Download Anna University B-Tech ME 5th Sem Metrology And Measurements MM Lab Manual Question Paper

1 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

V SEMESTER - R 2013

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No. : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LABORATORY MANUAL
FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice
1 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

V SEMESTER - R 2013

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No. : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LABORATORY MANUAL
2 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice
1 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

V SEMESTER - R 2013

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No. : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Section : _______________________________________


LABORATORY MANUAL
2 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

DHANALAKSHMI

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
2. To contribute to the promotion of Academic Excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels
3. To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

and soul

DEPARTMENT OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rendering the services to the global needs of engineering industries by educating students to become
professionally sound mechanical engineers of excellent caliber


To produce mechanical engineering technocrats with a perfect knowledge intellectual and hands on

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

experience and to inculcate the spirit of moral values and ethics to serve the society

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MISSION
MISSION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION

VISION

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

V SEMESTER - R 2013

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No. : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LABORATORY MANUAL
2 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

DHANALAKSHMI

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
2. To contribute to the promotion of Academic Excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels
3. To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING


Rendering the services to the global needs of engineering industries by educating students to become

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

professionally sound mechanical engineers of excellent caliber


To produce mechanical engineering technocrats with a perfect knowledge intellectual and hands on
experience and to inculcate the spirit of moral values and ethics to serve the society

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MISSION
MISSION
VISION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION

4 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals
To impart students with fundamental knowledge in mathematics and basic sciences that will mould
them to be successful professionals
2. Core competence

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To provide students with sound knowledge in engineering and experimental skills to identify
complex software problems in industry and to develop a practical solution for them
3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theory and practice which
enable them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and organization and to design

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

products requiring interdisciplinary skills
4. Professional skills
To bestow students with adequate training and provide opportunities to work as team that will build
up their communication skills, individual, leadership and supportive qualities and to enable them to
adapt and to work in ever changing technologies

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Life-long learning
To develop the ability of students to establish themselves as professionals in mechanical
engineering and to create awareness about the need for lifelong learning and pursuing advanced
degrees

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice
1 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

V SEMESTER - R 2013

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No. : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Section : _______________________________________


LABORATORY MANUAL
2 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

DHANALAKSHMI

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
2. To contribute to the promotion of Academic Excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels
3. To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

and soul

DEPARTMENT OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rendering the services to the global needs of engineering industries by educating students to become
professionally sound mechanical engineers of excellent caliber


To produce mechanical engineering technocrats with a perfect knowledge intellectual and hands on

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

experience and to inculcate the spirit of moral values and ethics to serve the society

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MISSION
MISSION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION

VISION

4 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals
To impart students with fundamental knowledge in mathematics and basic sciences that will mould
them to be successful professionals

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Core competence
To provide students with sound knowledge in engineering and experimental skills to identify
complex software problems in industry and to develop a practical solution for them
3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theory and practice which

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

enable them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and organization and to design
products requiring interdisciplinary skills
4. Professional skills
To bestow students with adequate training and provide opportunities to work as team that will build
up their communication skills, individual, leadership and supportive qualities and to enable them to

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

adapt and to work in ever changing technologies
5. Life-long learning
To develop the ability of students to establish themselves as professionals in mechanical
engineering and to create awareness about the need for lifelong learning and pursuing advanced
degrees

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)
On completion of the B.E. (Mechanical) degree, the graduate will be able

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

a) To apply the basic knowledge of mathematics, science and engineering
b) To design and conduct experiments as well as to analyze and interpret data and apply the same in
the career or entrepreneurship
c) To design and develop innovative and creative software applications
d) To understand a complex real world problem and develop an efficient practical solution

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

e) To create, select and apply appropriate techniques, resources, modern engineering and IT tools
f) To understand the role as a professional and give the best to the society
g) To develop a system that will meet expected needs within realistic constraints such as economical
environmental, social, political, ethical, safety and sustainability
h) To communicate effectively and make others understand exactly what they are trying to tell in both

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

verbal and written forms
i) To work in a team as a team member or a leader and make unique contributions and work with
coordination
j) To engage in lifelong learning and exhibit their technical skills
k) To develop and manage projects in multidisciplinary environments

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

V SEMESTER - R 2013

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No. : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LABORATORY MANUAL
2 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

DHANALAKSHMI

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
2. To contribute to the promotion of Academic Excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels
3. To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING


Rendering the services to the global needs of engineering industries by educating students to become

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

professionally sound mechanical engineers of excellent caliber


To produce mechanical engineering technocrats with a perfect knowledge intellectual and hands on
experience and to inculcate the spirit of moral values and ethics to serve the society

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MISSION
MISSION
VISION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION

4 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals
To impart students with fundamental knowledge in mathematics and basic sciences that will mould
them to be successful professionals
2. Core competence

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To provide students with sound knowledge in engineering and experimental skills to identify
complex software problems in industry and to develop a practical solution for them
3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theory and practice which
enable them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and organization and to design

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

products requiring interdisciplinary skills
4. Professional skills
To bestow students with adequate training and provide opportunities to work as team that will build
up their communication skills, individual, leadership and supportive qualities and to enable them to
adapt and to work in ever changing technologies

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Life-long learning
To develop the ability of students to establish themselves as professionals in mechanical
engineering and to create awareness about the need for lifelong learning and pursuing advanced
degrees

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)
On completion of the B.E. (Mechanical) degree, the graduate will be able
a) To apply the basic knowledge of mathematics, science and engineering

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

b) To design and conduct experiments as well as to analyze and interpret data and apply the same in
the career or entrepreneurship
c) To design and develop innovative and creative software applications
d) To understand a complex real world problem and develop an efficient practical solution
e) To create, select and apply appropriate techniques, resources, modern engineering and IT tools

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

f) To understand the role as a professional and give the best to the society
g) To develop a system that will meet expected needs within realistic constraints such as economical
environmental, social, political, ethical, safety and sustainability
h) To communicate effectively and make others understand exactly what they are trying to tell in both
verbal and written forms

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

i) To work in a team as a team member or a leader and make unique contributions and work with
coordination
j) To engage in lifelong learning and exhibit their technical skills
k) To develop and manage projects in multidisciplinary environments

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY



To familiar with different measurement equipment?s and use of this industry for quality inspection

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

List of Experiments
1. Tool Maker?s Microscope
2. Comparator
3. Sine Bar
4. Gear Tooth Vernier Caliper

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Floating gauge Micrometer
6. Coordinate Measuring Machine
7. Surface Finish Measuring Equipment
8. Vernier Height Gauge
9. Bore diameter measurement using telescope gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. Bore diameter measurement using micrometer
11. Force Measurement
12. Torque Measurement
13. Temperature measurement
14. Autocollimator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Ability to handle different measurement tools and perform measurements in quality impulsion
2. Learnt the usage of precision measuring instruments and practiced to take measurements
3. Learnt and practiced to build the required dimensions using slip gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Able to measure the various dimensions of the given specimen using the tool maker?s microscope
5. Able to find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge
6. Able to measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare
7. Learnt to determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen using Gear tooth vernier
8. Able to measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

wire method
9. Learnt to study the construction and operation of coordinate measuring machine
10. Learnt to determine the diameter of bore by using telescopic gauge and dial bore indicator
11. Able to measure the surface roughness using Talysurf instrument
12. Studied the characteristic between applied load and the output volt

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. Learnt the characteristics of developing torque and respective sensor output voltage
14. Studied the characteristics of thermocouple without compensation
15. Able to check the straightness & flatness of the given component by using Autocollimator
16. Learnt to measure the displacement using LVDT and to calibrate it with the millimeter scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OBJECTIVES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OUTCOMES

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice
1 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING


ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

V SEMESTER - R 2013

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No. : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LABORATORY MANUAL
2 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


3 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DHANALAKSHMI


College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.


1. To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
2. To contribute to the promotion of Academic Excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

levels
3. To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

DEPARTMENT OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rendering the services to the global needs of engineering industries by educating students to become
professionally sound mechanical engineers of excellent caliber

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To produce mechanical engineering technocrats with a perfect knowledge intellectual and hands on
experience and to inculcate the spirit of moral values and ethics to serve the society

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MISSION
MISSION
VISION

VISION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To impart students with fundamental knowledge in mathematics and basic sciences that will mould
them to be successful professionals
2. Core competence
To provide students with sound knowledge in engineering and experimental skills to identify
complex software problems in industry and to develop a practical solution for them

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theory and practice which
enable them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and organization and to design
products requiring interdisciplinary skills
4. Professional skills

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To bestow students with adequate training and provide opportunities to work as team that will build
up their communication skills, individual, leadership and supportive qualities and to enable them to
adapt and to work in ever changing technologies
5. Life-long learning
To develop the ability of students to establish themselves as professionals in mechanical

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

engineering and to create awareness about the need for lifelong learning and pursuing advanced
degrees

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)
On completion of the B.E. (Mechanical) degree, the graduate will be able
a) To apply the basic knowledge of mathematics, science and engineering
b) To design and conduct experiments as well as to analyze and interpret data and apply the same in
the career or entrepreneurship

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

c) To design and develop innovative and creative software applications
d) To understand a complex real world problem and develop an efficient practical solution
e) To create, select and apply appropriate techniques, resources, modern engineering and IT tools
f) To understand the role as a professional and give the best to the society
g) To develop a system that will meet expected needs within realistic constraints such as economical

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

environmental, social, political, ethical, safety and sustainability
h) To communicate effectively and make others understand exactly what they are trying to tell in both
verbal and written forms
i) To work in a team as a team member or a leader and make unique contributions and work with
coordination

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

j) To engage in lifelong learning and exhibit their technical skills
k) To develop and manage projects in multidisciplinary environments

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To familiar with different measurement equipment?s and use of this industry for quality inspection
List of Experiments
1. Tool Maker?s Microscope

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Comparator
3. Sine Bar
4. Gear Tooth Vernier Caliper
5. Floating gauge Micrometer
6. Coordinate Measuring Machine

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Surface Finish Measuring Equipment
8. Vernier Height Gauge
9. Bore diameter measurement using telescope gauge
10. Bore diameter measurement using micrometer
11. Force Measurement

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. Torque Measurement
13. Temperature measurement
14. Autocollimator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Ability to handle different measurement tools and perform measurements in quality impulsion
2. Learnt the usage of precision measuring instruments and practiced to take measurements
3. Learnt and practiced to build the required dimensions using slip gauge
4. Able to measure the various dimensions of the given specimen using the tool maker?s microscope
5. Able to find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Able to measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare
7. Learnt to determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen using Gear tooth vernier
8. Able to measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two
wire method
9. Learnt to study the construction and operation of coordinate measuring machine

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. Learnt to determine the diameter of bore by using telescopic gauge and dial bore indicator
11. Able to measure the surface roughness using Talysurf instrument
12. Studied the characteristic between applied load and the output volt
13. Learnt the characteristics of developing torque and respective sensor output voltage
14. Studied the characteristics of thermocouple without compensation

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15. Able to check the straightness & flatness of the given component by using Autocollimator
16. Learnt to measure the displacement using LVDT and to calibrate it with the millimeter scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OBJECTIVES

COURSE OUTCOMES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

CONTENTS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl. No. Name of the Experiments Page No.
CYCLE ? 1 EXPERIMENTS
1
Precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab ? A Study
7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
To build up the slip gauge for given dimension ? A Study
16
3
Thread parameters measurement using Tool Makers Microscope

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

20
4
Calibration of dial gauge
23
5

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of taper angle by sine bar method
26
6
Determination of gear tooth thickness using gear tooth vernier
29

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7
Measurement of thread parameters using floating carriage micrometer
32
CYCLE ? 2 EXPERIMENTS
8

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement of various dimensions using Coordinate Measuring Machine
35
9
Measurement of surface roughness
39

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
Measurement of bores using dial bore indicator and telescopic gauge
42
11
Force measurement using load cell

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

46
12
Torque measurement using strain gauge
49
13

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Temperature measurement using thermocouple
53
14
Measurement of alignment using autocollimator
56

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ADDITIONAL EXPERIMENT BEYOND THE SYLLABUS
15
Thread parameters measurement using profile projector
60
16

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Displacement measurement ? linear variable differential transducer (LVDT)
62
PROJECT WORK
65

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice
1 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?



DEPARTMENT OF

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MECHANICAL ENGINEERING


ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

V SEMESTER - R 2013

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Register No. : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________


LABORATORY MANUAL

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


3 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DHANALAKSHMI


College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
2. To contribute to the promotion of Academic Excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

DEPARTMENT OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rendering the services to the global needs of engineering industries by educating students to become
professionally sound mechanical engineers of excellent caliber

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To produce mechanical engineering technocrats with a perfect knowledge intellectual and hands on
experience and to inculcate the spirit of moral values and ethics to serve the society

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MISSION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MISSION
VISION

VISION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals
To impart students with fundamental knowledge in mathematics and basic sciences that will mould

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

them to be successful professionals
2. Core competence
To provide students with sound knowledge in engineering and experimental skills to identify
complex software problems in industry and to develop a practical solution for them
3. Breadth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theory and practice which
enable them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and organization and to design
products requiring interdisciplinary skills
4. Professional skills
To bestow students with adequate training and provide opportunities to work as team that will build

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

up their communication skills, individual, leadership and supportive qualities and to enable them to
adapt and to work in ever changing technologies
5. Life-long learning
To develop the ability of students to establish themselves as professionals in mechanical
engineering and to create awareness about the need for lifelong learning and pursuing advanced

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

degrees

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

On completion of the B.E. (Mechanical) degree, the graduate will be able
a) To apply the basic knowledge of mathematics, science and engineering
b) To design and conduct experiments as well as to analyze and interpret data and apply the same in
the career or entrepreneurship
c) To design and develop innovative and creative software applications

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d) To understand a complex real world problem and develop an efficient practical solution
e) To create, select and apply appropriate techniques, resources, modern engineering and IT tools
f) To understand the role as a professional and give the best to the society
g) To develop a system that will meet expected needs within realistic constraints such as economical
environmental, social, political, ethical, safety and sustainability

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

h) To communicate effectively and make others understand exactly what they are trying to tell in both
verbal and written forms
i) To work in a team as a team member or a leader and make unique contributions and work with
coordination
j) To engage in lifelong learning and exhibit their technical skills

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

k) To develop and manage projects in multidisciplinary environments

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To familiar with different measurement equipment?s and use of this industry for quality inspection
List of Experiments
1. Tool Maker?s Microscope
2. Comparator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Sine Bar
4. Gear Tooth Vernier Caliper
5. Floating gauge Micrometer
6. Coordinate Measuring Machine
7. Surface Finish Measuring Equipment

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Vernier Height Gauge
9. Bore diameter measurement using telescope gauge
10. Bore diameter measurement using micrometer
11. Force Measurement
12. Torque Measurement

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. Temperature measurement
14. Autocollimator


1. Ability to handle different measurement tools and perform measurements in quality impulsion

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Learnt the usage of precision measuring instruments and practiced to take measurements
3. Learnt and practiced to build the required dimensions using slip gauge
4. Able to measure the various dimensions of the given specimen using the tool maker?s microscope
5. Able to find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge
6. Able to measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Learnt to determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen using Gear tooth vernier
8. Able to measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two
wire method
9. Learnt to study the construction and operation of coordinate measuring machine
10. Learnt to determine the diameter of bore by using telescopic gauge and dial bore indicator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. Able to measure the surface roughness using Talysurf instrument
12. Studied the characteristic between applied load and the output volt
13. Learnt the characteristics of developing torque and respective sensor output voltage
14. Studied the characteristics of thermocouple without compensation
15. Able to check the straightness & flatness of the given component by using Autocollimator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16. Learnt to measure the displacement using LVDT and to calibrate it with the millimeter scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OBJECTIVES

COURSE OUTCOMES

7 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

CONTENTS
Sl. No. Name of the Experiments Page No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CYCLE ? 1 EXPERIMENTS
1
Precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab ? A Study
7
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To build up the slip gauge for given dimension ? A Study
16
3
Thread parameters measurement using Tool Makers Microscope
20

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4
Calibration of dial gauge
23
5
Determination of taper angle by sine bar method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

26
6
Determination of gear tooth thickness using gear tooth vernier
29
7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement of thread parameters using floating carriage micrometer
32
CYCLE ? 2 EXPERIMENTS
8
Measurement of various dimensions using Coordinate Measuring Machine

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

35
9
Measurement of surface roughness
39
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement of bores using dial bore indicator and telescopic gauge
42
11
Force measurement using load cell
46

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12
Torque measurement using strain gauge
49
13
Temperature measurement using thermocouple

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

53
14
Measurement of alignment using autocollimator
56
ADDITIONAL EXPERIMENT BEYOND THE SYLLABUS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15
Thread parameters measurement using profile projector
60
16
Displacement measurement ? linear variable differential transducer (LVDT)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

62
PROJECT WORK
65

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice
1 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

V SEMESTER - R 2013

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No. : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Section : _______________________________________


LABORATORY MANUAL
2 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

DHANALAKSHMI

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
2. To contribute to the promotion of Academic Excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels
3. To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

and soul

DEPARTMENT OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rendering the services to the global needs of engineering industries by educating students to become
professionally sound mechanical engineers of excellent caliber


To produce mechanical engineering technocrats with a perfect knowledge intellectual and hands on

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

experience and to inculcate the spirit of moral values and ethics to serve the society

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MISSION
MISSION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION

VISION

4 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals
To impart students with fundamental knowledge in mathematics and basic sciences that will mould
them to be successful professionals

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Core competence
To provide students with sound knowledge in engineering and experimental skills to identify
complex software problems in industry and to develop a practical solution for them
3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theory and practice which

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

enable them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and organization and to design
products requiring interdisciplinary skills
4. Professional skills
To bestow students with adequate training and provide opportunities to work as team that will build
up their communication skills, individual, leadership and supportive qualities and to enable them to

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

adapt and to work in ever changing technologies
5. Life-long learning
To develop the ability of students to establish themselves as professionals in mechanical
engineering and to create awareness about the need for lifelong learning and pursuing advanced
degrees

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)
On completion of the B.E. (Mechanical) degree, the graduate will be able

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

a) To apply the basic knowledge of mathematics, science and engineering
b) To design and conduct experiments as well as to analyze and interpret data and apply the same in
the career or entrepreneurship
c) To design and develop innovative and creative software applications
d) To understand a complex real world problem and develop an efficient practical solution

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

e) To create, select and apply appropriate techniques, resources, modern engineering and IT tools
f) To understand the role as a professional and give the best to the society
g) To develop a system that will meet expected needs within realistic constraints such as economical
environmental, social, political, ethical, safety and sustainability
h) To communicate effectively and make others understand exactly what they are trying to tell in both

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

verbal and written forms
i) To work in a team as a team member or a leader and make unique contributions and work with
coordination
j) To engage in lifelong learning and exhibit their technical skills
k) To develop and manage projects in multidisciplinary environments

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To familiar with different measurement equipment?s and use of this industry for quality inspection
List of Experiments
1. Tool Maker?s Microscope
2. Comparator
3. Sine Bar

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Gear Tooth Vernier Caliper
5. Floating gauge Micrometer
6. Coordinate Measuring Machine
7. Surface Finish Measuring Equipment
8. Vernier Height Gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. Bore diameter measurement using telescope gauge
10. Bore diameter measurement using micrometer
11. Force Measurement
12. Torque Measurement
13. Temperature measurement

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. Autocollimator


1. Ability to handle different measurement tools and perform measurements in quality impulsion
2. Learnt the usage of precision measuring instruments and practiced to take measurements

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Learnt and practiced to build the required dimensions using slip gauge
4. Able to measure the various dimensions of the given specimen using the tool maker?s microscope
5. Able to find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge
6. Able to measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare
7. Learnt to determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen using Gear tooth vernier

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Able to measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two
wire method
9. Learnt to study the construction and operation of coordinate measuring machine
10. Learnt to determine the diameter of bore by using telescopic gauge and dial bore indicator
11. Able to measure the surface roughness using Talysurf instrument

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. Studied the characteristic between applied load and the output volt
13. Learnt the characteristics of developing torque and respective sensor output voltage
14. Studied the characteristics of thermocouple without compensation
15. Able to check the straightness & flatness of the given component by using Autocollimator
16. Learnt to measure the displacement using LVDT and to calibrate it with the millimeter scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OBJECTIVES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OUTCOMES

7 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

CONTENTS
Sl. No. Name of the Experiments Page No.
CYCLE ? 1 EXPERIMENTS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1
Precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab ? A Study
7
2
To build up the slip gauge for given dimension ? A Study

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16
3
Thread parameters measurement using Tool Makers Microscope
20
4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Calibration of dial gauge
23
5
Determination of taper angle by sine bar method
26

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6
Determination of gear tooth thickness using gear tooth vernier
29
7
Measurement of thread parameters using floating carriage micrometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

32
CYCLE ? 2 EXPERIMENTS
8
Measurement of various dimensions using Coordinate Measuring Machine
35

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9
Measurement of surface roughness
39
10
Measurement of bores using dial bore indicator and telescopic gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

42
11
Force measurement using load cell
46
12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Torque measurement using strain gauge
49
13
Temperature measurement using thermocouple
53

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14
Measurement of alignment using autocollimator
56
ADDITIONAL EXPERIMENT BEYOND THE SYLLABUS
15

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thread parameters measurement using profile projector
60
16
Displacement measurement ? linear variable differential transducer (LVDT)
62

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROJECT WORK
65


8 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.01 PRECISION MEASURING INSTRUMENT YSED IN
METROLOGY LAB ? A STUDY
Aim:
To study the following instruments and their usage for measuring dimensions of given specimen

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Vernier caliper
2. Micrometer
3. Vernier height gauge
4. Depth micrometer
5. Universal bevel protractor

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Apparatus required:
Surface plate, specimen and above instruments
Vernier caliper:
The principle of vernier caliper is to use the minor difference between the sizes two scales or divisions
for measurement. The difference between them can be utilized to enhance the accuracy of measurement. The

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

vernier caliper essentially consists of two steel rules, sliding along each other.
Parts:
Different parts of the vernier caliper are
1. Beam ? It has main scale.
2. Fixed jaw

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Sliding or Moving jaw ? It has vernier scale and sliding jaw locking screw.
4. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw knife
edges for internal measurement.
5. Stem or depth bar for depth measurement
Least count:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm
1 VSD = 0.98 mm
Least count = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice
1 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?



DEPARTMENT OF

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MECHANICAL ENGINEERING


ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

V SEMESTER - R 2013

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Register No. : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________


LABORATORY MANUAL

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


3 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DHANALAKSHMI


College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
2. To contribute to the promotion of Academic Excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

DEPARTMENT OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rendering the services to the global needs of engineering industries by educating students to become
professionally sound mechanical engineers of excellent caliber

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To produce mechanical engineering technocrats with a perfect knowledge intellectual and hands on
experience and to inculcate the spirit of moral values and ethics to serve the society

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MISSION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MISSION
VISION

VISION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals
To impart students with fundamental knowledge in mathematics and basic sciences that will mould

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

them to be successful professionals
2. Core competence
To provide students with sound knowledge in engineering and experimental skills to identify
complex software problems in industry and to develop a practical solution for them
3. Breadth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theory and practice which
enable them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and organization and to design
products requiring interdisciplinary skills
4. Professional skills
To bestow students with adequate training and provide opportunities to work as team that will build

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

up their communication skills, individual, leadership and supportive qualities and to enable them to
adapt and to work in ever changing technologies
5. Life-long learning
To develop the ability of students to establish themselves as professionals in mechanical
engineering and to create awareness about the need for lifelong learning and pursuing advanced

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

degrees

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

On completion of the B.E. (Mechanical) degree, the graduate will be able
a) To apply the basic knowledge of mathematics, science and engineering
b) To design and conduct experiments as well as to analyze and interpret data and apply the same in
the career or entrepreneurship
c) To design and develop innovative and creative software applications

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d) To understand a complex real world problem and develop an efficient practical solution
e) To create, select and apply appropriate techniques, resources, modern engineering and IT tools
f) To understand the role as a professional and give the best to the society
g) To develop a system that will meet expected needs within realistic constraints such as economical
environmental, social, political, ethical, safety and sustainability

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

h) To communicate effectively and make others understand exactly what they are trying to tell in both
verbal and written forms
i) To work in a team as a team member or a leader and make unique contributions and work with
coordination
j) To engage in lifelong learning and exhibit their technical skills

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

k) To develop and manage projects in multidisciplinary environments

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To familiar with different measurement equipment?s and use of this industry for quality inspection
List of Experiments
1. Tool Maker?s Microscope
2. Comparator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Sine Bar
4. Gear Tooth Vernier Caliper
5. Floating gauge Micrometer
6. Coordinate Measuring Machine
7. Surface Finish Measuring Equipment

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Vernier Height Gauge
9. Bore diameter measurement using telescope gauge
10. Bore diameter measurement using micrometer
11. Force Measurement
12. Torque Measurement

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. Temperature measurement
14. Autocollimator


1. Ability to handle different measurement tools and perform measurements in quality impulsion

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Learnt the usage of precision measuring instruments and practiced to take measurements
3. Learnt and practiced to build the required dimensions using slip gauge
4. Able to measure the various dimensions of the given specimen using the tool maker?s microscope
5. Able to find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge
6. Able to measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Learnt to determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen using Gear tooth vernier
8. Able to measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two
wire method
9. Learnt to study the construction and operation of coordinate measuring machine
10. Learnt to determine the diameter of bore by using telescopic gauge and dial bore indicator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. Able to measure the surface roughness using Talysurf instrument
12. Studied the characteristic between applied load and the output volt
13. Learnt the characteristics of developing torque and respective sensor output voltage
14. Studied the characteristics of thermocouple without compensation
15. Able to check the straightness & flatness of the given component by using Autocollimator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16. Learnt to measure the displacement using LVDT and to calibrate it with the millimeter scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OBJECTIVES

COURSE OUTCOMES

7 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

CONTENTS
Sl. No. Name of the Experiments Page No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CYCLE ? 1 EXPERIMENTS
1
Precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab ? A Study
7
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To build up the slip gauge for given dimension ? A Study
16
3
Thread parameters measurement using Tool Makers Microscope
20

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4
Calibration of dial gauge
23
5
Determination of taper angle by sine bar method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

26
6
Determination of gear tooth thickness using gear tooth vernier
29
7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement of thread parameters using floating carriage micrometer
32
CYCLE ? 2 EXPERIMENTS
8
Measurement of various dimensions using Coordinate Measuring Machine

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

35
9
Measurement of surface roughness
39
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement of bores using dial bore indicator and telescopic gauge
42
11
Force measurement using load cell
46

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12
Torque measurement using strain gauge
49
13
Temperature measurement using thermocouple

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

53
14
Measurement of alignment using autocollimator
56
ADDITIONAL EXPERIMENT BEYOND THE SYLLABUS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15
Thread parameters measurement using profile projector
60
16
Displacement measurement ? linear variable differential transducer (LVDT)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

62
PROJECT WORK
65

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.01 PRECISION MEASURING INSTRUMENT YSED IN
METROLOGY LAB ? A STUDY
Aim:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To study the following instruments and their usage for measuring dimensions of given specimen
1. Vernier caliper
2. Micrometer
3. Vernier height gauge
4. Depth micrometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Universal bevel protractor
Apparatus required:
Surface plate, specimen and above instruments
Vernier caliper:
The principle of vernier caliper is to use the minor difference between the sizes two scales or divisions

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

for measurement. The difference between them can be utilized to enhance the accuracy of measurement. The
vernier caliper essentially consists of two steel rules, sliding along each other.
Parts:
Different parts of the vernier caliper are
1. Beam ? It has main scale.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Fixed jaw
3. Sliding or Moving jaw ? It has vernier scale and sliding jaw locking screw.
4. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw knife
edges for internal measurement.
5. Stem or depth bar for depth measurement

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count:
Least count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm
1 VSD = 0.98 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm

10 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ID

DEPTH

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OD
Measurement:
Given Vernier caliper can be used for external, internal depth, slot and step measurement.
Measurement principle:
When both jaws contact each other scale shows the zero reading. The finer adjustment of movable jaw

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

can be done by the fine adjustment screw. First the whole movable jaw assembly is adjusted so that the two
measuring tips just touch the part to be measured. Then the fine adjustment clamp locking screw is tightened.
Final adjustment depending upon the sense of correct feel is made by the adjusting screw. After final
adjustment has been made sliding jaw locking screw is also tightened and the reading is noted.
All the parts of the Vernier caliper are made of good quality steel and measuring faces are hardened.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Types of vernier:
Vernier caliper, electronic vernier caliper, vernier depth caliper


FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

V SEMESTER - R 2013

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No. : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LABORATORY MANUAL
2 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

DHANALAKSHMI

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
2. To contribute to the promotion of Academic Excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels
3. To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING


Rendering the services to the global needs of engineering industries by educating students to become

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

professionally sound mechanical engineers of excellent caliber


To produce mechanical engineering technocrats with a perfect knowledge intellectual and hands on
experience and to inculcate the spirit of moral values and ethics to serve the society

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MISSION
MISSION
VISION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION

4 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals
To impart students with fundamental knowledge in mathematics and basic sciences that will mould
them to be successful professionals
2. Core competence

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To provide students with sound knowledge in engineering and experimental skills to identify
complex software problems in industry and to develop a practical solution for them
3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theory and practice which
enable them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and organization and to design

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

products requiring interdisciplinary skills
4. Professional skills
To bestow students with adequate training and provide opportunities to work as team that will build
up their communication skills, individual, leadership and supportive qualities and to enable them to
adapt and to work in ever changing technologies

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Life-long learning
To develop the ability of students to establish themselves as professionals in mechanical
engineering and to create awareness about the need for lifelong learning and pursuing advanced
degrees

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)
On completion of the B.E. (Mechanical) degree, the graduate will be able
a) To apply the basic knowledge of mathematics, science and engineering

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

b) To design and conduct experiments as well as to analyze and interpret data and apply the same in
the career or entrepreneurship
c) To design and develop innovative and creative software applications
d) To understand a complex real world problem and develop an efficient practical solution
e) To create, select and apply appropriate techniques, resources, modern engineering and IT tools

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

f) To understand the role as a professional and give the best to the society
g) To develop a system that will meet expected needs within realistic constraints such as economical
environmental, social, political, ethical, safety and sustainability
h) To communicate effectively and make others understand exactly what they are trying to tell in both
verbal and written forms

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

i) To work in a team as a team member or a leader and make unique contributions and work with
coordination
j) To engage in lifelong learning and exhibit their technical skills
k) To develop and manage projects in multidisciplinary environments

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY



To familiar with different measurement equipment?s and use of this industry for quality inspection

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

List of Experiments
1. Tool Maker?s Microscope
2. Comparator
3. Sine Bar
4. Gear Tooth Vernier Caliper

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Floating gauge Micrometer
6. Coordinate Measuring Machine
7. Surface Finish Measuring Equipment
8. Vernier Height Gauge
9. Bore diameter measurement using telescope gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. Bore diameter measurement using micrometer
11. Force Measurement
12. Torque Measurement
13. Temperature measurement
14. Autocollimator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Ability to handle different measurement tools and perform measurements in quality impulsion
2. Learnt the usage of precision measuring instruments and practiced to take measurements
3. Learnt and practiced to build the required dimensions using slip gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Able to measure the various dimensions of the given specimen using the tool maker?s microscope
5. Able to find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge
6. Able to measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare
7. Learnt to determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen using Gear tooth vernier
8. Able to measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

wire method
9. Learnt to study the construction and operation of coordinate measuring machine
10. Learnt to determine the diameter of bore by using telescopic gauge and dial bore indicator
11. Able to measure the surface roughness using Talysurf instrument
12. Studied the characteristic between applied load and the output volt

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. Learnt the characteristics of developing torque and respective sensor output voltage
14. Studied the characteristics of thermocouple without compensation
15. Able to check the straightness & flatness of the given component by using Autocollimator
16. Learnt to measure the displacement using LVDT and to calibrate it with the millimeter scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OBJECTIVES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OUTCOMES

7 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CONTENTS
Sl. No. Name of the Experiments Page No.
CYCLE ? 1 EXPERIMENTS
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab ? A Study
7
2
To build up the slip gauge for given dimension ? A Study
16

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
Thread parameters measurement using Tool Makers Microscope
20
4
Calibration of dial gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

23
5
Determination of taper angle by sine bar method
26
6

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of gear tooth thickness using gear tooth vernier
29
7
Measurement of thread parameters using floating carriage micrometer
32

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CYCLE ? 2 EXPERIMENTS
8
Measurement of various dimensions using Coordinate Measuring Machine
35
9

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement of surface roughness
39
10
Measurement of bores using dial bore indicator and telescopic gauge
42

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11
Force measurement using load cell
46
12
Torque measurement using strain gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

49
13
Temperature measurement using thermocouple
53
14

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement of alignment using autocollimator
56
ADDITIONAL EXPERIMENT BEYOND THE SYLLABUS
15
Thread parameters measurement using profile projector

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

60
16
Displacement measurement ? linear variable differential transducer (LVDT)
62
PROJECT WORK

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

65


8 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.01 PRECISION MEASURING INSTRUMENT YSED IN
METROLOGY LAB ? A STUDY
Aim:
To study the following instruments and their usage for measuring dimensions of given specimen
1. Vernier caliper

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Micrometer
3. Vernier height gauge
4. Depth micrometer
5. Universal bevel protractor
Apparatus required:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Surface plate, specimen and above instruments
Vernier caliper:
The principle of vernier caliper is to use the minor difference between the sizes two scales or divisions
for measurement. The difference between them can be utilized to enhance the accuracy of measurement. The
vernier caliper essentially consists of two steel rules, sliding along each other.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Parts:
Different parts of the vernier caliper are
1. Beam ? It has main scale.
2. Fixed jaw
3. Sliding or Moving jaw ? It has vernier scale and sliding jaw locking screw.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw knife
edges for internal measurement.
5. Stem or depth bar for depth measurement
Least count:
Least count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm
1 VSD = 0.98 mm
Least count = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


ID

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPTH


OD
Measurement:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Given Vernier caliper can be used for external, internal depth, slot and step measurement.
Measurement principle:
When both jaws contact each other scale shows the zero reading. The finer adjustment of movable jaw
can be done by the fine adjustment screw. First the whole movable jaw assembly is adjusted so that the two
measuring tips just touch the part to be measured. Then the fine adjustment clamp locking screw is tightened.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Final adjustment depending upon the sense of correct feel is made by the adjusting screw. After final
adjustment has been made sliding jaw locking screw is also tightened and the reading is noted.
All the parts of the Vernier caliper are made of good quality steel and measuring faces are hardened.
Types of vernier:
Vernier caliper, electronic vernier caliper, vernier depth caliper

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Main scale
reading (MSR)
(mm)
Vernier scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale
reading (VSR) (mm)
Total reading (MSR
+ VSR)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)

OD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ID


Depth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier height gauge:
Vernier height gauge is a sort of vernier caliper equipped with a special instrument suitable for height
measurement. It is always kept on the surface plate and the use of the surfaces plates as datum surfaces is
very essential.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count:
Least Count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm
1 VSD = 0.98 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least Count (LC) = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm
Parts:
1. Base
2. Beam ? It has main scale.
3. Slider ? It has a vernier scale and slider locking screw.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Scriber
5. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw.


FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

V SEMESTER - R 2013

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No. : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LABORATORY MANUAL
2 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

DHANALAKSHMI

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
2. To contribute to the promotion of Academic Excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels
3. To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING


Rendering the services to the global needs of engineering industries by educating students to become

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

professionally sound mechanical engineers of excellent caliber


To produce mechanical engineering technocrats with a perfect knowledge intellectual and hands on
experience and to inculcate the spirit of moral values and ethics to serve the society

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MISSION
MISSION
VISION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION

4 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals
To impart students with fundamental knowledge in mathematics and basic sciences that will mould
them to be successful professionals
2. Core competence

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To provide students with sound knowledge in engineering and experimental skills to identify
complex software problems in industry and to develop a practical solution for them
3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theory and practice which
enable them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and organization and to design

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

products requiring interdisciplinary skills
4. Professional skills
To bestow students with adequate training and provide opportunities to work as team that will build
up their communication skills, individual, leadership and supportive qualities and to enable them to
adapt and to work in ever changing technologies

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Life-long learning
To develop the ability of students to establish themselves as professionals in mechanical
engineering and to create awareness about the need for lifelong learning and pursuing advanced
degrees

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)
On completion of the B.E. (Mechanical) degree, the graduate will be able
a) To apply the basic knowledge of mathematics, science and engineering

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

b) To design and conduct experiments as well as to analyze and interpret data and apply the same in
the career or entrepreneurship
c) To design and develop innovative and creative software applications
d) To understand a complex real world problem and develop an efficient practical solution
e) To create, select and apply appropriate techniques, resources, modern engineering and IT tools

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

f) To understand the role as a professional and give the best to the society
g) To develop a system that will meet expected needs within realistic constraints such as economical
environmental, social, political, ethical, safety and sustainability
h) To communicate effectively and make others understand exactly what they are trying to tell in both
verbal and written forms

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

i) To work in a team as a team member or a leader and make unique contributions and work with
coordination
j) To engage in lifelong learning and exhibit their technical skills
k) To develop and manage projects in multidisciplinary environments

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY



To familiar with different measurement equipment?s and use of this industry for quality inspection

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

List of Experiments
1. Tool Maker?s Microscope
2. Comparator
3. Sine Bar
4. Gear Tooth Vernier Caliper

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Floating gauge Micrometer
6. Coordinate Measuring Machine
7. Surface Finish Measuring Equipment
8. Vernier Height Gauge
9. Bore diameter measurement using telescope gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. Bore diameter measurement using micrometer
11. Force Measurement
12. Torque Measurement
13. Temperature measurement
14. Autocollimator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Ability to handle different measurement tools and perform measurements in quality impulsion
2. Learnt the usage of precision measuring instruments and practiced to take measurements
3. Learnt and practiced to build the required dimensions using slip gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Able to measure the various dimensions of the given specimen using the tool maker?s microscope
5. Able to find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge
6. Able to measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare
7. Learnt to determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen using Gear tooth vernier
8. Able to measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

wire method
9. Learnt to study the construction and operation of coordinate measuring machine
10. Learnt to determine the diameter of bore by using telescopic gauge and dial bore indicator
11. Able to measure the surface roughness using Talysurf instrument
12. Studied the characteristic between applied load and the output volt

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. Learnt the characteristics of developing torque and respective sensor output voltage
14. Studied the characteristics of thermocouple without compensation
15. Able to check the straightness & flatness of the given component by using Autocollimator
16. Learnt to measure the displacement using LVDT and to calibrate it with the millimeter scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OBJECTIVES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OUTCOMES

7 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CONTENTS
Sl. No. Name of the Experiments Page No.
CYCLE ? 1 EXPERIMENTS
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab ? A Study
7
2
To build up the slip gauge for given dimension ? A Study
16

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
Thread parameters measurement using Tool Makers Microscope
20
4
Calibration of dial gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

23
5
Determination of taper angle by sine bar method
26
6

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of gear tooth thickness using gear tooth vernier
29
7
Measurement of thread parameters using floating carriage micrometer
32

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CYCLE ? 2 EXPERIMENTS
8
Measurement of various dimensions using Coordinate Measuring Machine
35
9

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement of surface roughness
39
10
Measurement of bores using dial bore indicator and telescopic gauge
42

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11
Force measurement using load cell
46
12
Torque measurement using strain gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

49
13
Temperature measurement using thermocouple
53
14

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement of alignment using autocollimator
56
ADDITIONAL EXPERIMENT BEYOND THE SYLLABUS
15
Thread parameters measurement using profile projector

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

60
16
Displacement measurement ? linear variable differential transducer (LVDT)
62
PROJECT WORK

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

65


8 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.01 PRECISION MEASURING INSTRUMENT YSED IN
METROLOGY LAB ? A STUDY
Aim:
To study the following instruments and their usage for measuring dimensions of given specimen
1. Vernier caliper

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Micrometer
3. Vernier height gauge
4. Depth micrometer
5. Universal bevel protractor
Apparatus required:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Surface plate, specimen and above instruments
Vernier caliper:
The principle of vernier caliper is to use the minor difference between the sizes two scales or divisions
for measurement. The difference between them can be utilized to enhance the accuracy of measurement. The
vernier caliper essentially consists of two steel rules, sliding along each other.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Parts:
Different parts of the vernier caliper are
1. Beam ? It has main scale.
2. Fixed jaw
3. Sliding or Moving jaw ? It has vernier scale and sliding jaw locking screw.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw knife
edges for internal measurement.
5. Stem or depth bar for depth measurement
Least count:
Least count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm
1 VSD = 0.98 mm
Least count = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


ID

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPTH


OD
Measurement:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Given Vernier caliper can be used for external, internal depth, slot and step measurement.
Measurement principle:
When both jaws contact each other scale shows the zero reading. The finer adjustment of movable jaw
can be done by the fine adjustment screw. First the whole movable jaw assembly is adjusted so that the two
measuring tips just touch the part to be measured. Then the fine adjustment clamp locking screw is tightened.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Final adjustment depending upon the sense of correct feel is made by the adjusting screw. After final
adjustment has been made sliding jaw locking screw is also tightened and the reading is noted.
All the parts of the Vernier caliper are made of good quality steel and measuring faces are hardened.
Types of vernier:
Vernier caliper, electronic vernier caliper, vernier depth caliper

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Main scale
reading (MSR)
(mm)
Vernier scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale
reading (VSR) (mm)
Total reading (MSR
+ VSR)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)

OD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ID


Depth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier height gauge:
Vernier height gauge is a sort of vernier caliper equipped with a special instrument suitable for height
measurement. It is always kept on the surface plate and the use of the surfaces plates as datum surfaces is
very essential.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count:
Least Count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm
1 VSD = 0.98 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least Count (LC) = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm
Parts:
1. Base
2. Beam ? It has main scale.
3. Slider ? It has a vernier scale and slider locking screw.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Scriber
5. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw.


12 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Material:
All the parts of vernier are made of good quality steel and the measuring faces hardened.
Types of vernier gauge:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Analog vernier height gauge
2. Digital vernier height gauge
3. Electronic vernier height gauge
Tabulation:
Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Main scale reading
(MSR)(mm)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(VSR)(mm)
Total reading (MSR +
VSR)(mm)
1.
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice
1 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING


ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

V SEMESTER - R 2013

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No. : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LABORATORY MANUAL
2 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


3 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DHANALAKSHMI


College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.


1. To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
2. To contribute to the promotion of Academic Excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

levels
3. To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

DEPARTMENT OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rendering the services to the global needs of engineering industries by educating students to become
professionally sound mechanical engineers of excellent caliber

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To produce mechanical engineering technocrats with a perfect knowledge intellectual and hands on
experience and to inculcate the spirit of moral values and ethics to serve the society

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MISSION
MISSION
VISION

VISION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To impart students with fundamental knowledge in mathematics and basic sciences that will mould
them to be successful professionals
2. Core competence
To provide students with sound knowledge in engineering and experimental skills to identify
complex software problems in industry and to develop a practical solution for them

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theory and practice which
enable them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and organization and to design
products requiring interdisciplinary skills
4. Professional skills

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To bestow students with adequate training and provide opportunities to work as team that will build
up their communication skills, individual, leadership and supportive qualities and to enable them to
adapt and to work in ever changing technologies
5. Life-long learning
To develop the ability of students to establish themselves as professionals in mechanical

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

engineering and to create awareness about the need for lifelong learning and pursuing advanced
degrees

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)
On completion of the B.E. (Mechanical) degree, the graduate will be able
a) To apply the basic knowledge of mathematics, science and engineering
b) To design and conduct experiments as well as to analyze and interpret data and apply the same in
the career or entrepreneurship

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

c) To design and develop innovative and creative software applications
d) To understand a complex real world problem and develop an efficient practical solution
e) To create, select and apply appropriate techniques, resources, modern engineering and IT tools
f) To understand the role as a professional and give the best to the society
g) To develop a system that will meet expected needs within realistic constraints such as economical

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

environmental, social, political, ethical, safety and sustainability
h) To communicate effectively and make others understand exactly what they are trying to tell in both
verbal and written forms
i) To work in a team as a team member or a leader and make unique contributions and work with
coordination

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

j) To engage in lifelong learning and exhibit their technical skills
k) To develop and manage projects in multidisciplinary environments

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To familiar with different measurement equipment?s and use of this industry for quality inspection
List of Experiments
1. Tool Maker?s Microscope

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Comparator
3. Sine Bar
4. Gear Tooth Vernier Caliper
5. Floating gauge Micrometer
6. Coordinate Measuring Machine

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Surface Finish Measuring Equipment
8. Vernier Height Gauge
9. Bore diameter measurement using telescope gauge
10. Bore diameter measurement using micrometer
11. Force Measurement

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. Torque Measurement
13. Temperature measurement
14. Autocollimator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Ability to handle different measurement tools and perform measurements in quality impulsion
2. Learnt the usage of precision measuring instruments and practiced to take measurements
3. Learnt and practiced to build the required dimensions using slip gauge
4. Able to measure the various dimensions of the given specimen using the tool maker?s microscope
5. Able to find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Able to measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare
7. Learnt to determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen using Gear tooth vernier
8. Able to measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two
wire method
9. Learnt to study the construction and operation of coordinate measuring machine

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. Learnt to determine the diameter of bore by using telescopic gauge and dial bore indicator
11. Able to measure the surface roughness using Talysurf instrument
12. Studied the characteristic between applied load and the output volt
13. Learnt the characteristics of developing torque and respective sensor output voltage
14. Studied the characteristics of thermocouple without compensation

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15. Able to check the straightness & flatness of the given component by using Autocollimator
16. Learnt to measure the displacement using LVDT and to calibrate it with the millimeter scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OBJECTIVES

COURSE OUTCOMES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

CONTENTS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl. No. Name of the Experiments Page No.
CYCLE ? 1 EXPERIMENTS
1
Precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab ? A Study
7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
To build up the slip gauge for given dimension ? A Study
16
3
Thread parameters measurement using Tool Makers Microscope

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

20
4
Calibration of dial gauge
23
5

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of taper angle by sine bar method
26
6
Determination of gear tooth thickness using gear tooth vernier
29

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7
Measurement of thread parameters using floating carriage micrometer
32
CYCLE ? 2 EXPERIMENTS
8

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement of various dimensions using Coordinate Measuring Machine
35
9
Measurement of surface roughness
39

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
Measurement of bores using dial bore indicator and telescopic gauge
42
11
Force measurement using load cell

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

46
12
Torque measurement using strain gauge
49
13

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Temperature measurement using thermocouple
53
14
Measurement of alignment using autocollimator
56

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ADDITIONAL EXPERIMENT BEYOND THE SYLLABUS
15
Thread parameters measurement using profile projector
60
16

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Displacement measurement ? linear variable differential transducer (LVDT)
62
PROJECT WORK
65

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.01 PRECISION MEASURING INSTRUMENT YSED IN
METROLOGY LAB ? A STUDY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Aim:
To study the following instruments and their usage for measuring dimensions of given specimen
1. Vernier caliper
2. Micrometer
3. Vernier height gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Depth micrometer
5. Universal bevel protractor
Apparatus required:
Surface plate, specimen and above instruments
Vernier caliper:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The principle of vernier caliper is to use the minor difference between the sizes two scales or divisions
for measurement. The difference between them can be utilized to enhance the accuracy of measurement. The
vernier caliper essentially consists of two steel rules, sliding along each other.
Parts:
Different parts of the vernier caliper are

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Beam ? It has main scale.
2. Fixed jaw
3. Sliding or Moving jaw ? It has vernier scale and sliding jaw locking screw.
4. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw knife
edges for internal measurement.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Stem or depth bar for depth measurement
Least count:
Least count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 VSD = 0.98 mm
Least count = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm

10 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ID

DEPTH

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OD
Measurement:
Given Vernier caliper can be used for external, internal depth, slot and step measurement.
Measurement principle:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

When both jaws contact each other scale shows the zero reading. The finer adjustment of movable jaw
can be done by the fine adjustment screw. First the whole movable jaw assembly is adjusted so that the two
measuring tips just touch the part to be measured. Then the fine adjustment clamp locking screw is tightened.
Final adjustment depending upon the sense of correct feel is made by the adjusting screw. After final
adjustment has been made sliding jaw locking screw is also tightened and the reading is noted.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

All the parts of the Vernier caliper are made of good quality steel and measuring faces are hardened.
Types of vernier:
Vernier caliper, electronic vernier caliper, vernier depth caliper

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:

Main scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

reading (MSR)
(mm)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

reading (VSR) (mm)
Total reading (MSR
+ VSR)
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OD


ID

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Depth


Vernier height gauge:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier height gauge is a sort of vernier caliper equipped with a special instrument suitable for height
measurement. It is always kept on the surface plate and the use of the surfaces plates as datum surfaces is
very essential.
Least count:
Least Count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm
1 VSD = 0.98 mm
Least Count (LC) = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm
Parts:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Base
2. Beam ? It has main scale.
3. Slider ? It has a vernier scale and slider locking screw.
4. Scriber
5. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Material:
All the parts of vernier are made of good quality steel and the measuring faces hardened.
Types of vernier gauge:
1. Analog vernier height gauge
2. Digital vernier height gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Electronic vernier height gauge
Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Main scale reading
(MSR)(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale reading
(VSR)(mm)
Total reading (MSR +

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSR)(mm)
1.
2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Outside micrometer:
The micrometer essentially consists of an accurate screw having about 10 or 20 threads per cm. The
end of the screw forms one measuring tip and other measuring tip is constituted by a stationary anvil in the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

base of the frame. The screw is threaded for certain length and is plain afterwards. The plain portion is called
spindle and its end is the measuring surface. The spindle is advanced or retracted by turning a thimble
connected to a spindle. The spindle is a slide fit over the barrel and barrel is the fixed part attached with the
frame. The barrel & thimble are graduated. The pitch of the screw threads is 0.5 mm.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count:
Least Count (LC) = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale
= 0.5 / 50 = 0.01 mm
Parts:
1. Frame

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Anvil
3. Spindle
4. Spindle lock
5. Barrel or outside sleeve
6. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.
The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.
FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice
1 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING


ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

V SEMESTER - R 2013

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No. : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LABORATORY MANUAL
2 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


3 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DHANALAKSHMI


College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.


1. To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
2. To contribute to the promotion of Academic Excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

levels
3. To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

DEPARTMENT OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rendering the services to the global needs of engineering industries by educating students to become
professionally sound mechanical engineers of excellent caliber

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To produce mechanical engineering technocrats with a perfect knowledge intellectual and hands on
experience and to inculcate the spirit of moral values and ethics to serve the society

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MISSION
MISSION
VISION

VISION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To impart students with fundamental knowledge in mathematics and basic sciences that will mould
them to be successful professionals
2. Core competence
To provide students with sound knowledge in engineering and experimental skills to identify
complex software problems in industry and to develop a practical solution for them

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theory and practice which
enable them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and organization and to design
products requiring interdisciplinary skills
4. Professional skills

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To bestow students with adequate training and provide opportunities to work as team that will build
up their communication skills, individual, leadership and supportive qualities and to enable them to
adapt and to work in ever changing technologies
5. Life-long learning
To develop the ability of students to establish themselves as professionals in mechanical

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

engineering and to create awareness about the need for lifelong learning and pursuing advanced
degrees

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)
On completion of the B.E. (Mechanical) degree, the graduate will be able
a) To apply the basic knowledge of mathematics, science and engineering
b) To design and conduct experiments as well as to analyze and interpret data and apply the same in
the career or entrepreneurship

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

c) To design and develop innovative and creative software applications
d) To understand a complex real world problem and develop an efficient practical solution
e) To create, select and apply appropriate techniques, resources, modern engineering and IT tools
f) To understand the role as a professional and give the best to the society
g) To develop a system that will meet expected needs within realistic constraints such as economical

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

environmental, social, political, ethical, safety and sustainability
h) To communicate effectively and make others understand exactly what they are trying to tell in both
verbal and written forms
i) To work in a team as a team member or a leader and make unique contributions and work with
coordination

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

j) To engage in lifelong learning and exhibit their technical skills
k) To develop and manage projects in multidisciplinary environments

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To familiar with different measurement equipment?s and use of this industry for quality inspection
List of Experiments
1. Tool Maker?s Microscope

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Comparator
3. Sine Bar
4. Gear Tooth Vernier Caliper
5. Floating gauge Micrometer
6. Coordinate Measuring Machine

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Surface Finish Measuring Equipment
8. Vernier Height Gauge
9. Bore diameter measurement using telescope gauge
10. Bore diameter measurement using micrometer
11. Force Measurement

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. Torque Measurement
13. Temperature measurement
14. Autocollimator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Ability to handle different measurement tools and perform measurements in quality impulsion
2. Learnt the usage of precision measuring instruments and practiced to take measurements
3. Learnt and practiced to build the required dimensions using slip gauge
4. Able to measure the various dimensions of the given specimen using the tool maker?s microscope
5. Able to find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Able to measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare
7. Learnt to determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen using Gear tooth vernier
8. Able to measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two
wire method
9. Learnt to study the construction and operation of coordinate measuring machine

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. Learnt to determine the diameter of bore by using telescopic gauge and dial bore indicator
11. Able to measure the surface roughness using Talysurf instrument
12. Studied the characteristic between applied load and the output volt
13. Learnt the characteristics of developing torque and respective sensor output voltage
14. Studied the characteristics of thermocouple without compensation

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15. Able to check the straightness & flatness of the given component by using Autocollimator
16. Learnt to measure the displacement using LVDT and to calibrate it with the millimeter scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OBJECTIVES

COURSE OUTCOMES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

CONTENTS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl. No. Name of the Experiments Page No.
CYCLE ? 1 EXPERIMENTS
1
Precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab ? A Study
7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
To build up the slip gauge for given dimension ? A Study
16
3
Thread parameters measurement using Tool Makers Microscope

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

20
4
Calibration of dial gauge
23
5

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of taper angle by sine bar method
26
6
Determination of gear tooth thickness using gear tooth vernier
29

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7
Measurement of thread parameters using floating carriage micrometer
32
CYCLE ? 2 EXPERIMENTS
8

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement of various dimensions using Coordinate Measuring Machine
35
9
Measurement of surface roughness
39

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
Measurement of bores using dial bore indicator and telescopic gauge
42
11
Force measurement using load cell

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

46
12
Torque measurement using strain gauge
49
13

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Temperature measurement using thermocouple
53
14
Measurement of alignment using autocollimator
56

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ADDITIONAL EXPERIMENT BEYOND THE SYLLABUS
15
Thread parameters measurement using profile projector
60
16

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Displacement measurement ? linear variable differential transducer (LVDT)
62
PROJECT WORK
65

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.01 PRECISION MEASURING INSTRUMENT YSED IN
METROLOGY LAB ? A STUDY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Aim:
To study the following instruments and their usage for measuring dimensions of given specimen
1. Vernier caliper
2. Micrometer
3. Vernier height gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Depth micrometer
5. Universal bevel protractor
Apparatus required:
Surface plate, specimen and above instruments
Vernier caliper:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The principle of vernier caliper is to use the minor difference between the sizes two scales or divisions
for measurement. The difference between them can be utilized to enhance the accuracy of measurement. The
vernier caliper essentially consists of two steel rules, sliding along each other.
Parts:
Different parts of the vernier caliper are

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Beam ? It has main scale.
2. Fixed jaw
3. Sliding or Moving jaw ? It has vernier scale and sliding jaw locking screw.
4. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw knife
edges for internal measurement.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Stem or depth bar for depth measurement
Least count:
Least count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 VSD = 0.98 mm
Least count = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm

10 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ID

DEPTH

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OD
Measurement:
Given Vernier caliper can be used for external, internal depth, slot and step measurement.
Measurement principle:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

When both jaws contact each other scale shows the zero reading. The finer adjustment of movable jaw
can be done by the fine adjustment screw. First the whole movable jaw assembly is adjusted so that the two
measuring tips just touch the part to be measured. Then the fine adjustment clamp locking screw is tightened.
Final adjustment depending upon the sense of correct feel is made by the adjusting screw. After final
adjustment has been made sliding jaw locking screw is also tightened and the reading is noted.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

All the parts of the Vernier caliper are made of good quality steel and measuring faces are hardened.
Types of vernier:
Vernier caliper, electronic vernier caliper, vernier depth caliper

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:

Main scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

reading (MSR)
(mm)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

reading (VSR) (mm)
Total reading (MSR
+ VSR)
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OD


ID

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Depth


Vernier height gauge:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier height gauge is a sort of vernier caliper equipped with a special instrument suitable for height
measurement. It is always kept on the surface plate and the use of the surfaces plates as datum surfaces is
very essential.
Least count:
Least Count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm
1 VSD = 0.98 mm
Least Count (LC) = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm
Parts:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Base
2. Beam ? It has main scale.
3. Slider ? It has a vernier scale and slider locking screw.
4. Scriber
5. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Material:
All the parts of vernier are made of good quality steel and the measuring faces hardened.
Types of vernier gauge:
1. Analog vernier height gauge
2. Digital vernier height gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Electronic vernier height gauge
Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Main scale reading
(MSR)(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale reading
(VSR)(mm)
Total reading (MSR +

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSR)(mm)
1.
2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Outside micrometer:
The micrometer essentially consists of an accurate screw having about 10 or 20 threads per cm. The
end of the screw forms one measuring tip and other measuring tip is constituted by a stationary anvil in the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

base of the frame. The screw is threaded for certain length and is plain afterwards. The plain portion is called
spindle and its end is the measuring surface. The spindle is advanced or retracted by turning a thimble
connected to a spindle. The spindle is a slide fit over the barrel and barrel is the fixed part attached with the
frame. The barrel & thimble are graduated. The pitch of the screw threads is 0.5 mm.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count:
Least Count (LC) = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale
= 0.5 / 50 = 0.01 mm
Parts:
1. Frame

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Anvil
3. Spindle
4. Spindle lock
5. Barrel or outside sleeve
6. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.
The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.
14 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Measurement:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

It can be used for any external measurement.
Types of micrometer:
1. Outside micrometer, 2. Inside micrometer, 3.Depth micrometer, 4. Stick micrometer, 5. Screw thread
micrometer, 6. V ? anvil micrometer, 7. Blade type micrometer, 8. Dial micrometer, 9. Bench micrometer, 10.
Tape screw operated internal micrometer, 11. Groove micrometer, 12. Digital micrometer, 13.Differential screw

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

micrometer, 14.Adjustable range outside micrometer.
Ratchet stop mechanism:
The object of the ratchet stop is to ensure that same level of torque is applied on the spindle while
measuring and the sense of the feel of operator is eliminated and consistent readings are obtained. By
providing this arrangement, the ratchet stop is made slip off when the torque applied to rotate the spindle

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

exceeds the set torque. Thus this provision ensures the application of same amount of torque during the
measurement.
Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Pitch Scale Reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(PSR) (mm)
Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)
Head scale reading
(HSR x LC) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total Reading (PSR
+ HSR) (mm)
1.
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Depth micrometer:
Depth micrometer is a sort of micrometer which is mainly used for measuring depth of holes, so it is
named as depth micrometer.
Parts:
1. Shoulder

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Spindle
3. Spindle lock
4. Barrel or outside sleeve ? It has pitch scale.
5. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions.
6. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.
FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice
1 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?



DEPARTMENT OF

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MECHANICAL ENGINEERING


ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

V SEMESTER - R 2013

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Register No. : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________


LABORATORY MANUAL

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


3 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DHANALAKSHMI


College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
2. To contribute to the promotion of Academic Excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

DEPARTMENT OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rendering the services to the global needs of engineering industries by educating students to become
professionally sound mechanical engineers of excellent caliber

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To produce mechanical engineering technocrats with a perfect knowledge intellectual and hands on
experience and to inculcate the spirit of moral values and ethics to serve the society

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MISSION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MISSION
VISION

VISION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals
To impart students with fundamental knowledge in mathematics and basic sciences that will mould

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

them to be successful professionals
2. Core competence
To provide students with sound knowledge in engineering and experimental skills to identify
complex software problems in industry and to develop a practical solution for them
3. Breadth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theory and practice which
enable them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and organization and to design
products requiring interdisciplinary skills
4. Professional skills
To bestow students with adequate training and provide opportunities to work as team that will build

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

up their communication skills, individual, leadership and supportive qualities and to enable them to
adapt and to work in ever changing technologies
5. Life-long learning
To develop the ability of students to establish themselves as professionals in mechanical
engineering and to create awareness about the need for lifelong learning and pursuing advanced

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

degrees

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

On completion of the B.E. (Mechanical) degree, the graduate will be able
a) To apply the basic knowledge of mathematics, science and engineering
b) To design and conduct experiments as well as to analyze and interpret data and apply the same in
the career or entrepreneurship
c) To design and develop innovative and creative software applications

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d) To understand a complex real world problem and develop an efficient practical solution
e) To create, select and apply appropriate techniques, resources, modern engineering and IT tools
f) To understand the role as a professional and give the best to the society
g) To develop a system that will meet expected needs within realistic constraints such as economical
environmental, social, political, ethical, safety and sustainability

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

h) To communicate effectively and make others understand exactly what they are trying to tell in both
verbal and written forms
i) To work in a team as a team member or a leader and make unique contributions and work with
coordination
j) To engage in lifelong learning and exhibit their technical skills

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

k) To develop and manage projects in multidisciplinary environments

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To familiar with different measurement equipment?s and use of this industry for quality inspection
List of Experiments
1. Tool Maker?s Microscope
2. Comparator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Sine Bar
4. Gear Tooth Vernier Caliper
5. Floating gauge Micrometer
6. Coordinate Measuring Machine
7. Surface Finish Measuring Equipment

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Vernier Height Gauge
9. Bore diameter measurement using telescope gauge
10. Bore diameter measurement using micrometer
11. Force Measurement
12. Torque Measurement

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. Temperature measurement
14. Autocollimator


1. Ability to handle different measurement tools and perform measurements in quality impulsion

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Learnt the usage of precision measuring instruments and practiced to take measurements
3. Learnt and practiced to build the required dimensions using slip gauge
4. Able to measure the various dimensions of the given specimen using the tool maker?s microscope
5. Able to find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge
6. Able to measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Learnt to determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen using Gear tooth vernier
8. Able to measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two
wire method
9. Learnt to study the construction and operation of coordinate measuring machine
10. Learnt to determine the diameter of bore by using telescopic gauge and dial bore indicator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. Able to measure the surface roughness using Talysurf instrument
12. Studied the characteristic between applied load and the output volt
13. Learnt the characteristics of developing torque and respective sensor output voltage
14. Studied the characteristics of thermocouple without compensation
15. Able to check the straightness & flatness of the given component by using Autocollimator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16. Learnt to measure the displacement using LVDT and to calibrate it with the millimeter scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OBJECTIVES

COURSE OUTCOMES

7 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

CONTENTS
Sl. No. Name of the Experiments Page No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CYCLE ? 1 EXPERIMENTS
1
Precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab ? A Study
7
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To build up the slip gauge for given dimension ? A Study
16
3
Thread parameters measurement using Tool Makers Microscope
20

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4
Calibration of dial gauge
23
5
Determination of taper angle by sine bar method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

26
6
Determination of gear tooth thickness using gear tooth vernier
29
7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement of thread parameters using floating carriage micrometer
32
CYCLE ? 2 EXPERIMENTS
8
Measurement of various dimensions using Coordinate Measuring Machine

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

35
9
Measurement of surface roughness
39
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement of bores using dial bore indicator and telescopic gauge
42
11
Force measurement using load cell
46

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12
Torque measurement using strain gauge
49
13
Temperature measurement using thermocouple

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

53
14
Measurement of alignment using autocollimator
56
ADDITIONAL EXPERIMENT BEYOND THE SYLLABUS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15
Thread parameters measurement using profile projector
60
16
Displacement measurement ? linear variable differential transducer (LVDT)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

62
PROJECT WORK
65

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.01 PRECISION MEASURING INSTRUMENT YSED IN
METROLOGY LAB ? A STUDY
Aim:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To study the following instruments and their usage for measuring dimensions of given specimen
1. Vernier caliper
2. Micrometer
3. Vernier height gauge
4. Depth micrometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Universal bevel protractor
Apparatus required:
Surface plate, specimen and above instruments
Vernier caliper:
The principle of vernier caliper is to use the minor difference between the sizes two scales or divisions

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

for measurement. The difference between them can be utilized to enhance the accuracy of measurement. The
vernier caliper essentially consists of two steel rules, sliding along each other.
Parts:
Different parts of the vernier caliper are
1. Beam ? It has main scale.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Fixed jaw
3. Sliding or Moving jaw ? It has vernier scale and sliding jaw locking screw.
4. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw knife
edges for internal measurement.
5. Stem or depth bar for depth measurement

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count:
Least count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm
1 VSD = 0.98 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm

10 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ID

DEPTH

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OD
Measurement:
Given Vernier caliper can be used for external, internal depth, slot and step measurement.
Measurement principle:
When both jaws contact each other scale shows the zero reading. The finer adjustment of movable jaw

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

can be done by the fine adjustment screw. First the whole movable jaw assembly is adjusted so that the two
measuring tips just touch the part to be measured. Then the fine adjustment clamp locking screw is tightened.
Final adjustment depending upon the sense of correct feel is made by the adjusting screw. After final
adjustment has been made sliding jaw locking screw is also tightened and the reading is noted.
All the parts of the Vernier caliper are made of good quality steel and measuring faces are hardened.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Types of vernier:
Vernier caliper, electronic vernier caliper, vernier depth caliper


11 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:

Main scale
reading (MSR)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale
reading (VSR) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total reading (MSR
+ VSR)
(mm)

OD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ID

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Depth


Vernier height gauge:
Vernier height gauge is a sort of vernier caliper equipped with a special instrument suitable for height

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measurement. It is always kept on the surface plate and the use of the surfaces plates as datum surfaces is
very essential.
Least count:
Least Count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

50 VSD = 49 mm
1 VSD = 0.98 mm
Least Count (LC) = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm
Parts:
1. Base

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Beam ? It has main scale.
3. Slider ? It has a vernier scale and slider locking screw.
4. Scriber
5. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


Material:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

All the parts of vernier are made of good quality steel and the measuring faces hardened.
Types of vernier gauge:
1. Analog vernier height gauge
2. Digital vernier height gauge
3. Electronic vernier height gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Main scale reading
(MSR)(mm)
Vernier scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale reading
(VSR)(mm)
Total reading (MSR +
VSR)(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
2.
3.

13 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outside micrometer:
The micrometer essentially consists of an accurate screw having about 10 or 20 threads per cm. The
end of the screw forms one measuring tip and other measuring tip is constituted by a stationary anvil in the
base of the frame. The screw is threaded for certain length and is plain afterwards. The plain portion is called

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

spindle and its end is the measuring surface. The spindle is advanced or retracted by turning a thimble
connected to a spindle. The spindle is a slide fit over the barrel and barrel is the fixed part attached with the
frame. The barrel & thimble are graduated. The pitch of the screw threads is 0.5 mm.

Least count:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least Count (LC) = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale
= 0.5 / 50 = 0.01 mm
Parts:
1. Frame
2. Anvil

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Spindle
4. Spindle lock
5. Barrel or outside sleeve
6. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions
7. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.
14 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Measurement:
It can be used for any external measurement.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Types of micrometer:
1. Outside micrometer, 2. Inside micrometer, 3.Depth micrometer, 4. Stick micrometer, 5. Screw thread
micrometer, 6. V ? anvil micrometer, 7. Blade type micrometer, 8. Dial micrometer, 9. Bench micrometer, 10.
Tape screw operated internal micrometer, 11. Groove micrometer, 12. Digital micrometer, 13.Differential screw
micrometer, 14.Adjustable range outside micrometer.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Ratchet stop mechanism:
The object of the ratchet stop is to ensure that same level of torque is applied on the spindle while
measuring and the sense of the feel of operator is eliminated and consistent readings are obtained. By
providing this arrangement, the ratchet stop is made slip off when the torque applied to rotate the spindle
exceeds the set torque. Thus this provision ensures the application of same amount of torque during the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measurement.
Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)
Head scale reading
(HSR x LC) (mm)
Total Reading (PSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

+ HSR) (mm)
1.
2.

Depth micrometer:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Depth micrometer is a sort of micrometer which is mainly used for measuring depth of holes, so it is
named as depth micrometer.
Parts:
1. Shoulder
2. Spindle

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Spindle lock
4. Barrel or outside sleeve ? It has pitch scale.
5. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions.
6. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.
The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


Least count:
Least Count = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale = 0.50/50

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= 0.01 mm
Measurements:
It can be used for measuring the depth of holes, slots and recessed areas. The pitch of the screw thread
is 0.5 mm. The least count is 0.01 mm. Shoulder acts as a reference surface and is held firmly and
perpendicular to the centre line of the hole. For large range of measurement extension rods are used. In the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

barrel the scale is calibrated. The accuracy again depends upon the sense of touch.
Procedure:
First, calculate the least count of the instrument. Check the zero error. Measure the specimen note
down the main scale reading or the head scale reading. Note down the vernier or head scale coincidence with
main or pitch scale divisions.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) (mm)
Head Scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Coincidence (HSC)
Head scale reading
(HSR x LC) (mm)
Total Reading (PSR
+ HSR) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.


2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice
1 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING


ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

V SEMESTER - R 2013

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No. : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LABORATORY MANUAL
2 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


3 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DHANALAKSHMI


College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.


1. To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
2. To contribute to the promotion of Academic Excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

levels
3. To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

DEPARTMENT OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rendering the services to the global needs of engineering industries by educating students to become
professionally sound mechanical engineers of excellent caliber

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To produce mechanical engineering technocrats with a perfect knowledge intellectual and hands on
experience and to inculcate the spirit of moral values and ethics to serve the society

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MISSION
MISSION
VISION

VISION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To impart students with fundamental knowledge in mathematics and basic sciences that will mould
them to be successful professionals
2. Core competence
To provide students with sound knowledge in engineering and experimental skills to identify
complex software problems in industry and to develop a practical solution for them

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theory and practice which
enable them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and organization and to design
products requiring interdisciplinary skills
4. Professional skills

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To bestow students with adequate training and provide opportunities to work as team that will build
up their communication skills, individual, leadership and supportive qualities and to enable them to
adapt and to work in ever changing technologies
5. Life-long learning
To develop the ability of students to establish themselves as professionals in mechanical

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

engineering and to create awareness about the need for lifelong learning and pursuing advanced
degrees

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)
On completion of the B.E. (Mechanical) degree, the graduate will be able
a) To apply the basic knowledge of mathematics, science and engineering
b) To design and conduct experiments as well as to analyze and interpret data and apply the same in
the career or entrepreneurship

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

c) To design and develop innovative and creative software applications
d) To understand a complex real world problem and develop an efficient practical solution
e) To create, select and apply appropriate techniques, resources, modern engineering and IT tools
f) To understand the role as a professional and give the best to the society
g) To develop a system that will meet expected needs within realistic constraints such as economical

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

environmental, social, political, ethical, safety and sustainability
h) To communicate effectively and make others understand exactly what they are trying to tell in both
verbal and written forms
i) To work in a team as a team member or a leader and make unique contributions and work with
coordination

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

j) To engage in lifelong learning and exhibit their technical skills
k) To develop and manage projects in multidisciplinary environments

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To familiar with different measurement equipment?s and use of this industry for quality inspection
List of Experiments
1. Tool Maker?s Microscope

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Comparator
3. Sine Bar
4. Gear Tooth Vernier Caliper
5. Floating gauge Micrometer
6. Coordinate Measuring Machine

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Surface Finish Measuring Equipment
8. Vernier Height Gauge
9. Bore diameter measurement using telescope gauge
10. Bore diameter measurement using micrometer
11. Force Measurement

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. Torque Measurement
13. Temperature measurement
14. Autocollimator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Ability to handle different measurement tools and perform measurements in quality impulsion
2. Learnt the usage of precision measuring instruments and practiced to take measurements
3. Learnt and practiced to build the required dimensions using slip gauge
4. Able to measure the various dimensions of the given specimen using the tool maker?s microscope
5. Able to find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Able to measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare
7. Learnt to determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen using Gear tooth vernier
8. Able to measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two
wire method
9. Learnt to study the construction and operation of coordinate measuring machine

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. Learnt to determine the diameter of bore by using telescopic gauge and dial bore indicator
11. Able to measure the surface roughness using Talysurf instrument
12. Studied the characteristic between applied load and the output volt
13. Learnt the characteristics of developing torque and respective sensor output voltage
14. Studied the characteristics of thermocouple without compensation

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15. Able to check the straightness & flatness of the given component by using Autocollimator
16. Learnt to measure the displacement using LVDT and to calibrate it with the millimeter scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OBJECTIVES

COURSE OUTCOMES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

CONTENTS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl. No. Name of the Experiments Page No.
CYCLE ? 1 EXPERIMENTS
1
Precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab ? A Study
7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
To build up the slip gauge for given dimension ? A Study
16
3
Thread parameters measurement using Tool Makers Microscope

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

20
4
Calibration of dial gauge
23
5

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of taper angle by sine bar method
26
6
Determination of gear tooth thickness using gear tooth vernier
29

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7
Measurement of thread parameters using floating carriage micrometer
32
CYCLE ? 2 EXPERIMENTS
8

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement of various dimensions using Coordinate Measuring Machine
35
9
Measurement of surface roughness
39

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
Measurement of bores using dial bore indicator and telescopic gauge
42
11
Force measurement using load cell

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

46
12
Torque measurement using strain gauge
49
13

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Temperature measurement using thermocouple
53
14
Measurement of alignment using autocollimator
56

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ADDITIONAL EXPERIMENT BEYOND THE SYLLABUS
15
Thread parameters measurement using profile projector
60
16

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Displacement measurement ? linear variable differential transducer (LVDT)
62
PROJECT WORK
65

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.01 PRECISION MEASURING INSTRUMENT YSED IN
METROLOGY LAB ? A STUDY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Aim:
To study the following instruments and their usage for measuring dimensions of given specimen
1. Vernier caliper
2. Micrometer
3. Vernier height gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Depth micrometer
5. Universal bevel protractor
Apparatus required:
Surface plate, specimen and above instruments
Vernier caliper:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The principle of vernier caliper is to use the minor difference between the sizes two scales or divisions
for measurement. The difference between them can be utilized to enhance the accuracy of measurement. The
vernier caliper essentially consists of two steel rules, sliding along each other.
Parts:
Different parts of the vernier caliper are

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Beam ? It has main scale.
2. Fixed jaw
3. Sliding or Moving jaw ? It has vernier scale and sliding jaw locking screw.
4. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw knife
edges for internal measurement.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Stem or depth bar for depth measurement
Least count:
Least count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 VSD = 0.98 mm
Least count = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm

10 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ID

DEPTH

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OD
Measurement:
Given Vernier caliper can be used for external, internal depth, slot and step measurement.
Measurement principle:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

When both jaws contact each other scale shows the zero reading. The finer adjustment of movable jaw
can be done by the fine adjustment screw. First the whole movable jaw assembly is adjusted so that the two
measuring tips just touch the part to be measured. Then the fine adjustment clamp locking screw is tightened.
Final adjustment depending upon the sense of correct feel is made by the adjusting screw. After final
adjustment has been made sliding jaw locking screw is also tightened and the reading is noted.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

All the parts of the Vernier caliper are made of good quality steel and measuring faces are hardened.
Types of vernier:
Vernier caliper, electronic vernier caliper, vernier depth caliper

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:

Main scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

reading (MSR)
(mm)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

reading (VSR) (mm)
Total reading (MSR
+ VSR)
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OD


ID

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Depth


Vernier height gauge:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier height gauge is a sort of vernier caliper equipped with a special instrument suitable for height
measurement. It is always kept on the surface plate and the use of the surfaces plates as datum surfaces is
very essential.
Least count:
Least Count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm
1 VSD = 0.98 mm
Least Count (LC) = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm
Parts:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Base
2. Beam ? It has main scale.
3. Slider ? It has a vernier scale and slider locking screw.
4. Scriber
5. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Material:
All the parts of vernier are made of good quality steel and the measuring faces hardened.
Types of vernier gauge:
1. Analog vernier height gauge
2. Digital vernier height gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Electronic vernier height gauge
Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Main scale reading
(MSR)(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale reading
(VSR)(mm)
Total reading (MSR +

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSR)(mm)
1.
2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Outside micrometer:
The micrometer essentially consists of an accurate screw having about 10 or 20 threads per cm. The
end of the screw forms one measuring tip and other measuring tip is constituted by a stationary anvil in the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

base of the frame. The screw is threaded for certain length and is plain afterwards. The plain portion is called
spindle and its end is the measuring surface. The spindle is advanced or retracted by turning a thimble
connected to a spindle. The spindle is a slide fit over the barrel and barrel is the fixed part attached with the
frame. The barrel & thimble are graduated. The pitch of the screw threads is 0.5 mm.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count:
Least Count (LC) = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale
= 0.5 / 50 = 0.01 mm
Parts:
1. Frame

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Anvil
3. Spindle
4. Spindle lock
5. Barrel or outside sleeve
6. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.
The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.
14 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Measurement:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

It can be used for any external measurement.
Types of micrometer:
1. Outside micrometer, 2. Inside micrometer, 3.Depth micrometer, 4. Stick micrometer, 5. Screw thread
micrometer, 6. V ? anvil micrometer, 7. Blade type micrometer, 8. Dial micrometer, 9. Bench micrometer, 10.
Tape screw operated internal micrometer, 11. Groove micrometer, 12. Digital micrometer, 13.Differential screw

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

micrometer, 14.Adjustable range outside micrometer.
Ratchet stop mechanism:
The object of the ratchet stop is to ensure that same level of torque is applied on the spindle while
measuring and the sense of the feel of operator is eliminated and consistent readings are obtained. By
providing this arrangement, the ratchet stop is made slip off when the torque applied to rotate the spindle

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

exceeds the set torque. Thus this provision ensures the application of same amount of torque during the
measurement.
Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Pitch Scale Reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(PSR) (mm)
Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)
Head scale reading
(HSR x LC) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total Reading (PSR
+ HSR) (mm)
1.
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Depth micrometer:
Depth micrometer is a sort of micrometer which is mainly used for measuring depth of holes, so it is
named as depth micrometer.
Parts:
1. Shoulder

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Spindle
3. Spindle lock
4. Barrel or outside sleeve ? It has pitch scale.
5. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions.
6. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.
15 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


Least count:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least Count = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale = 0.50/50
= 0.01 mm
Measurements:
It can be used for measuring the depth of holes, slots and recessed areas. The pitch of the screw thread
is 0.5 mm. The least count is 0.01 mm. Shoulder acts as a reference surface and is held firmly and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

perpendicular to the centre line of the hole. For large range of measurement extension rods are used. In the
barrel the scale is calibrated. The accuracy again depends upon the sense of touch.
Procedure:
First, calculate the least count of the instrument. Check the zero error. Measure the specimen note
down the main scale reading or the head scale reading. Note down the vernier or head scale coincidence with

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

main or pitch scale divisions.
Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)
Head scale reading
(HSR x LC) (mm)
Total Reading (PSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

+ HSR) (mm)

1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.


16 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Universal bevel protractor:

Description:
Bevel protractor is an instrument for measuring the angle between the two faces of a specimen. It
consists of a base plate on which a circular scale is engraved. It is graduated in degrees. An adjustment plate

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

is attached to a circular plate containing the vernier scale. The adjustable blade can be locked in any position.
The circular plate has 360 division divided into four parts of 90 degrees each. The adjustable parts have 24
divisions of to the right and left sides of zero reading. These scales are used according to the position of the
specimen with respect to movable scale.
Procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Place the specimen whose taper is to be measured between the adjustable plate and movable
blade with one of its face parallel to the base.
2. Lock the adjustable plate in position and note down the main scale reading depending upon the
direction of rotation of adjustable plate in clockwise or anticlockwise.
3. Note the VSC to the right of zero.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Multiply the VSC with the least count and add to MSR to obtain the actual reading.
Least count:
Least Count = 2 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

24 VSD = 46
o
=> 1 VSD = 23/12
LC = 2 ? 23/12 = 1/12
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= 5? (five minutes)



FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

V SEMESTER - R 2013

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No. : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LABORATORY MANUAL
2 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

DHANALAKSHMI

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
2. To contribute to the promotion of Academic Excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels
3. To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING


Rendering the services to the global needs of engineering industries by educating students to become

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

professionally sound mechanical engineers of excellent caliber


To produce mechanical engineering technocrats with a perfect knowledge intellectual and hands on
experience and to inculcate the spirit of moral values and ethics to serve the society

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MISSION
MISSION
VISION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION

4 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals
To impart students with fundamental knowledge in mathematics and basic sciences that will mould
them to be successful professionals
2. Core competence

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To provide students with sound knowledge in engineering and experimental skills to identify
complex software problems in industry and to develop a practical solution for them
3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theory and practice which
enable them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and organization and to design

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

products requiring interdisciplinary skills
4. Professional skills
To bestow students with adequate training and provide opportunities to work as team that will build
up their communication skills, individual, leadership and supportive qualities and to enable them to
adapt and to work in ever changing technologies

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Life-long learning
To develop the ability of students to establish themselves as professionals in mechanical
engineering and to create awareness about the need for lifelong learning and pursuing advanced
degrees

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)
On completion of the B.E. (Mechanical) degree, the graduate will be able
a) To apply the basic knowledge of mathematics, science and engineering

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

b) To design and conduct experiments as well as to analyze and interpret data and apply the same in
the career or entrepreneurship
c) To design and develop innovative and creative software applications
d) To understand a complex real world problem and develop an efficient practical solution
e) To create, select and apply appropriate techniques, resources, modern engineering and IT tools

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

f) To understand the role as a professional and give the best to the society
g) To develop a system that will meet expected needs within realistic constraints such as economical
environmental, social, political, ethical, safety and sustainability
h) To communicate effectively and make others understand exactly what they are trying to tell in both
verbal and written forms

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

i) To work in a team as a team member or a leader and make unique contributions and work with
coordination
j) To engage in lifelong learning and exhibit their technical skills
k) To develop and manage projects in multidisciplinary environments

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY



To familiar with different measurement equipment?s and use of this industry for quality inspection

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

List of Experiments
1. Tool Maker?s Microscope
2. Comparator
3. Sine Bar
4. Gear Tooth Vernier Caliper

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Floating gauge Micrometer
6. Coordinate Measuring Machine
7. Surface Finish Measuring Equipment
8. Vernier Height Gauge
9. Bore diameter measurement using telescope gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. Bore diameter measurement using micrometer
11. Force Measurement
12. Torque Measurement
13. Temperature measurement
14. Autocollimator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Ability to handle different measurement tools and perform measurements in quality impulsion
2. Learnt the usage of precision measuring instruments and practiced to take measurements
3. Learnt and practiced to build the required dimensions using slip gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Able to measure the various dimensions of the given specimen using the tool maker?s microscope
5. Able to find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge
6. Able to measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare
7. Learnt to determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen using Gear tooth vernier
8. Able to measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

wire method
9. Learnt to study the construction and operation of coordinate measuring machine
10. Learnt to determine the diameter of bore by using telescopic gauge and dial bore indicator
11. Able to measure the surface roughness using Talysurf instrument
12. Studied the characteristic between applied load and the output volt

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. Learnt the characteristics of developing torque and respective sensor output voltage
14. Studied the characteristics of thermocouple without compensation
15. Able to check the straightness & flatness of the given component by using Autocollimator
16. Learnt to measure the displacement using LVDT and to calibrate it with the millimeter scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OBJECTIVES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OUTCOMES

7 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CONTENTS
Sl. No. Name of the Experiments Page No.
CYCLE ? 1 EXPERIMENTS
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab ? A Study
7
2
To build up the slip gauge for given dimension ? A Study
16

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
Thread parameters measurement using Tool Makers Microscope
20
4
Calibration of dial gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

23
5
Determination of taper angle by sine bar method
26
6

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of gear tooth thickness using gear tooth vernier
29
7
Measurement of thread parameters using floating carriage micrometer
32

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CYCLE ? 2 EXPERIMENTS
8
Measurement of various dimensions using Coordinate Measuring Machine
35
9

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement of surface roughness
39
10
Measurement of bores using dial bore indicator and telescopic gauge
42

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11
Force measurement using load cell
46
12
Torque measurement using strain gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

49
13
Temperature measurement using thermocouple
53
14

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement of alignment using autocollimator
56
ADDITIONAL EXPERIMENT BEYOND THE SYLLABUS
15
Thread parameters measurement using profile projector

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

60
16
Displacement measurement ? linear variable differential transducer (LVDT)
62
PROJECT WORK

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

65


8 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.01 PRECISION MEASURING INSTRUMENT YSED IN
METROLOGY LAB ? A STUDY
Aim:
To study the following instruments and their usage for measuring dimensions of given specimen
1. Vernier caliper

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Micrometer
3. Vernier height gauge
4. Depth micrometer
5. Universal bevel protractor
Apparatus required:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Surface plate, specimen and above instruments
Vernier caliper:
The principle of vernier caliper is to use the minor difference between the sizes two scales or divisions
for measurement. The difference between them can be utilized to enhance the accuracy of measurement. The
vernier caliper essentially consists of two steel rules, sliding along each other.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Parts:
Different parts of the vernier caliper are
1. Beam ? It has main scale.
2. Fixed jaw
3. Sliding or Moving jaw ? It has vernier scale and sliding jaw locking screw.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw knife
edges for internal measurement.
5. Stem or depth bar for depth measurement
Least count:
Least count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm
1 VSD = 0.98 mm
Least count = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


ID

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPTH


OD
Measurement:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Given Vernier caliper can be used for external, internal depth, slot and step measurement.
Measurement principle:
When both jaws contact each other scale shows the zero reading. The finer adjustment of movable jaw
can be done by the fine adjustment screw. First the whole movable jaw assembly is adjusted so that the two
measuring tips just touch the part to be measured. Then the fine adjustment clamp locking screw is tightened.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Final adjustment depending upon the sense of correct feel is made by the adjusting screw. After final
adjustment has been made sliding jaw locking screw is also tightened and the reading is noted.
All the parts of the Vernier caliper are made of good quality steel and measuring faces are hardened.
Types of vernier:
Vernier caliper, electronic vernier caliper, vernier depth caliper

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Main scale
reading (MSR)
(mm)
Vernier scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale
reading (VSR) (mm)
Total reading (MSR
+ VSR)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)

OD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ID


Depth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier height gauge:
Vernier height gauge is a sort of vernier caliper equipped with a special instrument suitable for height
measurement. It is always kept on the surface plate and the use of the surfaces plates as datum surfaces is
very essential.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count:
Least Count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm
1 VSD = 0.98 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least Count (LC) = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm
Parts:
1. Base
2. Beam ? It has main scale.
3. Slider ? It has a vernier scale and slider locking screw.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Scriber
5. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw.


12 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Material:
All the parts of vernier are made of good quality steel and the measuring faces hardened.
Types of vernier gauge:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Analog vernier height gauge
2. Digital vernier height gauge
3. Electronic vernier height gauge
Tabulation:
Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Main scale reading
(MSR)(mm)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(VSR)(mm)
Total reading (MSR +
VSR)(mm)
1.
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.

13 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Outside micrometer:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The micrometer essentially consists of an accurate screw having about 10 or 20 threads per cm. The
end of the screw forms one measuring tip and other measuring tip is constituted by a stationary anvil in the
base of the frame. The screw is threaded for certain length and is plain afterwards. The plain portion is called
spindle and its end is the measuring surface. The spindle is advanced or retracted by turning a thimble
connected to a spindle. The spindle is a slide fit over the barrel and barrel is the fixed part attached with the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

frame. The barrel & thimble are graduated. The pitch of the screw threads is 0.5 mm.

Least count:
Least Count (LC) = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale
= 0.5 / 50 = 0.01 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Parts:
1. Frame
2. Anvil
3. Spindle
4. Spindle lock

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Barrel or outside sleeve
6. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions
7. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.
The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.
14 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement:
It can be used for any external measurement.
Types of micrometer:
1. Outside micrometer, 2. Inside micrometer, 3.Depth micrometer, 4. Stick micrometer, 5. Screw thread

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

micrometer, 6. V ? anvil micrometer, 7. Blade type micrometer, 8. Dial micrometer, 9. Bench micrometer, 10.
Tape screw operated internal micrometer, 11. Groove micrometer, 12. Digital micrometer, 13.Differential screw
micrometer, 14.Adjustable range outside micrometer.
Ratchet stop mechanism:
The object of the ratchet stop is to ensure that same level of torque is applied on the spindle while

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measuring and the sense of the feel of operator is eliminated and consistent readings are obtained. By
providing this arrangement, the ratchet stop is made slip off when the torque applied to rotate the spindle
exceeds the set torque. Thus this provision ensures the application of same amount of torque during the
measurement.
Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) (mm)
Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Head scale reading
(HSR x LC) (mm)
Total Reading (PSR
+ HSR) (mm)
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.

Depth micrometer:
Depth micrometer is a sort of micrometer which is mainly used for measuring depth of holes, so it is
named as depth micrometer.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Parts:
1. Shoulder
2. Spindle
3. Spindle lock
4. Barrel or outside sleeve ? It has pitch scale.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions.
6. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.
The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.
15 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count:
Least Count = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale = 0.50/50
= 0.01 mm
Measurements:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

It can be used for measuring the depth of holes, slots and recessed areas. The pitch of the screw thread
is 0.5 mm. The least count is 0.01 mm. Shoulder acts as a reference surface and is held firmly and
perpendicular to the centre line of the hole. For large range of measurement extension rods are used. In the
barrel the scale is calibrated. The accuracy again depends upon the sense of touch.
Procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

First, calculate the least count of the instrument. Check the zero error. Measure the specimen note
down the main scale reading or the head scale reading. Note down the vernier or head scale coincidence with
main or pitch scale divisions.
Tabulation:
Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) (mm)
Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)
Head scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(HSR x LC) (mm)
Total Reading (PSR
+ HSR) (mm)

1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Universal bevel protractor:

Description:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Bevel protractor is an instrument for measuring the angle between the two faces of a specimen. It
consists of a base plate on which a circular scale is engraved. It is graduated in degrees. An adjustment plate
is attached to a circular plate containing the vernier scale. The adjustable blade can be locked in any position.
The circular plate has 360 division divided into four parts of 90 degrees each. The adjustable parts have 24
divisions of to the right and left sides of zero reading. These scales are used according to the position of the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

specimen with respect to movable scale.
Procedure:
1. Place the specimen whose taper is to be measured between the adjustable plate and movable
blade with one of its face parallel to the base.
2. Lock the adjustable plate in position and note down the main scale reading depending upon the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

direction of rotation of adjustable plate in clockwise or anticlockwise.
3. Note the VSC to the right of zero.
4. Multiply the VSC with the least count and add to MSR to obtain the actual reading.
Least count:
Least Count = 2 MSD ? 1 VSD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 MSD = 1
o
24 VSD = 46
o
=> 1 VSD = 23/12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LC = 2 ? 23/12 = 1/12
o
= 5? (five minutes)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:
Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Main scale reading
(MSR) (deg)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(VSR) (deg)
Total reading (MSR +
VSR)
(deg)
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.
The angle of scriber of the vernier height gauge =
Result:
Thus the various precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab are studied and the specimen
dimensions are recorded.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for linear, angular,
roundness and roughness measurements they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring
instrument according to a specific requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).
Application:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Quality Department


1. Define ? Metrology
2. Define ? Inspection

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. What are the needs of inspection in industries?
4. What are the various methods involving the measurement?
5. Define ? Precision
6. Define ? Accuracy
7. Define ? Calibration

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Define ? Repeatability
9. Define ? Magnification
10. Define ? Error
11. Define ? Systematic Error
12. Define ? Random Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. Define ? Parallax Error
14. Define ? Environmental Error
15. Define ? Cosine Error
Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice
1 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

V SEMESTER - R 2013

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No. : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Section : _______________________________________


LABORATORY MANUAL
2 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

DHANALAKSHMI

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
2. To contribute to the promotion of Academic Excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels
3. To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

and soul

DEPARTMENT OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rendering the services to the global needs of engineering industries by educating students to become
professionally sound mechanical engineers of excellent caliber


To produce mechanical engineering technocrats with a perfect knowledge intellectual and hands on

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

experience and to inculcate the spirit of moral values and ethics to serve the society

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MISSION
MISSION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION

VISION

4 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals
To impart students with fundamental knowledge in mathematics and basic sciences that will mould
them to be successful professionals

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Core competence
To provide students with sound knowledge in engineering and experimental skills to identify
complex software problems in industry and to develop a practical solution for them
3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theory and practice which

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

enable them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and organization and to design
products requiring interdisciplinary skills
4. Professional skills
To bestow students with adequate training and provide opportunities to work as team that will build
up their communication skills, individual, leadership and supportive qualities and to enable them to

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

adapt and to work in ever changing technologies
5. Life-long learning
To develop the ability of students to establish themselves as professionals in mechanical
engineering and to create awareness about the need for lifelong learning and pursuing advanced
degrees

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)
On completion of the B.E. (Mechanical) degree, the graduate will be able

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

a) To apply the basic knowledge of mathematics, science and engineering
b) To design and conduct experiments as well as to analyze and interpret data and apply the same in
the career or entrepreneurship
c) To design and develop innovative and creative software applications
d) To understand a complex real world problem and develop an efficient practical solution

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

e) To create, select and apply appropriate techniques, resources, modern engineering and IT tools
f) To understand the role as a professional and give the best to the society
g) To develop a system that will meet expected needs within realistic constraints such as economical
environmental, social, political, ethical, safety and sustainability
h) To communicate effectively and make others understand exactly what they are trying to tell in both

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

verbal and written forms
i) To work in a team as a team member or a leader and make unique contributions and work with
coordination
j) To engage in lifelong learning and exhibit their technical skills
k) To develop and manage projects in multidisciplinary environments

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To familiar with different measurement equipment?s and use of this industry for quality inspection
List of Experiments
1. Tool Maker?s Microscope
2. Comparator
3. Sine Bar

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Gear Tooth Vernier Caliper
5. Floating gauge Micrometer
6. Coordinate Measuring Machine
7. Surface Finish Measuring Equipment
8. Vernier Height Gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. Bore diameter measurement using telescope gauge
10. Bore diameter measurement using micrometer
11. Force Measurement
12. Torque Measurement
13. Temperature measurement

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. Autocollimator


1. Ability to handle different measurement tools and perform measurements in quality impulsion
2. Learnt the usage of precision measuring instruments and practiced to take measurements

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Learnt and practiced to build the required dimensions using slip gauge
4. Able to measure the various dimensions of the given specimen using the tool maker?s microscope
5. Able to find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge
6. Able to measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare
7. Learnt to determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen using Gear tooth vernier

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Able to measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two
wire method
9. Learnt to study the construction and operation of coordinate measuring machine
10. Learnt to determine the diameter of bore by using telescopic gauge and dial bore indicator
11. Able to measure the surface roughness using Talysurf instrument

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. Studied the characteristic between applied load and the output volt
13. Learnt the characteristics of developing torque and respective sensor output voltage
14. Studied the characteristics of thermocouple without compensation
15. Able to check the straightness & flatness of the given component by using Autocollimator
16. Learnt to measure the displacement using LVDT and to calibrate it with the millimeter scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OBJECTIVES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OUTCOMES

7 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

CONTENTS
Sl. No. Name of the Experiments Page No.
CYCLE ? 1 EXPERIMENTS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1
Precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab ? A Study
7
2
To build up the slip gauge for given dimension ? A Study

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16
3
Thread parameters measurement using Tool Makers Microscope
20
4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Calibration of dial gauge
23
5
Determination of taper angle by sine bar method
26

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6
Determination of gear tooth thickness using gear tooth vernier
29
7
Measurement of thread parameters using floating carriage micrometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

32
CYCLE ? 2 EXPERIMENTS
8
Measurement of various dimensions using Coordinate Measuring Machine
35

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9
Measurement of surface roughness
39
10
Measurement of bores using dial bore indicator and telescopic gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

42
11
Force measurement using load cell
46
12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Torque measurement using strain gauge
49
13
Temperature measurement using thermocouple
53

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14
Measurement of alignment using autocollimator
56
ADDITIONAL EXPERIMENT BEYOND THE SYLLABUS
15

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thread parameters measurement using profile projector
60
16
Displacement measurement ? linear variable differential transducer (LVDT)
62

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROJECT WORK
65


8 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.01 PRECISION MEASURING INSTRUMENT YSED IN
METROLOGY LAB ? A STUDY
Aim:
To study the following instruments and their usage for measuring dimensions of given specimen

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Vernier caliper
2. Micrometer
3. Vernier height gauge
4. Depth micrometer
5. Universal bevel protractor

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Apparatus required:
Surface plate, specimen and above instruments
Vernier caliper:
The principle of vernier caliper is to use the minor difference between the sizes two scales or divisions
for measurement. The difference between them can be utilized to enhance the accuracy of measurement. The

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

vernier caliper essentially consists of two steel rules, sliding along each other.
Parts:
Different parts of the vernier caliper are
1. Beam ? It has main scale.
2. Fixed jaw

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Sliding or Moving jaw ? It has vernier scale and sliding jaw locking screw.
4. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw knife
edges for internal measurement.
5. Stem or depth bar for depth measurement
Least count:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm
1 VSD = 0.98 mm
Least count = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


ID

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPTH


OD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement:
Given Vernier caliper can be used for external, internal depth, slot and step measurement.
Measurement principle:
When both jaws contact each other scale shows the zero reading. The finer adjustment of movable jaw
can be done by the fine adjustment screw. First the whole movable jaw assembly is adjusted so that the two

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measuring tips just touch the part to be measured. Then the fine adjustment clamp locking screw is tightened.
Final adjustment depending upon the sense of correct feel is made by the adjusting screw. After final
adjustment has been made sliding jaw locking screw is also tightened and the reading is noted.
All the parts of the Vernier caliper are made of good quality steel and measuring faces are hardened.
Types of vernier:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier caliper, electronic vernier caliper, vernier depth caliper


11 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:

Main scale
reading (MSR)
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale
reading (VSR) (mm)
Total reading (MSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

+ VSR)
(mm)

OD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ID


Depth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier height gauge:
Vernier height gauge is a sort of vernier caliper equipped with a special instrument suitable for height
measurement. It is always kept on the surface plate and the use of the surfaces plates as datum surfaces is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

very essential.
Least count:
Least Count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 VSD = 0.98 mm
Least Count (LC) = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm
Parts:
1. Base
2. Beam ? It has main scale.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Slider ? It has a vernier scale and slider locking screw.
4. Scriber
5. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


Material:
All the parts of vernier are made of good quality steel and the measuring faces hardened.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Types of vernier gauge:
1. Analog vernier height gauge
2. Digital vernier height gauge
3. Electronic vernier height gauge
Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
Main scale reading
(MSR)(mm)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier scale reading
(VSR)(mm)
Total reading (MSR +
VSR)(mm)
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.
3.

13 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outside micrometer:
The micrometer essentially consists of an accurate screw having about 10 or 20 threads per cm. The
end of the screw forms one measuring tip and other measuring tip is constituted by a stationary anvil in the
base of the frame. The screw is threaded for certain length and is plain afterwards. The plain portion is called
spindle and its end is the measuring surface. The spindle is advanced or retracted by turning a thimble

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

connected to a spindle. The spindle is a slide fit over the barrel and barrel is the fixed part attached with the
frame. The barrel & thimble are graduated. The pitch of the screw threads is 0.5 mm.

Least count:
Least Count (LC) = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= 0.5 / 50 = 0.01 mm
Parts:
1. Frame
2. Anvil
3. Spindle

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Spindle lock
5. Barrel or outside sleeve
6. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions
7. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.
The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Measurement:
It can be used for any external measurement.
Types of micrometer:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Outside micrometer, 2. Inside micrometer, 3.Depth micrometer, 4. Stick micrometer, 5. Screw thread
micrometer, 6. V ? anvil micrometer, 7. Blade type micrometer, 8. Dial micrometer, 9. Bench micrometer, 10.
Tape screw operated internal micrometer, 11. Groove micrometer, 12. Digital micrometer, 13.Differential screw
micrometer, 14.Adjustable range outside micrometer.
Ratchet stop mechanism:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The object of the ratchet stop is to ensure that same level of torque is applied on the spindle while
measuring and the sense of the feel of operator is eliminated and consistent readings are obtained. By
providing this arrangement, the ratchet stop is made slip off when the torque applied to rotate the spindle
exceeds the set torque. Thus this provision ensures the application of same amount of torque during the
measurement.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) (mm)
Head Scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Coincidence (HSC)
Head scale reading
(HSR x LC) (mm)
Total Reading (PSR
+ HSR) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
2.

Depth micrometer:
Depth micrometer is a sort of micrometer which is mainly used for measuring depth of holes, so it is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

named as depth micrometer.
Parts:
1. Shoulder
2. Spindle
3. Spindle lock

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Barrel or outside sleeve ? It has pitch scale.
5. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions.
6. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.
The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.
15 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count:
Least Count = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale = 0.50/50
= 0.01 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurements:
It can be used for measuring the depth of holes, slots and recessed areas. The pitch of the screw thread
is 0.5 mm. The least count is 0.01 mm. Shoulder acts as a reference surface and is held firmly and
perpendicular to the centre line of the hole. For large range of measurement extension rods are used. In the
barrel the scale is calibrated. The accuracy again depends upon the sense of touch.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
First, calculate the least count of the instrument. Check the zero error. Measure the specimen note
down the main scale reading or the head scale reading. Note down the vernier or head scale coincidence with
main or pitch scale divisions.
Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) (mm)
Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Head scale reading
(HSR x LC) (mm)
Total Reading (PSR
+ HSR) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.


2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Universal bevel protractor:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
Bevel protractor is an instrument for measuring the angle between the two faces of a specimen. It
consists of a base plate on which a circular scale is engraved. It is graduated in degrees. An adjustment plate
is attached to a circular plate containing the vernier scale. The adjustable blade can be locked in any position.
The circular plate has 360 division divided into four parts of 90 degrees each. The adjustable parts have 24

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

divisions of to the right and left sides of zero reading. These scales are used according to the position of the
specimen with respect to movable scale.
Procedure:
1. Place the specimen whose taper is to be measured between the adjustable plate and movable
blade with one of its face parallel to the base.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Lock the adjustable plate in position and note down the main scale reading depending upon the
direction of rotation of adjustable plate in clockwise or anticlockwise.
3. Note the VSC to the right of zero.
4. Multiply the VSC with the least count and add to MSR to obtain the actual reading.
Least count:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least Count = 2 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1
o
24 VSD = 46
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

=> 1 VSD = 23/12
LC = 2 ? 23/12 = 1/12
o
= 5? (five minutes)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
Main scale reading
(MSR) (deg)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier scale reading
(VSR) (deg)
Total reading (MSR +
VSR)
(deg)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
2.
The angle of scriber of the vernier height gauge =
Result:
Thus the various precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab are studied and the specimen

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

dimensions are recorded.
Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for linear, angular,
roundness and roughness measurements they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring
instrument according to a specific requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Quality Department


1. Define ? Metrology

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Define ? Inspection
3. What are the needs of inspection in industries?
4. What are the various methods involving the measurement?
5. Define ? Precision
6. Define ? Accuracy

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Define ? Calibration
8. Define ? Repeatability
9. Define ? Magnification
10. Define ? Error
11. Define ? Systematic Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. Define ? Random Error
13. Define ? Parallax Error
14. Define ? Environmental Error
15. Define ? Cosine Error
Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

18 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.02 BUILD UP THE SLIP GAUGE FOR GIVEN DIMENSION
? A STUDY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Aim:
To build up the slip gauge for given dimension
Apparatus required:
1. Slip gauges set
2. Surface plate

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Soft cloth
Diagram:

Description:
Slip gauge are universally accepted standard of length in industry. They are the working standard for

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

linear dimension. These were invented by a Swedish Engineer, C.E. Johansson. They are used
1. For direct precise measurement where the accuracy of the workpiece demand it.
2. For use with high- magnification comparators to establish the size of the gauge blocks in general
use.
3. Gauge blocks are also used for many other purposes such as checking the accuracy of measuring

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

instrument or setting up a comparator to a specific dimension, enabling a batch of component to be
quickly and accurately checked or indeed in any situation where there is need to refer to standard of
known length these blocks are rectangular.
FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice
1 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

V SEMESTER - R 2013

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No. : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LABORATORY MANUAL
2 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

DHANALAKSHMI

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.


1. To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. To contribute to the promotion of Academic Excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels
3. To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING


Rendering the services to the global needs of engineering industries by educating students to become
professionally sound mechanical engineers of excellent caliber

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To produce mechanical engineering technocrats with a perfect knowledge intellectual and hands on
experience and to inculcate the spirit of moral values and ethics to serve the society

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MISSION
MISSION
VISION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION

4 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Fundamentals
To impart students with fundamental knowledge in mathematics and basic sciences that will mould
them to be successful professionals
2. Core competence
To provide students with sound knowledge in engineering and experimental skills to identify

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

complex software problems in industry and to develop a practical solution for them
3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theory and practice which
enable them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and organization and to design
products requiring interdisciplinary skills

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Professional skills
To bestow students with adequate training and provide opportunities to work as team that will build
up their communication skills, individual, leadership and supportive qualities and to enable them to
adapt and to work in ever changing technologies
5. Life-long learning

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To develop the ability of students to establish themselves as professionals in mechanical
engineering and to create awareness about the need for lifelong learning and pursuing advanced
degrees

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)
On completion of the B.E. (Mechanical) degree, the graduate will be able
a) To apply the basic knowledge of mathematics, science and engineering
b) To design and conduct experiments as well as to analyze and interpret data and apply the same in

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the career or entrepreneurship
c) To design and develop innovative and creative software applications
d) To understand a complex real world problem and develop an efficient practical solution
e) To create, select and apply appropriate techniques, resources, modern engineering and IT tools
f) To understand the role as a professional and give the best to the society

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

g) To develop a system that will meet expected needs within realistic constraints such as economical
environmental, social, political, ethical, safety and sustainability
h) To communicate effectively and make others understand exactly what they are trying to tell in both
verbal and written forms
i) To work in a team as a team member or a leader and make unique contributions and work with

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

coordination
j) To engage in lifelong learning and exhibit their technical skills
k) To develop and manage projects in multidisciplinary environments

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To familiar with different measurement equipment?s and use of this industry for quality inspection
List of Experiments

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Tool Maker?s Microscope
2. Comparator
3. Sine Bar
4. Gear Tooth Vernier Caliper
5. Floating gauge Micrometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Coordinate Measuring Machine
7. Surface Finish Measuring Equipment
8. Vernier Height Gauge
9. Bore diameter measurement using telescope gauge
10. Bore diameter measurement using micrometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. Force Measurement
12. Torque Measurement
13. Temperature measurement
14. Autocollimator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Ability to handle different measurement tools and perform measurements in quality impulsion
2. Learnt the usage of precision measuring instruments and practiced to take measurements
3. Learnt and practiced to build the required dimensions using slip gauge
4. Able to measure the various dimensions of the given specimen using the tool maker?s microscope

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Able to find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge
6. Able to measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare
7. Learnt to determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen using Gear tooth vernier
8. Able to measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two
wire method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. Learnt to study the construction and operation of coordinate measuring machine
10. Learnt to determine the diameter of bore by using telescopic gauge and dial bore indicator
11. Able to measure the surface roughness using Talysurf instrument
12. Studied the characteristic between applied load and the output volt
13. Learnt the characteristics of developing torque and respective sensor output voltage

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. Studied the characteristics of thermocouple without compensation
15. Able to check the straightness & flatness of the given component by using Autocollimator
16. Learnt to measure the displacement using LVDT and to calibrate it with the millimeter scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OBJECTIVES

COURSE OUTCOMES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CONTENTS
Sl. No. Name of the Experiments Page No.
CYCLE ? 1 EXPERIMENTS
1
Precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab ? A Study

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7
2
To build up the slip gauge for given dimension ? A Study
16
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thread parameters measurement using Tool Makers Microscope
20
4
Calibration of dial gauge
23

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5
Determination of taper angle by sine bar method
26
6
Determination of gear tooth thickness using gear tooth vernier

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

29
7
Measurement of thread parameters using floating carriage micrometer
32
CYCLE ? 2 EXPERIMENTS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8
Measurement of various dimensions using Coordinate Measuring Machine
35
9
Measurement of surface roughness

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

39
10
Measurement of bores using dial bore indicator and telescopic gauge
42
11

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Force measurement using load cell
46
12
Torque measurement using strain gauge
49

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13
Temperature measurement using thermocouple
53
14
Measurement of alignment using autocollimator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

56
ADDITIONAL EXPERIMENT BEYOND THE SYLLABUS
15
Thread parameters measurement using profile projector
60

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16
Displacement measurement ? linear variable differential transducer (LVDT)
62
PROJECT WORK
65

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.01 PRECISION MEASURING INSTRUMENT YSED IN

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

METROLOGY LAB ? A STUDY
Aim:
To study the following instruments and their usage for measuring dimensions of given specimen
1. Vernier caliper
2. Micrometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Vernier height gauge
4. Depth micrometer
5. Universal bevel protractor
Apparatus required:
Surface plate, specimen and above instruments

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier caliper:
The principle of vernier caliper is to use the minor difference between the sizes two scales or divisions
for measurement. The difference between them can be utilized to enhance the accuracy of measurement. The
vernier caliper essentially consists of two steel rules, sliding along each other.
Parts:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Different parts of the vernier caliper are
1. Beam ? It has main scale.
2. Fixed jaw
3. Sliding or Moving jaw ? It has vernier scale and sliding jaw locking screw.
4. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw knife

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

edges for internal measurement.
5. Stem or depth bar for depth measurement
Least count:
Least count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

50 VSD = 49 mm
1 VSD = 0.98 mm
Least count = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm

10 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ID

DEPTH

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OD
Measurement:
Given Vernier caliper can be used for external, internal depth, slot and step measurement.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement principle:
When both jaws contact each other scale shows the zero reading. The finer adjustment of movable jaw
can be done by the fine adjustment screw. First the whole movable jaw assembly is adjusted so that the two
measuring tips just touch the part to be measured. Then the fine adjustment clamp locking screw is tightened.
Final adjustment depending upon the sense of correct feel is made by the adjusting screw. After final

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

adjustment has been made sliding jaw locking screw is also tightened and the reading is noted.
All the parts of the Vernier caliper are made of good quality steel and measuring faces are hardened.
Types of vernier:
Vernier caliper, electronic vernier caliper, vernier depth caliper

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Main scale
reading (MSR)
(mm)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier scale
reading (VSR) (mm)
Total reading (MSR
+ VSR)
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OD


ID

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Depth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier height gauge:
Vernier height gauge is a sort of vernier caliper equipped with a special instrument suitable for height
measurement. It is always kept on the surface plate and the use of the surfaces plates as datum surfaces is
very essential.
Least count:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least Count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm
1 VSD = 0.98 mm
Least Count (LC) = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Parts:
1. Base
2. Beam ? It has main scale.
3. Slider ? It has a vernier scale and slider locking screw.
4. Scriber

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw.


12 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Material:
All the parts of vernier are made of good quality steel and the measuring faces hardened.
Types of vernier gauge:
1. Analog vernier height gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Digital vernier height gauge
3. Electronic vernier height gauge
Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Main scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(MSR)(mm)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale reading
(VSR)(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total reading (MSR +
VSR)(mm)
1.
2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Outside micrometer:
The micrometer essentially consists of an accurate screw having about 10 or 20 threads per cm. The

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

end of the screw forms one measuring tip and other measuring tip is constituted by a stationary anvil in the
base of the frame. The screw is threaded for certain length and is plain afterwards. The plain portion is called
spindle and its end is the measuring surface. The spindle is advanced or retracted by turning a thimble
connected to a spindle. The spindle is a slide fit over the barrel and barrel is the fixed part attached with the
frame. The barrel & thimble are graduated. The pitch of the screw threads is 0.5 mm.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count:
Least Count (LC) = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale
= 0.5 / 50 = 0.01 mm
Parts:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Frame
2. Anvil
3. Spindle
4. Spindle lock
5. Barrel or outside sleeve

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions
7. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.
The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.
14 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement:
It can be used for any external measurement.
Types of micrometer:
1. Outside micrometer, 2. Inside micrometer, 3.Depth micrometer, 4. Stick micrometer, 5. Screw thread
micrometer, 6. V ? anvil micrometer, 7. Blade type micrometer, 8. Dial micrometer, 9. Bench micrometer, 10.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tape screw operated internal micrometer, 11. Groove micrometer, 12. Digital micrometer, 13.Differential screw
micrometer, 14.Adjustable range outside micrometer.
Ratchet stop mechanism:
The object of the ratchet stop is to ensure that same level of torque is applied on the spindle while
measuring and the sense of the feel of operator is eliminated and consistent readings are obtained. By

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

providing this arrangement, the ratchet stop is made slip off when the torque applied to rotate the spindle
exceeds the set torque. Thus this provision ensures the application of same amount of torque during the
measurement.
Tabulation:
Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) (mm)
Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)
Head scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(HSR x LC) (mm)
Total Reading (PSR
+ HSR) (mm)
1.
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Depth micrometer:
Depth micrometer is a sort of micrometer which is mainly used for measuring depth of holes, so it is
named as depth micrometer.
Parts:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Shoulder
2. Spindle
3. Spindle lock
4. Barrel or outside sleeve ? It has pitch scale.
5. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.
The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.
15 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count:
Least Count = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale = 0.50/50
= 0.01 mm
Measurements:
It can be used for measuring the depth of holes, slots and recessed areas. The pitch of the screw thread

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

is 0.5 mm. The least count is 0.01 mm. Shoulder acts as a reference surface and is held firmly and
perpendicular to the centre line of the hole. For large range of measurement extension rods are used. In the
barrel the scale is calibrated. The accuracy again depends upon the sense of touch.
Procedure:
First, calculate the least count of the instrument. Check the zero error. Measure the specimen note

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

down the main scale reading or the head scale reading. Note down the vernier or head scale coincidence with
main or pitch scale divisions.
Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Pitch Scale Reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(PSR) (mm)
Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)
Head scale reading
(HSR x LC) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total Reading (PSR
+ HSR) (mm)

1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.


16 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Universal bevel protractor:

Description:
Bevel protractor is an instrument for measuring the angle between the two faces of a specimen. It

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

consists of a base plate on which a circular scale is engraved. It is graduated in degrees. An adjustment plate
is attached to a circular plate containing the vernier scale. The adjustable blade can be locked in any position.
The circular plate has 360 division divided into four parts of 90 degrees each. The adjustable parts have 24
divisions of to the right and left sides of zero reading. These scales are used according to the position of the
specimen with respect to movable scale.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. Place the specimen whose taper is to be measured between the adjustable plate and movable
blade with one of its face parallel to the base.
2. Lock the adjustable plate in position and note down the main scale reading depending upon the
direction of rotation of adjustable plate in clockwise or anticlockwise.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Note the VSC to the right of zero.
4. Multiply the VSC with the least count and add to MSR to obtain the actual reading.
Least count:
Least Count = 2 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
24 VSD = 46
o
=> 1 VSD = 23/12
LC = 2 ? 23/12 = 1/12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
= 5? (five minutes)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Main scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(MSR) (deg)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale reading
(VSR) (deg)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total reading (MSR +
VSR)
(deg)
1.
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The angle of scriber of the vernier height gauge =
Result:
Thus the various precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab are studied and the specimen
dimensions are recorded.
Outcome:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for linear, angular,
roundness and roughness measurements they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring
instrument according to a specific requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).
Application:
1. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Metrology
2. Define ? Inspection
3. What are the needs of inspection in industries?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. What are the various methods involving the measurement?
5. Define ? Precision
6. Define ? Accuracy
7. Define ? Calibration
8. Define ? Repeatability

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. Define ? Magnification
10. Define ? Error
11. Define ? Systematic Error
12. Define ? Random Error
13. Define ? Parallax Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. Define ? Environmental Error
15. Define ? Cosine Error
Viva-voce

18 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.02 BUILD UP THE SLIP GAUGE FOR GIVEN DIMENSION
? A STUDY
Aim:
To build up the slip gauge for given dimension

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Apparatus required:
1. Slip gauges set
2. Surface plate
3. Soft cloth
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
Slip gauge are universally accepted standard of length in industry. They are the working standard for
linear dimension. These were invented by a Swedish Engineer, C.E. Johansson. They are used
1. For direct precise measurement where the accuracy of the workpiece demand it.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. For use with high- magnification comparators to establish the size of the gauge blocks in general
use.
3. Gauge blocks are also used for many other purposes such as checking the accuracy of measuring
instrument or setting up a comparator to a specific dimension, enabling a batch of component to be
quickly and accurately checked or indeed in any situation where there is need to refer to standard of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

known length these blocks are rectangular.
19 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Most gauge blocks are produced from high grade steel, hardened and established by a heat treatment
process to give a high degree of dimensional stability. Gauge blocks are also manufactured from tungsten

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

carbide which is an extremely hard and wear resistant material. The measuring faces have a lapped finish.
The faces are perfectly flat and parallel to one another with a high degree of accuracy. Each block has an
extremely high dimensional accuracy at 20
o
C.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

These slip gauge are available in variety of selected sets both in inch units and metric units. Letter ?E? is
used for inch units and ?M? is used for metric standard number of pieces in a set following the letter E or M. For
example EBI refers to a set whose blocks are in metric units and are 83 in number. Each block dimensions is
printed on anyone of its face itself the size of any required standard being made up by combining the
appropriate number of these different size blocks.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

If two gauges are slid and twisted together under pressure they will firmly join together. This process,
known as wringing, is very useful because it enables several gauge blocks to be assembled together to
produce a required size. In fact the success of precision measurement by slip gauges depends on the
phenomenon of wringing.
First the gauge is oscillated slightly with very light pressure over other gauge so as to detect pressure at

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

any foreign particles between the surfaces. One gauge is placed perpendicular to other using standard
gauging pressure and rotary motion is applied until the blocks are lined up.
Procedure:
1. Build the given dimension by wringing minimum number of slip gauges.
2. Note the given dimension and choose the minimum possible slip gauge available in the set so as to

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

accommodate the last decimal value. The minimum slip gauge value dimension available i.e., 1.12
mm must be chosen followed by 1.5 mm thick gauge block.
3. Follow the above steps to build up the slip gauge of any dimension.
Precautions:
1. Slip gauges should be handled very carefully placed gently and should never be dropped.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Whenever a slip gauge is being removed from the set, its dimensions are noted and must be
replaced into the set at its appropriate place only.
3. Correct procedure must be followed in wringing and also in removing the gauge blocks.
4. They should be cleaned well before use and petroleum jelly is applied after use.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice
1 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING


ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

V SEMESTER - R 2013

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No. : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LABORATORY MANUAL
2 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


3 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DHANALAKSHMI


College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.


1. To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
2. To contribute to the promotion of Academic Excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

levels
3. To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

DEPARTMENT OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rendering the services to the global needs of engineering industries by educating students to become
professionally sound mechanical engineers of excellent caliber

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To produce mechanical engineering technocrats with a perfect knowledge intellectual and hands on
experience and to inculcate the spirit of moral values and ethics to serve the society

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MISSION
MISSION
VISION

VISION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To impart students with fundamental knowledge in mathematics and basic sciences that will mould
them to be successful professionals
2. Core competence
To provide students with sound knowledge in engineering and experimental skills to identify
complex software problems in industry and to develop a practical solution for them

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theory and practice which
enable them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and organization and to design
products requiring interdisciplinary skills
4. Professional skills

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To bestow students with adequate training and provide opportunities to work as team that will build
up their communication skills, individual, leadership and supportive qualities and to enable them to
adapt and to work in ever changing technologies
5. Life-long learning
To develop the ability of students to establish themselves as professionals in mechanical

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

engineering and to create awareness about the need for lifelong learning and pursuing advanced
degrees

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)
On completion of the B.E. (Mechanical) degree, the graduate will be able
a) To apply the basic knowledge of mathematics, science and engineering
b) To design and conduct experiments as well as to analyze and interpret data and apply the same in
the career or entrepreneurship

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

c) To design and develop innovative and creative software applications
d) To understand a complex real world problem and develop an efficient practical solution
e) To create, select and apply appropriate techniques, resources, modern engineering and IT tools
f) To understand the role as a professional and give the best to the society
g) To develop a system that will meet expected needs within realistic constraints such as economical

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

environmental, social, political, ethical, safety and sustainability
h) To communicate effectively and make others understand exactly what they are trying to tell in both
verbal and written forms
i) To work in a team as a team member or a leader and make unique contributions and work with
coordination

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

j) To engage in lifelong learning and exhibit their technical skills
k) To develop and manage projects in multidisciplinary environments

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To familiar with different measurement equipment?s and use of this industry for quality inspection
List of Experiments
1. Tool Maker?s Microscope

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Comparator
3. Sine Bar
4. Gear Tooth Vernier Caliper
5. Floating gauge Micrometer
6. Coordinate Measuring Machine

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Surface Finish Measuring Equipment
8. Vernier Height Gauge
9. Bore diameter measurement using telescope gauge
10. Bore diameter measurement using micrometer
11. Force Measurement

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. Torque Measurement
13. Temperature measurement
14. Autocollimator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Ability to handle different measurement tools and perform measurements in quality impulsion
2. Learnt the usage of precision measuring instruments and practiced to take measurements
3. Learnt and practiced to build the required dimensions using slip gauge
4. Able to measure the various dimensions of the given specimen using the tool maker?s microscope
5. Able to find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Able to measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare
7. Learnt to determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen using Gear tooth vernier
8. Able to measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two
wire method
9. Learnt to study the construction and operation of coordinate measuring machine

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. Learnt to determine the diameter of bore by using telescopic gauge and dial bore indicator
11. Able to measure the surface roughness using Talysurf instrument
12. Studied the characteristic between applied load and the output volt
13. Learnt the characteristics of developing torque and respective sensor output voltage
14. Studied the characteristics of thermocouple without compensation

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15. Able to check the straightness & flatness of the given component by using Autocollimator
16. Learnt to measure the displacement using LVDT and to calibrate it with the millimeter scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OBJECTIVES

COURSE OUTCOMES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

CONTENTS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl. No. Name of the Experiments Page No.
CYCLE ? 1 EXPERIMENTS
1
Precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab ? A Study
7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
To build up the slip gauge for given dimension ? A Study
16
3
Thread parameters measurement using Tool Makers Microscope

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

20
4
Calibration of dial gauge
23
5

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of taper angle by sine bar method
26
6
Determination of gear tooth thickness using gear tooth vernier
29

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7
Measurement of thread parameters using floating carriage micrometer
32
CYCLE ? 2 EXPERIMENTS
8

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement of various dimensions using Coordinate Measuring Machine
35
9
Measurement of surface roughness
39

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
Measurement of bores using dial bore indicator and telescopic gauge
42
11
Force measurement using load cell

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

46
12
Torque measurement using strain gauge
49
13

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Temperature measurement using thermocouple
53
14
Measurement of alignment using autocollimator
56

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ADDITIONAL EXPERIMENT BEYOND THE SYLLABUS
15
Thread parameters measurement using profile projector
60
16

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Displacement measurement ? linear variable differential transducer (LVDT)
62
PROJECT WORK
65

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.01 PRECISION MEASURING INSTRUMENT YSED IN
METROLOGY LAB ? A STUDY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Aim:
To study the following instruments and their usage for measuring dimensions of given specimen
1. Vernier caliper
2. Micrometer
3. Vernier height gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Depth micrometer
5. Universal bevel protractor
Apparatus required:
Surface plate, specimen and above instruments
Vernier caliper:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The principle of vernier caliper is to use the minor difference between the sizes two scales or divisions
for measurement. The difference between them can be utilized to enhance the accuracy of measurement. The
vernier caliper essentially consists of two steel rules, sliding along each other.
Parts:
Different parts of the vernier caliper are

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Beam ? It has main scale.
2. Fixed jaw
3. Sliding or Moving jaw ? It has vernier scale and sliding jaw locking screw.
4. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw knife
edges for internal measurement.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Stem or depth bar for depth measurement
Least count:
Least count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 VSD = 0.98 mm
Least count = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm

10 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ID

DEPTH

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OD
Measurement:
Given Vernier caliper can be used for external, internal depth, slot and step measurement.
Measurement principle:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

When both jaws contact each other scale shows the zero reading. The finer adjustment of movable jaw
can be done by the fine adjustment screw. First the whole movable jaw assembly is adjusted so that the two
measuring tips just touch the part to be measured. Then the fine adjustment clamp locking screw is tightened.
Final adjustment depending upon the sense of correct feel is made by the adjusting screw. After final
adjustment has been made sliding jaw locking screw is also tightened and the reading is noted.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

All the parts of the Vernier caliper are made of good quality steel and measuring faces are hardened.
Types of vernier:
Vernier caliper, electronic vernier caliper, vernier depth caliper

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:

Main scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

reading (MSR)
(mm)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

reading (VSR) (mm)
Total reading (MSR
+ VSR)
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OD


ID

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Depth


Vernier height gauge:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier height gauge is a sort of vernier caliper equipped with a special instrument suitable for height
measurement. It is always kept on the surface plate and the use of the surfaces plates as datum surfaces is
very essential.
Least count:
Least Count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm
1 VSD = 0.98 mm
Least Count (LC) = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm
Parts:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Base
2. Beam ? It has main scale.
3. Slider ? It has a vernier scale and slider locking screw.
4. Scriber
5. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Material:
All the parts of vernier are made of good quality steel and the measuring faces hardened.
Types of vernier gauge:
1. Analog vernier height gauge
2. Digital vernier height gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Electronic vernier height gauge
Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Main scale reading
(MSR)(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale reading
(VSR)(mm)
Total reading (MSR +

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSR)(mm)
1.
2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Outside micrometer:
The micrometer essentially consists of an accurate screw having about 10 or 20 threads per cm. The
end of the screw forms one measuring tip and other measuring tip is constituted by a stationary anvil in the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

base of the frame. The screw is threaded for certain length and is plain afterwards. The plain portion is called
spindle and its end is the measuring surface. The spindle is advanced or retracted by turning a thimble
connected to a spindle. The spindle is a slide fit over the barrel and barrel is the fixed part attached with the
frame. The barrel & thimble are graduated. The pitch of the screw threads is 0.5 mm.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count:
Least Count (LC) = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale
= 0.5 / 50 = 0.01 mm
Parts:
1. Frame

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Anvil
3. Spindle
4. Spindle lock
5. Barrel or outside sleeve
6. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.
The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.
14 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Measurement:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

It can be used for any external measurement.
Types of micrometer:
1. Outside micrometer, 2. Inside micrometer, 3.Depth micrometer, 4. Stick micrometer, 5. Screw thread
micrometer, 6. V ? anvil micrometer, 7. Blade type micrometer, 8. Dial micrometer, 9. Bench micrometer, 10.
Tape screw operated internal micrometer, 11. Groove micrometer, 12. Digital micrometer, 13.Differential screw

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

micrometer, 14.Adjustable range outside micrometer.
Ratchet stop mechanism:
The object of the ratchet stop is to ensure that same level of torque is applied on the spindle while
measuring and the sense of the feel of operator is eliminated and consistent readings are obtained. By
providing this arrangement, the ratchet stop is made slip off when the torque applied to rotate the spindle

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

exceeds the set torque. Thus this provision ensures the application of same amount of torque during the
measurement.
Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Pitch Scale Reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(PSR) (mm)
Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)
Head scale reading
(HSR x LC) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total Reading (PSR
+ HSR) (mm)
1.
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Depth micrometer:
Depth micrometer is a sort of micrometer which is mainly used for measuring depth of holes, so it is
named as depth micrometer.
Parts:
1. Shoulder

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Spindle
3. Spindle lock
4. Barrel or outside sleeve ? It has pitch scale.
5. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions.
6. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.
15 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


Least count:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least Count = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale = 0.50/50
= 0.01 mm
Measurements:
It can be used for measuring the depth of holes, slots and recessed areas. The pitch of the screw thread
is 0.5 mm. The least count is 0.01 mm. Shoulder acts as a reference surface and is held firmly and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

perpendicular to the centre line of the hole. For large range of measurement extension rods are used. In the
barrel the scale is calibrated. The accuracy again depends upon the sense of touch.
Procedure:
First, calculate the least count of the instrument. Check the zero error. Measure the specimen note
down the main scale reading or the head scale reading. Note down the vernier or head scale coincidence with

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

main or pitch scale divisions.
Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)
Head scale reading
(HSR x LC) (mm)
Total Reading (PSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

+ HSR) (mm)

1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.


16 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Universal bevel protractor:

Description:
Bevel protractor is an instrument for measuring the angle between the two faces of a specimen. It
consists of a base plate on which a circular scale is engraved. It is graduated in degrees. An adjustment plate

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

is attached to a circular plate containing the vernier scale. The adjustable blade can be locked in any position.
The circular plate has 360 division divided into four parts of 90 degrees each. The adjustable parts have 24
divisions of to the right and left sides of zero reading. These scales are used according to the position of the
specimen with respect to movable scale.
Procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Place the specimen whose taper is to be measured between the adjustable plate and movable
blade with one of its face parallel to the base.
2. Lock the adjustable plate in position and note down the main scale reading depending upon the
direction of rotation of adjustable plate in clockwise or anticlockwise.
3. Note the VSC to the right of zero.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Multiply the VSC with the least count and add to MSR to obtain the actual reading.
Least count:
Least Count = 2 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

24 VSD = 46
o
=> 1 VSD = 23/12
LC = 2 ? 23/12 = 1/12
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= 5? (five minutes)



17 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Main scale reading
(MSR) (deg)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale reading
(VSR) (deg)
Total reading (MSR +

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSR)
(deg)
1.
2.
The angle of scriber of the vernier height gauge =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Thus the various precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab are studied and the specimen
dimensions are recorded.
Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for linear, angular,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

roundness and roughness measurements they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring
instrument according to a specific requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).
Application:
1. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Metrology
2. Define ? Inspection
3. What are the needs of inspection in industries?
4. What are the various methods involving the measurement?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Define ? Precision
6. Define ? Accuracy
7. Define ? Calibration
8. Define ? Repeatability
9. Define ? Magnification

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. Define ? Error
11. Define ? Systematic Error
12. Define ? Random Error
13. Define ? Parallax Error
14. Define ? Environmental Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15. Define ? Cosine Error
Viva-voce

18 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.02 BUILD UP THE SLIP GAUGE FOR GIVEN DIMENSION
? A STUDY
Aim:
To build up the slip gauge for given dimension
Apparatus required:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Slip gauges set
2. Surface plate
3. Soft cloth
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
Slip gauge are universally accepted standard of length in industry. They are the working standard for
linear dimension. These were invented by a Swedish Engineer, C.E. Johansson. They are used
1. For direct precise measurement where the accuracy of the workpiece demand it.
2. For use with high- magnification comparators to establish the size of the gauge blocks in general

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

use.
3. Gauge blocks are also used for many other purposes such as checking the accuracy of measuring
instrument or setting up a comparator to a specific dimension, enabling a batch of component to be
quickly and accurately checked or indeed in any situation where there is need to refer to standard of
known length these blocks are rectangular.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

19 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Most gauge blocks are produced from high grade steel, hardened and established by a heat treatment
process to give a high degree of dimensional stability. Gauge blocks are also manufactured from tungsten
carbide which is an extremely hard and wear resistant material. The measuring faces have a lapped finish.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The faces are perfectly flat and parallel to one another with a high degree of accuracy. Each block has an
extremely high dimensional accuracy at 20
o
C.
These slip gauge are available in variety of selected sets both in inch units and metric units. Letter ?E? is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

used for inch units and ?M? is used for metric standard number of pieces in a set following the letter E or M. For
example EBI refers to a set whose blocks are in metric units and are 83 in number. Each block dimensions is
printed on anyone of its face itself the size of any required standard being made up by combining the
appropriate number of these different size blocks.
If two gauges are slid and twisted together under pressure they will firmly join together. This process,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

known as wringing, is very useful because it enables several gauge blocks to be assembled together to
produce a required size. In fact the success of precision measurement by slip gauges depends on the
phenomenon of wringing.
First the gauge is oscillated slightly with very light pressure over other gauge so as to detect pressure at
any foreign particles between the surfaces. One gauge is placed perpendicular to other using standard

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

gauging pressure and rotary motion is applied until the blocks are lined up.
Procedure:
1. Build the given dimension by wringing minimum number of slip gauges.
2. Note the given dimension and choose the minimum possible slip gauge available in the set so as to
accommodate the last decimal value. The minimum slip gauge value dimension available i.e., 1.12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

mm must be chosen followed by 1.5 mm thick gauge block.
3. Follow the above steps to build up the slip gauge of any dimension.
Precautions:
1. Slip gauges should be handled very carefully placed gently and should never be dropped.
2. Whenever a slip gauge is being removed from the set, its dimensions are noted and must be

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

replaced into the set at its appropriate place only.
3. Correct procedure must be followed in wringing and also in removing the gauge blocks.
4. They should be cleaned well before use and petroleum jelly is applied after use.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

20 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:
Range (mm) Increment (mm) No. of pieces

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total = ____________ Pieces

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total length of slip gauge = ________ mm
Given diameter Slip gauges used Obtained dimensions

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Slip gauge set is studied and the given dimensions are building up by wringing minimum number of slip
gauges.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Students will be able to select proper measuring instrument and know requirement of calibration, errors
in measurement etc. They can perform accurate measurements.
Application:
1. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice
1 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?



DEPARTMENT OF

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MECHANICAL ENGINEERING


ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

V SEMESTER - R 2013

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Register No. : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________


LABORATORY MANUAL

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


3 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DHANALAKSHMI


College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
2. To contribute to the promotion of Academic Excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

DEPARTMENT OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rendering the services to the global needs of engineering industries by educating students to become
professionally sound mechanical engineers of excellent caliber

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To produce mechanical engineering technocrats with a perfect knowledge intellectual and hands on
experience and to inculcate the spirit of moral values and ethics to serve the society

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MISSION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MISSION
VISION

VISION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals
To impart students with fundamental knowledge in mathematics and basic sciences that will mould

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

them to be successful professionals
2. Core competence
To provide students with sound knowledge in engineering and experimental skills to identify
complex software problems in industry and to develop a practical solution for them
3. Breadth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theory and practice which
enable them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and organization and to design
products requiring interdisciplinary skills
4. Professional skills
To bestow students with adequate training and provide opportunities to work as team that will build

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

up their communication skills, individual, leadership and supportive qualities and to enable them to
adapt and to work in ever changing technologies
5. Life-long learning
To develop the ability of students to establish themselves as professionals in mechanical
engineering and to create awareness about the need for lifelong learning and pursuing advanced

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

degrees

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

On completion of the B.E. (Mechanical) degree, the graduate will be able
a) To apply the basic knowledge of mathematics, science and engineering
b) To design and conduct experiments as well as to analyze and interpret data and apply the same in
the career or entrepreneurship
c) To design and develop innovative and creative software applications

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d) To understand a complex real world problem and develop an efficient practical solution
e) To create, select and apply appropriate techniques, resources, modern engineering and IT tools
f) To understand the role as a professional and give the best to the society
g) To develop a system that will meet expected needs within realistic constraints such as economical
environmental, social, political, ethical, safety and sustainability

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

h) To communicate effectively and make others understand exactly what they are trying to tell in both
verbal and written forms
i) To work in a team as a team member or a leader and make unique contributions and work with
coordination
j) To engage in lifelong learning and exhibit their technical skills

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

k) To develop and manage projects in multidisciplinary environments

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To familiar with different measurement equipment?s and use of this industry for quality inspection
List of Experiments
1. Tool Maker?s Microscope
2. Comparator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Sine Bar
4. Gear Tooth Vernier Caliper
5. Floating gauge Micrometer
6. Coordinate Measuring Machine
7. Surface Finish Measuring Equipment

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Vernier Height Gauge
9. Bore diameter measurement using telescope gauge
10. Bore diameter measurement using micrometer
11. Force Measurement
12. Torque Measurement

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. Temperature measurement
14. Autocollimator


1. Ability to handle different measurement tools and perform measurements in quality impulsion

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Learnt the usage of precision measuring instruments and practiced to take measurements
3. Learnt and practiced to build the required dimensions using slip gauge
4. Able to measure the various dimensions of the given specimen using the tool maker?s microscope
5. Able to find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge
6. Able to measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Learnt to determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen using Gear tooth vernier
8. Able to measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two
wire method
9. Learnt to study the construction and operation of coordinate measuring machine
10. Learnt to determine the diameter of bore by using telescopic gauge and dial bore indicator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. Able to measure the surface roughness using Talysurf instrument
12. Studied the characteristic between applied load and the output volt
13. Learnt the characteristics of developing torque and respective sensor output voltage
14. Studied the characteristics of thermocouple without compensation
15. Able to check the straightness & flatness of the given component by using Autocollimator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16. Learnt to measure the displacement using LVDT and to calibrate it with the millimeter scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OBJECTIVES

COURSE OUTCOMES

7 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

CONTENTS
Sl. No. Name of the Experiments Page No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CYCLE ? 1 EXPERIMENTS
1
Precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab ? A Study
7
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To build up the slip gauge for given dimension ? A Study
16
3
Thread parameters measurement using Tool Makers Microscope
20

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4
Calibration of dial gauge
23
5
Determination of taper angle by sine bar method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

26
6
Determination of gear tooth thickness using gear tooth vernier
29
7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement of thread parameters using floating carriage micrometer
32
CYCLE ? 2 EXPERIMENTS
8
Measurement of various dimensions using Coordinate Measuring Machine

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

35
9
Measurement of surface roughness
39
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement of bores using dial bore indicator and telescopic gauge
42
11
Force measurement using load cell
46

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12
Torque measurement using strain gauge
49
13
Temperature measurement using thermocouple

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

53
14
Measurement of alignment using autocollimator
56
ADDITIONAL EXPERIMENT BEYOND THE SYLLABUS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15
Thread parameters measurement using profile projector
60
16
Displacement measurement ? linear variable differential transducer (LVDT)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

62
PROJECT WORK
65

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.01 PRECISION MEASURING INSTRUMENT YSED IN
METROLOGY LAB ? A STUDY
Aim:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To study the following instruments and their usage for measuring dimensions of given specimen
1. Vernier caliper
2. Micrometer
3. Vernier height gauge
4. Depth micrometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Universal bevel protractor
Apparatus required:
Surface plate, specimen and above instruments
Vernier caliper:
The principle of vernier caliper is to use the minor difference between the sizes two scales or divisions

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

for measurement. The difference between them can be utilized to enhance the accuracy of measurement. The
vernier caliper essentially consists of two steel rules, sliding along each other.
Parts:
Different parts of the vernier caliper are
1. Beam ? It has main scale.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Fixed jaw
3. Sliding or Moving jaw ? It has vernier scale and sliding jaw locking screw.
4. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw knife
edges for internal measurement.
5. Stem or depth bar for depth measurement

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count:
Least count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm
1 VSD = 0.98 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm

10 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ID

DEPTH

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OD
Measurement:
Given Vernier caliper can be used for external, internal depth, slot and step measurement.
Measurement principle:
When both jaws contact each other scale shows the zero reading. The finer adjustment of movable jaw

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

can be done by the fine adjustment screw. First the whole movable jaw assembly is adjusted so that the two
measuring tips just touch the part to be measured. Then the fine adjustment clamp locking screw is tightened.
Final adjustment depending upon the sense of correct feel is made by the adjusting screw. After final
adjustment has been made sliding jaw locking screw is also tightened and the reading is noted.
All the parts of the Vernier caliper are made of good quality steel and measuring faces are hardened.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Types of vernier:
Vernier caliper, electronic vernier caliper, vernier depth caliper


11 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:

Main scale
reading (MSR)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale
reading (VSR) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total reading (MSR
+ VSR)
(mm)

OD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ID

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Depth


Vernier height gauge:
Vernier height gauge is a sort of vernier caliper equipped with a special instrument suitable for height

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measurement. It is always kept on the surface plate and the use of the surfaces plates as datum surfaces is
very essential.
Least count:
Least Count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

50 VSD = 49 mm
1 VSD = 0.98 mm
Least Count (LC) = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm
Parts:
1. Base

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Beam ? It has main scale.
3. Slider ? It has a vernier scale and slider locking screw.
4. Scriber
5. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


Material:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

All the parts of vernier are made of good quality steel and the measuring faces hardened.
Types of vernier gauge:
1. Analog vernier height gauge
2. Digital vernier height gauge
3. Electronic vernier height gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Main scale reading
(MSR)(mm)
Vernier scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale reading
(VSR)(mm)
Total reading (MSR +
VSR)(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
2.
3.

13 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outside micrometer:
The micrometer essentially consists of an accurate screw having about 10 or 20 threads per cm. The
end of the screw forms one measuring tip and other measuring tip is constituted by a stationary anvil in the
base of the frame. The screw is threaded for certain length and is plain afterwards. The plain portion is called

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

spindle and its end is the measuring surface. The spindle is advanced or retracted by turning a thimble
connected to a spindle. The spindle is a slide fit over the barrel and barrel is the fixed part attached with the
frame. The barrel & thimble are graduated. The pitch of the screw threads is 0.5 mm.

Least count:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least Count (LC) = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale
= 0.5 / 50 = 0.01 mm
Parts:
1. Frame
2. Anvil

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Spindle
4. Spindle lock
5. Barrel or outside sleeve
6. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions
7. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.
14 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Measurement:
It can be used for any external measurement.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Types of micrometer:
1. Outside micrometer, 2. Inside micrometer, 3.Depth micrometer, 4. Stick micrometer, 5. Screw thread
micrometer, 6. V ? anvil micrometer, 7. Blade type micrometer, 8. Dial micrometer, 9. Bench micrometer, 10.
Tape screw operated internal micrometer, 11. Groove micrometer, 12. Digital micrometer, 13.Differential screw
micrometer, 14.Adjustable range outside micrometer.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Ratchet stop mechanism:
The object of the ratchet stop is to ensure that same level of torque is applied on the spindle while
measuring and the sense of the feel of operator is eliminated and consistent readings are obtained. By
providing this arrangement, the ratchet stop is made slip off when the torque applied to rotate the spindle
exceeds the set torque. Thus this provision ensures the application of same amount of torque during the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measurement.
Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)
Head scale reading
(HSR x LC) (mm)
Total Reading (PSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

+ HSR) (mm)
1.
2.

Depth micrometer:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Depth micrometer is a sort of micrometer which is mainly used for measuring depth of holes, so it is
named as depth micrometer.
Parts:
1. Shoulder
2. Spindle

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Spindle lock
4. Barrel or outside sleeve ? It has pitch scale.
5. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions.
6. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.
The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


Least count:
Least Count = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale = 0.50/50

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= 0.01 mm
Measurements:
It can be used for measuring the depth of holes, slots and recessed areas. The pitch of the screw thread
is 0.5 mm. The least count is 0.01 mm. Shoulder acts as a reference surface and is held firmly and
perpendicular to the centre line of the hole. For large range of measurement extension rods are used. In the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

barrel the scale is calibrated. The accuracy again depends upon the sense of touch.
Procedure:
First, calculate the least count of the instrument. Check the zero error. Measure the specimen note
down the main scale reading or the head scale reading. Note down the vernier or head scale coincidence with
main or pitch scale divisions.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) (mm)
Head Scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Coincidence (HSC)
Head scale reading
(HSR x LC) (mm)
Total Reading (PSR
+ HSR) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.


2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Universal bevel protractor:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
Bevel protractor is an instrument for measuring the angle between the two faces of a specimen. It
consists of a base plate on which a circular scale is engraved. It is graduated in degrees. An adjustment plate
is attached to a circular plate containing the vernier scale. The adjustable blade can be locked in any position.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The circular plate has 360 division divided into four parts of 90 degrees each. The adjustable parts have 24
divisions of to the right and left sides of zero reading. These scales are used according to the position of the
specimen with respect to movable scale.
Procedure:
1. Place the specimen whose taper is to be measured between the adjustable plate and movable

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

blade with one of its face parallel to the base.
2. Lock the adjustable plate in position and note down the main scale reading depending upon the
direction of rotation of adjustable plate in clockwise or anticlockwise.
3. Note the VSC to the right of zero.
4. Multiply the VSC with the least count and add to MSR to obtain the actual reading.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count:
Least Count = 2 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1
o
24 VSD = 46

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
=> 1 VSD = 23/12
LC = 2 ? 23/12 = 1/12
o
= 5? (five minutes)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Main scale reading
(MSR) (deg)
Vernier scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale reading
(VSR) (deg)
Total reading (MSR +
VSR)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(deg)
1.
2.
The angle of scriber of the vernier height gauge =
Result:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thus the various precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab are studied and the specimen
dimensions are recorded.
Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for linear, angular,
roundness and roughness measurements they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

instrument according to a specific requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).
Application:
1. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Metrology
2. Define ? Inspection
3. What are the needs of inspection in industries?
4. What are the various methods involving the measurement?
5. Define ? Precision

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Define ? Accuracy
7. Define ? Calibration
8. Define ? Repeatability
9. Define ? Magnification
10. Define ? Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. Define ? Systematic Error
12. Define ? Random Error
13. Define ? Parallax Error
14. Define ? Environmental Error
15. Define ? Cosine Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

18 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.02 BUILD UP THE SLIP GAUGE FOR GIVEN DIMENSION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? A STUDY
Aim:
To build up the slip gauge for given dimension
Apparatus required:
1. Slip gauges set

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Surface plate
3. Soft cloth
Diagram:

Description:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Slip gauge are universally accepted standard of length in industry. They are the working standard for
linear dimension. These were invented by a Swedish Engineer, C.E. Johansson. They are used
1. For direct precise measurement where the accuracy of the workpiece demand it.
2. For use with high- magnification comparators to establish the size of the gauge blocks in general
use.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Gauge blocks are also used for many other purposes such as checking the accuracy of measuring
instrument or setting up a comparator to a specific dimension, enabling a batch of component to be
quickly and accurately checked or indeed in any situation where there is need to refer to standard of
known length these blocks are rectangular.
19 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Most gauge blocks are produced from high grade steel, hardened and established by a heat treatment
process to give a high degree of dimensional stability. Gauge blocks are also manufactured from tungsten
carbide which is an extremely hard and wear resistant material. The measuring faces have a lapped finish.
The faces are perfectly flat and parallel to one another with a high degree of accuracy. Each block has an

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

extremely high dimensional accuracy at 20
o
C.
These slip gauge are available in variety of selected sets both in inch units and metric units. Letter ?E? is
used for inch units and ?M? is used for metric standard number of pieces in a set following the letter E or M. For

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

example EBI refers to a set whose blocks are in metric units and are 83 in number. Each block dimensions is
printed on anyone of its face itself the size of any required standard being made up by combining the
appropriate number of these different size blocks.
If two gauges are slid and twisted together under pressure they will firmly join together. This process,
known as wringing, is very useful because it enables several gauge blocks to be assembled together to

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

produce a required size. In fact the success of precision measurement by slip gauges depends on the
phenomenon of wringing.
First the gauge is oscillated slightly with very light pressure over other gauge so as to detect pressure at
any foreign particles between the surfaces. One gauge is placed perpendicular to other using standard
gauging pressure and rotary motion is applied until the blocks are lined up.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. Build the given dimension by wringing minimum number of slip gauges.
2. Note the given dimension and choose the minimum possible slip gauge available in the set so as to
accommodate the last decimal value. The minimum slip gauge value dimension available i.e., 1.12
mm must be chosen followed by 1.5 mm thick gauge block.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Follow the above steps to build up the slip gauge of any dimension.
Precautions:
1. Slip gauges should be handled very carefully placed gently and should never be dropped.
2. Whenever a slip gauge is being removed from the set, its dimensions are noted and must be
replaced into the set at its appropriate place only.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Correct procedure must be followed in wringing and also in removing the gauge blocks.
4. They should be cleaned well before use and petroleum jelly is applied after use.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

20 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:
Range (mm) Increment (mm) No. of pieces

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total = ____________ Pieces
Total length of slip gauge = ________ mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Given diameter Slip gauges used Obtained dimensions

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Slip gauge set is studied and the given dimensions are building up by wringing minimum number of slip
gauges.
Outcome:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Students will be able to select proper measuring instrument and know requirement of calibration, errors
in measurement etc. They can perform accurate measurements.
Application:
1. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Why C.I. is preferred material for surface plates and tables?
2. Why V ? blocks are generally manufactured in pairs?
3. Why micrometer is required to be tested for accuracy?
4. Define ? Linear Measurement
5. List the linear measuring instrument according to their accuracy.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Define ? Least Count
7. What are the uses of vernier depth gauge?
8. What are the uses of feeler gauges?
9. What are the uses of straight edge?
10. What are the uses of angle plate?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. What are the uses of V ? block?
12. What are the uses of combination square?
13. What precautions should be taken while using slip gauges?
14. What is wringing?
15. Why the slip gauges are termed as ?End standard?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

V SEMESTER - R 2013

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No. : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LABORATORY MANUAL
2 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

DHANALAKSHMI

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
2. To contribute to the promotion of Academic Excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels
3. To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING


Rendering the services to the global needs of engineering industries by educating students to become

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

professionally sound mechanical engineers of excellent caliber


To produce mechanical engineering technocrats with a perfect knowledge intellectual and hands on
experience and to inculcate the spirit of moral values and ethics to serve the society

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MISSION
MISSION
VISION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION

4 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals
To impart students with fundamental knowledge in mathematics and basic sciences that will mould
them to be successful professionals
2. Core competence

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To provide students with sound knowledge in engineering and experimental skills to identify
complex software problems in industry and to develop a practical solution for them
3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theory and practice which
enable them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and organization and to design

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

products requiring interdisciplinary skills
4. Professional skills
To bestow students with adequate training and provide opportunities to work as team that will build
up their communication skills, individual, leadership and supportive qualities and to enable them to
adapt and to work in ever changing technologies

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Life-long learning
To develop the ability of students to establish themselves as professionals in mechanical
engineering and to create awareness about the need for lifelong learning and pursuing advanced
degrees

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)
On completion of the B.E. (Mechanical) degree, the graduate will be able
a) To apply the basic knowledge of mathematics, science and engineering

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

b) To design and conduct experiments as well as to analyze and interpret data and apply the same in
the career or entrepreneurship
c) To design and develop innovative and creative software applications
d) To understand a complex real world problem and develop an efficient practical solution
e) To create, select and apply appropriate techniques, resources, modern engineering and IT tools

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

f) To understand the role as a professional and give the best to the society
g) To develop a system that will meet expected needs within realistic constraints such as economical
environmental, social, political, ethical, safety and sustainability
h) To communicate effectively and make others understand exactly what they are trying to tell in both
verbal and written forms

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

i) To work in a team as a team member or a leader and make unique contributions and work with
coordination
j) To engage in lifelong learning and exhibit their technical skills
k) To develop and manage projects in multidisciplinary environments

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY



To familiar with different measurement equipment?s and use of this industry for quality inspection

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

List of Experiments
1. Tool Maker?s Microscope
2. Comparator
3. Sine Bar
4. Gear Tooth Vernier Caliper

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Floating gauge Micrometer
6. Coordinate Measuring Machine
7. Surface Finish Measuring Equipment
8. Vernier Height Gauge
9. Bore diameter measurement using telescope gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. Bore diameter measurement using micrometer
11. Force Measurement
12. Torque Measurement
13. Temperature measurement
14. Autocollimator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Ability to handle different measurement tools and perform measurements in quality impulsion
2. Learnt the usage of precision measuring instruments and practiced to take measurements
3. Learnt and practiced to build the required dimensions using slip gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Able to measure the various dimensions of the given specimen using the tool maker?s microscope
5. Able to find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge
6. Able to measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare
7. Learnt to determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen using Gear tooth vernier
8. Able to measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

wire method
9. Learnt to study the construction and operation of coordinate measuring machine
10. Learnt to determine the diameter of bore by using telescopic gauge and dial bore indicator
11. Able to measure the surface roughness using Talysurf instrument
12. Studied the characteristic between applied load and the output volt

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. Learnt the characteristics of developing torque and respective sensor output voltage
14. Studied the characteristics of thermocouple without compensation
15. Able to check the straightness & flatness of the given component by using Autocollimator
16. Learnt to measure the displacement using LVDT and to calibrate it with the millimeter scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OBJECTIVES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OUTCOMES

7 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CONTENTS
Sl. No. Name of the Experiments Page No.
CYCLE ? 1 EXPERIMENTS
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab ? A Study
7
2
To build up the slip gauge for given dimension ? A Study
16

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
Thread parameters measurement using Tool Makers Microscope
20
4
Calibration of dial gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

23
5
Determination of taper angle by sine bar method
26
6

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of gear tooth thickness using gear tooth vernier
29
7
Measurement of thread parameters using floating carriage micrometer
32

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CYCLE ? 2 EXPERIMENTS
8
Measurement of various dimensions using Coordinate Measuring Machine
35
9

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement of surface roughness
39
10
Measurement of bores using dial bore indicator and telescopic gauge
42

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11
Force measurement using load cell
46
12
Torque measurement using strain gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

49
13
Temperature measurement using thermocouple
53
14

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement of alignment using autocollimator
56
ADDITIONAL EXPERIMENT BEYOND THE SYLLABUS
15
Thread parameters measurement using profile projector

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

60
16
Displacement measurement ? linear variable differential transducer (LVDT)
62
PROJECT WORK

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

65


8 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.01 PRECISION MEASURING INSTRUMENT YSED IN
METROLOGY LAB ? A STUDY
Aim:
To study the following instruments and their usage for measuring dimensions of given specimen
1. Vernier caliper

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Micrometer
3. Vernier height gauge
4. Depth micrometer
5. Universal bevel protractor
Apparatus required:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Surface plate, specimen and above instruments
Vernier caliper:
The principle of vernier caliper is to use the minor difference between the sizes two scales or divisions
for measurement. The difference between them can be utilized to enhance the accuracy of measurement. The
vernier caliper essentially consists of two steel rules, sliding along each other.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Parts:
Different parts of the vernier caliper are
1. Beam ? It has main scale.
2. Fixed jaw
3. Sliding or Moving jaw ? It has vernier scale and sliding jaw locking screw.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw knife
edges for internal measurement.
5. Stem or depth bar for depth measurement
Least count:
Least count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm
1 VSD = 0.98 mm
Least count = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


ID

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPTH


OD
Measurement:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Given Vernier caliper can be used for external, internal depth, slot and step measurement.
Measurement principle:
When both jaws contact each other scale shows the zero reading. The finer adjustment of movable jaw
can be done by the fine adjustment screw. First the whole movable jaw assembly is adjusted so that the two
measuring tips just touch the part to be measured. Then the fine adjustment clamp locking screw is tightened.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Final adjustment depending upon the sense of correct feel is made by the adjusting screw. After final
adjustment has been made sliding jaw locking screw is also tightened and the reading is noted.
All the parts of the Vernier caliper are made of good quality steel and measuring faces are hardened.
Types of vernier:
Vernier caliper, electronic vernier caliper, vernier depth caliper

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Main scale
reading (MSR)
(mm)
Vernier scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale
reading (VSR) (mm)
Total reading (MSR
+ VSR)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)

OD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ID


Depth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier height gauge:
Vernier height gauge is a sort of vernier caliper equipped with a special instrument suitable for height
measurement. It is always kept on the surface plate and the use of the surfaces plates as datum surfaces is
very essential.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count:
Least Count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm
1 VSD = 0.98 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least Count (LC) = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm
Parts:
1. Base
2. Beam ? It has main scale.
3. Slider ? It has a vernier scale and slider locking screw.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Scriber
5. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw.


12 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Material:
All the parts of vernier are made of good quality steel and the measuring faces hardened.
Types of vernier gauge:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Analog vernier height gauge
2. Digital vernier height gauge
3. Electronic vernier height gauge
Tabulation:
Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Main scale reading
(MSR)(mm)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(VSR)(mm)
Total reading (MSR +
VSR)(mm)
1.
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.

13 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Outside micrometer:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The micrometer essentially consists of an accurate screw having about 10 or 20 threads per cm. The
end of the screw forms one measuring tip and other measuring tip is constituted by a stationary anvil in the
base of the frame. The screw is threaded for certain length and is plain afterwards. The plain portion is called
spindle and its end is the measuring surface. The spindle is advanced or retracted by turning a thimble
connected to a spindle. The spindle is a slide fit over the barrel and barrel is the fixed part attached with the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

frame. The barrel & thimble are graduated. The pitch of the screw threads is 0.5 mm.

Least count:
Least Count (LC) = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale
= 0.5 / 50 = 0.01 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Parts:
1. Frame
2. Anvil
3. Spindle
4. Spindle lock

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Barrel or outside sleeve
6. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions
7. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.
The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.
14 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement:
It can be used for any external measurement.
Types of micrometer:
1. Outside micrometer, 2. Inside micrometer, 3.Depth micrometer, 4. Stick micrometer, 5. Screw thread

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

micrometer, 6. V ? anvil micrometer, 7. Blade type micrometer, 8. Dial micrometer, 9. Bench micrometer, 10.
Tape screw operated internal micrometer, 11. Groove micrometer, 12. Digital micrometer, 13.Differential screw
micrometer, 14.Adjustable range outside micrometer.
Ratchet stop mechanism:
The object of the ratchet stop is to ensure that same level of torque is applied on the spindle while

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measuring and the sense of the feel of operator is eliminated and consistent readings are obtained. By
providing this arrangement, the ratchet stop is made slip off when the torque applied to rotate the spindle
exceeds the set torque. Thus this provision ensures the application of same amount of torque during the
measurement.
Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) (mm)
Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Head scale reading
(HSR x LC) (mm)
Total Reading (PSR
+ HSR) (mm)
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.

Depth micrometer:
Depth micrometer is a sort of micrometer which is mainly used for measuring depth of holes, so it is
named as depth micrometer.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Parts:
1. Shoulder
2. Spindle
3. Spindle lock
4. Barrel or outside sleeve ? It has pitch scale.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions.
6. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.
The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.
15 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count:
Least Count = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale = 0.50/50
= 0.01 mm
Measurements:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

It can be used for measuring the depth of holes, slots and recessed areas. The pitch of the screw thread
is 0.5 mm. The least count is 0.01 mm. Shoulder acts as a reference surface and is held firmly and
perpendicular to the centre line of the hole. For large range of measurement extension rods are used. In the
barrel the scale is calibrated. The accuracy again depends upon the sense of touch.
Procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

First, calculate the least count of the instrument. Check the zero error. Measure the specimen note
down the main scale reading or the head scale reading. Note down the vernier or head scale coincidence with
main or pitch scale divisions.
Tabulation:
Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) (mm)
Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)
Head scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(HSR x LC) (mm)
Total Reading (PSR
+ HSR) (mm)

1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Universal bevel protractor:

Description:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Bevel protractor is an instrument for measuring the angle between the two faces of a specimen. It
consists of a base plate on which a circular scale is engraved. It is graduated in degrees. An adjustment plate
is attached to a circular plate containing the vernier scale. The adjustable blade can be locked in any position.
The circular plate has 360 division divided into four parts of 90 degrees each. The adjustable parts have 24
divisions of to the right and left sides of zero reading. These scales are used according to the position of the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

specimen with respect to movable scale.
Procedure:
1. Place the specimen whose taper is to be measured between the adjustable plate and movable
blade with one of its face parallel to the base.
2. Lock the adjustable plate in position and note down the main scale reading depending upon the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

direction of rotation of adjustable plate in clockwise or anticlockwise.
3. Note the VSC to the right of zero.
4. Multiply the VSC with the least count and add to MSR to obtain the actual reading.
Least count:
Least Count = 2 MSD ? 1 VSD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 MSD = 1
o
24 VSD = 46
o
=> 1 VSD = 23/12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LC = 2 ? 23/12 = 1/12
o
= 5? (five minutes)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:
Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Main scale reading
(MSR) (deg)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(VSR) (deg)
Total reading (MSR +
VSR)
(deg)
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.
The angle of scriber of the vernier height gauge =
Result:
Thus the various precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab are studied and the specimen
dimensions are recorded.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for linear, angular,
roundness and roughness measurements they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring
instrument according to a specific requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).
Application:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Quality Department


1. Define ? Metrology
2. Define ? Inspection

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. What are the needs of inspection in industries?
4. What are the various methods involving the measurement?
5. Define ? Precision
6. Define ? Accuracy
7. Define ? Calibration

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Define ? Repeatability
9. Define ? Magnification
10. Define ? Error
11. Define ? Systematic Error
12. Define ? Random Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. Define ? Parallax Error
14. Define ? Environmental Error
15. Define ? Cosine Error
Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

18 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.02 BUILD UP THE SLIP GAUGE FOR GIVEN DIMENSION
? A STUDY
Aim:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To build up the slip gauge for given dimension
Apparatus required:
1. Slip gauges set
2. Surface plate
3. Soft cloth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diagram:

Description:
Slip gauge are universally accepted standard of length in industry. They are the working standard for
linear dimension. These were invented by a Swedish Engineer, C.E. Johansson. They are used

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. For direct precise measurement where the accuracy of the workpiece demand it.
2. For use with high- magnification comparators to establish the size of the gauge blocks in general
use.
3. Gauge blocks are also used for many other purposes such as checking the accuracy of measuring
instrument or setting up a comparator to a specific dimension, enabling a batch of component to be

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

quickly and accurately checked or indeed in any situation where there is need to refer to standard of
known length these blocks are rectangular.
19 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Most gauge blocks are produced from high grade steel, hardened and established by a heat treatment

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

process to give a high degree of dimensional stability. Gauge blocks are also manufactured from tungsten
carbide which is an extremely hard and wear resistant material. The measuring faces have a lapped finish.
The faces are perfectly flat and parallel to one another with a high degree of accuracy. Each block has an
extremely high dimensional accuracy at 20
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C.
These slip gauge are available in variety of selected sets both in inch units and metric units. Letter ?E? is
used for inch units and ?M? is used for metric standard number of pieces in a set following the letter E or M. For
example EBI refers to a set whose blocks are in metric units and are 83 in number. Each block dimensions is
printed on anyone of its face itself the size of any required standard being made up by combining the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

appropriate number of these different size blocks.
If two gauges are slid and twisted together under pressure they will firmly join together. This process,
known as wringing, is very useful because it enables several gauge blocks to be assembled together to
produce a required size. In fact the success of precision measurement by slip gauges depends on the
phenomenon of wringing.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

First the gauge is oscillated slightly with very light pressure over other gauge so as to detect pressure at
any foreign particles between the surfaces. One gauge is placed perpendicular to other using standard
gauging pressure and rotary motion is applied until the blocks are lined up.
Procedure:
1. Build the given dimension by wringing minimum number of slip gauges.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Note the given dimension and choose the minimum possible slip gauge available in the set so as to
accommodate the last decimal value. The minimum slip gauge value dimension available i.e., 1.12
mm must be chosen followed by 1.5 mm thick gauge block.
3. Follow the above steps to build up the slip gauge of any dimension.
Precautions:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Slip gauges should be handled very carefully placed gently and should never be dropped.
2. Whenever a slip gauge is being removed from the set, its dimensions are noted and must be
replaced into the set at its appropriate place only.
3. Correct procedure must be followed in wringing and also in removing the gauge blocks.
4. They should be cleaned well before use and petroleum jelly is applied after use.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

20 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Range (mm) Increment (mm) No. of pieces

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total = ____________ Pieces
Total length of slip gauge = ________ mm
Given diameter Slip gauges used Obtained dimensions

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Slip gauge set is studied and the given dimensions are building up by wringing minimum number of slip
gauges.
Outcome:
Students will be able to select proper measuring instrument and know requirement of calibration, errors
in measurement etc. They can perform accurate measurements.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Why C.I. is preferred material for surface plates and tables?
2. Why V ? blocks are generally manufactured in pairs?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Why micrometer is required to be tested for accuracy?
4. Define ? Linear Measurement
5. List the linear measuring instrument according to their accuracy.
6. Define ? Least Count
7. What are the uses of vernier depth gauge?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. What are the uses of feeler gauges?
9. What are the uses of straight edge?
10. What are the uses of angle plate?
11. What are the uses of V ? block?
12. What are the uses of combination square?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. What precautions should be taken while using slip gauges?
14. What is wringing?
15. Why the slip gauges are termed as ?End standard?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

22 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.03 THREAD PARAMETERS MEASUREMENT USING
TOOL MAKERS MICROSCOPE
Aim:
To study the tool makers microscope and in the process measure the various dimensions of the given
specimen

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Apparatus required:
1. Tool makers microscope
2. Specimen
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
The tool maker?s microscope is designed for measurement of parts of complex forms; for example,
profile of a tool having external threads. It can also be used for measuring centre to centre distance of the
holes in any plane as well as the coordinates of the outline of a complex template gauge, using the
coordinates measuring system.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice
1 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

V SEMESTER - R 2013

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No. : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Section : _______________________________________


LABORATORY MANUAL
2 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

DHANALAKSHMI

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
2. To contribute to the promotion of Academic Excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels
3. To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

and soul

DEPARTMENT OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rendering the services to the global needs of engineering industries by educating students to become
professionally sound mechanical engineers of excellent caliber


To produce mechanical engineering technocrats with a perfect knowledge intellectual and hands on

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

experience and to inculcate the spirit of moral values and ethics to serve the society

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MISSION
MISSION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION

VISION

4 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals
To impart students with fundamental knowledge in mathematics and basic sciences that will mould
them to be successful professionals

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Core competence
To provide students with sound knowledge in engineering and experimental skills to identify
complex software problems in industry and to develop a practical solution for them
3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theory and practice which

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

enable them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and organization and to design
products requiring interdisciplinary skills
4. Professional skills
To bestow students with adequate training and provide opportunities to work as team that will build
up their communication skills, individual, leadership and supportive qualities and to enable them to

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

adapt and to work in ever changing technologies
5. Life-long learning
To develop the ability of students to establish themselves as professionals in mechanical
engineering and to create awareness about the need for lifelong learning and pursuing advanced
degrees

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)
On completion of the B.E. (Mechanical) degree, the graduate will be able

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

a) To apply the basic knowledge of mathematics, science and engineering
b) To design and conduct experiments as well as to analyze and interpret data and apply the same in
the career or entrepreneurship
c) To design and develop innovative and creative software applications
d) To understand a complex real world problem and develop an efficient practical solution

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

e) To create, select and apply appropriate techniques, resources, modern engineering and IT tools
f) To understand the role as a professional and give the best to the society
g) To develop a system that will meet expected needs within realistic constraints such as economical
environmental, social, political, ethical, safety and sustainability
h) To communicate effectively and make others understand exactly what they are trying to tell in both

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

verbal and written forms
i) To work in a team as a team member or a leader and make unique contributions and work with
coordination
j) To engage in lifelong learning and exhibit their technical skills
k) To develop and manage projects in multidisciplinary environments

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To familiar with different measurement equipment?s and use of this industry for quality inspection
List of Experiments
1. Tool Maker?s Microscope
2. Comparator
3. Sine Bar

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Gear Tooth Vernier Caliper
5. Floating gauge Micrometer
6. Coordinate Measuring Machine
7. Surface Finish Measuring Equipment
8. Vernier Height Gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. Bore diameter measurement using telescope gauge
10. Bore diameter measurement using micrometer
11. Force Measurement
12. Torque Measurement
13. Temperature measurement

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. Autocollimator


1. Ability to handle different measurement tools and perform measurements in quality impulsion
2. Learnt the usage of precision measuring instruments and practiced to take measurements

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Learnt and practiced to build the required dimensions using slip gauge
4. Able to measure the various dimensions of the given specimen using the tool maker?s microscope
5. Able to find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge
6. Able to measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare
7. Learnt to determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen using Gear tooth vernier

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Able to measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two
wire method
9. Learnt to study the construction and operation of coordinate measuring machine
10. Learnt to determine the diameter of bore by using telescopic gauge and dial bore indicator
11. Able to measure the surface roughness using Talysurf instrument

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. Studied the characteristic between applied load and the output volt
13. Learnt the characteristics of developing torque and respective sensor output voltage
14. Studied the characteristics of thermocouple without compensation
15. Able to check the straightness & flatness of the given component by using Autocollimator
16. Learnt to measure the displacement using LVDT and to calibrate it with the millimeter scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OBJECTIVES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OUTCOMES

7 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

CONTENTS
Sl. No. Name of the Experiments Page No.
CYCLE ? 1 EXPERIMENTS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1
Precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab ? A Study
7
2
To build up the slip gauge for given dimension ? A Study

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16
3
Thread parameters measurement using Tool Makers Microscope
20
4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Calibration of dial gauge
23
5
Determination of taper angle by sine bar method
26

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6
Determination of gear tooth thickness using gear tooth vernier
29
7
Measurement of thread parameters using floating carriage micrometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

32
CYCLE ? 2 EXPERIMENTS
8
Measurement of various dimensions using Coordinate Measuring Machine
35

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9
Measurement of surface roughness
39
10
Measurement of bores using dial bore indicator and telescopic gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

42
11
Force measurement using load cell
46
12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Torque measurement using strain gauge
49
13
Temperature measurement using thermocouple
53

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14
Measurement of alignment using autocollimator
56
ADDITIONAL EXPERIMENT BEYOND THE SYLLABUS
15

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thread parameters measurement using profile projector
60
16
Displacement measurement ? linear variable differential transducer (LVDT)
62

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROJECT WORK
65


8 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.01 PRECISION MEASURING INSTRUMENT YSED IN
METROLOGY LAB ? A STUDY
Aim:
To study the following instruments and their usage for measuring dimensions of given specimen

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Vernier caliper
2. Micrometer
3. Vernier height gauge
4. Depth micrometer
5. Universal bevel protractor

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Apparatus required:
Surface plate, specimen and above instruments
Vernier caliper:
The principle of vernier caliper is to use the minor difference between the sizes two scales or divisions
for measurement. The difference between them can be utilized to enhance the accuracy of measurement. The

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

vernier caliper essentially consists of two steel rules, sliding along each other.
Parts:
Different parts of the vernier caliper are
1. Beam ? It has main scale.
2. Fixed jaw

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Sliding or Moving jaw ? It has vernier scale and sliding jaw locking screw.
4. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw knife
edges for internal measurement.
5. Stem or depth bar for depth measurement
Least count:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm
1 VSD = 0.98 mm
Least count = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


ID

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPTH


OD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement:
Given Vernier caliper can be used for external, internal depth, slot and step measurement.
Measurement principle:
When both jaws contact each other scale shows the zero reading. The finer adjustment of movable jaw
can be done by the fine adjustment screw. First the whole movable jaw assembly is adjusted so that the two

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measuring tips just touch the part to be measured. Then the fine adjustment clamp locking screw is tightened.
Final adjustment depending upon the sense of correct feel is made by the adjusting screw. After final
adjustment has been made sliding jaw locking screw is also tightened and the reading is noted.
All the parts of the Vernier caliper are made of good quality steel and measuring faces are hardened.
Types of vernier:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier caliper, electronic vernier caliper, vernier depth caliper


11 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:

Main scale
reading (MSR)
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale
reading (VSR) (mm)
Total reading (MSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

+ VSR)
(mm)

OD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ID


Depth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier height gauge:
Vernier height gauge is a sort of vernier caliper equipped with a special instrument suitable for height
measurement. It is always kept on the surface plate and the use of the surfaces plates as datum surfaces is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

very essential.
Least count:
Least Count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 VSD = 0.98 mm
Least Count (LC) = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm
Parts:
1. Base
2. Beam ? It has main scale.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Slider ? It has a vernier scale and slider locking screw.
4. Scriber
5. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


Material:
All the parts of vernier are made of good quality steel and the measuring faces hardened.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Types of vernier gauge:
1. Analog vernier height gauge
2. Digital vernier height gauge
3. Electronic vernier height gauge
Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
Main scale reading
(MSR)(mm)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier scale reading
(VSR)(mm)
Total reading (MSR +
VSR)(mm)
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.
3.

13 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outside micrometer:
The micrometer essentially consists of an accurate screw having about 10 or 20 threads per cm. The
end of the screw forms one measuring tip and other measuring tip is constituted by a stationary anvil in the
base of the frame. The screw is threaded for certain length and is plain afterwards. The plain portion is called
spindle and its end is the measuring surface. The spindle is advanced or retracted by turning a thimble

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

connected to a spindle. The spindle is a slide fit over the barrel and barrel is the fixed part attached with the
frame. The barrel & thimble are graduated. The pitch of the screw threads is 0.5 mm.

Least count:
Least Count (LC) = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= 0.5 / 50 = 0.01 mm
Parts:
1. Frame
2. Anvil
3. Spindle

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Spindle lock
5. Barrel or outside sleeve
6. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions
7. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.
The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Measurement:
It can be used for any external measurement.
Types of micrometer:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Outside micrometer, 2. Inside micrometer, 3.Depth micrometer, 4. Stick micrometer, 5. Screw thread
micrometer, 6. V ? anvil micrometer, 7. Blade type micrometer, 8. Dial micrometer, 9. Bench micrometer, 10.
Tape screw operated internal micrometer, 11. Groove micrometer, 12. Digital micrometer, 13.Differential screw
micrometer, 14.Adjustable range outside micrometer.
Ratchet stop mechanism:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The object of the ratchet stop is to ensure that same level of torque is applied on the spindle while
measuring and the sense of the feel of operator is eliminated and consistent readings are obtained. By
providing this arrangement, the ratchet stop is made slip off when the torque applied to rotate the spindle
exceeds the set torque. Thus this provision ensures the application of same amount of torque during the
measurement.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) (mm)
Head Scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Coincidence (HSC)
Head scale reading
(HSR x LC) (mm)
Total Reading (PSR
+ HSR) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
2.

Depth micrometer:
Depth micrometer is a sort of micrometer which is mainly used for measuring depth of holes, so it is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

named as depth micrometer.
Parts:
1. Shoulder
2. Spindle
3. Spindle lock

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Barrel or outside sleeve ? It has pitch scale.
5. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions.
6. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.
The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.
15 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count:
Least Count = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale = 0.50/50
= 0.01 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurements:
It can be used for measuring the depth of holes, slots and recessed areas. The pitch of the screw thread
is 0.5 mm. The least count is 0.01 mm. Shoulder acts as a reference surface and is held firmly and
perpendicular to the centre line of the hole. For large range of measurement extension rods are used. In the
barrel the scale is calibrated. The accuracy again depends upon the sense of touch.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
First, calculate the least count of the instrument. Check the zero error. Measure the specimen note
down the main scale reading or the head scale reading. Note down the vernier or head scale coincidence with
main or pitch scale divisions.
Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) (mm)
Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Head scale reading
(HSR x LC) (mm)
Total Reading (PSR
+ HSR) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.


2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Universal bevel protractor:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
Bevel protractor is an instrument for measuring the angle between the two faces of a specimen. It
consists of a base plate on which a circular scale is engraved. It is graduated in degrees. An adjustment plate
is attached to a circular plate containing the vernier scale. The adjustable blade can be locked in any position.
The circular plate has 360 division divided into four parts of 90 degrees each. The adjustable parts have 24

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

divisions of to the right and left sides of zero reading. These scales are used according to the position of the
specimen with respect to movable scale.
Procedure:
1. Place the specimen whose taper is to be measured between the adjustable plate and movable
blade with one of its face parallel to the base.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Lock the adjustable plate in position and note down the main scale reading depending upon the
direction of rotation of adjustable plate in clockwise or anticlockwise.
3. Note the VSC to the right of zero.
4. Multiply the VSC with the least count and add to MSR to obtain the actual reading.
Least count:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least Count = 2 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1
o
24 VSD = 46
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

=> 1 VSD = 23/12
LC = 2 ? 23/12 = 1/12
o
= 5? (five minutes)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
Main scale reading
(MSR) (deg)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier scale reading
(VSR) (deg)
Total reading (MSR +
VSR)
(deg)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
2.
The angle of scriber of the vernier height gauge =
Result:
Thus the various precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab are studied and the specimen

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

dimensions are recorded.
Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for linear, angular,
roundness and roughness measurements they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring
instrument according to a specific requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Quality Department


1. Define ? Metrology

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Define ? Inspection
3. What are the needs of inspection in industries?
4. What are the various methods involving the measurement?
5. Define ? Precision
6. Define ? Accuracy

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Define ? Calibration
8. Define ? Repeatability
9. Define ? Magnification
10. Define ? Error
11. Define ? Systematic Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. Define ? Random Error
13. Define ? Parallax Error
14. Define ? Environmental Error
15. Define ? Cosine Error
Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

18 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.02 BUILD UP THE SLIP GAUGE FOR GIVEN DIMENSION
? A STUDY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Aim:
To build up the slip gauge for given dimension
Apparatus required:
1. Slip gauges set
2. Surface plate

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Soft cloth
Diagram:

Description:
Slip gauge are universally accepted standard of length in industry. They are the working standard for

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

linear dimension. These were invented by a Swedish Engineer, C.E. Johansson. They are used
1. For direct precise measurement where the accuracy of the workpiece demand it.
2. For use with high- magnification comparators to establish the size of the gauge blocks in general
use.
3. Gauge blocks are also used for many other purposes such as checking the accuracy of measuring

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

instrument or setting up a comparator to a specific dimension, enabling a batch of component to be
quickly and accurately checked or indeed in any situation where there is need to refer to standard of
known length these blocks are rectangular.
19 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Most gauge blocks are produced from high grade steel, hardened and established by a heat treatment
process to give a high degree of dimensional stability. Gauge blocks are also manufactured from tungsten
carbide which is an extremely hard and wear resistant material. The measuring faces have a lapped finish.
The faces are perfectly flat and parallel to one another with a high degree of accuracy. Each block has an
extremely high dimensional accuracy at 20

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C.
These slip gauge are available in variety of selected sets both in inch units and metric units. Letter ?E? is
used for inch units and ?M? is used for metric standard number of pieces in a set following the letter E or M. For
example EBI refers to a set whose blocks are in metric units and are 83 in number. Each block dimensions is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

printed on anyone of its face itself the size of any required standard being made up by combining the
appropriate number of these different size blocks.
If two gauges are slid and twisted together under pressure they will firmly join together. This process,
known as wringing, is very useful because it enables several gauge blocks to be assembled together to
produce a required size. In fact the success of precision measurement by slip gauges depends on the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

phenomenon of wringing.
First the gauge is oscillated slightly with very light pressure over other gauge so as to detect pressure at
any foreign particles between the surfaces. One gauge is placed perpendicular to other using standard
gauging pressure and rotary motion is applied until the blocks are lined up.
Procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Build the given dimension by wringing minimum number of slip gauges.
2. Note the given dimension and choose the minimum possible slip gauge available in the set so as to
accommodate the last decimal value. The minimum slip gauge value dimension available i.e., 1.12
mm must be chosen followed by 1.5 mm thick gauge block.
3. Follow the above steps to build up the slip gauge of any dimension.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Precautions:
1. Slip gauges should be handled very carefully placed gently and should never be dropped.
2. Whenever a slip gauge is being removed from the set, its dimensions are noted and must be
replaced into the set at its appropriate place only.
3. Correct procedure must be followed in wringing and also in removing the gauge blocks.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. They should be cleaned well before use and petroleum jelly is applied after use.



20 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Range (mm) Increment (mm) No. of pieces

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total = ____________ Pieces
Total length of slip gauge = ________ mm
Given diameter Slip gauges used Obtained dimensions

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Slip gauge set is studied and the given dimensions are building up by wringing minimum number of slip
gauges.
Outcome:
Students will be able to select proper measuring instrument and know requirement of calibration, errors

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

in measurement etc. They can perform accurate measurements.
Application:
1. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Why C.I. is preferred material for surface plates and tables?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Why V ? blocks are generally manufactured in pairs?
3. Why micrometer is required to be tested for accuracy?
4. Define ? Linear Measurement
5. List the linear measuring instrument according to their accuracy.
6. Define ? Least Count

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. What are the uses of vernier depth gauge?
8. What are the uses of feeler gauges?
9. What are the uses of straight edge?
10. What are the uses of angle plate?
11. What are the uses of V ? block?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. What are the uses of combination square?
13. What precautions should be taken while using slip gauges?
14. What is wringing?
15. Why the slip gauges are termed as ?End standard?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

22 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.03 THREAD PARAMETERS MEASUREMENT USING
TOOL MAKERS MICROSCOPE
Aim:
To study the tool makers microscope and in the process measure the various dimensions of the given

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

specimen
Apparatus required:
1. Tool makers microscope
2. Specimen
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
The tool maker?s microscope is designed for measurement of parts of complex forms; for example,
profile of a tool having external threads. It can also be used for measuring centre to centre distance of the
holes in any plane as well as the coordinates of the outline of a complex template gauge, using the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

coordinates measuring system.
23 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Basically it consists of an optical head which can be adjusted vertically along the ways of supporting
column. The optical head can be clamped at any position by a screw. On the work table (which as a circular

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

base in which there are graduations) the part to be inspected is placed. The table has a compound slide by
means of which the part can be measured. For giving these two movements, there are two micrometer screws
having thimble scales and verniers. At the back of the base light source is arranged that provides horizontal
beam of light, reflected from a mirror by 90 degrees upwards towards the table. The beam of light passes
through the transparent glass plate on which flat plates can be checked are placed. Observations are made

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

through the eyepiece of the optical head.
Procedure:
1. Place the given specimen on the work table and switch on all the three light sources and adjust the
intensity of the light source until a clean image of the cross wires and specimen are seen through
the eyepiece.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Coincide one of the two extreme edges between which the measurement has to be taken with
vertical or horizontal cross wires and depending upon the other image coincide with the same cross
wires by moving the above device. Note the reading.The difference between the two readings gives
the value of the required measurement.
3. Note the experiment specimen and the readings.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Tabulate the different measurements measured from the specimen.
Determination of thread parameters
Magnification =
S.No. Parameters
Magnified value

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
Actual value
(mm)
1. Outer diameter (O.D)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Internal diameter (I.D)

3. Pitch

4. Flank angle

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Included angle of the tool was measured using tool maker?s microscope and various dimensions of the
given specimen are measured.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice
1 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING


ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

V SEMESTER - R 2013

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No. : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LABORATORY MANUAL
2 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


3 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DHANALAKSHMI


College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.


1. To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
2. To contribute to the promotion of Academic Excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

levels
3. To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

DEPARTMENT OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rendering the services to the global needs of engineering industries by educating students to become
professionally sound mechanical engineers of excellent caliber

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To produce mechanical engineering technocrats with a perfect knowledge intellectual and hands on
experience and to inculcate the spirit of moral values and ethics to serve the society

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MISSION
MISSION
VISION

VISION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To impart students with fundamental knowledge in mathematics and basic sciences that will mould
them to be successful professionals
2. Core competence
To provide students with sound knowledge in engineering and experimental skills to identify
complex software problems in industry and to develop a practical solution for them

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theory and practice which
enable them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and organization and to design
products requiring interdisciplinary skills
4. Professional skills

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To bestow students with adequate training and provide opportunities to work as team that will build
up their communication skills, individual, leadership and supportive qualities and to enable them to
adapt and to work in ever changing technologies
5. Life-long learning
To develop the ability of students to establish themselves as professionals in mechanical

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

engineering and to create awareness about the need for lifelong learning and pursuing advanced
degrees

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)
On completion of the B.E. (Mechanical) degree, the graduate will be able
a) To apply the basic knowledge of mathematics, science and engineering
b) To design and conduct experiments as well as to analyze and interpret data and apply the same in
the career or entrepreneurship

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

c) To design and develop innovative and creative software applications
d) To understand a complex real world problem and develop an efficient practical solution
e) To create, select and apply appropriate techniques, resources, modern engineering and IT tools
f) To understand the role as a professional and give the best to the society
g) To develop a system that will meet expected needs within realistic constraints such as economical

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

environmental, social, political, ethical, safety and sustainability
h) To communicate effectively and make others understand exactly what they are trying to tell in both
verbal and written forms
i) To work in a team as a team member or a leader and make unique contributions and work with
coordination

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

j) To engage in lifelong learning and exhibit their technical skills
k) To develop and manage projects in multidisciplinary environments

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To familiar with different measurement equipment?s and use of this industry for quality inspection
List of Experiments
1. Tool Maker?s Microscope

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Comparator
3. Sine Bar
4. Gear Tooth Vernier Caliper
5. Floating gauge Micrometer
6. Coordinate Measuring Machine

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Surface Finish Measuring Equipment
8. Vernier Height Gauge
9. Bore diameter measurement using telescope gauge
10. Bore diameter measurement using micrometer
11. Force Measurement

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. Torque Measurement
13. Temperature measurement
14. Autocollimator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Ability to handle different measurement tools and perform measurements in quality impulsion
2. Learnt the usage of precision measuring instruments and practiced to take measurements
3. Learnt and practiced to build the required dimensions using slip gauge
4. Able to measure the various dimensions of the given specimen using the tool maker?s microscope
5. Able to find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Able to measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare
7. Learnt to determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen using Gear tooth vernier
8. Able to measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two
wire method
9. Learnt to study the construction and operation of coordinate measuring machine

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. Learnt to determine the diameter of bore by using telescopic gauge and dial bore indicator
11. Able to measure the surface roughness using Talysurf instrument
12. Studied the characteristic between applied load and the output volt
13. Learnt the characteristics of developing torque and respective sensor output voltage
14. Studied the characteristics of thermocouple without compensation

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15. Able to check the straightness & flatness of the given component by using Autocollimator
16. Learnt to measure the displacement using LVDT and to calibrate it with the millimeter scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OBJECTIVES

COURSE OUTCOMES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

CONTENTS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl. No. Name of the Experiments Page No.
CYCLE ? 1 EXPERIMENTS
1
Precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab ? A Study
7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
To build up the slip gauge for given dimension ? A Study
16
3
Thread parameters measurement using Tool Makers Microscope

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

20
4
Calibration of dial gauge
23
5

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of taper angle by sine bar method
26
6
Determination of gear tooth thickness using gear tooth vernier
29

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7
Measurement of thread parameters using floating carriage micrometer
32
CYCLE ? 2 EXPERIMENTS
8

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement of various dimensions using Coordinate Measuring Machine
35
9
Measurement of surface roughness
39

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
Measurement of bores using dial bore indicator and telescopic gauge
42
11
Force measurement using load cell

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

46
12
Torque measurement using strain gauge
49
13

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Temperature measurement using thermocouple
53
14
Measurement of alignment using autocollimator
56

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ADDITIONAL EXPERIMENT BEYOND THE SYLLABUS
15
Thread parameters measurement using profile projector
60
16

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Displacement measurement ? linear variable differential transducer (LVDT)
62
PROJECT WORK
65

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.01 PRECISION MEASURING INSTRUMENT YSED IN
METROLOGY LAB ? A STUDY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Aim:
To study the following instruments and their usage for measuring dimensions of given specimen
1. Vernier caliper
2. Micrometer
3. Vernier height gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Depth micrometer
5. Universal bevel protractor
Apparatus required:
Surface plate, specimen and above instruments
Vernier caliper:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The principle of vernier caliper is to use the minor difference between the sizes two scales or divisions
for measurement. The difference between them can be utilized to enhance the accuracy of measurement. The
vernier caliper essentially consists of two steel rules, sliding along each other.
Parts:
Different parts of the vernier caliper are

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Beam ? It has main scale.
2. Fixed jaw
3. Sliding or Moving jaw ? It has vernier scale and sliding jaw locking screw.
4. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw knife
edges for internal measurement.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Stem or depth bar for depth measurement
Least count:
Least count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 VSD = 0.98 mm
Least count = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm

10 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ID

DEPTH

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OD
Measurement:
Given Vernier caliper can be used for external, internal depth, slot and step measurement.
Measurement principle:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

When both jaws contact each other scale shows the zero reading. The finer adjustment of movable jaw
can be done by the fine adjustment screw. First the whole movable jaw assembly is adjusted so that the two
measuring tips just touch the part to be measured. Then the fine adjustment clamp locking screw is tightened.
Final adjustment depending upon the sense of correct feel is made by the adjusting screw. After final
adjustment has been made sliding jaw locking screw is also tightened and the reading is noted.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

All the parts of the Vernier caliper are made of good quality steel and measuring faces are hardened.
Types of vernier:
Vernier caliper, electronic vernier caliper, vernier depth caliper

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:

Main scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

reading (MSR)
(mm)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

reading (VSR) (mm)
Total reading (MSR
+ VSR)
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OD


ID

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Depth


Vernier height gauge:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier height gauge is a sort of vernier caliper equipped with a special instrument suitable for height
measurement. It is always kept on the surface plate and the use of the surfaces plates as datum surfaces is
very essential.
Least count:
Least Count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm
1 VSD = 0.98 mm
Least Count (LC) = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm
Parts:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Base
2. Beam ? It has main scale.
3. Slider ? It has a vernier scale and slider locking screw.
4. Scriber
5. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Material:
All the parts of vernier are made of good quality steel and the measuring faces hardened.
Types of vernier gauge:
1. Analog vernier height gauge
2. Digital vernier height gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Electronic vernier height gauge
Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Main scale reading
(MSR)(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale reading
(VSR)(mm)
Total reading (MSR +

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSR)(mm)
1.
2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Outside micrometer:
The micrometer essentially consists of an accurate screw having about 10 or 20 threads per cm. The
end of the screw forms one measuring tip and other measuring tip is constituted by a stationary anvil in the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

base of the frame. The screw is threaded for certain length and is plain afterwards. The plain portion is called
spindle and its end is the measuring surface. The spindle is advanced or retracted by turning a thimble
connected to a spindle. The spindle is a slide fit over the barrel and barrel is the fixed part attached with the
frame. The barrel & thimble are graduated. The pitch of the screw threads is 0.5 mm.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count:
Least Count (LC) = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale
= 0.5 / 50 = 0.01 mm
Parts:
1. Frame

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Anvil
3. Spindle
4. Spindle lock
5. Barrel or outside sleeve
6. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.
The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.
14 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Measurement:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

It can be used for any external measurement.
Types of micrometer:
1. Outside micrometer, 2. Inside micrometer, 3.Depth micrometer, 4. Stick micrometer, 5. Screw thread
micrometer, 6. V ? anvil micrometer, 7. Blade type micrometer, 8. Dial micrometer, 9. Bench micrometer, 10.
Tape screw operated internal micrometer, 11. Groove micrometer, 12. Digital micrometer, 13.Differential screw

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

micrometer, 14.Adjustable range outside micrometer.
Ratchet stop mechanism:
The object of the ratchet stop is to ensure that same level of torque is applied on the spindle while
measuring and the sense of the feel of operator is eliminated and consistent readings are obtained. By
providing this arrangement, the ratchet stop is made slip off when the torque applied to rotate the spindle

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

exceeds the set torque. Thus this provision ensures the application of same amount of torque during the
measurement.
Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Pitch Scale Reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(PSR) (mm)
Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)
Head scale reading
(HSR x LC) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total Reading (PSR
+ HSR) (mm)
1.
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Depth micrometer:
Depth micrometer is a sort of micrometer which is mainly used for measuring depth of holes, so it is
named as depth micrometer.
Parts:
1. Shoulder

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Spindle
3. Spindle lock
4. Barrel or outside sleeve ? It has pitch scale.
5. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions.
6. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.
15 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


Least count:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least Count = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale = 0.50/50
= 0.01 mm
Measurements:
It can be used for measuring the depth of holes, slots and recessed areas. The pitch of the screw thread
is 0.5 mm. The least count is 0.01 mm. Shoulder acts as a reference surface and is held firmly and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

perpendicular to the centre line of the hole. For large range of measurement extension rods are used. In the
barrel the scale is calibrated. The accuracy again depends upon the sense of touch.
Procedure:
First, calculate the least count of the instrument. Check the zero error. Measure the specimen note
down the main scale reading or the head scale reading. Note down the vernier or head scale coincidence with

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

main or pitch scale divisions.
Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)
Head scale reading
(HSR x LC) (mm)
Total Reading (PSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

+ HSR) (mm)

1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.


16 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Universal bevel protractor:

Description:
Bevel protractor is an instrument for measuring the angle between the two faces of a specimen. It
consists of a base plate on which a circular scale is engraved. It is graduated in degrees. An adjustment plate

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

is attached to a circular plate containing the vernier scale. The adjustable blade can be locked in any position.
The circular plate has 360 division divided into four parts of 90 degrees each. The adjustable parts have 24
divisions of to the right and left sides of zero reading. These scales are used according to the position of the
specimen with respect to movable scale.
Procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Place the specimen whose taper is to be measured between the adjustable plate and movable
blade with one of its face parallel to the base.
2. Lock the adjustable plate in position and note down the main scale reading depending upon the
direction of rotation of adjustable plate in clockwise or anticlockwise.
3. Note the VSC to the right of zero.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Multiply the VSC with the least count and add to MSR to obtain the actual reading.
Least count:
Least Count = 2 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

24 VSD = 46
o
=> 1 VSD = 23/12
LC = 2 ? 23/12 = 1/12
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= 5? (five minutes)



17 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Main scale reading
(MSR) (deg)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale reading
(VSR) (deg)
Total reading (MSR +

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSR)
(deg)
1.
2.
The angle of scriber of the vernier height gauge =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Thus the various precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab are studied and the specimen
dimensions are recorded.
Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for linear, angular,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

roundness and roughness measurements they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring
instrument according to a specific requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).
Application:
1. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Metrology
2. Define ? Inspection
3. What are the needs of inspection in industries?
4. What are the various methods involving the measurement?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Define ? Precision
6. Define ? Accuracy
7. Define ? Calibration
8. Define ? Repeatability
9. Define ? Magnification

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. Define ? Error
11. Define ? Systematic Error
12. Define ? Random Error
13. Define ? Parallax Error
14. Define ? Environmental Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15. Define ? Cosine Error
Viva-voce

18 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.02 BUILD UP THE SLIP GAUGE FOR GIVEN DIMENSION
? A STUDY
Aim:
To build up the slip gauge for given dimension
Apparatus required:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Slip gauges set
2. Surface plate
3. Soft cloth
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
Slip gauge are universally accepted standard of length in industry. They are the working standard for
linear dimension. These were invented by a Swedish Engineer, C.E. Johansson. They are used
1. For direct precise measurement where the accuracy of the workpiece demand it.
2. For use with high- magnification comparators to establish the size of the gauge blocks in general

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

use.
3. Gauge blocks are also used for many other purposes such as checking the accuracy of measuring
instrument or setting up a comparator to a specific dimension, enabling a batch of component to be
quickly and accurately checked or indeed in any situation where there is need to refer to standard of
known length these blocks are rectangular.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

19 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Most gauge blocks are produced from high grade steel, hardened and established by a heat treatment
process to give a high degree of dimensional stability. Gauge blocks are also manufactured from tungsten
carbide which is an extremely hard and wear resistant material. The measuring faces have a lapped finish.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The faces are perfectly flat and parallel to one another with a high degree of accuracy. Each block has an
extremely high dimensional accuracy at 20
o
C.
These slip gauge are available in variety of selected sets both in inch units and metric units. Letter ?E? is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

used for inch units and ?M? is used for metric standard number of pieces in a set following the letter E or M. For
example EBI refers to a set whose blocks are in metric units and are 83 in number. Each block dimensions is
printed on anyone of its face itself the size of any required standard being made up by combining the
appropriate number of these different size blocks.
If two gauges are slid and twisted together under pressure they will firmly join together. This process,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

known as wringing, is very useful because it enables several gauge blocks to be assembled together to
produce a required size. In fact the success of precision measurement by slip gauges depends on the
phenomenon of wringing.
First the gauge is oscillated slightly with very light pressure over other gauge so as to detect pressure at
any foreign particles between the surfaces. One gauge is placed perpendicular to other using standard

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

gauging pressure and rotary motion is applied until the blocks are lined up.
Procedure:
1. Build the given dimension by wringing minimum number of slip gauges.
2. Note the given dimension and choose the minimum possible slip gauge available in the set so as to
accommodate the last decimal value. The minimum slip gauge value dimension available i.e., 1.12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

mm must be chosen followed by 1.5 mm thick gauge block.
3. Follow the above steps to build up the slip gauge of any dimension.
Precautions:
1. Slip gauges should be handled very carefully placed gently and should never be dropped.
2. Whenever a slip gauge is being removed from the set, its dimensions are noted and must be

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

replaced into the set at its appropriate place only.
3. Correct procedure must be followed in wringing and also in removing the gauge blocks.
4. They should be cleaned well before use and petroleum jelly is applied after use.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

20 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:
Range (mm) Increment (mm) No. of pieces

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total = ____________ Pieces

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total length of slip gauge = ________ mm
Given diameter Slip gauges used Obtained dimensions

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Slip gauge set is studied and the given dimensions are building up by wringing minimum number of slip
gauges.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Students will be able to select proper measuring instrument and know requirement of calibration, errors
in measurement etc. They can perform accurate measurements.
Application:
1. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Why C.I. is preferred material for surface plates and tables?
2. Why V ? blocks are generally manufactured in pairs?
3. Why micrometer is required to be tested for accuracy?
4. Define ? Linear Measurement

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. List the linear measuring instrument according to their accuracy.
6. Define ? Least Count
7. What are the uses of vernier depth gauge?
8. What are the uses of feeler gauges?
9. What are the uses of straight edge?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. What are the uses of angle plate?
11. What are the uses of V ? block?
12. What are the uses of combination square?
13. What precautions should be taken while using slip gauges?
14. What is wringing?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15. Why the slip gauges are termed as ?End standard?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

22 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


Expt.No.03 THREAD PARAMETERS MEASUREMENT USING
TOOL MAKERS MICROSCOPE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Aim:
To study the tool makers microscope and in the process measure the various dimensions of the given
specimen
Apparatus required:
1. Tool makers microscope

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Specimen
Diagram:

Description:
The tool maker?s microscope is designed for measurement of parts of complex forms; for example,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

profile of a tool having external threads. It can also be used for measuring centre to centre distance of the
holes in any plane as well as the coordinates of the outline of a complex template gauge, using the
coordinates measuring system.
23 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Basically it consists of an optical head which can be adjusted vertically along the ways of supporting
column. The optical head can be clamped at any position by a screw. On the work table (which as a circular
base in which there are graduations) the part to be inspected is placed. The table has a compound slide by
means of which the part can be measured. For giving these two movements, there are two micrometer screws
having thimble scales and verniers. At the back of the base light source is arranged that provides horizontal

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

beam of light, reflected from a mirror by 90 degrees upwards towards the table. The beam of light passes
through the transparent glass plate on which flat plates can be checked are placed. Observations are made
through the eyepiece of the optical head.
Procedure:
1. Place the given specimen on the work table and switch on all the three light sources and adjust the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

intensity of the light source until a clean image of the cross wires and specimen are seen through
the eyepiece.
2. Coincide one of the two extreme edges between which the measurement has to be taken with
vertical or horizontal cross wires and depending upon the other image coincide with the same cross
wires by moving the above device. Note the reading.The difference between the two readings gives

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the value of the required measurement.
3. Note the experiment specimen and the readings.
4. Tabulate the different measurements measured from the specimen.
Determination of thread parameters
Magnification =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

S.No. Parameters
Magnified value
(mm)
Actual value
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Outer diameter (O.D)

2. Internal diameter (I.D)

3. Pitch

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Flank angle


Result:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Included angle of the tool was measured using tool maker?s microscope and various dimensions of the
given specimen are measured.


24 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the various parameters of thread and select proper measuring
instrument and know requirement of calibration, errors in measurement etc. They can perform accurate
measurements.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Machine Shop
2. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by tool maker?s microscope?
2. What is the light used in tool maker?s microscope?
3. What are the various characteristics that you would measure in a screw thread?
4. What are the instruments that are required for measuring screw thread?
5. Define ? Pitch

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. What are the causes of pitch error?
7. Define ? Flank
8. What are the effects of flank angle error?
9. What is progressive error?
10. What is periodic error?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. What is drunken error?
12. What is erratic error?
13. What are the applications of tool maker?s microscope?
14. What are the limitations of tool maker?s microscope?
15. What are the advantages of tool maker?s microscope?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice
1 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?



DEPARTMENT OF

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MECHANICAL ENGINEERING


ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

V SEMESTER - R 2013

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Register No. : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________


LABORATORY MANUAL

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


3 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DHANALAKSHMI


College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
2. To contribute to the promotion of Academic Excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

DEPARTMENT OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rendering the services to the global needs of engineering industries by educating students to become
professionally sound mechanical engineers of excellent caliber

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To produce mechanical engineering technocrats with a perfect knowledge intellectual and hands on
experience and to inculcate the spirit of moral values and ethics to serve the society

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MISSION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MISSION
VISION

VISION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals
To impart students with fundamental knowledge in mathematics and basic sciences that will mould

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

them to be successful professionals
2. Core competence
To provide students with sound knowledge in engineering and experimental skills to identify
complex software problems in industry and to develop a practical solution for them
3. Breadth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theory and practice which
enable them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and organization and to design
products requiring interdisciplinary skills
4. Professional skills
To bestow students with adequate training and provide opportunities to work as team that will build

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

up their communication skills, individual, leadership and supportive qualities and to enable them to
adapt and to work in ever changing technologies
5. Life-long learning
To develop the ability of students to establish themselves as professionals in mechanical
engineering and to create awareness about the need for lifelong learning and pursuing advanced

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

degrees

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

On completion of the B.E. (Mechanical) degree, the graduate will be able
a) To apply the basic knowledge of mathematics, science and engineering
b) To design and conduct experiments as well as to analyze and interpret data and apply the same in
the career or entrepreneurship
c) To design and develop innovative and creative software applications

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d) To understand a complex real world problem and develop an efficient practical solution
e) To create, select and apply appropriate techniques, resources, modern engineering and IT tools
f) To understand the role as a professional and give the best to the society
g) To develop a system that will meet expected needs within realistic constraints such as economical
environmental, social, political, ethical, safety and sustainability

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

h) To communicate effectively and make others understand exactly what they are trying to tell in both
verbal and written forms
i) To work in a team as a team member or a leader and make unique contributions and work with
coordination
j) To engage in lifelong learning and exhibit their technical skills

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

k) To develop and manage projects in multidisciplinary environments

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To familiar with different measurement equipment?s and use of this industry for quality inspection
List of Experiments
1. Tool Maker?s Microscope
2. Comparator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Sine Bar
4. Gear Tooth Vernier Caliper
5. Floating gauge Micrometer
6. Coordinate Measuring Machine
7. Surface Finish Measuring Equipment

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Vernier Height Gauge
9. Bore diameter measurement using telescope gauge
10. Bore diameter measurement using micrometer
11. Force Measurement
12. Torque Measurement

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. Temperature measurement
14. Autocollimator


1. Ability to handle different measurement tools and perform measurements in quality impulsion

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Learnt the usage of precision measuring instruments and practiced to take measurements
3. Learnt and practiced to build the required dimensions using slip gauge
4. Able to measure the various dimensions of the given specimen using the tool maker?s microscope
5. Able to find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge
6. Able to measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Learnt to determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen using Gear tooth vernier
8. Able to measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two
wire method
9. Learnt to study the construction and operation of coordinate measuring machine
10. Learnt to determine the diameter of bore by using telescopic gauge and dial bore indicator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. Able to measure the surface roughness using Talysurf instrument
12. Studied the characteristic between applied load and the output volt
13. Learnt the characteristics of developing torque and respective sensor output voltage
14. Studied the characteristics of thermocouple without compensation
15. Able to check the straightness & flatness of the given component by using Autocollimator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16. Learnt to measure the displacement using LVDT and to calibrate it with the millimeter scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OBJECTIVES

COURSE OUTCOMES

7 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

CONTENTS
Sl. No. Name of the Experiments Page No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CYCLE ? 1 EXPERIMENTS
1
Precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab ? A Study
7
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To build up the slip gauge for given dimension ? A Study
16
3
Thread parameters measurement using Tool Makers Microscope
20

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4
Calibration of dial gauge
23
5
Determination of taper angle by sine bar method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

26
6
Determination of gear tooth thickness using gear tooth vernier
29
7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement of thread parameters using floating carriage micrometer
32
CYCLE ? 2 EXPERIMENTS
8
Measurement of various dimensions using Coordinate Measuring Machine

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

35
9
Measurement of surface roughness
39
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement of bores using dial bore indicator and telescopic gauge
42
11
Force measurement using load cell
46

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12
Torque measurement using strain gauge
49
13
Temperature measurement using thermocouple

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

53
14
Measurement of alignment using autocollimator
56
ADDITIONAL EXPERIMENT BEYOND THE SYLLABUS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15
Thread parameters measurement using profile projector
60
16
Displacement measurement ? linear variable differential transducer (LVDT)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

62
PROJECT WORK
65

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.01 PRECISION MEASURING INSTRUMENT YSED IN
METROLOGY LAB ? A STUDY
Aim:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To study the following instruments and their usage for measuring dimensions of given specimen
1. Vernier caliper
2. Micrometer
3. Vernier height gauge
4. Depth micrometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Universal bevel protractor
Apparatus required:
Surface plate, specimen and above instruments
Vernier caliper:
The principle of vernier caliper is to use the minor difference between the sizes two scales or divisions

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

for measurement. The difference between them can be utilized to enhance the accuracy of measurement. The
vernier caliper essentially consists of two steel rules, sliding along each other.
Parts:
Different parts of the vernier caliper are
1. Beam ? It has main scale.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Fixed jaw
3. Sliding or Moving jaw ? It has vernier scale and sliding jaw locking screw.
4. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw knife
edges for internal measurement.
5. Stem or depth bar for depth measurement

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count:
Least count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm
1 VSD = 0.98 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm

10 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ID

DEPTH

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OD
Measurement:
Given Vernier caliper can be used for external, internal depth, slot and step measurement.
Measurement principle:
When both jaws contact each other scale shows the zero reading. The finer adjustment of movable jaw

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

can be done by the fine adjustment screw. First the whole movable jaw assembly is adjusted so that the two
measuring tips just touch the part to be measured. Then the fine adjustment clamp locking screw is tightened.
Final adjustment depending upon the sense of correct feel is made by the adjusting screw. After final
adjustment has been made sliding jaw locking screw is also tightened and the reading is noted.
All the parts of the Vernier caliper are made of good quality steel and measuring faces are hardened.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Types of vernier:
Vernier caliper, electronic vernier caliper, vernier depth caliper


11 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:

Main scale
reading (MSR)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale
reading (VSR) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total reading (MSR
+ VSR)
(mm)

OD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ID

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Depth


Vernier height gauge:
Vernier height gauge is a sort of vernier caliper equipped with a special instrument suitable for height

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measurement. It is always kept on the surface plate and the use of the surfaces plates as datum surfaces is
very essential.
Least count:
Least Count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

50 VSD = 49 mm
1 VSD = 0.98 mm
Least Count (LC) = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm
Parts:
1. Base

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Beam ? It has main scale.
3. Slider ? It has a vernier scale and slider locking screw.
4. Scriber
5. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


Material:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

All the parts of vernier are made of good quality steel and the measuring faces hardened.
Types of vernier gauge:
1. Analog vernier height gauge
2. Digital vernier height gauge
3. Electronic vernier height gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Main scale reading
(MSR)(mm)
Vernier scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale reading
(VSR)(mm)
Total reading (MSR +
VSR)(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
2.
3.

13 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outside micrometer:
The micrometer essentially consists of an accurate screw having about 10 or 20 threads per cm. The
end of the screw forms one measuring tip and other measuring tip is constituted by a stationary anvil in the
base of the frame. The screw is threaded for certain length and is plain afterwards. The plain portion is called

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

spindle and its end is the measuring surface. The spindle is advanced or retracted by turning a thimble
connected to a spindle. The spindle is a slide fit over the barrel and barrel is the fixed part attached with the
frame. The barrel & thimble are graduated. The pitch of the screw threads is 0.5 mm.

Least count:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least Count (LC) = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale
= 0.5 / 50 = 0.01 mm
Parts:
1. Frame
2. Anvil

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Spindle
4. Spindle lock
5. Barrel or outside sleeve
6. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions
7. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.
14 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Measurement:
It can be used for any external measurement.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Types of micrometer:
1. Outside micrometer, 2. Inside micrometer, 3.Depth micrometer, 4. Stick micrometer, 5. Screw thread
micrometer, 6. V ? anvil micrometer, 7. Blade type micrometer, 8. Dial micrometer, 9. Bench micrometer, 10.
Tape screw operated internal micrometer, 11. Groove micrometer, 12. Digital micrometer, 13.Differential screw
micrometer, 14.Adjustable range outside micrometer.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Ratchet stop mechanism:
The object of the ratchet stop is to ensure that same level of torque is applied on the spindle while
measuring and the sense of the feel of operator is eliminated and consistent readings are obtained. By
providing this arrangement, the ratchet stop is made slip off when the torque applied to rotate the spindle
exceeds the set torque. Thus this provision ensures the application of same amount of torque during the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measurement.
Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)
Head scale reading
(HSR x LC) (mm)
Total Reading (PSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

+ HSR) (mm)
1.
2.

Depth micrometer:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Depth micrometer is a sort of micrometer which is mainly used for measuring depth of holes, so it is
named as depth micrometer.
Parts:
1. Shoulder
2. Spindle

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Spindle lock
4. Barrel or outside sleeve ? It has pitch scale.
5. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions.
6. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.
The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


Least count:
Least Count = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale = 0.50/50

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= 0.01 mm
Measurements:
It can be used for measuring the depth of holes, slots and recessed areas. The pitch of the screw thread
is 0.5 mm. The least count is 0.01 mm. Shoulder acts as a reference surface and is held firmly and
perpendicular to the centre line of the hole. For large range of measurement extension rods are used. In the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

barrel the scale is calibrated. The accuracy again depends upon the sense of touch.
Procedure:
First, calculate the least count of the instrument. Check the zero error. Measure the specimen note
down the main scale reading or the head scale reading. Note down the vernier or head scale coincidence with
main or pitch scale divisions.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) (mm)
Head Scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Coincidence (HSC)
Head scale reading
(HSR x LC) (mm)
Total Reading (PSR
+ HSR) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.


2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Universal bevel protractor:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
Bevel protractor is an instrument for measuring the angle between the two faces of a specimen. It
consists of a base plate on which a circular scale is engraved. It is graduated in degrees. An adjustment plate
is attached to a circular plate containing the vernier scale. The adjustable blade can be locked in any position.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The circular plate has 360 division divided into four parts of 90 degrees each. The adjustable parts have 24
divisions of to the right and left sides of zero reading. These scales are used according to the position of the
specimen with respect to movable scale.
Procedure:
1. Place the specimen whose taper is to be measured between the adjustable plate and movable

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

blade with one of its face parallel to the base.
2. Lock the adjustable plate in position and note down the main scale reading depending upon the
direction of rotation of adjustable plate in clockwise or anticlockwise.
3. Note the VSC to the right of zero.
4. Multiply the VSC with the least count and add to MSR to obtain the actual reading.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count:
Least Count = 2 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1
o
24 VSD = 46

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
=> 1 VSD = 23/12
LC = 2 ? 23/12 = 1/12
o
= 5? (five minutes)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Main scale reading
(MSR) (deg)
Vernier scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale reading
(VSR) (deg)
Total reading (MSR +
VSR)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(deg)
1.
2.
The angle of scriber of the vernier height gauge =
Result:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thus the various precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab are studied and the specimen
dimensions are recorded.
Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for linear, angular,
roundness and roughness measurements they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

instrument according to a specific requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).
Application:
1. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Metrology
2. Define ? Inspection
3. What are the needs of inspection in industries?
4. What are the various methods involving the measurement?
5. Define ? Precision

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Define ? Accuracy
7. Define ? Calibration
8. Define ? Repeatability
9. Define ? Magnification
10. Define ? Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. Define ? Systematic Error
12. Define ? Random Error
13. Define ? Parallax Error
14. Define ? Environmental Error
15. Define ? Cosine Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

18 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.02 BUILD UP THE SLIP GAUGE FOR GIVEN DIMENSION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? A STUDY
Aim:
To build up the slip gauge for given dimension
Apparatus required:
1. Slip gauges set

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Surface plate
3. Soft cloth
Diagram:

Description:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Slip gauge are universally accepted standard of length in industry. They are the working standard for
linear dimension. These were invented by a Swedish Engineer, C.E. Johansson. They are used
1. For direct precise measurement where the accuracy of the workpiece demand it.
2. For use with high- magnification comparators to establish the size of the gauge blocks in general
use.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Gauge blocks are also used for many other purposes such as checking the accuracy of measuring
instrument or setting up a comparator to a specific dimension, enabling a batch of component to be
quickly and accurately checked or indeed in any situation where there is need to refer to standard of
known length these blocks are rectangular.
19 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Most gauge blocks are produced from high grade steel, hardened and established by a heat treatment
process to give a high degree of dimensional stability. Gauge blocks are also manufactured from tungsten
carbide which is an extremely hard and wear resistant material. The measuring faces have a lapped finish.
The faces are perfectly flat and parallel to one another with a high degree of accuracy. Each block has an

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

extremely high dimensional accuracy at 20
o
C.
These slip gauge are available in variety of selected sets both in inch units and metric units. Letter ?E? is
used for inch units and ?M? is used for metric standard number of pieces in a set following the letter E or M. For

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

example EBI refers to a set whose blocks are in metric units and are 83 in number. Each block dimensions is
printed on anyone of its face itself the size of any required standard being made up by combining the
appropriate number of these different size blocks.
If two gauges are slid and twisted together under pressure they will firmly join together. This process,
known as wringing, is very useful because it enables several gauge blocks to be assembled together to

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

produce a required size. In fact the success of precision measurement by slip gauges depends on the
phenomenon of wringing.
First the gauge is oscillated slightly with very light pressure over other gauge so as to detect pressure at
any foreign particles between the surfaces. One gauge is placed perpendicular to other using standard
gauging pressure and rotary motion is applied until the blocks are lined up.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. Build the given dimension by wringing minimum number of slip gauges.
2. Note the given dimension and choose the minimum possible slip gauge available in the set so as to
accommodate the last decimal value. The minimum slip gauge value dimension available i.e., 1.12
mm must be chosen followed by 1.5 mm thick gauge block.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Follow the above steps to build up the slip gauge of any dimension.
Precautions:
1. Slip gauges should be handled very carefully placed gently and should never be dropped.
2. Whenever a slip gauge is being removed from the set, its dimensions are noted and must be
replaced into the set at its appropriate place only.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Correct procedure must be followed in wringing and also in removing the gauge blocks.
4. They should be cleaned well before use and petroleum jelly is applied after use.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

20 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:
Range (mm) Increment (mm) No. of pieces

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total = ____________ Pieces
Total length of slip gauge = ________ mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Given diameter Slip gauges used Obtained dimensions

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Slip gauge set is studied and the given dimensions are building up by wringing minimum number of slip
gauges.
Outcome:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Students will be able to select proper measuring instrument and know requirement of calibration, errors
in measurement etc. They can perform accurate measurements.
Application:
1. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Why C.I. is preferred material for surface plates and tables?
2. Why V ? blocks are generally manufactured in pairs?
3. Why micrometer is required to be tested for accuracy?
4. Define ? Linear Measurement
5. List the linear measuring instrument according to their accuracy.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Define ? Least Count
7. What are the uses of vernier depth gauge?
8. What are the uses of feeler gauges?
9. What are the uses of straight edge?
10. What are the uses of angle plate?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. What are the uses of V ? block?
12. What are the uses of combination square?
13. What precautions should be taken while using slip gauges?
14. What is wringing?
15. Why the slip gauges are termed as ?End standard?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

22 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.03 THREAD PARAMETERS MEASUREMENT USING
TOOL MAKERS MICROSCOPE
Aim:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To study the tool makers microscope and in the process measure the various dimensions of the given
specimen
Apparatus required:
1. Tool makers microscope
2. Specimen

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diagram:

Description:
The tool maker?s microscope is designed for measurement of parts of complex forms; for example,
profile of a tool having external threads. It can also be used for measuring centre to centre distance of the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

holes in any plane as well as the coordinates of the outline of a complex template gauge, using the
coordinates measuring system.
23 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Basically it consists of an optical head which can be adjusted vertically along the ways of supporting

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

column. The optical head can be clamped at any position by a screw. On the work table (which as a circular
base in which there are graduations) the part to be inspected is placed. The table has a compound slide by
means of which the part can be measured. For giving these two movements, there are two micrometer screws
having thimble scales and verniers. At the back of the base light source is arranged that provides horizontal
beam of light, reflected from a mirror by 90 degrees upwards towards the table. The beam of light passes

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

through the transparent glass plate on which flat plates can be checked are placed. Observations are made
through the eyepiece of the optical head.
Procedure:
1. Place the given specimen on the work table and switch on all the three light sources and adjust the
intensity of the light source until a clean image of the cross wires and specimen are seen through

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the eyepiece.
2. Coincide one of the two extreme edges between which the measurement has to be taken with
vertical or horizontal cross wires and depending upon the other image coincide with the same cross
wires by moving the above device. Note the reading.The difference between the two readings gives
the value of the required measurement.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Note the experiment specimen and the readings.
4. Tabulate the different measurements measured from the specimen.
Determination of thread parameters
Magnification =
S.No. Parameters

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Magnified value
(mm)
Actual value
(mm)
1. Outer diameter (O.D)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Internal diameter (I.D)

3. Pitch

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Flank angle


Result:
Included angle of the tool was measured using tool maker?s microscope and various dimensions of the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

given specimen are measured.


24 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the various parameters of thread and select proper measuring
instrument and know requirement of calibration, errors in measurement etc. They can perform accurate
measurements.
Application:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Machine Shop
2. Quality Department


1. What is meant by tool maker?s microscope?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. What is the light used in tool maker?s microscope?
3. What are the various characteristics that you would measure in a screw thread?
4. What are the instruments that are required for measuring screw thread?
5. Define ? Pitch
6. What are the causes of pitch error?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Define ? Flank
8. What are the effects of flank angle error?
9. What is progressive error?
10. What is periodic error?
11. What is drunken error?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. What is erratic error?
13. What are the applications of tool maker?s microscope?
14. What are the limitations of tool maker?s microscope?
15. What are the advantages of tool maker?s microscope?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

25 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.04 CALIBRATION OF DIAL GAUGE USING SLIP GAUGE
Aim:
To find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Apparatus required:
Dial gauge, magnetic stand, slip gauge, and surface plate
Diagram:

Description:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The dial test indicator is a precision measuring instrument which can convert linear motion into angular
motion by means of transmission mechanics of rack and pinion and can be used to measure linear vibration
and errors of shape.
This instrument has the features such as good appearance, compact size, light weight, high precision,
reasonable construction, constant measuring face etc. Rigidity of all parts is excellent. Probe is tipped with

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

carbide balls. A shock proof mechanism is provided for those with larger measuring range.

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice
1 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING


ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

V SEMESTER - R 2013

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No. : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LABORATORY MANUAL
2 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


3 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DHANALAKSHMI


College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.


1. To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
2. To contribute to the promotion of Academic Excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

levels
3. To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

DEPARTMENT OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rendering the services to the global needs of engineering industries by educating students to become
professionally sound mechanical engineers of excellent caliber

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To produce mechanical engineering technocrats with a perfect knowledge intellectual and hands on
experience and to inculcate the spirit of moral values and ethics to serve the society

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MISSION
MISSION
VISION

VISION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To impart students with fundamental knowledge in mathematics and basic sciences that will mould
them to be successful professionals
2. Core competence
To provide students with sound knowledge in engineering and experimental skills to identify
complex software problems in industry and to develop a practical solution for them

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theory and practice which
enable them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and organization and to design
products requiring interdisciplinary skills
4. Professional skills

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To bestow students with adequate training and provide opportunities to work as team that will build
up their communication skills, individual, leadership and supportive qualities and to enable them to
adapt and to work in ever changing technologies
5. Life-long learning
To develop the ability of students to establish themselves as professionals in mechanical

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

engineering and to create awareness about the need for lifelong learning and pursuing advanced
degrees

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)
On completion of the B.E. (Mechanical) degree, the graduate will be able
a) To apply the basic knowledge of mathematics, science and engineering
b) To design and conduct experiments as well as to analyze and interpret data and apply the same in
the career or entrepreneurship

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

c) To design and develop innovative and creative software applications
d) To understand a complex real world problem and develop an efficient practical solution
e) To create, select and apply appropriate techniques, resources, modern engineering and IT tools
f) To understand the role as a professional and give the best to the society
g) To develop a system that will meet expected needs within realistic constraints such as economical

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

environmental, social, political, ethical, safety and sustainability
h) To communicate effectively and make others understand exactly what they are trying to tell in both
verbal and written forms
i) To work in a team as a team member or a leader and make unique contributions and work with
coordination

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

j) To engage in lifelong learning and exhibit their technical skills
k) To develop and manage projects in multidisciplinary environments

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To familiar with different measurement equipment?s and use of this industry for quality inspection
List of Experiments
1. Tool Maker?s Microscope

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Comparator
3. Sine Bar
4. Gear Tooth Vernier Caliper
5. Floating gauge Micrometer
6. Coordinate Measuring Machine

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Surface Finish Measuring Equipment
8. Vernier Height Gauge
9. Bore diameter measurement using telescope gauge
10. Bore diameter measurement using micrometer
11. Force Measurement

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. Torque Measurement
13. Temperature measurement
14. Autocollimator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Ability to handle different measurement tools and perform measurements in quality impulsion
2. Learnt the usage of precision measuring instruments and practiced to take measurements
3. Learnt and practiced to build the required dimensions using slip gauge
4. Able to measure the various dimensions of the given specimen using the tool maker?s microscope
5. Able to find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Able to measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare
7. Learnt to determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen using Gear tooth vernier
8. Able to measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two
wire method
9. Learnt to study the construction and operation of coordinate measuring machine

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. Learnt to determine the diameter of bore by using telescopic gauge and dial bore indicator
11. Able to measure the surface roughness using Talysurf instrument
12. Studied the characteristic between applied load and the output volt
13. Learnt the characteristics of developing torque and respective sensor output voltage
14. Studied the characteristics of thermocouple without compensation

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15. Able to check the straightness & flatness of the given component by using Autocollimator
16. Learnt to measure the displacement using LVDT and to calibrate it with the millimeter scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OBJECTIVES

COURSE OUTCOMES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

CONTENTS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl. No. Name of the Experiments Page No.
CYCLE ? 1 EXPERIMENTS
1
Precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab ? A Study
7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
To build up the slip gauge for given dimension ? A Study
16
3
Thread parameters measurement using Tool Makers Microscope

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

20
4
Calibration of dial gauge
23
5

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of taper angle by sine bar method
26
6
Determination of gear tooth thickness using gear tooth vernier
29

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7
Measurement of thread parameters using floating carriage micrometer
32
CYCLE ? 2 EXPERIMENTS
8

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement of various dimensions using Coordinate Measuring Machine
35
9
Measurement of surface roughness
39

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
Measurement of bores using dial bore indicator and telescopic gauge
42
11
Force measurement using load cell

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

46
12
Torque measurement using strain gauge
49
13

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Temperature measurement using thermocouple
53
14
Measurement of alignment using autocollimator
56

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ADDITIONAL EXPERIMENT BEYOND THE SYLLABUS
15
Thread parameters measurement using profile projector
60
16

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Displacement measurement ? linear variable differential transducer (LVDT)
62
PROJECT WORK
65

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.01 PRECISION MEASURING INSTRUMENT YSED IN
METROLOGY LAB ? A STUDY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Aim:
To study the following instruments and their usage for measuring dimensions of given specimen
1. Vernier caliper
2. Micrometer
3. Vernier height gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Depth micrometer
5. Universal bevel protractor
Apparatus required:
Surface plate, specimen and above instruments
Vernier caliper:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The principle of vernier caliper is to use the minor difference between the sizes two scales or divisions
for measurement. The difference between them can be utilized to enhance the accuracy of measurement. The
vernier caliper essentially consists of two steel rules, sliding along each other.
Parts:
Different parts of the vernier caliper are

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Beam ? It has main scale.
2. Fixed jaw
3. Sliding or Moving jaw ? It has vernier scale and sliding jaw locking screw.
4. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw knife
edges for internal measurement.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Stem or depth bar for depth measurement
Least count:
Least count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 VSD = 0.98 mm
Least count = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm

10 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ID

DEPTH

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OD
Measurement:
Given Vernier caliper can be used for external, internal depth, slot and step measurement.
Measurement principle:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

When both jaws contact each other scale shows the zero reading. The finer adjustment of movable jaw
can be done by the fine adjustment screw. First the whole movable jaw assembly is adjusted so that the two
measuring tips just touch the part to be measured. Then the fine adjustment clamp locking screw is tightened.
Final adjustment depending upon the sense of correct feel is made by the adjusting screw. After final
adjustment has been made sliding jaw locking screw is also tightened and the reading is noted.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

All the parts of the Vernier caliper are made of good quality steel and measuring faces are hardened.
Types of vernier:
Vernier caliper, electronic vernier caliper, vernier depth caliper

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:

Main scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

reading (MSR)
(mm)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

reading (VSR) (mm)
Total reading (MSR
+ VSR)
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OD


ID

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Depth


Vernier height gauge:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier height gauge is a sort of vernier caliper equipped with a special instrument suitable for height
measurement. It is always kept on the surface plate and the use of the surfaces plates as datum surfaces is
very essential.
Least count:
Least Count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm
1 VSD = 0.98 mm
Least Count (LC) = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm
Parts:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Base
2. Beam ? It has main scale.
3. Slider ? It has a vernier scale and slider locking screw.
4. Scriber
5. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Material:
All the parts of vernier are made of good quality steel and the measuring faces hardened.
Types of vernier gauge:
1. Analog vernier height gauge
2. Digital vernier height gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Electronic vernier height gauge
Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Main scale reading
(MSR)(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale reading
(VSR)(mm)
Total reading (MSR +

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSR)(mm)
1.
2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Outside micrometer:
The micrometer essentially consists of an accurate screw having about 10 or 20 threads per cm. The
end of the screw forms one measuring tip and other measuring tip is constituted by a stationary anvil in the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

base of the frame. The screw is threaded for certain length and is plain afterwards. The plain portion is called
spindle and its end is the measuring surface. The spindle is advanced or retracted by turning a thimble
connected to a spindle. The spindle is a slide fit over the barrel and barrel is the fixed part attached with the
frame. The barrel & thimble are graduated. The pitch of the screw threads is 0.5 mm.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count:
Least Count (LC) = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale
= 0.5 / 50 = 0.01 mm
Parts:
1. Frame

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Anvil
3. Spindle
4. Spindle lock
5. Barrel or outside sleeve
6. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.
The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.
14 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Measurement:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

It can be used for any external measurement.
Types of micrometer:
1. Outside micrometer, 2. Inside micrometer, 3.Depth micrometer, 4. Stick micrometer, 5. Screw thread
micrometer, 6. V ? anvil micrometer, 7. Blade type micrometer, 8. Dial micrometer, 9. Bench micrometer, 10.
Tape screw operated internal micrometer, 11. Groove micrometer, 12. Digital micrometer, 13.Differential screw

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

micrometer, 14.Adjustable range outside micrometer.
Ratchet stop mechanism:
The object of the ratchet stop is to ensure that same level of torque is applied on the spindle while
measuring and the sense of the feel of operator is eliminated and consistent readings are obtained. By
providing this arrangement, the ratchet stop is made slip off when the torque applied to rotate the spindle

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

exceeds the set torque. Thus this provision ensures the application of same amount of torque during the
measurement.
Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Pitch Scale Reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(PSR) (mm)
Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)
Head scale reading
(HSR x LC) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total Reading (PSR
+ HSR) (mm)
1.
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Depth micrometer:
Depth micrometer is a sort of micrometer which is mainly used for measuring depth of holes, so it is
named as depth micrometer.
Parts:
1. Shoulder

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Spindle
3. Spindle lock
4. Barrel or outside sleeve ? It has pitch scale.
5. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions.
6. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.
15 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


Least count:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least Count = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale = 0.50/50
= 0.01 mm
Measurements:
It can be used for measuring the depth of holes, slots and recessed areas. The pitch of the screw thread
is 0.5 mm. The least count is 0.01 mm. Shoulder acts as a reference surface and is held firmly and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

perpendicular to the centre line of the hole. For large range of measurement extension rods are used. In the
barrel the scale is calibrated. The accuracy again depends upon the sense of touch.
Procedure:
First, calculate the least count of the instrument. Check the zero error. Measure the specimen note
down the main scale reading or the head scale reading. Note down the vernier or head scale coincidence with

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

main or pitch scale divisions.
Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)
Head scale reading
(HSR x LC) (mm)
Total Reading (PSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

+ HSR) (mm)

1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.


16 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Universal bevel protractor:

Description:
Bevel protractor is an instrument for measuring the angle between the two faces of a specimen. It
consists of a base plate on which a circular scale is engraved. It is graduated in degrees. An adjustment plate

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

is attached to a circular plate containing the vernier scale. The adjustable blade can be locked in any position.
The circular plate has 360 division divided into four parts of 90 degrees each. The adjustable parts have 24
divisions of to the right and left sides of zero reading. These scales are used according to the position of the
specimen with respect to movable scale.
Procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Place the specimen whose taper is to be measured between the adjustable plate and movable
blade with one of its face parallel to the base.
2. Lock the adjustable plate in position and note down the main scale reading depending upon the
direction of rotation of adjustable plate in clockwise or anticlockwise.
3. Note the VSC to the right of zero.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Multiply the VSC with the least count and add to MSR to obtain the actual reading.
Least count:
Least Count = 2 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

24 VSD = 46
o
=> 1 VSD = 23/12
LC = 2 ? 23/12 = 1/12
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= 5? (five minutes)



17 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Main scale reading
(MSR) (deg)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale reading
(VSR) (deg)
Total reading (MSR +

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSR)
(deg)
1.
2.
The angle of scriber of the vernier height gauge =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Thus the various precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab are studied and the specimen
dimensions are recorded.
Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for linear, angular,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

roundness and roughness measurements they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring
instrument according to a specific requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).
Application:
1. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Metrology
2. Define ? Inspection
3. What are the needs of inspection in industries?
4. What are the various methods involving the measurement?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Define ? Precision
6. Define ? Accuracy
7. Define ? Calibration
8. Define ? Repeatability
9. Define ? Magnification

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. Define ? Error
11. Define ? Systematic Error
12. Define ? Random Error
13. Define ? Parallax Error
14. Define ? Environmental Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15. Define ? Cosine Error
Viva-voce

18 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.02 BUILD UP THE SLIP GAUGE FOR GIVEN DIMENSION
? A STUDY
Aim:
To build up the slip gauge for given dimension
Apparatus required:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Slip gauges set
2. Surface plate
3. Soft cloth
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
Slip gauge are universally accepted standard of length in industry. They are the working standard for
linear dimension. These were invented by a Swedish Engineer, C.E. Johansson. They are used
1. For direct precise measurement where the accuracy of the workpiece demand it.
2. For use with high- magnification comparators to establish the size of the gauge blocks in general

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

use.
3. Gauge blocks are also used for many other purposes such as checking the accuracy of measuring
instrument or setting up a comparator to a specific dimension, enabling a batch of component to be
quickly and accurately checked or indeed in any situation where there is need to refer to standard of
known length these blocks are rectangular.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

19 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Most gauge blocks are produced from high grade steel, hardened and established by a heat treatment
process to give a high degree of dimensional stability. Gauge blocks are also manufactured from tungsten
carbide which is an extremely hard and wear resistant material. The measuring faces have a lapped finish.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The faces are perfectly flat and parallel to one another with a high degree of accuracy. Each block has an
extremely high dimensional accuracy at 20
o
C.
These slip gauge are available in variety of selected sets both in inch units and metric units. Letter ?E? is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

used for inch units and ?M? is used for metric standard number of pieces in a set following the letter E or M. For
example EBI refers to a set whose blocks are in metric units and are 83 in number. Each block dimensions is
printed on anyone of its face itself the size of any required standard being made up by combining the
appropriate number of these different size blocks.
If two gauges are slid and twisted together under pressure they will firmly join together. This process,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

known as wringing, is very useful because it enables several gauge blocks to be assembled together to
produce a required size. In fact the success of precision measurement by slip gauges depends on the
phenomenon of wringing.
First the gauge is oscillated slightly with very light pressure over other gauge so as to detect pressure at
any foreign particles between the surfaces. One gauge is placed perpendicular to other using standard

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

gauging pressure and rotary motion is applied until the blocks are lined up.
Procedure:
1. Build the given dimension by wringing minimum number of slip gauges.
2. Note the given dimension and choose the minimum possible slip gauge available in the set so as to
accommodate the last decimal value. The minimum slip gauge value dimension available i.e., 1.12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

mm must be chosen followed by 1.5 mm thick gauge block.
3. Follow the above steps to build up the slip gauge of any dimension.
Precautions:
1. Slip gauges should be handled very carefully placed gently and should never be dropped.
2. Whenever a slip gauge is being removed from the set, its dimensions are noted and must be

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

replaced into the set at its appropriate place only.
3. Correct procedure must be followed in wringing and also in removing the gauge blocks.
4. They should be cleaned well before use and petroleum jelly is applied after use.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

20 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:
Range (mm) Increment (mm) No. of pieces

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total = ____________ Pieces

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total length of slip gauge = ________ mm
Given diameter Slip gauges used Obtained dimensions

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Slip gauge set is studied and the given dimensions are building up by wringing minimum number of slip
gauges.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Students will be able to select proper measuring instrument and know requirement of calibration, errors
in measurement etc. They can perform accurate measurements.
Application:
1. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Why C.I. is preferred material for surface plates and tables?
2. Why V ? blocks are generally manufactured in pairs?
3. Why micrometer is required to be tested for accuracy?
4. Define ? Linear Measurement

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. List the linear measuring instrument according to their accuracy.
6. Define ? Least Count
7. What are the uses of vernier depth gauge?
8. What are the uses of feeler gauges?
9. What are the uses of straight edge?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. What are the uses of angle plate?
11. What are the uses of V ? block?
12. What are the uses of combination square?
13. What precautions should be taken while using slip gauges?
14. What is wringing?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15. Why the slip gauges are termed as ?End standard?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

22 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


Expt.No.03 THREAD PARAMETERS MEASUREMENT USING
TOOL MAKERS MICROSCOPE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Aim:
To study the tool makers microscope and in the process measure the various dimensions of the given
specimen
Apparatus required:
1. Tool makers microscope

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Specimen
Diagram:

Description:
The tool maker?s microscope is designed for measurement of parts of complex forms; for example,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

profile of a tool having external threads. It can also be used for measuring centre to centre distance of the
holes in any plane as well as the coordinates of the outline of a complex template gauge, using the
coordinates measuring system.
23 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Basically it consists of an optical head which can be adjusted vertically along the ways of supporting
column. The optical head can be clamped at any position by a screw. On the work table (which as a circular
base in which there are graduations) the part to be inspected is placed. The table has a compound slide by
means of which the part can be measured. For giving these two movements, there are two micrometer screws
having thimble scales and verniers. At the back of the base light source is arranged that provides horizontal

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

beam of light, reflected from a mirror by 90 degrees upwards towards the table. The beam of light passes
through the transparent glass plate on which flat plates can be checked are placed. Observations are made
through the eyepiece of the optical head.
Procedure:
1. Place the given specimen on the work table and switch on all the three light sources and adjust the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

intensity of the light source until a clean image of the cross wires and specimen are seen through
the eyepiece.
2. Coincide one of the two extreme edges between which the measurement has to be taken with
vertical or horizontal cross wires and depending upon the other image coincide with the same cross
wires by moving the above device. Note the reading.The difference between the two readings gives

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the value of the required measurement.
3. Note the experiment specimen and the readings.
4. Tabulate the different measurements measured from the specimen.
Determination of thread parameters
Magnification =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

S.No. Parameters
Magnified value
(mm)
Actual value
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Outer diameter (O.D)

2. Internal diameter (I.D)

3. Pitch

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Flank angle


Result:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Included angle of the tool was measured using tool maker?s microscope and various dimensions of the
given specimen are measured.


24 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the various parameters of thread and select proper measuring
instrument and know requirement of calibration, errors in measurement etc. They can perform accurate
measurements.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Machine Shop
2. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by tool maker?s microscope?
2. What is the light used in tool maker?s microscope?
3. What are the various characteristics that you would measure in a screw thread?
4. What are the instruments that are required for measuring screw thread?
5. Define ? Pitch

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. What are the causes of pitch error?
7. Define ? Flank
8. What are the effects of flank angle error?
9. What is progressive error?
10. What is periodic error?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. What is drunken error?
12. What is erratic error?
13. What are the applications of tool maker?s microscope?
14. What are the limitations of tool maker?s microscope?
15. What are the advantages of tool maker?s microscope?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

25 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.04 CALIBRATION OF DIAL GAUGE USING SLIP GAUGE
Aim:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge
Apparatus required:
Dial gauge, magnetic stand, slip gauge, and surface plate
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
The dial test indicator is a precision measuring instrument which can convert linear motion into angular
motion by means of transmission mechanics of rack and pinion and can be used to measure linear vibration
and errors of shape.
This instrument has the features such as good appearance, compact size, light weight, high precision,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

reasonable construction, constant measuring face etc. Rigidity of all parts is excellent. Probe is tipped with
carbide balls. A shock proof mechanism is provided for those with larger measuring range.

26 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Types of dial indicator:
1. Plunger type
2. Lever type
Plunger type dial indicator has a resolution counter and each division in main scale is 0.01 mm. In lever
type dial test indicator is replaced by ball type stylus.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. Fix the dial gauge to the stand rigidly and place the stand on the surface plate.
2. Set the plunger of dial gauge to first touch the upper surface of standard slip gauge and set indicator
to zero.
3. Raise then the plunger by pulling the screw above the dial scale.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Place the standard slip gauge underneath the plunger.
5. Release the plunger and let it to touch the standard slip gauge.
6. Note the reading on the dial scale.
Formulae:
The standard error of dial gauge is calculated by the formula

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
S.No.
Slip gauge reading ?x?
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Dial gauge reading
(mm)
(x? - x)
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x? (x? - x)
1.
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Thus the accuracy and standard error of dial gauge is found. The standard error of given dial gauge is
__________.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice
1 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

V SEMESTER - R 2013

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No. : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Section : _______________________________________


LABORATORY MANUAL
2 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

DHANALAKSHMI

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
2. To contribute to the promotion of Academic Excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels
3. To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

and soul

DEPARTMENT OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rendering the services to the global needs of engineering industries by educating students to become
professionally sound mechanical engineers of excellent caliber


To produce mechanical engineering technocrats with a perfect knowledge intellectual and hands on

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

experience and to inculcate the spirit of moral values and ethics to serve the society

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MISSION
MISSION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION

VISION

4 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals
To impart students with fundamental knowledge in mathematics and basic sciences that will mould
them to be successful professionals

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Core competence
To provide students with sound knowledge in engineering and experimental skills to identify
complex software problems in industry and to develop a practical solution for them
3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theory and practice which

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

enable them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and organization and to design
products requiring interdisciplinary skills
4. Professional skills
To bestow students with adequate training and provide opportunities to work as team that will build
up their communication skills, individual, leadership and supportive qualities and to enable them to

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

adapt and to work in ever changing technologies
5. Life-long learning
To develop the ability of students to establish themselves as professionals in mechanical
engineering and to create awareness about the need for lifelong learning and pursuing advanced
degrees

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)
On completion of the B.E. (Mechanical) degree, the graduate will be able

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

a) To apply the basic knowledge of mathematics, science and engineering
b) To design and conduct experiments as well as to analyze and interpret data and apply the same in
the career or entrepreneurship
c) To design and develop innovative and creative software applications
d) To understand a complex real world problem and develop an efficient practical solution

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

e) To create, select and apply appropriate techniques, resources, modern engineering and IT tools
f) To understand the role as a professional and give the best to the society
g) To develop a system that will meet expected needs within realistic constraints such as economical
environmental, social, political, ethical, safety and sustainability
h) To communicate effectively and make others understand exactly what they are trying to tell in both

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

verbal and written forms
i) To work in a team as a team member or a leader and make unique contributions and work with
coordination
j) To engage in lifelong learning and exhibit their technical skills
k) To develop and manage projects in multidisciplinary environments

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To familiar with different measurement equipment?s and use of this industry for quality inspection
List of Experiments
1. Tool Maker?s Microscope
2. Comparator
3. Sine Bar

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Gear Tooth Vernier Caliper
5. Floating gauge Micrometer
6. Coordinate Measuring Machine
7. Surface Finish Measuring Equipment
8. Vernier Height Gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. Bore diameter measurement using telescope gauge
10. Bore diameter measurement using micrometer
11. Force Measurement
12. Torque Measurement
13. Temperature measurement

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. Autocollimator


1. Ability to handle different measurement tools and perform measurements in quality impulsion
2. Learnt the usage of precision measuring instruments and practiced to take measurements

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Learnt and practiced to build the required dimensions using slip gauge
4. Able to measure the various dimensions of the given specimen using the tool maker?s microscope
5. Able to find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge
6. Able to measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare
7. Learnt to determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen using Gear tooth vernier

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Able to measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two
wire method
9. Learnt to study the construction and operation of coordinate measuring machine
10. Learnt to determine the diameter of bore by using telescopic gauge and dial bore indicator
11. Able to measure the surface roughness using Talysurf instrument

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. Studied the characteristic between applied load and the output volt
13. Learnt the characteristics of developing torque and respective sensor output voltage
14. Studied the characteristics of thermocouple without compensation
15. Able to check the straightness & flatness of the given component by using Autocollimator
16. Learnt to measure the displacement using LVDT and to calibrate it with the millimeter scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OBJECTIVES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OUTCOMES

7 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

CONTENTS
Sl. No. Name of the Experiments Page No.
CYCLE ? 1 EXPERIMENTS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1
Precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab ? A Study
7
2
To build up the slip gauge for given dimension ? A Study

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16
3
Thread parameters measurement using Tool Makers Microscope
20
4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Calibration of dial gauge
23
5
Determination of taper angle by sine bar method
26

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6
Determination of gear tooth thickness using gear tooth vernier
29
7
Measurement of thread parameters using floating carriage micrometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

32
CYCLE ? 2 EXPERIMENTS
8
Measurement of various dimensions using Coordinate Measuring Machine
35

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9
Measurement of surface roughness
39
10
Measurement of bores using dial bore indicator and telescopic gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

42
11
Force measurement using load cell
46
12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Torque measurement using strain gauge
49
13
Temperature measurement using thermocouple
53

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14
Measurement of alignment using autocollimator
56
ADDITIONAL EXPERIMENT BEYOND THE SYLLABUS
15

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thread parameters measurement using profile projector
60
16
Displacement measurement ? linear variable differential transducer (LVDT)
62

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROJECT WORK
65


8 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.01 PRECISION MEASURING INSTRUMENT YSED IN
METROLOGY LAB ? A STUDY
Aim:
To study the following instruments and their usage for measuring dimensions of given specimen

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Vernier caliper
2. Micrometer
3. Vernier height gauge
4. Depth micrometer
5. Universal bevel protractor

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Apparatus required:
Surface plate, specimen and above instruments
Vernier caliper:
The principle of vernier caliper is to use the minor difference between the sizes two scales or divisions
for measurement. The difference between them can be utilized to enhance the accuracy of measurement. The

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

vernier caliper essentially consists of two steel rules, sliding along each other.
Parts:
Different parts of the vernier caliper are
1. Beam ? It has main scale.
2. Fixed jaw

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Sliding or Moving jaw ? It has vernier scale and sliding jaw locking screw.
4. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw knife
edges for internal measurement.
5. Stem or depth bar for depth measurement
Least count:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm
1 VSD = 0.98 mm
Least count = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


ID

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPTH


OD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement:
Given Vernier caliper can be used for external, internal depth, slot and step measurement.
Measurement principle:
When both jaws contact each other scale shows the zero reading. The finer adjustment of movable jaw
can be done by the fine adjustment screw. First the whole movable jaw assembly is adjusted so that the two

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measuring tips just touch the part to be measured. Then the fine adjustment clamp locking screw is tightened.
Final adjustment depending upon the sense of correct feel is made by the adjusting screw. After final
adjustment has been made sliding jaw locking screw is also tightened and the reading is noted.
All the parts of the Vernier caliper are made of good quality steel and measuring faces are hardened.
Types of vernier:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier caliper, electronic vernier caliper, vernier depth caliper


11 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:

Main scale
reading (MSR)
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale
reading (VSR) (mm)
Total reading (MSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

+ VSR)
(mm)

OD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ID


Depth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier height gauge:
Vernier height gauge is a sort of vernier caliper equipped with a special instrument suitable for height
measurement. It is always kept on the surface plate and the use of the surfaces plates as datum surfaces is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

very essential.
Least count:
Least Count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 VSD = 0.98 mm
Least Count (LC) = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm
Parts:
1. Base
2. Beam ? It has main scale.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Slider ? It has a vernier scale and slider locking screw.
4. Scriber
5. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


Material:
All the parts of vernier are made of good quality steel and the measuring faces hardened.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Types of vernier gauge:
1. Analog vernier height gauge
2. Digital vernier height gauge
3. Electronic vernier height gauge
Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
Main scale reading
(MSR)(mm)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier scale reading
(VSR)(mm)
Total reading (MSR +
VSR)(mm)
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.
3.

13 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outside micrometer:
The micrometer essentially consists of an accurate screw having about 10 or 20 threads per cm. The
end of the screw forms one measuring tip and other measuring tip is constituted by a stationary anvil in the
base of the frame. The screw is threaded for certain length and is plain afterwards. The plain portion is called
spindle and its end is the measuring surface. The spindle is advanced or retracted by turning a thimble

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

connected to a spindle. The spindle is a slide fit over the barrel and barrel is the fixed part attached with the
frame. The barrel & thimble are graduated. The pitch of the screw threads is 0.5 mm.

Least count:
Least Count (LC) = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= 0.5 / 50 = 0.01 mm
Parts:
1. Frame
2. Anvil
3. Spindle

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Spindle lock
5. Barrel or outside sleeve
6. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions
7. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.
The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Measurement:
It can be used for any external measurement.
Types of micrometer:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Outside micrometer, 2. Inside micrometer, 3.Depth micrometer, 4. Stick micrometer, 5. Screw thread
micrometer, 6. V ? anvil micrometer, 7. Blade type micrometer, 8. Dial micrometer, 9. Bench micrometer, 10.
Tape screw operated internal micrometer, 11. Groove micrometer, 12. Digital micrometer, 13.Differential screw
micrometer, 14.Adjustable range outside micrometer.
Ratchet stop mechanism:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The object of the ratchet stop is to ensure that same level of torque is applied on the spindle while
measuring and the sense of the feel of operator is eliminated and consistent readings are obtained. By
providing this arrangement, the ratchet stop is made slip off when the torque applied to rotate the spindle
exceeds the set torque. Thus this provision ensures the application of same amount of torque during the
measurement.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) (mm)
Head Scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Coincidence (HSC)
Head scale reading
(HSR x LC) (mm)
Total Reading (PSR
+ HSR) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
2.

Depth micrometer:
Depth micrometer is a sort of micrometer which is mainly used for measuring depth of holes, so it is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

named as depth micrometer.
Parts:
1. Shoulder
2. Spindle
3. Spindle lock

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Barrel or outside sleeve ? It has pitch scale.
5. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions.
6. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.
The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.
15 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count:
Least Count = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale = 0.50/50
= 0.01 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurements:
It can be used for measuring the depth of holes, slots and recessed areas. The pitch of the screw thread
is 0.5 mm. The least count is 0.01 mm. Shoulder acts as a reference surface and is held firmly and
perpendicular to the centre line of the hole. For large range of measurement extension rods are used. In the
barrel the scale is calibrated. The accuracy again depends upon the sense of touch.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
First, calculate the least count of the instrument. Check the zero error. Measure the specimen note
down the main scale reading or the head scale reading. Note down the vernier or head scale coincidence with
main or pitch scale divisions.
Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) (mm)
Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Head scale reading
(HSR x LC) (mm)
Total Reading (PSR
+ HSR) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.


2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Universal bevel protractor:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
Bevel protractor is an instrument for measuring the angle between the two faces of a specimen. It
consists of a base plate on which a circular scale is engraved. It is graduated in degrees. An adjustment plate
is attached to a circular plate containing the vernier scale. The adjustable blade can be locked in any position.
The circular plate has 360 division divided into four parts of 90 degrees each. The adjustable parts have 24

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

divisions of to the right and left sides of zero reading. These scales are used according to the position of the
specimen with respect to movable scale.
Procedure:
1. Place the specimen whose taper is to be measured between the adjustable plate and movable
blade with one of its face parallel to the base.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Lock the adjustable plate in position and note down the main scale reading depending upon the
direction of rotation of adjustable plate in clockwise or anticlockwise.
3. Note the VSC to the right of zero.
4. Multiply the VSC with the least count and add to MSR to obtain the actual reading.
Least count:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least Count = 2 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1
o
24 VSD = 46
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

=> 1 VSD = 23/12
LC = 2 ? 23/12 = 1/12
o
= 5? (five minutes)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
Main scale reading
(MSR) (deg)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier scale reading
(VSR) (deg)
Total reading (MSR +
VSR)
(deg)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
2.
The angle of scriber of the vernier height gauge =
Result:
Thus the various precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab are studied and the specimen

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

dimensions are recorded.
Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for linear, angular,
roundness and roughness measurements they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring
instrument according to a specific requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Quality Department


1. Define ? Metrology

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Define ? Inspection
3. What are the needs of inspection in industries?
4. What are the various methods involving the measurement?
5. Define ? Precision
6. Define ? Accuracy

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Define ? Calibration
8. Define ? Repeatability
9. Define ? Magnification
10. Define ? Error
11. Define ? Systematic Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. Define ? Random Error
13. Define ? Parallax Error
14. Define ? Environmental Error
15. Define ? Cosine Error
Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

18 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.02 BUILD UP THE SLIP GAUGE FOR GIVEN DIMENSION
? A STUDY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Aim:
To build up the slip gauge for given dimension
Apparatus required:
1. Slip gauges set
2. Surface plate

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Soft cloth
Diagram:

Description:
Slip gauge are universally accepted standard of length in industry. They are the working standard for

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

linear dimension. These were invented by a Swedish Engineer, C.E. Johansson. They are used
1. For direct precise measurement where the accuracy of the workpiece demand it.
2. For use with high- magnification comparators to establish the size of the gauge blocks in general
use.
3. Gauge blocks are also used for many other purposes such as checking the accuracy of measuring

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

instrument or setting up a comparator to a specific dimension, enabling a batch of component to be
quickly and accurately checked or indeed in any situation where there is need to refer to standard of
known length these blocks are rectangular.
19 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Most gauge blocks are produced from high grade steel, hardened and established by a heat treatment
process to give a high degree of dimensional stability. Gauge blocks are also manufactured from tungsten
carbide which is an extremely hard and wear resistant material. The measuring faces have a lapped finish.
The faces are perfectly flat and parallel to one another with a high degree of accuracy. Each block has an
extremely high dimensional accuracy at 20

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C.
These slip gauge are available in variety of selected sets both in inch units and metric units. Letter ?E? is
used for inch units and ?M? is used for metric standard number of pieces in a set following the letter E or M. For
example EBI refers to a set whose blocks are in metric units and are 83 in number. Each block dimensions is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

printed on anyone of its face itself the size of any required standard being made up by combining the
appropriate number of these different size blocks.
If two gauges are slid and twisted together under pressure they will firmly join together. This process,
known as wringing, is very useful because it enables several gauge blocks to be assembled together to
produce a required size. In fact the success of precision measurement by slip gauges depends on the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

phenomenon of wringing.
First the gauge is oscillated slightly with very light pressure over other gauge so as to detect pressure at
any foreign particles between the surfaces. One gauge is placed perpendicular to other using standard
gauging pressure and rotary motion is applied until the blocks are lined up.
Procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Build the given dimension by wringing minimum number of slip gauges.
2. Note the given dimension and choose the minimum possible slip gauge available in the set so as to
accommodate the last decimal value. The minimum slip gauge value dimension available i.e., 1.12
mm must be chosen followed by 1.5 mm thick gauge block.
3. Follow the above steps to build up the slip gauge of any dimension.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Precautions:
1. Slip gauges should be handled very carefully placed gently and should never be dropped.
2. Whenever a slip gauge is being removed from the set, its dimensions are noted and must be
replaced into the set at its appropriate place only.
3. Correct procedure must be followed in wringing and also in removing the gauge blocks.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. They should be cleaned well before use and petroleum jelly is applied after use.



20 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Range (mm) Increment (mm) No. of pieces

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total = ____________ Pieces
Total length of slip gauge = ________ mm
Given diameter Slip gauges used Obtained dimensions

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Slip gauge set is studied and the given dimensions are building up by wringing minimum number of slip
gauges.
Outcome:
Students will be able to select proper measuring instrument and know requirement of calibration, errors

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

in measurement etc. They can perform accurate measurements.
Application:
1. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Why C.I. is preferred material for surface plates and tables?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Why V ? blocks are generally manufactured in pairs?
3. Why micrometer is required to be tested for accuracy?
4. Define ? Linear Measurement
5. List the linear measuring instrument according to their accuracy.
6. Define ? Least Count

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. What are the uses of vernier depth gauge?
8. What are the uses of feeler gauges?
9. What are the uses of straight edge?
10. What are the uses of angle plate?
11. What are the uses of V ? block?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. What are the uses of combination square?
13. What precautions should be taken while using slip gauges?
14. What is wringing?
15. Why the slip gauges are termed as ?End standard?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

22 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.03 THREAD PARAMETERS MEASUREMENT USING
TOOL MAKERS MICROSCOPE
Aim:
To study the tool makers microscope and in the process measure the various dimensions of the given

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

specimen
Apparatus required:
1. Tool makers microscope
2. Specimen
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
The tool maker?s microscope is designed for measurement of parts of complex forms; for example,
profile of a tool having external threads. It can also be used for measuring centre to centre distance of the
holes in any plane as well as the coordinates of the outline of a complex template gauge, using the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

coordinates measuring system.
23 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Basically it consists of an optical head which can be adjusted vertically along the ways of supporting
column. The optical head can be clamped at any position by a screw. On the work table (which as a circular

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

base in which there are graduations) the part to be inspected is placed. The table has a compound slide by
means of which the part can be measured. For giving these two movements, there are two micrometer screws
having thimble scales and verniers. At the back of the base light source is arranged that provides horizontal
beam of light, reflected from a mirror by 90 degrees upwards towards the table. The beam of light passes
through the transparent glass plate on which flat plates can be checked are placed. Observations are made

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

through the eyepiece of the optical head.
Procedure:
1. Place the given specimen on the work table and switch on all the three light sources and adjust the
intensity of the light source until a clean image of the cross wires and specimen are seen through
the eyepiece.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Coincide one of the two extreme edges between which the measurement has to be taken with
vertical or horizontal cross wires and depending upon the other image coincide with the same cross
wires by moving the above device. Note the reading.The difference between the two readings gives
the value of the required measurement.
3. Note the experiment specimen and the readings.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Tabulate the different measurements measured from the specimen.
Determination of thread parameters
Magnification =
S.No. Parameters
Magnified value

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
Actual value
(mm)
1. Outer diameter (O.D)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Internal diameter (I.D)

3. Pitch

4. Flank angle

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Included angle of the tool was measured using tool maker?s microscope and various dimensions of the
given specimen are measured.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

24 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Outcome:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Students will be able to understand the various parameters of thread and select proper measuring
instrument and know requirement of calibration, errors in measurement etc. They can perform accurate
measurements.
Application:
1. Machine Shop

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Quality Department


1. What is meant by tool maker?s microscope?
2. What is the light used in tool maker?s microscope?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. What are the various characteristics that you would measure in a screw thread?
4. What are the instruments that are required for measuring screw thread?
5. Define ? Pitch
6. What are the causes of pitch error?
7. Define ? Flank

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. What are the effects of flank angle error?
9. What is progressive error?
10. What is periodic error?
11. What is drunken error?
12. What is erratic error?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. What are the applications of tool maker?s microscope?
14. What are the limitations of tool maker?s microscope?
15. What are the advantages of tool maker?s microscope?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

25 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.04 CALIBRATION OF DIAL GAUGE USING SLIP GAUGE
Aim:
To find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge
Apparatus required:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Dial gauge, magnetic stand, slip gauge, and surface plate
Diagram:

Description:
The dial test indicator is a precision measuring instrument which can convert linear motion into angular

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

motion by means of transmission mechanics of rack and pinion and can be used to measure linear vibration
and errors of shape.
This instrument has the features such as good appearance, compact size, light weight, high precision,
reasonable construction, constant measuring face etc. Rigidity of all parts is excellent. Probe is tipped with
carbide balls. A shock proof mechanism is provided for those with larger measuring range.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

26 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Types of dial indicator:
1. Plunger type

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Lever type
Plunger type dial indicator has a resolution counter and each division in main scale is 0.01 mm. In lever
type dial test indicator is replaced by ball type stylus.
Procedure:
1. Fix the dial gauge to the stand rigidly and place the stand on the surface plate.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Set the plunger of dial gauge to first touch the upper surface of standard slip gauge and set indicator
to zero.
3. Raise then the plunger by pulling the screw above the dial scale.
4. Place the standard slip gauge underneath the plunger.
5. Release the plunger and let it to touch the standard slip gauge.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Note the reading on the dial scale.
Formulae:
The standard error of dial gauge is calculated by the formula

Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

S.No.
Slip gauge reading ?x?
(mm)
Dial gauge reading
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x? - x)
2


x? (x? - x)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
2


Result:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thus the accuracy and standard error of dial gauge is found. The standard error of given dial gauge is
__________.

27 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Students will be able to check the variation in tolerance during the inspection process of a
machined part, measure the deflection of a beam or ring under laboratory conditions, as well as many
other situations where a small measurement needs to be registered or indicated
Application:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Milling Machine
2. Analog versus digital/electronic readout


1. What is comparator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. What are the types of comparators?
3. What is the LC for comparators?
4. What are the applications of comparator?
5. What is meant by plunger?
6. What are the types of dial indicators?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Why a revolution counter is not provided in lever type dial test indicator?
8. Draw a line diagram of the operating mechanism of plunger type dial test indicator.
9. Explain the term magnification of a dial indicator.
10. What are the uses of dial test indicator?
11. What are the practical applications of dial test indicator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. What precautions should be taken while using dial test indicator?
13. What are the desirable qualities of a dial test indicator?
14. What are the advantages of dial test indicator?
15. What are the limitations of dial test indicator?
16. Distinguish between comparator and measuring instrument.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17. What are the advantages of electrical comparator?
18. What are the advantages of optical comparator?
19. What are the uses of comparator?
20. What are the advantages and disadvantages of mechanical comparator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice
1 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

V SEMESTER - R 2013

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No. : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Section : _______________________________________


LABORATORY MANUAL
2 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

DHANALAKSHMI

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
2. To contribute to the promotion of Academic Excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels
3. To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

and soul

DEPARTMENT OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rendering the services to the global needs of engineering industries by educating students to become
professionally sound mechanical engineers of excellent caliber


To produce mechanical engineering technocrats with a perfect knowledge intellectual and hands on

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

experience and to inculcate the spirit of moral values and ethics to serve the society

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MISSION
MISSION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION

VISION

4 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals
To impart students with fundamental knowledge in mathematics and basic sciences that will mould
them to be successful professionals

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Core competence
To provide students with sound knowledge in engineering and experimental skills to identify
complex software problems in industry and to develop a practical solution for them
3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theory and practice which

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

enable them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and organization and to design
products requiring interdisciplinary skills
4. Professional skills
To bestow students with adequate training and provide opportunities to work as team that will build
up their communication skills, individual, leadership and supportive qualities and to enable them to

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

adapt and to work in ever changing technologies
5. Life-long learning
To develop the ability of students to establish themselves as professionals in mechanical
engineering and to create awareness about the need for lifelong learning and pursuing advanced
degrees

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)
On completion of the B.E. (Mechanical) degree, the graduate will be able

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

a) To apply the basic knowledge of mathematics, science and engineering
b) To design and conduct experiments as well as to analyze and interpret data and apply the same in
the career or entrepreneurship
c) To design and develop innovative and creative software applications
d) To understand a complex real world problem and develop an efficient practical solution

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

e) To create, select and apply appropriate techniques, resources, modern engineering and IT tools
f) To understand the role as a professional and give the best to the society
g) To develop a system that will meet expected needs within realistic constraints such as economical
environmental, social, political, ethical, safety and sustainability
h) To communicate effectively and make others understand exactly what they are trying to tell in both

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

verbal and written forms
i) To work in a team as a team member or a leader and make unique contributions and work with
coordination
j) To engage in lifelong learning and exhibit their technical skills
k) To develop and manage projects in multidisciplinary environments

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To familiar with different measurement equipment?s and use of this industry for quality inspection
List of Experiments
1. Tool Maker?s Microscope
2. Comparator
3. Sine Bar

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Gear Tooth Vernier Caliper
5. Floating gauge Micrometer
6. Coordinate Measuring Machine
7. Surface Finish Measuring Equipment
8. Vernier Height Gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. Bore diameter measurement using telescope gauge
10. Bore diameter measurement using micrometer
11. Force Measurement
12. Torque Measurement
13. Temperature measurement

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. Autocollimator


1. Ability to handle different measurement tools and perform measurements in quality impulsion
2. Learnt the usage of precision measuring instruments and practiced to take measurements

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Learnt and practiced to build the required dimensions using slip gauge
4. Able to measure the various dimensions of the given specimen using the tool maker?s microscope
5. Able to find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge
6. Able to measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare
7. Learnt to determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen using Gear tooth vernier

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Able to measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two
wire method
9. Learnt to study the construction and operation of coordinate measuring machine
10. Learnt to determine the diameter of bore by using telescopic gauge and dial bore indicator
11. Able to measure the surface roughness using Talysurf instrument

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. Studied the characteristic between applied load and the output volt
13. Learnt the characteristics of developing torque and respective sensor output voltage
14. Studied the characteristics of thermocouple without compensation
15. Able to check the straightness & flatness of the given component by using Autocollimator
16. Learnt to measure the displacement using LVDT and to calibrate it with the millimeter scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OBJECTIVES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OUTCOMES

7 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

CONTENTS
Sl. No. Name of the Experiments Page No.
CYCLE ? 1 EXPERIMENTS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1
Precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab ? A Study
7
2
To build up the slip gauge for given dimension ? A Study

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16
3
Thread parameters measurement using Tool Makers Microscope
20
4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Calibration of dial gauge
23
5
Determination of taper angle by sine bar method
26

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6
Determination of gear tooth thickness using gear tooth vernier
29
7
Measurement of thread parameters using floating carriage micrometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

32
CYCLE ? 2 EXPERIMENTS
8
Measurement of various dimensions using Coordinate Measuring Machine
35

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9
Measurement of surface roughness
39
10
Measurement of bores using dial bore indicator and telescopic gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

42
11
Force measurement using load cell
46
12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Torque measurement using strain gauge
49
13
Temperature measurement using thermocouple
53

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14
Measurement of alignment using autocollimator
56
ADDITIONAL EXPERIMENT BEYOND THE SYLLABUS
15

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thread parameters measurement using profile projector
60
16
Displacement measurement ? linear variable differential transducer (LVDT)
62

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROJECT WORK
65


8 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.01 PRECISION MEASURING INSTRUMENT YSED IN
METROLOGY LAB ? A STUDY
Aim:
To study the following instruments and their usage for measuring dimensions of given specimen

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Vernier caliper
2. Micrometer
3. Vernier height gauge
4. Depth micrometer
5. Universal bevel protractor

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Apparatus required:
Surface plate, specimen and above instruments
Vernier caliper:
The principle of vernier caliper is to use the minor difference between the sizes two scales or divisions
for measurement. The difference between them can be utilized to enhance the accuracy of measurement. The

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

vernier caliper essentially consists of two steel rules, sliding along each other.
Parts:
Different parts of the vernier caliper are
1. Beam ? It has main scale.
2. Fixed jaw

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Sliding or Moving jaw ? It has vernier scale and sliding jaw locking screw.
4. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw knife
edges for internal measurement.
5. Stem or depth bar for depth measurement
Least count:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm
1 VSD = 0.98 mm
Least count = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


ID

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPTH


OD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement:
Given Vernier caliper can be used for external, internal depth, slot and step measurement.
Measurement principle:
When both jaws contact each other scale shows the zero reading. The finer adjustment of movable jaw
can be done by the fine adjustment screw. First the whole movable jaw assembly is adjusted so that the two

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measuring tips just touch the part to be measured. Then the fine adjustment clamp locking screw is tightened.
Final adjustment depending upon the sense of correct feel is made by the adjusting screw. After final
adjustment has been made sliding jaw locking screw is also tightened and the reading is noted.
All the parts of the Vernier caliper are made of good quality steel and measuring faces are hardened.
Types of vernier:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier caliper, electronic vernier caliper, vernier depth caliper


11 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:

Main scale
reading (MSR)
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale
reading (VSR) (mm)
Total reading (MSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

+ VSR)
(mm)

OD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ID


Depth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier height gauge:
Vernier height gauge is a sort of vernier caliper equipped with a special instrument suitable for height
measurement. It is always kept on the surface plate and the use of the surfaces plates as datum surfaces is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

very essential.
Least count:
Least Count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 VSD = 0.98 mm
Least Count (LC) = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm
Parts:
1. Base
2. Beam ? It has main scale.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Slider ? It has a vernier scale and slider locking screw.
4. Scriber
5. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


Material:
All the parts of vernier are made of good quality steel and the measuring faces hardened.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Types of vernier gauge:
1. Analog vernier height gauge
2. Digital vernier height gauge
3. Electronic vernier height gauge
Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
Main scale reading
(MSR)(mm)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier scale reading
(VSR)(mm)
Total reading (MSR +
VSR)(mm)
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.
3.

13 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outside micrometer:
The micrometer essentially consists of an accurate screw having about 10 or 20 threads per cm. The
end of the screw forms one measuring tip and other measuring tip is constituted by a stationary anvil in the
base of the frame. The screw is threaded for certain length and is plain afterwards. The plain portion is called
spindle and its end is the measuring surface. The spindle is advanced or retracted by turning a thimble

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

connected to a spindle. The spindle is a slide fit over the barrel and barrel is the fixed part attached with the
frame. The barrel & thimble are graduated. The pitch of the screw threads is 0.5 mm.

Least count:
Least Count (LC) = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= 0.5 / 50 = 0.01 mm
Parts:
1. Frame
2. Anvil
3. Spindle

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Spindle lock
5. Barrel or outside sleeve
6. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions
7. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.
The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Measurement:
It can be used for any external measurement.
Types of micrometer:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Outside micrometer, 2. Inside micrometer, 3.Depth micrometer, 4. Stick micrometer, 5. Screw thread
micrometer, 6. V ? anvil micrometer, 7. Blade type micrometer, 8. Dial micrometer, 9. Bench micrometer, 10.
Tape screw operated internal micrometer, 11. Groove micrometer, 12. Digital micrometer, 13.Differential screw
micrometer, 14.Adjustable range outside micrometer.
Ratchet stop mechanism:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The object of the ratchet stop is to ensure that same level of torque is applied on the spindle while
measuring and the sense of the feel of operator is eliminated and consistent readings are obtained. By
providing this arrangement, the ratchet stop is made slip off when the torque applied to rotate the spindle
exceeds the set torque. Thus this provision ensures the application of same amount of torque during the
measurement.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) (mm)
Head Scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Coincidence (HSC)
Head scale reading
(HSR x LC) (mm)
Total Reading (PSR
+ HSR) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
2.

Depth micrometer:
Depth micrometer is a sort of micrometer which is mainly used for measuring depth of holes, so it is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

named as depth micrometer.
Parts:
1. Shoulder
2. Spindle
3. Spindle lock

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Barrel or outside sleeve ? It has pitch scale.
5. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions.
6. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.
The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.
15 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count:
Least Count = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale = 0.50/50
= 0.01 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurements:
It can be used for measuring the depth of holes, slots and recessed areas. The pitch of the screw thread
is 0.5 mm. The least count is 0.01 mm. Shoulder acts as a reference surface and is held firmly and
perpendicular to the centre line of the hole. For large range of measurement extension rods are used. In the
barrel the scale is calibrated. The accuracy again depends upon the sense of touch.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
First, calculate the least count of the instrument. Check the zero error. Measure the specimen note
down the main scale reading or the head scale reading. Note down the vernier or head scale coincidence with
main or pitch scale divisions.
Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) (mm)
Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Head scale reading
(HSR x LC) (mm)
Total Reading (PSR
+ HSR) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.


2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Universal bevel protractor:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
Bevel protractor is an instrument for measuring the angle between the two faces of a specimen. It
consists of a base plate on which a circular scale is engraved. It is graduated in degrees. An adjustment plate
is attached to a circular plate containing the vernier scale. The adjustable blade can be locked in any position.
The circular plate has 360 division divided into four parts of 90 degrees each. The adjustable parts have 24

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

divisions of to the right and left sides of zero reading. These scales are used according to the position of the
specimen with respect to movable scale.
Procedure:
1. Place the specimen whose taper is to be measured between the adjustable plate and movable
blade with one of its face parallel to the base.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Lock the adjustable plate in position and note down the main scale reading depending upon the
direction of rotation of adjustable plate in clockwise or anticlockwise.
3. Note the VSC to the right of zero.
4. Multiply the VSC with the least count and add to MSR to obtain the actual reading.
Least count:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least Count = 2 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1
o
24 VSD = 46
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

=> 1 VSD = 23/12
LC = 2 ? 23/12 = 1/12
o
= 5? (five minutes)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
Main scale reading
(MSR) (deg)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier scale reading
(VSR) (deg)
Total reading (MSR +
VSR)
(deg)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
2.
The angle of scriber of the vernier height gauge =
Result:
Thus the various precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab are studied and the specimen

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

dimensions are recorded.
Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for linear, angular,
roundness and roughness measurements they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring
instrument according to a specific requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Quality Department


1. Define ? Metrology

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Define ? Inspection
3. What are the needs of inspection in industries?
4. What are the various methods involving the measurement?
5. Define ? Precision
6. Define ? Accuracy

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Define ? Calibration
8. Define ? Repeatability
9. Define ? Magnification
10. Define ? Error
11. Define ? Systematic Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. Define ? Random Error
13. Define ? Parallax Error
14. Define ? Environmental Error
15. Define ? Cosine Error
Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

18 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.02 BUILD UP THE SLIP GAUGE FOR GIVEN DIMENSION
? A STUDY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Aim:
To build up the slip gauge for given dimension
Apparatus required:
1. Slip gauges set
2. Surface plate

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Soft cloth
Diagram:

Description:
Slip gauge are universally accepted standard of length in industry. They are the working standard for

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

linear dimension. These were invented by a Swedish Engineer, C.E. Johansson. They are used
1. For direct precise measurement where the accuracy of the workpiece demand it.
2. For use with high- magnification comparators to establish the size of the gauge blocks in general
use.
3. Gauge blocks are also used for many other purposes such as checking the accuracy of measuring

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

instrument or setting up a comparator to a specific dimension, enabling a batch of component to be
quickly and accurately checked or indeed in any situation where there is need to refer to standard of
known length these blocks are rectangular.
19 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Most gauge blocks are produced from high grade steel, hardened and established by a heat treatment
process to give a high degree of dimensional stability. Gauge blocks are also manufactured from tungsten
carbide which is an extremely hard and wear resistant material. The measuring faces have a lapped finish.
The faces are perfectly flat and parallel to one another with a high degree of accuracy. Each block has an
extremely high dimensional accuracy at 20

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C.
These slip gauge are available in variety of selected sets both in inch units and metric units. Letter ?E? is
used for inch units and ?M? is used for metric standard number of pieces in a set following the letter E or M. For
example EBI refers to a set whose blocks are in metric units and are 83 in number. Each block dimensions is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

printed on anyone of its face itself the size of any required standard being made up by combining the
appropriate number of these different size blocks.
If two gauges are slid and twisted together under pressure they will firmly join together. This process,
known as wringing, is very useful because it enables several gauge blocks to be assembled together to
produce a required size. In fact the success of precision measurement by slip gauges depends on the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

phenomenon of wringing.
First the gauge is oscillated slightly with very light pressure over other gauge so as to detect pressure at
any foreign particles between the surfaces. One gauge is placed perpendicular to other using standard
gauging pressure and rotary motion is applied until the blocks are lined up.
Procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Build the given dimension by wringing minimum number of slip gauges.
2. Note the given dimension and choose the minimum possible slip gauge available in the set so as to
accommodate the last decimal value. The minimum slip gauge value dimension available i.e., 1.12
mm must be chosen followed by 1.5 mm thick gauge block.
3. Follow the above steps to build up the slip gauge of any dimension.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Precautions:
1. Slip gauges should be handled very carefully placed gently and should never be dropped.
2. Whenever a slip gauge is being removed from the set, its dimensions are noted and must be
replaced into the set at its appropriate place only.
3. Correct procedure must be followed in wringing and also in removing the gauge blocks.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. They should be cleaned well before use and petroleum jelly is applied after use.



20 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Range (mm) Increment (mm) No. of pieces

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total = ____________ Pieces
Total length of slip gauge = ________ mm
Given diameter Slip gauges used Obtained dimensions

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Slip gauge set is studied and the given dimensions are building up by wringing minimum number of slip
gauges.
Outcome:
Students will be able to select proper measuring instrument and know requirement of calibration, errors

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

in measurement etc. They can perform accurate measurements.
Application:
1. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Why C.I. is preferred material for surface plates and tables?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Why V ? blocks are generally manufactured in pairs?
3. Why micrometer is required to be tested for accuracy?
4. Define ? Linear Measurement
5. List the linear measuring instrument according to their accuracy.
6. Define ? Least Count

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. What are the uses of vernier depth gauge?
8. What are the uses of feeler gauges?
9. What are the uses of straight edge?
10. What are the uses of angle plate?
11. What are the uses of V ? block?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. What are the uses of combination square?
13. What precautions should be taken while using slip gauges?
14. What is wringing?
15. Why the slip gauges are termed as ?End standard?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

22 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.03 THREAD PARAMETERS MEASUREMENT USING
TOOL MAKERS MICROSCOPE
Aim:
To study the tool makers microscope and in the process measure the various dimensions of the given

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

specimen
Apparatus required:
1. Tool makers microscope
2. Specimen
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
The tool maker?s microscope is designed for measurement of parts of complex forms; for example,
profile of a tool having external threads. It can also be used for measuring centre to centre distance of the
holes in any plane as well as the coordinates of the outline of a complex template gauge, using the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

coordinates measuring system.
23 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Basically it consists of an optical head which can be adjusted vertically along the ways of supporting
column. The optical head can be clamped at any position by a screw. On the work table (which as a circular

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

base in which there are graduations) the part to be inspected is placed. The table has a compound slide by
means of which the part can be measured. For giving these two movements, there are two micrometer screws
having thimble scales and verniers. At the back of the base light source is arranged that provides horizontal
beam of light, reflected from a mirror by 90 degrees upwards towards the table. The beam of light passes
through the transparent glass plate on which flat plates can be checked are placed. Observations are made

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

through the eyepiece of the optical head.
Procedure:
1. Place the given specimen on the work table and switch on all the three light sources and adjust the
intensity of the light source until a clean image of the cross wires and specimen are seen through
the eyepiece.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Coincide one of the two extreme edges between which the measurement has to be taken with
vertical or horizontal cross wires and depending upon the other image coincide with the same cross
wires by moving the above device. Note the reading.The difference between the two readings gives
the value of the required measurement.
3. Note the experiment specimen and the readings.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Tabulate the different measurements measured from the specimen.
Determination of thread parameters
Magnification =
S.No. Parameters
Magnified value

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
Actual value
(mm)
1. Outer diameter (O.D)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Internal diameter (I.D)

3. Pitch

4. Flank angle

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Included angle of the tool was measured using tool maker?s microscope and various dimensions of the
given specimen are measured.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

24 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Outcome:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Students will be able to understand the various parameters of thread and select proper measuring
instrument and know requirement of calibration, errors in measurement etc. They can perform accurate
measurements.
Application:
1. Machine Shop

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Quality Department


1. What is meant by tool maker?s microscope?
2. What is the light used in tool maker?s microscope?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. What are the various characteristics that you would measure in a screw thread?
4. What are the instruments that are required for measuring screw thread?
5. Define ? Pitch
6. What are the causes of pitch error?
7. Define ? Flank

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. What are the effects of flank angle error?
9. What is progressive error?
10. What is periodic error?
11. What is drunken error?
12. What is erratic error?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. What are the applications of tool maker?s microscope?
14. What are the limitations of tool maker?s microscope?
15. What are the advantages of tool maker?s microscope?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

25 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.04 CALIBRATION OF DIAL GAUGE USING SLIP GAUGE
Aim:
To find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge
Apparatus required:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Dial gauge, magnetic stand, slip gauge, and surface plate
Diagram:

Description:
The dial test indicator is a precision measuring instrument which can convert linear motion into angular

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

motion by means of transmission mechanics of rack and pinion and can be used to measure linear vibration
and errors of shape.
This instrument has the features such as good appearance, compact size, light weight, high precision,
reasonable construction, constant measuring face etc. Rigidity of all parts is excellent. Probe is tipped with
carbide balls. A shock proof mechanism is provided for those with larger measuring range.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

26 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Types of dial indicator:
1. Plunger type

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Lever type
Plunger type dial indicator has a resolution counter and each division in main scale is 0.01 mm. In lever
type dial test indicator is replaced by ball type stylus.
Procedure:
1. Fix the dial gauge to the stand rigidly and place the stand on the surface plate.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Set the plunger of dial gauge to first touch the upper surface of standard slip gauge and set indicator
to zero.
3. Raise then the plunger by pulling the screw above the dial scale.
4. Place the standard slip gauge underneath the plunger.
5. Release the plunger and let it to touch the standard slip gauge.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Note the reading on the dial scale.
Formulae:
The standard error of dial gauge is calculated by the formula

Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

S.No.
Slip gauge reading ?x?
(mm)
Dial gauge reading
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x? - x)
2


x? (x? - x)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
2


Result:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thus the accuracy and standard error of dial gauge is found. The standard error of given dial gauge is
__________.

27 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Students will be able to check the variation in tolerance during the inspection process of a
machined part, measure the deflection of a beam or ring under laboratory conditions, as well as many
other situations where a small measurement needs to be registered or indicated
Application:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Milling Machine
2. Analog versus digital/electronic readout


1. What is comparator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. What are the types of comparators?
3. What is the LC for comparators?
4. What are the applications of comparator?
5. What is meant by plunger?
6. What are the types of dial indicators?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Why a revolution counter is not provided in lever type dial test indicator?
8. Draw a line diagram of the operating mechanism of plunger type dial test indicator.
9. Explain the term magnification of a dial indicator.
10. What are the uses of dial test indicator?
11. What are the practical applications of dial test indicator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. What precautions should be taken while using dial test indicator?
13. What are the desirable qualities of a dial test indicator?
14. What are the advantages of dial test indicator?
15. What are the limitations of dial test indicator?
16. Distinguish between comparator and measuring instrument.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17. What are the advantages of electrical comparator?
18. What are the advantages of optical comparator?
19. What are the uses of comparator?
20. What are the advantages and disadvantages of mechanical comparator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

28 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.05 DETERMINATION OF TAPER ANGLE BY SINE BAR
METHOD
Aim:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare
Apparatus required:
Sine bar, slip gauges, dial gauge with stand, micrometer, surface plate, bevel protractor, vernier caliper
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
The sine bar principle uses the ratio of the length of two sides of a right triangle. It may be noted that
devices operating on sine principle are capable of ?self-generation?. The measurement is restricted to 45
o
from

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

accuracy point of view. Sine bar itself is not a measuring instrument.
Accuracy requirements of sine bar:
1. The axes of the rollers must be parallel to each other and the centre distance L must be precisely
known.
2. The sine bar must be flat and parallel to the plane connecting the axes of the rollers.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. The rollers must be of identical diameters and must have within a close tolerance.


FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice
1 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

V SEMESTER - R 2013

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No. : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LABORATORY MANUAL
2 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

DHANALAKSHMI

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.


1. To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. To contribute to the promotion of Academic Excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels
3. To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING


Rendering the services to the global needs of engineering industries by educating students to become
professionally sound mechanical engineers of excellent caliber

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To produce mechanical engineering technocrats with a perfect knowledge intellectual and hands on
experience and to inculcate the spirit of moral values and ethics to serve the society

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MISSION
MISSION
VISION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION

4 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Fundamentals
To impart students with fundamental knowledge in mathematics and basic sciences that will mould
them to be successful professionals
2. Core competence
To provide students with sound knowledge in engineering and experimental skills to identify

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

complex software problems in industry and to develop a practical solution for them
3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theory and practice which
enable them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and organization and to design
products requiring interdisciplinary skills

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Professional skills
To bestow students with adequate training and provide opportunities to work as team that will build
up their communication skills, individual, leadership and supportive qualities and to enable them to
adapt and to work in ever changing technologies
5. Life-long learning

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To develop the ability of students to establish themselves as professionals in mechanical
engineering and to create awareness about the need for lifelong learning and pursuing advanced
degrees

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)
On completion of the B.E. (Mechanical) degree, the graduate will be able
a) To apply the basic knowledge of mathematics, science and engineering
b) To design and conduct experiments as well as to analyze and interpret data and apply the same in

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the career or entrepreneurship
c) To design and develop innovative and creative software applications
d) To understand a complex real world problem and develop an efficient practical solution
e) To create, select and apply appropriate techniques, resources, modern engineering and IT tools
f) To understand the role as a professional and give the best to the society

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

g) To develop a system that will meet expected needs within realistic constraints such as economical
environmental, social, political, ethical, safety and sustainability
h) To communicate effectively and make others understand exactly what they are trying to tell in both
verbal and written forms
i) To work in a team as a team member or a leader and make unique contributions and work with

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

coordination
j) To engage in lifelong learning and exhibit their technical skills
k) To develop and manage projects in multidisciplinary environments

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To familiar with different measurement equipment?s and use of this industry for quality inspection
List of Experiments

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Tool Maker?s Microscope
2. Comparator
3. Sine Bar
4. Gear Tooth Vernier Caliper
5. Floating gauge Micrometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Coordinate Measuring Machine
7. Surface Finish Measuring Equipment
8. Vernier Height Gauge
9. Bore diameter measurement using telescope gauge
10. Bore diameter measurement using micrometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. Force Measurement
12. Torque Measurement
13. Temperature measurement
14. Autocollimator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Ability to handle different measurement tools and perform measurements in quality impulsion
2. Learnt the usage of precision measuring instruments and practiced to take measurements
3. Learnt and practiced to build the required dimensions using slip gauge
4. Able to measure the various dimensions of the given specimen using the tool maker?s microscope

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Able to find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge
6. Able to measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare
7. Learnt to determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen using Gear tooth vernier
8. Able to measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two
wire method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. Learnt to study the construction and operation of coordinate measuring machine
10. Learnt to determine the diameter of bore by using telescopic gauge and dial bore indicator
11. Able to measure the surface roughness using Talysurf instrument
12. Studied the characteristic between applied load and the output volt
13. Learnt the characteristics of developing torque and respective sensor output voltage

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. Studied the characteristics of thermocouple without compensation
15. Able to check the straightness & flatness of the given component by using Autocollimator
16. Learnt to measure the displacement using LVDT and to calibrate it with the millimeter scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OBJECTIVES

COURSE OUTCOMES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CONTENTS
Sl. No. Name of the Experiments Page No.
CYCLE ? 1 EXPERIMENTS
1
Precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab ? A Study

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7
2
To build up the slip gauge for given dimension ? A Study
16
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thread parameters measurement using Tool Makers Microscope
20
4
Calibration of dial gauge
23

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5
Determination of taper angle by sine bar method
26
6
Determination of gear tooth thickness using gear tooth vernier

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

29
7
Measurement of thread parameters using floating carriage micrometer
32
CYCLE ? 2 EXPERIMENTS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8
Measurement of various dimensions using Coordinate Measuring Machine
35
9
Measurement of surface roughness

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

39
10
Measurement of bores using dial bore indicator and telescopic gauge
42
11

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Force measurement using load cell
46
12
Torque measurement using strain gauge
49

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13
Temperature measurement using thermocouple
53
14
Measurement of alignment using autocollimator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

56
ADDITIONAL EXPERIMENT BEYOND THE SYLLABUS
15
Thread parameters measurement using profile projector
60

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16
Displacement measurement ? linear variable differential transducer (LVDT)
62
PROJECT WORK
65

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.01 PRECISION MEASURING INSTRUMENT YSED IN

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

METROLOGY LAB ? A STUDY
Aim:
To study the following instruments and their usage for measuring dimensions of given specimen
1. Vernier caliper
2. Micrometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Vernier height gauge
4. Depth micrometer
5. Universal bevel protractor
Apparatus required:
Surface plate, specimen and above instruments

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier caliper:
The principle of vernier caliper is to use the minor difference between the sizes two scales or divisions
for measurement. The difference between them can be utilized to enhance the accuracy of measurement. The
vernier caliper essentially consists of two steel rules, sliding along each other.
Parts:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Different parts of the vernier caliper are
1. Beam ? It has main scale.
2. Fixed jaw
3. Sliding or Moving jaw ? It has vernier scale and sliding jaw locking screw.
4. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw knife

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

edges for internal measurement.
5. Stem or depth bar for depth measurement
Least count:
Least count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

50 VSD = 49 mm
1 VSD = 0.98 mm
Least count = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm

10 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ID

DEPTH

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OD
Measurement:
Given Vernier caliper can be used for external, internal depth, slot and step measurement.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement principle:
When both jaws contact each other scale shows the zero reading. The finer adjustment of movable jaw
can be done by the fine adjustment screw. First the whole movable jaw assembly is adjusted so that the two
measuring tips just touch the part to be measured. Then the fine adjustment clamp locking screw is tightened.
Final adjustment depending upon the sense of correct feel is made by the adjusting screw. After final

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

adjustment has been made sliding jaw locking screw is also tightened and the reading is noted.
All the parts of the Vernier caliper are made of good quality steel and measuring faces are hardened.
Types of vernier:
Vernier caliper, electronic vernier caliper, vernier depth caliper

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Main scale
reading (MSR)
(mm)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier scale
reading (VSR) (mm)
Total reading (MSR
+ VSR)
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OD


ID

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Depth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier height gauge:
Vernier height gauge is a sort of vernier caliper equipped with a special instrument suitable for height
measurement. It is always kept on the surface plate and the use of the surfaces plates as datum surfaces is
very essential.
Least count:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least Count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm
1 VSD = 0.98 mm
Least Count (LC) = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Parts:
1. Base
2. Beam ? It has main scale.
3. Slider ? It has a vernier scale and slider locking screw.
4. Scriber

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw.


12 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Material:
All the parts of vernier are made of good quality steel and the measuring faces hardened.
Types of vernier gauge:
1. Analog vernier height gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Digital vernier height gauge
3. Electronic vernier height gauge
Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Main scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(MSR)(mm)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale reading
(VSR)(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total reading (MSR +
VSR)(mm)
1.
2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Outside micrometer:
The micrometer essentially consists of an accurate screw having about 10 or 20 threads per cm. The

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

end of the screw forms one measuring tip and other measuring tip is constituted by a stationary anvil in the
base of the frame. The screw is threaded for certain length and is plain afterwards. The plain portion is called
spindle and its end is the measuring surface. The spindle is advanced or retracted by turning a thimble
connected to a spindle. The spindle is a slide fit over the barrel and barrel is the fixed part attached with the
frame. The barrel & thimble are graduated. The pitch of the screw threads is 0.5 mm.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count:
Least Count (LC) = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale
= 0.5 / 50 = 0.01 mm
Parts:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Frame
2. Anvil
3. Spindle
4. Spindle lock
5. Barrel or outside sleeve

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions
7. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.
The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.
14 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement:
It can be used for any external measurement.
Types of micrometer:
1. Outside micrometer, 2. Inside micrometer, 3.Depth micrometer, 4. Stick micrometer, 5. Screw thread
micrometer, 6. V ? anvil micrometer, 7. Blade type micrometer, 8. Dial micrometer, 9. Bench micrometer, 10.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tape screw operated internal micrometer, 11. Groove micrometer, 12. Digital micrometer, 13.Differential screw
micrometer, 14.Adjustable range outside micrometer.
Ratchet stop mechanism:
The object of the ratchet stop is to ensure that same level of torque is applied on the spindle while
measuring and the sense of the feel of operator is eliminated and consistent readings are obtained. By

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

providing this arrangement, the ratchet stop is made slip off when the torque applied to rotate the spindle
exceeds the set torque. Thus this provision ensures the application of same amount of torque during the
measurement.
Tabulation:
Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) (mm)
Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)
Head scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(HSR x LC) (mm)
Total Reading (PSR
+ HSR) (mm)
1.
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Depth micrometer:
Depth micrometer is a sort of micrometer which is mainly used for measuring depth of holes, so it is
named as depth micrometer.
Parts:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Shoulder
2. Spindle
3. Spindle lock
4. Barrel or outside sleeve ? It has pitch scale.
5. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.
The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.
15 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count:
Least Count = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale = 0.50/50
= 0.01 mm
Measurements:
It can be used for measuring the depth of holes, slots and recessed areas. The pitch of the screw thread

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

is 0.5 mm. The least count is 0.01 mm. Shoulder acts as a reference surface and is held firmly and
perpendicular to the centre line of the hole. For large range of measurement extension rods are used. In the
barrel the scale is calibrated. The accuracy again depends upon the sense of touch.
Procedure:
First, calculate the least count of the instrument. Check the zero error. Measure the specimen note

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

down the main scale reading or the head scale reading. Note down the vernier or head scale coincidence with
main or pitch scale divisions.
Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Pitch Scale Reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(PSR) (mm)
Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)
Head scale reading
(HSR x LC) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total Reading (PSR
+ HSR) (mm)

1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.


16 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Universal bevel protractor:

Description:
Bevel protractor is an instrument for measuring the angle between the two faces of a specimen. It

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

consists of a base plate on which a circular scale is engraved. It is graduated in degrees. An adjustment plate
is attached to a circular plate containing the vernier scale. The adjustable blade can be locked in any position.
The circular plate has 360 division divided into four parts of 90 degrees each. The adjustable parts have 24
divisions of to the right and left sides of zero reading. These scales are used according to the position of the
specimen with respect to movable scale.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. Place the specimen whose taper is to be measured between the adjustable plate and movable
blade with one of its face parallel to the base.
2. Lock the adjustable plate in position and note down the main scale reading depending upon the
direction of rotation of adjustable plate in clockwise or anticlockwise.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Note the VSC to the right of zero.
4. Multiply the VSC with the least count and add to MSR to obtain the actual reading.
Least count:
Least Count = 2 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
24 VSD = 46
o
=> 1 VSD = 23/12
LC = 2 ? 23/12 = 1/12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
= 5? (five minutes)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Main scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(MSR) (deg)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale reading
(VSR) (deg)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total reading (MSR +
VSR)
(deg)
1.
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The angle of scriber of the vernier height gauge =
Result:
Thus the various precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab are studied and the specimen
dimensions are recorded.
Outcome:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for linear, angular,
roundness and roughness measurements they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring
instrument according to a specific requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).
Application:
1. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Metrology
2. Define ? Inspection
3. What are the needs of inspection in industries?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. What are the various methods involving the measurement?
5. Define ? Precision
6. Define ? Accuracy
7. Define ? Calibration
8. Define ? Repeatability

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. Define ? Magnification
10. Define ? Error
11. Define ? Systematic Error
12. Define ? Random Error
13. Define ? Parallax Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. Define ? Environmental Error
15. Define ? Cosine Error
Viva-voce

18 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.02 BUILD UP THE SLIP GAUGE FOR GIVEN DIMENSION
? A STUDY
Aim:
To build up the slip gauge for given dimension

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Apparatus required:
1. Slip gauges set
2. Surface plate
3. Soft cloth
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
Slip gauge are universally accepted standard of length in industry. They are the working standard for
linear dimension. These were invented by a Swedish Engineer, C.E. Johansson. They are used
1. For direct precise measurement where the accuracy of the workpiece demand it.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. For use with high- magnification comparators to establish the size of the gauge blocks in general
use.
3. Gauge blocks are also used for many other purposes such as checking the accuracy of measuring
instrument or setting up a comparator to a specific dimension, enabling a batch of component to be
quickly and accurately checked or indeed in any situation where there is need to refer to standard of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

known length these blocks are rectangular.
19 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Most gauge blocks are produced from high grade steel, hardened and established by a heat treatment
process to give a high degree of dimensional stability. Gauge blocks are also manufactured from tungsten

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

carbide which is an extremely hard and wear resistant material. The measuring faces have a lapped finish.
The faces are perfectly flat and parallel to one another with a high degree of accuracy. Each block has an
extremely high dimensional accuracy at 20
o
C.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

These slip gauge are available in variety of selected sets both in inch units and metric units. Letter ?E? is
used for inch units and ?M? is used for metric standard number of pieces in a set following the letter E or M. For
example EBI refers to a set whose blocks are in metric units and are 83 in number. Each block dimensions is
printed on anyone of its face itself the size of any required standard being made up by combining the
appropriate number of these different size blocks.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

If two gauges are slid and twisted together under pressure they will firmly join together. This process,
known as wringing, is very useful because it enables several gauge blocks to be assembled together to
produce a required size. In fact the success of precision measurement by slip gauges depends on the
phenomenon of wringing.
First the gauge is oscillated slightly with very light pressure over other gauge so as to detect pressure at

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

any foreign particles between the surfaces. One gauge is placed perpendicular to other using standard
gauging pressure and rotary motion is applied until the blocks are lined up.
Procedure:
1. Build the given dimension by wringing minimum number of slip gauges.
2. Note the given dimension and choose the minimum possible slip gauge available in the set so as to

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

accommodate the last decimal value. The minimum slip gauge value dimension available i.e., 1.12
mm must be chosen followed by 1.5 mm thick gauge block.
3. Follow the above steps to build up the slip gauge of any dimension.
Precautions:
1. Slip gauges should be handled very carefully placed gently and should never be dropped.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Whenever a slip gauge is being removed from the set, its dimensions are noted and must be
replaced into the set at its appropriate place only.
3. Correct procedure must be followed in wringing and also in removing the gauge blocks.
4. They should be cleaned well before use and petroleum jelly is applied after use.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

20 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Range (mm) Increment (mm) No. of pieces

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total = ____________ Pieces
Total length of slip gauge = ________ mm
Given diameter Slip gauges used Obtained dimensions

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Slip gauge set is studied and the given dimensions are building up by wringing minimum number of slip

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

gauges.
Outcome:
Students will be able to select proper measuring instrument and know requirement of calibration, errors
in measurement etc. They can perform accurate measurements.
Application:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Why C.I. is preferred material for surface plates and tables?
2. Why V ? blocks are generally manufactured in pairs?
3. Why micrometer is required to be tested for accuracy?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Define ? Linear Measurement
5. List the linear measuring instrument according to their accuracy.
6. Define ? Least Count
7. What are the uses of vernier depth gauge?
8. What are the uses of feeler gauges?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. What are the uses of straight edge?
10. What are the uses of angle plate?
11. What are the uses of V ? block?
12. What are the uses of combination square?
13. What precautions should be taken while using slip gauges?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. What is wringing?
15. Why the slip gauges are termed as ?End standard?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

22 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


Expt.No.03 THREAD PARAMETERS MEASUREMENT USING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TOOL MAKERS MICROSCOPE
Aim:
To study the tool makers microscope and in the process measure the various dimensions of the given
specimen
Apparatus required:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Tool makers microscope
2. Specimen
Diagram:

Description:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The tool maker?s microscope is designed for measurement of parts of complex forms; for example,
profile of a tool having external threads. It can also be used for measuring centre to centre distance of the
holes in any plane as well as the coordinates of the outline of a complex template gauge, using the
coordinates measuring system.
23 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Basically it consists of an optical head which can be adjusted vertically along the ways of supporting
column. The optical head can be clamped at any position by a screw. On the work table (which as a circular
base in which there are graduations) the part to be inspected is placed. The table has a compound slide by
means of which the part can be measured. For giving these two movements, there are two micrometer screws

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

having thimble scales and verniers. At the back of the base light source is arranged that provides horizontal
beam of light, reflected from a mirror by 90 degrees upwards towards the table. The beam of light passes
through the transparent glass plate on which flat plates can be checked are placed. Observations are made
through the eyepiece of the optical head.
Procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Place the given specimen on the work table and switch on all the three light sources and adjust the
intensity of the light source until a clean image of the cross wires and specimen are seen through
the eyepiece.
2. Coincide one of the two extreme edges between which the measurement has to be taken with
vertical or horizontal cross wires and depending upon the other image coincide with the same cross

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

wires by moving the above device. Note the reading.The difference between the two readings gives
the value of the required measurement.
3. Note the experiment specimen and the readings.
4. Tabulate the different measurements measured from the specimen.
Determination of thread parameters

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Magnification =
S.No. Parameters
Magnified value
(mm)
Actual value

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
1. Outer diameter (O.D)

2. Internal diameter (I.D)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Pitch

4. Flank angle

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Included angle of the tool was measured using tool maker?s microscope and various dimensions of the
given specimen are measured.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

24 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the various parameters of thread and select proper measuring
instrument and know requirement of calibration, errors in measurement etc. They can perform accurate

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measurements.
Application:
1. Machine Shop
2. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by tool maker?s microscope?
2. What is the light used in tool maker?s microscope?
3. What are the various characteristics that you would measure in a screw thread?
4. What are the instruments that are required for measuring screw thread?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Define ? Pitch
6. What are the causes of pitch error?
7. Define ? Flank
8. What are the effects of flank angle error?
9. What is progressive error?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. What is periodic error?
11. What is drunken error?
12. What is erratic error?
13. What are the applications of tool maker?s microscope?
14. What are the limitations of tool maker?s microscope?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15. What are the advantages of tool maker?s microscope?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

25 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.04 CALIBRATION OF DIAL GAUGE USING SLIP GAUGE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Aim:
To find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge
Apparatus required:
Dial gauge, magnetic stand, slip gauge, and surface plate
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
The dial test indicator is a precision measuring instrument which can convert linear motion into angular
motion by means of transmission mechanics of rack and pinion and can be used to measure linear vibration
and errors of shape.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

This instrument has the features such as good appearance, compact size, light weight, high precision,
reasonable construction, constant measuring face etc. Rigidity of all parts is excellent. Probe is tipped with
carbide balls. A shock proof mechanism is provided for those with larger measuring range.

26 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Types of dial indicator:
1. Plunger type
2. Lever type
Plunger type dial indicator has a resolution counter and each division in main scale is 0.01 mm. In lever

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

type dial test indicator is replaced by ball type stylus.
Procedure:
1. Fix the dial gauge to the stand rigidly and place the stand on the surface plate.
2. Set the plunger of dial gauge to first touch the upper surface of standard slip gauge and set indicator
to zero.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Raise then the plunger by pulling the screw above the dial scale.
4. Place the standard slip gauge underneath the plunger.
5. Release the plunger and let it to touch the standard slip gauge.
6. Note the reading on the dial scale.
Formulae:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The standard error of dial gauge is calculated by the formula

Tabulation:
S.No.
Slip gauge reading ?x?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
Dial gauge reading
(mm)
(x? - x)
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x? (x? - x)
1.
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Thus the accuracy and standard error of dial gauge is found. The standard error of given dial gauge is
__________.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

27 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Outcome:
Students will be able to check the variation in tolerance during the inspection process of a

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

machined part, measure the deflection of a beam or ring under laboratory conditions, as well as many
other situations where a small measurement needs to be registered or indicated
Application:
1. Milling Machine
2. Analog versus digital/electronic readout

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is comparator?
2. What are the types of comparators?
3. What is the LC for comparators?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. What are the applications of comparator?
5. What is meant by plunger?
6. What are the types of dial indicators?
7. Why a revolution counter is not provided in lever type dial test indicator?
8. Draw a line diagram of the operating mechanism of plunger type dial test indicator.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. Explain the term magnification of a dial indicator.
10. What are the uses of dial test indicator?
11. What are the practical applications of dial test indicator?
12. What precautions should be taken while using dial test indicator?
13. What are the desirable qualities of a dial test indicator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. What are the advantages of dial test indicator?
15. What are the limitations of dial test indicator?
16. Distinguish between comparator and measuring instrument.
17. What are the advantages of electrical comparator?
18. What are the advantages of optical comparator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

19. What are the uses of comparator?
20. What are the advantages and disadvantages of mechanical comparator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

28 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.05 DETERMINATION OF TAPER ANGLE BY SINE BAR
METHOD
Aim:
To measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare
Apparatus required:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sine bar, slip gauges, dial gauge with stand, micrometer, surface plate, bevel protractor, vernier caliper
Diagram:

Description:
The sine bar principle uses the ratio of the length of two sides of a right triangle. It may be noted that

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

devices operating on sine principle are capable of ?self-generation?. The measurement is restricted to 45
o
from
accuracy point of view. Sine bar itself is not a measuring instrument.
Accuracy requirements of sine bar:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. The axes of the rollers must be parallel to each other and the centre distance L must be precisely
known.
2. The sine bar must be flat and parallel to the plane connecting the axes of the rollers.
3. The rollers must be of identical diameters and must have within a close tolerance.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

29 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Procedure:
1. Fix the dial gaugeon the magnetic stand and place the magnetic stand on the surface plate.Check

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the parallelism of the sine bar.
2. Place the given specimen above the sine bar and place the dial gauge on top of the specimen.
Adjustthe dial gauge for zero deflection.
3. Raise the front end of the sine bar with slip gauges until the work surface is parallel to the datum
surface.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Check the parallelism using dial gauge.
5. Measure the distance between the centres of the sine bar rollers as ?L? and note the height of the
slip gauge as ?H?.
6. Note the included angle of the specimen.
Formulae:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sin ? = H/L where ? = Included angle of the specimen
H = Height of slip gauges
L = Distance between the centre of rollers
Tabulation:
S.No. L (mm) H (mm) Taper angle ( ?)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
2.
3.

Result:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The taper angle of the given specimen using sine bar was found to be =
Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for angular measurements
and they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a specific
requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Flat Surface
2. Granite

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice
1 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?



DEPARTMENT OF

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MECHANICAL ENGINEERING


ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

V SEMESTER - R 2013

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Register No. : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________


LABORATORY MANUAL

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


3 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DHANALAKSHMI


College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
2. To contribute to the promotion of Academic Excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

DEPARTMENT OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rendering the services to the global needs of engineering industries by educating students to become
professionally sound mechanical engineers of excellent caliber

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To produce mechanical engineering technocrats with a perfect knowledge intellectual and hands on
experience and to inculcate the spirit of moral values and ethics to serve the society

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MISSION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MISSION
VISION

VISION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals
To impart students with fundamental knowledge in mathematics and basic sciences that will mould

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

them to be successful professionals
2. Core competence
To provide students with sound knowledge in engineering and experimental skills to identify
complex software problems in industry and to develop a practical solution for them
3. Breadth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theory and practice which
enable them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and organization and to design
products requiring interdisciplinary skills
4. Professional skills
To bestow students with adequate training and provide opportunities to work as team that will build

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

up their communication skills, individual, leadership and supportive qualities and to enable them to
adapt and to work in ever changing technologies
5. Life-long learning
To develop the ability of students to establish themselves as professionals in mechanical
engineering and to create awareness about the need for lifelong learning and pursuing advanced

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

degrees

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

On completion of the B.E. (Mechanical) degree, the graduate will be able
a) To apply the basic knowledge of mathematics, science and engineering
b) To design and conduct experiments as well as to analyze and interpret data and apply the same in
the career or entrepreneurship
c) To design and develop innovative and creative software applications

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d) To understand a complex real world problem and develop an efficient practical solution
e) To create, select and apply appropriate techniques, resources, modern engineering and IT tools
f) To understand the role as a professional and give the best to the society
g) To develop a system that will meet expected needs within realistic constraints such as economical
environmental, social, political, ethical, safety and sustainability

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

h) To communicate effectively and make others understand exactly what they are trying to tell in both
verbal and written forms
i) To work in a team as a team member or a leader and make unique contributions and work with
coordination
j) To engage in lifelong learning and exhibit their technical skills

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

k) To develop and manage projects in multidisciplinary environments

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To familiar with different measurement equipment?s and use of this industry for quality inspection
List of Experiments
1. Tool Maker?s Microscope
2. Comparator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Sine Bar
4. Gear Tooth Vernier Caliper
5. Floating gauge Micrometer
6. Coordinate Measuring Machine
7. Surface Finish Measuring Equipment

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Vernier Height Gauge
9. Bore diameter measurement using telescope gauge
10. Bore diameter measurement using micrometer
11. Force Measurement
12. Torque Measurement

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. Temperature measurement
14. Autocollimator


1. Ability to handle different measurement tools and perform measurements in quality impulsion

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Learnt the usage of precision measuring instruments and practiced to take measurements
3. Learnt and practiced to build the required dimensions using slip gauge
4. Able to measure the various dimensions of the given specimen using the tool maker?s microscope
5. Able to find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge
6. Able to measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Learnt to determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen using Gear tooth vernier
8. Able to measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two
wire method
9. Learnt to study the construction and operation of coordinate measuring machine
10. Learnt to determine the diameter of bore by using telescopic gauge and dial bore indicator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. Able to measure the surface roughness using Talysurf instrument
12. Studied the characteristic between applied load and the output volt
13. Learnt the characteristics of developing torque and respective sensor output voltage
14. Studied the characteristics of thermocouple without compensation
15. Able to check the straightness & flatness of the given component by using Autocollimator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16. Learnt to measure the displacement using LVDT and to calibrate it with the millimeter scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OBJECTIVES

COURSE OUTCOMES

7 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

CONTENTS
Sl. No. Name of the Experiments Page No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CYCLE ? 1 EXPERIMENTS
1
Precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab ? A Study
7
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To build up the slip gauge for given dimension ? A Study
16
3
Thread parameters measurement using Tool Makers Microscope
20

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4
Calibration of dial gauge
23
5
Determination of taper angle by sine bar method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

26
6
Determination of gear tooth thickness using gear tooth vernier
29
7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement of thread parameters using floating carriage micrometer
32
CYCLE ? 2 EXPERIMENTS
8
Measurement of various dimensions using Coordinate Measuring Machine

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

35
9
Measurement of surface roughness
39
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement of bores using dial bore indicator and telescopic gauge
42
11
Force measurement using load cell
46

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12
Torque measurement using strain gauge
49
13
Temperature measurement using thermocouple

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

53
14
Measurement of alignment using autocollimator
56
ADDITIONAL EXPERIMENT BEYOND THE SYLLABUS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15
Thread parameters measurement using profile projector
60
16
Displacement measurement ? linear variable differential transducer (LVDT)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

62
PROJECT WORK
65

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.01 PRECISION MEASURING INSTRUMENT YSED IN
METROLOGY LAB ? A STUDY
Aim:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To study the following instruments and their usage for measuring dimensions of given specimen
1. Vernier caliper
2. Micrometer
3. Vernier height gauge
4. Depth micrometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Universal bevel protractor
Apparatus required:
Surface plate, specimen and above instruments
Vernier caliper:
The principle of vernier caliper is to use the minor difference between the sizes two scales or divisions

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

for measurement. The difference between them can be utilized to enhance the accuracy of measurement. The
vernier caliper essentially consists of two steel rules, sliding along each other.
Parts:
Different parts of the vernier caliper are
1. Beam ? It has main scale.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Fixed jaw
3. Sliding or Moving jaw ? It has vernier scale and sliding jaw locking screw.
4. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw knife
edges for internal measurement.
5. Stem or depth bar for depth measurement

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count:
Least count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm
1 VSD = 0.98 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm

10 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ID

DEPTH

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OD
Measurement:
Given Vernier caliper can be used for external, internal depth, slot and step measurement.
Measurement principle:
When both jaws contact each other scale shows the zero reading. The finer adjustment of movable jaw

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

can be done by the fine adjustment screw. First the whole movable jaw assembly is adjusted so that the two
measuring tips just touch the part to be measured. Then the fine adjustment clamp locking screw is tightened.
Final adjustment depending upon the sense of correct feel is made by the adjusting screw. After final
adjustment has been made sliding jaw locking screw is also tightened and the reading is noted.
All the parts of the Vernier caliper are made of good quality steel and measuring faces are hardened.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Types of vernier:
Vernier caliper, electronic vernier caliper, vernier depth caliper


11 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:

Main scale
reading (MSR)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale
reading (VSR) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total reading (MSR
+ VSR)
(mm)

OD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ID

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Depth


Vernier height gauge:
Vernier height gauge is a sort of vernier caliper equipped with a special instrument suitable for height

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measurement. It is always kept on the surface plate and the use of the surfaces plates as datum surfaces is
very essential.
Least count:
Least Count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

50 VSD = 49 mm
1 VSD = 0.98 mm
Least Count (LC) = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm
Parts:
1. Base

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Beam ? It has main scale.
3. Slider ? It has a vernier scale and slider locking screw.
4. Scriber
5. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


Material:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

All the parts of vernier are made of good quality steel and the measuring faces hardened.
Types of vernier gauge:
1. Analog vernier height gauge
2. Digital vernier height gauge
3. Electronic vernier height gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Main scale reading
(MSR)(mm)
Vernier scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale reading
(VSR)(mm)
Total reading (MSR +
VSR)(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
2.
3.

13 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outside micrometer:
The micrometer essentially consists of an accurate screw having about 10 or 20 threads per cm. The
end of the screw forms one measuring tip and other measuring tip is constituted by a stationary anvil in the
base of the frame. The screw is threaded for certain length and is plain afterwards. The plain portion is called

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

spindle and its end is the measuring surface. The spindle is advanced or retracted by turning a thimble
connected to a spindle. The spindle is a slide fit over the barrel and barrel is the fixed part attached with the
frame. The barrel & thimble are graduated. The pitch of the screw threads is 0.5 mm.

Least count:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least Count (LC) = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale
= 0.5 / 50 = 0.01 mm
Parts:
1. Frame
2. Anvil

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Spindle
4. Spindle lock
5. Barrel or outside sleeve
6. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions
7. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.
14 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Measurement:
It can be used for any external measurement.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Types of micrometer:
1. Outside micrometer, 2. Inside micrometer, 3.Depth micrometer, 4. Stick micrometer, 5. Screw thread
micrometer, 6. V ? anvil micrometer, 7. Blade type micrometer, 8. Dial micrometer, 9. Bench micrometer, 10.
Tape screw operated internal micrometer, 11. Groove micrometer, 12. Digital micrometer, 13.Differential screw
micrometer, 14.Adjustable range outside micrometer.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Ratchet stop mechanism:
The object of the ratchet stop is to ensure that same level of torque is applied on the spindle while
measuring and the sense of the feel of operator is eliminated and consistent readings are obtained. By
providing this arrangement, the ratchet stop is made slip off when the torque applied to rotate the spindle
exceeds the set torque. Thus this provision ensures the application of same amount of torque during the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measurement.
Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)
Head scale reading
(HSR x LC) (mm)
Total Reading (PSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

+ HSR) (mm)
1.
2.

Depth micrometer:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Depth micrometer is a sort of micrometer which is mainly used for measuring depth of holes, so it is
named as depth micrometer.
Parts:
1. Shoulder
2. Spindle

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Spindle lock
4. Barrel or outside sleeve ? It has pitch scale.
5. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions.
6. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.
The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


Least count:
Least Count = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale = 0.50/50

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= 0.01 mm
Measurements:
It can be used for measuring the depth of holes, slots and recessed areas. The pitch of the screw thread
is 0.5 mm. The least count is 0.01 mm. Shoulder acts as a reference surface and is held firmly and
perpendicular to the centre line of the hole. For large range of measurement extension rods are used. In the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

barrel the scale is calibrated. The accuracy again depends upon the sense of touch.
Procedure:
First, calculate the least count of the instrument. Check the zero error. Measure the specimen note
down the main scale reading or the head scale reading. Note down the vernier or head scale coincidence with
main or pitch scale divisions.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) (mm)
Head Scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Coincidence (HSC)
Head scale reading
(HSR x LC) (mm)
Total Reading (PSR
+ HSR) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.


2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Universal bevel protractor:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
Bevel protractor is an instrument for measuring the angle between the two faces of a specimen. It
consists of a base plate on which a circular scale is engraved. It is graduated in degrees. An adjustment plate
is attached to a circular plate containing the vernier scale. The adjustable blade can be locked in any position.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The circular plate has 360 division divided into four parts of 90 degrees each. The adjustable parts have 24
divisions of to the right and left sides of zero reading. These scales are used according to the position of the
specimen with respect to movable scale.
Procedure:
1. Place the specimen whose taper is to be measured between the adjustable plate and movable

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

blade with one of its face parallel to the base.
2. Lock the adjustable plate in position and note down the main scale reading depending upon the
direction of rotation of adjustable plate in clockwise or anticlockwise.
3. Note the VSC to the right of zero.
4. Multiply the VSC with the least count and add to MSR to obtain the actual reading.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count:
Least Count = 2 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1
o
24 VSD = 46

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
=> 1 VSD = 23/12
LC = 2 ? 23/12 = 1/12
o
= 5? (five minutes)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Main scale reading
(MSR) (deg)
Vernier scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale reading
(VSR) (deg)
Total reading (MSR +
VSR)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(deg)
1.
2.
The angle of scriber of the vernier height gauge =
Result:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thus the various precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab are studied and the specimen
dimensions are recorded.
Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for linear, angular,
roundness and roughness measurements they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

instrument according to a specific requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).
Application:
1. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Metrology
2. Define ? Inspection
3. What are the needs of inspection in industries?
4. What are the various methods involving the measurement?
5. Define ? Precision

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Define ? Accuracy
7. Define ? Calibration
8. Define ? Repeatability
9. Define ? Magnification
10. Define ? Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. Define ? Systematic Error
12. Define ? Random Error
13. Define ? Parallax Error
14. Define ? Environmental Error
15. Define ? Cosine Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

18 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.02 BUILD UP THE SLIP GAUGE FOR GIVEN DIMENSION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? A STUDY
Aim:
To build up the slip gauge for given dimension
Apparatus required:
1. Slip gauges set

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Surface plate
3. Soft cloth
Diagram:

Description:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Slip gauge are universally accepted standard of length in industry. They are the working standard for
linear dimension. These were invented by a Swedish Engineer, C.E. Johansson. They are used
1. For direct precise measurement where the accuracy of the workpiece demand it.
2. For use with high- magnification comparators to establish the size of the gauge blocks in general
use.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Gauge blocks are also used for many other purposes such as checking the accuracy of measuring
instrument or setting up a comparator to a specific dimension, enabling a batch of component to be
quickly and accurately checked or indeed in any situation where there is need to refer to standard of
known length these blocks are rectangular.
19 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Most gauge blocks are produced from high grade steel, hardened and established by a heat treatment
process to give a high degree of dimensional stability. Gauge blocks are also manufactured from tungsten
carbide which is an extremely hard and wear resistant material. The measuring faces have a lapped finish.
The faces are perfectly flat and parallel to one another with a high degree of accuracy. Each block has an

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

extremely high dimensional accuracy at 20
o
C.
These slip gauge are available in variety of selected sets both in inch units and metric units. Letter ?E? is
used for inch units and ?M? is used for metric standard number of pieces in a set following the letter E or M. For

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

example EBI refers to a set whose blocks are in metric units and are 83 in number. Each block dimensions is
printed on anyone of its face itself the size of any required standard being made up by combining the
appropriate number of these different size blocks.
If two gauges are slid and twisted together under pressure they will firmly join together. This process,
known as wringing, is very useful because it enables several gauge blocks to be assembled together to

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

produce a required size. In fact the success of precision measurement by slip gauges depends on the
phenomenon of wringing.
First the gauge is oscillated slightly with very light pressure over other gauge so as to detect pressure at
any foreign particles between the surfaces. One gauge is placed perpendicular to other using standard
gauging pressure and rotary motion is applied until the blocks are lined up.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. Build the given dimension by wringing minimum number of slip gauges.
2. Note the given dimension and choose the minimum possible slip gauge available in the set so as to
accommodate the last decimal value. The minimum slip gauge value dimension available i.e., 1.12
mm must be chosen followed by 1.5 mm thick gauge block.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Follow the above steps to build up the slip gauge of any dimension.
Precautions:
1. Slip gauges should be handled very carefully placed gently and should never be dropped.
2. Whenever a slip gauge is being removed from the set, its dimensions are noted and must be
replaced into the set at its appropriate place only.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Correct procedure must be followed in wringing and also in removing the gauge blocks.
4. They should be cleaned well before use and petroleum jelly is applied after use.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

20 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:
Range (mm) Increment (mm) No. of pieces

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total = ____________ Pieces
Total length of slip gauge = ________ mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Given diameter Slip gauges used Obtained dimensions

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Slip gauge set is studied and the given dimensions are building up by wringing minimum number of slip
gauges.
Outcome:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Students will be able to select proper measuring instrument and know requirement of calibration, errors
in measurement etc. They can perform accurate measurements.
Application:
1. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Why C.I. is preferred material for surface plates and tables?
2. Why V ? blocks are generally manufactured in pairs?
3. Why micrometer is required to be tested for accuracy?
4. Define ? Linear Measurement
5. List the linear measuring instrument according to their accuracy.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Define ? Least Count
7. What are the uses of vernier depth gauge?
8. What are the uses of feeler gauges?
9. What are the uses of straight edge?
10. What are the uses of angle plate?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. What are the uses of V ? block?
12. What are the uses of combination square?
13. What precautions should be taken while using slip gauges?
14. What is wringing?
15. Why the slip gauges are termed as ?End standard?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

22 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.03 THREAD PARAMETERS MEASUREMENT USING
TOOL MAKERS MICROSCOPE
Aim:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To study the tool makers microscope and in the process measure the various dimensions of the given
specimen
Apparatus required:
1. Tool makers microscope
2. Specimen

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diagram:

Description:
The tool maker?s microscope is designed for measurement of parts of complex forms; for example,
profile of a tool having external threads. It can also be used for measuring centre to centre distance of the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

holes in any plane as well as the coordinates of the outline of a complex template gauge, using the
coordinates measuring system.
23 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Basically it consists of an optical head which can be adjusted vertically along the ways of supporting

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

column. The optical head can be clamped at any position by a screw. On the work table (which as a circular
base in which there are graduations) the part to be inspected is placed. The table has a compound slide by
means of which the part can be measured. For giving these two movements, there are two micrometer screws
having thimble scales and verniers. At the back of the base light source is arranged that provides horizontal
beam of light, reflected from a mirror by 90 degrees upwards towards the table. The beam of light passes

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

through the transparent glass plate on which flat plates can be checked are placed. Observations are made
through the eyepiece of the optical head.
Procedure:
1. Place the given specimen on the work table and switch on all the three light sources and adjust the
intensity of the light source until a clean image of the cross wires and specimen are seen through

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the eyepiece.
2. Coincide one of the two extreme edges between which the measurement has to be taken with
vertical or horizontal cross wires and depending upon the other image coincide with the same cross
wires by moving the above device. Note the reading.The difference between the two readings gives
the value of the required measurement.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Note the experiment specimen and the readings.
4. Tabulate the different measurements measured from the specimen.
Determination of thread parameters
Magnification =
S.No. Parameters

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Magnified value
(mm)
Actual value
(mm)
1. Outer diameter (O.D)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Internal diameter (I.D)

3. Pitch

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Flank angle


Result:
Included angle of the tool was measured using tool maker?s microscope and various dimensions of the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

given specimen are measured.


24 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the various parameters of thread and select proper measuring
instrument and know requirement of calibration, errors in measurement etc. They can perform accurate
measurements.
Application:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Machine Shop
2. Quality Department


1. What is meant by tool maker?s microscope?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. What is the light used in tool maker?s microscope?
3. What are the various characteristics that you would measure in a screw thread?
4. What are the instruments that are required for measuring screw thread?
5. Define ? Pitch
6. What are the causes of pitch error?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Define ? Flank
8. What are the effects of flank angle error?
9. What is progressive error?
10. What is periodic error?
11. What is drunken error?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. What is erratic error?
13. What are the applications of tool maker?s microscope?
14. What are the limitations of tool maker?s microscope?
15. What are the advantages of tool maker?s microscope?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

25 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.04 CALIBRATION OF DIAL GAUGE USING SLIP GAUGE
Aim:
To find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Apparatus required:
Dial gauge, magnetic stand, slip gauge, and surface plate
Diagram:

Description:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The dial test indicator is a precision measuring instrument which can convert linear motion into angular
motion by means of transmission mechanics of rack and pinion and can be used to measure linear vibration
and errors of shape.
This instrument has the features such as good appearance, compact size, light weight, high precision,
reasonable construction, constant measuring face etc. Rigidity of all parts is excellent. Probe is tipped with

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

carbide balls. A shock proof mechanism is provided for those with larger measuring range.

26 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Types of dial indicator:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Plunger type
2. Lever type
Plunger type dial indicator has a resolution counter and each division in main scale is 0.01 mm. In lever
type dial test indicator is replaced by ball type stylus.
Procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Fix the dial gauge to the stand rigidly and place the stand on the surface plate.
2. Set the plunger of dial gauge to first touch the upper surface of standard slip gauge and set indicator
to zero.
3. Raise then the plunger by pulling the screw above the dial scale.
4. Place the standard slip gauge underneath the plunger.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Release the plunger and let it to touch the standard slip gauge.
6. Note the reading on the dial scale.
Formulae:
The standard error of dial gauge is calculated by the formula

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
S.No.
Slip gauge reading ?x?
(mm)
Dial gauge reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
(x? - x)
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x? (x? - x)
1.
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Thus the accuracy and standard error of dial gauge is found. The standard error of given dial gauge is
__________.

27 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Students will be able to check the variation in tolerance during the inspection process of a
machined part, measure the deflection of a beam or ring under laboratory conditions, as well as many
other situations where a small measurement needs to be registered or indicated

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Milling Machine
2. Analog versus digital/electronic readout

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is comparator?
2. What are the types of comparators?
3. What is the LC for comparators?
4. What are the applications of comparator?
5. What is meant by plunger?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. What are the types of dial indicators?
7. Why a revolution counter is not provided in lever type dial test indicator?
8. Draw a line diagram of the operating mechanism of plunger type dial test indicator.
9. Explain the term magnification of a dial indicator.
10. What are the uses of dial test indicator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. What are the practical applications of dial test indicator?
12. What precautions should be taken while using dial test indicator?
13. What are the desirable qualities of a dial test indicator?
14. What are the advantages of dial test indicator?
15. What are the limitations of dial test indicator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16. Distinguish between comparator and measuring instrument.
17. What are the advantages of electrical comparator?
18. What are the advantages of optical comparator?
19. What are the uses of comparator?
20. What are the advantages and disadvantages of mechanical comparator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

28 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.05 DETERMINATION OF TAPER ANGLE BY SINE BAR
METHOD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Aim:
To measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare
Apparatus required:
Sine bar, slip gauges, dial gauge with stand, micrometer, surface plate, bevel protractor, vernier caliper
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
The sine bar principle uses the ratio of the length of two sides of a right triangle. It may be noted that
devices operating on sine principle are capable of ?self-generation?. The measurement is restricted to 45
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

from
accuracy point of view. Sine bar itself is not a measuring instrument.
Accuracy requirements of sine bar:
1. The axes of the rollers must be parallel to each other and the centre distance L must be precisely
known.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. The sine bar must be flat and parallel to the plane connecting the axes of the rollers.
3. The rollers must be of identical diameters and must have within a close tolerance.


29 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. Fix the dial gaugeon the magnetic stand and place the magnetic stand on the surface plate.Check
the parallelism of the sine bar.
2. Place the given specimen above the sine bar and place the dial gauge on top of the specimen.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Adjustthe dial gauge for zero deflection.
3. Raise the front end of the sine bar with slip gauges until the work surface is parallel to the datum
surface.
4. Check the parallelism using dial gauge.
5. Measure the distance between the centres of the sine bar rollers as ?L? and note the height of the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

slip gauge as ?H?.
6. Note the included angle of the specimen.
Formulae:
Sin ? = H/L where ? = Included angle of the specimen
H = Height of slip gauges

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

L = Distance between the centre of rollers
Tabulation:
S.No. L (mm) H (mm) Taper angle ( ?)
1.
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.

Result:
The taper angle of the given specimen using sine bar was found to be =
Outcome:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for angular measurements
and they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a specific
requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).

Application:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Flat Surface
2. Granite


30 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. List out the various angle measuring instruments.
2. What is the working principles sine bar?
3. How is a sine bar used to measure the angle?
4. What is the application of sine bar?
5. What is the material of sine bar?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Why sine bar is not preferred to use for measuring angles more than 45
0
?
7. What are the features of sine bar?
8. A 100 mm sine bar is to be set up to an angle of 33

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

0
, determine the slip gauges needed from 87
pieces set.
9. What are the various instruments used for measuring angles?
10. What is sine bar?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. How sine bar is used for angle measurement?
12. Explain how sine bar is used to measure angle of small size component.
13. Explain how sine bar is used to measure angle of large size component.
14. What are the various types of sine bar?
15. What are the limitations of sine bar?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16. What is sine center?
17. What is sine table?
18. What are the possible sources of errors in angular measurement by sine bar?
19. What are angle gauges?
20. How angle gauges are used for measuring angles?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice
1 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?



DEPARTMENT OF

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MECHANICAL ENGINEERING


ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

V SEMESTER - R 2013

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Register No. : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________


LABORATORY MANUAL

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


3 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DHANALAKSHMI


College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
2. To contribute to the promotion of Academic Excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

DEPARTMENT OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rendering the services to the global needs of engineering industries by educating students to become
professionally sound mechanical engineers of excellent caliber

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To produce mechanical engineering technocrats with a perfect knowledge intellectual and hands on
experience and to inculcate the spirit of moral values and ethics to serve the society

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MISSION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MISSION
VISION

VISION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals
To impart students with fundamental knowledge in mathematics and basic sciences that will mould

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

them to be successful professionals
2. Core competence
To provide students with sound knowledge in engineering and experimental skills to identify
complex software problems in industry and to develop a practical solution for them
3. Breadth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theory and practice which
enable them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and organization and to design
products requiring interdisciplinary skills
4. Professional skills
To bestow students with adequate training and provide opportunities to work as team that will build

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

up their communication skills, individual, leadership and supportive qualities and to enable them to
adapt and to work in ever changing technologies
5. Life-long learning
To develop the ability of students to establish themselves as professionals in mechanical
engineering and to create awareness about the need for lifelong learning and pursuing advanced

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

degrees

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

On completion of the B.E. (Mechanical) degree, the graduate will be able
a) To apply the basic knowledge of mathematics, science and engineering
b) To design and conduct experiments as well as to analyze and interpret data and apply the same in
the career or entrepreneurship
c) To design and develop innovative and creative software applications

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d) To understand a complex real world problem and develop an efficient practical solution
e) To create, select and apply appropriate techniques, resources, modern engineering and IT tools
f) To understand the role as a professional and give the best to the society
g) To develop a system that will meet expected needs within realistic constraints such as economical
environmental, social, political, ethical, safety and sustainability

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

h) To communicate effectively and make others understand exactly what they are trying to tell in both
verbal and written forms
i) To work in a team as a team member or a leader and make unique contributions and work with
coordination
j) To engage in lifelong learning and exhibit their technical skills

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

k) To develop and manage projects in multidisciplinary environments

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To familiar with different measurement equipment?s and use of this industry for quality inspection
List of Experiments
1. Tool Maker?s Microscope
2. Comparator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Sine Bar
4. Gear Tooth Vernier Caliper
5. Floating gauge Micrometer
6. Coordinate Measuring Machine
7. Surface Finish Measuring Equipment

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Vernier Height Gauge
9. Bore diameter measurement using telescope gauge
10. Bore diameter measurement using micrometer
11. Force Measurement
12. Torque Measurement

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. Temperature measurement
14. Autocollimator


1. Ability to handle different measurement tools and perform measurements in quality impulsion

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Learnt the usage of precision measuring instruments and practiced to take measurements
3. Learnt and practiced to build the required dimensions using slip gauge
4. Able to measure the various dimensions of the given specimen using the tool maker?s microscope
5. Able to find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge
6. Able to measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Learnt to determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen using Gear tooth vernier
8. Able to measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two
wire method
9. Learnt to study the construction and operation of coordinate measuring machine
10. Learnt to determine the diameter of bore by using telescopic gauge and dial bore indicator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. Able to measure the surface roughness using Talysurf instrument
12. Studied the characteristic between applied load and the output volt
13. Learnt the characteristics of developing torque and respective sensor output voltage
14. Studied the characteristics of thermocouple without compensation
15. Able to check the straightness & flatness of the given component by using Autocollimator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16. Learnt to measure the displacement using LVDT and to calibrate it with the millimeter scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OBJECTIVES

COURSE OUTCOMES

7 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

CONTENTS
Sl. No. Name of the Experiments Page No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CYCLE ? 1 EXPERIMENTS
1
Precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab ? A Study
7
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To build up the slip gauge for given dimension ? A Study
16
3
Thread parameters measurement using Tool Makers Microscope
20

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4
Calibration of dial gauge
23
5
Determination of taper angle by sine bar method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

26
6
Determination of gear tooth thickness using gear tooth vernier
29
7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement of thread parameters using floating carriage micrometer
32
CYCLE ? 2 EXPERIMENTS
8
Measurement of various dimensions using Coordinate Measuring Machine

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

35
9
Measurement of surface roughness
39
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement of bores using dial bore indicator and telescopic gauge
42
11
Force measurement using load cell
46

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12
Torque measurement using strain gauge
49
13
Temperature measurement using thermocouple

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

53
14
Measurement of alignment using autocollimator
56
ADDITIONAL EXPERIMENT BEYOND THE SYLLABUS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15
Thread parameters measurement using profile projector
60
16
Displacement measurement ? linear variable differential transducer (LVDT)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

62
PROJECT WORK
65

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.01 PRECISION MEASURING INSTRUMENT YSED IN
METROLOGY LAB ? A STUDY
Aim:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To study the following instruments and their usage for measuring dimensions of given specimen
1. Vernier caliper
2. Micrometer
3. Vernier height gauge
4. Depth micrometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Universal bevel protractor
Apparatus required:
Surface plate, specimen and above instruments
Vernier caliper:
The principle of vernier caliper is to use the minor difference between the sizes two scales or divisions

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

for measurement. The difference between them can be utilized to enhance the accuracy of measurement. The
vernier caliper essentially consists of two steel rules, sliding along each other.
Parts:
Different parts of the vernier caliper are
1. Beam ? It has main scale.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Fixed jaw
3. Sliding or Moving jaw ? It has vernier scale and sliding jaw locking screw.
4. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw knife
edges for internal measurement.
5. Stem or depth bar for depth measurement

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count:
Least count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm
1 VSD = 0.98 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm

10 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ID

DEPTH

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OD
Measurement:
Given Vernier caliper can be used for external, internal depth, slot and step measurement.
Measurement principle:
When both jaws contact each other scale shows the zero reading. The finer adjustment of movable jaw

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

can be done by the fine adjustment screw. First the whole movable jaw assembly is adjusted so that the two
measuring tips just touch the part to be measured. Then the fine adjustment clamp locking screw is tightened.
Final adjustment depending upon the sense of correct feel is made by the adjusting screw. After final
adjustment has been made sliding jaw locking screw is also tightened and the reading is noted.
All the parts of the Vernier caliper are made of good quality steel and measuring faces are hardened.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Types of vernier:
Vernier caliper, electronic vernier caliper, vernier depth caliper


11 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:

Main scale
reading (MSR)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale
reading (VSR) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total reading (MSR
+ VSR)
(mm)

OD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ID

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Depth


Vernier height gauge:
Vernier height gauge is a sort of vernier caliper equipped with a special instrument suitable for height

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measurement. It is always kept on the surface plate and the use of the surfaces plates as datum surfaces is
very essential.
Least count:
Least Count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

50 VSD = 49 mm
1 VSD = 0.98 mm
Least Count (LC) = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm
Parts:
1. Base

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Beam ? It has main scale.
3. Slider ? It has a vernier scale and slider locking screw.
4. Scriber
5. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


Material:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

All the parts of vernier are made of good quality steel and the measuring faces hardened.
Types of vernier gauge:
1. Analog vernier height gauge
2. Digital vernier height gauge
3. Electronic vernier height gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Main scale reading
(MSR)(mm)
Vernier scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale reading
(VSR)(mm)
Total reading (MSR +
VSR)(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
2.
3.

13 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outside micrometer:
The micrometer essentially consists of an accurate screw having about 10 or 20 threads per cm. The
end of the screw forms one measuring tip and other measuring tip is constituted by a stationary anvil in the
base of the frame. The screw is threaded for certain length and is plain afterwards. The plain portion is called

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

spindle and its end is the measuring surface. The spindle is advanced or retracted by turning a thimble
connected to a spindle. The spindle is a slide fit over the barrel and barrel is the fixed part attached with the
frame. The barrel & thimble are graduated. The pitch of the screw threads is 0.5 mm.

Least count:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least Count (LC) = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale
= 0.5 / 50 = 0.01 mm
Parts:
1. Frame
2. Anvil

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Spindle
4. Spindle lock
5. Barrel or outside sleeve
6. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions
7. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.
14 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Measurement:
It can be used for any external measurement.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Types of micrometer:
1. Outside micrometer, 2. Inside micrometer, 3.Depth micrometer, 4. Stick micrometer, 5. Screw thread
micrometer, 6. V ? anvil micrometer, 7. Blade type micrometer, 8. Dial micrometer, 9. Bench micrometer, 10.
Tape screw operated internal micrometer, 11. Groove micrometer, 12. Digital micrometer, 13.Differential screw
micrometer, 14.Adjustable range outside micrometer.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Ratchet stop mechanism:
The object of the ratchet stop is to ensure that same level of torque is applied on the spindle while
measuring and the sense of the feel of operator is eliminated and consistent readings are obtained. By
providing this arrangement, the ratchet stop is made slip off when the torque applied to rotate the spindle
exceeds the set torque. Thus this provision ensures the application of same amount of torque during the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measurement.
Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)
Head scale reading
(HSR x LC) (mm)
Total Reading (PSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

+ HSR) (mm)
1.
2.

Depth micrometer:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Depth micrometer is a sort of micrometer which is mainly used for measuring depth of holes, so it is
named as depth micrometer.
Parts:
1. Shoulder
2. Spindle

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Spindle lock
4. Barrel or outside sleeve ? It has pitch scale.
5. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions.
6. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.
The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


Least count:
Least Count = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale = 0.50/50

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= 0.01 mm
Measurements:
It can be used for measuring the depth of holes, slots and recessed areas. The pitch of the screw thread
is 0.5 mm. The least count is 0.01 mm. Shoulder acts as a reference surface and is held firmly and
perpendicular to the centre line of the hole. For large range of measurement extension rods are used. In the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

barrel the scale is calibrated. The accuracy again depends upon the sense of touch.
Procedure:
First, calculate the least count of the instrument. Check the zero error. Measure the specimen note
down the main scale reading or the head scale reading. Note down the vernier or head scale coincidence with
main or pitch scale divisions.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) (mm)
Head Scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Coincidence (HSC)
Head scale reading
(HSR x LC) (mm)
Total Reading (PSR
+ HSR) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.


2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Universal bevel protractor:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
Bevel protractor is an instrument for measuring the angle between the two faces of a specimen. It
consists of a base plate on which a circular scale is engraved. It is graduated in degrees. An adjustment plate
is attached to a circular plate containing the vernier scale. The adjustable blade can be locked in any position.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The circular plate has 360 division divided into four parts of 90 degrees each. The adjustable parts have 24
divisions of to the right and left sides of zero reading. These scales are used according to the position of the
specimen with respect to movable scale.
Procedure:
1. Place the specimen whose taper is to be measured between the adjustable plate and movable

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

blade with one of its face parallel to the base.
2. Lock the adjustable plate in position and note down the main scale reading depending upon the
direction of rotation of adjustable plate in clockwise or anticlockwise.
3. Note the VSC to the right of zero.
4. Multiply the VSC with the least count and add to MSR to obtain the actual reading.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count:
Least Count = 2 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1
o
24 VSD = 46

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
=> 1 VSD = 23/12
LC = 2 ? 23/12 = 1/12
o
= 5? (five minutes)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Main scale reading
(MSR) (deg)
Vernier scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale reading
(VSR) (deg)
Total reading (MSR +
VSR)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(deg)
1.
2.
The angle of scriber of the vernier height gauge =
Result:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thus the various precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab are studied and the specimen
dimensions are recorded.
Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for linear, angular,
roundness and roughness measurements they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

instrument according to a specific requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).
Application:
1. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Metrology
2. Define ? Inspection
3. What are the needs of inspection in industries?
4. What are the various methods involving the measurement?
5. Define ? Precision

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Define ? Accuracy
7. Define ? Calibration
8. Define ? Repeatability
9. Define ? Magnification
10. Define ? Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. Define ? Systematic Error
12. Define ? Random Error
13. Define ? Parallax Error
14. Define ? Environmental Error
15. Define ? Cosine Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

18 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.02 BUILD UP THE SLIP GAUGE FOR GIVEN DIMENSION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? A STUDY
Aim:
To build up the slip gauge for given dimension
Apparatus required:
1. Slip gauges set

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Surface plate
3. Soft cloth
Diagram:

Description:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Slip gauge are universally accepted standard of length in industry. They are the working standard for
linear dimension. These were invented by a Swedish Engineer, C.E. Johansson. They are used
1. For direct precise measurement where the accuracy of the workpiece demand it.
2. For use with high- magnification comparators to establish the size of the gauge blocks in general
use.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Gauge blocks are also used for many other purposes such as checking the accuracy of measuring
instrument or setting up a comparator to a specific dimension, enabling a batch of component to be
quickly and accurately checked or indeed in any situation where there is need to refer to standard of
known length these blocks are rectangular.
19 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Most gauge blocks are produced from high grade steel, hardened and established by a heat treatment
process to give a high degree of dimensional stability. Gauge blocks are also manufactured from tungsten
carbide which is an extremely hard and wear resistant material. The measuring faces have a lapped finish.
The faces are perfectly flat and parallel to one another with a high degree of accuracy. Each block has an

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

extremely high dimensional accuracy at 20
o
C.
These slip gauge are available in variety of selected sets both in inch units and metric units. Letter ?E? is
used for inch units and ?M? is used for metric standard number of pieces in a set following the letter E or M. For

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

example EBI refers to a set whose blocks are in metric units and are 83 in number. Each block dimensions is
printed on anyone of its face itself the size of any required standard being made up by combining the
appropriate number of these different size blocks.
If two gauges are slid and twisted together under pressure they will firmly join together. This process,
known as wringing, is very useful because it enables several gauge blocks to be assembled together to

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

produce a required size. In fact the success of precision measurement by slip gauges depends on the
phenomenon of wringing.
First the gauge is oscillated slightly with very light pressure over other gauge so as to detect pressure at
any foreign particles between the surfaces. One gauge is placed perpendicular to other using standard
gauging pressure and rotary motion is applied until the blocks are lined up.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. Build the given dimension by wringing minimum number of slip gauges.
2. Note the given dimension and choose the minimum possible slip gauge available in the set so as to
accommodate the last decimal value. The minimum slip gauge value dimension available i.e., 1.12
mm must be chosen followed by 1.5 mm thick gauge block.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Follow the above steps to build up the slip gauge of any dimension.
Precautions:
1. Slip gauges should be handled very carefully placed gently and should never be dropped.
2. Whenever a slip gauge is being removed from the set, its dimensions are noted and must be
replaced into the set at its appropriate place only.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Correct procedure must be followed in wringing and also in removing the gauge blocks.
4. They should be cleaned well before use and petroleum jelly is applied after use.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

20 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:
Range (mm) Increment (mm) No. of pieces

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total = ____________ Pieces
Total length of slip gauge = ________ mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Given diameter Slip gauges used Obtained dimensions

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Slip gauge set is studied and the given dimensions are building up by wringing minimum number of slip
gauges.
Outcome:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Students will be able to select proper measuring instrument and know requirement of calibration, errors
in measurement etc. They can perform accurate measurements.
Application:
1. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Why C.I. is preferred material for surface plates and tables?
2. Why V ? blocks are generally manufactured in pairs?
3. Why micrometer is required to be tested for accuracy?
4. Define ? Linear Measurement
5. List the linear measuring instrument according to their accuracy.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Define ? Least Count
7. What are the uses of vernier depth gauge?
8. What are the uses of feeler gauges?
9. What are the uses of straight edge?
10. What are the uses of angle plate?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. What are the uses of V ? block?
12. What are the uses of combination square?
13. What precautions should be taken while using slip gauges?
14. What is wringing?
15. Why the slip gauges are termed as ?End standard?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

22 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.03 THREAD PARAMETERS MEASUREMENT USING
TOOL MAKERS MICROSCOPE
Aim:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To study the tool makers microscope and in the process measure the various dimensions of the given
specimen
Apparatus required:
1. Tool makers microscope
2. Specimen

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diagram:

Description:
The tool maker?s microscope is designed for measurement of parts of complex forms; for example,
profile of a tool having external threads. It can also be used for measuring centre to centre distance of the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

holes in any plane as well as the coordinates of the outline of a complex template gauge, using the
coordinates measuring system.
23 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Basically it consists of an optical head which can be adjusted vertically along the ways of supporting

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

column. The optical head can be clamped at any position by a screw. On the work table (which as a circular
base in which there are graduations) the part to be inspected is placed. The table has a compound slide by
means of which the part can be measured. For giving these two movements, there are two micrometer screws
having thimble scales and verniers. At the back of the base light source is arranged that provides horizontal
beam of light, reflected from a mirror by 90 degrees upwards towards the table. The beam of light passes

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

through the transparent glass plate on which flat plates can be checked are placed. Observations are made
through the eyepiece of the optical head.
Procedure:
1. Place the given specimen on the work table and switch on all the three light sources and adjust the
intensity of the light source until a clean image of the cross wires and specimen are seen through

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the eyepiece.
2. Coincide one of the two extreme edges between which the measurement has to be taken with
vertical or horizontal cross wires and depending upon the other image coincide with the same cross
wires by moving the above device. Note the reading.The difference between the two readings gives
the value of the required measurement.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Note the experiment specimen and the readings.
4. Tabulate the different measurements measured from the specimen.
Determination of thread parameters
Magnification =
S.No. Parameters

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Magnified value
(mm)
Actual value
(mm)
1. Outer diameter (O.D)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Internal diameter (I.D)

3. Pitch

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Flank angle


Result:
Included angle of the tool was measured using tool maker?s microscope and various dimensions of the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

given specimen are measured.


24 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the various parameters of thread and select proper measuring
instrument and know requirement of calibration, errors in measurement etc. They can perform accurate
measurements.
Application:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Machine Shop
2. Quality Department


1. What is meant by tool maker?s microscope?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. What is the light used in tool maker?s microscope?
3. What are the various characteristics that you would measure in a screw thread?
4. What are the instruments that are required for measuring screw thread?
5. Define ? Pitch
6. What are the causes of pitch error?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Define ? Flank
8. What are the effects of flank angle error?
9. What is progressive error?
10. What is periodic error?
11. What is drunken error?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. What is erratic error?
13. What are the applications of tool maker?s microscope?
14. What are the limitations of tool maker?s microscope?
15. What are the advantages of tool maker?s microscope?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

25 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.04 CALIBRATION OF DIAL GAUGE USING SLIP GAUGE
Aim:
To find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Apparatus required:
Dial gauge, magnetic stand, slip gauge, and surface plate
Diagram:

Description:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The dial test indicator is a precision measuring instrument which can convert linear motion into angular
motion by means of transmission mechanics of rack and pinion and can be used to measure linear vibration
and errors of shape.
This instrument has the features such as good appearance, compact size, light weight, high precision,
reasonable construction, constant measuring face etc. Rigidity of all parts is excellent. Probe is tipped with

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

carbide balls. A shock proof mechanism is provided for those with larger measuring range.

26 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Types of dial indicator:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Plunger type
2. Lever type
Plunger type dial indicator has a resolution counter and each division in main scale is 0.01 mm. In lever
type dial test indicator is replaced by ball type stylus.
Procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Fix the dial gauge to the stand rigidly and place the stand on the surface plate.
2. Set the plunger of dial gauge to first touch the upper surface of standard slip gauge and set indicator
to zero.
3. Raise then the plunger by pulling the screw above the dial scale.
4. Place the standard slip gauge underneath the plunger.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Release the plunger and let it to touch the standard slip gauge.
6. Note the reading on the dial scale.
Formulae:
The standard error of dial gauge is calculated by the formula

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
S.No.
Slip gauge reading ?x?
(mm)
Dial gauge reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
(x? - x)
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x? (x? - x)
1.
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Thus the accuracy and standard error of dial gauge is found. The standard error of given dial gauge is
__________.

27 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Students will be able to check the variation in tolerance during the inspection process of a
machined part, measure the deflection of a beam or ring under laboratory conditions, as well as many
other situations where a small measurement needs to be registered or indicated

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Milling Machine
2. Analog versus digital/electronic readout

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is comparator?
2. What are the types of comparators?
3. What is the LC for comparators?
4. What are the applications of comparator?
5. What is meant by plunger?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. What are the types of dial indicators?
7. Why a revolution counter is not provided in lever type dial test indicator?
8. Draw a line diagram of the operating mechanism of plunger type dial test indicator.
9. Explain the term magnification of a dial indicator.
10. What are the uses of dial test indicator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. What are the practical applications of dial test indicator?
12. What precautions should be taken while using dial test indicator?
13. What are the desirable qualities of a dial test indicator?
14. What are the advantages of dial test indicator?
15. What are the limitations of dial test indicator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16. Distinguish between comparator and measuring instrument.
17. What are the advantages of electrical comparator?
18. What are the advantages of optical comparator?
19. What are the uses of comparator?
20. What are the advantages and disadvantages of mechanical comparator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

28 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.05 DETERMINATION OF TAPER ANGLE BY SINE BAR
METHOD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Aim:
To measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare
Apparatus required:
Sine bar, slip gauges, dial gauge with stand, micrometer, surface plate, bevel protractor, vernier caliper
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
The sine bar principle uses the ratio of the length of two sides of a right triangle. It may be noted that
devices operating on sine principle are capable of ?self-generation?. The measurement is restricted to 45
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

from
accuracy point of view. Sine bar itself is not a measuring instrument.
Accuracy requirements of sine bar:
1. The axes of the rollers must be parallel to each other and the centre distance L must be precisely
known.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. The sine bar must be flat and parallel to the plane connecting the axes of the rollers.
3. The rollers must be of identical diameters and must have within a close tolerance.


29 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. Fix the dial gaugeon the magnetic stand and place the magnetic stand on the surface plate.Check
the parallelism of the sine bar.
2. Place the given specimen above the sine bar and place the dial gauge on top of the specimen.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Adjustthe dial gauge for zero deflection.
3. Raise the front end of the sine bar with slip gauges until the work surface is parallel to the datum
surface.
4. Check the parallelism using dial gauge.
5. Measure the distance between the centres of the sine bar rollers as ?L? and note the height of the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

slip gauge as ?H?.
6. Note the included angle of the specimen.
Formulae:
Sin ? = H/L where ? = Included angle of the specimen
H = Height of slip gauges

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

L = Distance between the centre of rollers
Tabulation:
S.No. L (mm) H (mm) Taper angle ( ?)
1.
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.

Result:
The taper angle of the given specimen using sine bar was found to be =
Outcome:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for angular measurements
and they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a specific
requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).

Application:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Flat Surface
2. Granite


30 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. List out the various angle measuring instruments.
2. What is the working principles sine bar?
3. How is a sine bar used to measure the angle?
4. What is the application of sine bar?
5. What is the material of sine bar?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Why sine bar is not preferred to use for measuring angles more than 45
0
?
7. What are the features of sine bar?
8. A 100 mm sine bar is to be set up to an angle of 33

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

0
, determine the slip gauges needed from 87
pieces set.
9. What are the various instruments used for measuring angles?
10. What is sine bar?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. How sine bar is used for angle measurement?
12. Explain how sine bar is used to measure angle of small size component.
13. Explain how sine bar is used to measure angle of large size component.
14. What are the various types of sine bar?
15. What are the limitations of sine bar?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16. What is sine center?
17. What is sine table?
18. What are the possible sources of errors in angular measurement by sine bar?
19. What are angle gauges?
20. How angle gauges are used for measuring angles?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

31 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.06 DETERMINATION OF GEAR TOOTH THICKNESS
USING GEAR TOOTH VERNIER
Aim:
To determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen and to draw the graph between the tooth
number and the error in thickness

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Apparatus required:
Gear tooth vernier, specimen, surface plate and vernier caliper
Diagram:

Description:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The tooth thickness, in general, is measured at pitch circle since gear tooth thickness varies from the tip
to the base circle of the tooth. This is possible only when there is an arrangement to fix that position for this
measurement by the gear tooth vernier. It has two vernier scales; one is vertical and other is horizontal.
Procedure:
FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

V SEMESTER - R 2013

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No. : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LABORATORY MANUAL
2 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

DHANALAKSHMI

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
2. To contribute to the promotion of Academic Excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels
3. To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING


Rendering the services to the global needs of engineering industries by educating students to become

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

professionally sound mechanical engineers of excellent caliber


To produce mechanical engineering technocrats with a perfect knowledge intellectual and hands on
experience and to inculcate the spirit of moral values and ethics to serve the society

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MISSION
MISSION
VISION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION

4 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals
To impart students with fundamental knowledge in mathematics and basic sciences that will mould
them to be successful professionals
2. Core competence

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To provide students with sound knowledge in engineering and experimental skills to identify
complex software problems in industry and to develop a practical solution for them
3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theory and practice which
enable them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and organization and to design

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

products requiring interdisciplinary skills
4. Professional skills
To bestow students with adequate training and provide opportunities to work as team that will build
up their communication skills, individual, leadership and supportive qualities and to enable them to
adapt and to work in ever changing technologies

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Life-long learning
To develop the ability of students to establish themselves as professionals in mechanical
engineering and to create awareness about the need for lifelong learning and pursuing advanced
degrees

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)
On completion of the B.E. (Mechanical) degree, the graduate will be able
a) To apply the basic knowledge of mathematics, science and engineering

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

b) To design and conduct experiments as well as to analyze and interpret data and apply the same in
the career or entrepreneurship
c) To design and develop innovative and creative software applications
d) To understand a complex real world problem and develop an efficient practical solution
e) To create, select and apply appropriate techniques, resources, modern engineering and IT tools

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

f) To understand the role as a professional and give the best to the society
g) To develop a system that will meet expected needs within realistic constraints such as economical
environmental, social, political, ethical, safety and sustainability
h) To communicate effectively and make others understand exactly what they are trying to tell in both
verbal and written forms

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

i) To work in a team as a team member or a leader and make unique contributions and work with
coordination
j) To engage in lifelong learning and exhibit their technical skills
k) To develop and manage projects in multidisciplinary environments

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY



To familiar with different measurement equipment?s and use of this industry for quality inspection

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

List of Experiments
1. Tool Maker?s Microscope
2. Comparator
3. Sine Bar
4. Gear Tooth Vernier Caliper

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Floating gauge Micrometer
6. Coordinate Measuring Machine
7. Surface Finish Measuring Equipment
8. Vernier Height Gauge
9. Bore diameter measurement using telescope gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. Bore diameter measurement using micrometer
11. Force Measurement
12. Torque Measurement
13. Temperature measurement
14. Autocollimator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Ability to handle different measurement tools and perform measurements in quality impulsion
2. Learnt the usage of precision measuring instruments and practiced to take measurements
3. Learnt and practiced to build the required dimensions using slip gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Able to measure the various dimensions of the given specimen using the tool maker?s microscope
5. Able to find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge
6. Able to measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare
7. Learnt to determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen using Gear tooth vernier
8. Able to measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

wire method
9. Learnt to study the construction and operation of coordinate measuring machine
10. Learnt to determine the diameter of bore by using telescopic gauge and dial bore indicator
11. Able to measure the surface roughness using Talysurf instrument
12. Studied the characteristic between applied load and the output volt

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. Learnt the characteristics of developing torque and respective sensor output voltage
14. Studied the characteristics of thermocouple without compensation
15. Able to check the straightness & flatness of the given component by using Autocollimator
16. Learnt to measure the displacement using LVDT and to calibrate it with the millimeter scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OBJECTIVES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OUTCOMES

7 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CONTENTS
Sl. No. Name of the Experiments Page No.
CYCLE ? 1 EXPERIMENTS
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab ? A Study
7
2
To build up the slip gauge for given dimension ? A Study
16

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
Thread parameters measurement using Tool Makers Microscope
20
4
Calibration of dial gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

23
5
Determination of taper angle by sine bar method
26
6

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of gear tooth thickness using gear tooth vernier
29
7
Measurement of thread parameters using floating carriage micrometer
32

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CYCLE ? 2 EXPERIMENTS
8
Measurement of various dimensions using Coordinate Measuring Machine
35
9

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement of surface roughness
39
10
Measurement of bores using dial bore indicator and telescopic gauge
42

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11
Force measurement using load cell
46
12
Torque measurement using strain gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

49
13
Temperature measurement using thermocouple
53
14

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement of alignment using autocollimator
56
ADDITIONAL EXPERIMENT BEYOND THE SYLLABUS
15
Thread parameters measurement using profile projector

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

60
16
Displacement measurement ? linear variable differential transducer (LVDT)
62
PROJECT WORK

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

65


8 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.01 PRECISION MEASURING INSTRUMENT YSED IN
METROLOGY LAB ? A STUDY
Aim:
To study the following instruments and their usage for measuring dimensions of given specimen
1. Vernier caliper

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Micrometer
3. Vernier height gauge
4. Depth micrometer
5. Universal bevel protractor
Apparatus required:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Surface plate, specimen and above instruments
Vernier caliper:
The principle of vernier caliper is to use the minor difference between the sizes two scales or divisions
for measurement. The difference between them can be utilized to enhance the accuracy of measurement. The
vernier caliper essentially consists of two steel rules, sliding along each other.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Parts:
Different parts of the vernier caliper are
1. Beam ? It has main scale.
2. Fixed jaw
3. Sliding or Moving jaw ? It has vernier scale and sliding jaw locking screw.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw knife
edges for internal measurement.
5. Stem or depth bar for depth measurement
Least count:
Least count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm
1 VSD = 0.98 mm
Least count = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


ID

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPTH


OD
Measurement:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Given Vernier caliper can be used for external, internal depth, slot and step measurement.
Measurement principle:
When both jaws contact each other scale shows the zero reading. The finer adjustment of movable jaw
can be done by the fine adjustment screw. First the whole movable jaw assembly is adjusted so that the two
measuring tips just touch the part to be measured. Then the fine adjustment clamp locking screw is tightened.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Final adjustment depending upon the sense of correct feel is made by the adjusting screw. After final
adjustment has been made sliding jaw locking screw is also tightened and the reading is noted.
All the parts of the Vernier caliper are made of good quality steel and measuring faces are hardened.
Types of vernier:
Vernier caliper, electronic vernier caliper, vernier depth caliper

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Main scale
reading (MSR)
(mm)
Vernier scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale
reading (VSR) (mm)
Total reading (MSR
+ VSR)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)

OD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ID


Depth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier height gauge:
Vernier height gauge is a sort of vernier caliper equipped with a special instrument suitable for height
measurement. It is always kept on the surface plate and the use of the surfaces plates as datum surfaces is
very essential.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count:
Least Count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm
1 VSD = 0.98 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least Count (LC) = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm
Parts:
1. Base
2. Beam ? It has main scale.
3. Slider ? It has a vernier scale and slider locking screw.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Scriber
5. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw.


12 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Material:
All the parts of vernier are made of good quality steel and the measuring faces hardened.
Types of vernier gauge:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Analog vernier height gauge
2. Digital vernier height gauge
3. Electronic vernier height gauge
Tabulation:
Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Main scale reading
(MSR)(mm)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(VSR)(mm)
Total reading (MSR +
VSR)(mm)
1.
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.

13 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Outside micrometer:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The micrometer essentially consists of an accurate screw having about 10 or 20 threads per cm. The
end of the screw forms one measuring tip and other measuring tip is constituted by a stationary anvil in the
base of the frame. The screw is threaded for certain length and is plain afterwards. The plain portion is called
spindle and its end is the measuring surface. The spindle is advanced or retracted by turning a thimble
connected to a spindle. The spindle is a slide fit over the barrel and barrel is the fixed part attached with the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

frame. The barrel & thimble are graduated. The pitch of the screw threads is 0.5 mm.

Least count:
Least Count (LC) = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale
= 0.5 / 50 = 0.01 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Parts:
1. Frame
2. Anvil
3. Spindle
4. Spindle lock

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Barrel or outside sleeve
6. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions
7. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.
The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.
14 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement:
It can be used for any external measurement.
Types of micrometer:
1. Outside micrometer, 2. Inside micrometer, 3.Depth micrometer, 4. Stick micrometer, 5. Screw thread

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

micrometer, 6. V ? anvil micrometer, 7. Blade type micrometer, 8. Dial micrometer, 9. Bench micrometer, 10.
Tape screw operated internal micrometer, 11. Groove micrometer, 12. Digital micrometer, 13.Differential screw
micrometer, 14.Adjustable range outside micrometer.
Ratchet stop mechanism:
The object of the ratchet stop is to ensure that same level of torque is applied on the spindle while

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measuring and the sense of the feel of operator is eliminated and consistent readings are obtained. By
providing this arrangement, the ratchet stop is made slip off when the torque applied to rotate the spindle
exceeds the set torque. Thus this provision ensures the application of same amount of torque during the
measurement.
Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) (mm)
Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Head scale reading
(HSR x LC) (mm)
Total Reading (PSR
+ HSR) (mm)
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.

Depth micrometer:
Depth micrometer is a sort of micrometer which is mainly used for measuring depth of holes, so it is
named as depth micrometer.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Parts:
1. Shoulder
2. Spindle
3. Spindle lock
4. Barrel or outside sleeve ? It has pitch scale.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions.
6. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.
The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.
15 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count:
Least Count = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale = 0.50/50
= 0.01 mm
Measurements:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

It can be used for measuring the depth of holes, slots and recessed areas. The pitch of the screw thread
is 0.5 mm. The least count is 0.01 mm. Shoulder acts as a reference surface and is held firmly and
perpendicular to the centre line of the hole. For large range of measurement extension rods are used. In the
barrel the scale is calibrated. The accuracy again depends upon the sense of touch.
Procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

First, calculate the least count of the instrument. Check the zero error. Measure the specimen note
down the main scale reading or the head scale reading. Note down the vernier or head scale coincidence with
main or pitch scale divisions.
Tabulation:
Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) (mm)
Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)
Head scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(HSR x LC) (mm)
Total Reading (PSR
+ HSR) (mm)

1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Universal bevel protractor:

Description:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Bevel protractor is an instrument for measuring the angle between the two faces of a specimen. It
consists of a base plate on which a circular scale is engraved. It is graduated in degrees. An adjustment plate
is attached to a circular plate containing the vernier scale. The adjustable blade can be locked in any position.
The circular plate has 360 division divided into four parts of 90 degrees each. The adjustable parts have 24
divisions of to the right and left sides of zero reading. These scales are used according to the position of the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

specimen with respect to movable scale.
Procedure:
1. Place the specimen whose taper is to be measured between the adjustable plate and movable
blade with one of its face parallel to the base.
2. Lock the adjustable plate in position and note down the main scale reading depending upon the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

direction of rotation of adjustable plate in clockwise or anticlockwise.
3. Note the VSC to the right of zero.
4. Multiply the VSC with the least count and add to MSR to obtain the actual reading.
Least count:
Least Count = 2 MSD ? 1 VSD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 MSD = 1
o
24 VSD = 46
o
=> 1 VSD = 23/12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LC = 2 ? 23/12 = 1/12
o
= 5? (five minutes)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:
Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Main scale reading
(MSR) (deg)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(VSR) (deg)
Total reading (MSR +
VSR)
(deg)
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.
The angle of scriber of the vernier height gauge =
Result:
Thus the various precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab are studied and the specimen
dimensions are recorded.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for linear, angular,
roundness and roughness measurements they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring
instrument according to a specific requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).
Application:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Quality Department


1. Define ? Metrology
2. Define ? Inspection

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. What are the needs of inspection in industries?
4. What are the various methods involving the measurement?
5. Define ? Precision
6. Define ? Accuracy
7. Define ? Calibration

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Define ? Repeatability
9. Define ? Magnification
10. Define ? Error
11. Define ? Systematic Error
12. Define ? Random Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. Define ? Parallax Error
14. Define ? Environmental Error
15. Define ? Cosine Error
Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

18 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.02 BUILD UP THE SLIP GAUGE FOR GIVEN DIMENSION
? A STUDY
Aim:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To build up the slip gauge for given dimension
Apparatus required:
1. Slip gauges set
2. Surface plate
3. Soft cloth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diagram:

Description:
Slip gauge are universally accepted standard of length in industry. They are the working standard for
linear dimension. These were invented by a Swedish Engineer, C.E. Johansson. They are used

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. For direct precise measurement where the accuracy of the workpiece demand it.
2. For use with high- magnification comparators to establish the size of the gauge blocks in general
use.
3. Gauge blocks are also used for many other purposes such as checking the accuracy of measuring
instrument or setting up a comparator to a specific dimension, enabling a batch of component to be

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

quickly and accurately checked or indeed in any situation where there is need to refer to standard of
known length these blocks are rectangular.
19 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Most gauge blocks are produced from high grade steel, hardened and established by a heat treatment

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

process to give a high degree of dimensional stability. Gauge blocks are also manufactured from tungsten
carbide which is an extremely hard and wear resistant material. The measuring faces have a lapped finish.
The faces are perfectly flat and parallel to one another with a high degree of accuracy. Each block has an
extremely high dimensional accuracy at 20
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C.
These slip gauge are available in variety of selected sets both in inch units and metric units. Letter ?E? is
used for inch units and ?M? is used for metric standard number of pieces in a set following the letter E or M. For
example EBI refers to a set whose blocks are in metric units and are 83 in number. Each block dimensions is
printed on anyone of its face itself the size of any required standard being made up by combining the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

appropriate number of these different size blocks.
If two gauges are slid and twisted together under pressure they will firmly join together. This process,
known as wringing, is very useful because it enables several gauge blocks to be assembled together to
produce a required size. In fact the success of precision measurement by slip gauges depends on the
phenomenon of wringing.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

First the gauge is oscillated slightly with very light pressure over other gauge so as to detect pressure at
any foreign particles between the surfaces. One gauge is placed perpendicular to other using standard
gauging pressure and rotary motion is applied until the blocks are lined up.
Procedure:
1. Build the given dimension by wringing minimum number of slip gauges.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Note the given dimension and choose the minimum possible slip gauge available in the set so as to
accommodate the last decimal value. The minimum slip gauge value dimension available i.e., 1.12
mm must be chosen followed by 1.5 mm thick gauge block.
3. Follow the above steps to build up the slip gauge of any dimension.
Precautions:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Slip gauges should be handled very carefully placed gently and should never be dropped.
2. Whenever a slip gauge is being removed from the set, its dimensions are noted and must be
replaced into the set at its appropriate place only.
3. Correct procedure must be followed in wringing and also in removing the gauge blocks.
4. They should be cleaned well before use and petroleum jelly is applied after use.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

20 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Range (mm) Increment (mm) No. of pieces

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total = ____________ Pieces
Total length of slip gauge = ________ mm
Given diameter Slip gauges used Obtained dimensions

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Slip gauge set is studied and the given dimensions are building up by wringing minimum number of slip
gauges.
Outcome:
Students will be able to select proper measuring instrument and know requirement of calibration, errors
in measurement etc. They can perform accurate measurements.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Why C.I. is preferred material for surface plates and tables?
2. Why V ? blocks are generally manufactured in pairs?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Why micrometer is required to be tested for accuracy?
4. Define ? Linear Measurement
5. List the linear measuring instrument according to their accuracy.
6. Define ? Least Count
7. What are the uses of vernier depth gauge?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. What are the uses of feeler gauges?
9. What are the uses of straight edge?
10. What are the uses of angle plate?
11. What are the uses of V ? block?
12. What are the uses of combination square?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. What precautions should be taken while using slip gauges?
14. What is wringing?
15. Why the slip gauges are termed as ?End standard?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

22 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.03 THREAD PARAMETERS MEASUREMENT USING
TOOL MAKERS MICROSCOPE
Aim:
To study the tool makers microscope and in the process measure the various dimensions of the given
specimen

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Apparatus required:
1. Tool makers microscope
2. Specimen
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
The tool maker?s microscope is designed for measurement of parts of complex forms; for example,
profile of a tool having external threads. It can also be used for measuring centre to centre distance of the
holes in any plane as well as the coordinates of the outline of a complex template gauge, using the
coordinates measuring system.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

23 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Basically it consists of an optical head which can be adjusted vertically along the ways of supporting
column. The optical head can be clamped at any position by a screw. On the work table (which as a circular
base in which there are graduations) the part to be inspected is placed. The table has a compound slide by

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

means of which the part can be measured. For giving these two movements, there are two micrometer screws
having thimble scales and verniers. At the back of the base light source is arranged that provides horizontal
beam of light, reflected from a mirror by 90 degrees upwards towards the table. The beam of light passes
through the transparent glass plate on which flat plates can be checked are placed. Observations are made
through the eyepiece of the optical head.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. Place the given specimen on the work table and switch on all the three light sources and adjust the
intensity of the light source until a clean image of the cross wires and specimen are seen through
the eyepiece.
2. Coincide one of the two extreme edges between which the measurement has to be taken with

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

vertical or horizontal cross wires and depending upon the other image coincide with the same cross
wires by moving the above device. Note the reading.The difference between the two readings gives
the value of the required measurement.
3. Note the experiment specimen and the readings.
4. Tabulate the different measurements measured from the specimen.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of thread parameters
Magnification =
S.No. Parameters
Magnified value
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Actual value
(mm)
1. Outer diameter (O.D)

2. Internal diameter (I.D)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Pitch

4. Flank angle

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Included angle of the tool was measured using tool maker?s microscope and various dimensions of the
given specimen are measured.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

24 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the various parameters of thread and select proper measuring

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

instrument and know requirement of calibration, errors in measurement etc. They can perform accurate
measurements.
Application:
1. Machine Shop
2. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by tool maker?s microscope?
2. What is the light used in tool maker?s microscope?
3. What are the various characteristics that you would measure in a screw thread?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. What are the instruments that are required for measuring screw thread?
5. Define ? Pitch
6. What are the causes of pitch error?
7. Define ? Flank
8. What are the effects of flank angle error?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. What is progressive error?
10. What is periodic error?
11. What is drunken error?
12. What is erratic error?
13. What are the applications of tool maker?s microscope?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. What are the limitations of tool maker?s microscope?
15. What are the advantages of tool maker?s microscope?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

25 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.04 CALIBRATION OF DIAL GAUGE USING SLIP GAUGE
Aim:
To find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge
Apparatus required:
Dial gauge, magnetic stand, slip gauge, and surface plate

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diagram:

Description:
The dial test indicator is a precision measuring instrument which can convert linear motion into angular
motion by means of transmission mechanics of rack and pinion and can be used to measure linear vibration

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

and errors of shape.
This instrument has the features such as good appearance, compact size, light weight, high precision,
reasonable construction, constant measuring face etc. Rigidity of all parts is excellent. Probe is tipped with
carbide balls. A shock proof mechanism is provided for those with larger measuring range.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

26 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Types of dial indicator:
1. Plunger type
2. Lever type

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Plunger type dial indicator has a resolution counter and each division in main scale is 0.01 mm. In lever
type dial test indicator is replaced by ball type stylus.
Procedure:
1. Fix the dial gauge to the stand rigidly and place the stand on the surface plate.
2. Set the plunger of dial gauge to first touch the upper surface of standard slip gauge and set indicator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

to zero.
3. Raise then the plunger by pulling the screw above the dial scale.
4. Place the standard slip gauge underneath the plunger.
5. Release the plunger and let it to touch the standard slip gauge.
6. Note the reading on the dial scale.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Formulae:
The standard error of dial gauge is calculated by the formula

Tabulation:
S.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Slip gauge reading ?x?
(mm)
Dial gauge reading
(mm)
(x? - x)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2


x? (x? - x)
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2


Result:
Thus the accuracy and standard error of dial gauge is found. The standard error of given dial gauge is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

__________.

27 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Outcome:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Students will be able to check the variation in tolerance during the inspection process of a
machined part, measure the deflection of a beam or ring under laboratory conditions, as well as many
other situations where a small measurement needs to be registered or indicated
Application:
1. Milling Machine

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Analog versus digital/electronic readout


1. What is comparator?
2. What are the types of comparators?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. What is the LC for comparators?
4. What are the applications of comparator?
5. What is meant by plunger?
6. What are the types of dial indicators?
7. Why a revolution counter is not provided in lever type dial test indicator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Draw a line diagram of the operating mechanism of plunger type dial test indicator.
9. Explain the term magnification of a dial indicator.
10. What are the uses of dial test indicator?
11. What are the practical applications of dial test indicator?
12. What precautions should be taken while using dial test indicator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. What are the desirable qualities of a dial test indicator?
14. What are the advantages of dial test indicator?
15. What are the limitations of dial test indicator?
16. Distinguish between comparator and measuring instrument.
17. What are the advantages of electrical comparator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

18. What are the advantages of optical comparator?
19. What are the uses of comparator?
20. What are the advantages and disadvantages of mechanical comparator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

28 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.05 DETERMINATION OF TAPER ANGLE BY SINE BAR
METHOD
Aim:
To measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Apparatus required:
Sine bar, slip gauges, dial gauge with stand, micrometer, surface plate, bevel protractor, vernier caliper
Diagram:

Description:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The sine bar principle uses the ratio of the length of two sides of a right triangle. It may be noted that
devices operating on sine principle are capable of ?self-generation?. The measurement is restricted to 45
o
from
accuracy point of view. Sine bar itself is not a measuring instrument.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Accuracy requirements of sine bar:
1. The axes of the rollers must be parallel to each other and the centre distance L must be precisely
known.
2. The sine bar must be flat and parallel to the plane connecting the axes of the rollers.
3. The rollers must be of identical diameters and must have within a close tolerance.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

29 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Fix the dial gaugeon the magnetic stand and place the magnetic stand on the surface plate.Check
the parallelism of the sine bar.
2. Place the given specimen above the sine bar and place the dial gauge on top of the specimen.
Adjustthe dial gauge for zero deflection.
3. Raise the front end of the sine bar with slip gauges until the work surface is parallel to the datum

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

surface.
4. Check the parallelism using dial gauge.
5. Measure the distance between the centres of the sine bar rollers as ?L? and note the height of the
slip gauge as ?H?.
6. Note the included angle of the specimen.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Formulae:
Sin ? = H/L where ? = Included angle of the specimen
H = Height of slip gauges
L = Distance between the centre of rollers
Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

S.No. L (mm) H (mm) Taper angle ( ?)
1.
2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
The taper angle of the given specimen using sine bar was found to be =
Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for angular measurements
and they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a specific

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).

Application:
1. Flat Surface
2. Granite

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

30 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. List out the various angle measuring instruments.
2. What is the working principles sine bar?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. How is a sine bar used to measure the angle?
4. What is the application of sine bar?
5. What is the material of sine bar?
6. Why sine bar is not preferred to use for measuring angles more than 45
0

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
7. What are the features of sine bar?
8. A 100 mm sine bar is to be set up to an angle of 33
0
, determine the slip gauges needed from 87

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

pieces set.
9. What are the various instruments used for measuring angles?
10. What is sine bar?
11. How sine bar is used for angle measurement?
12. Explain how sine bar is used to measure angle of small size component.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. Explain how sine bar is used to measure angle of large size component.
14. What are the various types of sine bar?
15. What are the limitations of sine bar?
16. What is sine center?
17. What is sine table?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

18. What are the possible sources of errors in angular measurement by sine bar?
19. What are angle gauges?
20. How angle gauges are used for measuring angles?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

31 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.06 DETERMINATION OF GEAR TOOTH THICKNESS
USING GEAR TOOTH VERNIER

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Aim:
To determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen and to draw the graph between the tooth
number and the error in thickness
Apparatus required:
Gear tooth vernier, specimen, surface plate and vernier caliper

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diagram:

Description:
The tooth thickness, in general, is measured at pitch circle since gear tooth thickness varies from the tip
to the base circle of the tooth. This is possible only when there is an arrangement to fix that position for this

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measurement by the gear tooth vernier. It has two vernier scales; one is vertical and other is horizontal.
Procedure:
32 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

1. Measure initially the outside diameter of the given gear specimen by means of a vertical calculation

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

of vernier caliper. Note the number of teeth. Calculate the module (m) using the formula.

M = OD/ (Z+2) where z ? number of teeth
M - Module
2. Calculate the theoretical tooth thickness (t) by t = z * m* sin (90/z).

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Set the vernier scale for the height and tighten.
4. Measure the thickness of each tooth using the horizontal scale. This is measured thickness. It can
be positive or negative.
H = m x [1+ Z/2 (1- Cos 90/Z)]
5. Calculate the error in the tooth thickness i.e,1. measured thickness ? Theoretical thickness

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Draw the graph between the tooth number and the error in thickness.
Tabulation:
Tooth
Number
Measured Thickness

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
Theoretical Thickness (mm)
Error in tooth thickness
(mm)
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
3

Tooth
Number

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MSR
(mm)
VSC

VSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
TR
(mm)
1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3

Graph:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Error



Tooth No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice
1 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

V SEMESTER - R 2013

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No. : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Section : _______________________________________


LABORATORY MANUAL
2 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

DHANALAKSHMI

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
2. To contribute to the promotion of Academic Excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels
3. To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

and soul

DEPARTMENT OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rendering the services to the global needs of engineering industries by educating students to become
professionally sound mechanical engineers of excellent caliber


To produce mechanical engineering technocrats with a perfect knowledge intellectual and hands on

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

experience and to inculcate the spirit of moral values and ethics to serve the society

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MISSION
MISSION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION

VISION

4 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals
To impart students with fundamental knowledge in mathematics and basic sciences that will mould
them to be successful professionals

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Core competence
To provide students with sound knowledge in engineering and experimental skills to identify
complex software problems in industry and to develop a practical solution for them
3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theory and practice which

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

enable them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and organization and to design
products requiring interdisciplinary skills
4. Professional skills
To bestow students with adequate training and provide opportunities to work as team that will build
up their communication skills, individual, leadership and supportive qualities and to enable them to

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

adapt and to work in ever changing technologies
5. Life-long learning
To develop the ability of students to establish themselves as professionals in mechanical
engineering and to create awareness about the need for lifelong learning and pursuing advanced
degrees

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)
On completion of the B.E. (Mechanical) degree, the graduate will be able

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

a) To apply the basic knowledge of mathematics, science and engineering
b) To design and conduct experiments as well as to analyze and interpret data and apply the same in
the career or entrepreneurship
c) To design and develop innovative and creative software applications
d) To understand a complex real world problem and develop an efficient practical solution

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

e) To create, select and apply appropriate techniques, resources, modern engineering and IT tools
f) To understand the role as a professional and give the best to the society
g) To develop a system that will meet expected needs within realistic constraints such as economical
environmental, social, political, ethical, safety and sustainability
h) To communicate effectively and make others understand exactly what they are trying to tell in both

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

verbal and written forms
i) To work in a team as a team member or a leader and make unique contributions and work with
coordination
j) To engage in lifelong learning and exhibit their technical skills
k) To develop and manage projects in multidisciplinary environments

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To familiar with different measurement equipment?s and use of this industry for quality inspection
List of Experiments
1. Tool Maker?s Microscope
2. Comparator
3. Sine Bar

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Gear Tooth Vernier Caliper
5. Floating gauge Micrometer
6. Coordinate Measuring Machine
7. Surface Finish Measuring Equipment
8. Vernier Height Gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. Bore diameter measurement using telescope gauge
10. Bore diameter measurement using micrometer
11. Force Measurement
12. Torque Measurement
13. Temperature measurement

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. Autocollimator


1. Ability to handle different measurement tools and perform measurements in quality impulsion
2. Learnt the usage of precision measuring instruments and practiced to take measurements

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Learnt and practiced to build the required dimensions using slip gauge
4. Able to measure the various dimensions of the given specimen using the tool maker?s microscope
5. Able to find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge
6. Able to measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare
7. Learnt to determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen using Gear tooth vernier

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Able to measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two
wire method
9. Learnt to study the construction and operation of coordinate measuring machine
10. Learnt to determine the diameter of bore by using telescopic gauge and dial bore indicator
11. Able to measure the surface roughness using Talysurf instrument

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. Studied the characteristic between applied load and the output volt
13. Learnt the characteristics of developing torque and respective sensor output voltage
14. Studied the characteristics of thermocouple without compensation
15. Able to check the straightness & flatness of the given component by using Autocollimator
16. Learnt to measure the displacement using LVDT and to calibrate it with the millimeter scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OBJECTIVES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OUTCOMES

7 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

CONTENTS
Sl. No. Name of the Experiments Page No.
CYCLE ? 1 EXPERIMENTS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1
Precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab ? A Study
7
2
To build up the slip gauge for given dimension ? A Study

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16
3
Thread parameters measurement using Tool Makers Microscope
20
4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Calibration of dial gauge
23
5
Determination of taper angle by sine bar method
26

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6
Determination of gear tooth thickness using gear tooth vernier
29
7
Measurement of thread parameters using floating carriage micrometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

32
CYCLE ? 2 EXPERIMENTS
8
Measurement of various dimensions using Coordinate Measuring Machine
35

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9
Measurement of surface roughness
39
10
Measurement of bores using dial bore indicator and telescopic gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

42
11
Force measurement using load cell
46
12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Torque measurement using strain gauge
49
13
Temperature measurement using thermocouple
53

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14
Measurement of alignment using autocollimator
56
ADDITIONAL EXPERIMENT BEYOND THE SYLLABUS
15

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thread parameters measurement using profile projector
60
16
Displacement measurement ? linear variable differential transducer (LVDT)
62

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROJECT WORK
65


8 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.01 PRECISION MEASURING INSTRUMENT YSED IN
METROLOGY LAB ? A STUDY
Aim:
To study the following instruments and their usage for measuring dimensions of given specimen

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Vernier caliper
2. Micrometer
3. Vernier height gauge
4. Depth micrometer
5. Universal bevel protractor

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Apparatus required:
Surface plate, specimen and above instruments
Vernier caliper:
The principle of vernier caliper is to use the minor difference between the sizes two scales or divisions
for measurement. The difference between them can be utilized to enhance the accuracy of measurement. The

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

vernier caliper essentially consists of two steel rules, sliding along each other.
Parts:
Different parts of the vernier caliper are
1. Beam ? It has main scale.
2. Fixed jaw

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Sliding or Moving jaw ? It has vernier scale and sliding jaw locking screw.
4. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw knife
edges for internal measurement.
5. Stem or depth bar for depth measurement
Least count:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm
1 VSD = 0.98 mm
Least count = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


ID

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPTH


OD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement:
Given Vernier caliper can be used for external, internal depth, slot and step measurement.
Measurement principle:
When both jaws contact each other scale shows the zero reading. The finer adjustment of movable jaw
can be done by the fine adjustment screw. First the whole movable jaw assembly is adjusted so that the two

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measuring tips just touch the part to be measured. Then the fine adjustment clamp locking screw is tightened.
Final adjustment depending upon the sense of correct feel is made by the adjusting screw. After final
adjustment has been made sliding jaw locking screw is also tightened and the reading is noted.
All the parts of the Vernier caliper are made of good quality steel and measuring faces are hardened.
Types of vernier:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier caliper, electronic vernier caliper, vernier depth caliper


11 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:

Main scale
reading (MSR)
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale
reading (VSR) (mm)
Total reading (MSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

+ VSR)
(mm)

OD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ID


Depth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier height gauge:
Vernier height gauge is a sort of vernier caliper equipped with a special instrument suitable for height
measurement. It is always kept on the surface plate and the use of the surfaces plates as datum surfaces is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

very essential.
Least count:
Least Count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 VSD = 0.98 mm
Least Count (LC) = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm
Parts:
1. Base
2. Beam ? It has main scale.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Slider ? It has a vernier scale and slider locking screw.
4. Scriber
5. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


Material:
All the parts of vernier are made of good quality steel and the measuring faces hardened.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Types of vernier gauge:
1. Analog vernier height gauge
2. Digital vernier height gauge
3. Electronic vernier height gauge
Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
Main scale reading
(MSR)(mm)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier scale reading
(VSR)(mm)
Total reading (MSR +
VSR)(mm)
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.
3.

13 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outside micrometer:
The micrometer essentially consists of an accurate screw having about 10 or 20 threads per cm. The
end of the screw forms one measuring tip and other measuring tip is constituted by a stationary anvil in the
base of the frame. The screw is threaded for certain length and is plain afterwards. The plain portion is called
spindle and its end is the measuring surface. The spindle is advanced or retracted by turning a thimble

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

connected to a spindle. The spindle is a slide fit over the barrel and barrel is the fixed part attached with the
frame. The barrel & thimble are graduated. The pitch of the screw threads is 0.5 mm.

Least count:
Least Count (LC) = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= 0.5 / 50 = 0.01 mm
Parts:
1. Frame
2. Anvil
3. Spindle

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Spindle lock
5. Barrel or outside sleeve
6. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions
7. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.
The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Measurement:
It can be used for any external measurement.
Types of micrometer:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Outside micrometer, 2. Inside micrometer, 3.Depth micrometer, 4. Stick micrometer, 5. Screw thread
micrometer, 6. V ? anvil micrometer, 7. Blade type micrometer, 8. Dial micrometer, 9. Bench micrometer, 10.
Tape screw operated internal micrometer, 11. Groove micrometer, 12. Digital micrometer, 13.Differential screw
micrometer, 14.Adjustable range outside micrometer.
Ratchet stop mechanism:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The object of the ratchet stop is to ensure that same level of torque is applied on the spindle while
measuring and the sense of the feel of operator is eliminated and consistent readings are obtained. By
providing this arrangement, the ratchet stop is made slip off when the torque applied to rotate the spindle
exceeds the set torque. Thus this provision ensures the application of same amount of torque during the
measurement.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) (mm)
Head Scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Coincidence (HSC)
Head scale reading
(HSR x LC) (mm)
Total Reading (PSR
+ HSR) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
2.

Depth micrometer:
Depth micrometer is a sort of micrometer which is mainly used for measuring depth of holes, so it is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

named as depth micrometer.
Parts:
1. Shoulder
2. Spindle
3. Spindle lock

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Barrel or outside sleeve ? It has pitch scale.
5. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions.
6. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.
The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.
15 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count:
Least Count = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale = 0.50/50
= 0.01 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurements:
It can be used for measuring the depth of holes, slots and recessed areas. The pitch of the screw thread
is 0.5 mm. The least count is 0.01 mm. Shoulder acts as a reference surface and is held firmly and
perpendicular to the centre line of the hole. For large range of measurement extension rods are used. In the
barrel the scale is calibrated. The accuracy again depends upon the sense of touch.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
First, calculate the least count of the instrument. Check the zero error. Measure the specimen note
down the main scale reading or the head scale reading. Note down the vernier or head scale coincidence with
main or pitch scale divisions.
Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) (mm)
Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Head scale reading
(HSR x LC) (mm)
Total Reading (PSR
+ HSR) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.


2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Universal bevel protractor:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
Bevel protractor is an instrument for measuring the angle between the two faces of a specimen. It
consists of a base plate on which a circular scale is engraved. It is graduated in degrees. An adjustment plate
is attached to a circular plate containing the vernier scale. The adjustable blade can be locked in any position.
The circular plate has 360 division divided into four parts of 90 degrees each. The adjustable parts have 24

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

divisions of to the right and left sides of zero reading. These scales are used according to the position of the
specimen with respect to movable scale.
Procedure:
1. Place the specimen whose taper is to be measured between the adjustable plate and movable
blade with one of its face parallel to the base.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Lock the adjustable plate in position and note down the main scale reading depending upon the
direction of rotation of adjustable plate in clockwise or anticlockwise.
3. Note the VSC to the right of zero.
4. Multiply the VSC with the least count and add to MSR to obtain the actual reading.
Least count:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least Count = 2 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1
o
24 VSD = 46
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

=> 1 VSD = 23/12
LC = 2 ? 23/12 = 1/12
o
= 5? (five minutes)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
Main scale reading
(MSR) (deg)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier scale reading
(VSR) (deg)
Total reading (MSR +
VSR)
(deg)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
2.
The angle of scriber of the vernier height gauge =
Result:
Thus the various precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab are studied and the specimen

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

dimensions are recorded.
Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for linear, angular,
roundness and roughness measurements they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring
instrument according to a specific requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Quality Department


1. Define ? Metrology

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Define ? Inspection
3. What are the needs of inspection in industries?
4. What are the various methods involving the measurement?
5. Define ? Precision
6. Define ? Accuracy

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Define ? Calibration
8. Define ? Repeatability
9. Define ? Magnification
10. Define ? Error
11. Define ? Systematic Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. Define ? Random Error
13. Define ? Parallax Error
14. Define ? Environmental Error
15. Define ? Cosine Error
Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

18 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.02 BUILD UP THE SLIP GAUGE FOR GIVEN DIMENSION
? A STUDY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Aim:
To build up the slip gauge for given dimension
Apparatus required:
1. Slip gauges set
2. Surface plate

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Soft cloth
Diagram:

Description:
Slip gauge are universally accepted standard of length in industry. They are the working standard for

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

linear dimension. These were invented by a Swedish Engineer, C.E. Johansson. They are used
1. For direct precise measurement where the accuracy of the workpiece demand it.
2. For use with high- magnification comparators to establish the size of the gauge blocks in general
use.
3. Gauge blocks are also used for many other purposes such as checking the accuracy of measuring

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

instrument or setting up a comparator to a specific dimension, enabling a batch of component to be
quickly and accurately checked or indeed in any situation where there is need to refer to standard of
known length these blocks are rectangular.
19 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Most gauge blocks are produced from high grade steel, hardened and established by a heat treatment
process to give a high degree of dimensional stability. Gauge blocks are also manufactured from tungsten
carbide which is an extremely hard and wear resistant material. The measuring faces have a lapped finish.
The faces are perfectly flat and parallel to one another with a high degree of accuracy. Each block has an
extremely high dimensional accuracy at 20

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C.
These slip gauge are available in variety of selected sets both in inch units and metric units. Letter ?E? is
used for inch units and ?M? is used for metric standard number of pieces in a set following the letter E or M. For
example EBI refers to a set whose blocks are in metric units and are 83 in number. Each block dimensions is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

printed on anyone of its face itself the size of any required standard being made up by combining the
appropriate number of these different size blocks.
If two gauges are slid and twisted together under pressure they will firmly join together. This process,
known as wringing, is very useful because it enables several gauge blocks to be assembled together to
produce a required size. In fact the success of precision measurement by slip gauges depends on the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

phenomenon of wringing.
First the gauge is oscillated slightly with very light pressure over other gauge so as to detect pressure at
any foreign particles between the surfaces. One gauge is placed perpendicular to other using standard
gauging pressure and rotary motion is applied until the blocks are lined up.
Procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Build the given dimension by wringing minimum number of slip gauges.
2. Note the given dimension and choose the minimum possible slip gauge available in the set so as to
accommodate the last decimal value. The minimum slip gauge value dimension available i.e., 1.12
mm must be chosen followed by 1.5 mm thick gauge block.
3. Follow the above steps to build up the slip gauge of any dimension.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Precautions:
1. Slip gauges should be handled very carefully placed gently and should never be dropped.
2. Whenever a slip gauge is being removed from the set, its dimensions are noted and must be
replaced into the set at its appropriate place only.
3. Correct procedure must be followed in wringing and also in removing the gauge blocks.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. They should be cleaned well before use and petroleum jelly is applied after use.



20 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Range (mm) Increment (mm) No. of pieces

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total = ____________ Pieces
Total length of slip gauge = ________ mm
Given diameter Slip gauges used Obtained dimensions

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Slip gauge set is studied and the given dimensions are building up by wringing minimum number of slip
gauges.
Outcome:
Students will be able to select proper measuring instrument and know requirement of calibration, errors

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

in measurement etc. They can perform accurate measurements.
Application:
1. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Why C.I. is preferred material for surface plates and tables?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Why V ? blocks are generally manufactured in pairs?
3. Why micrometer is required to be tested for accuracy?
4. Define ? Linear Measurement
5. List the linear measuring instrument according to their accuracy.
6. Define ? Least Count

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. What are the uses of vernier depth gauge?
8. What are the uses of feeler gauges?
9. What are the uses of straight edge?
10. What are the uses of angle plate?
11. What are the uses of V ? block?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. What are the uses of combination square?
13. What precautions should be taken while using slip gauges?
14. What is wringing?
15. Why the slip gauges are termed as ?End standard?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

22 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.03 THREAD PARAMETERS MEASUREMENT USING
TOOL MAKERS MICROSCOPE
Aim:
To study the tool makers microscope and in the process measure the various dimensions of the given

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

specimen
Apparatus required:
1. Tool makers microscope
2. Specimen
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
The tool maker?s microscope is designed for measurement of parts of complex forms; for example,
profile of a tool having external threads. It can also be used for measuring centre to centre distance of the
holes in any plane as well as the coordinates of the outline of a complex template gauge, using the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

coordinates measuring system.
23 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Basically it consists of an optical head which can be adjusted vertically along the ways of supporting
column. The optical head can be clamped at any position by a screw. On the work table (which as a circular

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

base in which there are graduations) the part to be inspected is placed. The table has a compound slide by
means of which the part can be measured. For giving these two movements, there are two micrometer screws
having thimble scales and verniers. At the back of the base light source is arranged that provides horizontal
beam of light, reflected from a mirror by 90 degrees upwards towards the table. The beam of light passes
through the transparent glass plate on which flat plates can be checked are placed. Observations are made

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

through the eyepiece of the optical head.
Procedure:
1. Place the given specimen on the work table and switch on all the three light sources and adjust the
intensity of the light source until a clean image of the cross wires and specimen are seen through
the eyepiece.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Coincide one of the two extreme edges between which the measurement has to be taken with
vertical or horizontal cross wires and depending upon the other image coincide with the same cross
wires by moving the above device. Note the reading.The difference between the two readings gives
the value of the required measurement.
3. Note the experiment specimen and the readings.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Tabulate the different measurements measured from the specimen.
Determination of thread parameters
Magnification =
S.No. Parameters
Magnified value

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
Actual value
(mm)
1. Outer diameter (O.D)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Internal diameter (I.D)

3. Pitch

4. Flank angle

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Included angle of the tool was measured using tool maker?s microscope and various dimensions of the
given specimen are measured.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

24 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Outcome:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Students will be able to understand the various parameters of thread and select proper measuring
instrument and know requirement of calibration, errors in measurement etc. They can perform accurate
measurements.
Application:
1. Machine Shop

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Quality Department


1. What is meant by tool maker?s microscope?
2. What is the light used in tool maker?s microscope?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. What are the various characteristics that you would measure in a screw thread?
4. What are the instruments that are required for measuring screw thread?
5. Define ? Pitch
6. What are the causes of pitch error?
7. Define ? Flank

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. What are the effects of flank angle error?
9. What is progressive error?
10. What is periodic error?
11. What is drunken error?
12. What is erratic error?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. What are the applications of tool maker?s microscope?
14. What are the limitations of tool maker?s microscope?
15. What are the advantages of tool maker?s microscope?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

25 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.04 CALIBRATION OF DIAL GAUGE USING SLIP GAUGE
Aim:
To find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge
Apparatus required:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Dial gauge, magnetic stand, slip gauge, and surface plate
Diagram:

Description:
The dial test indicator is a precision measuring instrument which can convert linear motion into angular

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

motion by means of transmission mechanics of rack and pinion and can be used to measure linear vibration
and errors of shape.
This instrument has the features such as good appearance, compact size, light weight, high precision,
reasonable construction, constant measuring face etc. Rigidity of all parts is excellent. Probe is tipped with
carbide balls. A shock proof mechanism is provided for those with larger measuring range.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

26 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Types of dial indicator:
1. Plunger type

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Lever type
Plunger type dial indicator has a resolution counter and each division in main scale is 0.01 mm. In lever
type dial test indicator is replaced by ball type stylus.
Procedure:
1. Fix the dial gauge to the stand rigidly and place the stand on the surface plate.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Set the plunger of dial gauge to first touch the upper surface of standard slip gauge and set indicator
to zero.
3. Raise then the plunger by pulling the screw above the dial scale.
4. Place the standard slip gauge underneath the plunger.
5. Release the plunger and let it to touch the standard slip gauge.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Note the reading on the dial scale.
Formulae:
The standard error of dial gauge is calculated by the formula

Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

S.No.
Slip gauge reading ?x?
(mm)
Dial gauge reading
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x? - x)
2


x? (x? - x)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
2


Result:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thus the accuracy and standard error of dial gauge is found. The standard error of given dial gauge is
__________.

27 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Students will be able to check the variation in tolerance during the inspection process of a
machined part, measure the deflection of a beam or ring under laboratory conditions, as well as many
other situations where a small measurement needs to be registered or indicated
Application:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Milling Machine
2. Analog versus digital/electronic readout


1. What is comparator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. What are the types of comparators?
3. What is the LC for comparators?
4. What are the applications of comparator?
5. What is meant by plunger?
6. What are the types of dial indicators?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Why a revolution counter is not provided in lever type dial test indicator?
8. Draw a line diagram of the operating mechanism of plunger type dial test indicator.
9. Explain the term magnification of a dial indicator.
10. What are the uses of dial test indicator?
11. What are the practical applications of dial test indicator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. What precautions should be taken while using dial test indicator?
13. What are the desirable qualities of a dial test indicator?
14. What are the advantages of dial test indicator?
15. What are the limitations of dial test indicator?
16. Distinguish between comparator and measuring instrument.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17. What are the advantages of electrical comparator?
18. What are the advantages of optical comparator?
19. What are the uses of comparator?
20. What are the advantages and disadvantages of mechanical comparator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

28 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.05 DETERMINATION OF TAPER ANGLE BY SINE BAR
METHOD
Aim:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare
Apparatus required:
Sine bar, slip gauges, dial gauge with stand, micrometer, surface plate, bevel protractor, vernier caliper
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
The sine bar principle uses the ratio of the length of two sides of a right triangle. It may be noted that
devices operating on sine principle are capable of ?self-generation?. The measurement is restricted to 45
o
from

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

accuracy point of view. Sine bar itself is not a measuring instrument.
Accuracy requirements of sine bar:
1. The axes of the rollers must be parallel to each other and the centre distance L must be precisely
known.
2. The sine bar must be flat and parallel to the plane connecting the axes of the rollers.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. The rollers must be of identical diameters and must have within a close tolerance.


29 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. Fix the dial gaugeon the magnetic stand and place the magnetic stand on the surface plate.Check
the parallelism of the sine bar.
2. Place the given specimen above the sine bar and place the dial gauge on top of the specimen.
Adjustthe dial gauge for zero deflection.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Raise the front end of the sine bar with slip gauges until the work surface is parallel to the datum
surface.
4. Check the parallelism using dial gauge.
5. Measure the distance between the centres of the sine bar rollers as ?L? and note the height of the
slip gauge as ?H?.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Note the included angle of the specimen.
Formulae:
Sin ? = H/L where ? = Included angle of the specimen
H = Height of slip gauges
L = Distance between the centre of rollers

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
S.No. L (mm) H (mm) Taper angle ( ?)
1.
2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
The taper angle of the given specimen using sine bar was found to be =
Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for angular measurements

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

and they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a specific
requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).

Application:
1. Flat Surface

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Granite


30 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. List out the various angle measuring instruments.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. What is the working principles sine bar?
3. How is a sine bar used to measure the angle?
4. What is the application of sine bar?
5. What is the material of sine bar?
6. Why sine bar is not preferred to use for measuring angles more than 45

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

0
?
7. What are the features of sine bar?
8. A 100 mm sine bar is to be set up to an angle of 33
0

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

, determine the slip gauges needed from 87
pieces set.
9. What are the various instruments used for measuring angles?
10. What is sine bar?
11. How sine bar is used for angle measurement?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. Explain how sine bar is used to measure angle of small size component.
13. Explain how sine bar is used to measure angle of large size component.
14. What are the various types of sine bar?
15. What are the limitations of sine bar?
16. What is sine center?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17. What is sine table?
18. What are the possible sources of errors in angular measurement by sine bar?
19. What are angle gauges?
20. How angle gauges are used for measuring angles?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

31 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00



Expt.No.06 DETERMINATION OF GEAR TOOTH THICKNESS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

USING GEAR TOOTH VERNIER
Aim:
To determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen and to draw the graph between the tooth
number and the error in thickness
Apparatus required:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Gear tooth vernier, specimen, surface plate and vernier caliper
Diagram:

Description:
The tooth thickness, in general, is measured at pitch circle since gear tooth thickness varies from the tip

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

to the base circle of the tooth. This is possible only when there is an arrangement to fix that position for this
measurement by the gear tooth vernier. It has two vernier scales; one is vertical and other is horizontal.
Procedure:
32 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Measure initially the outside diameter of the given gear specimen by means of a vertical calculation
of vernier caliper. Note the number of teeth. Calculate the module (m) using the formula.

M = OD/ (Z+2) where z ? number of teeth
M - Module

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Calculate the theoretical tooth thickness (t) by t = z * m* sin (90/z).
3. Set the vernier scale for the height and tighten.
4. Measure the thickness of each tooth using the horizontal scale. This is measured thickness. It can
be positive or negative.
H = m x [1+ Z/2 (1- Cos 90/Z)]

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Calculate the error in the tooth thickness i.e,1. measured thickness ? Theoretical thickness
6. Draw the graph between the tooth number and the error in thickness.
Tabulation:
Tooth
Number

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measured Thickness
(mm)
Theoretical Thickness (mm)
Error in tooth thickness
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1
2
3

Tooth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Number
MSR
(mm)
VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSR
(mm)
TR
(mm)
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
3

Graph:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tooth No.
33 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


Result:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The theoretical experiment value of gear tooth thickness is obtained and graph is drawn between error
and tooth number in tooth thickness
Theoretical tooth thickness =
Experimental tooth thickness =
Error in tooth thickness =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the basic measurement units and able to calibrate various
measuring parameters of the gear.
Application:
1. Gear Component

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Mining

1. Calculate the setting of a gear tooth vernier caliper for a straight spur gear having 40 teeth and
module 4.
2. What is the importance of chordal depth?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Define ? Chordal width
4. How is the actual profile of the gear tooth determined?
5. What are the manufacturing errors in gear element?
6. Define ? Addendum
7. Define ? Dedendum

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Define ? Flank of tooth
9. Define ? Pitch
10. Define ? Pitch Circle
11. Define ? Crest of tooth
12. Define ? Root of tooth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. Define ? Base Circle
14. Define ? Module
15. Define ? Angle of Obliquity

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice
1 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING


ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

V SEMESTER - R 2013

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No. : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LABORATORY MANUAL
2 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


3 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DHANALAKSHMI


College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.


1. To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
2. To contribute to the promotion of Academic Excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

levels
3. To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

DEPARTMENT OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rendering the services to the global needs of engineering industries by educating students to become
professionally sound mechanical engineers of excellent caliber

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To produce mechanical engineering technocrats with a perfect knowledge intellectual and hands on
experience and to inculcate the spirit of moral values and ethics to serve the society

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MISSION
MISSION
VISION

VISION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To impart students with fundamental knowledge in mathematics and basic sciences that will mould
them to be successful professionals
2. Core competence
To provide students with sound knowledge in engineering and experimental skills to identify
complex software problems in industry and to develop a practical solution for them

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theory and practice which
enable them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and organization and to design
products requiring interdisciplinary skills
4. Professional skills

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To bestow students with adequate training and provide opportunities to work as team that will build
up their communication skills, individual, leadership and supportive qualities and to enable them to
adapt and to work in ever changing technologies
5. Life-long learning
To develop the ability of students to establish themselves as professionals in mechanical

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

engineering and to create awareness about the need for lifelong learning and pursuing advanced
degrees

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)
On completion of the B.E. (Mechanical) degree, the graduate will be able
a) To apply the basic knowledge of mathematics, science and engineering
b) To design and conduct experiments as well as to analyze and interpret data and apply the same in
the career or entrepreneurship

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

c) To design and develop innovative and creative software applications
d) To understand a complex real world problem and develop an efficient practical solution
e) To create, select and apply appropriate techniques, resources, modern engineering and IT tools
f) To understand the role as a professional and give the best to the society
g) To develop a system that will meet expected needs within realistic constraints such as economical

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

environmental, social, political, ethical, safety and sustainability
h) To communicate effectively and make others understand exactly what they are trying to tell in both
verbal and written forms
i) To work in a team as a team member or a leader and make unique contributions and work with
coordination

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

j) To engage in lifelong learning and exhibit their technical skills
k) To develop and manage projects in multidisciplinary environments

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To familiar with different measurement equipment?s and use of this industry for quality inspection
List of Experiments
1. Tool Maker?s Microscope

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Comparator
3. Sine Bar
4. Gear Tooth Vernier Caliper
5. Floating gauge Micrometer
6. Coordinate Measuring Machine

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Surface Finish Measuring Equipment
8. Vernier Height Gauge
9. Bore diameter measurement using telescope gauge
10. Bore diameter measurement using micrometer
11. Force Measurement

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. Torque Measurement
13. Temperature measurement
14. Autocollimator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Ability to handle different measurement tools and perform measurements in quality impulsion
2. Learnt the usage of precision measuring instruments and practiced to take measurements
3. Learnt and practiced to build the required dimensions using slip gauge
4. Able to measure the various dimensions of the given specimen using the tool maker?s microscope
5. Able to find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Able to measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare
7. Learnt to determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen using Gear tooth vernier
8. Able to measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two
wire method
9. Learnt to study the construction and operation of coordinate measuring machine

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. Learnt to determine the diameter of bore by using telescopic gauge and dial bore indicator
11. Able to measure the surface roughness using Talysurf instrument
12. Studied the characteristic between applied load and the output volt
13. Learnt the characteristics of developing torque and respective sensor output voltage
14. Studied the characteristics of thermocouple without compensation

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15. Able to check the straightness & flatness of the given component by using Autocollimator
16. Learnt to measure the displacement using LVDT and to calibrate it with the millimeter scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OBJECTIVES

COURSE OUTCOMES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

CONTENTS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl. No. Name of the Experiments Page No.
CYCLE ? 1 EXPERIMENTS
1
Precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab ? A Study
7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
To build up the slip gauge for given dimension ? A Study
16
3
Thread parameters measurement using Tool Makers Microscope

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

20
4
Calibration of dial gauge
23
5

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of taper angle by sine bar method
26
6
Determination of gear tooth thickness using gear tooth vernier
29

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7
Measurement of thread parameters using floating carriage micrometer
32
CYCLE ? 2 EXPERIMENTS
8

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement of various dimensions using Coordinate Measuring Machine
35
9
Measurement of surface roughness
39

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
Measurement of bores using dial bore indicator and telescopic gauge
42
11
Force measurement using load cell

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

46
12
Torque measurement using strain gauge
49
13

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Temperature measurement using thermocouple
53
14
Measurement of alignment using autocollimator
56

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ADDITIONAL EXPERIMENT BEYOND THE SYLLABUS
15
Thread parameters measurement using profile projector
60
16

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Displacement measurement ? linear variable differential transducer (LVDT)
62
PROJECT WORK
65

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.01 PRECISION MEASURING INSTRUMENT YSED IN
METROLOGY LAB ? A STUDY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Aim:
To study the following instruments and their usage for measuring dimensions of given specimen
1. Vernier caliper
2. Micrometer
3. Vernier height gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Depth micrometer
5. Universal bevel protractor
Apparatus required:
Surface plate, specimen and above instruments
Vernier caliper:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The principle of vernier caliper is to use the minor difference between the sizes two scales or divisions
for measurement. The difference between them can be utilized to enhance the accuracy of measurement. The
vernier caliper essentially consists of two steel rules, sliding along each other.
Parts:
Different parts of the vernier caliper are

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Beam ? It has main scale.
2. Fixed jaw
3. Sliding or Moving jaw ? It has vernier scale and sliding jaw locking screw.
4. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw knife
edges for internal measurement.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Stem or depth bar for depth measurement
Least count:
Least count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 VSD = 0.98 mm
Least count = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm

10 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ID

DEPTH

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OD
Measurement:
Given Vernier caliper can be used for external, internal depth, slot and step measurement.
Measurement principle:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

When both jaws contact each other scale shows the zero reading. The finer adjustment of movable jaw
can be done by the fine adjustment screw. First the whole movable jaw assembly is adjusted so that the two
measuring tips just touch the part to be measured. Then the fine adjustment clamp locking screw is tightened.
Final adjustment depending upon the sense of correct feel is made by the adjusting screw. After final
adjustment has been made sliding jaw locking screw is also tightened and the reading is noted.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

All the parts of the Vernier caliper are made of good quality steel and measuring faces are hardened.
Types of vernier:
Vernier caliper, electronic vernier caliper, vernier depth caliper

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:

Main scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

reading (MSR)
(mm)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

reading (VSR) (mm)
Total reading (MSR
+ VSR)
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OD


ID

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Depth


Vernier height gauge:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier height gauge is a sort of vernier caliper equipped with a special instrument suitable for height
measurement. It is always kept on the surface plate and the use of the surfaces plates as datum surfaces is
very essential.
Least count:
Least Count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm
1 VSD = 0.98 mm
Least Count (LC) = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm
Parts:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Base
2. Beam ? It has main scale.
3. Slider ? It has a vernier scale and slider locking screw.
4. Scriber
5. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Material:
All the parts of vernier are made of good quality steel and the measuring faces hardened.
Types of vernier gauge:
1. Analog vernier height gauge
2. Digital vernier height gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Electronic vernier height gauge
Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Main scale reading
(MSR)(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale reading
(VSR)(mm)
Total reading (MSR +

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSR)(mm)
1.
2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Outside micrometer:
The micrometer essentially consists of an accurate screw having about 10 or 20 threads per cm. The
end of the screw forms one measuring tip and other measuring tip is constituted by a stationary anvil in the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

base of the frame. The screw is threaded for certain length and is plain afterwards. The plain portion is called
spindle and its end is the measuring surface. The spindle is advanced or retracted by turning a thimble
connected to a spindle. The spindle is a slide fit over the barrel and barrel is the fixed part attached with the
frame. The barrel & thimble are graduated. The pitch of the screw threads is 0.5 mm.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count:
Least Count (LC) = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale
= 0.5 / 50 = 0.01 mm
Parts:
1. Frame

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Anvil
3. Spindle
4. Spindle lock
5. Barrel or outside sleeve
6. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.
The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.
14 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Measurement:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

It can be used for any external measurement.
Types of micrometer:
1. Outside micrometer, 2. Inside micrometer, 3.Depth micrometer, 4. Stick micrometer, 5. Screw thread
micrometer, 6. V ? anvil micrometer, 7. Blade type micrometer, 8. Dial micrometer, 9. Bench micrometer, 10.
Tape screw operated internal micrometer, 11. Groove micrometer, 12. Digital micrometer, 13.Differential screw

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

micrometer, 14.Adjustable range outside micrometer.
Ratchet stop mechanism:
The object of the ratchet stop is to ensure that same level of torque is applied on the spindle while
measuring and the sense of the feel of operator is eliminated and consistent readings are obtained. By
providing this arrangement, the ratchet stop is made slip off when the torque applied to rotate the spindle

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

exceeds the set torque. Thus this provision ensures the application of same amount of torque during the
measurement.
Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Pitch Scale Reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(PSR) (mm)
Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)
Head scale reading
(HSR x LC) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total Reading (PSR
+ HSR) (mm)
1.
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Depth micrometer:
Depth micrometer is a sort of micrometer which is mainly used for measuring depth of holes, so it is
named as depth micrometer.
Parts:
1. Shoulder

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Spindle
3. Spindle lock
4. Barrel or outside sleeve ? It has pitch scale.
5. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions.
6. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.
15 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


Least count:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least Count = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale = 0.50/50
= 0.01 mm
Measurements:
It can be used for measuring the depth of holes, slots and recessed areas. The pitch of the screw thread
is 0.5 mm. The least count is 0.01 mm. Shoulder acts as a reference surface and is held firmly and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

perpendicular to the centre line of the hole. For large range of measurement extension rods are used. In the
barrel the scale is calibrated. The accuracy again depends upon the sense of touch.
Procedure:
First, calculate the least count of the instrument. Check the zero error. Measure the specimen note
down the main scale reading or the head scale reading. Note down the vernier or head scale coincidence with

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

main or pitch scale divisions.
Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)
Head scale reading
(HSR x LC) (mm)
Total Reading (PSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

+ HSR) (mm)

1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.


16 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Universal bevel protractor:

Description:
Bevel protractor is an instrument for measuring the angle between the two faces of a specimen. It
consists of a base plate on which a circular scale is engraved. It is graduated in degrees. An adjustment plate

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

is attached to a circular plate containing the vernier scale. The adjustable blade can be locked in any position.
The circular plate has 360 division divided into four parts of 90 degrees each. The adjustable parts have 24
divisions of to the right and left sides of zero reading. These scales are used according to the position of the
specimen with respect to movable scale.
Procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Place the specimen whose taper is to be measured between the adjustable plate and movable
blade with one of its face parallel to the base.
2. Lock the adjustable plate in position and note down the main scale reading depending upon the
direction of rotation of adjustable plate in clockwise or anticlockwise.
3. Note the VSC to the right of zero.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Multiply the VSC with the least count and add to MSR to obtain the actual reading.
Least count:
Least Count = 2 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

24 VSD = 46
o
=> 1 VSD = 23/12
LC = 2 ? 23/12 = 1/12
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= 5? (five minutes)



17 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Main scale reading
(MSR) (deg)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale reading
(VSR) (deg)
Total reading (MSR +

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSR)
(deg)
1.
2.
The angle of scriber of the vernier height gauge =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Thus the various precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab are studied and the specimen
dimensions are recorded.
Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for linear, angular,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

roundness and roughness measurements they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring
instrument according to a specific requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).
Application:
1. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Metrology
2. Define ? Inspection
3. What are the needs of inspection in industries?
4. What are the various methods involving the measurement?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Define ? Precision
6. Define ? Accuracy
7. Define ? Calibration
8. Define ? Repeatability
9. Define ? Magnification

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. Define ? Error
11. Define ? Systematic Error
12. Define ? Random Error
13. Define ? Parallax Error
14. Define ? Environmental Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15. Define ? Cosine Error
Viva-voce

18 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.02 BUILD UP THE SLIP GAUGE FOR GIVEN DIMENSION
? A STUDY
Aim:
To build up the slip gauge for given dimension
Apparatus required:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Slip gauges set
2. Surface plate
3. Soft cloth
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
Slip gauge are universally accepted standard of length in industry. They are the working standard for
linear dimension. These were invented by a Swedish Engineer, C.E. Johansson. They are used
1. For direct precise measurement where the accuracy of the workpiece demand it.
2. For use with high- magnification comparators to establish the size of the gauge blocks in general

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

use.
3. Gauge blocks are also used for many other purposes such as checking the accuracy of measuring
instrument or setting up a comparator to a specific dimension, enabling a batch of component to be
quickly and accurately checked or indeed in any situation where there is need to refer to standard of
known length these blocks are rectangular.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

19 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Most gauge blocks are produced from high grade steel, hardened and established by a heat treatment
process to give a high degree of dimensional stability. Gauge blocks are also manufactured from tungsten
carbide which is an extremely hard and wear resistant material. The measuring faces have a lapped finish.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The faces are perfectly flat and parallel to one another with a high degree of accuracy. Each block has an
extremely high dimensional accuracy at 20
o
C.
These slip gauge are available in variety of selected sets both in inch units and metric units. Letter ?E? is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

used for inch units and ?M? is used for metric standard number of pieces in a set following the letter E or M. For
example EBI refers to a set whose blocks are in metric units and are 83 in number. Each block dimensions is
printed on anyone of its face itself the size of any required standard being made up by combining the
appropriate number of these different size blocks.
If two gauges are slid and twisted together under pressure they will firmly join together. This process,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

known as wringing, is very useful because it enables several gauge blocks to be assembled together to
produce a required size. In fact the success of precision measurement by slip gauges depends on the
phenomenon of wringing.
First the gauge is oscillated slightly with very light pressure over other gauge so as to detect pressure at
any foreign particles between the surfaces. One gauge is placed perpendicular to other using standard

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

gauging pressure and rotary motion is applied until the blocks are lined up.
Procedure:
1. Build the given dimension by wringing minimum number of slip gauges.
2. Note the given dimension and choose the minimum possible slip gauge available in the set so as to
accommodate the last decimal value. The minimum slip gauge value dimension available i.e., 1.12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

mm must be chosen followed by 1.5 mm thick gauge block.
3. Follow the above steps to build up the slip gauge of any dimension.
Precautions:
1. Slip gauges should be handled very carefully placed gently and should never be dropped.
2. Whenever a slip gauge is being removed from the set, its dimensions are noted and must be

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

replaced into the set at its appropriate place only.
3. Correct procedure must be followed in wringing and also in removing the gauge blocks.
4. They should be cleaned well before use and petroleum jelly is applied after use.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

20 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:
Range (mm) Increment (mm) No. of pieces

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total = ____________ Pieces

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total length of slip gauge = ________ mm
Given diameter Slip gauges used Obtained dimensions

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Slip gauge set is studied and the given dimensions are building up by wringing minimum number of slip
gauges.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Students will be able to select proper measuring instrument and know requirement of calibration, errors
in measurement etc. They can perform accurate measurements.
Application:
1. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Why C.I. is preferred material for surface plates and tables?
2. Why V ? blocks are generally manufactured in pairs?
3. Why micrometer is required to be tested for accuracy?
4. Define ? Linear Measurement

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. List the linear measuring instrument according to their accuracy.
6. Define ? Least Count
7. What are the uses of vernier depth gauge?
8. What are the uses of feeler gauges?
9. What are the uses of straight edge?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. What are the uses of angle plate?
11. What are the uses of V ? block?
12. What are the uses of combination square?
13. What precautions should be taken while using slip gauges?
14. What is wringing?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15. Why the slip gauges are termed as ?End standard?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

22 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


Expt.No.03 THREAD PARAMETERS MEASUREMENT USING
TOOL MAKERS MICROSCOPE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Aim:
To study the tool makers microscope and in the process measure the various dimensions of the given
specimen
Apparatus required:
1. Tool makers microscope

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Specimen
Diagram:

Description:
The tool maker?s microscope is designed for measurement of parts of complex forms; for example,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

profile of a tool having external threads. It can also be used for measuring centre to centre distance of the
holes in any plane as well as the coordinates of the outline of a complex template gauge, using the
coordinates measuring system.
23 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Basically it consists of an optical head which can be adjusted vertically along the ways of supporting
column. The optical head can be clamped at any position by a screw. On the work table (which as a circular
base in which there are graduations) the part to be inspected is placed. The table has a compound slide by
means of which the part can be measured. For giving these two movements, there are two micrometer screws
having thimble scales and verniers. At the back of the base light source is arranged that provides horizontal

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

beam of light, reflected from a mirror by 90 degrees upwards towards the table. The beam of light passes
through the transparent glass plate on which flat plates can be checked are placed. Observations are made
through the eyepiece of the optical head.
Procedure:
1. Place the given specimen on the work table and switch on all the three light sources and adjust the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

intensity of the light source until a clean image of the cross wires and specimen are seen through
the eyepiece.
2. Coincide one of the two extreme edges between which the measurement has to be taken with
vertical or horizontal cross wires and depending upon the other image coincide with the same cross
wires by moving the above device. Note the reading.The difference between the two readings gives

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the value of the required measurement.
3. Note the experiment specimen and the readings.
4. Tabulate the different measurements measured from the specimen.
Determination of thread parameters
Magnification =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

S.No. Parameters
Magnified value
(mm)
Actual value
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Outer diameter (O.D)

2. Internal diameter (I.D)

3. Pitch

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Flank angle


Result:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Included angle of the tool was measured using tool maker?s microscope and various dimensions of the
given specimen are measured.


24 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the various parameters of thread and select proper measuring
instrument and know requirement of calibration, errors in measurement etc. They can perform accurate
measurements.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Machine Shop
2. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by tool maker?s microscope?
2. What is the light used in tool maker?s microscope?
3. What are the various characteristics that you would measure in a screw thread?
4. What are the instruments that are required for measuring screw thread?
5. Define ? Pitch

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. What are the causes of pitch error?
7. Define ? Flank
8. What are the effects of flank angle error?
9. What is progressive error?
10. What is periodic error?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. What is drunken error?
12. What is erratic error?
13. What are the applications of tool maker?s microscope?
14. What are the limitations of tool maker?s microscope?
15. What are the advantages of tool maker?s microscope?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

25 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.04 CALIBRATION OF DIAL GAUGE USING SLIP GAUGE
Aim:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge
Apparatus required:
Dial gauge, magnetic stand, slip gauge, and surface plate
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
The dial test indicator is a precision measuring instrument which can convert linear motion into angular
motion by means of transmission mechanics of rack and pinion and can be used to measure linear vibration
and errors of shape.
This instrument has the features such as good appearance, compact size, light weight, high precision,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

reasonable construction, constant measuring face etc. Rigidity of all parts is excellent. Probe is tipped with
carbide balls. A shock proof mechanism is provided for those with larger measuring range.

26 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Types of dial indicator:
1. Plunger type
2. Lever type
Plunger type dial indicator has a resolution counter and each division in main scale is 0.01 mm. In lever
type dial test indicator is replaced by ball type stylus.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. Fix the dial gauge to the stand rigidly and place the stand on the surface plate.
2. Set the plunger of dial gauge to first touch the upper surface of standard slip gauge and set indicator
to zero.
3. Raise then the plunger by pulling the screw above the dial scale.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Place the standard slip gauge underneath the plunger.
5. Release the plunger and let it to touch the standard slip gauge.
6. Note the reading on the dial scale.
Formulae:
The standard error of dial gauge is calculated by the formula

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
S.No.
Slip gauge reading ?x?
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Dial gauge reading
(mm)
(x? - x)
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x? (x? - x)
1.
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Thus the accuracy and standard error of dial gauge is found. The standard error of given dial gauge is
__________.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

27 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Outcome:
Students will be able to check the variation in tolerance during the inspection process of a
machined part, measure the deflection of a beam or ring under laboratory conditions, as well as many

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

other situations where a small measurement needs to be registered or indicated
Application:
1. Milling Machine
2. Analog versus digital/electronic readout

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is comparator?
2. What are the types of comparators?
3. What is the LC for comparators?
4. What are the applications of comparator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. What is meant by plunger?
6. What are the types of dial indicators?
7. Why a revolution counter is not provided in lever type dial test indicator?
8. Draw a line diagram of the operating mechanism of plunger type dial test indicator.
9. Explain the term magnification of a dial indicator.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. What are the uses of dial test indicator?
11. What are the practical applications of dial test indicator?
12. What precautions should be taken while using dial test indicator?
13. What are the desirable qualities of a dial test indicator?
14. What are the advantages of dial test indicator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15. What are the limitations of dial test indicator?
16. Distinguish between comparator and measuring instrument.
17. What are the advantages of electrical comparator?
18. What are the advantages of optical comparator?
19. What are the uses of comparator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

20. What are the advantages and disadvantages of mechanical comparator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

28 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.05 DETERMINATION OF TAPER ANGLE BY SINE BAR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

METHOD
Aim:
To measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare
Apparatus required:
Sine bar, slip gauges, dial gauge with stand, micrometer, surface plate, bevel protractor, vernier caliper

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diagram:

Description:
The sine bar principle uses the ratio of the length of two sides of a right triangle. It may be noted that
devices operating on sine principle are capable of ?self-generation?. The measurement is restricted to 45

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
from
accuracy point of view. Sine bar itself is not a measuring instrument.
Accuracy requirements of sine bar:
1. The axes of the rollers must be parallel to each other and the centre distance L must be precisely

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

known.
2. The sine bar must be flat and parallel to the plane connecting the axes of the rollers.
3. The rollers must be of identical diameters and must have within a close tolerance.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

29 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Procedure:
1. Fix the dial gaugeon the magnetic stand and place the magnetic stand on the surface plate.Check
the parallelism of the sine bar.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Place the given specimen above the sine bar and place the dial gauge on top of the specimen.
Adjustthe dial gauge for zero deflection.
3. Raise the front end of the sine bar with slip gauges until the work surface is parallel to the datum
surface.
4. Check the parallelism using dial gauge.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Measure the distance between the centres of the sine bar rollers as ?L? and note the height of the
slip gauge as ?H?.
6. Note the included angle of the specimen.
Formulae:
Sin ? = H/L where ? = Included angle of the specimen

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

H = Height of slip gauges
L = Distance between the centre of rollers
Tabulation:
S.No. L (mm) H (mm) Taper angle ( ?)
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.
3.

Result:
The taper angle of the given specimen using sine bar was found to be =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for angular measurements
and they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a specific
requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Flat Surface
2. Granite

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

30 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. List out the various angle measuring instruments.
2. What is the working principles sine bar?
3. How is a sine bar used to measure the angle?
4. What is the application of sine bar?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. What is the material of sine bar?
6. Why sine bar is not preferred to use for measuring angles more than 45
0
?
7. What are the features of sine bar?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. A 100 mm sine bar is to be set up to an angle of 33
0
, determine the slip gauges needed from 87
pieces set.
9. What are the various instruments used for measuring angles?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. What is sine bar?
11. How sine bar is used for angle measurement?
12. Explain how sine bar is used to measure angle of small size component.
13. Explain how sine bar is used to measure angle of large size component.
14. What are the various types of sine bar?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15. What are the limitations of sine bar?
16. What is sine center?
17. What is sine table?
18. What are the possible sources of errors in angular measurement by sine bar?
19. What are angle gauges?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

20. How angle gauges are used for measuring angles?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

31 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.06 DETERMINATION OF GEAR TOOTH THICKNESS
USING GEAR TOOTH VERNIER
Aim:
To determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen and to draw the graph between the tooth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

number and the error in thickness
Apparatus required:
Gear tooth vernier, specimen, surface plate and vernier caliper
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
The tooth thickness, in general, is measured at pitch circle since gear tooth thickness varies from the tip
to the base circle of the tooth. This is possible only when there is an arrangement to fix that position for this
measurement by the gear tooth vernier. It has two vernier scales; one is vertical and other is horizontal.
Procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

32 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

1. Measure initially the outside diameter of the given gear specimen by means of a vertical calculation
of vernier caliper. Note the number of teeth. Calculate the module (m) using the formula.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M = OD/ (Z+2) where z ? number of teeth
M - Module
2. Calculate the theoretical tooth thickness (t) by t = z * m* sin (90/z).
3. Set the vernier scale for the height and tighten.
4. Measure the thickness of each tooth using the horizontal scale. This is measured thickness. It can

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

be positive or negative.
H = m x [1+ Z/2 (1- Cos 90/Z)]
5. Calculate the error in the tooth thickness i.e,1. measured thickness ? Theoretical thickness
6. Draw the graph between the tooth number and the error in thickness.
Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tooth
Number
Measured Thickness
(mm)
Theoretical Thickness (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Error in tooth thickness
(mm)
1
2
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tooth
Number
MSR
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSC

VSR
(mm)
TR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
1
2
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Graph:


Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tooth No.
33 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
The theoretical experiment value of gear tooth thickness is obtained and graph is drawn between error
and tooth number in tooth thickness
Theoretical tooth thickness =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Experimental tooth thickness =
Error in tooth thickness =
Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the basic measurement units and able to calibrate various
measuring parameters of the gear.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Gear Component
2. Mining

1. Calculate the setting of a gear tooth vernier caliper for a straight spur gear having 40 teeth and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

module 4.
2. What is the importance of chordal depth?
3. Define ? Chordal width
4. How is the actual profile of the gear tooth determined?
5. What are the manufacturing errors in gear element?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Define ? Addendum
7. Define ? Dedendum
8. Define ? Flank of tooth
9. Define ? Pitch
10. Define ? Pitch Circle

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. Define ? Crest of tooth
12. Define ? Root of tooth
13. Define ? Base Circle
14. Define ? Module
15. Define ? Angle of Obliquity

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

34 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.07 MEASUREMENT OF THREAD PARAMETER USING
FLOATING CARRIAGE MICROMETER
Aim:
To measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two wire

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

method
Apparatus required:
1. Floating carriage micrometer
2. Standard wire
3. Given specimen (screw thread)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diagram:

Description of floating carriage micrometer:
It consists of three main units. A base casting carries a pair of centres on which threaded work piece is
to be mounted. Another carriage capable of moving towards centre is mounted exactly above. In this carriage

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

one head with thimble to measure up to 0.002 mm is provided and at the other side of head a fiducial indicator
is provided to indicate zero position.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice
1 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

V SEMESTER - R 2013

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No. : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Section : _______________________________________


LABORATORY MANUAL
2 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

DHANALAKSHMI

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
2. To contribute to the promotion of Academic Excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels
3. To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

and soul

DEPARTMENT OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rendering the services to the global needs of engineering industries by educating students to become
professionally sound mechanical engineers of excellent caliber


To produce mechanical engineering technocrats with a perfect knowledge intellectual and hands on

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

experience and to inculcate the spirit of moral values and ethics to serve the society

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MISSION
MISSION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION

VISION

4 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals
To impart students with fundamental knowledge in mathematics and basic sciences that will mould
them to be successful professionals

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Core competence
To provide students with sound knowledge in engineering and experimental skills to identify
complex software problems in industry and to develop a practical solution for them
3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theory and practice which

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

enable them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and organization and to design
products requiring interdisciplinary skills
4. Professional skills
To bestow students with adequate training and provide opportunities to work as team that will build
up their communication skills, individual, leadership and supportive qualities and to enable them to

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

adapt and to work in ever changing technologies
5. Life-long learning
To develop the ability of students to establish themselves as professionals in mechanical
engineering and to create awareness about the need for lifelong learning and pursuing advanced
degrees

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)
On completion of the B.E. (Mechanical) degree, the graduate will be able

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

a) To apply the basic knowledge of mathematics, science and engineering
b) To design and conduct experiments as well as to analyze and interpret data and apply the same in
the career or entrepreneurship
c) To design and develop innovative and creative software applications
d) To understand a complex real world problem and develop an efficient practical solution

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

e) To create, select and apply appropriate techniques, resources, modern engineering and IT tools
f) To understand the role as a professional and give the best to the society
g) To develop a system that will meet expected needs within realistic constraints such as economical
environmental, social, political, ethical, safety and sustainability
h) To communicate effectively and make others understand exactly what they are trying to tell in both

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

verbal and written forms
i) To work in a team as a team member or a leader and make unique contributions and work with
coordination
j) To engage in lifelong learning and exhibit their technical skills
k) To develop and manage projects in multidisciplinary environments

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To familiar with different measurement equipment?s and use of this industry for quality inspection
List of Experiments
1. Tool Maker?s Microscope
2. Comparator
3. Sine Bar

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Gear Tooth Vernier Caliper
5. Floating gauge Micrometer
6. Coordinate Measuring Machine
7. Surface Finish Measuring Equipment
8. Vernier Height Gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. Bore diameter measurement using telescope gauge
10. Bore diameter measurement using micrometer
11. Force Measurement
12. Torque Measurement
13. Temperature measurement

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. Autocollimator


1. Ability to handle different measurement tools and perform measurements in quality impulsion
2. Learnt the usage of precision measuring instruments and practiced to take measurements

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Learnt and practiced to build the required dimensions using slip gauge
4. Able to measure the various dimensions of the given specimen using the tool maker?s microscope
5. Able to find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge
6. Able to measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare
7. Learnt to determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen using Gear tooth vernier

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Able to measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two
wire method
9. Learnt to study the construction and operation of coordinate measuring machine
10. Learnt to determine the diameter of bore by using telescopic gauge and dial bore indicator
11. Able to measure the surface roughness using Talysurf instrument

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. Studied the characteristic between applied load and the output volt
13. Learnt the characteristics of developing torque and respective sensor output voltage
14. Studied the characteristics of thermocouple without compensation
15. Able to check the straightness & flatness of the given component by using Autocollimator
16. Learnt to measure the displacement using LVDT and to calibrate it with the millimeter scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OBJECTIVES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OUTCOMES

7 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

CONTENTS
Sl. No. Name of the Experiments Page No.
CYCLE ? 1 EXPERIMENTS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1
Precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab ? A Study
7
2
To build up the slip gauge for given dimension ? A Study

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16
3
Thread parameters measurement using Tool Makers Microscope
20
4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Calibration of dial gauge
23
5
Determination of taper angle by sine bar method
26

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6
Determination of gear tooth thickness using gear tooth vernier
29
7
Measurement of thread parameters using floating carriage micrometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

32
CYCLE ? 2 EXPERIMENTS
8
Measurement of various dimensions using Coordinate Measuring Machine
35

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9
Measurement of surface roughness
39
10
Measurement of bores using dial bore indicator and telescopic gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

42
11
Force measurement using load cell
46
12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Torque measurement using strain gauge
49
13
Temperature measurement using thermocouple
53

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14
Measurement of alignment using autocollimator
56
ADDITIONAL EXPERIMENT BEYOND THE SYLLABUS
15

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thread parameters measurement using profile projector
60
16
Displacement measurement ? linear variable differential transducer (LVDT)
62

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROJECT WORK
65


8 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.01 PRECISION MEASURING INSTRUMENT YSED IN
METROLOGY LAB ? A STUDY
Aim:
To study the following instruments and their usage for measuring dimensions of given specimen

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Vernier caliper
2. Micrometer
3. Vernier height gauge
4. Depth micrometer
5. Universal bevel protractor

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Apparatus required:
Surface plate, specimen and above instruments
Vernier caliper:
The principle of vernier caliper is to use the minor difference between the sizes two scales or divisions
for measurement. The difference between them can be utilized to enhance the accuracy of measurement. The

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

vernier caliper essentially consists of two steel rules, sliding along each other.
Parts:
Different parts of the vernier caliper are
1. Beam ? It has main scale.
2. Fixed jaw

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Sliding or Moving jaw ? It has vernier scale and sliding jaw locking screw.
4. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw knife
edges for internal measurement.
5. Stem or depth bar for depth measurement
Least count:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm
1 VSD = 0.98 mm
Least count = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


ID

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPTH


OD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement:
Given Vernier caliper can be used for external, internal depth, slot and step measurement.
Measurement principle:
When both jaws contact each other scale shows the zero reading. The finer adjustment of movable jaw
can be done by the fine adjustment screw. First the whole movable jaw assembly is adjusted so that the two

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measuring tips just touch the part to be measured. Then the fine adjustment clamp locking screw is tightened.
Final adjustment depending upon the sense of correct feel is made by the adjusting screw. After final
adjustment has been made sliding jaw locking screw is also tightened and the reading is noted.
All the parts of the Vernier caliper are made of good quality steel and measuring faces are hardened.
Types of vernier:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier caliper, electronic vernier caliper, vernier depth caliper


11 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:

Main scale
reading (MSR)
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale
reading (VSR) (mm)
Total reading (MSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

+ VSR)
(mm)

OD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ID


Depth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier height gauge:
Vernier height gauge is a sort of vernier caliper equipped with a special instrument suitable for height
measurement. It is always kept on the surface plate and the use of the surfaces plates as datum surfaces is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

very essential.
Least count:
Least Count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 VSD = 0.98 mm
Least Count (LC) = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm
Parts:
1. Base
2. Beam ? It has main scale.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Slider ? It has a vernier scale and slider locking screw.
4. Scriber
5. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


Material:
All the parts of vernier are made of good quality steel and the measuring faces hardened.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Types of vernier gauge:
1. Analog vernier height gauge
2. Digital vernier height gauge
3. Electronic vernier height gauge
Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
Main scale reading
(MSR)(mm)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier scale reading
(VSR)(mm)
Total reading (MSR +
VSR)(mm)
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.
3.

13 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outside micrometer:
The micrometer essentially consists of an accurate screw having about 10 or 20 threads per cm. The
end of the screw forms one measuring tip and other measuring tip is constituted by a stationary anvil in the
base of the frame. The screw is threaded for certain length and is plain afterwards. The plain portion is called
spindle and its end is the measuring surface. The spindle is advanced or retracted by turning a thimble

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

connected to a spindle. The spindle is a slide fit over the barrel and barrel is the fixed part attached with the
frame. The barrel & thimble are graduated. The pitch of the screw threads is 0.5 mm.

Least count:
Least Count (LC) = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= 0.5 / 50 = 0.01 mm
Parts:
1. Frame
2. Anvil
3. Spindle

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Spindle lock
5. Barrel or outside sleeve
6. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions
7. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.
The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Measurement:
It can be used for any external measurement.
Types of micrometer:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Outside micrometer, 2. Inside micrometer, 3.Depth micrometer, 4. Stick micrometer, 5. Screw thread
micrometer, 6. V ? anvil micrometer, 7. Blade type micrometer, 8. Dial micrometer, 9. Bench micrometer, 10.
Tape screw operated internal micrometer, 11. Groove micrometer, 12. Digital micrometer, 13.Differential screw
micrometer, 14.Adjustable range outside micrometer.
Ratchet stop mechanism:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The object of the ratchet stop is to ensure that same level of torque is applied on the spindle while
measuring and the sense of the feel of operator is eliminated and consistent readings are obtained. By
providing this arrangement, the ratchet stop is made slip off when the torque applied to rotate the spindle
exceeds the set torque. Thus this provision ensures the application of same amount of torque during the
measurement.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) (mm)
Head Scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Coincidence (HSC)
Head scale reading
(HSR x LC) (mm)
Total Reading (PSR
+ HSR) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
2.

Depth micrometer:
Depth micrometer is a sort of micrometer which is mainly used for measuring depth of holes, so it is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

named as depth micrometer.
Parts:
1. Shoulder
2. Spindle
3. Spindle lock

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Barrel or outside sleeve ? It has pitch scale.
5. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions.
6. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.
The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.
15 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count:
Least Count = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale = 0.50/50
= 0.01 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurements:
It can be used for measuring the depth of holes, slots and recessed areas. The pitch of the screw thread
is 0.5 mm. The least count is 0.01 mm. Shoulder acts as a reference surface and is held firmly and
perpendicular to the centre line of the hole. For large range of measurement extension rods are used. In the
barrel the scale is calibrated. The accuracy again depends upon the sense of touch.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
First, calculate the least count of the instrument. Check the zero error. Measure the specimen note
down the main scale reading or the head scale reading. Note down the vernier or head scale coincidence with
main or pitch scale divisions.
Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) (mm)
Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Head scale reading
(HSR x LC) (mm)
Total Reading (PSR
+ HSR) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.


2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Universal bevel protractor:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
Bevel protractor is an instrument for measuring the angle between the two faces of a specimen. It
consists of a base plate on which a circular scale is engraved. It is graduated in degrees. An adjustment plate
is attached to a circular plate containing the vernier scale. The adjustable blade can be locked in any position.
The circular plate has 360 division divided into four parts of 90 degrees each. The adjustable parts have 24

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

divisions of to the right and left sides of zero reading. These scales are used according to the position of the
specimen with respect to movable scale.
Procedure:
1. Place the specimen whose taper is to be measured between the adjustable plate and movable
blade with one of its face parallel to the base.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Lock the adjustable plate in position and note down the main scale reading depending upon the
direction of rotation of adjustable plate in clockwise or anticlockwise.
3. Note the VSC to the right of zero.
4. Multiply the VSC with the least count and add to MSR to obtain the actual reading.
Least count:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least Count = 2 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1
o
24 VSD = 46
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

=> 1 VSD = 23/12
LC = 2 ? 23/12 = 1/12
o
= 5? (five minutes)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
Main scale reading
(MSR) (deg)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier scale reading
(VSR) (deg)
Total reading (MSR +
VSR)
(deg)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
2.
The angle of scriber of the vernier height gauge =
Result:
Thus the various precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab are studied and the specimen

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

dimensions are recorded.
Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for linear, angular,
roundness and roughness measurements they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring
instrument according to a specific requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Quality Department


1. Define ? Metrology

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Define ? Inspection
3. What are the needs of inspection in industries?
4. What are the various methods involving the measurement?
5. Define ? Precision
6. Define ? Accuracy

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Define ? Calibration
8. Define ? Repeatability
9. Define ? Magnification
10. Define ? Error
11. Define ? Systematic Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. Define ? Random Error
13. Define ? Parallax Error
14. Define ? Environmental Error
15. Define ? Cosine Error
Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

18 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.02 BUILD UP THE SLIP GAUGE FOR GIVEN DIMENSION
? A STUDY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Aim:
To build up the slip gauge for given dimension
Apparatus required:
1. Slip gauges set
2. Surface plate

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Soft cloth
Diagram:

Description:
Slip gauge are universally accepted standard of length in industry. They are the working standard for

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

linear dimension. These were invented by a Swedish Engineer, C.E. Johansson. They are used
1. For direct precise measurement where the accuracy of the workpiece demand it.
2. For use with high- magnification comparators to establish the size of the gauge blocks in general
use.
3. Gauge blocks are also used for many other purposes such as checking the accuracy of measuring

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

instrument or setting up a comparator to a specific dimension, enabling a batch of component to be
quickly and accurately checked or indeed in any situation where there is need to refer to standard of
known length these blocks are rectangular.
19 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Most gauge blocks are produced from high grade steel, hardened and established by a heat treatment
process to give a high degree of dimensional stability. Gauge blocks are also manufactured from tungsten
carbide which is an extremely hard and wear resistant material. The measuring faces have a lapped finish.
The faces are perfectly flat and parallel to one another with a high degree of accuracy. Each block has an
extremely high dimensional accuracy at 20

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C.
These slip gauge are available in variety of selected sets both in inch units and metric units. Letter ?E? is
used for inch units and ?M? is used for metric standard number of pieces in a set following the letter E or M. For
example EBI refers to a set whose blocks are in metric units and are 83 in number. Each block dimensions is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

printed on anyone of its face itself the size of any required standard being made up by combining the
appropriate number of these different size blocks.
If two gauges are slid and twisted together under pressure they will firmly join together. This process,
known as wringing, is very useful because it enables several gauge blocks to be assembled together to
produce a required size. In fact the success of precision measurement by slip gauges depends on the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

phenomenon of wringing.
First the gauge is oscillated slightly with very light pressure over other gauge so as to detect pressure at
any foreign particles between the surfaces. One gauge is placed perpendicular to other using standard
gauging pressure and rotary motion is applied until the blocks are lined up.
Procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Build the given dimension by wringing minimum number of slip gauges.
2. Note the given dimension and choose the minimum possible slip gauge available in the set so as to
accommodate the last decimal value. The minimum slip gauge value dimension available i.e., 1.12
mm must be chosen followed by 1.5 mm thick gauge block.
3. Follow the above steps to build up the slip gauge of any dimension.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Precautions:
1. Slip gauges should be handled very carefully placed gently and should never be dropped.
2. Whenever a slip gauge is being removed from the set, its dimensions are noted and must be
replaced into the set at its appropriate place only.
3. Correct procedure must be followed in wringing and also in removing the gauge blocks.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. They should be cleaned well before use and petroleum jelly is applied after use.



20 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Range (mm) Increment (mm) No. of pieces

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total = ____________ Pieces
Total length of slip gauge = ________ mm
Given diameter Slip gauges used Obtained dimensions

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Slip gauge set is studied and the given dimensions are building up by wringing minimum number of slip
gauges.
Outcome:
Students will be able to select proper measuring instrument and know requirement of calibration, errors

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

in measurement etc. They can perform accurate measurements.
Application:
1. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Why C.I. is preferred material for surface plates and tables?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Why V ? blocks are generally manufactured in pairs?
3. Why micrometer is required to be tested for accuracy?
4. Define ? Linear Measurement
5. List the linear measuring instrument according to their accuracy.
6. Define ? Least Count

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. What are the uses of vernier depth gauge?
8. What are the uses of feeler gauges?
9. What are the uses of straight edge?
10. What are the uses of angle plate?
11. What are the uses of V ? block?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. What are the uses of combination square?
13. What precautions should be taken while using slip gauges?
14. What is wringing?
15. Why the slip gauges are termed as ?End standard?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

22 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.03 THREAD PARAMETERS MEASUREMENT USING
TOOL MAKERS MICROSCOPE
Aim:
To study the tool makers microscope and in the process measure the various dimensions of the given

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

specimen
Apparatus required:
1. Tool makers microscope
2. Specimen
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
The tool maker?s microscope is designed for measurement of parts of complex forms; for example,
profile of a tool having external threads. It can also be used for measuring centre to centre distance of the
holes in any plane as well as the coordinates of the outline of a complex template gauge, using the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

coordinates measuring system.
23 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Basically it consists of an optical head which can be adjusted vertically along the ways of supporting
column. The optical head can be clamped at any position by a screw. On the work table (which as a circular

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

base in which there are graduations) the part to be inspected is placed. The table has a compound slide by
means of which the part can be measured. For giving these two movements, there are two micrometer screws
having thimble scales and verniers. At the back of the base light source is arranged that provides horizontal
beam of light, reflected from a mirror by 90 degrees upwards towards the table. The beam of light passes
through the transparent glass plate on which flat plates can be checked are placed. Observations are made

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

through the eyepiece of the optical head.
Procedure:
1. Place the given specimen on the work table and switch on all the three light sources and adjust the
intensity of the light source until a clean image of the cross wires and specimen are seen through
the eyepiece.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Coincide one of the two extreme edges between which the measurement has to be taken with
vertical or horizontal cross wires and depending upon the other image coincide with the same cross
wires by moving the above device. Note the reading.The difference between the two readings gives
the value of the required measurement.
3. Note the experiment specimen and the readings.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Tabulate the different measurements measured from the specimen.
Determination of thread parameters
Magnification =
S.No. Parameters
Magnified value

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
Actual value
(mm)
1. Outer diameter (O.D)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Internal diameter (I.D)

3. Pitch

4. Flank angle

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Included angle of the tool was measured using tool maker?s microscope and various dimensions of the
given specimen are measured.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

24 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Outcome:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Students will be able to understand the various parameters of thread and select proper measuring
instrument and know requirement of calibration, errors in measurement etc. They can perform accurate
measurements.
Application:
1. Machine Shop

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Quality Department


1. What is meant by tool maker?s microscope?
2. What is the light used in tool maker?s microscope?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. What are the various characteristics that you would measure in a screw thread?
4. What are the instruments that are required for measuring screw thread?
5. Define ? Pitch
6. What are the causes of pitch error?
7. Define ? Flank

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. What are the effects of flank angle error?
9. What is progressive error?
10. What is periodic error?
11. What is drunken error?
12. What is erratic error?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. What are the applications of tool maker?s microscope?
14. What are the limitations of tool maker?s microscope?
15. What are the advantages of tool maker?s microscope?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

25 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.04 CALIBRATION OF DIAL GAUGE USING SLIP GAUGE
Aim:
To find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge
Apparatus required:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Dial gauge, magnetic stand, slip gauge, and surface plate
Diagram:

Description:
The dial test indicator is a precision measuring instrument which can convert linear motion into angular

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

motion by means of transmission mechanics of rack and pinion and can be used to measure linear vibration
and errors of shape.
This instrument has the features such as good appearance, compact size, light weight, high precision,
reasonable construction, constant measuring face etc. Rigidity of all parts is excellent. Probe is tipped with
carbide balls. A shock proof mechanism is provided for those with larger measuring range.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

26 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Types of dial indicator:
1. Plunger type

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Lever type
Plunger type dial indicator has a resolution counter and each division in main scale is 0.01 mm. In lever
type dial test indicator is replaced by ball type stylus.
Procedure:
1. Fix the dial gauge to the stand rigidly and place the stand on the surface plate.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Set the plunger of dial gauge to first touch the upper surface of standard slip gauge and set indicator
to zero.
3. Raise then the plunger by pulling the screw above the dial scale.
4. Place the standard slip gauge underneath the plunger.
5. Release the plunger and let it to touch the standard slip gauge.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Note the reading on the dial scale.
Formulae:
The standard error of dial gauge is calculated by the formula

Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

S.No.
Slip gauge reading ?x?
(mm)
Dial gauge reading
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x? - x)
2


x? (x? - x)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
2


Result:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thus the accuracy and standard error of dial gauge is found. The standard error of given dial gauge is
__________.

27 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Students will be able to check the variation in tolerance during the inspection process of a
machined part, measure the deflection of a beam or ring under laboratory conditions, as well as many
other situations where a small measurement needs to be registered or indicated
Application:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Milling Machine
2. Analog versus digital/electronic readout


1. What is comparator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. What are the types of comparators?
3. What is the LC for comparators?
4. What are the applications of comparator?
5. What is meant by plunger?
6. What are the types of dial indicators?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Why a revolution counter is not provided in lever type dial test indicator?
8. Draw a line diagram of the operating mechanism of plunger type dial test indicator.
9. Explain the term magnification of a dial indicator.
10. What are the uses of dial test indicator?
11. What are the practical applications of dial test indicator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. What precautions should be taken while using dial test indicator?
13. What are the desirable qualities of a dial test indicator?
14. What are the advantages of dial test indicator?
15. What are the limitations of dial test indicator?
16. Distinguish between comparator and measuring instrument.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17. What are the advantages of electrical comparator?
18. What are the advantages of optical comparator?
19. What are the uses of comparator?
20. What are the advantages and disadvantages of mechanical comparator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

28 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.05 DETERMINATION OF TAPER ANGLE BY SINE BAR
METHOD
Aim:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare
Apparatus required:
Sine bar, slip gauges, dial gauge with stand, micrometer, surface plate, bevel protractor, vernier caliper
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
The sine bar principle uses the ratio of the length of two sides of a right triangle. It may be noted that
devices operating on sine principle are capable of ?self-generation?. The measurement is restricted to 45
o
from

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

accuracy point of view. Sine bar itself is not a measuring instrument.
Accuracy requirements of sine bar:
1. The axes of the rollers must be parallel to each other and the centre distance L must be precisely
known.
2. The sine bar must be flat and parallel to the plane connecting the axes of the rollers.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. The rollers must be of identical diameters and must have within a close tolerance.


29 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. Fix the dial gaugeon the magnetic stand and place the magnetic stand on the surface plate.Check
the parallelism of the sine bar.
2. Place the given specimen above the sine bar and place the dial gauge on top of the specimen.
Adjustthe dial gauge for zero deflection.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Raise the front end of the sine bar with slip gauges until the work surface is parallel to the datum
surface.
4. Check the parallelism using dial gauge.
5. Measure the distance between the centres of the sine bar rollers as ?L? and note the height of the
slip gauge as ?H?.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Note the included angle of the specimen.
Formulae:
Sin ? = H/L where ? = Included angle of the specimen
H = Height of slip gauges
L = Distance between the centre of rollers

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
S.No. L (mm) H (mm) Taper angle ( ?)
1.
2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
The taper angle of the given specimen using sine bar was found to be =
Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for angular measurements

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

and they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a specific
requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).

Application:
1. Flat Surface

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Granite


30 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. List out the various angle measuring instruments.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. What is the working principles sine bar?
3. How is a sine bar used to measure the angle?
4. What is the application of sine bar?
5. What is the material of sine bar?
6. Why sine bar is not preferred to use for measuring angles more than 45

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

0
?
7. What are the features of sine bar?
8. A 100 mm sine bar is to be set up to an angle of 33
0

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

, determine the slip gauges needed from 87
pieces set.
9. What are the various instruments used for measuring angles?
10. What is sine bar?
11. How sine bar is used for angle measurement?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. Explain how sine bar is used to measure angle of small size component.
13. Explain how sine bar is used to measure angle of large size component.
14. What are the various types of sine bar?
15. What are the limitations of sine bar?
16. What is sine center?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17. What is sine table?
18. What are the possible sources of errors in angular measurement by sine bar?
19. What are angle gauges?
20. How angle gauges are used for measuring angles?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

31 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00



Expt.No.06 DETERMINATION OF GEAR TOOTH THICKNESS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

USING GEAR TOOTH VERNIER
Aim:
To determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen and to draw the graph between the tooth
number and the error in thickness
Apparatus required:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Gear tooth vernier, specimen, surface plate and vernier caliper
Diagram:

Description:
The tooth thickness, in general, is measured at pitch circle since gear tooth thickness varies from the tip

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

to the base circle of the tooth. This is possible only when there is an arrangement to fix that position for this
measurement by the gear tooth vernier. It has two vernier scales; one is vertical and other is horizontal.
Procedure:
32 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Measure initially the outside diameter of the given gear specimen by means of a vertical calculation
of vernier caliper. Note the number of teeth. Calculate the module (m) using the formula.

M = OD/ (Z+2) where z ? number of teeth
M - Module

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Calculate the theoretical tooth thickness (t) by t = z * m* sin (90/z).
3. Set the vernier scale for the height and tighten.
4. Measure the thickness of each tooth using the horizontal scale. This is measured thickness. It can
be positive or negative.
H = m x [1+ Z/2 (1- Cos 90/Z)]

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Calculate the error in the tooth thickness i.e,1. measured thickness ? Theoretical thickness
6. Draw the graph between the tooth number and the error in thickness.
Tabulation:
Tooth
Number

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measured Thickness
(mm)
Theoretical Thickness (mm)
Error in tooth thickness
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1
2
3

Tooth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Number
MSR
(mm)
VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSR
(mm)
TR
(mm)
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
3

Graph:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tooth No.
33 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


Result:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The theoretical experiment value of gear tooth thickness is obtained and graph is drawn between error
and tooth number in tooth thickness
Theoretical tooth thickness =
Experimental tooth thickness =
Error in tooth thickness =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the basic measurement units and able to calibrate various
measuring parameters of the gear.
Application:
1. Gear Component

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Mining

1. Calculate the setting of a gear tooth vernier caliper for a straight spur gear having 40 teeth and
module 4.
2. What is the importance of chordal depth?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Define ? Chordal width
4. How is the actual profile of the gear tooth determined?
5. What are the manufacturing errors in gear element?
6. Define ? Addendum
7. Define ? Dedendum

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Define ? Flank of tooth
9. Define ? Pitch
10. Define ? Pitch Circle
11. Define ? Crest of tooth
12. Define ? Root of tooth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. Define ? Base Circle
14. Define ? Module
15. Define ? Angle of Obliquity

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

34 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.07 MEASUREMENT OF THREAD PARAMETER USING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FLOATING CARRIAGE MICROMETER
Aim:
To measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two wire
method
Apparatus required:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Floating carriage micrometer
2. Standard wire
3. Given specimen (screw thread)
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description of floating carriage micrometer:
It consists of three main units. A base casting carries a pair of centres on which threaded work piece is
to be mounted. Another carriage capable of moving towards centre is mounted exactly above. In this carriage
one head with thimble to measure up to 0.002 mm is provided and at the other side of head a fiducial indicator
is provided to indicate zero position.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

35 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. For two wire method, place the standard wire over a thread of the screw at opposite sides.
2. For three wire method, place two standard wires on two successive threads and the third wire
placed opposite sides of the thread.
3. Measure the diameter over wires (M) using floating carriage micrometer.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Repeat this procedure at various positions of the screw and take different readings.
Formulae:
1. For best wire size, d = P / 2 Cos (x/2)
Where, P = Pitch
d= wire size

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x = angle between two threads
= 60
o
for metric thread
2. Actual effective diameter, E.A = M ? 3d + 0.866 p

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Nominal effective diameter, EN = D ? 0.648 p
4. Max. wire size = 1.01 p
5. Min. wire size = 0.505 p
6. Best wire size = 0.577 p
M = Diameter over wires

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

P = Pitch of thread
For metric thread:
Actual effective diameter (EA) = M ? 3d + 0.866 p
Where d = actual diameter of wire
Determination of actual and nominal effective diameter of the screw thread:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
Nominal
Diameter (D)
(mm)
Diameter over

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

wire ?M?
(mm)
Actual eff.
Diameter E.A
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Nominal eff.
Diameter E.N
(mm)
Error in effective
diameter

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(E.A ? E.N)
(mm)
1.
2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice
1 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

V SEMESTER - R 2013

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No. : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LABORATORY MANUAL
2 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

DHANALAKSHMI

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.


1. To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. To contribute to the promotion of Academic Excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels
3. To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING


Rendering the services to the global needs of engineering industries by educating students to become
professionally sound mechanical engineers of excellent caliber

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To produce mechanical engineering technocrats with a perfect knowledge intellectual and hands on
experience and to inculcate the spirit of moral values and ethics to serve the society

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MISSION
MISSION
VISION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION

4 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Fundamentals
To impart students with fundamental knowledge in mathematics and basic sciences that will mould
them to be successful professionals
2. Core competence
To provide students with sound knowledge in engineering and experimental skills to identify

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

complex software problems in industry and to develop a practical solution for them
3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theory and practice which
enable them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and organization and to design
products requiring interdisciplinary skills

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Professional skills
To bestow students with adequate training and provide opportunities to work as team that will build
up their communication skills, individual, leadership and supportive qualities and to enable them to
adapt and to work in ever changing technologies
5. Life-long learning

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To develop the ability of students to establish themselves as professionals in mechanical
engineering and to create awareness about the need for lifelong learning and pursuing advanced
degrees

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)
On completion of the B.E. (Mechanical) degree, the graduate will be able
a) To apply the basic knowledge of mathematics, science and engineering
b) To design and conduct experiments as well as to analyze and interpret data and apply the same in

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the career or entrepreneurship
c) To design and develop innovative and creative software applications
d) To understand a complex real world problem and develop an efficient practical solution
e) To create, select and apply appropriate techniques, resources, modern engineering and IT tools
f) To understand the role as a professional and give the best to the society

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

g) To develop a system that will meet expected needs within realistic constraints such as economical
environmental, social, political, ethical, safety and sustainability
h) To communicate effectively and make others understand exactly what they are trying to tell in both
verbal and written forms
i) To work in a team as a team member or a leader and make unique contributions and work with

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

coordination
j) To engage in lifelong learning and exhibit their technical skills
k) To develop and manage projects in multidisciplinary environments

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To familiar with different measurement equipment?s and use of this industry for quality inspection
List of Experiments

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Tool Maker?s Microscope
2. Comparator
3. Sine Bar
4. Gear Tooth Vernier Caliper
5. Floating gauge Micrometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Coordinate Measuring Machine
7. Surface Finish Measuring Equipment
8. Vernier Height Gauge
9. Bore diameter measurement using telescope gauge
10. Bore diameter measurement using micrometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. Force Measurement
12. Torque Measurement
13. Temperature measurement
14. Autocollimator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Ability to handle different measurement tools and perform measurements in quality impulsion
2. Learnt the usage of precision measuring instruments and practiced to take measurements
3. Learnt and practiced to build the required dimensions using slip gauge
4. Able to measure the various dimensions of the given specimen using the tool maker?s microscope

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Able to find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge
6. Able to measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare
7. Learnt to determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen using Gear tooth vernier
8. Able to measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two
wire method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. Learnt to study the construction and operation of coordinate measuring machine
10. Learnt to determine the diameter of bore by using telescopic gauge and dial bore indicator
11. Able to measure the surface roughness using Talysurf instrument
12. Studied the characteristic between applied load and the output volt
13. Learnt the characteristics of developing torque and respective sensor output voltage

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. Studied the characteristics of thermocouple without compensation
15. Able to check the straightness & flatness of the given component by using Autocollimator
16. Learnt to measure the displacement using LVDT and to calibrate it with the millimeter scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OBJECTIVES

COURSE OUTCOMES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CONTENTS
Sl. No. Name of the Experiments Page No.
CYCLE ? 1 EXPERIMENTS
1
Precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab ? A Study

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7
2
To build up the slip gauge for given dimension ? A Study
16
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thread parameters measurement using Tool Makers Microscope
20
4
Calibration of dial gauge
23

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5
Determination of taper angle by sine bar method
26
6
Determination of gear tooth thickness using gear tooth vernier

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

29
7
Measurement of thread parameters using floating carriage micrometer
32
CYCLE ? 2 EXPERIMENTS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8
Measurement of various dimensions using Coordinate Measuring Machine
35
9
Measurement of surface roughness

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

39
10
Measurement of bores using dial bore indicator and telescopic gauge
42
11

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Force measurement using load cell
46
12
Torque measurement using strain gauge
49

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13
Temperature measurement using thermocouple
53
14
Measurement of alignment using autocollimator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

56
ADDITIONAL EXPERIMENT BEYOND THE SYLLABUS
15
Thread parameters measurement using profile projector
60

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16
Displacement measurement ? linear variable differential transducer (LVDT)
62
PROJECT WORK
65

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.01 PRECISION MEASURING INSTRUMENT YSED IN

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

METROLOGY LAB ? A STUDY
Aim:
To study the following instruments and their usage for measuring dimensions of given specimen
1. Vernier caliper
2. Micrometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Vernier height gauge
4. Depth micrometer
5. Universal bevel protractor
Apparatus required:
Surface plate, specimen and above instruments

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier caliper:
The principle of vernier caliper is to use the minor difference between the sizes two scales or divisions
for measurement. The difference between them can be utilized to enhance the accuracy of measurement. The
vernier caliper essentially consists of two steel rules, sliding along each other.
Parts:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Different parts of the vernier caliper are
1. Beam ? It has main scale.
2. Fixed jaw
3. Sliding or Moving jaw ? It has vernier scale and sliding jaw locking screw.
4. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw knife

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

edges for internal measurement.
5. Stem or depth bar for depth measurement
Least count:
Least count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

50 VSD = 49 mm
1 VSD = 0.98 mm
Least count = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm

10 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ID

DEPTH

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OD
Measurement:
Given Vernier caliper can be used for external, internal depth, slot and step measurement.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement principle:
When both jaws contact each other scale shows the zero reading. The finer adjustment of movable jaw
can be done by the fine adjustment screw. First the whole movable jaw assembly is adjusted so that the two
measuring tips just touch the part to be measured. Then the fine adjustment clamp locking screw is tightened.
Final adjustment depending upon the sense of correct feel is made by the adjusting screw. After final

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

adjustment has been made sliding jaw locking screw is also tightened and the reading is noted.
All the parts of the Vernier caliper are made of good quality steel and measuring faces are hardened.
Types of vernier:
Vernier caliper, electronic vernier caliper, vernier depth caliper

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Main scale
reading (MSR)
(mm)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier scale
reading (VSR) (mm)
Total reading (MSR
+ VSR)
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OD


ID

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Depth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier height gauge:
Vernier height gauge is a sort of vernier caliper equipped with a special instrument suitable for height
measurement. It is always kept on the surface plate and the use of the surfaces plates as datum surfaces is
very essential.
Least count:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least Count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm
1 VSD = 0.98 mm
Least Count (LC) = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Parts:
1. Base
2. Beam ? It has main scale.
3. Slider ? It has a vernier scale and slider locking screw.
4. Scriber

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw.


12 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Material:
All the parts of vernier are made of good quality steel and the measuring faces hardened.
Types of vernier gauge:
1. Analog vernier height gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Digital vernier height gauge
3. Electronic vernier height gauge
Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Main scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(MSR)(mm)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale reading
(VSR)(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total reading (MSR +
VSR)(mm)
1.
2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Outside micrometer:
The micrometer essentially consists of an accurate screw having about 10 or 20 threads per cm. The

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

end of the screw forms one measuring tip and other measuring tip is constituted by a stationary anvil in the
base of the frame. The screw is threaded for certain length and is plain afterwards. The plain portion is called
spindle and its end is the measuring surface. The spindle is advanced or retracted by turning a thimble
connected to a spindle. The spindle is a slide fit over the barrel and barrel is the fixed part attached with the
frame. The barrel & thimble are graduated. The pitch of the screw threads is 0.5 mm.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count:
Least Count (LC) = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale
= 0.5 / 50 = 0.01 mm
Parts:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Frame
2. Anvil
3. Spindle
4. Spindle lock
5. Barrel or outside sleeve

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions
7. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.
The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.
14 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement:
It can be used for any external measurement.
Types of micrometer:
1. Outside micrometer, 2. Inside micrometer, 3.Depth micrometer, 4. Stick micrometer, 5. Screw thread
micrometer, 6. V ? anvil micrometer, 7. Blade type micrometer, 8. Dial micrometer, 9. Bench micrometer, 10.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tape screw operated internal micrometer, 11. Groove micrometer, 12. Digital micrometer, 13.Differential screw
micrometer, 14.Adjustable range outside micrometer.
Ratchet stop mechanism:
The object of the ratchet stop is to ensure that same level of torque is applied on the spindle while
measuring and the sense of the feel of operator is eliminated and consistent readings are obtained. By

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

providing this arrangement, the ratchet stop is made slip off when the torque applied to rotate the spindle
exceeds the set torque. Thus this provision ensures the application of same amount of torque during the
measurement.
Tabulation:
Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) (mm)
Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)
Head scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(HSR x LC) (mm)
Total Reading (PSR
+ HSR) (mm)
1.
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Depth micrometer:
Depth micrometer is a sort of micrometer which is mainly used for measuring depth of holes, so it is
named as depth micrometer.
Parts:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Shoulder
2. Spindle
3. Spindle lock
4. Barrel or outside sleeve ? It has pitch scale.
5. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.
The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.
15 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count:
Least Count = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale = 0.50/50
= 0.01 mm
Measurements:
It can be used for measuring the depth of holes, slots and recessed areas. The pitch of the screw thread

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

is 0.5 mm. The least count is 0.01 mm. Shoulder acts as a reference surface and is held firmly and
perpendicular to the centre line of the hole. For large range of measurement extension rods are used. In the
barrel the scale is calibrated. The accuracy again depends upon the sense of touch.
Procedure:
First, calculate the least count of the instrument. Check the zero error. Measure the specimen note

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

down the main scale reading or the head scale reading. Note down the vernier or head scale coincidence with
main or pitch scale divisions.
Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Pitch Scale Reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(PSR) (mm)
Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)
Head scale reading
(HSR x LC) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total Reading (PSR
+ HSR) (mm)

1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.


16 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Universal bevel protractor:

Description:
Bevel protractor is an instrument for measuring the angle between the two faces of a specimen. It

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

consists of a base plate on which a circular scale is engraved. It is graduated in degrees. An adjustment plate
is attached to a circular plate containing the vernier scale. The adjustable blade can be locked in any position.
The circular plate has 360 division divided into four parts of 90 degrees each. The adjustable parts have 24
divisions of to the right and left sides of zero reading. These scales are used according to the position of the
specimen with respect to movable scale.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. Place the specimen whose taper is to be measured between the adjustable plate and movable
blade with one of its face parallel to the base.
2. Lock the adjustable plate in position and note down the main scale reading depending upon the
direction of rotation of adjustable plate in clockwise or anticlockwise.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Note the VSC to the right of zero.
4. Multiply the VSC with the least count and add to MSR to obtain the actual reading.
Least count:
Least Count = 2 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
24 VSD = 46
o
=> 1 VSD = 23/12
LC = 2 ? 23/12 = 1/12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
= 5? (five minutes)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Main scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(MSR) (deg)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale reading
(VSR) (deg)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total reading (MSR +
VSR)
(deg)
1.
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The angle of scriber of the vernier height gauge =
Result:
Thus the various precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab are studied and the specimen
dimensions are recorded.
Outcome:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for linear, angular,
roundness and roughness measurements they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring
instrument according to a specific requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).
Application:
1. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Metrology
2. Define ? Inspection
3. What are the needs of inspection in industries?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. What are the various methods involving the measurement?
5. Define ? Precision
6. Define ? Accuracy
7. Define ? Calibration
8. Define ? Repeatability

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. Define ? Magnification
10. Define ? Error
11. Define ? Systematic Error
12. Define ? Random Error
13. Define ? Parallax Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. Define ? Environmental Error
15. Define ? Cosine Error
Viva-voce

18 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.02 BUILD UP THE SLIP GAUGE FOR GIVEN DIMENSION
? A STUDY
Aim:
To build up the slip gauge for given dimension

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Apparatus required:
1. Slip gauges set
2. Surface plate
3. Soft cloth
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
Slip gauge are universally accepted standard of length in industry. They are the working standard for
linear dimension. These were invented by a Swedish Engineer, C.E. Johansson. They are used
1. For direct precise measurement where the accuracy of the workpiece demand it.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. For use with high- magnification comparators to establish the size of the gauge blocks in general
use.
3. Gauge blocks are also used for many other purposes such as checking the accuracy of measuring
instrument or setting up a comparator to a specific dimension, enabling a batch of component to be
quickly and accurately checked or indeed in any situation where there is need to refer to standard of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

known length these blocks are rectangular.
19 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Most gauge blocks are produced from high grade steel, hardened and established by a heat treatment
process to give a high degree of dimensional stability. Gauge blocks are also manufactured from tungsten

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

carbide which is an extremely hard and wear resistant material. The measuring faces have a lapped finish.
The faces are perfectly flat and parallel to one another with a high degree of accuracy. Each block has an
extremely high dimensional accuracy at 20
o
C.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

These slip gauge are available in variety of selected sets both in inch units and metric units. Letter ?E? is
used for inch units and ?M? is used for metric standard number of pieces in a set following the letter E or M. For
example EBI refers to a set whose blocks are in metric units and are 83 in number. Each block dimensions is
printed on anyone of its face itself the size of any required standard being made up by combining the
appropriate number of these different size blocks.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

If two gauges are slid and twisted together under pressure they will firmly join together. This process,
known as wringing, is very useful because it enables several gauge blocks to be assembled together to
produce a required size. In fact the success of precision measurement by slip gauges depends on the
phenomenon of wringing.
First the gauge is oscillated slightly with very light pressure over other gauge so as to detect pressure at

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

any foreign particles between the surfaces. One gauge is placed perpendicular to other using standard
gauging pressure and rotary motion is applied until the blocks are lined up.
Procedure:
1. Build the given dimension by wringing minimum number of slip gauges.
2. Note the given dimension and choose the minimum possible slip gauge available in the set so as to

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

accommodate the last decimal value. The minimum slip gauge value dimension available i.e., 1.12
mm must be chosen followed by 1.5 mm thick gauge block.
3. Follow the above steps to build up the slip gauge of any dimension.
Precautions:
1. Slip gauges should be handled very carefully placed gently and should never be dropped.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Whenever a slip gauge is being removed from the set, its dimensions are noted and must be
replaced into the set at its appropriate place only.
3. Correct procedure must be followed in wringing and also in removing the gauge blocks.
4. They should be cleaned well before use and petroleum jelly is applied after use.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

20 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Range (mm) Increment (mm) No. of pieces

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total = ____________ Pieces
Total length of slip gauge = ________ mm
Given diameter Slip gauges used Obtained dimensions

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Slip gauge set is studied and the given dimensions are building up by wringing minimum number of slip

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

gauges.
Outcome:
Students will be able to select proper measuring instrument and know requirement of calibration, errors
in measurement etc. They can perform accurate measurements.
Application:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Why C.I. is preferred material for surface plates and tables?
2. Why V ? blocks are generally manufactured in pairs?
3. Why micrometer is required to be tested for accuracy?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Define ? Linear Measurement
5. List the linear measuring instrument according to their accuracy.
6. Define ? Least Count
7. What are the uses of vernier depth gauge?
8. What are the uses of feeler gauges?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. What are the uses of straight edge?
10. What are the uses of angle plate?
11. What are the uses of V ? block?
12. What are the uses of combination square?
13. What precautions should be taken while using slip gauges?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. What is wringing?
15. Why the slip gauges are termed as ?End standard?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

22 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


Expt.No.03 THREAD PARAMETERS MEASUREMENT USING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TOOL MAKERS MICROSCOPE
Aim:
To study the tool makers microscope and in the process measure the various dimensions of the given
specimen
Apparatus required:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Tool makers microscope
2. Specimen
Diagram:

Description:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The tool maker?s microscope is designed for measurement of parts of complex forms; for example,
profile of a tool having external threads. It can also be used for measuring centre to centre distance of the
holes in any plane as well as the coordinates of the outline of a complex template gauge, using the
coordinates measuring system.
23 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Basically it consists of an optical head which can be adjusted vertically along the ways of supporting
column. The optical head can be clamped at any position by a screw. On the work table (which as a circular
base in which there are graduations) the part to be inspected is placed. The table has a compound slide by
means of which the part can be measured. For giving these two movements, there are two micrometer screws

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

having thimble scales and verniers. At the back of the base light source is arranged that provides horizontal
beam of light, reflected from a mirror by 90 degrees upwards towards the table. The beam of light passes
through the transparent glass plate on which flat plates can be checked are placed. Observations are made
through the eyepiece of the optical head.
Procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Place the given specimen on the work table and switch on all the three light sources and adjust the
intensity of the light source until a clean image of the cross wires and specimen are seen through
the eyepiece.
2. Coincide one of the two extreme edges between which the measurement has to be taken with
vertical or horizontal cross wires and depending upon the other image coincide with the same cross

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

wires by moving the above device. Note the reading.The difference between the two readings gives
the value of the required measurement.
3. Note the experiment specimen and the readings.
4. Tabulate the different measurements measured from the specimen.
Determination of thread parameters

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Magnification =
S.No. Parameters
Magnified value
(mm)
Actual value

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
1. Outer diameter (O.D)

2. Internal diameter (I.D)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Pitch

4. Flank angle

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Included angle of the tool was measured using tool maker?s microscope and various dimensions of the
given specimen are measured.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

24 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the various parameters of thread and select proper measuring
instrument and know requirement of calibration, errors in measurement etc. They can perform accurate

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measurements.
Application:
1. Machine Shop
2. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by tool maker?s microscope?
2. What is the light used in tool maker?s microscope?
3. What are the various characteristics that you would measure in a screw thread?
4. What are the instruments that are required for measuring screw thread?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Define ? Pitch
6. What are the causes of pitch error?
7. Define ? Flank
8. What are the effects of flank angle error?
9. What is progressive error?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. What is periodic error?
11. What is drunken error?
12. What is erratic error?
13. What are the applications of tool maker?s microscope?
14. What are the limitations of tool maker?s microscope?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15. What are the advantages of tool maker?s microscope?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

25 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.04 CALIBRATION OF DIAL GAUGE USING SLIP GAUGE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Aim:
To find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge
Apparatus required:
Dial gauge, magnetic stand, slip gauge, and surface plate
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
The dial test indicator is a precision measuring instrument which can convert linear motion into angular
motion by means of transmission mechanics of rack and pinion and can be used to measure linear vibration
and errors of shape.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

This instrument has the features such as good appearance, compact size, light weight, high precision,
reasonable construction, constant measuring face etc. Rigidity of all parts is excellent. Probe is tipped with
carbide balls. A shock proof mechanism is provided for those with larger measuring range.

26 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Types of dial indicator:
1. Plunger type
2. Lever type
Plunger type dial indicator has a resolution counter and each division in main scale is 0.01 mm. In lever

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

type dial test indicator is replaced by ball type stylus.
Procedure:
1. Fix the dial gauge to the stand rigidly and place the stand on the surface plate.
2. Set the plunger of dial gauge to first touch the upper surface of standard slip gauge and set indicator
to zero.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Raise then the plunger by pulling the screw above the dial scale.
4. Place the standard slip gauge underneath the plunger.
5. Release the plunger and let it to touch the standard slip gauge.
6. Note the reading on the dial scale.
Formulae:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The standard error of dial gauge is calculated by the formula

Tabulation:
S.No.
Slip gauge reading ?x?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
Dial gauge reading
(mm)
(x? - x)
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x? (x? - x)
1.
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Thus the accuracy and standard error of dial gauge is found. The standard error of given dial gauge is
__________.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

27 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Outcome:
Students will be able to check the variation in tolerance during the inspection process of a

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

machined part, measure the deflection of a beam or ring under laboratory conditions, as well as many
other situations where a small measurement needs to be registered or indicated
Application:
1. Milling Machine
2. Analog versus digital/electronic readout

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is comparator?
2. What are the types of comparators?
3. What is the LC for comparators?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. What are the applications of comparator?
5. What is meant by plunger?
6. What are the types of dial indicators?
7. Why a revolution counter is not provided in lever type dial test indicator?
8. Draw a line diagram of the operating mechanism of plunger type dial test indicator.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. Explain the term magnification of a dial indicator.
10. What are the uses of dial test indicator?
11. What are the practical applications of dial test indicator?
12. What precautions should be taken while using dial test indicator?
13. What are the desirable qualities of a dial test indicator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. What are the advantages of dial test indicator?
15. What are the limitations of dial test indicator?
16. Distinguish between comparator and measuring instrument.
17. What are the advantages of electrical comparator?
18. What are the advantages of optical comparator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

19. What are the uses of comparator?
20. What are the advantages and disadvantages of mechanical comparator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

28 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.05 DETERMINATION OF TAPER ANGLE BY SINE BAR
METHOD
Aim:
To measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare
Apparatus required:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sine bar, slip gauges, dial gauge with stand, micrometer, surface plate, bevel protractor, vernier caliper
Diagram:

Description:
The sine bar principle uses the ratio of the length of two sides of a right triangle. It may be noted that

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

devices operating on sine principle are capable of ?self-generation?. The measurement is restricted to 45
o
from
accuracy point of view. Sine bar itself is not a measuring instrument.
Accuracy requirements of sine bar:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. The axes of the rollers must be parallel to each other and the centre distance L must be precisely
known.
2. The sine bar must be flat and parallel to the plane connecting the axes of the rollers.
3. The rollers must be of identical diameters and must have within a close tolerance.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

29 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Procedure:
1. Fix the dial gaugeon the magnetic stand and place the magnetic stand on the surface plate.Check

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the parallelism of the sine bar.
2. Place the given specimen above the sine bar and place the dial gauge on top of the specimen.
Adjustthe dial gauge for zero deflection.
3. Raise the front end of the sine bar with slip gauges until the work surface is parallel to the datum
surface.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Check the parallelism using dial gauge.
5. Measure the distance between the centres of the sine bar rollers as ?L? and note the height of the
slip gauge as ?H?.
6. Note the included angle of the specimen.
Formulae:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sin ? = H/L where ? = Included angle of the specimen
H = Height of slip gauges
L = Distance between the centre of rollers
Tabulation:
S.No. L (mm) H (mm) Taper angle ( ?)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
2.
3.

Result:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The taper angle of the given specimen using sine bar was found to be =
Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for angular measurements
and they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a specific
requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Flat Surface
2. Granite

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

30 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. List out the various angle measuring instruments.
2. What is the working principles sine bar?
3. How is a sine bar used to measure the angle?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. What is the application of sine bar?
5. What is the material of sine bar?
6. Why sine bar is not preferred to use for measuring angles more than 45
0
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. What are the features of sine bar?
8. A 100 mm sine bar is to be set up to an angle of 33
0
, determine the slip gauges needed from 87
pieces set.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. What are the various instruments used for measuring angles?
10. What is sine bar?
11. How sine bar is used for angle measurement?
12. Explain how sine bar is used to measure angle of small size component.
13. Explain how sine bar is used to measure angle of large size component.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. What are the various types of sine bar?
15. What are the limitations of sine bar?
16. What is sine center?
17. What is sine table?
18. What are the possible sources of errors in angular measurement by sine bar?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

19. What are angle gauges?
20. How angle gauges are used for measuring angles?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

31 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.06 DETERMINATION OF GEAR TOOTH THICKNESS
USING GEAR TOOTH VERNIER
Aim:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen and to draw the graph between the tooth
number and the error in thickness
Apparatus required:
Gear tooth vernier, specimen, surface plate and vernier caliper
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
The tooth thickness, in general, is measured at pitch circle since gear tooth thickness varies from the tip
to the base circle of the tooth. This is possible only when there is an arrangement to fix that position for this
measurement by the gear tooth vernier. It has two vernier scales; one is vertical and other is horizontal.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
32 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

1. Measure initially the outside diameter of the given gear specimen by means of a vertical calculation
of vernier caliper. Note the number of teeth. Calculate the module (m) using the formula.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M = OD/ (Z+2) where z ? number of teeth
M - Module
2. Calculate the theoretical tooth thickness (t) by t = z * m* sin (90/z).
3. Set the vernier scale for the height and tighten.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Measure the thickness of each tooth using the horizontal scale. This is measured thickness. It can
be positive or negative.
H = m x [1+ Z/2 (1- Cos 90/Z)]
5. Calculate the error in the tooth thickness i.e,1. measured thickness ? Theoretical thickness
6. Draw the graph between the tooth number and the error in thickness.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Tooth
Number
Measured Thickness
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Theoretical Thickness (mm)
Error in tooth thickness
(mm)
1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3

Tooth
Number
MSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
VSC

VSR
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TR
(mm)
1
2
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Graph:


Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tooth No.
33 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
The theoretical experiment value of gear tooth thickness is obtained and graph is drawn between error
and tooth number in tooth thickness

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Theoretical tooth thickness =
Experimental tooth thickness =
Error in tooth thickness =
Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the basic measurement units and able to calibrate various

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measuring parameters of the gear.
Application:
1. Gear Component
2. Mining

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Calculate the setting of a gear tooth vernier caliper for a straight spur gear having 40 teeth and
module 4.
2. What is the importance of chordal depth?
3. Define ? Chordal width
4. How is the actual profile of the gear tooth determined?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. What are the manufacturing errors in gear element?
6. Define ? Addendum
7. Define ? Dedendum
8. Define ? Flank of tooth
9. Define ? Pitch

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. Define ? Pitch Circle
11. Define ? Crest of tooth
12. Define ? Root of tooth
13. Define ? Base Circle
14. Define ? Module

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15. Define ? Angle of Obliquity


Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

34 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.07 MEASUREMENT OF THREAD PARAMETER USING
FLOATING CARRIAGE MICROMETER
Aim:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two wire
method
Apparatus required:
1. Floating carriage micrometer
2. Standard wire

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Given specimen (screw thread)
Diagram:

Description of floating carriage micrometer:
It consists of three main units. A base casting carries a pair of centres on which threaded work piece is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

to be mounted. Another carriage capable of moving towards centre is mounted exactly above. In this carriage
one head with thimble to measure up to 0.002 mm is provided and at the other side of head a fiducial indicator
is provided to indicate zero position.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

35 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Procedure:
1. For two wire method, place the standard wire over a thread of the screw at opposite sides.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. For three wire method, place two standard wires on two successive threads and the third wire
placed opposite sides of the thread.
3. Measure the diameter over wires (M) using floating carriage micrometer.
4. Repeat this procedure at various positions of the screw and take different readings.
Formulae:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. For best wire size, d = P / 2 Cos (x/2)
Where, P = Pitch
d= wire size
x = angle between two threads
= 60

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
for metric thread
2. Actual effective diameter, E.A = M ? 3d + 0.866 p
3. Nominal effective diameter, EN = D ? 0.648 p
4. Max. wire size = 1.01 p

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Min. wire size = 0.505 p
6. Best wire size = 0.577 p
M = Diameter over wires
P = Pitch of thread
For metric thread:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Actual effective diameter (EA) = M ? 3d + 0.866 p
Where d = actual diameter of wire
Determination of actual and nominal effective diameter of the screw thread:
Sl.No.
Nominal

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diameter (D)
(mm)
Diameter over
wire ?M?
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Actual eff.
Diameter E.A
(mm)
Nominal eff.
Diameter E.N

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
Error in effective
diameter
(E.A ? E.N)
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

36 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Result:
Thus the actual and nominal effective diameter is measured using three wire method and the error in

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

effective diameter of screw is determined.
Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for roundness
measurements and they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a
specific requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Wholse
2. Maxxis Rubber India

1. Define ? Pitch

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Define ? Flank Angle
3. What is plug gauge?
4. What is meant by micrometer?
5. What is meant by indicator?
6. What is best ? size wire?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Calculate the diameter of the best wire for an M 20 x 25 screws.
8. What are the different corrections to be applied in the measurement of effective diameter by the
method of wire?
9. What is floating carriage micrometer?
10. What are the uses of floating carriage micrometer?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. What are the methods are used for measuring effective diameter?
12. Define ? Effective Diameter
13. Define ? Major Diameter
14. Define ? Minor Diameter
15. What are the effects of flank error?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16. Define ? Rake Angle
17. Define ? Pitch Cylinder
18. What are the effects of pitch error?
19. Define ? Pitch Diameter
20. What is meant by angle of thread?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

V SEMESTER - R 2013

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No. : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LABORATORY MANUAL
2 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

DHANALAKSHMI

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
2. To contribute to the promotion of Academic Excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels
3. To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING


Rendering the services to the global needs of engineering industries by educating students to become

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

professionally sound mechanical engineers of excellent caliber


To produce mechanical engineering technocrats with a perfect knowledge intellectual and hands on
experience and to inculcate the spirit of moral values and ethics to serve the society

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MISSION
MISSION
VISION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION

4 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals
To impart students with fundamental knowledge in mathematics and basic sciences that will mould
them to be successful professionals
2. Core competence

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To provide students with sound knowledge in engineering and experimental skills to identify
complex software problems in industry and to develop a practical solution for them
3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theory and practice which
enable them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and organization and to design

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

products requiring interdisciplinary skills
4. Professional skills
To bestow students with adequate training and provide opportunities to work as team that will build
up their communication skills, individual, leadership and supportive qualities and to enable them to
adapt and to work in ever changing technologies

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Life-long learning
To develop the ability of students to establish themselves as professionals in mechanical
engineering and to create awareness about the need for lifelong learning and pursuing advanced
degrees

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)
On completion of the B.E. (Mechanical) degree, the graduate will be able
a) To apply the basic knowledge of mathematics, science and engineering

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

b) To design and conduct experiments as well as to analyze and interpret data and apply the same in
the career or entrepreneurship
c) To design and develop innovative and creative software applications
d) To understand a complex real world problem and develop an efficient practical solution
e) To create, select and apply appropriate techniques, resources, modern engineering and IT tools

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

f) To understand the role as a professional and give the best to the society
g) To develop a system that will meet expected needs within realistic constraints such as economical
environmental, social, political, ethical, safety and sustainability
h) To communicate effectively and make others understand exactly what they are trying to tell in both
verbal and written forms

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

i) To work in a team as a team member or a leader and make unique contributions and work with
coordination
j) To engage in lifelong learning and exhibit their technical skills
k) To develop and manage projects in multidisciplinary environments

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY



To familiar with different measurement equipment?s and use of this industry for quality inspection

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

List of Experiments
1. Tool Maker?s Microscope
2. Comparator
3. Sine Bar
4. Gear Tooth Vernier Caliper

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Floating gauge Micrometer
6. Coordinate Measuring Machine
7. Surface Finish Measuring Equipment
8. Vernier Height Gauge
9. Bore diameter measurement using telescope gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. Bore diameter measurement using micrometer
11. Force Measurement
12. Torque Measurement
13. Temperature measurement
14. Autocollimator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Ability to handle different measurement tools and perform measurements in quality impulsion
2. Learnt the usage of precision measuring instruments and practiced to take measurements
3. Learnt and practiced to build the required dimensions using slip gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Able to measure the various dimensions of the given specimen using the tool maker?s microscope
5. Able to find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge
6. Able to measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare
7. Learnt to determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen using Gear tooth vernier
8. Able to measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

wire method
9. Learnt to study the construction and operation of coordinate measuring machine
10. Learnt to determine the diameter of bore by using telescopic gauge and dial bore indicator
11. Able to measure the surface roughness using Talysurf instrument
12. Studied the characteristic between applied load and the output volt

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. Learnt the characteristics of developing torque and respective sensor output voltage
14. Studied the characteristics of thermocouple without compensation
15. Able to check the straightness & flatness of the given component by using Autocollimator
16. Learnt to measure the displacement using LVDT and to calibrate it with the millimeter scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OBJECTIVES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OUTCOMES

7 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CONTENTS
Sl. No. Name of the Experiments Page No.
CYCLE ? 1 EXPERIMENTS
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab ? A Study
7
2
To build up the slip gauge for given dimension ? A Study
16

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
Thread parameters measurement using Tool Makers Microscope
20
4
Calibration of dial gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

23
5
Determination of taper angle by sine bar method
26
6

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of gear tooth thickness using gear tooth vernier
29
7
Measurement of thread parameters using floating carriage micrometer
32

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CYCLE ? 2 EXPERIMENTS
8
Measurement of various dimensions using Coordinate Measuring Machine
35
9

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement of surface roughness
39
10
Measurement of bores using dial bore indicator and telescopic gauge
42

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11
Force measurement using load cell
46
12
Torque measurement using strain gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

49
13
Temperature measurement using thermocouple
53
14

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement of alignment using autocollimator
56
ADDITIONAL EXPERIMENT BEYOND THE SYLLABUS
15
Thread parameters measurement using profile projector

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

60
16
Displacement measurement ? linear variable differential transducer (LVDT)
62
PROJECT WORK

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

65


8 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.01 PRECISION MEASURING INSTRUMENT YSED IN
METROLOGY LAB ? A STUDY
Aim:
To study the following instruments and their usage for measuring dimensions of given specimen
1. Vernier caliper

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Micrometer
3. Vernier height gauge
4. Depth micrometer
5. Universal bevel protractor
Apparatus required:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Surface plate, specimen and above instruments
Vernier caliper:
The principle of vernier caliper is to use the minor difference between the sizes two scales or divisions
for measurement. The difference between them can be utilized to enhance the accuracy of measurement. The
vernier caliper essentially consists of two steel rules, sliding along each other.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Parts:
Different parts of the vernier caliper are
1. Beam ? It has main scale.
2. Fixed jaw
3. Sliding or Moving jaw ? It has vernier scale and sliding jaw locking screw.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw knife
edges for internal measurement.
5. Stem or depth bar for depth measurement
Least count:
Least count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm
1 VSD = 0.98 mm
Least count = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


ID

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPTH


OD
Measurement:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Given Vernier caliper can be used for external, internal depth, slot and step measurement.
Measurement principle:
When both jaws contact each other scale shows the zero reading. The finer adjustment of movable jaw
can be done by the fine adjustment screw. First the whole movable jaw assembly is adjusted so that the two
measuring tips just touch the part to be measured. Then the fine adjustment clamp locking screw is tightened.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Final adjustment depending upon the sense of correct feel is made by the adjusting screw. After final
adjustment has been made sliding jaw locking screw is also tightened and the reading is noted.
All the parts of the Vernier caliper are made of good quality steel and measuring faces are hardened.
Types of vernier:
Vernier caliper, electronic vernier caliper, vernier depth caliper

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Main scale
reading (MSR)
(mm)
Vernier scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale
reading (VSR) (mm)
Total reading (MSR
+ VSR)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)

OD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ID


Depth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier height gauge:
Vernier height gauge is a sort of vernier caliper equipped with a special instrument suitable for height
measurement. It is always kept on the surface plate and the use of the surfaces plates as datum surfaces is
very essential.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count:
Least Count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm
1 VSD = 0.98 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least Count (LC) = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm
Parts:
1. Base
2. Beam ? It has main scale.
3. Slider ? It has a vernier scale and slider locking screw.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Scriber
5. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw.


12 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Material:
All the parts of vernier are made of good quality steel and the measuring faces hardened.
Types of vernier gauge:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Analog vernier height gauge
2. Digital vernier height gauge
3. Electronic vernier height gauge
Tabulation:
Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Main scale reading
(MSR)(mm)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(VSR)(mm)
Total reading (MSR +
VSR)(mm)
1.
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.

13 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Outside micrometer:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The micrometer essentially consists of an accurate screw having about 10 or 20 threads per cm. The
end of the screw forms one measuring tip and other measuring tip is constituted by a stationary anvil in the
base of the frame. The screw is threaded for certain length and is plain afterwards. The plain portion is called
spindle and its end is the measuring surface. The spindle is advanced or retracted by turning a thimble
connected to a spindle. The spindle is a slide fit over the barrel and barrel is the fixed part attached with the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

frame. The barrel & thimble are graduated. The pitch of the screw threads is 0.5 mm.

Least count:
Least Count (LC) = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale
= 0.5 / 50 = 0.01 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Parts:
1. Frame
2. Anvil
3. Spindle
4. Spindle lock

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Barrel or outside sleeve
6. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions
7. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.
The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.
14 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement:
It can be used for any external measurement.
Types of micrometer:
1. Outside micrometer, 2. Inside micrometer, 3.Depth micrometer, 4. Stick micrometer, 5. Screw thread

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

micrometer, 6. V ? anvil micrometer, 7. Blade type micrometer, 8. Dial micrometer, 9. Bench micrometer, 10.
Tape screw operated internal micrometer, 11. Groove micrometer, 12. Digital micrometer, 13.Differential screw
micrometer, 14.Adjustable range outside micrometer.
Ratchet stop mechanism:
The object of the ratchet stop is to ensure that same level of torque is applied on the spindle while

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measuring and the sense of the feel of operator is eliminated and consistent readings are obtained. By
providing this arrangement, the ratchet stop is made slip off when the torque applied to rotate the spindle
exceeds the set torque. Thus this provision ensures the application of same amount of torque during the
measurement.
Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) (mm)
Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Head scale reading
(HSR x LC) (mm)
Total Reading (PSR
+ HSR) (mm)
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.

Depth micrometer:
Depth micrometer is a sort of micrometer which is mainly used for measuring depth of holes, so it is
named as depth micrometer.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Parts:
1. Shoulder
2. Spindle
3. Spindle lock
4. Barrel or outside sleeve ? It has pitch scale.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions.
6. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.
The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.
15 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count:
Least Count = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale = 0.50/50
= 0.01 mm
Measurements:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

It can be used for measuring the depth of holes, slots and recessed areas. The pitch of the screw thread
is 0.5 mm. The least count is 0.01 mm. Shoulder acts as a reference surface and is held firmly and
perpendicular to the centre line of the hole. For large range of measurement extension rods are used. In the
barrel the scale is calibrated. The accuracy again depends upon the sense of touch.
Procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

First, calculate the least count of the instrument. Check the zero error. Measure the specimen note
down the main scale reading or the head scale reading. Note down the vernier or head scale coincidence with
main or pitch scale divisions.
Tabulation:
Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) (mm)
Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)
Head scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(HSR x LC) (mm)
Total Reading (PSR
+ HSR) (mm)

1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Universal bevel protractor:

Description:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Bevel protractor is an instrument for measuring the angle between the two faces of a specimen. It
consists of a base plate on which a circular scale is engraved. It is graduated in degrees. An adjustment plate
is attached to a circular plate containing the vernier scale. The adjustable blade can be locked in any position.
The circular plate has 360 division divided into four parts of 90 degrees each. The adjustable parts have 24
divisions of to the right and left sides of zero reading. These scales are used according to the position of the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

specimen with respect to movable scale.
Procedure:
1. Place the specimen whose taper is to be measured between the adjustable plate and movable
blade with one of its face parallel to the base.
2. Lock the adjustable plate in position and note down the main scale reading depending upon the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

direction of rotation of adjustable plate in clockwise or anticlockwise.
3. Note the VSC to the right of zero.
4. Multiply the VSC with the least count and add to MSR to obtain the actual reading.
Least count:
Least Count = 2 MSD ? 1 VSD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 MSD = 1
o
24 VSD = 46
o
=> 1 VSD = 23/12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LC = 2 ? 23/12 = 1/12
o
= 5? (five minutes)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:
Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Main scale reading
(MSR) (deg)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(VSR) (deg)
Total reading (MSR +
VSR)
(deg)
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.
The angle of scriber of the vernier height gauge =
Result:
Thus the various precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab are studied and the specimen
dimensions are recorded.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for linear, angular,
roundness and roughness measurements they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring
instrument according to a specific requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).
Application:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Quality Department


1. Define ? Metrology
2. Define ? Inspection

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. What are the needs of inspection in industries?
4. What are the various methods involving the measurement?
5. Define ? Precision
6. Define ? Accuracy
7. Define ? Calibration

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Define ? Repeatability
9. Define ? Magnification
10. Define ? Error
11. Define ? Systematic Error
12. Define ? Random Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. Define ? Parallax Error
14. Define ? Environmental Error
15. Define ? Cosine Error
Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

18 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.02 BUILD UP THE SLIP GAUGE FOR GIVEN DIMENSION
? A STUDY
Aim:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To build up the slip gauge for given dimension
Apparatus required:
1. Slip gauges set
2. Surface plate
3. Soft cloth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diagram:

Description:
Slip gauge are universally accepted standard of length in industry. They are the working standard for
linear dimension. These were invented by a Swedish Engineer, C.E. Johansson. They are used

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. For direct precise measurement where the accuracy of the workpiece demand it.
2. For use with high- magnification comparators to establish the size of the gauge blocks in general
use.
3. Gauge blocks are also used for many other purposes such as checking the accuracy of measuring
instrument or setting up a comparator to a specific dimension, enabling a batch of component to be

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

quickly and accurately checked or indeed in any situation where there is need to refer to standard of
known length these blocks are rectangular.
19 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Most gauge blocks are produced from high grade steel, hardened and established by a heat treatment

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

process to give a high degree of dimensional stability. Gauge blocks are also manufactured from tungsten
carbide which is an extremely hard and wear resistant material. The measuring faces have a lapped finish.
The faces are perfectly flat and parallel to one another with a high degree of accuracy. Each block has an
extremely high dimensional accuracy at 20
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C.
These slip gauge are available in variety of selected sets both in inch units and metric units. Letter ?E? is
used for inch units and ?M? is used for metric standard number of pieces in a set following the letter E or M. For
example EBI refers to a set whose blocks are in metric units and are 83 in number. Each block dimensions is
printed on anyone of its face itself the size of any required standard being made up by combining the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

appropriate number of these different size blocks.
If two gauges are slid and twisted together under pressure they will firmly join together. This process,
known as wringing, is very useful because it enables several gauge blocks to be assembled together to
produce a required size. In fact the success of precision measurement by slip gauges depends on the
phenomenon of wringing.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

First the gauge is oscillated slightly with very light pressure over other gauge so as to detect pressure at
any foreign particles between the surfaces. One gauge is placed perpendicular to other using standard
gauging pressure and rotary motion is applied until the blocks are lined up.
Procedure:
1. Build the given dimension by wringing minimum number of slip gauges.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Note the given dimension and choose the minimum possible slip gauge available in the set so as to
accommodate the last decimal value. The minimum slip gauge value dimension available i.e., 1.12
mm must be chosen followed by 1.5 mm thick gauge block.
3. Follow the above steps to build up the slip gauge of any dimension.
Precautions:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Slip gauges should be handled very carefully placed gently and should never be dropped.
2. Whenever a slip gauge is being removed from the set, its dimensions are noted and must be
replaced into the set at its appropriate place only.
3. Correct procedure must be followed in wringing and also in removing the gauge blocks.
4. They should be cleaned well before use and petroleum jelly is applied after use.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

20 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Range (mm) Increment (mm) No. of pieces

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total = ____________ Pieces
Total length of slip gauge = ________ mm
Given diameter Slip gauges used Obtained dimensions

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Slip gauge set is studied and the given dimensions are building up by wringing minimum number of slip
gauges.
Outcome:
Students will be able to select proper measuring instrument and know requirement of calibration, errors
in measurement etc. They can perform accurate measurements.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Why C.I. is preferred material for surface plates and tables?
2. Why V ? blocks are generally manufactured in pairs?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Why micrometer is required to be tested for accuracy?
4. Define ? Linear Measurement
5. List the linear measuring instrument according to their accuracy.
6. Define ? Least Count
7. What are the uses of vernier depth gauge?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. What are the uses of feeler gauges?
9. What are the uses of straight edge?
10. What are the uses of angle plate?
11. What are the uses of V ? block?
12. What are the uses of combination square?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. What precautions should be taken while using slip gauges?
14. What is wringing?
15. Why the slip gauges are termed as ?End standard?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

22 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.03 THREAD PARAMETERS MEASUREMENT USING
TOOL MAKERS MICROSCOPE
Aim:
To study the tool makers microscope and in the process measure the various dimensions of the given
specimen

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Apparatus required:
1. Tool makers microscope
2. Specimen
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
The tool maker?s microscope is designed for measurement of parts of complex forms; for example,
profile of a tool having external threads. It can also be used for measuring centre to centre distance of the
holes in any plane as well as the coordinates of the outline of a complex template gauge, using the
coordinates measuring system.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

23 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Basically it consists of an optical head which can be adjusted vertically along the ways of supporting
column. The optical head can be clamped at any position by a screw. On the work table (which as a circular
base in which there are graduations) the part to be inspected is placed. The table has a compound slide by

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

means of which the part can be measured. For giving these two movements, there are two micrometer screws
having thimble scales and verniers. At the back of the base light source is arranged that provides horizontal
beam of light, reflected from a mirror by 90 degrees upwards towards the table. The beam of light passes
through the transparent glass plate on which flat plates can be checked are placed. Observations are made
through the eyepiece of the optical head.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. Place the given specimen on the work table and switch on all the three light sources and adjust the
intensity of the light source until a clean image of the cross wires and specimen are seen through
the eyepiece.
2. Coincide one of the two extreme edges between which the measurement has to be taken with

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

vertical or horizontal cross wires and depending upon the other image coincide with the same cross
wires by moving the above device. Note the reading.The difference between the two readings gives
the value of the required measurement.
3. Note the experiment specimen and the readings.
4. Tabulate the different measurements measured from the specimen.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of thread parameters
Magnification =
S.No. Parameters
Magnified value
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Actual value
(mm)
1. Outer diameter (O.D)

2. Internal diameter (I.D)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Pitch

4. Flank angle

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Included angle of the tool was measured using tool maker?s microscope and various dimensions of the
given specimen are measured.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

24 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the various parameters of thread and select proper measuring

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

instrument and know requirement of calibration, errors in measurement etc. They can perform accurate
measurements.
Application:
1. Machine Shop
2. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by tool maker?s microscope?
2. What is the light used in tool maker?s microscope?
3. What are the various characteristics that you would measure in a screw thread?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. What are the instruments that are required for measuring screw thread?
5. Define ? Pitch
6. What are the causes of pitch error?
7. Define ? Flank
8. What are the effects of flank angle error?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. What is progressive error?
10. What is periodic error?
11. What is drunken error?
12. What is erratic error?
13. What are the applications of tool maker?s microscope?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. What are the limitations of tool maker?s microscope?
15. What are the advantages of tool maker?s microscope?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

25 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.04 CALIBRATION OF DIAL GAUGE USING SLIP GAUGE
Aim:
To find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge
Apparatus required:
Dial gauge, magnetic stand, slip gauge, and surface plate

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diagram:

Description:
The dial test indicator is a precision measuring instrument which can convert linear motion into angular
motion by means of transmission mechanics of rack and pinion and can be used to measure linear vibration

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

and errors of shape.
This instrument has the features such as good appearance, compact size, light weight, high precision,
reasonable construction, constant measuring face etc. Rigidity of all parts is excellent. Probe is tipped with
carbide balls. A shock proof mechanism is provided for those with larger measuring range.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

26 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Types of dial indicator:
1. Plunger type
2. Lever type

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Plunger type dial indicator has a resolution counter and each division in main scale is 0.01 mm. In lever
type dial test indicator is replaced by ball type stylus.
Procedure:
1. Fix the dial gauge to the stand rigidly and place the stand on the surface plate.
2. Set the plunger of dial gauge to first touch the upper surface of standard slip gauge and set indicator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

to zero.
3. Raise then the plunger by pulling the screw above the dial scale.
4. Place the standard slip gauge underneath the plunger.
5. Release the plunger and let it to touch the standard slip gauge.
6. Note the reading on the dial scale.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Formulae:
The standard error of dial gauge is calculated by the formula

Tabulation:
S.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Slip gauge reading ?x?
(mm)
Dial gauge reading
(mm)
(x? - x)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2


x? (x? - x)
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2


Result:
Thus the accuracy and standard error of dial gauge is found. The standard error of given dial gauge is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

__________.

27 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Outcome:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Students will be able to check the variation in tolerance during the inspection process of a
machined part, measure the deflection of a beam or ring under laboratory conditions, as well as many
other situations where a small measurement needs to be registered or indicated
Application:
1. Milling Machine

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Analog versus digital/electronic readout


1. What is comparator?
2. What are the types of comparators?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. What is the LC for comparators?
4. What are the applications of comparator?
5. What is meant by plunger?
6. What are the types of dial indicators?
7. Why a revolution counter is not provided in lever type dial test indicator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Draw a line diagram of the operating mechanism of plunger type dial test indicator.
9. Explain the term magnification of a dial indicator.
10. What are the uses of dial test indicator?
11. What are the practical applications of dial test indicator?
12. What precautions should be taken while using dial test indicator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. What are the desirable qualities of a dial test indicator?
14. What are the advantages of dial test indicator?
15. What are the limitations of dial test indicator?
16. Distinguish between comparator and measuring instrument.
17. What are the advantages of electrical comparator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

18. What are the advantages of optical comparator?
19. What are the uses of comparator?
20. What are the advantages and disadvantages of mechanical comparator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

28 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.05 DETERMINATION OF TAPER ANGLE BY SINE BAR
METHOD
Aim:
To measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Apparatus required:
Sine bar, slip gauges, dial gauge with stand, micrometer, surface plate, bevel protractor, vernier caliper
Diagram:

Description:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The sine bar principle uses the ratio of the length of two sides of a right triangle. It may be noted that
devices operating on sine principle are capable of ?self-generation?. The measurement is restricted to 45
o
from
accuracy point of view. Sine bar itself is not a measuring instrument.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Accuracy requirements of sine bar:
1. The axes of the rollers must be parallel to each other and the centre distance L must be precisely
known.
2. The sine bar must be flat and parallel to the plane connecting the axes of the rollers.
3. The rollers must be of identical diameters and must have within a close tolerance.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

29 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Fix the dial gaugeon the magnetic stand and place the magnetic stand on the surface plate.Check
the parallelism of the sine bar.
2. Place the given specimen above the sine bar and place the dial gauge on top of the specimen.
Adjustthe dial gauge for zero deflection.
3. Raise the front end of the sine bar with slip gauges until the work surface is parallel to the datum

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

surface.
4. Check the parallelism using dial gauge.
5. Measure the distance between the centres of the sine bar rollers as ?L? and note the height of the
slip gauge as ?H?.
6. Note the included angle of the specimen.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Formulae:
Sin ? = H/L where ? = Included angle of the specimen
H = Height of slip gauges
L = Distance between the centre of rollers
Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

S.No. L (mm) H (mm) Taper angle ( ?)
1.
2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
The taper angle of the given specimen using sine bar was found to be =
Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for angular measurements
and they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a specific

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).

Application:
1. Flat Surface
2. Granite

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

30 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. List out the various angle measuring instruments.
2. What is the working principles sine bar?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. How is a sine bar used to measure the angle?
4. What is the application of sine bar?
5. What is the material of sine bar?
6. Why sine bar is not preferred to use for measuring angles more than 45
0

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
7. What are the features of sine bar?
8. A 100 mm sine bar is to be set up to an angle of 33
0
, determine the slip gauges needed from 87

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

pieces set.
9. What are the various instruments used for measuring angles?
10. What is sine bar?
11. How sine bar is used for angle measurement?
12. Explain how sine bar is used to measure angle of small size component.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. Explain how sine bar is used to measure angle of large size component.
14. What are the various types of sine bar?
15. What are the limitations of sine bar?
16. What is sine center?
17. What is sine table?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

18. What are the possible sources of errors in angular measurement by sine bar?
19. What are angle gauges?
20. How angle gauges are used for measuring angles?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

31 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.06 DETERMINATION OF GEAR TOOTH THICKNESS
USING GEAR TOOTH VERNIER

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Aim:
To determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen and to draw the graph between the tooth
number and the error in thickness
Apparatus required:
Gear tooth vernier, specimen, surface plate and vernier caliper

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diagram:

Description:
The tooth thickness, in general, is measured at pitch circle since gear tooth thickness varies from the tip
to the base circle of the tooth. This is possible only when there is an arrangement to fix that position for this

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measurement by the gear tooth vernier. It has two vernier scales; one is vertical and other is horizontal.
Procedure:
32 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

1. Measure initially the outside diameter of the given gear specimen by means of a vertical calculation

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

of vernier caliper. Note the number of teeth. Calculate the module (m) using the formula.

M = OD/ (Z+2) where z ? number of teeth
M - Module
2. Calculate the theoretical tooth thickness (t) by t = z * m* sin (90/z).

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Set the vernier scale for the height and tighten.
4. Measure the thickness of each tooth using the horizontal scale. This is measured thickness. It can
be positive or negative.
H = m x [1+ Z/2 (1- Cos 90/Z)]
5. Calculate the error in the tooth thickness i.e,1. measured thickness ? Theoretical thickness

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Draw the graph between the tooth number and the error in thickness.
Tabulation:
Tooth
Number
Measured Thickness

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
Theoretical Thickness (mm)
Error in tooth thickness
(mm)
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
3

Tooth
Number

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MSR
(mm)
VSC

VSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
TR
(mm)
1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3

Graph:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Error



Tooth No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

33 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


Result:
The theoretical experiment value of gear tooth thickness is obtained and graph is drawn between error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

and tooth number in tooth thickness
Theoretical tooth thickness =
Experimental tooth thickness =
Error in tooth thickness =
Outcome:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Students will be able to understand the basic measurement units and able to calibrate various
measuring parameters of the gear.
Application:
1. Gear Component
2. Mining

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Calculate the setting of a gear tooth vernier caliper for a straight spur gear having 40 teeth and
module 4.
2. What is the importance of chordal depth?
3. Define ? Chordal width

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. How is the actual profile of the gear tooth determined?
5. What are the manufacturing errors in gear element?
6. Define ? Addendum
7. Define ? Dedendum
8. Define ? Flank of tooth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. Define ? Pitch
10. Define ? Pitch Circle
11. Define ? Crest of tooth
12. Define ? Root of tooth
13. Define ? Base Circle

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. Define ? Module
15. Define ? Angle of Obliquity


Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

34 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.07 MEASUREMENT OF THREAD PARAMETER USING
FLOATING CARRIAGE MICROMETER

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Aim:
To measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two wire
method
Apparatus required:
1. Floating carriage micrometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Standard wire
3. Given specimen (screw thread)
Diagram:

Description of floating carriage micrometer:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

It consists of three main units. A base casting carries a pair of centres on which threaded work piece is
to be mounted. Another carriage capable of moving towards centre is mounted exactly above. In this carriage
one head with thimble to measure up to 0.002 mm is provided and at the other side of head a fiducial indicator
is provided to indicate zero position.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

35 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. For two wire method, place the standard wire over a thread of the screw at opposite sides.
2. For three wire method, place two standard wires on two successive threads and the third wire
placed opposite sides of the thread.
3. Measure the diameter over wires (M) using floating carriage micrometer.
4. Repeat this procedure at various positions of the screw and take different readings.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Formulae:
1. For best wire size, d = P / 2 Cos (x/2)
Where, P = Pitch
d= wire size
x = angle between two threads

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= 60
o
for metric thread
2. Actual effective diameter, E.A = M ? 3d + 0.866 p
3. Nominal effective diameter, EN = D ? 0.648 p

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Max. wire size = 1.01 p
5. Min. wire size = 0.505 p
6. Best wire size = 0.577 p
M = Diameter over wires
P = Pitch of thread

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

For metric thread:
Actual effective diameter (EA) = M ? 3d + 0.866 p
Where d = actual diameter of wire
Determination of actual and nominal effective diameter of the screw thread:
Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Nominal
Diameter (D)
(mm)
Diameter over
wire ?M?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
Actual eff.
Diameter E.A
(mm)
Nominal eff.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diameter E.N
(mm)
Error in effective
diameter
(E.A ? E.N)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
1.
2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

36 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Result:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thus the actual and nominal effective diameter is measured using three wire method and the error in
effective diameter of screw is determined.
Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for roundness
measurements and they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

specific requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).
Application:
1. Wholse
2. Maxxis Rubber India

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Pitch
2. Define ? Flank Angle
3. What is plug gauge?
4. What is meant by micrometer?
5. What is meant by indicator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. What is best ? size wire?
7. Calculate the diameter of the best wire for an M 20 x 25 screws.
8. What are the different corrections to be applied in the measurement of effective diameter by the
method of wire?
9. What is floating carriage micrometer?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. What are the uses of floating carriage micrometer?
11. What are the methods are used for measuring effective diameter?
12. Define ? Effective Diameter
13. Define ? Major Diameter
14. Define ? Minor Diameter

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15. What are the effects of flank error?
16. Define ? Rake Angle
17. Define ? Pitch Cylinder
18. What are the effects of pitch error?
19. Define ? Pitch Diameter

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

20. What is meant by angle of thread?


Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

37 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.08 MEASUREMENT OF VARIOUS DIMENSIONS USING
COORDINATE MEASURING MACHINE
Aim:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. To study the construction and operation of coordinate measuring machine
2. To measure the specified dimensions of the given component
Instruments used:
Coordinate measuring machine, vernier calipers
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Theory:
A coordinate measuring machine (CMM) is a 3D device for measuring the physical and geometrical
characteristics of an object. This machine may be manually controlled by an operator or it may be computer
controlled. Measurements are defined by a probe attached to the three moving axis of this machine X, Y and Z

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

axes. A coordinate measuring machine (CMM) is also a device used in manufacturing and assembly
processes to test a part or assembly against the design intent. By precisely recording the X, Y and Z
coordinates of the target, points are generated which can be analyzed via regression algorithms for the
construction of features. These points are collected by using a probe that is positioned manually by an
FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

V SEMESTER - R 2013

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No. : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LABORATORY MANUAL
2 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

DHANALAKSHMI

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
2. To contribute to the promotion of Academic Excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels
3. To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING


Rendering the services to the global needs of engineering industries by educating students to become

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

professionally sound mechanical engineers of excellent caliber


To produce mechanical engineering technocrats with a perfect knowledge intellectual and hands on
experience and to inculcate the spirit of moral values and ethics to serve the society

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MISSION
MISSION
VISION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION

4 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals
To impart students with fundamental knowledge in mathematics and basic sciences that will mould
them to be successful professionals
2. Core competence

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To provide students with sound knowledge in engineering and experimental skills to identify
complex software problems in industry and to develop a practical solution for them
3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theory and practice which
enable them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and organization and to design

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

products requiring interdisciplinary skills
4. Professional skills
To bestow students with adequate training and provide opportunities to work as team that will build
up their communication skills, individual, leadership and supportive qualities and to enable them to
adapt and to work in ever changing technologies

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Life-long learning
To develop the ability of students to establish themselves as professionals in mechanical
engineering and to create awareness about the need for lifelong learning and pursuing advanced
degrees

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)
On completion of the B.E. (Mechanical) degree, the graduate will be able
a) To apply the basic knowledge of mathematics, science and engineering

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

b) To design and conduct experiments as well as to analyze and interpret data and apply the same in
the career or entrepreneurship
c) To design and develop innovative and creative software applications
d) To understand a complex real world problem and develop an efficient practical solution
e) To create, select and apply appropriate techniques, resources, modern engineering and IT tools

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

f) To understand the role as a professional and give the best to the society
g) To develop a system that will meet expected needs within realistic constraints such as economical
environmental, social, political, ethical, safety and sustainability
h) To communicate effectively and make others understand exactly what they are trying to tell in both
verbal and written forms

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

i) To work in a team as a team member or a leader and make unique contributions and work with
coordination
j) To engage in lifelong learning and exhibit their technical skills
k) To develop and manage projects in multidisciplinary environments

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY



To familiar with different measurement equipment?s and use of this industry for quality inspection

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

List of Experiments
1. Tool Maker?s Microscope
2. Comparator
3. Sine Bar
4. Gear Tooth Vernier Caliper

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Floating gauge Micrometer
6. Coordinate Measuring Machine
7. Surface Finish Measuring Equipment
8. Vernier Height Gauge
9. Bore diameter measurement using telescope gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. Bore diameter measurement using micrometer
11. Force Measurement
12. Torque Measurement
13. Temperature measurement
14. Autocollimator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Ability to handle different measurement tools and perform measurements in quality impulsion
2. Learnt the usage of precision measuring instruments and practiced to take measurements
3. Learnt and practiced to build the required dimensions using slip gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Able to measure the various dimensions of the given specimen using the tool maker?s microscope
5. Able to find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge
6. Able to measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare
7. Learnt to determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen using Gear tooth vernier
8. Able to measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

wire method
9. Learnt to study the construction and operation of coordinate measuring machine
10. Learnt to determine the diameter of bore by using telescopic gauge and dial bore indicator
11. Able to measure the surface roughness using Talysurf instrument
12. Studied the characteristic between applied load and the output volt

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. Learnt the characteristics of developing torque and respective sensor output voltage
14. Studied the characteristics of thermocouple without compensation
15. Able to check the straightness & flatness of the given component by using Autocollimator
16. Learnt to measure the displacement using LVDT and to calibrate it with the millimeter scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OBJECTIVES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OUTCOMES

7 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CONTENTS
Sl. No. Name of the Experiments Page No.
CYCLE ? 1 EXPERIMENTS
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab ? A Study
7
2
To build up the slip gauge for given dimension ? A Study
16

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
Thread parameters measurement using Tool Makers Microscope
20
4
Calibration of dial gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

23
5
Determination of taper angle by sine bar method
26
6

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of gear tooth thickness using gear tooth vernier
29
7
Measurement of thread parameters using floating carriage micrometer
32

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CYCLE ? 2 EXPERIMENTS
8
Measurement of various dimensions using Coordinate Measuring Machine
35
9

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement of surface roughness
39
10
Measurement of bores using dial bore indicator and telescopic gauge
42

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11
Force measurement using load cell
46
12
Torque measurement using strain gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

49
13
Temperature measurement using thermocouple
53
14

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement of alignment using autocollimator
56
ADDITIONAL EXPERIMENT BEYOND THE SYLLABUS
15
Thread parameters measurement using profile projector

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

60
16
Displacement measurement ? linear variable differential transducer (LVDT)
62
PROJECT WORK

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

65


8 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.01 PRECISION MEASURING INSTRUMENT YSED IN
METROLOGY LAB ? A STUDY
Aim:
To study the following instruments and their usage for measuring dimensions of given specimen
1. Vernier caliper

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Micrometer
3. Vernier height gauge
4. Depth micrometer
5. Universal bevel protractor
Apparatus required:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Surface plate, specimen and above instruments
Vernier caliper:
The principle of vernier caliper is to use the minor difference between the sizes two scales or divisions
for measurement. The difference between them can be utilized to enhance the accuracy of measurement. The
vernier caliper essentially consists of two steel rules, sliding along each other.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Parts:
Different parts of the vernier caliper are
1. Beam ? It has main scale.
2. Fixed jaw
3. Sliding or Moving jaw ? It has vernier scale and sliding jaw locking screw.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw knife
edges for internal measurement.
5. Stem or depth bar for depth measurement
Least count:
Least count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm
1 VSD = 0.98 mm
Least count = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


ID

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPTH


OD
Measurement:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Given Vernier caliper can be used for external, internal depth, slot and step measurement.
Measurement principle:
When both jaws contact each other scale shows the zero reading. The finer adjustment of movable jaw
can be done by the fine adjustment screw. First the whole movable jaw assembly is adjusted so that the two
measuring tips just touch the part to be measured. Then the fine adjustment clamp locking screw is tightened.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Final adjustment depending upon the sense of correct feel is made by the adjusting screw. After final
adjustment has been made sliding jaw locking screw is also tightened and the reading is noted.
All the parts of the Vernier caliper are made of good quality steel and measuring faces are hardened.
Types of vernier:
Vernier caliper, electronic vernier caliper, vernier depth caliper

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Main scale
reading (MSR)
(mm)
Vernier scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale
reading (VSR) (mm)
Total reading (MSR
+ VSR)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)

OD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ID


Depth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier height gauge:
Vernier height gauge is a sort of vernier caliper equipped with a special instrument suitable for height
measurement. It is always kept on the surface plate and the use of the surfaces plates as datum surfaces is
very essential.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count:
Least Count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm
1 VSD = 0.98 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least Count (LC) = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm
Parts:
1. Base
2. Beam ? It has main scale.
3. Slider ? It has a vernier scale and slider locking screw.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Scriber
5. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw.


12 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Material:
All the parts of vernier are made of good quality steel and the measuring faces hardened.
Types of vernier gauge:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Analog vernier height gauge
2. Digital vernier height gauge
3. Electronic vernier height gauge
Tabulation:
Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Main scale reading
(MSR)(mm)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(VSR)(mm)
Total reading (MSR +
VSR)(mm)
1.
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.

13 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Outside micrometer:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The micrometer essentially consists of an accurate screw having about 10 or 20 threads per cm. The
end of the screw forms one measuring tip and other measuring tip is constituted by a stationary anvil in the
base of the frame. The screw is threaded for certain length and is plain afterwards. The plain portion is called
spindle and its end is the measuring surface. The spindle is advanced or retracted by turning a thimble
connected to a spindle. The spindle is a slide fit over the barrel and barrel is the fixed part attached with the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

frame. The barrel & thimble are graduated. The pitch of the screw threads is 0.5 mm.

Least count:
Least Count (LC) = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale
= 0.5 / 50 = 0.01 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Parts:
1. Frame
2. Anvil
3. Spindle
4. Spindle lock

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Barrel or outside sleeve
6. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions
7. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.
The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.
14 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement:
It can be used for any external measurement.
Types of micrometer:
1. Outside micrometer, 2. Inside micrometer, 3.Depth micrometer, 4. Stick micrometer, 5. Screw thread

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

micrometer, 6. V ? anvil micrometer, 7. Blade type micrometer, 8. Dial micrometer, 9. Bench micrometer, 10.
Tape screw operated internal micrometer, 11. Groove micrometer, 12. Digital micrometer, 13.Differential screw
micrometer, 14.Adjustable range outside micrometer.
Ratchet stop mechanism:
The object of the ratchet stop is to ensure that same level of torque is applied on the spindle while

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measuring and the sense of the feel of operator is eliminated and consistent readings are obtained. By
providing this arrangement, the ratchet stop is made slip off when the torque applied to rotate the spindle
exceeds the set torque. Thus this provision ensures the application of same amount of torque during the
measurement.
Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) (mm)
Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Head scale reading
(HSR x LC) (mm)
Total Reading (PSR
+ HSR) (mm)
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.

Depth micrometer:
Depth micrometer is a sort of micrometer which is mainly used for measuring depth of holes, so it is
named as depth micrometer.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Parts:
1. Shoulder
2. Spindle
3. Spindle lock
4. Barrel or outside sleeve ? It has pitch scale.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions.
6. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.
The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.
15 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count:
Least Count = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale = 0.50/50
= 0.01 mm
Measurements:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

It can be used for measuring the depth of holes, slots and recessed areas. The pitch of the screw thread
is 0.5 mm. The least count is 0.01 mm. Shoulder acts as a reference surface and is held firmly and
perpendicular to the centre line of the hole. For large range of measurement extension rods are used. In the
barrel the scale is calibrated. The accuracy again depends upon the sense of touch.
Procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

First, calculate the least count of the instrument. Check the zero error. Measure the specimen note
down the main scale reading or the head scale reading. Note down the vernier or head scale coincidence with
main or pitch scale divisions.
Tabulation:
Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) (mm)
Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)
Head scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(HSR x LC) (mm)
Total Reading (PSR
+ HSR) (mm)

1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Universal bevel protractor:

Description:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Bevel protractor is an instrument for measuring the angle between the two faces of a specimen. It
consists of a base plate on which a circular scale is engraved. It is graduated in degrees. An adjustment plate
is attached to a circular plate containing the vernier scale. The adjustable blade can be locked in any position.
The circular plate has 360 division divided into four parts of 90 degrees each. The adjustable parts have 24
divisions of to the right and left sides of zero reading. These scales are used according to the position of the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

specimen with respect to movable scale.
Procedure:
1. Place the specimen whose taper is to be measured between the adjustable plate and movable
blade with one of its face parallel to the base.
2. Lock the adjustable plate in position and note down the main scale reading depending upon the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

direction of rotation of adjustable plate in clockwise or anticlockwise.
3. Note the VSC to the right of zero.
4. Multiply the VSC with the least count and add to MSR to obtain the actual reading.
Least count:
Least Count = 2 MSD ? 1 VSD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 MSD = 1
o
24 VSD = 46
o
=> 1 VSD = 23/12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LC = 2 ? 23/12 = 1/12
o
= 5? (five minutes)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:
Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Main scale reading
(MSR) (deg)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(VSR) (deg)
Total reading (MSR +
VSR)
(deg)
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.
The angle of scriber of the vernier height gauge =
Result:
Thus the various precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab are studied and the specimen
dimensions are recorded.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for linear, angular,
roundness and roughness measurements they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring
instrument according to a specific requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).
Application:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Quality Department


1. Define ? Metrology
2. Define ? Inspection

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. What are the needs of inspection in industries?
4. What are the various methods involving the measurement?
5. Define ? Precision
6. Define ? Accuracy
7. Define ? Calibration

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Define ? Repeatability
9. Define ? Magnification
10. Define ? Error
11. Define ? Systematic Error
12. Define ? Random Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. Define ? Parallax Error
14. Define ? Environmental Error
15. Define ? Cosine Error
Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

18 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.02 BUILD UP THE SLIP GAUGE FOR GIVEN DIMENSION
? A STUDY
Aim:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To build up the slip gauge for given dimension
Apparatus required:
1. Slip gauges set
2. Surface plate
3. Soft cloth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diagram:

Description:
Slip gauge are universally accepted standard of length in industry. They are the working standard for
linear dimension. These were invented by a Swedish Engineer, C.E. Johansson. They are used

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. For direct precise measurement where the accuracy of the workpiece demand it.
2. For use with high- magnification comparators to establish the size of the gauge blocks in general
use.
3. Gauge blocks are also used for many other purposes such as checking the accuracy of measuring
instrument or setting up a comparator to a specific dimension, enabling a batch of component to be

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

quickly and accurately checked or indeed in any situation where there is need to refer to standard of
known length these blocks are rectangular.
19 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Most gauge blocks are produced from high grade steel, hardened and established by a heat treatment

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

process to give a high degree of dimensional stability. Gauge blocks are also manufactured from tungsten
carbide which is an extremely hard and wear resistant material. The measuring faces have a lapped finish.
The faces are perfectly flat and parallel to one another with a high degree of accuracy. Each block has an
extremely high dimensional accuracy at 20
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C.
These slip gauge are available in variety of selected sets both in inch units and metric units. Letter ?E? is
used for inch units and ?M? is used for metric standard number of pieces in a set following the letter E or M. For
example EBI refers to a set whose blocks are in metric units and are 83 in number. Each block dimensions is
printed on anyone of its face itself the size of any required standard being made up by combining the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

appropriate number of these different size blocks.
If two gauges are slid and twisted together under pressure they will firmly join together. This process,
known as wringing, is very useful because it enables several gauge blocks to be assembled together to
produce a required size. In fact the success of precision measurement by slip gauges depends on the
phenomenon of wringing.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

First the gauge is oscillated slightly with very light pressure over other gauge so as to detect pressure at
any foreign particles between the surfaces. One gauge is placed perpendicular to other using standard
gauging pressure and rotary motion is applied until the blocks are lined up.
Procedure:
1. Build the given dimension by wringing minimum number of slip gauges.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Note the given dimension and choose the minimum possible slip gauge available in the set so as to
accommodate the last decimal value. The minimum slip gauge value dimension available i.e., 1.12
mm must be chosen followed by 1.5 mm thick gauge block.
3. Follow the above steps to build up the slip gauge of any dimension.
Precautions:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Slip gauges should be handled very carefully placed gently and should never be dropped.
2. Whenever a slip gauge is being removed from the set, its dimensions are noted and must be
replaced into the set at its appropriate place only.
3. Correct procedure must be followed in wringing and also in removing the gauge blocks.
4. They should be cleaned well before use and petroleum jelly is applied after use.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

20 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Range (mm) Increment (mm) No. of pieces

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total = ____________ Pieces
Total length of slip gauge = ________ mm
Given diameter Slip gauges used Obtained dimensions

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Slip gauge set is studied and the given dimensions are building up by wringing minimum number of slip
gauges.
Outcome:
Students will be able to select proper measuring instrument and know requirement of calibration, errors
in measurement etc. They can perform accurate measurements.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Why C.I. is preferred material for surface plates and tables?
2. Why V ? blocks are generally manufactured in pairs?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Why micrometer is required to be tested for accuracy?
4. Define ? Linear Measurement
5. List the linear measuring instrument according to their accuracy.
6. Define ? Least Count
7. What are the uses of vernier depth gauge?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. What are the uses of feeler gauges?
9. What are the uses of straight edge?
10. What are the uses of angle plate?
11. What are the uses of V ? block?
12. What are the uses of combination square?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. What precautions should be taken while using slip gauges?
14. What is wringing?
15. Why the slip gauges are termed as ?End standard?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

22 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.03 THREAD PARAMETERS MEASUREMENT USING
TOOL MAKERS MICROSCOPE
Aim:
To study the tool makers microscope and in the process measure the various dimensions of the given
specimen

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Apparatus required:
1. Tool makers microscope
2. Specimen
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
The tool maker?s microscope is designed for measurement of parts of complex forms; for example,
profile of a tool having external threads. It can also be used for measuring centre to centre distance of the
holes in any plane as well as the coordinates of the outline of a complex template gauge, using the
coordinates measuring system.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

23 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Basically it consists of an optical head which can be adjusted vertically along the ways of supporting
column. The optical head can be clamped at any position by a screw. On the work table (which as a circular
base in which there are graduations) the part to be inspected is placed. The table has a compound slide by

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

means of which the part can be measured. For giving these two movements, there are two micrometer screws
having thimble scales and verniers. At the back of the base light source is arranged that provides horizontal
beam of light, reflected from a mirror by 90 degrees upwards towards the table. The beam of light passes
through the transparent glass plate on which flat plates can be checked are placed. Observations are made
through the eyepiece of the optical head.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. Place the given specimen on the work table and switch on all the three light sources and adjust the
intensity of the light source until a clean image of the cross wires and specimen are seen through
the eyepiece.
2. Coincide one of the two extreme edges between which the measurement has to be taken with

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

vertical or horizontal cross wires and depending upon the other image coincide with the same cross
wires by moving the above device. Note the reading.The difference between the two readings gives
the value of the required measurement.
3. Note the experiment specimen and the readings.
4. Tabulate the different measurements measured from the specimen.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of thread parameters
Magnification =
S.No. Parameters
Magnified value
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Actual value
(mm)
1. Outer diameter (O.D)

2. Internal diameter (I.D)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Pitch

4. Flank angle

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Included angle of the tool was measured using tool maker?s microscope and various dimensions of the
given specimen are measured.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

24 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the various parameters of thread and select proper measuring

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

instrument and know requirement of calibration, errors in measurement etc. They can perform accurate
measurements.
Application:
1. Machine Shop
2. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by tool maker?s microscope?
2. What is the light used in tool maker?s microscope?
3. What are the various characteristics that you would measure in a screw thread?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. What are the instruments that are required for measuring screw thread?
5. Define ? Pitch
6. What are the causes of pitch error?
7. Define ? Flank
8. What are the effects of flank angle error?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. What is progressive error?
10. What is periodic error?
11. What is drunken error?
12. What is erratic error?
13. What are the applications of tool maker?s microscope?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. What are the limitations of tool maker?s microscope?
15. What are the advantages of tool maker?s microscope?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

25 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.04 CALIBRATION OF DIAL GAUGE USING SLIP GAUGE
Aim:
To find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge
Apparatus required:
Dial gauge, magnetic stand, slip gauge, and surface plate

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diagram:

Description:
The dial test indicator is a precision measuring instrument which can convert linear motion into angular
motion by means of transmission mechanics of rack and pinion and can be used to measure linear vibration

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

and errors of shape.
This instrument has the features such as good appearance, compact size, light weight, high precision,
reasonable construction, constant measuring face etc. Rigidity of all parts is excellent. Probe is tipped with
carbide balls. A shock proof mechanism is provided for those with larger measuring range.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

26 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Types of dial indicator:
1. Plunger type
2. Lever type

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Plunger type dial indicator has a resolution counter and each division in main scale is 0.01 mm. In lever
type dial test indicator is replaced by ball type stylus.
Procedure:
1. Fix the dial gauge to the stand rigidly and place the stand on the surface plate.
2. Set the plunger of dial gauge to first touch the upper surface of standard slip gauge and set indicator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

to zero.
3. Raise then the plunger by pulling the screw above the dial scale.
4. Place the standard slip gauge underneath the plunger.
5. Release the plunger and let it to touch the standard slip gauge.
6. Note the reading on the dial scale.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Formulae:
The standard error of dial gauge is calculated by the formula

Tabulation:
S.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Slip gauge reading ?x?
(mm)
Dial gauge reading
(mm)
(x? - x)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2


x? (x? - x)
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2


Result:
Thus the accuracy and standard error of dial gauge is found. The standard error of given dial gauge is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

__________.

27 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Outcome:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Students will be able to check the variation in tolerance during the inspection process of a
machined part, measure the deflection of a beam or ring under laboratory conditions, as well as many
other situations where a small measurement needs to be registered or indicated
Application:
1. Milling Machine

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Analog versus digital/electronic readout


1. What is comparator?
2. What are the types of comparators?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. What is the LC for comparators?
4. What are the applications of comparator?
5. What is meant by plunger?
6. What are the types of dial indicators?
7. Why a revolution counter is not provided in lever type dial test indicator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Draw a line diagram of the operating mechanism of plunger type dial test indicator.
9. Explain the term magnification of a dial indicator.
10. What are the uses of dial test indicator?
11. What are the practical applications of dial test indicator?
12. What precautions should be taken while using dial test indicator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. What are the desirable qualities of a dial test indicator?
14. What are the advantages of dial test indicator?
15. What are the limitations of dial test indicator?
16. Distinguish between comparator and measuring instrument.
17. What are the advantages of electrical comparator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

18. What are the advantages of optical comparator?
19. What are the uses of comparator?
20. What are the advantages and disadvantages of mechanical comparator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

28 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.05 DETERMINATION OF TAPER ANGLE BY SINE BAR
METHOD
Aim:
To measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Apparatus required:
Sine bar, slip gauges, dial gauge with stand, micrometer, surface plate, bevel protractor, vernier caliper
Diagram:

Description:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The sine bar principle uses the ratio of the length of two sides of a right triangle. It may be noted that
devices operating on sine principle are capable of ?self-generation?. The measurement is restricted to 45
o
from
accuracy point of view. Sine bar itself is not a measuring instrument.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Accuracy requirements of sine bar:
1. The axes of the rollers must be parallel to each other and the centre distance L must be precisely
known.
2. The sine bar must be flat and parallel to the plane connecting the axes of the rollers.
3. The rollers must be of identical diameters and must have within a close tolerance.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

29 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Fix the dial gaugeon the magnetic stand and place the magnetic stand on the surface plate.Check
the parallelism of the sine bar.
2. Place the given specimen above the sine bar and place the dial gauge on top of the specimen.
Adjustthe dial gauge for zero deflection.
3. Raise the front end of the sine bar with slip gauges until the work surface is parallel to the datum

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

surface.
4. Check the parallelism using dial gauge.
5. Measure the distance between the centres of the sine bar rollers as ?L? and note the height of the
slip gauge as ?H?.
6. Note the included angle of the specimen.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Formulae:
Sin ? = H/L where ? = Included angle of the specimen
H = Height of slip gauges
L = Distance between the centre of rollers
Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

S.No. L (mm) H (mm) Taper angle ( ?)
1.
2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
The taper angle of the given specimen using sine bar was found to be =
Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for angular measurements
and they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a specific

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).

Application:
1. Flat Surface
2. Granite

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

30 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. List out the various angle measuring instruments.
2. What is the working principles sine bar?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. How is a sine bar used to measure the angle?
4. What is the application of sine bar?
5. What is the material of sine bar?
6. Why sine bar is not preferred to use for measuring angles more than 45
0

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
7. What are the features of sine bar?
8. A 100 mm sine bar is to be set up to an angle of 33
0
, determine the slip gauges needed from 87

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

pieces set.
9. What are the various instruments used for measuring angles?
10. What is sine bar?
11. How sine bar is used for angle measurement?
12. Explain how sine bar is used to measure angle of small size component.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. Explain how sine bar is used to measure angle of large size component.
14. What are the various types of sine bar?
15. What are the limitations of sine bar?
16. What is sine center?
17. What is sine table?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

18. What are the possible sources of errors in angular measurement by sine bar?
19. What are angle gauges?
20. How angle gauges are used for measuring angles?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

31 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.06 DETERMINATION OF GEAR TOOTH THICKNESS
USING GEAR TOOTH VERNIER

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Aim:
To determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen and to draw the graph between the tooth
number and the error in thickness
Apparatus required:
Gear tooth vernier, specimen, surface plate and vernier caliper

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diagram:

Description:
The tooth thickness, in general, is measured at pitch circle since gear tooth thickness varies from the tip
to the base circle of the tooth. This is possible only when there is an arrangement to fix that position for this

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measurement by the gear tooth vernier. It has two vernier scales; one is vertical and other is horizontal.
Procedure:
32 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

1. Measure initially the outside diameter of the given gear specimen by means of a vertical calculation

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

of vernier caliper. Note the number of teeth. Calculate the module (m) using the formula.

M = OD/ (Z+2) where z ? number of teeth
M - Module
2. Calculate the theoretical tooth thickness (t) by t = z * m* sin (90/z).

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Set the vernier scale for the height and tighten.
4. Measure the thickness of each tooth using the horizontal scale. This is measured thickness. It can
be positive or negative.
H = m x [1+ Z/2 (1- Cos 90/Z)]
5. Calculate the error in the tooth thickness i.e,1. measured thickness ? Theoretical thickness

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Draw the graph between the tooth number and the error in thickness.
Tabulation:
Tooth
Number
Measured Thickness

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
Theoretical Thickness (mm)
Error in tooth thickness
(mm)
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
3

Tooth
Number

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MSR
(mm)
VSC

VSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
TR
(mm)
1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3

Graph:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Error



Tooth No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

33 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


Result:
The theoretical experiment value of gear tooth thickness is obtained and graph is drawn between error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

and tooth number in tooth thickness
Theoretical tooth thickness =
Experimental tooth thickness =
Error in tooth thickness =
Outcome:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Students will be able to understand the basic measurement units and able to calibrate various
measuring parameters of the gear.
Application:
1. Gear Component
2. Mining

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Calculate the setting of a gear tooth vernier caliper for a straight spur gear having 40 teeth and
module 4.
2. What is the importance of chordal depth?
3. Define ? Chordal width

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. How is the actual profile of the gear tooth determined?
5. What are the manufacturing errors in gear element?
6. Define ? Addendum
7. Define ? Dedendum
8. Define ? Flank of tooth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. Define ? Pitch
10. Define ? Pitch Circle
11. Define ? Crest of tooth
12. Define ? Root of tooth
13. Define ? Base Circle

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. Define ? Module
15. Define ? Angle of Obliquity


Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

34 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.07 MEASUREMENT OF THREAD PARAMETER USING
FLOATING CARRIAGE MICROMETER

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Aim:
To measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two wire
method
Apparatus required:
1. Floating carriage micrometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Standard wire
3. Given specimen (screw thread)
Diagram:

Description of floating carriage micrometer:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

It consists of three main units. A base casting carries a pair of centres on which threaded work piece is
to be mounted. Another carriage capable of moving towards centre is mounted exactly above. In this carriage
one head with thimble to measure up to 0.002 mm is provided and at the other side of head a fiducial indicator
is provided to indicate zero position.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

35 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. For two wire method, place the standard wire over a thread of the screw at opposite sides.
2. For three wire method, place two standard wires on two successive threads and the third wire
placed opposite sides of the thread.
3. Measure the diameter over wires (M) using floating carriage micrometer.
4. Repeat this procedure at various positions of the screw and take different readings.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Formulae:
1. For best wire size, d = P / 2 Cos (x/2)
Where, P = Pitch
d= wire size
x = angle between two threads

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= 60
o
for metric thread
2. Actual effective diameter, E.A = M ? 3d + 0.866 p
3. Nominal effective diameter, EN = D ? 0.648 p

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Max. wire size = 1.01 p
5. Min. wire size = 0.505 p
6. Best wire size = 0.577 p
M = Diameter over wires
P = Pitch of thread

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

For metric thread:
Actual effective diameter (EA) = M ? 3d + 0.866 p
Where d = actual diameter of wire
Determination of actual and nominal effective diameter of the screw thread:
Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Nominal
Diameter (D)
(mm)
Diameter over
wire ?M?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
Actual eff.
Diameter E.A
(mm)
Nominal eff.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diameter E.N
(mm)
Error in effective
diameter
(E.A ? E.N)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
1.
2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

36 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Result:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thus the actual and nominal effective diameter is measured using three wire method and the error in
effective diameter of screw is determined.
Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for roundness
measurements and they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

specific requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).
Application:
1. Wholse
2. Maxxis Rubber India

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Pitch
2. Define ? Flank Angle
3. What is plug gauge?
4. What is meant by micrometer?
5. What is meant by indicator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. What is best ? size wire?
7. Calculate the diameter of the best wire for an M 20 x 25 screws.
8. What are the different corrections to be applied in the measurement of effective diameter by the
method of wire?
9. What is floating carriage micrometer?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. What are the uses of floating carriage micrometer?
11. What are the methods are used for measuring effective diameter?
12. Define ? Effective Diameter
13. Define ? Major Diameter
14. Define ? Minor Diameter

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15. What are the effects of flank error?
16. Define ? Rake Angle
17. Define ? Pitch Cylinder
18. What are the effects of pitch error?
19. Define ? Pitch Diameter

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

20. What is meant by angle of thread?


Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

37 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.08 MEASUREMENT OF VARIOUS DIMENSIONS USING
COORDINATE MEASURING MACHINE
Aim:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. To study the construction and operation of coordinate measuring machine
2. To measure the specified dimensions of the given component
Instruments used:
Coordinate measuring machine, vernier calipers
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Theory:
A coordinate measuring machine (CMM) is a 3D device for measuring the physical and geometrical
characteristics of an object. This machine may be manually controlled by an operator or it may be computer
controlled. Measurements are defined by a probe attached to the three moving axis of this machine X, Y and Z

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

axes. A coordinate measuring machine (CMM) is also a device used in manufacturing and assembly
processes to test a part or assembly against the design intent. By precisely recording the X, Y and Z
coordinates of the target, points are generated which can be analyzed via regression algorithms for the
construction of features. These points are collected by using a probe that is positioned manually by an
38 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

operator or automatically via direct computer control (DCC). DCC CMMs can be programmed to repeatedly
measure identical parts, thus a CMM is a specialized form of industrial robot.
Parts:
Coordinate measuring machine include three main components:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. The main structures which include three axes of motion.
2. Probing system
3. Data collection and reduction system ? typically includes a machine controller, desktop computer
and application software
Machine description:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. In modern machines, the gantry type superstructure has two legs and is often called a bridge. This
moves freely along the granite table with one leg following a guide rail attached to one side of the
granite table. The opposite leg simply rests on the granite table following the vertical surface
contour.
2. Air bearings are fixed for ensuring friction free travel. Compressed air is forced through a series of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

very small holes in a flat bearing surface to provide a smooth but controlled air cushion on which the
CMM can move in a frictionless manner.
3. The movement of the bridge along the granite table forms one axis of the XY plane. The bridge of
the gantry contains a carriage which traverses between the inside and outside legs and forms the
other X or Y horizontal axis.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. The third axis of movement (Z axis) is provided by the addition of a vertical quill or spindle which
moves up and down through the center of the carriage. The touch probe forms the sensing device
on the end of the quill.
5. The movement of the X, Y and Z axes fully describes the measuring envelope. Some touch probes
are themselves powered rotary devices with the probe tip able to swivel vertically through 90

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

degrees and through a full 360 degrees rotation.
Uses:
They are generally used for:
1. Dimensional measurement
2. Profile measurement

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Angularity or orientation measurement
4. Depth mapping
5. Digitizing mapping
6. Shaft measurement
FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

V SEMESTER - R 2013

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No. : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LABORATORY MANUAL
2 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

DHANALAKSHMI

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
2. To contribute to the promotion of Academic Excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels
3. To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING


Rendering the services to the global needs of engineering industries by educating students to become

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

professionally sound mechanical engineers of excellent caliber


To produce mechanical engineering technocrats with a perfect knowledge intellectual and hands on
experience and to inculcate the spirit of moral values and ethics to serve the society

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MISSION
MISSION
VISION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION

4 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals
To impart students with fundamental knowledge in mathematics and basic sciences that will mould
them to be successful professionals
2. Core competence

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To provide students with sound knowledge in engineering and experimental skills to identify
complex software problems in industry and to develop a practical solution for them
3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theory and practice which
enable them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and organization and to design

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

products requiring interdisciplinary skills
4. Professional skills
To bestow students with adequate training and provide opportunities to work as team that will build
up their communication skills, individual, leadership and supportive qualities and to enable them to
adapt and to work in ever changing technologies

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Life-long learning
To develop the ability of students to establish themselves as professionals in mechanical
engineering and to create awareness about the need for lifelong learning and pursuing advanced
degrees

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)
On completion of the B.E. (Mechanical) degree, the graduate will be able
a) To apply the basic knowledge of mathematics, science and engineering

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

b) To design and conduct experiments as well as to analyze and interpret data and apply the same in
the career or entrepreneurship
c) To design and develop innovative and creative software applications
d) To understand a complex real world problem and develop an efficient practical solution
e) To create, select and apply appropriate techniques, resources, modern engineering and IT tools

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

f) To understand the role as a professional and give the best to the society
g) To develop a system that will meet expected needs within realistic constraints such as economical
environmental, social, political, ethical, safety and sustainability
h) To communicate effectively and make others understand exactly what they are trying to tell in both
verbal and written forms

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

i) To work in a team as a team member or a leader and make unique contributions and work with
coordination
j) To engage in lifelong learning and exhibit their technical skills
k) To develop and manage projects in multidisciplinary environments

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY



To familiar with different measurement equipment?s and use of this industry for quality inspection

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

List of Experiments
1. Tool Maker?s Microscope
2. Comparator
3. Sine Bar
4. Gear Tooth Vernier Caliper

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Floating gauge Micrometer
6. Coordinate Measuring Machine
7. Surface Finish Measuring Equipment
8. Vernier Height Gauge
9. Bore diameter measurement using telescope gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. Bore diameter measurement using micrometer
11. Force Measurement
12. Torque Measurement
13. Temperature measurement
14. Autocollimator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Ability to handle different measurement tools and perform measurements in quality impulsion
2. Learnt the usage of precision measuring instruments and practiced to take measurements
3. Learnt and practiced to build the required dimensions using slip gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Able to measure the various dimensions of the given specimen using the tool maker?s microscope
5. Able to find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge
6. Able to measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare
7. Learnt to determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen using Gear tooth vernier
8. Able to measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

wire method
9. Learnt to study the construction and operation of coordinate measuring machine
10. Learnt to determine the diameter of bore by using telescopic gauge and dial bore indicator
11. Able to measure the surface roughness using Talysurf instrument
12. Studied the characteristic between applied load and the output volt

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. Learnt the characteristics of developing torque and respective sensor output voltage
14. Studied the characteristics of thermocouple without compensation
15. Able to check the straightness & flatness of the given component by using Autocollimator
16. Learnt to measure the displacement using LVDT and to calibrate it with the millimeter scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OBJECTIVES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OUTCOMES

7 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CONTENTS
Sl. No. Name of the Experiments Page No.
CYCLE ? 1 EXPERIMENTS
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab ? A Study
7
2
To build up the slip gauge for given dimension ? A Study
16

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
Thread parameters measurement using Tool Makers Microscope
20
4
Calibration of dial gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

23
5
Determination of taper angle by sine bar method
26
6

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of gear tooth thickness using gear tooth vernier
29
7
Measurement of thread parameters using floating carriage micrometer
32

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CYCLE ? 2 EXPERIMENTS
8
Measurement of various dimensions using Coordinate Measuring Machine
35
9

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement of surface roughness
39
10
Measurement of bores using dial bore indicator and telescopic gauge
42

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11
Force measurement using load cell
46
12
Torque measurement using strain gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

49
13
Temperature measurement using thermocouple
53
14

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement of alignment using autocollimator
56
ADDITIONAL EXPERIMENT BEYOND THE SYLLABUS
15
Thread parameters measurement using profile projector

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

60
16
Displacement measurement ? linear variable differential transducer (LVDT)
62
PROJECT WORK

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

65


8 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.01 PRECISION MEASURING INSTRUMENT YSED IN
METROLOGY LAB ? A STUDY
Aim:
To study the following instruments and their usage for measuring dimensions of given specimen
1. Vernier caliper

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Micrometer
3. Vernier height gauge
4. Depth micrometer
5. Universal bevel protractor
Apparatus required:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Surface plate, specimen and above instruments
Vernier caliper:
The principle of vernier caliper is to use the minor difference between the sizes two scales or divisions
for measurement. The difference between them can be utilized to enhance the accuracy of measurement. The
vernier caliper essentially consists of two steel rules, sliding along each other.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Parts:
Different parts of the vernier caliper are
1. Beam ? It has main scale.
2. Fixed jaw
3. Sliding or Moving jaw ? It has vernier scale and sliding jaw locking screw.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw knife
edges for internal measurement.
5. Stem or depth bar for depth measurement
Least count:
Least count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm
1 VSD = 0.98 mm
Least count = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


ID

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPTH


OD
Measurement:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Given Vernier caliper can be used for external, internal depth, slot and step measurement.
Measurement principle:
When both jaws contact each other scale shows the zero reading. The finer adjustment of movable jaw
can be done by the fine adjustment screw. First the whole movable jaw assembly is adjusted so that the two
measuring tips just touch the part to be measured. Then the fine adjustment clamp locking screw is tightened.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Final adjustment depending upon the sense of correct feel is made by the adjusting screw. After final
adjustment has been made sliding jaw locking screw is also tightened and the reading is noted.
All the parts of the Vernier caliper are made of good quality steel and measuring faces are hardened.
Types of vernier:
Vernier caliper, electronic vernier caliper, vernier depth caliper

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Main scale
reading (MSR)
(mm)
Vernier scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale
reading (VSR) (mm)
Total reading (MSR
+ VSR)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)

OD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ID


Depth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier height gauge:
Vernier height gauge is a sort of vernier caliper equipped with a special instrument suitable for height
measurement. It is always kept on the surface plate and the use of the surfaces plates as datum surfaces is
very essential.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count:
Least Count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm
1 VSD = 0.98 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least Count (LC) = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm
Parts:
1. Base
2. Beam ? It has main scale.
3. Slider ? It has a vernier scale and slider locking screw.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Scriber
5. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw.


12 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Material:
All the parts of vernier are made of good quality steel and the measuring faces hardened.
Types of vernier gauge:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Analog vernier height gauge
2. Digital vernier height gauge
3. Electronic vernier height gauge
Tabulation:
Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Main scale reading
(MSR)(mm)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(VSR)(mm)
Total reading (MSR +
VSR)(mm)
1.
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.

13 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Outside micrometer:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The micrometer essentially consists of an accurate screw having about 10 or 20 threads per cm. The
end of the screw forms one measuring tip and other measuring tip is constituted by a stationary anvil in the
base of the frame. The screw is threaded for certain length and is plain afterwards. The plain portion is called
spindle and its end is the measuring surface. The spindle is advanced or retracted by turning a thimble
connected to a spindle. The spindle is a slide fit over the barrel and barrel is the fixed part attached with the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

frame. The barrel & thimble are graduated. The pitch of the screw threads is 0.5 mm.

Least count:
Least Count (LC) = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale
= 0.5 / 50 = 0.01 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Parts:
1. Frame
2. Anvil
3. Spindle
4. Spindle lock

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Barrel or outside sleeve
6. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions
7. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.
The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.
14 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement:
It can be used for any external measurement.
Types of micrometer:
1. Outside micrometer, 2. Inside micrometer, 3.Depth micrometer, 4. Stick micrometer, 5. Screw thread

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

micrometer, 6. V ? anvil micrometer, 7. Blade type micrometer, 8. Dial micrometer, 9. Bench micrometer, 10.
Tape screw operated internal micrometer, 11. Groove micrometer, 12. Digital micrometer, 13.Differential screw
micrometer, 14.Adjustable range outside micrometer.
Ratchet stop mechanism:
The object of the ratchet stop is to ensure that same level of torque is applied on the spindle while

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measuring and the sense of the feel of operator is eliminated and consistent readings are obtained. By
providing this arrangement, the ratchet stop is made slip off when the torque applied to rotate the spindle
exceeds the set torque. Thus this provision ensures the application of same amount of torque during the
measurement.
Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) (mm)
Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Head scale reading
(HSR x LC) (mm)
Total Reading (PSR
+ HSR) (mm)
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.

Depth micrometer:
Depth micrometer is a sort of micrometer which is mainly used for measuring depth of holes, so it is
named as depth micrometer.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Parts:
1. Shoulder
2. Spindle
3. Spindle lock
4. Barrel or outside sleeve ? It has pitch scale.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions.
6. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.
The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.
15 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count:
Least Count = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale = 0.50/50
= 0.01 mm
Measurements:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

It can be used for measuring the depth of holes, slots and recessed areas. The pitch of the screw thread
is 0.5 mm. The least count is 0.01 mm. Shoulder acts as a reference surface and is held firmly and
perpendicular to the centre line of the hole. For large range of measurement extension rods are used. In the
barrel the scale is calibrated. The accuracy again depends upon the sense of touch.
Procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

First, calculate the least count of the instrument. Check the zero error. Measure the specimen note
down the main scale reading or the head scale reading. Note down the vernier or head scale coincidence with
main or pitch scale divisions.
Tabulation:
Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) (mm)
Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)
Head scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(HSR x LC) (mm)
Total Reading (PSR
+ HSR) (mm)

1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Universal bevel protractor:

Description:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Bevel protractor is an instrument for measuring the angle between the two faces of a specimen. It
consists of a base plate on which a circular scale is engraved. It is graduated in degrees. An adjustment plate
is attached to a circular plate containing the vernier scale. The adjustable blade can be locked in any position.
The circular plate has 360 division divided into four parts of 90 degrees each. The adjustable parts have 24
divisions of to the right and left sides of zero reading. These scales are used according to the position of the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

specimen with respect to movable scale.
Procedure:
1. Place the specimen whose taper is to be measured between the adjustable plate and movable
blade with one of its face parallel to the base.
2. Lock the adjustable plate in position and note down the main scale reading depending upon the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

direction of rotation of adjustable plate in clockwise or anticlockwise.
3. Note the VSC to the right of zero.
4. Multiply the VSC with the least count and add to MSR to obtain the actual reading.
Least count:
Least Count = 2 MSD ? 1 VSD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 MSD = 1
o
24 VSD = 46
o
=> 1 VSD = 23/12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LC = 2 ? 23/12 = 1/12
o
= 5? (five minutes)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:
Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Main scale reading
(MSR) (deg)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(VSR) (deg)
Total reading (MSR +
VSR)
(deg)
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.
The angle of scriber of the vernier height gauge =
Result:
Thus the various precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab are studied and the specimen
dimensions are recorded.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for linear, angular,
roundness and roughness measurements they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring
instrument according to a specific requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).
Application:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Quality Department


1. Define ? Metrology
2. Define ? Inspection

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. What are the needs of inspection in industries?
4. What are the various methods involving the measurement?
5. Define ? Precision
6. Define ? Accuracy
7. Define ? Calibration

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Define ? Repeatability
9. Define ? Magnification
10. Define ? Error
11. Define ? Systematic Error
12. Define ? Random Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. Define ? Parallax Error
14. Define ? Environmental Error
15. Define ? Cosine Error
Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

18 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.02 BUILD UP THE SLIP GAUGE FOR GIVEN DIMENSION
? A STUDY
Aim:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To build up the slip gauge for given dimension
Apparatus required:
1. Slip gauges set
2. Surface plate
3. Soft cloth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diagram:

Description:
Slip gauge are universally accepted standard of length in industry. They are the working standard for
linear dimension. These were invented by a Swedish Engineer, C.E. Johansson. They are used

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. For direct precise measurement where the accuracy of the workpiece demand it.
2. For use with high- magnification comparators to establish the size of the gauge blocks in general
use.
3. Gauge blocks are also used for many other purposes such as checking the accuracy of measuring
instrument or setting up a comparator to a specific dimension, enabling a batch of component to be

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

quickly and accurately checked or indeed in any situation where there is need to refer to standard of
known length these blocks are rectangular.
19 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Most gauge blocks are produced from high grade steel, hardened and established by a heat treatment

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

process to give a high degree of dimensional stability. Gauge blocks are also manufactured from tungsten
carbide which is an extremely hard and wear resistant material. The measuring faces have a lapped finish.
The faces are perfectly flat and parallel to one another with a high degree of accuracy. Each block has an
extremely high dimensional accuracy at 20
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C.
These slip gauge are available in variety of selected sets both in inch units and metric units. Letter ?E? is
used for inch units and ?M? is used for metric standard number of pieces in a set following the letter E or M. For
example EBI refers to a set whose blocks are in metric units and are 83 in number. Each block dimensions is
printed on anyone of its face itself the size of any required standard being made up by combining the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

appropriate number of these different size blocks.
If two gauges are slid and twisted together under pressure they will firmly join together. This process,
known as wringing, is very useful because it enables several gauge blocks to be assembled together to
produce a required size. In fact the success of precision measurement by slip gauges depends on the
phenomenon of wringing.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

First the gauge is oscillated slightly with very light pressure over other gauge so as to detect pressure at
any foreign particles between the surfaces. One gauge is placed perpendicular to other using standard
gauging pressure and rotary motion is applied until the blocks are lined up.
Procedure:
1. Build the given dimension by wringing minimum number of slip gauges.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Note the given dimension and choose the minimum possible slip gauge available in the set so as to
accommodate the last decimal value. The minimum slip gauge value dimension available i.e., 1.12
mm must be chosen followed by 1.5 mm thick gauge block.
3. Follow the above steps to build up the slip gauge of any dimension.
Precautions:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Slip gauges should be handled very carefully placed gently and should never be dropped.
2. Whenever a slip gauge is being removed from the set, its dimensions are noted and must be
replaced into the set at its appropriate place only.
3. Correct procedure must be followed in wringing and also in removing the gauge blocks.
4. They should be cleaned well before use and petroleum jelly is applied after use.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

20 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Range (mm) Increment (mm) No. of pieces

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total = ____________ Pieces
Total length of slip gauge = ________ mm
Given diameter Slip gauges used Obtained dimensions

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Slip gauge set is studied and the given dimensions are building up by wringing minimum number of slip
gauges.
Outcome:
Students will be able to select proper measuring instrument and know requirement of calibration, errors
in measurement etc. They can perform accurate measurements.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Why C.I. is preferred material for surface plates and tables?
2. Why V ? blocks are generally manufactured in pairs?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Why micrometer is required to be tested for accuracy?
4. Define ? Linear Measurement
5. List the linear measuring instrument according to their accuracy.
6. Define ? Least Count
7. What are the uses of vernier depth gauge?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. What are the uses of feeler gauges?
9. What are the uses of straight edge?
10. What are the uses of angle plate?
11. What are the uses of V ? block?
12. What are the uses of combination square?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. What precautions should be taken while using slip gauges?
14. What is wringing?
15. Why the slip gauges are termed as ?End standard?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

22 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.03 THREAD PARAMETERS MEASUREMENT USING
TOOL MAKERS MICROSCOPE
Aim:
To study the tool makers microscope and in the process measure the various dimensions of the given
specimen

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Apparatus required:
1. Tool makers microscope
2. Specimen
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
The tool maker?s microscope is designed for measurement of parts of complex forms; for example,
profile of a tool having external threads. It can also be used for measuring centre to centre distance of the
holes in any plane as well as the coordinates of the outline of a complex template gauge, using the
coordinates measuring system.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

23 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Basically it consists of an optical head which can be adjusted vertically along the ways of supporting
column. The optical head can be clamped at any position by a screw. On the work table (which as a circular
base in which there are graduations) the part to be inspected is placed. The table has a compound slide by

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

means of which the part can be measured. For giving these two movements, there are two micrometer screws
having thimble scales and verniers. At the back of the base light source is arranged that provides horizontal
beam of light, reflected from a mirror by 90 degrees upwards towards the table. The beam of light passes
through the transparent glass plate on which flat plates can be checked are placed. Observations are made
through the eyepiece of the optical head.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. Place the given specimen on the work table and switch on all the three light sources and adjust the
intensity of the light source until a clean image of the cross wires and specimen are seen through
the eyepiece.
2. Coincide one of the two extreme edges between which the measurement has to be taken with

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

vertical or horizontal cross wires and depending upon the other image coincide with the same cross
wires by moving the above device. Note the reading.The difference between the two readings gives
the value of the required measurement.
3. Note the experiment specimen and the readings.
4. Tabulate the different measurements measured from the specimen.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of thread parameters
Magnification =
S.No. Parameters
Magnified value
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Actual value
(mm)
1. Outer diameter (O.D)

2. Internal diameter (I.D)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Pitch

4. Flank angle

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Included angle of the tool was measured using tool maker?s microscope and various dimensions of the
given specimen are measured.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

24 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the various parameters of thread and select proper measuring

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

instrument and know requirement of calibration, errors in measurement etc. They can perform accurate
measurements.
Application:
1. Machine Shop
2. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by tool maker?s microscope?
2. What is the light used in tool maker?s microscope?
3. What are the various characteristics that you would measure in a screw thread?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. What are the instruments that are required for measuring screw thread?
5. Define ? Pitch
6. What are the causes of pitch error?
7. Define ? Flank
8. What are the effects of flank angle error?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. What is progressive error?
10. What is periodic error?
11. What is drunken error?
12. What is erratic error?
13. What are the applications of tool maker?s microscope?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. What are the limitations of tool maker?s microscope?
15. What are the advantages of tool maker?s microscope?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

25 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.04 CALIBRATION OF DIAL GAUGE USING SLIP GAUGE
Aim:
To find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge
Apparatus required:
Dial gauge, magnetic stand, slip gauge, and surface plate

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diagram:

Description:
The dial test indicator is a precision measuring instrument which can convert linear motion into angular
motion by means of transmission mechanics of rack and pinion and can be used to measure linear vibration

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

and errors of shape.
This instrument has the features such as good appearance, compact size, light weight, high precision,
reasonable construction, constant measuring face etc. Rigidity of all parts is excellent. Probe is tipped with
carbide balls. A shock proof mechanism is provided for those with larger measuring range.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

26 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Types of dial indicator:
1. Plunger type
2. Lever type

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Plunger type dial indicator has a resolution counter and each division in main scale is 0.01 mm. In lever
type dial test indicator is replaced by ball type stylus.
Procedure:
1. Fix the dial gauge to the stand rigidly and place the stand on the surface plate.
2. Set the plunger of dial gauge to first touch the upper surface of standard slip gauge and set indicator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

to zero.
3. Raise then the plunger by pulling the screw above the dial scale.
4. Place the standard slip gauge underneath the plunger.
5. Release the plunger and let it to touch the standard slip gauge.
6. Note the reading on the dial scale.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Formulae:
The standard error of dial gauge is calculated by the formula

Tabulation:
S.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Slip gauge reading ?x?
(mm)
Dial gauge reading
(mm)
(x? - x)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2


x? (x? - x)
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2


Result:
Thus the accuracy and standard error of dial gauge is found. The standard error of given dial gauge is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

__________.

27 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Outcome:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Students will be able to check the variation in tolerance during the inspection process of a
machined part, measure the deflection of a beam or ring under laboratory conditions, as well as many
other situations where a small measurement needs to be registered or indicated
Application:
1. Milling Machine

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Analog versus digital/electronic readout


1. What is comparator?
2. What are the types of comparators?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. What is the LC for comparators?
4. What are the applications of comparator?
5. What is meant by plunger?
6. What are the types of dial indicators?
7. Why a revolution counter is not provided in lever type dial test indicator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Draw a line diagram of the operating mechanism of plunger type dial test indicator.
9. Explain the term magnification of a dial indicator.
10. What are the uses of dial test indicator?
11. What are the practical applications of dial test indicator?
12. What precautions should be taken while using dial test indicator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. What are the desirable qualities of a dial test indicator?
14. What are the advantages of dial test indicator?
15. What are the limitations of dial test indicator?
16. Distinguish between comparator and measuring instrument.
17. What are the advantages of electrical comparator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

18. What are the advantages of optical comparator?
19. What are the uses of comparator?
20. What are the advantages and disadvantages of mechanical comparator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

28 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.05 DETERMINATION OF TAPER ANGLE BY SINE BAR
METHOD
Aim:
To measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Apparatus required:
Sine bar, slip gauges, dial gauge with stand, micrometer, surface plate, bevel protractor, vernier caliper
Diagram:

Description:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The sine bar principle uses the ratio of the length of two sides of a right triangle. It may be noted that
devices operating on sine principle are capable of ?self-generation?. The measurement is restricted to 45
o
from
accuracy point of view. Sine bar itself is not a measuring instrument.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Accuracy requirements of sine bar:
1. The axes of the rollers must be parallel to each other and the centre distance L must be precisely
known.
2. The sine bar must be flat and parallel to the plane connecting the axes of the rollers.
3. The rollers must be of identical diameters and must have within a close tolerance.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

29 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Fix the dial gaugeon the magnetic stand and place the magnetic stand on the surface plate.Check
the parallelism of the sine bar.
2. Place the given specimen above the sine bar and place the dial gauge on top of the specimen.
Adjustthe dial gauge for zero deflection.
3. Raise the front end of the sine bar with slip gauges until the work surface is parallel to the datum

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

surface.
4. Check the parallelism using dial gauge.
5. Measure the distance between the centres of the sine bar rollers as ?L? and note the height of the
slip gauge as ?H?.
6. Note the included angle of the specimen.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Formulae:
Sin ? = H/L where ? = Included angle of the specimen
H = Height of slip gauges
L = Distance between the centre of rollers
Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

S.No. L (mm) H (mm) Taper angle ( ?)
1.
2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
The taper angle of the given specimen using sine bar was found to be =
Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for angular measurements
and they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a specific

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).

Application:
1. Flat Surface
2. Granite

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

30 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. List out the various angle measuring instruments.
2. What is the working principles sine bar?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. How is a sine bar used to measure the angle?
4. What is the application of sine bar?
5. What is the material of sine bar?
6. Why sine bar is not preferred to use for measuring angles more than 45
0

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
7. What are the features of sine bar?
8. A 100 mm sine bar is to be set up to an angle of 33
0
, determine the slip gauges needed from 87

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

pieces set.
9. What are the various instruments used for measuring angles?
10. What is sine bar?
11. How sine bar is used for angle measurement?
12. Explain how sine bar is used to measure angle of small size component.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. Explain how sine bar is used to measure angle of large size component.
14. What are the various types of sine bar?
15. What are the limitations of sine bar?
16. What is sine center?
17. What is sine table?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

18. What are the possible sources of errors in angular measurement by sine bar?
19. What are angle gauges?
20. How angle gauges are used for measuring angles?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

31 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.06 DETERMINATION OF GEAR TOOTH THICKNESS
USING GEAR TOOTH VERNIER

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Aim:
To determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen and to draw the graph between the tooth
number and the error in thickness
Apparatus required:
Gear tooth vernier, specimen, surface plate and vernier caliper

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diagram:

Description:
The tooth thickness, in general, is measured at pitch circle since gear tooth thickness varies from the tip
to the base circle of the tooth. This is possible only when there is an arrangement to fix that position for this

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measurement by the gear tooth vernier. It has two vernier scales; one is vertical and other is horizontal.
Procedure:
32 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

1. Measure initially the outside diameter of the given gear specimen by means of a vertical calculation

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

of vernier caliper. Note the number of teeth. Calculate the module (m) using the formula.

M = OD/ (Z+2) where z ? number of teeth
M - Module
2. Calculate the theoretical tooth thickness (t) by t = z * m* sin (90/z).

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Set the vernier scale for the height and tighten.
4. Measure the thickness of each tooth using the horizontal scale. This is measured thickness. It can
be positive or negative.
H = m x [1+ Z/2 (1- Cos 90/Z)]
5. Calculate the error in the tooth thickness i.e,1. measured thickness ? Theoretical thickness

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Draw the graph between the tooth number and the error in thickness.
Tabulation:
Tooth
Number
Measured Thickness

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
Theoretical Thickness (mm)
Error in tooth thickness
(mm)
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
3

Tooth
Number

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MSR
(mm)
VSC

VSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
TR
(mm)
1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3

Graph:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Error



Tooth No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

33 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


Result:
The theoretical experiment value of gear tooth thickness is obtained and graph is drawn between error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

and tooth number in tooth thickness
Theoretical tooth thickness =
Experimental tooth thickness =
Error in tooth thickness =
Outcome:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Students will be able to understand the basic measurement units and able to calibrate various
measuring parameters of the gear.
Application:
1. Gear Component
2. Mining

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Calculate the setting of a gear tooth vernier caliper for a straight spur gear having 40 teeth and
module 4.
2. What is the importance of chordal depth?
3. Define ? Chordal width

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. How is the actual profile of the gear tooth determined?
5. What are the manufacturing errors in gear element?
6. Define ? Addendum
7. Define ? Dedendum
8. Define ? Flank of tooth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. Define ? Pitch
10. Define ? Pitch Circle
11. Define ? Crest of tooth
12. Define ? Root of tooth
13. Define ? Base Circle

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. Define ? Module
15. Define ? Angle of Obliquity


Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

34 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.07 MEASUREMENT OF THREAD PARAMETER USING
FLOATING CARRIAGE MICROMETER

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Aim:
To measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two wire
method
Apparatus required:
1. Floating carriage micrometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Standard wire
3. Given specimen (screw thread)
Diagram:

Description of floating carriage micrometer:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

It consists of three main units. A base casting carries a pair of centres on which threaded work piece is
to be mounted. Another carriage capable of moving towards centre is mounted exactly above. In this carriage
one head with thimble to measure up to 0.002 mm is provided and at the other side of head a fiducial indicator
is provided to indicate zero position.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

35 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. For two wire method, place the standard wire over a thread of the screw at opposite sides.
2. For three wire method, place two standard wires on two successive threads and the third wire
placed opposite sides of the thread.
3. Measure the diameter over wires (M) using floating carriage micrometer.
4. Repeat this procedure at various positions of the screw and take different readings.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Formulae:
1. For best wire size, d = P / 2 Cos (x/2)
Where, P = Pitch
d= wire size
x = angle between two threads

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= 60
o
for metric thread
2. Actual effective diameter, E.A = M ? 3d + 0.866 p
3. Nominal effective diameter, EN = D ? 0.648 p

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Max. wire size = 1.01 p
5. Min. wire size = 0.505 p
6. Best wire size = 0.577 p
M = Diameter over wires
P = Pitch of thread

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

For metric thread:
Actual effective diameter (EA) = M ? 3d + 0.866 p
Where d = actual diameter of wire
Determination of actual and nominal effective diameter of the screw thread:
Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Nominal
Diameter (D)
(mm)
Diameter over
wire ?M?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
Actual eff.
Diameter E.A
(mm)
Nominal eff.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diameter E.N
(mm)
Error in effective
diameter
(E.A ? E.N)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
1.
2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

36 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Result:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thus the actual and nominal effective diameter is measured using three wire method and the error in
effective diameter of screw is determined.
Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for roundness
measurements and they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

specific requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).
Application:
1. Wholse
2. Maxxis Rubber India

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Pitch
2. Define ? Flank Angle
3. What is plug gauge?
4. What is meant by micrometer?
5. What is meant by indicator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. What is best ? size wire?
7. Calculate the diameter of the best wire for an M 20 x 25 screws.
8. What are the different corrections to be applied in the measurement of effective diameter by the
method of wire?
9. What is floating carriage micrometer?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. What are the uses of floating carriage micrometer?
11. What are the methods are used for measuring effective diameter?
12. Define ? Effective Diameter
13. Define ? Major Diameter
14. Define ? Minor Diameter

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15. What are the effects of flank error?
16. Define ? Rake Angle
17. Define ? Pitch Cylinder
18. What are the effects of pitch error?
19. Define ? Pitch Diameter

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

20. What is meant by angle of thread?


Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

37 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.08 MEASUREMENT OF VARIOUS DIMENSIONS USING
COORDINATE MEASURING MACHINE
Aim:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. To study the construction and operation of coordinate measuring machine
2. To measure the specified dimensions of the given component
Instruments used:
Coordinate measuring machine, vernier calipers
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Theory:
A coordinate measuring machine (CMM) is a 3D device for measuring the physical and geometrical
characteristics of an object. This machine may be manually controlled by an operator or it may be computer
controlled. Measurements are defined by a probe attached to the three moving axis of this machine X, Y and Z

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

axes. A coordinate measuring machine (CMM) is also a device used in manufacturing and assembly
processes to test a part or assembly against the design intent. By precisely recording the X, Y and Z
coordinates of the target, points are generated which can be analyzed via regression algorithms for the
construction of features. These points are collected by using a probe that is positioned manually by an
38 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

operator or automatically via direct computer control (DCC). DCC CMMs can be programmed to repeatedly
measure identical parts, thus a CMM is a specialized form of industrial robot.
Parts:
Coordinate measuring machine include three main components:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. The main structures which include three axes of motion.
2. Probing system
3. Data collection and reduction system ? typically includes a machine controller, desktop computer
and application software
Machine description:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. In modern machines, the gantry type superstructure has two legs and is often called a bridge. This
moves freely along the granite table with one leg following a guide rail attached to one side of the
granite table. The opposite leg simply rests on the granite table following the vertical surface
contour.
2. Air bearings are fixed for ensuring friction free travel. Compressed air is forced through a series of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

very small holes in a flat bearing surface to provide a smooth but controlled air cushion on which the
CMM can move in a frictionless manner.
3. The movement of the bridge along the granite table forms one axis of the XY plane. The bridge of
the gantry contains a carriage which traverses between the inside and outside legs and forms the
other X or Y horizontal axis.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. The third axis of movement (Z axis) is provided by the addition of a vertical quill or spindle which
moves up and down through the center of the carriage. The touch probe forms the sensing device
on the end of the quill.
5. The movement of the X, Y and Z axes fully describes the measuring envelope. Some touch probes
are themselves powered rotary devices with the probe tip able to swivel vertically through 90

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

degrees and through a full 360 degrees rotation.
Uses:
They are generally used for:
1. Dimensional measurement
2. Profile measurement

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Angularity or orientation measurement
4. Depth mapping
5. Digitizing mapping
6. Shaft measurement
39 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The machines are available in a wide range of sizes and designs with a variety of different probe
technologies. They can be operated manually or automatically through direct computer control (DCC). They
are offered in various configurations such as bench top, free ? standing, handheld and portable.
Procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Take at least 8 points on sphere ball attached to the granite table.
2. Fix the object whose dimension needs to be measured using the jigs and fixtures.
3. Using joystick, move the probe whose tip is made of ruby slowly and carefully to the surface whose
measurements have to be taken.
4. Touch the probe at two places for measurement of a line (starting and ending point).

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Touch the probe at two places for measurement of a circular profile and for a cylinder touch the
probe at 8 points.
6. Measure the same profiles again with vernier calipers (length of line, circle diameter, cylinder
diameter) to compare the two readings.
Comments:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. The machine should be calibrated every time when it is being used.
2. While measuring the profiles, the probe should be moved very slowly as it may damage the ruby if
hit with a high force.
3. Care should be taken while performing experiment so that the granite table of the machines should
get any scratches.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. ?Retract distance? should be fixed according to the space available in the near vicinity of the profile
measurement area.
Observation:
Sl.No. Feature
CMM reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
Vernier reading
(mm)
Form error
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Difference in two
readings (mm)
1 Circle -1
2 Circle -2
3 Circle -3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4 Line
5 Arc
6
Cone - Diameter
Cone ? Vertex angle

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Cone ? Height
7
Cylinder ? Diameter
Cylinder ? Height

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice
1 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?



DEPARTMENT OF

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MECHANICAL ENGINEERING


ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

V SEMESTER - R 2013

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Register No. : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________


LABORATORY MANUAL

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


3 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DHANALAKSHMI


College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
2. To contribute to the promotion of Academic Excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

DEPARTMENT OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rendering the services to the global needs of engineering industries by educating students to become
professionally sound mechanical engineers of excellent caliber

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To produce mechanical engineering technocrats with a perfect knowledge intellectual and hands on
experience and to inculcate the spirit of moral values and ethics to serve the society

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MISSION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MISSION
VISION

VISION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals
To impart students with fundamental knowledge in mathematics and basic sciences that will mould

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

them to be successful professionals
2. Core competence
To provide students with sound knowledge in engineering and experimental skills to identify
complex software problems in industry and to develop a practical solution for them
3. Breadth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theory and practice which
enable them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and organization and to design
products requiring interdisciplinary skills
4. Professional skills
To bestow students with adequate training and provide opportunities to work as team that will build

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

up their communication skills, individual, leadership and supportive qualities and to enable them to
adapt and to work in ever changing technologies
5. Life-long learning
To develop the ability of students to establish themselves as professionals in mechanical
engineering and to create awareness about the need for lifelong learning and pursuing advanced

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

degrees

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

On completion of the B.E. (Mechanical) degree, the graduate will be able
a) To apply the basic knowledge of mathematics, science and engineering
b) To design and conduct experiments as well as to analyze and interpret data and apply the same in
the career or entrepreneurship
c) To design and develop innovative and creative software applications

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d) To understand a complex real world problem and develop an efficient practical solution
e) To create, select and apply appropriate techniques, resources, modern engineering and IT tools
f) To understand the role as a professional and give the best to the society
g) To develop a system that will meet expected needs within realistic constraints such as economical
environmental, social, political, ethical, safety and sustainability

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

h) To communicate effectively and make others understand exactly what they are trying to tell in both
verbal and written forms
i) To work in a team as a team member or a leader and make unique contributions and work with
coordination
j) To engage in lifelong learning and exhibit their technical skills

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

k) To develop and manage projects in multidisciplinary environments

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To familiar with different measurement equipment?s and use of this industry for quality inspection
List of Experiments
1. Tool Maker?s Microscope
2. Comparator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Sine Bar
4. Gear Tooth Vernier Caliper
5. Floating gauge Micrometer
6. Coordinate Measuring Machine
7. Surface Finish Measuring Equipment

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Vernier Height Gauge
9. Bore diameter measurement using telescope gauge
10. Bore diameter measurement using micrometer
11. Force Measurement
12. Torque Measurement

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. Temperature measurement
14. Autocollimator


1. Ability to handle different measurement tools and perform measurements in quality impulsion

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Learnt the usage of precision measuring instruments and practiced to take measurements
3. Learnt and practiced to build the required dimensions using slip gauge
4. Able to measure the various dimensions of the given specimen using the tool maker?s microscope
5. Able to find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge
6. Able to measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Learnt to determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen using Gear tooth vernier
8. Able to measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two
wire method
9. Learnt to study the construction and operation of coordinate measuring machine
10. Learnt to determine the diameter of bore by using telescopic gauge and dial bore indicator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. Able to measure the surface roughness using Talysurf instrument
12. Studied the characteristic between applied load and the output volt
13. Learnt the characteristics of developing torque and respective sensor output voltage
14. Studied the characteristics of thermocouple without compensation
15. Able to check the straightness & flatness of the given component by using Autocollimator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16. Learnt to measure the displacement using LVDT and to calibrate it with the millimeter scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OBJECTIVES

COURSE OUTCOMES

7 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

CONTENTS
Sl. No. Name of the Experiments Page No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CYCLE ? 1 EXPERIMENTS
1
Precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab ? A Study
7
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To build up the slip gauge for given dimension ? A Study
16
3
Thread parameters measurement using Tool Makers Microscope
20

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4
Calibration of dial gauge
23
5
Determination of taper angle by sine bar method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

26
6
Determination of gear tooth thickness using gear tooth vernier
29
7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement of thread parameters using floating carriage micrometer
32
CYCLE ? 2 EXPERIMENTS
8
Measurement of various dimensions using Coordinate Measuring Machine

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

35
9
Measurement of surface roughness
39
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement of bores using dial bore indicator and telescopic gauge
42
11
Force measurement using load cell
46

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12
Torque measurement using strain gauge
49
13
Temperature measurement using thermocouple

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

53
14
Measurement of alignment using autocollimator
56
ADDITIONAL EXPERIMENT BEYOND THE SYLLABUS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15
Thread parameters measurement using profile projector
60
16
Displacement measurement ? linear variable differential transducer (LVDT)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

62
PROJECT WORK
65

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.01 PRECISION MEASURING INSTRUMENT YSED IN
METROLOGY LAB ? A STUDY
Aim:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To study the following instruments and their usage for measuring dimensions of given specimen
1. Vernier caliper
2. Micrometer
3. Vernier height gauge
4. Depth micrometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Universal bevel protractor
Apparatus required:
Surface plate, specimen and above instruments
Vernier caliper:
The principle of vernier caliper is to use the minor difference between the sizes two scales or divisions

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

for measurement. The difference between them can be utilized to enhance the accuracy of measurement. The
vernier caliper essentially consists of two steel rules, sliding along each other.
Parts:
Different parts of the vernier caliper are
1. Beam ? It has main scale.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Fixed jaw
3. Sliding or Moving jaw ? It has vernier scale and sliding jaw locking screw.
4. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw knife
edges for internal measurement.
5. Stem or depth bar for depth measurement

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count:
Least count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm
1 VSD = 0.98 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm

10 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ID

DEPTH

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OD
Measurement:
Given Vernier caliper can be used for external, internal depth, slot and step measurement.
Measurement principle:
When both jaws contact each other scale shows the zero reading. The finer adjustment of movable jaw

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

can be done by the fine adjustment screw. First the whole movable jaw assembly is adjusted so that the two
measuring tips just touch the part to be measured. Then the fine adjustment clamp locking screw is tightened.
Final adjustment depending upon the sense of correct feel is made by the adjusting screw. After final
adjustment has been made sliding jaw locking screw is also tightened and the reading is noted.
All the parts of the Vernier caliper are made of good quality steel and measuring faces are hardened.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Types of vernier:
Vernier caliper, electronic vernier caliper, vernier depth caliper


11 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:

Main scale
reading (MSR)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale
reading (VSR) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total reading (MSR
+ VSR)
(mm)

OD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ID

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Depth


Vernier height gauge:
Vernier height gauge is a sort of vernier caliper equipped with a special instrument suitable for height

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measurement. It is always kept on the surface plate and the use of the surfaces plates as datum surfaces is
very essential.
Least count:
Least Count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

50 VSD = 49 mm
1 VSD = 0.98 mm
Least Count (LC) = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm
Parts:
1. Base

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Beam ? It has main scale.
3. Slider ? It has a vernier scale and slider locking screw.
4. Scriber
5. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


Material:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

All the parts of vernier are made of good quality steel and the measuring faces hardened.
Types of vernier gauge:
1. Analog vernier height gauge
2. Digital vernier height gauge
3. Electronic vernier height gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Main scale reading
(MSR)(mm)
Vernier scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale reading
(VSR)(mm)
Total reading (MSR +
VSR)(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
2.
3.

13 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outside micrometer:
The micrometer essentially consists of an accurate screw having about 10 or 20 threads per cm. The
end of the screw forms one measuring tip and other measuring tip is constituted by a stationary anvil in the
base of the frame. The screw is threaded for certain length and is plain afterwards. The plain portion is called

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

spindle and its end is the measuring surface. The spindle is advanced or retracted by turning a thimble
connected to a spindle. The spindle is a slide fit over the barrel and barrel is the fixed part attached with the
frame. The barrel & thimble are graduated. The pitch of the screw threads is 0.5 mm.

Least count:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least Count (LC) = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale
= 0.5 / 50 = 0.01 mm
Parts:
1. Frame
2. Anvil

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Spindle
4. Spindle lock
5. Barrel or outside sleeve
6. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions
7. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.
14 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Measurement:
It can be used for any external measurement.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Types of micrometer:
1. Outside micrometer, 2. Inside micrometer, 3.Depth micrometer, 4. Stick micrometer, 5. Screw thread
micrometer, 6. V ? anvil micrometer, 7. Blade type micrometer, 8. Dial micrometer, 9. Bench micrometer, 10.
Tape screw operated internal micrometer, 11. Groove micrometer, 12. Digital micrometer, 13.Differential screw
micrometer, 14.Adjustable range outside micrometer.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Ratchet stop mechanism:
The object of the ratchet stop is to ensure that same level of torque is applied on the spindle while
measuring and the sense of the feel of operator is eliminated and consistent readings are obtained. By
providing this arrangement, the ratchet stop is made slip off when the torque applied to rotate the spindle
exceeds the set torque. Thus this provision ensures the application of same amount of torque during the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measurement.
Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)
Head scale reading
(HSR x LC) (mm)
Total Reading (PSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

+ HSR) (mm)
1.
2.

Depth micrometer:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Depth micrometer is a sort of micrometer which is mainly used for measuring depth of holes, so it is
named as depth micrometer.
Parts:
1. Shoulder
2. Spindle

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Spindle lock
4. Barrel or outside sleeve ? It has pitch scale.
5. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions.
6. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.
The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


Least count:
Least Count = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale = 0.50/50

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= 0.01 mm
Measurements:
It can be used for measuring the depth of holes, slots and recessed areas. The pitch of the screw thread
is 0.5 mm. The least count is 0.01 mm. Shoulder acts as a reference surface and is held firmly and
perpendicular to the centre line of the hole. For large range of measurement extension rods are used. In the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

barrel the scale is calibrated. The accuracy again depends upon the sense of touch.
Procedure:
First, calculate the least count of the instrument. Check the zero error. Measure the specimen note
down the main scale reading or the head scale reading. Note down the vernier or head scale coincidence with
main or pitch scale divisions.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) (mm)
Head Scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Coincidence (HSC)
Head scale reading
(HSR x LC) (mm)
Total Reading (PSR
+ HSR) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.


2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Universal bevel protractor:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
Bevel protractor is an instrument for measuring the angle between the two faces of a specimen. It
consists of a base plate on which a circular scale is engraved. It is graduated in degrees. An adjustment plate
is attached to a circular plate containing the vernier scale. The adjustable blade can be locked in any position.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The circular plate has 360 division divided into four parts of 90 degrees each. The adjustable parts have 24
divisions of to the right and left sides of zero reading. These scales are used according to the position of the
specimen with respect to movable scale.
Procedure:
1. Place the specimen whose taper is to be measured between the adjustable plate and movable

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

blade with one of its face parallel to the base.
2. Lock the adjustable plate in position and note down the main scale reading depending upon the
direction of rotation of adjustable plate in clockwise or anticlockwise.
3. Note the VSC to the right of zero.
4. Multiply the VSC with the least count and add to MSR to obtain the actual reading.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count:
Least Count = 2 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1
o
24 VSD = 46

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
=> 1 VSD = 23/12
LC = 2 ? 23/12 = 1/12
o
= 5? (five minutes)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Main scale reading
(MSR) (deg)
Vernier scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale reading
(VSR) (deg)
Total reading (MSR +
VSR)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(deg)
1.
2.
The angle of scriber of the vernier height gauge =
Result:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thus the various precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab are studied and the specimen
dimensions are recorded.
Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for linear, angular,
roundness and roughness measurements they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

instrument according to a specific requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).
Application:
1. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Metrology
2. Define ? Inspection
3. What are the needs of inspection in industries?
4. What are the various methods involving the measurement?
5. Define ? Precision

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Define ? Accuracy
7. Define ? Calibration
8. Define ? Repeatability
9. Define ? Magnification
10. Define ? Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. Define ? Systematic Error
12. Define ? Random Error
13. Define ? Parallax Error
14. Define ? Environmental Error
15. Define ? Cosine Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

18 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.02 BUILD UP THE SLIP GAUGE FOR GIVEN DIMENSION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? A STUDY
Aim:
To build up the slip gauge for given dimension
Apparatus required:
1. Slip gauges set

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Surface plate
3. Soft cloth
Diagram:

Description:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Slip gauge are universally accepted standard of length in industry. They are the working standard for
linear dimension. These were invented by a Swedish Engineer, C.E. Johansson. They are used
1. For direct precise measurement where the accuracy of the workpiece demand it.
2. For use with high- magnification comparators to establish the size of the gauge blocks in general
use.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Gauge blocks are also used for many other purposes such as checking the accuracy of measuring
instrument or setting up a comparator to a specific dimension, enabling a batch of component to be
quickly and accurately checked or indeed in any situation where there is need to refer to standard of
known length these blocks are rectangular.
19 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Most gauge blocks are produced from high grade steel, hardened and established by a heat treatment
process to give a high degree of dimensional stability. Gauge blocks are also manufactured from tungsten
carbide which is an extremely hard and wear resistant material. The measuring faces have a lapped finish.
The faces are perfectly flat and parallel to one another with a high degree of accuracy. Each block has an

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

extremely high dimensional accuracy at 20
o
C.
These slip gauge are available in variety of selected sets both in inch units and metric units. Letter ?E? is
used for inch units and ?M? is used for metric standard number of pieces in a set following the letter E or M. For

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

example EBI refers to a set whose blocks are in metric units and are 83 in number. Each block dimensions is
printed on anyone of its face itself the size of any required standard being made up by combining the
appropriate number of these different size blocks.
If two gauges are slid and twisted together under pressure they will firmly join together. This process,
known as wringing, is very useful because it enables several gauge blocks to be assembled together to

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

produce a required size. In fact the success of precision measurement by slip gauges depends on the
phenomenon of wringing.
First the gauge is oscillated slightly with very light pressure over other gauge so as to detect pressure at
any foreign particles between the surfaces. One gauge is placed perpendicular to other using standard
gauging pressure and rotary motion is applied until the blocks are lined up.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. Build the given dimension by wringing minimum number of slip gauges.
2. Note the given dimension and choose the minimum possible slip gauge available in the set so as to
accommodate the last decimal value. The minimum slip gauge value dimension available i.e., 1.12
mm must be chosen followed by 1.5 mm thick gauge block.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Follow the above steps to build up the slip gauge of any dimension.
Precautions:
1. Slip gauges should be handled very carefully placed gently and should never be dropped.
2. Whenever a slip gauge is being removed from the set, its dimensions are noted and must be
replaced into the set at its appropriate place only.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Correct procedure must be followed in wringing and also in removing the gauge blocks.
4. They should be cleaned well before use and petroleum jelly is applied after use.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

20 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:
Range (mm) Increment (mm) No. of pieces

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total = ____________ Pieces
Total length of slip gauge = ________ mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Given diameter Slip gauges used Obtained dimensions

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Slip gauge set is studied and the given dimensions are building up by wringing minimum number of slip
gauges.
Outcome:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Students will be able to select proper measuring instrument and know requirement of calibration, errors
in measurement etc. They can perform accurate measurements.
Application:
1. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Why C.I. is preferred material for surface plates and tables?
2. Why V ? blocks are generally manufactured in pairs?
3. Why micrometer is required to be tested for accuracy?
4. Define ? Linear Measurement
5. List the linear measuring instrument according to their accuracy.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Define ? Least Count
7. What are the uses of vernier depth gauge?
8. What are the uses of feeler gauges?
9. What are the uses of straight edge?
10. What are the uses of angle plate?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. What are the uses of V ? block?
12. What are the uses of combination square?
13. What precautions should be taken while using slip gauges?
14. What is wringing?
15. Why the slip gauges are termed as ?End standard?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

22 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.03 THREAD PARAMETERS MEASUREMENT USING
TOOL MAKERS MICROSCOPE
Aim:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To study the tool makers microscope and in the process measure the various dimensions of the given
specimen
Apparatus required:
1. Tool makers microscope
2. Specimen

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diagram:

Description:
The tool maker?s microscope is designed for measurement of parts of complex forms; for example,
profile of a tool having external threads. It can also be used for measuring centre to centre distance of the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

holes in any plane as well as the coordinates of the outline of a complex template gauge, using the
coordinates measuring system.
23 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Basically it consists of an optical head which can be adjusted vertically along the ways of supporting

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

column. The optical head can be clamped at any position by a screw. On the work table (which as a circular
base in which there are graduations) the part to be inspected is placed. The table has a compound slide by
means of which the part can be measured. For giving these two movements, there are two micrometer screws
having thimble scales and verniers. At the back of the base light source is arranged that provides horizontal
beam of light, reflected from a mirror by 90 degrees upwards towards the table. The beam of light passes

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

through the transparent glass plate on which flat plates can be checked are placed. Observations are made
through the eyepiece of the optical head.
Procedure:
1. Place the given specimen on the work table and switch on all the three light sources and adjust the
intensity of the light source until a clean image of the cross wires and specimen are seen through

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the eyepiece.
2. Coincide one of the two extreme edges between which the measurement has to be taken with
vertical or horizontal cross wires and depending upon the other image coincide with the same cross
wires by moving the above device. Note the reading.The difference between the two readings gives
the value of the required measurement.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Note the experiment specimen and the readings.
4. Tabulate the different measurements measured from the specimen.
Determination of thread parameters
Magnification =
S.No. Parameters

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Magnified value
(mm)
Actual value
(mm)
1. Outer diameter (O.D)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Internal diameter (I.D)

3. Pitch

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Flank angle


Result:
Included angle of the tool was measured using tool maker?s microscope and various dimensions of the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

given specimen are measured.


24 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the various parameters of thread and select proper measuring
instrument and know requirement of calibration, errors in measurement etc. They can perform accurate
measurements.
Application:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Machine Shop
2. Quality Department


1. What is meant by tool maker?s microscope?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. What is the light used in tool maker?s microscope?
3. What are the various characteristics that you would measure in a screw thread?
4. What are the instruments that are required for measuring screw thread?
5. Define ? Pitch
6. What are the causes of pitch error?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Define ? Flank
8. What are the effects of flank angle error?
9. What is progressive error?
10. What is periodic error?
11. What is drunken error?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. What is erratic error?
13. What are the applications of tool maker?s microscope?
14. What are the limitations of tool maker?s microscope?
15. What are the advantages of tool maker?s microscope?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

25 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.04 CALIBRATION OF DIAL GAUGE USING SLIP GAUGE
Aim:
To find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Apparatus required:
Dial gauge, magnetic stand, slip gauge, and surface plate
Diagram:

Description:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The dial test indicator is a precision measuring instrument which can convert linear motion into angular
motion by means of transmission mechanics of rack and pinion and can be used to measure linear vibration
and errors of shape.
This instrument has the features such as good appearance, compact size, light weight, high precision,
reasonable construction, constant measuring face etc. Rigidity of all parts is excellent. Probe is tipped with

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

carbide balls. A shock proof mechanism is provided for those with larger measuring range.

26 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Types of dial indicator:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Plunger type
2. Lever type
Plunger type dial indicator has a resolution counter and each division in main scale is 0.01 mm. In lever
type dial test indicator is replaced by ball type stylus.
Procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Fix the dial gauge to the stand rigidly and place the stand on the surface plate.
2. Set the plunger of dial gauge to first touch the upper surface of standard slip gauge and set indicator
to zero.
3. Raise then the plunger by pulling the screw above the dial scale.
4. Place the standard slip gauge underneath the plunger.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Release the plunger and let it to touch the standard slip gauge.
6. Note the reading on the dial scale.
Formulae:
The standard error of dial gauge is calculated by the formula

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
S.No.
Slip gauge reading ?x?
(mm)
Dial gauge reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
(x? - x)
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x? (x? - x)
1.
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Thus the accuracy and standard error of dial gauge is found. The standard error of given dial gauge is
__________.

27 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Students will be able to check the variation in tolerance during the inspection process of a
machined part, measure the deflection of a beam or ring under laboratory conditions, as well as many
other situations where a small measurement needs to be registered or indicated

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Milling Machine
2. Analog versus digital/electronic readout

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is comparator?
2. What are the types of comparators?
3. What is the LC for comparators?
4. What are the applications of comparator?
5. What is meant by plunger?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. What are the types of dial indicators?
7. Why a revolution counter is not provided in lever type dial test indicator?
8. Draw a line diagram of the operating mechanism of plunger type dial test indicator.
9. Explain the term magnification of a dial indicator.
10. What are the uses of dial test indicator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. What are the practical applications of dial test indicator?
12. What precautions should be taken while using dial test indicator?
13. What are the desirable qualities of a dial test indicator?
14. What are the advantages of dial test indicator?
15. What are the limitations of dial test indicator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16. Distinguish between comparator and measuring instrument.
17. What are the advantages of electrical comparator?
18. What are the advantages of optical comparator?
19. What are the uses of comparator?
20. What are the advantages and disadvantages of mechanical comparator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

28 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.05 DETERMINATION OF TAPER ANGLE BY SINE BAR
METHOD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Aim:
To measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare
Apparatus required:
Sine bar, slip gauges, dial gauge with stand, micrometer, surface plate, bevel protractor, vernier caliper
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
The sine bar principle uses the ratio of the length of two sides of a right triangle. It may be noted that
devices operating on sine principle are capable of ?self-generation?. The measurement is restricted to 45
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

from
accuracy point of view. Sine bar itself is not a measuring instrument.
Accuracy requirements of sine bar:
1. The axes of the rollers must be parallel to each other and the centre distance L must be precisely
known.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. The sine bar must be flat and parallel to the plane connecting the axes of the rollers.
3. The rollers must be of identical diameters and must have within a close tolerance.


29 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. Fix the dial gaugeon the magnetic stand and place the magnetic stand on the surface plate.Check
the parallelism of the sine bar.
2. Place the given specimen above the sine bar and place the dial gauge on top of the specimen.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Adjustthe dial gauge for zero deflection.
3. Raise the front end of the sine bar with slip gauges until the work surface is parallel to the datum
surface.
4. Check the parallelism using dial gauge.
5. Measure the distance between the centres of the sine bar rollers as ?L? and note the height of the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

slip gauge as ?H?.
6. Note the included angle of the specimen.
Formulae:
Sin ? = H/L where ? = Included angle of the specimen
H = Height of slip gauges

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

L = Distance between the centre of rollers
Tabulation:
S.No. L (mm) H (mm) Taper angle ( ?)
1.
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.

Result:
The taper angle of the given specimen using sine bar was found to be =
Outcome:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for angular measurements
and they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a specific
requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).

Application:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Flat Surface
2. Granite


30 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. List out the various angle measuring instruments.
2. What is the working principles sine bar?
3. How is a sine bar used to measure the angle?
4. What is the application of sine bar?
5. What is the material of sine bar?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Why sine bar is not preferred to use for measuring angles more than 45
0
?
7. What are the features of sine bar?
8. A 100 mm sine bar is to be set up to an angle of 33

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

0
, determine the slip gauges needed from 87
pieces set.
9. What are the various instruments used for measuring angles?
10. What is sine bar?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. How sine bar is used for angle measurement?
12. Explain how sine bar is used to measure angle of small size component.
13. Explain how sine bar is used to measure angle of large size component.
14. What are the various types of sine bar?
15. What are the limitations of sine bar?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16. What is sine center?
17. What is sine table?
18. What are the possible sources of errors in angular measurement by sine bar?
19. What are angle gauges?
20. How angle gauges are used for measuring angles?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

31 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.06 DETERMINATION OF GEAR TOOTH THICKNESS
USING GEAR TOOTH VERNIER
Aim:
To determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen and to draw the graph between the tooth
number and the error in thickness

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Apparatus required:
Gear tooth vernier, specimen, surface plate and vernier caliper
Diagram:

Description:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The tooth thickness, in general, is measured at pitch circle since gear tooth thickness varies from the tip
to the base circle of the tooth. This is possible only when there is an arrangement to fix that position for this
measurement by the gear tooth vernier. It has two vernier scales; one is vertical and other is horizontal.
Procedure:
32 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Measure initially the outside diameter of the given gear specimen by means of a vertical calculation
of vernier caliper. Note the number of teeth. Calculate the module (m) using the formula.

M = OD/ (Z+2) where z ? number of teeth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M - Module
2. Calculate the theoretical tooth thickness (t) by t = z * m* sin (90/z).
3. Set the vernier scale for the height and tighten.
4. Measure the thickness of each tooth using the horizontal scale. This is measured thickness. It can
be positive or negative.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

H = m x [1+ Z/2 (1- Cos 90/Z)]
5. Calculate the error in the tooth thickness i.e,1. measured thickness ? Theoretical thickness
6. Draw the graph between the tooth number and the error in thickness.
Tabulation:
Tooth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Number
Measured Thickness
(mm)
Theoretical Thickness (mm)
Error in tooth thickness

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
1
2
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tooth
Number
MSR
(mm)
VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSR
(mm)
TR
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1
2
3

Graph:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tooth No.
33 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
The theoretical experiment value of gear tooth thickness is obtained and graph is drawn between error
and tooth number in tooth thickness
Theoretical tooth thickness =
Experimental tooth thickness =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Error in tooth thickness =
Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the basic measurement units and able to calibrate various
measuring parameters of the gear.
Application:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Gear Component
2. Mining

1. Calculate the setting of a gear tooth vernier caliper for a straight spur gear having 40 teeth and
module 4.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. What is the importance of chordal depth?
3. Define ? Chordal width
4. How is the actual profile of the gear tooth determined?
5. What are the manufacturing errors in gear element?
6. Define ? Addendum

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Define ? Dedendum
8. Define ? Flank of tooth
9. Define ? Pitch
10. Define ? Pitch Circle
11. Define ? Crest of tooth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. Define ? Root of tooth
13. Define ? Base Circle
14. Define ? Module
15. Define ? Angle of Obliquity

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

34 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.07 MEASUREMENT OF THREAD PARAMETER USING
FLOATING CARRIAGE MICROMETER
Aim:
To measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two wire
method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Apparatus required:
1. Floating carriage micrometer
2. Standard wire
3. Given specimen (screw thread)
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description of floating carriage micrometer:
It consists of three main units. A base casting carries a pair of centres on which threaded work piece is
to be mounted. Another carriage capable of moving towards centre is mounted exactly above. In this carriage
one head with thimble to measure up to 0.002 mm is provided and at the other side of head a fiducial indicator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

is provided to indicate zero position.



35 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. For two wire method, place the standard wire over a thread of the screw at opposite sides.
2. For three wire method, place two standard wires on two successive threads and the third wire
placed opposite sides of the thread.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Measure the diameter over wires (M) using floating carriage micrometer.
4. Repeat this procedure at various positions of the screw and take different readings.
Formulae:
1. For best wire size, d = P / 2 Cos (x/2)
Where, P = Pitch

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d= wire size
x = angle between two threads
= 60
o
for metric thread

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Actual effective diameter, E.A = M ? 3d + 0.866 p
3. Nominal effective diameter, EN = D ? 0.648 p
4. Max. wire size = 1.01 p
5. Min. wire size = 0.505 p
6. Best wire size = 0.577 p

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M = Diameter over wires
P = Pitch of thread
For metric thread:
Actual effective diameter (EA) = M ? 3d + 0.866 p
Where d = actual diameter of wire

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of actual and nominal effective diameter of the screw thread:
Sl.No.
Nominal
Diameter (D)
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diameter over
wire ?M?
(mm)
Actual eff.
Diameter E.A

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
Nominal eff.
Diameter E.N
(mm)
Error in effective

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

diameter
(E.A ? E.N)
(mm)
1.
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.



36 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Thus the actual and nominal effective diameter is measured using three wire method and the error in
effective diameter of screw is determined.
Outcome:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for roundness
measurements and they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a
specific requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).
Application:
1. Wholse

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Maxxis Rubber India

1. Define ? Pitch
2. Define ? Flank Angle
3. What is plug gauge?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. What is meant by micrometer?
5. What is meant by indicator?
6. What is best ? size wire?
7. Calculate the diameter of the best wire for an M 20 x 25 screws.
8. What are the different corrections to be applied in the measurement of effective diameter by the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

method of wire?
9. What is floating carriage micrometer?
10. What are the uses of floating carriage micrometer?
11. What are the methods are used for measuring effective diameter?
12. Define ? Effective Diameter

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. Define ? Major Diameter
14. Define ? Minor Diameter
15. What are the effects of flank error?
16. Define ? Rake Angle
17. Define ? Pitch Cylinder

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

18. What are the effects of pitch error?
19. Define ? Pitch Diameter
20. What is meant by angle of thread?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

37 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.08 MEASUREMENT OF VARIOUS DIMENSIONS USING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COORDINATE MEASURING MACHINE
Aim:
1. To study the construction and operation of coordinate measuring machine
2. To measure the specified dimensions of the given component
Instruments used:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Coordinate measuring machine, vernier calipers
Diagram:

Theory:
A coordinate measuring machine (CMM) is a 3D device for measuring the physical and geometrical

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

characteristics of an object. This machine may be manually controlled by an operator or it may be computer
controlled. Measurements are defined by a probe attached to the three moving axis of this machine X, Y and Z
axes. A coordinate measuring machine (CMM) is also a device used in manufacturing and assembly
processes to test a part or assembly against the design intent. By precisely recording the X, Y and Z
coordinates of the target, points are generated which can be analyzed via regression algorithms for the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

construction of features. These points are collected by using a probe that is positioned manually by an
38 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

operator or automatically via direct computer control (DCC). DCC CMMs can be programmed to repeatedly
measure identical parts, thus a CMM is a specialized form of industrial robot.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Parts:
Coordinate measuring machine include three main components:
1. The main structures which include three axes of motion.
2. Probing system
3. Data collection and reduction system ? typically includes a machine controller, desktop computer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

and application software
Machine description:
1. In modern machines, the gantry type superstructure has two legs and is often called a bridge. This
moves freely along the granite table with one leg following a guide rail attached to one side of the
granite table. The opposite leg simply rests on the granite table following the vertical surface

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

contour.
2. Air bearings are fixed for ensuring friction free travel. Compressed air is forced through a series of
very small holes in a flat bearing surface to provide a smooth but controlled air cushion on which the
CMM can move in a frictionless manner.
3. The movement of the bridge along the granite table forms one axis of the XY plane. The bridge of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the gantry contains a carriage which traverses between the inside and outside legs and forms the
other X or Y horizontal axis.
4. The third axis of movement (Z axis) is provided by the addition of a vertical quill or spindle which
moves up and down through the center of the carriage. The touch probe forms the sensing device
on the end of the quill.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. The movement of the X, Y and Z axes fully describes the measuring envelope. Some touch probes
are themselves powered rotary devices with the probe tip able to swivel vertically through 90
degrees and through a full 360 degrees rotation.
Uses:
They are generally used for:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Dimensional measurement
2. Profile measurement
3. Angularity or orientation measurement
4. Depth mapping
5. Digitizing mapping

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Shaft measurement
39 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

The machines are available in a wide range of sizes and designs with a variety of different probe
technologies. They can be operated manually or automatically through direct computer control (DCC). They

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

are offered in various configurations such as bench top, free ? standing, handheld and portable.
Procedure:
1. Take at least 8 points on sphere ball attached to the granite table.
2. Fix the object whose dimension needs to be measured using the jigs and fixtures.
3. Using joystick, move the probe whose tip is made of ruby slowly and carefully to the surface whose

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measurements have to be taken.
4. Touch the probe at two places for measurement of a line (starting and ending point).
5. Touch the probe at two places for measurement of a circular profile and for a cylinder touch the
probe at 8 points.
6. Measure the same profiles again with vernier calipers (length of line, circle diameter, cylinder

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

diameter) to compare the two readings.
Comments:
1. The machine should be calibrated every time when it is being used.
2. While measuring the profiles, the probe should be moved very slowly as it may damage the ruby if
hit with a high force.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Care should be taken while performing experiment so that the granite table of the machines should
get any scratches.
4. ?Retract distance? should be fixed according to the space available in the near vicinity of the profile
measurement area.
Observation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No. Feature
CMM reading
(mm)
Vernier reading
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Form error
(mm)
Difference in two
readings (mm)
1 Circle -1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2 Circle -2
3 Circle -3
4 Line
5 Arc
6

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Cone - Diameter
Cone ? Vertex angle
Cone ? Height
7
Cylinder ? Diameter

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Cylinder ? Height


40 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Thus the different profile of given object are measured using coordinate measuring machine
Outcome:
Students will be able to measures the geometry of physical objects by sensing discrete points on the
surface of the object with a probe and they will be able to know the Various types of probes are used in CMMs,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

including mechanical, optical, laser, and white light.
Application:
1. Surface Measuring Equipment
2. Photo transistor

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What are the types of measuring machine?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. What is CMM?
3. What are the types of CMM?
4. What are the advantages of CMM?
5. What are the limitations of CMM?
6. What are the possible sources of error in CMM?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. What is the use of universal measuring machine?
8. What are the applications of CMM?
9. What is the working principle of three axis measuring machine?
10. What is image shearing microscope?
11. What is the use of electronic inspection and measuring machine?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. What are the types of electronic inspection and measuring machine?
13. What is CMM probe?
14. What are the three main probes are available?
15. What are the types of stylus?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice
1 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

V SEMESTER - R 2013

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No. : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Section : _______________________________________


LABORATORY MANUAL
2 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

DHANALAKSHMI

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
2. To contribute to the promotion of Academic Excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels
3. To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

and soul

DEPARTMENT OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rendering the services to the global needs of engineering industries by educating students to become
professionally sound mechanical engineers of excellent caliber


To produce mechanical engineering technocrats with a perfect knowledge intellectual and hands on

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

experience and to inculcate the spirit of moral values and ethics to serve the society

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MISSION
MISSION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION

VISION

4 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals
To impart students with fundamental knowledge in mathematics and basic sciences that will mould
them to be successful professionals

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Core competence
To provide students with sound knowledge in engineering and experimental skills to identify
complex software problems in industry and to develop a practical solution for them
3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theory and practice which

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

enable them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and organization and to design
products requiring interdisciplinary skills
4. Professional skills
To bestow students with adequate training and provide opportunities to work as team that will build
up their communication skills, individual, leadership and supportive qualities and to enable them to

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

adapt and to work in ever changing technologies
5. Life-long learning
To develop the ability of students to establish themselves as professionals in mechanical
engineering and to create awareness about the need for lifelong learning and pursuing advanced
degrees

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)
On completion of the B.E. (Mechanical) degree, the graduate will be able

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

a) To apply the basic knowledge of mathematics, science and engineering
b) To design and conduct experiments as well as to analyze and interpret data and apply the same in
the career or entrepreneurship
c) To design and develop innovative and creative software applications
d) To understand a complex real world problem and develop an efficient practical solution

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

e) To create, select and apply appropriate techniques, resources, modern engineering and IT tools
f) To understand the role as a professional and give the best to the society
g) To develop a system that will meet expected needs within realistic constraints such as economical
environmental, social, political, ethical, safety and sustainability
h) To communicate effectively and make others understand exactly what they are trying to tell in both

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

verbal and written forms
i) To work in a team as a team member or a leader and make unique contributions and work with
coordination
j) To engage in lifelong learning and exhibit their technical skills
k) To develop and manage projects in multidisciplinary environments

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To familiar with different measurement equipment?s and use of this industry for quality inspection
List of Experiments
1. Tool Maker?s Microscope
2. Comparator
3. Sine Bar

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Gear Tooth Vernier Caliper
5. Floating gauge Micrometer
6. Coordinate Measuring Machine
7. Surface Finish Measuring Equipment
8. Vernier Height Gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. Bore diameter measurement using telescope gauge
10. Bore diameter measurement using micrometer
11. Force Measurement
12. Torque Measurement
13. Temperature measurement

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. Autocollimator


1. Ability to handle different measurement tools and perform measurements in quality impulsion
2. Learnt the usage of precision measuring instruments and practiced to take measurements

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Learnt and practiced to build the required dimensions using slip gauge
4. Able to measure the various dimensions of the given specimen using the tool maker?s microscope
5. Able to find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge
6. Able to measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare
7. Learnt to determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen using Gear tooth vernier

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Able to measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two
wire method
9. Learnt to study the construction and operation of coordinate measuring machine
10. Learnt to determine the diameter of bore by using telescopic gauge and dial bore indicator
11. Able to measure the surface roughness using Talysurf instrument

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. Studied the characteristic between applied load and the output volt
13. Learnt the characteristics of developing torque and respective sensor output voltage
14. Studied the characteristics of thermocouple without compensation
15. Able to check the straightness & flatness of the given component by using Autocollimator
16. Learnt to measure the displacement using LVDT and to calibrate it with the millimeter scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OBJECTIVES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OUTCOMES

7 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

CONTENTS
Sl. No. Name of the Experiments Page No.
CYCLE ? 1 EXPERIMENTS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1
Precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab ? A Study
7
2
To build up the slip gauge for given dimension ? A Study

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16
3
Thread parameters measurement using Tool Makers Microscope
20
4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Calibration of dial gauge
23
5
Determination of taper angle by sine bar method
26

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6
Determination of gear tooth thickness using gear tooth vernier
29
7
Measurement of thread parameters using floating carriage micrometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

32
CYCLE ? 2 EXPERIMENTS
8
Measurement of various dimensions using Coordinate Measuring Machine
35

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9
Measurement of surface roughness
39
10
Measurement of bores using dial bore indicator and telescopic gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

42
11
Force measurement using load cell
46
12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Torque measurement using strain gauge
49
13
Temperature measurement using thermocouple
53

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14
Measurement of alignment using autocollimator
56
ADDITIONAL EXPERIMENT BEYOND THE SYLLABUS
15

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thread parameters measurement using profile projector
60
16
Displacement measurement ? linear variable differential transducer (LVDT)
62

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROJECT WORK
65


8 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.01 PRECISION MEASURING INSTRUMENT YSED IN
METROLOGY LAB ? A STUDY
Aim:
To study the following instruments and their usage for measuring dimensions of given specimen

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Vernier caliper
2. Micrometer
3. Vernier height gauge
4. Depth micrometer
5. Universal bevel protractor

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Apparatus required:
Surface plate, specimen and above instruments
Vernier caliper:
The principle of vernier caliper is to use the minor difference between the sizes two scales or divisions
for measurement. The difference between them can be utilized to enhance the accuracy of measurement. The

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

vernier caliper essentially consists of two steel rules, sliding along each other.
Parts:
Different parts of the vernier caliper are
1. Beam ? It has main scale.
2. Fixed jaw

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Sliding or Moving jaw ? It has vernier scale and sliding jaw locking screw.
4. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw knife
edges for internal measurement.
5. Stem or depth bar for depth measurement
Least count:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm
1 VSD = 0.98 mm
Least count = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


ID

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPTH


OD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement:
Given Vernier caliper can be used for external, internal depth, slot and step measurement.
Measurement principle:
When both jaws contact each other scale shows the zero reading. The finer adjustment of movable jaw
can be done by the fine adjustment screw. First the whole movable jaw assembly is adjusted so that the two

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measuring tips just touch the part to be measured. Then the fine adjustment clamp locking screw is tightened.
Final adjustment depending upon the sense of correct feel is made by the adjusting screw. After final
adjustment has been made sliding jaw locking screw is also tightened and the reading is noted.
All the parts of the Vernier caliper are made of good quality steel and measuring faces are hardened.
Types of vernier:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier caliper, electronic vernier caliper, vernier depth caliper


11 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:

Main scale
reading (MSR)
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale
reading (VSR) (mm)
Total reading (MSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

+ VSR)
(mm)

OD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ID


Depth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier height gauge:
Vernier height gauge is a sort of vernier caliper equipped with a special instrument suitable for height
measurement. It is always kept on the surface plate and the use of the surfaces plates as datum surfaces is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

very essential.
Least count:
Least Count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 VSD = 0.98 mm
Least Count (LC) = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm
Parts:
1. Base
2. Beam ? It has main scale.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Slider ? It has a vernier scale and slider locking screw.
4. Scriber
5. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


Material:
All the parts of vernier are made of good quality steel and the measuring faces hardened.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Types of vernier gauge:
1. Analog vernier height gauge
2. Digital vernier height gauge
3. Electronic vernier height gauge
Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
Main scale reading
(MSR)(mm)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier scale reading
(VSR)(mm)
Total reading (MSR +
VSR)(mm)
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.
3.

13 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outside micrometer:
The micrometer essentially consists of an accurate screw having about 10 or 20 threads per cm. The
end of the screw forms one measuring tip and other measuring tip is constituted by a stationary anvil in the
base of the frame. The screw is threaded for certain length and is plain afterwards. The plain portion is called
spindle and its end is the measuring surface. The spindle is advanced or retracted by turning a thimble

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

connected to a spindle. The spindle is a slide fit over the barrel and barrel is the fixed part attached with the
frame. The barrel & thimble are graduated. The pitch of the screw threads is 0.5 mm.

Least count:
Least Count (LC) = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= 0.5 / 50 = 0.01 mm
Parts:
1. Frame
2. Anvil
3. Spindle

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Spindle lock
5. Barrel or outside sleeve
6. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions
7. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.
The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Measurement:
It can be used for any external measurement.
Types of micrometer:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Outside micrometer, 2. Inside micrometer, 3.Depth micrometer, 4. Stick micrometer, 5. Screw thread
micrometer, 6. V ? anvil micrometer, 7. Blade type micrometer, 8. Dial micrometer, 9. Bench micrometer, 10.
Tape screw operated internal micrometer, 11. Groove micrometer, 12. Digital micrometer, 13.Differential screw
micrometer, 14.Adjustable range outside micrometer.
Ratchet stop mechanism:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The object of the ratchet stop is to ensure that same level of torque is applied on the spindle while
measuring and the sense of the feel of operator is eliminated and consistent readings are obtained. By
providing this arrangement, the ratchet stop is made slip off when the torque applied to rotate the spindle
exceeds the set torque. Thus this provision ensures the application of same amount of torque during the
measurement.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) (mm)
Head Scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Coincidence (HSC)
Head scale reading
(HSR x LC) (mm)
Total Reading (PSR
+ HSR) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
2.

Depth micrometer:
Depth micrometer is a sort of micrometer which is mainly used for measuring depth of holes, so it is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

named as depth micrometer.
Parts:
1. Shoulder
2. Spindle
3. Spindle lock

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Barrel or outside sleeve ? It has pitch scale.
5. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions.
6. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.
The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.
15 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count:
Least Count = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale = 0.50/50
= 0.01 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurements:
It can be used for measuring the depth of holes, slots and recessed areas. The pitch of the screw thread
is 0.5 mm. The least count is 0.01 mm. Shoulder acts as a reference surface and is held firmly and
perpendicular to the centre line of the hole. For large range of measurement extension rods are used. In the
barrel the scale is calibrated. The accuracy again depends upon the sense of touch.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
First, calculate the least count of the instrument. Check the zero error. Measure the specimen note
down the main scale reading or the head scale reading. Note down the vernier or head scale coincidence with
main or pitch scale divisions.
Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) (mm)
Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Head scale reading
(HSR x LC) (mm)
Total Reading (PSR
+ HSR) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.


2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Universal bevel protractor:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
Bevel protractor is an instrument for measuring the angle between the two faces of a specimen. It
consists of a base plate on which a circular scale is engraved. It is graduated in degrees. An adjustment plate
is attached to a circular plate containing the vernier scale. The adjustable blade can be locked in any position.
The circular plate has 360 division divided into four parts of 90 degrees each. The adjustable parts have 24

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

divisions of to the right and left sides of zero reading. These scales are used according to the position of the
specimen with respect to movable scale.
Procedure:
1. Place the specimen whose taper is to be measured between the adjustable plate and movable
blade with one of its face parallel to the base.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Lock the adjustable plate in position and note down the main scale reading depending upon the
direction of rotation of adjustable plate in clockwise or anticlockwise.
3. Note the VSC to the right of zero.
4. Multiply the VSC with the least count and add to MSR to obtain the actual reading.
Least count:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least Count = 2 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1
o
24 VSD = 46
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

=> 1 VSD = 23/12
LC = 2 ? 23/12 = 1/12
o
= 5? (five minutes)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
Main scale reading
(MSR) (deg)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier scale reading
(VSR) (deg)
Total reading (MSR +
VSR)
(deg)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
2.
The angle of scriber of the vernier height gauge =
Result:
Thus the various precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab are studied and the specimen

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

dimensions are recorded.
Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for linear, angular,
roundness and roughness measurements they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring
instrument according to a specific requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Quality Department


1. Define ? Metrology

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Define ? Inspection
3. What are the needs of inspection in industries?
4. What are the various methods involving the measurement?
5. Define ? Precision
6. Define ? Accuracy

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Define ? Calibration
8. Define ? Repeatability
9. Define ? Magnification
10. Define ? Error
11. Define ? Systematic Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. Define ? Random Error
13. Define ? Parallax Error
14. Define ? Environmental Error
15. Define ? Cosine Error
Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

18 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.02 BUILD UP THE SLIP GAUGE FOR GIVEN DIMENSION
? A STUDY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Aim:
To build up the slip gauge for given dimension
Apparatus required:
1. Slip gauges set
2. Surface plate

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Soft cloth
Diagram:

Description:
Slip gauge are universally accepted standard of length in industry. They are the working standard for

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

linear dimension. These were invented by a Swedish Engineer, C.E. Johansson. They are used
1. For direct precise measurement where the accuracy of the workpiece demand it.
2. For use with high- magnification comparators to establish the size of the gauge blocks in general
use.
3. Gauge blocks are also used for many other purposes such as checking the accuracy of measuring

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

instrument or setting up a comparator to a specific dimension, enabling a batch of component to be
quickly and accurately checked or indeed in any situation where there is need to refer to standard of
known length these blocks are rectangular.
19 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Most gauge blocks are produced from high grade steel, hardened and established by a heat treatment
process to give a high degree of dimensional stability. Gauge blocks are also manufactured from tungsten
carbide which is an extremely hard and wear resistant material. The measuring faces have a lapped finish.
The faces are perfectly flat and parallel to one another with a high degree of accuracy. Each block has an
extremely high dimensional accuracy at 20

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C.
These slip gauge are available in variety of selected sets both in inch units and metric units. Letter ?E? is
used for inch units and ?M? is used for metric standard number of pieces in a set following the letter E or M. For
example EBI refers to a set whose blocks are in metric units and are 83 in number. Each block dimensions is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

printed on anyone of its face itself the size of any required standard being made up by combining the
appropriate number of these different size blocks.
If two gauges are slid and twisted together under pressure they will firmly join together. This process,
known as wringing, is very useful because it enables several gauge blocks to be assembled together to
produce a required size. In fact the success of precision measurement by slip gauges depends on the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

phenomenon of wringing.
First the gauge is oscillated slightly with very light pressure over other gauge so as to detect pressure at
any foreign particles between the surfaces. One gauge is placed perpendicular to other using standard
gauging pressure and rotary motion is applied until the blocks are lined up.
Procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Build the given dimension by wringing minimum number of slip gauges.
2. Note the given dimension and choose the minimum possible slip gauge available in the set so as to
accommodate the last decimal value. The minimum slip gauge value dimension available i.e., 1.12
mm must be chosen followed by 1.5 mm thick gauge block.
3. Follow the above steps to build up the slip gauge of any dimension.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Precautions:
1. Slip gauges should be handled very carefully placed gently and should never be dropped.
2. Whenever a slip gauge is being removed from the set, its dimensions are noted and must be
replaced into the set at its appropriate place only.
3. Correct procedure must be followed in wringing and also in removing the gauge blocks.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. They should be cleaned well before use and petroleum jelly is applied after use.



20 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Range (mm) Increment (mm) No. of pieces

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total = ____________ Pieces
Total length of slip gauge = ________ mm
Given diameter Slip gauges used Obtained dimensions

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Slip gauge set is studied and the given dimensions are building up by wringing minimum number of slip
gauges.
Outcome:
Students will be able to select proper measuring instrument and know requirement of calibration, errors

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

in measurement etc. They can perform accurate measurements.
Application:
1. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Why C.I. is preferred material for surface plates and tables?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Why V ? blocks are generally manufactured in pairs?
3. Why micrometer is required to be tested for accuracy?
4. Define ? Linear Measurement
5. List the linear measuring instrument according to their accuracy.
6. Define ? Least Count

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. What are the uses of vernier depth gauge?
8. What are the uses of feeler gauges?
9. What are the uses of straight edge?
10. What are the uses of angle plate?
11. What are the uses of V ? block?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. What are the uses of combination square?
13. What precautions should be taken while using slip gauges?
14. What is wringing?
15. Why the slip gauges are termed as ?End standard?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

22 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.03 THREAD PARAMETERS MEASUREMENT USING
TOOL MAKERS MICROSCOPE
Aim:
To study the tool makers microscope and in the process measure the various dimensions of the given

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

specimen
Apparatus required:
1. Tool makers microscope
2. Specimen
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
The tool maker?s microscope is designed for measurement of parts of complex forms; for example,
profile of a tool having external threads. It can also be used for measuring centre to centre distance of the
holes in any plane as well as the coordinates of the outline of a complex template gauge, using the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

coordinates measuring system.
23 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Basically it consists of an optical head which can be adjusted vertically along the ways of supporting
column. The optical head can be clamped at any position by a screw. On the work table (which as a circular

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

base in which there are graduations) the part to be inspected is placed. The table has a compound slide by
means of which the part can be measured. For giving these two movements, there are two micrometer screws
having thimble scales and verniers. At the back of the base light source is arranged that provides horizontal
beam of light, reflected from a mirror by 90 degrees upwards towards the table. The beam of light passes
through the transparent glass plate on which flat plates can be checked are placed. Observations are made

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

through the eyepiece of the optical head.
Procedure:
1. Place the given specimen on the work table and switch on all the three light sources and adjust the
intensity of the light source until a clean image of the cross wires and specimen are seen through
the eyepiece.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Coincide one of the two extreme edges between which the measurement has to be taken with
vertical or horizontal cross wires and depending upon the other image coincide with the same cross
wires by moving the above device. Note the reading.The difference between the two readings gives
the value of the required measurement.
3. Note the experiment specimen and the readings.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Tabulate the different measurements measured from the specimen.
Determination of thread parameters
Magnification =
S.No. Parameters
Magnified value

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
Actual value
(mm)
1. Outer diameter (O.D)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Internal diameter (I.D)

3. Pitch

4. Flank angle

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Included angle of the tool was measured using tool maker?s microscope and various dimensions of the
given specimen are measured.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

24 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Outcome:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Students will be able to understand the various parameters of thread and select proper measuring
instrument and know requirement of calibration, errors in measurement etc. They can perform accurate
measurements.
Application:
1. Machine Shop

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Quality Department


1. What is meant by tool maker?s microscope?
2. What is the light used in tool maker?s microscope?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. What are the various characteristics that you would measure in a screw thread?
4. What are the instruments that are required for measuring screw thread?
5. Define ? Pitch
6. What are the causes of pitch error?
7. Define ? Flank

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. What are the effects of flank angle error?
9. What is progressive error?
10. What is periodic error?
11. What is drunken error?
12. What is erratic error?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. What are the applications of tool maker?s microscope?
14. What are the limitations of tool maker?s microscope?
15. What are the advantages of tool maker?s microscope?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

25 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.04 CALIBRATION OF DIAL GAUGE USING SLIP GAUGE
Aim:
To find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge
Apparatus required:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Dial gauge, magnetic stand, slip gauge, and surface plate
Diagram:

Description:
The dial test indicator is a precision measuring instrument which can convert linear motion into angular

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

motion by means of transmission mechanics of rack and pinion and can be used to measure linear vibration
and errors of shape.
This instrument has the features such as good appearance, compact size, light weight, high precision,
reasonable construction, constant measuring face etc. Rigidity of all parts is excellent. Probe is tipped with
carbide balls. A shock proof mechanism is provided for those with larger measuring range.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

26 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Types of dial indicator:
1. Plunger type

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Lever type
Plunger type dial indicator has a resolution counter and each division in main scale is 0.01 mm. In lever
type dial test indicator is replaced by ball type stylus.
Procedure:
1. Fix the dial gauge to the stand rigidly and place the stand on the surface plate.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Set the plunger of dial gauge to first touch the upper surface of standard slip gauge and set indicator
to zero.
3. Raise then the plunger by pulling the screw above the dial scale.
4. Place the standard slip gauge underneath the plunger.
5. Release the plunger and let it to touch the standard slip gauge.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Note the reading on the dial scale.
Formulae:
The standard error of dial gauge is calculated by the formula

Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

S.No.
Slip gauge reading ?x?
(mm)
Dial gauge reading
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x? - x)
2


x? (x? - x)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
2


Result:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thus the accuracy and standard error of dial gauge is found. The standard error of given dial gauge is
__________.

27 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Students will be able to check the variation in tolerance during the inspection process of a
machined part, measure the deflection of a beam or ring under laboratory conditions, as well as many
other situations where a small measurement needs to be registered or indicated
Application:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Milling Machine
2. Analog versus digital/electronic readout


1. What is comparator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. What are the types of comparators?
3. What is the LC for comparators?
4. What are the applications of comparator?
5. What is meant by plunger?
6. What are the types of dial indicators?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Why a revolution counter is not provided in lever type dial test indicator?
8. Draw a line diagram of the operating mechanism of plunger type dial test indicator.
9. Explain the term magnification of a dial indicator.
10. What are the uses of dial test indicator?
11. What are the practical applications of dial test indicator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. What precautions should be taken while using dial test indicator?
13. What are the desirable qualities of a dial test indicator?
14. What are the advantages of dial test indicator?
15. What are the limitations of dial test indicator?
16. Distinguish between comparator and measuring instrument.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17. What are the advantages of electrical comparator?
18. What are the advantages of optical comparator?
19. What are the uses of comparator?
20. What are the advantages and disadvantages of mechanical comparator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

28 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.05 DETERMINATION OF TAPER ANGLE BY SINE BAR
METHOD
Aim:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare
Apparatus required:
Sine bar, slip gauges, dial gauge with stand, micrometer, surface plate, bevel protractor, vernier caliper
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
The sine bar principle uses the ratio of the length of two sides of a right triangle. It may be noted that
devices operating on sine principle are capable of ?self-generation?. The measurement is restricted to 45
o
from

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

accuracy point of view. Sine bar itself is not a measuring instrument.
Accuracy requirements of sine bar:
1. The axes of the rollers must be parallel to each other and the centre distance L must be precisely
known.
2. The sine bar must be flat and parallel to the plane connecting the axes of the rollers.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. The rollers must be of identical diameters and must have within a close tolerance.


29 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. Fix the dial gaugeon the magnetic stand and place the magnetic stand on the surface plate.Check
the parallelism of the sine bar.
2. Place the given specimen above the sine bar and place the dial gauge on top of the specimen.
Adjustthe dial gauge for zero deflection.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Raise the front end of the sine bar with slip gauges until the work surface is parallel to the datum
surface.
4. Check the parallelism using dial gauge.
5. Measure the distance between the centres of the sine bar rollers as ?L? and note the height of the
slip gauge as ?H?.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Note the included angle of the specimen.
Formulae:
Sin ? = H/L where ? = Included angle of the specimen
H = Height of slip gauges
L = Distance between the centre of rollers

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
S.No. L (mm) H (mm) Taper angle ( ?)
1.
2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
The taper angle of the given specimen using sine bar was found to be =
Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for angular measurements

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

and they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a specific
requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).

Application:
1. Flat Surface

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Granite


30 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. List out the various angle measuring instruments.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. What is the working principles sine bar?
3. How is a sine bar used to measure the angle?
4. What is the application of sine bar?
5. What is the material of sine bar?
6. Why sine bar is not preferred to use for measuring angles more than 45

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

0
?
7. What are the features of sine bar?
8. A 100 mm sine bar is to be set up to an angle of 33
0

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

, determine the slip gauges needed from 87
pieces set.
9. What are the various instruments used for measuring angles?
10. What is sine bar?
11. How sine bar is used for angle measurement?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. Explain how sine bar is used to measure angle of small size component.
13. Explain how sine bar is used to measure angle of large size component.
14. What are the various types of sine bar?
15. What are the limitations of sine bar?
16. What is sine center?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17. What is sine table?
18. What are the possible sources of errors in angular measurement by sine bar?
19. What are angle gauges?
20. How angle gauges are used for measuring angles?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

31 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00



Expt.No.06 DETERMINATION OF GEAR TOOTH THICKNESS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

USING GEAR TOOTH VERNIER
Aim:
To determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen and to draw the graph between the tooth
number and the error in thickness
Apparatus required:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Gear tooth vernier, specimen, surface plate and vernier caliper
Diagram:

Description:
The tooth thickness, in general, is measured at pitch circle since gear tooth thickness varies from the tip

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

to the base circle of the tooth. This is possible only when there is an arrangement to fix that position for this
measurement by the gear tooth vernier. It has two vernier scales; one is vertical and other is horizontal.
Procedure:
32 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Measure initially the outside diameter of the given gear specimen by means of a vertical calculation
of vernier caliper. Note the number of teeth. Calculate the module (m) using the formula.

M = OD/ (Z+2) where z ? number of teeth
M - Module

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Calculate the theoretical tooth thickness (t) by t = z * m* sin (90/z).
3. Set the vernier scale for the height and tighten.
4. Measure the thickness of each tooth using the horizontal scale. This is measured thickness. It can
be positive or negative.
H = m x [1+ Z/2 (1- Cos 90/Z)]

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Calculate the error in the tooth thickness i.e,1. measured thickness ? Theoretical thickness
6. Draw the graph between the tooth number and the error in thickness.
Tabulation:
Tooth
Number

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measured Thickness
(mm)
Theoretical Thickness (mm)
Error in tooth thickness
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1
2
3

Tooth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Number
MSR
(mm)
VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSR
(mm)
TR
(mm)
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
3

Graph:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tooth No.
33 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


Result:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The theoretical experiment value of gear tooth thickness is obtained and graph is drawn between error
and tooth number in tooth thickness
Theoretical tooth thickness =
Experimental tooth thickness =
Error in tooth thickness =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the basic measurement units and able to calibrate various
measuring parameters of the gear.
Application:
1. Gear Component

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Mining

1. Calculate the setting of a gear tooth vernier caliper for a straight spur gear having 40 teeth and
module 4.
2. What is the importance of chordal depth?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Define ? Chordal width
4. How is the actual profile of the gear tooth determined?
5. What are the manufacturing errors in gear element?
6. Define ? Addendum
7. Define ? Dedendum

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Define ? Flank of tooth
9. Define ? Pitch
10. Define ? Pitch Circle
11. Define ? Crest of tooth
12. Define ? Root of tooth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. Define ? Base Circle
14. Define ? Module
15. Define ? Angle of Obliquity

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

34 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.07 MEASUREMENT OF THREAD PARAMETER USING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FLOATING CARRIAGE MICROMETER
Aim:
To measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two wire
method
Apparatus required:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Floating carriage micrometer
2. Standard wire
3. Given specimen (screw thread)
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description of floating carriage micrometer:
It consists of three main units. A base casting carries a pair of centres on which threaded work piece is
to be mounted. Another carriage capable of moving towards centre is mounted exactly above. In this carriage
one head with thimble to measure up to 0.002 mm is provided and at the other side of head a fiducial indicator
is provided to indicate zero position.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

35 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. For two wire method, place the standard wire over a thread of the screw at opposite sides.
2. For three wire method, place two standard wires on two successive threads and the third wire
placed opposite sides of the thread.
3. Measure the diameter over wires (M) using floating carriage micrometer.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Repeat this procedure at various positions of the screw and take different readings.
Formulae:
1. For best wire size, d = P / 2 Cos (x/2)
Where, P = Pitch
d= wire size

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x = angle between two threads
= 60
o
for metric thread
2. Actual effective diameter, E.A = M ? 3d + 0.866 p

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Nominal effective diameter, EN = D ? 0.648 p
4. Max. wire size = 1.01 p
5. Min. wire size = 0.505 p
6. Best wire size = 0.577 p
M = Diameter over wires

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

P = Pitch of thread
For metric thread:
Actual effective diameter (EA) = M ? 3d + 0.866 p
Where d = actual diameter of wire
Determination of actual and nominal effective diameter of the screw thread:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
Nominal
Diameter (D)
(mm)
Diameter over

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

wire ?M?
(mm)
Actual eff.
Diameter E.A
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Nominal eff.
Diameter E.N
(mm)
Error in effective
diameter

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(E.A ? E.N)
(mm)
1.
2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

36 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Thus the actual and nominal effective diameter is measured using three wire method and the error in
effective diameter of screw is determined.
Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for roundness

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measurements and they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a
specific requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).
Application:
1. Wholse
2. Maxxis Rubber India

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Pitch
2. Define ? Flank Angle
3. What is plug gauge?
4. What is meant by micrometer?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. What is meant by indicator?
6. What is best ? size wire?
7. Calculate the diameter of the best wire for an M 20 x 25 screws.
8. What are the different corrections to be applied in the measurement of effective diameter by the
method of wire?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. What is floating carriage micrometer?
10. What are the uses of floating carriage micrometer?
11. What are the methods are used for measuring effective diameter?
12. Define ? Effective Diameter
13. Define ? Major Diameter

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. Define ? Minor Diameter
15. What are the effects of flank error?
16. Define ? Rake Angle
17. Define ? Pitch Cylinder
18. What are the effects of pitch error?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

19. Define ? Pitch Diameter
20. What is meant by angle of thread?


Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

37 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.08 MEASUREMENT OF VARIOUS DIMENSIONS USING
COORDINATE MEASURING MACHINE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Aim:
1. To study the construction and operation of coordinate measuring machine
2. To measure the specified dimensions of the given component
Instruments used:
Coordinate measuring machine, vernier calipers

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diagram:

Theory:
A coordinate measuring machine (CMM) is a 3D device for measuring the physical and geometrical
characteristics of an object. This machine may be manually controlled by an operator or it may be computer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

controlled. Measurements are defined by a probe attached to the three moving axis of this machine X, Y and Z
axes. A coordinate measuring machine (CMM) is also a device used in manufacturing and assembly
processes to test a part or assembly against the design intent. By precisely recording the X, Y and Z
coordinates of the target, points are generated which can be analyzed via regression algorithms for the
construction of features. These points are collected by using a probe that is positioned manually by an

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

38 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

operator or automatically via direct computer control (DCC). DCC CMMs can be programmed to repeatedly
measure identical parts, thus a CMM is a specialized form of industrial robot.
Parts:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Coordinate measuring machine include three main components:
1. The main structures which include three axes of motion.
2. Probing system
3. Data collection and reduction system ? typically includes a machine controller, desktop computer
and application software

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Machine description:
1. In modern machines, the gantry type superstructure has two legs and is often called a bridge. This
moves freely along the granite table with one leg following a guide rail attached to one side of the
granite table. The opposite leg simply rests on the granite table following the vertical surface
contour.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Air bearings are fixed for ensuring friction free travel. Compressed air is forced through a series of
very small holes in a flat bearing surface to provide a smooth but controlled air cushion on which the
CMM can move in a frictionless manner.
3. The movement of the bridge along the granite table forms one axis of the XY plane. The bridge of
the gantry contains a carriage which traverses between the inside and outside legs and forms the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

other X or Y horizontal axis.
4. The third axis of movement (Z axis) is provided by the addition of a vertical quill or spindle which
moves up and down through the center of the carriage. The touch probe forms the sensing device
on the end of the quill.
5. The movement of the X, Y and Z axes fully describes the measuring envelope. Some touch probes

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

are themselves powered rotary devices with the probe tip able to swivel vertically through 90
degrees and through a full 360 degrees rotation.
Uses:
They are generally used for:
1. Dimensional measurement

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Profile measurement
3. Angularity or orientation measurement
4. Depth mapping
5. Digitizing mapping
6. Shaft measurement

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

39 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

The machines are available in a wide range of sizes and designs with a variety of different probe
technologies. They can be operated manually or automatically through direct computer control (DCC). They
are offered in various configurations such as bench top, free ? standing, handheld and portable.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. Take at least 8 points on sphere ball attached to the granite table.
2. Fix the object whose dimension needs to be measured using the jigs and fixtures.
3. Using joystick, move the probe whose tip is made of ruby slowly and carefully to the surface whose
measurements have to be taken.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Touch the probe at two places for measurement of a line (starting and ending point).
5. Touch the probe at two places for measurement of a circular profile and for a cylinder touch the
probe at 8 points.
6. Measure the same profiles again with vernier calipers (length of line, circle diameter, cylinder
diameter) to compare the two readings.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Comments:
1. The machine should be calibrated every time when it is being used.
2. While measuring the profiles, the probe should be moved very slowly as it may damage the ruby if
hit with a high force.
3. Care should be taken while performing experiment so that the granite table of the machines should

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

get any scratches.
4. ?Retract distance? should be fixed according to the space available in the near vicinity of the profile
measurement area.
Observation:
Sl.No. Feature

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CMM reading
(mm)
Vernier reading
(mm)
Form error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
Difference in two
readings (mm)
1 Circle -1
2 Circle -2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3 Circle -3
4 Line
5 Arc
6
Cone - Diameter

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Cone ? Vertex angle
Cone ? Height
7
Cylinder ? Diameter
Cylinder ? Height

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

40 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Result:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thus the different profile of given object are measured using coordinate measuring machine
Outcome:
Students will be able to measures the geometry of physical objects by sensing discrete points on the
surface of the object with a probe and they will be able to know the Various types of probes are used in CMMs,
including mechanical, optical, laser, and white light.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Surface Measuring Equipment
2. Photo transistor

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What are the types of measuring machine?
2. What is CMM?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. What are the types of CMM?
4. What are the advantages of CMM?
5. What are the limitations of CMM?
6. What are the possible sources of error in CMM?
7. What is the use of universal measuring machine?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. What are the applications of CMM?
9. What is the working principle of three axis measuring machine?
10. What is image shearing microscope?
11. What is the use of electronic inspection and measuring machine?
12. What are the types of electronic inspection and measuring machine?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. What is CMM probe?
14. What are the three main probes are available?
15. What are the types of stylus?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

41 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.09 MEASUREMENT OF SURFACE ROUGHNESS UING
TALYSURF INSTRUMENT
Aim:
To measure the surface roughness using Talysurf instrument

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Apparatus required:
Talysurf instrument, work piece, surface plate
Diagram:

Theory:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

On any finished surface, imperfections are bound to be there and these take the form of a succession of
hills and valleys which vary both in height and in spacing and result in a kind of texture which in appearance or
feel is often characteristic of the machining process and accompanying defects. The several kinds of
departures are there on the surface and these are due to various causes.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice
1 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

V SEMESTER - R 2013

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No. : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Section : _______________________________________


LABORATORY MANUAL
2 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

DHANALAKSHMI

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
2. To contribute to the promotion of Academic Excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels
3. To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

and soul

DEPARTMENT OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rendering the services to the global needs of engineering industries by educating students to become
professionally sound mechanical engineers of excellent caliber


To produce mechanical engineering technocrats with a perfect knowledge intellectual and hands on

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

experience and to inculcate the spirit of moral values and ethics to serve the society

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MISSION
MISSION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION

VISION

4 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals
To impart students with fundamental knowledge in mathematics and basic sciences that will mould
them to be successful professionals

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Core competence
To provide students with sound knowledge in engineering and experimental skills to identify
complex software problems in industry and to develop a practical solution for them
3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theory and practice which

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

enable them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and organization and to design
products requiring interdisciplinary skills
4. Professional skills
To bestow students with adequate training and provide opportunities to work as team that will build
up their communication skills, individual, leadership and supportive qualities and to enable them to

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

adapt and to work in ever changing technologies
5. Life-long learning
To develop the ability of students to establish themselves as professionals in mechanical
engineering and to create awareness about the need for lifelong learning and pursuing advanced
degrees

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)
On completion of the B.E. (Mechanical) degree, the graduate will be able

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

a) To apply the basic knowledge of mathematics, science and engineering
b) To design and conduct experiments as well as to analyze and interpret data and apply the same in
the career or entrepreneurship
c) To design and develop innovative and creative software applications
d) To understand a complex real world problem and develop an efficient practical solution

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

e) To create, select and apply appropriate techniques, resources, modern engineering and IT tools
f) To understand the role as a professional and give the best to the society
g) To develop a system that will meet expected needs within realistic constraints such as economical
environmental, social, political, ethical, safety and sustainability
h) To communicate effectively and make others understand exactly what they are trying to tell in both

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

verbal and written forms
i) To work in a team as a team member or a leader and make unique contributions and work with
coordination
j) To engage in lifelong learning and exhibit their technical skills
k) To develop and manage projects in multidisciplinary environments

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To familiar with different measurement equipment?s and use of this industry for quality inspection
List of Experiments
1. Tool Maker?s Microscope
2. Comparator
3. Sine Bar

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Gear Tooth Vernier Caliper
5. Floating gauge Micrometer
6. Coordinate Measuring Machine
7. Surface Finish Measuring Equipment
8. Vernier Height Gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. Bore diameter measurement using telescope gauge
10. Bore diameter measurement using micrometer
11. Force Measurement
12. Torque Measurement
13. Temperature measurement

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. Autocollimator


1. Ability to handle different measurement tools and perform measurements in quality impulsion
2. Learnt the usage of precision measuring instruments and practiced to take measurements

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Learnt and practiced to build the required dimensions using slip gauge
4. Able to measure the various dimensions of the given specimen using the tool maker?s microscope
5. Able to find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge
6. Able to measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare
7. Learnt to determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen using Gear tooth vernier

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Able to measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two
wire method
9. Learnt to study the construction and operation of coordinate measuring machine
10. Learnt to determine the diameter of bore by using telescopic gauge and dial bore indicator
11. Able to measure the surface roughness using Talysurf instrument

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. Studied the characteristic between applied load and the output volt
13. Learnt the characteristics of developing torque and respective sensor output voltage
14. Studied the characteristics of thermocouple without compensation
15. Able to check the straightness & flatness of the given component by using Autocollimator
16. Learnt to measure the displacement using LVDT and to calibrate it with the millimeter scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OBJECTIVES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OUTCOMES

7 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

CONTENTS
Sl. No. Name of the Experiments Page No.
CYCLE ? 1 EXPERIMENTS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1
Precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab ? A Study
7
2
To build up the slip gauge for given dimension ? A Study

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16
3
Thread parameters measurement using Tool Makers Microscope
20
4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Calibration of dial gauge
23
5
Determination of taper angle by sine bar method
26

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6
Determination of gear tooth thickness using gear tooth vernier
29
7
Measurement of thread parameters using floating carriage micrometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

32
CYCLE ? 2 EXPERIMENTS
8
Measurement of various dimensions using Coordinate Measuring Machine
35

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9
Measurement of surface roughness
39
10
Measurement of bores using dial bore indicator and telescopic gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

42
11
Force measurement using load cell
46
12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Torque measurement using strain gauge
49
13
Temperature measurement using thermocouple
53

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14
Measurement of alignment using autocollimator
56
ADDITIONAL EXPERIMENT BEYOND THE SYLLABUS
15

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thread parameters measurement using profile projector
60
16
Displacement measurement ? linear variable differential transducer (LVDT)
62

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROJECT WORK
65


8 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.01 PRECISION MEASURING INSTRUMENT YSED IN
METROLOGY LAB ? A STUDY
Aim:
To study the following instruments and their usage for measuring dimensions of given specimen

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Vernier caliper
2. Micrometer
3. Vernier height gauge
4. Depth micrometer
5. Universal bevel protractor

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Apparatus required:
Surface plate, specimen and above instruments
Vernier caliper:
The principle of vernier caliper is to use the minor difference between the sizes two scales or divisions
for measurement. The difference between them can be utilized to enhance the accuracy of measurement. The

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

vernier caliper essentially consists of two steel rules, sliding along each other.
Parts:
Different parts of the vernier caliper are
1. Beam ? It has main scale.
2. Fixed jaw

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Sliding or Moving jaw ? It has vernier scale and sliding jaw locking screw.
4. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw knife
edges for internal measurement.
5. Stem or depth bar for depth measurement
Least count:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm
1 VSD = 0.98 mm
Least count = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


ID

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPTH


OD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement:
Given Vernier caliper can be used for external, internal depth, slot and step measurement.
Measurement principle:
When both jaws contact each other scale shows the zero reading. The finer adjustment of movable jaw
can be done by the fine adjustment screw. First the whole movable jaw assembly is adjusted so that the two

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measuring tips just touch the part to be measured. Then the fine adjustment clamp locking screw is tightened.
Final adjustment depending upon the sense of correct feel is made by the adjusting screw. After final
adjustment has been made sliding jaw locking screw is also tightened and the reading is noted.
All the parts of the Vernier caliper are made of good quality steel and measuring faces are hardened.
Types of vernier:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier caliper, electronic vernier caliper, vernier depth caliper


11 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:

Main scale
reading (MSR)
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale
reading (VSR) (mm)
Total reading (MSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

+ VSR)
(mm)

OD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ID


Depth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier height gauge:
Vernier height gauge is a sort of vernier caliper equipped with a special instrument suitable for height
measurement. It is always kept on the surface plate and the use of the surfaces plates as datum surfaces is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

very essential.
Least count:
Least Count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 VSD = 0.98 mm
Least Count (LC) = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm
Parts:
1. Base
2. Beam ? It has main scale.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Slider ? It has a vernier scale and slider locking screw.
4. Scriber
5. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


Material:
All the parts of vernier are made of good quality steel and the measuring faces hardened.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Types of vernier gauge:
1. Analog vernier height gauge
2. Digital vernier height gauge
3. Electronic vernier height gauge
Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
Main scale reading
(MSR)(mm)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier scale reading
(VSR)(mm)
Total reading (MSR +
VSR)(mm)
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.
3.

13 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outside micrometer:
The micrometer essentially consists of an accurate screw having about 10 or 20 threads per cm. The
end of the screw forms one measuring tip and other measuring tip is constituted by a stationary anvil in the
base of the frame. The screw is threaded for certain length and is plain afterwards. The plain portion is called
spindle and its end is the measuring surface. The spindle is advanced or retracted by turning a thimble

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

connected to a spindle. The spindle is a slide fit over the barrel and barrel is the fixed part attached with the
frame. The barrel & thimble are graduated. The pitch of the screw threads is 0.5 mm.

Least count:
Least Count (LC) = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= 0.5 / 50 = 0.01 mm
Parts:
1. Frame
2. Anvil
3. Spindle

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Spindle lock
5. Barrel or outside sleeve
6. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions
7. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.
The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Measurement:
It can be used for any external measurement.
Types of micrometer:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Outside micrometer, 2. Inside micrometer, 3.Depth micrometer, 4. Stick micrometer, 5. Screw thread
micrometer, 6. V ? anvil micrometer, 7. Blade type micrometer, 8. Dial micrometer, 9. Bench micrometer, 10.
Tape screw operated internal micrometer, 11. Groove micrometer, 12. Digital micrometer, 13.Differential screw
micrometer, 14.Adjustable range outside micrometer.
Ratchet stop mechanism:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The object of the ratchet stop is to ensure that same level of torque is applied on the spindle while
measuring and the sense of the feel of operator is eliminated and consistent readings are obtained. By
providing this arrangement, the ratchet stop is made slip off when the torque applied to rotate the spindle
exceeds the set torque. Thus this provision ensures the application of same amount of torque during the
measurement.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) (mm)
Head Scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Coincidence (HSC)
Head scale reading
(HSR x LC) (mm)
Total Reading (PSR
+ HSR) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
2.

Depth micrometer:
Depth micrometer is a sort of micrometer which is mainly used for measuring depth of holes, so it is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

named as depth micrometer.
Parts:
1. Shoulder
2. Spindle
3. Spindle lock

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Barrel or outside sleeve ? It has pitch scale.
5. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions.
6. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.
The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.
15 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count:
Least Count = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale = 0.50/50
= 0.01 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurements:
It can be used for measuring the depth of holes, slots and recessed areas. The pitch of the screw thread
is 0.5 mm. The least count is 0.01 mm. Shoulder acts as a reference surface and is held firmly and
perpendicular to the centre line of the hole. For large range of measurement extension rods are used. In the
barrel the scale is calibrated. The accuracy again depends upon the sense of touch.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
First, calculate the least count of the instrument. Check the zero error. Measure the specimen note
down the main scale reading or the head scale reading. Note down the vernier or head scale coincidence with
main or pitch scale divisions.
Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) (mm)
Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Head scale reading
(HSR x LC) (mm)
Total Reading (PSR
+ HSR) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.


2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Universal bevel protractor:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
Bevel protractor is an instrument for measuring the angle between the two faces of a specimen. It
consists of a base plate on which a circular scale is engraved. It is graduated in degrees. An adjustment plate
is attached to a circular plate containing the vernier scale. The adjustable blade can be locked in any position.
The circular plate has 360 division divided into four parts of 90 degrees each. The adjustable parts have 24

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

divisions of to the right and left sides of zero reading. These scales are used according to the position of the
specimen with respect to movable scale.
Procedure:
1. Place the specimen whose taper is to be measured between the adjustable plate and movable
blade with one of its face parallel to the base.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Lock the adjustable plate in position and note down the main scale reading depending upon the
direction of rotation of adjustable plate in clockwise or anticlockwise.
3. Note the VSC to the right of zero.
4. Multiply the VSC with the least count and add to MSR to obtain the actual reading.
Least count:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least Count = 2 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1
o
24 VSD = 46
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

=> 1 VSD = 23/12
LC = 2 ? 23/12 = 1/12
o
= 5? (five minutes)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
Main scale reading
(MSR) (deg)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier scale reading
(VSR) (deg)
Total reading (MSR +
VSR)
(deg)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
2.
The angle of scriber of the vernier height gauge =
Result:
Thus the various precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab are studied and the specimen

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

dimensions are recorded.
Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for linear, angular,
roundness and roughness measurements they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring
instrument according to a specific requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Quality Department


1. Define ? Metrology

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Define ? Inspection
3. What are the needs of inspection in industries?
4. What are the various methods involving the measurement?
5. Define ? Precision
6. Define ? Accuracy

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Define ? Calibration
8. Define ? Repeatability
9. Define ? Magnification
10. Define ? Error
11. Define ? Systematic Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. Define ? Random Error
13. Define ? Parallax Error
14. Define ? Environmental Error
15. Define ? Cosine Error
Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

18 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.02 BUILD UP THE SLIP GAUGE FOR GIVEN DIMENSION
? A STUDY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Aim:
To build up the slip gauge for given dimension
Apparatus required:
1. Slip gauges set
2. Surface plate

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Soft cloth
Diagram:

Description:
Slip gauge are universally accepted standard of length in industry. They are the working standard for

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

linear dimension. These were invented by a Swedish Engineer, C.E. Johansson. They are used
1. For direct precise measurement where the accuracy of the workpiece demand it.
2. For use with high- magnification comparators to establish the size of the gauge blocks in general
use.
3. Gauge blocks are also used for many other purposes such as checking the accuracy of measuring

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

instrument or setting up a comparator to a specific dimension, enabling a batch of component to be
quickly and accurately checked or indeed in any situation where there is need to refer to standard of
known length these blocks are rectangular.
19 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Most gauge blocks are produced from high grade steel, hardened and established by a heat treatment
process to give a high degree of dimensional stability. Gauge blocks are also manufactured from tungsten
carbide which is an extremely hard and wear resistant material. The measuring faces have a lapped finish.
The faces are perfectly flat and parallel to one another with a high degree of accuracy. Each block has an
extremely high dimensional accuracy at 20

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C.
These slip gauge are available in variety of selected sets both in inch units and metric units. Letter ?E? is
used for inch units and ?M? is used for metric standard number of pieces in a set following the letter E or M. For
example EBI refers to a set whose blocks are in metric units and are 83 in number. Each block dimensions is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

printed on anyone of its face itself the size of any required standard being made up by combining the
appropriate number of these different size blocks.
If two gauges are slid and twisted together under pressure they will firmly join together. This process,
known as wringing, is very useful because it enables several gauge blocks to be assembled together to
produce a required size. In fact the success of precision measurement by slip gauges depends on the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

phenomenon of wringing.
First the gauge is oscillated slightly with very light pressure over other gauge so as to detect pressure at
any foreign particles between the surfaces. One gauge is placed perpendicular to other using standard
gauging pressure and rotary motion is applied until the blocks are lined up.
Procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Build the given dimension by wringing minimum number of slip gauges.
2. Note the given dimension and choose the minimum possible slip gauge available in the set so as to
accommodate the last decimal value. The minimum slip gauge value dimension available i.e., 1.12
mm must be chosen followed by 1.5 mm thick gauge block.
3. Follow the above steps to build up the slip gauge of any dimension.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Precautions:
1. Slip gauges should be handled very carefully placed gently and should never be dropped.
2. Whenever a slip gauge is being removed from the set, its dimensions are noted and must be
replaced into the set at its appropriate place only.
3. Correct procedure must be followed in wringing and also in removing the gauge blocks.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. They should be cleaned well before use and petroleum jelly is applied after use.



20 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Range (mm) Increment (mm) No. of pieces

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total = ____________ Pieces
Total length of slip gauge = ________ mm
Given diameter Slip gauges used Obtained dimensions

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Slip gauge set is studied and the given dimensions are building up by wringing minimum number of slip
gauges.
Outcome:
Students will be able to select proper measuring instrument and know requirement of calibration, errors

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

in measurement etc. They can perform accurate measurements.
Application:
1. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Why C.I. is preferred material for surface plates and tables?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Why V ? blocks are generally manufactured in pairs?
3. Why micrometer is required to be tested for accuracy?
4. Define ? Linear Measurement
5. List the linear measuring instrument according to their accuracy.
6. Define ? Least Count

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. What are the uses of vernier depth gauge?
8. What are the uses of feeler gauges?
9. What are the uses of straight edge?
10. What are the uses of angle plate?
11. What are the uses of V ? block?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. What are the uses of combination square?
13. What precautions should be taken while using slip gauges?
14. What is wringing?
15. Why the slip gauges are termed as ?End standard?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

22 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.03 THREAD PARAMETERS MEASUREMENT USING
TOOL MAKERS MICROSCOPE
Aim:
To study the tool makers microscope and in the process measure the various dimensions of the given

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

specimen
Apparatus required:
1. Tool makers microscope
2. Specimen
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
The tool maker?s microscope is designed for measurement of parts of complex forms; for example,
profile of a tool having external threads. It can also be used for measuring centre to centre distance of the
holes in any plane as well as the coordinates of the outline of a complex template gauge, using the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

coordinates measuring system.
23 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Basically it consists of an optical head which can be adjusted vertically along the ways of supporting
column. The optical head can be clamped at any position by a screw. On the work table (which as a circular

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

base in which there are graduations) the part to be inspected is placed. The table has a compound slide by
means of which the part can be measured. For giving these two movements, there are two micrometer screws
having thimble scales and verniers. At the back of the base light source is arranged that provides horizontal
beam of light, reflected from a mirror by 90 degrees upwards towards the table. The beam of light passes
through the transparent glass plate on which flat plates can be checked are placed. Observations are made

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

through the eyepiece of the optical head.
Procedure:
1. Place the given specimen on the work table and switch on all the three light sources and adjust the
intensity of the light source until a clean image of the cross wires and specimen are seen through
the eyepiece.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Coincide one of the two extreme edges between which the measurement has to be taken with
vertical or horizontal cross wires and depending upon the other image coincide with the same cross
wires by moving the above device. Note the reading.The difference between the two readings gives
the value of the required measurement.
3. Note the experiment specimen and the readings.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Tabulate the different measurements measured from the specimen.
Determination of thread parameters
Magnification =
S.No. Parameters
Magnified value

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
Actual value
(mm)
1. Outer diameter (O.D)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Internal diameter (I.D)

3. Pitch

4. Flank angle

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Included angle of the tool was measured using tool maker?s microscope and various dimensions of the
given specimen are measured.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

24 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Outcome:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Students will be able to understand the various parameters of thread and select proper measuring
instrument and know requirement of calibration, errors in measurement etc. They can perform accurate
measurements.
Application:
1. Machine Shop

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Quality Department


1. What is meant by tool maker?s microscope?
2. What is the light used in tool maker?s microscope?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. What are the various characteristics that you would measure in a screw thread?
4. What are the instruments that are required for measuring screw thread?
5. Define ? Pitch
6. What are the causes of pitch error?
7. Define ? Flank

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. What are the effects of flank angle error?
9. What is progressive error?
10. What is periodic error?
11. What is drunken error?
12. What is erratic error?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. What are the applications of tool maker?s microscope?
14. What are the limitations of tool maker?s microscope?
15. What are the advantages of tool maker?s microscope?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

25 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.04 CALIBRATION OF DIAL GAUGE USING SLIP GAUGE
Aim:
To find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge
Apparatus required:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Dial gauge, magnetic stand, slip gauge, and surface plate
Diagram:

Description:
The dial test indicator is a precision measuring instrument which can convert linear motion into angular

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

motion by means of transmission mechanics of rack and pinion and can be used to measure linear vibration
and errors of shape.
This instrument has the features such as good appearance, compact size, light weight, high precision,
reasonable construction, constant measuring face etc. Rigidity of all parts is excellent. Probe is tipped with
carbide balls. A shock proof mechanism is provided for those with larger measuring range.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

26 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Types of dial indicator:
1. Plunger type

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Lever type
Plunger type dial indicator has a resolution counter and each division in main scale is 0.01 mm. In lever
type dial test indicator is replaced by ball type stylus.
Procedure:
1. Fix the dial gauge to the stand rigidly and place the stand on the surface plate.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Set the plunger of dial gauge to first touch the upper surface of standard slip gauge and set indicator
to zero.
3. Raise then the plunger by pulling the screw above the dial scale.
4. Place the standard slip gauge underneath the plunger.
5. Release the plunger and let it to touch the standard slip gauge.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Note the reading on the dial scale.
Formulae:
The standard error of dial gauge is calculated by the formula

Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

S.No.
Slip gauge reading ?x?
(mm)
Dial gauge reading
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x? - x)
2


x? (x? - x)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
2


Result:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thus the accuracy and standard error of dial gauge is found. The standard error of given dial gauge is
__________.

27 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Students will be able to check the variation in tolerance during the inspection process of a
machined part, measure the deflection of a beam or ring under laboratory conditions, as well as many
other situations where a small measurement needs to be registered or indicated
Application:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Milling Machine
2. Analog versus digital/electronic readout


1. What is comparator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. What are the types of comparators?
3. What is the LC for comparators?
4. What are the applications of comparator?
5. What is meant by plunger?
6. What are the types of dial indicators?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Why a revolution counter is not provided in lever type dial test indicator?
8. Draw a line diagram of the operating mechanism of plunger type dial test indicator.
9. Explain the term magnification of a dial indicator.
10. What are the uses of dial test indicator?
11. What are the practical applications of dial test indicator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. What precautions should be taken while using dial test indicator?
13. What are the desirable qualities of a dial test indicator?
14. What are the advantages of dial test indicator?
15. What are the limitations of dial test indicator?
16. Distinguish between comparator and measuring instrument.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17. What are the advantages of electrical comparator?
18. What are the advantages of optical comparator?
19. What are the uses of comparator?
20. What are the advantages and disadvantages of mechanical comparator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

28 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.05 DETERMINATION OF TAPER ANGLE BY SINE BAR
METHOD
Aim:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare
Apparatus required:
Sine bar, slip gauges, dial gauge with stand, micrometer, surface plate, bevel protractor, vernier caliper
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
The sine bar principle uses the ratio of the length of two sides of a right triangle. It may be noted that
devices operating on sine principle are capable of ?self-generation?. The measurement is restricted to 45
o
from

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

accuracy point of view. Sine bar itself is not a measuring instrument.
Accuracy requirements of sine bar:
1. The axes of the rollers must be parallel to each other and the centre distance L must be precisely
known.
2. The sine bar must be flat and parallel to the plane connecting the axes of the rollers.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. The rollers must be of identical diameters and must have within a close tolerance.


29 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. Fix the dial gaugeon the magnetic stand and place the magnetic stand on the surface plate.Check
the parallelism of the sine bar.
2. Place the given specimen above the sine bar and place the dial gauge on top of the specimen.
Adjustthe dial gauge for zero deflection.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Raise the front end of the sine bar with slip gauges until the work surface is parallel to the datum
surface.
4. Check the parallelism using dial gauge.
5. Measure the distance between the centres of the sine bar rollers as ?L? and note the height of the
slip gauge as ?H?.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Note the included angle of the specimen.
Formulae:
Sin ? = H/L where ? = Included angle of the specimen
H = Height of slip gauges
L = Distance between the centre of rollers

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
S.No. L (mm) H (mm) Taper angle ( ?)
1.
2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
The taper angle of the given specimen using sine bar was found to be =
Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for angular measurements

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

and they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a specific
requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).

Application:
1. Flat Surface

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Granite


30 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. List out the various angle measuring instruments.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. What is the working principles sine bar?
3. How is a sine bar used to measure the angle?
4. What is the application of sine bar?
5. What is the material of sine bar?
6. Why sine bar is not preferred to use for measuring angles more than 45

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

0
?
7. What are the features of sine bar?
8. A 100 mm sine bar is to be set up to an angle of 33
0

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

, determine the slip gauges needed from 87
pieces set.
9. What are the various instruments used for measuring angles?
10. What is sine bar?
11. How sine bar is used for angle measurement?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. Explain how sine bar is used to measure angle of small size component.
13. Explain how sine bar is used to measure angle of large size component.
14. What are the various types of sine bar?
15. What are the limitations of sine bar?
16. What is sine center?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17. What is sine table?
18. What are the possible sources of errors in angular measurement by sine bar?
19. What are angle gauges?
20. How angle gauges are used for measuring angles?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

31 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00



Expt.No.06 DETERMINATION OF GEAR TOOTH THICKNESS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

USING GEAR TOOTH VERNIER
Aim:
To determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen and to draw the graph between the tooth
number and the error in thickness
Apparatus required:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Gear tooth vernier, specimen, surface plate and vernier caliper
Diagram:

Description:
The tooth thickness, in general, is measured at pitch circle since gear tooth thickness varies from the tip

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

to the base circle of the tooth. This is possible only when there is an arrangement to fix that position for this
measurement by the gear tooth vernier. It has two vernier scales; one is vertical and other is horizontal.
Procedure:
32 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Measure initially the outside diameter of the given gear specimen by means of a vertical calculation
of vernier caliper. Note the number of teeth. Calculate the module (m) using the formula.

M = OD/ (Z+2) where z ? number of teeth
M - Module

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Calculate the theoretical tooth thickness (t) by t = z * m* sin (90/z).
3. Set the vernier scale for the height and tighten.
4. Measure the thickness of each tooth using the horizontal scale. This is measured thickness. It can
be positive or negative.
H = m x [1+ Z/2 (1- Cos 90/Z)]

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Calculate the error in the tooth thickness i.e,1. measured thickness ? Theoretical thickness
6. Draw the graph between the tooth number and the error in thickness.
Tabulation:
Tooth
Number

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measured Thickness
(mm)
Theoretical Thickness (mm)
Error in tooth thickness
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1
2
3

Tooth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Number
MSR
(mm)
VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSR
(mm)
TR
(mm)
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
3

Graph:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tooth No.
33 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


Result:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The theoretical experiment value of gear tooth thickness is obtained and graph is drawn between error
and tooth number in tooth thickness
Theoretical tooth thickness =
Experimental tooth thickness =
Error in tooth thickness =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the basic measurement units and able to calibrate various
measuring parameters of the gear.
Application:
1. Gear Component

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Mining

1. Calculate the setting of a gear tooth vernier caliper for a straight spur gear having 40 teeth and
module 4.
2. What is the importance of chordal depth?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Define ? Chordal width
4. How is the actual profile of the gear tooth determined?
5. What are the manufacturing errors in gear element?
6. Define ? Addendum
7. Define ? Dedendum

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Define ? Flank of tooth
9. Define ? Pitch
10. Define ? Pitch Circle
11. Define ? Crest of tooth
12. Define ? Root of tooth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. Define ? Base Circle
14. Define ? Module
15. Define ? Angle of Obliquity

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

34 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.07 MEASUREMENT OF THREAD PARAMETER USING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FLOATING CARRIAGE MICROMETER
Aim:
To measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two wire
method
Apparatus required:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Floating carriage micrometer
2. Standard wire
3. Given specimen (screw thread)
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description of floating carriage micrometer:
It consists of three main units. A base casting carries a pair of centres on which threaded work piece is
to be mounted. Another carriage capable of moving towards centre is mounted exactly above. In this carriage
one head with thimble to measure up to 0.002 mm is provided and at the other side of head a fiducial indicator
is provided to indicate zero position.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

35 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. For two wire method, place the standard wire over a thread of the screw at opposite sides.
2. For three wire method, place two standard wires on two successive threads and the third wire
placed opposite sides of the thread.
3. Measure the diameter over wires (M) using floating carriage micrometer.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Repeat this procedure at various positions of the screw and take different readings.
Formulae:
1. For best wire size, d = P / 2 Cos (x/2)
Where, P = Pitch
d= wire size

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x = angle between two threads
= 60
o
for metric thread
2. Actual effective diameter, E.A = M ? 3d + 0.866 p

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Nominal effective diameter, EN = D ? 0.648 p
4. Max. wire size = 1.01 p
5. Min. wire size = 0.505 p
6. Best wire size = 0.577 p
M = Diameter over wires

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

P = Pitch of thread
For metric thread:
Actual effective diameter (EA) = M ? 3d + 0.866 p
Where d = actual diameter of wire
Determination of actual and nominal effective diameter of the screw thread:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
Nominal
Diameter (D)
(mm)
Diameter over

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

wire ?M?
(mm)
Actual eff.
Diameter E.A
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Nominal eff.
Diameter E.N
(mm)
Error in effective
diameter

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(E.A ? E.N)
(mm)
1.
2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

36 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Thus the actual and nominal effective diameter is measured using three wire method and the error in
effective diameter of screw is determined.
Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for roundness

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measurements and they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a
specific requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).
Application:
1. Wholse
2. Maxxis Rubber India

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Pitch
2. Define ? Flank Angle
3. What is plug gauge?
4. What is meant by micrometer?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. What is meant by indicator?
6. What is best ? size wire?
7. Calculate the diameter of the best wire for an M 20 x 25 screws.
8. What are the different corrections to be applied in the measurement of effective diameter by the
method of wire?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. What is floating carriage micrometer?
10. What are the uses of floating carriage micrometer?
11. What are the methods are used for measuring effective diameter?
12. Define ? Effective Diameter
13. Define ? Major Diameter

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. Define ? Minor Diameter
15. What are the effects of flank error?
16. Define ? Rake Angle
17. Define ? Pitch Cylinder
18. What are the effects of pitch error?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

19. Define ? Pitch Diameter
20. What is meant by angle of thread?


Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

37 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.08 MEASUREMENT OF VARIOUS DIMENSIONS USING
COORDINATE MEASURING MACHINE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Aim:
1. To study the construction and operation of coordinate measuring machine
2. To measure the specified dimensions of the given component
Instruments used:
Coordinate measuring machine, vernier calipers

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diagram:

Theory:
A coordinate measuring machine (CMM) is a 3D device for measuring the physical and geometrical
characteristics of an object. This machine may be manually controlled by an operator or it may be computer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

controlled. Measurements are defined by a probe attached to the three moving axis of this machine X, Y and Z
axes. A coordinate measuring machine (CMM) is also a device used in manufacturing and assembly
processes to test a part or assembly against the design intent. By precisely recording the X, Y and Z
coordinates of the target, points are generated which can be analyzed via regression algorithms for the
construction of features. These points are collected by using a probe that is positioned manually by an

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

38 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

operator or automatically via direct computer control (DCC). DCC CMMs can be programmed to repeatedly
measure identical parts, thus a CMM is a specialized form of industrial robot.
Parts:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Coordinate measuring machine include three main components:
1. The main structures which include three axes of motion.
2. Probing system
3. Data collection and reduction system ? typically includes a machine controller, desktop computer
and application software

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Machine description:
1. In modern machines, the gantry type superstructure has two legs and is often called a bridge. This
moves freely along the granite table with one leg following a guide rail attached to one side of the
granite table. The opposite leg simply rests on the granite table following the vertical surface
contour.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Air bearings are fixed for ensuring friction free travel. Compressed air is forced through a series of
very small holes in a flat bearing surface to provide a smooth but controlled air cushion on which the
CMM can move in a frictionless manner.
3. The movement of the bridge along the granite table forms one axis of the XY plane. The bridge of
the gantry contains a carriage which traverses between the inside and outside legs and forms the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

other X or Y horizontal axis.
4. The third axis of movement (Z axis) is provided by the addition of a vertical quill or spindle which
moves up and down through the center of the carriage. The touch probe forms the sensing device
on the end of the quill.
5. The movement of the X, Y and Z axes fully describes the measuring envelope. Some touch probes

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

are themselves powered rotary devices with the probe tip able to swivel vertically through 90
degrees and through a full 360 degrees rotation.
Uses:
They are generally used for:
1. Dimensional measurement

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Profile measurement
3. Angularity or orientation measurement
4. Depth mapping
5. Digitizing mapping
6. Shaft measurement

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

39 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

The machines are available in a wide range of sizes and designs with a variety of different probe
technologies. They can be operated manually or automatically through direct computer control (DCC). They
are offered in various configurations such as bench top, free ? standing, handheld and portable.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. Take at least 8 points on sphere ball attached to the granite table.
2. Fix the object whose dimension needs to be measured using the jigs and fixtures.
3. Using joystick, move the probe whose tip is made of ruby slowly and carefully to the surface whose
measurements have to be taken.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Touch the probe at two places for measurement of a line (starting and ending point).
5. Touch the probe at two places for measurement of a circular profile and for a cylinder touch the
probe at 8 points.
6. Measure the same profiles again with vernier calipers (length of line, circle diameter, cylinder
diameter) to compare the two readings.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Comments:
1. The machine should be calibrated every time when it is being used.
2. While measuring the profiles, the probe should be moved very slowly as it may damage the ruby if
hit with a high force.
3. Care should be taken while performing experiment so that the granite table of the machines should

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

get any scratches.
4. ?Retract distance? should be fixed according to the space available in the near vicinity of the profile
measurement area.
Observation:
Sl.No. Feature

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CMM reading
(mm)
Vernier reading
(mm)
Form error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
Difference in two
readings (mm)
1 Circle -1
2 Circle -2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3 Circle -3
4 Line
5 Arc
6
Cone - Diameter

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Cone ? Vertex angle
Cone ? Height
7
Cylinder ? Diameter
Cylinder ? Height

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

40 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Result:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thus the different profile of given object are measured using coordinate measuring machine
Outcome:
Students will be able to measures the geometry of physical objects by sensing discrete points on the
surface of the object with a probe and they will be able to know the Various types of probes are used in CMMs,
including mechanical, optical, laser, and white light.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Surface Measuring Equipment
2. Photo transistor

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What are the types of measuring machine?
2. What is CMM?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. What are the types of CMM?
4. What are the advantages of CMM?
5. What are the limitations of CMM?
6. What are the possible sources of error in CMM?
7. What is the use of universal measuring machine?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. What are the applications of CMM?
9. What is the working principle of three axis measuring machine?
10. What is image shearing microscope?
11. What is the use of electronic inspection and measuring machine?
12. What are the types of electronic inspection and measuring machine?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. What is CMM probe?
14. What are the three main probes are available?
15. What are the types of stylus?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

41 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.09 MEASUREMENT OF SURFACE ROUGHNESS UING
TALYSURF INSTRUMENT
Aim:
To measure the surface roughness using Talysurf instrument

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Apparatus required:
Talysurf instrument, work piece, surface plate
Diagram:

Theory:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

On any finished surface, imperfections are bound to be there and these take the form of a succession of
hills and valleys which vary both in height and in spacing and result in a kind of texture which in appearance or
feel is often characteristic of the machining process and accompanying defects. The several kinds of
departures are there on the surface and these are due to various causes.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

42 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Methods of measuring surface roughness:
1. Surface inspection of comparison methods
2. Direct instrument measurements

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

In comparative methods the surface texture is assessed by observation of the surface. But these
methods are not reliable as they can be misleading, if comparison is not made with surfaces produced by
same techniques. The various methods available under comparison method are: (i) Touch Inspection
(ii)Scratch Inspection (iii) Microscopic Inspection (iv) Visual Inspection (v) Surface Photographs (vi) Reflected
Light Intensity Direct Instrument Measurements enable to determine a numerical value of the surface finish of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

any surface. Nearly all instruments used are stylus probe type of instruments. This operates on electrical
principle.
Procedure:
1. Place the finished component on the surface plate.
2. Fix the Talysurf tester to the vernier height gauge using adopter at a convenient height.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Make sure that the stylus probe touches the work piece.
4. Fix the sampling length in the tester.
5. Press the power button so that the probe moves on the surface to and fro.
6. Take the readings of the surface roughness directly from the instrument.
7. Repeat the above process for the remaining specimen and tabulate the readings.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Precautions:
1. The surface to be tested should be cleaned properly.
2. The tester should be fixed to the height gauge properly so that the movement of the probe is exactly
parallel to the surface of work.
3. Make sure that the probe gently touches the work.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
S.No
Measurement roughness value,
?m
Sample direction Ra, Rz

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Average Ra Average Rz Grade
1.
2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice
1 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

V SEMESTER - R 2013

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No. : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LABORATORY MANUAL
2 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

DHANALAKSHMI

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.


1. To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. To contribute to the promotion of Academic Excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels
3. To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING


Rendering the services to the global needs of engineering industries by educating students to become
professionally sound mechanical engineers of excellent caliber

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To produce mechanical engineering technocrats with a perfect knowledge intellectual and hands on
experience and to inculcate the spirit of moral values and ethics to serve the society

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MISSION
MISSION
VISION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION

4 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Fundamentals
To impart students with fundamental knowledge in mathematics and basic sciences that will mould
them to be successful professionals
2. Core competence
To provide students with sound knowledge in engineering and experimental skills to identify

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

complex software problems in industry and to develop a practical solution for them
3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theory and practice which
enable them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and organization and to design
products requiring interdisciplinary skills

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Professional skills
To bestow students with adequate training and provide opportunities to work as team that will build
up their communication skills, individual, leadership and supportive qualities and to enable them to
adapt and to work in ever changing technologies
5. Life-long learning

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To develop the ability of students to establish themselves as professionals in mechanical
engineering and to create awareness about the need for lifelong learning and pursuing advanced
degrees

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)
On completion of the B.E. (Mechanical) degree, the graduate will be able
a) To apply the basic knowledge of mathematics, science and engineering
b) To design and conduct experiments as well as to analyze and interpret data and apply the same in

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the career or entrepreneurship
c) To design and develop innovative and creative software applications
d) To understand a complex real world problem and develop an efficient practical solution
e) To create, select and apply appropriate techniques, resources, modern engineering and IT tools
f) To understand the role as a professional and give the best to the society

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

g) To develop a system that will meet expected needs within realistic constraints such as economical
environmental, social, political, ethical, safety and sustainability
h) To communicate effectively and make others understand exactly what they are trying to tell in both
verbal and written forms
i) To work in a team as a team member or a leader and make unique contributions and work with

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

coordination
j) To engage in lifelong learning and exhibit their technical skills
k) To develop and manage projects in multidisciplinary environments

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To familiar with different measurement equipment?s and use of this industry for quality inspection
List of Experiments

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Tool Maker?s Microscope
2. Comparator
3. Sine Bar
4. Gear Tooth Vernier Caliper
5. Floating gauge Micrometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Coordinate Measuring Machine
7. Surface Finish Measuring Equipment
8. Vernier Height Gauge
9. Bore diameter measurement using telescope gauge
10. Bore diameter measurement using micrometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. Force Measurement
12. Torque Measurement
13. Temperature measurement
14. Autocollimator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Ability to handle different measurement tools and perform measurements in quality impulsion
2. Learnt the usage of precision measuring instruments and practiced to take measurements
3. Learnt and practiced to build the required dimensions using slip gauge
4. Able to measure the various dimensions of the given specimen using the tool maker?s microscope

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Able to find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge
6. Able to measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare
7. Learnt to determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen using Gear tooth vernier
8. Able to measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two
wire method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. Learnt to study the construction and operation of coordinate measuring machine
10. Learnt to determine the diameter of bore by using telescopic gauge and dial bore indicator
11. Able to measure the surface roughness using Talysurf instrument
12. Studied the characteristic between applied load and the output volt
13. Learnt the characteristics of developing torque and respective sensor output voltage

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. Studied the characteristics of thermocouple without compensation
15. Able to check the straightness & flatness of the given component by using Autocollimator
16. Learnt to measure the displacement using LVDT and to calibrate it with the millimeter scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OBJECTIVES

COURSE OUTCOMES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CONTENTS
Sl. No. Name of the Experiments Page No.
CYCLE ? 1 EXPERIMENTS
1
Precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab ? A Study

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7
2
To build up the slip gauge for given dimension ? A Study
16
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thread parameters measurement using Tool Makers Microscope
20
4
Calibration of dial gauge
23

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5
Determination of taper angle by sine bar method
26
6
Determination of gear tooth thickness using gear tooth vernier

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

29
7
Measurement of thread parameters using floating carriage micrometer
32
CYCLE ? 2 EXPERIMENTS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8
Measurement of various dimensions using Coordinate Measuring Machine
35
9
Measurement of surface roughness

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

39
10
Measurement of bores using dial bore indicator and telescopic gauge
42
11

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Force measurement using load cell
46
12
Torque measurement using strain gauge
49

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13
Temperature measurement using thermocouple
53
14
Measurement of alignment using autocollimator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

56
ADDITIONAL EXPERIMENT BEYOND THE SYLLABUS
15
Thread parameters measurement using profile projector
60

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16
Displacement measurement ? linear variable differential transducer (LVDT)
62
PROJECT WORK
65

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.01 PRECISION MEASURING INSTRUMENT YSED IN

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

METROLOGY LAB ? A STUDY
Aim:
To study the following instruments and their usage for measuring dimensions of given specimen
1. Vernier caliper
2. Micrometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Vernier height gauge
4. Depth micrometer
5. Universal bevel protractor
Apparatus required:
Surface plate, specimen and above instruments

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier caliper:
The principle of vernier caliper is to use the minor difference between the sizes two scales or divisions
for measurement. The difference between them can be utilized to enhance the accuracy of measurement. The
vernier caliper essentially consists of two steel rules, sliding along each other.
Parts:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Different parts of the vernier caliper are
1. Beam ? It has main scale.
2. Fixed jaw
3. Sliding or Moving jaw ? It has vernier scale and sliding jaw locking screw.
4. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw knife

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

edges for internal measurement.
5. Stem or depth bar for depth measurement
Least count:
Least count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

50 VSD = 49 mm
1 VSD = 0.98 mm
Least count = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm

10 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ID

DEPTH

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OD
Measurement:
Given Vernier caliper can be used for external, internal depth, slot and step measurement.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement principle:
When both jaws contact each other scale shows the zero reading. The finer adjustment of movable jaw
can be done by the fine adjustment screw. First the whole movable jaw assembly is adjusted so that the two
measuring tips just touch the part to be measured. Then the fine adjustment clamp locking screw is tightened.
Final adjustment depending upon the sense of correct feel is made by the adjusting screw. After final

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

adjustment has been made sliding jaw locking screw is also tightened and the reading is noted.
All the parts of the Vernier caliper are made of good quality steel and measuring faces are hardened.
Types of vernier:
Vernier caliper, electronic vernier caliper, vernier depth caliper

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Main scale
reading (MSR)
(mm)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier scale
reading (VSR) (mm)
Total reading (MSR
+ VSR)
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OD


ID

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Depth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier height gauge:
Vernier height gauge is a sort of vernier caliper equipped with a special instrument suitable for height
measurement. It is always kept on the surface plate and the use of the surfaces plates as datum surfaces is
very essential.
Least count:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least Count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm
1 VSD = 0.98 mm
Least Count (LC) = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Parts:
1. Base
2. Beam ? It has main scale.
3. Slider ? It has a vernier scale and slider locking screw.
4. Scriber

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw.


12 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Material:
All the parts of vernier are made of good quality steel and the measuring faces hardened.
Types of vernier gauge:
1. Analog vernier height gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Digital vernier height gauge
3. Electronic vernier height gauge
Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Main scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(MSR)(mm)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale reading
(VSR)(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total reading (MSR +
VSR)(mm)
1.
2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Outside micrometer:
The micrometer essentially consists of an accurate screw having about 10 or 20 threads per cm. The

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

end of the screw forms one measuring tip and other measuring tip is constituted by a stationary anvil in the
base of the frame. The screw is threaded for certain length and is plain afterwards. The plain portion is called
spindle and its end is the measuring surface. The spindle is advanced or retracted by turning a thimble
connected to a spindle. The spindle is a slide fit over the barrel and barrel is the fixed part attached with the
frame. The barrel & thimble are graduated. The pitch of the screw threads is 0.5 mm.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count:
Least Count (LC) = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale
= 0.5 / 50 = 0.01 mm
Parts:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Frame
2. Anvil
3. Spindle
4. Spindle lock
5. Barrel or outside sleeve

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions
7. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.
The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.
14 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement:
It can be used for any external measurement.
Types of micrometer:
1. Outside micrometer, 2. Inside micrometer, 3.Depth micrometer, 4. Stick micrometer, 5. Screw thread
micrometer, 6. V ? anvil micrometer, 7. Blade type micrometer, 8. Dial micrometer, 9. Bench micrometer, 10.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tape screw operated internal micrometer, 11. Groove micrometer, 12. Digital micrometer, 13.Differential screw
micrometer, 14.Adjustable range outside micrometer.
Ratchet stop mechanism:
The object of the ratchet stop is to ensure that same level of torque is applied on the spindle while
measuring and the sense of the feel of operator is eliminated and consistent readings are obtained. By

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

providing this arrangement, the ratchet stop is made slip off when the torque applied to rotate the spindle
exceeds the set torque. Thus this provision ensures the application of same amount of torque during the
measurement.
Tabulation:
Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) (mm)
Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)
Head scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(HSR x LC) (mm)
Total Reading (PSR
+ HSR) (mm)
1.
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Depth micrometer:
Depth micrometer is a sort of micrometer which is mainly used for measuring depth of holes, so it is
named as depth micrometer.
Parts:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Shoulder
2. Spindle
3. Spindle lock
4. Barrel or outside sleeve ? It has pitch scale.
5. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.
The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.
15 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count:
Least Count = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale = 0.50/50
= 0.01 mm
Measurements:
It can be used for measuring the depth of holes, slots and recessed areas. The pitch of the screw thread

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

is 0.5 mm. The least count is 0.01 mm. Shoulder acts as a reference surface and is held firmly and
perpendicular to the centre line of the hole. For large range of measurement extension rods are used. In the
barrel the scale is calibrated. The accuracy again depends upon the sense of touch.
Procedure:
First, calculate the least count of the instrument. Check the zero error. Measure the specimen note

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

down the main scale reading or the head scale reading. Note down the vernier or head scale coincidence with
main or pitch scale divisions.
Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Pitch Scale Reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(PSR) (mm)
Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)
Head scale reading
(HSR x LC) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total Reading (PSR
+ HSR) (mm)

1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.


16 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Universal bevel protractor:

Description:
Bevel protractor is an instrument for measuring the angle between the two faces of a specimen. It

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

consists of a base plate on which a circular scale is engraved. It is graduated in degrees. An adjustment plate
is attached to a circular plate containing the vernier scale. The adjustable blade can be locked in any position.
The circular plate has 360 division divided into four parts of 90 degrees each. The adjustable parts have 24
divisions of to the right and left sides of zero reading. These scales are used according to the position of the
specimen with respect to movable scale.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. Place the specimen whose taper is to be measured between the adjustable plate and movable
blade with one of its face parallel to the base.
2. Lock the adjustable plate in position and note down the main scale reading depending upon the
direction of rotation of adjustable plate in clockwise or anticlockwise.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Note the VSC to the right of zero.
4. Multiply the VSC with the least count and add to MSR to obtain the actual reading.
Least count:
Least Count = 2 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
24 VSD = 46
o
=> 1 VSD = 23/12
LC = 2 ? 23/12 = 1/12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
= 5? (five minutes)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Main scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(MSR) (deg)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale reading
(VSR) (deg)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total reading (MSR +
VSR)
(deg)
1.
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The angle of scriber of the vernier height gauge =
Result:
Thus the various precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab are studied and the specimen
dimensions are recorded.
Outcome:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for linear, angular,
roundness and roughness measurements they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring
instrument according to a specific requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).
Application:
1. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Metrology
2. Define ? Inspection
3. What are the needs of inspection in industries?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. What are the various methods involving the measurement?
5. Define ? Precision
6. Define ? Accuracy
7. Define ? Calibration
8. Define ? Repeatability

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. Define ? Magnification
10. Define ? Error
11. Define ? Systematic Error
12. Define ? Random Error
13. Define ? Parallax Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. Define ? Environmental Error
15. Define ? Cosine Error
Viva-voce

18 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.02 BUILD UP THE SLIP GAUGE FOR GIVEN DIMENSION
? A STUDY
Aim:
To build up the slip gauge for given dimension

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Apparatus required:
1. Slip gauges set
2. Surface plate
3. Soft cloth
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
Slip gauge are universally accepted standard of length in industry. They are the working standard for
linear dimension. These were invented by a Swedish Engineer, C.E. Johansson. They are used
1. For direct precise measurement where the accuracy of the workpiece demand it.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. For use with high- magnification comparators to establish the size of the gauge blocks in general
use.
3. Gauge blocks are also used for many other purposes such as checking the accuracy of measuring
instrument or setting up a comparator to a specific dimension, enabling a batch of component to be
quickly and accurately checked or indeed in any situation where there is need to refer to standard of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

known length these blocks are rectangular.
19 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Most gauge blocks are produced from high grade steel, hardened and established by a heat treatment
process to give a high degree of dimensional stability. Gauge blocks are also manufactured from tungsten

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

carbide which is an extremely hard and wear resistant material. The measuring faces have a lapped finish.
The faces are perfectly flat and parallel to one another with a high degree of accuracy. Each block has an
extremely high dimensional accuracy at 20
o
C.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

These slip gauge are available in variety of selected sets both in inch units and metric units. Letter ?E? is
used for inch units and ?M? is used for metric standard number of pieces in a set following the letter E or M. For
example EBI refers to a set whose blocks are in metric units and are 83 in number. Each block dimensions is
printed on anyone of its face itself the size of any required standard being made up by combining the
appropriate number of these different size blocks.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

If two gauges are slid and twisted together under pressure they will firmly join together. This process,
known as wringing, is very useful because it enables several gauge blocks to be assembled together to
produce a required size. In fact the success of precision measurement by slip gauges depends on the
phenomenon of wringing.
First the gauge is oscillated slightly with very light pressure over other gauge so as to detect pressure at

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

any foreign particles between the surfaces. One gauge is placed perpendicular to other using standard
gauging pressure and rotary motion is applied until the blocks are lined up.
Procedure:
1. Build the given dimension by wringing minimum number of slip gauges.
2. Note the given dimension and choose the minimum possible slip gauge available in the set so as to

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

accommodate the last decimal value. The minimum slip gauge value dimension available i.e., 1.12
mm must be chosen followed by 1.5 mm thick gauge block.
3. Follow the above steps to build up the slip gauge of any dimension.
Precautions:
1. Slip gauges should be handled very carefully placed gently and should never be dropped.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Whenever a slip gauge is being removed from the set, its dimensions are noted and must be
replaced into the set at its appropriate place only.
3. Correct procedure must be followed in wringing and also in removing the gauge blocks.
4. They should be cleaned well before use and petroleum jelly is applied after use.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

20 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Range (mm) Increment (mm) No. of pieces

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total = ____________ Pieces
Total length of slip gauge = ________ mm
Given diameter Slip gauges used Obtained dimensions

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Slip gauge set is studied and the given dimensions are building up by wringing minimum number of slip

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

gauges.
Outcome:
Students will be able to select proper measuring instrument and know requirement of calibration, errors
in measurement etc. They can perform accurate measurements.
Application:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Why C.I. is preferred material for surface plates and tables?
2. Why V ? blocks are generally manufactured in pairs?
3. Why micrometer is required to be tested for accuracy?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Define ? Linear Measurement
5. List the linear measuring instrument according to their accuracy.
6. Define ? Least Count
7. What are the uses of vernier depth gauge?
8. What are the uses of feeler gauges?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. What are the uses of straight edge?
10. What are the uses of angle plate?
11. What are the uses of V ? block?
12. What are the uses of combination square?
13. What precautions should be taken while using slip gauges?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. What is wringing?
15. Why the slip gauges are termed as ?End standard?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

22 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


Expt.No.03 THREAD PARAMETERS MEASUREMENT USING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TOOL MAKERS MICROSCOPE
Aim:
To study the tool makers microscope and in the process measure the various dimensions of the given
specimen
Apparatus required:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Tool makers microscope
2. Specimen
Diagram:

Description:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The tool maker?s microscope is designed for measurement of parts of complex forms; for example,
profile of a tool having external threads. It can also be used for measuring centre to centre distance of the
holes in any plane as well as the coordinates of the outline of a complex template gauge, using the
coordinates measuring system.
23 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Basically it consists of an optical head which can be adjusted vertically along the ways of supporting
column. The optical head can be clamped at any position by a screw. On the work table (which as a circular
base in which there are graduations) the part to be inspected is placed. The table has a compound slide by
means of which the part can be measured. For giving these two movements, there are two micrometer screws

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

having thimble scales and verniers. At the back of the base light source is arranged that provides horizontal
beam of light, reflected from a mirror by 90 degrees upwards towards the table. The beam of light passes
through the transparent glass plate on which flat plates can be checked are placed. Observations are made
through the eyepiece of the optical head.
Procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Place the given specimen on the work table and switch on all the three light sources and adjust the
intensity of the light source until a clean image of the cross wires and specimen are seen through
the eyepiece.
2. Coincide one of the two extreme edges between which the measurement has to be taken with
vertical or horizontal cross wires and depending upon the other image coincide with the same cross

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

wires by moving the above device. Note the reading.The difference between the two readings gives
the value of the required measurement.
3. Note the experiment specimen and the readings.
4. Tabulate the different measurements measured from the specimen.
Determination of thread parameters

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Magnification =
S.No. Parameters
Magnified value
(mm)
Actual value

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
1. Outer diameter (O.D)

2. Internal diameter (I.D)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Pitch

4. Flank angle

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Included angle of the tool was measured using tool maker?s microscope and various dimensions of the
given specimen are measured.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

24 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the various parameters of thread and select proper measuring
instrument and know requirement of calibration, errors in measurement etc. They can perform accurate

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measurements.
Application:
1. Machine Shop
2. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by tool maker?s microscope?
2. What is the light used in tool maker?s microscope?
3. What are the various characteristics that you would measure in a screw thread?
4. What are the instruments that are required for measuring screw thread?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Define ? Pitch
6. What are the causes of pitch error?
7. Define ? Flank
8. What are the effects of flank angle error?
9. What is progressive error?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. What is periodic error?
11. What is drunken error?
12. What is erratic error?
13. What are the applications of tool maker?s microscope?
14. What are the limitations of tool maker?s microscope?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15. What are the advantages of tool maker?s microscope?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

25 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.04 CALIBRATION OF DIAL GAUGE USING SLIP GAUGE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Aim:
To find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge
Apparatus required:
Dial gauge, magnetic stand, slip gauge, and surface plate
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
The dial test indicator is a precision measuring instrument which can convert linear motion into angular
motion by means of transmission mechanics of rack and pinion and can be used to measure linear vibration
and errors of shape.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

This instrument has the features such as good appearance, compact size, light weight, high precision,
reasonable construction, constant measuring face etc. Rigidity of all parts is excellent. Probe is tipped with
carbide balls. A shock proof mechanism is provided for those with larger measuring range.

26 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Types of dial indicator:
1. Plunger type
2. Lever type
Plunger type dial indicator has a resolution counter and each division in main scale is 0.01 mm. In lever

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

type dial test indicator is replaced by ball type stylus.
Procedure:
1. Fix the dial gauge to the stand rigidly and place the stand on the surface plate.
2. Set the plunger of dial gauge to first touch the upper surface of standard slip gauge and set indicator
to zero.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Raise then the plunger by pulling the screw above the dial scale.
4. Place the standard slip gauge underneath the plunger.
5. Release the plunger and let it to touch the standard slip gauge.
6. Note the reading on the dial scale.
Formulae:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The standard error of dial gauge is calculated by the formula

Tabulation:
S.No.
Slip gauge reading ?x?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
Dial gauge reading
(mm)
(x? - x)
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x? (x? - x)
1.
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Thus the accuracy and standard error of dial gauge is found. The standard error of given dial gauge is
__________.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

27 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Outcome:
Students will be able to check the variation in tolerance during the inspection process of a

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

machined part, measure the deflection of a beam or ring under laboratory conditions, as well as many
other situations where a small measurement needs to be registered or indicated
Application:
1. Milling Machine
2. Analog versus digital/electronic readout

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is comparator?
2. What are the types of comparators?
3. What is the LC for comparators?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. What are the applications of comparator?
5. What is meant by plunger?
6. What are the types of dial indicators?
7. Why a revolution counter is not provided in lever type dial test indicator?
8. Draw a line diagram of the operating mechanism of plunger type dial test indicator.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. Explain the term magnification of a dial indicator.
10. What are the uses of dial test indicator?
11. What are the practical applications of dial test indicator?
12. What precautions should be taken while using dial test indicator?
13. What are the desirable qualities of a dial test indicator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. What are the advantages of dial test indicator?
15. What are the limitations of dial test indicator?
16. Distinguish between comparator and measuring instrument.
17. What are the advantages of electrical comparator?
18. What are the advantages of optical comparator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

19. What are the uses of comparator?
20. What are the advantages and disadvantages of mechanical comparator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

28 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.05 DETERMINATION OF TAPER ANGLE BY SINE BAR
METHOD
Aim:
To measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare
Apparatus required:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sine bar, slip gauges, dial gauge with stand, micrometer, surface plate, bevel protractor, vernier caliper
Diagram:

Description:
The sine bar principle uses the ratio of the length of two sides of a right triangle. It may be noted that

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

devices operating on sine principle are capable of ?self-generation?. The measurement is restricted to 45
o
from
accuracy point of view. Sine bar itself is not a measuring instrument.
Accuracy requirements of sine bar:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. The axes of the rollers must be parallel to each other and the centre distance L must be precisely
known.
2. The sine bar must be flat and parallel to the plane connecting the axes of the rollers.
3. The rollers must be of identical diameters and must have within a close tolerance.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

29 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Procedure:
1. Fix the dial gaugeon the magnetic stand and place the magnetic stand on the surface plate.Check

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the parallelism of the sine bar.
2. Place the given specimen above the sine bar and place the dial gauge on top of the specimen.
Adjustthe dial gauge for zero deflection.
3. Raise the front end of the sine bar with slip gauges until the work surface is parallel to the datum
surface.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Check the parallelism using dial gauge.
5. Measure the distance between the centres of the sine bar rollers as ?L? and note the height of the
slip gauge as ?H?.
6. Note the included angle of the specimen.
Formulae:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sin ? = H/L where ? = Included angle of the specimen
H = Height of slip gauges
L = Distance between the centre of rollers
Tabulation:
S.No. L (mm) H (mm) Taper angle ( ?)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
2.
3.

Result:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The taper angle of the given specimen using sine bar was found to be =
Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for angular measurements
and they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a specific
requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Flat Surface
2. Granite

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

30 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. List out the various angle measuring instruments.
2. What is the working principles sine bar?
3. How is a sine bar used to measure the angle?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. What is the application of sine bar?
5. What is the material of sine bar?
6. Why sine bar is not preferred to use for measuring angles more than 45
0
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. What are the features of sine bar?
8. A 100 mm sine bar is to be set up to an angle of 33
0
, determine the slip gauges needed from 87
pieces set.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. What are the various instruments used for measuring angles?
10. What is sine bar?
11. How sine bar is used for angle measurement?
12. Explain how sine bar is used to measure angle of small size component.
13. Explain how sine bar is used to measure angle of large size component.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. What are the various types of sine bar?
15. What are the limitations of sine bar?
16. What is sine center?
17. What is sine table?
18. What are the possible sources of errors in angular measurement by sine bar?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

19. What are angle gauges?
20. How angle gauges are used for measuring angles?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

31 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.06 DETERMINATION OF GEAR TOOTH THICKNESS
USING GEAR TOOTH VERNIER
Aim:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen and to draw the graph between the tooth
number and the error in thickness
Apparatus required:
Gear tooth vernier, specimen, surface plate and vernier caliper
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
The tooth thickness, in general, is measured at pitch circle since gear tooth thickness varies from the tip
to the base circle of the tooth. This is possible only when there is an arrangement to fix that position for this
measurement by the gear tooth vernier. It has two vernier scales; one is vertical and other is horizontal.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
32 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

1. Measure initially the outside diameter of the given gear specimen by means of a vertical calculation
of vernier caliper. Note the number of teeth. Calculate the module (m) using the formula.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M = OD/ (Z+2) where z ? number of teeth
M - Module
2. Calculate the theoretical tooth thickness (t) by t = z * m* sin (90/z).
3. Set the vernier scale for the height and tighten.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Measure the thickness of each tooth using the horizontal scale. This is measured thickness. It can
be positive or negative.
H = m x [1+ Z/2 (1- Cos 90/Z)]
5. Calculate the error in the tooth thickness i.e,1. measured thickness ? Theoretical thickness
6. Draw the graph between the tooth number and the error in thickness.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Tooth
Number
Measured Thickness
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Theoretical Thickness (mm)
Error in tooth thickness
(mm)
1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3

Tooth
Number
MSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
VSC

VSR
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TR
(mm)
1
2
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Graph:


Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tooth No.
33 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
The theoretical experiment value of gear tooth thickness is obtained and graph is drawn between error
and tooth number in tooth thickness

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Theoretical tooth thickness =
Experimental tooth thickness =
Error in tooth thickness =
Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the basic measurement units and able to calibrate various

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measuring parameters of the gear.
Application:
1. Gear Component
2. Mining

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Calculate the setting of a gear tooth vernier caliper for a straight spur gear having 40 teeth and
module 4.
2. What is the importance of chordal depth?
3. Define ? Chordal width
4. How is the actual profile of the gear tooth determined?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. What are the manufacturing errors in gear element?
6. Define ? Addendum
7. Define ? Dedendum
8. Define ? Flank of tooth
9. Define ? Pitch

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. Define ? Pitch Circle
11. Define ? Crest of tooth
12. Define ? Root of tooth
13. Define ? Base Circle
14. Define ? Module

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15. Define ? Angle of Obliquity


Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

34 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.07 MEASUREMENT OF THREAD PARAMETER USING
FLOATING CARRIAGE MICROMETER
Aim:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two wire
method
Apparatus required:
1. Floating carriage micrometer
2. Standard wire

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Given specimen (screw thread)
Diagram:

Description of floating carriage micrometer:
It consists of three main units. A base casting carries a pair of centres on which threaded work piece is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

to be mounted. Another carriage capable of moving towards centre is mounted exactly above. In this carriage
one head with thimble to measure up to 0.002 mm is provided and at the other side of head a fiducial indicator
is provided to indicate zero position.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

35 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Procedure:
1. For two wire method, place the standard wire over a thread of the screw at opposite sides.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. For three wire method, place two standard wires on two successive threads and the third wire
placed opposite sides of the thread.
3. Measure the diameter over wires (M) using floating carriage micrometer.
4. Repeat this procedure at various positions of the screw and take different readings.
Formulae:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. For best wire size, d = P / 2 Cos (x/2)
Where, P = Pitch
d= wire size
x = angle between two threads
= 60

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
for metric thread
2. Actual effective diameter, E.A = M ? 3d + 0.866 p
3. Nominal effective diameter, EN = D ? 0.648 p
4. Max. wire size = 1.01 p

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Min. wire size = 0.505 p
6. Best wire size = 0.577 p
M = Diameter over wires
P = Pitch of thread
For metric thread:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Actual effective diameter (EA) = M ? 3d + 0.866 p
Where d = actual diameter of wire
Determination of actual and nominal effective diameter of the screw thread:
Sl.No.
Nominal

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diameter (D)
(mm)
Diameter over
wire ?M?
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Actual eff.
Diameter E.A
(mm)
Nominal eff.
Diameter E.N

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
Error in effective
diameter
(E.A ? E.N)
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

36 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Result:
Thus the actual and nominal effective diameter is measured using three wire method and the error in

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

effective diameter of screw is determined.
Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for roundness
measurements and they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a
specific requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Wholse
2. Maxxis Rubber India

1. Define ? Pitch

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Define ? Flank Angle
3. What is plug gauge?
4. What is meant by micrometer?
5. What is meant by indicator?
6. What is best ? size wire?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Calculate the diameter of the best wire for an M 20 x 25 screws.
8. What are the different corrections to be applied in the measurement of effective diameter by the
method of wire?
9. What is floating carriage micrometer?
10. What are the uses of floating carriage micrometer?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. What are the methods are used for measuring effective diameter?
12. Define ? Effective Diameter
13. Define ? Major Diameter
14. Define ? Minor Diameter
15. What are the effects of flank error?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16. Define ? Rake Angle
17. Define ? Pitch Cylinder
18. What are the effects of pitch error?
19. Define ? Pitch Diameter
20. What is meant by angle of thread?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

37 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.08 MEASUREMENT OF VARIOUS DIMENSIONS USING
COORDINATE MEASURING MACHINE
Aim:
1. To study the construction and operation of coordinate measuring machine

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. To measure the specified dimensions of the given component
Instruments used:
Coordinate measuring machine, vernier calipers
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Theory:
A coordinate measuring machine (CMM) is a 3D device for measuring the physical and geometrical
characteristics of an object. This machine may be manually controlled by an operator or it may be computer
controlled. Measurements are defined by a probe attached to the three moving axis of this machine X, Y and Z
axes. A coordinate measuring machine (CMM) is also a device used in manufacturing and assembly

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

processes to test a part or assembly against the design intent. By precisely recording the X, Y and Z
coordinates of the target, points are generated which can be analyzed via regression algorithms for the
construction of features. These points are collected by using a probe that is positioned manually by an
38 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

operator or automatically via direct computer control (DCC). DCC CMMs can be programmed to repeatedly
measure identical parts, thus a CMM is a specialized form of industrial robot.
Parts:
Coordinate measuring machine include three main components:
1. The main structures which include three axes of motion.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Probing system
3. Data collection and reduction system ? typically includes a machine controller, desktop computer
and application software
Machine description:
1. In modern machines, the gantry type superstructure has two legs and is often called a bridge. This

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

moves freely along the granite table with one leg following a guide rail attached to one side of the
granite table. The opposite leg simply rests on the granite table following the vertical surface
contour.
2. Air bearings are fixed for ensuring friction free travel. Compressed air is forced through a series of
very small holes in a flat bearing surface to provide a smooth but controlled air cushion on which the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CMM can move in a frictionless manner.
3. The movement of the bridge along the granite table forms one axis of the XY plane. The bridge of
the gantry contains a carriage which traverses between the inside and outside legs and forms the
other X or Y horizontal axis.
4. The third axis of movement (Z axis) is provided by the addition of a vertical quill or spindle which

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

moves up and down through the center of the carriage. The touch probe forms the sensing device
on the end of the quill.
5. The movement of the X, Y and Z axes fully describes the measuring envelope. Some touch probes
are themselves powered rotary devices with the probe tip able to swivel vertically through 90
degrees and through a full 360 degrees rotation.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Uses:
They are generally used for:
1. Dimensional measurement
2. Profile measurement
3. Angularity or orientation measurement

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Depth mapping
5. Digitizing mapping
6. Shaft measurement
39 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The machines are available in a wide range of sizes and designs with a variety of different probe
technologies. They can be operated manually or automatically through direct computer control (DCC). They
are offered in various configurations such as bench top, free ? standing, handheld and portable.
Procedure:
1. Take at least 8 points on sphere ball attached to the granite table.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Fix the object whose dimension needs to be measured using the jigs and fixtures.
3. Using joystick, move the probe whose tip is made of ruby slowly and carefully to the surface whose
measurements have to be taken.
4. Touch the probe at two places for measurement of a line (starting and ending point).
5. Touch the probe at two places for measurement of a circular profile and for a cylinder touch the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

probe at 8 points.
6. Measure the same profiles again with vernier calipers (length of line, circle diameter, cylinder
diameter) to compare the two readings.
Comments:
1. The machine should be calibrated every time when it is being used.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. While measuring the profiles, the probe should be moved very slowly as it may damage the ruby if
hit with a high force.
3. Care should be taken while performing experiment so that the granite table of the machines should
get any scratches.
4. ?Retract distance? should be fixed according to the space available in the near vicinity of the profile

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measurement area.
Observation:
Sl.No. Feature
CMM reading
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier reading
(mm)
Form error
(mm)
Difference in two

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

readings (mm)
1 Circle -1
2 Circle -2
3 Circle -3
4 Line

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 Arc
6
Cone - Diameter
Cone ? Vertex angle
Cone ? Height

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7
Cylinder ? Diameter
Cylinder ? Height

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

40 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Result:
Thus the different profile of given object are measured using coordinate measuring machine
Outcome:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Students will be able to measures the geometry of physical objects by sensing discrete points on the
surface of the object with a probe and they will be able to know the Various types of probes are used in CMMs,
including mechanical, optical, laser, and white light.
Application:
1. Surface Measuring Equipment

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Photo transistor

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What are the types of measuring machine?
2. What is CMM?
3. What are the types of CMM?
4. What are the advantages of CMM?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. What are the limitations of CMM?
6. What are the possible sources of error in CMM?
7. What is the use of universal measuring machine?
8. What are the applications of CMM?
9. What is the working principle of three axis measuring machine?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. What is image shearing microscope?
11. What is the use of electronic inspection and measuring machine?
12. What are the types of electronic inspection and measuring machine?
13. What is CMM probe?
14. What are the three main probes are available?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15. What are the types of stylus?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

41 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.09 MEASUREMENT OF SURFACE ROUGHNESS UING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TALYSURF INSTRUMENT
Aim:
To measure the surface roughness using Talysurf instrument
Apparatus required:
Talysurf instrument, work piece, surface plate

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diagram:

Theory:
On any finished surface, imperfections are bound to be there and these take the form of a succession of
hills and valleys which vary both in height and in spacing and result in a kind of texture which in appearance or

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

feel is often characteristic of the machining process and accompanying defects. The several kinds of
departures are there on the surface and these are due to various causes.

42 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Methods of measuring surface roughness:
1. Surface inspection of comparison methods
2. Direct instrument measurements
In comparative methods the surface texture is assessed by observation of the surface. But these
methods are not reliable as they can be misleading, if comparison is not made with surfaces produced by

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

same techniques. The various methods available under comparison method are: (i) Touch Inspection
(ii)Scratch Inspection (iii) Microscopic Inspection (iv) Visual Inspection (v) Surface Photographs (vi) Reflected
Light Intensity Direct Instrument Measurements enable to determine a numerical value of the surface finish of
any surface. Nearly all instruments used are stylus probe type of instruments. This operates on electrical
principle.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. Place the finished component on the surface plate.
2. Fix the Talysurf tester to the vernier height gauge using adopter at a convenient height.
3. Make sure that the stylus probe touches the work piece.
4. Fix the sampling length in the tester.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Press the power button so that the probe moves on the surface to and fro.
6. Take the readings of the surface roughness directly from the instrument.
7. Repeat the above process for the remaining specimen and tabulate the readings.
Precautions:
1. The surface to be tested should be cleaned properly.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. The tester should be fixed to the height gauge properly so that the movement of the probe is exactly
parallel to the surface of work.
3. Make sure that the probe gently touches the work.
Tabulation:
S.No

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement roughness value,
?m
Sample direction Ra, Rz
Average Ra Average Rz Grade
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

43 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Result:
Thus the surface roughness is checked for different specimens by Talysurf.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for roughness
measurements they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a specific
requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).
Application:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Machine Shop
2. Quality Department


1. Define ? Actual Size?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. What is meant by normal surface?
3. What is meant by profilo-graph?
4. What is Tomlinson surface meter?
5. What is meant by profile?
6. What are the factors affecting surface roughness?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Why the surface texture is control?
8. Define ? Lay
9. Define ? Surface Texture
10. Define ? Flaws
11. What is sampling length?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. What are the methods used for evaluating surface finish?
13. What is form factor?
14. What are the methods used for measuring surface finish?
15. How will you differentiate smooth surface from flat surface?
16. How surface finish is designated on drawings?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17. Define ? Primary Texture
18. Define ? Secondary Texture
19. What are the types of instrument used for measuring surface texture?
20. Define ? waviness

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

V SEMESTER - R 2013

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No. : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LABORATORY MANUAL
2 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

DHANALAKSHMI

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
2. To contribute to the promotion of Academic Excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels
3. To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING


Rendering the services to the global needs of engineering industries by educating students to become

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

professionally sound mechanical engineers of excellent caliber


To produce mechanical engineering technocrats with a perfect knowledge intellectual and hands on
experience and to inculcate the spirit of moral values and ethics to serve the society

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MISSION
MISSION
VISION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION

4 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals
To impart students with fundamental knowledge in mathematics and basic sciences that will mould
them to be successful professionals
2. Core competence

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To provide students with sound knowledge in engineering and experimental skills to identify
complex software problems in industry and to develop a practical solution for them
3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theory and practice which
enable them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and organization and to design

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

products requiring interdisciplinary skills
4. Professional skills
To bestow students with adequate training and provide opportunities to work as team that will build
up their communication skills, individual, leadership and supportive qualities and to enable them to
adapt and to work in ever changing technologies

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Life-long learning
To develop the ability of students to establish themselves as professionals in mechanical
engineering and to create awareness about the need for lifelong learning and pursuing advanced
degrees

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)
On completion of the B.E. (Mechanical) degree, the graduate will be able
a) To apply the basic knowledge of mathematics, science and engineering

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

b) To design and conduct experiments as well as to analyze and interpret data and apply the same in
the career or entrepreneurship
c) To design and develop innovative and creative software applications
d) To understand a complex real world problem and develop an efficient practical solution
e) To create, select and apply appropriate techniques, resources, modern engineering and IT tools

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

f) To understand the role as a professional and give the best to the society
g) To develop a system that will meet expected needs within realistic constraints such as economical
environmental, social, political, ethical, safety and sustainability
h) To communicate effectively and make others understand exactly what they are trying to tell in both
verbal and written forms

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

i) To work in a team as a team member or a leader and make unique contributions and work with
coordination
j) To engage in lifelong learning and exhibit their technical skills
k) To develop and manage projects in multidisciplinary environments

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY



To familiar with different measurement equipment?s and use of this industry for quality inspection

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

List of Experiments
1. Tool Maker?s Microscope
2. Comparator
3. Sine Bar
4. Gear Tooth Vernier Caliper

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Floating gauge Micrometer
6. Coordinate Measuring Machine
7. Surface Finish Measuring Equipment
8. Vernier Height Gauge
9. Bore diameter measurement using telescope gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. Bore diameter measurement using micrometer
11. Force Measurement
12. Torque Measurement
13. Temperature measurement
14. Autocollimator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Ability to handle different measurement tools and perform measurements in quality impulsion
2. Learnt the usage of precision measuring instruments and practiced to take measurements
3. Learnt and practiced to build the required dimensions using slip gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Able to measure the various dimensions of the given specimen using the tool maker?s microscope
5. Able to find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge
6. Able to measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare
7. Learnt to determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen using Gear tooth vernier
8. Able to measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

wire method
9. Learnt to study the construction and operation of coordinate measuring machine
10. Learnt to determine the diameter of bore by using telescopic gauge and dial bore indicator
11. Able to measure the surface roughness using Talysurf instrument
12. Studied the characteristic between applied load and the output volt

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. Learnt the characteristics of developing torque and respective sensor output voltage
14. Studied the characteristics of thermocouple without compensation
15. Able to check the straightness & flatness of the given component by using Autocollimator
16. Learnt to measure the displacement using LVDT and to calibrate it with the millimeter scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OBJECTIVES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OUTCOMES

7 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CONTENTS
Sl. No. Name of the Experiments Page No.
CYCLE ? 1 EXPERIMENTS
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab ? A Study
7
2
To build up the slip gauge for given dimension ? A Study
16

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
Thread parameters measurement using Tool Makers Microscope
20
4
Calibration of dial gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

23
5
Determination of taper angle by sine bar method
26
6

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of gear tooth thickness using gear tooth vernier
29
7
Measurement of thread parameters using floating carriage micrometer
32

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CYCLE ? 2 EXPERIMENTS
8
Measurement of various dimensions using Coordinate Measuring Machine
35
9

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement of surface roughness
39
10
Measurement of bores using dial bore indicator and telescopic gauge
42

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11
Force measurement using load cell
46
12
Torque measurement using strain gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

49
13
Temperature measurement using thermocouple
53
14

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement of alignment using autocollimator
56
ADDITIONAL EXPERIMENT BEYOND THE SYLLABUS
15
Thread parameters measurement using profile projector

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

60
16
Displacement measurement ? linear variable differential transducer (LVDT)
62
PROJECT WORK

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

65


8 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.01 PRECISION MEASURING INSTRUMENT YSED IN
METROLOGY LAB ? A STUDY
Aim:
To study the following instruments and their usage for measuring dimensions of given specimen
1. Vernier caliper

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Micrometer
3. Vernier height gauge
4. Depth micrometer
5. Universal bevel protractor
Apparatus required:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Surface plate, specimen and above instruments
Vernier caliper:
The principle of vernier caliper is to use the minor difference between the sizes two scales or divisions
for measurement. The difference between them can be utilized to enhance the accuracy of measurement. The
vernier caliper essentially consists of two steel rules, sliding along each other.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Parts:
Different parts of the vernier caliper are
1. Beam ? It has main scale.
2. Fixed jaw
3. Sliding or Moving jaw ? It has vernier scale and sliding jaw locking screw.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw knife
edges for internal measurement.
5. Stem or depth bar for depth measurement
Least count:
Least count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm
1 VSD = 0.98 mm
Least count = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


ID

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPTH


OD
Measurement:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Given Vernier caliper can be used for external, internal depth, slot and step measurement.
Measurement principle:
When both jaws contact each other scale shows the zero reading. The finer adjustment of movable jaw
can be done by the fine adjustment screw. First the whole movable jaw assembly is adjusted so that the two
measuring tips just touch the part to be measured. Then the fine adjustment clamp locking screw is tightened.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Final adjustment depending upon the sense of correct feel is made by the adjusting screw. After final
adjustment has been made sliding jaw locking screw is also tightened and the reading is noted.
All the parts of the Vernier caliper are made of good quality steel and measuring faces are hardened.
Types of vernier:
Vernier caliper, electronic vernier caliper, vernier depth caliper

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Main scale
reading (MSR)
(mm)
Vernier scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale
reading (VSR) (mm)
Total reading (MSR
+ VSR)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)

OD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ID


Depth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier height gauge:
Vernier height gauge is a sort of vernier caliper equipped with a special instrument suitable for height
measurement. It is always kept on the surface plate and the use of the surfaces plates as datum surfaces is
very essential.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count:
Least Count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm
1 VSD = 0.98 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least Count (LC) = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm
Parts:
1. Base
2. Beam ? It has main scale.
3. Slider ? It has a vernier scale and slider locking screw.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Scriber
5. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw.


12 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Material:
All the parts of vernier are made of good quality steel and the measuring faces hardened.
Types of vernier gauge:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Analog vernier height gauge
2. Digital vernier height gauge
3. Electronic vernier height gauge
Tabulation:
Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Main scale reading
(MSR)(mm)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(VSR)(mm)
Total reading (MSR +
VSR)(mm)
1.
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.

13 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Outside micrometer:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The micrometer essentially consists of an accurate screw having about 10 or 20 threads per cm. The
end of the screw forms one measuring tip and other measuring tip is constituted by a stationary anvil in the
base of the frame. The screw is threaded for certain length and is plain afterwards. The plain portion is called
spindle and its end is the measuring surface. The spindle is advanced or retracted by turning a thimble
connected to a spindle. The spindle is a slide fit over the barrel and barrel is the fixed part attached with the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

frame. The barrel & thimble are graduated. The pitch of the screw threads is 0.5 mm.

Least count:
Least Count (LC) = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale
= 0.5 / 50 = 0.01 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Parts:
1. Frame
2. Anvil
3. Spindle
4. Spindle lock

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Barrel or outside sleeve
6. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions
7. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.
The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.
14 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement:
It can be used for any external measurement.
Types of micrometer:
1. Outside micrometer, 2. Inside micrometer, 3.Depth micrometer, 4. Stick micrometer, 5. Screw thread

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

micrometer, 6. V ? anvil micrometer, 7. Blade type micrometer, 8. Dial micrometer, 9. Bench micrometer, 10.
Tape screw operated internal micrometer, 11. Groove micrometer, 12. Digital micrometer, 13.Differential screw
micrometer, 14.Adjustable range outside micrometer.
Ratchet stop mechanism:
The object of the ratchet stop is to ensure that same level of torque is applied on the spindle while

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measuring and the sense of the feel of operator is eliminated and consistent readings are obtained. By
providing this arrangement, the ratchet stop is made slip off when the torque applied to rotate the spindle
exceeds the set torque. Thus this provision ensures the application of same amount of torque during the
measurement.
Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) (mm)
Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Head scale reading
(HSR x LC) (mm)
Total Reading (PSR
+ HSR) (mm)
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.

Depth micrometer:
Depth micrometer is a sort of micrometer which is mainly used for measuring depth of holes, so it is
named as depth micrometer.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Parts:
1. Shoulder
2. Spindle
3. Spindle lock
4. Barrel or outside sleeve ? It has pitch scale.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions.
6. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.
The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.
15 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count:
Least Count = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale = 0.50/50
= 0.01 mm
Measurements:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

It can be used for measuring the depth of holes, slots and recessed areas. The pitch of the screw thread
is 0.5 mm. The least count is 0.01 mm. Shoulder acts as a reference surface and is held firmly and
perpendicular to the centre line of the hole. For large range of measurement extension rods are used. In the
barrel the scale is calibrated. The accuracy again depends upon the sense of touch.
Procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

First, calculate the least count of the instrument. Check the zero error. Measure the specimen note
down the main scale reading or the head scale reading. Note down the vernier or head scale coincidence with
main or pitch scale divisions.
Tabulation:
Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) (mm)
Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)
Head scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(HSR x LC) (mm)
Total Reading (PSR
+ HSR) (mm)

1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Universal bevel protractor:

Description:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Bevel protractor is an instrument for measuring the angle between the two faces of a specimen. It
consists of a base plate on which a circular scale is engraved. It is graduated in degrees. An adjustment plate
is attached to a circular plate containing the vernier scale. The adjustable blade can be locked in any position.
The circular plate has 360 division divided into four parts of 90 degrees each. The adjustable parts have 24
divisions of to the right and left sides of zero reading. These scales are used according to the position of the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

specimen with respect to movable scale.
Procedure:
1. Place the specimen whose taper is to be measured between the adjustable plate and movable
blade with one of its face parallel to the base.
2. Lock the adjustable plate in position and note down the main scale reading depending upon the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

direction of rotation of adjustable plate in clockwise or anticlockwise.
3. Note the VSC to the right of zero.
4. Multiply the VSC with the least count and add to MSR to obtain the actual reading.
Least count:
Least Count = 2 MSD ? 1 VSD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 MSD = 1
o
24 VSD = 46
o
=> 1 VSD = 23/12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LC = 2 ? 23/12 = 1/12
o
= 5? (five minutes)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:
Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Main scale reading
(MSR) (deg)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(VSR) (deg)
Total reading (MSR +
VSR)
(deg)
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.
The angle of scriber of the vernier height gauge =
Result:
Thus the various precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab are studied and the specimen
dimensions are recorded.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for linear, angular,
roundness and roughness measurements they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring
instrument according to a specific requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).
Application:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Quality Department


1. Define ? Metrology
2. Define ? Inspection

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. What are the needs of inspection in industries?
4. What are the various methods involving the measurement?
5. Define ? Precision
6. Define ? Accuracy
7. Define ? Calibration

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Define ? Repeatability
9. Define ? Magnification
10. Define ? Error
11. Define ? Systematic Error
12. Define ? Random Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. Define ? Parallax Error
14. Define ? Environmental Error
15. Define ? Cosine Error
Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

18 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.02 BUILD UP THE SLIP GAUGE FOR GIVEN DIMENSION
? A STUDY
Aim:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To build up the slip gauge for given dimension
Apparatus required:
1. Slip gauges set
2. Surface plate
3. Soft cloth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diagram:

Description:
Slip gauge are universally accepted standard of length in industry. They are the working standard for
linear dimension. These were invented by a Swedish Engineer, C.E. Johansson. They are used

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. For direct precise measurement where the accuracy of the workpiece demand it.
2. For use with high- magnification comparators to establish the size of the gauge blocks in general
use.
3. Gauge blocks are also used for many other purposes such as checking the accuracy of measuring
instrument or setting up a comparator to a specific dimension, enabling a batch of component to be

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

quickly and accurately checked or indeed in any situation where there is need to refer to standard of
known length these blocks are rectangular.
19 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Most gauge blocks are produced from high grade steel, hardened and established by a heat treatment

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

process to give a high degree of dimensional stability. Gauge blocks are also manufactured from tungsten
carbide which is an extremely hard and wear resistant material. The measuring faces have a lapped finish.
The faces are perfectly flat and parallel to one another with a high degree of accuracy. Each block has an
extremely high dimensional accuracy at 20
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C.
These slip gauge are available in variety of selected sets both in inch units and metric units. Letter ?E? is
used for inch units and ?M? is used for metric standard number of pieces in a set following the letter E or M. For
example EBI refers to a set whose blocks are in metric units and are 83 in number. Each block dimensions is
printed on anyone of its face itself the size of any required standard being made up by combining the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

appropriate number of these different size blocks.
If two gauges are slid and twisted together under pressure they will firmly join together. This process,
known as wringing, is very useful because it enables several gauge blocks to be assembled together to
produce a required size. In fact the success of precision measurement by slip gauges depends on the
phenomenon of wringing.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

First the gauge is oscillated slightly with very light pressure over other gauge so as to detect pressure at
any foreign particles between the surfaces. One gauge is placed perpendicular to other using standard
gauging pressure and rotary motion is applied until the blocks are lined up.
Procedure:
1. Build the given dimension by wringing minimum number of slip gauges.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Note the given dimension and choose the minimum possible slip gauge available in the set so as to
accommodate the last decimal value. The minimum slip gauge value dimension available i.e., 1.12
mm must be chosen followed by 1.5 mm thick gauge block.
3. Follow the above steps to build up the slip gauge of any dimension.
Precautions:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Slip gauges should be handled very carefully placed gently and should never be dropped.
2. Whenever a slip gauge is being removed from the set, its dimensions are noted and must be
replaced into the set at its appropriate place only.
3. Correct procedure must be followed in wringing and also in removing the gauge blocks.
4. They should be cleaned well before use and petroleum jelly is applied after use.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

20 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Range (mm) Increment (mm) No. of pieces

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total = ____________ Pieces
Total length of slip gauge = ________ mm
Given diameter Slip gauges used Obtained dimensions

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Slip gauge set is studied and the given dimensions are building up by wringing minimum number of slip
gauges.
Outcome:
Students will be able to select proper measuring instrument and know requirement of calibration, errors
in measurement etc. They can perform accurate measurements.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Why C.I. is preferred material for surface plates and tables?
2. Why V ? blocks are generally manufactured in pairs?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Why micrometer is required to be tested for accuracy?
4. Define ? Linear Measurement
5. List the linear measuring instrument according to their accuracy.
6. Define ? Least Count
7. What are the uses of vernier depth gauge?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. What are the uses of feeler gauges?
9. What are the uses of straight edge?
10. What are the uses of angle plate?
11. What are the uses of V ? block?
12. What are the uses of combination square?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. What precautions should be taken while using slip gauges?
14. What is wringing?
15. Why the slip gauges are termed as ?End standard?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

22 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.03 THREAD PARAMETERS MEASUREMENT USING
TOOL MAKERS MICROSCOPE
Aim:
To study the tool makers microscope and in the process measure the various dimensions of the given
specimen

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Apparatus required:
1. Tool makers microscope
2. Specimen
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
The tool maker?s microscope is designed for measurement of parts of complex forms; for example,
profile of a tool having external threads. It can also be used for measuring centre to centre distance of the
holes in any plane as well as the coordinates of the outline of a complex template gauge, using the
coordinates measuring system.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

23 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Basically it consists of an optical head which can be adjusted vertically along the ways of supporting
column. The optical head can be clamped at any position by a screw. On the work table (which as a circular
base in which there are graduations) the part to be inspected is placed. The table has a compound slide by

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

means of which the part can be measured. For giving these two movements, there are two micrometer screws
having thimble scales and verniers. At the back of the base light source is arranged that provides horizontal
beam of light, reflected from a mirror by 90 degrees upwards towards the table. The beam of light passes
through the transparent glass plate on which flat plates can be checked are placed. Observations are made
through the eyepiece of the optical head.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. Place the given specimen on the work table and switch on all the three light sources and adjust the
intensity of the light source until a clean image of the cross wires and specimen are seen through
the eyepiece.
2. Coincide one of the two extreme edges between which the measurement has to be taken with

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

vertical or horizontal cross wires and depending upon the other image coincide with the same cross
wires by moving the above device. Note the reading.The difference between the two readings gives
the value of the required measurement.
3. Note the experiment specimen and the readings.
4. Tabulate the different measurements measured from the specimen.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of thread parameters
Magnification =
S.No. Parameters
Magnified value
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Actual value
(mm)
1. Outer diameter (O.D)

2. Internal diameter (I.D)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Pitch

4. Flank angle

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Included angle of the tool was measured using tool maker?s microscope and various dimensions of the
given specimen are measured.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

24 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the various parameters of thread and select proper measuring

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

instrument and know requirement of calibration, errors in measurement etc. They can perform accurate
measurements.
Application:
1. Machine Shop
2. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by tool maker?s microscope?
2. What is the light used in tool maker?s microscope?
3. What are the various characteristics that you would measure in a screw thread?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. What are the instruments that are required for measuring screw thread?
5. Define ? Pitch
6. What are the causes of pitch error?
7. Define ? Flank
8. What are the effects of flank angle error?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. What is progressive error?
10. What is periodic error?
11. What is drunken error?
12. What is erratic error?
13. What are the applications of tool maker?s microscope?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. What are the limitations of tool maker?s microscope?
15. What are the advantages of tool maker?s microscope?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

25 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.04 CALIBRATION OF DIAL GAUGE USING SLIP GAUGE
Aim:
To find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge
Apparatus required:
Dial gauge, magnetic stand, slip gauge, and surface plate

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diagram:

Description:
The dial test indicator is a precision measuring instrument which can convert linear motion into angular
motion by means of transmission mechanics of rack and pinion and can be used to measure linear vibration

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

and errors of shape.
This instrument has the features such as good appearance, compact size, light weight, high precision,
reasonable construction, constant measuring face etc. Rigidity of all parts is excellent. Probe is tipped with
carbide balls. A shock proof mechanism is provided for those with larger measuring range.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

26 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Types of dial indicator:
1. Plunger type
2. Lever type

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Plunger type dial indicator has a resolution counter and each division in main scale is 0.01 mm. In lever
type dial test indicator is replaced by ball type stylus.
Procedure:
1. Fix the dial gauge to the stand rigidly and place the stand on the surface plate.
2. Set the plunger of dial gauge to first touch the upper surface of standard slip gauge and set indicator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

to zero.
3. Raise then the plunger by pulling the screw above the dial scale.
4. Place the standard slip gauge underneath the plunger.
5. Release the plunger and let it to touch the standard slip gauge.
6. Note the reading on the dial scale.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Formulae:
The standard error of dial gauge is calculated by the formula

Tabulation:
S.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Slip gauge reading ?x?
(mm)
Dial gauge reading
(mm)
(x? - x)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2


x? (x? - x)
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2


Result:
Thus the accuracy and standard error of dial gauge is found. The standard error of given dial gauge is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

__________.

27 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Outcome:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Students will be able to check the variation in tolerance during the inspection process of a
machined part, measure the deflection of a beam or ring under laboratory conditions, as well as many
other situations where a small measurement needs to be registered or indicated
Application:
1. Milling Machine

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Analog versus digital/electronic readout


1. What is comparator?
2. What are the types of comparators?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. What is the LC for comparators?
4. What are the applications of comparator?
5. What is meant by plunger?
6. What are the types of dial indicators?
7. Why a revolution counter is not provided in lever type dial test indicator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Draw a line diagram of the operating mechanism of plunger type dial test indicator.
9. Explain the term magnification of a dial indicator.
10. What are the uses of dial test indicator?
11. What are the practical applications of dial test indicator?
12. What precautions should be taken while using dial test indicator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. What are the desirable qualities of a dial test indicator?
14. What are the advantages of dial test indicator?
15. What are the limitations of dial test indicator?
16. Distinguish between comparator and measuring instrument.
17. What are the advantages of electrical comparator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

18. What are the advantages of optical comparator?
19. What are the uses of comparator?
20. What are the advantages and disadvantages of mechanical comparator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

28 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.05 DETERMINATION OF TAPER ANGLE BY SINE BAR
METHOD
Aim:
To measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Apparatus required:
Sine bar, slip gauges, dial gauge with stand, micrometer, surface plate, bevel protractor, vernier caliper
Diagram:

Description:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The sine bar principle uses the ratio of the length of two sides of a right triangle. It may be noted that
devices operating on sine principle are capable of ?self-generation?. The measurement is restricted to 45
o
from
accuracy point of view. Sine bar itself is not a measuring instrument.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Accuracy requirements of sine bar:
1. The axes of the rollers must be parallel to each other and the centre distance L must be precisely
known.
2. The sine bar must be flat and parallel to the plane connecting the axes of the rollers.
3. The rollers must be of identical diameters and must have within a close tolerance.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

29 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Fix the dial gaugeon the magnetic stand and place the magnetic stand on the surface plate.Check
the parallelism of the sine bar.
2. Place the given specimen above the sine bar and place the dial gauge on top of the specimen.
Adjustthe dial gauge for zero deflection.
3. Raise the front end of the sine bar with slip gauges until the work surface is parallel to the datum

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

surface.
4. Check the parallelism using dial gauge.
5. Measure the distance between the centres of the sine bar rollers as ?L? and note the height of the
slip gauge as ?H?.
6. Note the included angle of the specimen.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Formulae:
Sin ? = H/L where ? = Included angle of the specimen
H = Height of slip gauges
L = Distance between the centre of rollers
Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

S.No. L (mm) H (mm) Taper angle ( ?)
1.
2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
The taper angle of the given specimen using sine bar was found to be =
Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for angular measurements
and they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a specific

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).

Application:
1. Flat Surface
2. Granite

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

30 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. List out the various angle measuring instruments.
2. What is the working principles sine bar?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. How is a sine bar used to measure the angle?
4. What is the application of sine bar?
5. What is the material of sine bar?
6. Why sine bar is not preferred to use for measuring angles more than 45
0

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
7. What are the features of sine bar?
8. A 100 mm sine bar is to be set up to an angle of 33
0
, determine the slip gauges needed from 87

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

pieces set.
9. What are the various instruments used for measuring angles?
10. What is sine bar?
11. How sine bar is used for angle measurement?
12. Explain how sine bar is used to measure angle of small size component.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. Explain how sine bar is used to measure angle of large size component.
14. What are the various types of sine bar?
15. What are the limitations of sine bar?
16. What is sine center?
17. What is sine table?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

18. What are the possible sources of errors in angular measurement by sine bar?
19. What are angle gauges?
20. How angle gauges are used for measuring angles?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

31 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.06 DETERMINATION OF GEAR TOOTH THICKNESS
USING GEAR TOOTH VERNIER

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Aim:
To determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen and to draw the graph between the tooth
number and the error in thickness
Apparatus required:
Gear tooth vernier, specimen, surface plate and vernier caliper

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diagram:

Description:
The tooth thickness, in general, is measured at pitch circle since gear tooth thickness varies from the tip
to the base circle of the tooth. This is possible only when there is an arrangement to fix that position for this

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measurement by the gear tooth vernier. It has two vernier scales; one is vertical and other is horizontal.
Procedure:
32 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

1. Measure initially the outside diameter of the given gear specimen by means of a vertical calculation

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

of vernier caliper. Note the number of teeth. Calculate the module (m) using the formula.

M = OD/ (Z+2) where z ? number of teeth
M - Module
2. Calculate the theoretical tooth thickness (t) by t = z * m* sin (90/z).

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Set the vernier scale for the height and tighten.
4. Measure the thickness of each tooth using the horizontal scale. This is measured thickness. It can
be positive or negative.
H = m x [1+ Z/2 (1- Cos 90/Z)]
5. Calculate the error in the tooth thickness i.e,1. measured thickness ? Theoretical thickness

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Draw the graph between the tooth number and the error in thickness.
Tabulation:
Tooth
Number
Measured Thickness

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
Theoretical Thickness (mm)
Error in tooth thickness
(mm)
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
3

Tooth
Number

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MSR
(mm)
VSC

VSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
TR
(mm)
1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3

Graph:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Error



Tooth No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

33 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


Result:
The theoretical experiment value of gear tooth thickness is obtained and graph is drawn between error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

and tooth number in tooth thickness
Theoretical tooth thickness =
Experimental tooth thickness =
Error in tooth thickness =
Outcome:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Students will be able to understand the basic measurement units and able to calibrate various
measuring parameters of the gear.
Application:
1. Gear Component
2. Mining

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Calculate the setting of a gear tooth vernier caliper for a straight spur gear having 40 teeth and
module 4.
2. What is the importance of chordal depth?
3. Define ? Chordal width

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. How is the actual profile of the gear tooth determined?
5. What are the manufacturing errors in gear element?
6. Define ? Addendum
7. Define ? Dedendum
8. Define ? Flank of tooth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. Define ? Pitch
10. Define ? Pitch Circle
11. Define ? Crest of tooth
12. Define ? Root of tooth
13. Define ? Base Circle

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. Define ? Module
15. Define ? Angle of Obliquity


Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

34 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.07 MEASUREMENT OF THREAD PARAMETER USING
FLOATING CARRIAGE MICROMETER

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Aim:
To measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two wire
method
Apparatus required:
1. Floating carriage micrometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Standard wire
3. Given specimen (screw thread)
Diagram:

Description of floating carriage micrometer:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

It consists of three main units. A base casting carries a pair of centres on which threaded work piece is
to be mounted. Another carriage capable of moving towards centre is mounted exactly above. In this carriage
one head with thimble to measure up to 0.002 mm is provided and at the other side of head a fiducial indicator
is provided to indicate zero position.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

35 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. For two wire method, place the standard wire over a thread of the screw at opposite sides.
2. For three wire method, place two standard wires on two successive threads and the third wire
placed opposite sides of the thread.
3. Measure the diameter over wires (M) using floating carriage micrometer.
4. Repeat this procedure at various positions of the screw and take different readings.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Formulae:
1. For best wire size, d = P / 2 Cos (x/2)
Where, P = Pitch
d= wire size
x = angle between two threads

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= 60
o
for metric thread
2. Actual effective diameter, E.A = M ? 3d + 0.866 p
3. Nominal effective diameter, EN = D ? 0.648 p

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Max. wire size = 1.01 p
5. Min. wire size = 0.505 p
6. Best wire size = 0.577 p
M = Diameter over wires
P = Pitch of thread

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

For metric thread:
Actual effective diameter (EA) = M ? 3d + 0.866 p
Where d = actual diameter of wire
Determination of actual and nominal effective diameter of the screw thread:
Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Nominal
Diameter (D)
(mm)
Diameter over
wire ?M?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
Actual eff.
Diameter E.A
(mm)
Nominal eff.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diameter E.N
(mm)
Error in effective
diameter
(E.A ? E.N)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
1.
2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

36 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Result:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thus the actual and nominal effective diameter is measured using three wire method and the error in
effective diameter of screw is determined.
Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for roundness
measurements and they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

specific requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).
Application:
1. Wholse
2. Maxxis Rubber India

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Pitch
2. Define ? Flank Angle
3. What is plug gauge?
4. What is meant by micrometer?
5. What is meant by indicator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. What is best ? size wire?
7. Calculate the diameter of the best wire for an M 20 x 25 screws.
8. What are the different corrections to be applied in the measurement of effective diameter by the
method of wire?
9. What is floating carriage micrometer?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. What are the uses of floating carriage micrometer?
11. What are the methods are used for measuring effective diameter?
12. Define ? Effective Diameter
13. Define ? Major Diameter
14. Define ? Minor Diameter

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15. What are the effects of flank error?
16. Define ? Rake Angle
17. Define ? Pitch Cylinder
18. What are the effects of pitch error?
19. Define ? Pitch Diameter

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

20. What is meant by angle of thread?


Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

37 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.08 MEASUREMENT OF VARIOUS DIMENSIONS USING
COORDINATE MEASURING MACHINE
Aim:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. To study the construction and operation of coordinate measuring machine
2. To measure the specified dimensions of the given component
Instruments used:
Coordinate measuring machine, vernier calipers
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Theory:
A coordinate measuring machine (CMM) is a 3D device for measuring the physical and geometrical
characteristics of an object. This machine may be manually controlled by an operator or it may be computer
controlled. Measurements are defined by a probe attached to the three moving axis of this machine X, Y and Z

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

axes. A coordinate measuring machine (CMM) is also a device used in manufacturing and assembly
processes to test a part or assembly against the design intent. By precisely recording the X, Y and Z
coordinates of the target, points are generated which can be analyzed via regression algorithms for the
construction of features. These points are collected by using a probe that is positioned manually by an
38 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

operator or automatically via direct computer control (DCC). DCC CMMs can be programmed to repeatedly
measure identical parts, thus a CMM is a specialized form of industrial robot.
Parts:
Coordinate measuring machine include three main components:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. The main structures which include three axes of motion.
2. Probing system
3. Data collection and reduction system ? typically includes a machine controller, desktop computer
and application software
Machine description:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. In modern machines, the gantry type superstructure has two legs and is often called a bridge. This
moves freely along the granite table with one leg following a guide rail attached to one side of the
granite table. The opposite leg simply rests on the granite table following the vertical surface
contour.
2. Air bearings are fixed for ensuring friction free travel. Compressed air is forced through a series of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

very small holes in a flat bearing surface to provide a smooth but controlled air cushion on which the
CMM can move in a frictionless manner.
3. The movement of the bridge along the granite table forms one axis of the XY plane. The bridge of
the gantry contains a carriage which traverses between the inside and outside legs and forms the
other X or Y horizontal axis.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. The third axis of movement (Z axis) is provided by the addition of a vertical quill or spindle which
moves up and down through the center of the carriage. The touch probe forms the sensing device
on the end of the quill.
5. The movement of the X, Y and Z axes fully describes the measuring envelope. Some touch probes
are themselves powered rotary devices with the probe tip able to swivel vertically through 90

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

degrees and through a full 360 degrees rotation.
Uses:
They are generally used for:
1. Dimensional measurement
2. Profile measurement

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Angularity or orientation measurement
4. Depth mapping
5. Digitizing mapping
6. Shaft measurement
39 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The machines are available in a wide range of sizes and designs with a variety of different probe
technologies. They can be operated manually or automatically through direct computer control (DCC). They
are offered in various configurations such as bench top, free ? standing, handheld and portable.
Procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Take at least 8 points on sphere ball attached to the granite table.
2. Fix the object whose dimension needs to be measured using the jigs and fixtures.
3. Using joystick, move the probe whose tip is made of ruby slowly and carefully to the surface whose
measurements have to be taken.
4. Touch the probe at two places for measurement of a line (starting and ending point).

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Touch the probe at two places for measurement of a circular profile and for a cylinder touch the
probe at 8 points.
6. Measure the same profiles again with vernier calipers (length of line, circle diameter, cylinder
diameter) to compare the two readings.
Comments:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. The machine should be calibrated every time when it is being used.
2. While measuring the profiles, the probe should be moved very slowly as it may damage the ruby if
hit with a high force.
3. Care should be taken while performing experiment so that the granite table of the machines should
get any scratches.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. ?Retract distance? should be fixed according to the space available in the near vicinity of the profile
measurement area.
Observation:
Sl.No. Feature
CMM reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
Vernier reading
(mm)
Form error
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Difference in two
readings (mm)
1 Circle -1
2 Circle -2
3 Circle -3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4 Line
5 Arc
6
Cone - Diameter
Cone ? Vertex angle

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Cone ? Height
7
Cylinder ? Diameter
Cylinder ? Height

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

40 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Result:
Thus the different profile of given object are measured using coordinate measuring machine

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Students will be able to measures the geometry of physical objects by sensing discrete points on the
surface of the object with a probe and they will be able to know the Various types of probes are used in CMMs,
including mechanical, optical, laser, and white light.
Application:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Surface Measuring Equipment
2. Photo transistor

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What are the types of measuring machine?
2. What is CMM?
3. What are the types of CMM?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. What are the advantages of CMM?
5. What are the limitations of CMM?
6. What are the possible sources of error in CMM?
7. What is the use of universal measuring machine?
8. What are the applications of CMM?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. What is the working principle of three axis measuring machine?
10. What is image shearing microscope?
11. What is the use of electronic inspection and measuring machine?
12. What are the types of electronic inspection and measuring machine?
13. What is CMM probe?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. What are the three main probes are available?
15. What are the types of stylus?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

41 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.09 MEASUREMENT OF SURFACE ROUGHNESS UING
TALYSURF INSTRUMENT
Aim:
To measure the surface roughness using Talysurf instrument
Apparatus required:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Talysurf instrument, work piece, surface plate
Diagram:

Theory:
On any finished surface, imperfections are bound to be there and these take the form of a succession of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

hills and valleys which vary both in height and in spacing and result in a kind of texture which in appearance or
feel is often characteristic of the machining process and accompanying defects. The several kinds of
departures are there on the surface and these are due to various causes.

42 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Methods of measuring surface roughness:
1. Surface inspection of comparison methods
2. Direct instrument measurements
In comparative methods the surface texture is assessed by observation of the surface. But these

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

methods are not reliable as they can be misleading, if comparison is not made with surfaces produced by
same techniques. The various methods available under comparison method are: (i) Touch Inspection
(ii)Scratch Inspection (iii) Microscopic Inspection (iv) Visual Inspection (v) Surface Photographs (vi) Reflected
Light Intensity Direct Instrument Measurements enable to determine a numerical value of the surface finish of
any surface. Nearly all instruments used are stylus probe type of instruments. This operates on electrical

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

principle.
Procedure:
1. Place the finished component on the surface plate.
2. Fix the Talysurf tester to the vernier height gauge using adopter at a convenient height.
3. Make sure that the stylus probe touches the work piece.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Fix the sampling length in the tester.
5. Press the power button so that the probe moves on the surface to and fro.
6. Take the readings of the surface roughness directly from the instrument.
7. Repeat the above process for the remaining specimen and tabulate the readings.
Precautions:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. The surface to be tested should be cleaned properly.
2. The tester should be fixed to the height gauge properly so that the movement of the probe is exactly
parallel to the surface of work.
3. Make sure that the probe gently touches the work.
Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

S.No
Measurement roughness value,
?m
Sample direction Ra, Rz
Average Ra Average Rz Grade

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

43 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Result:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thus the surface roughness is checked for different specimens by Talysurf.
Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for roughness
measurements they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a specific
requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Machine Shop
2. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Actual Size?
2. What is meant by normal surface?
3. What is meant by profilo-graph?
4. What is Tomlinson surface meter?
5. What is meant by profile?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. What are the factors affecting surface roughness?
7. Why the surface texture is control?
8. Define ? Lay
9. Define ? Surface Texture
10. Define ? Flaws

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. What is sampling length?
12. What are the methods used for evaluating surface finish?
13. What is form factor?
14. What are the methods used for measuring surface finish?
15. How will you differentiate smooth surface from flat surface?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16. How surface finish is designated on drawings?
17. Define ? Primary Texture
18. Define ? Secondary Texture
19. What are the types of instrument used for measuring surface texture?
20. Define ? waviness

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

44 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.10 MEASUREMENT OF BORE USING DIAL BORE
INDICATOR AND TELESCOPIC GAUGE
Aim:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To determine the diameter of bore by using telescopic gauge and checking the same by using dial bore
indicator
Apparatus required:
Work piece, vernier caliper, telescopic gauge and dial gauge indicator set with anvil.
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice
1 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?



DEPARTMENT OF

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MECHANICAL ENGINEERING


ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

V SEMESTER - R 2013

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Register No. : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________


LABORATORY MANUAL

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


3 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DHANALAKSHMI


College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
2. To contribute to the promotion of Academic Excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

DEPARTMENT OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rendering the services to the global needs of engineering industries by educating students to become
professionally sound mechanical engineers of excellent caliber

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To produce mechanical engineering technocrats with a perfect knowledge intellectual and hands on
experience and to inculcate the spirit of moral values and ethics to serve the society

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MISSION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MISSION
VISION

VISION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals
To impart students with fundamental knowledge in mathematics and basic sciences that will mould

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

them to be successful professionals
2. Core competence
To provide students with sound knowledge in engineering and experimental skills to identify
complex software problems in industry and to develop a practical solution for them
3. Breadth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theory and practice which
enable them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and organization and to design
products requiring interdisciplinary skills
4. Professional skills
To bestow students with adequate training and provide opportunities to work as team that will build

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

up their communication skills, individual, leadership and supportive qualities and to enable them to
adapt and to work in ever changing technologies
5. Life-long learning
To develop the ability of students to establish themselves as professionals in mechanical
engineering and to create awareness about the need for lifelong learning and pursuing advanced

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

degrees

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

On completion of the B.E. (Mechanical) degree, the graduate will be able
a) To apply the basic knowledge of mathematics, science and engineering
b) To design and conduct experiments as well as to analyze and interpret data and apply the same in
the career or entrepreneurship
c) To design and develop innovative and creative software applications

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d) To understand a complex real world problem and develop an efficient practical solution
e) To create, select and apply appropriate techniques, resources, modern engineering and IT tools
f) To understand the role as a professional and give the best to the society
g) To develop a system that will meet expected needs within realistic constraints such as economical
environmental, social, political, ethical, safety and sustainability

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

h) To communicate effectively and make others understand exactly what they are trying to tell in both
verbal and written forms
i) To work in a team as a team member or a leader and make unique contributions and work with
coordination
j) To engage in lifelong learning and exhibit their technical skills

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

k) To develop and manage projects in multidisciplinary environments

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To familiar with different measurement equipment?s and use of this industry for quality inspection
List of Experiments
1. Tool Maker?s Microscope
2. Comparator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Sine Bar
4. Gear Tooth Vernier Caliper
5. Floating gauge Micrometer
6. Coordinate Measuring Machine
7. Surface Finish Measuring Equipment

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Vernier Height Gauge
9. Bore diameter measurement using telescope gauge
10. Bore diameter measurement using micrometer
11. Force Measurement
12. Torque Measurement

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. Temperature measurement
14. Autocollimator


1. Ability to handle different measurement tools and perform measurements in quality impulsion

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Learnt the usage of precision measuring instruments and practiced to take measurements
3. Learnt and practiced to build the required dimensions using slip gauge
4. Able to measure the various dimensions of the given specimen using the tool maker?s microscope
5. Able to find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge
6. Able to measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Learnt to determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen using Gear tooth vernier
8. Able to measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two
wire method
9. Learnt to study the construction and operation of coordinate measuring machine
10. Learnt to determine the diameter of bore by using telescopic gauge and dial bore indicator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. Able to measure the surface roughness using Talysurf instrument
12. Studied the characteristic between applied load and the output volt
13. Learnt the characteristics of developing torque and respective sensor output voltage
14. Studied the characteristics of thermocouple without compensation
15. Able to check the straightness & flatness of the given component by using Autocollimator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16. Learnt to measure the displacement using LVDT and to calibrate it with the millimeter scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OBJECTIVES

COURSE OUTCOMES

7 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

CONTENTS
Sl. No. Name of the Experiments Page No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CYCLE ? 1 EXPERIMENTS
1
Precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab ? A Study
7
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To build up the slip gauge for given dimension ? A Study
16
3
Thread parameters measurement using Tool Makers Microscope
20

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4
Calibration of dial gauge
23
5
Determination of taper angle by sine bar method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

26
6
Determination of gear tooth thickness using gear tooth vernier
29
7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement of thread parameters using floating carriage micrometer
32
CYCLE ? 2 EXPERIMENTS
8
Measurement of various dimensions using Coordinate Measuring Machine

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

35
9
Measurement of surface roughness
39
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement of bores using dial bore indicator and telescopic gauge
42
11
Force measurement using load cell
46

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12
Torque measurement using strain gauge
49
13
Temperature measurement using thermocouple

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

53
14
Measurement of alignment using autocollimator
56
ADDITIONAL EXPERIMENT BEYOND THE SYLLABUS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15
Thread parameters measurement using profile projector
60
16
Displacement measurement ? linear variable differential transducer (LVDT)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

62
PROJECT WORK
65

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.01 PRECISION MEASURING INSTRUMENT YSED IN
METROLOGY LAB ? A STUDY
Aim:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To study the following instruments and their usage for measuring dimensions of given specimen
1. Vernier caliper
2. Micrometer
3. Vernier height gauge
4. Depth micrometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Universal bevel protractor
Apparatus required:
Surface plate, specimen and above instruments
Vernier caliper:
The principle of vernier caliper is to use the minor difference between the sizes two scales or divisions

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

for measurement. The difference between them can be utilized to enhance the accuracy of measurement. The
vernier caliper essentially consists of two steel rules, sliding along each other.
Parts:
Different parts of the vernier caliper are
1. Beam ? It has main scale.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Fixed jaw
3. Sliding or Moving jaw ? It has vernier scale and sliding jaw locking screw.
4. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw knife
edges for internal measurement.
5. Stem or depth bar for depth measurement

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count:
Least count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm
1 VSD = 0.98 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm

10 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ID

DEPTH

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OD
Measurement:
Given Vernier caliper can be used for external, internal depth, slot and step measurement.
Measurement principle:
When both jaws contact each other scale shows the zero reading. The finer adjustment of movable jaw

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

can be done by the fine adjustment screw. First the whole movable jaw assembly is adjusted so that the two
measuring tips just touch the part to be measured. Then the fine adjustment clamp locking screw is tightened.
Final adjustment depending upon the sense of correct feel is made by the adjusting screw. After final
adjustment has been made sliding jaw locking screw is also tightened and the reading is noted.
All the parts of the Vernier caliper are made of good quality steel and measuring faces are hardened.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Types of vernier:
Vernier caliper, electronic vernier caliper, vernier depth caliper


11 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:

Main scale
reading (MSR)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale
reading (VSR) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total reading (MSR
+ VSR)
(mm)

OD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ID

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Depth


Vernier height gauge:
Vernier height gauge is a sort of vernier caliper equipped with a special instrument suitable for height

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measurement. It is always kept on the surface plate and the use of the surfaces plates as datum surfaces is
very essential.
Least count:
Least Count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

50 VSD = 49 mm
1 VSD = 0.98 mm
Least Count (LC) = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm
Parts:
1. Base

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Beam ? It has main scale.
3. Slider ? It has a vernier scale and slider locking screw.
4. Scriber
5. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


Material:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

All the parts of vernier are made of good quality steel and the measuring faces hardened.
Types of vernier gauge:
1. Analog vernier height gauge
2. Digital vernier height gauge
3. Electronic vernier height gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Main scale reading
(MSR)(mm)
Vernier scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale reading
(VSR)(mm)
Total reading (MSR +
VSR)(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
2.
3.

13 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outside micrometer:
The micrometer essentially consists of an accurate screw having about 10 or 20 threads per cm. The
end of the screw forms one measuring tip and other measuring tip is constituted by a stationary anvil in the
base of the frame. The screw is threaded for certain length and is plain afterwards. The plain portion is called

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

spindle and its end is the measuring surface. The spindle is advanced or retracted by turning a thimble
connected to a spindle. The spindle is a slide fit over the barrel and barrel is the fixed part attached with the
frame. The barrel & thimble are graduated. The pitch of the screw threads is 0.5 mm.

Least count:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least Count (LC) = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale
= 0.5 / 50 = 0.01 mm
Parts:
1. Frame
2. Anvil

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Spindle
4. Spindle lock
5. Barrel or outside sleeve
6. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions
7. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.
14 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Measurement:
It can be used for any external measurement.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Types of micrometer:
1. Outside micrometer, 2. Inside micrometer, 3.Depth micrometer, 4. Stick micrometer, 5. Screw thread
micrometer, 6. V ? anvil micrometer, 7. Blade type micrometer, 8. Dial micrometer, 9. Bench micrometer, 10.
Tape screw operated internal micrometer, 11. Groove micrometer, 12. Digital micrometer, 13.Differential screw
micrometer, 14.Adjustable range outside micrometer.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Ratchet stop mechanism:
The object of the ratchet stop is to ensure that same level of torque is applied on the spindle while
measuring and the sense of the feel of operator is eliminated and consistent readings are obtained. By
providing this arrangement, the ratchet stop is made slip off when the torque applied to rotate the spindle
exceeds the set torque. Thus this provision ensures the application of same amount of torque during the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measurement.
Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)
Head scale reading
(HSR x LC) (mm)
Total Reading (PSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

+ HSR) (mm)
1.
2.

Depth micrometer:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Depth micrometer is a sort of micrometer which is mainly used for measuring depth of holes, so it is
named as depth micrometer.
Parts:
1. Shoulder
2. Spindle

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Spindle lock
4. Barrel or outside sleeve ? It has pitch scale.
5. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions.
6. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.
The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


Least count:
Least Count = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale = 0.50/50

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= 0.01 mm
Measurements:
It can be used for measuring the depth of holes, slots and recessed areas. The pitch of the screw thread
is 0.5 mm. The least count is 0.01 mm. Shoulder acts as a reference surface and is held firmly and
perpendicular to the centre line of the hole. For large range of measurement extension rods are used. In the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

barrel the scale is calibrated. The accuracy again depends upon the sense of touch.
Procedure:
First, calculate the least count of the instrument. Check the zero error. Measure the specimen note
down the main scale reading or the head scale reading. Note down the vernier or head scale coincidence with
main or pitch scale divisions.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) (mm)
Head Scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Coincidence (HSC)
Head scale reading
(HSR x LC) (mm)
Total Reading (PSR
+ HSR) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.


2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Universal bevel protractor:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
Bevel protractor is an instrument for measuring the angle between the two faces of a specimen. It
consists of a base plate on which a circular scale is engraved. It is graduated in degrees. An adjustment plate
is attached to a circular plate containing the vernier scale. The adjustable blade can be locked in any position.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The circular plate has 360 division divided into four parts of 90 degrees each. The adjustable parts have 24
divisions of to the right and left sides of zero reading. These scales are used according to the position of the
specimen with respect to movable scale.
Procedure:
1. Place the specimen whose taper is to be measured between the adjustable plate and movable

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

blade with one of its face parallel to the base.
2. Lock the adjustable plate in position and note down the main scale reading depending upon the
direction of rotation of adjustable plate in clockwise or anticlockwise.
3. Note the VSC to the right of zero.
4. Multiply the VSC with the least count and add to MSR to obtain the actual reading.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count:
Least Count = 2 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1
o
24 VSD = 46

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
=> 1 VSD = 23/12
LC = 2 ? 23/12 = 1/12
o
= 5? (five minutes)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Main scale reading
(MSR) (deg)
Vernier scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale reading
(VSR) (deg)
Total reading (MSR +
VSR)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(deg)
1.
2.
The angle of scriber of the vernier height gauge =
Result:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thus the various precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab are studied and the specimen
dimensions are recorded.
Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for linear, angular,
roundness and roughness measurements they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

instrument according to a specific requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).
Application:
1. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Metrology
2. Define ? Inspection
3. What are the needs of inspection in industries?
4. What are the various methods involving the measurement?
5. Define ? Precision

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Define ? Accuracy
7. Define ? Calibration
8. Define ? Repeatability
9. Define ? Magnification
10. Define ? Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. Define ? Systematic Error
12. Define ? Random Error
13. Define ? Parallax Error
14. Define ? Environmental Error
15. Define ? Cosine Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

18 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.02 BUILD UP THE SLIP GAUGE FOR GIVEN DIMENSION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? A STUDY
Aim:
To build up the slip gauge for given dimension
Apparatus required:
1. Slip gauges set

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Surface plate
3. Soft cloth
Diagram:

Description:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Slip gauge are universally accepted standard of length in industry. They are the working standard for
linear dimension. These were invented by a Swedish Engineer, C.E. Johansson. They are used
1. For direct precise measurement where the accuracy of the workpiece demand it.
2. For use with high- magnification comparators to establish the size of the gauge blocks in general
use.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Gauge blocks are also used for many other purposes such as checking the accuracy of measuring
instrument or setting up a comparator to a specific dimension, enabling a batch of component to be
quickly and accurately checked or indeed in any situation where there is need to refer to standard of
known length these blocks are rectangular.
19 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Most gauge blocks are produced from high grade steel, hardened and established by a heat treatment
process to give a high degree of dimensional stability. Gauge blocks are also manufactured from tungsten
carbide which is an extremely hard and wear resistant material. The measuring faces have a lapped finish.
The faces are perfectly flat and parallel to one another with a high degree of accuracy. Each block has an

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

extremely high dimensional accuracy at 20
o
C.
These slip gauge are available in variety of selected sets both in inch units and metric units. Letter ?E? is
used for inch units and ?M? is used for metric standard number of pieces in a set following the letter E or M. For

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

example EBI refers to a set whose blocks are in metric units and are 83 in number. Each block dimensions is
printed on anyone of its face itself the size of any required standard being made up by combining the
appropriate number of these different size blocks.
If two gauges are slid and twisted together under pressure they will firmly join together. This process,
known as wringing, is very useful because it enables several gauge blocks to be assembled together to

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

produce a required size. In fact the success of precision measurement by slip gauges depends on the
phenomenon of wringing.
First the gauge is oscillated slightly with very light pressure over other gauge so as to detect pressure at
any foreign particles between the surfaces. One gauge is placed perpendicular to other using standard
gauging pressure and rotary motion is applied until the blocks are lined up.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. Build the given dimension by wringing minimum number of slip gauges.
2. Note the given dimension and choose the minimum possible slip gauge available in the set so as to
accommodate the last decimal value. The minimum slip gauge value dimension available i.e., 1.12
mm must be chosen followed by 1.5 mm thick gauge block.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Follow the above steps to build up the slip gauge of any dimension.
Precautions:
1. Slip gauges should be handled very carefully placed gently and should never be dropped.
2. Whenever a slip gauge is being removed from the set, its dimensions are noted and must be
replaced into the set at its appropriate place only.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Correct procedure must be followed in wringing and also in removing the gauge blocks.
4. They should be cleaned well before use and petroleum jelly is applied after use.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

20 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:
Range (mm) Increment (mm) No. of pieces

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total = ____________ Pieces
Total length of slip gauge = ________ mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Given diameter Slip gauges used Obtained dimensions

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Slip gauge set is studied and the given dimensions are building up by wringing minimum number of slip
gauges.
Outcome:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Students will be able to select proper measuring instrument and know requirement of calibration, errors
in measurement etc. They can perform accurate measurements.
Application:
1. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Why C.I. is preferred material for surface plates and tables?
2. Why V ? blocks are generally manufactured in pairs?
3. Why micrometer is required to be tested for accuracy?
4. Define ? Linear Measurement
5. List the linear measuring instrument according to their accuracy.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Define ? Least Count
7. What are the uses of vernier depth gauge?
8. What are the uses of feeler gauges?
9. What are the uses of straight edge?
10. What are the uses of angle plate?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. What are the uses of V ? block?
12. What are the uses of combination square?
13. What precautions should be taken while using slip gauges?
14. What is wringing?
15. Why the slip gauges are termed as ?End standard?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

22 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.03 THREAD PARAMETERS MEASUREMENT USING
TOOL MAKERS MICROSCOPE
Aim:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To study the tool makers microscope and in the process measure the various dimensions of the given
specimen
Apparatus required:
1. Tool makers microscope
2. Specimen

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diagram:

Description:
The tool maker?s microscope is designed for measurement of parts of complex forms; for example,
profile of a tool having external threads. It can also be used for measuring centre to centre distance of the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

holes in any plane as well as the coordinates of the outline of a complex template gauge, using the
coordinates measuring system.
23 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Basically it consists of an optical head which can be adjusted vertically along the ways of supporting

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

column. The optical head can be clamped at any position by a screw. On the work table (which as a circular
base in which there are graduations) the part to be inspected is placed. The table has a compound slide by
means of which the part can be measured. For giving these two movements, there are two micrometer screws
having thimble scales and verniers. At the back of the base light source is arranged that provides horizontal
beam of light, reflected from a mirror by 90 degrees upwards towards the table. The beam of light passes

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

through the transparent glass plate on which flat plates can be checked are placed. Observations are made
through the eyepiece of the optical head.
Procedure:
1. Place the given specimen on the work table and switch on all the three light sources and adjust the
intensity of the light source until a clean image of the cross wires and specimen are seen through

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the eyepiece.
2. Coincide one of the two extreme edges between which the measurement has to be taken with
vertical or horizontal cross wires and depending upon the other image coincide with the same cross
wires by moving the above device. Note the reading.The difference between the two readings gives
the value of the required measurement.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Note the experiment specimen and the readings.
4. Tabulate the different measurements measured from the specimen.
Determination of thread parameters
Magnification =
S.No. Parameters

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Magnified value
(mm)
Actual value
(mm)
1. Outer diameter (O.D)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Internal diameter (I.D)

3. Pitch

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Flank angle


Result:
Included angle of the tool was measured using tool maker?s microscope and various dimensions of the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

given specimen are measured.


24 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the various parameters of thread and select proper measuring
instrument and know requirement of calibration, errors in measurement etc. They can perform accurate
measurements.
Application:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Machine Shop
2. Quality Department


1. What is meant by tool maker?s microscope?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. What is the light used in tool maker?s microscope?
3. What are the various characteristics that you would measure in a screw thread?
4. What are the instruments that are required for measuring screw thread?
5. Define ? Pitch
6. What are the causes of pitch error?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Define ? Flank
8. What are the effects of flank angle error?
9. What is progressive error?
10. What is periodic error?
11. What is drunken error?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. What is erratic error?
13. What are the applications of tool maker?s microscope?
14. What are the limitations of tool maker?s microscope?
15. What are the advantages of tool maker?s microscope?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

25 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.04 CALIBRATION OF DIAL GAUGE USING SLIP GAUGE
Aim:
To find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Apparatus required:
Dial gauge, magnetic stand, slip gauge, and surface plate
Diagram:

Description:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The dial test indicator is a precision measuring instrument which can convert linear motion into angular
motion by means of transmission mechanics of rack and pinion and can be used to measure linear vibration
and errors of shape.
This instrument has the features such as good appearance, compact size, light weight, high precision,
reasonable construction, constant measuring face etc. Rigidity of all parts is excellent. Probe is tipped with

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

carbide balls. A shock proof mechanism is provided for those with larger measuring range.

26 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Types of dial indicator:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Plunger type
2. Lever type
Plunger type dial indicator has a resolution counter and each division in main scale is 0.01 mm. In lever
type dial test indicator is replaced by ball type stylus.
Procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Fix the dial gauge to the stand rigidly and place the stand on the surface plate.
2. Set the plunger of dial gauge to first touch the upper surface of standard slip gauge and set indicator
to zero.
3. Raise then the plunger by pulling the screw above the dial scale.
4. Place the standard slip gauge underneath the plunger.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Release the plunger and let it to touch the standard slip gauge.
6. Note the reading on the dial scale.
Formulae:
The standard error of dial gauge is calculated by the formula

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
S.No.
Slip gauge reading ?x?
(mm)
Dial gauge reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
(x? - x)
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x? (x? - x)
1.
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Thus the accuracy and standard error of dial gauge is found. The standard error of given dial gauge is
__________.

27 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Students will be able to check the variation in tolerance during the inspection process of a
machined part, measure the deflection of a beam or ring under laboratory conditions, as well as many
other situations where a small measurement needs to be registered or indicated

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Milling Machine
2. Analog versus digital/electronic readout

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is comparator?
2. What are the types of comparators?
3. What is the LC for comparators?
4. What are the applications of comparator?
5. What is meant by plunger?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. What are the types of dial indicators?
7. Why a revolution counter is not provided in lever type dial test indicator?
8. Draw a line diagram of the operating mechanism of plunger type dial test indicator.
9. Explain the term magnification of a dial indicator.
10. What are the uses of dial test indicator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. What are the practical applications of dial test indicator?
12. What precautions should be taken while using dial test indicator?
13. What are the desirable qualities of a dial test indicator?
14. What are the advantages of dial test indicator?
15. What are the limitations of dial test indicator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16. Distinguish between comparator and measuring instrument.
17. What are the advantages of electrical comparator?
18. What are the advantages of optical comparator?
19. What are the uses of comparator?
20. What are the advantages and disadvantages of mechanical comparator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

28 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.05 DETERMINATION OF TAPER ANGLE BY SINE BAR
METHOD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Aim:
To measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare
Apparatus required:
Sine bar, slip gauges, dial gauge with stand, micrometer, surface plate, bevel protractor, vernier caliper
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
The sine bar principle uses the ratio of the length of two sides of a right triangle. It may be noted that
devices operating on sine principle are capable of ?self-generation?. The measurement is restricted to 45
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

from
accuracy point of view. Sine bar itself is not a measuring instrument.
Accuracy requirements of sine bar:
1. The axes of the rollers must be parallel to each other and the centre distance L must be precisely
known.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. The sine bar must be flat and parallel to the plane connecting the axes of the rollers.
3. The rollers must be of identical diameters and must have within a close tolerance.


29 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. Fix the dial gaugeon the magnetic stand and place the magnetic stand on the surface plate.Check
the parallelism of the sine bar.
2. Place the given specimen above the sine bar and place the dial gauge on top of the specimen.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Adjustthe dial gauge for zero deflection.
3. Raise the front end of the sine bar with slip gauges until the work surface is parallel to the datum
surface.
4. Check the parallelism using dial gauge.
5. Measure the distance between the centres of the sine bar rollers as ?L? and note the height of the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

slip gauge as ?H?.
6. Note the included angle of the specimen.
Formulae:
Sin ? = H/L where ? = Included angle of the specimen
H = Height of slip gauges

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

L = Distance between the centre of rollers
Tabulation:
S.No. L (mm) H (mm) Taper angle ( ?)
1.
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.

Result:
The taper angle of the given specimen using sine bar was found to be =
Outcome:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for angular measurements
and they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a specific
requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).

Application:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Flat Surface
2. Granite


30 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. List out the various angle measuring instruments.
2. What is the working principles sine bar?
3. How is a sine bar used to measure the angle?
4. What is the application of sine bar?
5. What is the material of sine bar?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Why sine bar is not preferred to use for measuring angles more than 45
0
?
7. What are the features of sine bar?
8. A 100 mm sine bar is to be set up to an angle of 33

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

0
, determine the slip gauges needed from 87
pieces set.
9. What are the various instruments used for measuring angles?
10. What is sine bar?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. How sine bar is used for angle measurement?
12. Explain how sine bar is used to measure angle of small size component.
13. Explain how sine bar is used to measure angle of large size component.
14. What are the various types of sine bar?
15. What are the limitations of sine bar?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16. What is sine center?
17. What is sine table?
18. What are the possible sources of errors in angular measurement by sine bar?
19. What are angle gauges?
20. How angle gauges are used for measuring angles?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

31 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.06 DETERMINATION OF GEAR TOOTH THICKNESS
USING GEAR TOOTH VERNIER
Aim:
To determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen and to draw the graph between the tooth
number and the error in thickness

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Apparatus required:
Gear tooth vernier, specimen, surface plate and vernier caliper
Diagram:

Description:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The tooth thickness, in general, is measured at pitch circle since gear tooth thickness varies from the tip
to the base circle of the tooth. This is possible only when there is an arrangement to fix that position for this
measurement by the gear tooth vernier. It has two vernier scales; one is vertical and other is horizontal.
Procedure:
32 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Measure initially the outside diameter of the given gear specimen by means of a vertical calculation
of vernier caliper. Note the number of teeth. Calculate the module (m) using the formula.

M = OD/ (Z+2) where z ? number of teeth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M - Module
2. Calculate the theoretical tooth thickness (t) by t = z * m* sin (90/z).
3. Set the vernier scale for the height and tighten.
4. Measure the thickness of each tooth using the horizontal scale. This is measured thickness. It can
be positive or negative.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

H = m x [1+ Z/2 (1- Cos 90/Z)]
5. Calculate the error in the tooth thickness i.e,1. measured thickness ? Theoretical thickness
6. Draw the graph between the tooth number and the error in thickness.
Tabulation:
Tooth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Number
Measured Thickness
(mm)
Theoretical Thickness (mm)
Error in tooth thickness

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
1
2
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tooth
Number
MSR
(mm)
VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSR
(mm)
TR
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1
2
3

Graph:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tooth No.
33 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
The theoretical experiment value of gear tooth thickness is obtained and graph is drawn between error
and tooth number in tooth thickness
Theoretical tooth thickness =
Experimental tooth thickness =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Error in tooth thickness =
Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the basic measurement units and able to calibrate various
measuring parameters of the gear.
Application:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Gear Component
2. Mining

1. Calculate the setting of a gear tooth vernier caliper for a straight spur gear having 40 teeth and
module 4.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. What is the importance of chordal depth?
3. Define ? Chordal width
4. How is the actual profile of the gear tooth determined?
5. What are the manufacturing errors in gear element?
6. Define ? Addendum

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Define ? Dedendum
8. Define ? Flank of tooth
9. Define ? Pitch
10. Define ? Pitch Circle
11. Define ? Crest of tooth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. Define ? Root of tooth
13. Define ? Base Circle
14. Define ? Module
15. Define ? Angle of Obliquity

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

34 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.07 MEASUREMENT OF THREAD PARAMETER USING
FLOATING CARRIAGE MICROMETER
Aim:
To measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two wire
method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Apparatus required:
1. Floating carriage micrometer
2. Standard wire
3. Given specimen (screw thread)
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description of floating carriage micrometer:
It consists of three main units. A base casting carries a pair of centres on which threaded work piece is
to be mounted. Another carriage capable of moving towards centre is mounted exactly above. In this carriage
one head with thimble to measure up to 0.002 mm is provided and at the other side of head a fiducial indicator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

is provided to indicate zero position.



35 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. For two wire method, place the standard wire over a thread of the screw at opposite sides.
2. For three wire method, place two standard wires on two successive threads and the third wire
placed opposite sides of the thread.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Measure the diameter over wires (M) using floating carriage micrometer.
4. Repeat this procedure at various positions of the screw and take different readings.
Formulae:
1. For best wire size, d = P / 2 Cos (x/2)
Where, P = Pitch

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d= wire size
x = angle between two threads
= 60
o
for metric thread

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Actual effective diameter, E.A = M ? 3d + 0.866 p
3. Nominal effective diameter, EN = D ? 0.648 p
4. Max. wire size = 1.01 p
5. Min. wire size = 0.505 p
6. Best wire size = 0.577 p

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M = Diameter over wires
P = Pitch of thread
For metric thread:
Actual effective diameter (EA) = M ? 3d + 0.866 p
Where d = actual diameter of wire

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of actual and nominal effective diameter of the screw thread:
Sl.No.
Nominal
Diameter (D)
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diameter over
wire ?M?
(mm)
Actual eff.
Diameter E.A

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
Nominal eff.
Diameter E.N
(mm)
Error in effective

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

diameter
(E.A ? E.N)
(mm)
1.
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.



36 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Thus the actual and nominal effective diameter is measured using three wire method and the error in
effective diameter of screw is determined.
Outcome:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for roundness
measurements and they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a
specific requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).
Application:
1. Wholse

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Maxxis Rubber India

1. Define ? Pitch
2. Define ? Flank Angle
3. What is plug gauge?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. What is meant by micrometer?
5. What is meant by indicator?
6. What is best ? size wire?
7. Calculate the diameter of the best wire for an M 20 x 25 screws.
8. What are the different corrections to be applied in the measurement of effective diameter by the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

method of wire?
9. What is floating carriage micrometer?
10. What are the uses of floating carriage micrometer?
11. What are the methods are used for measuring effective diameter?
12. Define ? Effective Diameter

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. Define ? Major Diameter
14. Define ? Minor Diameter
15. What are the effects of flank error?
16. Define ? Rake Angle
17. Define ? Pitch Cylinder

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

18. What are the effects of pitch error?
19. Define ? Pitch Diameter
20. What is meant by angle of thread?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

37 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.08 MEASUREMENT OF VARIOUS DIMENSIONS USING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COORDINATE MEASURING MACHINE
Aim:
1. To study the construction and operation of coordinate measuring machine
2. To measure the specified dimensions of the given component
Instruments used:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Coordinate measuring machine, vernier calipers
Diagram:

Theory:
A coordinate measuring machine (CMM) is a 3D device for measuring the physical and geometrical

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

characteristics of an object. This machine may be manually controlled by an operator or it may be computer
controlled. Measurements are defined by a probe attached to the three moving axis of this machine X, Y and Z
axes. A coordinate measuring machine (CMM) is also a device used in manufacturing and assembly
processes to test a part or assembly against the design intent. By precisely recording the X, Y and Z
coordinates of the target, points are generated which can be analyzed via regression algorithms for the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

construction of features. These points are collected by using a probe that is positioned manually by an
38 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

operator or automatically via direct computer control (DCC). DCC CMMs can be programmed to repeatedly
measure identical parts, thus a CMM is a specialized form of industrial robot.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Parts:
Coordinate measuring machine include three main components:
1. The main structures which include three axes of motion.
2. Probing system
3. Data collection and reduction system ? typically includes a machine controller, desktop computer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

and application software
Machine description:
1. In modern machines, the gantry type superstructure has two legs and is often called a bridge. This
moves freely along the granite table with one leg following a guide rail attached to one side of the
granite table. The opposite leg simply rests on the granite table following the vertical surface

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

contour.
2. Air bearings are fixed for ensuring friction free travel. Compressed air is forced through a series of
very small holes in a flat bearing surface to provide a smooth but controlled air cushion on which the
CMM can move in a frictionless manner.
3. The movement of the bridge along the granite table forms one axis of the XY plane. The bridge of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the gantry contains a carriage which traverses between the inside and outside legs and forms the
other X or Y horizontal axis.
4. The third axis of movement (Z axis) is provided by the addition of a vertical quill or spindle which
moves up and down through the center of the carriage. The touch probe forms the sensing device
on the end of the quill.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. The movement of the X, Y and Z axes fully describes the measuring envelope. Some touch probes
are themselves powered rotary devices with the probe tip able to swivel vertically through 90
degrees and through a full 360 degrees rotation.
Uses:
They are generally used for:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Dimensional measurement
2. Profile measurement
3. Angularity or orientation measurement
4. Depth mapping
5. Digitizing mapping

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Shaft measurement
39 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

The machines are available in a wide range of sizes and designs with a variety of different probe
technologies. They can be operated manually or automatically through direct computer control (DCC). They

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

are offered in various configurations such as bench top, free ? standing, handheld and portable.
Procedure:
1. Take at least 8 points on sphere ball attached to the granite table.
2. Fix the object whose dimension needs to be measured using the jigs and fixtures.
3. Using joystick, move the probe whose tip is made of ruby slowly and carefully to the surface whose

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measurements have to be taken.
4. Touch the probe at two places for measurement of a line (starting and ending point).
5. Touch the probe at two places for measurement of a circular profile and for a cylinder touch the
probe at 8 points.
6. Measure the same profiles again with vernier calipers (length of line, circle diameter, cylinder

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

diameter) to compare the two readings.
Comments:
1. The machine should be calibrated every time when it is being used.
2. While measuring the profiles, the probe should be moved very slowly as it may damage the ruby if
hit with a high force.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Care should be taken while performing experiment so that the granite table of the machines should
get any scratches.
4. ?Retract distance? should be fixed according to the space available in the near vicinity of the profile
measurement area.
Observation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No. Feature
CMM reading
(mm)
Vernier reading
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Form error
(mm)
Difference in two
readings (mm)
1 Circle -1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2 Circle -2
3 Circle -3
4 Line
5 Arc
6

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Cone - Diameter
Cone ? Vertex angle
Cone ? Height
7
Cylinder ? Diameter

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Cylinder ? Height


40 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Thus the different profile of given object are measured using coordinate measuring machine
Outcome:
Students will be able to measures the geometry of physical objects by sensing discrete points on the
surface of the object with a probe and they will be able to know the Various types of probes are used in CMMs,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

including mechanical, optical, laser, and white light.
Application:
1. Surface Measuring Equipment
2. Photo transistor

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What are the types of measuring machine?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. What is CMM?
3. What are the types of CMM?
4. What are the advantages of CMM?
5. What are the limitations of CMM?
6. What are the possible sources of error in CMM?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. What is the use of universal measuring machine?
8. What are the applications of CMM?
9. What is the working principle of three axis measuring machine?
10. What is image shearing microscope?
11. What is the use of electronic inspection and measuring machine?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. What are the types of electronic inspection and measuring machine?
13. What is CMM probe?
14. What are the three main probes are available?
15. What are the types of stylus?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

41 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.09 MEASUREMENT OF SURFACE ROUGHNESS UING
TALYSURF INSTRUMENT
Aim:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To measure the surface roughness using Talysurf instrument
Apparatus required:
Talysurf instrument, work piece, surface plate
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Theory:
On any finished surface, imperfections are bound to be there and these take the form of a succession of
hills and valleys which vary both in height and in spacing and result in a kind of texture which in appearance or
feel is often characteristic of the machining process and accompanying defects. The several kinds of
departures are there on the surface and these are due to various causes.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

42 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Methods of measuring surface roughness:
1. Surface inspection of comparison methods

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Direct instrument measurements
In comparative methods the surface texture is assessed by observation of the surface. But these
methods are not reliable as they can be misleading, if comparison is not made with surfaces produced by
same techniques. The various methods available under comparison method are: (i) Touch Inspection
(ii)Scratch Inspection (iii) Microscopic Inspection (iv) Visual Inspection (v) Surface Photographs (vi) Reflected

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Light Intensity Direct Instrument Measurements enable to determine a numerical value of the surface finish of
any surface. Nearly all instruments used are stylus probe type of instruments. This operates on electrical
principle.
Procedure:
1. Place the finished component on the surface plate.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Fix the Talysurf tester to the vernier height gauge using adopter at a convenient height.
3. Make sure that the stylus probe touches the work piece.
4. Fix the sampling length in the tester.
5. Press the power button so that the probe moves on the surface to and fro.
6. Take the readings of the surface roughness directly from the instrument.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Repeat the above process for the remaining specimen and tabulate the readings.
Precautions:
1. The surface to be tested should be cleaned properly.
2. The tester should be fixed to the height gauge properly so that the movement of the probe is exactly
parallel to the surface of work.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Make sure that the probe gently touches the work.
Tabulation:
S.No
Measurement roughness value,
?m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sample direction Ra, Rz
Average Ra Average Rz Grade
1.
2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

43 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Thus the surface roughness is checked for different specimens by Talysurf.
Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for roughness

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measurements they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a specific
requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).
Application:
1. Machine Shop
2. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Actual Size?
2. What is meant by normal surface?
3. What is meant by profilo-graph?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. What is Tomlinson surface meter?
5. What is meant by profile?
6. What are the factors affecting surface roughness?
7. Why the surface texture is control?
8. Define ? Lay

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. Define ? Surface Texture
10. Define ? Flaws
11. What is sampling length?
12. What are the methods used for evaluating surface finish?
13. What is form factor?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. What are the methods used for measuring surface finish?
15. How will you differentiate smooth surface from flat surface?
16. How surface finish is designated on drawings?
17. Define ? Primary Texture
18. Define ? Secondary Texture

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

19. What are the types of instrument used for measuring surface texture?
20. Define ? waviness

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

44 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.10 MEASUREMENT OF BORE USING DIAL BORE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

INDICATOR AND TELESCOPIC GAUGE
Aim:
To determine the diameter of bore by using telescopic gauge and checking the same by using dial bore
indicator
Apparatus required:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Work piece, vernier caliper, telescopic gauge and dial gauge indicator set with anvil.
Diagram:

45 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
Bore gauge measurement:
1. Select the extension rod and washer according to the bore diameter to be measured
2. Fix the suitable extension rod and washer with the bore gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Fix the dial gauge to the bore gauge in its position
4. Insert the bore gauge inside the bore to be measured and hold the gauge in parallel o the axis of the
bore. Ensure that the tips on either side of the bore gauge are in touch with inner wall of the bore
5. Note down the reading in the dial gauge and withdraw the bore gauge from the bore
6. Hold the measuring tips of bore gauge between the spindle and anvil of a micrometer and compress

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the tips by rotating the thimble till the reading reaches the same one as noted earlier
7. Observe and record the micrometer reading as the bore diameter to be measured
Telescopic gauge measurement:
1. Select the telescopic gauge according to the bore diameter to be measured
2. Press the telescopic spindles in the telescopic gauge lock them by locking screw

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Insert the telescopic gauge inside thee bore to be measured. Release the locking screw to expand
the telescopic spindles outwards inside the bore
4. Hold the telescopic gauge in parallel to the axis of bore axis and ensure that the tips of telescopic
spindles are in touch with the inner wall of the bore
5. Lock the telescopic spindles and withdraw it from the bore

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice
1 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

V SEMESTER - R 2013

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No. : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Section : _______________________________________


LABORATORY MANUAL
2 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

DHANALAKSHMI

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
2. To contribute to the promotion of Academic Excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels
3. To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

and soul

DEPARTMENT OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rendering the services to the global needs of engineering industries by educating students to become
professionally sound mechanical engineers of excellent caliber


To produce mechanical engineering technocrats with a perfect knowledge intellectual and hands on

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

experience and to inculcate the spirit of moral values and ethics to serve the society

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MISSION
MISSION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION

VISION

4 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals
To impart students with fundamental knowledge in mathematics and basic sciences that will mould
them to be successful professionals

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Core competence
To provide students with sound knowledge in engineering and experimental skills to identify
complex software problems in industry and to develop a practical solution for them
3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theory and practice which

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

enable them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and organization and to design
products requiring interdisciplinary skills
4. Professional skills
To bestow students with adequate training and provide opportunities to work as team that will build
up their communication skills, individual, leadership and supportive qualities and to enable them to

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

adapt and to work in ever changing technologies
5. Life-long learning
To develop the ability of students to establish themselves as professionals in mechanical
engineering and to create awareness about the need for lifelong learning and pursuing advanced
degrees

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)
On completion of the B.E. (Mechanical) degree, the graduate will be able

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

a) To apply the basic knowledge of mathematics, science and engineering
b) To design and conduct experiments as well as to analyze and interpret data and apply the same in
the career or entrepreneurship
c) To design and develop innovative and creative software applications
d) To understand a complex real world problem and develop an efficient practical solution

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

e) To create, select and apply appropriate techniques, resources, modern engineering and IT tools
f) To understand the role as a professional and give the best to the society
g) To develop a system that will meet expected needs within realistic constraints such as economical
environmental, social, political, ethical, safety and sustainability
h) To communicate effectively and make others understand exactly what they are trying to tell in both

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

verbal and written forms
i) To work in a team as a team member or a leader and make unique contributions and work with
coordination
j) To engage in lifelong learning and exhibit their technical skills
k) To develop and manage projects in multidisciplinary environments

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To familiar with different measurement equipment?s and use of this industry for quality inspection
List of Experiments
1. Tool Maker?s Microscope
2. Comparator
3. Sine Bar

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Gear Tooth Vernier Caliper
5. Floating gauge Micrometer
6. Coordinate Measuring Machine
7. Surface Finish Measuring Equipment
8. Vernier Height Gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. Bore diameter measurement using telescope gauge
10. Bore diameter measurement using micrometer
11. Force Measurement
12. Torque Measurement
13. Temperature measurement

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. Autocollimator


1. Ability to handle different measurement tools and perform measurements in quality impulsion
2. Learnt the usage of precision measuring instruments and practiced to take measurements

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Learnt and practiced to build the required dimensions using slip gauge
4. Able to measure the various dimensions of the given specimen using the tool maker?s microscope
5. Able to find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge
6. Able to measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare
7. Learnt to determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen using Gear tooth vernier

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Able to measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two
wire method
9. Learnt to study the construction and operation of coordinate measuring machine
10. Learnt to determine the diameter of bore by using telescopic gauge and dial bore indicator
11. Able to measure the surface roughness using Talysurf instrument

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. Studied the characteristic between applied load and the output volt
13. Learnt the characteristics of developing torque and respective sensor output voltage
14. Studied the characteristics of thermocouple without compensation
15. Able to check the straightness & flatness of the given component by using Autocollimator
16. Learnt to measure the displacement using LVDT and to calibrate it with the millimeter scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OBJECTIVES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OUTCOMES

7 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

CONTENTS
Sl. No. Name of the Experiments Page No.
CYCLE ? 1 EXPERIMENTS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1
Precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab ? A Study
7
2
To build up the slip gauge for given dimension ? A Study

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16
3
Thread parameters measurement using Tool Makers Microscope
20
4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Calibration of dial gauge
23
5
Determination of taper angle by sine bar method
26

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6
Determination of gear tooth thickness using gear tooth vernier
29
7
Measurement of thread parameters using floating carriage micrometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

32
CYCLE ? 2 EXPERIMENTS
8
Measurement of various dimensions using Coordinate Measuring Machine
35

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9
Measurement of surface roughness
39
10
Measurement of bores using dial bore indicator and telescopic gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

42
11
Force measurement using load cell
46
12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Torque measurement using strain gauge
49
13
Temperature measurement using thermocouple
53

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14
Measurement of alignment using autocollimator
56
ADDITIONAL EXPERIMENT BEYOND THE SYLLABUS
15

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thread parameters measurement using profile projector
60
16
Displacement measurement ? linear variable differential transducer (LVDT)
62

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROJECT WORK
65


8 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.01 PRECISION MEASURING INSTRUMENT YSED IN
METROLOGY LAB ? A STUDY
Aim:
To study the following instruments and their usage for measuring dimensions of given specimen

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Vernier caliper
2. Micrometer
3. Vernier height gauge
4. Depth micrometer
5. Universal bevel protractor

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Apparatus required:
Surface plate, specimen and above instruments
Vernier caliper:
The principle of vernier caliper is to use the minor difference between the sizes two scales or divisions
for measurement. The difference between them can be utilized to enhance the accuracy of measurement. The

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

vernier caliper essentially consists of two steel rules, sliding along each other.
Parts:
Different parts of the vernier caliper are
1. Beam ? It has main scale.
2. Fixed jaw

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Sliding or Moving jaw ? It has vernier scale and sliding jaw locking screw.
4. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw knife
edges for internal measurement.
5. Stem or depth bar for depth measurement
Least count:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm
1 VSD = 0.98 mm
Least count = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


ID

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPTH


OD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement:
Given Vernier caliper can be used for external, internal depth, slot and step measurement.
Measurement principle:
When both jaws contact each other scale shows the zero reading. The finer adjustment of movable jaw
can be done by the fine adjustment screw. First the whole movable jaw assembly is adjusted so that the two

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measuring tips just touch the part to be measured. Then the fine adjustment clamp locking screw is tightened.
Final adjustment depending upon the sense of correct feel is made by the adjusting screw. After final
adjustment has been made sliding jaw locking screw is also tightened and the reading is noted.
All the parts of the Vernier caliper are made of good quality steel and measuring faces are hardened.
Types of vernier:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier caliper, electronic vernier caliper, vernier depth caliper


11 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:

Main scale
reading (MSR)
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale
reading (VSR) (mm)
Total reading (MSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

+ VSR)
(mm)

OD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ID


Depth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier height gauge:
Vernier height gauge is a sort of vernier caliper equipped with a special instrument suitable for height
measurement. It is always kept on the surface plate and the use of the surfaces plates as datum surfaces is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

very essential.
Least count:
Least Count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 VSD = 0.98 mm
Least Count (LC) = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm
Parts:
1. Base
2. Beam ? It has main scale.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Slider ? It has a vernier scale and slider locking screw.
4. Scriber
5. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


Material:
All the parts of vernier are made of good quality steel and the measuring faces hardened.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Types of vernier gauge:
1. Analog vernier height gauge
2. Digital vernier height gauge
3. Electronic vernier height gauge
Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
Main scale reading
(MSR)(mm)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier scale reading
(VSR)(mm)
Total reading (MSR +
VSR)(mm)
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.
3.

13 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outside micrometer:
The micrometer essentially consists of an accurate screw having about 10 or 20 threads per cm. The
end of the screw forms one measuring tip and other measuring tip is constituted by a stationary anvil in the
base of the frame. The screw is threaded for certain length and is plain afterwards. The plain portion is called
spindle and its end is the measuring surface. The spindle is advanced or retracted by turning a thimble

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

connected to a spindle. The spindle is a slide fit over the barrel and barrel is the fixed part attached with the
frame. The barrel & thimble are graduated. The pitch of the screw threads is 0.5 mm.

Least count:
Least Count (LC) = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= 0.5 / 50 = 0.01 mm
Parts:
1. Frame
2. Anvil
3. Spindle

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Spindle lock
5. Barrel or outside sleeve
6. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions
7. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.
The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Measurement:
It can be used for any external measurement.
Types of micrometer:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Outside micrometer, 2. Inside micrometer, 3.Depth micrometer, 4. Stick micrometer, 5. Screw thread
micrometer, 6. V ? anvil micrometer, 7. Blade type micrometer, 8. Dial micrometer, 9. Bench micrometer, 10.
Tape screw operated internal micrometer, 11. Groove micrometer, 12. Digital micrometer, 13.Differential screw
micrometer, 14.Adjustable range outside micrometer.
Ratchet stop mechanism:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The object of the ratchet stop is to ensure that same level of torque is applied on the spindle while
measuring and the sense of the feel of operator is eliminated and consistent readings are obtained. By
providing this arrangement, the ratchet stop is made slip off when the torque applied to rotate the spindle
exceeds the set torque. Thus this provision ensures the application of same amount of torque during the
measurement.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) (mm)
Head Scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Coincidence (HSC)
Head scale reading
(HSR x LC) (mm)
Total Reading (PSR
+ HSR) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
2.

Depth micrometer:
Depth micrometer is a sort of micrometer which is mainly used for measuring depth of holes, so it is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

named as depth micrometer.
Parts:
1. Shoulder
2. Spindle
3. Spindle lock

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Barrel or outside sleeve ? It has pitch scale.
5. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions.
6. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.
The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.
15 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count:
Least Count = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale = 0.50/50
= 0.01 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurements:
It can be used for measuring the depth of holes, slots and recessed areas. The pitch of the screw thread
is 0.5 mm. The least count is 0.01 mm. Shoulder acts as a reference surface and is held firmly and
perpendicular to the centre line of the hole. For large range of measurement extension rods are used. In the
barrel the scale is calibrated. The accuracy again depends upon the sense of touch.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
First, calculate the least count of the instrument. Check the zero error. Measure the specimen note
down the main scale reading or the head scale reading. Note down the vernier or head scale coincidence with
main or pitch scale divisions.
Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) (mm)
Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Head scale reading
(HSR x LC) (mm)
Total Reading (PSR
+ HSR) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.


2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Universal bevel protractor:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
Bevel protractor is an instrument for measuring the angle between the two faces of a specimen. It
consists of a base plate on which a circular scale is engraved. It is graduated in degrees. An adjustment plate
is attached to a circular plate containing the vernier scale. The adjustable blade can be locked in any position.
The circular plate has 360 division divided into four parts of 90 degrees each. The adjustable parts have 24

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

divisions of to the right and left sides of zero reading. These scales are used according to the position of the
specimen with respect to movable scale.
Procedure:
1. Place the specimen whose taper is to be measured between the adjustable plate and movable
blade with one of its face parallel to the base.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Lock the adjustable plate in position and note down the main scale reading depending upon the
direction of rotation of adjustable plate in clockwise or anticlockwise.
3. Note the VSC to the right of zero.
4. Multiply the VSC with the least count and add to MSR to obtain the actual reading.
Least count:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least Count = 2 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1
o
24 VSD = 46
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

=> 1 VSD = 23/12
LC = 2 ? 23/12 = 1/12
o
= 5? (five minutes)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
Main scale reading
(MSR) (deg)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier scale reading
(VSR) (deg)
Total reading (MSR +
VSR)
(deg)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
2.
The angle of scriber of the vernier height gauge =
Result:
Thus the various precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab are studied and the specimen

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

dimensions are recorded.
Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for linear, angular,
roundness and roughness measurements they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring
instrument according to a specific requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Quality Department


1. Define ? Metrology

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Define ? Inspection
3. What are the needs of inspection in industries?
4. What are the various methods involving the measurement?
5. Define ? Precision
6. Define ? Accuracy

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Define ? Calibration
8. Define ? Repeatability
9. Define ? Magnification
10. Define ? Error
11. Define ? Systematic Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. Define ? Random Error
13. Define ? Parallax Error
14. Define ? Environmental Error
15. Define ? Cosine Error
Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

18 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.02 BUILD UP THE SLIP GAUGE FOR GIVEN DIMENSION
? A STUDY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Aim:
To build up the slip gauge for given dimension
Apparatus required:
1. Slip gauges set
2. Surface plate

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Soft cloth
Diagram:

Description:
Slip gauge are universally accepted standard of length in industry. They are the working standard for

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

linear dimension. These were invented by a Swedish Engineer, C.E. Johansson. They are used
1. For direct precise measurement where the accuracy of the workpiece demand it.
2. For use with high- magnification comparators to establish the size of the gauge blocks in general
use.
3. Gauge blocks are also used for many other purposes such as checking the accuracy of measuring

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

instrument or setting up a comparator to a specific dimension, enabling a batch of component to be
quickly and accurately checked or indeed in any situation where there is need to refer to standard of
known length these blocks are rectangular.
19 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Most gauge blocks are produced from high grade steel, hardened and established by a heat treatment
process to give a high degree of dimensional stability. Gauge blocks are also manufactured from tungsten
carbide which is an extremely hard and wear resistant material. The measuring faces have a lapped finish.
The faces are perfectly flat and parallel to one another with a high degree of accuracy. Each block has an
extremely high dimensional accuracy at 20

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C.
These slip gauge are available in variety of selected sets both in inch units and metric units. Letter ?E? is
used for inch units and ?M? is used for metric standard number of pieces in a set following the letter E or M. For
example EBI refers to a set whose blocks are in metric units and are 83 in number. Each block dimensions is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

printed on anyone of its face itself the size of any required standard being made up by combining the
appropriate number of these different size blocks.
If two gauges are slid and twisted together under pressure they will firmly join together. This process,
known as wringing, is very useful because it enables several gauge blocks to be assembled together to
produce a required size. In fact the success of precision measurement by slip gauges depends on the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

phenomenon of wringing.
First the gauge is oscillated slightly with very light pressure over other gauge so as to detect pressure at
any foreign particles between the surfaces. One gauge is placed perpendicular to other using standard
gauging pressure and rotary motion is applied until the blocks are lined up.
Procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Build the given dimension by wringing minimum number of slip gauges.
2. Note the given dimension and choose the minimum possible slip gauge available in the set so as to
accommodate the last decimal value. The minimum slip gauge value dimension available i.e., 1.12
mm must be chosen followed by 1.5 mm thick gauge block.
3. Follow the above steps to build up the slip gauge of any dimension.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Precautions:
1. Slip gauges should be handled very carefully placed gently and should never be dropped.
2. Whenever a slip gauge is being removed from the set, its dimensions are noted and must be
replaced into the set at its appropriate place only.
3. Correct procedure must be followed in wringing and also in removing the gauge blocks.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. They should be cleaned well before use and petroleum jelly is applied after use.



20 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Range (mm) Increment (mm) No. of pieces

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total = ____________ Pieces
Total length of slip gauge = ________ mm
Given diameter Slip gauges used Obtained dimensions

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Slip gauge set is studied and the given dimensions are building up by wringing minimum number of slip
gauges.
Outcome:
Students will be able to select proper measuring instrument and know requirement of calibration, errors

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

in measurement etc. They can perform accurate measurements.
Application:
1. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Why C.I. is preferred material for surface plates and tables?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Why V ? blocks are generally manufactured in pairs?
3. Why micrometer is required to be tested for accuracy?
4. Define ? Linear Measurement
5. List the linear measuring instrument according to their accuracy.
6. Define ? Least Count

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. What are the uses of vernier depth gauge?
8. What are the uses of feeler gauges?
9. What are the uses of straight edge?
10. What are the uses of angle plate?
11. What are the uses of V ? block?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. What are the uses of combination square?
13. What precautions should be taken while using slip gauges?
14. What is wringing?
15. Why the slip gauges are termed as ?End standard?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

22 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.03 THREAD PARAMETERS MEASUREMENT USING
TOOL MAKERS MICROSCOPE
Aim:
To study the tool makers microscope and in the process measure the various dimensions of the given

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

specimen
Apparatus required:
1. Tool makers microscope
2. Specimen
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
The tool maker?s microscope is designed for measurement of parts of complex forms; for example,
profile of a tool having external threads. It can also be used for measuring centre to centre distance of the
holes in any plane as well as the coordinates of the outline of a complex template gauge, using the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

coordinates measuring system.
23 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Basically it consists of an optical head which can be adjusted vertically along the ways of supporting
column. The optical head can be clamped at any position by a screw. On the work table (which as a circular

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

base in which there are graduations) the part to be inspected is placed. The table has a compound slide by
means of which the part can be measured. For giving these two movements, there are two micrometer screws
having thimble scales and verniers. At the back of the base light source is arranged that provides horizontal
beam of light, reflected from a mirror by 90 degrees upwards towards the table. The beam of light passes
through the transparent glass plate on which flat plates can be checked are placed. Observations are made

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

through the eyepiece of the optical head.
Procedure:
1. Place the given specimen on the work table and switch on all the three light sources and adjust the
intensity of the light source until a clean image of the cross wires and specimen are seen through
the eyepiece.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Coincide one of the two extreme edges between which the measurement has to be taken with
vertical or horizontal cross wires and depending upon the other image coincide with the same cross
wires by moving the above device. Note the reading.The difference between the two readings gives
the value of the required measurement.
3. Note the experiment specimen and the readings.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Tabulate the different measurements measured from the specimen.
Determination of thread parameters
Magnification =
S.No. Parameters
Magnified value

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
Actual value
(mm)
1. Outer diameter (O.D)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Internal diameter (I.D)

3. Pitch

4. Flank angle

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Included angle of the tool was measured using tool maker?s microscope and various dimensions of the
given specimen are measured.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

24 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Outcome:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Students will be able to understand the various parameters of thread and select proper measuring
instrument and know requirement of calibration, errors in measurement etc. They can perform accurate
measurements.
Application:
1. Machine Shop

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Quality Department


1. What is meant by tool maker?s microscope?
2. What is the light used in tool maker?s microscope?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. What are the various characteristics that you would measure in a screw thread?
4. What are the instruments that are required for measuring screw thread?
5. Define ? Pitch
6. What are the causes of pitch error?
7. Define ? Flank

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. What are the effects of flank angle error?
9. What is progressive error?
10. What is periodic error?
11. What is drunken error?
12. What is erratic error?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. What are the applications of tool maker?s microscope?
14. What are the limitations of tool maker?s microscope?
15. What are the advantages of tool maker?s microscope?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

25 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.04 CALIBRATION OF DIAL GAUGE USING SLIP GAUGE
Aim:
To find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge
Apparatus required:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Dial gauge, magnetic stand, slip gauge, and surface plate
Diagram:

Description:
The dial test indicator is a precision measuring instrument which can convert linear motion into angular

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

motion by means of transmission mechanics of rack and pinion and can be used to measure linear vibration
and errors of shape.
This instrument has the features such as good appearance, compact size, light weight, high precision,
reasonable construction, constant measuring face etc. Rigidity of all parts is excellent. Probe is tipped with
carbide balls. A shock proof mechanism is provided for those with larger measuring range.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

26 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Types of dial indicator:
1. Plunger type

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Lever type
Plunger type dial indicator has a resolution counter and each division in main scale is 0.01 mm. In lever
type dial test indicator is replaced by ball type stylus.
Procedure:
1. Fix the dial gauge to the stand rigidly and place the stand on the surface plate.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Set the plunger of dial gauge to first touch the upper surface of standard slip gauge and set indicator
to zero.
3. Raise then the plunger by pulling the screw above the dial scale.
4. Place the standard slip gauge underneath the plunger.
5. Release the plunger and let it to touch the standard slip gauge.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Note the reading on the dial scale.
Formulae:
The standard error of dial gauge is calculated by the formula

Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

S.No.
Slip gauge reading ?x?
(mm)
Dial gauge reading
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x? - x)
2


x? (x? - x)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
2


Result:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thus the accuracy and standard error of dial gauge is found. The standard error of given dial gauge is
__________.

27 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Students will be able to check the variation in tolerance during the inspection process of a
machined part, measure the deflection of a beam or ring under laboratory conditions, as well as many
other situations where a small measurement needs to be registered or indicated
Application:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Milling Machine
2. Analog versus digital/electronic readout


1. What is comparator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. What are the types of comparators?
3. What is the LC for comparators?
4. What are the applications of comparator?
5. What is meant by plunger?
6. What are the types of dial indicators?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Why a revolution counter is not provided in lever type dial test indicator?
8. Draw a line diagram of the operating mechanism of plunger type dial test indicator.
9. Explain the term magnification of a dial indicator.
10. What are the uses of dial test indicator?
11. What are the practical applications of dial test indicator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. What precautions should be taken while using dial test indicator?
13. What are the desirable qualities of a dial test indicator?
14. What are the advantages of dial test indicator?
15. What are the limitations of dial test indicator?
16. Distinguish between comparator and measuring instrument.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17. What are the advantages of electrical comparator?
18. What are the advantages of optical comparator?
19. What are the uses of comparator?
20. What are the advantages and disadvantages of mechanical comparator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

28 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.05 DETERMINATION OF TAPER ANGLE BY SINE BAR
METHOD
Aim:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare
Apparatus required:
Sine bar, slip gauges, dial gauge with stand, micrometer, surface plate, bevel protractor, vernier caliper
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
The sine bar principle uses the ratio of the length of two sides of a right triangle. It may be noted that
devices operating on sine principle are capable of ?self-generation?. The measurement is restricted to 45
o
from

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

accuracy point of view. Sine bar itself is not a measuring instrument.
Accuracy requirements of sine bar:
1. The axes of the rollers must be parallel to each other and the centre distance L must be precisely
known.
2. The sine bar must be flat and parallel to the plane connecting the axes of the rollers.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. The rollers must be of identical diameters and must have within a close tolerance.


29 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. Fix the dial gaugeon the magnetic stand and place the magnetic stand on the surface plate.Check
the parallelism of the sine bar.
2. Place the given specimen above the sine bar and place the dial gauge on top of the specimen.
Adjustthe dial gauge for zero deflection.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Raise the front end of the sine bar with slip gauges until the work surface is parallel to the datum
surface.
4. Check the parallelism using dial gauge.
5. Measure the distance between the centres of the sine bar rollers as ?L? and note the height of the
slip gauge as ?H?.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Note the included angle of the specimen.
Formulae:
Sin ? = H/L where ? = Included angle of the specimen
H = Height of slip gauges
L = Distance between the centre of rollers

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
S.No. L (mm) H (mm) Taper angle ( ?)
1.
2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
The taper angle of the given specimen using sine bar was found to be =
Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for angular measurements

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

and they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a specific
requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).

Application:
1. Flat Surface

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Granite


30 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. List out the various angle measuring instruments.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. What is the working principles sine bar?
3. How is a sine bar used to measure the angle?
4. What is the application of sine bar?
5. What is the material of sine bar?
6. Why sine bar is not preferred to use for measuring angles more than 45

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

0
?
7. What are the features of sine bar?
8. A 100 mm sine bar is to be set up to an angle of 33
0

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

, determine the slip gauges needed from 87
pieces set.
9. What are the various instruments used for measuring angles?
10. What is sine bar?
11. How sine bar is used for angle measurement?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. Explain how sine bar is used to measure angle of small size component.
13. Explain how sine bar is used to measure angle of large size component.
14. What are the various types of sine bar?
15. What are the limitations of sine bar?
16. What is sine center?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17. What is sine table?
18. What are the possible sources of errors in angular measurement by sine bar?
19. What are angle gauges?
20. How angle gauges are used for measuring angles?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

31 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00



Expt.No.06 DETERMINATION OF GEAR TOOTH THICKNESS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

USING GEAR TOOTH VERNIER
Aim:
To determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen and to draw the graph between the tooth
number and the error in thickness
Apparatus required:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Gear tooth vernier, specimen, surface plate and vernier caliper
Diagram:

Description:
The tooth thickness, in general, is measured at pitch circle since gear tooth thickness varies from the tip

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

to the base circle of the tooth. This is possible only when there is an arrangement to fix that position for this
measurement by the gear tooth vernier. It has two vernier scales; one is vertical and other is horizontal.
Procedure:
32 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Measure initially the outside diameter of the given gear specimen by means of a vertical calculation
of vernier caliper. Note the number of teeth. Calculate the module (m) using the formula.

M = OD/ (Z+2) where z ? number of teeth
M - Module

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Calculate the theoretical tooth thickness (t) by t = z * m* sin (90/z).
3. Set the vernier scale for the height and tighten.
4. Measure the thickness of each tooth using the horizontal scale. This is measured thickness. It can
be positive or negative.
H = m x [1+ Z/2 (1- Cos 90/Z)]

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Calculate the error in the tooth thickness i.e,1. measured thickness ? Theoretical thickness
6. Draw the graph between the tooth number and the error in thickness.
Tabulation:
Tooth
Number

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measured Thickness
(mm)
Theoretical Thickness (mm)
Error in tooth thickness
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1
2
3

Tooth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Number
MSR
(mm)
VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSR
(mm)
TR
(mm)
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
3

Graph:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tooth No.
33 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


Result:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The theoretical experiment value of gear tooth thickness is obtained and graph is drawn between error
and tooth number in tooth thickness
Theoretical tooth thickness =
Experimental tooth thickness =
Error in tooth thickness =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the basic measurement units and able to calibrate various
measuring parameters of the gear.
Application:
1. Gear Component

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Mining

1. Calculate the setting of a gear tooth vernier caliper for a straight spur gear having 40 teeth and
module 4.
2. What is the importance of chordal depth?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Define ? Chordal width
4. How is the actual profile of the gear tooth determined?
5. What are the manufacturing errors in gear element?
6. Define ? Addendum
7. Define ? Dedendum

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Define ? Flank of tooth
9. Define ? Pitch
10. Define ? Pitch Circle
11. Define ? Crest of tooth
12. Define ? Root of tooth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. Define ? Base Circle
14. Define ? Module
15. Define ? Angle of Obliquity

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

34 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.07 MEASUREMENT OF THREAD PARAMETER USING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FLOATING CARRIAGE MICROMETER
Aim:
To measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two wire
method
Apparatus required:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Floating carriage micrometer
2. Standard wire
3. Given specimen (screw thread)
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description of floating carriage micrometer:
It consists of three main units. A base casting carries a pair of centres on which threaded work piece is
to be mounted. Another carriage capable of moving towards centre is mounted exactly above. In this carriage
one head with thimble to measure up to 0.002 mm is provided and at the other side of head a fiducial indicator
is provided to indicate zero position.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

35 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. For two wire method, place the standard wire over a thread of the screw at opposite sides.
2. For three wire method, place two standard wires on two successive threads and the third wire
placed opposite sides of the thread.
3. Measure the diameter over wires (M) using floating carriage micrometer.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Repeat this procedure at various positions of the screw and take different readings.
Formulae:
1. For best wire size, d = P / 2 Cos (x/2)
Where, P = Pitch
d= wire size

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x = angle between two threads
= 60
o
for metric thread
2. Actual effective diameter, E.A = M ? 3d + 0.866 p

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Nominal effective diameter, EN = D ? 0.648 p
4. Max. wire size = 1.01 p
5. Min. wire size = 0.505 p
6. Best wire size = 0.577 p
M = Diameter over wires

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

P = Pitch of thread
For metric thread:
Actual effective diameter (EA) = M ? 3d + 0.866 p
Where d = actual diameter of wire
Determination of actual and nominal effective diameter of the screw thread:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
Nominal
Diameter (D)
(mm)
Diameter over

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

wire ?M?
(mm)
Actual eff.
Diameter E.A
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Nominal eff.
Diameter E.N
(mm)
Error in effective
diameter

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(E.A ? E.N)
(mm)
1.
2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

36 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Thus the actual and nominal effective diameter is measured using three wire method and the error in
effective diameter of screw is determined.
Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for roundness

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measurements and they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a
specific requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).
Application:
1. Wholse
2. Maxxis Rubber India

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Pitch
2. Define ? Flank Angle
3. What is plug gauge?
4. What is meant by micrometer?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. What is meant by indicator?
6. What is best ? size wire?
7. Calculate the diameter of the best wire for an M 20 x 25 screws.
8. What are the different corrections to be applied in the measurement of effective diameter by the
method of wire?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. What is floating carriage micrometer?
10. What are the uses of floating carriage micrometer?
11. What are the methods are used for measuring effective diameter?
12. Define ? Effective Diameter
13. Define ? Major Diameter

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. Define ? Minor Diameter
15. What are the effects of flank error?
16. Define ? Rake Angle
17. Define ? Pitch Cylinder
18. What are the effects of pitch error?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

19. Define ? Pitch Diameter
20. What is meant by angle of thread?


Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

37 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.08 MEASUREMENT OF VARIOUS DIMENSIONS USING
COORDINATE MEASURING MACHINE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Aim:
1. To study the construction and operation of coordinate measuring machine
2. To measure the specified dimensions of the given component
Instruments used:
Coordinate measuring machine, vernier calipers

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diagram:

Theory:
A coordinate measuring machine (CMM) is a 3D device for measuring the physical and geometrical
characteristics of an object. This machine may be manually controlled by an operator or it may be computer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

controlled. Measurements are defined by a probe attached to the three moving axis of this machine X, Y and Z
axes. A coordinate measuring machine (CMM) is also a device used in manufacturing and assembly
processes to test a part or assembly against the design intent. By precisely recording the X, Y and Z
coordinates of the target, points are generated which can be analyzed via regression algorithms for the
construction of features. These points are collected by using a probe that is positioned manually by an

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

38 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

operator or automatically via direct computer control (DCC). DCC CMMs can be programmed to repeatedly
measure identical parts, thus a CMM is a specialized form of industrial robot.
Parts:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Coordinate measuring machine include three main components:
1. The main structures which include three axes of motion.
2. Probing system
3. Data collection and reduction system ? typically includes a machine controller, desktop computer
and application software

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Machine description:
1. In modern machines, the gantry type superstructure has two legs and is often called a bridge. This
moves freely along the granite table with one leg following a guide rail attached to one side of the
granite table. The opposite leg simply rests on the granite table following the vertical surface
contour.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Air bearings are fixed for ensuring friction free travel. Compressed air is forced through a series of
very small holes in a flat bearing surface to provide a smooth but controlled air cushion on which the
CMM can move in a frictionless manner.
3. The movement of the bridge along the granite table forms one axis of the XY plane. The bridge of
the gantry contains a carriage which traverses between the inside and outside legs and forms the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

other X or Y horizontal axis.
4. The third axis of movement (Z axis) is provided by the addition of a vertical quill or spindle which
moves up and down through the center of the carriage. The touch probe forms the sensing device
on the end of the quill.
5. The movement of the X, Y and Z axes fully describes the measuring envelope. Some touch probes

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

are themselves powered rotary devices with the probe tip able to swivel vertically through 90
degrees and through a full 360 degrees rotation.
Uses:
They are generally used for:
1. Dimensional measurement

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Profile measurement
3. Angularity or orientation measurement
4. Depth mapping
5. Digitizing mapping
6. Shaft measurement

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

39 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

The machines are available in a wide range of sizes and designs with a variety of different probe
technologies. They can be operated manually or automatically through direct computer control (DCC). They
are offered in various configurations such as bench top, free ? standing, handheld and portable.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. Take at least 8 points on sphere ball attached to the granite table.
2. Fix the object whose dimension needs to be measured using the jigs and fixtures.
3. Using joystick, move the probe whose tip is made of ruby slowly and carefully to the surface whose
measurements have to be taken.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Touch the probe at two places for measurement of a line (starting and ending point).
5. Touch the probe at two places for measurement of a circular profile and for a cylinder touch the
probe at 8 points.
6. Measure the same profiles again with vernier calipers (length of line, circle diameter, cylinder
diameter) to compare the two readings.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Comments:
1. The machine should be calibrated every time when it is being used.
2. While measuring the profiles, the probe should be moved very slowly as it may damage the ruby if
hit with a high force.
3. Care should be taken while performing experiment so that the granite table of the machines should

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

get any scratches.
4. ?Retract distance? should be fixed according to the space available in the near vicinity of the profile
measurement area.
Observation:
Sl.No. Feature

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CMM reading
(mm)
Vernier reading
(mm)
Form error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
Difference in two
readings (mm)
1 Circle -1
2 Circle -2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3 Circle -3
4 Line
5 Arc
6
Cone - Diameter

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Cone ? Vertex angle
Cone ? Height
7
Cylinder ? Diameter
Cylinder ? Height

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

40 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Result:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thus the different profile of given object are measured using coordinate measuring machine
Outcome:
Students will be able to measures the geometry of physical objects by sensing discrete points on the
surface of the object with a probe and they will be able to know the Various types of probes are used in CMMs,
including mechanical, optical, laser, and white light.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Surface Measuring Equipment
2. Photo transistor

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What are the types of measuring machine?
2. What is CMM?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. What are the types of CMM?
4. What are the advantages of CMM?
5. What are the limitations of CMM?
6. What are the possible sources of error in CMM?
7. What is the use of universal measuring machine?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. What are the applications of CMM?
9. What is the working principle of three axis measuring machine?
10. What is image shearing microscope?
11. What is the use of electronic inspection and measuring machine?
12. What are the types of electronic inspection and measuring machine?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. What is CMM probe?
14. What are the three main probes are available?
15. What are the types of stylus?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

41 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.09 MEASUREMENT OF SURFACE ROUGHNESS UING
TALYSURF INSTRUMENT
Aim:
To measure the surface roughness using Talysurf instrument

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Apparatus required:
Talysurf instrument, work piece, surface plate
Diagram:

Theory:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

On any finished surface, imperfections are bound to be there and these take the form of a succession of
hills and valleys which vary both in height and in spacing and result in a kind of texture which in appearance or
feel is often characteristic of the machining process and accompanying defects. The several kinds of
departures are there on the surface and these are due to various causes.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

42 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Methods of measuring surface roughness:
1. Surface inspection of comparison methods
2. Direct instrument measurements

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

In comparative methods the surface texture is assessed by observation of the surface. But these
methods are not reliable as they can be misleading, if comparison is not made with surfaces produced by
same techniques. The various methods available under comparison method are: (i) Touch Inspection
(ii)Scratch Inspection (iii) Microscopic Inspection (iv) Visual Inspection (v) Surface Photographs (vi) Reflected
Light Intensity Direct Instrument Measurements enable to determine a numerical value of the surface finish of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

any surface. Nearly all instruments used are stylus probe type of instruments. This operates on electrical
principle.
Procedure:
1. Place the finished component on the surface plate.
2. Fix the Talysurf tester to the vernier height gauge using adopter at a convenient height.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Make sure that the stylus probe touches the work piece.
4. Fix the sampling length in the tester.
5. Press the power button so that the probe moves on the surface to and fro.
6. Take the readings of the surface roughness directly from the instrument.
7. Repeat the above process for the remaining specimen and tabulate the readings.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Precautions:
1. The surface to be tested should be cleaned properly.
2. The tester should be fixed to the height gauge properly so that the movement of the probe is exactly
parallel to the surface of work.
3. Make sure that the probe gently touches the work.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
S.No
Measurement roughness value,
?m
Sample direction Ra, Rz

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Average Ra Average Rz Grade
1.
2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

43 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Thus the surface roughness is checked for different specimens by Talysurf.
Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for roughness
measurements they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a specific

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).
Application:
1. Machine Shop
2. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Actual Size?
2. What is meant by normal surface?
3. What is meant by profilo-graph?
4. What is Tomlinson surface meter?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. What is meant by profile?
6. What are the factors affecting surface roughness?
7. Why the surface texture is control?
8. Define ? Lay
9. Define ? Surface Texture

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. Define ? Flaws
11. What is sampling length?
12. What are the methods used for evaluating surface finish?
13. What is form factor?
14. What are the methods used for measuring surface finish?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15. How will you differentiate smooth surface from flat surface?
16. How surface finish is designated on drawings?
17. Define ? Primary Texture
18. Define ? Secondary Texture
19. What are the types of instrument used for measuring surface texture?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

20. Define ? waviness



Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

44 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.10 MEASUREMENT OF BORE USING DIAL BORE
INDICATOR AND TELESCOPIC GAUGE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Aim:
To determine the diameter of bore by using telescopic gauge and checking the same by using dial bore
indicator
Apparatus required:
Work piece, vernier caliper, telescopic gauge and dial gauge indicator set with anvil.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diagram:

45 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
Bore gauge measurement:
1. Select the extension rod and washer according to the bore diameter to be measured
2. Fix the suitable extension rod and washer with the bore gauge
3. Fix the dial gauge to the bore gauge in its position

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Insert the bore gauge inside the bore to be measured and hold the gauge in parallel o the axis of the
bore. Ensure that the tips on either side of the bore gauge are in touch with inner wall of the bore
5. Note down the reading in the dial gauge and withdraw the bore gauge from the bore
6. Hold the measuring tips of bore gauge between the spindle and anvil of a micrometer and compress
the tips by rotating the thimble till the reading reaches the same one as noted earlier

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Observe and record the micrometer reading as the bore diameter to be measured
Telescopic gauge measurement:
1. Select the telescopic gauge according to the bore diameter to be measured
2. Press the telescopic spindles in the telescopic gauge lock them by locking screw
3. Insert the telescopic gauge inside thee bore to be measured. Release the locking screw to expand

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the telescopic spindles outwards inside the bore
4. Hold the telescopic gauge in parallel to the axis of bore axis and ensure that the tips of telescopic
spindles are in touch with the inner wall of the bore
5. Lock the telescopic spindles and withdraw it from the bore
46 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Measure the expanded length of the telescopic spindles using micrometer record them as the inner
diameter of the bore
Practical observations:
Rough measurement of bore using Telescopic gauge:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count of micrometer = 0.01 mm
Sl.No.
Micrometer reading
Total reading
(MSR + TSC * LC) ( mm) Main scale reading (MSR)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
Thimble scale
coincidence
1.
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Average reading = ________ mm
Accurate measuring using Bore gauge
Sl.No.
Micrometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

reading
(d) (mm)
Bore gauge
reading
(R1) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Work piece reading
(R2) (mm)
Final reading
d+ (R1 ? R2) * 0.01
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
2.

Accurate internal diameter of hole using bore gauge = ______ mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result
1. Internal diameter of the work piece by using telescopic gauge is ________mm
2. Diameter obtained by using dial gauge indicator is __________________mm

Outcome:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Students will be able to measure a bore's size, by transferring the internal dimension to a remote
measuring tool (Telescopic gauge).
Application:
1. Automobile
2. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice
1 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING


ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

V SEMESTER - R 2013

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No. : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LABORATORY MANUAL
2 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


3 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DHANALAKSHMI


College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.


1. To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
2. To contribute to the promotion of Academic Excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

levels
3. To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

DEPARTMENT OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rendering the services to the global needs of engineering industries by educating students to become
professionally sound mechanical engineers of excellent caliber

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To produce mechanical engineering technocrats with a perfect knowledge intellectual and hands on
experience and to inculcate the spirit of moral values and ethics to serve the society

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MISSION
MISSION
VISION

VISION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To impart students with fundamental knowledge in mathematics and basic sciences that will mould
them to be successful professionals
2. Core competence
To provide students with sound knowledge in engineering and experimental skills to identify
complex software problems in industry and to develop a practical solution for them

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theory and practice which
enable them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and organization and to design
products requiring interdisciplinary skills
4. Professional skills

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To bestow students with adequate training and provide opportunities to work as team that will build
up their communication skills, individual, leadership and supportive qualities and to enable them to
adapt and to work in ever changing technologies
5. Life-long learning
To develop the ability of students to establish themselves as professionals in mechanical

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

engineering and to create awareness about the need for lifelong learning and pursuing advanced
degrees

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)
On completion of the B.E. (Mechanical) degree, the graduate will be able
a) To apply the basic knowledge of mathematics, science and engineering
b) To design and conduct experiments as well as to analyze and interpret data and apply the same in
the career or entrepreneurship

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

c) To design and develop innovative and creative software applications
d) To understand a complex real world problem and develop an efficient practical solution
e) To create, select and apply appropriate techniques, resources, modern engineering and IT tools
f) To understand the role as a professional and give the best to the society
g) To develop a system that will meet expected needs within realistic constraints such as economical

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

environmental, social, political, ethical, safety and sustainability
h) To communicate effectively and make others understand exactly what they are trying to tell in both
verbal and written forms
i) To work in a team as a team member or a leader and make unique contributions and work with
coordination

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

j) To engage in lifelong learning and exhibit their technical skills
k) To develop and manage projects in multidisciplinary environments

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To familiar with different measurement equipment?s and use of this industry for quality inspection
List of Experiments
1. Tool Maker?s Microscope

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Comparator
3. Sine Bar
4. Gear Tooth Vernier Caliper
5. Floating gauge Micrometer
6. Coordinate Measuring Machine

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Surface Finish Measuring Equipment
8. Vernier Height Gauge
9. Bore diameter measurement using telescope gauge
10. Bore diameter measurement using micrometer
11. Force Measurement

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. Torque Measurement
13. Temperature measurement
14. Autocollimator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Ability to handle different measurement tools and perform measurements in quality impulsion
2. Learnt the usage of precision measuring instruments and practiced to take measurements
3. Learnt and practiced to build the required dimensions using slip gauge
4. Able to measure the various dimensions of the given specimen using the tool maker?s microscope
5. Able to find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Able to measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare
7. Learnt to determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen using Gear tooth vernier
8. Able to measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two
wire method
9. Learnt to study the construction and operation of coordinate measuring machine

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. Learnt to determine the diameter of bore by using telescopic gauge and dial bore indicator
11. Able to measure the surface roughness using Talysurf instrument
12. Studied the characteristic between applied load and the output volt
13. Learnt the characteristics of developing torque and respective sensor output voltage
14. Studied the characteristics of thermocouple without compensation

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15. Able to check the straightness & flatness of the given component by using Autocollimator
16. Learnt to measure the displacement using LVDT and to calibrate it with the millimeter scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OBJECTIVES

COURSE OUTCOMES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

CONTENTS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl. No. Name of the Experiments Page No.
CYCLE ? 1 EXPERIMENTS
1
Precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab ? A Study
7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
To build up the slip gauge for given dimension ? A Study
16
3
Thread parameters measurement using Tool Makers Microscope

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

20
4
Calibration of dial gauge
23
5

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of taper angle by sine bar method
26
6
Determination of gear tooth thickness using gear tooth vernier
29

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7
Measurement of thread parameters using floating carriage micrometer
32
CYCLE ? 2 EXPERIMENTS
8

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement of various dimensions using Coordinate Measuring Machine
35
9
Measurement of surface roughness
39

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
Measurement of bores using dial bore indicator and telescopic gauge
42
11
Force measurement using load cell

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

46
12
Torque measurement using strain gauge
49
13

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Temperature measurement using thermocouple
53
14
Measurement of alignment using autocollimator
56

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ADDITIONAL EXPERIMENT BEYOND THE SYLLABUS
15
Thread parameters measurement using profile projector
60
16

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Displacement measurement ? linear variable differential transducer (LVDT)
62
PROJECT WORK
65

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.01 PRECISION MEASURING INSTRUMENT YSED IN
METROLOGY LAB ? A STUDY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Aim:
To study the following instruments and their usage for measuring dimensions of given specimen
1. Vernier caliper
2. Micrometer
3. Vernier height gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Depth micrometer
5. Universal bevel protractor
Apparatus required:
Surface plate, specimen and above instruments
Vernier caliper:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The principle of vernier caliper is to use the minor difference between the sizes two scales or divisions
for measurement. The difference between them can be utilized to enhance the accuracy of measurement. The
vernier caliper essentially consists of two steel rules, sliding along each other.
Parts:
Different parts of the vernier caliper are

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Beam ? It has main scale.
2. Fixed jaw
3. Sliding or Moving jaw ? It has vernier scale and sliding jaw locking screw.
4. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw knife
edges for internal measurement.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Stem or depth bar for depth measurement
Least count:
Least count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 VSD = 0.98 mm
Least count = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm

10 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ID

DEPTH

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OD
Measurement:
Given Vernier caliper can be used for external, internal depth, slot and step measurement.
Measurement principle:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

When both jaws contact each other scale shows the zero reading. The finer adjustment of movable jaw
can be done by the fine adjustment screw. First the whole movable jaw assembly is adjusted so that the two
measuring tips just touch the part to be measured. Then the fine adjustment clamp locking screw is tightened.
Final adjustment depending upon the sense of correct feel is made by the adjusting screw. After final
adjustment has been made sliding jaw locking screw is also tightened and the reading is noted.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

All the parts of the Vernier caliper are made of good quality steel and measuring faces are hardened.
Types of vernier:
Vernier caliper, electronic vernier caliper, vernier depth caliper

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:

Main scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

reading (MSR)
(mm)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

reading (VSR) (mm)
Total reading (MSR
+ VSR)
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OD


ID

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Depth


Vernier height gauge:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier height gauge is a sort of vernier caliper equipped with a special instrument suitable for height
measurement. It is always kept on the surface plate and the use of the surfaces plates as datum surfaces is
very essential.
Least count:
Least Count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm
1 VSD = 0.98 mm
Least Count (LC) = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm
Parts:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Base
2. Beam ? It has main scale.
3. Slider ? It has a vernier scale and slider locking screw.
4. Scriber
5. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Material:
All the parts of vernier are made of good quality steel and the measuring faces hardened.
Types of vernier gauge:
1. Analog vernier height gauge
2. Digital vernier height gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Electronic vernier height gauge
Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Main scale reading
(MSR)(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale reading
(VSR)(mm)
Total reading (MSR +

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSR)(mm)
1.
2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Outside micrometer:
The micrometer essentially consists of an accurate screw having about 10 or 20 threads per cm. The
end of the screw forms one measuring tip and other measuring tip is constituted by a stationary anvil in the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

base of the frame. The screw is threaded for certain length and is plain afterwards. The plain portion is called
spindle and its end is the measuring surface. The spindle is advanced or retracted by turning a thimble
connected to a spindle. The spindle is a slide fit over the barrel and barrel is the fixed part attached with the
frame. The barrel & thimble are graduated. The pitch of the screw threads is 0.5 mm.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count:
Least Count (LC) = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale
= 0.5 / 50 = 0.01 mm
Parts:
1. Frame

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Anvil
3. Spindle
4. Spindle lock
5. Barrel or outside sleeve
6. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.
The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.
14 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Measurement:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

It can be used for any external measurement.
Types of micrometer:
1. Outside micrometer, 2. Inside micrometer, 3.Depth micrometer, 4. Stick micrometer, 5. Screw thread
micrometer, 6. V ? anvil micrometer, 7. Blade type micrometer, 8. Dial micrometer, 9. Bench micrometer, 10.
Tape screw operated internal micrometer, 11. Groove micrometer, 12. Digital micrometer, 13.Differential screw

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

micrometer, 14.Adjustable range outside micrometer.
Ratchet stop mechanism:
The object of the ratchet stop is to ensure that same level of torque is applied on the spindle while
measuring and the sense of the feel of operator is eliminated and consistent readings are obtained. By
providing this arrangement, the ratchet stop is made slip off when the torque applied to rotate the spindle

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

exceeds the set torque. Thus this provision ensures the application of same amount of torque during the
measurement.
Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Pitch Scale Reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(PSR) (mm)
Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)
Head scale reading
(HSR x LC) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total Reading (PSR
+ HSR) (mm)
1.
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Depth micrometer:
Depth micrometer is a sort of micrometer which is mainly used for measuring depth of holes, so it is
named as depth micrometer.
Parts:
1. Shoulder

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Spindle
3. Spindle lock
4. Barrel or outside sleeve ? It has pitch scale.
5. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions.
6. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.
15 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


Least count:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least Count = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale = 0.50/50
= 0.01 mm
Measurements:
It can be used for measuring the depth of holes, slots and recessed areas. The pitch of the screw thread
is 0.5 mm. The least count is 0.01 mm. Shoulder acts as a reference surface and is held firmly and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

perpendicular to the centre line of the hole. For large range of measurement extension rods are used. In the
barrel the scale is calibrated. The accuracy again depends upon the sense of touch.
Procedure:
First, calculate the least count of the instrument. Check the zero error. Measure the specimen note
down the main scale reading or the head scale reading. Note down the vernier or head scale coincidence with

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

main or pitch scale divisions.
Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)
Head scale reading
(HSR x LC) (mm)
Total Reading (PSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

+ HSR) (mm)

1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.


16 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Universal bevel protractor:

Description:
Bevel protractor is an instrument for measuring the angle between the two faces of a specimen. It
consists of a base plate on which a circular scale is engraved. It is graduated in degrees. An adjustment plate

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

is attached to a circular plate containing the vernier scale. The adjustable blade can be locked in any position.
The circular plate has 360 division divided into four parts of 90 degrees each. The adjustable parts have 24
divisions of to the right and left sides of zero reading. These scales are used according to the position of the
specimen with respect to movable scale.
Procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Place the specimen whose taper is to be measured between the adjustable plate and movable
blade with one of its face parallel to the base.
2. Lock the adjustable plate in position and note down the main scale reading depending upon the
direction of rotation of adjustable plate in clockwise or anticlockwise.
3. Note the VSC to the right of zero.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Multiply the VSC with the least count and add to MSR to obtain the actual reading.
Least count:
Least Count = 2 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

24 VSD = 46
o
=> 1 VSD = 23/12
LC = 2 ? 23/12 = 1/12
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= 5? (five minutes)



17 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Main scale reading
(MSR) (deg)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale reading
(VSR) (deg)
Total reading (MSR +

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSR)
(deg)
1.
2.
The angle of scriber of the vernier height gauge =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Thus the various precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab are studied and the specimen
dimensions are recorded.
Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for linear, angular,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

roundness and roughness measurements they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring
instrument according to a specific requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).
Application:
1. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Metrology
2. Define ? Inspection
3. What are the needs of inspection in industries?
4. What are the various methods involving the measurement?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Define ? Precision
6. Define ? Accuracy
7. Define ? Calibration
8. Define ? Repeatability
9. Define ? Magnification

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. Define ? Error
11. Define ? Systematic Error
12. Define ? Random Error
13. Define ? Parallax Error
14. Define ? Environmental Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15. Define ? Cosine Error
Viva-voce

18 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.02 BUILD UP THE SLIP GAUGE FOR GIVEN DIMENSION
? A STUDY
Aim:
To build up the slip gauge for given dimension
Apparatus required:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Slip gauges set
2. Surface plate
3. Soft cloth
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
Slip gauge are universally accepted standard of length in industry. They are the working standard for
linear dimension. These were invented by a Swedish Engineer, C.E. Johansson. They are used
1. For direct precise measurement where the accuracy of the workpiece demand it.
2. For use with high- magnification comparators to establish the size of the gauge blocks in general

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

use.
3. Gauge blocks are also used for many other purposes such as checking the accuracy of measuring
instrument or setting up a comparator to a specific dimension, enabling a batch of component to be
quickly and accurately checked or indeed in any situation where there is need to refer to standard of
known length these blocks are rectangular.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

19 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Most gauge blocks are produced from high grade steel, hardened and established by a heat treatment
process to give a high degree of dimensional stability. Gauge blocks are also manufactured from tungsten
carbide which is an extremely hard and wear resistant material. The measuring faces have a lapped finish.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The faces are perfectly flat and parallel to one another with a high degree of accuracy. Each block has an
extremely high dimensional accuracy at 20
o
C.
These slip gauge are available in variety of selected sets both in inch units and metric units. Letter ?E? is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

used for inch units and ?M? is used for metric standard number of pieces in a set following the letter E or M. For
example EBI refers to a set whose blocks are in metric units and are 83 in number. Each block dimensions is
printed on anyone of its face itself the size of any required standard being made up by combining the
appropriate number of these different size blocks.
If two gauges are slid and twisted together under pressure they will firmly join together. This process,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

known as wringing, is very useful because it enables several gauge blocks to be assembled together to
produce a required size. In fact the success of precision measurement by slip gauges depends on the
phenomenon of wringing.
First the gauge is oscillated slightly with very light pressure over other gauge so as to detect pressure at
any foreign particles between the surfaces. One gauge is placed perpendicular to other using standard

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

gauging pressure and rotary motion is applied until the blocks are lined up.
Procedure:
1. Build the given dimension by wringing minimum number of slip gauges.
2. Note the given dimension and choose the minimum possible slip gauge available in the set so as to
accommodate the last decimal value. The minimum slip gauge value dimension available i.e., 1.12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

mm must be chosen followed by 1.5 mm thick gauge block.
3. Follow the above steps to build up the slip gauge of any dimension.
Precautions:
1. Slip gauges should be handled very carefully placed gently and should never be dropped.
2. Whenever a slip gauge is being removed from the set, its dimensions are noted and must be

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

replaced into the set at its appropriate place only.
3. Correct procedure must be followed in wringing and also in removing the gauge blocks.
4. They should be cleaned well before use and petroleum jelly is applied after use.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

20 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:
Range (mm) Increment (mm) No. of pieces

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total = ____________ Pieces

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total length of slip gauge = ________ mm
Given diameter Slip gauges used Obtained dimensions

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Slip gauge set is studied and the given dimensions are building up by wringing minimum number of slip
gauges.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Students will be able to select proper measuring instrument and know requirement of calibration, errors
in measurement etc. They can perform accurate measurements.
Application:
1. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Why C.I. is preferred material for surface plates and tables?
2. Why V ? blocks are generally manufactured in pairs?
3. Why micrometer is required to be tested for accuracy?
4. Define ? Linear Measurement

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. List the linear measuring instrument according to their accuracy.
6. Define ? Least Count
7. What are the uses of vernier depth gauge?
8. What are the uses of feeler gauges?
9. What are the uses of straight edge?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. What are the uses of angle plate?
11. What are the uses of V ? block?
12. What are the uses of combination square?
13. What precautions should be taken while using slip gauges?
14. What is wringing?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15. Why the slip gauges are termed as ?End standard?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

22 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


Expt.No.03 THREAD PARAMETERS MEASUREMENT USING
TOOL MAKERS MICROSCOPE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Aim:
To study the tool makers microscope and in the process measure the various dimensions of the given
specimen
Apparatus required:
1. Tool makers microscope

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Specimen
Diagram:

Description:
The tool maker?s microscope is designed for measurement of parts of complex forms; for example,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

profile of a tool having external threads. It can also be used for measuring centre to centre distance of the
holes in any plane as well as the coordinates of the outline of a complex template gauge, using the
coordinates measuring system.
23 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Basically it consists of an optical head which can be adjusted vertically along the ways of supporting
column. The optical head can be clamped at any position by a screw. On the work table (which as a circular
base in which there are graduations) the part to be inspected is placed. The table has a compound slide by
means of which the part can be measured. For giving these two movements, there are two micrometer screws
having thimble scales and verniers. At the back of the base light source is arranged that provides horizontal

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

beam of light, reflected from a mirror by 90 degrees upwards towards the table. The beam of light passes
through the transparent glass plate on which flat plates can be checked are placed. Observations are made
through the eyepiece of the optical head.
Procedure:
1. Place the given specimen on the work table and switch on all the three light sources and adjust the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

intensity of the light source until a clean image of the cross wires and specimen are seen through
the eyepiece.
2. Coincide one of the two extreme edges between which the measurement has to be taken with
vertical or horizontal cross wires and depending upon the other image coincide with the same cross
wires by moving the above device. Note the reading.The difference between the two readings gives

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the value of the required measurement.
3. Note the experiment specimen and the readings.
4. Tabulate the different measurements measured from the specimen.
Determination of thread parameters
Magnification =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

S.No. Parameters
Magnified value
(mm)
Actual value
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Outer diameter (O.D)

2. Internal diameter (I.D)

3. Pitch

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Flank angle


Result:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Included angle of the tool was measured using tool maker?s microscope and various dimensions of the
given specimen are measured.


24 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the various parameters of thread and select proper measuring
instrument and know requirement of calibration, errors in measurement etc. They can perform accurate
measurements.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Machine Shop
2. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by tool maker?s microscope?
2. What is the light used in tool maker?s microscope?
3. What are the various characteristics that you would measure in a screw thread?
4. What are the instruments that are required for measuring screw thread?
5. Define ? Pitch

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. What are the causes of pitch error?
7. Define ? Flank
8. What are the effects of flank angle error?
9. What is progressive error?
10. What is periodic error?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. What is drunken error?
12. What is erratic error?
13. What are the applications of tool maker?s microscope?
14. What are the limitations of tool maker?s microscope?
15. What are the advantages of tool maker?s microscope?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

25 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.04 CALIBRATION OF DIAL GAUGE USING SLIP GAUGE
Aim:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge
Apparatus required:
Dial gauge, magnetic stand, slip gauge, and surface plate
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
The dial test indicator is a precision measuring instrument which can convert linear motion into angular
motion by means of transmission mechanics of rack and pinion and can be used to measure linear vibration
and errors of shape.
This instrument has the features such as good appearance, compact size, light weight, high precision,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

reasonable construction, constant measuring face etc. Rigidity of all parts is excellent. Probe is tipped with
carbide balls. A shock proof mechanism is provided for those with larger measuring range.

26 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Types of dial indicator:
1. Plunger type
2. Lever type
Plunger type dial indicator has a resolution counter and each division in main scale is 0.01 mm. In lever
type dial test indicator is replaced by ball type stylus.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. Fix the dial gauge to the stand rigidly and place the stand on the surface plate.
2. Set the plunger of dial gauge to first touch the upper surface of standard slip gauge and set indicator
to zero.
3. Raise then the plunger by pulling the screw above the dial scale.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Place the standard slip gauge underneath the plunger.
5. Release the plunger and let it to touch the standard slip gauge.
6. Note the reading on the dial scale.
Formulae:
The standard error of dial gauge is calculated by the formula

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
S.No.
Slip gauge reading ?x?
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Dial gauge reading
(mm)
(x? - x)
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x? (x? - x)
1.
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Thus the accuracy and standard error of dial gauge is found. The standard error of given dial gauge is
__________.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

27 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Outcome:
Students will be able to check the variation in tolerance during the inspection process of a
machined part, measure the deflection of a beam or ring under laboratory conditions, as well as many

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

other situations where a small measurement needs to be registered or indicated
Application:
1. Milling Machine
2. Analog versus digital/electronic readout

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is comparator?
2. What are the types of comparators?
3. What is the LC for comparators?
4. What are the applications of comparator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. What is meant by plunger?
6. What are the types of dial indicators?
7. Why a revolution counter is not provided in lever type dial test indicator?
8. Draw a line diagram of the operating mechanism of plunger type dial test indicator.
9. Explain the term magnification of a dial indicator.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. What are the uses of dial test indicator?
11. What are the practical applications of dial test indicator?
12. What precautions should be taken while using dial test indicator?
13. What are the desirable qualities of a dial test indicator?
14. What are the advantages of dial test indicator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15. What are the limitations of dial test indicator?
16. Distinguish between comparator and measuring instrument.
17. What are the advantages of electrical comparator?
18. What are the advantages of optical comparator?
19. What are the uses of comparator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

20. What are the advantages and disadvantages of mechanical comparator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

28 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.05 DETERMINATION OF TAPER ANGLE BY SINE BAR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

METHOD
Aim:
To measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare
Apparatus required:
Sine bar, slip gauges, dial gauge with stand, micrometer, surface plate, bevel protractor, vernier caliper

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diagram:

Description:
The sine bar principle uses the ratio of the length of two sides of a right triangle. It may be noted that
devices operating on sine principle are capable of ?self-generation?. The measurement is restricted to 45

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
from
accuracy point of view. Sine bar itself is not a measuring instrument.
Accuracy requirements of sine bar:
1. The axes of the rollers must be parallel to each other and the centre distance L must be precisely

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

known.
2. The sine bar must be flat and parallel to the plane connecting the axes of the rollers.
3. The rollers must be of identical diameters and must have within a close tolerance.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

29 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Procedure:
1. Fix the dial gaugeon the magnetic stand and place the magnetic stand on the surface plate.Check
the parallelism of the sine bar.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Place the given specimen above the sine bar and place the dial gauge on top of the specimen.
Adjustthe dial gauge for zero deflection.
3. Raise the front end of the sine bar with slip gauges until the work surface is parallel to the datum
surface.
4. Check the parallelism using dial gauge.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Measure the distance between the centres of the sine bar rollers as ?L? and note the height of the
slip gauge as ?H?.
6. Note the included angle of the specimen.
Formulae:
Sin ? = H/L where ? = Included angle of the specimen

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

H = Height of slip gauges
L = Distance between the centre of rollers
Tabulation:
S.No. L (mm) H (mm) Taper angle ( ?)
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.
3.

Result:
The taper angle of the given specimen using sine bar was found to be =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for angular measurements
and they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a specific
requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Flat Surface
2. Granite

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

30 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. List out the various angle measuring instruments.
2. What is the working principles sine bar?
3. How is a sine bar used to measure the angle?
4. What is the application of sine bar?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. What is the material of sine bar?
6. Why sine bar is not preferred to use for measuring angles more than 45
0
?
7. What are the features of sine bar?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. A 100 mm sine bar is to be set up to an angle of 33
0
, determine the slip gauges needed from 87
pieces set.
9. What are the various instruments used for measuring angles?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. What is sine bar?
11. How sine bar is used for angle measurement?
12. Explain how sine bar is used to measure angle of small size component.
13. Explain how sine bar is used to measure angle of large size component.
14. What are the various types of sine bar?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15. What are the limitations of sine bar?
16. What is sine center?
17. What is sine table?
18. What are the possible sources of errors in angular measurement by sine bar?
19. What are angle gauges?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

20. How angle gauges are used for measuring angles?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

31 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.06 DETERMINATION OF GEAR TOOTH THICKNESS
USING GEAR TOOTH VERNIER
Aim:
To determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen and to draw the graph between the tooth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

number and the error in thickness
Apparatus required:
Gear tooth vernier, specimen, surface plate and vernier caliper
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
The tooth thickness, in general, is measured at pitch circle since gear tooth thickness varies from the tip
to the base circle of the tooth. This is possible only when there is an arrangement to fix that position for this
measurement by the gear tooth vernier. It has two vernier scales; one is vertical and other is horizontal.
Procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

32 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

1. Measure initially the outside diameter of the given gear specimen by means of a vertical calculation
of vernier caliper. Note the number of teeth. Calculate the module (m) using the formula.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M = OD/ (Z+2) where z ? number of teeth
M - Module
2. Calculate the theoretical tooth thickness (t) by t = z * m* sin (90/z).
3. Set the vernier scale for the height and tighten.
4. Measure the thickness of each tooth using the horizontal scale. This is measured thickness. It can

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

be positive or negative.
H = m x [1+ Z/2 (1- Cos 90/Z)]
5. Calculate the error in the tooth thickness i.e,1. measured thickness ? Theoretical thickness
6. Draw the graph between the tooth number and the error in thickness.
Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tooth
Number
Measured Thickness
(mm)
Theoretical Thickness (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Error in tooth thickness
(mm)
1
2
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tooth
Number
MSR
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSC

VSR
(mm)
TR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
1
2
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Graph:


Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tooth No.
33 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
The theoretical experiment value of gear tooth thickness is obtained and graph is drawn between error
and tooth number in tooth thickness
Theoretical tooth thickness =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Experimental tooth thickness =
Error in tooth thickness =
Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the basic measurement units and able to calibrate various
measuring parameters of the gear.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Gear Component
2. Mining

1. Calculate the setting of a gear tooth vernier caliper for a straight spur gear having 40 teeth and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

module 4.
2. What is the importance of chordal depth?
3. Define ? Chordal width
4. How is the actual profile of the gear tooth determined?
5. What are the manufacturing errors in gear element?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Define ? Addendum
7. Define ? Dedendum
8. Define ? Flank of tooth
9. Define ? Pitch
10. Define ? Pitch Circle

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. Define ? Crest of tooth
12. Define ? Root of tooth
13. Define ? Base Circle
14. Define ? Module
15. Define ? Angle of Obliquity

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

34 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.07 MEASUREMENT OF THREAD PARAMETER USING
FLOATING CARRIAGE MICROMETER
Aim:
To measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two wire

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

method
Apparatus required:
1. Floating carriage micrometer
2. Standard wire
3. Given specimen (screw thread)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diagram:

Description of floating carriage micrometer:
It consists of three main units. A base casting carries a pair of centres on which threaded work piece is
to be mounted. Another carriage capable of moving towards centre is mounted exactly above. In this carriage

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

one head with thimble to measure up to 0.002 mm is provided and at the other side of head a fiducial indicator
is provided to indicate zero position.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

35 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Procedure:
1. For two wire method, place the standard wire over a thread of the screw at opposite sides.
2. For three wire method, place two standard wires on two successive threads and the third wire

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

placed opposite sides of the thread.
3. Measure the diameter over wires (M) using floating carriage micrometer.
4. Repeat this procedure at various positions of the screw and take different readings.
Formulae:
1. For best wire size, d = P / 2 Cos (x/2)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Where, P = Pitch
d= wire size
x = angle between two threads
= 60
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

for metric thread
2. Actual effective diameter, E.A = M ? 3d + 0.866 p
3. Nominal effective diameter, EN = D ? 0.648 p
4. Max. wire size = 1.01 p
5. Min. wire size = 0.505 p

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Best wire size = 0.577 p
M = Diameter over wires
P = Pitch of thread
For metric thread:
Actual effective diameter (EA) = M ? 3d + 0.866 p

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Where d = actual diameter of wire
Determination of actual and nominal effective diameter of the screw thread:
Sl.No.
Nominal
Diameter (D)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
Diameter over
wire ?M?
(mm)
Actual eff.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diameter E.A
(mm)
Nominal eff.
Diameter E.N
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Error in effective
diameter
(E.A ? E.N)
(mm)
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

36 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Result:
Thus the actual and nominal effective diameter is measured using three wire method and the error in
effective diameter of screw is determined.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for roundness
measurements and they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a
specific requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).
Application:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Wholse
2. Maxxis Rubber India

1. Define ? Pitch
2. Define ? Flank Angle

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. What is plug gauge?
4. What is meant by micrometer?
5. What is meant by indicator?
6. What is best ? size wire?
7. Calculate the diameter of the best wire for an M 20 x 25 screws.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. What are the different corrections to be applied in the measurement of effective diameter by the
method of wire?
9. What is floating carriage micrometer?
10. What are the uses of floating carriage micrometer?
11. What are the methods are used for measuring effective diameter?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. Define ? Effective Diameter
13. Define ? Major Diameter
14. Define ? Minor Diameter
15. What are the effects of flank error?
16. Define ? Rake Angle

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17. Define ? Pitch Cylinder
18. What are the effects of pitch error?
19. Define ? Pitch Diameter
20. What is meant by angle of thread?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

37 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.08 MEASUREMENT OF VARIOUS DIMENSIONS USING
COORDINATE MEASURING MACHINE
Aim:
1. To study the construction and operation of coordinate measuring machine
2. To measure the specified dimensions of the given component

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Instruments used:
Coordinate measuring machine, vernier calipers
Diagram:

Theory:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

A coordinate measuring machine (CMM) is a 3D device for measuring the physical and geometrical
characteristics of an object. This machine may be manually controlled by an operator or it may be computer
controlled. Measurements are defined by a probe attached to the three moving axis of this machine X, Y and Z
axes. A coordinate measuring machine (CMM) is also a device used in manufacturing and assembly
processes to test a part or assembly against the design intent. By precisely recording the X, Y and Z

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

coordinates of the target, points are generated which can be analyzed via regression algorithms for the
construction of features. These points are collected by using a probe that is positioned manually by an
38 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

operator or automatically via direct computer control (DCC). DCC CMMs can be programmed to repeatedly

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measure identical parts, thus a CMM is a specialized form of industrial robot.
Parts:
Coordinate measuring machine include three main components:
1. The main structures which include three axes of motion.
2. Probing system

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Data collection and reduction system ? typically includes a machine controller, desktop computer
and application software
Machine description:
1. In modern machines, the gantry type superstructure has two legs and is often called a bridge. This
moves freely along the granite table with one leg following a guide rail attached to one side of the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

granite table. The opposite leg simply rests on the granite table following the vertical surface
contour.
2. Air bearings are fixed for ensuring friction free travel. Compressed air is forced through a series of
very small holes in a flat bearing surface to provide a smooth but controlled air cushion on which the
CMM can move in a frictionless manner.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. The movement of the bridge along the granite table forms one axis of the XY plane. The bridge of
the gantry contains a carriage which traverses between the inside and outside legs and forms the
other X or Y horizontal axis.
4. The third axis of movement (Z axis) is provided by the addition of a vertical quill or spindle which
moves up and down through the center of the carriage. The touch probe forms the sensing device

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

on the end of the quill.
5. The movement of the X, Y and Z axes fully describes the measuring envelope. Some touch probes
are themselves powered rotary devices with the probe tip able to swivel vertically through 90
degrees and through a full 360 degrees rotation.
Uses:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

They are generally used for:
1. Dimensional measurement
2. Profile measurement
3. Angularity or orientation measurement
4. Depth mapping

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Digitizing mapping
6. Shaft measurement
39 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

The machines are available in a wide range of sizes and designs with a variety of different probe

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

technologies. They can be operated manually or automatically through direct computer control (DCC). They
are offered in various configurations such as bench top, free ? standing, handheld and portable.
Procedure:
1. Take at least 8 points on sphere ball attached to the granite table.
2. Fix the object whose dimension needs to be measured using the jigs and fixtures.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Using joystick, move the probe whose tip is made of ruby slowly and carefully to the surface whose
measurements have to be taken.
4. Touch the probe at two places for measurement of a line (starting and ending point).
5. Touch the probe at two places for measurement of a circular profile and for a cylinder touch the
probe at 8 points.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Measure the same profiles again with vernier calipers (length of line, circle diameter, cylinder
diameter) to compare the two readings.
Comments:
1. The machine should be calibrated every time when it is being used.
2. While measuring the profiles, the probe should be moved very slowly as it may damage the ruby if

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

hit with a high force.
3. Care should be taken while performing experiment so that the granite table of the machines should
get any scratches.
4. ?Retract distance? should be fixed according to the space available in the near vicinity of the profile
measurement area.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Observation:
Sl.No. Feature
CMM reading
(mm)
Vernier reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
Form error
(mm)
Difference in two
readings (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 Circle -1
2 Circle -2
3 Circle -3
4 Line
5 Arc

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6
Cone - Diameter
Cone ? Vertex angle
Cone ? Height
7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Cylinder ? Diameter
Cylinder ? Height


40 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Thus the different profile of given object are measured using coordinate measuring machine
Outcome:
Students will be able to measures the geometry of physical objects by sensing discrete points on the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

surface of the object with a probe and they will be able to know the Various types of probes are used in CMMs,
including mechanical, optical, laser, and white light.
Application:
1. Surface Measuring Equipment
2. Photo transistor

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What are the types of measuring machine?
2. What is CMM?
3. What are the types of CMM?
4. What are the advantages of CMM?
5. What are the limitations of CMM?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. What are the possible sources of error in CMM?
7. What is the use of universal measuring machine?
8. What are the applications of CMM?
9. What is the working principle of three axis measuring machine?
10. What is image shearing microscope?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. What is the use of electronic inspection and measuring machine?
12. What are the types of electronic inspection and measuring machine?
13. What is CMM probe?
14. What are the three main probes are available?
15. What are the types of stylus?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

41 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.09 MEASUREMENT OF SURFACE ROUGHNESS UING
TALYSURF INSTRUMENT

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Aim:
To measure the surface roughness using Talysurf instrument
Apparatus required:
Talysurf instrument, work piece, surface plate
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Theory:
On any finished surface, imperfections are bound to be there and these take the form of a succession of
hills and valleys which vary both in height and in spacing and result in a kind of texture which in appearance or
feel is often characteristic of the machining process and accompanying defects. The several kinds of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

departures are there on the surface and these are due to various causes.

42 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Methods of measuring surface roughness:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Surface inspection of comparison methods
2. Direct instrument measurements
In comparative methods the surface texture is assessed by observation of the surface. But these
methods are not reliable as they can be misleading, if comparison is not made with surfaces produced by
same techniques. The various methods available under comparison method are: (i) Touch Inspection

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(ii)Scratch Inspection (iii) Microscopic Inspection (iv) Visual Inspection (v) Surface Photographs (vi) Reflected
Light Intensity Direct Instrument Measurements enable to determine a numerical value of the surface finish of
any surface. Nearly all instruments used are stylus probe type of instruments. This operates on electrical
principle.
Procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Place the finished component on the surface plate.
2. Fix the Talysurf tester to the vernier height gauge using adopter at a convenient height.
3. Make sure that the stylus probe touches the work piece.
4. Fix the sampling length in the tester.
5. Press the power button so that the probe moves on the surface to and fro.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Take the readings of the surface roughness directly from the instrument.
7. Repeat the above process for the remaining specimen and tabulate the readings.
Precautions:
1. The surface to be tested should be cleaned properly.
2. The tester should be fixed to the height gauge properly so that the movement of the probe is exactly

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

parallel to the surface of work.
3. Make sure that the probe gently touches the work.
Tabulation:
S.No
Measurement roughness value,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?m
Sample direction Ra, Rz
Average Ra Average Rz Grade
1.
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

43 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Result:
Thus the surface roughness is checked for different specimens by Talysurf.
Outcome:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for roughness
measurements they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a specific
requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).
Application:
1. Machine Shop

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Quality Department


1. Define ? Actual Size?
2. What is meant by normal surface?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. What is meant by profilo-graph?
4. What is Tomlinson surface meter?
5. What is meant by profile?
6. What are the factors affecting surface roughness?
7. Why the surface texture is control?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Define ? Lay
9. Define ? Surface Texture
10. Define ? Flaws
11. What is sampling length?
12. What are the methods used for evaluating surface finish?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. What is form factor?
14. What are the methods used for measuring surface finish?
15. How will you differentiate smooth surface from flat surface?
16. How surface finish is designated on drawings?
17. Define ? Primary Texture

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

18. Define ? Secondary Texture
19. What are the types of instrument used for measuring surface texture?
20. Define ? waviness

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

44 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.10 MEASUREMENT OF BORE USING DIAL BORE
INDICATOR AND TELESCOPIC GAUGE
Aim:
To determine the diameter of bore by using telescopic gauge and checking the same by using dial bore
indicator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Apparatus required:
Work piece, vernier caliper, telescopic gauge and dial gauge indicator set with anvil.
Diagram:

45 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
Bore gauge measurement:
1. Select the extension rod and washer according to the bore diameter to be measured

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Fix the suitable extension rod and washer with the bore gauge
3. Fix the dial gauge to the bore gauge in its position
4. Insert the bore gauge inside the bore to be measured and hold the gauge in parallel o the axis of the
bore. Ensure that the tips on either side of the bore gauge are in touch with inner wall of the bore
5. Note down the reading in the dial gauge and withdraw the bore gauge from the bore

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Hold the measuring tips of bore gauge between the spindle and anvil of a micrometer and compress
the tips by rotating the thimble till the reading reaches the same one as noted earlier
7. Observe and record the micrometer reading as the bore diameter to be measured
Telescopic gauge measurement:
1. Select the telescopic gauge according to the bore diameter to be measured

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Press the telescopic spindles in the telescopic gauge lock them by locking screw
3. Insert the telescopic gauge inside thee bore to be measured. Release the locking screw to expand
the telescopic spindles outwards inside the bore
4. Hold the telescopic gauge in parallel to the axis of bore axis and ensure that the tips of telescopic
spindles are in touch with the inner wall of the bore

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Lock the telescopic spindles and withdraw it from the bore
46 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

6. Measure the expanded length of the telescopic spindles using micrometer record them as the inner
diameter of the bore

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Practical observations:
Rough measurement of bore using Telescopic gauge:
Least count of micrometer = 0.01 mm
Sl.No.
Micrometer reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total reading
(MSR + TSC * LC) ( mm) Main scale reading (MSR)
(mm)
Thimble scale
coincidence

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
2.

Average reading = ________ mm
Accurate measuring using Bore gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
Micrometer
reading
(d) (mm)
Bore gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

reading
(R1) (mm)
Work piece reading
(R2) (mm)
Final reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d+ (R1 ? R2) * 0.01
(mm)
1.
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Accurate internal diameter of hole using bore gauge = ______ mm

Result
1. Internal diameter of the work piece by using telescopic gauge is ________mm
2. Diameter obtained by using dial gauge indicator is __________________mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Students will be able to measure a bore's size, by transferring the internal dimension to a remote
measuring tool (Telescopic gauge).
Application:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Automobile
2. Quality Department


47 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by bore diameter?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. What is gauge?
3. What is meant by measurement?
4. What is telescope gauge?
5. What is bore gauge?
6. What is contact point?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. What is the principle of bore gauge?
8. What are the applications of telescopic gauge?
9. What types of materials are used in telescopic gauge?
10. What are the types of instrument used to measure bore diameter?
11. What are the applications of bore gauge?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. What are the advantages of bore gauge over telescopic gauge?
13. What are the limitations of bore gauge?
14. What is the working principle of telescopic gauge?
15. What are the disadvantages of telescopic gauge?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

V SEMESTER - R 2013

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No. : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LABORATORY MANUAL
2 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

DHANALAKSHMI

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
2. To contribute to the promotion of Academic Excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels
3. To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING


Rendering the services to the global needs of engineering industries by educating students to become

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

professionally sound mechanical engineers of excellent caliber


To produce mechanical engineering technocrats with a perfect knowledge intellectual and hands on
experience and to inculcate the spirit of moral values and ethics to serve the society

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MISSION
MISSION
VISION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION

4 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals
To impart students with fundamental knowledge in mathematics and basic sciences that will mould
them to be successful professionals
2. Core competence

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To provide students with sound knowledge in engineering and experimental skills to identify
complex software problems in industry and to develop a practical solution for them
3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theory and practice which
enable them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and organization and to design

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

products requiring interdisciplinary skills
4. Professional skills
To bestow students with adequate training and provide opportunities to work as team that will build
up their communication skills, individual, leadership and supportive qualities and to enable them to
adapt and to work in ever changing technologies

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Life-long learning
To develop the ability of students to establish themselves as professionals in mechanical
engineering and to create awareness about the need for lifelong learning and pursuing advanced
degrees

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)
On completion of the B.E. (Mechanical) degree, the graduate will be able
a) To apply the basic knowledge of mathematics, science and engineering

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

b) To design and conduct experiments as well as to analyze and interpret data and apply the same in
the career or entrepreneurship
c) To design and develop innovative and creative software applications
d) To understand a complex real world problem and develop an efficient practical solution
e) To create, select and apply appropriate techniques, resources, modern engineering and IT tools

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

f) To understand the role as a professional and give the best to the society
g) To develop a system that will meet expected needs within realistic constraints such as economical
environmental, social, political, ethical, safety and sustainability
h) To communicate effectively and make others understand exactly what they are trying to tell in both
verbal and written forms

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

i) To work in a team as a team member or a leader and make unique contributions and work with
coordination
j) To engage in lifelong learning and exhibit their technical skills
k) To develop and manage projects in multidisciplinary environments

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY



To familiar with different measurement equipment?s and use of this industry for quality inspection

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

List of Experiments
1. Tool Maker?s Microscope
2. Comparator
3. Sine Bar
4. Gear Tooth Vernier Caliper

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Floating gauge Micrometer
6. Coordinate Measuring Machine
7. Surface Finish Measuring Equipment
8. Vernier Height Gauge
9. Bore diameter measurement using telescope gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. Bore diameter measurement using micrometer
11. Force Measurement
12. Torque Measurement
13. Temperature measurement
14. Autocollimator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Ability to handle different measurement tools and perform measurements in quality impulsion
2. Learnt the usage of precision measuring instruments and practiced to take measurements
3. Learnt and practiced to build the required dimensions using slip gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Able to measure the various dimensions of the given specimen using the tool maker?s microscope
5. Able to find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge
6. Able to measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare
7. Learnt to determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen using Gear tooth vernier
8. Able to measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

wire method
9. Learnt to study the construction and operation of coordinate measuring machine
10. Learnt to determine the diameter of bore by using telescopic gauge and dial bore indicator
11. Able to measure the surface roughness using Talysurf instrument
12. Studied the characteristic between applied load and the output volt

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. Learnt the characteristics of developing torque and respective sensor output voltage
14. Studied the characteristics of thermocouple without compensation
15. Able to check the straightness & flatness of the given component by using Autocollimator
16. Learnt to measure the displacement using LVDT and to calibrate it with the millimeter scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OBJECTIVES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OUTCOMES

7 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CONTENTS
Sl. No. Name of the Experiments Page No.
CYCLE ? 1 EXPERIMENTS
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab ? A Study
7
2
To build up the slip gauge for given dimension ? A Study
16

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
Thread parameters measurement using Tool Makers Microscope
20
4
Calibration of dial gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

23
5
Determination of taper angle by sine bar method
26
6

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of gear tooth thickness using gear tooth vernier
29
7
Measurement of thread parameters using floating carriage micrometer
32

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CYCLE ? 2 EXPERIMENTS
8
Measurement of various dimensions using Coordinate Measuring Machine
35
9

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement of surface roughness
39
10
Measurement of bores using dial bore indicator and telescopic gauge
42

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11
Force measurement using load cell
46
12
Torque measurement using strain gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

49
13
Temperature measurement using thermocouple
53
14

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement of alignment using autocollimator
56
ADDITIONAL EXPERIMENT BEYOND THE SYLLABUS
15
Thread parameters measurement using profile projector

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

60
16
Displacement measurement ? linear variable differential transducer (LVDT)
62
PROJECT WORK

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

65


8 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.01 PRECISION MEASURING INSTRUMENT YSED IN
METROLOGY LAB ? A STUDY
Aim:
To study the following instruments and their usage for measuring dimensions of given specimen
1. Vernier caliper

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Micrometer
3. Vernier height gauge
4. Depth micrometer
5. Universal bevel protractor
Apparatus required:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Surface plate, specimen and above instruments
Vernier caliper:
The principle of vernier caliper is to use the minor difference between the sizes two scales or divisions
for measurement. The difference between them can be utilized to enhance the accuracy of measurement. The
vernier caliper essentially consists of two steel rules, sliding along each other.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Parts:
Different parts of the vernier caliper are
1. Beam ? It has main scale.
2. Fixed jaw
3. Sliding or Moving jaw ? It has vernier scale and sliding jaw locking screw.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw knife
edges for internal measurement.
5. Stem or depth bar for depth measurement
Least count:
Least count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm
1 VSD = 0.98 mm
Least count = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


ID

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPTH


OD
Measurement:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Given Vernier caliper can be used for external, internal depth, slot and step measurement.
Measurement principle:
When both jaws contact each other scale shows the zero reading. The finer adjustment of movable jaw
can be done by the fine adjustment screw. First the whole movable jaw assembly is adjusted so that the two
measuring tips just touch the part to be measured. Then the fine adjustment clamp locking screw is tightened.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Final adjustment depending upon the sense of correct feel is made by the adjusting screw. After final
adjustment has been made sliding jaw locking screw is also tightened and the reading is noted.
All the parts of the Vernier caliper are made of good quality steel and measuring faces are hardened.
Types of vernier:
Vernier caliper, electronic vernier caliper, vernier depth caliper

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Main scale
reading (MSR)
(mm)
Vernier scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale
reading (VSR) (mm)
Total reading (MSR
+ VSR)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)

OD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ID


Depth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier height gauge:
Vernier height gauge is a sort of vernier caliper equipped with a special instrument suitable for height
measurement. It is always kept on the surface plate and the use of the surfaces plates as datum surfaces is
very essential.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count:
Least Count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm
1 VSD = 0.98 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least Count (LC) = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm
Parts:
1. Base
2. Beam ? It has main scale.
3. Slider ? It has a vernier scale and slider locking screw.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Scriber
5. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw.


12 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Material:
All the parts of vernier are made of good quality steel and the measuring faces hardened.
Types of vernier gauge:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Analog vernier height gauge
2. Digital vernier height gauge
3. Electronic vernier height gauge
Tabulation:
Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Main scale reading
(MSR)(mm)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(VSR)(mm)
Total reading (MSR +
VSR)(mm)
1.
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.

13 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Outside micrometer:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The micrometer essentially consists of an accurate screw having about 10 or 20 threads per cm. The
end of the screw forms one measuring tip and other measuring tip is constituted by a stationary anvil in the
base of the frame. The screw is threaded for certain length and is plain afterwards. The plain portion is called
spindle and its end is the measuring surface. The spindle is advanced or retracted by turning a thimble
connected to a spindle. The spindle is a slide fit over the barrel and barrel is the fixed part attached with the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

frame. The barrel & thimble are graduated. The pitch of the screw threads is 0.5 mm.

Least count:
Least Count (LC) = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale
= 0.5 / 50 = 0.01 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Parts:
1. Frame
2. Anvil
3. Spindle
4. Spindle lock

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Barrel or outside sleeve
6. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions
7. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.
The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.
14 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement:
It can be used for any external measurement.
Types of micrometer:
1. Outside micrometer, 2. Inside micrometer, 3.Depth micrometer, 4. Stick micrometer, 5. Screw thread

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

micrometer, 6. V ? anvil micrometer, 7. Blade type micrometer, 8. Dial micrometer, 9. Bench micrometer, 10.
Tape screw operated internal micrometer, 11. Groove micrometer, 12. Digital micrometer, 13.Differential screw
micrometer, 14.Adjustable range outside micrometer.
Ratchet stop mechanism:
The object of the ratchet stop is to ensure that same level of torque is applied on the spindle while

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measuring and the sense of the feel of operator is eliminated and consistent readings are obtained. By
providing this arrangement, the ratchet stop is made slip off when the torque applied to rotate the spindle
exceeds the set torque. Thus this provision ensures the application of same amount of torque during the
measurement.
Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) (mm)
Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Head scale reading
(HSR x LC) (mm)
Total Reading (PSR
+ HSR) (mm)
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.

Depth micrometer:
Depth micrometer is a sort of micrometer which is mainly used for measuring depth of holes, so it is
named as depth micrometer.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Parts:
1. Shoulder
2. Spindle
3. Spindle lock
4. Barrel or outside sleeve ? It has pitch scale.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions.
6. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.
The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.
15 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count:
Least Count = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale = 0.50/50
= 0.01 mm
Measurements:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

It can be used for measuring the depth of holes, slots and recessed areas. The pitch of the screw thread
is 0.5 mm. The least count is 0.01 mm. Shoulder acts as a reference surface and is held firmly and
perpendicular to the centre line of the hole. For large range of measurement extension rods are used. In the
barrel the scale is calibrated. The accuracy again depends upon the sense of touch.
Procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

First, calculate the least count of the instrument. Check the zero error. Measure the specimen note
down the main scale reading or the head scale reading. Note down the vernier or head scale coincidence with
main or pitch scale divisions.
Tabulation:
Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) (mm)
Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)
Head scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(HSR x LC) (mm)
Total Reading (PSR
+ HSR) (mm)

1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Universal bevel protractor:

Description:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Bevel protractor is an instrument for measuring the angle between the two faces of a specimen. It
consists of a base plate on which a circular scale is engraved. It is graduated in degrees. An adjustment plate
is attached to a circular plate containing the vernier scale. The adjustable blade can be locked in any position.
The circular plate has 360 division divided into four parts of 90 degrees each. The adjustable parts have 24
divisions of to the right and left sides of zero reading. These scales are used according to the position of the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

specimen with respect to movable scale.
Procedure:
1. Place the specimen whose taper is to be measured between the adjustable plate and movable
blade with one of its face parallel to the base.
2. Lock the adjustable plate in position and note down the main scale reading depending upon the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

direction of rotation of adjustable plate in clockwise or anticlockwise.
3. Note the VSC to the right of zero.
4. Multiply the VSC with the least count and add to MSR to obtain the actual reading.
Least count:
Least Count = 2 MSD ? 1 VSD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 MSD = 1
o
24 VSD = 46
o
=> 1 VSD = 23/12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LC = 2 ? 23/12 = 1/12
o
= 5? (five minutes)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:
Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Main scale reading
(MSR) (deg)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(VSR) (deg)
Total reading (MSR +
VSR)
(deg)
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.
The angle of scriber of the vernier height gauge =
Result:
Thus the various precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab are studied and the specimen
dimensions are recorded.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for linear, angular,
roundness and roughness measurements they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring
instrument according to a specific requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).
Application:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Quality Department


1. Define ? Metrology
2. Define ? Inspection

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. What are the needs of inspection in industries?
4. What are the various methods involving the measurement?
5. Define ? Precision
6. Define ? Accuracy
7. Define ? Calibration

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Define ? Repeatability
9. Define ? Magnification
10. Define ? Error
11. Define ? Systematic Error
12. Define ? Random Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. Define ? Parallax Error
14. Define ? Environmental Error
15. Define ? Cosine Error
Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

18 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.02 BUILD UP THE SLIP GAUGE FOR GIVEN DIMENSION
? A STUDY
Aim:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To build up the slip gauge for given dimension
Apparatus required:
1. Slip gauges set
2. Surface plate
3. Soft cloth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diagram:

Description:
Slip gauge are universally accepted standard of length in industry. They are the working standard for
linear dimension. These were invented by a Swedish Engineer, C.E. Johansson. They are used

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. For direct precise measurement where the accuracy of the workpiece demand it.
2. For use with high- magnification comparators to establish the size of the gauge blocks in general
use.
3. Gauge blocks are also used for many other purposes such as checking the accuracy of measuring
instrument or setting up a comparator to a specific dimension, enabling a batch of component to be

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

quickly and accurately checked or indeed in any situation where there is need to refer to standard of
known length these blocks are rectangular.
19 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Most gauge blocks are produced from high grade steel, hardened and established by a heat treatment

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

process to give a high degree of dimensional stability. Gauge blocks are also manufactured from tungsten
carbide which is an extremely hard and wear resistant material. The measuring faces have a lapped finish.
The faces are perfectly flat and parallel to one another with a high degree of accuracy. Each block has an
extremely high dimensional accuracy at 20
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C.
These slip gauge are available in variety of selected sets both in inch units and metric units. Letter ?E? is
used for inch units and ?M? is used for metric standard number of pieces in a set following the letter E or M. For
example EBI refers to a set whose blocks are in metric units and are 83 in number. Each block dimensions is
printed on anyone of its face itself the size of any required standard being made up by combining the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

appropriate number of these different size blocks.
If two gauges are slid and twisted together under pressure they will firmly join together. This process,
known as wringing, is very useful because it enables several gauge blocks to be assembled together to
produce a required size. In fact the success of precision measurement by slip gauges depends on the
phenomenon of wringing.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

First the gauge is oscillated slightly with very light pressure over other gauge so as to detect pressure at
any foreign particles between the surfaces. One gauge is placed perpendicular to other using standard
gauging pressure and rotary motion is applied until the blocks are lined up.
Procedure:
1. Build the given dimension by wringing minimum number of slip gauges.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Note the given dimension and choose the minimum possible slip gauge available in the set so as to
accommodate the last decimal value. The minimum slip gauge value dimension available i.e., 1.12
mm must be chosen followed by 1.5 mm thick gauge block.
3. Follow the above steps to build up the slip gauge of any dimension.
Precautions:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Slip gauges should be handled very carefully placed gently and should never be dropped.
2. Whenever a slip gauge is being removed from the set, its dimensions are noted and must be
replaced into the set at its appropriate place only.
3. Correct procedure must be followed in wringing and also in removing the gauge blocks.
4. They should be cleaned well before use and petroleum jelly is applied after use.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

20 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Range (mm) Increment (mm) No. of pieces

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total = ____________ Pieces
Total length of slip gauge = ________ mm
Given diameter Slip gauges used Obtained dimensions

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Slip gauge set is studied and the given dimensions are building up by wringing minimum number of slip
gauges.
Outcome:
Students will be able to select proper measuring instrument and know requirement of calibration, errors
in measurement etc. They can perform accurate measurements.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Why C.I. is preferred material for surface plates and tables?
2. Why V ? blocks are generally manufactured in pairs?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Why micrometer is required to be tested for accuracy?
4. Define ? Linear Measurement
5. List the linear measuring instrument according to their accuracy.
6. Define ? Least Count
7. What are the uses of vernier depth gauge?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. What are the uses of feeler gauges?
9. What are the uses of straight edge?
10. What are the uses of angle plate?
11. What are the uses of V ? block?
12. What are the uses of combination square?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. What precautions should be taken while using slip gauges?
14. What is wringing?
15. Why the slip gauges are termed as ?End standard?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

22 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.03 THREAD PARAMETERS MEASUREMENT USING
TOOL MAKERS MICROSCOPE
Aim:
To study the tool makers microscope and in the process measure the various dimensions of the given
specimen

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Apparatus required:
1. Tool makers microscope
2. Specimen
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
The tool maker?s microscope is designed for measurement of parts of complex forms; for example,
profile of a tool having external threads. It can also be used for measuring centre to centre distance of the
holes in any plane as well as the coordinates of the outline of a complex template gauge, using the
coordinates measuring system.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

23 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Basically it consists of an optical head which can be adjusted vertically along the ways of supporting
column. The optical head can be clamped at any position by a screw. On the work table (which as a circular
base in which there are graduations) the part to be inspected is placed. The table has a compound slide by

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

means of which the part can be measured. For giving these two movements, there are two micrometer screws
having thimble scales and verniers. At the back of the base light source is arranged that provides horizontal
beam of light, reflected from a mirror by 90 degrees upwards towards the table. The beam of light passes
through the transparent glass plate on which flat plates can be checked are placed. Observations are made
through the eyepiece of the optical head.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. Place the given specimen on the work table and switch on all the three light sources and adjust the
intensity of the light source until a clean image of the cross wires and specimen are seen through
the eyepiece.
2. Coincide one of the two extreme edges between which the measurement has to be taken with

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

vertical or horizontal cross wires and depending upon the other image coincide with the same cross
wires by moving the above device. Note the reading.The difference between the two readings gives
the value of the required measurement.
3. Note the experiment specimen and the readings.
4. Tabulate the different measurements measured from the specimen.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of thread parameters
Magnification =
S.No. Parameters
Magnified value
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Actual value
(mm)
1. Outer diameter (O.D)

2. Internal diameter (I.D)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Pitch

4. Flank angle

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Included angle of the tool was measured using tool maker?s microscope and various dimensions of the
given specimen are measured.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

24 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the various parameters of thread and select proper measuring

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

instrument and know requirement of calibration, errors in measurement etc. They can perform accurate
measurements.
Application:
1. Machine Shop
2. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by tool maker?s microscope?
2. What is the light used in tool maker?s microscope?
3. What are the various characteristics that you would measure in a screw thread?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. What are the instruments that are required for measuring screw thread?
5. Define ? Pitch
6. What are the causes of pitch error?
7. Define ? Flank
8. What are the effects of flank angle error?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. What is progressive error?
10. What is periodic error?
11. What is drunken error?
12. What is erratic error?
13. What are the applications of tool maker?s microscope?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. What are the limitations of tool maker?s microscope?
15. What are the advantages of tool maker?s microscope?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

25 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.04 CALIBRATION OF DIAL GAUGE USING SLIP GAUGE
Aim:
To find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge
Apparatus required:
Dial gauge, magnetic stand, slip gauge, and surface plate

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diagram:

Description:
The dial test indicator is a precision measuring instrument which can convert linear motion into angular
motion by means of transmission mechanics of rack and pinion and can be used to measure linear vibration

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

and errors of shape.
This instrument has the features such as good appearance, compact size, light weight, high precision,
reasonable construction, constant measuring face etc. Rigidity of all parts is excellent. Probe is tipped with
carbide balls. A shock proof mechanism is provided for those with larger measuring range.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

26 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Types of dial indicator:
1. Plunger type
2. Lever type

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Plunger type dial indicator has a resolution counter and each division in main scale is 0.01 mm. In lever
type dial test indicator is replaced by ball type stylus.
Procedure:
1. Fix the dial gauge to the stand rigidly and place the stand on the surface plate.
2. Set the plunger of dial gauge to first touch the upper surface of standard slip gauge and set indicator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

to zero.
3. Raise then the plunger by pulling the screw above the dial scale.
4. Place the standard slip gauge underneath the plunger.
5. Release the plunger and let it to touch the standard slip gauge.
6. Note the reading on the dial scale.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Formulae:
The standard error of dial gauge is calculated by the formula

Tabulation:
S.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Slip gauge reading ?x?
(mm)
Dial gauge reading
(mm)
(x? - x)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2


x? (x? - x)
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2


Result:
Thus the accuracy and standard error of dial gauge is found. The standard error of given dial gauge is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

__________.

27 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Outcome:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Students will be able to check the variation in tolerance during the inspection process of a
machined part, measure the deflection of a beam or ring under laboratory conditions, as well as many
other situations where a small measurement needs to be registered or indicated
Application:
1. Milling Machine

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Analog versus digital/electronic readout


1. What is comparator?
2. What are the types of comparators?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. What is the LC for comparators?
4. What are the applications of comparator?
5. What is meant by plunger?
6. What are the types of dial indicators?
7. Why a revolution counter is not provided in lever type dial test indicator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Draw a line diagram of the operating mechanism of plunger type dial test indicator.
9. Explain the term magnification of a dial indicator.
10. What are the uses of dial test indicator?
11. What are the practical applications of dial test indicator?
12. What precautions should be taken while using dial test indicator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. What are the desirable qualities of a dial test indicator?
14. What are the advantages of dial test indicator?
15. What are the limitations of dial test indicator?
16. Distinguish between comparator and measuring instrument.
17. What are the advantages of electrical comparator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

18. What are the advantages of optical comparator?
19. What are the uses of comparator?
20. What are the advantages and disadvantages of mechanical comparator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

28 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.05 DETERMINATION OF TAPER ANGLE BY SINE BAR
METHOD
Aim:
To measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Apparatus required:
Sine bar, slip gauges, dial gauge with stand, micrometer, surface plate, bevel protractor, vernier caliper
Diagram:

Description:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The sine bar principle uses the ratio of the length of two sides of a right triangle. It may be noted that
devices operating on sine principle are capable of ?self-generation?. The measurement is restricted to 45
o
from
accuracy point of view. Sine bar itself is not a measuring instrument.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Accuracy requirements of sine bar:
1. The axes of the rollers must be parallel to each other and the centre distance L must be precisely
known.
2. The sine bar must be flat and parallel to the plane connecting the axes of the rollers.
3. The rollers must be of identical diameters and must have within a close tolerance.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

29 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Fix the dial gaugeon the magnetic stand and place the magnetic stand on the surface plate.Check
the parallelism of the sine bar.
2. Place the given specimen above the sine bar and place the dial gauge on top of the specimen.
Adjustthe dial gauge for zero deflection.
3. Raise the front end of the sine bar with slip gauges until the work surface is parallel to the datum

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

surface.
4. Check the parallelism using dial gauge.
5. Measure the distance between the centres of the sine bar rollers as ?L? and note the height of the
slip gauge as ?H?.
6. Note the included angle of the specimen.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Formulae:
Sin ? = H/L where ? = Included angle of the specimen
H = Height of slip gauges
L = Distance between the centre of rollers
Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

S.No. L (mm) H (mm) Taper angle ( ?)
1.
2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
The taper angle of the given specimen using sine bar was found to be =
Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for angular measurements
and they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a specific

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).

Application:
1. Flat Surface
2. Granite

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

30 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. List out the various angle measuring instruments.
2. What is the working principles sine bar?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. How is a sine bar used to measure the angle?
4. What is the application of sine bar?
5. What is the material of sine bar?
6. Why sine bar is not preferred to use for measuring angles more than 45
0

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
7. What are the features of sine bar?
8. A 100 mm sine bar is to be set up to an angle of 33
0
, determine the slip gauges needed from 87

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

pieces set.
9. What are the various instruments used for measuring angles?
10. What is sine bar?
11. How sine bar is used for angle measurement?
12. Explain how sine bar is used to measure angle of small size component.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. Explain how sine bar is used to measure angle of large size component.
14. What are the various types of sine bar?
15. What are the limitations of sine bar?
16. What is sine center?
17. What is sine table?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

18. What are the possible sources of errors in angular measurement by sine bar?
19. What are angle gauges?
20. How angle gauges are used for measuring angles?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

31 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.06 DETERMINATION OF GEAR TOOTH THICKNESS
USING GEAR TOOTH VERNIER

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Aim:
To determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen and to draw the graph between the tooth
number and the error in thickness
Apparatus required:
Gear tooth vernier, specimen, surface plate and vernier caliper

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diagram:

Description:
The tooth thickness, in general, is measured at pitch circle since gear tooth thickness varies from the tip
to the base circle of the tooth. This is possible only when there is an arrangement to fix that position for this

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measurement by the gear tooth vernier. It has two vernier scales; one is vertical and other is horizontal.
Procedure:
32 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

1. Measure initially the outside diameter of the given gear specimen by means of a vertical calculation

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

of vernier caliper. Note the number of teeth. Calculate the module (m) using the formula.

M = OD/ (Z+2) where z ? number of teeth
M - Module
2. Calculate the theoretical tooth thickness (t) by t = z * m* sin (90/z).

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Set the vernier scale for the height and tighten.
4. Measure the thickness of each tooth using the horizontal scale. This is measured thickness. It can
be positive or negative.
H = m x [1+ Z/2 (1- Cos 90/Z)]
5. Calculate the error in the tooth thickness i.e,1. measured thickness ? Theoretical thickness

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Draw the graph between the tooth number and the error in thickness.
Tabulation:
Tooth
Number
Measured Thickness

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
Theoretical Thickness (mm)
Error in tooth thickness
(mm)
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
3

Tooth
Number

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MSR
(mm)
VSC

VSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
TR
(mm)
1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3

Graph:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Error



Tooth No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

33 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


Result:
The theoretical experiment value of gear tooth thickness is obtained and graph is drawn between error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

and tooth number in tooth thickness
Theoretical tooth thickness =
Experimental tooth thickness =
Error in tooth thickness =
Outcome:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Students will be able to understand the basic measurement units and able to calibrate various
measuring parameters of the gear.
Application:
1. Gear Component
2. Mining

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Calculate the setting of a gear tooth vernier caliper for a straight spur gear having 40 teeth and
module 4.
2. What is the importance of chordal depth?
3. Define ? Chordal width

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. How is the actual profile of the gear tooth determined?
5. What are the manufacturing errors in gear element?
6. Define ? Addendum
7. Define ? Dedendum
8. Define ? Flank of tooth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. Define ? Pitch
10. Define ? Pitch Circle
11. Define ? Crest of tooth
12. Define ? Root of tooth
13. Define ? Base Circle

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. Define ? Module
15. Define ? Angle of Obliquity


Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

34 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.07 MEASUREMENT OF THREAD PARAMETER USING
FLOATING CARRIAGE MICROMETER

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Aim:
To measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two wire
method
Apparatus required:
1. Floating carriage micrometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Standard wire
3. Given specimen (screw thread)
Diagram:

Description of floating carriage micrometer:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

It consists of three main units. A base casting carries a pair of centres on which threaded work piece is
to be mounted. Another carriage capable of moving towards centre is mounted exactly above. In this carriage
one head with thimble to measure up to 0.002 mm is provided and at the other side of head a fiducial indicator
is provided to indicate zero position.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

35 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. For two wire method, place the standard wire over a thread of the screw at opposite sides.
2. For three wire method, place two standard wires on two successive threads and the third wire
placed opposite sides of the thread.
3. Measure the diameter over wires (M) using floating carriage micrometer.
4. Repeat this procedure at various positions of the screw and take different readings.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Formulae:
1. For best wire size, d = P / 2 Cos (x/2)
Where, P = Pitch
d= wire size
x = angle between two threads

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= 60
o
for metric thread
2. Actual effective diameter, E.A = M ? 3d + 0.866 p
3. Nominal effective diameter, EN = D ? 0.648 p

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Max. wire size = 1.01 p
5. Min. wire size = 0.505 p
6. Best wire size = 0.577 p
M = Diameter over wires
P = Pitch of thread

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

For metric thread:
Actual effective diameter (EA) = M ? 3d + 0.866 p
Where d = actual diameter of wire
Determination of actual and nominal effective diameter of the screw thread:
Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Nominal
Diameter (D)
(mm)
Diameter over
wire ?M?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
Actual eff.
Diameter E.A
(mm)
Nominal eff.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diameter E.N
(mm)
Error in effective
diameter
(E.A ? E.N)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
1.
2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

36 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Result:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thus the actual and nominal effective diameter is measured using three wire method and the error in
effective diameter of screw is determined.
Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for roundness
measurements and they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

specific requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).
Application:
1. Wholse
2. Maxxis Rubber India

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Pitch
2. Define ? Flank Angle
3. What is plug gauge?
4. What is meant by micrometer?
5. What is meant by indicator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. What is best ? size wire?
7. Calculate the diameter of the best wire for an M 20 x 25 screws.
8. What are the different corrections to be applied in the measurement of effective diameter by the
method of wire?
9. What is floating carriage micrometer?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. What are the uses of floating carriage micrometer?
11. What are the methods are used for measuring effective diameter?
12. Define ? Effective Diameter
13. Define ? Major Diameter
14. Define ? Minor Diameter

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15. What are the effects of flank error?
16. Define ? Rake Angle
17. Define ? Pitch Cylinder
18. What are the effects of pitch error?
19. Define ? Pitch Diameter

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

20. What is meant by angle of thread?


Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

37 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.08 MEASUREMENT OF VARIOUS DIMENSIONS USING
COORDINATE MEASURING MACHINE
Aim:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. To study the construction and operation of coordinate measuring machine
2. To measure the specified dimensions of the given component
Instruments used:
Coordinate measuring machine, vernier calipers
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Theory:
A coordinate measuring machine (CMM) is a 3D device for measuring the physical and geometrical
characteristics of an object. This machine may be manually controlled by an operator or it may be computer
controlled. Measurements are defined by a probe attached to the three moving axis of this machine X, Y and Z

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

axes. A coordinate measuring machine (CMM) is also a device used in manufacturing and assembly
processes to test a part or assembly against the design intent. By precisely recording the X, Y and Z
coordinates of the target, points are generated which can be analyzed via regression algorithms for the
construction of features. These points are collected by using a probe that is positioned manually by an
38 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

operator or automatically via direct computer control (DCC). DCC CMMs can be programmed to repeatedly
measure identical parts, thus a CMM is a specialized form of industrial robot.
Parts:
Coordinate measuring machine include three main components:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. The main structures which include three axes of motion.
2. Probing system
3. Data collection and reduction system ? typically includes a machine controller, desktop computer
and application software
Machine description:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. In modern machines, the gantry type superstructure has two legs and is often called a bridge. This
moves freely along the granite table with one leg following a guide rail attached to one side of the
granite table. The opposite leg simply rests on the granite table following the vertical surface
contour.
2. Air bearings are fixed for ensuring friction free travel. Compressed air is forced through a series of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

very small holes in a flat bearing surface to provide a smooth but controlled air cushion on which the
CMM can move in a frictionless manner.
3. The movement of the bridge along the granite table forms one axis of the XY plane. The bridge of
the gantry contains a carriage which traverses between the inside and outside legs and forms the
other X or Y horizontal axis.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. The third axis of movement (Z axis) is provided by the addition of a vertical quill or spindle which
moves up and down through the center of the carriage. The touch probe forms the sensing device
on the end of the quill.
5. The movement of the X, Y and Z axes fully describes the measuring envelope. Some touch probes
are themselves powered rotary devices with the probe tip able to swivel vertically through 90

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

degrees and through a full 360 degrees rotation.
Uses:
They are generally used for:
1. Dimensional measurement
2. Profile measurement

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Angularity or orientation measurement
4. Depth mapping
5. Digitizing mapping
6. Shaft measurement
39 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The machines are available in a wide range of sizes and designs with a variety of different probe
technologies. They can be operated manually or automatically through direct computer control (DCC). They
are offered in various configurations such as bench top, free ? standing, handheld and portable.
Procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Take at least 8 points on sphere ball attached to the granite table.
2. Fix the object whose dimension needs to be measured using the jigs and fixtures.
3. Using joystick, move the probe whose tip is made of ruby slowly and carefully to the surface whose
measurements have to be taken.
4. Touch the probe at two places for measurement of a line (starting and ending point).

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Touch the probe at two places for measurement of a circular profile and for a cylinder touch the
probe at 8 points.
6. Measure the same profiles again with vernier calipers (length of line, circle diameter, cylinder
diameter) to compare the two readings.
Comments:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. The machine should be calibrated every time when it is being used.
2. While measuring the profiles, the probe should be moved very slowly as it may damage the ruby if
hit with a high force.
3. Care should be taken while performing experiment so that the granite table of the machines should
get any scratches.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. ?Retract distance? should be fixed according to the space available in the near vicinity of the profile
measurement area.
Observation:
Sl.No. Feature
CMM reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
Vernier reading
(mm)
Form error
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Difference in two
readings (mm)
1 Circle -1
2 Circle -2
3 Circle -3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4 Line
5 Arc
6
Cone - Diameter
Cone ? Vertex angle

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Cone ? Height
7
Cylinder ? Diameter
Cylinder ? Height

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

40 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Result:
Thus the different profile of given object are measured using coordinate measuring machine

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Students will be able to measures the geometry of physical objects by sensing discrete points on the
surface of the object with a probe and they will be able to know the Various types of probes are used in CMMs,
including mechanical, optical, laser, and white light.
Application:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Surface Measuring Equipment
2. Photo transistor

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What are the types of measuring machine?
2. What is CMM?
3. What are the types of CMM?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. What are the advantages of CMM?
5. What are the limitations of CMM?
6. What are the possible sources of error in CMM?
7. What is the use of universal measuring machine?
8. What are the applications of CMM?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. What is the working principle of three axis measuring machine?
10. What is image shearing microscope?
11. What is the use of electronic inspection and measuring machine?
12. What are the types of electronic inspection and measuring machine?
13. What is CMM probe?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. What are the three main probes are available?
15. What are the types of stylus?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

41 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.09 MEASUREMENT OF SURFACE ROUGHNESS UING
TALYSURF INSTRUMENT
Aim:
To measure the surface roughness using Talysurf instrument
Apparatus required:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Talysurf instrument, work piece, surface plate
Diagram:

Theory:
On any finished surface, imperfections are bound to be there and these take the form of a succession of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

hills and valleys which vary both in height and in spacing and result in a kind of texture which in appearance or
feel is often characteristic of the machining process and accompanying defects. The several kinds of
departures are there on the surface and these are due to various causes.

42 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Methods of measuring surface roughness:
1. Surface inspection of comparison methods
2. Direct instrument measurements
In comparative methods the surface texture is assessed by observation of the surface. But these

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

methods are not reliable as they can be misleading, if comparison is not made with surfaces produced by
same techniques. The various methods available under comparison method are: (i) Touch Inspection
(ii)Scratch Inspection (iii) Microscopic Inspection (iv) Visual Inspection (v) Surface Photographs (vi) Reflected
Light Intensity Direct Instrument Measurements enable to determine a numerical value of the surface finish of
any surface. Nearly all instruments used are stylus probe type of instruments. This operates on electrical

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

principle.
Procedure:
1. Place the finished component on the surface plate.
2. Fix the Talysurf tester to the vernier height gauge using adopter at a convenient height.
3. Make sure that the stylus probe touches the work piece.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Fix the sampling length in the tester.
5. Press the power button so that the probe moves on the surface to and fro.
6. Take the readings of the surface roughness directly from the instrument.
7. Repeat the above process for the remaining specimen and tabulate the readings.
Precautions:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. The surface to be tested should be cleaned properly.
2. The tester should be fixed to the height gauge properly so that the movement of the probe is exactly
parallel to the surface of work.
3. Make sure that the probe gently touches the work.
Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

S.No
Measurement roughness value,
?m
Sample direction Ra, Rz
Average Ra Average Rz Grade

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

43 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Result:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thus the surface roughness is checked for different specimens by Talysurf.
Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for roughness
measurements they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a specific
requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Machine Shop
2. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Actual Size?
2. What is meant by normal surface?
3. What is meant by profilo-graph?
4. What is Tomlinson surface meter?
5. What is meant by profile?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. What are the factors affecting surface roughness?
7. Why the surface texture is control?
8. Define ? Lay
9. Define ? Surface Texture
10. Define ? Flaws

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. What is sampling length?
12. What are the methods used for evaluating surface finish?
13. What is form factor?
14. What are the methods used for measuring surface finish?
15. How will you differentiate smooth surface from flat surface?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16. How surface finish is designated on drawings?
17. Define ? Primary Texture
18. Define ? Secondary Texture
19. What are the types of instrument used for measuring surface texture?
20. Define ? waviness

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

44 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.10 MEASUREMENT OF BORE USING DIAL BORE
INDICATOR AND TELESCOPIC GAUGE
Aim:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To determine the diameter of bore by using telescopic gauge and checking the same by using dial bore
indicator
Apparatus required:
Work piece, vernier caliper, telescopic gauge and dial gauge indicator set with anvil.
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

45 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


Procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Bore gauge measurement:
1. Select the extension rod and washer according to the bore diameter to be measured
2. Fix the suitable extension rod and washer with the bore gauge
3. Fix the dial gauge to the bore gauge in its position
4. Insert the bore gauge inside the bore to be measured and hold the gauge in parallel o the axis of the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

bore. Ensure that the tips on either side of the bore gauge are in touch with inner wall of the bore
5. Note down the reading in the dial gauge and withdraw the bore gauge from the bore
6. Hold the measuring tips of bore gauge between the spindle and anvil of a micrometer and compress
the tips by rotating the thimble till the reading reaches the same one as noted earlier
7. Observe and record the micrometer reading as the bore diameter to be measured

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Telescopic gauge measurement:
1. Select the telescopic gauge according to the bore diameter to be measured
2. Press the telescopic spindles in the telescopic gauge lock them by locking screw
3. Insert the telescopic gauge inside thee bore to be measured. Release the locking screw to expand
the telescopic spindles outwards inside the bore

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Hold the telescopic gauge in parallel to the axis of bore axis and ensure that the tips of telescopic
spindles are in touch with the inner wall of the bore
5. Lock the telescopic spindles and withdraw it from the bore
46 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Measure the expanded length of the telescopic spindles using micrometer record them as the inner
diameter of the bore
Practical observations:
Rough measurement of bore using Telescopic gauge:
Least count of micrometer = 0.01 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
Micrometer reading
Total reading
(MSR + TSC * LC) ( mm) Main scale reading (MSR)
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thimble scale
coincidence
1.
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Average reading = ________ mm
Accurate measuring using Bore gauge
Sl.No.
Micrometer
reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(d) (mm)
Bore gauge
reading
(R1) (mm)
Work piece reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(R2) (mm)
Final reading
d+ (R1 ? R2) * 0.01
(mm)
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.

Accurate internal diameter of hole using bore gauge = ______ mm

Result

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Internal diameter of the work piece by using telescopic gauge is ________mm
2. Diameter obtained by using dial gauge indicator is __________________mm

Outcome:
Students will be able to measure a bore's size, by transferring the internal dimension to a remote

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measuring tool (Telescopic gauge).
Application:
1. Automobile
2. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

47 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by bore diameter?
2. What is gauge?
3. What is meant by measurement?
4. What is telescope gauge?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. What is bore gauge?
6. What is contact point?
7. What is the principle of bore gauge?
8. What are the applications of telescopic gauge?
9. What types of materials are used in telescopic gauge?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. What are the types of instrument used to measure bore diameter?
11. What are the applications of bore gauge?
12. What are the advantages of bore gauge over telescopic gauge?
13. What are the limitations of bore gauge?
14. What is the working principle of telescopic gauge?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15. What are the disadvantages of telescopic gauge?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

48 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.11 MEASUREMENT OF FORCE USING LOAD CELL
Aim:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To study the characteristic between applied load and the output voltage
Apparatus required:
1. Trainer kit
2. Multimeter
3. Load cell sensor with setup

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Weights (5 kg)
5. Power chord
Diagram:

Formulae:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Error (%) = {Applied Voltage ? (Displayed Load)/ Applied Load)} x 100
Block diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Applied DC
Load O/P

DC Excitation source Transducer
Transducer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Instrumentation
Amplifier
Gain Amplifier DVM
FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice
1 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

V SEMESTER - R 2013

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No. : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LABORATORY MANUAL
2 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

DHANALAKSHMI

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.


1. To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. To contribute to the promotion of Academic Excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels
3. To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING


Rendering the services to the global needs of engineering industries by educating students to become
professionally sound mechanical engineers of excellent caliber

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To produce mechanical engineering technocrats with a perfect knowledge intellectual and hands on
experience and to inculcate the spirit of moral values and ethics to serve the society

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MISSION
MISSION
VISION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION

4 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Fundamentals
To impart students with fundamental knowledge in mathematics and basic sciences that will mould
them to be successful professionals
2. Core competence
To provide students with sound knowledge in engineering and experimental skills to identify

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

complex software problems in industry and to develop a practical solution for them
3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theory and practice which
enable them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and organization and to design
products requiring interdisciplinary skills

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Professional skills
To bestow students with adequate training and provide opportunities to work as team that will build
up their communication skills, individual, leadership and supportive qualities and to enable them to
adapt and to work in ever changing technologies
5. Life-long learning

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To develop the ability of students to establish themselves as professionals in mechanical
engineering and to create awareness about the need for lifelong learning and pursuing advanced
degrees

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)
On completion of the B.E. (Mechanical) degree, the graduate will be able
a) To apply the basic knowledge of mathematics, science and engineering
b) To design and conduct experiments as well as to analyze and interpret data and apply the same in

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the career or entrepreneurship
c) To design and develop innovative and creative software applications
d) To understand a complex real world problem and develop an efficient practical solution
e) To create, select and apply appropriate techniques, resources, modern engineering and IT tools
f) To understand the role as a professional and give the best to the society

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

g) To develop a system that will meet expected needs within realistic constraints such as economical
environmental, social, political, ethical, safety and sustainability
h) To communicate effectively and make others understand exactly what they are trying to tell in both
verbal and written forms
i) To work in a team as a team member or a leader and make unique contributions and work with

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

coordination
j) To engage in lifelong learning and exhibit their technical skills
k) To develop and manage projects in multidisciplinary environments

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To familiar with different measurement equipment?s and use of this industry for quality inspection
List of Experiments

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Tool Maker?s Microscope
2. Comparator
3. Sine Bar
4. Gear Tooth Vernier Caliper
5. Floating gauge Micrometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Coordinate Measuring Machine
7. Surface Finish Measuring Equipment
8. Vernier Height Gauge
9. Bore diameter measurement using telescope gauge
10. Bore diameter measurement using micrometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. Force Measurement
12. Torque Measurement
13. Temperature measurement
14. Autocollimator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Ability to handle different measurement tools and perform measurements in quality impulsion
2. Learnt the usage of precision measuring instruments and practiced to take measurements
3. Learnt and practiced to build the required dimensions using slip gauge
4. Able to measure the various dimensions of the given specimen using the tool maker?s microscope

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Able to find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge
6. Able to measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare
7. Learnt to determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen using Gear tooth vernier
8. Able to measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two
wire method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. Learnt to study the construction and operation of coordinate measuring machine
10. Learnt to determine the diameter of bore by using telescopic gauge and dial bore indicator
11. Able to measure the surface roughness using Talysurf instrument
12. Studied the characteristic between applied load and the output volt
13. Learnt the characteristics of developing torque and respective sensor output voltage

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. Studied the characteristics of thermocouple without compensation
15. Able to check the straightness & flatness of the given component by using Autocollimator
16. Learnt to measure the displacement using LVDT and to calibrate it with the millimeter scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OBJECTIVES

COURSE OUTCOMES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CONTENTS
Sl. No. Name of the Experiments Page No.
CYCLE ? 1 EXPERIMENTS
1
Precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab ? A Study

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7
2
To build up the slip gauge for given dimension ? A Study
16
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thread parameters measurement using Tool Makers Microscope
20
4
Calibration of dial gauge
23

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5
Determination of taper angle by sine bar method
26
6
Determination of gear tooth thickness using gear tooth vernier

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

29
7
Measurement of thread parameters using floating carriage micrometer
32
CYCLE ? 2 EXPERIMENTS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8
Measurement of various dimensions using Coordinate Measuring Machine
35
9
Measurement of surface roughness

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

39
10
Measurement of bores using dial bore indicator and telescopic gauge
42
11

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Force measurement using load cell
46
12
Torque measurement using strain gauge
49

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13
Temperature measurement using thermocouple
53
14
Measurement of alignment using autocollimator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

56
ADDITIONAL EXPERIMENT BEYOND THE SYLLABUS
15
Thread parameters measurement using profile projector
60

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16
Displacement measurement ? linear variable differential transducer (LVDT)
62
PROJECT WORK
65

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.01 PRECISION MEASURING INSTRUMENT YSED IN

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

METROLOGY LAB ? A STUDY
Aim:
To study the following instruments and their usage for measuring dimensions of given specimen
1. Vernier caliper
2. Micrometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Vernier height gauge
4. Depth micrometer
5. Universal bevel protractor
Apparatus required:
Surface plate, specimen and above instruments

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier caliper:
The principle of vernier caliper is to use the minor difference between the sizes two scales or divisions
for measurement. The difference between them can be utilized to enhance the accuracy of measurement. The
vernier caliper essentially consists of two steel rules, sliding along each other.
Parts:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Different parts of the vernier caliper are
1. Beam ? It has main scale.
2. Fixed jaw
3. Sliding or Moving jaw ? It has vernier scale and sliding jaw locking screw.
4. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw knife

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

edges for internal measurement.
5. Stem or depth bar for depth measurement
Least count:
Least count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

50 VSD = 49 mm
1 VSD = 0.98 mm
Least count = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm

10 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ID

DEPTH

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OD
Measurement:
Given Vernier caliper can be used for external, internal depth, slot and step measurement.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement principle:
When both jaws contact each other scale shows the zero reading. The finer adjustment of movable jaw
can be done by the fine adjustment screw. First the whole movable jaw assembly is adjusted so that the two
measuring tips just touch the part to be measured. Then the fine adjustment clamp locking screw is tightened.
Final adjustment depending upon the sense of correct feel is made by the adjusting screw. After final

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

adjustment has been made sliding jaw locking screw is also tightened and the reading is noted.
All the parts of the Vernier caliper are made of good quality steel and measuring faces are hardened.
Types of vernier:
Vernier caliper, electronic vernier caliper, vernier depth caliper

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Main scale
reading (MSR)
(mm)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier scale
reading (VSR) (mm)
Total reading (MSR
+ VSR)
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OD


ID

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Depth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier height gauge:
Vernier height gauge is a sort of vernier caliper equipped with a special instrument suitable for height
measurement. It is always kept on the surface plate and the use of the surfaces plates as datum surfaces is
very essential.
Least count:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least Count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm
1 VSD = 0.98 mm
Least Count (LC) = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Parts:
1. Base
2. Beam ? It has main scale.
3. Slider ? It has a vernier scale and slider locking screw.
4. Scriber

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw.


12 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Material:
All the parts of vernier are made of good quality steel and the measuring faces hardened.
Types of vernier gauge:
1. Analog vernier height gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Digital vernier height gauge
3. Electronic vernier height gauge
Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Main scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(MSR)(mm)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale reading
(VSR)(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total reading (MSR +
VSR)(mm)
1.
2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Outside micrometer:
The micrometer essentially consists of an accurate screw having about 10 or 20 threads per cm. The

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

end of the screw forms one measuring tip and other measuring tip is constituted by a stationary anvil in the
base of the frame. The screw is threaded for certain length and is plain afterwards. The plain portion is called
spindle and its end is the measuring surface. The spindle is advanced or retracted by turning a thimble
connected to a spindle. The spindle is a slide fit over the barrel and barrel is the fixed part attached with the
frame. The barrel & thimble are graduated. The pitch of the screw threads is 0.5 mm.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count:
Least Count (LC) = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale
= 0.5 / 50 = 0.01 mm
Parts:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Frame
2. Anvil
3. Spindle
4. Spindle lock
5. Barrel or outside sleeve

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions
7. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.
The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.
14 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement:
It can be used for any external measurement.
Types of micrometer:
1. Outside micrometer, 2. Inside micrometer, 3.Depth micrometer, 4. Stick micrometer, 5. Screw thread
micrometer, 6. V ? anvil micrometer, 7. Blade type micrometer, 8. Dial micrometer, 9. Bench micrometer, 10.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tape screw operated internal micrometer, 11. Groove micrometer, 12. Digital micrometer, 13.Differential screw
micrometer, 14.Adjustable range outside micrometer.
Ratchet stop mechanism:
The object of the ratchet stop is to ensure that same level of torque is applied on the spindle while
measuring and the sense of the feel of operator is eliminated and consistent readings are obtained. By

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

providing this arrangement, the ratchet stop is made slip off when the torque applied to rotate the spindle
exceeds the set torque. Thus this provision ensures the application of same amount of torque during the
measurement.
Tabulation:
Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) (mm)
Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)
Head scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(HSR x LC) (mm)
Total Reading (PSR
+ HSR) (mm)
1.
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Depth micrometer:
Depth micrometer is a sort of micrometer which is mainly used for measuring depth of holes, so it is
named as depth micrometer.
Parts:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Shoulder
2. Spindle
3. Spindle lock
4. Barrel or outside sleeve ? It has pitch scale.
5. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.
The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.
15 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count:
Least Count = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale = 0.50/50
= 0.01 mm
Measurements:
It can be used for measuring the depth of holes, slots and recessed areas. The pitch of the screw thread

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

is 0.5 mm. The least count is 0.01 mm. Shoulder acts as a reference surface and is held firmly and
perpendicular to the centre line of the hole. For large range of measurement extension rods are used. In the
barrel the scale is calibrated. The accuracy again depends upon the sense of touch.
Procedure:
First, calculate the least count of the instrument. Check the zero error. Measure the specimen note

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

down the main scale reading or the head scale reading. Note down the vernier or head scale coincidence with
main or pitch scale divisions.
Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Pitch Scale Reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(PSR) (mm)
Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)
Head scale reading
(HSR x LC) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total Reading (PSR
+ HSR) (mm)

1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.


16 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Universal bevel protractor:

Description:
Bevel protractor is an instrument for measuring the angle between the two faces of a specimen. It

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

consists of a base plate on which a circular scale is engraved. It is graduated in degrees. An adjustment plate
is attached to a circular plate containing the vernier scale. The adjustable blade can be locked in any position.
The circular plate has 360 division divided into four parts of 90 degrees each. The adjustable parts have 24
divisions of to the right and left sides of zero reading. These scales are used according to the position of the
specimen with respect to movable scale.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. Place the specimen whose taper is to be measured between the adjustable plate and movable
blade with one of its face parallel to the base.
2. Lock the adjustable plate in position and note down the main scale reading depending upon the
direction of rotation of adjustable plate in clockwise or anticlockwise.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Note the VSC to the right of zero.
4. Multiply the VSC with the least count and add to MSR to obtain the actual reading.
Least count:
Least Count = 2 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
24 VSD = 46
o
=> 1 VSD = 23/12
LC = 2 ? 23/12 = 1/12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
= 5? (five minutes)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Main scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(MSR) (deg)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale reading
(VSR) (deg)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total reading (MSR +
VSR)
(deg)
1.
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The angle of scriber of the vernier height gauge =
Result:
Thus the various precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab are studied and the specimen
dimensions are recorded.
Outcome:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for linear, angular,
roundness and roughness measurements they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring
instrument according to a specific requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).
Application:
1. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Metrology
2. Define ? Inspection
3. What are the needs of inspection in industries?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. What are the various methods involving the measurement?
5. Define ? Precision
6. Define ? Accuracy
7. Define ? Calibration
8. Define ? Repeatability

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. Define ? Magnification
10. Define ? Error
11. Define ? Systematic Error
12. Define ? Random Error
13. Define ? Parallax Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. Define ? Environmental Error
15. Define ? Cosine Error
Viva-voce

18 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.02 BUILD UP THE SLIP GAUGE FOR GIVEN DIMENSION
? A STUDY
Aim:
To build up the slip gauge for given dimension

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Apparatus required:
1. Slip gauges set
2. Surface plate
3. Soft cloth
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
Slip gauge are universally accepted standard of length in industry. They are the working standard for
linear dimension. These were invented by a Swedish Engineer, C.E. Johansson. They are used
1. For direct precise measurement where the accuracy of the workpiece demand it.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. For use with high- magnification comparators to establish the size of the gauge blocks in general
use.
3. Gauge blocks are also used for many other purposes such as checking the accuracy of measuring
instrument or setting up a comparator to a specific dimension, enabling a batch of component to be
quickly and accurately checked or indeed in any situation where there is need to refer to standard of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

known length these blocks are rectangular.
19 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Most gauge blocks are produced from high grade steel, hardened and established by a heat treatment
process to give a high degree of dimensional stability. Gauge blocks are also manufactured from tungsten

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

carbide which is an extremely hard and wear resistant material. The measuring faces have a lapped finish.
The faces are perfectly flat and parallel to one another with a high degree of accuracy. Each block has an
extremely high dimensional accuracy at 20
o
C.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

These slip gauge are available in variety of selected sets both in inch units and metric units. Letter ?E? is
used for inch units and ?M? is used for metric standard number of pieces in a set following the letter E or M. For
example EBI refers to a set whose blocks are in metric units and are 83 in number. Each block dimensions is
printed on anyone of its face itself the size of any required standard being made up by combining the
appropriate number of these different size blocks.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

If two gauges are slid and twisted together under pressure they will firmly join together. This process,
known as wringing, is very useful because it enables several gauge blocks to be assembled together to
produce a required size. In fact the success of precision measurement by slip gauges depends on the
phenomenon of wringing.
First the gauge is oscillated slightly with very light pressure over other gauge so as to detect pressure at

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

any foreign particles between the surfaces. One gauge is placed perpendicular to other using standard
gauging pressure and rotary motion is applied until the blocks are lined up.
Procedure:
1. Build the given dimension by wringing minimum number of slip gauges.
2. Note the given dimension and choose the minimum possible slip gauge available in the set so as to

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

accommodate the last decimal value. The minimum slip gauge value dimension available i.e., 1.12
mm must be chosen followed by 1.5 mm thick gauge block.
3. Follow the above steps to build up the slip gauge of any dimension.
Precautions:
1. Slip gauges should be handled very carefully placed gently and should never be dropped.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Whenever a slip gauge is being removed from the set, its dimensions are noted and must be
replaced into the set at its appropriate place only.
3. Correct procedure must be followed in wringing and also in removing the gauge blocks.
4. They should be cleaned well before use and petroleum jelly is applied after use.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

20 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Range (mm) Increment (mm) No. of pieces

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total = ____________ Pieces
Total length of slip gauge = ________ mm
Given diameter Slip gauges used Obtained dimensions

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Slip gauge set is studied and the given dimensions are building up by wringing minimum number of slip

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

gauges.
Outcome:
Students will be able to select proper measuring instrument and know requirement of calibration, errors
in measurement etc. They can perform accurate measurements.
Application:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Why C.I. is preferred material for surface plates and tables?
2. Why V ? blocks are generally manufactured in pairs?
3. Why micrometer is required to be tested for accuracy?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Define ? Linear Measurement
5. List the linear measuring instrument according to their accuracy.
6. Define ? Least Count
7. What are the uses of vernier depth gauge?
8. What are the uses of feeler gauges?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. What are the uses of straight edge?
10. What are the uses of angle plate?
11. What are the uses of V ? block?
12. What are the uses of combination square?
13. What precautions should be taken while using slip gauges?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. What is wringing?
15. Why the slip gauges are termed as ?End standard?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

22 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


Expt.No.03 THREAD PARAMETERS MEASUREMENT USING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TOOL MAKERS MICROSCOPE
Aim:
To study the tool makers microscope and in the process measure the various dimensions of the given
specimen
Apparatus required:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Tool makers microscope
2. Specimen
Diagram:

Description:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The tool maker?s microscope is designed for measurement of parts of complex forms; for example,
profile of a tool having external threads. It can also be used for measuring centre to centre distance of the
holes in any plane as well as the coordinates of the outline of a complex template gauge, using the
coordinates measuring system.
23 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Basically it consists of an optical head which can be adjusted vertically along the ways of supporting
column. The optical head can be clamped at any position by a screw. On the work table (which as a circular
base in which there are graduations) the part to be inspected is placed. The table has a compound slide by
means of which the part can be measured. For giving these two movements, there are two micrometer screws

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

having thimble scales and verniers. At the back of the base light source is arranged that provides horizontal
beam of light, reflected from a mirror by 90 degrees upwards towards the table. The beam of light passes
through the transparent glass plate on which flat plates can be checked are placed. Observations are made
through the eyepiece of the optical head.
Procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Place the given specimen on the work table and switch on all the three light sources and adjust the
intensity of the light source until a clean image of the cross wires and specimen are seen through
the eyepiece.
2. Coincide one of the two extreme edges between which the measurement has to be taken with
vertical or horizontal cross wires and depending upon the other image coincide with the same cross

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

wires by moving the above device. Note the reading.The difference between the two readings gives
the value of the required measurement.
3. Note the experiment specimen and the readings.
4. Tabulate the different measurements measured from the specimen.
Determination of thread parameters

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Magnification =
S.No. Parameters
Magnified value
(mm)
Actual value

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
1. Outer diameter (O.D)

2. Internal diameter (I.D)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Pitch

4. Flank angle

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Included angle of the tool was measured using tool maker?s microscope and various dimensions of the
given specimen are measured.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

24 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the various parameters of thread and select proper measuring
instrument and know requirement of calibration, errors in measurement etc. They can perform accurate

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measurements.
Application:
1. Machine Shop
2. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by tool maker?s microscope?
2. What is the light used in tool maker?s microscope?
3. What are the various characteristics that you would measure in a screw thread?
4. What are the instruments that are required for measuring screw thread?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Define ? Pitch
6. What are the causes of pitch error?
7. Define ? Flank
8. What are the effects of flank angle error?
9. What is progressive error?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. What is periodic error?
11. What is drunken error?
12. What is erratic error?
13. What are the applications of tool maker?s microscope?
14. What are the limitations of tool maker?s microscope?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15. What are the advantages of tool maker?s microscope?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

25 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.04 CALIBRATION OF DIAL GAUGE USING SLIP GAUGE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Aim:
To find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge
Apparatus required:
Dial gauge, magnetic stand, slip gauge, and surface plate
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
The dial test indicator is a precision measuring instrument which can convert linear motion into angular
motion by means of transmission mechanics of rack and pinion and can be used to measure linear vibration
and errors of shape.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

This instrument has the features such as good appearance, compact size, light weight, high precision,
reasonable construction, constant measuring face etc. Rigidity of all parts is excellent. Probe is tipped with
carbide balls. A shock proof mechanism is provided for those with larger measuring range.

26 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Types of dial indicator:
1. Plunger type
2. Lever type
Plunger type dial indicator has a resolution counter and each division in main scale is 0.01 mm. In lever

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

type dial test indicator is replaced by ball type stylus.
Procedure:
1. Fix the dial gauge to the stand rigidly and place the stand on the surface plate.
2. Set the plunger of dial gauge to first touch the upper surface of standard slip gauge and set indicator
to zero.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Raise then the plunger by pulling the screw above the dial scale.
4. Place the standard slip gauge underneath the plunger.
5. Release the plunger and let it to touch the standard slip gauge.
6. Note the reading on the dial scale.
Formulae:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The standard error of dial gauge is calculated by the formula

Tabulation:
S.No.
Slip gauge reading ?x?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
Dial gauge reading
(mm)
(x? - x)
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x? (x? - x)
1.
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Thus the accuracy and standard error of dial gauge is found. The standard error of given dial gauge is
__________.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

27 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Outcome:
Students will be able to check the variation in tolerance during the inspection process of a

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

machined part, measure the deflection of a beam or ring under laboratory conditions, as well as many
other situations where a small measurement needs to be registered or indicated
Application:
1. Milling Machine
2. Analog versus digital/electronic readout

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is comparator?
2. What are the types of comparators?
3. What is the LC for comparators?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. What are the applications of comparator?
5. What is meant by plunger?
6. What are the types of dial indicators?
7. Why a revolution counter is not provided in lever type dial test indicator?
8. Draw a line diagram of the operating mechanism of plunger type dial test indicator.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. Explain the term magnification of a dial indicator.
10. What are the uses of dial test indicator?
11. What are the practical applications of dial test indicator?
12. What precautions should be taken while using dial test indicator?
13. What are the desirable qualities of a dial test indicator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. What are the advantages of dial test indicator?
15. What are the limitations of dial test indicator?
16. Distinguish between comparator and measuring instrument.
17. What are the advantages of electrical comparator?
18. What are the advantages of optical comparator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

19. What are the uses of comparator?
20. What are the advantages and disadvantages of mechanical comparator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

28 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.05 DETERMINATION OF TAPER ANGLE BY SINE BAR
METHOD
Aim:
To measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare
Apparatus required:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sine bar, slip gauges, dial gauge with stand, micrometer, surface plate, bevel protractor, vernier caliper
Diagram:

Description:
The sine bar principle uses the ratio of the length of two sides of a right triangle. It may be noted that

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

devices operating on sine principle are capable of ?self-generation?. The measurement is restricted to 45
o
from
accuracy point of view. Sine bar itself is not a measuring instrument.
Accuracy requirements of sine bar:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. The axes of the rollers must be parallel to each other and the centre distance L must be precisely
known.
2. The sine bar must be flat and parallel to the plane connecting the axes of the rollers.
3. The rollers must be of identical diameters and must have within a close tolerance.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

29 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Procedure:
1. Fix the dial gaugeon the magnetic stand and place the magnetic stand on the surface plate.Check

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the parallelism of the sine bar.
2. Place the given specimen above the sine bar and place the dial gauge on top of the specimen.
Adjustthe dial gauge for zero deflection.
3. Raise the front end of the sine bar with slip gauges until the work surface is parallel to the datum
surface.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Check the parallelism using dial gauge.
5. Measure the distance between the centres of the sine bar rollers as ?L? and note the height of the
slip gauge as ?H?.
6. Note the included angle of the specimen.
Formulae:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sin ? = H/L where ? = Included angle of the specimen
H = Height of slip gauges
L = Distance between the centre of rollers
Tabulation:
S.No. L (mm) H (mm) Taper angle ( ?)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
2.
3.

Result:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The taper angle of the given specimen using sine bar was found to be =
Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for angular measurements
and they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a specific
requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Flat Surface
2. Granite

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

30 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. List out the various angle measuring instruments.
2. What is the working principles sine bar?
3. How is a sine bar used to measure the angle?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. What is the application of sine bar?
5. What is the material of sine bar?
6. Why sine bar is not preferred to use for measuring angles more than 45
0
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. What are the features of sine bar?
8. A 100 mm sine bar is to be set up to an angle of 33
0
, determine the slip gauges needed from 87
pieces set.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. What are the various instruments used for measuring angles?
10. What is sine bar?
11. How sine bar is used for angle measurement?
12. Explain how sine bar is used to measure angle of small size component.
13. Explain how sine bar is used to measure angle of large size component.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. What are the various types of sine bar?
15. What are the limitations of sine bar?
16. What is sine center?
17. What is sine table?
18. What are the possible sources of errors in angular measurement by sine bar?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

19. What are angle gauges?
20. How angle gauges are used for measuring angles?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

31 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.06 DETERMINATION OF GEAR TOOTH THICKNESS
USING GEAR TOOTH VERNIER
Aim:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen and to draw the graph between the tooth
number and the error in thickness
Apparatus required:
Gear tooth vernier, specimen, surface plate and vernier caliper
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
The tooth thickness, in general, is measured at pitch circle since gear tooth thickness varies from the tip
to the base circle of the tooth. This is possible only when there is an arrangement to fix that position for this
measurement by the gear tooth vernier. It has two vernier scales; one is vertical and other is horizontal.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
32 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

1. Measure initially the outside diameter of the given gear specimen by means of a vertical calculation
of vernier caliper. Note the number of teeth. Calculate the module (m) using the formula.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M = OD/ (Z+2) where z ? number of teeth
M - Module
2. Calculate the theoretical tooth thickness (t) by t = z * m* sin (90/z).
3. Set the vernier scale for the height and tighten.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Measure the thickness of each tooth using the horizontal scale. This is measured thickness. It can
be positive or negative.
H = m x [1+ Z/2 (1- Cos 90/Z)]
5. Calculate the error in the tooth thickness i.e,1. measured thickness ? Theoretical thickness
6. Draw the graph between the tooth number and the error in thickness.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Tooth
Number
Measured Thickness
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Theoretical Thickness (mm)
Error in tooth thickness
(mm)
1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3

Tooth
Number
MSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
VSC

VSR
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TR
(mm)
1
2
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Graph:


Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tooth No.
33 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
The theoretical experiment value of gear tooth thickness is obtained and graph is drawn between error
and tooth number in tooth thickness

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Theoretical tooth thickness =
Experimental tooth thickness =
Error in tooth thickness =
Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the basic measurement units and able to calibrate various

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measuring parameters of the gear.
Application:
1. Gear Component
2. Mining

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Calculate the setting of a gear tooth vernier caliper for a straight spur gear having 40 teeth and
module 4.
2. What is the importance of chordal depth?
3. Define ? Chordal width
4. How is the actual profile of the gear tooth determined?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. What are the manufacturing errors in gear element?
6. Define ? Addendum
7. Define ? Dedendum
8. Define ? Flank of tooth
9. Define ? Pitch

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. Define ? Pitch Circle
11. Define ? Crest of tooth
12. Define ? Root of tooth
13. Define ? Base Circle
14. Define ? Module

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15. Define ? Angle of Obliquity


Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

34 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.07 MEASUREMENT OF THREAD PARAMETER USING
FLOATING CARRIAGE MICROMETER
Aim:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two wire
method
Apparatus required:
1. Floating carriage micrometer
2. Standard wire

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Given specimen (screw thread)
Diagram:

Description of floating carriage micrometer:
It consists of three main units. A base casting carries a pair of centres on which threaded work piece is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

to be mounted. Another carriage capable of moving towards centre is mounted exactly above. In this carriage
one head with thimble to measure up to 0.002 mm is provided and at the other side of head a fiducial indicator
is provided to indicate zero position.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

35 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Procedure:
1. For two wire method, place the standard wire over a thread of the screw at opposite sides.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. For three wire method, place two standard wires on two successive threads and the third wire
placed opposite sides of the thread.
3. Measure the diameter over wires (M) using floating carriage micrometer.
4. Repeat this procedure at various positions of the screw and take different readings.
Formulae:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. For best wire size, d = P / 2 Cos (x/2)
Where, P = Pitch
d= wire size
x = angle between two threads
= 60

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
for metric thread
2. Actual effective diameter, E.A = M ? 3d + 0.866 p
3. Nominal effective diameter, EN = D ? 0.648 p
4. Max. wire size = 1.01 p

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Min. wire size = 0.505 p
6. Best wire size = 0.577 p
M = Diameter over wires
P = Pitch of thread
For metric thread:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Actual effective diameter (EA) = M ? 3d + 0.866 p
Where d = actual diameter of wire
Determination of actual and nominal effective diameter of the screw thread:
Sl.No.
Nominal

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diameter (D)
(mm)
Diameter over
wire ?M?
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Actual eff.
Diameter E.A
(mm)
Nominal eff.
Diameter E.N

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
Error in effective
diameter
(E.A ? E.N)
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

36 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Result:
Thus the actual and nominal effective diameter is measured using three wire method and the error in

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

effective diameter of screw is determined.
Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for roundness
measurements and they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a
specific requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Wholse
2. Maxxis Rubber India

1. Define ? Pitch

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Define ? Flank Angle
3. What is plug gauge?
4. What is meant by micrometer?
5. What is meant by indicator?
6. What is best ? size wire?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Calculate the diameter of the best wire for an M 20 x 25 screws.
8. What are the different corrections to be applied in the measurement of effective diameter by the
method of wire?
9. What is floating carriage micrometer?
10. What are the uses of floating carriage micrometer?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. What are the methods are used for measuring effective diameter?
12. Define ? Effective Diameter
13. Define ? Major Diameter
14. Define ? Minor Diameter
15. What are the effects of flank error?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16. Define ? Rake Angle
17. Define ? Pitch Cylinder
18. What are the effects of pitch error?
19. Define ? Pitch Diameter
20. What is meant by angle of thread?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

37 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.08 MEASUREMENT OF VARIOUS DIMENSIONS USING
COORDINATE MEASURING MACHINE
Aim:
1. To study the construction and operation of coordinate measuring machine

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. To measure the specified dimensions of the given component
Instruments used:
Coordinate measuring machine, vernier calipers
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Theory:
A coordinate measuring machine (CMM) is a 3D device for measuring the physical and geometrical
characteristics of an object. This machine may be manually controlled by an operator or it may be computer
controlled. Measurements are defined by a probe attached to the three moving axis of this machine X, Y and Z
axes. A coordinate measuring machine (CMM) is also a device used in manufacturing and assembly

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

processes to test a part or assembly against the design intent. By precisely recording the X, Y and Z
coordinates of the target, points are generated which can be analyzed via regression algorithms for the
construction of features. These points are collected by using a probe that is positioned manually by an
38 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

operator or automatically via direct computer control (DCC). DCC CMMs can be programmed to repeatedly
measure identical parts, thus a CMM is a specialized form of industrial robot.
Parts:
Coordinate measuring machine include three main components:
1. The main structures which include three axes of motion.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Probing system
3. Data collection and reduction system ? typically includes a machine controller, desktop computer
and application software
Machine description:
1. In modern machines, the gantry type superstructure has two legs and is often called a bridge. This

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

moves freely along the granite table with one leg following a guide rail attached to one side of the
granite table. The opposite leg simply rests on the granite table following the vertical surface
contour.
2. Air bearings are fixed for ensuring friction free travel. Compressed air is forced through a series of
very small holes in a flat bearing surface to provide a smooth but controlled air cushion on which the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CMM can move in a frictionless manner.
3. The movement of the bridge along the granite table forms one axis of the XY plane. The bridge of
the gantry contains a carriage which traverses between the inside and outside legs and forms the
other X or Y horizontal axis.
4. The third axis of movement (Z axis) is provided by the addition of a vertical quill or spindle which

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

moves up and down through the center of the carriage. The touch probe forms the sensing device
on the end of the quill.
5. The movement of the X, Y and Z axes fully describes the measuring envelope. Some touch probes
are themselves powered rotary devices with the probe tip able to swivel vertically through 90
degrees and through a full 360 degrees rotation.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Uses:
They are generally used for:
1. Dimensional measurement
2. Profile measurement
3. Angularity or orientation measurement

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Depth mapping
5. Digitizing mapping
6. Shaft measurement
39 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The machines are available in a wide range of sizes and designs with a variety of different probe
technologies. They can be operated manually or automatically through direct computer control (DCC). They
are offered in various configurations such as bench top, free ? standing, handheld and portable.
Procedure:
1. Take at least 8 points on sphere ball attached to the granite table.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Fix the object whose dimension needs to be measured using the jigs and fixtures.
3. Using joystick, move the probe whose tip is made of ruby slowly and carefully to the surface whose
measurements have to be taken.
4. Touch the probe at two places for measurement of a line (starting and ending point).
5. Touch the probe at two places for measurement of a circular profile and for a cylinder touch the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

probe at 8 points.
6. Measure the same profiles again with vernier calipers (length of line, circle diameter, cylinder
diameter) to compare the two readings.
Comments:
1. The machine should be calibrated every time when it is being used.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. While measuring the profiles, the probe should be moved very slowly as it may damage the ruby if
hit with a high force.
3. Care should be taken while performing experiment so that the granite table of the machines should
get any scratches.
4. ?Retract distance? should be fixed according to the space available in the near vicinity of the profile

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measurement area.
Observation:
Sl.No. Feature
CMM reading
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier reading
(mm)
Form error
(mm)
Difference in two

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

readings (mm)
1 Circle -1
2 Circle -2
3 Circle -3
4 Line

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 Arc
6
Cone - Diameter
Cone ? Vertex angle
Cone ? Height

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7
Cylinder ? Diameter
Cylinder ? Height

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

40 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Result:
Thus the different profile of given object are measured using coordinate measuring machine
Outcome:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Students will be able to measures the geometry of physical objects by sensing discrete points on the
surface of the object with a probe and they will be able to know the Various types of probes are used in CMMs,
including mechanical, optical, laser, and white light.
Application:
1. Surface Measuring Equipment

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Photo transistor

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What are the types of measuring machine?
2. What is CMM?
3. What are the types of CMM?
4. What are the advantages of CMM?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. What are the limitations of CMM?
6. What are the possible sources of error in CMM?
7. What is the use of universal measuring machine?
8. What are the applications of CMM?
9. What is the working principle of three axis measuring machine?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. What is image shearing microscope?
11. What is the use of electronic inspection and measuring machine?
12. What are the types of electronic inspection and measuring machine?
13. What is CMM probe?
14. What are the three main probes are available?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15. What are the types of stylus?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

41 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.09 MEASUREMENT OF SURFACE ROUGHNESS UING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TALYSURF INSTRUMENT
Aim:
To measure the surface roughness using Talysurf instrument
Apparatus required:
Talysurf instrument, work piece, surface plate

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diagram:

Theory:
On any finished surface, imperfections are bound to be there and these take the form of a succession of
hills and valleys which vary both in height and in spacing and result in a kind of texture which in appearance or

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

feel is often characteristic of the machining process and accompanying defects. The several kinds of
departures are there on the surface and these are due to various causes.

42 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Methods of measuring surface roughness:
1. Surface inspection of comparison methods
2. Direct instrument measurements
In comparative methods the surface texture is assessed by observation of the surface. But these
methods are not reliable as they can be misleading, if comparison is not made with surfaces produced by

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

same techniques. The various methods available under comparison method are: (i) Touch Inspection
(ii)Scratch Inspection (iii) Microscopic Inspection (iv) Visual Inspection (v) Surface Photographs (vi) Reflected
Light Intensity Direct Instrument Measurements enable to determine a numerical value of the surface finish of
any surface. Nearly all instruments used are stylus probe type of instruments. This operates on electrical
principle.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. Place the finished component on the surface plate.
2. Fix the Talysurf tester to the vernier height gauge using adopter at a convenient height.
3. Make sure that the stylus probe touches the work piece.
4. Fix the sampling length in the tester.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Press the power button so that the probe moves on the surface to and fro.
6. Take the readings of the surface roughness directly from the instrument.
7. Repeat the above process for the remaining specimen and tabulate the readings.
Precautions:
1. The surface to be tested should be cleaned properly.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. The tester should be fixed to the height gauge properly so that the movement of the probe is exactly
parallel to the surface of work.
3. Make sure that the probe gently touches the work.
Tabulation:
S.No

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement roughness value,
?m
Sample direction Ra, Rz
Average Ra Average Rz Grade
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

43 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Result:
Thus the surface roughness is checked for different specimens by Talysurf.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for roughness
measurements they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a specific
requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).
Application:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Machine Shop
2. Quality Department


1. Define ? Actual Size?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. What is meant by normal surface?
3. What is meant by profilo-graph?
4. What is Tomlinson surface meter?
5. What is meant by profile?
6. What are the factors affecting surface roughness?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Why the surface texture is control?
8. Define ? Lay
9. Define ? Surface Texture
10. Define ? Flaws
11. What is sampling length?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. What are the methods used for evaluating surface finish?
13. What is form factor?
14. What are the methods used for measuring surface finish?
15. How will you differentiate smooth surface from flat surface?
16. How surface finish is designated on drawings?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17. Define ? Primary Texture
18. Define ? Secondary Texture
19. What are the types of instrument used for measuring surface texture?
20. Define ? waviness

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

44 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.10 MEASUREMENT OF BORE USING DIAL BORE
INDICATOR AND TELESCOPIC GAUGE
Aim:
To determine the diameter of bore by using telescopic gauge and checking the same by using dial bore

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

indicator
Apparatus required:
Work piece, vernier caliper, telescopic gauge and dial gauge indicator set with anvil.
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

45 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


Procedure:
Bore gauge measurement:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Select the extension rod and washer according to the bore diameter to be measured
2. Fix the suitable extension rod and washer with the bore gauge
3. Fix the dial gauge to the bore gauge in its position
4. Insert the bore gauge inside the bore to be measured and hold the gauge in parallel o the axis of the
bore. Ensure that the tips on either side of the bore gauge are in touch with inner wall of the bore

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Note down the reading in the dial gauge and withdraw the bore gauge from the bore
6. Hold the measuring tips of bore gauge between the spindle and anvil of a micrometer and compress
the tips by rotating the thimble till the reading reaches the same one as noted earlier
7. Observe and record the micrometer reading as the bore diameter to be measured
Telescopic gauge measurement:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Select the telescopic gauge according to the bore diameter to be measured
2. Press the telescopic spindles in the telescopic gauge lock them by locking screw
3. Insert the telescopic gauge inside thee bore to be measured. Release the locking screw to expand
the telescopic spindles outwards inside the bore
4. Hold the telescopic gauge in parallel to the axis of bore axis and ensure that the tips of telescopic

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

spindles are in touch with the inner wall of the bore
5. Lock the telescopic spindles and withdraw it from the bore
46 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

6. Measure the expanded length of the telescopic spindles using micrometer record them as the inner

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

diameter of the bore
Practical observations:
Rough measurement of bore using Telescopic gauge:
Least count of micrometer = 0.01 mm
Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Micrometer reading
Total reading
(MSR + TSC * LC) ( mm) Main scale reading (MSR)
(mm)
Thimble scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

coincidence
1.
2.

Average reading = ________ mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Accurate measuring using Bore gauge
Sl.No.
Micrometer
reading
(d) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Bore gauge
reading
(R1) (mm)
Work piece reading
(R2) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Final reading
d+ (R1 ? R2) * 0.01
(mm)
1.
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Accurate internal diameter of hole using bore gauge = ______ mm

Result
1. Internal diameter of the work piece by using telescopic gauge is ________mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Diameter obtained by using dial gauge indicator is __________________mm

Outcome:
Students will be able to measure a bore's size, by transferring the internal dimension to a remote
measuring tool (Telescopic gauge).

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Automobile
2. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

47 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by bore diameter?
2. What is gauge?
3. What is meant by measurement?
4. What is telescope gauge?
5. What is bore gauge?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. What is contact point?
7. What is the principle of bore gauge?
8. What are the applications of telescopic gauge?
9. What types of materials are used in telescopic gauge?
10. What are the types of instrument used to measure bore diameter?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. What are the applications of bore gauge?
12. What are the advantages of bore gauge over telescopic gauge?
13. What are the limitations of bore gauge?
14. What is the working principle of telescopic gauge?
15. What are the disadvantages of telescopic gauge?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

48 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.11 MEASUREMENT OF FORCE USING LOAD CELL
Aim:
To study the characteristic between applied load and the output voltage

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Apparatus required:
1. Trainer kit
2. Multimeter
3. Load cell sensor with setup
4. Weights (5 kg)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Power chord
Diagram:

Formulae:
Error (%) = {Applied Voltage ? (Displayed Load)/ Applied Load)} x 100

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Block diagram:



Applied DC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Load O/P

DC Excitation source Transducer
Transducer
Instrumentation

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Amplifier
Gain Amplifier DVM
49 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Interfacing and calibration procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Interface the load cell 9 pin ?D? type male connector to 9 pin D type female connector, fixed on the
module.
2. First unload the beam and nullify the display by using zero adjustment POT
3. Apply the maximum load of 5 kg to the beam and adjust the display to 5 kg by using gain
adjustment POT.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. After the initial adjustment, the unit should not be disturbed until the completion of the experiment.
Safety precaution:
1. During offset adjustment, the beam should not be loaded.
2. The beam should not be disturbed during the experiment.
3. Remove the load from the beam, after completion of the experiment; otherwise wire wound on the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

strain gauge will get damaged.
4. If you are getting an unsatisfactory reading, then vary the zero and span POT minimum to
maximum.
5. Maximum load should not exceed 5 kg.
6. Once calibrated, the setting should not be distributed till the end of the experiment.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. Install the load cell module and interface the 9 pin D connector with kit.
2. Connect the multimeter in volt mode across T5 and GND for the output voltage measurement.
3. Switch on the module.
4. Initially, unload the beam and nullify the display by using zero adjustment POT (zero calibration).

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Apply the maximum load of 5 kg to the beam and adjust the display to 5 kg by using gain
adjustment POT (gain calibration).
6. Now apply the load to the beam, a force will develop on the beam and measure the output voltage
(V) across T5 and GND.
7. Gradually increase the load and note down the output voltage (V) and applied load.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Tabulate the values of displayed load and applied voltage.
9. Plot a graph between applied load and output voltage (V).
Note: When 1 kg load is applied to the beam, the displayed voltage is 1 kg.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice
1 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

V SEMESTER - R 2013

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No. : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Section : _______________________________________


LABORATORY MANUAL
2 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

DHANALAKSHMI

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
2. To contribute to the promotion of Academic Excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels
3. To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

and soul

DEPARTMENT OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rendering the services to the global needs of engineering industries by educating students to become
professionally sound mechanical engineers of excellent caliber


To produce mechanical engineering technocrats with a perfect knowledge intellectual and hands on

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

experience and to inculcate the spirit of moral values and ethics to serve the society

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MISSION
MISSION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION

VISION

4 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals
To impart students with fundamental knowledge in mathematics and basic sciences that will mould
them to be successful professionals

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Core competence
To provide students with sound knowledge in engineering and experimental skills to identify
complex software problems in industry and to develop a practical solution for them
3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theory and practice which

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

enable them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and organization and to design
products requiring interdisciplinary skills
4. Professional skills
To bestow students with adequate training and provide opportunities to work as team that will build
up their communication skills, individual, leadership and supportive qualities and to enable them to

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

adapt and to work in ever changing technologies
5. Life-long learning
To develop the ability of students to establish themselves as professionals in mechanical
engineering and to create awareness about the need for lifelong learning and pursuing advanced
degrees

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)
On completion of the B.E. (Mechanical) degree, the graduate will be able

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

a) To apply the basic knowledge of mathematics, science and engineering
b) To design and conduct experiments as well as to analyze and interpret data and apply the same in
the career or entrepreneurship
c) To design and develop innovative and creative software applications
d) To understand a complex real world problem and develop an efficient practical solution

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

e) To create, select and apply appropriate techniques, resources, modern engineering and IT tools
f) To understand the role as a professional and give the best to the society
g) To develop a system that will meet expected needs within realistic constraints such as economical
environmental, social, political, ethical, safety and sustainability
h) To communicate effectively and make others understand exactly what they are trying to tell in both

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

verbal and written forms
i) To work in a team as a team member or a leader and make unique contributions and work with
coordination
j) To engage in lifelong learning and exhibit their technical skills
k) To develop and manage projects in multidisciplinary environments

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To familiar with different measurement equipment?s and use of this industry for quality inspection
List of Experiments
1. Tool Maker?s Microscope
2. Comparator
3. Sine Bar

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Gear Tooth Vernier Caliper
5. Floating gauge Micrometer
6. Coordinate Measuring Machine
7. Surface Finish Measuring Equipment
8. Vernier Height Gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. Bore diameter measurement using telescope gauge
10. Bore diameter measurement using micrometer
11. Force Measurement
12. Torque Measurement
13. Temperature measurement

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. Autocollimator


1. Ability to handle different measurement tools and perform measurements in quality impulsion
2. Learnt the usage of precision measuring instruments and practiced to take measurements

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Learnt and practiced to build the required dimensions using slip gauge
4. Able to measure the various dimensions of the given specimen using the tool maker?s microscope
5. Able to find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge
6. Able to measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare
7. Learnt to determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen using Gear tooth vernier

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Able to measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two
wire method
9. Learnt to study the construction and operation of coordinate measuring machine
10. Learnt to determine the diameter of bore by using telescopic gauge and dial bore indicator
11. Able to measure the surface roughness using Talysurf instrument

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. Studied the characteristic between applied load and the output volt
13. Learnt the characteristics of developing torque and respective sensor output voltage
14. Studied the characteristics of thermocouple without compensation
15. Able to check the straightness & flatness of the given component by using Autocollimator
16. Learnt to measure the displacement using LVDT and to calibrate it with the millimeter scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OBJECTIVES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OUTCOMES

7 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

CONTENTS
Sl. No. Name of the Experiments Page No.
CYCLE ? 1 EXPERIMENTS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1
Precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab ? A Study
7
2
To build up the slip gauge for given dimension ? A Study

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16
3
Thread parameters measurement using Tool Makers Microscope
20
4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Calibration of dial gauge
23
5
Determination of taper angle by sine bar method
26

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6
Determination of gear tooth thickness using gear tooth vernier
29
7
Measurement of thread parameters using floating carriage micrometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

32
CYCLE ? 2 EXPERIMENTS
8
Measurement of various dimensions using Coordinate Measuring Machine
35

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9
Measurement of surface roughness
39
10
Measurement of bores using dial bore indicator and telescopic gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

42
11
Force measurement using load cell
46
12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Torque measurement using strain gauge
49
13
Temperature measurement using thermocouple
53

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14
Measurement of alignment using autocollimator
56
ADDITIONAL EXPERIMENT BEYOND THE SYLLABUS
15

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thread parameters measurement using profile projector
60
16
Displacement measurement ? linear variable differential transducer (LVDT)
62

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROJECT WORK
65


8 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.01 PRECISION MEASURING INSTRUMENT YSED IN
METROLOGY LAB ? A STUDY
Aim:
To study the following instruments and their usage for measuring dimensions of given specimen

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Vernier caliper
2. Micrometer
3. Vernier height gauge
4. Depth micrometer
5. Universal bevel protractor

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Apparatus required:
Surface plate, specimen and above instruments
Vernier caliper:
The principle of vernier caliper is to use the minor difference between the sizes two scales or divisions
for measurement. The difference between them can be utilized to enhance the accuracy of measurement. The

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

vernier caliper essentially consists of two steel rules, sliding along each other.
Parts:
Different parts of the vernier caliper are
1. Beam ? It has main scale.
2. Fixed jaw

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Sliding or Moving jaw ? It has vernier scale and sliding jaw locking screw.
4. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw knife
edges for internal measurement.
5. Stem or depth bar for depth measurement
Least count:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm
1 VSD = 0.98 mm
Least count = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


ID

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPTH


OD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement:
Given Vernier caliper can be used for external, internal depth, slot and step measurement.
Measurement principle:
When both jaws contact each other scale shows the zero reading. The finer adjustment of movable jaw
can be done by the fine adjustment screw. First the whole movable jaw assembly is adjusted so that the two

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measuring tips just touch the part to be measured. Then the fine adjustment clamp locking screw is tightened.
Final adjustment depending upon the sense of correct feel is made by the adjusting screw. After final
adjustment has been made sliding jaw locking screw is also tightened and the reading is noted.
All the parts of the Vernier caliper are made of good quality steel and measuring faces are hardened.
Types of vernier:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier caliper, electronic vernier caliper, vernier depth caliper


11 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:

Main scale
reading (MSR)
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale
reading (VSR) (mm)
Total reading (MSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

+ VSR)
(mm)

OD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ID


Depth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier height gauge:
Vernier height gauge is a sort of vernier caliper equipped with a special instrument suitable for height
measurement. It is always kept on the surface plate and the use of the surfaces plates as datum surfaces is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

very essential.
Least count:
Least Count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 VSD = 0.98 mm
Least Count (LC) = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm
Parts:
1. Base
2. Beam ? It has main scale.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Slider ? It has a vernier scale and slider locking screw.
4. Scriber
5. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


Material:
All the parts of vernier are made of good quality steel and the measuring faces hardened.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Types of vernier gauge:
1. Analog vernier height gauge
2. Digital vernier height gauge
3. Electronic vernier height gauge
Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
Main scale reading
(MSR)(mm)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier scale reading
(VSR)(mm)
Total reading (MSR +
VSR)(mm)
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.
3.

13 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outside micrometer:
The micrometer essentially consists of an accurate screw having about 10 or 20 threads per cm. The
end of the screw forms one measuring tip and other measuring tip is constituted by a stationary anvil in the
base of the frame. The screw is threaded for certain length and is plain afterwards. The plain portion is called
spindle and its end is the measuring surface. The spindle is advanced or retracted by turning a thimble

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

connected to a spindle. The spindle is a slide fit over the barrel and barrel is the fixed part attached with the
frame. The barrel & thimble are graduated. The pitch of the screw threads is 0.5 mm.

Least count:
Least Count (LC) = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= 0.5 / 50 = 0.01 mm
Parts:
1. Frame
2. Anvil
3. Spindle

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Spindle lock
5. Barrel or outside sleeve
6. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions
7. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.
The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Measurement:
It can be used for any external measurement.
Types of micrometer:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Outside micrometer, 2. Inside micrometer, 3.Depth micrometer, 4. Stick micrometer, 5. Screw thread
micrometer, 6. V ? anvil micrometer, 7. Blade type micrometer, 8. Dial micrometer, 9. Bench micrometer, 10.
Tape screw operated internal micrometer, 11. Groove micrometer, 12. Digital micrometer, 13.Differential screw
micrometer, 14.Adjustable range outside micrometer.
Ratchet stop mechanism:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The object of the ratchet stop is to ensure that same level of torque is applied on the spindle while
measuring and the sense of the feel of operator is eliminated and consistent readings are obtained. By
providing this arrangement, the ratchet stop is made slip off when the torque applied to rotate the spindle
exceeds the set torque. Thus this provision ensures the application of same amount of torque during the
measurement.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) (mm)
Head Scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Coincidence (HSC)
Head scale reading
(HSR x LC) (mm)
Total Reading (PSR
+ HSR) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
2.

Depth micrometer:
Depth micrometer is a sort of micrometer which is mainly used for measuring depth of holes, so it is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

named as depth micrometer.
Parts:
1. Shoulder
2. Spindle
3. Spindle lock

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Barrel or outside sleeve ? It has pitch scale.
5. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions.
6. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.
The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.
15 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count:
Least Count = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale = 0.50/50
= 0.01 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurements:
It can be used for measuring the depth of holes, slots and recessed areas. The pitch of the screw thread
is 0.5 mm. The least count is 0.01 mm. Shoulder acts as a reference surface and is held firmly and
perpendicular to the centre line of the hole. For large range of measurement extension rods are used. In the
barrel the scale is calibrated. The accuracy again depends upon the sense of touch.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
First, calculate the least count of the instrument. Check the zero error. Measure the specimen note
down the main scale reading or the head scale reading. Note down the vernier or head scale coincidence with
main or pitch scale divisions.
Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) (mm)
Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Head scale reading
(HSR x LC) (mm)
Total Reading (PSR
+ HSR) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.


2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Universal bevel protractor:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
Bevel protractor is an instrument for measuring the angle between the two faces of a specimen. It
consists of a base plate on which a circular scale is engraved. It is graduated in degrees. An adjustment plate
is attached to a circular plate containing the vernier scale. The adjustable blade can be locked in any position.
The circular plate has 360 division divided into four parts of 90 degrees each. The adjustable parts have 24

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

divisions of to the right and left sides of zero reading. These scales are used according to the position of the
specimen with respect to movable scale.
Procedure:
1. Place the specimen whose taper is to be measured between the adjustable plate and movable
blade with one of its face parallel to the base.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Lock the adjustable plate in position and note down the main scale reading depending upon the
direction of rotation of adjustable plate in clockwise or anticlockwise.
3. Note the VSC to the right of zero.
4. Multiply the VSC with the least count and add to MSR to obtain the actual reading.
Least count:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least Count = 2 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1
o
24 VSD = 46
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

=> 1 VSD = 23/12
LC = 2 ? 23/12 = 1/12
o
= 5? (five minutes)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
Main scale reading
(MSR) (deg)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier scale reading
(VSR) (deg)
Total reading (MSR +
VSR)
(deg)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
2.
The angle of scriber of the vernier height gauge =
Result:
Thus the various precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab are studied and the specimen

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

dimensions are recorded.
Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for linear, angular,
roundness and roughness measurements they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring
instrument according to a specific requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Quality Department


1. Define ? Metrology

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Define ? Inspection
3. What are the needs of inspection in industries?
4. What are the various methods involving the measurement?
5. Define ? Precision
6. Define ? Accuracy

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Define ? Calibration
8. Define ? Repeatability
9. Define ? Magnification
10. Define ? Error
11. Define ? Systematic Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. Define ? Random Error
13. Define ? Parallax Error
14. Define ? Environmental Error
15. Define ? Cosine Error
Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

18 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.02 BUILD UP THE SLIP GAUGE FOR GIVEN DIMENSION
? A STUDY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Aim:
To build up the slip gauge for given dimension
Apparatus required:
1. Slip gauges set
2. Surface plate

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Soft cloth
Diagram:

Description:
Slip gauge are universally accepted standard of length in industry. They are the working standard for

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

linear dimension. These were invented by a Swedish Engineer, C.E. Johansson. They are used
1. For direct precise measurement where the accuracy of the workpiece demand it.
2. For use with high- magnification comparators to establish the size of the gauge blocks in general
use.
3. Gauge blocks are also used for many other purposes such as checking the accuracy of measuring

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

instrument or setting up a comparator to a specific dimension, enabling a batch of component to be
quickly and accurately checked or indeed in any situation where there is need to refer to standard of
known length these blocks are rectangular.
19 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Most gauge blocks are produced from high grade steel, hardened and established by a heat treatment
process to give a high degree of dimensional stability. Gauge blocks are also manufactured from tungsten
carbide which is an extremely hard and wear resistant material. The measuring faces have a lapped finish.
The faces are perfectly flat and parallel to one another with a high degree of accuracy. Each block has an
extremely high dimensional accuracy at 20

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C.
These slip gauge are available in variety of selected sets both in inch units and metric units. Letter ?E? is
used for inch units and ?M? is used for metric standard number of pieces in a set following the letter E or M. For
example EBI refers to a set whose blocks are in metric units and are 83 in number. Each block dimensions is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

printed on anyone of its face itself the size of any required standard being made up by combining the
appropriate number of these different size blocks.
If two gauges are slid and twisted together under pressure they will firmly join together. This process,
known as wringing, is very useful because it enables several gauge blocks to be assembled together to
produce a required size. In fact the success of precision measurement by slip gauges depends on the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

phenomenon of wringing.
First the gauge is oscillated slightly with very light pressure over other gauge so as to detect pressure at
any foreign particles between the surfaces. One gauge is placed perpendicular to other using standard
gauging pressure and rotary motion is applied until the blocks are lined up.
Procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Build the given dimension by wringing minimum number of slip gauges.
2. Note the given dimension and choose the minimum possible slip gauge available in the set so as to
accommodate the last decimal value. The minimum slip gauge value dimension available i.e., 1.12
mm must be chosen followed by 1.5 mm thick gauge block.
3. Follow the above steps to build up the slip gauge of any dimension.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Precautions:
1. Slip gauges should be handled very carefully placed gently and should never be dropped.
2. Whenever a slip gauge is being removed from the set, its dimensions are noted and must be
replaced into the set at its appropriate place only.
3. Correct procedure must be followed in wringing and also in removing the gauge blocks.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. They should be cleaned well before use and petroleum jelly is applied after use.



20 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Range (mm) Increment (mm) No. of pieces

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total = ____________ Pieces
Total length of slip gauge = ________ mm
Given diameter Slip gauges used Obtained dimensions

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Slip gauge set is studied and the given dimensions are building up by wringing minimum number of slip
gauges.
Outcome:
Students will be able to select proper measuring instrument and know requirement of calibration, errors

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

in measurement etc. They can perform accurate measurements.
Application:
1. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Why C.I. is preferred material for surface plates and tables?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Why V ? blocks are generally manufactured in pairs?
3. Why micrometer is required to be tested for accuracy?
4. Define ? Linear Measurement
5. List the linear measuring instrument according to their accuracy.
6. Define ? Least Count

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. What are the uses of vernier depth gauge?
8. What are the uses of feeler gauges?
9. What are the uses of straight edge?
10. What are the uses of angle plate?
11. What are the uses of V ? block?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. What are the uses of combination square?
13. What precautions should be taken while using slip gauges?
14. What is wringing?
15. Why the slip gauges are termed as ?End standard?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

22 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.03 THREAD PARAMETERS MEASUREMENT USING
TOOL MAKERS MICROSCOPE
Aim:
To study the tool makers microscope and in the process measure the various dimensions of the given

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

specimen
Apparatus required:
1. Tool makers microscope
2. Specimen
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
The tool maker?s microscope is designed for measurement of parts of complex forms; for example,
profile of a tool having external threads. It can also be used for measuring centre to centre distance of the
holes in any plane as well as the coordinates of the outline of a complex template gauge, using the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

coordinates measuring system.
23 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Basically it consists of an optical head which can be adjusted vertically along the ways of supporting
column. The optical head can be clamped at any position by a screw. On the work table (which as a circular

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

base in which there are graduations) the part to be inspected is placed. The table has a compound slide by
means of which the part can be measured. For giving these two movements, there are two micrometer screws
having thimble scales and verniers. At the back of the base light source is arranged that provides horizontal
beam of light, reflected from a mirror by 90 degrees upwards towards the table. The beam of light passes
through the transparent glass plate on which flat plates can be checked are placed. Observations are made

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

through the eyepiece of the optical head.
Procedure:
1. Place the given specimen on the work table and switch on all the three light sources and adjust the
intensity of the light source until a clean image of the cross wires and specimen are seen through
the eyepiece.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Coincide one of the two extreme edges between which the measurement has to be taken with
vertical or horizontal cross wires and depending upon the other image coincide with the same cross
wires by moving the above device. Note the reading.The difference between the two readings gives
the value of the required measurement.
3. Note the experiment specimen and the readings.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Tabulate the different measurements measured from the specimen.
Determination of thread parameters
Magnification =
S.No. Parameters
Magnified value

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
Actual value
(mm)
1. Outer diameter (O.D)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Internal diameter (I.D)

3. Pitch

4. Flank angle

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Included angle of the tool was measured using tool maker?s microscope and various dimensions of the
given specimen are measured.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

24 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Outcome:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Students will be able to understand the various parameters of thread and select proper measuring
instrument and know requirement of calibration, errors in measurement etc. They can perform accurate
measurements.
Application:
1. Machine Shop

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Quality Department


1. What is meant by tool maker?s microscope?
2. What is the light used in tool maker?s microscope?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. What are the various characteristics that you would measure in a screw thread?
4. What are the instruments that are required for measuring screw thread?
5. Define ? Pitch
6. What are the causes of pitch error?
7. Define ? Flank

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. What are the effects of flank angle error?
9. What is progressive error?
10. What is periodic error?
11. What is drunken error?
12. What is erratic error?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. What are the applications of tool maker?s microscope?
14. What are the limitations of tool maker?s microscope?
15. What are the advantages of tool maker?s microscope?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

25 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.04 CALIBRATION OF DIAL GAUGE USING SLIP GAUGE
Aim:
To find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge
Apparatus required:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Dial gauge, magnetic stand, slip gauge, and surface plate
Diagram:

Description:
The dial test indicator is a precision measuring instrument which can convert linear motion into angular

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

motion by means of transmission mechanics of rack and pinion and can be used to measure linear vibration
and errors of shape.
This instrument has the features such as good appearance, compact size, light weight, high precision,
reasonable construction, constant measuring face etc. Rigidity of all parts is excellent. Probe is tipped with
carbide balls. A shock proof mechanism is provided for those with larger measuring range.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

26 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Types of dial indicator:
1. Plunger type

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Lever type
Plunger type dial indicator has a resolution counter and each division in main scale is 0.01 mm. In lever
type dial test indicator is replaced by ball type stylus.
Procedure:
1. Fix the dial gauge to the stand rigidly and place the stand on the surface plate.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Set the plunger of dial gauge to first touch the upper surface of standard slip gauge and set indicator
to zero.
3. Raise then the plunger by pulling the screw above the dial scale.
4. Place the standard slip gauge underneath the plunger.
5. Release the plunger and let it to touch the standard slip gauge.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Note the reading on the dial scale.
Formulae:
The standard error of dial gauge is calculated by the formula

Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

S.No.
Slip gauge reading ?x?
(mm)
Dial gauge reading
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x? - x)
2


x? (x? - x)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
2


Result:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thus the accuracy and standard error of dial gauge is found. The standard error of given dial gauge is
__________.

27 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Students will be able to check the variation in tolerance during the inspection process of a
machined part, measure the deflection of a beam or ring under laboratory conditions, as well as many
other situations where a small measurement needs to be registered or indicated
Application:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Milling Machine
2. Analog versus digital/electronic readout


1. What is comparator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. What are the types of comparators?
3. What is the LC for comparators?
4. What are the applications of comparator?
5. What is meant by plunger?
6. What are the types of dial indicators?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Why a revolution counter is not provided in lever type dial test indicator?
8. Draw a line diagram of the operating mechanism of plunger type dial test indicator.
9. Explain the term magnification of a dial indicator.
10. What are the uses of dial test indicator?
11. What are the practical applications of dial test indicator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. What precautions should be taken while using dial test indicator?
13. What are the desirable qualities of a dial test indicator?
14. What are the advantages of dial test indicator?
15. What are the limitations of dial test indicator?
16. Distinguish between comparator and measuring instrument.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17. What are the advantages of electrical comparator?
18. What are the advantages of optical comparator?
19. What are the uses of comparator?
20. What are the advantages and disadvantages of mechanical comparator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

28 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.05 DETERMINATION OF TAPER ANGLE BY SINE BAR
METHOD
Aim:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare
Apparatus required:
Sine bar, slip gauges, dial gauge with stand, micrometer, surface plate, bevel protractor, vernier caliper
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
The sine bar principle uses the ratio of the length of two sides of a right triangle. It may be noted that
devices operating on sine principle are capable of ?self-generation?. The measurement is restricted to 45
o
from

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

accuracy point of view. Sine bar itself is not a measuring instrument.
Accuracy requirements of sine bar:
1. The axes of the rollers must be parallel to each other and the centre distance L must be precisely
known.
2. The sine bar must be flat and parallel to the plane connecting the axes of the rollers.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. The rollers must be of identical diameters and must have within a close tolerance.


29 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. Fix the dial gaugeon the magnetic stand and place the magnetic stand on the surface plate.Check
the parallelism of the sine bar.
2. Place the given specimen above the sine bar and place the dial gauge on top of the specimen.
Adjustthe dial gauge for zero deflection.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Raise the front end of the sine bar with slip gauges until the work surface is parallel to the datum
surface.
4. Check the parallelism using dial gauge.
5. Measure the distance between the centres of the sine bar rollers as ?L? and note the height of the
slip gauge as ?H?.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Note the included angle of the specimen.
Formulae:
Sin ? = H/L where ? = Included angle of the specimen
H = Height of slip gauges
L = Distance between the centre of rollers

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
S.No. L (mm) H (mm) Taper angle ( ?)
1.
2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
The taper angle of the given specimen using sine bar was found to be =
Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for angular measurements

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

and they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a specific
requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).

Application:
1. Flat Surface

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Granite


30 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. List out the various angle measuring instruments.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. What is the working principles sine bar?
3. How is a sine bar used to measure the angle?
4. What is the application of sine bar?
5. What is the material of sine bar?
6. Why sine bar is not preferred to use for measuring angles more than 45

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

0
?
7. What are the features of sine bar?
8. A 100 mm sine bar is to be set up to an angle of 33
0

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

, determine the slip gauges needed from 87
pieces set.
9. What are the various instruments used for measuring angles?
10. What is sine bar?
11. How sine bar is used for angle measurement?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. Explain how sine bar is used to measure angle of small size component.
13. Explain how sine bar is used to measure angle of large size component.
14. What are the various types of sine bar?
15. What are the limitations of sine bar?
16. What is sine center?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17. What is sine table?
18. What are the possible sources of errors in angular measurement by sine bar?
19. What are angle gauges?
20. How angle gauges are used for measuring angles?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

31 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00



Expt.No.06 DETERMINATION OF GEAR TOOTH THICKNESS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

USING GEAR TOOTH VERNIER
Aim:
To determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen and to draw the graph between the tooth
number and the error in thickness
Apparatus required:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Gear tooth vernier, specimen, surface plate and vernier caliper
Diagram:

Description:
The tooth thickness, in general, is measured at pitch circle since gear tooth thickness varies from the tip

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

to the base circle of the tooth. This is possible only when there is an arrangement to fix that position for this
measurement by the gear tooth vernier. It has two vernier scales; one is vertical and other is horizontal.
Procedure:
32 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Measure initially the outside diameter of the given gear specimen by means of a vertical calculation
of vernier caliper. Note the number of teeth. Calculate the module (m) using the formula.

M = OD/ (Z+2) where z ? number of teeth
M - Module

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Calculate the theoretical tooth thickness (t) by t = z * m* sin (90/z).
3. Set the vernier scale for the height and tighten.
4. Measure the thickness of each tooth using the horizontal scale. This is measured thickness. It can
be positive or negative.
H = m x [1+ Z/2 (1- Cos 90/Z)]

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Calculate the error in the tooth thickness i.e,1. measured thickness ? Theoretical thickness
6. Draw the graph between the tooth number and the error in thickness.
Tabulation:
Tooth
Number

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measured Thickness
(mm)
Theoretical Thickness (mm)
Error in tooth thickness
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1
2
3

Tooth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Number
MSR
(mm)
VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSR
(mm)
TR
(mm)
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
3

Graph:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tooth No.
33 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


Result:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The theoretical experiment value of gear tooth thickness is obtained and graph is drawn between error
and tooth number in tooth thickness
Theoretical tooth thickness =
Experimental tooth thickness =
Error in tooth thickness =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the basic measurement units and able to calibrate various
measuring parameters of the gear.
Application:
1. Gear Component

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Mining

1. Calculate the setting of a gear tooth vernier caliper for a straight spur gear having 40 teeth and
module 4.
2. What is the importance of chordal depth?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Define ? Chordal width
4. How is the actual profile of the gear tooth determined?
5. What are the manufacturing errors in gear element?
6. Define ? Addendum
7. Define ? Dedendum

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Define ? Flank of tooth
9. Define ? Pitch
10. Define ? Pitch Circle
11. Define ? Crest of tooth
12. Define ? Root of tooth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. Define ? Base Circle
14. Define ? Module
15. Define ? Angle of Obliquity

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

34 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.07 MEASUREMENT OF THREAD PARAMETER USING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FLOATING CARRIAGE MICROMETER
Aim:
To measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two wire
method
Apparatus required:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Floating carriage micrometer
2. Standard wire
3. Given specimen (screw thread)
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description of floating carriage micrometer:
It consists of three main units. A base casting carries a pair of centres on which threaded work piece is
to be mounted. Another carriage capable of moving towards centre is mounted exactly above. In this carriage
one head with thimble to measure up to 0.002 mm is provided and at the other side of head a fiducial indicator
is provided to indicate zero position.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

35 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. For two wire method, place the standard wire over a thread of the screw at opposite sides.
2. For three wire method, place two standard wires on two successive threads and the third wire
placed opposite sides of the thread.
3. Measure the diameter over wires (M) using floating carriage micrometer.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Repeat this procedure at various positions of the screw and take different readings.
Formulae:
1. For best wire size, d = P / 2 Cos (x/2)
Where, P = Pitch
d= wire size

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x = angle between two threads
= 60
o
for metric thread
2. Actual effective diameter, E.A = M ? 3d + 0.866 p

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Nominal effective diameter, EN = D ? 0.648 p
4. Max. wire size = 1.01 p
5. Min. wire size = 0.505 p
6. Best wire size = 0.577 p
M = Diameter over wires

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

P = Pitch of thread
For metric thread:
Actual effective diameter (EA) = M ? 3d + 0.866 p
Where d = actual diameter of wire
Determination of actual and nominal effective diameter of the screw thread:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
Nominal
Diameter (D)
(mm)
Diameter over

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

wire ?M?
(mm)
Actual eff.
Diameter E.A
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Nominal eff.
Diameter E.N
(mm)
Error in effective
diameter

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(E.A ? E.N)
(mm)
1.
2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

36 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Thus the actual and nominal effective diameter is measured using three wire method and the error in
effective diameter of screw is determined.
Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for roundness

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measurements and they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a
specific requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).
Application:
1. Wholse
2. Maxxis Rubber India

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Pitch
2. Define ? Flank Angle
3. What is plug gauge?
4. What is meant by micrometer?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. What is meant by indicator?
6. What is best ? size wire?
7. Calculate the diameter of the best wire for an M 20 x 25 screws.
8. What are the different corrections to be applied in the measurement of effective diameter by the
method of wire?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. What is floating carriage micrometer?
10. What are the uses of floating carriage micrometer?
11. What are the methods are used for measuring effective diameter?
12. Define ? Effective Diameter
13. Define ? Major Diameter

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. Define ? Minor Diameter
15. What are the effects of flank error?
16. Define ? Rake Angle
17. Define ? Pitch Cylinder
18. What are the effects of pitch error?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

19. Define ? Pitch Diameter
20. What is meant by angle of thread?


Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

37 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.08 MEASUREMENT OF VARIOUS DIMENSIONS USING
COORDINATE MEASURING MACHINE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Aim:
1. To study the construction and operation of coordinate measuring machine
2. To measure the specified dimensions of the given component
Instruments used:
Coordinate measuring machine, vernier calipers

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diagram:

Theory:
A coordinate measuring machine (CMM) is a 3D device for measuring the physical and geometrical
characteristics of an object. This machine may be manually controlled by an operator or it may be computer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

controlled. Measurements are defined by a probe attached to the three moving axis of this machine X, Y and Z
axes. A coordinate measuring machine (CMM) is also a device used in manufacturing and assembly
processes to test a part or assembly against the design intent. By precisely recording the X, Y and Z
coordinates of the target, points are generated which can be analyzed via regression algorithms for the
construction of features. These points are collected by using a probe that is positioned manually by an

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

38 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

operator or automatically via direct computer control (DCC). DCC CMMs can be programmed to repeatedly
measure identical parts, thus a CMM is a specialized form of industrial robot.
Parts:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Coordinate measuring machine include three main components:
1. The main structures which include three axes of motion.
2. Probing system
3. Data collection and reduction system ? typically includes a machine controller, desktop computer
and application software

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Machine description:
1. In modern machines, the gantry type superstructure has two legs and is often called a bridge. This
moves freely along the granite table with one leg following a guide rail attached to one side of the
granite table. The opposite leg simply rests on the granite table following the vertical surface
contour.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Air bearings are fixed for ensuring friction free travel. Compressed air is forced through a series of
very small holes in a flat bearing surface to provide a smooth but controlled air cushion on which the
CMM can move in a frictionless manner.
3. The movement of the bridge along the granite table forms one axis of the XY plane. The bridge of
the gantry contains a carriage which traverses between the inside and outside legs and forms the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

other X or Y horizontal axis.
4. The third axis of movement (Z axis) is provided by the addition of a vertical quill or spindle which
moves up and down through the center of the carriage. The touch probe forms the sensing device
on the end of the quill.
5. The movement of the X, Y and Z axes fully describes the measuring envelope. Some touch probes

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

are themselves powered rotary devices with the probe tip able to swivel vertically through 90
degrees and through a full 360 degrees rotation.
Uses:
They are generally used for:
1. Dimensional measurement

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Profile measurement
3. Angularity or orientation measurement
4. Depth mapping
5. Digitizing mapping
6. Shaft measurement

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

39 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

The machines are available in a wide range of sizes and designs with a variety of different probe
technologies. They can be operated manually or automatically through direct computer control (DCC). They
are offered in various configurations such as bench top, free ? standing, handheld and portable.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. Take at least 8 points on sphere ball attached to the granite table.
2. Fix the object whose dimension needs to be measured using the jigs and fixtures.
3. Using joystick, move the probe whose tip is made of ruby slowly and carefully to the surface whose
measurements have to be taken.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Touch the probe at two places for measurement of a line (starting and ending point).
5. Touch the probe at two places for measurement of a circular profile and for a cylinder touch the
probe at 8 points.
6. Measure the same profiles again with vernier calipers (length of line, circle diameter, cylinder
diameter) to compare the two readings.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Comments:
1. The machine should be calibrated every time when it is being used.
2. While measuring the profiles, the probe should be moved very slowly as it may damage the ruby if
hit with a high force.
3. Care should be taken while performing experiment so that the granite table of the machines should

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

get any scratches.
4. ?Retract distance? should be fixed according to the space available in the near vicinity of the profile
measurement area.
Observation:
Sl.No. Feature

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CMM reading
(mm)
Vernier reading
(mm)
Form error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
Difference in two
readings (mm)
1 Circle -1
2 Circle -2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3 Circle -3
4 Line
5 Arc
6
Cone - Diameter

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Cone ? Vertex angle
Cone ? Height
7
Cylinder ? Diameter
Cylinder ? Height

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

40 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Result:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thus the different profile of given object are measured using coordinate measuring machine
Outcome:
Students will be able to measures the geometry of physical objects by sensing discrete points on the
surface of the object with a probe and they will be able to know the Various types of probes are used in CMMs,
including mechanical, optical, laser, and white light.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Surface Measuring Equipment
2. Photo transistor

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What are the types of measuring machine?
2. What is CMM?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. What are the types of CMM?
4. What are the advantages of CMM?
5. What are the limitations of CMM?
6. What are the possible sources of error in CMM?
7. What is the use of universal measuring machine?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. What are the applications of CMM?
9. What is the working principle of three axis measuring machine?
10. What is image shearing microscope?
11. What is the use of electronic inspection and measuring machine?
12. What are the types of electronic inspection and measuring machine?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. What is CMM probe?
14. What are the three main probes are available?
15. What are the types of stylus?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

41 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.09 MEASUREMENT OF SURFACE ROUGHNESS UING
TALYSURF INSTRUMENT
Aim:
To measure the surface roughness using Talysurf instrument

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Apparatus required:
Talysurf instrument, work piece, surface plate
Diagram:

Theory:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

On any finished surface, imperfections are bound to be there and these take the form of a succession of
hills and valleys which vary both in height and in spacing and result in a kind of texture which in appearance or
feel is often characteristic of the machining process and accompanying defects. The several kinds of
departures are there on the surface and these are due to various causes.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

42 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Methods of measuring surface roughness:
1. Surface inspection of comparison methods
2. Direct instrument measurements

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

In comparative methods the surface texture is assessed by observation of the surface. But these
methods are not reliable as they can be misleading, if comparison is not made with surfaces produced by
same techniques. The various methods available under comparison method are: (i) Touch Inspection
(ii)Scratch Inspection (iii) Microscopic Inspection (iv) Visual Inspection (v) Surface Photographs (vi) Reflected
Light Intensity Direct Instrument Measurements enable to determine a numerical value of the surface finish of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

any surface. Nearly all instruments used are stylus probe type of instruments. This operates on electrical
principle.
Procedure:
1. Place the finished component on the surface plate.
2. Fix the Talysurf tester to the vernier height gauge using adopter at a convenient height.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Make sure that the stylus probe touches the work piece.
4. Fix the sampling length in the tester.
5. Press the power button so that the probe moves on the surface to and fro.
6. Take the readings of the surface roughness directly from the instrument.
7. Repeat the above process for the remaining specimen and tabulate the readings.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Precautions:
1. The surface to be tested should be cleaned properly.
2. The tester should be fixed to the height gauge properly so that the movement of the probe is exactly
parallel to the surface of work.
3. Make sure that the probe gently touches the work.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
S.No
Measurement roughness value,
?m
Sample direction Ra, Rz

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Average Ra Average Rz Grade
1.
2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

43 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Thus the surface roughness is checked for different specimens by Talysurf.
Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for roughness
measurements they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a specific

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).
Application:
1. Machine Shop
2. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Actual Size?
2. What is meant by normal surface?
3. What is meant by profilo-graph?
4. What is Tomlinson surface meter?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. What is meant by profile?
6. What are the factors affecting surface roughness?
7. Why the surface texture is control?
8. Define ? Lay
9. Define ? Surface Texture

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. Define ? Flaws
11. What is sampling length?
12. What are the methods used for evaluating surface finish?
13. What is form factor?
14. What are the methods used for measuring surface finish?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15. How will you differentiate smooth surface from flat surface?
16. How surface finish is designated on drawings?
17. Define ? Primary Texture
18. Define ? Secondary Texture
19. What are the types of instrument used for measuring surface texture?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

20. Define ? waviness



Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

44 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.10 MEASUREMENT OF BORE USING DIAL BORE
INDICATOR AND TELESCOPIC GAUGE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Aim:
To determine the diameter of bore by using telescopic gauge and checking the same by using dial bore
indicator
Apparatus required:
Work piece, vernier caliper, telescopic gauge and dial gauge indicator set with anvil.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diagram:

45 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
Bore gauge measurement:
1. Select the extension rod and washer according to the bore diameter to be measured
2. Fix the suitable extension rod and washer with the bore gauge
3. Fix the dial gauge to the bore gauge in its position

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Insert the bore gauge inside the bore to be measured and hold the gauge in parallel o the axis of the
bore. Ensure that the tips on either side of the bore gauge are in touch with inner wall of the bore
5. Note down the reading in the dial gauge and withdraw the bore gauge from the bore
6. Hold the measuring tips of bore gauge between the spindle and anvil of a micrometer and compress
the tips by rotating the thimble till the reading reaches the same one as noted earlier

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Observe and record the micrometer reading as the bore diameter to be measured
Telescopic gauge measurement:
1. Select the telescopic gauge according to the bore diameter to be measured
2. Press the telescopic spindles in the telescopic gauge lock them by locking screw
3. Insert the telescopic gauge inside thee bore to be measured. Release the locking screw to expand

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the telescopic spindles outwards inside the bore
4. Hold the telescopic gauge in parallel to the axis of bore axis and ensure that the tips of telescopic
spindles are in touch with the inner wall of the bore
5. Lock the telescopic spindles and withdraw it from the bore
46 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Measure the expanded length of the telescopic spindles using micrometer record them as the inner
diameter of the bore
Practical observations:
Rough measurement of bore using Telescopic gauge:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count of micrometer = 0.01 mm
Sl.No.
Micrometer reading
Total reading
(MSR + TSC * LC) ( mm) Main scale reading (MSR)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
Thimble scale
coincidence
1.
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Average reading = ________ mm
Accurate measuring using Bore gauge
Sl.No.
Micrometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

reading
(d) (mm)
Bore gauge
reading
(R1) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Work piece reading
(R2) (mm)
Final reading
d+ (R1 ? R2) * 0.01
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
2.

Accurate internal diameter of hole using bore gauge = ______ mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result
1. Internal diameter of the work piece by using telescopic gauge is ________mm
2. Diameter obtained by using dial gauge indicator is __________________mm

Outcome:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Students will be able to measure a bore's size, by transferring the internal dimension to a remote
measuring tool (Telescopic gauge).
Application:
1. Automobile
2. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

47 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by bore diameter?
2. What is gauge?
3. What is meant by measurement?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. What is telescope gauge?
5. What is bore gauge?
6. What is contact point?
7. What is the principle of bore gauge?
8. What are the applications of telescopic gauge?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. What types of materials are used in telescopic gauge?
10. What are the types of instrument used to measure bore diameter?
11. What are the applications of bore gauge?
12. What are the advantages of bore gauge over telescopic gauge?
13. What are the limitations of bore gauge?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. What is the working principle of telescopic gauge?
15. What are the disadvantages of telescopic gauge?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

48 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.11 MEASUREMENT OF FORCE USING LOAD CELL

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Aim:
To study the characteristic between applied load and the output voltage
Apparatus required:
1. Trainer kit
2. Multimeter

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Load cell sensor with setup
4. Weights (5 kg)
5. Power chord
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Formulae:
Error (%) = {Applied Voltage ? (Displayed Load)/ Applied Load)} x 100
Block diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Applied DC
Load O/P

DC Excitation source Transducer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Transducer
Instrumentation
Amplifier
Gain Amplifier DVM
49 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Interfacing and calibration procedure:
1. Interface the load cell 9 pin ?D? type male connector to 9 pin D type female connector, fixed on the
module.
2. First unload the beam and nullify the display by using zero adjustment POT

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Apply the maximum load of 5 kg to the beam and adjust the display to 5 kg by using gain
adjustment POT.
4. After the initial adjustment, the unit should not be disturbed until the completion of the experiment.
Safety precaution:
1. During offset adjustment, the beam should not be loaded.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. The beam should not be disturbed during the experiment.
3. Remove the load from the beam, after completion of the experiment; otherwise wire wound on the
strain gauge will get damaged.
4. If you are getting an unsatisfactory reading, then vary the zero and span POT minimum to
maximum.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Maximum load should not exceed 5 kg.
6. Once calibrated, the setting should not be distributed till the end of the experiment.
Procedure:
1. Install the load cell module and interface the 9 pin D connector with kit.
2. Connect the multimeter in volt mode across T5 and GND for the output voltage measurement.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Switch on the module.
4. Initially, unload the beam and nullify the display by using zero adjustment POT (zero calibration).
5. Apply the maximum load of 5 kg to the beam and adjust the display to 5 kg by using gain
adjustment POT (gain calibration).
6. Now apply the load to the beam, a force will develop on the beam and measure the output voltage

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(V) across T5 and GND.
7. Gradually increase the load and note down the output voltage (V) and applied load.
8. Tabulate the values of displayed load and applied voltage.
9. Plot a graph between applied load and output voltage (V).
Note: When 1 kg load is applied to the beam, the displayed voltage is 1 kg.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

50 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Applied load
(kg)
Output voltage
(V)
Displayed load

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(kg)
% Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Graph:
1. Applied load (kg) Vs Output Voltage (V)
2. Actual load (kg) Vs % Error
Result:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thus the characteristic between applied load and the output voltage was studied.
Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the Sensor device (electro-mechanical) which help us to measure
a physical parameter (such as temperature, pressure, force, acceleration etc.) by providing analog input to get
digital output.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Machine Shop
2. Automobile

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by force?
2. Define ? Wheat stone bridge circuit
3. Define ? Load
4. What is meant by deflector?
5. What is meant by force indicator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Define ? Instrumentation
7. How instrumentations are classified?
8. Define ? Transducer
9. What is electrical transducer?
10. How transducers are classified?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice
1 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

V SEMESTER - R 2013

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No. : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Section : _______________________________________


LABORATORY MANUAL
2 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

DHANALAKSHMI

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
2. To contribute to the promotion of Academic Excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels
3. To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

and soul

DEPARTMENT OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rendering the services to the global needs of engineering industries by educating students to become
professionally sound mechanical engineers of excellent caliber


To produce mechanical engineering technocrats with a perfect knowledge intellectual and hands on

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

experience and to inculcate the spirit of moral values and ethics to serve the society

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MISSION
MISSION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION

VISION

4 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals
To impart students with fundamental knowledge in mathematics and basic sciences that will mould
them to be successful professionals

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Core competence
To provide students with sound knowledge in engineering and experimental skills to identify
complex software problems in industry and to develop a practical solution for them
3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theory and practice which

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

enable them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and organization and to design
products requiring interdisciplinary skills
4. Professional skills
To bestow students with adequate training and provide opportunities to work as team that will build
up their communication skills, individual, leadership and supportive qualities and to enable them to

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

adapt and to work in ever changing technologies
5. Life-long learning
To develop the ability of students to establish themselves as professionals in mechanical
engineering and to create awareness about the need for lifelong learning and pursuing advanced
degrees

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)
On completion of the B.E. (Mechanical) degree, the graduate will be able

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

a) To apply the basic knowledge of mathematics, science and engineering
b) To design and conduct experiments as well as to analyze and interpret data and apply the same in
the career or entrepreneurship
c) To design and develop innovative and creative software applications
d) To understand a complex real world problem and develop an efficient practical solution

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

e) To create, select and apply appropriate techniques, resources, modern engineering and IT tools
f) To understand the role as a professional and give the best to the society
g) To develop a system that will meet expected needs within realistic constraints such as economical
environmental, social, political, ethical, safety and sustainability
h) To communicate effectively and make others understand exactly what they are trying to tell in both

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

verbal and written forms
i) To work in a team as a team member or a leader and make unique contributions and work with
coordination
j) To engage in lifelong learning and exhibit their technical skills
k) To develop and manage projects in multidisciplinary environments

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To familiar with different measurement equipment?s and use of this industry for quality inspection
List of Experiments
1. Tool Maker?s Microscope
2. Comparator
3. Sine Bar

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Gear Tooth Vernier Caliper
5. Floating gauge Micrometer
6. Coordinate Measuring Machine
7. Surface Finish Measuring Equipment
8. Vernier Height Gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. Bore diameter measurement using telescope gauge
10. Bore diameter measurement using micrometer
11. Force Measurement
12. Torque Measurement
13. Temperature measurement

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. Autocollimator


1. Ability to handle different measurement tools and perform measurements in quality impulsion
2. Learnt the usage of precision measuring instruments and practiced to take measurements

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Learnt and practiced to build the required dimensions using slip gauge
4. Able to measure the various dimensions of the given specimen using the tool maker?s microscope
5. Able to find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge
6. Able to measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare
7. Learnt to determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen using Gear tooth vernier

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Able to measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two
wire method
9. Learnt to study the construction and operation of coordinate measuring machine
10. Learnt to determine the diameter of bore by using telescopic gauge and dial bore indicator
11. Able to measure the surface roughness using Talysurf instrument

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. Studied the characteristic between applied load and the output volt
13. Learnt the characteristics of developing torque and respective sensor output voltage
14. Studied the characteristics of thermocouple without compensation
15. Able to check the straightness & flatness of the given component by using Autocollimator
16. Learnt to measure the displacement using LVDT and to calibrate it with the millimeter scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OBJECTIVES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OUTCOMES

7 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

CONTENTS
Sl. No. Name of the Experiments Page No.
CYCLE ? 1 EXPERIMENTS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1
Precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab ? A Study
7
2
To build up the slip gauge for given dimension ? A Study

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16
3
Thread parameters measurement using Tool Makers Microscope
20
4

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Calibration of dial gauge
23
5
Determination of taper angle by sine bar method
26

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6
Determination of gear tooth thickness using gear tooth vernier
29
7
Measurement of thread parameters using floating carriage micrometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

32
CYCLE ? 2 EXPERIMENTS
8
Measurement of various dimensions using Coordinate Measuring Machine
35

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9
Measurement of surface roughness
39
10
Measurement of bores using dial bore indicator and telescopic gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

42
11
Force measurement using load cell
46
12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Torque measurement using strain gauge
49
13
Temperature measurement using thermocouple
53

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14
Measurement of alignment using autocollimator
56
ADDITIONAL EXPERIMENT BEYOND THE SYLLABUS
15

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thread parameters measurement using profile projector
60
16
Displacement measurement ? linear variable differential transducer (LVDT)
62

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROJECT WORK
65


8 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.01 PRECISION MEASURING INSTRUMENT YSED IN
METROLOGY LAB ? A STUDY
Aim:
To study the following instruments and their usage for measuring dimensions of given specimen

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Vernier caliper
2. Micrometer
3. Vernier height gauge
4. Depth micrometer
5. Universal bevel protractor

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Apparatus required:
Surface plate, specimen and above instruments
Vernier caliper:
The principle of vernier caliper is to use the minor difference between the sizes two scales or divisions
for measurement. The difference between them can be utilized to enhance the accuracy of measurement. The

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

vernier caliper essentially consists of two steel rules, sliding along each other.
Parts:
Different parts of the vernier caliper are
1. Beam ? It has main scale.
2. Fixed jaw

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Sliding or Moving jaw ? It has vernier scale and sliding jaw locking screw.
4. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw knife
edges for internal measurement.
5. Stem or depth bar for depth measurement
Least count:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm
1 VSD = 0.98 mm
Least count = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


ID

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPTH


OD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement:
Given Vernier caliper can be used for external, internal depth, slot and step measurement.
Measurement principle:
When both jaws contact each other scale shows the zero reading. The finer adjustment of movable jaw
can be done by the fine adjustment screw. First the whole movable jaw assembly is adjusted so that the two

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measuring tips just touch the part to be measured. Then the fine adjustment clamp locking screw is tightened.
Final adjustment depending upon the sense of correct feel is made by the adjusting screw. After final
adjustment has been made sliding jaw locking screw is also tightened and the reading is noted.
All the parts of the Vernier caliper are made of good quality steel and measuring faces are hardened.
Types of vernier:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier caliper, electronic vernier caliper, vernier depth caliper


11 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:

Main scale
reading (MSR)
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale
reading (VSR) (mm)
Total reading (MSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

+ VSR)
(mm)

OD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ID


Depth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier height gauge:
Vernier height gauge is a sort of vernier caliper equipped with a special instrument suitable for height
measurement. It is always kept on the surface plate and the use of the surfaces plates as datum surfaces is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

very essential.
Least count:
Least Count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 VSD = 0.98 mm
Least Count (LC) = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm
Parts:
1. Base
2. Beam ? It has main scale.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Slider ? It has a vernier scale and slider locking screw.
4. Scriber
5. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


Material:
All the parts of vernier are made of good quality steel and the measuring faces hardened.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Types of vernier gauge:
1. Analog vernier height gauge
2. Digital vernier height gauge
3. Electronic vernier height gauge
Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
Main scale reading
(MSR)(mm)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier scale reading
(VSR)(mm)
Total reading (MSR +
VSR)(mm)
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.
3.

13 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outside micrometer:
The micrometer essentially consists of an accurate screw having about 10 or 20 threads per cm. The
end of the screw forms one measuring tip and other measuring tip is constituted by a stationary anvil in the
base of the frame. The screw is threaded for certain length and is plain afterwards. The plain portion is called
spindle and its end is the measuring surface. The spindle is advanced or retracted by turning a thimble

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

connected to a spindle. The spindle is a slide fit over the barrel and barrel is the fixed part attached with the
frame. The barrel & thimble are graduated. The pitch of the screw threads is 0.5 mm.

Least count:
Least Count (LC) = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= 0.5 / 50 = 0.01 mm
Parts:
1. Frame
2. Anvil
3. Spindle

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Spindle lock
5. Barrel or outside sleeve
6. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions
7. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.
The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Measurement:
It can be used for any external measurement.
Types of micrometer:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Outside micrometer, 2. Inside micrometer, 3.Depth micrometer, 4. Stick micrometer, 5. Screw thread
micrometer, 6. V ? anvil micrometer, 7. Blade type micrometer, 8. Dial micrometer, 9. Bench micrometer, 10.
Tape screw operated internal micrometer, 11. Groove micrometer, 12. Digital micrometer, 13.Differential screw
micrometer, 14.Adjustable range outside micrometer.
Ratchet stop mechanism:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The object of the ratchet stop is to ensure that same level of torque is applied on the spindle while
measuring and the sense of the feel of operator is eliminated and consistent readings are obtained. By
providing this arrangement, the ratchet stop is made slip off when the torque applied to rotate the spindle
exceeds the set torque. Thus this provision ensures the application of same amount of torque during the
measurement.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) (mm)
Head Scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Coincidence (HSC)
Head scale reading
(HSR x LC) (mm)
Total Reading (PSR
+ HSR) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
2.

Depth micrometer:
Depth micrometer is a sort of micrometer which is mainly used for measuring depth of holes, so it is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

named as depth micrometer.
Parts:
1. Shoulder
2. Spindle
3. Spindle lock

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Barrel or outside sleeve ? It has pitch scale.
5. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions.
6. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.
The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.
15 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count:
Least Count = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale = 0.50/50
= 0.01 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurements:
It can be used for measuring the depth of holes, slots and recessed areas. The pitch of the screw thread
is 0.5 mm. The least count is 0.01 mm. Shoulder acts as a reference surface and is held firmly and
perpendicular to the centre line of the hole. For large range of measurement extension rods are used. In the
barrel the scale is calibrated. The accuracy again depends upon the sense of touch.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
First, calculate the least count of the instrument. Check the zero error. Measure the specimen note
down the main scale reading or the head scale reading. Note down the vernier or head scale coincidence with
main or pitch scale divisions.
Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) (mm)
Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Head scale reading
(HSR x LC) (mm)
Total Reading (PSR
+ HSR) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.


2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Universal bevel protractor:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
Bevel protractor is an instrument for measuring the angle between the two faces of a specimen. It
consists of a base plate on which a circular scale is engraved. It is graduated in degrees. An adjustment plate
is attached to a circular plate containing the vernier scale. The adjustable blade can be locked in any position.
The circular plate has 360 division divided into four parts of 90 degrees each. The adjustable parts have 24

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

divisions of to the right and left sides of zero reading. These scales are used according to the position of the
specimen with respect to movable scale.
Procedure:
1. Place the specimen whose taper is to be measured between the adjustable plate and movable
blade with one of its face parallel to the base.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Lock the adjustable plate in position and note down the main scale reading depending upon the
direction of rotation of adjustable plate in clockwise or anticlockwise.
3. Note the VSC to the right of zero.
4. Multiply the VSC with the least count and add to MSR to obtain the actual reading.
Least count:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least Count = 2 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1
o
24 VSD = 46
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

=> 1 VSD = 23/12
LC = 2 ? 23/12 = 1/12
o
= 5? (five minutes)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
Main scale reading
(MSR) (deg)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier scale reading
(VSR) (deg)
Total reading (MSR +
VSR)
(deg)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
2.
The angle of scriber of the vernier height gauge =
Result:
Thus the various precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab are studied and the specimen

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

dimensions are recorded.
Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for linear, angular,
roundness and roughness measurements they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring
instrument according to a specific requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Quality Department


1. Define ? Metrology

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Define ? Inspection
3. What are the needs of inspection in industries?
4. What are the various methods involving the measurement?
5. Define ? Precision
6. Define ? Accuracy

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Define ? Calibration
8. Define ? Repeatability
9. Define ? Magnification
10. Define ? Error
11. Define ? Systematic Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. Define ? Random Error
13. Define ? Parallax Error
14. Define ? Environmental Error
15. Define ? Cosine Error
Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

18 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.02 BUILD UP THE SLIP GAUGE FOR GIVEN DIMENSION
? A STUDY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Aim:
To build up the slip gauge for given dimension
Apparatus required:
1. Slip gauges set
2. Surface plate

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Soft cloth
Diagram:

Description:
Slip gauge are universally accepted standard of length in industry. They are the working standard for

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

linear dimension. These were invented by a Swedish Engineer, C.E. Johansson. They are used
1. For direct precise measurement where the accuracy of the workpiece demand it.
2. For use with high- magnification comparators to establish the size of the gauge blocks in general
use.
3. Gauge blocks are also used for many other purposes such as checking the accuracy of measuring

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

instrument or setting up a comparator to a specific dimension, enabling a batch of component to be
quickly and accurately checked or indeed in any situation where there is need to refer to standard of
known length these blocks are rectangular.
19 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Most gauge blocks are produced from high grade steel, hardened and established by a heat treatment
process to give a high degree of dimensional stability. Gauge blocks are also manufactured from tungsten
carbide which is an extremely hard and wear resistant material. The measuring faces have a lapped finish.
The faces are perfectly flat and parallel to one another with a high degree of accuracy. Each block has an
extremely high dimensional accuracy at 20

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C.
These slip gauge are available in variety of selected sets both in inch units and metric units. Letter ?E? is
used for inch units and ?M? is used for metric standard number of pieces in a set following the letter E or M. For
example EBI refers to a set whose blocks are in metric units and are 83 in number. Each block dimensions is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

printed on anyone of its face itself the size of any required standard being made up by combining the
appropriate number of these different size blocks.
If two gauges are slid and twisted together under pressure they will firmly join together. This process,
known as wringing, is very useful because it enables several gauge blocks to be assembled together to
produce a required size. In fact the success of precision measurement by slip gauges depends on the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

phenomenon of wringing.
First the gauge is oscillated slightly with very light pressure over other gauge so as to detect pressure at
any foreign particles between the surfaces. One gauge is placed perpendicular to other using standard
gauging pressure and rotary motion is applied until the blocks are lined up.
Procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Build the given dimension by wringing minimum number of slip gauges.
2. Note the given dimension and choose the minimum possible slip gauge available in the set so as to
accommodate the last decimal value. The minimum slip gauge value dimension available i.e., 1.12
mm must be chosen followed by 1.5 mm thick gauge block.
3. Follow the above steps to build up the slip gauge of any dimension.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Precautions:
1. Slip gauges should be handled very carefully placed gently and should never be dropped.
2. Whenever a slip gauge is being removed from the set, its dimensions are noted and must be
replaced into the set at its appropriate place only.
3. Correct procedure must be followed in wringing and also in removing the gauge blocks.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. They should be cleaned well before use and petroleum jelly is applied after use.



20 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Range (mm) Increment (mm) No. of pieces

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total = ____________ Pieces
Total length of slip gauge = ________ mm
Given diameter Slip gauges used Obtained dimensions

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Slip gauge set is studied and the given dimensions are building up by wringing minimum number of slip
gauges.
Outcome:
Students will be able to select proper measuring instrument and know requirement of calibration, errors

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

in measurement etc. They can perform accurate measurements.
Application:
1. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Why C.I. is preferred material for surface plates and tables?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Why V ? blocks are generally manufactured in pairs?
3. Why micrometer is required to be tested for accuracy?
4. Define ? Linear Measurement
5. List the linear measuring instrument according to their accuracy.
6. Define ? Least Count

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. What are the uses of vernier depth gauge?
8. What are the uses of feeler gauges?
9. What are the uses of straight edge?
10. What are the uses of angle plate?
11. What are the uses of V ? block?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. What are the uses of combination square?
13. What precautions should be taken while using slip gauges?
14. What is wringing?
15. Why the slip gauges are termed as ?End standard?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

22 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.03 THREAD PARAMETERS MEASUREMENT USING
TOOL MAKERS MICROSCOPE
Aim:
To study the tool makers microscope and in the process measure the various dimensions of the given

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

specimen
Apparatus required:
1. Tool makers microscope
2. Specimen
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
The tool maker?s microscope is designed for measurement of parts of complex forms; for example,
profile of a tool having external threads. It can also be used for measuring centre to centre distance of the
holes in any plane as well as the coordinates of the outline of a complex template gauge, using the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

coordinates measuring system.
23 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Basically it consists of an optical head which can be adjusted vertically along the ways of supporting
column. The optical head can be clamped at any position by a screw. On the work table (which as a circular

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

base in which there are graduations) the part to be inspected is placed. The table has a compound slide by
means of which the part can be measured. For giving these two movements, there are two micrometer screws
having thimble scales and verniers. At the back of the base light source is arranged that provides horizontal
beam of light, reflected from a mirror by 90 degrees upwards towards the table. The beam of light passes
through the transparent glass plate on which flat plates can be checked are placed. Observations are made

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

through the eyepiece of the optical head.
Procedure:
1. Place the given specimen on the work table and switch on all the three light sources and adjust the
intensity of the light source until a clean image of the cross wires and specimen are seen through
the eyepiece.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Coincide one of the two extreme edges between which the measurement has to be taken with
vertical or horizontal cross wires and depending upon the other image coincide with the same cross
wires by moving the above device. Note the reading.The difference between the two readings gives
the value of the required measurement.
3. Note the experiment specimen and the readings.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Tabulate the different measurements measured from the specimen.
Determination of thread parameters
Magnification =
S.No. Parameters
Magnified value

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
Actual value
(mm)
1. Outer diameter (O.D)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Internal diameter (I.D)

3. Pitch

4. Flank angle

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Included angle of the tool was measured using tool maker?s microscope and various dimensions of the
given specimen are measured.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

24 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Outcome:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Students will be able to understand the various parameters of thread and select proper measuring
instrument and know requirement of calibration, errors in measurement etc. They can perform accurate
measurements.
Application:
1. Machine Shop

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Quality Department


1. What is meant by tool maker?s microscope?
2. What is the light used in tool maker?s microscope?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. What are the various characteristics that you would measure in a screw thread?
4. What are the instruments that are required for measuring screw thread?
5. Define ? Pitch
6. What are the causes of pitch error?
7. Define ? Flank

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. What are the effects of flank angle error?
9. What is progressive error?
10. What is periodic error?
11. What is drunken error?
12. What is erratic error?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. What are the applications of tool maker?s microscope?
14. What are the limitations of tool maker?s microscope?
15. What are the advantages of tool maker?s microscope?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

25 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.04 CALIBRATION OF DIAL GAUGE USING SLIP GAUGE
Aim:
To find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge
Apparatus required:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Dial gauge, magnetic stand, slip gauge, and surface plate
Diagram:

Description:
The dial test indicator is a precision measuring instrument which can convert linear motion into angular

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

motion by means of transmission mechanics of rack and pinion and can be used to measure linear vibration
and errors of shape.
This instrument has the features such as good appearance, compact size, light weight, high precision,
reasonable construction, constant measuring face etc. Rigidity of all parts is excellent. Probe is tipped with
carbide balls. A shock proof mechanism is provided for those with larger measuring range.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

26 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Types of dial indicator:
1. Plunger type

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Lever type
Plunger type dial indicator has a resolution counter and each division in main scale is 0.01 mm. In lever
type dial test indicator is replaced by ball type stylus.
Procedure:
1. Fix the dial gauge to the stand rigidly and place the stand on the surface plate.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Set the plunger of dial gauge to first touch the upper surface of standard slip gauge and set indicator
to zero.
3. Raise then the plunger by pulling the screw above the dial scale.
4. Place the standard slip gauge underneath the plunger.
5. Release the plunger and let it to touch the standard slip gauge.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Note the reading on the dial scale.
Formulae:
The standard error of dial gauge is calculated by the formula

Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

S.No.
Slip gauge reading ?x?
(mm)
Dial gauge reading
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(x? - x)
2


x? (x? - x)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
2


Result:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thus the accuracy and standard error of dial gauge is found. The standard error of given dial gauge is
__________.

27 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Students will be able to check the variation in tolerance during the inspection process of a
machined part, measure the deflection of a beam or ring under laboratory conditions, as well as many
other situations where a small measurement needs to be registered or indicated
Application:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Milling Machine
2. Analog versus digital/electronic readout


1. What is comparator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. What are the types of comparators?
3. What is the LC for comparators?
4. What are the applications of comparator?
5. What is meant by plunger?
6. What are the types of dial indicators?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Why a revolution counter is not provided in lever type dial test indicator?
8. Draw a line diagram of the operating mechanism of plunger type dial test indicator.
9. Explain the term magnification of a dial indicator.
10. What are the uses of dial test indicator?
11. What are the practical applications of dial test indicator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. What precautions should be taken while using dial test indicator?
13. What are the desirable qualities of a dial test indicator?
14. What are the advantages of dial test indicator?
15. What are the limitations of dial test indicator?
16. Distinguish between comparator and measuring instrument.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17. What are the advantages of electrical comparator?
18. What are the advantages of optical comparator?
19. What are the uses of comparator?
20. What are the advantages and disadvantages of mechanical comparator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

28 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.05 DETERMINATION OF TAPER ANGLE BY SINE BAR
METHOD
Aim:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare
Apparatus required:
Sine bar, slip gauges, dial gauge with stand, micrometer, surface plate, bevel protractor, vernier caliper
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
The sine bar principle uses the ratio of the length of two sides of a right triangle. It may be noted that
devices operating on sine principle are capable of ?self-generation?. The measurement is restricted to 45
o
from

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

accuracy point of view. Sine bar itself is not a measuring instrument.
Accuracy requirements of sine bar:
1. The axes of the rollers must be parallel to each other and the centre distance L must be precisely
known.
2. The sine bar must be flat and parallel to the plane connecting the axes of the rollers.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. The rollers must be of identical diameters and must have within a close tolerance.


29 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. Fix the dial gaugeon the magnetic stand and place the magnetic stand on the surface plate.Check
the parallelism of the sine bar.
2. Place the given specimen above the sine bar and place the dial gauge on top of the specimen.
Adjustthe dial gauge for zero deflection.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Raise the front end of the sine bar with slip gauges until the work surface is parallel to the datum
surface.
4. Check the parallelism using dial gauge.
5. Measure the distance between the centres of the sine bar rollers as ?L? and note the height of the
slip gauge as ?H?.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Note the included angle of the specimen.
Formulae:
Sin ? = H/L where ? = Included angle of the specimen
H = Height of slip gauges
L = Distance between the centre of rollers

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
S.No. L (mm) H (mm) Taper angle ( ?)
1.
2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
The taper angle of the given specimen using sine bar was found to be =
Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for angular measurements

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

and they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a specific
requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).

Application:
1. Flat Surface

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Granite


30 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. List out the various angle measuring instruments.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. What is the working principles sine bar?
3. How is a sine bar used to measure the angle?
4. What is the application of sine bar?
5. What is the material of sine bar?
6. Why sine bar is not preferred to use for measuring angles more than 45

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

0
?
7. What are the features of sine bar?
8. A 100 mm sine bar is to be set up to an angle of 33
0

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

, determine the slip gauges needed from 87
pieces set.
9. What are the various instruments used for measuring angles?
10. What is sine bar?
11. How sine bar is used for angle measurement?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. Explain how sine bar is used to measure angle of small size component.
13. Explain how sine bar is used to measure angle of large size component.
14. What are the various types of sine bar?
15. What are the limitations of sine bar?
16. What is sine center?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17. What is sine table?
18. What are the possible sources of errors in angular measurement by sine bar?
19. What are angle gauges?
20. How angle gauges are used for measuring angles?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

31 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00



Expt.No.06 DETERMINATION OF GEAR TOOTH THICKNESS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

USING GEAR TOOTH VERNIER
Aim:
To determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen and to draw the graph between the tooth
number and the error in thickness
Apparatus required:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Gear tooth vernier, specimen, surface plate and vernier caliper
Diagram:

Description:
The tooth thickness, in general, is measured at pitch circle since gear tooth thickness varies from the tip

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

to the base circle of the tooth. This is possible only when there is an arrangement to fix that position for this
measurement by the gear tooth vernier. It has two vernier scales; one is vertical and other is horizontal.
Procedure:
32 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Measure initially the outside diameter of the given gear specimen by means of a vertical calculation
of vernier caliper. Note the number of teeth. Calculate the module (m) using the formula.

M = OD/ (Z+2) where z ? number of teeth
M - Module

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Calculate the theoretical tooth thickness (t) by t = z * m* sin (90/z).
3. Set the vernier scale for the height and tighten.
4. Measure the thickness of each tooth using the horizontal scale. This is measured thickness. It can
be positive or negative.
H = m x [1+ Z/2 (1- Cos 90/Z)]

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Calculate the error in the tooth thickness i.e,1. measured thickness ? Theoretical thickness
6. Draw the graph between the tooth number and the error in thickness.
Tabulation:
Tooth
Number

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measured Thickness
(mm)
Theoretical Thickness (mm)
Error in tooth thickness
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1
2
3

Tooth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Number
MSR
(mm)
VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSR
(mm)
TR
(mm)
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
3

Graph:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tooth No.
33 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


Result:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The theoretical experiment value of gear tooth thickness is obtained and graph is drawn between error
and tooth number in tooth thickness
Theoretical tooth thickness =
Experimental tooth thickness =
Error in tooth thickness =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the basic measurement units and able to calibrate various
measuring parameters of the gear.
Application:
1. Gear Component

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Mining

1. Calculate the setting of a gear tooth vernier caliper for a straight spur gear having 40 teeth and
module 4.
2. What is the importance of chordal depth?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Define ? Chordal width
4. How is the actual profile of the gear tooth determined?
5. What are the manufacturing errors in gear element?
6. Define ? Addendum
7. Define ? Dedendum

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Define ? Flank of tooth
9. Define ? Pitch
10. Define ? Pitch Circle
11. Define ? Crest of tooth
12. Define ? Root of tooth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. Define ? Base Circle
14. Define ? Module
15. Define ? Angle of Obliquity

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

34 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.07 MEASUREMENT OF THREAD PARAMETER USING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FLOATING CARRIAGE MICROMETER
Aim:
To measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two wire
method
Apparatus required:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Floating carriage micrometer
2. Standard wire
3. Given specimen (screw thread)
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description of floating carriage micrometer:
It consists of three main units. A base casting carries a pair of centres on which threaded work piece is
to be mounted. Another carriage capable of moving towards centre is mounted exactly above. In this carriage
one head with thimble to measure up to 0.002 mm is provided and at the other side of head a fiducial indicator
is provided to indicate zero position.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

35 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. For two wire method, place the standard wire over a thread of the screw at opposite sides.
2. For three wire method, place two standard wires on two successive threads and the third wire
placed opposite sides of the thread.
3. Measure the diameter over wires (M) using floating carriage micrometer.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Repeat this procedure at various positions of the screw and take different readings.
Formulae:
1. For best wire size, d = P / 2 Cos (x/2)
Where, P = Pitch
d= wire size

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x = angle between two threads
= 60
o
for metric thread
2. Actual effective diameter, E.A = M ? 3d + 0.866 p

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Nominal effective diameter, EN = D ? 0.648 p
4. Max. wire size = 1.01 p
5. Min. wire size = 0.505 p
6. Best wire size = 0.577 p
M = Diameter over wires

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

P = Pitch of thread
For metric thread:
Actual effective diameter (EA) = M ? 3d + 0.866 p
Where d = actual diameter of wire
Determination of actual and nominal effective diameter of the screw thread:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
Nominal
Diameter (D)
(mm)
Diameter over

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

wire ?M?
(mm)
Actual eff.
Diameter E.A
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Nominal eff.
Diameter E.N
(mm)
Error in effective
diameter

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(E.A ? E.N)
(mm)
1.
2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

36 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Thus the actual and nominal effective diameter is measured using three wire method and the error in
effective diameter of screw is determined.
Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for roundness

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measurements and they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a
specific requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).
Application:
1. Wholse
2. Maxxis Rubber India

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Pitch
2. Define ? Flank Angle
3. What is plug gauge?
4. What is meant by micrometer?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. What is meant by indicator?
6. What is best ? size wire?
7. Calculate the diameter of the best wire for an M 20 x 25 screws.
8. What are the different corrections to be applied in the measurement of effective diameter by the
method of wire?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. What is floating carriage micrometer?
10. What are the uses of floating carriage micrometer?
11. What are the methods are used for measuring effective diameter?
12. Define ? Effective Diameter
13. Define ? Major Diameter

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. Define ? Minor Diameter
15. What are the effects of flank error?
16. Define ? Rake Angle
17. Define ? Pitch Cylinder
18. What are the effects of pitch error?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

19. Define ? Pitch Diameter
20. What is meant by angle of thread?


Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

37 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.08 MEASUREMENT OF VARIOUS DIMENSIONS USING
COORDINATE MEASURING MACHINE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Aim:
1. To study the construction and operation of coordinate measuring machine
2. To measure the specified dimensions of the given component
Instruments used:
Coordinate measuring machine, vernier calipers

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diagram:

Theory:
A coordinate measuring machine (CMM) is a 3D device for measuring the physical and geometrical
characteristics of an object. This machine may be manually controlled by an operator or it may be computer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

controlled. Measurements are defined by a probe attached to the three moving axis of this machine X, Y and Z
axes. A coordinate measuring machine (CMM) is also a device used in manufacturing and assembly
processes to test a part or assembly against the design intent. By precisely recording the X, Y and Z
coordinates of the target, points are generated which can be analyzed via regression algorithms for the
construction of features. These points are collected by using a probe that is positioned manually by an

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

38 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

operator or automatically via direct computer control (DCC). DCC CMMs can be programmed to repeatedly
measure identical parts, thus a CMM is a specialized form of industrial robot.
Parts:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Coordinate measuring machine include three main components:
1. The main structures which include three axes of motion.
2. Probing system
3. Data collection and reduction system ? typically includes a machine controller, desktop computer
and application software

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Machine description:
1. In modern machines, the gantry type superstructure has two legs and is often called a bridge. This
moves freely along the granite table with one leg following a guide rail attached to one side of the
granite table. The opposite leg simply rests on the granite table following the vertical surface
contour.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Air bearings are fixed for ensuring friction free travel. Compressed air is forced through a series of
very small holes in a flat bearing surface to provide a smooth but controlled air cushion on which the
CMM can move in a frictionless manner.
3. The movement of the bridge along the granite table forms one axis of the XY plane. The bridge of
the gantry contains a carriage which traverses between the inside and outside legs and forms the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

other X or Y horizontal axis.
4. The third axis of movement (Z axis) is provided by the addition of a vertical quill or spindle which
moves up and down through the center of the carriage. The touch probe forms the sensing device
on the end of the quill.
5. The movement of the X, Y and Z axes fully describes the measuring envelope. Some touch probes

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

are themselves powered rotary devices with the probe tip able to swivel vertically through 90
degrees and through a full 360 degrees rotation.
Uses:
They are generally used for:
1. Dimensional measurement

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Profile measurement
3. Angularity or orientation measurement
4. Depth mapping
5. Digitizing mapping
6. Shaft measurement

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

39 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

The machines are available in a wide range of sizes and designs with a variety of different probe
technologies. They can be operated manually or automatically through direct computer control (DCC). They
are offered in various configurations such as bench top, free ? standing, handheld and portable.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. Take at least 8 points on sphere ball attached to the granite table.
2. Fix the object whose dimension needs to be measured using the jigs and fixtures.
3. Using joystick, move the probe whose tip is made of ruby slowly and carefully to the surface whose
measurements have to be taken.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Touch the probe at two places for measurement of a line (starting and ending point).
5. Touch the probe at two places for measurement of a circular profile and for a cylinder touch the
probe at 8 points.
6. Measure the same profiles again with vernier calipers (length of line, circle diameter, cylinder
diameter) to compare the two readings.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Comments:
1. The machine should be calibrated every time when it is being used.
2. While measuring the profiles, the probe should be moved very slowly as it may damage the ruby if
hit with a high force.
3. Care should be taken while performing experiment so that the granite table of the machines should

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

get any scratches.
4. ?Retract distance? should be fixed according to the space available in the near vicinity of the profile
measurement area.
Observation:
Sl.No. Feature

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CMM reading
(mm)
Vernier reading
(mm)
Form error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
Difference in two
readings (mm)
1 Circle -1
2 Circle -2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3 Circle -3
4 Line
5 Arc
6
Cone - Diameter

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Cone ? Vertex angle
Cone ? Height
7
Cylinder ? Diameter
Cylinder ? Height

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

40 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Result:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thus the different profile of given object are measured using coordinate measuring machine
Outcome:
Students will be able to measures the geometry of physical objects by sensing discrete points on the
surface of the object with a probe and they will be able to know the Various types of probes are used in CMMs,
including mechanical, optical, laser, and white light.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Surface Measuring Equipment
2. Photo transistor

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What are the types of measuring machine?
2. What is CMM?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. What are the types of CMM?
4. What are the advantages of CMM?
5. What are the limitations of CMM?
6. What are the possible sources of error in CMM?
7. What is the use of universal measuring machine?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. What are the applications of CMM?
9. What is the working principle of three axis measuring machine?
10. What is image shearing microscope?
11. What is the use of electronic inspection and measuring machine?
12. What are the types of electronic inspection and measuring machine?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. What is CMM probe?
14. What are the three main probes are available?
15. What are the types of stylus?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

41 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.09 MEASUREMENT OF SURFACE ROUGHNESS UING
TALYSURF INSTRUMENT
Aim:
To measure the surface roughness using Talysurf instrument

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Apparatus required:
Talysurf instrument, work piece, surface plate
Diagram:

Theory:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

On any finished surface, imperfections are bound to be there and these take the form of a succession of
hills and valleys which vary both in height and in spacing and result in a kind of texture which in appearance or
feel is often characteristic of the machining process and accompanying defects. The several kinds of
departures are there on the surface and these are due to various causes.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

42 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Methods of measuring surface roughness:
1. Surface inspection of comparison methods
2. Direct instrument measurements

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

In comparative methods the surface texture is assessed by observation of the surface. But these
methods are not reliable as they can be misleading, if comparison is not made with surfaces produced by
same techniques. The various methods available under comparison method are: (i) Touch Inspection
(ii)Scratch Inspection (iii) Microscopic Inspection (iv) Visual Inspection (v) Surface Photographs (vi) Reflected
Light Intensity Direct Instrument Measurements enable to determine a numerical value of the surface finish of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

any surface. Nearly all instruments used are stylus probe type of instruments. This operates on electrical
principle.
Procedure:
1. Place the finished component on the surface plate.
2. Fix the Talysurf tester to the vernier height gauge using adopter at a convenient height.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Make sure that the stylus probe touches the work piece.
4. Fix the sampling length in the tester.
5. Press the power button so that the probe moves on the surface to and fro.
6. Take the readings of the surface roughness directly from the instrument.
7. Repeat the above process for the remaining specimen and tabulate the readings.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Precautions:
1. The surface to be tested should be cleaned properly.
2. The tester should be fixed to the height gauge properly so that the movement of the probe is exactly
parallel to the surface of work.
3. Make sure that the probe gently touches the work.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
S.No
Measurement roughness value,
?m
Sample direction Ra, Rz

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Average Ra Average Rz Grade
1.
2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

43 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Thus the surface roughness is checked for different specimens by Talysurf.
Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for roughness
measurements they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a specific

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).
Application:
1. Machine Shop
2. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Actual Size?
2. What is meant by normal surface?
3. What is meant by profilo-graph?
4. What is Tomlinson surface meter?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. What is meant by profile?
6. What are the factors affecting surface roughness?
7. Why the surface texture is control?
8. Define ? Lay
9. Define ? Surface Texture

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. Define ? Flaws
11. What is sampling length?
12. What are the methods used for evaluating surface finish?
13. What is form factor?
14. What are the methods used for measuring surface finish?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15. How will you differentiate smooth surface from flat surface?
16. How surface finish is designated on drawings?
17. Define ? Primary Texture
18. Define ? Secondary Texture
19. What are the types of instrument used for measuring surface texture?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

20. Define ? waviness



Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

44 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.10 MEASUREMENT OF BORE USING DIAL BORE
INDICATOR AND TELESCOPIC GAUGE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Aim:
To determine the diameter of bore by using telescopic gauge and checking the same by using dial bore
indicator
Apparatus required:
Work piece, vernier caliper, telescopic gauge and dial gauge indicator set with anvil.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diagram:

45 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
Bore gauge measurement:
1. Select the extension rod and washer according to the bore diameter to be measured
2. Fix the suitable extension rod and washer with the bore gauge
3. Fix the dial gauge to the bore gauge in its position

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Insert the bore gauge inside the bore to be measured and hold the gauge in parallel o the axis of the
bore. Ensure that the tips on either side of the bore gauge are in touch with inner wall of the bore
5. Note down the reading in the dial gauge and withdraw the bore gauge from the bore
6. Hold the measuring tips of bore gauge between the spindle and anvil of a micrometer and compress
the tips by rotating the thimble till the reading reaches the same one as noted earlier

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Observe and record the micrometer reading as the bore diameter to be measured
Telescopic gauge measurement:
1. Select the telescopic gauge according to the bore diameter to be measured
2. Press the telescopic spindles in the telescopic gauge lock them by locking screw
3. Insert the telescopic gauge inside thee bore to be measured. Release the locking screw to expand

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the telescopic spindles outwards inside the bore
4. Hold the telescopic gauge in parallel to the axis of bore axis and ensure that the tips of telescopic
spindles are in touch with the inner wall of the bore
5. Lock the telescopic spindles and withdraw it from the bore
46 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Measure the expanded length of the telescopic spindles using micrometer record them as the inner
diameter of the bore
Practical observations:
Rough measurement of bore using Telescopic gauge:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count of micrometer = 0.01 mm
Sl.No.
Micrometer reading
Total reading
(MSR + TSC * LC) ( mm) Main scale reading (MSR)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
Thimble scale
coincidence
1.
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Average reading = ________ mm
Accurate measuring using Bore gauge
Sl.No.
Micrometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

reading
(d) (mm)
Bore gauge
reading
(R1) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Work piece reading
(R2) (mm)
Final reading
d+ (R1 ? R2) * 0.01
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
2.

Accurate internal diameter of hole using bore gauge = ______ mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result
1. Internal diameter of the work piece by using telescopic gauge is ________mm
2. Diameter obtained by using dial gauge indicator is __________________mm

Outcome:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Students will be able to measure a bore's size, by transferring the internal dimension to a remote
measuring tool (Telescopic gauge).
Application:
1. Automobile
2. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

47 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by bore diameter?
2. What is gauge?
3. What is meant by measurement?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. What is telescope gauge?
5. What is bore gauge?
6. What is contact point?
7. What is the principle of bore gauge?
8. What are the applications of telescopic gauge?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. What types of materials are used in telescopic gauge?
10. What are the types of instrument used to measure bore diameter?
11. What are the applications of bore gauge?
12. What are the advantages of bore gauge over telescopic gauge?
13. What are the limitations of bore gauge?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. What is the working principle of telescopic gauge?
15. What are the disadvantages of telescopic gauge?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

48 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.11 MEASUREMENT OF FORCE USING LOAD CELL

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Aim:
To study the characteristic between applied load and the output voltage
Apparatus required:
1. Trainer kit
2. Multimeter

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Load cell sensor with setup
4. Weights (5 kg)
5. Power chord
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Formulae:
Error (%) = {Applied Voltage ? (Displayed Load)/ Applied Load)} x 100
Block diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Applied DC
Load O/P

DC Excitation source Transducer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Transducer
Instrumentation
Amplifier
Gain Amplifier DVM
49 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Interfacing and calibration procedure:
1. Interface the load cell 9 pin ?D? type male connector to 9 pin D type female connector, fixed on the
module.
2. First unload the beam and nullify the display by using zero adjustment POT

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Apply the maximum load of 5 kg to the beam and adjust the display to 5 kg by using gain
adjustment POT.
4. After the initial adjustment, the unit should not be disturbed until the completion of the experiment.
Safety precaution:
1. During offset adjustment, the beam should not be loaded.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. The beam should not be disturbed during the experiment.
3. Remove the load from the beam, after completion of the experiment; otherwise wire wound on the
strain gauge will get damaged.
4. If you are getting an unsatisfactory reading, then vary the zero and span POT minimum to
maximum.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Maximum load should not exceed 5 kg.
6. Once calibrated, the setting should not be distributed till the end of the experiment.
Procedure:
1. Install the load cell module and interface the 9 pin D connector with kit.
2. Connect the multimeter in volt mode across T5 and GND for the output voltage measurement.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Switch on the module.
4. Initially, unload the beam and nullify the display by using zero adjustment POT (zero calibration).
5. Apply the maximum load of 5 kg to the beam and adjust the display to 5 kg by using gain
adjustment POT (gain calibration).
6. Now apply the load to the beam, a force will develop on the beam and measure the output voltage

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(V) across T5 and GND.
7. Gradually increase the load and note down the output voltage (V) and applied load.
8. Tabulate the values of displayed load and applied voltage.
9. Plot a graph between applied load and output voltage (V).
Note: When 1 kg load is applied to the beam, the displayed voltage is 1 kg.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

50 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Applied load
(kg)
Output voltage
(V)
Displayed load

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(kg)
% Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Graph:
1. Applied load (kg) Vs Output Voltage (V)
2. Actual load (kg) Vs % Error
Result:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thus the characteristic between applied load and the output voltage was studied.
Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the Sensor device (electro-mechanical) which help us to measure
a physical parameter (such as temperature, pressure, force, acceleration etc.) by providing analog input to get
digital output.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Machine Shop
2. Automobile

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by force?
2. Define ? Wheat stone bridge circuit
3. Define ? Load
4. What is meant by deflector?
5. What is meant by force indicator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Define ? Instrumentation
7. How instrumentations are classified?
8. Define ? Transducer
9. What is electrical transducer?
10. How transducers are classified?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

51 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.12 MEASUREMENT OF TORQUE USING STRAIN
GAUGE
Aim:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To study the characteristics of the developing torque and the signal conditioned sensor output voltage
Apparatus required:
1. Trainer kit
2. Digital Multimeter (V)
3. Torque sensor setup

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Weights (100 gram x 10 Nos.)
5. Power chord
Diagram:

Interfacing and calibration procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Interface the torque sensor 9 pin. ?D? type male connector to ?9? pin ?D? type female connector, fixed
on the module.
2. First, unload the beam and nullify the display by using zero adjustment POT.
3. Apply the maximum load of 1 kg to the beam and adjust the display to 9.81 Nm by using adjustment
POT.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. After this initial calibration, the unit should not be disturbed until the completion of the experiment.
FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice
1 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?



DEPARTMENT OF

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MECHANICAL ENGINEERING


ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

V SEMESTER - R 2013

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Register No. : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________


LABORATORY MANUAL

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


3 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DHANALAKSHMI


College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
2. To contribute to the promotion of Academic Excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

DEPARTMENT OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rendering the services to the global needs of engineering industries by educating students to become
professionally sound mechanical engineers of excellent caliber

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To produce mechanical engineering technocrats with a perfect knowledge intellectual and hands on
experience and to inculcate the spirit of moral values and ethics to serve the society

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MISSION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MISSION
VISION

VISION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals
To impart students with fundamental knowledge in mathematics and basic sciences that will mould

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

them to be successful professionals
2. Core competence
To provide students with sound knowledge in engineering and experimental skills to identify
complex software problems in industry and to develop a practical solution for them
3. Breadth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theory and practice which
enable them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and organization and to design
products requiring interdisciplinary skills
4. Professional skills
To bestow students with adequate training and provide opportunities to work as team that will build

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

up their communication skills, individual, leadership and supportive qualities and to enable them to
adapt and to work in ever changing technologies
5. Life-long learning
To develop the ability of students to establish themselves as professionals in mechanical
engineering and to create awareness about the need for lifelong learning and pursuing advanced

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

degrees

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

On completion of the B.E. (Mechanical) degree, the graduate will be able
a) To apply the basic knowledge of mathematics, science and engineering
b) To design and conduct experiments as well as to analyze and interpret data and apply the same in
the career or entrepreneurship
c) To design and develop innovative and creative software applications

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d) To understand a complex real world problem and develop an efficient practical solution
e) To create, select and apply appropriate techniques, resources, modern engineering and IT tools
f) To understand the role as a professional and give the best to the society
g) To develop a system that will meet expected needs within realistic constraints such as economical
environmental, social, political, ethical, safety and sustainability

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

h) To communicate effectively and make others understand exactly what they are trying to tell in both
verbal and written forms
i) To work in a team as a team member or a leader and make unique contributions and work with
coordination
j) To engage in lifelong learning and exhibit their technical skills

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

k) To develop and manage projects in multidisciplinary environments

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To familiar with different measurement equipment?s and use of this industry for quality inspection
List of Experiments
1. Tool Maker?s Microscope
2. Comparator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Sine Bar
4. Gear Tooth Vernier Caliper
5. Floating gauge Micrometer
6. Coordinate Measuring Machine
7. Surface Finish Measuring Equipment

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Vernier Height Gauge
9. Bore diameter measurement using telescope gauge
10. Bore diameter measurement using micrometer
11. Force Measurement
12. Torque Measurement

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. Temperature measurement
14. Autocollimator


1. Ability to handle different measurement tools and perform measurements in quality impulsion

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Learnt the usage of precision measuring instruments and practiced to take measurements
3. Learnt and practiced to build the required dimensions using slip gauge
4. Able to measure the various dimensions of the given specimen using the tool maker?s microscope
5. Able to find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge
6. Able to measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Learnt to determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen using Gear tooth vernier
8. Able to measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two
wire method
9. Learnt to study the construction and operation of coordinate measuring machine
10. Learnt to determine the diameter of bore by using telescopic gauge and dial bore indicator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. Able to measure the surface roughness using Talysurf instrument
12. Studied the characteristic between applied load and the output volt
13. Learnt the characteristics of developing torque and respective sensor output voltage
14. Studied the characteristics of thermocouple without compensation
15. Able to check the straightness & flatness of the given component by using Autocollimator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16. Learnt to measure the displacement using LVDT and to calibrate it with the millimeter scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OBJECTIVES

COURSE OUTCOMES

7 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

CONTENTS
Sl. No. Name of the Experiments Page No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CYCLE ? 1 EXPERIMENTS
1
Precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab ? A Study
7
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To build up the slip gauge for given dimension ? A Study
16
3
Thread parameters measurement using Tool Makers Microscope
20

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4
Calibration of dial gauge
23
5
Determination of taper angle by sine bar method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

26
6
Determination of gear tooth thickness using gear tooth vernier
29
7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement of thread parameters using floating carriage micrometer
32
CYCLE ? 2 EXPERIMENTS
8
Measurement of various dimensions using Coordinate Measuring Machine

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

35
9
Measurement of surface roughness
39
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement of bores using dial bore indicator and telescopic gauge
42
11
Force measurement using load cell
46

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12
Torque measurement using strain gauge
49
13
Temperature measurement using thermocouple

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

53
14
Measurement of alignment using autocollimator
56
ADDITIONAL EXPERIMENT BEYOND THE SYLLABUS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15
Thread parameters measurement using profile projector
60
16
Displacement measurement ? linear variable differential transducer (LVDT)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

62
PROJECT WORK
65

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.01 PRECISION MEASURING INSTRUMENT YSED IN
METROLOGY LAB ? A STUDY
Aim:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To study the following instruments and their usage for measuring dimensions of given specimen
1. Vernier caliper
2. Micrometer
3. Vernier height gauge
4. Depth micrometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Universal bevel protractor
Apparatus required:
Surface plate, specimen and above instruments
Vernier caliper:
The principle of vernier caliper is to use the minor difference between the sizes two scales or divisions

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

for measurement. The difference between them can be utilized to enhance the accuracy of measurement. The
vernier caliper essentially consists of two steel rules, sliding along each other.
Parts:
Different parts of the vernier caliper are
1. Beam ? It has main scale.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Fixed jaw
3. Sliding or Moving jaw ? It has vernier scale and sliding jaw locking screw.
4. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw knife
edges for internal measurement.
5. Stem or depth bar for depth measurement

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count:
Least count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm
1 VSD = 0.98 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm

10 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ID

DEPTH

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OD
Measurement:
Given Vernier caliper can be used for external, internal depth, slot and step measurement.
Measurement principle:
When both jaws contact each other scale shows the zero reading. The finer adjustment of movable jaw

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

can be done by the fine adjustment screw. First the whole movable jaw assembly is adjusted so that the two
measuring tips just touch the part to be measured. Then the fine adjustment clamp locking screw is tightened.
Final adjustment depending upon the sense of correct feel is made by the adjusting screw. After final
adjustment has been made sliding jaw locking screw is also tightened and the reading is noted.
All the parts of the Vernier caliper are made of good quality steel and measuring faces are hardened.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Types of vernier:
Vernier caliper, electronic vernier caliper, vernier depth caliper


11 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:

Main scale
reading (MSR)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale
reading (VSR) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total reading (MSR
+ VSR)
(mm)

OD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ID

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Depth


Vernier height gauge:
Vernier height gauge is a sort of vernier caliper equipped with a special instrument suitable for height

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measurement. It is always kept on the surface plate and the use of the surfaces plates as datum surfaces is
very essential.
Least count:
Least Count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

50 VSD = 49 mm
1 VSD = 0.98 mm
Least Count (LC) = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm
Parts:
1. Base

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Beam ? It has main scale.
3. Slider ? It has a vernier scale and slider locking screw.
4. Scriber
5. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


Material:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

All the parts of vernier are made of good quality steel and the measuring faces hardened.
Types of vernier gauge:
1. Analog vernier height gauge
2. Digital vernier height gauge
3. Electronic vernier height gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Main scale reading
(MSR)(mm)
Vernier scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale reading
(VSR)(mm)
Total reading (MSR +
VSR)(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
2.
3.

13 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outside micrometer:
The micrometer essentially consists of an accurate screw having about 10 or 20 threads per cm. The
end of the screw forms one measuring tip and other measuring tip is constituted by a stationary anvil in the
base of the frame. The screw is threaded for certain length and is plain afterwards. The plain portion is called

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

spindle and its end is the measuring surface. The spindle is advanced or retracted by turning a thimble
connected to a spindle. The spindle is a slide fit over the barrel and barrel is the fixed part attached with the
frame. The barrel & thimble are graduated. The pitch of the screw threads is 0.5 mm.

Least count:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least Count (LC) = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale
= 0.5 / 50 = 0.01 mm
Parts:
1. Frame
2. Anvil

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Spindle
4. Spindle lock
5. Barrel or outside sleeve
6. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions
7. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.
14 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Measurement:
It can be used for any external measurement.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Types of micrometer:
1. Outside micrometer, 2. Inside micrometer, 3.Depth micrometer, 4. Stick micrometer, 5. Screw thread
micrometer, 6. V ? anvil micrometer, 7. Blade type micrometer, 8. Dial micrometer, 9. Bench micrometer, 10.
Tape screw operated internal micrometer, 11. Groove micrometer, 12. Digital micrometer, 13.Differential screw
micrometer, 14.Adjustable range outside micrometer.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Ratchet stop mechanism:
The object of the ratchet stop is to ensure that same level of torque is applied on the spindle while
measuring and the sense of the feel of operator is eliminated and consistent readings are obtained. By
providing this arrangement, the ratchet stop is made slip off when the torque applied to rotate the spindle
exceeds the set torque. Thus this provision ensures the application of same amount of torque during the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measurement.
Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)
Head scale reading
(HSR x LC) (mm)
Total Reading (PSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

+ HSR) (mm)
1.
2.

Depth micrometer:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Depth micrometer is a sort of micrometer which is mainly used for measuring depth of holes, so it is
named as depth micrometer.
Parts:
1. Shoulder
2. Spindle

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Spindle lock
4. Barrel or outside sleeve ? It has pitch scale.
5. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions.
6. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.
The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


Least count:
Least Count = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale = 0.50/50

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= 0.01 mm
Measurements:
It can be used for measuring the depth of holes, slots and recessed areas. The pitch of the screw thread
is 0.5 mm. The least count is 0.01 mm. Shoulder acts as a reference surface and is held firmly and
perpendicular to the centre line of the hole. For large range of measurement extension rods are used. In the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

barrel the scale is calibrated. The accuracy again depends upon the sense of touch.
Procedure:
First, calculate the least count of the instrument. Check the zero error. Measure the specimen note
down the main scale reading or the head scale reading. Note down the vernier or head scale coincidence with
main or pitch scale divisions.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) (mm)
Head Scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Coincidence (HSC)
Head scale reading
(HSR x LC) (mm)
Total Reading (PSR
+ HSR) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.


2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Universal bevel protractor:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
Bevel protractor is an instrument for measuring the angle between the two faces of a specimen. It
consists of a base plate on which a circular scale is engraved. It is graduated in degrees. An adjustment plate
is attached to a circular plate containing the vernier scale. The adjustable blade can be locked in any position.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The circular plate has 360 division divided into four parts of 90 degrees each. The adjustable parts have 24
divisions of to the right and left sides of zero reading. These scales are used according to the position of the
specimen with respect to movable scale.
Procedure:
1. Place the specimen whose taper is to be measured between the adjustable plate and movable

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

blade with one of its face parallel to the base.
2. Lock the adjustable plate in position and note down the main scale reading depending upon the
direction of rotation of adjustable plate in clockwise or anticlockwise.
3. Note the VSC to the right of zero.
4. Multiply the VSC with the least count and add to MSR to obtain the actual reading.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count:
Least Count = 2 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1
o
24 VSD = 46

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
=> 1 VSD = 23/12
LC = 2 ? 23/12 = 1/12
o
= 5? (five minutes)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Main scale reading
(MSR) (deg)
Vernier scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale reading
(VSR) (deg)
Total reading (MSR +
VSR)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(deg)
1.
2.
The angle of scriber of the vernier height gauge =
Result:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thus the various precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab are studied and the specimen
dimensions are recorded.
Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for linear, angular,
roundness and roughness measurements they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

instrument according to a specific requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).
Application:
1. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Metrology
2. Define ? Inspection
3. What are the needs of inspection in industries?
4. What are the various methods involving the measurement?
5. Define ? Precision

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Define ? Accuracy
7. Define ? Calibration
8. Define ? Repeatability
9. Define ? Magnification
10. Define ? Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. Define ? Systematic Error
12. Define ? Random Error
13. Define ? Parallax Error
14. Define ? Environmental Error
15. Define ? Cosine Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

18 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.02 BUILD UP THE SLIP GAUGE FOR GIVEN DIMENSION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? A STUDY
Aim:
To build up the slip gauge for given dimension
Apparatus required:
1. Slip gauges set

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Surface plate
3. Soft cloth
Diagram:

Description:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Slip gauge are universally accepted standard of length in industry. They are the working standard for
linear dimension. These were invented by a Swedish Engineer, C.E. Johansson. They are used
1. For direct precise measurement where the accuracy of the workpiece demand it.
2. For use with high- magnification comparators to establish the size of the gauge blocks in general
use.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Gauge blocks are also used for many other purposes such as checking the accuracy of measuring
instrument or setting up a comparator to a specific dimension, enabling a batch of component to be
quickly and accurately checked or indeed in any situation where there is need to refer to standard of
known length these blocks are rectangular.
19 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Most gauge blocks are produced from high grade steel, hardened and established by a heat treatment
process to give a high degree of dimensional stability. Gauge blocks are also manufactured from tungsten
carbide which is an extremely hard and wear resistant material. The measuring faces have a lapped finish.
The faces are perfectly flat and parallel to one another with a high degree of accuracy. Each block has an

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

extremely high dimensional accuracy at 20
o
C.
These slip gauge are available in variety of selected sets both in inch units and metric units. Letter ?E? is
used for inch units and ?M? is used for metric standard number of pieces in a set following the letter E or M. For

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

example EBI refers to a set whose blocks are in metric units and are 83 in number. Each block dimensions is
printed on anyone of its face itself the size of any required standard being made up by combining the
appropriate number of these different size blocks.
If two gauges are slid and twisted together under pressure they will firmly join together. This process,
known as wringing, is very useful because it enables several gauge blocks to be assembled together to

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

produce a required size. In fact the success of precision measurement by slip gauges depends on the
phenomenon of wringing.
First the gauge is oscillated slightly with very light pressure over other gauge so as to detect pressure at
any foreign particles between the surfaces. One gauge is placed perpendicular to other using standard
gauging pressure and rotary motion is applied until the blocks are lined up.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. Build the given dimension by wringing minimum number of slip gauges.
2. Note the given dimension and choose the minimum possible slip gauge available in the set so as to
accommodate the last decimal value. The minimum slip gauge value dimension available i.e., 1.12
mm must be chosen followed by 1.5 mm thick gauge block.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Follow the above steps to build up the slip gauge of any dimension.
Precautions:
1. Slip gauges should be handled very carefully placed gently and should never be dropped.
2. Whenever a slip gauge is being removed from the set, its dimensions are noted and must be
replaced into the set at its appropriate place only.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Correct procedure must be followed in wringing and also in removing the gauge blocks.
4. They should be cleaned well before use and petroleum jelly is applied after use.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

20 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:
Range (mm) Increment (mm) No. of pieces

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total = ____________ Pieces
Total length of slip gauge = ________ mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Given diameter Slip gauges used Obtained dimensions

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Slip gauge set is studied and the given dimensions are building up by wringing minimum number of slip
gauges.
Outcome:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Students will be able to select proper measuring instrument and know requirement of calibration, errors
in measurement etc. They can perform accurate measurements.
Application:
1. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Why C.I. is preferred material for surface plates and tables?
2. Why V ? blocks are generally manufactured in pairs?
3. Why micrometer is required to be tested for accuracy?
4. Define ? Linear Measurement
5. List the linear measuring instrument according to their accuracy.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Define ? Least Count
7. What are the uses of vernier depth gauge?
8. What are the uses of feeler gauges?
9. What are the uses of straight edge?
10. What are the uses of angle plate?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. What are the uses of V ? block?
12. What are the uses of combination square?
13. What precautions should be taken while using slip gauges?
14. What is wringing?
15. Why the slip gauges are termed as ?End standard?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

22 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.03 THREAD PARAMETERS MEASUREMENT USING
TOOL MAKERS MICROSCOPE
Aim:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To study the tool makers microscope and in the process measure the various dimensions of the given
specimen
Apparatus required:
1. Tool makers microscope
2. Specimen

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diagram:

Description:
The tool maker?s microscope is designed for measurement of parts of complex forms; for example,
profile of a tool having external threads. It can also be used for measuring centre to centre distance of the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

holes in any plane as well as the coordinates of the outline of a complex template gauge, using the
coordinates measuring system.
23 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Basically it consists of an optical head which can be adjusted vertically along the ways of supporting

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

column. The optical head can be clamped at any position by a screw. On the work table (which as a circular
base in which there are graduations) the part to be inspected is placed. The table has a compound slide by
means of which the part can be measured. For giving these two movements, there are two micrometer screws
having thimble scales and verniers. At the back of the base light source is arranged that provides horizontal
beam of light, reflected from a mirror by 90 degrees upwards towards the table. The beam of light passes

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

through the transparent glass plate on which flat plates can be checked are placed. Observations are made
through the eyepiece of the optical head.
Procedure:
1. Place the given specimen on the work table and switch on all the three light sources and adjust the
intensity of the light source until a clean image of the cross wires and specimen are seen through

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the eyepiece.
2. Coincide one of the two extreme edges between which the measurement has to be taken with
vertical or horizontal cross wires and depending upon the other image coincide with the same cross
wires by moving the above device. Note the reading.The difference between the two readings gives
the value of the required measurement.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Note the experiment specimen and the readings.
4. Tabulate the different measurements measured from the specimen.
Determination of thread parameters
Magnification =
S.No. Parameters

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Magnified value
(mm)
Actual value
(mm)
1. Outer diameter (O.D)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Internal diameter (I.D)

3. Pitch

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Flank angle


Result:
Included angle of the tool was measured using tool maker?s microscope and various dimensions of the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

given specimen are measured.


24 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the various parameters of thread and select proper measuring
instrument and know requirement of calibration, errors in measurement etc. They can perform accurate
measurements.
Application:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Machine Shop
2. Quality Department


1. What is meant by tool maker?s microscope?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. What is the light used in tool maker?s microscope?
3. What are the various characteristics that you would measure in a screw thread?
4. What are the instruments that are required for measuring screw thread?
5. Define ? Pitch
6. What are the causes of pitch error?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Define ? Flank
8. What are the effects of flank angle error?
9. What is progressive error?
10. What is periodic error?
11. What is drunken error?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. What is erratic error?
13. What are the applications of tool maker?s microscope?
14. What are the limitations of tool maker?s microscope?
15. What are the advantages of tool maker?s microscope?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

25 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.04 CALIBRATION OF DIAL GAUGE USING SLIP GAUGE
Aim:
To find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Apparatus required:
Dial gauge, magnetic stand, slip gauge, and surface plate
Diagram:

Description:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The dial test indicator is a precision measuring instrument which can convert linear motion into angular
motion by means of transmission mechanics of rack and pinion and can be used to measure linear vibration
and errors of shape.
This instrument has the features such as good appearance, compact size, light weight, high precision,
reasonable construction, constant measuring face etc. Rigidity of all parts is excellent. Probe is tipped with

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

carbide balls. A shock proof mechanism is provided for those with larger measuring range.

26 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Types of dial indicator:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Plunger type
2. Lever type
Plunger type dial indicator has a resolution counter and each division in main scale is 0.01 mm. In lever
type dial test indicator is replaced by ball type stylus.
Procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Fix the dial gauge to the stand rigidly and place the stand on the surface plate.
2. Set the plunger of dial gauge to first touch the upper surface of standard slip gauge and set indicator
to zero.
3. Raise then the plunger by pulling the screw above the dial scale.
4. Place the standard slip gauge underneath the plunger.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Release the plunger and let it to touch the standard slip gauge.
6. Note the reading on the dial scale.
Formulae:
The standard error of dial gauge is calculated by the formula

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
S.No.
Slip gauge reading ?x?
(mm)
Dial gauge reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
(x? - x)
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x? (x? - x)
1.
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Thus the accuracy and standard error of dial gauge is found. The standard error of given dial gauge is
__________.

27 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Students will be able to check the variation in tolerance during the inspection process of a
machined part, measure the deflection of a beam or ring under laboratory conditions, as well as many
other situations where a small measurement needs to be registered or indicated

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Milling Machine
2. Analog versus digital/electronic readout

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is comparator?
2. What are the types of comparators?
3. What is the LC for comparators?
4. What are the applications of comparator?
5. What is meant by plunger?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. What are the types of dial indicators?
7. Why a revolution counter is not provided in lever type dial test indicator?
8. Draw a line diagram of the operating mechanism of plunger type dial test indicator.
9. Explain the term magnification of a dial indicator.
10. What are the uses of dial test indicator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. What are the practical applications of dial test indicator?
12. What precautions should be taken while using dial test indicator?
13. What are the desirable qualities of a dial test indicator?
14. What are the advantages of dial test indicator?
15. What are the limitations of dial test indicator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16. Distinguish between comparator and measuring instrument.
17. What are the advantages of electrical comparator?
18. What are the advantages of optical comparator?
19. What are the uses of comparator?
20. What are the advantages and disadvantages of mechanical comparator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

28 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.05 DETERMINATION OF TAPER ANGLE BY SINE BAR
METHOD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Aim:
To measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare
Apparatus required:
Sine bar, slip gauges, dial gauge with stand, micrometer, surface plate, bevel protractor, vernier caliper
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
The sine bar principle uses the ratio of the length of two sides of a right triangle. It may be noted that
devices operating on sine principle are capable of ?self-generation?. The measurement is restricted to 45
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

from
accuracy point of view. Sine bar itself is not a measuring instrument.
Accuracy requirements of sine bar:
1. The axes of the rollers must be parallel to each other and the centre distance L must be precisely
known.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. The sine bar must be flat and parallel to the plane connecting the axes of the rollers.
3. The rollers must be of identical diameters and must have within a close tolerance.


29 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. Fix the dial gaugeon the magnetic stand and place the magnetic stand on the surface plate.Check
the parallelism of the sine bar.
2. Place the given specimen above the sine bar and place the dial gauge on top of the specimen.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Adjustthe dial gauge for zero deflection.
3. Raise the front end of the sine bar with slip gauges until the work surface is parallel to the datum
surface.
4. Check the parallelism using dial gauge.
5. Measure the distance between the centres of the sine bar rollers as ?L? and note the height of the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

slip gauge as ?H?.
6. Note the included angle of the specimen.
Formulae:
Sin ? = H/L where ? = Included angle of the specimen
H = Height of slip gauges

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

L = Distance between the centre of rollers
Tabulation:
S.No. L (mm) H (mm) Taper angle ( ?)
1.
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.

Result:
The taper angle of the given specimen using sine bar was found to be =
Outcome:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for angular measurements
and they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a specific
requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).

Application:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Flat Surface
2. Granite


30 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. List out the various angle measuring instruments.
2. What is the working principles sine bar?
3. How is a sine bar used to measure the angle?
4. What is the application of sine bar?
5. What is the material of sine bar?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Why sine bar is not preferred to use for measuring angles more than 45
0
?
7. What are the features of sine bar?
8. A 100 mm sine bar is to be set up to an angle of 33

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

0
, determine the slip gauges needed from 87
pieces set.
9. What are the various instruments used for measuring angles?
10. What is sine bar?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. How sine bar is used for angle measurement?
12. Explain how sine bar is used to measure angle of small size component.
13. Explain how sine bar is used to measure angle of large size component.
14. What are the various types of sine bar?
15. What are the limitations of sine bar?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16. What is sine center?
17. What is sine table?
18. What are the possible sources of errors in angular measurement by sine bar?
19. What are angle gauges?
20. How angle gauges are used for measuring angles?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

31 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.06 DETERMINATION OF GEAR TOOTH THICKNESS
USING GEAR TOOTH VERNIER
Aim:
To determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen and to draw the graph between the tooth
number and the error in thickness

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Apparatus required:
Gear tooth vernier, specimen, surface plate and vernier caliper
Diagram:

Description:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The tooth thickness, in general, is measured at pitch circle since gear tooth thickness varies from the tip
to the base circle of the tooth. This is possible only when there is an arrangement to fix that position for this
measurement by the gear tooth vernier. It has two vernier scales; one is vertical and other is horizontal.
Procedure:
32 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Measure initially the outside diameter of the given gear specimen by means of a vertical calculation
of vernier caliper. Note the number of teeth. Calculate the module (m) using the formula.

M = OD/ (Z+2) where z ? number of teeth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M - Module
2. Calculate the theoretical tooth thickness (t) by t = z * m* sin (90/z).
3. Set the vernier scale for the height and tighten.
4. Measure the thickness of each tooth using the horizontal scale. This is measured thickness. It can
be positive or negative.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

H = m x [1+ Z/2 (1- Cos 90/Z)]
5. Calculate the error in the tooth thickness i.e,1. measured thickness ? Theoretical thickness
6. Draw the graph between the tooth number and the error in thickness.
Tabulation:
Tooth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Number
Measured Thickness
(mm)
Theoretical Thickness (mm)
Error in tooth thickness

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
1
2
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tooth
Number
MSR
(mm)
VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSR
(mm)
TR
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1
2
3

Graph:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tooth No.
33 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
The theoretical experiment value of gear tooth thickness is obtained and graph is drawn between error
and tooth number in tooth thickness
Theoretical tooth thickness =
Experimental tooth thickness =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Error in tooth thickness =
Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the basic measurement units and able to calibrate various
measuring parameters of the gear.
Application:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Gear Component
2. Mining

1. Calculate the setting of a gear tooth vernier caliper for a straight spur gear having 40 teeth and
module 4.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. What is the importance of chordal depth?
3. Define ? Chordal width
4. How is the actual profile of the gear tooth determined?
5. What are the manufacturing errors in gear element?
6. Define ? Addendum

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Define ? Dedendum
8. Define ? Flank of tooth
9. Define ? Pitch
10. Define ? Pitch Circle
11. Define ? Crest of tooth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. Define ? Root of tooth
13. Define ? Base Circle
14. Define ? Module
15. Define ? Angle of Obliquity

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

34 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.07 MEASUREMENT OF THREAD PARAMETER USING
FLOATING CARRIAGE MICROMETER
Aim:
To measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two wire
method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Apparatus required:
1. Floating carriage micrometer
2. Standard wire
3. Given specimen (screw thread)
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description of floating carriage micrometer:
It consists of three main units. A base casting carries a pair of centres on which threaded work piece is
to be mounted. Another carriage capable of moving towards centre is mounted exactly above. In this carriage
one head with thimble to measure up to 0.002 mm is provided and at the other side of head a fiducial indicator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

is provided to indicate zero position.



35 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. For two wire method, place the standard wire over a thread of the screw at opposite sides.
2. For three wire method, place two standard wires on two successive threads and the third wire
placed opposite sides of the thread.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Measure the diameter over wires (M) using floating carriage micrometer.
4. Repeat this procedure at various positions of the screw and take different readings.
Formulae:
1. For best wire size, d = P / 2 Cos (x/2)
Where, P = Pitch

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d= wire size
x = angle between two threads
= 60
o
for metric thread

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Actual effective diameter, E.A = M ? 3d + 0.866 p
3. Nominal effective diameter, EN = D ? 0.648 p
4. Max. wire size = 1.01 p
5. Min. wire size = 0.505 p
6. Best wire size = 0.577 p

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M = Diameter over wires
P = Pitch of thread
For metric thread:
Actual effective diameter (EA) = M ? 3d + 0.866 p
Where d = actual diameter of wire

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of actual and nominal effective diameter of the screw thread:
Sl.No.
Nominal
Diameter (D)
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diameter over
wire ?M?
(mm)
Actual eff.
Diameter E.A

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
Nominal eff.
Diameter E.N
(mm)
Error in effective

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

diameter
(E.A ? E.N)
(mm)
1.
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.



36 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Thus the actual and nominal effective diameter is measured using three wire method and the error in
effective diameter of screw is determined.
Outcome:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for roundness
measurements and they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a
specific requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).
Application:
1. Wholse

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Maxxis Rubber India

1. Define ? Pitch
2. Define ? Flank Angle
3. What is plug gauge?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. What is meant by micrometer?
5. What is meant by indicator?
6. What is best ? size wire?
7. Calculate the diameter of the best wire for an M 20 x 25 screws.
8. What are the different corrections to be applied in the measurement of effective diameter by the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

method of wire?
9. What is floating carriage micrometer?
10. What are the uses of floating carriage micrometer?
11. What are the methods are used for measuring effective diameter?
12. Define ? Effective Diameter

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. Define ? Major Diameter
14. Define ? Minor Diameter
15. What are the effects of flank error?
16. Define ? Rake Angle
17. Define ? Pitch Cylinder

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

18. What are the effects of pitch error?
19. Define ? Pitch Diameter
20. What is meant by angle of thread?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

37 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.08 MEASUREMENT OF VARIOUS DIMENSIONS USING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COORDINATE MEASURING MACHINE
Aim:
1. To study the construction and operation of coordinate measuring machine
2. To measure the specified dimensions of the given component
Instruments used:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Coordinate measuring machine, vernier calipers
Diagram:

Theory:
A coordinate measuring machine (CMM) is a 3D device for measuring the physical and geometrical

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

characteristics of an object. This machine may be manually controlled by an operator or it may be computer
controlled. Measurements are defined by a probe attached to the three moving axis of this machine X, Y and Z
axes. A coordinate measuring machine (CMM) is also a device used in manufacturing and assembly
processes to test a part or assembly against the design intent. By precisely recording the X, Y and Z
coordinates of the target, points are generated which can be analyzed via regression algorithms for the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

construction of features. These points are collected by using a probe that is positioned manually by an
38 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

operator or automatically via direct computer control (DCC). DCC CMMs can be programmed to repeatedly
measure identical parts, thus a CMM is a specialized form of industrial robot.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Parts:
Coordinate measuring machine include three main components:
1. The main structures which include three axes of motion.
2. Probing system
3. Data collection and reduction system ? typically includes a machine controller, desktop computer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

and application software
Machine description:
1. In modern machines, the gantry type superstructure has two legs and is often called a bridge. This
moves freely along the granite table with one leg following a guide rail attached to one side of the
granite table. The opposite leg simply rests on the granite table following the vertical surface

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

contour.
2. Air bearings are fixed for ensuring friction free travel. Compressed air is forced through a series of
very small holes in a flat bearing surface to provide a smooth but controlled air cushion on which the
CMM can move in a frictionless manner.
3. The movement of the bridge along the granite table forms one axis of the XY plane. The bridge of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the gantry contains a carriage which traverses between the inside and outside legs and forms the
other X or Y horizontal axis.
4. The third axis of movement (Z axis) is provided by the addition of a vertical quill or spindle which
moves up and down through the center of the carriage. The touch probe forms the sensing device
on the end of the quill.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. The movement of the X, Y and Z axes fully describes the measuring envelope. Some touch probes
are themselves powered rotary devices with the probe tip able to swivel vertically through 90
degrees and through a full 360 degrees rotation.
Uses:
They are generally used for:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Dimensional measurement
2. Profile measurement
3. Angularity or orientation measurement
4. Depth mapping
5. Digitizing mapping

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Shaft measurement
39 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

The machines are available in a wide range of sizes and designs with a variety of different probe
technologies. They can be operated manually or automatically through direct computer control (DCC). They

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

are offered in various configurations such as bench top, free ? standing, handheld and portable.
Procedure:
1. Take at least 8 points on sphere ball attached to the granite table.
2. Fix the object whose dimension needs to be measured using the jigs and fixtures.
3. Using joystick, move the probe whose tip is made of ruby slowly and carefully to the surface whose

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measurements have to be taken.
4. Touch the probe at two places for measurement of a line (starting and ending point).
5. Touch the probe at two places for measurement of a circular profile and for a cylinder touch the
probe at 8 points.
6. Measure the same profiles again with vernier calipers (length of line, circle diameter, cylinder

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

diameter) to compare the two readings.
Comments:
1. The machine should be calibrated every time when it is being used.
2. While measuring the profiles, the probe should be moved very slowly as it may damage the ruby if
hit with a high force.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Care should be taken while performing experiment so that the granite table of the machines should
get any scratches.
4. ?Retract distance? should be fixed according to the space available in the near vicinity of the profile
measurement area.
Observation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No. Feature
CMM reading
(mm)
Vernier reading
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Form error
(mm)
Difference in two
readings (mm)
1 Circle -1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2 Circle -2
3 Circle -3
4 Line
5 Arc
6

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Cone - Diameter
Cone ? Vertex angle
Cone ? Height
7
Cylinder ? Diameter

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Cylinder ? Height


40 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Thus the different profile of given object are measured using coordinate measuring machine
Outcome:
Students will be able to measures the geometry of physical objects by sensing discrete points on the
surface of the object with a probe and they will be able to know the Various types of probes are used in CMMs,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

including mechanical, optical, laser, and white light.
Application:
1. Surface Measuring Equipment
2. Photo transistor

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What are the types of measuring machine?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. What is CMM?
3. What are the types of CMM?
4. What are the advantages of CMM?
5. What are the limitations of CMM?
6. What are the possible sources of error in CMM?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. What is the use of universal measuring machine?
8. What are the applications of CMM?
9. What is the working principle of three axis measuring machine?
10. What is image shearing microscope?
11. What is the use of electronic inspection and measuring machine?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. What are the types of electronic inspection and measuring machine?
13. What is CMM probe?
14. What are the three main probes are available?
15. What are the types of stylus?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

41 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.09 MEASUREMENT OF SURFACE ROUGHNESS UING
TALYSURF INSTRUMENT
Aim:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To measure the surface roughness using Talysurf instrument
Apparatus required:
Talysurf instrument, work piece, surface plate
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Theory:
On any finished surface, imperfections are bound to be there and these take the form of a succession of
hills and valleys which vary both in height and in spacing and result in a kind of texture which in appearance or
feel is often characteristic of the machining process and accompanying defects. The several kinds of
departures are there on the surface and these are due to various causes.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

42 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Methods of measuring surface roughness:
1. Surface inspection of comparison methods

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Direct instrument measurements
In comparative methods the surface texture is assessed by observation of the surface. But these
methods are not reliable as they can be misleading, if comparison is not made with surfaces produced by
same techniques. The various methods available under comparison method are: (i) Touch Inspection
(ii)Scratch Inspection (iii) Microscopic Inspection (iv) Visual Inspection (v) Surface Photographs (vi) Reflected

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Light Intensity Direct Instrument Measurements enable to determine a numerical value of the surface finish of
any surface. Nearly all instruments used are stylus probe type of instruments. This operates on electrical
principle.
Procedure:
1. Place the finished component on the surface plate.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Fix the Talysurf tester to the vernier height gauge using adopter at a convenient height.
3. Make sure that the stylus probe touches the work piece.
4. Fix the sampling length in the tester.
5. Press the power button so that the probe moves on the surface to and fro.
6. Take the readings of the surface roughness directly from the instrument.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Repeat the above process for the remaining specimen and tabulate the readings.
Precautions:
1. The surface to be tested should be cleaned properly.
2. The tester should be fixed to the height gauge properly so that the movement of the probe is exactly
parallel to the surface of work.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Make sure that the probe gently touches the work.
Tabulation:
S.No
Measurement roughness value,
?m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sample direction Ra, Rz
Average Ra Average Rz Grade
1.
2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

43 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Thus the surface roughness is checked for different specimens by Talysurf.
Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for roughness

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measurements they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a specific
requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).
Application:
1. Machine Shop
2. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Actual Size?
2. What is meant by normal surface?
3. What is meant by profilo-graph?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. What is Tomlinson surface meter?
5. What is meant by profile?
6. What are the factors affecting surface roughness?
7. Why the surface texture is control?
8. Define ? Lay

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. Define ? Surface Texture
10. Define ? Flaws
11. What is sampling length?
12. What are the methods used for evaluating surface finish?
13. What is form factor?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. What are the methods used for measuring surface finish?
15. How will you differentiate smooth surface from flat surface?
16. How surface finish is designated on drawings?
17. Define ? Primary Texture
18. Define ? Secondary Texture

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

19. What are the types of instrument used for measuring surface texture?
20. Define ? waviness

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

44 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.10 MEASUREMENT OF BORE USING DIAL BORE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

INDICATOR AND TELESCOPIC GAUGE
Aim:
To determine the diameter of bore by using telescopic gauge and checking the same by using dial bore
indicator
Apparatus required:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Work piece, vernier caliper, telescopic gauge and dial gauge indicator set with anvil.
Diagram:

45 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
Bore gauge measurement:
1. Select the extension rod and washer according to the bore diameter to be measured
2. Fix the suitable extension rod and washer with the bore gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Fix the dial gauge to the bore gauge in its position
4. Insert the bore gauge inside the bore to be measured and hold the gauge in parallel o the axis of the
bore. Ensure that the tips on either side of the bore gauge are in touch with inner wall of the bore
5. Note down the reading in the dial gauge and withdraw the bore gauge from the bore
6. Hold the measuring tips of bore gauge between the spindle and anvil of a micrometer and compress

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the tips by rotating the thimble till the reading reaches the same one as noted earlier
7. Observe and record the micrometer reading as the bore diameter to be measured
Telescopic gauge measurement:
1. Select the telescopic gauge according to the bore diameter to be measured
2. Press the telescopic spindles in the telescopic gauge lock them by locking screw

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Insert the telescopic gauge inside thee bore to be measured. Release the locking screw to expand
the telescopic spindles outwards inside the bore
4. Hold the telescopic gauge in parallel to the axis of bore axis and ensure that the tips of telescopic
spindles are in touch with the inner wall of the bore
5. Lock the telescopic spindles and withdraw it from the bore

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

46 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

6. Measure the expanded length of the telescopic spindles using micrometer record them as the inner
diameter of the bore
Practical observations:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rough measurement of bore using Telescopic gauge:
Least count of micrometer = 0.01 mm
Sl.No.
Micrometer reading
Total reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(MSR + TSC * LC) ( mm) Main scale reading (MSR)
(mm)
Thimble scale
coincidence
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.

Average reading = ________ mm
Accurate measuring using Bore gauge
Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Micrometer
reading
(d) (mm)
Bore gauge
reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(R1) (mm)
Work piece reading
(R2) (mm)
Final reading
d+ (R1 ? R2) * 0.01

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
1.
2.

Accurate internal diameter of hole using bore gauge = ______ mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result
1. Internal diameter of the work piece by using telescopic gauge is ________mm
2. Diameter obtained by using dial gauge indicator is __________________mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Students will be able to measure a bore's size, by transferring the internal dimension to a remote
measuring tool (Telescopic gauge).
Application:
1. Automobile

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Quality Department


47 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by bore diameter?
2. What is gauge?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. What is meant by measurement?
4. What is telescope gauge?
5. What is bore gauge?
6. What is contact point?
7. What is the principle of bore gauge?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. What are the applications of telescopic gauge?
9. What types of materials are used in telescopic gauge?
10. What are the types of instrument used to measure bore diameter?
11. What are the applications of bore gauge?
12. What are the advantages of bore gauge over telescopic gauge?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. What are the limitations of bore gauge?
14. What is the working principle of telescopic gauge?
15. What are the disadvantages of telescopic gauge?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

48 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.11 MEASUREMENT OF FORCE USING LOAD CELL
Aim:
To study the characteristic between applied load and the output voltage
Apparatus required:
1. Trainer kit

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Multimeter
3. Load cell sensor with setup
4. Weights (5 kg)
5. Power chord
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Formulae:
Error (%) = {Applied Voltage ? (Displayed Load)/ Applied Load)} x 100
Block diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Applied DC
Load O/P

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DC Excitation source Transducer
Transducer
Instrumentation
Amplifier
Gain Amplifier DVM

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

49 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Interfacing and calibration procedure:
1. Interface the load cell 9 pin ?D? type male connector to 9 pin D type female connector, fixed on the
module.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. First unload the beam and nullify the display by using zero adjustment POT
3. Apply the maximum load of 5 kg to the beam and adjust the display to 5 kg by using gain
adjustment POT.
4. After the initial adjustment, the unit should not be disturbed until the completion of the experiment.
Safety precaution:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. During offset adjustment, the beam should not be loaded.
2. The beam should not be disturbed during the experiment.
3. Remove the load from the beam, after completion of the experiment; otherwise wire wound on the
strain gauge will get damaged.
4. If you are getting an unsatisfactory reading, then vary the zero and span POT minimum to

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

maximum.
5. Maximum load should not exceed 5 kg.
6. Once calibrated, the setting should not be distributed till the end of the experiment.
Procedure:
1. Install the load cell module and interface the 9 pin D connector with kit.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Connect the multimeter in volt mode across T5 and GND for the output voltage measurement.
3. Switch on the module.
4. Initially, unload the beam and nullify the display by using zero adjustment POT (zero calibration).
5. Apply the maximum load of 5 kg to the beam and adjust the display to 5 kg by using gain
adjustment POT (gain calibration).

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Now apply the load to the beam, a force will develop on the beam and measure the output voltage
(V) across T5 and GND.
7. Gradually increase the load and note down the output voltage (V) and applied load.
8. Tabulate the values of displayed load and applied voltage.
9. Plot a graph between applied load and output voltage (V).

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Note: When 1 kg load is applied to the beam, the displayed voltage is 1 kg.


50 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Applied load
(kg)
Output voltage
(V)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Displayed load
(kg)
% Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Graph:
1. Applied load (kg) Vs Output Voltage (V)
2. Actual load (kg) Vs % Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Thus the characteristic between applied load and the output voltage was studied.
Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the Sensor device (electro-mechanical) which help us to measure
a physical parameter (such as temperature, pressure, force, acceleration etc.) by providing analog input to get

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

digital output.
Application:
1. Machine Shop
2. Automobile

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by force?
2. Define ? Wheat stone bridge circuit
3. Define ? Load
4. What is meant by deflector?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. What is meant by force indicator?
6. Define ? Instrumentation
7. How instrumentations are classified?
8. Define ? Transducer
9. What is electrical transducer?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. How transducers are classified?



Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

51 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.12 MEASUREMENT OF TORQUE USING STRAIN
GAUGE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Aim:
To study the characteristics of the developing torque and the signal conditioned sensor output voltage
Apparatus required:
1. Trainer kit
2. Digital Multimeter (V)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Torque sensor setup
4. Weights (100 gram x 10 Nos.)
5. Power chord
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Interfacing and calibration procedure:
1. Interface the torque sensor 9 pin. ?D? type male connector to ?9? pin ?D? type female connector, fixed
on the module.
2. First, unload the beam and nullify the display by using zero adjustment POT.
3. Apply the maximum load of 1 kg to the beam and adjust the display to 9.81 Nm by using adjustment

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

POT.
4. After this initial calibration, the unit should not be disturbed until the completion of the experiment.
52 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Safety precaution:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. During offset adjustment, the beam should not be loaded.
2. The beam should not be disturbed during the experiment.
3. Remove the beam from the shaft, after completion of the experiment otherwise wire wound on the
strain gauge will get damaged.
4. If the displayed torque reading are in negative, change the beam connections in opposite to

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

previously connected direction.
5. If you are getting an unsatisfactory reading, then vary the zero and span POT minimum to
maximum.
6. Maximum load should not exceed 1 kg.
7. Once calibrated, the setting should not be disturbed till the end of this experiment.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. Install the torque sensor setup and interface with kit.
2. Switch ?ON? the module.
3. Connect the Multimeter in millivolts mode T2 and T3 for bridge output voltage measurement POT.
4. First, unload the beam and nullify the bridge output voltage by using zero adjustment POT.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. By applying load to the beam, torque will develop on the shaft and measure the bridge output
voltage (mV) across T2 and T3
6. Gradually increase the force by applying load and note down the bridge output voltage (mV).
7. Tabulate the readings and plot a graph between developed torque versus bridge output voltage
(mV).

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Formulae:
Error (%) = {(Actual Torque ? Theoretical Torque)/ Theoretical Torque} x 100
Theoretical Torque = mass (m) x acceleration due to gravity (g) x radial distance
= 1 kg x 9.81 m/s
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x 1 m
= 9.81 Nm
Tabulation:
Sl.No. Theoretical Torque
(Nm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Bridge output voltage
(mV)


Model graph:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The graph between developed torque and bridge output voltage is drawn
FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice
1 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?



DEPARTMENT OF

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MECHANICAL ENGINEERING


ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

V SEMESTER - R 2013

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Register No. : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________


LABORATORY MANUAL

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


3 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DHANALAKSHMI


College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
2. To contribute to the promotion of Academic Excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

DEPARTMENT OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rendering the services to the global needs of engineering industries by educating students to become
professionally sound mechanical engineers of excellent caliber

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To produce mechanical engineering technocrats with a perfect knowledge intellectual and hands on
experience and to inculcate the spirit of moral values and ethics to serve the society

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MISSION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MISSION
VISION

VISION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals
To impart students with fundamental knowledge in mathematics and basic sciences that will mould

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

them to be successful professionals
2. Core competence
To provide students with sound knowledge in engineering and experimental skills to identify
complex software problems in industry and to develop a practical solution for them
3. Breadth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theory and practice which
enable them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and organization and to design
products requiring interdisciplinary skills
4. Professional skills
To bestow students with adequate training and provide opportunities to work as team that will build

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

up their communication skills, individual, leadership and supportive qualities and to enable them to
adapt and to work in ever changing technologies
5. Life-long learning
To develop the ability of students to establish themselves as professionals in mechanical
engineering and to create awareness about the need for lifelong learning and pursuing advanced

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

degrees

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

On completion of the B.E. (Mechanical) degree, the graduate will be able
a) To apply the basic knowledge of mathematics, science and engineering
b) To design and conduct experiments as well as to analyze and interpret data and apply the same in
the career or entrepreneurship
c) To design and develop innovative and creative software applications

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d) To understand a complex real world problem and develop an efficient practical solution
e) To create, select and apply appropriate techniques, resources, modern engineering and IT tools
f) To understand the role as a professional and give the best to the society
g) To develop a system that will meet expected needs within realistic constraints such as economical
environmental, social, political, ethical, safety and sustainability

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

h) To communicate effectively and make others understand exactly what they are trying to tell in both
verbal and written forms
i) To work in a team as a team member or a leader and make unique contributions and work with
coordination
j) To engage in lifelong learning and exhibit their technical skills

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

k) To develop and manage projects in multidisciplinary environments

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To familiar with different measurement equipment?s and use of this industry for quality inspection
List of Experiments
1. Tool Maker?s Microscope
2. Comparator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Sine Bar
4. Gear Tooth Vernier Caliper
5. Floating gauge Micrometer
6. Coordinate Measuring Machine
7. Surface Finish Measuring Equipment

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Vernier Height Gauge
9. Bore diameter measurement using telescope gauge
10. Bore diameter measurement using micrometer
11. Force Measurement
12. Torque Measurement

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. Temperature measurement
14. Autocollimator


1. Ability to handle different measurement tools and perform measurements in quality impulsion

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Learnt the usage of precision measuring instruments and practiced to take measurements
3. Learnt and practiced to build the required dimensions using slip gauge
4. Able to measure the various dimensions of the given specimen using the tool maker?s microscope
5. Able to find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge
6. Able to measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Learnt to determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen using Gear tooth vernier
8. Able to measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two
wire method
9. Learnt to study the construction and operation of coordinate measuring machine
10. Learnt to determine the diameter of bore by using telescopic gauge and dial bore indicator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. Able to measure the surface roughness using Talysurf instrument
12. Studied the characteristic between applied load and the output volt
13. Learnt the characteristics of developing torque and respective sensor output voltage
14. Studied the characteristics of thermocouple without compensation
15. Able to check the straightness & flatness of the given component by using Autocollimator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16. Learnt to measure the displacement using LVDT and to calibrate it with the millimeter scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OBJECTIVES

COURSE OUTCOMES

7 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

CONTENTS
Sl. No. Name of the Experiments Page No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CYCLE ? 1 EXPERIMENTS
1
Precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab ? A Study
7
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To build up the slip gauge for given dimension ? A Study
16
3
Thread parameters measurement using Tool Makers Microscope
20

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4
Calibration of dial gauge
23
5
Determination of taper angle by sine bar method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

26
6
Determination of gear tooth thickness using gear tooth vernier
29
7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement of thread parameters using floating carriage micrometer
32
CYCLE ? 2 EXPERIMENTS
8
Measurement of various dimensions using Coordinate Measuring Machine

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

35
9
Measurement of surface roughness
39
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement of bores using dial bore indicator and telescopic gauge
42
11
Force measurement using load cell
46

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12
Torque measurement using strain gauge
49
13
Temperature measurement using thermocouple

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

53
14
Measurement of alignment using autocollimator
56
ADDITIONAL EXPERIMENT BEYOND THE SYLLABUS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15
Thread parameters measurement using profile projector
60
16
Displacement measurement ? linear variable differential transducer (LVDT)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

62
PROJECT WORK
65

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.01 PRECISION MEASURING INSTRUMENT YSED IN
METROLOGY LAB ? A STUDY
Aim:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To study the following instruments and their usage for measuring dimensions of given specimen
1. Vernier caliper
2. Micrometer
3. Vernier height gauge
4. Depth micrometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Universal bevel protractor
Apparatus required:
Surface plate, specimen and above instruments
Vernier caliper:
The principle of vernier caliper is to use the minor difference between the sizes two scales or divisions

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

for measurement. The difference between them can be utilized to enhance the accuracy of measurement. The
vernier caliper essentially consists of two steel rules, sliding along each other.
Parts:
Different parts of the vernier caliper are
1. Beam ? It has main scale.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Fixed jaw
3. Sliding or Moving jaw ? It has vernier scale and sliding jaw locking screw.
4. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw knife
edges for internal measurement.
5. Stem or depth bar for depth measurement

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count:
Least count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm
1 VSD = 0.98 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm

10 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ID

DEPTH

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OD
Measurement:
Given Vernier caliper can be used for external, internal depth, slot and step measurement.
Measurement principle:
When both jaws contact each other scale shows the zero reading. The finer adjustment of movable jaw

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

can be done by the fine adjustment screw. First the whole movable jaw assembly is adjusted so that the two
measuring tips just touch the part to be measured. Then the fine adjustment clamp locking screw is tightened.
Final adjustment depending upon the sense of correct feel is made by the adjusting screw. After final
adjustment has been made sliding jaw locking screw is also tightened and the reading is noted.
All the parts of the Vernier caliper are made of good quality steel and measuring faces are hardened.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Types of vernier:
Vernier caliper, electronic vernier caliper, vernier depth caliper


11 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:

Main scale
reading (MSR)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale
reading (VSR) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total reading (MSR
+ VSR)
(mm)

OD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ID

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Depth


Vernier height gauge:
Vernier height gauge is a sort of vernier caliper equipped with a special instrument suitable for height

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measurement. It is always kept on the surface plate and the use of the surfaces plates as datum surfaces is
very essential.
Least count:
Least Count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

50 VSD = 49 mm
1 VSD = 0.98 mm
Least Count (LC) = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm
Parts:
1. Base

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Beam ? It has main scale.
3. Slider ? It has a vernier scale and slider locking screw.
4. Scriber
5. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


Material:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

All the parts of vernier are made of good quality steel and the measuring faces hardened.
Types of vernier gauge:
1. Analog vernier height gauge
2. Digital vernier height gauge
3. Electronic vernier height gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Main scale reading
(MSR)(mm)
Vernier scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale reading
(VSR)(mm)
Total reading (MSR +
VSR)(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
2.
3.

13 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outside micrometer:
The micrometer essentially consists of an accurate screw having about 10 or 20 threads per cm. The
end of the screw forms one measuring tip and other measuring tip is constituted by a stationary anvil in the
base of the frame. The screw is threaded for certain length and is plain afterwards. The plain portion is called

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

spindle and its end is the measuring surface. The spindle is advanced or retracted by turning a thimble
connected to a spindle. The spindle is a slide fit over the barrel and barrel is the fixed part attached with the
frame. The barrel & thimble are graduated. The pitch of the screw threads is 0.5 mm.

Least count:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least Count (LC) = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale
= 0.5 / 50 = 0.01 mm
Parts:
1. Frame
2. Anvil

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Spindle
4. Spindle lock
5. Barrel or outside sleeve
6. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions
7. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.
14 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Measurement:
It can be used for any external measurement.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Types of micrometer:
1. Outside micrometer, 2. Inside micrometer, 3.Depth micrometer, 4. Stick micrometer, 5. Screw thread
micrometer, 6. V ? anvil micrometer, 7. Blade type micrometer, 8. Dial micrometer, 9. Bench micrometer, 10.
Tape screw operated internal micrometer, 11. Groove micrometer, 12. Digital micrometer, 13.Differential screw
micrometer, 14.Adjustable range outside micrometer.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Ratchet stop mechanism:
The object of the ratchet stop is to ensure that same level of torque is applied on the spindle while
measuring and the sense of the feel of operator is eliminated and consistent readings are obtained. By
providing this arrangement, the ratchet stop is made slip off when the torque applied to rotate the spindle
exceeds the set torque. Thus this provision ensures the application of same amount of torque during the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measurement.
Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)
Head scale reading
(HSR x LC) (mm)
Total Reading (PSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

+ HSR) (mm)
1.
2.

Depth micrometer:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Depth micrometer is a sort of micrometer which is mainly used for measuring depth of holes, so it is
named as depth micrometer.
Parts:
1. Shoulder
2. Spindle

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Spindle lock
4. Barrel or outside sleeve ? It has pitch scale.
5. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions.
6. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.
The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


Least count:
Least Count = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale = 0.50/50

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= 0.01 mm
Measurements:
It can be used for measuring the depth of holes, slots and recessed areas. The pitch of the screw thread
is 0.5 mm. The least count is 0.01 mm. Shoulder acts as a reference surface and is held firmly and
perpendicular to the centre line of the hole. For large range of measurement extension rods are used. In the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

barrel the scale is calibrated. The accuracy again depends upon the sense of touch.
Procedure:
First, calculate the least count of the instrument. Check the zero error. Measure the specimen note
down the main scale reading or the head scale reading. Note down the vernier or head scale coincidence with
main or pitch scale divisions.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) (mm)
Head Scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Coincidence (HSC)
Head scale reading
(HSR x LC) (mm)
Total Reading (PSR
+ HSR) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.


2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Universal bevel protractor:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
Bevel protractor is an instrument for measuring the angle between the two faces of a specimen. It
consists of a base plate on which a circular scale is engraved. It is graduated in degrees. An adjustment plate
is attached to a circular plate containing the vernier scale. The adjustable blade can be locked in any position.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The circular plate has 360 division divided into four parts of 90 degrees each. The adjustable parts have 24
divisions of to the right and left sides of zero reading. These scales are used according to the position of the
specimen with respect to movable scale.
Procedure:
1. Place the specimen whose taper is to be measured between the adjustable plate and movable

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

blade with one of its face parallel to the base.
2. Lock the adjustable plate in position and note down the main scale reading depending upon the
direction of rotation of adjustable plate in clockwise or anticlockwise.
3. Note the VSC to the right of zero.
4. Multiply the VSC with the least count and add to MSR to obtain the actual reading.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count:
Least Count = 2 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1
o
24 VSD = 46

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
=> 1 VSD = 23/12
LC = 2 ? 23/12 = 1/12
o
= 5? (five minutes)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Main scale reading
(MSR) (deg)
Vernier scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale reading
(VSR) (deg)
Total reading (MSR +
VSR)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(deg)
1.
2.
The angle of scriber of the vernier height gauge =
Result:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thus the various precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab are studied and the specimen
dimensions are recorded.
Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for linear, angular,
roundness and roughness measurements they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

instrument according to a specific requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).
Application:
1. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Metrology
2. Define ? Inspection
3. What are the needs of inspection in industries?
4. What are the various methods involving the measurement?
5. Define ? Precision

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Define ? Accuracy
7. Define ? Calibration
8. Define ? Repeatability
9. Define ? Magnification
10. Define ? Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. Define ? Systematic Error
12. Define ? Random Error
13. Define ? Parallax Error
14. Define ? Environmental Error
15. Define ? Cosine Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

18 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.02 BUILD UP THE SLIP GAUGE FOR GIVEN DIMENSION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? A STUDY
Aim:
To build up the slip gauge for given dimension
Apparatus required:
1. Slip gauges set

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Surface plate
3. Soft cloth
Diagram:

Description:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Slip gauge are universally accepted standard of length in industry. They are the working standard for
linear dimension. These were invented by a Swedish Engineer, C.E. Johansson. They are used
1. For direct precise measurement where the accuracy of the workpiece demand it.
2. For use with high- magnification comparators to establish the size of the gauge blocks in general
use.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Gauge blocks are also used for many other purposes such as checking the accuracy of measuring
instrument or setting up a comparator to a specific dimension, enabling a batch of component to be
quickly and accurately checked or indeed in any situation where there is need to refer to standard of
known length these blocks are rectangular.
19 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Most gauge blocks are produced from high grade steel, hardened and established by a heat treatment
process to give a high degree of dimensional stability. Gauge blocks are also manufactured from tungsten
carbide which is an extremely hard and wear resistant material. The measuring faces have a lapped finish.
The faces are perfectly flat and parallel to one another with a high degree of accuracy. Each block has an

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

extremely high dimensional accuracy at 20
o
C.
These slip gauge are available in variety of selected sets both in inch units and metric units. Letter ?E? is
used for inch units and ?M? is used for metric standard number of pieces in a set following the letter E or M. For

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

example EBI refers to a set whose blocks are in metric units and are 83 in number. Each block dimensions is
printed on anyone of its face itself the size of any required standard being made up by combining the
appropriate number of these different size blocks.
If two gauges are slid and twisted together under pressure they will firmly join together. This process,
known as wringing, is very useful because it enables several gauge blocks to be assembled together to

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

produce a required size. In fact the success of precision measurement by slip gauges depends on the
phenomenon of wringing.
First the gauge is oscillated slightly with very light pressure over other gauge so as to detect pressure at
any foreign particles between the surfaces. One gauge is placed perpendicular to other using standard
gauging pressure and rotary motion is applied until the blocks are lined up.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. Build the given dimension by wringing minimum number of slip gauges.
2. Note the given dimension and choose the minimum possible slip gauge available in the set so as to
accommodate the last decimal value. The minimum slip gauge value dimension available i.e., 1.12
mm must be chosen followed by 1.5 mm thick gauge block.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Follow the above steps to build up the slip gauge of any dimension.
Precautions:
1. Slip gauges should be handled very carefully placed gently and should never be dropped.
2. Whenever a slip gauge is being removed from the set, its dimensions are noted and must be
replaced into the set at its appropriate place only.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Correct procedure must be followed in wringing and also in removing the gauge blocks.
4. They should be cleaned well before use and petroleum jelly is applied after use.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

20 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:
Range (mm) Increment (mm) No. of pieces

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total = ____________ Pieces
Total length of slip gauge = ________ mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Given diameter Slip gauges used Obtained dimensions

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Slip gauge set is studied and the given dimensions are building up by wringing minimum number of slip
gauges.
Outcome:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Students will be able to select proper measuring instrument and know requirement of calibration, errors
in measurement etc. They can perform accurate measurements.
Application:
1. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Why C.I. is preferred material for surface plates and tables?
2. Why V ? blocks are generally manufactured in pairs?
3. Why micrometer is required to be tested for accuracy?
4. Define ? Linear Measurement
5. List the linear measuring instrument according to their accuracy.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Define ? Least Count
7. What are the uses of vernier depth gauge?
8. What are the uses of feeler gauges?
9. What are the uses of straight edge?
10. What are the uses of angle plate?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. What are the uses of V ? block?
12. What are the uses of combination square?
13. What precautions should be taken while using slip gauges?
14. What is wringing?
15. Why the slip gauges are termed as ?End standard?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

22 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.03 THREAD PARAMETERS MEASUREMENT USING
TOOL MAKERS MICROSCOPE
Aim:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To study the tool makers microscope and in the process measure the various dimensions of the given
specimen
Apparatus required:
1. Tool makers microscope
2. Specimen

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diagram:

Description:
The tool maker?s microscope is designed for measurement of parts of complex forms; for example,
profile of a tool having external threads. It can also be used for measuring centre to centre distance of the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

holes in any plane as well as the coordinates of the outline of a complex template gauge, using the
coordinates measuring system.
23 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Basically it consists of an optical head which can be adjusted vertically along the ways of supporting

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

column. The optical head can be clamped at any position by a screw. On the work table (which as a circular
base in which there are graduations) the part to be inspected is placed. The table has a compound slide by
means of which the part can be measured. For giving these two movements, there are two micrometer screws
having thimble scales and verniers. At the back of the base light source is arranged that provides horizontal
beam of light, reflected from a mirror by 90 degrees upwards towards the table. The beam of light passes

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

through the transparent glass plate on which flat plates can be checked are placed. Observations are made
through the eyepiece of the optical head.
Procedure:
1. Place the given specimen on the work table and switch on all the three light sources and adjust the
intensity of the light source until a clean image of the cross wires and specimen are seen through

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the eyepiece.
2. Coincide one of the two extreme edges between which the measurement has to be taken with
vertical or horizontal cross wires and depending upon the other image coincide with the same cross
wires by moving the above device. Note the reading.The difference between the two readings gives
the value of the required measurement.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Note the experiment specimen and the readings.
4. Tabulate the different measurements measured from the specimen.
Determination of thread parameters
Magnification =
S.No. Parameters

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Magnified value
(mm)
Actual value
(mm)
1. Outer diameter (O.D)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Internal diameter (I.D)

3. Pitch

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Flank angle


Result:
Included angle of the tool was measured using tool maker?s microscope and various dimensions of the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

given specimen are measured.


24 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the various parameters of thread and select proper measuring
instrument and know requirement of calibration, errors in measurement etc. They can perform accurate
measurements.
Application:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Machine Shop
2. Quality Department


1. What is meant by tool maker?s microscope?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. What is the light used in tool maker?s microscope?
3. What are the various characteristics that you would measure in a screw thread?
4. What are the instruments that are required for measuring screw thread?
5. Define ? Pitch
6. What are the causes of pitch error?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Define ? Flank
8. What are the effects of flank angle error?
9. What is progressive error?
10. What is periodic error?
11. What is drunken error?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. What is erratic error?
13. What are the applications of tool maker?s microscope?
14. What are the limitations of tool maker?s microscope?
15. What are the advantages of tool maker?s microscope?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

25 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.04 CALIBRATION OF DIAL GAUGE USING SLIP GAUGE
Aim:
To find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Apparatus required:
Dial gauge, magnetic stand, slip gauge, and surface plate
Diagram:

Description:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The dial test indicator is a precision measuring instrument which can convert linear motion into angular
motion by means of transmission mechanics of rack and pinion and can be used to measure linear vibration
and errors of shape.
This instrument has the features such as good appearance, compact size, light weight, high precision,
reasonable construction, constant measuring face etc. Rigidity of all parts is excellent. Probe is tipped with

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

carbide balls. A shock proof mechanism is provided for those with larger measuring range.

26 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Types of dial indicator:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Plunger type
2. Lever type
Plunger type dial indicator has a resolution counter and each division in main scale is 0.01 mm. In lever
type dial test indicator is replaced by ball type stylus.
Procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Fix the dial gauge to the stand rigidly and place the stand on the surface plate.
2. Set the plunger of dial gauge to first touch the upper surface of standard slip gauge and set indicator
to zero.
3. Raise then the plunger by pulling the screw above the dial scale.
4. Place the standard slip gauge underneath the plunger.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Release the plunger and let it to touch the standard slip gauge.
6. Note the reading on the dial scale.
Formulae:
The standard error of dial gauge is calculated by the formula

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
S.No.
Slip gauge reading ?x?
(mm)
Dial gauge reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
(x? - x)
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x? (x? - x)
1.
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Thus the accuracy and standard error of dial gauge is found. The standard error of given dial gauge is
__________.

27 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Students will be able to check the variation in tolerance during the inspection process of a
machined part, measure the deflection of a beam or ring under laboratory conditions, as well as many
other situations where a small measurement needs to be registered or indicated

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Milling Machine
2. Analog versus digital/electronic readout

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is comparator?
2. What are the types of comparators?
3. What is the LC for comparators?
4. What are the applications of comparator?
5. What is meant by plunger?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. What are the types of dial indicators?
7. Why a revolution counter is not provided in lever type dial test indicator?
8. Draw a line diagram of the operating mechanism of plunger type dial test indicator.
9. Explain the term magnification of a dial indicator.
10. What are the uses of dial test indicator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. What are the practical applications of dial test indicator?
12. What precautions should be taken while using dial test indicator?
13. What are the desirable qualities of a dial test indicator?
14. What are the advantages of dial test indicator?
15. What are the limitations of dial test indicator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16. Distinguish between comparator and measuring instrument.
17. What are the advantages of electrical comparator?
18. What are the advantages of optical comparator?
19. What are the uses of comparator?
20. What are the advantages and disadvantages of mechanical comparator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

28 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.05 DETERMINATION OF TAPER ANGLE BY SINE BAR
METHOD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Aim:
To measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare
Apparatus required:
Sine bar, slip gauges, dial gauge with stand, micrometer, surface plate, bevel protractor, vernier caliper
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
The sine bar principle uses the ratio of the length of two sides of a right triangle. It may be noted that
devices operating on sine principle are capable of ?self-generation?. The measurement is restricted to 45
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

from
accuracy point of view. Sine bar itself is not a measuring instrument.
Accuracy requirements of sine bar:
1. The axes of the rollers must be parallel to each other and the centre distance L must be precisely
known.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. The sine bar must be flat and parallel to the plane connecting the axes of the rollers.
3. The rollers must be of identical diameters and must have within a close tolerance.


29 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. Fix the dial gaugeon the magnetic stand and place the magnetic stand on the surface plate.Check
the parallelism of the sine bar.
2. Place the given specimen above the sine bar and place the dial gauge on top of the specimen.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Adjustthe dial gauge for zero deflection.
3. Raise the front end of the sine bar with slip gauges until the work surface is parallel to the datum
surface.
4. Check the parallelism using dial gauge.
5. Measure the distance between the centres of the sine bar rollers as ?L? and note the height of the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

slip gauge as ?H?.
6. Note the included angle of the specimen.
Formulae:
Sin ? = H/L where ? = Included angle of the specimen
H = Height of slip gauges

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

L = Distance between the centre of rollers
Tabulation:
S.No. L (mm) H (mm) Taper angle ( ?)
1.
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.

Result:
The taper angle of the given specimen using sine bar was found to be =
Outcome:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for angular measurements
and they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a specific
requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).

Application:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Flat Surface
2. Granite


30 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. List out the various angle measuring instruments.
2. What is the working principles sine bar?
3. How is a sine bar used to measure the angle?
4. What is the application of sine bar?
5. What is the material of sine bar?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Why sine bar is not preferred to use for measuring angles more than 45
0
?
7. What are the features of sine bar?
8. A 100 mm sine bar is to be set up to an angle of 33

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

0
, determine the slip gauges needed from 87
pieces set.
9. What are the various instruments used for measuring angles?
10. What is sine bar?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. How sine bar is used for angle measurement?
12. Explain how sine bar is used to measure angle of small size component.
13. Explain how sine bar is used to measure angle of large size component.
14. What are the various types of sine bar?
15. What are the limitations of sine bar?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16. What is sine center?
17. What is sine table?
18. What are the possible sources of errors in angular measurement by sine bar?
19. What are angle gauges?
20. How angle gauges are used for measuring angles?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

31 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.06 DETERMINATION OF GEAR TOOTH THICKNESS
USING GEAR TOOTH VERNIER
Aim:
To determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen and to draw the graph between the tooth
number and the error in thickness

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Apparatus required:
Gear tooth vernier, specimen, surface plate and vernier caliper
Diagram:

Description:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The tooth thickness, in general, is measured at pitch circle since gear tooth thickness varies from the tip
to the base circle of the tooth. This is possible only when there is an arrangement to fix that position for this
measurement by the gear tooth vernier. It has two vernier scales; one is vertical and other is horizontal.
Procedure:
32 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Measure initially the outside diameter of the given gear specimen by means of a vertical calculation
of vernier caliper. Note the number of teeth. Calculate the module (m) using the formula.

M = OD/ (Z+2) where z ? number of teeth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M - Module
2. Calculate the theoretical tooth thickness (t) by t = z * m* sin (90/z).
3. Set the vernier scale for the height and tighten.
4. Measure the thickness of each tooth using the horizontal scale. This is measured thickness. It can
be positive or negative.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

H = m x [1+ Z/2 (1- Cos 90/Z)]
5. Calculate the error in the tooth thickness i.e,1. measured thickness ? Theoretical thickness
6. Draw the graph between the tooth number and the error in thickness.
Tabulation:
Tooth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Number
Measured Thickness
(mm)
Theoretical Thickness (mm)
Error in tooth thickness

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
1
2
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tooth
Number
MSR
(mm)
VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSR
(mm)
TR
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1
2
3

Graph:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tooth No.
33 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
The theoretical experiment value of gear tooth thickness is obtained and graph is drawn between error
and tooth number in tooth thickness
Theoretical tooth thickness =
Experimental tooth thickness =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Error in tooth thickness =
Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the basic measurement units and able to calibrate various
measuring parameters of the gear.
Application:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Gear Component
2. Mining

1. Calculate the setting of a gear tooth vernier caliper for a straight spur gear having 40 teeth and
module 4.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. What is the importance of chordal depth?
3. Define ? Chordal width
4. How is the actual profile of the gear tooth determined?
5. What are the manufacturing errors in gear element?
6. Define ? Addendum

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Define ? Dedendum
8. Define ? Flank of tooth
9. Define ? Pitch
10. Define ? Pitch Circle
11. Define ? Crest of tooth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. Define ? Root of tooth
13. Define ? Base Circle
14. Define ? Module
15. Define ? Angle of Obliquity

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

34 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.07 MEASUREMENT OF THREAD PARAMETER USING
FLOATING CARRIAGE MICROMETER
Aim:
To measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two wire
method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Apparatus required:
1. Floating carriage micrometer
2. Standard wire
3. Given specimen (screw thread)
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description of floating carriage micrometer:
It consists of three main units. A base casting carries a pair of centres on which threaded work piece is
to be mounted. Another carriage capable of moving towards centre is mounted exactly above. In this carriage
one head with thimble to measure up to 0.002 mm is provided and at the other side of head a fiducial indicator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

is provided to indicate zero position.



35 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. For two wire method, place the standard wire over a thread of the screw at opposite sides.
2. For three wire method, place two standard wires on two successive threads and the third wire
placed opposite sides of the thread.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Measure the diameter over wires (M) using floating carriage micrometer.
4. Repeat this procedure at various positions of the screw and take different readings.
Formulae:
1. For best wire size, d = P / 2 Cos (x/2)
Where, P = Pitch

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d= wire size
x = angle between two threads
= 60
o
for metric thread

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Actual effective diameter, E.A = M ? 3d + 0.866 p
3. Nominal effective diameter, EN = D ? 0.648 p
4. Max. wire size = 1.01 p
5. Min. wire size = 0.505 p
6. Best wire size = 0.577 p

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M = Diameter over wires
P = Pitch of thread
For metric thread:
Actual effective diameter (EA) = M ? 3d + 0.866 p
Where d = actual diameter of wire

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of actual and nominal effective diameter of the screw thread:
Sl.No.
Nominal
Diameter (D)
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diameter over
wire ?M?
(mm)
Actual eff.
Diameter E.A

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
Nominal eff.
Diameter E.N
(mm)
Error in effective

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

diameter
(E.A ? E.N)
(mm)
1.
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.



36 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Thus the actual and nominal effective diameter is measured using three wire method and the error in
effective diameter of screw is determined.
Outcome:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for roundness
measurements and they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a
specific requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).
Application:
1. Wholse

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Maxxis Rubber India

1. Define ? Pitch
2. Define ? Flank Angle
3. What is plug gauge?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. What is meant by micrometer?
5. What is meant by indicator?
6. What is best ? size wire?
7. Calculate the diameter of the best wire for an M 20 x 25 screws.
8. What are the different corrections to be applied in the measurement of effective diameter by the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

method of wire?
9. What is floating carriage micrometer?
10. What are the uses of floating carriage micrometer?
11. What are the methods are used for measuring effective diameter?
12. Define ? Effective Diameter

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. Define ? Major Diameter
14. Define ? Minor Diameter
15. What are the effects of flank error?
16. Define ? Rake Angle
17. Define ? Pitch Cylinder

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

18. What are the effects of pitch error?
19. Define ? Pitch Diameter
20. What is meant by angle of thread?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

37 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.08 MEASUREMENT OF VARIOUS DIMENSIONS USING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COORDINATE MEASURING MACHINE
Aim:
1. To study the construction and operation of coordinate measuring machine
2. To measure the specified dimensions of the given component
Instruments used:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Coordinate measuring machine, vernier calipers
Diagram:

Theory:
A coordinate measuring machine (CMM) is a 3D device for measuring the physical and geometrical

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

characteristics of an object. This machine may be manually controlled by an operator or it may be computer
controlled. Measurements are defined by a probe attached to the three moving axis of this machine X, Y and Z
axes. A coordinate measuring machine (CMM) is also a device used in manufacturing and assembly
processes to test a part or assembly against the design intent. By precisely recording the X, Y and Z
coordinates of the target, points are generated which can be analyzed via regression algorithms for the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

construction of features. These points are collected by using a probe that is positioned manually by an
38 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

operator or automatically via direct computer control (DCC). DCC CMMs can be programmed to repeatedly
measure identical parts, thus a CMM is a specialized form of industrial robot.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Parts:
Coordinate measuring machine include three main components:
1. The main structures which include three axes of motion.
2. Probing system
3. Data collection and reduction system ? typically includes a machine controller, desktop computer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

and application software
Machine description:
1. In modern machines, the gantry type superstructure has two legs and is often called a bridge. This
moves freely along the granite table with one leg following a guide rail attached to one side of the
granite table. The opposite leg simply rests on the granite table following the vertical surface

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

contour.
2. Air bearings are fixed for ensuring friction free travel. Compressed air is forced through a series of
very small holes in a flat bearing surface to provide a smooth but controlled air cushion on which the
CMM can move in a frictionless manner.
3. The movement of the bridge along the granite table forms one axis of the XY plane. The bridge of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the gantry contains a carriage which traverses between the inside and outside legs and forms the
other X or Y horizontal axis.
4. The third axis of movement (Z axis) is provided by the addition of a vertical quill or spindle which
moves up and down through the center of the carriage. The touch probe forms the sensing device
on the end of the quill.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. The movement of the X, Y and Z axes fully describes the measuring envelope. Some touch probes
are themselves powered rotary devices with the probe tip able to swivel vertically through 90
degrees and through a full 360 degrees rotation.
Uses:
They are generally used for:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Dimensional measurement
2. Profile measurement
3. Angularity or orientation measurement
4. Depth mapping
5. Digitizing mapping

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Shaft measurement
39 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

The machines are available in a wide range of sizes and designs with a variety of different probe
technologies. They can be operated manually or automatically through direct computer control (DCC). They

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

are offered in various configurations such as bench top, free ? standing, handheld and portable.
Procedure:
1. Take at least 8 points on sphere ball attached to the granite table.
2. Fix the object whose dimension needs to be measured using the jigs and fixtures.
3. Using joystick, move the probe whose tip is made of ruby slowly and carefully to the surface whose

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measurements have to be taken.
4. Touch the probe at two places for measurement of a line (starting and ending point).
5. Touch the probe at two places for measurement of a circular profile and for a cylinder touch the
probe at 8 points.
6. Measure the same profiles again with vernier calipers (length of line, circle diameter, cylinder

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

diameter) to compare the two readings.
Comments:
1. The machine should be calibrated every time when it is being used.
2. While measuring the profiles, the probe should be moved very slowly as it may damage the ruby if
hit with a high force.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Care should be taken while performing experiment so that the granite table of the machines should
get any scratches.
4. ?Retract distance? should be fixed according to the space available in the near vicinity of the profile
measurement area.
Observation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No. Feature
CMM reading
(mm)
Vernier reading
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Form error
(mm)
Difference in two
readings (mm)
1 Circle -1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2 Circle -2
3 Circle -3
4 Line
5 Arc
6

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Cone - Diameter
Cone ? Vertex angle
Cone ? Height
7
Cylinder ? Diameter

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Cylinder ? Height


40 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Thus the different profile of given object are measured using coordinate measuring machine
Outcome:
Students will be able to measures the geometry of physical objects by sensing discrete points on the
surface of the object with a probe and they will be able to know the Various types of probes are used in CMMs,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

including mechanical, optical, laser, and white light.
Application:
1. Surface Measuring Equipment
2. Photo transistor

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What are the types of measuring machine?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. What is CMM?
3. What are the types of CMM?
4. What are the advantages of CMM?
5. What are the limitations of CMM?
6. What are the possible sources of error in CMM?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. What is the use of universal measuring machine?
8. What are the applications of CMM?
9. What is the working principle of three axis measuring machine?
10. What is image shearing microscope?
11. What is the use of electronic inspection and measuring machine?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. What are the types of electronic inspection and measuring machine?
13. What is CMM probe?
14. What are the three main probes are available?
15. What are the types of stylus?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

41 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.09 MEASUREMENT OF SURFACE ROUGHNESS UING
TALYSURF INSTRUMENT
Aim:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To measure the surface roughness using Talysurf instrument
Apparatus required:
Talysurf instrument, work piece, surface plate
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Theory:
On any finished surface, imperfections are bound to be there and these take the form of a succession of
hills and valleys which vary both in height and in spacing and result in a kind of texture which in appearance or
feel is often characteristic of the machining process and accompanying defects. The several kinds of
departures are there on the surface and these are due to various causes.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

42 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Methods of measuring surface roughness:
1. Surface inspection of comparison methods

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Direct instrument measurements
In comparative methods the surface texture is assessed by observation of the surface. But these
methods are not reliable as they can be misleading, if comparison is not made with surfaces produced by
same techniques. The various methods available under comparison method are: (i) Touch Inspection
(ii)Scratch Inspection (iii) Microscopic Inspection (iv) Visual Inspection (v) Surface Photographs (vi) Reflected

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Light Intensity Direct Instrument Measurements enable to determine a numerical value of the surface finish of
any surface. Nearly all instruments used are stylus probe type of instruments. This operates on electrical
principle.
Procedure:
1. Place the finished component on the surface plate.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Fix the Talysurf tester to the vernier height gauge using adopter at a convenient height.
3. Make sure that the stylus probe touches the work piece.
4. Fix the sampling length in the tester.
5. Press the power button so that the probe moves on the surface to and fro.
6. Take the readings of the surface roughness directly from the instrument.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Repeat the above process for the remaining specimen and tabulate the readings.
Precautions:
1. The surface to be tested should be cleaned properly.
2. The tester should be fixed to the height gauge properly so that the movement of the probe is exactly
parallel to the surface of work.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Make sure that the probe gently touches the work.
Tabulation:
S.No
Measurement roughness value,
?m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sample direction Ra, Rz
Average Ra Average Rz Grade
1.
2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

43 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Thus the surface roughness is checked for different specimens by Talysurf.
Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for roughness

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measurements they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a specific
requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).
Application:
1. Machine Shop
2. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Actual Size?
2. What is meant by normal surface?
3. What is meant by profilo-graph?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. What is Tomlinson surface meter?
5. What is meant by profile?
6. What are the factors affecting surface roughness?
7. Why the surface texture is control?
8. Define ? Lay

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. Define ? Surface Texture
10. Define ? Flaws
11. What is sampling length?
12. What are the methods used for evaluating surface finish?
13. What is form factor?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. What are the methods used for measuring surface finish?
15. How will you differentiate smooth surface from flat surface?
16. How surface finish is designated on drawings?
17. Define ? Primary Texture
18. Define ? Secondary Texture

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

19. What are the types of instrument used for measuring surface texture?
20. Define ? waviness

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

44 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.10 MEASUREMENT OF BORE USING DIAL BORE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

INDICATOR AND TELESCOPIC GAUGE
Aim:
To determine the diameter of bore by using telescopic gauge and checking the same by using dial bore
indicator
Apparatus required:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Work piece, vernier caliper, telescopic gauge and dial gauge indicator set with anvil.
Diagram:

45 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
Bore gauge measurement:
1. Select the extension rod and washer according to the bore diameter to be measured
2. Fix the suitable extension rod and washer with the bore gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Fix the dial gauge to the bore gauge in its position
4. Insert the bore gauge inside the bore to be measured and hold the gauge in parallel o the axis of the
bore. Ensure that the tips on either side of the bore gauge are in touch with inner wall of the bore
5. Note down the reading in the dial gauge and withdraw the bore gauge from the bore
6. Hold the measuring tips of bore gauge between the spindle and anvil of a micrometer and compress

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the tips by rotating the thimble till the reading reaches the same one as noted earlier
7. Observe and record the micrometer reading as the bore diameter to be measured
Telescopic gauge measurement:
1. Select the telescopic gauge according to the bore diameter to be measured
2. Press the telescopic spindles in the telescopic gauge lock them by locking screw

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Insert the telescopic gauge inside thee bore to be measured. Release the locking screw to expand
the telescopic spindles outwards inside the bore
4. Hold the telescopic gauge in parallel to the axis of bore axis and ensure that the tips of telescopic
spindles are in touch with the inner wall of the bore
5. Lock the telescopic spindles and withdraw it from the bore

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

46 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

6. Measure the expanded length of the telescopic spindles using micrometer record them as the inner
diameter of the bore
Practical observations:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rough measurement of bore using Telescopic gauge:
Least count of micrometer = 0.01 mm
Sl.No.
Micrometer reading
Total reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(MSR + TSC * LC) ( mm) Main scale reading (MSR)
(mm)
Thimble scale
coincidence
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.

Average reading = ________ mm
Accurate measuring using Bore gauge
Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Micrometer
reading
(d) (mm)
Bore gauge
reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(R1) (mm)
Work piece reading
(R2) (mm)
Final reading
d+ (R1 ? R2) * 0.01

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
1.
2.

Accurate internal diameter of hole using bore gauge = ______ mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result
1. Internal diameter of the work piece by using telescopic gauge is ________mm
2. Diameter obtained by using dial gauge indicator is __________________mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Students will be able to measure a bore's size, by transferring the internal dimension to a remote
measuring tool (Telescopic gauge).
Application:
1. Automobile

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Quality Department


47 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by bore diameter?
2. What is gauge?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. What is meant by measurement?
4. What is telescope gauge?
5. What is bore gauge?
6. What is contact point?
7. What is the principle of bore gauge?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. What are the applications of telescopic gauge?
9. What types of materials are used in telescopic gauge?
10. What are the types of instrument used to measure bore diameter?
11. What are the applications of bore gauge?
12. What are the advantages of bore gauge over telescopic gauge?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. What are the limitations of bore gauge?
14. What is the working principle of telescopic gauge?
15. What are the disadvantages of telescopic gauge?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

48 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.11 MEASUREMENT OF FORCE USING LOAD CELL
Aim:
To study the characteristic between applied load and the output voltage
Apparatus required:
1. Trainer kit

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Multimeter
3. Load cell sensor with setup
4. Weights (5 kg)
5. Power chord
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Formulae:
Error (%) = {Applied Voltage ? (Displayed Load)/ Applied Load)} x 100
Block diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Applied DC
Load O/P

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DC Excitation source Transducer
Transducer
Instrumentation
Amplifier
Gain Amplifier DVM

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

49 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Interfacing and calibration procedure:
1. Interface the load cell 9 pin ?D? type male connector to 9 pin D type female connector, fixed on the
module.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. First unload the beam and nullify the display by using zero adjustment POT
3. Apply the maximum load of 5 kg to the beam and adjust the display to 5 kg by using gain
adjustment POT.
4. After the initial adjustment, the unit should not be disturbed until the completion of the experiment.
Safety precaution:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. During offset adjustment, the beam should not be loaded.
2. The beam should not be disturbed during the experiment.
3. Remove the load from the beam, after completion of the experiment; otherwise wire wound on the
strain gauge will get damaged.
4. If you are getting an unsatisfactory reading, then vary the zero and span POT minimum to

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

maximum.
5. Maximum load should not exceed 5 kg.
6. Once calibrated, the setting should not be distributed till the end of the experiment.
Procedure:
1. Install the load cell module and interface the 9 pin D connector with kit.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Connect the multimeter in volt mode across T5 and GND for the output voltage measurement.
3. Switch on the module.
4. Initially, unload the beam and nullify the display by using zero adjustment POT (zero calibration).
5. Apply the maximum load of 5 kg to the beam and adjust the display to 5 kg by using gain
adjustment POT (gain calibration).

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Now apply the load to the beam, a force will develop on the beam and measure the output voltage
(V) across T5 and GND.
7. Gradually increase the load and note down the output voltage (V) and applied load.
8. Tabulate the values of displayed load and applied voltage.
9. Plot a graph between applied load and output voltage (V).

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Note: When 1 kg load is applied to the beam, the displayed voltage is 1 kg.


50 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Applied load
(kg)
Output voltage
(V)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Displayed load
(kg)
% Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Graph:
1. Applied load (kg) Vs Output Voltage (V)
2. Actual load (kg) Vs % Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Thus the characteristic between applied load and the output voltage was studied.
Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the Sensor device (electro-mechanical) which help us to measure
a physical parameter (such as temperature, pressure, force, acceleration etc.) by providing analog input to get

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

digital output.
Application:
1. Machine Shop
2. Automobile

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by force?
2. Define ? Wheat stone bridge circuit
3. Define ? Load
4. What is meant by deflector?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. What is meant by force indicator?
6. Define ? Instrumentation
7. How instrumentations are classified?
8. Define ? Transducer
9. What is electrical transducer?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. How transducers are classified?



Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

51 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.12 MEASUREMENT OF TORQUE USING STRAIN
GAUGE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Aim:
To study the characteristics of the developing torque and the signal conditioned sensor output voltage
Apparatus required:
1. Trainer kit
2. Digital Multimeter (V)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Torque sensor setup
4. Weights (100 gram x 10 Nos.)
5. Power chord
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Interfacing and calibration procedure:
1. Interface the torque sensor 9 pin. ?D? type male connector to ?9? pin ?D? type female connector, fixed
on the module.
2. First, unload the beam and nullify the display by using zero adjustment POT.
3. Apply the maximum load of 1 kg to the beam and adjust the display to 9.81 Nm by using adjustment

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

POT.
4. After this initial calibration, the unit should not be disturbed until the completion of the experiment.
52 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Safety precaution:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. During offset adjustment, the beam should not be loaded.
2. The beam should not be disturbed during the experiment.
3. Remove the beam from the shaft, after completion of the experiment otherwise wire wound on the
strain gauge will get damaged.
4. If the displayed torque reading are in negative, change the beam connections in opposite to

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

previously connected direction.
5. If you are getting an unsatisfactory reading, then vary the zero and span POT minimum to
maximum.
6. Maximum load should not exceed 1 kg.
7. Once calibrated, the setting should not be disturbed till the end of this experiment.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. Install the torque sensor setup and interface with kit.
2. Switch ?ON? the module.
3. Connect the Multimeter in millivolts mode T2 and T3 for bridge output voltage measurement POT.
4. First, unload the beam and nullify the bridge output voltage by using zero adjustment POT.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. By applying load to the beam, torque will develop on the shaft and measure the bridge output
voltage (mV) across T2 and T3
6. Gradually increase the force by applying load and note down the bridge output voltage (mV).
7. Tabulate the readings and plot a graph between developed torque versus bridge output voltage
(mV).

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Formulae:
Error (%) = {(Actual Torque ? Theoretical Torque)/ Theoretical Torque} x 100
Theoretical Torque = mass (m) x acceleration due to gravity (g) x radial distance
= 1 kg x 9.81 m/s
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x 1 m
= 9.81 Nm
Tabulation:
Sl.No. Theoretical Torque
(Nm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Bridge output voltage
(mV)


Model graph:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The graph between developed torque and bridge output voltage is drawn
53 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Developed torque (Nm) Vs Output Voltage (V)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sample reading:
Developed Torque (Nm) = 9.81 Nm
Output Voltage (V) = 5 mV
Result:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thus the characteristics of the torque developed which is due to force applied to beam and the bridge
output voltage were studied and graph is plotted.
Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the Sensor device (electro-mechanical) which helps us to
measure the strain by providing analog input to digital output.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Machine Shop
2. Turbine

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice
1 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

V SEMESTER - R 2013

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No. : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LABORATORY MANUAL
2 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

DHANALAKSHMI

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.


1. To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. To contribute to the promotion of Academic Excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels
3. To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING


Rendering the services to the global needs of engineering industries by educating students to become
professionally sound mechanical engineers of excellent caliber

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To produce mechanical engineering technocrats with a perfect knowledge intellectual and hands on
experience and to inculcate the spirit of moral values and ethics to serve the society

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MISSION
MISSION
VISION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION

4 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Fundamentals
To impart students with fundamental knowledge in mathematics and basic sciences that will mould
them to be successful professionals
2. Core competence
To provide students with sound knowledge in engineering and experimental skills to identify

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

complex software problems in industry and to develop a practical solution for them
3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theory and practice which
enable them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and organization and to design
products requiring interdisciplinary skills

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Professional skills
To bestow students with adequate training and provide opportunities to work as team that will build
up their communication skills, individual, leadership and supportive qualities and to enable them to
adapt and to work in ever changing technologies
5. Life-long learning

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To develop the ability of students to establish themselves as professionals in mechanical
engineering and to create awareness about the need for lifelong learning and pursuing advanced
degrees

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)
On completion of the B.E. (Mechanical) degree, the graduate will be able
a) To apply the basic knowledge of mathematics, science and engineering
b) To design and conduct experiments as well as to analyze and interpret data and apply the same in

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the career or entrepreneurship
c) To design and develop innovative and creative software applications
d) To understand a complex real world problem and develop an efficient practical solution
e) To create, select and apply appropriate techniques, resources, modern engineering and IT tools
f) To understand the role as a professional and give the best to the society

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

g) To develop a system that will meet expected needs within realistic constraints such as economical
environmental, social, political, ethical, safety and sustainability
h) To communicate effectively and make others understand exactly what they are trying to tell in both
verbal and written forms
i) To work in a team as a team member or a leader and make unique contributions and work with

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

coordination
j) To engage in lifelong learning and exhibit their technical skills
k) To develop and manage projects in multidisciplinary environments

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To familiar with different measurement equipment?s and use of this industry for quality inspection
List of Experiments

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Tool Maker?s Microscope
2. Comparator
3. Sine Bar
4. Gear Tooth Vernier Caliper
5. Floating gauge Micrometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Coordinate Measuring Machine
7. Surface Finish Measuring Equipment
8. Vernier Height Gauge
9. Bore diameter measurement using telescope gauge
10. Bore diameter measurement using micrometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. Force Measurement
12. Torque Measurement
13. Temperature measurement
14. Autocollimator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Ability to handle different measurement tools and perform measurements in quality impulsion
2. Learnt the usage of precision measuring instruments and practiced to take measurements
3. Learnt and practiced to build the required dimensions using slip gauge
4. Able to measure the various dimensions of the given specimen using the tool maker?s microscope

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Able to find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge
6. Able to measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare
7. Learnt to determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen using Gear tooth vernier
8. Able to measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two
wire method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. Learnt to study the construction and operation of coordinate measuring machine
10. Learnt to determine the diameter of bore by using telescopic gauge and dial bore indicator
11. Able to measure the surface roughness using Talysurf instrument
12. Studied the characteristic between applied load and the output volt
13. Learnt the characteristics of developing torque and respective sensor output voltage

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. Studied the characteristics of thermocouple without compensation
15. Able to check the straightness & flatness of the given component by using Autocollimator
16. Learnt to measure the displacement using LVDT and to calibrate it with the millimeter scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OBJECTIVES

COURSE OUTCOMES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CONTENTS
Sl. No. Name of the Experiments Page No.
CYCLE ? 1 EXPERIMENTS
1
Precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab ? A Study

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7
2
To build up the slip gauge for given dimension ? A Study
16
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thread parameters measurement using Tool Makers Microscope
20
4
Calibration of dial gauge
23

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5
Determination of taper angle by sine bar method
26
6
Determination of gear tooth thickness using gear tooth vernier

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

29
7
Measurement of thread parameters using floating carriage micrometer
32
CYCLE ? 2 EXPERIMENTS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8
Measurement of various dimensions using Coordinate Measuring Machine
35
9
Measurement of surface roughness

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

39
10
Measurement of bores using dial bore indicator and telescopic gauge
42
11

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Force measurement using load cell
46
12
Torque measurement using strain gauge
49

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13
Temperature measurement using thermocouple
53
14
Measurement of alignment using autocollimator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

56
ADDITIONAL EXPERIMENT BEYOND THE SYLLABUS
15
Thread parameters measurement using profile projector
60

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16
Displacement measurement ? linear variable differential transducer (LVDT)
62
PROJECT WORK
65

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.01 PRECISION MEASURING INSTRUMENT YSED IN

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

METROLOGY LAB ? A STUDY
Aim:
To study the following instruments and their usage for measuring dimensions of given specimen
1. Vernier caliper
2. Micrometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Vernier height gauge
4. Depth micrometer
5. Universal bevel protractor
Apparatus required:
Surface plate, specimen and above instruments

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier caliper:
The principle of vernier caliper is to use the minor difference between the sizes two scales or divisions
for measurement. The difference between them can be utilized to enhance the accuracy of measurement. The
vernier caliper essentially consists of two steel rules, sliding along each other.
Parts:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Different parts of the vernier caliper are
1. Beam ? It has main scale.
2. Fixed jaw
3. Sliding or Moving jaw ? It has vernier scale and sliding jaw locking screw.
4. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw knife

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

edges for internal measurement.
5. Stem or depth bar for depth measurement
Least count:
Least count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

50 VSD = 49 mm
1 VSD = 0.98 mm
Least count = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm

10 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ID

DEPTH

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OD
Measurement:
Given Vernier caliper can be used for external, internal depth, slot and step measurement.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement principle:
When both jaws contact each other scale shows the zero reading. The finer adjustment of movable jaw
can be done by the fine adjustment screw. First the whole movable jaw assembly is adjusted so that the two
measuring tips just touch the part to be measured. Then the fine adjustment clamp locking screw is tightened.
Final adjustment depending upon the sense of correct feel is made by the adjusting screw. After final

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

adjustment has been made sliding jaw locking screw is also tightened and the reading is noted.
All the parts of the Vernier caliper are made of good quality steel and measuring faces are hardened.
Types of vernier:
Vernier caliper, electronic vernier caliper, vernier depth caliper

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Main scale
reading (MSR)
(mm)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier scale
reading (VSR) (mm)
Total reading (MSR
+ VSR)
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OD


ID

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Depth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier height gauge:
Vernier height gauge is a sort of vernier caliper equipped with a special instrument suitable for height
measurement. It is always kept on the surface plate and the use of the surfaces plates as datum surfaces is
very essential.
Least count:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least Count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm
1 VSD = 0.98 mm
Least Count (LC) = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Parts:
1. Base
2. Beam ? It has main scale.
3. Slider ? It has a vernier scale and slider locking screw.
4. Scriber

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw.


12 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Material:
All the parts of vernier are made of good quality steel and the measuring faces hardened.
Types of vernier gauge:
1. Analog vernier height gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Digital vernier height gauge
3. Electronic vernier height gauge
Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Main scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(MSR)(mm)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale reading
(VSR)(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total reading (MSR +
VSR)(mm)
1.
2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Outside micrometer:
The micrometer essentially consists of an accurate screw having about 10 or 20 threads per cm. The

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

end of the screw forms one measuring tip and other measuring tip is constituted by a stationary anvil in the
base of the frame. The screw is threaded for certain length and is plain afterwards. The plain portion is called
spindle and its end is the measuring surface. The spindle is advanced or retracted by turning a thimble
connected to a spindle. The spindle is a slide fit over the barrel and barrel is the fixed part attached with the
frame. The barrel & thimble are graduated. The pitch of the screw threads is 0.5 mm.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count:
Least Count (LC) = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale
= 0.5 / 50 = 0.01 mm
Parts:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Frame
2. Anvil
3. Spindle
4. Spindle lock
5. Barrel or outside sleeve

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions
7. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.
The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.
14 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement:
It can be used for any external measurement.
Types of micrometer:
1. Outside micrometer, 2. Inside micrometer, 3.Depth micrometer, 4. Stick micrometer, 5. Screw thread
micrometer, 6. V ? anvil micrometer, 7. Blade type micrometer, 8. Dial micrometer, 9. Bench micrometer, 10.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tape screw operated internal micrometer, 11. Groove micrometer, 12. Digital micrometer, 13.Differential screw
micrometer, 14.Adjustable range outside micrometer.
Ratchet stop mechanism:
The object of the ratchet stop is to ensure that same level of torque is applied on the spindle while
measuring and the sense of the feel of operator is eliminated and consistent readings are obtained. By

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

providing this arrangement, the ratchet stop is made slip off when the torque applied to rotate the spindle
exceeds the set torque. Thus this provision ensures the application of same amount of torque during the
measurement.
Tabulation:
Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) (mm)
Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)
Head scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(HSR x LC) (mm)
Total Reading (PSR
+ HSR) (mm)
1.
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Depth micrometer:
Depth micrometer is a sort of micrometer which is mainly used for measuring depth of holes, so it is
named as depth micrometer.
Parts:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Shoulder
2. Spindle
3. Spindle lock
4. Barrel or outside sleeve ? It has pitch scale.
5. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.
The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.
15 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count:
Least Count = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale = 0.50/50
= 0.01 mm
Measurements:
It can be used for measuring the depth of holes, slots and recessed areas. The pitch of the screw thread

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

is 0.5 mm. The least count is 0.01 mm. Shoulder acts as a reference surface and is held firmly and
perpendicular to the centre line of the hole. For large range of measurement extension rods are used. In the
barrel the scale is calibrated. The accuracy again depends upon the sense of touch.
Procedure:
First, calculate the least count of the instrument. Check the zero error. Measure the specimen note

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

down the main scale reading or the head scale reading. Note down the vernier or head scale coincidence with
main or pitch scale divisions.
Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Pitch Scale Reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(PSR) (mm)
Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)
Head scale reading
(HSR x LC) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total Reading (PSR
+ HSR) (mm)

1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.


16 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Universal bevel protractor:

Description:
Bevel protractor is an instrument for measuring the angle between the two faces of a specimen. It

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

consists of a base plate on which a circular scale is engraved. It is graduated in degrees. An adjustment plate
is attached to a circular plate containing the vernier scale. The adjustable blade can be locked in any position.
The circular plate has 360 division divided into four parts of 90 degrees each. The adjustable parts have 24
divisions of to the right and left sides of zero reading. These scales are used according to the position of the
specimen with respect to movable scale.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. Place the specimen whose taper is to be measured between the adjustable plate and movable
blade with one of its face parallel to the base.
2. Lock the adjustable plate in position and note down the main scale reading depending upon the
direction of rotation of adjustable plate in clockwise or anticlockwise.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Note the VSC to the right of zero.
4. Multiply the VSC with the least count and add to MSR to obtain the actual reading.
Least count:
Least Count = 2 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
24 VSD = 46
o
=> 1 VSD = 23/12
LC = 2 ? 23/12 = 1/12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
= 5? (five minutes)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Main scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(MSR) (deg)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale reading
(VSR) (deg)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total reading (MSR +
VSR)
(deg)
1.
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The angle of scriber of the vernier height gauge =
Result:
Thus the various precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab are studied and the specimen
dimensions are recorded.
Outcome:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for linear, angular,
roundness and roughness measurements they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring
instrument according to a specific requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).
Application:
1. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Metrology
2. Define ? Inspection
3. What are the needs of inspection in industries?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. What are the various methods involving the measurement?
5. Define ? Precision
6. Define ? Accuracy
7. Define ? Calibration
8. Define ? Repeatability

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. Define ? Magnification
10. Define ? Error
11. Define ? Systematic Error
12. Define ? Random Error
13. Define ? Parallax Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. Define ? Environmental Error
15. Define ? Cosine Error
Viva-voce

18 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.02 BUILD UP THE SLIP GAUGE FOR GIVEN DIMENSION
? A STUDY
Aim:
To build up the slip gauge for given dimension

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Apparatus required:
1. Slip gauges set
2. Surface plate
3. Soft cloth
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
Slip gauge are universally accepted standard of length in industry. They are the working standard for
linear dimension. These were invented by a Swedish Engineer, C.E. Johansson. They are used
1. For direct precise measurement where the accuracy of the workpiece demand it.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. For use with high- magnification comparators to establish the size of the gauge blocks in general
use.
3. Gauge blocks are also used for many other purposes such as checking the accuracy of measuring
instrument or setting up a comparator to a specific dimension, enabling a batch of component to be
quickly and accurately checked or indeed in any situation where there is need to refer to standard of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

known length these blocks are rectangular.
19 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Most gauge blocks are produced from high grade steel, hardened and established by a heat treatment
process to give a high degree of dimensional stability. Gauge blocks are also manufactured from tungsten

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

carbide which is an extremely hard and wear resistant material. The measuring faces have a lapped finish.
The faces are perfectly flat and parallel to one another with a high degree of accuracy. Each block has an
extremely high dimensional accuracy at 20
o
C.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

These slip gauge are available in variety of selected sets both in inch units and metric units. Letter ?E? is
used for inch units and ?M? is used for metric standard number of pieces in a set following the letter E or M. For
example EBI refers to a set whose blocks are in metric units and are 83 in number. Each block dimensions is
printed on anyone of its face itself the size of any required standard being made up by combining the
appropriate number of these different size blocks.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

If two gauges are slid and twisted together under pressure they will firmly join together. This process,
known as wringing, is very useful because it enables several gauge blocks to be assembled together to
produce a required size. In fact the success of precision measurement by slip gauges depends on the
phenomenon of wringing.
First the gauge is oscillated slightly with very light pressure over other gauge so as to detect pressure at

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

any foreign particles between the surfaces. One gauge is placed perpendicular to other using standard
gauging pressure and rotary motion is applied until the blocks are lined up.
Procedure:
1. Build the given dimension by wringing minimum number of slip gauges.
2. Note the given dimension and choose the minimum possible slip gauge available in the set so as to

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

accommodate the last decimal value. The minimum slip gauge value dimension available i.e., 1.12
mm must be chosen followed by 1.5 mm thick gauge block.
3. Follow the above steps to build up the slip gauge of any dimension.
Precautions:
1. Slip gauges should be handled very carefully placed gently and should never be dropped.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Whenever a slip gauge is being removed from the set, its dimensions are noted and must be
replaced into the set at its appropriate place only.
3. Correct procedure must be followed in wringing and also in removing the gauge blocks.
4. They should be cleaned well before use and petroleum jelly is applied after use.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

20 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Range (mm) Increment (mm) No. of pieces

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total = ____________ Pieces
Total length of slip gauge = ________ mm
Given diameter Slip gauges used Obtained dimensions

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Slip gauge set is studied and the given dimensions are building up by wringing minimum number of slip

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

gauges.
Outcome:
Students will be able to select proper measuring instrument and know requirement of calibration, errors
in measurement etc. They can perform accurate measurements.
Application:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Why C.I. is preferred material for surface plates and tables?
2. Why V ? blocks are generally manufactured in pairs?
3. Why micrometer is required to be tested for accuracy?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Define ? Linear Measurement
5. List the linear measuring instrument according to their accuracy.
6. Define ? Least Count
7. What are the uses of vernier depth gauge?
8. What are the uses of feeler gauges?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. What are the uses of straight edge?
10. What are the uses of angle plate?
11. What are the uses of V ? block?
12. What are the uses of combination square?
13. What precautions should be taken while using slip gauges?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. What is wringing?
15. Why the slip gauges are termed as ?End standard?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

22 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


Expt.No.03 THREAD PARAMETERS MEASUREMENT USING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TOOL MAKERS MICROSCOPE
Aim:
To study the tool makers microscope and in the process measure the various dimensions of the given
specimen
Apparatus required:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Tool makers microscope
2. Specimen
Diagram:

Description:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The tool maker?s microscope is designed for measurement of parts of complex forms; for example,
profile of a tool having external threads. It can also be used for measuring centre to centre distance of the
holes in any plane as well as the coordinates of the outline of a complex template gauge, using the
coordinates measuring system.
23 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Basically it consists of an optical head which can be adjusted vertically along the ways of supporting
column. The optical head can be clamped at any position by a screw. On the work table (which as a circular
base in which there are graduations) the part to be inspected is placed. The table has a compound slide by
means of which the part can be measured. For giving these two movements, there are two micrometer screws

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

having thimble scales and verniers. At the back of the base light source is arranged that provides horizontal
beam of light, reflected from a mirror by 90 degrees upwards towards the table. The beam of light passes
through the transparent glass plate on which flat plates can be checked are placed. Observations are made
through the eyepiece of the optical head.
Procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Place the given specimen on the work table and switch on all the three light sources and adjust the
intensity of the light source until a clean image of the cross wires and specimen are seen through
the eyepiece.
2. Coincide one of the two extreme edges between which the measurement has to be taken with
vertical or horizontal cross wires and depending upon the other image coincide with the same cross

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

wires by moving the above device. Note the reading.The difference between the two readings gives
the value of the required measurement.
3. Note the experiment specimen and the readings.
4. Tabulate the different measurements measured from the specimen.
Determination of thread parameters

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Magnification =
S.No. Parameters
Magnified value
(mm)
Actual value

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
1. Outer diameter (O.D)

2. Internal diameter (I.D)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Pitch

4. Flank angle

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Included angle of the tool was measured using tool maker?s microscope and various dimensions of the
given specimen are measured.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

24 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the various parameters of thread and select proper measuring
instrument and know requirement of calibration, errors in measurement etc. They can perform accurate

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measurements.
Application:
1. Machine Shop
2. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by tool maker?s microscope?
2. What is the light used in tool maker?s microscope?
3. What are the various characteristics that you would measure in a screw thread?
4. What are the instruments that are required for measuring screw thread?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Define ? Pitch
6. What are the causes of pitch error?
7. Define ? Flank
8. What are the effects of flank angle error?
9. What is progressive error?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. What is periodic error?
11. What is drunken error?
12. What is erratic error?
13. What are the applications of tool maker?s microscope?
14. What are the limitations of tool maker?s microscope?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15. What are the advantages of tool maker?s microscope?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

25 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.04 CALIBRATION OF DIAL GAUGE USING SLIP GAUGE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Aim:
To find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge
Apparatus required:
Dial gauge, magnetic stand, slip gauge, and surface plate
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
The dial test indicator is a precision measuring instrument which can convert linear motion into angular
motion by means of transmission mechanics of rack and pinion and can be used to measure linear vibration
and errors of shape.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

This instrument has the features such as good appearance, compact size, light weight, high precision,
reasonable construction, constant measuring face etc. Rigidity of all parts is excellent. Probe is tipped with
carbide balls. A shock proof mechanism is provided for those with larger measuring range.

26 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Types of dial indicator:
1. Plunger type
2. Lever type
Plunger type dial indicator has a resolution counter and each division in main scale is 0.01 mm. In lever

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

type dial test indicator is replaced by ball type stylus.
Procedure:
1. Fix the dial gauge to the stand rigidly and place the stand on the surface plate.
2. Set the plunger of dial gauge to first touch the upper surface of standard slip gauge and set indicator
to zero.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Raise then the plunger by pulling the screw above the dial scale.
4. Place the standard slip gauge underneath the plunger.
5. Release the plunger and let it to touch the standard slip gauge.
6. Note the reading on the dial scale.
Formulae:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The standard error of dial gauge is calculated by the formula

Tabulation:
S.No.
Slip gauge reading ?x?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
Dial gauge reading
(mm)
(x? - x)
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x? (x? - x)
1.
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Thus the accuracy and standard error of dial gauge is found. The standard error of given dial gauge is
__________.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

27 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Outcome:
Students will be able to check the variation in tolerance during the inspection process of a

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

machined part, measure the deflection of a beam or ring under laboratory conditions, as well as many
other situations where a small measurement needs to be registered or indicated
Application:
1. Milling Machine
2. Analog versus digital/electronic readout

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is comparator?
2. What are the types of comparators?
3. What is the LC for comparators?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. What are the applications of comparator?
5. What is meant by plunger?
6. What are the types of dial indicators?
7. Why a revolution counter is not provided in lever type dial test indicator?
8. Draw a line diagram of the operating mechanism of plunger type dial test indicator.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. Explain the term magnification of a dial indicator.
10. What are the uses of dial test indicator?
11. What are the practical applications of dial test indicator?
12. What precautions should be taken while using dial test indicator?
13. What are the desirable qualities of a dial test indicator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. What are the advantages of dial test indicator?
15. What are the limitations of dial test indicator?
16. Distinguish between comparator and measuring instrument.
17. What are the advantages of electrical comparator?
18. What are the advantages of optical comparator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

19. What are the uses of comparator?
20. What are the advantages and disadvantages of mechanical comparator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

28 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.05 DETERMINATION OF TAPER ANGLE BY SINE BAR
METHOD
Aim:
To measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare
Apparatus required:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sine bar, slip gauges, dial gauge with stand, micrometer, surface plate, bevel protractor, vernier caliper
Diagram:

Description:
The sine bar principle uses the ratio of the length of two sides of a right triangle. It may be noted that

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

devices operating on sine principle are capable of ?self-generation?. The measurement is restricted to 45
o
from
accuracy point of view. Sine bar itself is not a measuring instrument.
Accuracy requirements of sine bar:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. The axes of the rollers must be parallel to each other and the centre distance L must be precisely
known.
2. The sine bar must be flat and parallel to the plane connecting the axes of the rollers.
3. The rollers must be of identical diameters and must have within a close tolerance.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

29 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Procedure:
1. Fix the dial gaugeon the magnetic stand and place the magnetic stand on the surface plate.Check

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the parallelism of the sine bar.
2. Place the given specimen above the sine bar and place the dial gauge on top of the specimen.
Adjustthe dial gauge for zero deflection.
3. Raise the front end of the sine bar with slip gauges until the work surface is parallel to the datum
surface.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Check the parallelism using dial gauge.
5. Measure the distance between the centres of the sine bar rollers as ?L? and note the height of the
slip gauge as ?H?.
6. Note the included angle of the specimen.
Formulae:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sin ? = H/L where ? = Included angle of the specimen
H = Height of slip gauges
L = Distance between the centre of rollers
Tabulation:
S.No. L (mm) H (mm) Taper angle ( ?)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
2.
3.

Result:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The taper angle of the given specimen using sine bar was found to be =
Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for angular measurements
and they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a specific
requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Flat Surface
2. Granite

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

30 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. List out the various angle measuring instruments.
2. What is the working principles sine bar?
3. How is a sine bar used to measure the angle?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. What is the application of sine bar?
5. What is the material of sine bar?
6. Why sine bar is not preferred to use for measuring angles more than 45
0
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. What are the features of sine bar?
8. A 100 mm sine bar is to be set up to an angle of 33
0
, determine the slip gauges needed from 87
pieces set.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. What are the various instruments used for measuring angles?
10. What is sine bar?
11. How sine bar is used for angle measurement?
12. Explain how sine bar is used to measure angle of small size component.
13. Explain how sine bar is used to measure angle of large size component.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. What are the various types of sine bar?
15. What are the limitations of sine bar?
16. What is sine center?
17. What is sine table?
18. What are the possible sources of errors in angular measurement by sine bar?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

19. What are angle gauges?
20. How angle gauges are used for measuring angles?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

31 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.06 DETERMINATION OF GEAR TOOTH THICKNESS
USING GEAR TOOTH VERNIER
Aim:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen and to draw the graph between the tooth
number and the error in thickness
Apparatus required:
Gear tooth vernier, specimen, surface plate and vernier caliper
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
The tooth thickness, in general, is measured at pitch circle since gear tooth thickness varies from the tip
to the base circle of the tooth. This is possible only when there is an arrangement to fix that position for this
measurement by the gear tooth vernier. It has two vernier scales; one is vertical and other is horizontal.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
32 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

1. Measure initially the outside diameter of the given gear specimen by means of a vertical calculation
of vernier caliper. Note the number of teeth. Calculate the module (m) using the formula.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M = OD/ (Z+2) where z ? number of teeth
M - Module
2. Calculate the theoretical tooth thickness (t) by t = z * m* sin (90/z).
3. Set the vernier scale for the height and tighten.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Measure the thickness of each tooth using the horizontal scale. This is measured thickness. It can
be positive or negative.
H = m x [1+ Z/2 (1- Cos 90/Z)]
5. Calculate the error in the tooth thickness i.e,1. measured thickness ? Theoretical thickness
6. Draw the graph between the tooth number and the error in thickness.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Tooth
Number
Measured Thickness
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Theoretical Thickness (mm)
Error in tooth thickness
(mm)
1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3

Tooth
Number
MSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
VSC

VSR
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TR
(mm)
1
2
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Graph:


Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tooth No.
33 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
The theoretical experiment value of gear tooth thickness is obtained and graph is drawn between error
and tooth number in tooth thickness

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Theoretical tooth thickness =
Experimental tooth thickness =
Error in tooth thickness =
Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the basic measurement units and able to calibrate various

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measuring parameters of the gear.
Application:
1. Gear Component
2. Mining

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Calculate the setting of a gear tooth vernier caliper for a straight spur gear having 40 teeth and
module 4.
2. What is the importance of chordal depth?
3. Define ? Chordal width
4. How is the actual profile of the gear tooth determined?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. What are the manufacturing errors in gear element?
6. Define ? Addendum
7. Define ? Dedendum
8. Define ? Flank of tooth
9. Define ? Pitch

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. Define ? Pitch Circle
11. Define ? Crest of tooth
12. Define ? Root of tooth
13. Define ? Base Circle
14. Define ? Module

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15. Define ? Angle of Obliquity


Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

34 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.07 MEASUREMENT OF THREAD PARAMETER USING
FLOATING CARRIAGE MICROMETER
Aim:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two wire
method
Apparatus required:
1. Floating carriage micrometer
2. Standard wire

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Given specimen (screw thread)
Diagram:

Description of floating carriage micrometer:
It consists of three main units. A base casting carries a pair of centres on which threaded work piece is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

to be mounted. Another carriage capable of moving towards centre is mounted exactly above. In this carriage
one head with thimble to measure up to 0.002 mm is provided and at the other side of head a fiducial indicator
is provided to indicate zero position.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

35 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Procedure:
1. For two wire method, place the standard wire over a thread of the screw at opposite sides.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. For three wire method, place two standard wires on two successive threads and the third wire
placed opposite sides of the thread.
3. Measure the diameter over wires (M) using floating carriage micrometer.
4. Repeat this procedure at various positions of the screw and take different readings.
Formulae:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. For best wire size, d = P / 2 Cos (x/2)
Where, P = Pitch
d= wire size
x = angle between two threads
= 60

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
for metric thread
2. Actual effective diameter, E.A = M ? 3d + 0.866 p
3. Nominal effective diameter, EN = D ? 0.648 p
4. Max. wire size = 1.01 p

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Min. wire size = 0.505 p
6. Best wire size = 0.577 p
M = Diameter over wires
P = Pitch of thread
For metric thread:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Actual effective diameter (EA) = M ? 3d + 0.866 p
Where d = actual diameter of wire
Determination of actual and nominal effective diameter of the screw thread:
Sl.No.
Nominal

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diameter (D)
(mm)
Diameter over
wire ?M?
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Actual eff.
Diameter E.A
(mm)
Nominal eff.
Diameter E.N

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
Error in effective
diameter
(E.A ? E.N)
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

36 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Result:
Thus the actual and nominal effective diameter is measured using three wire method and the error in

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

effective diameter of screw is determined.
Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for roundness
measurements and they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a
specific requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Wholse
2. Maxxis Rubber India

1. Define ? Pitch

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Define ? Flank Angle
3. What is plug gauge?
4. What is meant by micrometer?
5. What is meant by indicator?
6. What is best ? size wire?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Calculate the diameter of the best wire for an M 20 x 25 screws.
8. What are the different corrections to be applied in the measurement of effective diameter by the
method of wire?
9. What is floating carriage micrometer?
10. What are the uses of floating carriage micrometer?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. What are the methods are used for measuring effective diameter?
12. Define ? Effective Diameter
13. Define ? Major Diameter
14. Define ? Minor Diameter
15. What are the effects of flank error?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16. Define ? Rake Angle
17. Define ? Pitch Cylinder
18. What are the effects of pitch error?
19. Define ? Pitch Diameter
20. What is meant by angle of thread?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

37 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.08 MEASUREMENT OF VARIOUS DIMENSIONS USING
COORDINATE MEASURING MACHINE
Aim:
1. To study the construction and operation of coordinate measuring machine

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. To measure the specified dimensions of the given component
Instruments used:
Coordinate measuring machine, vernier calipers
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Theory:
A coordinate measuring machine (CMM) is a 3D device for measuring the physical and geometrical
characteristics of an object. This machine may be manually controlled by an operator or it may be computer
controlled. Measurements are defined by a probe attached to the three moving axis of this machine X, Y and Z
axes. A coordinate measuring machine (CMM) is also a device used in manufacturing and assembly

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

processes to test a part or assembly against the design intent. By precisely recording the X, Y and Z
coordinates of the target, points are generated which can be analyzed via regression algorithms for the
construction of features. These points are collected by using a probe that is positioned manually by an
38 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

operator or automatically via direct computer control (DCC). DCC CMMs can be programmed to repeatedly
measure identical parts, thus a CMM is a specialized form of industrial robot.
Parts:
Coordinate measuring machine include three main components:
1. The main structures which include three axes of motion.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Probing system
3. Data collection and reduction system ? typically includes a machine controller, desktop computer
and application software
Machine description:
1. In modern machines, the gantry type superstructure has two legs and is often called a bridge. This

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

moves freely along the granite table with one leg following a guide rail attached to one side of the
granite table. The opposite leg simply rests on the granite table following the vertical surface
contour.
2. Air bearings are fixed for ensuring friction free travel. Compressed air is forced through a series of
very small holes in a flat bearing surface to provide a smooth but controlled air cushion on which the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CMM can move in a frictionless manner.
3. The movement of the bridge along the granite table forms one axis of the XY plane. The bridge of
the gantry contains a carriage which traverses between the inside and outside legs and forms the
other X or Y horizontal axis.
4. The third axis of movement (Z axis) is provided by the addition of a vertical quill or spindle which

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

moves up and down through the center of the carriage. The touch probe forms the sensing device
on the end of the quill.
5. The movement of the X, Y and Z axes fully describes the measuring envelope. Some touch probes
are themselves powered rotary devices with the probe tip able to swivel vertically through 90
degrees and through a full 360 degrees rotation.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Uses:
They are generally used for:
1. Dimensional measurement
2. Profile measurement
3. Angularity or orientation measurement

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Depth mapping
5. Digitizing mapping
6. Shaft measurement
39 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The machines are available in a wide range of sizes and designs with a variety of different probe
technologies. They can be operated manually or automatically through direct computer control (DCC). They
are offered in various configurations such as bench top, free ? standing, handheld and portable.
Procedure:
1. Take at least 8 points on sphere ball attached to the granite table.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Fix the object whose dimension needs to be measured using the jigs and fixtures.
3. Using joystick, move the probe whose tip is made of ruby slowly and carefully to the surface whose
measurements have to be taken.
4. Touch the probe at two places for measurement of a line (starting and ending point).
5. Touch the probe at two places for measurement of a circular profile and for a cylinder touch the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

probe at 8 points.
6. Measure the same profiles again with vernier calipers (length of line, circle diameter, cylinder
diameter) to compare the two readings.
Comments:
1. The machine should be calibrated every time when it is being used.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. While measuring the profiles, the probe should be moved very slowly as it may damage the ruby if
hit with a high force.
3. Care should be taken while performing experiment so that the granite table of the machines should
get any scratches.
4. ?Retract distance? should be fixed according to the space available in the near vicinity of the profile

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measurement area.
Observation:
Sl.No. Feature
CMM reading
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier reading
(mm)
Form error
(mm)
Difference in two

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

readings (mm)
1 Circle -1
2 Circle -2
3 Circle -3
4 Line

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 Arc
6
Cone - Diameter
Cone ? Vertex angle
Cone ? Height

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7
Cylinder ? Diameter
Cylinder ? Height

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

40 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Result:
Thus the different profile of given object are measured using coordinate measuring machine
Outcome:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Students will be able to measures the geometry of physical objects by sensing discrete points on the
surface of the object with a probe and they will be able to know the Various types of probes are used in CMMs,
including mechanical, optical, laser, and white light.
Application:
1. Surface Measuring Equipment

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Photo transistor

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What are the types of measuring machine?
2. What is CMM?
3. What are the types of CMM?
4. What are the advantages of CMM?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. What are the limitations of CMM?
6. What are the possible sources of error in CMM?
7. What is the use of universal measuring machine?
8. What are the applications of CMM?
9. What is the working principle of three axis measuring machine?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. What is image shearing microscope?
11. What is the use of electronic inspection and measuring machine?
12. What are the types of electronic inspection and measuring machine?
13. What is CMM probe?
14. What are the three main probes are available?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15. What are the types of stylus?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

41 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.09 MEASUREMENT OF SURFACE ROUGHNESS UING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TALYSURF INSTRUMENT
Aim:
To measure the surface roughness using Talysurf instrument
Apparatus required:
Talysurf instrument, work piece, surface plate

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diagram:

Theory:
On any finished surface, imperfections are bound to be there and these take the form of a succession of
hills and valleys which vary both in height and in spacing and result in a kind of texture which in appearance or

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

feel is often characteristic of the machining process and accompanying defects. The several kinds of
departures are there on the surface and these are due to various causes.

42 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Methods of measuring surface roughness:
1. Surface inspection of comparison methods
2. Direct instrument measurements
In comparative methods the surface texture is assessed by observation of the surface. But these
methods are not reliable as they can be misleading, if comparison is not made with surfaces produced by

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

same techniques. The various methods available under comparison method are: (i) Touch Inspection
(ii)Scratch Inspection (iii) Microscopic Inspection (iv) Visual Inspection (v) Surface Photographs (vi) Reflected
Light Intensity Direct Instrument Measurements enable to determine a numerical value of the surface finish of
any surface. Nearly all instruments used are stylus probe type of instruments. This operates on electrical
principle.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. Place the finished component on the surface plate.
2. Fix the Talysurf tester to the vernier height gauge using adopter at a convenient height.
3. Make sure that the stylus probe touches the work piece.
4. Fix the sampling length in the tester.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Press the power button so that the probe moves on the surface to and fro.
6. Take the readings of the surface roughness directly from the instrument.
7. Repeat the above process for the remaining specimen and tabulate the readings.
Precautions:
1. The surface to be tested should be cleaned properly.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. The tester should be fixed to the height gauge properly so that the movement of the probe is exactly
parallel to the surface of work.
3. Make sure that the probe gently touches the work.
Tabulation:
S.No

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement roughness value,
?m
Sample direction Ra, Rz
Average Ra Average Rz Grade
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

43 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Result:
Thus the surface roughness is checked for different specimens by Talysurf.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for roughness
measurements they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a specific
requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).
Application:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Machine Shop
2. Quality Department


1. Define ? Actual Size?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. What is meant by normal surface?
3. What is meant by profilo-graph?
4. What is Tomlinson surface meter?
5. What is meant by profile?
6. What are the factors affecting surface roughness?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Why the surface texture is control?
8. Define ? Lay
9. Define ? Surface Texture
10. Define ? Flaws
11. What is sampling length?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. What are the methods used for evaluating surface finish?
13. What is form factor?
14. What are the methods used for measuring surface finish?
15. How will you differentiate smooth surface from flat surface?
16. How surface finish is designated on drawings?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17. Define ? Primary Texture
18. Define ? Secondary Texture
19. What are the types of instrument used for measuring surface texture?
20. Define ? waviness

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

44 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.10 MEASUREMENT OF BORE USING DIAL BORE
INDICATOR AND TELESCOPIC GAUGE
Aim:
To determine the diameter of bore by using telescopic gauge and checking the same by using dial bore

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

indicator
Apparatus required:
Work piece, vernier caliper, telescopic gauge and dial gauge indicator set with anvil.
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

45 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


Procedure:
Bore gauge measurement:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Select the extension rod and washer according to the bore diameter to be measured
2. Fix the suitable extension rod and washer with the bore gauge
3. Fix the dial gauge to the bore gauge in its position
4. Insert the bore gauge inside the bore to be measured and hold the gauge in parallel o the axis of the
bore. Ensure that the tips on either side of the bore gauge are in touch with inner wall of the bore

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Note down the reading in the dial gauge and withdraw the bore gauge from the bore
6. Hold the measuring tips of bore gauge between the spindle and anvil of a micrometer and compress
the tips by rotating the thimble till the reading reaches the same one as noted earlier
7. Observe and record the micrometer reading as the bore diameter to be measured
Telescopic gauge measurement:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Select the telescopic gauge according to the bore diameter to be measured
2. Press the telescopic spindles in the telescopic gauge lock them by locking screw
3. Insert the telescopic gauge inside thee bore to be measured. Release the locking screw to expand
the telescopic spindles outwards inside the bore
4. Hold the telescopic gauge in parallel to the axis of bore axis and ensure that the tips of telescopic

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

spindles are in touch with the inner wall of the bore
5. Lock the telescopic spindles and withdraw it from the bore
46 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

6. Measure the expanded length of the telescopic spindles using micrometer record them as the inner

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

diameter of the bore
Practical observations:
Rough measurement of bore using Telescopic gauge:
Least count of micrometer = 0.01 mm
Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Micrometer reading
Total reading
(MSR + TSC * LC) ( mm) Main scale reading (MSR)
(mm)
Thimble scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

coincidence
1.
2.

Average reading = ________ mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Accurate measuring using Bore gauge
Sl.No.
Micrometer
reading
(d) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Bore gauge
reading
(R1) (mm)
Work piece reading
(R2) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Final reading
d+ (R1 ? R2) * 0.01
(mm)
1.
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Accurate internal diameter of hole using bore gauge = ______ mm

Result
1. Internal diameter of the work piece by using telescopic gauge is ________mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Diameter obtained by using dial gauge indicator is __________________mm

Outcome:
Students will be able to measure a bore's size, by transferring the internal dimension to a remote
measuring tool (Telescopic gauge).

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Automobile
2. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

47 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by bore diameter?
2. What is gauge?
3. What is meant by measurement?
4. What is telescope gauge?
5. What is bore gauge?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. What is contact point?
7. What is the principle of bore gauge?
8. What are the applications of telescopic gauge?
9. What types of materials are used in telescopic gauge?
10. What are the types of instrument used to measure bore diameter?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. What are the applications of bore gauge?
12. What are the advantages of bore gauge over telescopic gauge?
13. What are the limitations of bore gauge?
14. What is the working principle of telescopic gauge?
15. What are the disadvantages of telescopic gauge?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

48 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.11 MEASUREMENT OF FORCE USING LOAD CELL
Aim:
To study the characteristic between applied load and the output voltage

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Apparatus required:
1. Trainer kit
2. Multimeter
3. Load cell sensor with setup
4. Weights (5 kg)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Power chord
Diagram:

Formulae:
Error (%) = {Applied Voltage ? (Displayed Load)/ Applied Load)} x 100

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Block diagram:



Applied DC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Load O/P

DC Excitation source Transducer
Transducer
Instrumentation

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Amplifier
Gain Amplifier DVM
49 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Interfacing and calibration procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Interface the load cell 9 pin ?D? type male connector to 9 pin D type female connector, fixed on the
module.
2. First unload the beam and nullify the display by using zero adjustment POT
3. Apply the maximum load of 5 kg to the beam and adjust the display to 5 kg by using gain
adjustment POT.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. After the initial adjustment, the unit should not be disturbed until the completion of the experiment.
Safety precaution:
1. During offset adjustment, the beam should not be loaded.
2. The beam should not be disturbed during the experiment.
3. Remove the load from the beam, after completion of the experiment; otherwise wire wound on the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

strain gauge will get damaged.
4. If you are getting an unsatisfactory reading, then vary the zero and span POT minimum to
maximum.
5. Maximum load should not exceed 5 kg.
6. Once calibrated, the setting should not be distributed till the end of the experiment.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. Install the load cell module and interface the 9 pin D connector with kit.
2. Connect the multimeter in volt mode across T5 and GND for the output voltage measurement.
3. Switch on the module.
4. Initially, unload the beam and nullify the display by using zero adjustment POT (zero calibration).

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Apply the maximum load of 5 kg to the beam and adjust the display to 5 kg by using gain
adjustment POT (gain calibration).
6. Now apply the load to the beam, a force will develop on the beam and measure the output voltage
(V) across T5 and GND.
7. Gradually increase the load and note down the output voltage (V) and applied load.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Tabulate the values of displayed load and applied voltage.
9. Plot a graph between applied load and output voltage (V).
Note: When 1 kg load is applied to the beam, the displayed voltage is 1 kg.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

50 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:
Applied load
(kg)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Output voltage
(V)
Displayed load
(kg)
% Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Graph:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Applied load (kg) Vs Output Voltage (V)
2. Actual load (kg) Vs % Error
Result:
Thus the characteristic between applied load and the output voltage was studied.
Outcome:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Students will be able to understand the Sensor device (electro-mechanical) which help us to measure
a physical parameter (such as temperature, pressure, force, acceleration etc.) by providing analog input to get
digital output.
Application:
1. Machine Shop

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Automobile


1. What is meant by force?
2. Define ? Wheat stone bridge circuit

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Define ? Load
4. What is meant by deflector?
5. What is meant by force indicator?
6. Define ? Instrumentation
7. How instrumentations are classified?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Define ? Transducer
9. What is electrical transducer?
10. How transducers are classified?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

51 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.12 MEASUREMENT OF TORQUE USING STRAIN
GAUGE
Aim:
To study the characteristics of the developing torque and the signal conditioned sensor output voltage
Apparatus required:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Trainer kit
2. Digital Multimeter (V)
3. Torque sensor setup
4. Weights (100 gram x 10 Nos.)
5. Power chord

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diagram:

Interfacing and calibration procedure:
1. Interface the torque sensor 9 pin. ?D? type male connector to ?9? pin ?D? type female connector, fixed
on the module.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. First, unload the beam and nullify the display by using zero adjustment POT.
3. Apply the maximum load of 1 kg to the beam and adjust the display to 9.81 Nm by using adjustment
POT.
4. After this initial calibration, the unit should not be disturbed until the completion of the experiment.
52 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Safety precaution:
1. During offset adjustment, the beam should not be loaded.
2. The beam should not be disturbed during the experiment.
3. Remove the beam from the shaft, after completion of the experiment otherwise wire wound on the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

strain gauge will get damaged.
4. If the displayed torque reading are in negative, change the beam connections in opposite to
previously connected direction.
5. If you are getting an unsatisfactory reading, then vary the zero and span POT minimum to
maximum.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Maximum load should not exceed 1 kg.
7. Once calibrated, the setting should not be disturbed till the end of this experiment.
Procedure:
1. Install the torque sensor setup and interface with kit.
2. Switch ?ON? the module.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Connect the Multimeter in millivolts mode T2 and T3 for bridge output voltage measurement POT.
4. First, unload the beam and nullify the bridge output voltage by using zero adjustment POT.
5. By applying load to the beam, torque will develop on the shaft and measure the bridge output
voltage (mV) across T2 and T3
6. Gradually increase the force by applying load and note down the bridge output voltage (mV).

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Tabulate the readings and plot a graph between developed torque versus bridge output voltage
(mV).
Formulae:
Error (%) = {(Actual Torque ? Theoretical Torque)/ Theoretical Torque} x 100
Theoretical Torque = mass (m) x acceleration due to gravity (g) x radial distance

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= 1 kg x 9.81 m/s
2
x 1 m
= 9.81 Nm
Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No. Theoretical Torque
(Nm)
Bridge output voltage
(mV)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Model graph:
The graph between developed torque and bridge output voltage is drawn
53 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Developed torque (Nm) Vs Output Voltage (V)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sample reading:
Developed Torque (Nm) = 9.81 Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Output Voltage (V) = 5 mV
Result:
Thus the characteristics of the torque developed which is due to force applied to beam and the bridge
output voltage were studied and graph is plotted.
Outcome:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Students will be able to understand the Sensor device (electro-mechanical) which helps us to
measure the strain by providing analog input to digital output.
Application:
1. Machine Shop
2. Turbine

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

54 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00



1. Define ? Torque

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Define ? Twist
3. What are the methods used for measuring torque?
4. Define ? Strain Gauge
5. What is prony brake?
6. What are the modern devices used for measuring torque?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. What are the elements of strain gauge?
8. What is the use of slip ring for measuring torque?
9. What is slip ring?
10. What are the types of torque?
11. What are the types of dynamometer?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. What are the applications of dynamometer?
13. What are the features of dynamometer?
14. What is gauge factor?
15. What are the types of torque measurement?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice
1 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING


ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

V SEMESTER - R 2013

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No. : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LABORATORY MANUAL
2 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


3 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DHANALAKSHMI


College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.


1. To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
2. To contribute to the promotion of Academic Excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

levels
3. To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

DEPARTMENT OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rendering the services to the global needs of engineering industries by educating students to become
professionally sound mechanical engineers of excellent caliber

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To produce mechanical engineering technocrats with a perfect knowledge intellectual and hands on
experience and to inculcate the spirit of moral values and ethics to serve the society

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MISSION
MISSION
VISION

VISION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To impart students with fundamental knowledge in mathematics and basic sciences that will mould
them to be successful professionals
2. Core competence
To provide students with sound knowledge in engineering and experimental skills to identify
complex software problems in industry and to develop a practical solution for them

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theory and practice which
enable them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and organization and to design
products requiring interdisciplinary skills
4. Professional skills

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To bestow students with adequate training and provide opportunities to work as team that will build
up their communication skills, individual, leadership and supportive qualities and to enable them to
adapt and to work in ever changing technologies
5. Life-long learning
To develop the ability of students to establish themselves as professionals in mechanical

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

engineering and to create awareness about the need for lifelong learning and pursuing advanced
degrees

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)
On completion of the B.E. (Mechanical) degree, the graduate will be able
a) To apply the basic knowledge of mathematics, science and engineering
b) To design and conduct experiments as well as to analyze and interpret data and apply the same in
the career or entrepreneurship

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

c) To design and develop innovative and creative software applications
d) To understand a complex real world problem and develop an efficient practical solution
e) To create, select and apply appropriate techniques, resources, modern engineering and IT tools
f) To understand the role as a professional and give the best to the society
g) To develop a system that will meet expected needs within realistic constraints such as economical

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

environmental, social, political, ethical, safety and sustainability
h) To communicate effectively and make others understand exactly what they are trying to tell in both
verbal and written forms
i) To work in a team as a team member or a leader and make unique contributions and work with
coordination

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

j) To engage in lifelong learning and exhibit their technical skills
k) To develop and manage projects in multidisciplinary environments

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To familiar with different measurement equipment?s and use of this industry for quality inspection
List of Experiments
1. Tool Maker?s Microscope

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Comparator
3. Sine Bar
4. Gear Tooth Vernier Caliper
5. Floating gauge Micrometer
6. Coordinate Measuring Machine

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Surface Finish Measuring Equipment
8. Vernier Height Gauge
9. Bore diameter measurement using telescope gauge
10. Bore diameter measurement using micrometer
11. Force Measurement

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. Torque Measurement
13. Temperature measurement
14. Autocollimator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Ability to handle different measurement tools and perform measurements in quality impulsion
2. Learnt the usage of precision measuring instruments and practiced to take measurements
3. Learnt and practiced to build the required dimensions using slip gauge
4. Able to measure the various dimensions of the given specimen using the tool maker?s microscope
5. Able to find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Able to measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare
7. Learnt to determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen using Gear tooth vernier
8. Able to measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two
wire method
9. Learnt to study the construction and operation of coordinate measuring machine

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. Learnt to determine the diameter of bore by using telescopic gauge and dial bore indicator
11. Able to measure the surface roughness using Talysurf instrument
12. Studied the characteristic between applied load and the output volt
13. Learnt the characteristics of developing torque and respective sensor output voltage
14. Studied the characteristics of thermocouple without compensation

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15. Able to check the straightness & flatness of the given component by using Autocollimator
16. Learnt to measure the displacement using LVDT and to calibrate it with the millimeter scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OBJECTIVES

COURSE OUTCOMES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

CONTENTS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl. No. Name of the Experiments Page No.
CYCLE ? 1 EXPERIMENTS
1
Precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab ? A Study
7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
To build up the slip gauge for given dimension ? A Study
16
3
Thread parameters measurement using Tool Makers Microscope

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

20
4
Calibration of dial gauge
23
5

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of taper angle by sine bar method
26
6
Determination of gear tooth thickness using gear tooth vernier
29

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7
Measurement of thread parameters using floating carriage micrometer
32
CYCLE ? 2 EXPERIMENTS
8

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement of various dimensions using Coordinate Measuring Machine
35
9
Measurement of surface roughness
39

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
Measurement of bores using dial bore indicator and telescopic gauge
42
11
Force measurement using load cell

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

46
12
Torque measurement using strain gauge
49
13

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Temperature measurement using thermocouple
53
14
Measurement of alignment using autocollimator
56

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ADDITIONAL EXPERIMENT BEYOND THE SYLLABUS
15
Thread parameters measurement using profile projector
60
16

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Displacement measurement ? linear variable differential transducer (LVDT)
62
PROJECT WORK
65

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.01 PRECISION MEASURING INSTRUMENT YSED IN
METROLOGY LAB ? A STUDY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Aim:
To study the following instruments and their usage for measuring dimensions of given specimen
1. Vernier caliper
2. Micrometer
3. Vernier height gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Depth micrometer
5. Universal bevel protractor
Apparatus required:
Surface plate, specimen and above instruments
Vernier caliper:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The principle of vernier caliper is to use the minor difference between the sizes two scales or divisions
for measurement. The difference between them can be utilized to enhance the accuracy of measurement. The
vernier caliper essentially consists of two steel rules, sliding along each other.
Parts:
Different parts of the vernier caliper are

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Beam ? It has main scale.
2. Fixed jaw
3. Sliding or Moving jaw ? It has vernier scale and sliding jaw locking screw.
4. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw knife
edges for internal measurement.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Stem or depth bar for depth measurement
Least count:
Least count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 VSD = 0.98 mm
Least count = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm

10 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ID

DEPTH

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OD
Measurement:
Given Vernier caliper can be used for external, internal depth, slot and step measurement.
Measurement principle:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

When both jaws contact each other scale shows the zero reading. The finer adjustment of movable jaw
can be done by the fine adjustment screw. First the whole movable jaw assembly is adjusted so that the two
measuring tips just touch the part to be measured. Then the fine adjustment clamp locking screw is tightened.
Final adjustment depending upon the sense of correct feel is made by the adjusting screw. After final
adjustment has been made sliding jaw locking screw is also tightened and the reading is noted.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

All the parts of the Vernier caliper are made of good quality steel and measuring faces are hardened.
Types of vernier:
Vernier caliper, electronic vernier caliper, vernier depth caliper

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:

Main scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

reading (MSR)
(mm)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

reading (VSR) (mm)
Total reading (MSR
+ VSR)
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OD


ID

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Depth


Vernier height gauge:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier height gauge is a sort of vernier caliper equipped with a special instrument suitable for height
measurement. It is always kept on the surface plate and the use of the surfaces plates as datum surfaces is
very essential.
Least count:
Least Count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm
1 VSD = 0.98 mm
Least Count (LC) = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm
Parts:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Base
2. Beam ? It has main scale.
3. Slider ? It has a vernier scale and slider locking screw.
4. Scriber
5. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Material:
All the parts of vernier are made of good quality steel and the measuring faces hardened.
Types of vernier gauge:
1. Analog vernier height gauge
2. Digital vernier height gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Electronic vernier height gauge
Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Main scale reading
(MSR)(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale reading
(VSR)(mm)
Total reading (MSR +

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSR)(mm)
1.
2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Outside micrometer:
The micrometer essentially consists of an accurate screw having about 10 or 20 threads per cm. The
end of the screw forms one measuring tip and other measuring tip is constituted by a stationary anvil in the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

base of the frame. The screw is threaded for certain length and is plain afterwards. The plain portion is called
spindle and its end is the measuring surface. The spindle is advanced or retracted by turning a thimble
connected to a spindle. The spindle is a slide fit over the barrel and barrel is the fixed part attached with the
frame. The barrel & thimble are graduated. The pitch of the screw threads is 0.5 mm.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count:
Least Count (LC) = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale
= 0.5 / 50 = 0.01 mm
Parts:
1. Frame

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Anvil
3. Spindle
4. Spindle lock
5. Barrel or outside sleeve
6. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.
The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.
14 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Measurement:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

It can be used for any external measurement.
Types of micrometer:
1. Outside micrometer, 2. Inside micrometer, 3.Depth micrometer, 4. Stick micrometer, 5. Screw thread
micrometer, 6. V ? anvil micrometer, 7. Blade type micrometer, 8. Dial micrometer, 9. Bench micrometer, 10.
Tape screw operated internal micrometer, 11. Groove micrometer, 12. Digital micrometer, 13.Differential screw

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

micrometer, 14.Adjustable range outside micrometer.
Ratchet stop mechanism:
The object of the ratchet stop is to ensure that same level of torque is applied on the spindle while
measuring and the sense of the feel of operator is eliminated and consistent readings are obtained. By
providing this arrangement, the ratchet stop is made slip off when the torque applied to rotate the spindle

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

exceeds the set torque. Thus this provision ensures the application of same amount of torque during the
measurement.
Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Pitch Scale Reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(PSR) (mm)
Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)
Head scale reading
(HSR x LC) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total Reading (PSR
+ HSR) (mm)
1.
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Depth micrometer:
Depth micrometer is a sort of micrometer which is mainly used for measuring depth of holes, so it is
named as depth micrometer.
Parts:
1. Shoulder

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Spindle
3. Spindle lock
4. Barrel or outside sleeve ? It has pitch scale.
5. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions.
6. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.
15 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


Least count:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least Count = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale = 0.50/50
= 0.01 mm
Measurements:
It can be used for measuring the depth of holes, slots and recessed areas. The pitch of the screw thread
is 0.5 mm. The least count is 0.01 mm. Shoulder acts as a reference surface and is held firmly and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

perpendicular to the centre line of the hole. For large range of measurement extension rods are used. In the
barrel the scale is calibrated. The accuracy again depends upon the sense of touch.
Procedure:
First, calculate the least count of the instrument. Check the zero error. Measure the specimen note
down the main scale reading or the head scale reading. Note down the vernier or head scale coincidence with

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

main or pitch scale divisions.
Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)
Head scale reading
(HSR x LC) (mm)
Total Reading (PSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

+ HSR) (mm)

1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.


16 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Universal bevel protractor:

Description:
Bevel protractor is an instrument for measuring the angle between the two faces of a specimen. It
consists of a base plate on which a circular scale is engraved. It is graduated in degrees. An adjustment plate

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

is attached to a circular plate containing the vernier scale. The adjustable blade can be locked in any position.
The circular plate has 360 division divided into four parts of 90 degrees each. The adjustable parts have 24
divisions of to the right and left sides of zero reading. These scales are used according to the position of the
specimen with respect to movable scale.
Procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Place the specimen whose taper is to be measured between the adjustable plate and movable
blade with one of its face parallel to the base.
2. Lock the adjustable plate in position and note down the main scale reading depending upon the
direction of rotation of adjustable plate in clockwise or anticlockwise.
3. Note the VSC to the right of zero.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Multiply the VSC with the least count and add to MSR to obtain the actual reading.
Least count:
Least Count = 2 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

24 VSD = 46
o
=> 1 VSD = 23/12
LC = 2 ? 23/12 = 1/12
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= 5? (five minutes)



17 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Main scale reading
(MSR) (deg)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale reading
(VSR) (deg)
Total reading (MSR +

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSR)
(deg)
1.
2.
The angle of scriber of the vernier height gauge =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Thus the various precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab are studied and the specimen
dimensions are recorded.
Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for linear, angular,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

roundness and roughness measurements they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring
instrument according to a specific requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).
Application:
1. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Metrology
2. Define ? Inspection
3. What are the needs of inspection in industries?
4. What are the various methods involving the measurement?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Define ? Precision
6. Define ? Accuracy
7. Define ? Calibration
8. Define ? Repeatability
9. Define ? Magnification

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. Define ? Error
11. Define ? Systematic Error
12. Define ? Random Error
13. Define ? Parallax Error
14. Define ? Environmental Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15. Define ? Cosine Error
Viva-voce

18 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.02 BUILD UP THE SLIP GAUGE FOR GIVEN DIMENSION
? A STUDY
Aim:
To build up the slip gauge for given dimension
Apparatus required:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Slip gauges set
2. Surface plate
3. Soft cloth
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
Slip gauge are universally accepted standard of length in industry. They are the working standard for
linear dimension. These were invented by a Swedish Engineer, C.E. Johansson. They are used
1. For direct precise measurement where the accuracy of the workpiece demand it.
2. For use with high- magnification comparators to establish the size of the gauge blocks in general

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

use.
3. Gauge blocks are also used for many other purposes such as checking the accuracy of measuring
instrument or setting up a comparator to a specific dimension, enabling a batch of component to be
quickly and accurately checked or indeed in any situation where there is need to refer to standard of
known length these blocks are rectangular.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

19 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Most gauge blocks are produced from high grade steel, hardened and established by a heat treatment
process to give a high degree of dimensional stability. Gauge blocks are also manufactured from tungsten
carbide which is an extremely hard and wear resistant material. The measuring faces have a lapped finish.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The faces are perfectly flat and parallel to one another with a high degree of accuracy. Each block has an
extremely high dimensional accuracy at 20
o
C.
These slip gauge are available in variety of selected sets both in inch units and metric units. Letter ?E? is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

used for inch units and ?M? is used for metric standard number of pieces in a set following the letter E or M. For
example EBI refers to a set whose blocks are in metric units and are 83 in number. Each block dimensions is
printed on anyone of its face itself the size of any required standard being made up by combining the
appropriate number of these different size blocks.
If two gauges are slid and twisted together under pressure they will firmly join together. This process,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

known as wringing, is very useful because it enables several gauge blocks to be assembled together to
produce a required size. In fact the success of precision measurement by slip gauges depends on the
phenomenon of wringing.
First the gauge is oscillated slightly with very light pressure over other gauge so as to detect pressure at
any foreign particles between the surfaces. One gauge is placed perpendicular to other using standard

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

gauging pressure and rotary motion is applied until the blocks are lined up.
Procedure:
1. Build the given dimension by wringing minimum number of slip gauges.
2. Note the given dimension and choose the minimum possible slip gauge available in the set so as to
accommodate the last decimal value. The minimum slip gauge value dimension available i.e., 1.12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

mm must be chosen followed by 1.5 mm thick gauge block.
3. Follow the above steps to build up the slip gauge of any dimension.
Precautions:
1. Slip gauges should be handled very carefully placed gently and should never be dropped.
2. Whenever a slip gauge is being removed from the set, its dimensions are noted and must be

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

replaced into the set at its appropriate place only.
3. Correct procedure must be followed in wringing and also in removing the gauge blocks.
4. They should be cleaned well before use and petroleum jelly is applied after use.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

20 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:
Range (mm) Increment (mm) No. of pieces

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total = ____________ Pieces

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total length of slip gauge = ________ mm
Given diameter Slip gauges used Obtained dimensions

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Slip gauge set is studied and the given dimensions are building up by wringing minimum number of slip
gauges.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Students will be able to select proper measuring instrument and know requirement of calibration, errors
in measurement etc. They can perform accurate measurements.
Application:
1. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Why C.I. is preferred material for surface plates and tables?
2. Why V ? blocks are generally manufactured in pairs?
3. Why micrometer is required to be tested for accuracy?
4. Define ? Linear Measurement

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. List the linear measuring instrument according to their accuracy.
6. Define ? Least Count
7. What are the uses of vernier depth gauge?
8. What are the uses of feeler gauges?
9. What are the uses of straight edge?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. What are the uses of angle plate?
11. What are the uses of V ? block?
12. What are the uses of combination square?
13. What precautions should be taken while using slip gauges?
14. What is wringing?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15. Why the slip gauges are termed as ?End standard?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

22 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


Expt.No.03 THREAD PARAMETERS MEASUREMENT USING
TOOL MAKERS MICROSCOPE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Aim:
To study the tool makers microscope and in the process measure the various dimensions of the given
specimen
Apparatus required:
1. Tool makers microscope

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Specimen
Diagram:

Description:
The tool maker?s microscope is designed for measurement of parts of complex forms; for example,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

profile of a tool having external threads. It can also be used for measuring centre to centre distance of the
holes in any plane as well as the coordinates of the outline of a complex template gauge, using the
coordinates measuring system.
23 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Basically it consists of an optical head which can be adjusted vertically along the ways of supporting
column. The optical head can be clamped at any position by a screw. On the work table (which as a circular
base in which there are graduations) the part to be inspected is placed. The table has a compound slide by
means of which the part can be measured. For giving these two movements, there are two micrometer screws
having thimble scales and verniers. At the back of the base light source is arranged that provides horizontal

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

beam of light, reflected from a mirror by 90 degrees upwards towards the table. The beam of light passes
through the transparent glass plate on which flat plates can be checked are placed. Observations are made
through the eyepiece of the optical head.
Procedure:
1. Place the given specimen on the work table and switch on all the three light sources and adjust the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

intensity of the light source until a clean image of the cross wires and specimen are seen through
the eyepiece.
2. Coincide one of the two extreme edges between which the measurement has to be taken with
vertical or horizontal cross wires and depending upon the other image coincide with the same cross
wires by moving the above device. Note the reading.The difference between the two readings gives

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the value of the required measurement.
3. Note the experiment specimen and the readings.
4. Tabulate the different measurements measured from the specimen.
Determination of thread parameters
Magnification =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

S.No. Parameters
Magnified value
(mm)
Actual value
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Outer diameter (O.D)

2. Internal diameter (I.D)

3. Pitch

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Flank angle


Result:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Included angle of the tool was measured using tool maker?s microscope and various dimensions of the
given specimen are measured.


24 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the various parameters of thread and select proper measuring
instrument and know requirement of calibration, errors in measurement etc. They can perform accurate
measurements.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Machine Shop
2. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by tool maker?s microscope?
2. What is the light used in tool maker?s microscope?
3. What are the various characteristics that you would measure in a screw thread?
4. What are the instruments that are required for measuring screw thread?
5. Define ? Pitch

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. What are the causes of pitch error?
7. Define ? Flank
8. What are the effects of flank angle error?
9. What is progressive error?
10. What is periodic error?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. What is drunken error?
12. What is erratic error?
13. What are the applications of tool maker?s microscope?
14. What are the limitations of tool maker?s microscope?
15. What are the advantages of tool maker?s microscope?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

25 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.04 CALIBRATION OF DIAL GAUGE USING SLIP GAUGE
Aim:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge
Apparatus required:
Dial gauge, magnetic stand, slip gauge, and surface plate
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
The dial test indicator is a precision measuring instrument which can convert linear motion into angular
motion by means of transmission mechanics of rack and pinion and can be used to measure linear vibration
and errors of shape.
This instrument has the features such as good appearance, compact size, light weight, high precision,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

reasonable construction, constant measuring face etc. Rigidity of all parts is excellent. Probe is tipped with
carbide balls. A shock proof mechanism is provided for those with larger measuring range.

26 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Types of dial indicator:
1. Plunger type
2. Lever type
Plunger type dial indicator has a resolution counter and each division in main scale is 0.01 mm. In lever
type dial test indicator is replaced by ball type stylus.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. Fix the dial gauge to the stand rigidly and place the stand on the surface plate.
2. Set the plunger of dial gauge to first touch the upper surface of standard slip gauge and set indicator
to zero.
3. Raise then the plunger by pulling the screw above the dial scale.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Place the standard slip gauge underneath the plunger.
5. Release the plunger and let it to touch the standard slip gauge.
6. Note the reading on the dial scale.
Formulae:
The standard error of dial gauge is calculated by the formula

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
S.No.
Slip gauge reading ?x?
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Dial gauge reading
(mm)
(x? - x)
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x? (x? - x)
1.
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Thus the accuracy and standard error of dial gauge is found. The standard error of given dial gauge is
__________.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

27 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Outcome:
Students will be able to check the variation in tolerance during the inspection process of a
machined part, measure the deflection of a beam or ring under laboratory conditions, as well as many

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

other situations where a small measurement needs to be registered or indicated
Application:
1. Milling Machine
2. Analog versus digital/electronic readout

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is comparator?
2. What are the types of comparators?
3. What is the LC for comparators?
4. What are the applications of comparator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. What is meant by plunger?
6. What are the types of dial indicators?
7. Why a revolution counter is not provided in lever type dial test indicator?
8. Draw a line diagram of the operating mechanism of plunger type dial test indicator.
9. Explain the term magnification of a dial indicator.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. What are the uses of dial test indicator?
11. What are the practical applications of dial test indicator?
12. What precautions should be taken while using dial test indicator?
13. What are the desirable qualities of a dial test indicator?
14. What are the advantages of dial test indicator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15. What are the limitations of dial test indicator?
16. Distinguish between comparator and measuring instrument.
17. What are the advantages of electrical comparator?
18. What are the advantages of optical comparator?
19. What are the uses of comparator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

20. What are the advantages and disadvantages of mechanical comparator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

28 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.05 DETERMINATION OF TAPER ANGLE BY SINE BAR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

METHOD
Aim:
To measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare
Apparatus required:
Sine bar, slip gauges, dial gauge with stand, micrometer, surface plate, bevel protractor, vernier caliper

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diagram:

Description:
The sine bar principle uses the ratio of the length of two sides of a right triangle. It may be noted that
devices operating on sine principle are capable of ?self-generation?. The measurement is restricted to 45

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
from
accuracy point of view. Sine bar itself is not a measuring instrument.
Accuracy requirements of sine bar:
1. The axes of the rollers must be parallel to each other and the centre distance L must be precisely

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

known.
2. The sine bar must be flat and parallel to the plane connecting the axes of the rollers.
3. The rollers must be of identical diameters and must have within a close tolerance.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

29 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Procedure:
1. Fix the dial gaugeon the magnetic stand and place the magnetic stand on the surface plate.Check
the parallelism of the sine bar.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Place the given specimen above the sine bar and place the dial gauge on top of the specimen.
Adjustthe dial gauge for zero deflection.
3. Raise the front end of the sine bar with slip gauges until the work surface is parallel to the datum
surface.
4. Check the parallelism using dial gauge.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Measure the distance between the centres of the sine bar rollers as ?L? and note the height of the
slip gauge as ?H?.
6. Note the included angle of the specimen.
Formulae:
Sin ? = H/L where ? = Included angle of the specimen

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

H = Height of slip gauges
L = Distance between the centre of rollers
Tabulation:
S.No. L (mm) H (mm) Taper angle ( ?)
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.
3.

Result:
The taper angle of the given specimen using sine bar was found to be =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for angular measurements
and they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a specific
requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Flat Surface
2. Granite

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

30 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. List out the various angle measuring instruments.
2. What is the working principles sine bar?
3. How is a sine bar used to measure the angle?
4. What is the application of sine bar?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. What is the material of sine bar?
6. Why sine bar is not preferred to use for measuring angles more than 45
0
?
7. What are the features of sine bar?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. A 100 mm sine bar is to be set up to an angle of 33
0
, determine the slip gauges needed from 87
pieces set.
9. What are the various instruments used for measuring angles?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. What is sine bar?
11. How sine bar is used for angle measurement?
12. Explain how sine bar is used to measure angle of small size component.
13. Explain how sine bar is used to measure angle of large size component.
14. What are the various types of sine bar?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15. What are the limitations of sine bar?
16. What is sine center?
17. What is sine table?
18. What are the possible sources of errors in angular measurement by sine bar?
19. What are angle gauges?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

20. How angle gauges are used for measuring angles?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

31 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.06 DETERMINATION OF GEAR TOOTH THICKNESS
USING GEAR TOOTH VERNIER
Aim:
To determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen and to draw the graph between the tooth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

number and the error in thickness
Apparatus required:
Gear tooth vernier, specimen, surface plate and vernier caliper
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
The tooth thickness, in general, is measured at pitch circle since gear tooth thickness varies from the tip
to the base circle of the tooth. This is possible only when there is an arrangement to fix that position for this
measurement by the gear tooth vernier. It has two vernier scales; one is vertical and other is horizontal.
Procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

32 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

1. Measure initially the outside diameter of the given gear specimen by means of a vertical calculation
of vernier caliper. Note the number of teeth. Calculate the module (m) using the formula.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M = OD/ (Z+2) where z ? number of teeth
M - Module
2. Calculate the theoretical tooth thickness (t) by t = z * m* sin (90/z).
3. Set the vernier scale for the height and tighten.
4. Measure the thickness of each tooth using the horizontal scale. This is measured thickness. It can

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

be positive or negative.
H = m x [1+ Z/2 (1- Cos 90/Z)]
5. Calculate the error in the tooth thickness i.e,1. measured thickness ? Theoretical thickness
6. Draw the graph between the tooth number and the error in thickness.
Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tooth
Number
Measured Thickness
(mm)
Theoretical Thickness (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Error in tooth thickness
(mm)
1
2
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tooth
Number
MSR
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSC

VSR
(mm)
TR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
1
2
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Graph:


Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tooth No.
33 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
The theoretical experiment value of gear tooth thickness is obtained and graph is drawn between error
and tooth number in tooth thickness
Theoretical tooth thickness =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Experimental tooth thickness =
Error in tooth thickness =
Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the basic measurement units and able to calibrate various
measuring parameters of the gear.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Gear Component
2. Mining

1. Calculate the setting of a gear tooth vernier caliper for a straight spur gear having 40 teeth and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

module 4.
2. What is the importance of chordal depth?
3. Define ? Chordal width
4. How is the actual profile of the gear tooth determined?
5. What are the manufacturing errors in gear element?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Define ? Addendum
7. Define ? Dedendum
8. Define ? Flank of tooth
9. Define ? Pitch
10. Define ? Pitch Circle

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. Define ? Crest of tooth
12. Define ? Root of tooth
13. Define ? Base Circle
14. Define ? Module
15. Define ? Angle of Obliquity

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

34 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.07 MEASUREMENT OF THREAD PARAMETER USING
FLOATING CARRIAGE MICROMETER
Aim:
To measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two wire

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

method
Apparatus required:
1. Floating carriage micrometer
2. Standard wire
3. Given specimen (screw thread)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diagram:

Description of floating carriage micrometer:
It consists of three main units. A base casting carries a pair of centres on which threaded work piece is
to be mounted. Another carriage capable of moving towards centre is mounted exactly above. In this carriage

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

one head with thimble to measure up to 0.002 mm is provided and at the other side of head a fiducial indicator
is provided to indicate zero position.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

35 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Procedure:
1. For two wire method, place the standard wire over a thread of the screw at opposite sides.
2. For three wire method, place two standard wires on two successive threads and the third wire

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

placed opposite sides of the thread.
3. Measure the diameter over wires (M) using floating carriage micrometer.
4. Repeat this procedure at various positions of the screw and take different readings.
Formulae:
1. For best wire size, d = P / 2 Cos (x/2)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Where, P = Pitch
d= wire size
x = angle between two threads
= 60
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

for metric thread
2. Actual effective diameter, E.A = M ? 3d + 0.866 p
3. Nominal effective diameter, EN = D ? 0.648 p
4. Max. wire size = 1.01 p
5. Min. wire size = 0.505 p

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Best wire size = 0.577 p
M = Diameter over wires
P = Pitch of thread
For metric thread:
Actual effective diameter (EA) = M ? 3d + 0.866 p

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Where d = actual diameter of wire
Determination of actual and nominal effective diameter of the screw thread:
Sl.No.
Nominal
Diameter (D)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
Diameter over
wire ?M?
(mm)
Actual eff.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diameter E.A
(mm)
Nominal eff.
Diameter E.N
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Error in effective
diameter
(E.A ? E.N)
(mm)
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

36 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Result:
Thus the actual and nominal effective diameter is measured using three wire method and the error in
effective diameter of screw is determined.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for roundness
measurements and they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a
specific requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).
Application:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Wholse
2. Maxxis Rubber India

1. Define ? Pitch
2. Define ? Flank Angle

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. What is plug gauge?
4. What is meant by micrometer?
5. What is meant by indicator?
6. What is best ? size wire?
7. Calculate the diameter of the best wire for an M 20 x 25 screws.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. What are the different corrections to be applied in the measurement of effective diameter by the
method of wire?
9. What is floating carriage micrometer?
10. What are the uses of floating carriage micrometer?
11. What are the methods are used for measuring effective diameter?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. Define ? Effective Diameter
13. Define ? Major Diameter
14. Define ? Minor Diameter
15. What are the effects of flank error?
16. Define ? Rake Angle

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17. Define ? Pitch Cylinder
18. What are the effects of pitch error?
19. Define ? Pitch Diameter
20. What is meant by angle of thread?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

37 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.08 MEASUREMENT OF VARIOUS DIMENSIONS USING
COORDINATE MEASURING MACHINE
Aim:
1. To study the construction and operation of coordinate measuring machine
2. To measure the specified dimensions of the given component

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Instruments used:
Coordinate measuring machine, vernier calipers
Diagram:

Theory:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

A coordinate measuring machine (CMM) is a 3D device for measuring the physical and geometrical
characteristics of an object. This machine may be manually controlled by an operator or it may be computer
controlled. Measurements are defined by a probe attached to the three moving axis of this machine X, Y and Z
axes. A coordinate measuring machine (CMM) is also a device used in manufacturing and assembly
processes to test a part or assembly against the design intent. By precisely recording the X, Y and Z

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

coordinates of the target, points are generated which can be analyzed via regression algorithms for the
construction of features. These points are collected by using a probe that is positioned manually by an
38 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

operator or automatically via direct computer control (DCC). DCC CMMs can be programmed to repeatedly

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measure identical parts, thus a CMM is a specialized form of industrial robot.
Parts:
Coordinate measuring machine include three main components:
1. The main structures which include three axes of motion.
2. Probing system

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Data collection and reduction system ? typically includes a machine controller, desktop computer
and application software
Machine description:
1. In modern machines, the gantry type superstructure has two legs and is often called a bridge. This
moves freely along the granite table with one leg following a guide rail attached to one side of the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

granite table. The opposite leg simply rests on the granite table following the vertical surface
contour.
2. Air bearings are fixed for ensuring friction free travel. Compressed air is forced through a series of
very small holes in a flat bearing surface to provide a smooth but controlled air cushion on which the
CMM can move in a frictionless manner.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. The movement of the bridge along the granite table forms one axis of the XY plane. The bridge of
the gantry contains a carriage which traverses between the inside and outside legs and forms the
other X or Y horizontal axis.
4. The third axis of movement (Z axis) is provided by the addition of a vertical quill or spindle which
moves up and down through the center of the carriage. The touch probe forms the sensing device

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

on the end of the quill.
5. The movement of the X, Y and Z axes fully describes the measuring envelope. Some touch probes
are themselves powered rotary devices with the probe tip able to swivel vertically through 90
degrees and through a full 360 degrees rotation.
Uses:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

They are generally used for:
1. Dimensional measurement
2. Profile measurement
3. Angularity or orientation measurement
4. Depth mapping

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Digitizing mapping
6. Shaft measurement
39 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

The machines are available in a wide range of sizes and designs with a variety of different probe

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

technologies. They can be operated manually or automatically through direct computer control (DCC). They
are offered in various configurations such as bench top, free ? standing, handheld and portable.
Procedure:
1. Take at least 8 points on sphere ball attached to the granite table.
2. Fix the object whose dimension needs to be measured using the jigs and fixtures.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Using joystick, move the probe whose tip is made of ruby slowly and carefully to the surface whose
measurements have to be taken.
4. Touch the probe at two places for measurement of a line (starting and ending point).
5. Touch the probe at two places for measurement of a circular profile and for a cylinder touch the
probe at 8 points.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Measure the same profiles again with vernier calipers (length of line, circle diameter, cylinder
diameter) to compare the two readings.
Comments:
1. The machine should be calibrated every time when it is being used.
2. While measuring the profiles, the probe should be moved very slowly as it may damage the ruby if

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

hit with a high force.
3. Care should be taken while performing experiment so that the granite table of the machines should
get any scratches.
4. ?Retract distance? should be fixed according to the space available in the near vicinity of the profile
measurement area.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Observation:
Sl.No. Feature
CMM reading
(mm)
Vernier reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
Form error
(mm)
Difference in two
readings (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 Circle -1
2 Circle -2
3 Circle -3
4 Line
5 Arc

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6
Cone - Diameter
Cone ? Vertex angle
Cone ? Height
7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Cylinder ? Diameter
Cylinder ? Height


40 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Thus the different profile of given object are measured using coordinate measuring machine
Outcome:
Students will be able to measures the geometry of physical objects by sensing discrete points on the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

surface of the object with a probe and they will be able to know the Various types of probes are used in CMMs,
including mechanical, optical, laser, and white light.
Application:
1. Surface Measuring Equipment
2. Photo transistor

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What are the types of measuring machine?
2. What is CMM?
3. What are the types of CMM?
4. What are the advantages of CMM?
5. What are the limitations of CMM?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. What are the possible sources of error in CMM?
7. What is the use of universal measuring machine?
8. What are the applications of CMM?
9. What is the working principle of three axis measuring machine?
10. What is image shearing microscope?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. What is the use of electronic inspection and measuring machine?
12. What are the types of electronic inspection and measuring machine?
13. What is CMM probe?
14. What are the three main probes are available?
15. What are the types of stylus?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

41 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.09 MEASUREMENT OF SURFACE ROUGHNESS UING
TALYSURF INSTRUMENT

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Aim:
To measure the surface roughness using Talysurf instrument
Apparatus required:
Talysurf instrument, work piece, surface plate
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Theory:
On any finished surface, imperfections are bound to be there and these take the form of a succession of
hills and valleys which vary both in height and in spacing and result in a kind of texture which in appearance or
feel is often characteristic of the machining process and accompanying defects. The several kinds of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

departures are there on the surface and these are due to various causes.

42 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Methods of measuring surface roughness:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Surface inspection of comparison methods
2. Direct instrument measurements
In comparative methods the surface texture is assessed by observation of the surface. But these
methods are not reliable as they can be misleading, if comparison is not made with surfaces produced by
same techniques. The various methods available under comparison method are: (i) Touch Inspection

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(ii)Scratch Inspection (iii) Microscopic Inspection (iv) Visual Inspection (v) Surface Photographs (vi) Reflected
Light Intensity Direct Instrument Measurements enable to determine a numerical value of the surface finish of
any surface. Nearly all instruments used are stylus probe type of instruments. This operates on electrical
principle.
Procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Place the finished component on the surface plate.
2. Fix the Talysurf tester to the vernier height gauge using adopter at a convenient height.
3. Make sure that the stylus probe touches the work piece.
4. Fix the sampling length in the tester.
5. Press the power button so that the probe moves on the surface to and fro.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Take the readings of the surface roughness directly from the instrument.
7. Repeat the above process for the remaining specimen and tabulate the readings.
Precautions:
1. The surface to be tested should be cleaned properly.
2. The tester should be fixed to the height gauge properly so that the movement of the probe is exactly

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

parallel to the surface of work.
3. Make sure that the probe gently touches the work.
Tabulation:
S.No
Measurement roughness value,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?m
Sample direction Ra, Rz
Average Ra Average Rz Grade
1.
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

43 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Result:
Thus the surface roughness is checked for different specimens by Talysurf.
Outcome:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for roughness
measurements they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a specific
requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).
Application:
1. Machine Shop

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Quality Department


1. Define ? Actual Size?
2. What is meant by normal surface?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. What is meant by profilo-graph?
4. What is Tomlinson surface meter?
5. What is meant by profile?
6. What are the factors affecting surface roughness?
7. Why the surface texture is control?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Define ? Lay
9. Define ? Surface Texture
10. Define ? Flaws
11. What is sampling length?
12. What are the methods used for evaluating surface finish?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. What is form factor?
14. What are the methods used for measuring surface finish?
15. How will you differentiate smooth surface from flat surface?
16. How surface finish is designated on drawings?
17. Define ? Primary Texture

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

18. Define ? Secondary Texture
19. What are the types of instrument used for measuring surface texture?
20. Define ? waviness

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

44 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.10 MEASUREMENT OF BORE USING DIAL BORE
INDICATOR AND TELESCOPIC GAUGE
Aim:
To determine the diameter of bore by using telescopic gauge and checking the same by using dial bore
indicator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Apparatus required:
Work piece, vernier caliper, telescopic gauge and dial gauge indicator set with anvil.
Diagram:

45 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
Bore gauge measurement:
1. Select the extension rod and washer according to the bore diameter to be measured

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Fix the suitable extension rod and washer with the bore gauge
3. Fix the dial gauge to the bore gauge in its position
4. Insert the bore gauge inside the bore to be measured and hold the gauge in parallel o the axis of the
bore. Ensure that the tips on either side of the bore gauge are in touch with inner wall of the bore
5. Note down the reading in the dial gauge and withdraw the bore gauge from the bore

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Hold the measuring tips of bore gauge between the spindle and anvil of a micrometer and compress
the tips by rotating the thimble till the reading reaches the same one as noted earlier
7. Observe and record the micrometer reading as the bore diameter to be measured
Telescopic gauge measurement:
1. Select the telescopic gauge according to the bore diameter to be measured

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Press the telescopic spindles in the telescopic gauge lock them by locking screw
3. Insert the telescopic gauge inside thee bore to be measured. Release the locking screw to expand
the telescopic spindles outwards inside the bore
4. Hold the telescopic gauge in parallel to the axis of bore axis and ensure that the tips of telescopic
spindles are in touch with the inner wall of the bore

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Lock the telescopic spindles and withdraw it from the bore
46 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

6. Measure the expanded length of the telescopic spindles using micrometer record them as the inner
diameter of the bore

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Practical observations:
Rough measurement of bore using Telescopic gauge:
Least count of micrometer = 0.01 mm
Sl.No.
Micrometer reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total reading
(MSR + TSC * LC) ( mm) Main scale reading (MSR)
(mm)
Thimble scale
coincidence

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
2.

Average reading = ________ mm
Accurate measuring using Bore gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
Micrometer
reading
(d) (mm)
Bore gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

reading
(R1) (mm)
Work piece reading
(R2) (mm)
Final reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d+ (R1 ? R2) * 0.01
(mm)
1.
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Accurate internal diameter of hole using bore gauge = ______ mm

Result
1. Internal diameter of the work piece by using telescopic gauge is ________mm
2. Diameter obtained by using dial gauge indicator is __________________mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Students will be able to measure a bore's size, by transferring the internal dimension to a remote
measuring tool (Telescopic gauge).
Application:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Automobile
2. Quality Department


47 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by bore diameter?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. What is gauge?
3. What is meant by measurement?
4. What is telescope gauge?
5. What is bore gauge?
6. What is contact point?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. What is the principle of bore gauge?
8. What are the applications of telescopic gauge?
9. What types of materials are used in telescopic gauge?
10. What are the types of instrument used to measure bore diameter?
11. What are the applications of bore gauge?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. What are the advantages of bore gauge over telescopic gauge?
13. What are the limitations of bore gauge?
14. What is the working principle of telescopic gauge?
15. What are the disadvantages of telescopic gauge?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

48 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.11 MEASUREMENT OF FORCE USING LOAD CELL
Aim:
To study the characteristic between applied load and the output voltage
Apparatus required:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Trainer kit
2. Multimeter
3. Load cell sensor with setup
4. Weights (5 kg)
5. Power chord

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diagram:

Formulae:
Error (%) = {Applied Voltage ? (Displayed Load)/ Applied Load)} x 100
Block diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Applied DC
Load O/P

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DC Excitation source Transducer
Transducer
Instrumentation
Amplifier

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Gain Amplifier DVM
49 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Interfacing and calibration procedure:
1. Interface the load cell 9 pin ?D? type male connector to 9 pin D type female connector, fixed on the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

module.
2. First unload the beam and nullify the display by using zero adjustment POT
3. Apply the maximum load of 5 kg to the beam and adjust the display to 5 kg by using gain
adjustment POT.
4. After the initial adjustment, the unit should not be disturbed until the completion of the experiment.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Safety precaution:
1. During offset adjustment, the beam should not be loaded.
2. The beam should not be disturbed during the experiment.
3. Remove the load from the beam, after completion of the experiment; otherwise wire wound on the
strain gauge will get damaged.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. If you are getting an unsatisfactory reading, then vary the zero and span POT minimum to
maximum.
5. Maximum load should not exceed 5 kg.
6. Once calibrated, the setting should not be distributed till the end of the experiment.
Procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Install the load cell module and interface the 9 pin D connector with kit.
2. Connect the multimeter in volt mode across T5 and GND for the output voltage measurement.
3. Switch on the module.
4. Initially, unload the beam and nullify the display by using zero adjustment POT (zero calibration).
5. Apply the maximum load of 5 kg to the beam and adjust the display to 5 kg by using gain

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

adjustment POT (gain calibration).
6. Now apply the load to the beam, a force will develop on the beam and measure the output voltage
(V) across T5 and GND.
7. Gradually increase the load and note down the output voltage (V) and applied load.
8. Tabulate the values of displayed load and applied voltage.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. Plot a graph between applied load and output voltage (V).
Note: When 1 kg load is applied to the beam, the displayed voltage is 1 kg.


50 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Applied load
(kg)
Output voltage

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(V)
Displayed load
(kg)
% Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Graph:
1. Applied load (kg) Vs Output Voltage (V)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Actual load (kg) Vs % Error
Result:
Thus the characteristic between applied load and the output voltage was studied.
Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the Sensor device (electro-mechanical) which help us to measure

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

a physical parameter (such as temperature, pressure, force, acceleration etc.) by providing analog input to get
digital output.
Application:
1. Machine Shop
2. Automobile

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by force?
2. Define ? Wheat stone bridge circuit
3. Define ? Load

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. What is meant by deflector?
5. What is meant by force indicator?
6. Define ? Instrumentation
7. How instrumentations are classified?
8. Define ? Transducer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. What is electrical transducer?
10. How transducers are classified?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

51 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.12 MEASUREMENT OF TORQUE USING STRAIN

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

GAUGE
Aim:
To study the characteristics of the developing torque and the signal conditioned sensor output voltage
Apparatus required:
1. Trainer kit

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Digital Multimeter (V)
3. Torque sensor setup
4. Weights (100 gram x 10 Nos.)
5. Power chord
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Interfacing and calibration procedure:
1. Interface the torque sensor 9 pin. ?D? type male connector to ?9? pin ?D? type female connector, fixed
on the module.
2. First, unload the beam and nullify the display by using zero adjustment POT.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Apply the maximum load of 1 kg to the beam and adjust the display to 9.81 Nm by using adjustment
POT.
4. After this initial calibration, the unit should not be disturbed until the completion of the experiment.
52 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Safety precaution:
1. During offset adjustment, the beam should not be loaded.
2. The beam should not be disturbed during the experiment.
3. Remove the beam from the shaft, after completion of the experiment otherwise wire wound on the
strain gauge will get damaged.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. If the displayed torque reading are in negative, change the beam connections in opposite to
previously connected direction.
5. If you are getting an unsatisfactory reading, then vary the zero and span POT minimum to
maximum.
6. Maximum load should not exceed 1 kg.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Once calibrated, the setting should not be disturbed till the end of this experiment.
Procedure:
1. Install the torque sensor setup and interface with kit.
2. Switch ?ON? the module.
3. Connect the Multimeter in millivolts mode T2 and T3 for bridge output voltage measurement POT.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. First, unload the beam and nullify the bridge output voltage by using zero adjustment POT.
5. By applying load to the beam, torque will develop on the shaft and measure the bridge output
voltage (mV) across T2 and T3
6. Gradually increase the force by applying load and note down the bridge output voltage (mV).
7. Tabulate the readings and plot a graph between developed torque versus bridge output voltage

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mV).
Formulae:
Error (%) = {(Actual Torque ? Theoretical Torque)/ Theoretical Torque} x 100
Theoretical Torque = mass (m) x acceleration due to gravity (g) x radial distance
= 1 kg x 9.81 m/s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
x 1 m
= 9.81 Nm
Tabulation:
Sl.No. Theoretical Torque

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(Nm)
Bridge output voltage
(mV)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Model graph:
The graph between developed torque and bridge output voltage is drawn
53 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Developed torque (Nm) Vs Output Voltage (V)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sample reading:
Developed Torque (Nm) = 9.81 Nm
Output Voltage (V) = 5 mV

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Thus the characteristics of the torque developed which is due to force applied to beam and the bridge
output voltage were studied and graph is plotted.
Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the Sensor device (electro-mechanical) which helps us to

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measure the strain by providing analog input to digital output.
Application:
1. Machine Shop
2. Turbine

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

54 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Torque
2. Define ? Twist

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. What are the methods used for measuring torque?
4. Define ? Strain Gauge
5. What is prony brake?
6. What are the modern devices used for measuring torque?
7. What are the elements of strain gauge?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. What is the use of slip ring for measuring torque?
9. What is slip ring?
10. What are the types of torque?
11. What are the types of dynamometer?
12. What are the applications of dynamometer?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. What are the features of dynamometer?
14. What is gauge factor?
15. What are the types of torque measurement?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

55 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.13 MEASUREMENT OF TEMPERATURE USING
THERMOCOUPLE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Aim:
To study the characteristics of thermocouple without compensation
Apparatus required:
1. Trainer kit
2. Thermocouple

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Water bath
4. Thermometer
5. Digital multi meter
6. Power chord
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. Connect the two terminals of the thermocouple across T1 & T2.
2. Position the switch ?SW1? towards ?NO?.
3. Switch ?ON? the unit and note the displayed temperature.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. If there is any difference in displayed temperature at room temperature, adjust the offset knob ?zero?
to set 0
o
C in display.
5. Place the Multimeter across T7 and T8.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Insert the thermocouple and thermometer into water bath.
7. Switch ?ON? the water bath.
8. Note the actual temperature in thermometer and displayed temperature simultaneously.
9. Tabulate the reading and calculate % error using the above formula
FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

V SEMESTER - R 2013

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No. : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LABORATORY MANUAL
2 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

DHANALAKSHMI

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
2. To contribute to the promotion of Academic Excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels
3. To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING


Rendering the services to the global needs of engineering industries by educating students to become

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

professionally sound mechanical engineers of excellent caliber


To produce mechanical engineering technocrats with a perfect knowledge intellectual and hands on
experience and to inculcate the spirit of moral values and ethics to serve the society

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MISSION
MISSION
VISION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION

4 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals
To impart students with fundamental knowledge in mathematics and basic sciences that will mould
them to be successful professionals
2. Core competence

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To provide students with sound knowledge in engineering and experimental skills to identify
complex software problems in industry and to develop a practical solution for them
3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theory and practice which
enable them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and organization and to design

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

products requiring interdisciplinary skills
4. Professional skills
To bestow students with adequate training and provide opportunities to work as team that will build
up their communication skills, individual, leadership and supportive qualities and to enable them to
adapt and to work in ever changing technologies

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Life-long learning
To develop the ability of students to establish themselves as professionals in mechanical
engineering and to create awareness about the need for lifelong learning and pursuing advanced
degrees

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)
On completion of the B.E. (Mechanical) degree, the graduate will be able
a) To apply the basic knowledge of mathematics, science and engineering

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

b) To design and conduct experiments as well as to analyze and interpret data and apply the same in
the career or entrepreneurship
c) To design and develop innovative and creative software applications
d) To understand a complex real world problem and develop an efficient practical solution
e) To create, select and apply appropriate techniques, resources, modern engineering and IT tools

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

f) To understand the role as a professional and give the best to the society
g) To develop a system that will meet expected needs within realistic constraints such as economical
environmental, social, political, ethical, safety and sustainability
h) To communicate effectively and make others understand exactly what they are trying to tell in both
verbal and written forms

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

i) To work in a team as a team member or a leader and make unique contributions and work with
coordination
j) To engage in lifelong learning and exhibit their technical skills
k) To develop and manage projects in multidisciplinary environments

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY



To familiar with different measurement equipment?s and use of this industry for quality inspection

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

List of Experiments
1. Tool Maker?s Microscope
2. Comparator
3. Sine Bar
4. Gear Tooth Vernier Caliper

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Floating gauge Micrometer
6. Coordinate Measuring Machine
7. Surface Finish Measuring Equipment
8. Vernier Height Gauge
9. Bore diameter measurement using telescope gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. Bore diameter measurement using micrometer
11. Force Measurement
12. Torque Measurement
13. Temperature measurement
14. Autocollimator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Ability to handle different measurement tools and perform measurements in quality impulsion
2. Learnt the usage of precision measuring instruments and practiced to take measurements
3. Learnt and practiced to build the required dimensions using slip gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Able to measure the various dimensions of the given specimen using the tool maker?s microscope
5. Able to find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge
6. Able to measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare
7. Learnt to determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen using Gear tooth vernier
8. Able to measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

wire method
9. Learnt to study the construction and operation of coordinate measuring machine
10. Learnt to determine the diameter of bore by using telescopic gauge and dial bore indicator
11. Able to measure the surface roughness using Talysurf instrument
12. Studied the characteristic between applied load and the output volt

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. Learnt the characteristics of developing torque and respective sensor output voltage
14. Studied the characteristics of thermocouple without compensation
15. Able to check the straightness & flatness of the given component by using Autocollimator
16. Learnt to measure the displacement using LVDT and to calibrate it with the millimeter scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OBJECTIVES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OUTCOMES

7 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CONTENTS
Sl. No. Name of the Experiments Page No.
CYCLE ? 1 EXPERIMENTS
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab ? A Study
7
2
To build up the slip gauge for given dimension ? A Study
16

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
Thread parameters measurement using Tool Makers Microscope
20
4
Calibration of dial gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

23
5
Determination of taper angle by sine bar method
26
6

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of gear tooth thickness using gear tooth vernier
29
7
Measurement of thread parameters using floating carriage micrometer
32

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CYCLE ? 2 EXPERIMENTS
8
Measurement of various dimensions using Coordinate Measuring Machine
35
9

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement of surface roughness
39
10
Measurement of bores using dial bore indicator and telescopic gauge
42

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11
Force measurement using load cell
46
12
Torque measurement using strain gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

49
13
Temperature measurement using thermocouple
53
14

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement of alignment using autocollimator
56
ADDITIONAL EXPERIMENT BEYOND THE SYLLABUS
15
Thread parameters measurement using profile projector

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

60
16
Displacement measurement ? linear variable differential transducer (LVDT)
62
PROJECT WORK

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

65


8 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.01 PRECISION MEASURING INSTRUMENT YSED IN
METROLOGY LAB ? A STUDY
Aim:
To study the following instruments and their usage for measuring dimensions of given specimen
1. Vernier caliper

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Micrometer
3. Vernier height gauge
4. Depth micrometer
5. Universal bevel protractor
Apparatus required:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Surface plate, specimen and above instruments
Vernier caliper:
The principle of vernier caliper is to use the minor difference between the sizes two scales or divisions
for measurement. The difference between them can be utilized to enhance the accuracy of measurement. The
vernier caliper essentially consists of two steel rules, sliding along each other.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Parts:
Different parts of the vernier caliper are
1. Beam ? It has main scale.
2. Fixed jaw
3. Sliding or Moving jaw ? It has vernier scale and sliding jaw locking screw.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw knife
edges for internal measurement.
5. Stem or depth bar for depth measurement
Least count:
Least count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm
1 VSD = 0.98 mm
Least count = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


ID

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPTH


OD
Measurement:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Given Vernier caliper can be used for external, internal depth, slot and step measurement.
Measurement principle:
When both jaws contact each other scale shows the zero reading. The finer adjustment of movable jaw
can be done by the fine adjustment screw. First the whole movable jaw assembly is adjusted so that the two
measuring tips just touch the part to be measured. Then the fine adjustment clamp locking screw is tightened.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Final adjustment depending upon the sense of correct feel is made by the adjusting screw. After final
adjustment has been made sliding jaw locking screw is also tightened and the reading is noted.
All the parts of the Vernier caliper are made of good quality steel and measuring faces are hardened.
Types of vernier:
Vernier caliper, electronic vernier caliper, vernier depth caliper

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Main scale
reading (MSR)
(mm)
Vernier scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale
reading (VSR) (mm)
Total reading (MSR
+ VSR)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)

OD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ID


Depth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier height gauge:
Vernier height gauge is a sort of vernier caliper equipped with a special instrument suitable for height
measurement. It is always kept on the surface plate and the use of the surfaces plates as datum surfaces is
very essential.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count:
Least Count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm
1 VSD = 0.98 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least Count (LC) = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm
Parts:
1. Base
2. Beam ? It has main scale.
3. Slider ? It has a vernier scale and slider locking screw.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Scriber
5. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw.


12 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Material:
All the parts of vernier are made of good quality steel and the measuring faces hardened.
Types of vernier gauge:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Analog vernier height gauge
2. Digital vernier height gauge
3. Electronic vernier height gauge
Tabulation:
Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Main scale reading
(MSR)(mm)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(VSR)(mm)
Total reading (MSR +
VSR)(mm)
1.
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.

13 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Outside micrometer:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The micrometer essentially consists of an accurate screw having about 10 or 20 threads per cm. The
end of the screw forms one measuring tip and other measuring tip is constituted by a stationary anvil in the
base of the frame. The screw is threaded for certain length and is plain afterwards. The plain portion is called
spindle and its end is the measuring surface. The spindle is advanced or retracted by turning a thimble
connected to a spindle. The spindle is a slide fit over the barrel and barrel is the fixed part attached with the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

frame. The barrel & thimble are graduated. The pitch of the screw threads is 0.5 mm.

Least count:
Least Count (LC) = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale
= 0.5 / 50 = 0.01 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Parts:
1. Frame
2. Anvil
3. Spindle
4. Spindle lock

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Barrel or outside sleeve
6. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions
7. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.
The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.
14 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement:
It can be used for any external measurement.
Types of micrometer:
1. Outside micrometer, 2. Inside micrometer, 3.Depth micrometer, 4. Stick micrometer, 5. Screw thread

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

micrometer, 6. V ? anvil micrometer, 7. Blade type micrometer, 8. Dial micrometer, 9. Bench micrometer, 10.
Tape screw operated internal micrometer, 11. Groove micrometer, 12. Digital micrometer, 13.Differential screw
micrometer, 14.Adjustable range outside micrometer.
Ratchet stop mechanism:
The object of the ratchet stop is to ensure that same level of torque is applied on the spindle while

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measuring and the sense of the feel of operator is eliminated and consistent readings are obtained. By
providing this arrangement, the ratchet stop is made slip off when the torque applied to rotate the spindle
exceeds the set torque. Thus this provision ensures the application of same amount of torque during the
measurement.
Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) (mm)
Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Head scale reading
(HSR x LC) (mm)
Total Reading (PSR
+ HSR) (mm)
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.

Depth micrometer:
Depth micrometer is a sort of micrometer which is mainly used for measuring depth of holes, so it is
named as depth micrometer.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Parts:
1. Shoulder
2. Spindle
3. Spindle lock
4. Barrel or outside sleeve ? It has pitch scale.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions.
6. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.
The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.
15 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count:
Least Count = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale = 0.50/50
= 0.01 mm
Measurements:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

It can be used for measuring the depth of holes, slots and recessed areas. The pitch of the screw thread
is 0.5 mm. The least count is 0.01 mm. Shoulder acts as a reference surface and is held firmly and
perpendicular to the centre line of the hole. For large range of measurement extension rods are used. In the
barrel the scale is calibrated. The accuracy again depends upon the sense of touch.
Procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

First, calculate the least count of the instrument. Check the zero error. Measure the specimen note
down the main scale reading or the head scale reading. Note down the vernier or head scale coincidence with
main or pitch scale divisions.
Tabulation:
Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) (mm)
Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)
Head scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(HSR x LC) (mm)
Total Reading (PSR
+ HSR) (mm)

1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Universal bevel protractor:

Description:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Bevel protractor is an instrument for measuring the angle between the two faces of a specimen. It
consists of a base plate on which a circular scale is engraved. It is graduated in degrees. An adjustment plate
is attached to a circular plate containing the vernier scale. The adjustable blade can be locked in any position.
The circular plate has 360 division divided into four parts of 90 degrees each. The adjustable parts have 24
divisions of to the right and left sides of zero reading. These scales are used according to the position of the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

specimen with respect to movable scale.
Procedure:
1. Place the specimen whose taper is to be measured between the adjustable plate and movable
blade with one of its face parallel to the base.
2. Lock the adjustable plate in position and note down the main scale reading depending upon the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

direction of rotation of adjustable plate in clockwise or anticlockwise.
3. Note the VSC to the right of zero.
4. Multiply the VSC with the least count and add to MSR to obtain the actual reading.
Least count:
Least Count = 2 MSD ? 1 VSD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 MSD = 1
o
24 VSD = 46
o
=> 1 VSD = 23/12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LC = 2 ? 23/12 = 1/12
o
= 5? (five minutes)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:
Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Main scale reading
(MSR) (deg)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(VSR) (deg)
Total reading (MSR +
VSR)
(deg)
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.
The angle of scriber of the vernier height gauge =
Result:
Thus the various precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab are studied and the specimen
dimensions are recorded.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for linear, angular,
roundness and roughness measurements they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring
instrument according to a specific requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).
Application:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Quality Department


1. Define ? Metrology
2. Define ? Inspection

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. What are the needs of inspection in industries?
4. What are the various methods involving the measurement?
5. Define ? Precision
6. Define ? Accuracy
7. Define ? Calibration

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Define ? Repeatability
9. Define ? Magnification
10. Define ? Error
11. Define ? Systematic Error
12. Define ? Random Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. Define ? Parallax Error
14. Define ? Environmental Error
15. Define ? Cosine Error
Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

18 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.02 BUILD UP THE SLIP GAUGE FOR GIVEN DIMENSION
? A STUDY
Aim:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To build up the slip gauge for given dimension
Apparatus required:
1. Slip gauges set
2. Surface plate
3. Soft cloth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diagram:

Description:
Slip gauge are universally accepted standard of length in industry. They are the working standard for
linear dimension. These were invented by a Swedish Engineer, C.E. Johansson. They are used

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. For direct precise measurement where the accuracy of the workpiece demand it.
2. For use with high- magnification comparators to establish the size of the gauge blocks in general
use.
3. Gauge blocks are also used for many other purposes such as checking the accuracy of measuring
instrument or setting up a comparator to a specific dimension, enabling a batch of component to be

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

quickly and accurately checked or indeed in any situation where there is need to refer to standard of
known length these blocks are rectangular.
19 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Most gauge blocks are produced from high grade steel, hardened and established by a heat treatment

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

process to give a high degree of dimensional stability. Gauge blocks are also manufactured from tungsten
carbide which is an extremely hard and wear resistant material. The measuring faces have a lapped finish.
The faces are perfectly flat and parallel to one another with a high degree of accuracy. Each block has an
extremely high dimensional accuracy at 20
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C.
These slip gauge are available in variety of selected sets both in inch units and metric units. Letter ?E? is
used for inch units and ?M? is used for metric standard number of pieces in a set following the letter E or M. For
example EBI refers to a set whose blocks are in metric units and are 83 in number. Each block dimensions is
printed on anyone of its face itself the size of any required standard being made up by combining the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

appropriate number of these different size blocks.
If two gauges are slid and twisted together under pressure they will firmly join together. This process,
known as wringing, is very useful because it enables several gauge blocks to be assembled together to
produce a required size. In fact the success of precision measurement by slip gauges depends on the
phenomenon of wringing.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

First the gauge is oscillated slightly with very light pressure over other gauge so as to detect pressure at
any foreign particles between the surfaces. One gauge is placed perpendicular to other using standard
gauging pressure and rotary motion is applied until the blocks are lined up.
Procedure:
1. Build the given dimension by wringing minimum number of slip gauges.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Note the given dimension and choose the minimum possible slip gauge available in the set so as to
accommodate the last decimal value. The minimum slip gauge value dimension available i.e., 1.12
mm must be chosen followed by 1.5 mm thick gauge block.
3. Follow the above steps to build up the slip gauge of any dimension.
Precautions:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Slip gauges should be handled very carefully placed gently and should never be dropped.
2. Whenever a slip gauge is being removed from the set, its dimensions are noted and must be
replaced into the set at its appropriate place only.
3. Correct procedure must be followed in wringing and also in removing the gauge blocks.
4. They should be cleaned well before use and petroleum jelly is applied after use.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

20 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Range (mm) Increment (mm) No. of pieces

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total = ____________ Pieces
Total length of slip gauge = ________ mm
Given diameter Slip gauges used Obtained dimensions

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Slip gauge set is studied and the given dimensions are building up by wringing minimum number of slip
gauges.
Outcome:
Students will be able to select proper measuring instrument and know requirement of calibration, errors
in measurement etc. They can perform accurate measurements.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Why C.I. is preferred material for surface plates and tables?
2. Why V ? blocks are generally manufactured in pairs?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Why micrometer is required to be tested for accuracy?
4. Define ? Linear Measurement
5. List the linear measuring instrument according to their accuracy.
6. Define ? Least Count
7. What are the uses of vernier depth gauge?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. What are the uses of feeler gauges?
9. What are the uses of straight edge?
10. What are the uses of angle plate?
11. What are the uses of V ? block?
12. What are the uses of combination square?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. What precautions should be taken while using slip gauges?
14. What is wringing?
15. Why the slip gauges are termed as ?End standard?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

22 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.03 THREAD PARAMETERS MEASUREMENT USING
TOOL MAKERS MICROSCOPE
Aim:
To study the tool makers microscope and in the process measure the various dimensions of the given
specimen

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Apparatus required:
1. Tool makers microscope
2. Specimen
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
The tool maker?s microscope is designed for measurement of parts of complex forms; for example,
profile of a tool having external threads. It can also be used for measuring centre to centre distance of the
holes in any plane as well as the coordinates of the outline of a complex template gauge, using the
coordinates measuring system.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

23 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Basically it consists of an optical head which can be adjusted vertically along the ways of supporting
column. The optical head can be clamped at any position by a screw. On the work table (which as a circular
base in which there are graduations) the part to be inspected is placed. The table has a compound slide by

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

means of which the part can be measured. For giving these two movements, there are two micrometer screws
having thimble scales and verniers. At the back of the base light source is arranged that provides horizontal
beam of light, reflected from a mirror by 90 degrees upwards towards the table. The beam of light passes
through the transparent glass plate on which flat plates can be checked are placed. Observations are made
through the eyepiece of the optical head.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. Place the given specimen on the work table and switch on all the three light sources and adjust the
intensity of the light source until a clean image of the cross wires and specimen are seen through
the eyepiece.
2. Coincide one of the two extreme edges between which the measurement has to be taken with

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

vertical or horizontal cross wires and depending upon the other image coincide with the same cross
wires by moving the above device. Note the reading.The difference between the two readings gives
the value of the required measurement.
3. Note the experiment specimen and the readings.
4. Tabulate the different measurements measured from the specimen.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of thread parameters
Magnification =
S.No. Parameters
Magnified value
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Actual value
(mm)
1. Outer diameter (O.D)

2. Internal diameter (I.D)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Pitch

4. Flank angle

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Included angle of the tool was measured using tool maker?s microscope and various dimensions of the
given specimen are measured.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

24 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the various parameters of thread and select proper measuring

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

instrument and know requirement of calibration, errors in measurement etc. They can perform accurate
measurements.
Application:
1. Machine Shop
2. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by tool maker?s microscope?
2. What is the light used in tool maker?s microscope?
3. What are the various characteristics that you would measure in a screw thread?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. What are the instruments that are required for measuring screw thread?
5. Define ? Pitch
6. What are the causes of pitch error?
7. Define ? Flank
8. What are the effects of flank angle error?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. What is progressive error?
10. What is periodic error?
11. What is drunken error?
12. What is erratic error?
13. What are the applications of tool maker?s microscope?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. What are the limitations of tool maker?s microscope?
15. What are the advantages of tool maker?s microscope?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

25 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.04 CALIBRATION OF DIAL GAUGE USING SLIP GAUGE
Aim:
To find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge
Apparatus required:
Dial gauge, magnetic stand, slip gauge, and surface plate

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diagram:

Description:
The dial test indicator is a precision measuring instrument which can convert linear motion into angular
motion by means of transmission mechanics of rack and pinion and can be used to measure linear vibration

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

and errors of shape.
This instrument has the features such as good appearance, compact size, light weight, high precision,
reasonable construction, constant measuring face etc. Rigidity of all parts is excellent. Probe is tipped with
carbide balls. A shock proof mechanism is provided for those with larger measuring range.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

26 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Types of dial indicator:
1. Plunger type
2. Lever type

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Plunger type dial indicator has a resolution counter and each division in main scale is 0.01 mm. In lever
type dial test indicator is replaced by ball type stylus.
Procedure:
1. Fix the dial gauge to the stand rigidly and place the stand on the surface plate.
2. Set the plunger of dial gauge to first touch the upper surface of standard slip gauge and set indicator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

to zero.
3. Raise then the plunger by pulling the screw above the dial scale.
4. Place the standard slip gauge underneath the plunger.
5. Release the plunger and let it to touch the standard slip gauge.
6. Note the reading on the dial scale.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Formulae:
The standard error of dial gauge is calculated by the formula

Tabulation:
S.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Slip gauge reading ?x?
(mm)
Dial gauge reading
(mm)
(x? - x)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2


x? (x? - x)
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2


Result:
Thus the accuracy and standard error of dial gauge is found. The standard error of given dial gauge is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

__________.

27 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Outcome:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Students will be able to check the variation in tolerance during the inspection process of a
machined part, measure the deflection of a beam or ring under laboratory conditions, as well as many
other situations where a small measurement needs to be registered or indicated
Application:
1. Milling Machine

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Analog versus digital/electronic readout


1. What is comparator?
2. What are the types of comparators?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. What is the LC for comparators?
4. What are the applications of comparator?
5. What is meant by plunger?
6. What are the types of dial indicators?
7. Why a revolution counter is not provided in lever type dial test indicator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Draw a line diagram of the operating mechanism of plunger type dial test indicator.
9. Explain the term magnification of a dial indicator.
10. What are the uses of dial test indicator?
11. What are the practical applications of dial test indicator?
12. What precautions should be taken while using dial test indicator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. What are the desirable qualities of a dial test indicator?
14. What are the advantages of dial test indicator?
15. What are the limitations of dial test indicator?
16. Distinguish between comparator and measuring instrument.
17. What are the advantages of electrical comparator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

18. What are the advantages of optical comparator?
19. What are the uses of comparator?
20. What are the advantages and disadvantages of mechanical comparator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

28 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.05 DETERMINATION OF TAPER ANGLE BY SINE BAR
METHOD
Aim:
To measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Apparatus required:
Sine bar, slip gauges, dial gauge with stand, micrometer, surface plate, bevel protractor, vernier caliper
Diagram:

Description:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The sine bar principle uses the ratio of the length of two sides of a right triangle. It may be noted that
devices operating on sine principle are capable of ?self-generation?. The measurement is restricted to 45
o
from
accuracy point of view. Sine bar itself is not a measuring instrument.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Accuracy requirements of sine bar:
1. The axes of the rollers must be parallel to each other and the centre distance L must be precisely
known.
2. The sine bar must be flat and parallel to the plane connecting the axes of the rollers.
3. The rollers must be of identical diameters and must have within a close tolerance.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

29 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Fix the dial gaugeon the magnetic stand and place the magnetic stand on the surface plate.Check
the parallelism of the sine bar.
2. Place the given specimen above the sine bar and place the dial gauge on top of the specimen.
Adjustthe dial gauge for zero deflection.
3. Raise the front end of the sine bar with slip gauges until the work surface is parallel to the datum

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

surface.
4. Check the parallelism using dial gauge.
5. Measure the distance between the centres of the sine bar rollers as ?L? and note the height of the
slip gauge as ?H?.
6. Note the included angle of the specimen.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Formulae:
Sin ? = H/L where ? = Included angle of the specimen
H = Height of slip gauges
L = Distance between the centre of rollers
Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

S.No. L (mm) H (mm) Taper angle ( ?)
1.
2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
The taper angle of the given specimen using sine bar was found to be =
Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for angular measurements
and they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a specific

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).

Application:
1. Flat Surface
2. Granite

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

30 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. List out the various angle measuring instruments.
2. What is the working principles sine bar?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. How is a sine bar used to measure the angle?
4. What is the application of sine bar?
5. What is the material of sine bar?
6. Why sine bar is not preferred to use for measuring angles more than 45
0

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
7. What are the features of sine bar?
8. A 100 mm sine bar is to be set up to an angle of 33
0
, determine the slip gauges needed from 87

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

pieces set.
9. What are the various instruments used for measuring angles?
10. What is sine bar?
11. How sine bar is used for angle measurement?
12. Explain how sine bar is used to measure angle of small size component.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. Explain how sine bar is used to measure angle of large size component.
14. What are the various types of sine bar?
15. What are the limitations of sine bar?
16. What is sine center?
17. What is sine table?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

18. What are the possible sources of errors in angular measurement by sine bar?
19. What are angle gauges?
20. How angle gauges are used for measuring angles?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

31 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.06 DETERMINATION OF GEAR TOOTH THICKNESS
USING GEAR TOOTH VERNIER

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Aim:
To determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen and to draw the graph between the tooth
number and the error in thickness
Apparatus required:
Gear tooth vernier, specimen, surface plate and vernier caliper

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diagram:

Description:
The tooth thickness, in general, is measured at pitch circle since gear tooth thickness varies from the tip
to the base circle of the tooth. This is possible only when there is an arrangement to fix that position for this

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measurement by the gear tooth vernier. It has two vernier scales; one is vertical and other is horizontal.
Procedure:
32 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

1. Measure initially the outside diameter of the given gear specimen by means of a vertical calculation

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

of vernier caliper. Note the number of teeth. Calculate the module (m) using the formula.

M = OD/ (Z+2) where z ? number of teeth
M - Module
2. Calculate the theoretical tooth thickness (t) by t = z * m* sin (90/z).

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Set the vernier scale for the height and tighten.
4. Measure the thickness of each tooth using the horizontal scale. This is measured thickness. It can
be positive or negative.
H = m x [1+ Z/2 (1- Cos 90/Z)]
5. Calculate the error in the tooth thickness i.e,1. measured thickness ? Theoretical thickness

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Draw the graph between the tooth number and the error in thickness.
Tabulation:
Tooth
Number
Measured Thickness

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
Theoretical Thickness (mm)
Error in tooth thickness
(mm)
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
3

Tooth
Number

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MSR
(mm)
VSC

VSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
TR
(mm)
1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3

Graph:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Error



Tooth No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

33 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


Result:
The theoretical experiment value of gear tooth thickness is obtained and graph is drawn between error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

and tooth number in tooth thickness
Theoretical tooth thickness =
Experimental tooth thickness =
Error in tooth thickness =
Outcome:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Students will be able to understand the basic measurement units and able to calibrate various
measuring parameters of the gear.
Application:
1. Gear Component
2. Mining

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Calculate the setting of a gear tooth vernier caliper for a straight spur gear having 40 teeth and
module 4.
2. What is the importance of chordal depth?
3. Define ? Chordal width

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. How is the actual profile of the gear tooth determined?
5. What are the manufacturing errors in gear element?
6. Define ? Addendum
7. Define ? Dedendum
8. Define ? Flank of tooth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. Define ? Pitch
10. Define ? Pitch Circle
11. Define ? Crest of tooth
12. Define ? Root of tooth
13. Define ? Base Circle

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. Define ? Module
15. Define ? Angle of Obliquity


Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

34 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.07 MEASUREMENT OF THREAD PARAMETER USING
FLOATING CARRIAGE MICROMETER

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Aim:
To measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two wire
method
Apparatus required:
1. Floating carriage micrometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Standard wire
3. Given specimen (screw thread)
Diagram:

Description of floating carriage micrometer:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

It consists of three main units. A base casting carries a pair of centres on which threaded work piece is
to be mounted. Another carriage capable of moving towards centre is mounted exactly above. In this carriage
one head with thimble to measure up to 0.002 mm is provided and at the other side of head a fiducial indicator
is provided to indicate zero position.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

35 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. For two wire method, place the standard wire over a thread of the screw at opposite sides.
2. For three wire method, place two standard wires on two successive threads and the third wire
placed opposite sides of the thread.
3. Measure the diameter over wires (M) using floating carriage micrometer.
4. Repeat this procedure at various positions of the screw and take different readings.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Formulae:
1. For best wire size, d = P / 2 Cos (x/2)
Where, P = Pitch
d= wire size
x = angle between two threads

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= 60
o
for metric thread
2. Actual effective diameter, E.A = M ? 3d + 0.866 p
3. Nominal effective diameter, EN = D ? 0.648 p

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Max. wire size = 1.01 p
5. Min. wire size = 0.505 p
6. Best wire size = 0.577 p
M = Diameter over wires
P = Pitch of thread

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

For metric thread:
Actual effective diameter (EA) = M ? 3d + 0.866 p
Where d = actual diameter of wire
Determination of actual and nominal effective diameter of the screw thread:
Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Nominal
Diameter (D)
(mm)
Diameter over
wire ?M?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
Actual eff.
Diameter E.A
(mm)
Nominal eff.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diameter E.N
(mm)
Error in effective
diameter
(E.A ? E.N)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
1.
2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

36 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Result:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thus the actual and nominal effective diameter is measured using three wire method and the error in
effective diameter of screw is determined.
Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for roundness
measurements and they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

specific requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).
Application:
1. Wholse
2. Maxxis Rubber India

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Pitch
2. Define ? Flank Angle
3. What is plug gauge?
4. What is meant by micrometer?
5. What is meant by indicator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. What is best ? size wire?
7. Calculate the diameter of the best wire for an M 20 x 25 screws.
8. What are the different corrections to be applied in the measurement of effective diameter by the
method of wire?
9. What is floating carriage micrometer?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. What are the uses of floating carriage micrometer?
11. What are the methods are used for measuring effective diameter?
12. Define ? Effective Diameter
13. Define ? Major Diameter
14. Define ? Minor Diameter

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15. What are the effects of flank error?
16. Define ? Rake Angle
17. Define ? Pitch Cylinder
18. What are the effects of pitch error?
19. Define ? Pitch Diameter

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

20. What is meant by angle of thread?


Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

37 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.08 MEASUREMENT OF VARIOUS DIMENSIONS USING
COORDINATE MEASURING MACHINE
Aim:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. To study the construction and operation of coordinate measuring machine
2. To measure the specified dimensions of the given component
Instruments used:
Coordinate measuring machine, vernier calipers
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Theory:
A coordinate measuring machine (CMM) is a 3D device for measuring the physical and geometrical
characteristics of an object. This machine may be manually controlled by an operator or it may be computer
controlled. Measurements are defined by a probe attached to the three moving axis of this machine X, Y and Z

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

axes. A coordinate measuring machine (CMM) is also a device used in manufacturing and assembly
processes to test a part or assembly against the design intent. By precisely recording the X, Y and Z
coordinates of the target, points are generated which can be analyzed via regression algorithms for the
construction of features. These points are collected by using a probe that is positioned manually by an
38 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

operator or automatically via direct computer control (DCC). DCC CMMs can be programmed to repeatedly
measure identical parts, thus a CMM is a specialized form of industrial robot.
Parts:
Coordinate measuring machine include three main components:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. The main structures which include three axes of motion.
2. Probing system
3. Data collection and reduction system ? typically includes a machine controller, desktop computer
and application software
Machine description:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. In modern machines, the gantry type superstructure has two legs and is often called a bridge. This
moves freely along the granite table with one leg following a guide rail attached to one side of the
granite table. The opposite leg simply rests on the granite table following the vertical surface
contour.
2. Air bearings are fixed for ensuring friction free travel. Compressed air is forced through a series of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

very small holes in a flat bearing surface to provide a smooth but controlled air cushion on which the
CMM can move in a frictionless manner.
3. The movement of the bridge along the granite table forms one axis of the XY plane. The bridge of
the gantry contains a carriage which traverses between the inside and outside legs and forms the
other X or Y horizontal axis.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. The third axis of movement (Z axis) is provided by the addition of a vertical quill or spindle which
moves up and down through the center of the carriage. The touch probe forms the sensing device
on the end of the quill.
5. The movement of the X, Y and Z axes fully describes the measuring envelope. Some touch probes
are themselves powered rotary devices with the probe tip able to swivel vertically through 90

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

degrees and through a full 360 degrees rotation.
Uses:
They are generally used for:
1. Dimensional measurement
2. Profile measurement

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Angularity or orientation measurement
4. Depth mapping
5. Digitizing mapping
6. Shaft measurement
39 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The machines are available in a wide range of sizes and designs with a variety of different probe
technologies. They can be operated manually or automatically through direct computer control (DCC). They
are offered in various configurations such as bench top, free ? standing, handheld and portable.
Procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Take at least 8 points on sphere ball attached to the granite table.
2. Fix the object whose dimension needs to be measured using the jigs and fixtures.
3. Using joystick, move the probe whose tip is made of ruby slowly and carefully to the surface whose
measurements have to be taken.
4. Touch the probe at two places for measurement of a line (starting and ending point).

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Touch the probe at two places for measurement of a circular profile and for a cylinder touch the
probe at 8 points.
6. Measure the same profiles again with vernier calipers (length of line, circle diameter, cylinder
diameter) to compare the two readings.
Comments:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. The machine should be calibrated every time when it is being used.
2. While measuring the profiles, the probe should be moved very slowly as it may damage the ruby if
hit with a high force.
3. Care should be taken while performing experiment so that the granite table of the machines should
get any scratches.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. ?Retract distance? should be fixed according to the space available in the near vicinity of the profile
measurement area.
Observation:
Sl.No. Feature
CMM reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
Vernier reading
(mm)
Form error
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Difference in two
readings (mm)
1 Circle -1
2 Circle -2
3 Circle -3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4 Line
5 Arc
6
Cone - Diameter
Cone ? Vertex angle

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Cone ? Height
7
Cylinder ? Diameter
Cylinder ? Height

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

40 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Result:
Thus the different profile of given object are measured using coordinate measuring machine

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Students will be able to measures the geometry of physical objects by sensing discrete points on the
surface of the object with a probe and they will be able to know the Various types of probes are used in CMMs,
including mechanical, optical, laser, and white light.
Application:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Surface Measuring Equipment
2. Photo transistor

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What are the types of measuring machine?
2. What is CMM?
3. What are the types of CMM?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. What are the advantages of CMM?
5. What are the limitations of CMM?
6. What are the possible sources of error in CMM?
7. What is the use of universal measuring machine?
8. What are the applications of CMM?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. What is the working principle of three axis measuring machine?
10. What is image shearing microscope?
11. What is the use of electronic inspection and measuring machine?
12. What are the types of electronic inspection and measuring machine?
13. What is CMM probe?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. What are the three main probes are available?
15. What are the types of stylus?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

41 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.09 MEASUREMENT OF SURFACE ROUGHNESS UING
TALYSURF INSTRUMENT
Aim:
To measure the surface roughness using Talysurf instrument
Apparatus required:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Talysurf instrument, work piece, surface plate
Diagram:

Theory:
On any finished surface, imperfections are bound to be there and these take the form of a succession of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

hills and valleys which vary both in height and in spacing and result in a kind of texture which in appearance or
feel is often characteristic of the machining process and accompanying defects. The several kinds of
departures are there on the surface and these are due to various causes.

42 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Methods of measuring surface roughness:
1. Surface inspection of comparison methods
2. Direct instrument measurements
In comparative methods the surface texture is assessed by observation of the surface. But these

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

methods are not reliable as they can be misleading, if comparison is not made with surfaces produced by
same techniques. The various methods available under comparison method are: (i) Touch Inspection
(ii)Scratch Inspection (iii) Microscopic Inspection (iv) Visual Inspection (v) Surface Photographs (vi) Reflected
Light Intensity Direct Instrument Measurements enable to determine a numerical value of the surface finish of
any surface. Nearly all instruments used are stylus probe type of instruments. This operates on electrical

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

principle.
Procedure:
1. Place the finished component on the surface plate.
2. Fix the Talysurf tester to the vernier height gauge using adopter at a convenient height.
3. Make sure that the stylus probe touches the work piece.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Fix the sampling length in the tester.
5. Press the power button so that the probe moves on the surface to and fro.
6. Take the readings of the surface roughness directly from the instrument.
7. Repeat the above process for the remaining specimen and tabulate the readings.
Precautions:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. The surface to be tested should be cleaned properly.
2. The tester should be fixed to the height gauge properly so that the movement of the probe is exactly
parallel to the surface of work.
3. Make sure that the probe gently touches the work.
Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

S.No
Measurement roughness value,
?m
Sample direction Ra, Rz
Average Ra Average Rz Grade

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

43 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Result:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thus the surface roughness is checked for different specimens by Talysurf.
Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for roughness
measurements they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a specific
requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Machine Shop
2. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Actual Size?
2. What is meant by normal surface?
3. What is meant by profilo-graph?
4. What is Tomlinson surface meter?
5. What is meant by profile?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. What are the factors affecting surface roughness?
7. Why the surface texture is control?
8. Define ? Lay
9. Define ? Surface Texture
10. Define ? Flaws

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. What is sampling length?
12. What are the methods used for evaluating surface finish?
13. What is form factor?
14. What are the methods used for measuring surface finish?
15. How will you differentiate smooth surface from flat surface?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16. How surface finish is designated on drawings?
17. Define ? Primary Texture
18. Define ? Secondary Texture
19. What are the types of instrument used for measuring surface texture?
20. Define ? waviness

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

44 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.10 MEASUREMENT OF BORE USING DIAL BORE
INDICATOR AND TELESCOPIC GAUGE
Aim:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To determine the diameter of bore by using telescopic gauge and checking the same by using dial bore
indicator
Apparatus required:
Work piece, vernier caliper, telescopic gauge and dial gauge indicator set with anvil.
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

45 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


Procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Bore gauge measurement:
1. Select the extension rod and washer according to the bore diameter to be measured
2. Fix the suitable extension rod and washer with the bore gauge
3. Fix the dial gauge to the bore gauge in its position
4. Insert the bore gauge inside the bore to be measured and hold the gauge in parallel o the axis of the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

bore. Ensure that the tips on either side of the bore gauge are in touch with inner wall of the bore
5. Note down the reading in the dial gauge and withdraw the bore gauge from the bore
6. Hold the measuring tips of bore gauge between the spindle and anvil of a micrometer and compress
the tips by rotating the thimble till the reading reaches the same one as noted earlier
7. Observe and record the micrometer reading as the bore diameter to be measured

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Telescopic gauge measurement:
1. Select the telescopic gauge according to the bore diameter to be measured
2. Press the telescopic spindles in the telescopic gauge lock them by locking screw
3. Insert the telescopic gauge inside thee bore to be measured. Release the locking screw to expand
the telescopic spindles outwards inside the bore

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Hold the telescopic gauge in parallel to the axis of bore axis and ensure that the tips of telescopic
spindles are in touch with the inner wall of the bore
5. Lock the telescopic spindles and withdraw it from the bore
46 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Measure the expanded length of the telescopic spindles using micrometer record them as the inner
diameter of the bore
Practical observations:
Rough measurement of bore using Telescopic gauge:
Least count of micrometer = 0.01 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
Micrometer reading
Total reading
(MSR + TSC * LC) ( mm) Main scale reading (MSR)
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thimble scale
coincidence
1.
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Average reading = ________ mm
Accurate measuring using Bore gauge
Sl.No.
Micrometer
reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(d) (mm)
Bore gauge
reading
(R1) (mm)
Work piece reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(R2) (mm)
Final reading
d+ (R1 ? R2) * 0.01
(mm)
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.

Accurate internal diameter of hole using bore gauge = ______ mm

Result

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Internal diameter of the work piece by using telescopic gauge is ________mm
2. Diameter obtained by using dial gauge indicator is __________________mm

Outcome:
Students will be able to measure a bore's size, by transferring the internal dimension to a remote

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measuring tool (Telescopic gauge).
Application:
1. Automobile
2. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

47 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by bore diameter?
2. What is gauge?
3. What is meant by measurement?
4. What is telescope gauge?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. What is bore gauge?
6. What is contact point?
7. What is the principle of bore gauge?
8. What are the applications of telescopic gauge?
9. What types of materials are used in telescopic gauge?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. What are the types of instrument used to measure bore diameter?
11. What are the applications of bore gauge?
12. What are the advantages of bore gauge over telescopic gauge?
13. What are the limitations of bore gauge?
14. What is the working principle of telescopic gauge?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15. What are the disadvantages of telescopic gauge?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

48 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.11 MEASUREMENT OF FORCE USING LOAD CELL
Aim:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To study the characteristic between applied load and the output voltage
Apparatus required:
1. Trainer kit
2. Multimeter
3. Load cell sensor with setup

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Weights (5 kg)
5. Power chord
Diagram:

Formulae:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Error (%) = {Applied Voltage ? (Displayed Load)/ Applied Load)} x 100
Block diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Applied DC
Load O/P

DC Excitation source Transducer
Transducer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Instrumentation
Amplifier
Gain Amplifier DVM
49 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Interfacing and calibration procedure:
1. Interface the load cell 9 pin ?D? type male connector to 9 pin D type female connector, fixed on the
module.
2. First unload the beam and nullify the display by using zero adjustment POT
3. Apply the maximum load of 5 kg to the beam and adjust the display to 5 kg by using gain

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

adjustment POT.
4. After the initial adjustment, the unit should not be disturbed until the completion of the experiment.
Safety precaution:
1. During offset adjustment, the beam should not be loaded.
2. The beam should not be disturbed during the experiment.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Remove the load from the beam, after completion of the experiment; otherwise wire wound on the
strain gauge will get damaged.
4. If you are getting an unsatisfactory reading, then vary the zero and span POT minimum to
maximum.
5. Maximum load should not exceed 5 kg.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Once calibrated, the setting should not be distributed till the end of the experiment.
Procedure:
1. Install the load cell module and interface the 9 pin D connector with kit.
2. Connect the multimeter in volt mode across T5 and GND for the output voltage measurement.
3. Switch on the module.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Initially, unload the beam and nullify the display by using zero adjustment POT (zero calibration).
5. Apply the maximum load of 5 kg to the beam and adjust the display to 5 kg by using gain
adjustment POT (gain calibration).
6. Now apply the load to the beam, a force will develop on the beam and measure the output voltage
(V) across T5 and GND.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Gradually increase the load and note down the output voltage (V) and applied load.
8. Tabulate the values of displayed load and applied voltage.
9. Plot a graph between applied load and output voltage (V).
Note: When 1 kg load is applied to the beam, the displayed voltage is 1 kg.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

50 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:
Applied load

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(kg)
Output voltage
(V)
Displayed load
(kg)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

% Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Graph:
1. Applied load (kg) Vs Output Voltage (V)
2. Actual load (kg) Vs % Error
Result:
Thus the characteristic between applied load and the output voltage was studied.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the Sensor device (electro-mechanical) which help us to measure
a physical parameter (such as temperature, pressure, force, acceleration etc.) by providing analog input to get
digital output.
Application:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Machine Shop
2. Automobile


1. What is meant by force?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Define ? Wheat stone bridge circuit
3. Define ? Load
4. What is meant by deflector?
5. What is meant by force indicator?
6. Define ? Instrumentation

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. How instrumentations are classified?
8. Define ? Transducer
9. What is electrical transducer?
10. How transducers are classified?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

51 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.12 MEASUREMENT OF TORQUE USING STRAIN
GAUGE
Aim:
To study the characteristics of the developing torque and the signal conditioned sensor output voltage

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Apparatus required:
1. Trainer kit
2. Digital Multimeter (V)
3. Torque sensor setup
4. Weights (100 gram x 10 Nos.)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Power chord
Diagram:

Interfacing and calibration procedure:
1. Interface the torque sensor 9 pin. ?D? type male connector to ?9? pin ?D? type female connector, fixed

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

on the module.
2. First, unload the beam and nullify the display by using zero adjustment POT.
3. Apply the maximum load of 1 kg to the beam and adjust the display to 9.81 Nm by using adjustment
POT.
4. After this initial calibration, the unit should not be disturbed until the completion of the experiment.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

52 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Safety precaution:
1. During offset adjustment, the beam should not be loaded.
2. The beam should not be disturbed during the experiment.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Remove the beam from the shaft, after completion of the experiment otherwise wire wound on the
strain gauge will get damaged.
4. If the displayed torque reading are in negative, change the beam connections in opposite to
previously connected direction.
5. If you are getting an unsatisfactory reading, then vary the zero and span POT minimum to

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

maximum.
6. Maximum load should not exceed 1 kg.
7. Once calibrated, the setting should not be disturbed till the end of this experiment.
Procedure:
1. Install the torque sensor setup and interface with kit.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Switch ?ON? the module.
3. Connect the Multimeter in millivolts mode T2 and T3 for bridge output voltage measurement POT.
4. First, unload the beam and nullify the bridge output voltage by using zero adjustment POT.
5. By applying load to the beam, torque will develop on the shaft and measure the bridge output
voltage (mV) across T2 and T3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Gradually increase the force by applying load and note down the bridge output voltage (mV).
7. Tabulate the readings and plot a graph between developed torque versus bridge output voltage
(mV).
Formulae:
Error (%) = {(Actual Torque ? Theoretical Torque)/ Theoretical Torque} x 100

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Theoretical Torque = mass (m) x acceleration due to gravity (g) x radial distance
= 1 kg x 9.81 m/s
2
x 1 m
= 9.81 Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Sl.No. Theoretical Torque
(Nm)
Bridge output voltage
(mV)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Model graph:
The graph between developed torque and bridge output voltage is drawn
53 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Developed torque (Nm) Vs Output Voltage (V)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sample reading:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Developed Torque (Nm) = 9.81 Nm
Output Voltage (V) = 5 mV
Result:
Thus the characteristics of the torque developed which is due to force applied to beam and the bridge
output voltage were studied and graph is plotted.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the Sensor device (electro-mechanical) which helps us to
measure the strain by providing analog input to digital output.
Application:
1. Machine Shop

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Turbine

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

54 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Torque
2. Define ? Twist
3. What are the methods used for measuring torque?
4. Define ? Strain Gauge
5. What is prony brake?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. What are the modern devices used for measuring torque?
7. What are the elements of strain gauge?
8. What is the use of slip ring for measuring torque?
9. What is slip ring?
10. What are the types of torque?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. What are the types of dynamometer?
12. What are the applications of dynamometer?
13. What are the features of dynamometer?
14. What is gauge factor?
15. What are the types of torque measurement?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

55 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.13 MEASUREMENT OF TEMPERATURE USING
THERMOCOUPLE
Aim:
To study the characteristics of thermocouple without compensation
Apparatus required:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Trainer kit
2. Thermocouple
3. Water bath
4. Thermometer
5. Digital multi meter

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Power chord
Diagram:

Procedure:
1. Connect the two terminals of the thermocouple across T1 & T2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Position the switch ?SW1? towards ?NO?.
3. Switch ?ON? the unit and note the displayed temperature.
4. If there is any difference in displayed temperature at room temperature, adjust the offset knob ?zero?
to set 0
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C in display.
5. Place the Multimeter across T7 and T8.
6. Insert the thermocouple and thermometer into water bath.
7. Switch ?ON? the water bath.
8. Note the actual temperature in thermometer and displayed temperature simultaneously.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. Tabulate the reading and calculate % error using the above formula
56 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

10. Plot the graph actual temperature Vs % error
Formulae:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Error (%) = {(Displayed Temperature ? Actual Temp)/ Actual Temp} x 100

Tabulation:
Actual Temperature
(

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C)
Displayed Temperature
(
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C)
% Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Graph
Temperature Vs % Error
Result:
Thus the characteristics of the thermocouple without compensation were studied and graph is plotted.
Outcome:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Students will be able to understand the Sensor device (electro-mechanical) which help us to measure
a physical parameter (such as temperature) by providing analog input.
Application:
1. Thermocouple
2. Heat generation

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice
1 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

V SEMESTER - R 2013

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No. : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LABORATORY MANUAL
2 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

DHANALAKSHMI

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.


1. To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. To contribute to the promotion of Academic Excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels
3. To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING


Rendering the services to the global needs of engineering industries by educating students to become
professionally sound mechanical engineers of excellent caliber

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To produce mechanical engineering technocrats with a perfect knowledge intellectual and hands on
experience and to inculcate the spirit of moral values and ethics to serve the society

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MISSION
MISSION
VISION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION

4 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Fundamentals
To impart students with fundamental knowledge in mathematics and basic sciences that will mould
them to be successful professionals
2. Core competence
To provide students with sound knowledge in engineering and experimental skills to identify

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

complex software problems in industry and to develop a practical solution for them
3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theory and practice which
enable them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and organization and to design
products requiring interdisciplinary skills

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Professional skills
To bestow students with adequate training and provide opportunities to work as team that will build
up their communication skills, individual, leadership and supportive qualities and to enable them to
adapt and to work in ever changing technologies
5. Life-long learning

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To develop the ability of students to establish themselves as professionals in mechanical
engineering and to create awareness about the need for lifelong learning and pursuing advanced
degrees

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)
On completion of the B.E. (Mechanical) degree, the graduate will be able
a) To apply the basic knowledge of mathematics, science and engineering
b) To design and conduct experiments as well as to analyze and interpret data and apply the same in

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the career or entrepreneurship
c) To design and develop innovative and creative software applications
d) To understand a complex real world problem and develop an efficient practical solution
e) To create, select and apply appropriate techniques, resources, modern engineering and IT tools
f) To understand the role as a professional and give the best to the society

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

g) To develop a system that will meet expected needs within realistic constraints such as economical
environmental, social, political, ethical, safety and sustainability
h) To communicate effectively and make others understand exactly what they are trying to tell in both
verbal and written forms
i) To work in a team as a team member or a leader and make unique contributions and work with

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

coordination
j) To engage in lifelong learning and exhibit their technical skills
k) To develop and manage projects in multidisciplinary environments

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To familiar with different measurement equipment?s and use of this industry for quality inspection
List of Experiments

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Tool Maker?s Microscope
2. Comparator
3. Sine Bar
4. Gear Tooth Vernier Caliper
5. Floating gauge Micrometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Coordinate Measuring Machine
7. Surface Finish Measuring Equipment
8. Vernier Height Gauge
9. Bore diameter measurement using telescope gauge
10. Bore diameter measurement using micrometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. Force Measurement
12. Torque Measurement
13. Temperature measurement
14. Autocollimator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Ability to handle different measurement tools and perform measurements in quality impulsion
2. Learnt the usage of precision measuring instruments and practiced to take measurements
3. Learnt and practiced to build the required dimensions using slip gauge
4. Able to measure the various dimensions of the given specimen using the tool maker?s microscope

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Able to find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge
6. Able to measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare
7. Learnt to determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen using Gear tooth vernier
8. Able to measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two
wire method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. Learnt to study the construction and operation of coordinate measuring machine
10. Learnt to determine the diameter of bore by using telescopic gauge and dial bore indicator
11. Able to measure the surface roughness using Talysurf instrument
12. Studied the characteristic between applied load and the output volt
13. Learnt the characteristics of developing torque and respective sensor output voltage

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. Studied the characteristics of thermocouple without compensation
15. Able to check the straightness & flatness of the given component by using Autocollimator
16. Learnt to measure the displacement using LVDT and to calibrate it with the millimeter scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OBJECTIVES

COURSE OUTCOMES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CONTENTS
Sl. No. Name of the Experiments Page No.
CYCLE ? 1 EXPERIMENTS
1
Precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab ? A Study

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7
2
To build up the slip gauge for given dimension ? A Study
16
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thread parameters measurement using Tool Makers Microscope
20
4
Calibration of dial gauge
23

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5
Determination of taper angle by sine bar method
26
6
Determination of gear tooth thickness using gear tooth vernier

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

29
7
Measurement of thread parameters using floating carriage micrometer
32
CYCLE ? 2 EXPERIMENTS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8
Measurement of various dimensions using Coordinate Measuring Machine
35
9
Measurement of surface roughness

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

39
10
Measurement of bores using dial bore indicator and telescopic gauge
42
11

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Force measurement using load cell
46
12
Torque measurement using strain gauge
49

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13
Temperature measurement using thermocouple
53
14
Measurement of alignment using autocollimator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

56
ADDITIONAL EXPERIMENT BEYOND THE SYLLABUS
15
Thread parameters measurement using profile projector
60

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16
Displacement measurement ? linear variable differential transducer (LVDT)
62
PROJECT WORK
65

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.01 PRECISION MEASURING INSTRUMENT YSED IN

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

METROLOGY LAB ? A STUDY
Aim:
To study the following instruments and their usage for measuring dimensions of given specimen
1. Vernier caliper
2. Micrometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Vernier height gauge
4. Depth micrometer
5. Universal bevel protractor
Apparatus required:
Surface plate, specimen and above instruments

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier caliper:
The principle of vernier caliper is to use the minor difference between the sizes two scales or divisions
for measurement. The difference between them can be utilized to enhance the accuracy of measurement. The
vernier caliper essentially consists of two steel rules, sliding along each other.
Parts:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Different parts of the vernier caliper are
1. Beam ? It has main scale.
2. Fixed jaw
3. Sliding or Moving jaw ? It has vernier scale and sliding jaw locking screw.
4. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw knife

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

edges for internal measurement.
5. Stem or depth bar for depth measurement
Least count:
Least count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

50 VSD = 49 mm
1 VSD = 0.98 mm
Least count = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm

10 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ID

DEPTH

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OD
Measurement:
Given Vernier caliper can be used for external, internal depth, slot and step measurement.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement principle:
When both jaws contact each other scale shows the zero reading. The finer adjustment of movable jaw
can be done by the fine adjustment screw. First the whole movable jaw assembly is adjusted so that the two
measuring tips just touch the part to be measured. Then the fine adjustment clamp locking screw is tightened.
Final adjustment depending upon the sense of correct feel is made by the adjusting screw. After final

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

adjustment has been made sliding jaw locking screw is also tightened and the reading is noted.
All the parts of the Vernier caliper are made of good quality steel and measuring faces are hardened.
Types of vernier:
Vernier caliper, electronic vernier caliper, vernier depth caliper

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Main scale
reading (MSR)
(mm)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier scale
reading (VSR) (mm)
Total reading (MSR
+ VSR)
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OD


ID

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Depth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier height gauge:
Vernier height gauge is a sort of vernier caliper equipped with a special instrument suitable for height
measurement. It is always kept on the surface plate and the use of the surfaces plates as datum surfaces is
very essential.
Least count:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least Count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm
1 VSD = 0.98 mm
Least Count (LC) = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Parts:
1. Base
2. Beam ? It has main scale.
3. Slider ? It has a vernier scale and slider locking screw.
4. Scriber

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw.


12 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Material:
All the parts of vernier are made of good quality steel and the measuring faces hardened.
Types of vernier gauge:
1. Analog vernier height gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Digital vernier height gauge
3. Electronic vernier height gauge
Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Main scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(MSR)(mm)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale reading
(VSR)(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total reading (MSR +
VSR)(mm)
1.
2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Outside micrometer:
The micrometer essentially consists of an accurate screw having about 10 or 20 threads per cm. The

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

end of the screw forms one measuring tip and other measuring tip is constituted by a stationary anvil in the
base of the frame. The screw is threaded for certain length and is plain afterwards. The plain portion is called
spindle and its end is the measuring surface. The spindle is advanced or retracted by turning a thimble
connected to a spindle. The spindle is a slide fit over the barrel and barrel is the fixed part attached with the
frame. The barrel & thimble are graduated. The pitch of the screw threads is 0.5 mm.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count:
Least Count (LC) = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale
= 0.5 / 50 = 0.01 mm
Parts:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Frame
2. Anvil
3. Spindle
4. Spindle lock
5. Barrel or outside sleeve

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions
7. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.
The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.
14 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement:
It can be used for any external measurement.
Types of micrometer:
1. Outside micrometer, 2. Inside micrometer, 3.Depth micrometer, 4. Stick micrometer, 5. Screw thread
micrometer, 6. V ? anvil micrometer, 7. Blade type micrometer, 8. Dial micrometer, 9. Bench micrometer, 10.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tape screw operated internal micrometer, 11. Groove micrometer, 12. Digital micrometer, 13.Differential screw
micrometer, 14.Adjustable range outside micrometer.
Ratchet stop mechanism:
The object of the ratchet stop is to ensure that same level of torque is applied on the spindle while
measuring and the sense of the feel of operator is eliminated and consistent readings are obtained. By

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

providing this arrangement, the ratchet stop is made slip off when the torque applied to rotate the spindle
exceeds the set torque. Thus this provision ensures the application of same amount of torque during the
measurement.
Tabulation:
Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) (mm)
Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)
Head scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(HSR x LC) (mm)
Total Reading (PSR
+ HSR) (mm)
1.
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Depth micrometer:
Depth micrometer is a sort of micrometer which is mainly used for measuring depth of holes, so it is
named as depth micrometer.
Parts:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Shoulder
2. Spindle
3. Spindle lock
4. Barrel or outside sleeve ? It has pitch scale.
5. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.
The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.
15 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count:
Least Count = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale = 0.50/50
= 0.01 mm
Measurements:
It can be used for measuring the depth of holes, slots and recessed areas. The pitch of the screw thread

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

is 0.5 mm. The least count is 0.01 mm. Shoulder acts as a reference surface and is held firmly and
perpendicular to the centre line of the hole. For large range of measurement extension rods are used. In the
barrel the scale is calibrated. The accuracy again depends upon the sense of touch.
Procedure:
First, calculate the least count of the instrument. Check the zero error. Measure the specimen note

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

down the main scale reading or the head scale reading. Note down the vernier or head scale coincidence with
main or pitch scale divisions.
Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Pitch Scale Reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(PSR) (mm)
Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)
Head scale reading
(HSR x LC) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total Reading (PSR
+ HSR) (mm)

1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.


16 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Universal bevel protractor:

Description:
Bevel protractor is an instrument for measuring the angle between the two faces of a specimen. It

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

consists of a base plate on which a circular scale is engraved. It is graduated in degrees. An adjustment plate
is attached to a circular plate containing the vernier scale. The adjustable blade can be locked in any position.
The circular plate has 360 division divided into four parts of 90 degrees each. The adjustable parts have 24
divisions of to the right and left sides of zero reading. These scales are used according to the position of the
specimen with respect to movable scale.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. Place the specimen whose taper is to be measured between the adjustable plate and movable
blade with one of its face parallel to the base.
2. Lock the adjustable plate in position and note down the main scale reading depending upon the
direction of rotation of adjustable plate in clockwise or anticlockwise.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Note the VSC to the right of zero.
4. Multiply the VSC with the least count and add to MSR to obtain the actual reading.
Least count:
Least Count = 2 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
24 VSD = 46
o
=> 1 VSD = 23/12
LC = 2 ? 23/12 = 1/12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
= 5? (five minutes)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Main scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(MSR) (deg)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale reading
(VSR) (deg)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total reading (MSR +
VSR)
(deg)
1.
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The angle of scriber of the vernier height gauge =
Result:
Thus the various precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab are studied and the specimen
dimensions are recorded.
Outcome:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for linear, angular,
roundness and roughness measurements they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring
instrument according to a specific requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).
Application:
1. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Metrology
2. Define ? Inspection
3. What are the needs of inspection in industries?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. What are the various methods involving the measurement?
5. Define ? Precision
6. Define ? Accuracy
7. Define ? Calibration
8. Define ? Repeatability

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. Define ? Magnification
10. Define ? Error
11. Define ? Systematic Error
12. Define ? Random Error
13. Define ? Parallax Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. Define ? Environmental Error
15. Define ? Cosine Error
Viva-voce

18 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.02 BUILD UP THE SLIP GAUGE FOR GIVEN DIMENSION
? A STUDY
Aim:
To build up the slip gauge for given dimension

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Apparatus required:
1. Slip gauges set
2. Surface plate
3. Soft cloth
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
Slip gauge are universally accepted standard of length in industry. They are the working standard for
linear dimension. These were invented by a Swedish Engineer, C.E. Johansson. They are used
1. For direct precise measurement where the accuracy of the workpiece demand it.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. For use with high- magnification comparators to establish the size of the gauge blocks in general
use.
3. Gauge blocks are also used for many other purposes such as checking the accuracy of measuring
instrument or setting up a comparator to a specific dimension, enabling a batch of component to be
quickly and accurately checked or indeed in any situation where there is need to refer to standard of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

known length these blocks are rectangular.
19 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Most gauge blocks are produced from high grade steel, hardened and established by a heat treatment
process to give a high degree of dimensional stability. Gauge blocks are also manufactured from tungsten

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

carbide which is an extremely hard and wear resistant material. The measuring faces have a lapped finish.
The faces are perfectly flat and parallel to one another with a high degree of accuracy. Each block has an
extremely high dimensional accuracy at 20
o
C.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

These slip gauge are available in variety of selected sets both in inch units and metric units. Letter ?E? is
used for inch units and ?M? is used for metric standard number of pieces in a set following the letter E or M. For
example EBI refers to a set whose blocks are in metric units and are 83 in number. Each block dimensions is
printed on anyone of its face itself the size of any required standard being made up by combining the
appropriate number of these different size blocks.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

If two gauges are slid and twisted together under pressure they will firmly join together. This process,
known as wringing, is very useful because it enables several gauge blocks to be assembled together to
produce a required size. In fact the success of precision measurement by slip gauges depends on the
phenomenon of wringing.
First the gauge is oscillated slightly with very light pressure over other gauge so as to detect pressure at

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

any foreign particles between the surfaces. One gauge is placed perpendicular to other using standard
gauging pressure and rotary motion is applied until the blocks are lined up.
Procedure:
1. Build the given dimension by wringing minimum number of slip gauges.
2. Note the given dimension and choose the minimum possible slip gauge available in the set so as to

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

accommodate the last decimal value. The minimum slip gauge value dimension available i.e., 1.12
mm must be chosen followed by 1.5 mm thick gauge block.
3. Follow the above steps to build up the slip gauge of any dimension.
Precautions:
1. Slip gauges should be handled very carefully placed gently and should never be dropped.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Whenever a slip gauge is being removed from the set, its dimensions are noted and must be
replaced into the set at its appropriate place only.
3. Correct procedure must be followed in wringing and also in removing the gauge blocks.
4. They should be cleaned well before use and petroleum jelly is applied after use.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

20 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Range (mm) Increment (mm) No. of pieces

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total = ____________ Pieces
Total length of slip gauge = ________ mm
Given diameter Slip gauges used Obtained dimensions

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Slip gauge set is studied and the given dimensions are building up by wringing minimum number of slip

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

gauges.
Outcome:
Students will be able to select proper measuring instrument and know requirement of calibration, errors
in measurement etc. They can perform accurate measurements.
Application:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Why C.I. is preferred material for surface plates and tables?
2. Why V ? blocks are generally manufactured in pairs?
3. Why micrometer is required to be tested for accuracy?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Define ? Linear Measurement
5. List the linear measuring instrument according to their accuracy.
6. Define ? Least Count
7. What are the uses of vernier depth gauge?
8. What are the uses of feeler gauges?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. What are the uses of straight edge?
10. What are the uses of angle plate?
11. What are the uses of V ? block?
12. What are the uses of combination square?
13. What precautions should be taken while using slip gauges?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. What is wringing?
15. Why the slip gauges are termed as ?End standard?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

22 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


Expt.No.03 THREAD PARAMETERS MEASUREMENT USING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TOOL MAKERS MICROSCOPE
Aim:
To study the tool makers microscope and in the process measure the various dimensions of the given
specimen
Apparatus required:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Tool makers microscope
2. Specimen
Diagram:

Description:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The tool maker?s microscope is designed for measurement of parts of complex forms; for example,
profile of a tool having external threads. It can also be used for measuring centre to centre distance of the
holes in any plane as well as the coordinates of the outline of a complex template gauge, using the
coordinates measuring system.
23 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Basically it consists of an optical head which can be adjusted vertically along the ways of supporting
column. The optical head can be clamped at any position by a screw. On the work table (which as a circular
base in which there are graduations) the part to be inspected is placed. The table has a compound slide by
means of which the part can be measured. For giving these two movements, there are two micrometer screws

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

having thimble scales and verniers. At the back of the base light source is arranged that provides horizontal
beam of light, reflected from a mirror by 90 degrees upwards towards the table. The beam of light passes
through the transparent glass plate on which flat plates can be checked are placed. Observations are made
through the eyepiece of the optical head.
Procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Place the given specimen on the work table and switch on all the three light sources and adjust the
intensity of the light source until a clean image of the cross wires and specimen are seen through
the eyepiece.
2. Coincide one of the two extreme edges between which the measurement has to be taken with
vertical or horizontal cross wires and depending upon the other image coincide with the same cross

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

wires by moving the above device. Note the reading.The difference between the two readings gives
the value of the required measurement.
3. Note the experiment specimen and the readings.
4. Tabulate the different measurements measured from the specimen.
Determination of thread parameters

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Magnification =
S.No. Parameters
Magnified value
(mm)
Actual value

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
1. Outer diameter (O.D)

2. Internal diameter (I.D)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Pitch

4. Flank angle

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Included angle of the tool was measured using tool maker?s microscope and various dimensions of the
given specimen are measured.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

24 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the various parameters of thread and select proper measuring
instrument and know requirement of calibration, errors in measurement etc. They can perform accurate

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measurements.
Application:
1. Machine Shop
2. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by tool maker?s microscope?
2. What is the light used in tool maker?s microscope?
3. What are the various characteristics that you would measure in a screw thread?
4. What are the instruments that are required for measuring screw thread?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Define ? Pitch
6. What are the causes of pitch error?
7. Define ? Flank
8. What are the effects of flank angle error?
9. What is progressive error?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. What is periodic error?
11. What is drunken error?
12. What is erratic error?
13. What are the applications of tool maker?s microscope?
14. What are the limitations of tool maker?s microscope?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15. What are the advantages of tool maker?s microscope?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

25 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.04 CALIBRATION OF DIAL GAUGE USING SLIP GAUGE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Aim:
To find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge
Apparatus required:
Dial gauge, magnetic stand, slip gauge, and surface plate
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
The dial test indicator is a precision measuring instrument which can convert linear motion into angular
motion by means of transmission mechanics of rack and pinion and can be used to measure linear vibration
and errors of shape.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

This instrument has the features such as good appearance, compact size, light weight, high precision,
reasonable construction, constant measuring face etc. Rigidity of all parts is excellent. Probe is tipped with
carbide balls. A shock proof mechanism is provided for those with larger measuring range.

26 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Types of dial indicator:
1. Plunger type
2. Lever type
Plunger type dial indicator has a resolution counter and each division in main scale is 0.01 mm. In lever

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

type dial test indicator is replaced by ball type stylus.
Procedure:
1. Fix the dial gauge to the stand rigidly and place the stand on the surface plate.
2. Set the plunger of dial gauge to first touch the upper surface of standard slip gauge and set indicator
to zero.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Raise then the plunger by pulling the screw above the dial scale.
4. Place the standard slip gauge underneath the plunger.
5. Release the plunger and let it to touch the standard slip gauge.
6. Note the reading on the dial scale.
Formulae:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The standard error of dial gauge is calculated by the formula

Tabulation:
S.No.
Slip gauge reading ?x?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
Dial gauge reading
(mm)
(x? - x)
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x? (x? - x)
1.
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Thus the accuracy and standard error of dial gauge is found. The standard error of given dial gauge is
__________.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

27 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Outcome:
Students will be able to check the variation in tolerance during the inspection process of a

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

machined part, measure the deflection of a beam or ring under laboratory conditions, as well as many
other situations where a small measurement needs to be registered or indicated
Application:
1. Milling Machine
2. Analog versus digital/electronic readout

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is comparator?
2. What are the types of comparators?
3. What is the LC for comparators?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. What are the applications of comparator?
5. What is meant by plunger?
6. What are the types of dial indicators?
7. Why a revolution counter is not provided in lever type dial test indicator?
8. Draw a line diagram of the operating mechanism of plunger type dial test indicator.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. Explain the term magnification of a dial indicator.
10. What are the uses of dial test indicator?
11. What are the practical applications of dial test indicator?
12. What precautions should be taken while using dial test indicator?
13. What are the desirable qualities of a dial test indicator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. What are the advantages of dial test indicator?
15. What are the limitations of dial test indicator?
16. Distinguish between comparator and measuring instrument.
17. What are the advantages of electrical comparator?
18. What are the advantages of optical comparator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

19. What are the uses of comparator?
20. What are the advantages and disadvantages of mechanical comparator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

28 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.05 DETERMINATION OF TAPER ANGLE BY SINE BAR
METHOD
Aim:
To measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare
Apparatus required:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sine bar, slip gauges, dial gauge with stand, micrometer, surface plate, bevel protractor, vernier caliper
Diagram:

Description:
The sine bar principle uses the ratio of the length of two sides of a right triangle. It may be noted that

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

devices operating on sine principle are capable of ?self-generation?. The measurement is restricted to 45
o
from
accuracy point of view. Sine bar itself is not a measuring instrument.
Accuracy requirements of sine bar:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. The axes of the rollers must be parallel to each other and the centre distance L must be precisely
known.
2. The sine bar must be flat and parallel to the plane connecting the axes of the rollers.
3. The rollers must be of identical diameters and must have within a close tolerance.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

29 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Procedure:
1. Fix the dial gaugeon the magnetic stand and place the magnetic stand on the surface plate.Check

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the parallelism of the sine bar.
2. Place the given specimen above the sine bar and place the dial gauge on top of the specimen.
Adjustthe dial gauge for zero deflection.
3. Raise the front end of the sine bar with slip gauges until the work surface is parallel to the datum
surface.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Check the parallelism using dial gauge.
5. Measure the distance between the centres of the sine bar rollers as ?L? and note the height of the
slip gauge as ?H?.
6. Note the included angle of the specimen.
Formulae:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sin ? = H/L where ? = Included angle of the specimen
H = Height of slip gauges
L = Distance between the centre of rollers
Tabulation:
S.No. L (mm) H (mm) Taper angle ( ?)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
2.
3.

Result:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The taper angle of the given specimen using sine bar was found to be =
Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for angular measurements
and they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a specific
requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Flat Surface
2. Granite

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

30 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. List out the various angle measuring instruments.
2. What is the working principles sine bar?
3. How is a sine bar used to measure the angle?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. What is the application of sine bar?
5. What is the material of sine bar?
6. Why sine bar is not preferred to use for measuring angles more than 45
0
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. What are the features of sine bar?
8. A 100 mm sine bar is to be set up to an angle of 33
0
, determine the slip gauges needed from 87
pieces set.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. What are the various instruments used for measuring angles?
10. What is sine bar?
11. How sine bar is used for angle measurement?
12. Explain how sine bar is used to measure angle of small size component.
13. Explain how sine bar is used to measure angle of large size component.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. What are the various types of sine bar?
15. What are the limitations of sine bar?
16. What is sine center?
17. What is sine table?
18. What are the possible sources of errors in angular measurement by sine bar?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

19. What are angle gauges?
20. How angle gauges are used for measuring angles?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

31 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.06 DETERMINATION OF GEAR TOOTH THICKNESS
USING GEAR TOOTH VERNIER
Aim:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen and to draw the graph between the tooth
number and the error in thickness
Apparatus required:
Gear tooth vernier, specimen, surface plate and vernier caliper
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
The tooth thickness, in general, is measured at pitch circle since gear tooth thickness varies from the tip
to the base circle of the tooth. This is possible only when there is an arrangement to fix that position for this
measurement by the gear tooth vernier. It has two vernier scales; one is vertical and other is horizontal.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
32 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

1. Measure initially the outside diameter of the given gear specimen by means of a vertical calculation
of vernier caliper. Note the number of teeth. Calculate the module (m) using the formula.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M = OD/ (Z+2) where z ? number of teeth
M - Module
2. Calculate the theoretical tooth thickness (t) by t = z * m* sin (90/z).
3. Set the vernier scale for the height and tighten.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Measure the thickness of each tooth using the horizontal scale. This is measured thickness. It can
be positive or negative.
H = m x [1+ Z/2 (1- Cos 90/Z)]
5. Calculate the error in the tooth thickness i.e,1. measured thickness ? Theoretical thickness
6. Draw the graph between the tooth number and the error in thickness.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Tooth
Number
Measured Thickness
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Theoretical Thickness (mm)
Error in tooth thickness
(mm)
1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3

Tooth
Number
MSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
VSC

VSR
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TR
(mm)
1
2
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Graph:


Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tooth No.
33 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
The theoretical experiment value of gear tooth thickness is obtained and graph is drawn between error
and tooth number in tooth thickness

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Theoretical tooth thickness =
Experimental tooth thickness =
Error in tooth thickness =
Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the basic measurement units and able to calibrate various

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measuring parameters of the gear.
Application:
1. Gear Component
2. Mining

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Calculate the setting of a gear tooth vernier caliper for a straight spur gear having 40 teeth and
module 4.
2. What is the importance of chordal depth?
3. Define ? Chordal width
4. How is the actual profile of the gear tooth determined?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. What are the manufacturing errors in gear element?
6. Define ? Addendum
7. Define ? Dedendum
8. Define ? Flank of tooth
9. Define ? Pitch

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. Define ? Pitch Circle
11. Define ? Crest of tooth
12. Define ? Root of tooth
13. Define ? Base Circle
14. Define ? Module

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15. Define ? Angle of Obliquity


Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

34 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.07 MEASUREMENT OF THREAD PARAMETER USING
FLOATING CARRIAGE MICROMETER
Aim:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two wire
method
Apparatus required:
1. Floating carriage micrometer
2. Standard wire

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Given specimen (screw thread)
Diagram:

Description of floating carriage micrometer:
It consists of three main units. A base casting carries a pair of centres on which threaded work piece is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

to be mounted. Another carriage capable of moving towards centre is mounted exactly above. In this carriage
one head with thimble to measure up to 0.002 mm is provided and at the other side of head a fiducial indicator
is provided to indicate zero position.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

35 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Procedure:
1. For two wire method, place the standard wire over a thread of the screw at opposite sides.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. For three wire method, place two standard wires on two successive threads and the third wire
placed opposite sides of the thread.
3. Measure the diameter over wires (M) using floating carriage micrometer.
4. Repeat this procedure at various positions of the screw and take different readings.
Formulae:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. For best wire size, d = P / 2 Cos (x/2)
Where, P = Pitch
d= wire size
x = angle between two threads
= 60

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
for metric thread
2. Actual effective diameter, E.A = M ? 3d + 0.866 p
3. Nominal effective diameter, EN = D ? 0.648 p
4. Max. wire size = 1.01 p

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Min. wire size = 0.505 p
6. Best wire size = 0.577 p
M = Diameter over wires
P = Pitch of thread
For metric thread:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Actual effective diameter (EA) = M ? 3d + 0.866 p
Where d = actual diameter of wire
Determination of actual and nominal effective diameter of the screw thread:
Sl.No.
Nominal

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diameter (D)
(mm)
Diameter over
wire ?M?
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Actual eff.
Diameter E.A
(mm)
Nominal eff.
Diameter E.N

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
Error in effective
diameter
(E.A ? E.N)
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

36 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Result:
Thus the actual and nominal effective diameter is measured using three wire method and the error in

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

effective diameter of screw is determined.
Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for roundness
measurements and they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a
specific requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Wholse
2. Maxxis Rubber India

1. Define ? Pitch

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Define ? Flank Angle
3. What is plug gauge?
4. What is meant by micrometer?
5. What is meant by indicator?
6. What is best ? size wire?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Calculate the diameter of the best wire for an M 20 x 25 screws.
8. What are the different corrections to be applied in the measurement of effective diameter by the
method of wire?
9. What is floating carriage micrometer?
10. What are the uses of floating carriage micrometer?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. What are the methods are used for measuring effective diameter?
12. Define ? Effective Diameter
13. Define ? Major Diameter
14. Define ? Minor Diameter
15. What are the effects of flank error?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16. Define ? Rake Angle
17. Define ? Pitch Cylinder
18. What are the effects of pitch error?
19. Define ? Pitch Diameter
20. What is meant by angle of thread?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

37 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.08 MEASUREMENT OF VARIOUS DIMENSIONS USING
COORDINATE MEASURING MACHINE
Aim:
1. To study the construction and operation of coordinate measuring machine

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. To measure the specified dimensions of the given component
Instruments used:
Coordinate measuring machine, vernier calipers
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Theory:
A coordinate measuring machine (CMM) is a 3D device for measuring the physical and geometrical
characteristics of an object. This machine may be manually controlled by an operator or it may be computer
controlled. Measurements are defined by a probe attached to the three moving axis of this machine X, Y and Z
axes. A coordinate measuring machine (CMM) is also a device used in manufacturing and assembly

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

processes to test a part or assembly against the design intent. By precisely recording the X, Y and Z
coordinates of the target, points are generated which can be analyzed via regression algorithms for the
construction of features. These points are collected by using a probe that is positioned manually by an
38 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

operator or automatically via direct computer control (DCC). DCC CMMs can be programmed to repeatedly
measure identical parts, thus a CMM is a specialized form of industrial robot.
Parts:
Coordinate measuring machine include three main components:
1. The main structures which include three axes of motion.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Probing system
3. Data collection and reduction system ? typically includes a machine controller, desktop computer
and application software
Machine description:
1. In modern machines, the gantry type superstructure has two legs and is often called a bridge. This

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

moves freely along the granite table with one leg following a guide rail attached to one side of the
granite table. The opposite leg simply rests on the granite table following the vertical surface
contour.
2. Air bearings are fixed for ensuring friction free travel. Compressed air is forced through a series of
very small holes in a flat bearing surface to provide a smooth but controlled air cushion on which the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CMM can move in a frictionless manner.
3. The movement of the bridge along the granite table forms one axis of the XY plane. The bridge of
the gantry contains a carriage which traverses between the inside and outside legs and forms the
other X or Y horizontal axis.
4. The third axis of movement (Z axis) is provided by the addition of a vertical quill or spindle which

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

moves up and down through the center of the carriage. The touch probe forms the sensing device
on the end of the quill.
5. The movement of the X, Y and Z axes fully describes the measuring envelope. Some touch probes
are themselves powered rotary devices with the probe tip able to swivel vertically through 90
degrees and through a full 360 degrees rotation.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Uses:
They are generally used for:
1. Dimensional measurement
2. Profile measurement
3. Angularity or orientation measurement

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Depth mapping
5. Digitizing mapping
6. Shaft measurement
39 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The machines are available in a wide range of sizes and designs with a variety of different probe
technologies. They can be operated manually or automatically through direct computer control (DCC). They
are offered in various configurations such as bench top, free ? standing, handheld and portable.
Procedure:
1. Take at least 8 points on sphere ball attached to the granite table.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Fix the object whose dimension needs to be measured using the jigs and fixtures.
3. Using joystick, move the probe whose tip is made of ruby slowly and carefully to the surface whose
measurements have to be taken.
4. Touch the probe at two places for measurement of a line (starting and ending point).
5. Touch the probe at two places for measurement of a circular profile and for a cylinder touch the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

probe at 8 points.
6. Measure the same profiles again with vernier calipers (length of line, circle diameter, cylinder
diameter) to compare the two readings.
Comments:
1. The machine should be calibrated every time when it is being used.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. While measuring the profiles, the probe should be moved very slowly as it may damage the ruby if
hit with a high force.
3. Care should be taken while performing experiment so that the granite table of the machines should
get any scratches.
4. ?Retract distance? should be fixed according to the space available in the near vicinity of the profile

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measurement area.
Observation:
Sl.No. Feature
CMM reading
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier reading
(mm)
Form error
(mm)
Difference in two

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

readings (mm)
1 Circle -1
2 Circle -2
3 Circle -3
4 Line

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 Arc
6
Cone - Diameter
Cone ? Vertex angle
Cone ? Height

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7
Cylinder ? Diameter
Cylinder ? Height

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

40 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Result:
Thus the different profile of given object are measured using coordinate measuring machine
Outcome:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Students will be able to measures the geometry of physical objects by sensing discrete points on the
surface of the object with a probe and they will be able to know the Various types of probes are used in CMMs,
including mechanical, optical, laser, and white light.
Application:
1. Surface Measuring Equipment

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Photo transistor

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What are the types of measuring machine?
2. What is CMM?
3. What are the types of CMM?
4. What are the advantages of CMM?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. What are the limitations of CMM?
6. What are the possible sources of error in CMM?
7. What is the use of universal measuring machine?
8. What are the applications of CMM?
9. What is the working principle of three axis measuring machine?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. What is image shearing microscope?
11. What is the use of electronic inspection and measuring machine?
12. What are the types of electronic inspection and measuring machine?
13. What is CMM probe?
14. What are the three main probes are available?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15. What are the types of stylus?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

41 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.09 MEASUREMENT OF SURFACE ROUGHNESS UING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TALYSURF INSTRUMENT
Aim:
To measure the surface roughness using Talysurf instrument
Apparatus required:
Talysurf instrument, work piece, surface plate

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diagram:

Theory:
On any finished surface, imperfections are bound to be there and these take the form of a succession of
hills and valleys which vary both in height and in spacing and result in a kind of texture which in appearance or

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

feel is often characteristic of the machining process and accompanying defects. The several kinds of
departures are there on the surface and these are due to various causes.

42 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Methods of measuring surface roughness:
1. Surface inspection of comparison methods
2. Direct instrument measurements
In comparative methods the surface texture is assessed by observation of the surface. But these
methods are not reliable as they can be misleading, if comparison is not made with surfaces produced by

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

same techniques. The various methods available under comparison method are: (i) Touch Inspection
(ii)Scratch Inspection (iii) Microscopic Inspection (iv) Visual Inspection (v) Surface Photographs (vi) Reflected
Light Intensity Direct Instrument Measurements enable to determine a numerical value of the surface finish of
any surface. Nearly all instruments used are stylus probe type of instruments. This operates on electrical
principle.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. Place the finished component on the surface plate.
2. Fix the Talysurf tester to the vernier height gauge using adopter at a convenient height.
3. Make sure that the stylus probe touches the work piece.
4. Fix the sampling length in the tester.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Press the power button so that the probe moves on the surface to and fro.
6. Take the readings of the surface roughness directly from the instrument.
7. Repeat the above process for the remaining specimen and tabulate the readings.
Precautions:
1. The surface to be tested should be cleaned properly.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. The tester should be fixed to the height gauge properly so that the movement of the probe is exactly
parallel to the surface of work.
3. Make sure that the probe gently touches the work.
Tabulation:
S.No

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement roughness value,
?m
Sample direction Ra, Rz
Average Ra Average Rz Grade
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

43 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Result:
Thus the surface roughness is checked for different specimens by Talysurf.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for roughness
measurements they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a specific
requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).
Application:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Machine Shop
2. Quality Department


1. Define ? Actual Size?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. What is meant by normal surface?
3. What is meant by profilo-graph?
4. What is Tomlinson surface meter?
5. What is meant by profile?
6. What are the factors affecting surface roughness?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Why the surface texture is control?
8. Define ? Lay
9. Define ? Surface Texture
10. Define ? Flaws
11. What is sampling length?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. What are the methods used for evaluating surface finish?
13. What is form factor?
14. What are the methods used for measuring surface finish?
15. How will you differentiate smooth surface from flat surface?
16. How surface finish is designated on drawings?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17. Define ? Primary Texture
18. Define ? Secondary Texture
19. What are the types of instrument used for measuring surface texture?
20. Define ? waviness

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

44 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.10 MEASUREMENT OF BORE USING DIAL BORE
INDICATOR AND TELESCOPIC GAUGE
Aim:
To determine the diameter of bore by using telescopic gauge and checking the same by using dial bore

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

indicator
Apparatus required:
Work piece, vernier caliper, telescopic gauge and dial gauge indicator set with anvil.
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

45 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


Procedure:
Bore gauge measurement:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Select the extension rod and washer according to the bore diameter to be measured
2. Fix the suitable extension rod and washer with the bore gauge
3. Fix the dial gauge to the bore gauge in its position
4. Insert the bore gauge inside the bore to be measured and hold the gauge in parallel o the axis of the
bore. Ensure that the tips on either side of the bore gauge are in touch with inner wall of the bore

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Note down the reading in the dial gauge and withdraw the bore gauge from the bore
6. Hold the measuring tips of bore gauge between the spindle and anvil of a micrometer and compress
the tips by rotating the thimble till the reading reaches the same one as noted earlier
7. Observe and record the micrometer reading as the bore diameter to be measured
Telescopic gauge measurement:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Select the telescopic gauge according to the bore diameter to be measured
2. Press the telescopic spindles in the telescopic gauge lock them by locking screw
3. Insert the telescopic gauge inside thee bore to be measured. Release the locking screw to expand
the telescopic spindles outwards inside the bore
4. Hold the telescopic gauge in parallel to the axis of bore axis and ensure that the tips of telescopic

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

spindles are in touch with the inner wall of the bore
5. Lock the telescopic spindles and withdraw it from the bore
46 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

6. Measure the expanded length of the telescopic spindles using micrometer record them as the inner

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

diameter of the bore
Practical observations:
Rough measurement of bore using Telescopic gauge:
Least count of micrometer = 0.01 mm
Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Micrometer reading
Total reading
(MSR + TSC * LC) ( mm) Main scale reading (MSR)
(mm)
Thimble scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

coincidence
1.
2.

Average reading = ________ mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Accurate measuring using Bore gauge
Sl.No.
Micrometer
reading
(d) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Bore gauge
reading
(R1) (mm)
Work piece reading
(R2) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Final reading
d+ (R1 ? R2) * 0.01
(mm)
1.
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Accurate internal diameter of hole using bore gauge = ______ mm

Result
1. Internal diameter of the work piece by using telescopic gauge is ________mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Diameter obtained by using dial gauge indicator is __________________mm

Outcome:
Students will be able to measure a bore's size, by transferring the internal dimension to a remote
measuring tool (Telescopic gauge).

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Automobile
2. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

47 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by bore diameter?
2. What is gauge?
3. What is meant by measurement?
4. What is telescope gauge?
5. What is bore gauge?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. What is contact point?
7. What is the principle of bore gauge?
8. What are the applications of telescopic gauge?
9. What types of materials are used in telescopic gauge?
10. What are the types of instrument used to measure bore diameter?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. What are the applications of bore gauge?
12. What are the advantages of bore gauge over telescopic gauge?
13. What are the limitations of bore gauge?
14. What is the working principle of telescopic gauge?
15. What are the disadvantages of telescopic gauge?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

48 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.11 MEASUREMENT OF FORCE USING LOAD CELL
Aim:
To study the characteristic between applied load and the output voltage

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Apparatus required:
1. Trainer kit
2. Multimeter
3. Load cell sensor with setup
4. Weights (5 kg)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Power chord
Diagram:

Formulae:
Error (%) = {Applied Voltage ? (Displayed Load)/ Applied Load)} x 100

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Block diagram:



Applied DC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Load O/P

DC Excitation source Transducer
Transducer
Instrumentation

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Amplifier
Gain Amplifier DVM
49 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Interfacing and calibration procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Interface the load cell 9 pin ?D? type male connector to 9 pin D type female connector, fixed on the
module.
2. First unload the beam and nullify the display by using zero adjustment POT
3. Apply the maximum load of 5 kg to the beam and adjust the display to 5 kg by using gain
adjustment POT.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. After the initial adjustment, the unit should not be disturbed until the completion of the experiment.
Safety precaution:
1. During offset adjustment, the beam should not be loaded.
2. The beam should not be disturbed during the experiment.
3. Remove the load from the beam, after completion of the experiment; otherwise wire wound on the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

strain gauge will get damaged.
4. If you are getting an unsatisfactory reading, then vary the zero and span POT minimum to
maximum.
5. Maximum load should not exceed 5 kg.
6. Once calibrated, the setting should not be distributed till the end of the experiment.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. Install the load cell module and interface the 9 pin D connector with kit.
2. Connect the multimeter in volt mode across T5 and GND for the output voltage measurement.
3. Switch on the module.
4. Initially, unload the beam and nullify the display by using zero adjustment POT (zero calibration).

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Apply the maximum load of 5 kg to the beam and adjust the display to 5 kg by using gain
adjustment POT (gain calibration).
6. Now apply the load to the beam, a force will develop on the beam and measure the output voltage
(V) across T5 and GND.
7. Gradually increase the load and note down the output voltage (V) and applied load.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Tabulate the values of displayed load and applied voltage.
9. Plot a graph between applied load and output voltage (V).
Note: When 1 kg load is applied to the beam, the displayed voltage is 1 kg.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

50 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:
Applied load
(kg)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Output voltage
(V)
Displayed load
(kg)
% Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Graph:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Applied load (kg) Vs Output Voltage (V)
2. Actual load (kg) Vs % Error
Result:
Thus the characteristic between applied load and the output voltage was studied.
Outcome:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Students will be able to understand the Sensor device (electro-mechanical) which help us to measure
a physical parameter (such as temperature, pressure, force, acceleration etc.) by providing analog input to get
digital output.
Application:
1. Machine Shop

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Automobile


1. What is meant by force?
2. Define ? Wheat stone bridge circuit

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Define ? Load
4. What is meant by deflector?
5. What is meant by force indicator?
6. Define ? Instrumentation
7. How instrumentations are classified?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Define ? Transducer
9. What is electrical transducer?
10. How transducers are classified?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

51 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.12 MEASUREMENT OF TORQUE USING STRAIN
GAUGE
Aim:
To study the characteristics of the developing torque and the signal conditioned sensor output voltage
Apparatus required:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Trainer kit
2. Digital Multimeter (V)
3. Torque sensor setup
4. Weights (100 gram x 10 Nos.)
5. Power chord

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diagram:

Interfacing and calibration procedure:
1. Interface the torque sensor 9 pin. ?D? type male connector to ?9? pin ?D? type female connector, fixed
on the module.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. First, unload the beam and nullify the display by using zero adjustment POT.
3. Apply the maximum load of 1 kg to the beam and adjust the display to 9.81 Nm by using adjustment
POT.
4. After this initial calibration, the unit should not be disturbed until the completion of the experiment.
52 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Safety precaution:
1. During offset adjustment, the beam should not be loaded.
2. The beam should not be disturbed during the experiment.
3. Remove the beam from the shaft, after completion of the experiment otherwise wire wound on the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

strain gauge will get damaged.
4. If the displayed torque reading are in negative, change the beam connections in opposite to
previously connected direction.
5. If you are getting an unsatisfactory reading, then vary the zero and span POT minimum to
maximum.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Maximum load should not exceed 1 kg.
7. Once calibrated, the setting should not be disturbed till the end of this experiment.
Procedure:
1. Install the torque sensor setup and interface with kit.
2. Switch ?ON? the module.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Connect the Multimeter in millivolts mode T2 and T3 for bridge output voltage measurement POT.
4. First, unload the beam and nullify the bridge output voltage by using zero adjustment POT.
5. By applying load to the beam, torque will develop on the shaft and measure the bridge output
voltage (mV) across T2 and T3
6. Gradually increase the force by applying load and note down the bridge output voltage (mV).

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Tabulate the readings and plot a graph between developed torque versus bridge output voltage
(mV).
Formulae:
Error (%) = {(Actual Torque ? Theoretical Torque)/ Theoretical Torque} x 100
Theoretical Torque = mass (m) x acceleration due to gravity (g) x radial distance

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= 1 kg x 9.81 m/s
2
x 1 m
= 9.81 Nm
Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No. Theoretical Torque
(Nm)
Bridge output voltage
(mV)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Model graph:
The graph between developed torque and bridge output voltage is drawn
53 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Developed torque (Nm) Vs Output Voltage (V)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sample reading:
Developed Torque (Nm) = 9.81 Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Output Voltage (V) = 5 mV
Result:
Thus the characteristics of the torque developed which is due to force applied to beam and the bridge
output voltage were studied and graph is plotted.
Outcome:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Students will be able to understand the Sensor device (electro-mechanical) which helps us to
measure the strain by providing analog input to digital output.
Application:
1. Machine Shop
2. Turbine

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

54 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00



1. Define ? Torque

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Define ? Twist
3. What are the methods used for measuring torque?
4. Define ? Strain Gauge
5. What is prony brake?
6. What are the modern devices used for measuring torque?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. What are the elements of strain gauge?
8. What is the use of slip ring for measuring torque?
9. What is slip ring?
10. What are the types of torque?
11. What are the types of dynamometer?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. What are the applications of dynamometer?
13. What are the features of dynamometer?
14. What is gauge factor?
15. What are the types of torque measurement?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

55 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.13 MEASUREMENT OF TEMPERATURE USING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

THERMOCOUPLE
Aim:
To study the characteristics of thermocouple without compensation
Apparatus required:
1. Trainer kit

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Thermocouple
3. Water bath
4. Thermometer
5. Digital multi meter
6. Power chord

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diagram:

Procedure:
1. Connect the two terminals of the thermocouple across T1 & T2.
2. Position the switch ?SW1? towards ?NO?.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Switch ?ON? the unit and note the displayed temperature.
4. If there is any difference in displayed temperature at room temperature, adjust the offset knob ?zero?
to set 0
o
C in display.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Place the Multimeter across T7 and T8.
6. Insert the thermocouple and thermometer into water bath.
7. Switch ?ON? the water bath.
8. Note the actual temperature in thermometer and displayed temperature simultaneously.
9. Tabulate the reading and calculate % error using the above formula

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

56 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

10. Plot the graph actual temperature Vs % error
Formulae:
Error (%) = {(Displayed Temperature ? Actual Temp)/ Actual Temp} x 100

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Actual Temperature
(
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C)
Displayed Temperature
(
o
C)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

% Error



Graph

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Temperature Vs % Error
Result:
Thus the characteristics of the thermocouple without compensation were studied and graph is plotted.
Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the Sensor device (electro-mechanical) which help us to measure

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

a physical parameter (such as temperature) by providing analog input.
Application:
1. Thermocouple
2. Heat generation

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

57 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by total radiation pyrometer?
2. How the mercury in glass thermometer worked?
3. What are the sources of error in thermocouple?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Define ? Resistance
5. Define ? Temperature detector
6. Define ? Temperature
7. What are the types of instrument used for measuring temperature?
8. What are the types of electrical temperature sensors?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. What is optical sensor?
10. What are the applications of liquid in gas thermometer?
11. What are the applications of bimetallic thermometer?
12. What is vapour pressure thermometer?
13. What is thermocouple?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. What are the types of metal are used in combination to form thermocouples?
15. What are the advantages of thermocouple?
16. What are the disadvantages of thermocouple?
17. Define ? Resistance Thermometer
18. Define ? Thermistor

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

19. What is the use radiation pyrometer?
20. What are the advantages of optical pyrometer?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

V SEMESTER - R 2013

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No. : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LABORATORY MANUAL
2 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

DHANALAKSHMI

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
2. To contribute to the promotion of Academic Excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels
3. To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING


Rendering the services to the global needs of engineering industries by educating students to become

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

professionally sound mechanical engineers of excellent caliber


To produce mechanical engineering technocrats with a perfect knowledge intellectual and hands on
experience and to inculcate the spirit of moral values and ethics to serve the society

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MISSION
MISSION
VISION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION

4 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals
To impart students with fundamental knowledge in mathematics and basic sciences that will mould
them to be successful professionals
2. Core competence

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To provide students with sound knowledge in engineering and experimental skills to identify
complex software problems in industry and to develop a practical solution for them
3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theory and practice which
enable them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and organization and to design

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

products requiring interdisciplinary skills
4. Professional skills
To bestow students with adequate training and provide opportunities to work as team that will build
up their communication skills, individual, leadership and supportive qualities and to enable them to
adapt and to work in ever changing technologies

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Life-long learning
To develop the ability of students to establish themselves as professionals in mechanical
engineering and to create awareness about the need for lifelong learning and pursuing advanced
degrees

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)
On completion of the B.E. (Mechanical) degree, the graduate will be able
a) To apply the basic knowledge of mathematics, science and engineering

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

b) To design and conduct experiments as well as to analyze and interpret data and apply the same in
the career or entrepreneurship
c) To design and develop innovative and creative software applications
d) To understand a complex real world problem and develop an efficient practical solution
e) To create, select and apply appropriate techniques, resources, modern engineering and IT tools

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

f) To understand the role as a professional and give the best to the society
g) To develop a system that will meet expected needs within realistic constraints such as economical
environmental, social, political, ethical, safety and sustainability
h) To communicate effectively and make others understand exactly what they are trying to tell in both
verbal and written forms

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

i) To work in a team as a team member or a leader and make unique contributions and work with
coordination
j) To engage in lifelong learning and exhibit their technical skills
k) To develop and manage projects in multidisciplinary environments

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY



To familiar with different measurement equipment?s and use of this industry for quality inspection

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

List of Experiments
1. Tool Maker?s Microscope
2. Comparator
3. Sine Bar
4. Gear Tooth Vernier Caliper

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Floating gauge Micrometer
6. Coordinate Measuring Machine
7. Surface Finish Measuring Equipment
8. Vernier Height Gauge
9. Bore diameter measurement using telescope gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. Bore diameter measurement using micrometer
11. Force Measurement
12. Torque Measurement
13. Temperature measurement
14. Autocollimator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Ability to handle different measurement tools and perform measurements in quality impulsion
2. Learnt the usage of precision measuring instruments and practiced to take measurements
3. Learnt and practiced to build the required dimensions using slip gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Able to measure the various dimensions of the given specimen using the tool maker?s microscope
5. Able to find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge
6. Able to measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare
7. Learnt to determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen using Gear tooth vernier
8. Able to measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

wire method
9. Learnt to study the construction and operation of coordinate measuring machine
10. Learnt to determine the diameter of bore by using telescopic gauge and dial bore indicator
11. Able to measure the surface roughness using Talysurf instrument
12. Studied the characteristic between applied load and the output volt

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. Learnt the characteristics of developing torque and respective sensor output voltage
14. Studied the characteristics of thermocouple without compensation
15. Able to check the straightness & flatness of the given component by using Autocollimator
16. Learnt to measure the displacement using LVDT and to calibrate it with the millimeter scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OBJECTIVES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OUTCOMES

7 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CONTENTS
Sl. No. Name of the Experiments Page No.
CYCLE ? 1 EXPERIMENTS
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab ? A Study
7
2
To build up the slip gauge for given dimension ? A Study
16

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3
Thread parameters measurement using Tool Makers Microscope
20
4
Calibration of dial gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

23
5
Determination of taper angle by sine bar method
26
6

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of gear tooth thickness using gear tooth vernier
29
7
Measurement of thread parameters using floating carriage micrometer
32

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CYCLE ? 2 EXPERIMENTS
8
Measurement of various dimensions using Coordinate Measuring Machine
35
9

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement of surface roughness
39
10
Measurement of bores using dial bore indicator and telescopic gauge
42

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11
Force measurement using load cell
46
12
Torque measurement using strain gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

49
13
Temperature measurement using thermocouple
53
14

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement of alignment using autocollimator
56
ADDITIONAL EXPERIMENT BEYOND THE SYLLABUS
15
Thread parameters measurement using profile projector

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

60
16
Displacement measurement ? linear variable differential transducer (LVDT)
62
PROJECT WORK

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

65


8 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.01 PRECISION MEASURING INSTRUMENT YSED IN
METROLOGY LAB ? A STUDY
Aim:
To study the following instruments and their usage for measuring dimensions of given specimen
1. Vernier caliper

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Micrometer
3. Vernier height gauge
4. Depth micrometer
5. Universal bevel protractor
Apparatus required:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Surface plate, specimen and above instruments
Vernier caliper:
The principle of vernier caliper is to use the minor difference between the sizes two scales or divisions
for measurement. The difference between them can be utilized to enhance the accuracy of measurement. The
vernier caliper essentially consists of two steel rules, sliding along each other.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Parts:
Different parts of the vernier caliper are
1. Beam ? It has main scale.
2. Fixed jaw
3. Sliding or Moving jaw ? It has vernier scale and sliding jaw locking screw.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw knife
edges for internal measurement.
5. Stem or depth bar for depth measurement
Least count:
Least count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm
1 VSD = 0.98 mm
Least count = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


ID

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPTH


OD
Measurement:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Given Vernier caliper can be used for external, internal depth, slot and step measurement.
Measurement principle:
When both jaws contact each other scale shows the zero reading. The finer adjustment of movable jaw
can be done by the fine adjustment screw. First the whole movable jaw assembly is adjusted so that the two
measuring tips just touch the part to be measured. Then the fine adjustment clamp locking screw is tightened.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Final adjustment depending upon the sense of correct feel is made by the adjusting screw. After final
adjustment has been made sliding jaw locking screw is also tightened and the reading is noted.
All the parts of the Vernier caliper are made of good quality steel and measuring faces are hardened.
Types of vernier:
Vernier caliper, electronic vernier caliper, vernier depth caliper

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Main scale
reading (MSR)
(mm)
Vernier scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale
reading (VSR) (mm)
Total reading (MSR
+ VSR)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)

OD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ID


Depth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier height gauge:
Vernier height gauge is a sort of vernier caliper equipped with a special instrument suitable for height
measurement. It is always kept on the surface plate and the use of the surfaces plates as datum surfaces is
very essential.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count:
Least Count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm
1 VSD = 0.98 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least Count (LC) = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm
Parts:
1. Base
2. Beam ? It has main scale.
3. Slider ? It has a vernier scale and slider locking screw.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Scriber
5. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw.


12 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Material:
All the parts of vernier are made of good quality steel and the measuring faces hardened.
Types of vernier gauge:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Analog vernier height gauge
2. Digital vernier height gauge
3. Electronic vernier height gauge
Tabulation:
Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Main scale reading
(MSR)(mm)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(VSR)(mm)
Total reading (MSR +
VSR)(mm)
1.
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.

13 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Outside micrometer:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The micrometer essentially consists of an accurate screw having about 10 or 20 threads per cm. The
end of the screw forms one measuring tip and other measuring tip is constituted by a stationary anvil in the
base of the frame. The screw is threaded for certain length and is plain afterwards. The plain portion is called
spindle and its end is the measuring surface. The spindle is advanced or retracted by turning a thimble
connected to a spindle. The spindle is a slide fit over the barrel and barrel is the fixed part attached with the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

frame. The barrel & thimble are graduated. The pitch of the screw threads is 0.5 mm.

Least count:
Least Count (LC) = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale
= 0.5 / 50 = 0.01 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Parts:
1. Frame
2. Anvil
3. Spindle
4. Spindle lock

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Barrel or outside sleeve
6. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions
7. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.
The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.
14 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement:
It can be used for any external measurement.
Types of micrometer:
1. Outside micrometer, 2. Inside micrometer, 3.Depth micrometer, 4. Stick micrometer, 5. Screw thread

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

micrometer, 6. V ? anvil micrometer, 7. Blade type micrometer, 8. Dial micrometer, 9. Bench micrometer, 10.
Tape screw operated internal micrometer, 11. Groove micrometer, 12. Digital micrometer, 13.Differential screw
micrometer, 14.Adjustable range outside micrometer.
Ratchet stop mechanism:
The object of the ratchet stop is to ensure that same level of torque is applied on the spindle while

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measuring and the sense of the feel of operator is eliminated and consistent readings are obtained. By
providing this arrangement, the ratchet stop is made slip off when the torque applied to rotate the spindle
exceeds the set torque. Thus this provision ensures the application of same amount of torque during the
measurement.
Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) (mm)
Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Head scale reading
(HSR x LC) (mm)
Total Reading (PSR
+ HSR) (mm)
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.

Depth micrometer:
Depth micrometer is a sort of micrometer which is mainly used for measuring depth of holes, so it is
named as depth micrometer.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Parts:
1. Shoulder
2. Spindle
3. Spindle lock
4. Barrel or outside sleeve ? It has pitch scale.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions.
6. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.
The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.
15 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count:
Least Count = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale = 0.50/50
= 0.01 mm
Measurements:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

It can be used for measuring the depth of holes, slots and recessed areas. The pitch of the screw thread
is 0.5 mm. The least count is 0.01 mm. Shoulder acts as a reference surface and is held firmly and
perpendicular to the centre line of the hole. For large range of measurement extension rods are used. In the
barrel the scale is calibrated. The accuracy again depends upon the sense of touch.
Procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

First, calculate the least count of the instrument. Check the zero error. Measure the specimen note
down the main scale reading or the head scale reading. Note down the vernier or head scale coincidence with
main or pitch scale divisions.
Tabulation:
Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) (mm)
Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)
Head scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(HSR x LC) (mm)
Total Reading (PSR
+ HSR) (mm)

1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Universal bevel protractor:

Description:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Bevel protractor is an instrument for measuring the angle between the two faces of a specimen. It
consists of a base plate on which a circular scale is engraved. It is graduated in degrees. An adjustment plate
is attached to a circular plate containing the vernier scale. The adjustable blade can be locked in any position.
The circular plate has 360 division divided into four parts of 90 degrees each. The adjustable parts have 24
divisions of to the right and left sides of zero reading. These scales are used according to the position of the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

specimen with respect to movable scale.
Procedure:
1. Place the specimen whose taper is to be measured between the adjustable plate and movable
blade with one of its face parallel to the base.
2. Lock the adjustable plate in position and note down the main scale reading depending upon the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

direction of rotation of adjustable plate in clockwise or anticlockwise.
3. Note the VSC to the right of zero.
4. Multiply the VSC with the least count and add to MSR to obtain the actual reading.
Least count:
Least Count = 2 MSD ? 1 VSD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 MSD = 1
o
24 VSD = 46
o
=> 1 VSD = 23/12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LC = 2 ? 23/12 = 1/12
o
= 5? (five minutes)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:
Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Main scale reading
(MSR) (deg)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(VSR) (deg)
Total reading (MSR +
VSR)
(deg)
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.
The angle of scriber of the vernier height gauge =
Result:
Thus the various precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab are studied and the specimen
dimensions are recorded.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for linear, angular,
roundness and roughness measurements they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring
instrument according to a specific requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).
Application:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Quality Department


1. Define ? Metrology
2. Define ? Inspection

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. What are the needs of inspection in industries?
4. What are the various methods involving the measurement?
5. Define ? Precision
6. Define ? Accuracy
7. Define ? Calibration

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Define ? Repeatability
9. Define ? Magnification
10. Define ? Error
11. Define ? Systematic Error
12. Define ? Random Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. Define ? Parallax Error
14. Define ? Environmental Error
15. Define ? Cosine Error
Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

18 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.02 BUILD UP THE SLIP GAUGE FOR GIVEN DIMENSION
? A STUDY
Aim:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To build up the slip gauge for given dimension
Apparatus required:
1. Slip gauges set
2. Surface plate
3. Soft cloth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diagram:

Description:
Slip gauge are universally accepted standard of length in industry. They are the working standard for
linear dimension. These were invented by a Swedish Engineer, C.E. Johansson. They are used

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. For direct precise measurement where the accuracy of the workpiece demand it.
2. For use with high- magnification comparators to establish the size of the gauge blocks in general
use.
3. Gauge blocks are also used for many other purposes such as checking the accuracy of measuring
instrument or setting up a comparator to a specific dimension, enabling a batch of component to be

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

quickly and accurately checked or indeed in any situation where there is need to refer to standard of
known length these blocks are rectangular.
19 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Most gauge blocks are produced from high grade steel, hardened and established by a heat treatment

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

process to give a high degree of dimensional stability. Gauge blocks are also manufactured from tungsten
carbide which is an extremely hard and wear resistant material. The measuring faces have a lapped finish.
The faces are perfectly flat and parallel to one another with a high degree of accuracy. Each block has an
extremely high dimensional accuracy at 20
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C.
These slip gauge are available in variety of selected sets both in inch units and metric units. Letter ?E? is
used for inch units and ?M? is used for metric standard number of pieces in a set following the letter E or M. For
example EBI refers to a set whose blocks are in metric units and are 83 in number. Each block dimensions is
printed on anyone of its face itself the size of any required standard being made up by combining the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

appropriate number of these different size blocks.
If two gauges are slid and twisted together under pressure they will firmly join together. This process,
known as wringing, is very useful because it enables several gauge blocks to be assembled together to
produce a required size. In fact the success of precision measurement by slip gauges depends on the
phenomenon of wringing.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

First the gauge is oscillated slightly with very light pressure over other gauge so as to detect pressure at
any foreign particles between the surfaces. One gauge is placed perpendicular to other using standard
gauging pressure and rotary motion is applied until the blocks are lined up.
Procedure:
1. Build the given dimension by wringing minimum number of slip gauges.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Note the given dimension and choose the minimum possible slip gauge available in the set so as to
accommodate the last decimal value. The minimum slip gauge value dimension available i.e., 1.12
mm must be chosen followed by 1.5 mm thick gauge block.
3. Follow the above steps to build up the slip gauge of any dimension.
Precautions:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Slip gauges should be handled very carefully placed gently and should never be dropped.
2. Whenever a slip gauge is being removed from the set, its dimensions are noted and must be
replaced into the set at its appropriate place only.
3. Correct procedure must be followed in wringing and also in removing the gauge blocks.
4. They should be cleaned well before use and petroleum jelly is applied after use.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

20 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Range (mm) Increment (mm) No. of pieces

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total = ____________ Pieces
Total length of slip gauge = ________ mm
Given diameter Slip gauges used Obtained dimensions

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Slip gauge set is studied and the given dimensions are building up by wringing minimum number of slip
gauges.
Outcome:
Students will be able to select proper measuring instrument and know requirement of calibration, errors
in measurement etc. They can perform accurate measurements.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Why C.I. is preferred material for surface plates and tables?
2. Why V ? blocks are generally manufactured in pairs?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Why micrometer is required to be tested for accuracy?
4. Define ? Linear Measurement
5. List the linear measuring instrument according to their accuracy.
6. Define ? Least Count
7. What are the uses of vernier depth gauge?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. What are the uses of feeler gauges?
9. What are the uses of straight edge?
10. What are the uses of angle plate?
11. What are the uses of V ? block?
12. What are the uses of combination square?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. What precautions should be taken while using slip gauges?
14. What is wringing?
15. Why the slip gauges are termed as ?End standard?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

22 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.03 THREAD PARAMETERS MEASUREMENT USING
TOOL MAKERS MICROSCOPE
Aim:
To study the tool makers microscope and in the process measure the various dimensions of the given
specimen

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Apparatus required:
1. Tool makers microscope
2. Specimen
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
The tool maker?s microscope is designed for measurement of parts of complex forms; for example,
profile of a tool having external threads. It can also be used for measuring centre to centre distance of the
holes in any plane as well as the coordinates of the outline of a complex template gauge, using the
coordinates measuring system.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

23 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Basically it consists of an optical head which can be adjusted vertically along the ways of supporting
column. The optical head can be clamped at any position by a screw. On the work table (which as a circular
base in which there are graduations) the part to be inspected is placed. The table has a compound slide by

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

means of which the part can be measured. For giving these two movements, there are two micrometer screws
having thimble scales and verniers. At the back of the base light source is arranged that provides horizontal
beam of light, reflected from a mirror by 90 degrees upwards towards the table. The beam of light passes
through the transparent glass plate on which flat plates can be checked are placed. Observations are made
through the eyepiece of the optical head.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. Place the given specimen on the work table and switch on all the three light sources and adjust the
intensity of the light source until a clean image of the cross wires and specimen are seen through
the eyepiece.
2. Coincide one of the two extreme edges between which the measurement has to be taken with

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

vertical or horizontal cross wires and depending upon the other image coincide with the same cross
wires by moving the above device. Note the reading.The difference between the two readings gives
the value of the required measurement.
3. Note the experiment specimen and the readings.
4. Tabulate the different measurements measured from the specimen.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of thread parameters
Magnification =
S.No. Parameters
Magnified value
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Actual value
(mm)
1. Outer diameter (O.D)

2. Internal diameter (I.D)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Pitch

4. Flank angle

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Included angle of the tool was measured using tool maker?s microscope and various dimensions of the
given specimen are measured.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

24 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the various parameters of thread and select proper measuring

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

instrument and know requirement of calibration, errors in measurement etc. They can perform accurate
measurements.
Application:
1. Machine Shop
2. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by tool maker?s microscope?
2. What is the light used in tool maker?s microscope?
3. What are the various characteristics that you would measure in a screw thread?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. What are the instruments that are required for measuring screw thread?
5. Define ? Pitch
6. What are the causes of pitch error?
7. Define ? Flank
8. What are the effects of flank angle error?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. What is progressive error?
10. What is periodic error?
11. What is drunken error?
12. What is erratic error?
13. What are the applications of tool maker?s microscope?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. What are the limitations of tool maker?s microscope?
15. What are the advantages of tool maker?s microscope?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

25 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.04 CALIBRATION OF DIAL GAUGE USING SLIP GAUGE
Aim:
To find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge
Apparatus required:
Dial gauge, magnetic stand, slip gauge, and surface plate

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diagram:

Description:
The dial test indicator is a precision measuring instrument which can convert linear motion into angular
motion by means of transmission mechanics of rack and pinion and can be used to measure linear vibration

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

and errors of shape.
This instrument has the features such as good appearance, compact size, light weight, high precision,
reasonable construction, constant measuring face etc. Rigidity of all parts is excellent. Probe is tipped with
carbide balls. A shock proof mechanism is provided for those with larger measuring range.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

26 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Types of dial indicator:
1. Plunger type
2. Lever type

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Plunger type dial indicator has a resolution counter and each division in main scale is 0.01 mm. In lever
type dial test indicator is replaced by ball type stylus.
Procedure:
1. Fix the dial gauge to the stand rigidly and place the stand on the surface plate.
2. Set the plunger of dial gauge to first touch the upper surface of standard slip gauge and set indicator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

to zero.
3. Raise then the plunger by pulling the screw above the dial scale.
4. Place the standard slip gauge underneath the plunger.
5. Release the plunger and let it to touch the standard slip gauge.
6. Note the reading on the dial scale.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Formulae:
The standard error of dial gauge is calculated by the formula

Tabulation:
S.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Slip gauge reading ?x?
(mm)
Dial gauge reading
(mm)
(x? - x)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2


x? (x? - x)
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2


Result:
Thus the accuracy and standard error of dial gauge is found. The standard error of given dial gauge is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

__________.

27 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Outcome:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Students will be able to check the variation in tolerance during the inspection process of a
machined part, measure the deflection of a beam or ring under laboratory conditions, as well as many
other situations where a small measurement needs to be registered or indicated
Application:
1. Milling Machine

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Analog versus digital/electronic readout


1. What is comparator?
2. What are the types of comparators?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. What is the LC for comparators?
4. What are the applications of comparator?
5. What is meant by plunger?
6. What are the types of dial indicators?
7. Why a revolution counter is not provided in lever type dial test indicator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Draw a line diagram of the operating mechanism of plunger type dial test indicator.
9. Explain the term magnification of a dial indicator.
10. What are the uses of dial test indicator?
11. What are the practical applications of dial test indicator?
12. What precautions should be taken while using dial test indicator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. What are the desirable qualities of a dial test indicator?
14. What are the advantages of dial test indicator?
15. What are the limitations of dial test indicator?
16. Distinguish between comparator and measuring instrument.
17. What are the advantages of electrical comparator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

18. What are the advantages of optical comparator?
19. What are the uses of comparator?
20. What are the advantages and disadvantages of mechanical comparator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

28 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.05 DETERMINATION OF TAPER ANGLE BY SINE BAR
METHOD
Aim:
To measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Apparatus required:
Sine bar, slip gauges, dial gauge with stand, micrometer, surface plate, bevel protractor, vernier caliper
Diagram:

Description:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The sine bar principle uses the ratio of the length of two sides of a right triangle. It may be noted that
devices operating on sine principle are capable of ?self-generation?. The measurement is restricted to 45
o
from
accuracy point of view. Sine bar itself is not a measuring instrument.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Accuracy requirements of sine bar:
1. The axes of the rollers must be parallel to each other and the centre distance L must be precisely
known.
2. The sine bar must be flat and parallel to the plane connecting the axes of the rollers.
3. The rollers must be of identical diameters and must have within a close tolerance.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

29 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Fix the dial gaugeon the magnetic stand and place the magnetic stand on the surface plate.Check
the parallelism of the sine bar.
2. Place the given specimen above the sine bar and place the dial gauge on top of the specimen.
Adjustthe dial gauge for zero deflection.
3. Raise the front end of the sine bar with slip gauges until the work surface is parallel to the datum

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

surface.
4. Check the parallelism using dial gauge.
5. Measure the distance between the centres of the sine bar rollers as ?L? and note the height of the
slip gauge as ?H?.
6. Note the included angle of the specimen.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Formulae:
Sin ? = H/L where ? = Included angle of the specimen
H = Height of slip gauges
L = Distance between the centre of rollers
Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

S.No. L (mm) H (mm) Taper angle ( ?)
1.
2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
The taper angle of the given specimen using sine bar was found to be =
Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for angular measurements
and they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a specific

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).

Application:
1. Flat Surface
2. Granite

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

30 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. List out the various angle measuring instruments.
2. What is the working principles sine bar?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. How is a sine bar used to measure the angle?
4. What is the application of sine bar?
5. What is the material of sine bar?
6. Why sine bar is not preferred to use for measuring angles more than 45
0

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?
7. What are the features of sine bar?
8. A 100 mm sine bar is to be set up to an angle of 33
0
, determine the slip gauges needed from 87

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

pieces set.
9. What are the various instruments used for measuring angles?
10. What is sine bar?
11. How sine bar is used for angle measurement?
12. Explain how sine bar is used to measure angle of small size component.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. Explain how sine bar is used to measure angle of large size component.
14. What are the various types of sine bar?
15. What are the limitations of sine bar?
16. What is sine center?
17. What is sine table?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

18. What are the possible sources of errors in angular measurement by sine bar?
19. What are angle gauges?
20. How angle gauges are used for measuring angles?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

31 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.06 DETERMINATION OF GEAR TOOTH THICKNESS
USING GEAR TOOTH VERNIER

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Aim:
To determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen and to draw the graph between the tooth
number and the error in thickness
Apparatus required:
Gear tooth vernier, specimen, surface plate and vernier caliper

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diagram:

Description:
The tooth thickness, in general, is measured at pitch circle since gear tooth thickness varies from the tip
to the base circle of the tooth. This is possible only when there is an arrangement to fix that position for this

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measurement by the gear tooth vernier. It has two vernier scales; one is vertical and other is horizontal.
Procedure:
32 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

1. Measure initially the outside diameter of the given gear specimen by means of a vertical calculation

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

of vernier caliper. Note the number of teeth. Calculate the module (m) using the formula.

M = OD/ (Z+2) where z ? number of teeth
M - Module
2. Calculate the theoretical tooth thickness (t) by t = z * m* sin (90/z).

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Set the vernier scale for the height and tighten.
4. Measure the thickness of each tooth using the horizontal scale. This is measured thickness. It can
be positive or negative.
H = m x [1+ Z/2 (1- Cos 90/Z)]
5. Calculate the error in the tooth thickness i.e,1. measured thickness ? Theoretical thickness

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Draw the graph between the tooth number and the error in thickness.
Tabulation:
Tooth
Number
Measured Thickness

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
Theoretical Thickness (mm)
Error in tooth thickness
(mm)
1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
3

Tooth
Number

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MSR
(mm)
VSC

VSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
TR
(mm)
1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3

Graph:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Error



Tooth No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

33 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


Result:
The theoretical experiment value of gear tooth thickness is obtained and graph is drawn between error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

and tooth number in tooth thickness
Theoretical tooth thickness =
Experimental tooth thickness =
Error in tooth thickness =
Outcome:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Students will be able to understand the basic measurement units and able to calibrate various
measuring parameters of the gear.
Application:
1. Gear Component
2. Mining

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Calculate the setting of a gear tooth vernier caliper for a straight spur gear having 40 teeth and
module 4.
2. What is the importance of chordal depth?
3. Define ? Chordal width

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. How is the actual profile of the gear tooth determined?
5. What are the manufacturing errors in gear element?
6. Define ? Addendum
7. Define ? Dedendum
8. Define ? Flank of tooth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. Define ? Pitch
10. Define ? Pitch Circle
11. Define ? Crest of tooth
12. Define ? Root of tooth
13. Define ? Base Circle

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. Define ? Module
15. Define ? Angle of Obliquity


Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

34 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.07 MEASUREMENT OF THREAD PARAMETER USING
FLOATING CARRIAGE MICROMETER

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Aim:
To measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two wire
method
Apparatus required:
1. Floating carriage micrometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Standard wire
3. Given specimen (screw thread)
Diagram:

Description of floating carriage micrometer:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

It consists of three main units. A base casting carries a pair of centres on which threaded work piece is
to be mounted. Another carriage capable of moving towards centre is mounted exactly above. In this carriage
one head with thimble to measure up to 0.002 mm is provided and at the other side of head a fiducial indicator
is provided to indicate zero position.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

35 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. For two wire method, place the standard wire over a thread of the screw at opposite sides.
2. For three wire method, place two standard wires on two successive threads and the third wire
placed opposite sides of the thread.
3. Measure the diameter over wires (M) using floating carriage micrometer.
4. Repeat this procedure at various positions of the screw and take different readings.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Formulae:
1. For best wire size, d = P / 2 Cos (x/2)
Where, P = Pitch
d= wire size
x = angle between two threads

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= 60
o
for metric thread
2. Actual effective diameter, E.A = M ? 3d + 0.866 p
3. Nominal effective diameter, EN = D ? 0.648 p

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Max. wire size = 1.01 p
5. Min. wire size = 0.505 p
6. Best wire size = 0.577 p
M = Diameter over wires
P = Pitch of thread

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

For metric thread:
Actual effective diameter (EA) = M ? 3d + 0.866 p
Where d = actual diameter of wire
Determination of actual and nominal effective diameter of the screw thread:
Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Nominal
Diameter (D)
(mm)
Diameter over
wire ?M?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
Actual eff.
Diameter E.A
(mm)
Nominal eff.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diameter E.N
(mm)
Error in effective
diameter
(E.A ? E.N)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
1.
2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

36 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Result:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thus the actual and nominal effective diameter is measured using three wire method and the error in
effective diameter of screw is determined.
Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for roundness
measurements and they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

specific requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).
Application:
1. Wholse
2. Maxxis Rubber India

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Pitch
2. Define ? Flank Angle
3. What is plug gauge?
4. What is meant by micrometer?
5. What is meant by indicator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. What is best ? size wire?
7. Calculate the diameter of the best wire for an M 20 x 25 screws.
8. What are the different corrections to be applied in the measurement of effective diameter by the
method of wire?
9. What is floating carriage micrometer?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. What are the uses of floating carriage micrometer?
11. What are the methods are used for measuring effective diameter?
12. Define ? Effective Diameter
13. Define ? Major Diameter
14. Define ? Minor Diameter

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15. What are the effects of flank error?
16. Define ? Rake Angle
17. Define ? Pitch Cylinder
18. What are the effects of pitch error?
19. Define ? Pitch Diameter

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

20. What is meant by angle of thread?


Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

37 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.08 MEASUREMENT OF VARIOUS DIMENSIONS USING
COORDINATE MEASURING MACHINE
Aim:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. To study the construction and operation of coordinate measuring machine
2. To measure the specified dimensions of the given component
Instruments used:
Coordinate measuring machine, vernier calipers
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Theory:
A coordinate measuring machine (CMM) is a 3D device for measuring the physical and geometrical
characteristics of an object. This machine may be manually controlled by an operator or it may be computer
controlled. Measurements are defined by a probe attached to the three moving axis of this machine X, Y and Z

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

axes. A coordinate measuring machine (CMM) is also a device used in manufacturing and assembly
processes to test a part or assembly against the design intent. By precisely recording the X, Y and Z
coordinates of the target, points are generated which can be analyzed via regression algorithms for the
construction of features. These points are collected by using a probe that is positioned manually by an
38 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

operator or automatically via direct computer control (DCC). DCC CMMs can be programmed to repeatedly
measure identical parts, thus a CMM is a specialized form of industrial robot.
Parts:
Coordinate measuring machine include three main components:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. The main structures which include three axes of motion.
2. Probing system
3. Data collection and reduction system ? typically includes a machine controller, desktop computer
and application software
Machine description:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. In modern machines, the gantry type superstructure has two legs and is often called a bridge. This
moves freely along the granite table with one leg following a guide rail attached to one side of the
granite table. The opposite leg simply rests on the granite table following the vertical surface
contour.
2. Air bearings are fixed for ensuring friction free travel. Compressed air is forced through a series of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

very small holes in a flat bearing surface to provide a smooth but controlled air cushion on which the
CMM can move in a frictionless manner.
3. The movement of the bridge along the granite table forms one axis of the XY plane. The bridge of
the gantry contains a carriage which traverses between the inside and outside legs and forms the
other X or Y horizontal axis.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. The third axis of movement (Z axis) is provided by the addition of a vertical quill or spindle which
moves up and down through the center of the carriage. The touch probe forms the sensing device
on the end of the quill.
5. The movement of the X, Y and Z axes fully describes the measuring envelope. Some touch probes
are themselves powered rotary devices with the probe tip able to swivel vertically through 90

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

degrees and through a full 360 degrees rotation.
Uses:
They are generally used for:
1. Dimensional measurement
2. Profile measurement

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Angularity or orientation measurement
4. Depth mapping
5. Digitizing mapping
6. Shaft measurement
39 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The machines are available in a wide range of sizes and designs with a variety of different probe
technologies. They can be operated manually or automatically through direct computer control (DCC). They
are offered in various configurations such as bench top, free ? standing, handheld and portable.
Procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Take at least 8 points on sphere ball attached to the granite table.
2. Fix the object whose dimension needs to be measured using the jigs and fixtures.
3. Using joystick, move the probe whose tip is made of ruby slowly and carefully to the surface whose
measurements have to be taken.
4. Touch the probe at two places for measurement of a line (starting and ending point).

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Touch the probe at two places for measurement of a circular profile and for a cylinder touch the
probe at 8 points.
6. Measure the same profiles again with vernier calipers (length of line, circle diameter, cylinder
diameter) to compare the two readings.
Comments:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. The machine should be calibrated every time when it is being used.
2. While measuring the profiles, the probe should be moved very slowly as it may damage the ruby if
hit with a high force.
3. Care should be taken while performing experiment so that the granite table of the machines should
get any scratches.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. ?Retract distance? should be fixed according to the space available in the near vicinity of the profile
measurement area.
Observation:
Sl.No. Feature
CMM reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
Vernier reading
(mm)
Form error
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Difference in two
readings (mm)
1 Circle -1
2 Circle -2
3 Circle -3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4 Line
5 Arc
6
Cone - Diameter
Cone ? Vertex angle

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Cone ? Height
7
Cylinder ? Diameter
Cylinder ? Height

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

40 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Result:
Thus the different profile of given object are measured using coordinate measuring machine

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Students will be able to measures the geometry of physical objects by sensing discrete points on the
surface of the object with a probe and they will be able to know the Various types of probes are used in CMMs,
including mechanical, optical, laser, and white light.
Application:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Surface Measuring Equipment
2. Photo transistor

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What are the types of measuring machine?
2. What is CMM?
3. What are the types of CMM?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. What are the advantages of CMM?
5. What are the limitations of CMM?
6. What are the possible sources of error in CMM?
7. What is the use of universal measuring machine?
8. What are the applications of CMM?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. What is the working principle of three axis measuring machine?
10. What is image shearing microscope?
11. What is the use of electronic inspection and measuring machine?
12. What are the types of electronic inspection and measuring machine?
13. What is CMM probe?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. What are the three main probes are available?
15. What are the types of stylus?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

41 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.09 MEASUREMENT OF SURFACE ROUGHNESS UING
TALYSURF INSTRUMENT
Aim:
To measure the surface roughness using Talysurf instrument
Apparatus required:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Talysurf instrument, work piece, surface plate
Diagram:

Theory:
On any finished surface, imperfections are bound to be there and these take the form of a succession of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

hills and valleys which vary both in height and in spacing and result in a kind of texture which in appearance or
feel is often characteristic of the machining process and accompanying defects. The several kinds of
departures are there on the surface and these are due to various causes.

42 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Methods of measuring surface roughness:
1. Surface inspection of comparison methods
2. Direct instrument measurements
In comparative methods the surface texture is assessed by observation of the surface. But these

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

methods are not reliable as they can be misleading, if comparison is not made with surfaces produced by
same techniques. The various methods available under comparison method are: (i) Touch Inspection
(ii)Scratch Inspection (iii) Microscopic Inspection (iv) Visual Inspection (v) Surface Photographs (vi) Reflected
Light Intensity Direct Instrument Measurements enable to determine a numerical value of the surface finish of
any surface. Nearly all instruments used are stylus probe type of instruments. This operates on electrical

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

principle.
Procedure:
1. Place the finished component on the surface plate.
2. Fix the Talysurf tester to the vernier height gauge using adopter at a convenient height.
3. Make sure that the stylus probe touches the work piece.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Fix the sampling length in the tester.
5. Press the power button so that the probe moves on the surface to and fro.
6. Take the readings of the surface roughness directly from the instrument.
7. Repeat the above process for the remaining specimen and tabulate the readings.
Precautions:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. The surface to be tested should be cleaned properly.
2. The tester should be fixed to the height gauge properly so that the movement of the probe is exactly
parallel to the surface of work.
3. Make sure that the probe gently touches the work.
Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

S.No
Measurement roughness value,
?m
Sample direction Ra, Rz
Average Ra Average Rz Grade

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

43 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Result:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thus the surface roughness is checked for different specimens by Talysurf.
Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for roughness
measurements they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a specific
requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Machine Shop
2. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Actual Size?
2. What is meant by normal surface?
3. What is meant by profilo-graph?
4. What is Tomlinson surface meter?
5. What is meant by profile?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. What are the factors affecting surface roughness?
7. Why the surface texture is control?
8. Define ? Lay
9. Define ? Surface Texture
10. Define ? Flaws

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. What is sampling length?
12. What are the methods used for evaluating surface finish?
13. What is form factor?
14. What are the methods used for measuring surface finish?
15. How will you differentiate smooth surface from flat surface?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16. How surface finish is designated on drawings?
17. Define ? Primary Texture
18. Define ? Secondary Texture
19. What are the types of instrument used for measuring surface texture?
20. Define ? waviness

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

44 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.10 MEASUREMENT OF BORE USING DIAL BORE
INDICATOR AND TELESCOPIC GAUGE
Aim:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To determine the diameter of bore by using telescopic gauge and checking the same by using dial bore
indicator
Apparatus required:
Work piece, vernier caliper, telescopic gauge and dial gauge indicator set with anvil.
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

45 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


Procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Bore gauge measurement:
1. Select the extension rod and washer according to the bore diameter to be measured
2. Fix the suitable extension rod and washer with the bore gauge
3. Fix the dial gauge to the bore gauge in its position
4. Insert the bore gauge inside the bore to be measured and hold the gauge in parallel o the axis of the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

bore. Ensure that the tips on either side of the bore gauge are in touch with inner wall of the bore
5. Note down the reading in the dial gauge and withdraw the bore gauge from the bore
6. Hold the measuring tips of bore gauge between the spindle and anvil of a micrometer and compress
the tips by rotating the thimble till the reading reaches the same one as noted earlier
7. Observe and record the micrometer reading as the bore diameter to be measured

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Telescopic gauge measurement:
1. Select the telescopic gauge according to the bore diameter to be measured
2. Press the telescopic spindles in the telescopic gauge lock them by locking screw
3. Insert the telescopic gauge inside thee bore to be measured. Release the locking screw to expand
the telescopic spindles outwards inside the bore

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Hold the telescopic gauge in parallel to the axis of bore axis and ensure that the tips of telescopic
spindles are in touch with the inner wall of the bore
5. Lock the telescopic spindles and withdraw it from the bore
46 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Measure the expanded length of the telescopic spindles using micrometer record them as the inner
diameter of the bore
Practical observations:
Rough measurement of bore using Telescopic gauge:
Least count of micrometer = 0.01 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
Micrometer reading
Total reading
(MSR + TSC * LC) ( mm) Main scale reading (MSR)
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thimble scale
coincidence
1.
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Average reading = ________ mm
Accurate measuring using Bore gauge
Sl.No.
Micrometer
reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(d) (mm)
Bore gauge
reading
(R1) (mm)
Work piece reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(R2) (mm)
Final reading
d+ (R1 ? R2) * 0.01
(mm)
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.

Accurate internal diameter of hole using bore gauge = ______ mm

Result

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Internal diameter of the work piece by using telescopic gauge is ________mm
2. Diameter obtained by using dial gauge indicator is __________________mm

Outcome:
Students will be able to measure a bore's size, by transferring the internal dimension to a remote

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measuring tool (Telescopic gauge).
Application:
1. Automobile
2. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

47 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by bore diameter?
2. What is gauge?
3. What is meant by measurement?
4. What is telescope gauge?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. What is bore gauge?
6. What is contact point?
7. What is the principle of bore gauge?
8. What are the applications of telescopic gauge?
9. What types of materials are used in telescopic gauge?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. What are the types of instrument used to measure bore diameter?
11. What are the applications of bore gauge?
12. What are the advantages of bore gauge over telescopic gauge?
13. What are the limitations of bore gauge?
14. What is the working principle of telescopic gauge?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15. What are the disadvantages of telescopic gauge?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

48 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.11 MEASUREMENT OF FORCE USING LOAD CELL
Aim:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To study the characteristic between applied load and the output voltage
Apparatus required:
1. Trainer kit
2. Multimeter
3. Load cell sensor with setup

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Weights (5 kg)
5. Power chord
Diagram:

Formulae:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Error (%) = {Applied Voltage ? (Displayed Load)/ Applied Load)} x 100
Block diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Applied DC
Load O/P

DC Excitation source Transducer
Transducer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Instrumentation
Amplifier
Gain Amplifier DVM
49 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Interfacing and calibration procedure:
1. Interface the load cell 9 pin ?D? type male connector to 9 pin D type female connector, fixed on the
module.
2. First unload the beam and nullify the display by using zero adjustment POT
3. Apply the maximum load of 5 kg to the beam and adjust the display to 5 kg by using gain

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

adjustment POT.
4. After the initial adjustment, the unit should not be disturbed until the completion of the experiment.
Safety precaution:
1. During offset adjustment, the beam should not be loaded.
2. The beam should not be disturbed during the experiment.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Remove the load from the beam, after completion of the experiment; otherwise wire wound on the
strain gauge will get damaged.
4. If you are getting an unsatisfactory reading, then vary the zero and span POT minimum to
maximum.
5. Maximum load should not exceed 5 kg.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Once calibrated, the setting should not be distributed till the end of the experiment.
Procedure:
1. Install the load cell module and interface the 9 pin D connector with kit.
2. Connect the multimeter in volt mode across T5 and GND for the output voltage measurement.
3. Switch on the module.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Initially, unload the beam and nullify the display by using zero adjustment POT (zero calibration).
5. Apply the maximum load of 5 kg to the beam and adjust the display to 5 kg by using gain
adjustment POT (gain calibration).
6. Now apply the load to the beam, a force will develop on the beam and measure the output voltage
(V) across T5 and GND.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Gradually increase the load and note down the output voltage (V) and applied load.
8. Tabulate the values of displayed load and applied voltage.
9. Plot a graph between applied load and output voltage (V).
Note: When 1 kg load is applied to the beam, the displayed voltage is 1 kg.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

50 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:
Applied load

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(kg)
Output voltage
(V)
Displayed load
(kg)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

% Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Graph:
1. Applied load (kg) Vs Output Voltage (V)
2. Actual load (kg) Vs % Error
Result:
Thus the characteristic between applied load and the output voltage was studied.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the Sensor device (electro-mechanical) which help us to measure
a physical parameter (such as temperature, pressure, force, acceleration etc.) by providing analog input to get
digital output.
Application:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Machine Shop
2. Automobile


1. What is meant by force?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Define ? Wheat stone bridge circuit
3. Define ? Load
4. What is meant by deflector?
5. What is meant by force indicator?
6. Define ? Instrumentation

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. How instrumentations are classified?
8. Define ? Transducer
9. What is electrical transducer?
10. How transducers are classified?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

51 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.12 MEASUREMENT OF TORQUE USING STRAIN
GAUGE
Aim:
To study the characteristics of the developing torque and the signal conditioned sensor output voltage

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Apparatus required:
1. Trainer kit
2. Digital Multimeter (V)
3. Torque sensor setup
4. Weights (100 gram x 10 Nos.)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Power chord
Diagram:

Interfacing and calibration procedure:
1. Interface the torque sensor 9 pin. ?D? type male connector to ?9? pin ?D? type female connector, fixed

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

on the module.
2. First, unload the beam and nullify the display by using zero adjustment POT.
3. Apply the maximum load of 1 kg to the beam and adjust the display to 9.81 Nm by using adjustment
POT.
4. After this initial calibration, the unit should not be disturbed until the completion of the experiment.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

52 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Safety precaution:
1. During offset adjustment, the beam should not be loaded.
2. The beam should not be disturbed during the experiment.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Remove the beam from the shaft, after completion of the experiment otherwise wire wound on the
strain gauge will get damaged.
4. If the displayed torque reading are in negative, change the beam connections in opposite to
previously connected direction.
5. If you are getting an unsatisfactory reading, then vary the zero and span POT minimum to

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

maximum.
6. Maximum load should not exceed 1 kg.
7. Once calibrated, the setting should not be disturbed till the end of this experiment.
Procedure:
1. Install the torque sensor setup and interface with kit.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Switch ?ON? the module.
3. Connect the Multimeter in millivolts mode T2 and T3 for bridge output voltage measurement POT.
4. First, unload the beam and nullify the bridge output voltage by using zero adjustment POT.
5. By applying load to the beam, torque will develop on the shaft and measure the bridge output
voltage (mV) across T2 and T3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Gradually increase the force by applying load and note down the bridge output voltage (mV).
7. Tabulate the readings and plot a graph between developed torque versus bridge output voltage
(mV).
Formulae:
Error (%) = {(Actual Torque ? Theoretical Torque)/ Theoretical Torque} x 100

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Theoretical Torque = mass (m) x acceleration due to gravity (g) x radial distance
= 1 kg x 9.81 m/s
2
x 1 m
= 9.81 Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Sl.No. Theoretical Torque
(Nm)
Bridge output voltage
(mV)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Model graph:
The graph between developed torque and bridge output voltage is drawn
53 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Developed torque (Nm) Vs Output Voltage (V)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sample reading:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Developed Torque (Nm) = 9.81 Nm
Output Voltage (V) = 5 mV
Result:
Thus the characteristics of the torque developed which is due to force applied to beam and the bridge
output voltage were studied and graph is plotted.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the Sensor device (electro-mechanical) which helps us to
measure the strain by providing analog input to digital output.
Application:
1. Machine Shop

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Turbine

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

54 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Torque
2. Define ? Twist
3. What are the methods used for measuring torque?
4. Define ? Strain Gauge
5. What is prony brake?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. What are the modern devices used for measuring torque?
7. What are the elements of strain gauge?
8. What is the use of slip ring for measuring torque?
9. What is slip ring?
10. What are the types of torque?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. What are the types of dynamometer?
12. What are the applications of dynamometer?
13. What are the features of dynamometer?
14. What is gauge factor?
15. What are the types of torque measurement?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

55 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.13 MEASUREMENT OF TEMPERATURE USING
THERMOCOUPLE
Aim:
To study the characteristics of thermocouple without compensation
Apparatus required:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Trainer kit
2. Thermocouple
3. Water bath
4. Thermometer
5. Digital multi meter

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Power chord
Diagram:

Procedure:
1. Connect the two terminals of the thermocouple across T1 & T2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Position the switch ?SW1? towards ?NO?.
3. Switch ?ON? the unit and note the displayed temperature.
4. If there is any difference in displayed temperature at room temperature, adjust the offset knob ?zero?
to set 0
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C in display.
5. Place the Multimeter across T7 and T8.
6. Insert the thermocouple and thermometer into water bath.
7. Switch ?ON? the water bath.
8. Note the actual temperature in thermometer and displayed temperature simultaneously.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. Tabulate the reading and calculate % error using the above formula
56 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

10. Plot the graph actual temperature Vs % error
Formulae:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Error (%) = {(Displayed Temperature ? Actual Temp)/ Actual Temp} x 100

Tabulation:
Actual Temperature
(

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
C)
Displayed Temperature
(
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C)
% Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Graph
Temperature Vs % Error
Result:
Thus the characteristics of the thermocouple without compensation were studied and graph is plotted.
Outcome:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Students will be able to understand the Sensor device (electro-mechanical) which help us to measure
a physical parameter (such as temperature) by providing analog input.
Application:
1. Thermocouple
2. Heat generation

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

57 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by total radiation pyrometer?
2. How the mercury in glass thermometer worked?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. What are the sources of error in thermocouple?
4. Define ? Resistance
5. Define ? Temperature detector
6. Define ? Temperature
7. What are the types of instrument used for measuring temperature?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. What are the types of electrical temperature sensors?
9. What is optical sensor?
10. What are the applications of liquid in gas thermometer?
11. What are the applications of bimetallic thermometer?
12. What is vapour pressure thermometer?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. What is thermocouple?
14. What are the types of metal are used in combination to form thermocouples?
15. What are the advantages of thermocouple?
16. What are the disadvantages of thermocouple?
17. Define ? Resistance Thermometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

18. Define ? Thermistor
19. What is the use radiation pyrometer?
20. What are the advantages of optical pyrometer?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

58 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


Expt.No.14 MEASUREMENT OF ALIGNMENT USING
AUTOCOLLIMATOR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Aim:
To check the straightness & flatness of the given component by using Autocollimator
Apparatus required:
Autocollimator, work piece/ object to be tested
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Theory:
1. Definition of straightness ? A plane is to be said straight over a given length if the variation or
distance of its point from two planes perpendicular to each other and parallel to the generation
direction at of the line remain within specified tolerance limits. The reference planes being so

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

chosen that their intersection is parallel to the straight line joining two points suitably located on the
line to be tested and two points being close ends of the length to be measured.
2. Principle of the Autocollimator-A cross line ?target? graticule is positioned at the focal plane of a
telescope objective system with the intersection of the cross line on the optical axis, i.e. at the
principal focus. When the target graticule is illuminated, rays of light diverging from the intersection

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

point reach the objective via a beam splitter and are projected from the objective as parallel pencils
of light. In this mode the optical system is operating as a collimator.
FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice
1 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING


ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

V SEMESTER - R 2013

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No. : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LABORATORY MANUAL
2 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


3 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DHANALAKSHMI


College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.


1. To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
2. To contribute to the promotion of Academic Excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

levels
3. To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

DEPARTMENT OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rendering the services to the global needs of engineering industries by educating students to become
professionally sound mechanical engineers of excellent caliber

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To produce mechanical engineering technocrats with a perfect knowledge intellectual and hands on
experience and to inculcate the spirit of moral values and ethics to serve the society

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MISSION
MISSION
VISION

VISION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To impart students with fundamental knowledge in mathematics and basic sciences that will mould
them to be successful professionals
2. Core competence
To provide students with sound knowledge in engineering and experimental skills to identify
complex software problems in industry and to develop a practical solution for them

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theory and practice which
enable them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and organization and to design
products requiring interdisciplinary skills
4. Professional skills

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To bestow students with adequate training and provide opportunities to work as team that will build
up their communication skills, individual, leadership and supportive qualities and to enable them to
adapt and to work in ever changing technologies
5. Life-long learning
To develop the ability of students to establish themselves as professionals in mechanical

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

engineering and to create awareness about the need for lifelong learning and pursuing advanced
degrees

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)
On completion of the B.E. (Mechanical) degree, the graduate will be able
a) To apply the basic knowledge of mathematics, science and engineering
b) To design and conduct experiments as well as to analyze and interpret data and apply the same in
the career or entrepreneurship

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

c) To design and develop innovative and creative software applications
d) To understand a complex real world problem and develop an efficient practical solution
e) To create, select and apply appropriate techniques, resources, modern engineering and IT tools
f) To understand the role as a professional and give the best to the society
g) To develop a system that will meet expected needs within realistic constraints such as economical

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

environmental, social, political, ethical, safety and sustainability
h) To communicate effectively and make others understand exactly what they are trying to tell in both
verbal and written forms
i) To work in a team as a team member or a leader and make unique contributions and work with
coordination

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

j) To engage in lifelong learning and exhibit their technical skills
k) To develop and manage projects in multidisciplinary environments

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To familiar with different measurement equipment?s and use of this industry for quality inspection
List of Experiments
1. Tool Maker?s Microscope

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Comparator
3. Sine Bar
4. Gear Tooth Vernier Caliper
5. Floating gauge Micrometer
6. Coordinate Measuring Machine

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Surface Finish Measuring Equipment
8. Vernier Height Gauge
9. Bore diameter measurement using telescope gauge
10. Bore diameter measurement using micrometer
11. Force Measurement

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. Torque Measurement
13. Temperature measurement
14. Autocollimator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Ability to handle different measurement tools and perform measurements in quality impulsion
2. Learnt the usage of precision measuring instruments and practiced to take measurements
3. Learnt and practiced to build the required dimensions using slip gauge
4. Able to measure the various dimensions of the given specimen using the tool maker?s microscope
5. Able to find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Able to measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare
7. Learnt to determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen using Gear tooth vernier
8. Able to measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two
wire method
9. Learnt to study the construction and operation of coordinate measuring machine

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. Learnt to determine the diameter of bore by using telescopic gauge and dial bore indicator
11. Able to measure the surface roughness using Talysurf instrument
12. Studied the characteristic between applied load and the output volt
13. Learnt the characteristics of developing torque and respective sensor output voltage
14. Studied the characteristics of thermocouple without compensation

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15. Able to check the straightness & flatness of the given component by using Autocollimator
16. Learnt to measure the displacement using LVDT and to calibrate it with the millimeter scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OBJECTIVES

COURSE OUTCOMES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

CONTENTS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl. No. Name of the Experiments Page No.
CYCLE ? 1 EXPERIMENTS
1
Precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab ? A Study
7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
To build up the slip gauge for given dimension ? A Study
16
3
Thread parameters measurement using Tool Makers Microscope

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

20
4
Calibration of dial gauge
23
5

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of taper angle by sine bar method
26
6
Determination of gear tooth thickness using gear tooth vernier
29

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7
Measurement of thread parameters using floating carriage micrometer
32
CYCLE ? 2 EXPERIMENTS
8

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement of various dimensions using Coordinate Measuring Machine
35
9
Measurement of surface roughness
39

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
Measurement of bores using dial bore indicator and telescopic gauge
42
11
Force measurement using load cell

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

46
12
Torque measurement using strain gauge
49
13

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Temperature measurement using thermocouple
53
14
Measurement of alignment using autocollimator
56

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ADDITIONAL EXPERIMENT BEYOND THE SYLLABUS
15
Thread parameters measurement using profile projector
60
16

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Displacement measurement ? linear variable differential transducer (LVDT)
62
PROJECT WORK
65

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.01 PRECISION MEASURING INSTRUMENT YSED IN
METROLOGY LAB ? A STUDY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Aim:
To study the following instruments and their usage for measuring dimensions of given specimen
1. Vernier caliper
2. Micrometer
3. Vernier height gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Depth micrometer
5. Universal bevel protractor
Apparatus required:
Surface plate, specimen and above instruments
Vernier caliper:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The principle of vernier caliper is to use the minor difference between the sizes two scales or divisions
for measurement. The difference between them can be utilized to enhance the accuracy of measurement. The
vernier caliper essentially consists of two steel rules, sliding along each other.
Parts:
Different parts of the vernier caliper are

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Beam ? It has main scale.
2. Fixed jaw
3. Sliding or Moving jaw ? It has vernier scale and sliding jaw locking screw.
4. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw knife
edges for internal measurement.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Stem or depth bar for depth measurement
Least count:
Least count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 VSD = 0.98 mm
Least count = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm

10 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ID

DEPTH

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OD
Measurement:
Given Vernier caliper can be used for external, internal depth, slot and step measurement.
Measurement principle:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

When both jaws contact each other scale shows the zero reading. The finer adjustment of movable jaw
can be done by the fine adjustment screw. First the whole movable jaw assembly is adjusted so that the two
measuring tips just touch the part to be measured. Then the fine adjustment clamp locking screw is tightened.
Final adjustment depending upon the sense of correct feel is made by the adjusting screw. After final
adjustment has been made sliding jaw locking screw is also tightened and the reading is noted.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

All the parts of the Vernier caliper are made of good quality steel and measuring faces are hardened.
Types of vernier:
Vernier caliper, electronic vernier caliper, vernier depth caliper

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:

Main scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

reading (MSR)
(mm)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

reading (VSR) (mm)
Total reading (MSR
+ VSR)
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OD


ID

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Depth


Vernier height gauge:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier height gauge is a sort of vernier caliper equipped with a special instrument suitable for height
measurement. It is always kept on the surface plate and the use of the surfaces plates as datum surfaces is
very essential.
Least count:
Least Count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm
1 VSD = 0.98 mm
Least Count (LC) = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm
Parts:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Base
2. Beam ? It has main scale.
3. Slider ? It has a vernier scale and slider locking screw.
4. Scriber
5. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Material:
All the parts of vernier are made of good quality steel and the measuring faces hardened.
Types of vernier gauge:
1. Analog vernier height gauge
2. Digital vernier height gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Electronic vernier height gauge
Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Main scale reading
(MSR)(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale reading
(VSR)(mm)
Total reading (MSR +

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSR)(mm)
1.
2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Outside micrometer:
The micrometer essentially consists of an accurate screw having about 10 or 20 threads per cm. The
end of the screw forms one measuring tip and other measuring tip is constituted by a stationary anvil in the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

base of the frame. The screw is threaded for certain length and is plain afterwards. The plain portion is called
spindle and its end is the measuring surface. The spindle is advanced or retracted by turning a thimble
connected to a spindle. The spindle is a slide fit over the barrel and barrel is the fixed part attached with the
frame. The barrel & thimble are graduated. The pitch of the screw threads is 0.5 mm.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count:
Least Count (LC) = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale
= 0.5 / 50 = 0.01 mm
Parts:
1. Frame

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Anvil
3. Spindle
4. Spindle lock
5. Barrel or outside sleeve
6. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.
The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.
14 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Measurement:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

It can be used for any external measurement.
Types of micrometer:
1. Outside micrometer, 2. Inside micrometer, 3.Depth micrometer, 4. Stick micrometer, 5. Screw thread
micrometer, 6. V ? anvil micrometer, 7. Blade type micrometer, 8. Dial micrometer, 9. Bench micrometer, 10.
Tape screw operated internal micrometer, 11. Groove micrometer, 12. Digital micrometer, 13.Differential screw

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

micrometer, 14.Adjustable range outside micrometer.
Ratchet stop mechanism:
The object of the ratchet stop is to ensure that same level of torque is applied on the spindle while
measuring and the sense of the feel of operator is eliminated and consistent readings are obtained. By
providing this arrangement, the ratchet stop is made slip off when the torque applied to rotate the spindle

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

exceeds the set torque. Thus this provision ensures the application of same amount of torque during the
measurement.
Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Pitch Scale Reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(PSR) (mm)
Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)
Head scale reading
(HSR x LC) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total Reading (PSR
+ HSR) (mm)
1.
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Depth micrometer:
Depth micrometer is a sort of micrometer which is mainly used for measuring depth of holes, so it is
named as depth micrometer.
Parts:
1. Shoulder

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Spindle
3. Spindle lock
4. Barrel or outside sleeve ? It has pitch scale.
5. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions.
6. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.
15 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


Least count:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least Count = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale = 0.50/50
= 0.01 mm
Measurements:
It can be used for measuring the depth of holes, slots and recessed areas. The pitch of the screw thread
is 0.5 mm. The least count is 0.01 mm. Shoulder acts as a reference surface and is held firmly and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

perpendicular to the centre line of the hole. For large range of measurement extension rods are used. In the
barrel the scale is calibrated. The accuracy again depends upon the sense of touch.
Procedure:
First, calculate the least count of the instrument. Check the zero error. Measure the specimen note
down the main scale reading or the head scale reading. Note down the vernier or head scale coincidence with

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

main or pitch scale divisions.
Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)
Head scale reading
(HSR x LC) (mm)
Total Reading (PSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

+ HSR) (mm)

1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.


16 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Universal bevel protractor:

Description:
Bevel protractor is an instrument for measuring the angle between the two faces of a specimen. It
consists of a base plate on which a circular scale is engraved. It is graduated in degrees. An adjustment plate

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

is attached to a circular plate containing the vernier scale. The adjustable blade can be locked in any position.
The circular plate has 360 division divided into four parts of 90 degrees each. The adjustable parts have 24
divisions of to the right and left sides of zero reading. These scales are used according to the position of the
specimen with respect to movable scale.
Procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Place the specimen whose taper is to be measured between the adjustable plate and movable
blade with one of its face parallel to the base.
2. Lock the adjustable plate in position and note down the main scale reading depending upon the
direction of rotation of adjustable plate in clockwise or anticlockwise.
3. Note the VSC to the right of zero.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Multiply the VSC with the least count and add to MSR to obtain the actual reading.
Least count:
Least Count = 2 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

24 VSD = 46
o
=> 1 VSD = 23/12
LC = 2 ? 23/12 = 1/12
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= 5? (five minutes)



17 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Main scale reading
(MSR) (deg)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale reading
(VSR) (deg)
Total reading (MSR +

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSR)
(deg)
1.
2.
The angle of scriber of the vernier height gauge =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Thus the various precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab are studied and the specimen
dimensions are recorded.
Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for linear, angular,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

roundness and roughness measurements they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring
instrument according to a specific requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).
Application:
1. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Metrology
2. Define ? Inspection
3. What are the needs of inspection in industries?
4. What are the various methods involving the measurement?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Define ? Precision
6. Define ? Accuracy
7. Define ? Calibration
8. Define ? Repeatability
9. Define ? Magnification

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. Define ? Error
11. Define ? Systematic Error
12. Define ? Random Error
13. Define ? Parallax Error
14. Define ? Environmental Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15. Define ? Cosine Error
Viva-voce

18 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.02 BUILD UP THE SLIP GAUGE FOR GIVEN DIMENSION
? A STUDY
Aim:
To build up the slip gauge for given dimension
Apparatus required:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Slip gauges set
2. Surface plate
3. Soft cloth
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
Slip gauge are universally accepted standard of length in industry. They are the working standard for
linear dimension. These were invented by a Swedish Engineer, C.E. Johansson. They are used
1. For direct precise measurement where the accuracy of the workpiece demand it.
2. For use with high- magnification comparators to establish the size of the gauge blocks in general

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

use.
3. Gauge blocks are also used for many other purposes such as checking the accuracy of measuring
instrument or setting up a comparator to a specific dimension, enabling a batch of component to be
quickly and accurately checked or indeed in any situation where there is need to refer to standard of
known length these blocks are rectangular.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

19 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Most gauge blocks are produced from high grade steel, hardened and established by a heat treatment
process to give a high degree of dimensional stability. Gauge blocks are also manufactured from tungsten
carbide which is an extremely hard and wear resistant material. The measuring faces have a lapped finish.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The faces are perfectly flat and parallel to one another with a high degree of accuracy. Each block has an
extremely high dimensional accuracy at 20
o
C.
These slip gauge are available in variety of selected sets both in inch units and metric units. Letter ?E? is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

used for inch units and ?M? is used for metric standard number of pieces in a set following the letter E or M. For
example EBI refers to a set whose blocks are in metric units and are 83 in number. Each block dimensions is
printed on anyone of its face itself the size of any required standard being made up by combining the
appropriate number of these different size blocks.
If two gauges are slid and twisted together under pressure they will firmly join together. This process,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

known as wringing, is very useful because it enables several gauge blocks to be assembled together to
produce a required size. In fact the success of precision measurement by slip gauges depends on the
phenomenon of wringing.
First the gauge is oscillated slightly with very light pressure over other gauge so as to detect pressure at
any foreign particles between the surfaces. One gauge is placed perpendicular to other using standard

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

gauging pressure and rotary motion is applied until the blocks are lined up.
Procedure:
1. Build the given dimension by wringing minimum number of slip gauges.
2. Note the given dimension and choose the minimum possible slip gauge available in the set so as to
accommodate the last decimal value. The minimum slip gauge value dimension available i.e., 1.12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

mm must be chosen followed by 1.5 mm thick gauge block.
3. Follow the above steps to build up the slip gauge of any dimension.
Precautions:
1. Slip gauges should be handled very carefully placed gently and should never be dropped.
2. Whenever a slip gauge is being removed from the set, its dimensions are noted and must be

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

replaced into the set at its appropriate place only.
3. Correct procedure must be followed in wringing and also in removing the gauge blocks.
4. They should be cleaned well before use and petroleum jelly is applied after use.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

20 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:
Range (mm) Increment (mm) No. of pieces

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total = ____________ Pieces

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total length of slip gauge = ________ mm
Given diameter Slip gauges used Obtained dimensions

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Slip gauge set is studied and the given dimensions are building up by wringing minimum number of slip
gauges.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Students will be able to select proper measuring instrument and know requirement of calibration, errors
in measurement etc. They can perform accurate measurements.
Application:
1. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Why C.I. is preferred material for surface plates and tables?
2. Why V ? blocks are generally manufactured in pairs?
3. Why micrometer is required to be tested for accuracy?
4. Define ? Linear Measurement

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. List the linear measuring instrument according to their accuracy.
6. Define ? Least Count
7. What are the uses of vernier depth gauge?
8. What are the uses of feeler gauges?
9. What are the uses of straight edge?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. What are the uses of angle plate?
11. What are the uses of V ? block?
12. What are the uses of combination square?
13. What precautions should be taken while using slip gauges?
14. What is wringing?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15. Why the slip gauges are termed as ?End standard?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

22 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


Expt.No.03 THREAD PARAMETERS MEASUREMENT USING
TOOL MAKERS MICROSCOPE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Aim:
To study the tool makers microscope and in the process measure the various dimensions of the given
specimen
Apparatus required:
1. Tool makers microscope

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Specimen
Diagram:

Description:
The tool maker?s microscope is designed for measurement of parts of complex forms; for example,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

profile of a tool having external threads. It can also be used for measuring centre to centre distance of the
holes in any plane as well as the coordinates of the outline of a complex template gauge, using the
coordinates measuring system.
23 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Basically it consists of an optical head which can be adjusted vertically along the ways of supporting
column. The optical head can be clamped at any position by a screw. On the work table (which as a circular
base in which there are graduations) the part to be inspected is placed. The table has a compound slide by
means of which the part can be measured. For giving these two movements, there are two micrometer screws
having thimble scales and verniers. At the back of the base light source is arranged that provides horizontal

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

beam of light, reflected from a mirror by 90 degrees upwards towards the table. The beam of light passes
through the transparent glass plate on which flat plates can be checked are placed. Observations are made
through the eyepiece of the optical head.
Procedure:
1. Place the given specimen on the work table and switch on all the three light sources and adjust the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

intensity of the light source until a clean image of the cross wires and specimen are seen through
the eyepiece.
2. Coincide one of the two extreme edges between which the measurement has to be taken with
vertical or horizontal cross wires and depending upon the other image coincide with the same cross
wires by moving the above device. Note the reading.The difference between the two readings gives

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the value of the required measurement.
3. Note the experiment specimen and the readings.
4. Tabulate the different measurements measured from the specimen.
Determination of thread parameters
Magnification =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

S.No. Parameters
Magnified value
(mm)
Actual value
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Outer diameter (O.D)

2. Internal diameter (I.D)

3. Pitch

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Flank angle


Result:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Included angle of the tool was measured using tool maker?s microscope and various dimensions of the
given specimen are measured.


24 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the various parameters of thread and select proper measuring
instrument and know requirement of calibration, errors in measurement etc. They can perform accurate
measurements.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Machine Shop
2. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by tool maker?s microscope?
2. What is the light used in tool maker?s microscope?
3. What are the various characteristics that you would measure in a screw thread?
4. What are the instruments that are required for measuring screw thread?
5. Define ? Pitch

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. What are the causes of pitch error?
7. Define ? Flank
8. What are the effects of flank angle error?
9. What is progressive error?
10. What is periodic error?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. What is drunken error?
12. What is erratic error?
13. What are the applications of tool maker?s microscope?
14. What are the limitations of tool maker?s microscope?
15. What are the advantages of tool maker?s microscope?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

25 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.04 CALIBRATION OF DIAL GAUGE USING SLIP GAUGE
Aim:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge
Apparatus required:
Dial gauge, magnetic stand, slip gauge, and surface plate
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
The dial test indicator is a precision measuring instrument which can convert linear motion into angular
motion by means of transmission mechanics of rack and pinion and can be used to measure linear vibration
and errors of shape.
This instrument has the features such as good appearance, compact size, light weight, high precision,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

reasonable construction, constant measuring face etc. Rigidity of all parts is excellent. Probe is tipped with
carbide balls. A shock proof mechanism is provided for those with larger measuring range.

26 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Types of dial indicator:
1. Plunger type
2. Lever type
Plunger type dial indicator has a resolution counter and each division in main scale is 0.01 mm. In lever
type dial test indicator is replaced by ball type stylus.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. Fix the dial gauge to the stand rigidly and place the stand on the surface plate.
2. Set the plunger of dial gauge to first touch the upper surface of standard slip gauge and set indicator
to zero.
3. Raise then the plunger by pulling the screw above the dial scale.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Place the standard slip gauge underneath the plunger.
5. Release the plunger and let it to touch the standard slip gauge.
6. Note the reading on the dial scale.
Formulae:
The standard error of dial gauge is calculated by the formula

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
S.No.
Slip gauge reading ?x?
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Dial gauge reading
(mm)
(x? - x)
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x? (x? - x)
1.
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Thus the accuracy and standard error of dial gauge is found. The standard error of given dial gauge is
__________.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

27 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Outcome:
Students will be able to check the variation in tolerance during the inspection process of a
machined part, measure the deflection of a beam or ring under laboratory conditions, as well as many

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

other situations where a small measurement needs to be registered or indicated
Application:
1. Milling Machine
2. Analog versus digital/electronic readout

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is comparator?
2. What are the types of comparators?
3. What is the LC for comparators?
4. What are the applications of comparator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. What is meant by plunger?
6. What are the types of dial indicators?
7. Why a revolution counter is not provided in lever type dial test indicator?
8. Draw a line diagram of the operating mechanism of plunger type dial test indicator.
9. Explain the term magnification of a dial indicator.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. What are the uses of dial test indicator?
11. What are the practical applications of dial test indicator?
12. What precautions should be taken while using dial test indicator?
13. What are the desirable qualities of a dial test indicator?
14. What are the advantages of dial test indicator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15. What are the limitations of dial test indicator?
16. Distinguish between comparator and measuring instrument.
17. What are the advantages of electrical comparator?
18. What are the advantages of optical comparator?
19. What are the uses of comparator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

20. What are the advantages and disadvantages of mechanical comparator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

28 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.05 DETERMINATION OF TAPER ANGLE BY SINE BAR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

METHOD
Aim:
To measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare
Apparatus required:
Sine bar, slip gauges, dial gauge with stand, micrometer, surface plate, bevel protractor, vernier caliper

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diagram:

Description:
The sine bar principle uses the ratio of the length of two sides of a right triangle. It may be noted that
devices operating on sine principle are capable of ?self-generation?. The measurement is restricted to 45

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
from
accuracy point of view. Sine bar itself is not a measuring instrument.
Accuracy requirements of sine bar:
1. The axes of the rollers must be parallel to each other and the centre distance L must be precisely

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

known.
2. The sine bar must be flat and parallel to the plane connecting the axes of the rollers.
3. The rollers must be of identical diameters and must have within a close tolerance.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

29 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Procedure:
1. Fix the dial gaugeon the magnetic stand and place the magnetic stand on the surface plate.Check
the parallelism of the sine bar.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Place the given specimen above the sine bar and place the dial gauge on top of the specimen.
Adjustthe dial gauge for zero deflection.
3. Raise the front end of the sine bar with slip gauges until the work surface is parallel to the datum
surface.
4. Check the parallelism using dial gauge.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Measure the distance between the centres of the sine bar rollers as ?L? and note the height of the
slip gauge as ?H?.
6. Note the included angle of the specimen.
Formulae:
Sin ? = H/L where ? = Included angle of the specimen

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

H = Height of slip gauges
L = Distance between the centre of rollers
Tabulation:
S.No. L (mm) H (mm) Taper angle ( ?)
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.
3.

Result:
The taper angle of the given specimen using sine bar was found to be =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for angular measurements
and they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a specific
requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Flat Surface
2. Granite

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

30 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. List out the various angle measuring instruments.
2. What is the working principles sine bar?
3. How is a sine bar used to measure the angle?
4. What is the application of sine bar?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. What is the material of sine bar?
6. Why sine bar is not preferred to use for measuring angles more than 45
0
?
7. What are the features of sine bar?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. A 100 mm sine bar is to be set up to an angle of 33
0
, determine the slip gauges needed from 87
pieces set.
9. What are the various instruments used for measuring angles?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. What is sine bar?
11. How sine bar is used for angle measurement?
12. Explain how sine bar is used to measure angle of small size component.
13. Explain how sine bar is used to measure angle of large size component.
14. What are the various types of sine bar?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15. What are the limitations of sine bar?
16. What is sine center?
17. What is sine table?
18. What are the possible sources of errors in angular measurement by sine bar?
19. What are angle gauges?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

20. How angle gauges are used for measuring angles?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

31 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.06 DETERMINATION OF GEAR TOOTH THICKNESS
USING GEAR TOOTH VERNIER
Aim:
To determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen and to draw the graph between the tooth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

number and the error in thickness
Apparatus required:
Gear tooth vernier, specimen, surface plate and vernier caliper
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
The tooth thickness, in general, is measured at pitch circle since gear tooth thickness varies from the tip
to the base circle of the tooth. This is possible only when there is an arrangement to fix that position for this
measurement by the gear tooth vernier. It has two vernier scales; one is vertical and other is horizontal.
Procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

32 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

1. Measure initially the outside diameter of the given gear specimen by means of a vertical calculation
of vernier caliper. Note the number of teeth. Calculate the module (m) using the formula.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M = OD/ (Z+2) where z ? number of teeth
M - Module
2. Calculate the theoretical tooth thickness (t) by t = z * m* sin (90/z).
3. Set the vernier scale for the height and tighten.
4. Measure the thickness of each tooth using the horizontal scale. This is measured thickness. It can

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

be positive or negative.
H = m x [1+ Z/2 (1- Cos 90/Z)]
5. Calculate the error in the tooth thickness i.e,1. measured thickness ? Theoretical thickness
6. Draw the graph between the tooth number and the error in thickness.
Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tooth
Number
Measured Thickness
(mm)
Theoretical Thickness (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Error in tooth thickness
(mm)
1
2
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tooth
Number
MSR
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSC

VSR
(mm)
TR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
1
2
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Graph:


Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tooth No.
33 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
The theoretical experiment value of gear tooth thickness is obtained and graph is drawn between error
and tooth number in tooth thickness
Theoretical tooth thickness =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Experimental tooth thickness =
Error in tooth thickness =
Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the basic measurement units and able to calibrate various
measuring parameters of the gear.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Gear Component
2. Mining

1. Calculate the setting of a gear tooth vernier caliper for a straight spur gear having 40 teeth and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

module 4.
2. What is the importance of chordal depth?
3. Define ? Chordal width
4. How is the actual profile of the gear tooth determined?
5. What are the manufacturing errors in gear element?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Define ? Addendum
7. Define ? Dedendum
8. Define ? Flank of tooth
9. Define ? Pitch
10. Define ? Pitch Circle

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. Define ? Crest of tooth
12. Define ? Root of tooth
13. Define ? Base Circle
14. Define ? Module
15. Define ? Angle of Obliquity

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

34 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.07 MEASUREMENT OF THREAD PARAMETER USING
FLOATING CARRIAGE MICROMETER
Aim:
To measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two wire

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

method
Apparatus required:
1. Floating carriage micrometer
2. Standard wire
3. Given specimen (screw thread)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diagram:

Description of floating carriage micrometer:
It consists of three main units. A base casting carries a pair of centres on which threaded work piece is
to be mounted. Another carriage capable of moving towards centre is mounted exactly above. In this carriage

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

one head with thimble to measure up to 0.002 mm is provided and at the other side of head a fiducial indicator
is provided to indicate zero position.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

35 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Procedure:
1. For two wire method, place the standard wire over a thread of the screw at opposite sides.
2. For three wire method, place two standard wires on two successive threads and the third wire

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

placed opposite sides of the thread.
3. Measure the diameter over wires (M) using floating carriage micrometer.
4. Repeat this procedure at various positions of the screw and take different readings.
Formulae:
1. For best wire size, d = P / 2 Cos (x/2)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Where, P = Pitch
d= wire size
x = angle between two threads
= 60
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

for metric thread
2. Actual effective diameter, E.A = M ? 3d + 0.866 p
3. Nominal effective diameter, EN = D ? 0.648 p
4. Max. wire size = 1.01 p
5. Min. wire size = 0.505 p

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Best wire size = 0.577 p
M = Diameter over wires
P = Pitch of thread
For metric thread:
Actual effective diameter (EA) = M ? 3d + 0.866 p

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Where d = actual diameter of wire
Determination of actual and nominal effective diameter of the screw thread:
Sl.No.
Nominal
Diameter (D)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
Diameter over
wire ?M?
(mm)
Actual eff.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diameter E.A
(mm)
Nominal eff.
Diameter E.N
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Error in effective
diameter
(E.A ? E.N)
(mm)
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

36 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Result:
Thus the actual and nominal effective diameter is measured using three wire method and the error in
effective diameter of screw is determined.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for roundness
measurements and they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a
specific requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).
Application:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Wholse
2. Maxxis Rubber India

1. Define ? Pitch
2. Define ? Flank Angle

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. What is plug gauge?
4. What is meant by micrometer?
5. What is meant by indicator?
6. What is best ? size wire?
7. Calculate the diameter of the best wire for an M 20 x 25 screws.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. What are the different corrections to be applied in the measurement of effective diameter by the
method of wire?
9. What is floating carriage micrometer?
10. What are the uses of floating carriage micrometer?
11. What are the methods are used for measuring effective diameter?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. Define ? Effective Diameter
13. Define ? Major Diameter
14. Define ? Minor Diameter
15. What are the effects of flank error?
16. Define ? Rake Angle

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17. Define ? Pitch Cylinder
18. What are the effects of pitch error?
19. Define ? Pitch Diameter
20. What is meant by angle of thread?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

37 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.08 MEASUREMENT OF VARIOUS DIMENSIONS USING
COORDINATE MEASURING MACHINE
Aim:
1. To study the construction and operation of coordinate measuring machine
2. To measure the specified dimensions of the given component

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Instruments used:
Coordinate measuring machine, vernier calipers
Diagram:

Theory:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

A coordinate measuring machine (CMM) is a 3D device for measuring the physical and geometrical
characteristics of an object. This machine may be manually controlled by an operator or it may be computer
controlled. Measurements are defined by a probe attached to the three moving axis of this machine X, Y and Z
axes. A coordinate measuring machine (CMM) is also a device used in manufacturing and assembly
processes to test a part or assembly against the design intent. By precisely recording the X, Y and Z

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

coordinates of the target, points are generated which can be analyzed via regression algorithms for the
construction of features. These points are collected by using a probe that is positioned manually by an
38 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

operator or automatically via direct computer control (DCC). DCC CMMs can be programmed to repeatedly

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measure identical parts, thus a CMM is a specialized form of industrial robot.
Parts:
Coordinate measuring machine include three main components:
1. The main structures which include three axes of motion.
2. Probing system

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Data collection and reduction system ? typically includes a machine controller, desktop computer
and application software
Machine description:
1. In modern machines, the gantry type superstructure has two legs and is often called a bridge. This
moves freely along the granite table with one leg following a guide rail attached to one side of the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

granite table. The opposite leg simply rests on the granite table following the vertical surface
contour.
2. Air bearings are fixed for ensuring friction free travel. Compressed air is forced through a series of
very small holes in a flat bearing surface to provide a smooth but controlled air cushion on which the
CMM can move in a frictionless manner.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. The movement of the bridge along the granite table forms one axis of the XY plane. The bridge of
the gantry contains a carriage which traverses between the inside and outside legs and forms the
other X or Y horizontal axis.
4. The third axis of movement (Z axis) is provided by the addition of a vertical quill or spindle which
moves up and down through the center of the carriage. The touch probe forms the sensing device

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

on the end of the quill.
5. The movement of the X, Y and Z axes fully describes the measuring envelope. Some touch probes
are themselves powered rotary devices with the probe tip able to swivel vertically through 90
degrees and through a full 360 degrees rotation.
Uses:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

They are generally used for:
1. Dimensional measurement
2. Profile measurement
3. Angularity or orientation measurement
4. Depth mapping

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Digitizing mapping
6. Shaft measurement
39 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

The machines are available in a wide range of sizes and designs with a variety of different probe

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

technologies. They can be operated manually or automatically through direct computer control (DCC). They
are offered in various configurations such as bench top, free ? standing, handheld and portable.
Procedure:
1. Take at least 8 points on sphere ball attached to the granite table.
2. Fix the object whose dimension needs to be measured using the jigs and fixtures.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Using joystick, move the probe whose tip is made of ruby slowly and carefully to the surface whose
measurements have to be taken.
4. Touch the probe at two places for measurement of a line (starting and ending point).
5. Touch the probe at two places for measurement of a circular profile and for a cylinder touch the
probe at 8 points.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Measure the same profiles again with vernier calipers (length of line, circle diameter, cylinder
diameter) to compare the two readings.
Comments:
1. The machine should be calibrated every time when it is being used.
2. While measuring the profiles, the probe should be moved very slowly as it may damage the ruby if

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

hit with a high force.
3. Care should be taken while performing experiment so that the granite table of the machines should
get any scratches.
4. ?Retract distance? should be fixed according to the space available in the near vicinity of the profile
measurement area.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Observation:
Sl.No. Feature
CMM reading
(mm)
Vernier reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
Form error
(mm)
Difference in two
readings (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 Circle -1
2 Circle -2
3 Circle -3
4 Line
5 Arc

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6
Cone - Diameter
Cone ? Vertex angle
Cone ? Height
7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Cylinder ? Diameter
Cylinder ? Height


40 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Thus the different profile of given object are measured using coordinate measuring machine
Outcome:
Students will be able to measures the geometry of physical objects by sensing discrete points on the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

surface of the object with a probe and they will be able to know the Various types of probes are used in CMMs,
including mechanical, optical, laser, and white light.
Application:
1. Surface Measuring Equipment
2. Photo transistor

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What are the types of measuring machine?
2. What is CMM?
3. What are the types of CMM?
4. What are the advantages of CMM?
5. What are the limitations of CMM?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. What are the possible sources of error in CMM?
7. What is the use of universal measuring machine?
8. What are the applications of CMM?
9. What is the working principle of three axis measuring machine?
10. What is image shearing microscope?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. What is the use of electronic inspection and measuring machine?
12. What are the types of electronic inspection and measuring machine?
13. What is CMM probe?
14. What are the three main probes are available?
15. What are the types of stylus?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

41 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.09 MEASUREMENT OF SURFACE ROUGHNESS UING
TALYSURF INSTRUMENT

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Aim:
To measure the surface roughness using Talysurf instrument
Apparatus required:
Talysurf instrument, work piece, surface plate
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Theory:
On any finished surface, imperfections are bound to be there and these take the form of a succession of
hills and valleys which vary both in height and in spacing and result in a kind of texture which in appearance or
feel is often characteristic of the machining process and accompanying defects. The several kinds of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

departures are there on the surface and these are due to various causes.

42 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Methods of measuring surface roughness:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Surface inspection of comparison methods
2. Direct instrument measurements
In comparative methods the surface texture is assessed by observation of the surface. But these
methods are not reliable as they can be misleading, if comparison is not made with surfaces produced by
same techniques. The various methods available under comparison method are: (i) Touch Inspection

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(ii)Scratch Inspection (iii) Microscopic Inspection (iv) Visual Inspection (v) Surface Photographs (vi) Reflected
Light Intensity Direct Instrument Measurements enable to determine a numerical value of the surface finish of
any surface. Nearly all instruments used are stylus probe type of instruments. This operates on electrical
principle.
Procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Place the finished component on the surface plate.
2. Fix the Talysurf tester to the vernier height gauge using adopter at a convenient height.
3. Make sure that the stylus probe touches the work piece.
4. Fix the sampling length in the tester.
5. Press the power button so that the probe moves on the surface to and fro.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Take the readings of the surface roughness directly from the instrument.
7. Repeat the above process for the remaining specimen and tabulate the readings.
Precautions:
1. The surface to be tested should be cleaned properly.
2. The tester should be fixed to the height gauge properly so that the movement of the probe is exactly

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

parallel to the surface of work.
3. Make sure that the probe gently touches the work.
Tabulation:
S.No
Measurement roughness value,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?m
Sample direction Ra, Rz
Average Ra Average Rz Grade
1.
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

43 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Result:
Thus the surface roughness is checked for different specimens by Talysurf.
Outcome:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for roughness
measurements they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a specific
requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).
Application:
1. Machine Shop

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Quality Department


1. Define ? Actual Size?
2. What is meant by normal surface?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. What is meant by profilo-graph?
4. What is Tomlinson surface meter?
5. What is meant by profile?
6. What are the factors affecting surface roughness?
7. Why the surface texture is control?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Define ? Lay
9. Define ? Surface Texture
10. Define ? Flaws
11. What is sampling length?
12. What are the methods used for evaluating surface finish?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. What is form factor?
14. What are the methods used for measuring surface finish?
15. How will you differentiate smooth surface from flat surface?
16. How surface finish is designated on drawings?
17. Define ? Primary Texture

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

18. Define ? Secondary Texture
19. What are the types of instrument used for measuring surface texture?
20. Define ? waviness

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

44 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.10 MEASUREMENT OF BORE USING DIAL BORE
INDICATOR AND TELESCOPIC GAUGE
Aim:
To determine the diameter of bore by using telescopic gauge and checking the same by using dial bore
indicator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Apparatus required:
Work piece, vernier caliper, telescopic gauge and dial gauge indicator set with anvil.
Diagram:

45 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
Bore gauge measurement:
1. Select the extension rod and washer according to the bore diameter to be measured

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Fix the suitable extension rod and washer with the bore gauge
3. Fix the dial gauge to the bore gauge in its position
4. Insert the bore gauge inside the bore to be measured and hold the gauge in parallel o the axis of the
bore. Ensure that the tips on either side of the bore gauge are in touch with inner wall of the bore
5. Note down the reading in the dial gauge and withdraw the bore gauge from the bore

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Hold the measuring tips of bore gauge between the spindle and anvil of a micrometer and compress
the tips by rotating the thimble till the reading reaches the same one as noted earlier
7. Observe and record the micrometer reading as the bore diameter to be measured
Telescopic gauge measurement:
1. Select the telescopic gauge according to the bore diameter to be measured

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Press the telescopic spindles in the telescopic gauge lock them by locking screw
3. Insert the telescopic gauge inside thee bore to be measured. Release the locking screw to expand
the telescopic spindles outwards inside the bore
4. Hold the telescopic gauge in parallel to the axis of bore axis and ensure that the tips of telescopic
spindles are in touch with the inner wall of the bore

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Lock the telescopic spindles and withdraw it from the bore
46 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

6. Measure the expanded length of the telescopic spindles using micrometer record them as the inner
diameter of the bore

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Practical observations:
Rough measurement of bore using Telescopic gauge:
Least count of micrometer = 0.01 mm
Sl.No.
Micrometer reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total reading
(MSR + TSC * LC) ( mm) Main scale reading (MSR)
(mm)
Thimble scale
coincidence

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
2.

Average reading = ________ mm
Accurate measuring using Bore gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
Micrometer
reading
(d) (mm)
Bore gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

reading
(R1) (mm)
Work piece reading
(R2) (mm)
Final reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d+ (R1 ? R2) * 0.01
(mm)
1.
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Accurate internal diameter of hole using bore gauge = ______ mm

Result
1. Internal diameter of the work piece by using telescopic gauge is ________mm
2. Diameter obtained by using dial gauge indicator is __________________mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Students will be able to measure a bore's size, by transferring the internal dimension to a remote
measuring tool (Telescopic gauge).
Application:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Automobile
2. Quality Department


47 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by bore diameter?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. What is gauge?
3. What is meant by measurement?
4. What is telescope gauge?
5. What is bore gauge?
6. What is contact point?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. What is the principle of bore gauge?
8. What are the applications of telescopic gauge?
9. What types of materials are used in telescopic gauge?
10. What are the types of instrument used to measure bore diameter?
11. What are the applications of bore gauge?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. What are the advantages of bore gauge over telescopic gauge?
13. What are the limitations of bore gauge?
14. What is the working principle of telescopic gauge?
15. What are the disadvantages of telescopic gauge?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

48 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.11 MEASUREMENT OF FORCE USING LOAD CELL
Aim:
To study the characteristic between applied load and the output voltage
Apparatus required:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Trainer kit
2. Multimeter
3. Load cell sensor with setup
4. Weights (5 kg)
5. Power chord

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diagram:

Formulae:
Error (%) = {Applied Voltage ? (Displayed Load)/ Applied Load)} x 100
Block diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Applied DC
Load O/P

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DC Excitation source Transducer
Transducer
Instrumentation
Amplifier

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Gain Amplifier DVM
49 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Interfacing and calibration procedure:
1. Interface the load cell 9 pin ?D? type male connector to 9 pin D type female connector, fixed on the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

module.
2. First unload the beam and nullify the display by using zero adjustment POT
3. Apply the maximum load of 5 kg to the beam and adjust the display to 5 kg by using gain
adjustment POT.
4. After the initial adjustment, the unit should not be disturbed until the completion of the experiment.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Safety precaution:
1. During offset adjustment, the beam should not be loaded.
2. The beam should not be disturbed during the experiment.
3. Remove the load from the beam, after completion of the experiment; otherwise wire wound on the
strain gauge will get damaged.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. If you are getting an unsatisfactory reading, then vary the zero and span POT minimum to
maximum.
5. Maximum load should not exceed 5 kg.
6. Once calibrated, the setting should not be distributed till the end of the experiment.
Procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Install the load cell module and interface the 9 pin D connector with kit.
2. Connect the multimeter in volt mode across T5 and GND for the output voltage measurement.
3. Switch on the module.
4. Initially, unload the beam and nullify the display by using zero adjustment POT (zero calibration).
5. Apply the maximum load of 5 kg to the beam and adjust the display to 5 kg by using gain

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

adjustment POT (gain calibration).
6. Now apply the load to the beam, a force will develop on the beam and measure the output voltage
(V) across T5 and GND.
7. Gradually increase the load and note down the output voltage (V) and applied load.
8. Tabulate the values of displayed load and applied voltage.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. Plot a graph between applied load and output voltage (V).
Note: When 1 kg load is applied to the beam, the displayed voltage is 1 kg.


50 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Applied load
(kg)
Output voltage

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(V)
Displayed load
(kg)
% Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Graph:
1. Applied load (kg) Vs Output Voltage (V)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Actual load (kg) Vs % Error
Result:
Thus the characteristic between applied load and the output voltage was studied.
Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the Sensor device (electro-mechanical) which help us to measure

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

a physical parameter (such as temperature, pressure, force, acceleration etc.) by providing analog input to get
digital output.
Application:
1. Machine Shop
2. Automobile

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by force?
2. Define ? Wheat stone bridge circuit
3. Define ? Load

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. What is meant by deflector?
5. What is meant by force indicator?
6. Define ? Instrumentation
7. How instrumentations are classified?
8. Define ? Transducer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. What is electrical transducer?
10. How transducers are classified?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

51 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.12 MEASUREMENT OF TORQUE USING STRAIN

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

GAUGE
Aim:
To study the characteristics of the developing torque and the signal conditioned sensor output voltage
Apparatus required:
1. Trainer kit

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Digital Multimeter (V)
3. Torque sensor setup
4. Weights (100 gram x 10 Nos.)
5. Power chord
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Interfacing and calibration procedure:
1. Interface the torque sensor 9 pin. ?D? type male connector to ?9? pin ?D? type female connector, fixed
on the module.
2. First, unload the beam and nullify the display by using zero adjustment POT.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Apply the maximum load of 1 kg to the beam and adjust the display to 9.81 Nm by using adjustment
POT.
4. After this initial calibration, the unit should not be disturbed until the completion of the experiment.
52 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Safety precaution:
1. During offset adjustment, the beam should not be loaded.
2. The beam should not be disturbed during the experiment.
3. Remove the beam from the shaft, after completion of the experiment otherwise wire wound on the
strain gauge will get damaged.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. If the displayed torque reading are in negative, change the beam connections in opposite to
previously connected direction.
5. If you are getting an unsatisfactory reading, then vary the zero and span POT minimum to
maximum.
6. Maximum load should not exceed 1 kg.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Once calibrated, the setting should not be disturbed till the end of this experiment.
Procedure:
1. Install the torque sensor setup and interface with kit.
2. Switch ?ON? the module.
3. Connect the Multimeter in millivolts mode T2 and T3 for bridge output voltage measurement POT.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. First, unload the beam and nullify the bridge output voltage by using zero adjustment POT.
5. By applying load to the beam, torque will develop on the shaft and measure the bridge output
voltage (mV) across T2 and T3
6. Gradually increase the force by applying load and note down the bridge output voltage (mV).
7. Tabulate the readings and plot a graph between developed torque versus bridge output voltage

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mV).
Formulae:
Error (%) = {(Actual Torque ? Theoretical Torque)/ Theoretical Torque} x 100
Theoretical Torque = mass (m) x acceleration due to gravity (g) x radial distance
= 1 kg x 9.81 m/s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
x 1 m
= 9.81 Nm
Tabulation:
Sl.No. Theoretical Torque

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(Nm)
Bridge output voltage
(mV)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Model graph:
The graph between developed torque and bridge output voltage is drawn
53 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Developed torque (Nm) Vs Output Voltage (V)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sample reading:
Developed Torque (Nm) = 9.81 Nm
Output Voltage (V) = 5 mV

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Thus the characteristics of the torque developed which is due to force applied to beam and the bridge
output voltage were studied and graph is plotted.
Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the Sensor device (electro-mechanical) which helps us to

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measure the strain by providing analog input to digital output.
Application:
1. Machine Shop
2. Turbine

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

54 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Torque
2. Define ? Twist

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. What are the methods used for measuring torque?
4. Define ? Strain Gauge
5. What is prony brake?
6. What are the modern devices used for measuring torque?
7. What are the elements of strain gauge?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. What is the use of slip ring for measuring torque?
9. What is slip ring?
10. What are the types of torque?
11. What are the types of dynamometer?
12. What are the applications of dynamometer?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. What are the features of dynamometer?
14. What is gauge factor?
15. What are the types of torque measurement?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

55 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.13 MEASUREMENT OF TEMPERATURE USING
THERMOCOUPLE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Aim:
To study the characteristics of thermocouple without compensation
Apparatus required:
1. Trainer kit
2. Thermocouple

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Water bath
4. Thermometer
5. Digital multi meter
6. Power chord
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. Connect the two terminals of the thermocouple across T1 & T2.
2. Position the switch ?SW1? towards ?NO?.
3. Switch ?ON? the unit and note the displayed temperature.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. If there is any difference in displayed temperature at room temperature, adjust the offset knob ?zero?
to set 0
o
C in display.
5. Place the Multimeter across T7 and T8.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Insert the thermocouple and thermometer into water bath.
7. Switch ?ON? the water bath.
8. Note the actual temperature in thermometer and displayed temperature simultaneously.
9. Tabulate the reading and calculate % error using the above formula
56 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. Plot the graph actual temperature Vs % error
Formulae:
Error (%) = {(Displayed Temperature ? Actual Temp)/ Actual Temp} x 100

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Actual Temperature
(
o
C)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Displayed Temperature
(
o
C)
% Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Graph
Temperature Vs % Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Thus the characteristics of the thermocouple without compensation were studied and graph is plotted.
Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the Sensor device (electro-mechanical) which help us to measure
a physical parameter (such as temperature) by providing analog input.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Thermocouple
2. Heat generation

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

57 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by total radiation pyrometer?
2. How the mercury in glass thermometer worked?
3. What are the sources of error in thermocouple?
4. Define ? Resistance

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Define ? Temperature detector
6. Define ? Temperature
7. What are the types of instrument used for measuring temperature?
8. What are the types of electrical temperature sensors?
9. What is optical sensor?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. What are the applications of liquid in gas thermometer?
11. What are the applications of bimetallic thermometer?
12. What is vapour pressure thermometer?
13. What is thermocouple?
14. What are the types of metal are used in combination to form thermocouples?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15. What are the advantages of thermocouple?
16. What are the disadvantages of thermocouple?
17. Define ? Resistance Thermometer
18. Define ? Thermistor
19. What is the use radiation pyrometer?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

20. What are the advantages of optical pyrometer?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

58 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.14 MEASUREMENT OF ALIGNMENT USING
AUTOCOLLIMATOR
Aim:
To check the straightness & flatness of the given component by using Autocollimator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Apparatus required:
Autocollimator, work piece/ object to be tested
Diagram:

Theory:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Definition of straightness ? A plane is to be said straight over a given length if the variation or
distance of its point from two planes perpendicular to each other and parallel to the generation
direction at of the line remain within specified tolerance limits. The reference planes being so
chosen that their intersection is parallel to the straight line joining two points suitably located on the
line to be tested and two points being close ends of the length to be measured.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Principle of the Autocollimator-A cross line ?target? graticule is positioned at the focal plane of a
telescope objective system with the intersection of the cross line on the optical axis, i.e. at the
principal focus. When the target graticule is illuminated, rays of light diverging from the intersection
point reach the objective via a beam splitter and are projected from the objective as parallel pencils
of light. In this mode the optical system is operating as a collimator.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

59 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

3. A flat reflector placed in front of the objective and exactly normal to the optical axis reflects the
parallel pencils of light back along their original paths. They are then brought to focus in the plane of
the target graticule and exactor coincident with its intersection. A proportion of the returned light

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

passes straight through the beam splitter and the return image of the target cross line is therefore
visible through the eyepiece. In this mode, the optical system is operating as a telescope focused at
infinity.
4. If the reflector is tilted through a small angle the reflected pencils of light will be deflected by twice
the angle of tilt (principle of reflection) and will be brought to focus in the plane of target graticule but

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

linearly displaced from the actual target cross lines by an amount 2?* f.
5. An optical system of an autocollimator consists of a light source, condensers, semi-reflectors, target
wire, collimating lens and reflector apart from microscope eyepiece. A target wire takes place of the
light source into the focal plane of the collimator lenses. Both the target wire and the reflected image
are seen through a microscope eyepiece. The eyepiece incorporates a scale graduated in 0.05mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

interval and a pair of parallel setting wires which can be adjusted. Movements of wires are effected
through a micrometer, one rotation of the drum equals to one scale division movement of the wires.
The instrument is designed to be rotated through 90 degrees about its longitudinal axis so that the
angles in both horizontal and vertical planes are measured.
Autocollimator:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

It is an instrument designed to measure small angular deflections & maybe used in conjunction with a
plane mirror or other reflecting surface. An autocollimator is essentially an infinity telescope and a collimator
combined into one instrument. This is an optical instrument used for the measurement of small angular
differences. For small angular measurements, autocollimator provides a very sensitive and accurate approach.
The principle on which this instrument works is given below. O is a point source of light placed at the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

principal focus of a collimating lens. The rays of light from O, incident on the lens, travels as a parallel beam of
light. If this beam strikes a plane reflector which is normal to the optical axis, it will be reflected back along its
own path and refocused at the same point O. If the plane reflector be tilted through a small angle ?, then
parallel beam will be deflected through twice this angle, and will be brought to focus at O? in the same plane at
a distance x from O. Obviously.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OO?=x=2?.f, where f is the focal length of the lens.
Applications:
1. For aligning circular & flat surfaces in machining
2. Alignment of beams & columns in construction buildings / industries, steel structures
3. To measure the straightness, flatness and parallelism

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice
1 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?



DEPARTMENT OF

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MECHANICAL ENGINEERING


ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

V SEMESTER - R 2013

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Register No. : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________


LABORATORY MANUAL

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


3 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DHANALAKSHMI


College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
2. To contribute to the promotion of Academic Excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

DEPARTMENT OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rendering the services to the global needs of engineering industries by educating students to become
professionally sound mechanical engineers of excellent caliber

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To produce mechanical engineering technocrats with a perfect knowledge intellectual and hands on
experience and to inculcate the spirit of moral values and ethics to serve the society

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MISSION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MISSION
VISION

VISION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals
To impart students with fundamental knowledge in mathematics and basic sciences that will mould

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

them to be successful professionals
2. Core competence
To provide students with sound knowledge in engineering and experimental skills to identify
complex software problems in industry and to develop a practical solution for them
3. Breadth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theory and practice which
enable them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and organization and to design
products requiring interdisciplinary skills
4. Professional skills
To bestow students with adequate training and provide opportunities to work as team that will build

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

up their communication skills, individual, leadership and supportive qualities and to enable them to
adapt and to work in ever changing technologies
5. Life-long learning
To develop the ability of students to establish themselves as professionals in mechanical
engineering and to create awareness about the need for lifelong learning and pursuing advanced

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

degrees

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

On completion of the B.E. (Mechanical) degree, the graduate will be able
a) To apply the basic knowledge of mathematics, science and engineering
b) To design and conduct experiments as well as to analyze and interpret data and apply the same in
the career or entrepreneurship
c) To design and develop innovative and creative software applications

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d) To understand a complex real world problem and develop an efficient practical solution
e) To create, select and apply appropriate techniques, resources, modern engineering and IT tools
f) To understand the role as a professional and give the best to the society
g) To develop a system that will meet expected needs within realistic constraints such as economical
environmental, social, political, ethical, safety and sustainability

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

h) To communicate effectively and make others understand exactly what they are trying to tell in both
verbal and written forms
i) To work in a team as a team member or a leader and make unique contributions and work with
coordination
j) To engage in lifelong learning and exhibit their technical skills

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

k) To develop and manage projects in multidisciplinary environments

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To familiar with different measurement equipment?s and use of this industry for quality inspection
List of Experiments
1. Tool Maker?s Microscope
2. Comparator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Sine Bar
4. Gear Tooth Vernier Caliper
5. Floating gauge Micrometer
6. Coordinate Measuring Machine
7. Surface Finish Measuring Equipment

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Vernier Height Gauge
9. Bore diameter measurement using telescope gauge
10. Bore diameter measurement using micrometer
11. Force Measurement
12. Torque Measurement

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. Temperature measurement
14. Autocollimator


1. Ability to handle different measurement tools and perform measurements in quality impulsion

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Learnt the usage of precision measuring instruments and practiced to take measurements
3. Learnt and practiced to build the required dimensions using slip gauge
4. Able to measure the various dimensions of the given specimen using the tool maker?s microscope
5. Able to find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge
6. Able to measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Learnt to determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen using Gear tooth vernier
8. Able to measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two
wire method
9. Learnt to study the construction and operation of coordinate measuring machine
10. Learnt to determine the diameter of bore by using telescopic gauge and dial bore indicator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. Able to measure the surface roughness using Talysurf instrument
12. Studied the characteristic between applied load and the output volt
13. Learnt the characteristics of developing torque and respective sensor output voltage
14. Studied the characteristics of thermocouple without compensation
15. Able to check the straightness & flatness of the given component by using Autocollimator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16. Learnt to measure the displacement using LVDT and to calibrate it with the millimeter scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OBJECTIVES

COURSE OUTCOMES

7 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

CONTENTS
Sl. No. Name of the Experiments Page No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CYCLE ? 1 EXPERIMENTS
1
Precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab ? A Study
7
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To build up the slip gauge for given dimension ? A Study
16
3
Thread parameters measurement using Tool Makers Microscope
20

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4
Calibration of dial gauge
23
5
Determination of taper angle by sine bar method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

26
6
Determination of gear tooth thickness using gear tooth vernier
29
7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement of thread parameters using floating carriage micrometer
32
CYCLE ? 2 EXPERIMENTS
8
Measurement of various dimensions using Coordinate Measuring Machine

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

35
9
Measurement of surface roughness
39
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement of bores using dial bore indicator and telescopic gauge
42
11
Force measurement using load cell
46

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12
Torque measurement using strain gauge
49
13
Temperature measurement using thermocouple

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

53
14
Measurement of alignment using autocollimator
56
ADDITIONAL EXPERIMENT BEYOND THE SYLLABUS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15
Thread parameters measurement using profile projector
60
16
Displacement measurement ? linear variable differential transducer (LVDT)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

62
PROJECT WORK
65

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.01 PRECISION MEASURING INSTRUMENT YSED IN
METROLOGY LAB ? A STUDY
Aim:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To study the following instruments and their usage for measuring dimensions of given specimen
1. Vernier caliper
2. Micrometer
3. Vernier height gauge
4. Depth micrometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Universal bevel protractor
Apparatus required:
Surface plate, specimen and above instruments
Vernier caliper:
The principle of vernier caliper is to use the minor difference between the sizes two scales or divisions

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

for measurement. The difference between them can be utilized to enhance the accuracy of measurement. The
vernier caliper essentially consists of two steel rules, sliding along each other.
Parts:
Different parts of the vernier caliper are
1. Beam ? It has main scale.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Fixed jaw
3. Sliding or Moving jaw ? It has vernier scale and sliding jaw locking screw.
4. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw knife
edges for internal measurement.
5. Stem or depth bar for depth measurement

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count:
Least count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm
1 VSD = 0.98 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm

10 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ID

DEPTH

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OD
Measurement:
Given Vernier caliper can be used for external, internal depth, slot and step measurement.
Measurement principle:
When both jaws contact each other scale shows the zero reading. The finer adjustment of movable jaw

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

can be done by the fine adjustment screw. First the whole movable jaw assembly is adjusted so that the two
measuring tips just touch the part to be measured. Then the fine adjustment clamp locking screw is tightened.
Final adjustment depending upon the sense of correct feel is made by the adjusting screw. After final
adjustment has been made sliding jaw locking screw is also tightened and the reading is noted.
All the parts of the Vernier caliper are made of good quality steel and measuring faces are hardened.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Types of vernier:
Vernier caliper, electronic vernier caliper, vernier depth caliper


11 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:

Main scale
reading (MSR)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale
reading (VSR) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total reading (MSR
+ VSR)
(mm)

OD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ID

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Depth


Vernier height gauge:
Vernier height gauge is a sort of vernier caliper equipped with a special instrument suitable for height

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measurement. It is always kept on the surface plate and the use of the surfaces plates as datum surfaces is
very essential.
Least count:
Least Count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

50 VSD = 49 mm
1 VSD = 0.98 mm
Least Count (LC) = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm
Parts:
1. Base

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Beam ? It has main scale.
3. Slider ? It has a vernier scale and slider locking screw.
4. Scriber
5. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


Material:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

All the parts of vernier are made of good quality steel and the measuring faces hardened.
Types of vernier gauge:
1. Analog vernier height gauge
2. Digital vernier height gauge
3. Electronic vernier height gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Main scale reading
(MSR)(mm)
Vernier scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale reading
(VSR)(mm)
Total reading (MSR +
VSR)(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
2.
3.

13 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outside micrometer:
The micrometer essentially consists of an accurate screw having about 10 or 20 threads per cm. The
end of the screw forms one measuring tip and other measuring tip is constituted by a stationary anvil in the
base of the frame. The screw is threaded for certain length and is plain afterwards. The plain portion is called

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

spindle and its end is the measuring surface. The spindle is advanced or retracted by turning a thimble
connected to a spindle. The spindle is a slide fit over the barrel and barrel is the fixed part attached with the
frame. The barrel & thimble are graduated. The pitch of the screw threads is 0.5 mm.

Least count:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least Count (LC) = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale
= 0.5 / 50 = 0.01 mm
Parts:
1. Frame
2. Anvil

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Spindle
4. Spindle lock
5. Barrel or outside sleeve
6. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions
7. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.
14 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Measurement:
It can be used for any external measurement.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Types of micrometer:
1. Outside micrometer, 2. Inside micrometer, 3.Depth micrometer, 4. Stick micrometer, 5. Screw thread
micrometer, 6. V ? anvil micrometer, 7. Blade type micrometer, 8. Dial micrometer, 9. Bench micrometer, 10.
Tape screw operated internal micrometer, 11. Groove micrometer, 12. Digital micrometer, 13.Differential screw
micrometer, 14.Adjustable range outside micrometer.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Ratchet stop mechanism:
The object of the ratchet stop is to ensure that same level of torque is applied on the spindle while
measuring and the sense of the feel of operator is eliminated and consistent readings are obtained. By
providing this arrangement, the ratchet stop is made slip off when the torque applied to rotate the spindle
exceeds the set torque. Thus this provision ensures the application of same amount of torque during the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measurement.
Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)
Head scale reading
(HSR x LC) (mm)
Total Reading (PSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

+ HSR) (mm)
1.
2.

Depth micrometer:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Depth micrometer is a sort of micrometer which is mainly used for measuring depth of holes, so it is
named as depth micrometer.
Parts:
1. Shoulder
2. Spindle

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Spindle lock
4. Barrel or outside sleeve ? It has pitch scale.
5. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions.
6. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.
The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


Least count:
Least Count = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale = 0.50/50

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= 0.01 mm
Measurements:
It can be used for measuring the depth of holes, slots and recessed areas. The pitch of the screw thread
is 0.5 mm. The least count is 0.01 mm. Shoulder acts as a reference surface and is held firmly and
perpendicular to the centre line of the hole. For large range of measurement extension rods are used. In the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

barrel the scale is calibrated. The accuracy again depends upon the sense of touch.
Procedure:
First, calculate the least count of the instrument. Check the zero error. Measure the specimen note
down the main scale reading or the head scale reading. Note down the vernier or head scale coincidence with
main or pitch scale divisions.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) (mm)
Head Scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Coincidence (HSC)
Head scale reading
(HSR x LC) (mm)
Total Reading (PSR
+ HSR) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.


2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Universal bevel protractor:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
Bevel protractor is an instrument for measuring the angle between the two faces of a specimen. It
consists of a base plate on which a circular scale is engraved. It is graduated in degrees. An adjustment plate
is attached to a circular plate containing the vernier scale. The adjustable blade can be locked in any position.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The circular plate has 360 division divided into four parts of 90 degrees each. The adjustable parts have 24
divisions of to the right and left sides of zero reading. These scales are used according to the position of the
specimen with respect to movable scale.
Procedure:
1. Place the specimen whose taper is to be measured between the adjustable plate and movable

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

blade with one of its face parallel to the base.
2. Lock the adjustable plate in position and note down the main scale reading depending upon the
direction of rotation of adjustable plate in clockwise or anticlockwise.
3. Note the VSC to the right of zero.
4. Multiply the VSC with the least count and add to MSR to obtain the actual reading.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count:
Least Count = 2 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1
o
24 VSD = 46

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
=> 1 VSD = 23/12
LC = 2 ? 23/12 = 1/12
o
= 5? (five minutes)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Main scale reading
(MSR) (deg)
Vernier scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale reading
(VSR) (deg)
Total reading (MSR +
VSR)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(deg)
1.
2.
The angle of scriber of the vernier height gauge =
Result:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thus the various precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab are studied and the specimen
dimensions are recorded.
Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for linear, angular,
roundness and roughness measurements they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

instrument according to a specific requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).
Application:
1. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Metrology
2. Define ? Inspection
3. What are the needs of inspection in industries?
4. What are the various methods involving the measurement?
5. Define ? Precision

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Define ? Accuracy
7. Define ? Calibration
8. Define ? Repeatability
9. Define ? Magnification
10. Define ? Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. Define ? Systematic Error
12. Define ? Random Error
13. Define ? Parallax Error
14. Define ? Environmental Error
15. Define ? Cosine Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

18 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.02 BUILD UP THE SLIP GAUGE FOR GIVEN DIMENSION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? A STUDY
Aim:
To build up the slip gauge for given dimension
Apparatus required:
1. Slip gauges set

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Surface plate
3. Soft cloth
Diagram:

Description:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Slip gauge are universally accepted standard of length in industry. They are the working standard for
linear dimension. These were invented by a Swedish Engineer, C.E. Johansson. They are used
1. For direct precise measurement where the accuracy of the workpiece demand it.
2. For use with high- magnification comparators to establish the size of the gauge blocks in general
use.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Gauge blocks are also used for many other purposes such as checking the accuracy of measuring
instrument or setting up a comparator to a specific dimension, enabling a batch of component to be
quickly and accurately checked or indeed in any situation where there is need to refer to standard of
known length these blocks are rectangular.
19 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Most gauge blocks are produced from high grade steel, hardened and established by a heat treatment
process to give a high degree of dimensional stability. Gauge blocks are also manufactured from tungsten
carbide which is an extremely hard and wear resistant material. The measuring faces have a lapped finish.
The faces are perfectly flat and parallel to one another with a high degree of accuracy. Each block has an

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

extremely high dimensional accuracy at 20
o
C.
These slip gauge are available in variety of selected sets both in inch units and metric units. Letter ?E? is
used for inch units and ?M? is used for metric standard number of pieces in a set following the letter E or M. For

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

example EBI refers to a set whose blocks are in metric units and are 83 in number. Each block dimensions is
printed on anyone of its face itself the size of any required standard being made up by combining the
appropriate number of these different size blocks.
If two gauges are slid and twisted together under pressure they will firmly join together. This process,
known as wringing, is very useful because it enables several gauge blocks to be assembled together to

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

produce a required size. In fact the success of precision measurement by slip gauges depends on the
phenomenon of wringing.
First the gauge is oscillated slightly with very light pressure over other gauge so as to detect pressure at
any foreign particles between the surfaces. One gauge is placed perpendicular to other using standard
gauging pressure and rotary motion is applied until the blocks are lined up.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. Build the given dimension by wringing minimum number of slip gauges.
2. Note the given dimension and choose the minimum possible slip gauge available in the set so as to
accommodate the last decimal value. The minimum slip gauge value dimension available i.e., 1.12
mm must be chosen followed by 1.5 mm thick gauge block.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Follow the above steps to build up the slip gauge of any dimension.
Precautions:
1. Slip gauges should be handled very carefully placed gently and should never be dropped.
2. Whenever a slip gauge is being removed from the set, its dimensions are noted and must be
replaced into the set at its appropriate place only.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Correct procedure must be followed in wringing and also in removing the gauge blocks.
4. They should be cleaned well before use and petroleum jelly is applied after use.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

20 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:
Range (mm) Increment (mm) No. of pieces

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total = ____________ Pieces
Total length of slip gauge = ________ mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Given diameter Slip gauges used Obtained dimensions

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Slip gauge set is studied and the given dimensions are building up by wringing minimum number of slip
gauges.
Outcome:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Students will be able to select proper measuring instrument and know requirement of calibration, errors
in measurement etc. They can perform accurate measurements.
Application:
1. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Why C.I. is preferred material for surface plates and tables?
2. Why V ? blocks are generally manufactured in pairs?
3. Why micrometer is required to be tested for accuracy?
4. Define ? Linear Measurement
5. List the linear measuring instrument according to their accuracy.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Define ? Least Count
7. What are the uses of vernier depth gauge?
8. What are the uses of feeler gauges?
9. What are the uses of straight edge?
10. What are the uses of angle plate?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. What are the uses of V ? block?
12. What are the uses of combination square?
13. What precautions should be taken while using slip gauges?
14. What is wringing?
15. Why the slip gauges are termed as ?End standard?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

22 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.03 THREAD PARAMETERS MEASUREMENT USING
TOOL MAKERS MICROSCOPE
Aim:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To study the tool makers microscope and in the process measure the various dimensions of the given
specimen
Apparatus required:
1. Tool makers microscope
2. Specimen

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diagram:

Description:
The tool maker?s microscope is designed for measurement of parts of complex forms; for example,
profile of a tool having external threads. It can also be used for measuring centre to centre distance of the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

holes in any plane as well as the coordinates of the outline of a complex template gauge, using the
coordinates measuring system.
23 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Basically it consists of an optical head which can be adjusted vertically along the ways of supporting

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

column. The optical head can be clamped at any position by a screw. On the work table (which as a circular
base in which there are graduations) the part to be inspected is placed. The table has a compound slide by
means of which the part can be measured. For giving these two movements, there are two micrometer screws
having thimble scales and verniers. At the back of the base light source is arranged that provides horizontal
beam of light, reflected from a mirror by 90 degrees upwards towards the table. The beam of light passes

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

through the transparent glass plate on which flat plates can be checked are placed. Observations are made
through the eyepiece of the optical head.
Procedure:
1. Place the given specimen on the work table and switch on all the three light sources and adjust the
intensity of the light source until a clean image of the cross wires and specimen are seen through

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the eyepiece.
2. Coincide one of the two extreme edges between which the measurement has to be taken with
vertical or horizontal cross wires and depending upon the other image coincide with the same cross
wires by moving the above device. Note the reading.The difference between the two readings gives
the value of the required measurement.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Note the experiment specimen and the readings.
4. Tabulate the different measurements measured from the specimen.
Determination of thread parameters
Magnification =
S.No. Parameters

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Magnified value
(mm)
Actual value
(mm)
1. Outer diameter (O.D)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Internal diameter (I.D)

3. Pitch

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Flank angle


Result:
Included angle of the tool was measured using tool maker?s microscope and various dimensions of the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

given specimen are measured.


24 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the various parameters of thread and select proper measuring
instrument and know requirement of calibration, errors in measurement etc. They can perform accurate
measurements.
Application:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Machine Shop
2. Quality Department


1. What is meant by tool maker?s microscope?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. What is the light used in tool maker?s microscope?
3. What are the various characteristics that you would measure in a screw thread?
4. What are the instruments that are required for measuring screw thread?
5. Define ? Pitch
6. What are the causes of pitch error?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Define ? Flank
8. What are the effects of flank angle error?
9. What is progressive error?
10. What is periodic error?
11. What is drunken error?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. What is erratic error?
13. What are the applications of tool maker?s microscope?
14. What are the limitations of tool maker?s microscope?
15. What are the advantages of tool maker?s microscope?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

25 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.04 CALIBRATION OF DIAL GAUGE USING SLIP GAUGE
Aim:
To find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Apparatus required:
Dial gauge, magnetic stand, slip gauge, and surface plate
Diagram:

Description:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The dial test indicator is a precision measuring instrument which can convert linear motion into angular
motion by means of transmission mechanics of rack and pinion and can be used to measure linear vibration
and errors of shape.
This instrument has the features such as good appearance, compact size, light weight, high precision,
reasonable construction, constant measuring face etc. Rigidity of all parts is excellent. Probe is tipped with

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

carbide balls. A shock proof mechanism is provided for those with larger measuring range.

26 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Types of dial indicator:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Plunger type
2. Lever type
Plunger type dial indicator has a resolution counter and each division in main scale is 0.01 mm. In lever
type dial test indicator is replaced by ball type stylus.
Procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Fix the dial gauge to the stand rigidly and place the stand on the surface plate.
2. Set the plunger of dial gauge to first touch the upper surface of standard slip gauge and set indicator
to zero.
3. Raise then the plunger by pulling the screw above the dial scale.
4. Place the standard slip gauge underneath the plunger.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Release the plunger and let it to touch the standard slip gauge.
6. Note the reading on the dial scale.
Formulae:
The standard error of dial gauge is calculated by the formula

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
S.No.
Slip gauge reading ?x?
(mm)
Dial gauge reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
(x? - x)
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x? (x? - x)
1.
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Thus the accuracy and standard error of dial gauge is found. The standard error of given dial gauge is
__________.

27 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Students will be able to check the variation in tolerance during the inspection process of a
machined part, measure the deflection of a beam or ring under laboratory conditions, as well as many
other situations where a small measurement needs to be registered or indicated

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Milling Machine
2. Analog versus digital/electronic readout

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is comparator?
2. What are the types of comparators?
3. What is the LC for comparators?
4. What are the applications of comparator?
5. What is meant by plunger?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. What are the types of dial indicators?
7. Why a revolution counter is not provided in lever type dial test indicator?
8. Draw a line diagram of the operating mechanism of plunger type dial test indicator.
9. Explain the term magnification of a dial indicator.
10. What are the uses of dial test indicator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. What are the practical applications of dial test indicator?
12. What precautions should be taken while using dial test indicator?
13. What are the desirable qualities of a dial test indicator?
14. What are the advantages of dial test indicator?
15. What are the limitations of dial test indicator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16. Distinguish between comparator and measuring instrument.
17. What are the advantages of electrical comparator?
18. What are the advantages of optical comparator?
19. What are the uses of comparator?
20. What are the advantages and disadvantages of mechanical comparator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

28 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.05 DETERMINATION OF TAPER ANGLE BY SINE BAR
METHOD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Aim:
To measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare
Apparatus required:
Sine bar, slip gauges, dial gauge with stand, micrometer, surface plate, bevel protractor, vernier caliper
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
The sine bar principle uses the ratio of the length of two sides of a right triangle. It may be noted that
devices operating on sine principle are capable of ?self-generation?. The measurement is restricted to 45
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

from
accuracy point of view. Sine bar itself is not a measuring instrument.
Accuracy requirements of sine bar:
1. The axes of the rollers must be parallel to each other and the centre distance L must be precisely
known.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. The sine bar must be flat and parallel to the plane connecting the axes of the rollers.
3. The rollers must be of identical diameters and must have within a close tolerance.


29 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. Fix the dial gaugeon the magnetic stand and place the magnetic stand on the surface plate.Check
the parallelism of the sine bar.
2. Place the given specimen above the sine bar and place the dial gauge on top of the specimen.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Adjustthe dial gauge for zero deflection.
3. Raise the front end of the sine bar with slip gauges until the work surface is parallel to the datum
surface.
4. Check the parallelism using dial gauge.
5. Measure the distance between the centres of the sine bar rollers as ?L? and note the height of the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

slip gauge as ?H?.
6. Note the included angle of the specimen.
Formulae:
Sin ? = H/L where ? = Included angle of the specimen
H = Height of slip gauges

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

L = Distance between the centre of rollers
Tabulation:
S.No. L (mm) H (mm) Taper angle ( ?)
1.
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.

Result:
The taper angle of the given specimen using sine bar was found to be =
Outcome:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for angular measurements
and they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a specific
requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).

Application:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Flat Surface
2. Granite


30 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. List out the various angle measuring instruments.
2. What is the working principles sine bar?
3. How is a sine bar used to measure the angle?
4. What is the application of sine bar?
5. What is the material of sine bar?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Why sine bar is not preferred to use for measuring angles more than 45
0
?
7. What are the features of sine bar?
8. A 100 mm sine bar is to be set up to an angle of 33

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

0
, determine the slip gauges needed from 87
pieces set.
9. What are the various instruments used for measuring angles?
10. What is sine bar?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. How sine bar is used for angle measurement?
12. Explain how sine bar is used to measure angle of small size component.
13. Explain how sine bar is used to measure angle of large size component.
14. What are the various types of sine bar?
15. What are the limitations of sine bar?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16. What is sine center?
17. What is sine table?
18. What are the possible sources of errors in angular measurement by sine bar?
19. What are angle gauges?
20. How angle gauges are used for measuring angles?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

31 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.06 DETERMINATION OF GEAR TOOTH THICKNESS
USING GEAR TOOTH VERNIER
Aim:
To determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen and to draw the graph between the tooth
number and the error in thickness

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Apparatus required:
Gear tooth vernier, specimen, surface plate and vernier caliper
Diagram:

Description:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The tooth thickness, in general, is measured at pitch circle since gear tooth thickness varies from the tip
to the base circle of the tooth. This is possible only when there is an arrangement to fix that position for this
measurement by the gear tooth vernier. It has two vernier scales; one is vertical and other is horizontal.
Procedure:
32 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Measure initially the outside diameter of the given gear specimen by means of a vertical calculation
of vernier caliper. Note the number of teeth. Calculate the module (m) using the formula.

M = OD/ (Z+2) where z ? number of teeth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M - Module
2. Calculate the theoretical tooth thickness (t) by t = z * m* sin (90/z).
3. Set the vernier scale for the height and tighten.
4. Measure the thickness of each tooth using the horizontal scale. This is measured thickness. It can
be positive or negative.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

H = m x [1+ Z/2 (1- Cos 90/Z)]
5. Calculate the error in the tooth thickness i.e,1. measured thickness ? Theoretical thickness
6. Draw the graph between the tooth number and the error in thickness.
Tabulation:
Tooth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Number
Measured Thickness
(mm)
Theoretical Thickness (mm)
Error in tooth thickness

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
1
2
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tooth
Number
MSR
(mm)
VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSR
(mm)
TR
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1
2
3

Graph:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tooth No.
33 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
The theoretical experiment value of gear tooth thickness is obtained and graph is drawn between error
and tooth number in tooth thickness
Theoretical tooth thickness =
Experimental tooth thickness =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Error in tooth thickness =
Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the basic measurement units and able to calibrate various
measuring parameters of the gear.
Application:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Gear Component
2. Mining

1. Calculate the setting of a gear tooth vernier caliper for a straight spur gear having 40 teeth and
module 4.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. What is the importance of chordal depth?
3. Define ? Chordal width
4. How is the actual profile of the gear tooth determined?
5. What are the manufacturing errors in gear element?
6. Define ? Addendum

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Define ? Dedendum
8. Define ? Flank of tooth
9. Define ? Pitch
10. Define ? Pitch Circle
11. Define ? Crest of tooth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. Define ? Root of tooth
13. Define ? Base Circle
14. Define ? Module
15. Define ? Angle of Obliquity

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

34 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.07 MEASUREMENT OF THREAD PARAMETER USING
FLOATING CARRIAGE MICROMETER
Aim:
To measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two wire
method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Apparatus required:
1. Floating carriage micrometer
2. Standard wire
3. Given specimen (screw thread)
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description of floating carriage micrometer:
It consists of three main units. A base casting carries a pair of centres on which threaded work piece is
to be mounted. Another carriage capable of moving towards centre is mounted exactly above. In this carriage
one head with thimble to measure up to 0.002 mm is provided and at the other side of head a fiducial indicator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

is provided to indicate zero position.



35 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. For two wire method, place the standard wire over a thread of the screw at opposite sides.
2. For three wire method, place two standard wires on two successive threads and the third wire
placed opposite sides of the thread.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Measure the diameter over wires (M) using floating carriage micrometer.
4. Repeat this procedure at various positions of the screw and take different readings.
Formulae:
1. For best wire size, d = P / 2 Cos (x/2)
Where, P = Pitch

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d= wire size
x = angle between two threads
= 60
o
for metric thread

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Actual effective diameter, E.A = M ? 3d + 0.866 p
3. Nominal effective diameter, EN = D ? 0.648 p
4. Max. wire size = 1.01 p
5. Min. wire size = 0.505 p
6. Best wire size = 0.577 p

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M = Diameter over wires
P = Pitch of thread
For metric thread:
Actual effective diameter (EA) = M ? 3d + 0.866 p
Where d = actual diameter of wire

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of actual and nominal effective diameter of the screw thread:
Sl.No.
Nominal
Diameter (D)
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diameter over
wire ?M?
(mm)
Actual eff.
Diameter E.A

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
Nominal eff.
Diameter E.N
(mm)
Error in effective

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

diameter
(E.A ? E.N)
(mm)
1.
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.



36 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Thus the actual and nominal effective diameter is measured using three wire method and the error in
effective diameter of screw is determined.
Outcome:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for roundness
measurements and they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a
specific requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).
Application:
1. Wholse

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Maxxis Rubber India

1. Define ? Pitch
2. Define ? Flank Angle
3. What is plug gauge?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. What is meant by micrometer?
5. What is meant by indicator?
6. What is best ? size wire?
7. Calculate the diameter of the best wire for an M 20 x 25 screws.
8. What are the different corrections to be applied in the measurement of effective diameter by the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

method of wire?
9. What is floating carriage micrometer?
10. What are the uses of floating carriage micrometer?
11. What are the methods are used for measuring effective diameter?
12. Define ? Effective Diameter

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. Define ? Major Diameter
14. Define ? Minor Diameter
15. What are the effects of flank error?
16. Define ? Rake Angle
17. Define ? Pitch Cylinder

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

18. What are the effects of pitch error?
19. Define ? Pitch Diameter
20. What is meant by angle of thread?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

37 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.08 MEASUREMENT OF VARIOUS DIMENSIONS USING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COORDINATE MEASURING MACHINE
Aim:
1. To study the construction and operation of coordinate measuring machine
2. To measure the specified dimensions of the given component
Instruments used:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Coordinate measuring machine, vernier calipers
Diagram:

Theory:
A coordinate measuring machine (CMM) is a 3D device for measuring the physical and geometrical

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

characteristics of an object. This machine may be manually controlled by an operator or it may be computer
controlled. Measurements are defined by a probe attached to the three moving axis of this machine X, Y and Z
axes. A coordinate measuring machine (CMM) is also a device used in manufacturing and assembly
processes to test a part or assembly against the design intent. By precisely recording the X, Y and Z
coordinates of the target, points are generated which can be analyzed via regression algorithms for the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

construction of features. These points are collected by using a probe that is positioned manually by an
38 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

operator or automatically via direct computer control (DCC). DCC CMMs can be programmed to repeatedly
measure identical parts, thus a CMM is a specialized form of industrial robot.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Parts:
Coordinate measuring machine include three main components:
1. The main structures which include three axes of motion.
2. Probing system
3. Data collection and reduction system ? typically includes a machine controller, desktop computer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

and application software
Machine description:
1. In modern machines, the gantry type superstructure has two legs and is often called a bridge. This
moves freely along the granite table with one leg following a guide rail attached to one side of the
granite table. The opposite leg simply rests on the granite table following the vertical surface

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

contour.
2. Air bearings are fixed for ensuring friction free travel. Compressed air is forced through a series of
very small holes in a flat bearing surface to provide a smooth but controlled air cushion on which the
CMM can move in a frictionless manner.
3. The movement of the bridge along the granite table forms one axis of the XY plane. The bridge of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the gantry contains a carriage which traverses between the inside and outside legs and forms the
other X or Y horizontal axis.
4. The third axis of movement (Z axis) is provided by the addition of a vertical quill or spindle which
moves up and down through the center of the carriage. The touch probe forms the sensing device
on the end of the quill.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. The movement of the X, Y and Z axes fully describes the measuring envelope. Some touch probes
are themselves powered rotary devices with the probe tip able to swivel vertically through 90
degrees and through a full 360 degrees rotation.
Uses:
They are generally used for:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Dimensional measurement
2. Profile measurement
3. Angularity or orientation measurement
4. Depth mapping
5. Digitizing mapping

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Shaft measurement
39 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

The machines are available in a wide range of sizes and designs with a variety of different probe
technologies. They can be operated manually or automatically through direct computer control (DCC). They

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

are offered in various configurations such as bench top, free ? standing, handheld and portable.
Procedure:
1. Take at least 8 points on sphere ball attached to the granite table.
2. Fix the object whose dimension needs to be measured using the jigs and fixtures.
3. Using joystick, move the probe whose tip is made of ruby slowly and carefully to the surface whose

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measurements have to be taken.
4. Touch the probe at two places for measurement of a line (starting and ending point).
5. Touch the probe at two places for measurement of a circular profile and for a cylinder touch the
probe at 8 points.
6. Measure the same profiles again with vernier calipers (length of line, circle diameter, cylinder

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

diameter) to compare the two readings.
Comments:
1. The machine should be calibrated every time when it is being used.
2. While measuring the profiles, the probe should be moved very slowly as it may damage the ruby if
hit with a high force.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Care should be taken while performing experiment so that the granite table of the machines should
get any scratches.
4. ?Retract distance? should be fixed according to the space available in the near vicinity of the profile
measurement area.
Observation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No. Feature
CMM reading
(mm)
Vernier reading
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Form error
(mm)
Difference in two
readings (mm)
1 Circle -1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2 Circle -2
3 Circle -3
4 Line
5 Arc
6

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Cone - Diameter
Cone ? Vertex angle
Cone ? Height
7
Cylinder ? Diameter

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Cylinder ? Height


40 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Thus the different profile of given object are measured using coordinate measuring machine
Outcome:
Students will be able to measures the geometry of physical objects by sensing discrete points on the
surface of the object with a probe and they will be able to know the Various types of probes are used in CMMs,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

including mechanical, optical, laser, and white light.
Application:
1. Surface Measuring Equipment
2. Photo transistor

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What are the types of measuring machine?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. What is CMM?
3. What are the types of CMM?
4. What are the advantages of CMM?
5. What are the limitations of CMM?
6. What are the possible sources of error in CMM?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. What is the use of universal measuring machine?
8. What are the applications of CMM?
9. What is the working principle of three axis measuring machine?
10. What is image shearing microscope?
11. What is the use of electronic inspection and measuring machine?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. What are the types of electronic inspection and measuring machine?
13. What is CMM probe?
14. What are the three main probes are available?
15. What are the types of stylus?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

41 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.09 MEASUREMENT OF SURFACE ROUGHNESS UING
TALYSURF INSTRUMENT
Aim:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To measure the surface roughness using Talysurf instrument
Apparatus required:
Talysurf instrument, work piece, surface plate
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Theory:
On any finished surface, imperfections are bound to be there and these take the form of a succession of
hills and valleys which vary both in height and in spacing and result in a kind of texture which in appearance or
feel is often characteristic of the machining process and accompanying defects. The several kinds of
departures are there on the surface and these are due to various causes.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

42 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Methods of measuring surface roughness:
1. Surface inspection of comparison methods

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Direct instrument measurements
In comparative methods the surface texture is assessed by observation of the surface. But these
methods are not reliable as they can be misleading, if comparison is not made with surfaces produced by
same techniques. The various methods available under comparison method are: (i) Touch Inspection
(ii)Scratch Inspection (iii) Microscopic Inspection (iv) Visual Inspection (v) Surface Photographs (vi) Reflected

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Light Intensity Direct Instrument Measurements enable to determine a numerical value of the surface finish of
any surface. Nearly all instruments used are stylus probe type of instruments. This operates on electrical
principle.
Procedure:
1. Place the finished component on the surface plate.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Fix the Talysurf tester to the vernier height gauge using adopter at a convenient height.
3. Make sure that the stylus probe touches the work piece.
4. Fix the sampling length in the tester.
5. Press the power button so that the probe moves on the surface to and fro.
6. Take the readings of the surface roughness directly from the instrument.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Repeat the above process for the remaining specimen and tabulate the readings.
Precautions:
1. The surface to be tested should be cleaned properly.
2. The tester should be fixed to the height gauge properly so that the movement of the probe is exactly
parallel to the surface of work.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Make sure that the probe gently touches the work.
Tabulation:
S.No
Measurement roughness value,
?m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sample direction Ra, Rz
Average Ra Average Rz Grade
1.
2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

43 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Thus the surface roughness is checked for different specimens by Talysurf.
Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for roughness

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measurements they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a specific
requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).
Application:
1. Machine Shop
2. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Actual Size?
2. What is meant by normal surface?
3. What is meant by profilo-graph?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. What is Tomlinson surface meter?
5. What is meant by profile?
6. What are the factors affecting surface roughness?
7. Why the surface texture is control?
8. Define ? Lay

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. Define ? Surface Texture
10. Define ? Flaws
11. What is sampling length?
12. What are the methods used for evaluating surface finish?
13. What is form factor?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. What are the methods used for measuring surface finish?
15. How will you differentiate smooth surface from flat surface?
16. How surface finish is designated on drawings?
17. Define ? Primary Texture
18. Define ? Secondary Texture

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

19. What are the types of instrument used for measuring surface texture?
20. Define ? waviness

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

44 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.10 MEASUREMENT OF BORE USING DIAL BORE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

INDICATOR AND TELESCOPIC GAUGE
Aim:
To determine the diameter of bore by using telescopic gauge and checking the same by using dial bore
indicator
Apparatus required:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Work piece, vernier caliper, telescopic gauge and dial gauge indicator set with anvil.
Diagram:

45 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
Bore gauge measurement:
1. Select the extension rod and washer according to the bore diameter to be measured
2. Fix the suitable extension rod and washer with the bore gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Fix the dial gauge to the bore gauge in its position
4. Insert the bore gauge inside the bore to be measured and hold the gauge in parallel o the axis of the
bore. Ensure that the tips on either side of the bore gauge are in touch with inner wall of the bore
5. Note down the reading in the dial gauge and withdraw the bore gauge from the bore
6. Hold the measuring tips of bore gauge between the spindle and anvil of a micrometer and compress

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the tips by rotating the thimble till the reading reaches the same one as noted earlier
7. Observe and record the micrometer reading as the bore diameter to be measured
Telescopic gauge measurement:
1. Select the telescopic gauge according to the bore diameter to be measured
2. Press the telescopic spindles in the telescopic gauge lock them by locking screw

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Insert the telescopic gauge inside thee bore to be measured. Release the locking screw to expand
the telescopic spindles outwards inside the bore
4. Hold the telescopic gauge in parallel to the axis of bore axis and ensure that the tips of telescopic
spindles are in touch with the inner wall of the bore
5. Lock the telescopic spindles and withdraw it from the bore

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

46 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

6. Measure the expanded length of the telescopic spindles using micrometer record them as the inner
diameter of the bore
Practical observations:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rough measurement of bore using Telescopic gauge:
Least count of micrometer = 0.01 mm
Sl.No.
Micrometer reading
Total reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(MSR + TSC * LC) ( mm) Main scale reading (MSR)
(mm)
Thimble scale
coincidence
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.

Average reading = ________ mm
Accurate measuring using Bore gauge
Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Micrometer
reading
(d) (mm)
Bore gauge
reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(R1) (mm)
Work piece reading
(R2) (mm)
Final reading
d+ (R1 ? R2) * 0.01

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
1.
2.

Accurate internal diameter of hole using bore gauge = ______ mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result
1. Internal diameter of the work piece by using telescopic gauge is ________mm
2. Diameter obtained by using dial gauge indicator is __________________mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Students will be able to measure a bore's size, by transferring the internal dimension to a remote
measuring tool (Telescopic gauge).
Application:
1. Automobile

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Quality Department


47 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by bore diameter?
2. What is gauge?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. What is meant by measurement?
4. What is telescope gauge?
5. What is bore gauge?
6. What is contact point?
7. What is the principle of bore gauge?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. What are the applications of telescopic gauge?
9. What types of materials are used in telescopic gauge?
10. What are the types of instrument used to measure bore diameter?
11. What are the applications of bore gauge?
12. What are the advantages of bore gauge over telescopic gauge?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. What are the limitations of bore gauge?
14. What is the working principle of telescopic gauge?
15. What are the disadvantages of telescopic gauge?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

48 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.11 MEASUREMENT OF FORCE USING LOAD CELL
Aim:
To study the characteristic between applied load and the output voltage
Apparatus required:
1. Trainer kit

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Multimeter
3. Load cell sensor with setup
4. Weights (5 kg)
5. Power chord
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Formulae:
Error (%) = {Applied Voltage ? (Displayed Load)/ Applied Load)} x 100
Block diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Applied DC
Load O/P

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DC Excitation source Transducer
Transducer
Instrumentation
Amplifier
Gain Amplifier DVM

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

49 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Interfacing and calibration procedure:
1. Interface the load cell 9 pin ?D? type male connector to 9 pin D type female connector, fixed on the
module.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. First unload the beam and nullify the display by using zero adjustment POT
3. Apply the maximum load of 5 kg to the beam and adjust the display to 5 kg by using gain
adjustment POT.
4. After the initial adjustment, the unit should not be disturbed until the completion of the experiment.
Safety precaution:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. During offset adjustment, the beam should not be loaded.
2. The beam should not be disturbed during the experiment.
3. Remove the load from the beam, after completion of the experiment; otherwise wire wound on the
strain gauge will get damaged.
4. If you are getting an unsatisfactory reading, then vary the zero and span POT minimum to

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

maximum.
5. Maximum load should not exceed 5 kg.
6. Once calibrated, the setting should not be distributed till the end of the experiment.
Procedure:
1. Install the load cell module and interface the 9 pin D connector with kit.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Connect the multimeter in volt mode across T5 and GND for the output voltage measurement.
3. Switch on the module.
4. Initially, unload the beam and nullify the display by using zero adjustment POT (zero calibration).
5. Apply the maximum load of 5 kg to the beam and adjust the display to 5 kg by using gain
adjustment POT (gain calibration).

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Now apply the load to the beam, a force will develop on the beam and measure the output voltage
(V) across T5 and GND.
7. Gradually increase the load and note down the output voltage (V) and applied load.
8. Tabulate the values of displayed load and applied voltage.
9. Plot a graph between applied load and output voltage (V).

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Note: When 1 kg load is applied to the beam, the displayed voltage is 1 kg.


50 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Applied load
(kg)
Output voltage
(V)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Displayed load
(kg)
% Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Graph:
1. Applied load (kg) Vs Output Voltage (V)
2. Actual load (kg) Vs % Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Thus the characteristic between applied load and the output voltage was studied.
Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the Sensor device (electro-mechanical) which help us to measure
a physical parameter (such as temperature, pressure, force, acceleration etc.) by providing analog input to get

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

digital output.
Application:
1. Machine Shop
2. Automobile

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by force?
2. Define ? Wheat stone bridge circuit
3. Define ? Load
4. What is meant by deflector?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. What is meant by force indicator?
6. Define ? Instrumentation
7. How instrumentations are classified?
8. Define ? Transducer
9. What is electrical transducer?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. How transducers are classified?



Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

51 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.12 MEASUREMENT OF TORQUE USING STRAIN
GAUGE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Aim:
To study the characteristics of the developing torque and the signal conditioned sensor output voltage
Apparatus required:
1. Trainer kit
2. Digital Multimeter (V)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Torque sensor setup
4. Weights (100 gram x 10 Nos.)
5. Power chord
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Interfacing and calibration procedure:
1. Interface the torque sensor 9 pin. ?D? type male connector to ?9? pin ?D? type female connector, fixed
on the module.
2. First, unload the beam and nullify the display by using zero adjustment POT.
3. Apply the maximum load of 1 kg to the beam and adjust the display to 9.81 Nm by using adjustment

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

POT.
4. After this initial calibration, the unit should not be disturbed until the completion of the experiment.
52 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Safety precaution:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. During offset adjustment, the beam should not be loaded.
2. The beam should not be disturbed during the experiment.
3. Remove the beam from the shaft, after completion of the experiment otherwise wire wound on the
strain gauge will get damaged.
4. If the displayed torque reading are in negative, change the beam connections in opposite to

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

previously connected direction.
5. If you are getting an unsatisfactory reading, then vary the zero and span POT minimum to
maximum.
6. Maximum load should not exceed 1 kg.
7. Once calibrated, the setting should not be disturbed till the end of this experiment.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. Install the torque sensor setup and interface with kit.
2. Switch ?ON? the module.
3. Connect the Multimeter in millivolts mode T2 and T3 for bridge output voltage measurement POT.
4. First, unload the beam and nullify the bridge output voltage by using zero adjustment POT.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. By applying load to the beam, torque will develop on the shaft and measure the bridge output
voltage (mV) across T2 and T3
6. Gradually increase the force by applying load and note down the bridge output voltage (mV).
7. Tabulate the readings and plot a graph between developed torque versus bridge output voltage
(mV).

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Formulae:
Error (%) = {(Actual Torque ? Theoretical Torque)/ Theoretical Torque} x 100
Theoretical Torque = mass (m) x acceleration due to gravity (g) x radial distance
= 1 kg x 9.81 m/s
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x 1 m
= 9.81 Nm
Tabulation:
Sl.No. Theoretical Torque
(Nm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Bridge output voltage
(mV)


Model graph:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The graph between developed torque and bridge output voltage is drawn
53 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Developed torque (Nm) Vs Output Voltage (V)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sample reading:
Developed Torque (Nm) = 9.81 Nm
Output Voltage (V) = 5 mV
Result:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thus the characteristics of the torque developed which is due to force applied to beam and the bridge
output voltage were studied and graph is plotted.
Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the Sensor device (electro-mechanical) which helps us to
measure the strain by providing analog input to digital output.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Machine Shop
2. Turbine

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

54 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Torque
2. Define ? Twist
3. What are the methods used for measuring torque?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Define ? Strain Gauge
5. What is prony brake?
6. What are the modern devices used for measuring torque?
7. What are the elements of strain gauge?
8. What is the use of slip ring for measuring torque?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. What is slip ring?
10. What are the types of torque?
11. What are the types of dynamometer?
12. What are the applications of dynamometer?
13. What are the features of dynamometer?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. What is gauge factor?
15. What are the types of torque measurement?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

55 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.13 MEASUREMENT OF TEMPERATURE USING
THERMOCOUPLE
Aim:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To study the characteristics of thermocouple without compensation
Apparatus required:
1. Trainer kit
2. Thermocouple
3. Water bath

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Thermometer
5. Digital multi meter
6. Power chord
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. Connect the two terminals of the thermocouple across T1 & T2.
2. Position the switch ?SW1? towards ?NO?.
3. Switch ?ON? the unit and note the displayed temperature.
4. If there is any difference in displayed temperature at room temperature, adjust the offset knob ?zero?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

to set 0
o
C in display.
5. Place the Multimeter across T7 and T8.
6. Insert the thermocouple and thermometer into water bath.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Switch ?ON? the water bath.
8. Note the actual temperature in thermometer and displayed temperature simultaneously.
9. Tabulate the reading and calculate % error using the above formula
56 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. Plot the graph actual temperature Vs % error
Formulae:
Error (%) = {(Displayed Temperature ? Actual Temp)/ Actual Temp} x 100

Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Actual Temperature
(
o
C)
Displayed Temperature

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(
o
C)
% Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Graph
Temperature Vs % Error
Result:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thus the characteristics of the thermocouple without compensation were studied and graph is plotted.
Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the Sensor device (electro-mechanical) which help us to measure
a physical parameter (such as temperature) by providing analog input.
Application:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Thermocouple
2. Heat generation

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

57 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by total radiation pyrometer?
2. How the mercury in glass thermometer worked?
3. What are the sources of error in thermocouple?
4. Define ? Resistance
5. Define ? Temperature detector

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Define ? Temperature
7. What are the types of instrument used for measuring temperature?
8. What are the types of electrical temperature sensors?
9. What is optical sensor?
10. What are the applications of liquid in gas thermometer?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. What are the applications of bimetallic thermometer?
12. What is vapour pressure thermometer?
13. What is thermocouple?
14. What are the types of metal are used in combination to form thermocouples?
15. What are the advantages of thermocouple?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16. What are the disadvantages of thermocouple?
17. Define ? Resistance Thermometer
18. Define ? Thermistor
19. What is the use radiation pyrometer?
20. What are the advantages of optical pyrometer?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

58 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.14 MEASUREMENT OF ALIGNMENT USING
AUTOCOLLIMATOR
Aim:
To check the straightness & flatness of the given component by using Autocollimator
Apparatus required:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Autocollimator, work piece/ object to be tested
Diagram:

Theory:
1. Definition of straightness ? A plane is to be said straight over a given length if the variation or

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

distance of its point from two planes perpendicular to each other and parallel to the generation
direction at of the line remain within specified tolerance limits. The reference planes being so
chosen that their intersection is parallel to the straight line joining two points suitably located on the
line to be tested and two points being close ends of the length to be measured.
2. Principle of the Autocollimator-A cross line ?target? graticule is positioned at the focal plane of a

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

telescope objective system with the intersection of the cross line on the optical axis, i.e. at the
principal focus. When the target graticule is illuminated, rays of light diverging from the intersection
point reach the objective via a beam splitter and are projected from the objective as parallel pencils
of light. In this mode the optical system is operating as a collimator.
59 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. A flat reflector placed in front of the objective and exactly normal to the optical axis reflects the
parallel pencils of light back along their original paths. They are then brought to focus in the plane of
the target graticule and exactor coincident with its intersection. A proportion of the returned light
passes straight through the beam splitter and the return image of the target cross line is therefore

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

visible through the eyepiece. In this mode, the optical system is operating as a telescope focused at
infinity.
4. If the reflector is tilted through a small angle the reflected pencils of light will be deflected by twice
the angle of tilt (principle of reflection) and will be brought to focus in the plane of target graticule but
linearly displaced from the actual target cross lines by an amount 2?* f.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. An optical system of an autocollimator consists of a light source, condensers, semi-reflectors, target
wire, collimating lens and reflector apart from microscope eyepiece. A target wire takes place of the
light source into the focal plane of the collimator lenses. Both the target wire and the reflected image
are seen through a microscope eyepiece. The eyepiece incorporates a scale graduated in 0.05mm
interval and a pair of parallel setting wires which can be adjusted. Movements of wires are effected

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

through a micrometer, one rotation of the drum equals to one scale division movement of the wires.
The instrument is designed to be rotated through 90 degrees about its longitudinal axis so that the
angles in both horizontal and vertical planes are measured.
Autocollimator:
It is an instrument designed to measure small angular deflections & maybe used in conjunction with a

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

plane mirror or other reflecting surface. An autocollimator is essentially an infinity telescope and a collimator
combined into one instrument. This is an optical instrument used for the measurement of small angular
differences. For small angular measurements, autocollimator provides a very sensitive and accurate approach.
The principle on which this instrument works is given below. O is a point source of light placed at the
principal focus of a collimating lens. The rays of light from O, incident on the lens, travels as a parallel beam of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

light. If this beam strikes a plane reflector which is normal to the optical axis, it will be reflected back along its
own path and refocused at the same point O. If the plane reflector be tilted through a small angle ?, then
parallel beam will be deflected through twice this angle, and will be brought to focus at O? in the same plane at
a distance x from O. Obviously.
OO?=x=2?.f, where f is the focal length of the lens.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Applications:
1. For aligning circular & flat surfaces in machining
2. Alignment of beams & columns in construction buildings / industries, steel structures
3. To measure the straightness, flatness and parallelism

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

60 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Procedure:
1. Make the distance of 100mm internal on the work piece.
2. Set the cross wire so that two cross will coincide.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Set the mirror so that the cross wire is visible.
4. Move the reflector on next 100mm mark and adjust it to see reflection of cross wire.
5. Take the reading of reflected crosswire deviated or moved up or down.
6. Measure the distance between two crosswire.
Formulae:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tan ? = X / 100
X = (100 x Tan ?) x 1000 in microns
Where X = Level at position B with respect to position A
? = Angle/Deviation in degrees/ Seconds (1 Degree = 60 Minutes, 1 Minute = 60 Seconds).

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:

Sl.No.
Bridge Length
(Base length of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the reflector)
Cumulative
Bridge length
(Position of the
reflector)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Micrometer final
reading
(Autocollimator)
Deviation for
each 100mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

( ? in degrees)
1.
2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
The values are analyzed and necessary modification of the surface may be recommended based on the
accuracy required on flatness. If the values observed from the micrometer are varying linearly then
straightness/flatness can be judged.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the optical instruments for non-contact measurement
of angles.
Application:
1. Surface Roughness

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Quality Department

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice
1 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING


ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

V SEMESTER - R 2013

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No. : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LABORATORY MANUAL
2 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


3 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DHANALAKSHMI


College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.


1. To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
2. To contribute to the promotion of Academic Excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

levels
3. To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

DEPARTMENT OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rendering the services to the global needs of engineering industries by educating students to become
professionally sound mechanical engineers of excellent caliber

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To produce mechanical engineering technocrats with a perfect knowledge intellectual and hands on
experience and to inculcate the spirit of moral values and ethics to serve the society

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MISSION
MISSION
VISION

VISION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To impart students with fundamental knowledge in mathematics and basic sciences that will mould
them to be successful professionals
2. Core competence
To provide students with sound knowledge in engineering and experimental skills to identify
complex software problems in industry and to develop a practical solution for them

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theory and practice which
enable them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and organization and to design
products requiring interdisciplinary skills
4. Professional skills

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To bestow students with adequate training and provide opportunities to work as team that will build
up their communication skills, individual, leadership and supportive qualities and to enable them to
adapt and to work in ever changing technologies
5. Life-long learning
To develop the ability of students to establish themselves as professionals in mechanical

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

engineering and to create awareness about the need for lifelong learning and pursuing advanced
degrees

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)
On completion of the B.E. (Mechanical) degree, the graduate will be able
a) To apply the basic knowledge of mathematics, science and engineering
b) To design and conduct experiments as well as to analyze and interpret data and apply the same in
the career or entrepreneurship

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

c) To design and develop innovative and creative software applications
d) To understand a complex real world problem and develop an efficient practical solution
e) To create, select and apply appropriate techniques, resources, modern engineering and IT tools
f) To understand the role as a professional and give the best to the society
g) To develop a system that will meet expected needs within realistic constraints such as economical

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

environmental, social, political, ethical, safety and sustainability
h) To communicate effectively and make others understand exactly what they are trying to tell in both
verbal and written forms
i) To work in a team as a team member or a leader and make unique contributions and work with
coordination

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

j) To engage in lifelong learning and exhibit their technical skills
k) To develop and manage projects in multidisciplinary environments

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To familiar with different measurement equipment?s and use of this industry for quality inspection
List of Experiments
1. Tool Maker?s Microscope

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Comparator
3. Sine Bar
4. Gear Tooth Vernier Caliper
5. Floating gauge Micrometer
6. Coordinate Measuring Machine

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Surface Finish Measuring Equipment
8. Vernier Height Gauge
9. Bore diameter measurement using telescope gauge
10. Bore diameter measurement using micrometer
11. Force Measurement

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. Torque Measurement
13. Temperature measurement
14. Autocollimator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Ability to handle different measurement tools and perform measurements in quality impulsion
2. Learnt the usage of precision measuring instruments and practiced to take measurements
3. Learnt and practiced to build the required dimensions using slip gauge
4. Able to measure the various dimensions of the given specimen using the tool maker?s microscope
5. Able to find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Able to measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare
7. Learnt to determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen using Gear tooth vernier
8. Able to measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two
wire method
9. Learnt to study the construction and operation of coordinate measuring machine

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. Learnt to determine the diameter of bore by using telescopic gauge and dial bore indicator
11. Able to measure the surface roughness using Talysurf instrument
12. Studied the characteristic between applied load and the output volt
13. Learnt the characteristics of developing torque and respective sensor output voltage
14. Studied the characteristics of thermocouple without compensation

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15. Able to check the straightness & flatness of the given component by using Autocollimator
16. Learnt to measure the displacement using LVDT and to calibrate it with the millimeter scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OBJECTIVES

COURSE OUTCOMES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

CONTENTS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl. No. Name of the Experiments Page No.
CYCLE ? 1 EXPERIMENTS
1
Precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab ? A Study
7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
To build up the slip gauge for given dimension ? A Study
16
3
Thread parameters measurement using Tool Makers Microscope

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

20
4
Calibration of dial gauge
23
5

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of taper angle by sine bar method
26
6
Determination of gear tooth thickness using gear tooth vernier
29

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7
Measurement of thread parameters using floating carriage micrometer
32
CYCLE ? 2 EXPERIMENTS
8

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement of various dimensions using Coordinate Measuring Machine
35
9
Measurement of surface roughness
39

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
Measurement of bores using dial bore indicator and telescopic gauge
42
11
Force measurement using load cell

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

46
12
Torque measurement using strain gauge
49
13

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Temperature measurement using thermocouple
53
14
Measurement of alignment using autocollimator
56

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ADDITIONAL EXPERIMENT BEYOND THE SYLLABUS
15
Thread parameters measurement using profile projector
60
16

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Displacement measurement ? linear variable differential transducer (LVDT)
62
PROJECT WORK
65

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.01 PRECISION MEASURING INSTRUMENT YSED IN
METROLOGY LAB ? A STUDY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Aim:
To study the following instruments and their usage for measuring dimensions of given specimen
1. Vernier caliper
2. Micrometer
3. Vernier height gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Depth micrometer
5. Universal bevel protractor
Apparatus required:
Surface plate, specimen and above instruments
Vernier caliper:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The principle of vernier caliper is to use the minor difference between the sizes two scales or divisions
for measurement. The difference between them can be utilized to enhance the accuracy of measurement. The
vernier caliper essentially consists of two steel rules, sliding along each other.
Parts:
Different parts of the vernier caliper are

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Beam ? It has main scale.
2. Fixed jaw
3. Sliding or Moving jaw ? It has vernier scale and sliding jaw locking screw.
4. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw knife
edges for internal measurement.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Stem or depth bar for depth measurement
Least count:
Least count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 VSD = 0.98 mm
Least count = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm

10 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ID

DEPTH

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OD
Measurement:
Given Vernier caliper can be used for external, internal depth, slot and step measurement.
Measurement principle:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

When both jaws contact each other scale shows the zero reading. The finer adjustment of movable jaw
can be done by the fine adjustment screw. First the whole movable jaw assembly is adjusted so that the two
measuring tips just touch the part to be measured. Then the fine adjustment clamp locking screw is tightened.
Final adjustment depending upon the sense of correct feel is made by the adjusting screw. After final
adjustment has been made sliding jaw locking screw is also tightened and the reading is noted.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

All the parts of the Vernier caliper are made of good quality steel and measuring faces are hardened.
Types of vernier:
Vernier caliper, electronic vernier caliper, vernier depth caliper

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:

Main scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

reading (MSR)
(mm)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

reading (VSR) (mm)
Total reading (MSR
+ VSR)
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OD


ID

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Depth


Vernier height gauge:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier height gauge is a sort of vernier caliper equipped with a special instrument suitable for height
measurement. It is always kept on the surface plate and the use of the surfaces plates as datum surfaces is
very essential.
Least count:
Least Count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm
1 VSD = 0.98 mm
Least Count (LC) = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm
Parts:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Base
2. Beam ? It has main scale.
3. Slider ? It has a vernier scale and slider locking screw.
4. Scriber
5. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Material:
All the parts of vernier are made of good quality steel and the measuring faces hardened.
Types of vernier gauge:
1. Analog vernier height gauge
2. Digital vernier height gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Electronic vernier height gauge
Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Main scale reading
(MSR)(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale reading
(VSR)(mm)
Total reading (MSR +

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSR)(mm)
1.
2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Outside micrometer:
The micrometer essentially consists of an accurate screw having about 10 or 20 threads per cm. The
end of the screw forms one measuring tip and other measuring tip is constituted by a stationary anvil in the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

base of the frame. The screw is threaded for certain length and is plain afterwards. The plain portion is called
spindle and its end is the measuring surface. The spindle is advanced or retracted by turning a thimble
connected to a spindle. The spindle is a slide fit over the barrel and barrel is the fixed part attached with the
frame. The barrel & thimble are graduated. The pitch of the screw threads is 0.5 mm.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count:
Least Count (LC) = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale
= 0.5 / 50 = 0.01 mm
Parts:
1. Frame

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Anvil
3. Spindle
4. Spindle lock
5. Barrel or outside sleeve
6. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.
The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.
14 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Measurement:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

It can be used for any external measurement.
Types of micrometer:
1. Outside micrometer, 2. Inside micrometer, 3.Depth micrometer, 4. Stick micrometer, 5. Screw thread
micrometer, 6. V ? anvil micrometer, 7. Blade type micrometer, 8. Dial micrometer, 9. Bench micrometer, 10.
Tape screw operated internal micrometer, 11. Groove micrometer, 12. Digital micrometer, 13.Differential screw

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

micrometer, 14.Adjustable range outside micrometer.
Ratchet stop mechanism:
The object of the ratchet stop is to ensure that same level of torque is applied on the spindle while
measuring and the sense of the feel of operator is eliminated and consistent readings are obtained. By
providing this arrangement, the ratchet stop is made slip off when the torque applied to rotate the spindle

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

exceeds the set torque. Thus this provision ensures the application of same amount of torque during the
measurement.
Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Pitch Scale Reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(PSR) (mm)
Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)
Head scale reading
(HSR x LC) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total Reading (PSR
+ HSR) (mm)
1.
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Depth micrometer:
Depth micrometer is a sort of micrometer which is mainly used for measuring depth of holes, so it is
named as depth micrometer.
Parts:
1. Shoulder

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Spindle
3. Spindle lock
4. Barrel or outside sleeve ? It has pitch scale.
5. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions.
6. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.
15 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


Least count:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least Count = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale = 0.50/50
= 0.01 mm
Measurements:
It can be used for measuring the depth of holes, slots and recessed areas. The pitch of the screw thread
is 0.5 mm. The least count is 0.01 mm. Shoulder acts as a reference surface and is held firmly and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

perpendicular to the centre line of the hole. For large range of measurement extension rods are used. In the
barrel the scale is calibrated. The accuracy again depends upon the sense of touch.
Procedure:
First, calculate the least count of the instrument. Check the zero error. Measure the specimen note
down the main scale reading or the head scale reading. Note down the vernier or head scale coincidence with

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

main or pitch scale divisions.
Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)
Head scale reading
(HSR x LC) (mm)
Total Reading (PSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

+ HSR) (mm)

1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.


16 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Universal bevel protractor:

Description:
Bevel protractor is an instrument for measuring the angle between the two faces of a specimen. It
consists of a base plate on which a circular scale is engraved. It is graduated in degrees. An adjustment plate

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

is attached to a circular plate containing the vernier scale. The adjustable blade can be locked in any position.
The circular plate has 360 division divided into four parts of 90 degrees each. The adjustable parts have 24
divisions of to the right and left sides of zero reading. These scales are used according to the position of the
specimen with respect to movable scale.
Procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Place the specimen whose taper is to be measured between the adjustable plate and movable
blade with one of its face parallel to the base.
2. Lock the adjustable plate in position and note down the main scale reading depending upon the
direction of rotation of adjustable plate in clockwise or anticlockwise.
3. Note the VSC to the right of zero.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Multiply the VSC with the least count and add to MSR to obtain the actual reading.
Least count:
Least Count = 2 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

24 VSD = 46
o
=> 1 VSD = 23/12
LC = 2 ? 23/12 = 1/12
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= 5? (five minutes)



17 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Main scale reading
(MSR) (deg)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale reading
(VSR) (deg)
Total reading (MSR +

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSR)
(deg)
1.
2.
The angle of scriber of the vernier height gauge =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Thus the various precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab are studied and the specimen
dimensions are recorded.
Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for linear, angular,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

roundness and roughness measurements they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring
instrument according to a specific requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).
Application:
1. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Metrology
2. Define ? Inspection
3. What are the needs of inspection in industries?
4. What are the various methods involving the measurement?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Define ? Precision
6. Define ? Accuracy
7. Define ? Calibration
8. Define ? Repeatability
9. Define ? Magnification

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. Define ? Error
11. Define ? Systematic Error
12. Define ? Random Error
13. Define ? Parallax Error
14. Define ? Environmental Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15. Define ? Cosine Error
Viva-voce

18 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.02 BUILD UP THE SLIP GAUGE FOR GIVEN DIMENSION
? A STUDY
Aim:
To build up the slip gauge for given dimension
Apparatus required:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Slip gauges set
2. Surface plate
3. Soft cloth
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
Slip gauge are universally accepted standard of length in industry. They are the working standard for
linear dimension. These were invented by a Swedish Engineer, C.E. Johansson. They are used
1. For direct precise measurement where the accuracy of the workpiece demand it.
2. For use with high- magnification comparators to establish the size of the gauge blocks in general

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

use.
3. Gauge blocks are also used for many other purposes such as checking the accuracy of measuring
instrument or setting up a comparator to a specific dimension, enabling a batch of component to be
quickly and accurately checked or indeed in any situation where there is need to refer to standard of
known length these blocks are rectangular.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

19 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Most gauge blocks are produced from high grade steel, hardened and established by a heat treatment
process to give a high degree of dimensional stability. Gauge blocks are also manufactured from tungsten
carbide which is an extremely hard and wear resistant material. The measuring faces have a lapped finish.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The faces are perfectly flat and parallel to one another with a high degree of accuracy. Each block has an
extremely high dimensional accuracy at 20
o
C.
These slip gauge are available in variety of selected sets both in inch units and metric units. Letter ?E? is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

used for inch units and ?M? is used for metric standard number of pieces in a set following the letter E or M. For
example EBI refers to a set whose blocks are in metric units and are 83 in number. Each block dimensions is
printed on anyone of its face itself the size of any required standard being made up by combining the
appropriate number of these different size blocks.
If two gauges are slid and twisted together under pressure they will firmly join together. This process,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

known as wringing, is very useful because it enables several gauge blocks to be assembled together to
produce a required size. In fact the success of precision measurement by slip gauges depends on the
phenomenon of wringing.
First the gauge is oscillated slightly with very light pressure over other gauge so as to detect pressure at
any foreign particles between the surfaces. One gauge is placed perpendicular to other using standard

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

gauging pressure and rotary motion is applied until the blocks are lined up.
Procedure:
1. Build the given dimension by wringing minimum number of slip gauges.
2. Note the given dimension and choose the minimum possible slip gauge available in the set so as to
accommodate the last decimal value. The minimum slip gauge value dimension available i.e., 1.12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

mm must be chosen followed by 1.5 mm thick gauge block.
3. Follow the above steps to build up the slip gauge of any dimension.
Precautions:
1. Slip gauges should be handled very carefully placed gently and should never be dropped.
2. Whenever a slip gauge is being removed from the set, its dimensions are noted and must be

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

replaced into the set at its appropriate place only.
3. Correct procedure must be followed in wringing and also in removing the gauge blocks.
4. They should be cleaned well before use and petroleum jelly is applied after use.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

20 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:
Range (mm) Increment (mm) No. of pieces

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total = ____________ Pieces

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total length of slip gauge = ________ mm
Given diameter Slip gauges used Obtained dimensions

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Slip gauge set is studied and the given dimensions are building up by wringing minimum number of slip
gauges.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Students will be able to select proper measuring instrument and know requirement of calibration, errors
in measurement etc. They can perform accurate measurements.
Application:
1. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Why C.I. is preferred material for surface plates and tables?
2. Why V ? blocks are generally manufactured in pairs?
3. Why micrometer is required to be tested for accuracy?
4. Define ? Linear Measurement

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. List the linear measuring instrument according to their accuracy.
6. Define ? Least Count
7. What are the uses of vernier depth gauge?
8. What are the uses of feeler gauges?
9. What are the uses of straight edge?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. What are the uses of angle plate?
11. What are the uses of V ? block?
12. What are the uses of combination square?
13. What precautions should be taken while using slip gauges?
14. What is wringing?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15. Why the slip gauges are termed as ?End standard?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

22 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


Expt.No.03 THREAD PARAMETERS MEASUREMENT USING
TOOL MAKERS MICROSCOPE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Aim:
To study the tool makers microscope and in the process measure the various dimensions of the given
specimen
Apparatus required:
1. Tool makers microscope

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Specimen
Diagram:

Description:
The tool maker?s microscope is designed for measurement of parts of complex forms; for example,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

profile of a tool having external threads. It can also be used for measuring centre to centre distance of the
holes in any plane as well as the coordinates of the outline of a complex template gauge, using the
coordinates measuring system.
23 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Basically it consists of an optical head which can be adjusted vertically along the ways of supporting
column. The optical head can be clamped at any position by a screw. On the work table (which as a circular
base in which there are graduations) the part to be inspected is placed. The table has a compound slide by
means of which the part can be measured. For giving these two movements, there are two micrometer screws
having thimble scales and verniers. At the back of the base light source is arranged that provides horizontal

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

beam of light, reflected from a mirror by 90 degrees upwards towards the table. The beam of light passes
through the transparent glass plate on which flat plates can be checked are placed. Observations are made
through the eyepiece of the optical head.
Procedure:
1. Place the given specimen on the work table and switch on all the three light sources and adjust the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

intensity of the light source until a clean image of the cross wires and specimen are seen through
the eyepiece.
2. Coincide one of the two extreme edges between which the measurement has to be taken with
vertical or horizontal cross wires and depending upon the other image coincide with the same cross
wires by moving the above device. Note the reading.The difference between the two readings gives

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the value of the required measurement.
3. Note the experiment specimen and the readings.
4. Tabulate the different measurements measured from the specimen.
Determination of thread parameters
Magnification =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

S.No. Parameters
Magnified value
(mm)
Actual value
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Outer diameter (O.D)

2. Internal diameter (I.D)

3. Pitch

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Flank angle


Result:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Included angle of the tool was measured using tool maker?s microscope and various dimensions of the
given specimen are measured.


24 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the various parameters of thread and select proper measuring
instrument and know requirement of calibration, errors in measurement etc. They can perform accurate
measurements.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Machine Shop
2. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by tool maker?s microscope?
2. What is the light used in tool maker?s microscope?
3. What are the various characteristics that you would measure in a screw thread?
4. What are the instruments that are required for measuring screw thread?
5. Define ? Pitch

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. What are the causes of pitch error?
7. Define ? Flank
8. What are the effects of flank angle error?
9. What is progressive error?
10. What is periodic error?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. What is drunken error?
12. What is erratic error?
13. What are the applications of tool maker?s microscope?
14. What are the limitations of tool maker?s microscope?
15. What are the advantages of tool maker?s microscope?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

25 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.04 CALIBRATION OF DIAL GAUGE USING SLIP GAUGE
Aim:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge
Apparatus required:
Dial gauge, magnetic stand, slip gauge, and surface plate
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
The dial test indicator is a precision measuring instrument which can convert linear motion into angular
motion by means of transmission mechanics of rack and pinion and can be used to measure linear vibration
and errors of shape.
This instrument has the features such as good appearance, compact size, light weight, high precision,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

reasonable construction, constant measuring face etc. Rigidity of all parts is excellent. Probe is tipped with
carbide balls. A shock proof mechanism is provided for those with larger measuring range.

26 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Types of dial indicator:
1. Plunger type
2. Lever type
Plunger type dial indicator has a resolution counter and each division in main scale is 0.01 mm. In lever
type dial test indicator is replaced by ball type stylus.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. Fix the dial gauge to the stand rigidly and place the stand on the surface plate.
2. Set the plunger of dial gauge to first touch the upper surface of standard slip gauge and set indicator
to zero.
3. Raise then the plunger by pulling the screw above the dial scale.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Place the standard slip gauge underneath the plunger.
5. Release the plunger and let it to touch the standard slip gauge.
6. Note the reading on the dial scale.
Formulae:
The standard error of dial gauge is calculated by the formula

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
S.No.
Slip gauge reading ?x?
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Dial gauge reading
(mm)
(x? - x)
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x? (x? - x)
1.
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Thus the accuracy and standard error of dial gauge is found. The standard error of given dial gauge is
__________.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

27 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Outcome:
Students will be able to check the variation in tolerance during the inspection process of a
machined part, measure the deflection of a beam or ring under laboratory conditions, as well as many

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

other situations where a small measurement needs to be registered or indicated
Application:
1. Milling Machine
2. Analog versus digital/electronic readout

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is comparator?
2. What are the types of comparators?
3. What is the LC for comparators?
4. What are the applications of comparator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. What is meant by plunger?
6. What are the types of dial indicators?
7. Why a revolution counter is not provided in lever type dial test indicator?
8. Draw a line diagram of the operating mechanism of plunger type dial test indicator.
9. Explain the term magnification of a dial indicator.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. What are the uses of dial test indicator?
11. What are the practical applications of dial test indicator?
12. What precautions should be taken while using dial test indicator?
13. What are the desirable qualities of a dial test indicator?
14. What are the advantages of dial test indicator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15. What are the limitations of dial test indicator?
16. Distinguish between comparator and measuring instrument.
17. What are the advantages of electrical comparator?
18. What are the advantages of optical comparator?
19. What are the uses of comparator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

20. What are the advantages and disadvantages of mechanical comparator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

28 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.05 DETERMINATION OF TAPER ANGLE BY SINE BAR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

METHOD
Aim:
To measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare
Apparatus required:
Sine bar, slip gauges, dial gauge with stand, micrometer, surface plate, bevel protractor, vernier caliper

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diagram:

Description:
The sine bar principle uses the ratio of the length of two sides of a right triangle. It may be noted that
devices operating on sine principle are capable of ?self-generation?. The measurement is restricted to 45

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
from
accuracy point of view. Sine bar itself is not a measuring instrument.
Accuracy requirements of sine bar:
1. The axes of the rollers must be parallel to each other and the centre distance L must be precisely

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

known.
2. The sine bar must be flat and parallel to the plane connecting the axes of the rollers.
3. The rollers must be of identical diameters and must have within a close tolerance.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

29 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Procedure:
1. Fix the dial gaugeon the magnetic stand and place the magnetic stand on the surface plate.Check
the parallelism of the sine bar.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Place the given specimen above the sine bar and place the dial gauge on top of the specimen.
Adjustthe dial gauge for zero deflection.
3. Raise the front end of the sine bar with slip gauges until the work surface is parallel to the datum
surface.
4. Check the parallelism using dial gauge.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Measure the distance between the centres of the sine bar rollers as ?L? and note the height of the
slip gauge as ?H?.
6. Note the included angle of the specimen.
Formulae:
Sin ? = H/L where ? = Included angle of the specimen

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

H = Height of slip gauges
L = Distance between the centre of rollers
Tabulation:
S.No. L (mm) H (mm) Taper angle ( ?)
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.
3.

Result:
The taper angle of the given specimen using sine bar was found to be =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for angular measurements
and they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a specific
requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Flat Surface
2. Granite

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

30 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. List out the various angle measuring instruments.
2. What is the working principles sine bar?
3. How is a sine bar used to measure the angle?
4. What is the application of sine bar?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. What is the material of sine bar?
6. Why sine bar is not preferred to use for measuring angles more than 45
0
?
7. What are the features of sine bar?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. A 100 mm sine bar is to be set up to an angle of 33
0
, determine the slip gauges needed from 87
pieces set.
9. What are the various instruments used for measuring angles?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. What is sine bar?
11. How sine bar is used for angle measurement?
12. Explain how sine bar is used to measure angle of small size component.
13. Explain how sine bar is used to measure angle of large size component.
14. What are the various types of sine bar?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15. What are the limitations of sine bar?
16. What is sine center?
17. What is sine table?
18. What are the possible sources of errors in angular measurement by sine bar?
19. What are angle gauges?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

20. How angle gauges are used for measuring angles?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

31 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.06 DETERMINATION OF GEAR TOOTH THICKNESS
USING GEAR TOOTH VERNIER
Aim:
To determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen and to draw the graph between the tooth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

number and the error in thickness
Apparatus required:
Gear tooth vernier, specimen, surface plate and vernier caliper
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
The tooth thickness, in general, is measured at pitch circle since gear tooth thickness varies from the tip
to the base circle of the tooth. This is possible only when there is an arrangement to fix that position for this
measurement by the gear tooth vernier. It has two vernier scales; one is vertical and other is horizontal.
Procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

32 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

1. Measure initially the outside diameter of the given gear specimen by means of a vertical calculation
of vernier caliper. Note the number of teeth. Calculate the module (m) using the formula.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M = OD/ (Z+2) where z ? number of teeth
M - Module
2. Calculate the theoretical tooth thickness (t) by t = z * m* sin (90/z).
3. Set the vernier scale for the height and tighten.
4. Measure the thickness of each tooth using the horizontal scale. This is measured thickness. It can

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

be positive or negative.
H = m x [1+ Z/2 (1- Cos 90/Z)]
5. Calculate the error in the tooth thickness i.e,1. measured thickness ? Theoretical thickness
6. Draw the graph between the tooth number and the error in thickness.
Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tooth
Number
Measured Thickness
(mm)
Theoretical Thickness (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Error in tooth thickness
(mm)
1
2
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tooth
Number
MSR
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSC

VSR
(mm)
TR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
1
2
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Graph:


Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tooth No.
33 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
The theoretical experiment value of gear tooth thickness is obtained and graph is drawn between error
and tooth number in tooth thickness
Theoretical tooth thickness =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Experimental tooth thickness =
Error in tooth thickness =
Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the basic measurement units and able to calibrate various
measuring parameters of the gear.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Gear Component
2. Mining

1. Calculate the setting of a gear tooth vernier caliper for a straight spur gear having 40 teeth and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

module 4.
2. What is the importance of chordal depth?
3. Define ? Chordal width
4. How is the actual profile of the gear tooth determined?
5. What are the manufacturing errors in gear element?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Define ? Addendum
7. Define ? Dedendum
8. Define ? Flank of tooth
9. Define ? Pitch
10. Define ? Pitch Circle

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. Define ? Crest of tooth
12. Define ? Root of tooth
13. Define ? Base Circle
14. Define ? Module
15. Define ? Angle of Obliquity

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

34 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.07 MEASUREMENT OF THREAD PARAMETER USING
FLOATING CARRIAGE MICROMETER
Aim:
To measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two wire

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

method
Apparatus required:
1. Floating carriage micrometer
2. Standard wire
3. Given specimen (screw thread)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diagram:

Description of floating carriage micrometer:
It consists of three main units. A base casting carries a pair of centres on which threaded work piece is
to be mounted. Another carriage capable of moving towards centre is mounted exactly above. In this carriage

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

one head with thimble to measure up to 0.002 mm is provided and at the other side of head a fiducial indicator
is provided to indicate zero position.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

35 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Procedure:
1. For two wire method, place the standard wire over a thread of the screw at opposite sides.
2. For three wire method, place two standard wires on two successive threads and the third wire

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

placed opposite sides of the thread.
3. Measure the diameter over wires (M) using floating carriage micrometer.
4. Repeat this procedure at various positions of the screw and take different readings.
Formulae:
1. For best wire size, d = P / 2 Cos (x/2)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Where, P = Pitch
d= wire size
x = angle between two threads
= 60
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

for metric thread
2. Actual effective diameter, E.A = M ? 3d + 0.866 p
3. Nominal effective diameter, EN = D ? 0.648 p
4. Max. wire size = 1.01 p
5. Min. wire size = 0.505 p

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Best wire size = 0.577 p
M = Diameter over wires
P = Pitch of thread
For metric thread:
Actual effective diameter (EA) = M ? 3d + 0.866 p

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Where d = actual diameter of wire
Determination of actual and nominal effective diameter of the screw thread:
Sl.No.
Nominal
Diameter (D)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
Diameter over
wire ?M?
(mm)
Actual eff.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diameter E.A
(mm)
Nominal eff.
Diameter E.N
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Error in effective
diameter
(E.A ? E.N)
(mm)
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

36 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Result:
Thus the actual and nominal effective diameter is measured using three wire method and the error in
effective diameter of screw is determined.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for roundness
measurements and they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a
specific requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).
Application:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Wholse
2. Maxxis Rubber India

1. Define ? Pitch
2. Define ? Flank Angle

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. What is plug gauge?
4. What is meant by micrometer?
5. What is meant by indicator?
6. What is best ? size wire?
7. Calculate the diameter of the best wire for an M 20 x 25 screws.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. What are the different corrections to be applied in the measurement of effective diameter by the
method of wire?
9. What is floating carriage micrometer?
10. What are the uses of floating carriage micrometer?
11. What are the methods are used for measuring effective diameter?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. Define ? Effective Diameter
13. Define ? Major Diameter
14. Define ? Minor Diameter
15. What are the effects of flank error?
16. Define ? Rake Angle

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17. Define ? Pitch Cylinder
18. What are the effects of pitch error?
19. Define ? Pitch Diameter
20. What is meant by angle of thread?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

37 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.08 MEASUREMENT OF VARIOUS DIMENSIONS USING
COORDINATE MEASURING MACHINE
Aim:
1. To study the construction and operation of coordinate measuring machine
2. To measure the specified dimensions of the given component

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Instruments used:
Coordinate measuring machine, vernier calipers
Diagram:

Theory:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

A coordinate measuring machine (CMM) is a 3D device for measuring the physical and geometrical
characteristics of an object. This machine may be manually controlled by an operator or it may be computer
controlled. Measurements are defined by a probe attached to the three moving axis of this machine X, Y and Z
axes. A coordinate measuring machine (CMM) is also a device used in manufacturing and assembly
processes to test a part or assembly against the design intent. By precisely recording the X, Y and Z

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

coordinates of the target, points are generated which can be analyzed via regression algorithms for the
construction of features. These points are collected by using a probe that is positioned manually by an
38 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

operator or automatically via direct computer control (DCC). DCC CMMs can be programmed to repeatedly

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measure identical parts, thus a CMM is a specialized form of industrial robot.
Parts:
Coordinate measuring machine include three main components:
1. The main structures which include three axes of motion.
2. Probing system

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Data collection and reduction system ? typically includes a machine controller, desktop computer
and application software
Machine description:
1. In modern machines, the gantry type superstructure has two legs and is often called a bridge. This
moves freely along the granite table with one leg following a guide rail attached to one side of the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

granite table. The opposite leg simply rests on the granite table following the vertical surface
contour.
2. Air bearings are fixed for ensuring friction free travel. Compressed air is forced through a series of
very small holes in a flat bearing surface to provide a smooth but controlled air cushion on which the
CMM can move in a frictionless manner.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. The movement of the bridge along the granite table forms one axis of the XY plane. The bridge of
the gantry contains a carriage which traverses between the inside and outside legs and forms the
other X or Y horizontal axis.
4. The third axis of movement (Z axis) is provided by the addition of a vertical quill or spindle which
moves up and down through the center of the carriage. The touch probe forms the sensing device

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

on the end of the quill.
5. The movement of the X, Y and Z axes fully describes the measuring envelope. Some touch probes
are themselves powered rotary devices with the probe tip able to swivel vertically through 90
degrees and through a full 360 degrees rotation.
Uses:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

They are generally used for:
1. Dimensional measurement
2. Profile measurement
3. Angularity or orientation measurement
4. Depth mapping

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Digitizing mapping
6. Shaft measurement
39 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

The machines are available in a wide range of sizes and designs with a variety of different probe

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

technologies. They can be operated manually or automatically through direct computer control (DCC). They
are offered in various configurations such as bench top, free ? standing, handheld and portable.
Procedure:
1. Take at least 8 points on sphere ball attached to the granite table.
2. Fix the object whose dimension needs to be measured using the jigs and fixtures.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Using joystick, move the probe whose tip is made of ruby slowly and carefully to the surface whose
measurements have to be taken.
4. Touch the probe at two places for measurement of a line (starting and ending point).
5. Touch the probe at two places for measurement of a circular profile and for a cylinder touch the
probe at 8 points.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Measure the same profiles again with vernier calipers (length of line, circle diameter, cylinder
diameter) to compare the two readings.
Comments:
1. The machine should be calibrated every time when it is being used.
2. While measuring the profiles, the probe should be moved very slowly as it may damage the ruby if

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

hit with a high force.
3. Care should be taken while performing experiment so that the granite table of the machines should
get any scratches.
4. ?Retract distance? should be fixed according to the space available in the near vicinity of the profile
measurement area.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Observation:
Sl.No. Feature
CMM reading
(mm)
Vernier reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
Form error
(mm)
Difference in two
readings (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 Circle -1
2 Circle -2
3 Circle -3
4 Line
5 Arc

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6
Cone - Diameter
Cone ? Vertex angle
Cone ? Height
7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Cylinder ? Diameter
Cylinder ? Height


40 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Thus the different profile of given object are measured using coordinate measuring machine
Outcome:
Students will be able to measures the geometry of physical objects by sensing discrete points on the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

surface of the object with a probe and they will be able to know the Various types of probes are used in CMMs,
including mechanical, optical, laser, and white light.
Application:
1. Surface Measuring Equipment
2. Photo transistor

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What are the types of measuring machine?
2. What is CMM?
3. What are the types of CMM?
4. What are the advantages of CMM?
5. What are the limitations of CMM?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. What are the possible sources of error in CMM?
7. What is the use of universal measuring machine?
8. What are the applications of CMM?
9. What is the working principle of three axis measuring machine?
10. What is image shearing microscope?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. What is the use of electronic inspection and measuring machine?
12. What are the types of electronic inspection and measuring machine?
13. What is CMM probe?
14. What are the three main probes are available?
15. What are the types of stylus?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

41 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.09 MEASUREMENT OF SURFACE ROUGHNESS UING
TALYSURF INSTRUMENT

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Aim:
To measure the surface roughness using Talysurf instrument
Apparatus required:
Talysurf instrument, work piece, surface plate
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Theory:
On any finished surface, imperfections are bound to be there and these take the form of a succession of
hills and valleys which vary both in height and in spacing and result in a kind of texture which in appearance or
feel is often characteristic of the machining process and accompanying defects. The several kinds of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

departures are there on the surface and these are due to various causes.

42 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Methods of measuring surface roughness:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Surface inspection of comparison methods
2. Direct instrument measurements
In comparative methods the surface texture is assessed by observation of the surface. But these
methods are not reliable as they can be misleading, if comparison is not made with surfaces produced by
same techniques. The various methods available under comparison method are: (i) Touch Inspection

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(ii)Scratch Inspection (iii) Microscopic Inspection (iv) Visual Inspection (v) Surface Photographs (vi) Reflected
Light Intensity Direct Instrument Measurements enable to determine a numerical value of the surface finish of
any surface. Nearly all instruments used are stylus probe type of instruments. This operates on electrical
principle.
Procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Place the finished component on the surface plate.
2. Fix the Talysurf tester to the vernier height gauge using adopter at a convenient height.
3. Make sure that the stylus probe touches the work piece.
4. Fix the sampling length in the tester.
5. Press the power button so that the probe moves on the surface to and fro.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Take the readings of the surface roughness directly from the instrument.
7. Repeat the above process for the remaining specimen and tabulate the readings.
Precautions:
1. The surface to be tested should be cleaned properly.
2. The tester should be fixed to the height gauge properly so that the movement of the probe is exactly

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

parallel to the surface of work.
3. Make sure that the probe gently touches the work.
Tabulation:
S.No
Measurement roughness value,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?m
Sample direction Ra, Rz
Average Ra Average Rz Grade
1.
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

43 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Result:
Thus the surface roughness is checked for different specimens by Talysurf.
Outcome:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for roughness
measurements they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a specific
requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).
Application:
1. Machine Shop

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Quality Department


1. Define ? Actual Size?
2. What is meant by normal surface?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. What is meant by profilo-graph?
4. What is Tomlinson surface meter?
5. What is meant by profile?
6. What are the factors affecting surface roughness?
7. Why the surface texture is control?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Define ? Lay
9. Define ? Surface Texture
10. Define ? Flaws
11. What is sampling length?
12. What are the methods used for evaluating surface finish?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. What is form factor?
14. What are the methods used for measuring surface finish?
15. How will you differentiate smooth surface from flat surface?
16. How surface finish is designated on drawings?
17. Define ? Primary Texture

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

18. Define ? Secondary Texture
19. What are the types of instrument used for measuring surface texture?
20. Define ? waviness

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

44 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.10 MEASUREMENT OF BORE USING DIAL BORE
INDICATOR AND TELESCOPIC GAUGE
Aim:
To determine the diameter of bore by using telescopic gauge and checking the same by using dial bore
indicator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Apparatus required:
Work piece, vernier caliper, telescopic gauge and dial gauge indicator set with anvil.
Diagram:

45 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
Bore gauge measurement:
1. Select the extension rod and washer according to the bore diameter to be measured

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Fix the suitable extension rod and washer with the bore gauge
3. Fix the dial gauge to the bore gauge in its position
4. Insert the bore gauge inside the bore to be measured and hold the gauge in parallel o the axis of the
bore. Ensure that the tips on either side of the bore gauge are in touch with inner wall of the bore
5. Note down the reading in the dial gauge and withdraw the bore gauge from the bore

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Hold the measuring tips of bore gauge between the spindle and anvil of a micrometer and compress
the tips by rotating the thimble till the reading reaches the same one as noted earlier
7. Observe and record the micrometer reading as the bore diameter to be measured
Telescopic gauge measurement:
1. Select the telescopic gauge according to the bore diameter to be measured

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Press the telescopic spindles in the telescopic gauge lock them by locking screw
3. Insert the telescopic gauge inside thee bore to be measured. Release the locking screw to expand
the telescopic spindles outwards inside the bore
4. Hold the telescopic gauge in parallel to the axis of bore axis and ensure that the tips of telescopic
spindles are in touch with the inner wall of the bore

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Lock the telescopic spindles and withdraw it from the bore
46 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

6. Measure the expanded length of the telescopic spindles using micrometer record them as the inner
diameter of the bore

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Practical observations:
Rough measurement of bore using Telescopic gauge:
Least count of micrometer = 0.01 mm
Sl.No.
Micrometer reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total reading
(MSR + TSC * LC) ( mm) Main scale reading (MSR)
(mm)
Thimble scale
coincidence

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
2.

Average reading = ________ mm
Accurate measuring using Bore gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
Micrometer
reading
(d) (mm)
Bore gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

reading
(R1) (mm)
Work piece reading
(R2) (mm)
Final reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d+ (R1 ? R2) * 0.01
(mm)
1.
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Accurate internal diameter of hole using bore gauge = ______ mm

Result
1. Internal diameter of the work piece by using telescopic gauge is ________mm
2. Diameter obtained by using dial gauge indicator is __________________mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Students will be able to measure a bore's size, by transferring the internal dimension to a remote
measuring tool (Telescopic gauge).
Application:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Automobile
2. Quality Department


47 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by bore diameter?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. What is gauge?
3. What is meant by measurement?
4. What is telescope gauge?
5. What is bore gauge?
6. What is contact point?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. What is the principle of bore gauge?
8. What are the applications of telescopic gauge?
9. What types of materials are used in telescopic gauge?
10. What are the types of instrument used to measure bore diameter?
11. What are the applications of bore gauge?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. What are the advantages of bore gauge over telescopic gauge?
13. What are the limitations of bore gauge?
14. What is the working principle of telescopic gauge?
15. What are the disadvantages of telescopic gauge?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

48 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.11 MEASUREMENT OF FORCE USING LOAD CELL
Aim:
To study the characteristic between applied load and the output voltage
Apparatus required:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Trainer kit
2. Multimeter
3. Load cell sensor with setup
4. Weights (5 kg)
5. Power chord

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diagram:

Formulae:
Error (%) = {Applied Voltage ? (Displayed Load)/ Applied Load)} x 100
Block diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Applied DC
Load O/P

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DC Excitation source Transducer
Transducer
Instrumentation
Amplifier

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Gain Amplifier DVM
49 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Interfacing and calibration procedure:
1. Interface the load cell 9 pin ?D? type male connector to 9 pin D type female connector, fixed on the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

module.
2. First unload the beam and nullify the display by using zero adjustment POT
3. Apply the maximum load of 5 kg to the beam and adjust the display to 5 kg by using gain
adjustment POT.
4. After the initial adjustment, the unit should not be disturbed until the completion of the experiment.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Safety precaution:
1. During offset adjustment, the beam should not be loaded.
2. The beam should not be disturbed during the experiment.
3. Remove the load from the beam, after completion of the experiment; otherwise wire wound on the
strain gauge will get damaged.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. If you are getting an unsatisfactory reading, then vary the zero and span POT minimum to
maximum.
5. Maximum load should not exceed 5 kg.
6. Once calibrated, the setting should not be distributed till the end of the experiment.
Procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Install the load cell module and interface the 9 pin D connector with kit.
2. Connect the multimeter in volt mode across T5 and GND for the output voltage measurement.
3. Switch on the module.
4. Initially, unload the beam and nullify the display by using zero adjustment POT (zero calibration).
5. Apply the maximum load of 5 kg to the beam and adjust the display to 5 kg by using gain

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

adjustment POT (gain calibration).
6. Now apply the load to the beam, a force will develop on the beam and measure the output voltage
(V) across T5 and GND.
7. Gradually increase the load and note down the output voltage (V) and applied load.
8. Tabulate the values of displayed load and applied voltage.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. Plot a graph between applied load and output voltage (V).
Note: When 1 kg load is applied to the beam, the displayed voltage is 1 kg.


50 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Applied load
(kg)
Output voltage

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(V)
Displayed load
(kg)
% Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Graph:
1. Applied load (kg) Vs Output Voltage (V)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Actual load (kg) Vs % Error
Result:
Thus the characteristic between applied load and the output voltage was studied.
Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the Sensor device (electro-mechanical) which help us to measure

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

a physical parameter (such as temperature, pressure, force, acceleration etc.) by providing analog input to get
digital output.
Application:
1. Machine Shop
2. Automobile

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by force?
2. Define ? Wheat stone bridge circuit
3. Define ? Load

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. What is meant by deflector?
5. What is meant by force indicator?
6. Define ? Instrumentation
7. How instrumentations are classified?
8. Define ? Transducer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. What is electrical transducer?
10. How transducers are classified?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

51 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.12 MEASUREMENT OF TORQUE USING STRAIN

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

GAUGE
Aim:
To study the characteristics of the developing torque and the signal conditioned sensor output voltage
Apparatus required:
1. Trainer kit

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Digital Multimeter (V)
3. Torque sensor setup
4. Weights (100 gram x 10 Nos.)
5. Power chord
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Interfacing and calibration procedure:
1. Interface the torque sensor 9 pin. ?D? type male connector to ?9? pin ?D? type female connector, fixed
on the module.
2. First, unload the beam and nullify the display by using zero adjustment POT.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Apply the maximum load of 1 kg to the beam and adjust the display to 9.81 Nm by using adjustment
POT.
4. After this initial calibration, the unit should not be disturbed until the completion of the experiment.
52 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Safety precaution:
1. During offset adjustment, the beam should not be loaded.
2. The beam should not be disturbed during the experiment.
3. Remove the beam from the shaft, after completion of the experiment otherwise wire wound on the
strain gauge will get damaged.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. If the displayed torque reading are in negative, change the beam connections in opposite to
previously connected direction.
5. If you are getting an unsatisfactory reading, then vary the zero and span POT minimum to
maximum.
6. Maximum load should not exceed 1 kg.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Once calibrated, the setting should not be disturbed till the end of this experiment.
Procedure:
1. Install the torque sensor setup and interface with kit.
2. Switch ?ON? the module.
3. Connect the Multimeter in millivolts mode T2 and T3 for bridge output voltage measurement POT.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. First, unload the beam and nullify the bridge output voltage by using zero adjustment POT.
5. By applying load to the beam, torque will develop on the shaft and measure the bridge output
voltage (mV) across T2 and T3
6. Gradually increase the force by applying load and note down the bridge output voltage (mV).
7. Tabulate the readings and plot a graph between developed torque versus bridge output voltage

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mV).
Formulae:
Error (%) = {(Actual Torque ? Theoretical Torque)/ Theoretical Torque} x 100
Theoretical Torque = mass (m) x acceleration due to gravity (g) x radial distance
= 1 kg x 9.81 m/s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
x 1 m
= 9.81 Nm
Tabulation:
Sl.No. Theoretical Torque

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(Nm)
Bridge output voltage
(mV)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Model graph:
The graph between developed torque and bridge output voltage is drawn
53 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Developed torque (Nm) Vs Output Voltage (V)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sample reading:
Developed Torque (Nm) = 9.81 Nm
Output Voltage (V) = 5 mV

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Thus the characteristics of the torque developed which is due to force applied to beam and the bridge
output voltage were studied and graph is plotted.
Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the Sensor device (electro-mechanical) which helps us to

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measure the strain by providing analog input to digital output.
Application:
1. Machine Shop
2. Turbine

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

54 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Torque
2. Define ? Twist

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. What are the methods used for measuring torque?
4. Define ? Strain Gauge
5. What is prony brake?
6. What are the modern devices used for measuring torque?
7. What are the elements of strain gauge?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. What is the use of slip ring for measuring torque?
9. What is slip ring?
10. What are the types of torque?
11. What are the types of dynamometer?
12. What are the applications of dynamometer?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. What are the features of dynamometer?
14. What is gauge factor?
15. What are the types of torque measurement?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

55 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.13 MEASUREMENT OF TEMPERATURE USING
THERMOCOUPLE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Aim:
To study the characteristics of thermocouple without compensation
Apparatus required:
1. Trainer kit
2. Thermocouple

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Water bath
4. Thermometer
5. Digital multi meter
6. Power chord
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. Connect the two terminals of the thermocouple across T1 & T2.
2. Position the switch ?SW1? towards ?NO?.
3. Switch ?ON? the unit and note the displayed temperature.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. If there is any difference in displayed temperature at room temperature, adjust the offset knob ?zero?
to set 0
o
C in display.
5. Place the Multimeter across T7 and T8.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Insert the thermocouple and thermometer into water bath.
7. Switch ?ON? the water bath.
8. Note the actual temperature in thermometer and displayed temperature simultaneously.
9. Tabulate the reading and calculate % error using the above formula
56 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. Plot the graph actual temperature Vs % error
Formulae:
Error (%) = {(Displayed Temperature ? Actual Temp)/ Actual Temp} x 100

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Actual Temperature
(
o
C)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Displayed Temperature
(
o
C)
% Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Graph
Temperature Vs % Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Thus the characteristics of the thermocouple without compensation were studied and graph is plotted.
Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the Sensor device (electro-mechanical) which help us to measure
a physical parameter (such as temperature) by providing analog input.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Thermocouple
2. Heat generation

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

57 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by total radiation pyrometer?
2. How the mercury in glass thermometer worked?
3. What are the sources of error in thermocouple?
4. Define ? Resistance

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Define ? Temperature detector
6. Define ? Temperature
7. What are the types of instrument used for measuring temperature?
8. What are the types of electrical temperature sensors?
9. What is optical sensor?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. What are the applications of liquid in gas thermometer?
11. What are the applications of bimetallic thermometer?
12. What is vapour pressure thermometer?
13. What is thermocouple?
14. What are the types of metal are used in combination to form thermocouples?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15. What are the advantages of thermocouple?
16. What are the disadvantages of thermocouple?
17. Define ? Resistance Thermometer
18. Define ? Thermistor
19. What is the use radiation pyrometer?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

20. What are the advantages of optical pyrometer?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

58 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.14 MEASUREMENT OF ALIGNMENT USING
AUTOCOLLIMATOR
Aim:
To check the straightness & flatness of the given component by using Autocollimator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Apparatus required:
Autocollimator, work piece/ object to be tested
Diagram:

Theory:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Definition of straightness ? A plane is to be said straight over a given length if the variation or
distance of its point from two planes perpendicular to each other and parallel to the generation
direction at of the line remain within specified tolerance limits. The reference planes being so
chosen that their intersection is parallel to the straight line joining two points suitably located on the
line to be tested and two points being close ends of the length to be measured.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Principle of the Autocollimator-A cross line ?target? graticule is positioned at the focal plane of a
telescope objective system with the intersection of the cross line on the optical axis, i.e. at the
principal focus. When the target graticule is illuminated, rays of light diverging from the intersection
point reach the objective via a beam splitter and are projected from the objective as parallel pencils
of light. In this mode the optical system is operating as a collimator.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

59 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

3. A flat reflector placed in front of the objective and exactly normal to the optical axis reflects the
parallel pencils of light back along their original paths. They are then brought to focus in the plane of
the target graticule and exactor coincident with its intersection. A proportion of the returned light

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

passes straight through the beam splitter and the return image of the target cross line is therefore
visible through the eyepiece. In this mode, the optical system is operating as a telescope focused at
infinity.
4. If the reflector is tilted through a small angle the reflected pencils of light will be deflected by twice
the angle of tilt (principle of reflection) and will be brought to focus in the plane of target graticule but

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

linearly displaced from the actual target cross lines by an amount 2?* f.
5. An optical system of an autocollimator consists of a light source, condensers, semi-reflectors, target
wire, collimating lens and reflector apart from microscope eyepiece. A target wire takes place of the
light source into the focal plane of the collimator lenses. Both the target wire and the reflected image
are seen through a microscope eyepiece. The eyepiece incorporates a scale graduated in 0.05mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

interval and a pair of parallel setting wires which can be adjusted. Movements of wires are effected
through a micrometer, one rotation of the drum equals to one scale division movement of the wires.
The instrument is designed to be rotated through 90 degrees about its longitudinal axis so that the
angles in both horizontal and vertical planes are measured.
Autocollimator:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

It is an instrument designed to measure small angular deflections & maybe used in conjunction with a
plane mirror or other reflecting surface. An autocollimator is essentially an infinity telescope and a collimator
combined into one instrument. This is an optical instrument used for the measurement of small angular
differences. For small angular measurements, autocollimator provides a very sensitive and accurate approach.
The principle on which this instrument works is given below. O is a point source of light placed at the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

principal focus of a collimating lens. The rays of light from O, incident on the lens, travels as a parallel beam of
light. If this beam strikes a plane reflector which is normal to the optical axis, it will be reflected back along its
own path and refocused at the same point O. If the plane reflector be tilted through a small angle ?, then
parallel beam will be deflected through twice this angle, and will be brought to focus at O? in the same plane at
a distance x from O. Obviously.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OO?=x=2?.f, where f is the focal length of the lens.
Applications:
1. For aligning circular & flat surfaces in machining
2. Alignment of beams & columns in construction buildings / industries, steel structures
3. To measure the straightness, flatness and parallelism

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

60 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Procedure:
1. Make the distance of 100mm internal on the work piece.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Set the cross wire so that two cross will coincide.
3. Set the mirror so that the cross wire is visible.
4. Move the reflector on next 100mm mark and adjust it to see reflection of cross wire.
5. Take the reading of reflected crosswire deviated or moved up or down.
6. Measure the distance between two crosswire.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Formulae:
Tan ? = X / 100
X = (100 x Tan ?) x 1000 in microns
Where X = Level at position B with respect to position A
? = Angle/Deviation in degrees/ Seconds (1 Degree = 60 Minutes, 1 Minute = 60 Seconds).

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:

Sl.No.
Bridge Length

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(Base length of
the reflector)
Cumulative
Bridge length
(Position of the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

reflector)
Micrometer final
reading
(Autocollimator)
Deviation for

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

each 100mm
( ? in degrees)
1.
2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
The values are analyzed and necessary modification of the surface may be recommended based on the
accuracy required on flatness. If the values observed from the micrometer are varying linearly then

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

straightness/flatness can be judged.
Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the optical instruments for non-contact measurement
of angles.
Application:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Surface Roughness
2. Quality Department

61 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Straightness

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Define ? Tolerance straightness
3. What is flatness?
4. What is autocollimator?
5. What light rays used in autocollimator?
6. What is the use of autocollimator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. What is collimating lens?
8. What are the applications of autocollimator?
9. What is meant by target graticule?
10. What is objective lens?
11. What is beam splitter?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. What is the principle of autocollimator?
13. What are the advantages of autocollimator?
14. What are the limitations of autocollimator?
15. What are the types of measurement uncertainties of autocollimator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice
1 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING


ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

V SEMESTER - R 2013

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No. : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LABORATORY MANUAL
2 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


3 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DHANALAKSHMI


College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.


1. To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
2. To contribute to the promotion of Academic Excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

levels
3. To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

DEPARTMENT OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rendering the services to the global needs of engineering industries by educating students to become
professionally sound mechanical engineers of excellent caliber

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To produce mechanical engineering technocrats with a perfect knowledge intellectual and hands on
experience and to inculcate the spirit of moral values and ethics to serve the society

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MISSION
MISSION
VISION

VISION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To impart students with fundamental knowledge in mathematics and basic sciences that will mould
them to be successful professionals
2. Core competence
To provide students with sound knowledge in engineering and experimental skills to identify
complex software problems in industry and to develop a practical solution for them

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theory and practice which
enable them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and organization and to design
products requiring interdisciplinary skills
4. Professional skills

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To bestow students with adequate training and provide opportunities to work as team that will build
up their communication skills, individual, leadership and supportive qualities and to enable them to
adapt and to work in ever changing technologies
5. Life-long learning
To develop the ability of students to establish themselves as professionals in mechanical

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

engineering and to create awareness about the need for lifelong learning and pursuing advanced
degrees

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)
On completion of the B.E. (Mechanical) degree, the graduate will be able
a) To apply the basic knowledge of mathematics, science and engineering
b) To design and conduct experiments as well as to analyze and interpret data and apply the same in
the career or entrepreneurship

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

c) To design and develop innovative and creative software applications
d) To understand a complex real world problem and develop an efficient practical solution
e) To create, select and apply appropriate techniques, resources, modern engineering and IT tools
f) To understand the role as a professional and give the best to the society
g) To develop a system that will meet expected needs within realistic constraints such as economical

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

environmental, social, political, ethical, safety and sustainability
h) To communicate effectively and make others understand exactly what they are trying to tell in both
verbal and written forms
i) To work in a team as a team member or a leader and make unique contributions and work with
coordination

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

j) To engage in lifelong learning and exhibit their technical skills
k) To develop and manage projects in multidisciplinary environments

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To familiar with different measurement equipment?s and use of this industry for quality inspection
List of Experiments
1. Tool Maker?s Microscope

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Comparator
3. Sine Bar
4. Gear Tooth Vernier Caliper
5. Floating gauge Micrometer
6. Coordinate Measuring Machine

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Surface Finish Measuring Equipment
8. Vernier Height Gauge
9. Bore diameter measurement using telescope gauge
10. Bore diameter measurement using micrometer
11. Force Measurement

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. Torque Measurement
13. Temperature measurement
14. Autocollimator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Ability to handle different measurement tools and perform measurements in quality impulsion
2. Learnt the usage of precision measuring instruments and practiced to take measurements
3. Learnt and practiced to build the required dimensions using slip gauge
4. Able to measure the various dimensions of the given specimen using the tool maker?s microscope
5. Able to find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Able to measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare
7. Learnt to determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen using Gear tooth vernier
8. Able to measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two
wire method
9. Learnt to study the construction and operation of coordinate measuring machine

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. Learnt to determine the diameter of bore by using telescopic gauge and dial bore indicator
11. Able to measure the surface roughness using Talysurf instrument
12. Studied the characteristic between applied load and the output volt
13. Learnt the characteristics of developing torque and respective sensor output voltage
14. Studied the characteristics of thermocouple without compensation

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15. Able to check the straightness & flatness of the given component by using Autocollimator
16. Learnt to measure the displacement using LVDT and to calibrate it with the millimeter scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OBJECTIVES

COURSE OUTCOMES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

CONTENTS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl. No. Name of the Experiments Page No.
CYCLE ? 1 EXPERIMENTS
1
Precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab ? A Study
7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
To build up the slip gauge for given dimension ? A Study
16
3
Thread parameters measurement using Tool Makers Microscope

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

20
4
Calibration of dial gauge
23
5

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of taper angle by sine bar method
26
6
Determination of gear tooth thickness using gear tooth vernier
29

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7
Measurement of thread parameters using floating carriage micrometer
32
CYCLE ? 2 EXPERIMENTS
8

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement of various dimensions using Coordinate Measuring Machine
35
9
Measurement of surface roughness
39

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
Measurement of bores using dial bore indicator and telescopic gauge
42
11
Force measurement using load cell

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

46
12
Torque measurement using strain gauge
49
13

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Temperature measurement using thermocouple
53
14
Measurement of alignment using autocollimator
56

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ADDITIONAL EXPERIMENT BEYOND THE SYLLABUS
15
Thread parameters measurement using profile projector
60
16

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Displacement measurement ? linear variable differential transducer (LVDT)
62
PROJECT WORK
65

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.01 PRECISION MEASURING INSTRUMENT YSED IN
METROLOGY LAB ? A STUDY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Aim:
To study the following instruments and their usage for measuring dimensions of given specimen
1. Vernier caliper
2. Micrometer
3. Vernier height gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Depth micrometer
5. Universal bevel protractor
Apparatus required:
Surface plate, specimen and above instruments
Vernier caliper:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The principle of vernier caliper is to use the minor difference between the sizes two scales or divisions
for measurement. The difference between them can be utilized to enhance the accuracy of measurement. The
vernier caliper essentially consists of two steel rules, sliding along each other.
Parts:
Different parts of the vernier caliper are

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Beam ? It has main scale.
2. Fixed jaw
3. Sliding or Moving jaw ? It has vernier scale and sliding jaw locking screw.
4. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw knife
edges for internal measurement.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Stem or depth bar for depth measurement
Least count:
Least count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 VSD = 0.98 mm
Least count = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm

10 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ID

DEPTH

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OD
Measurement:
Given Vernier caliper can be used for external, internal depth, slot and step measurement.
Measurement principle:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

When both jaws contact each other scale shows the zero reading. The finer adjustment of movable jaw
can be done by the fine adjustment screw. First the whole movable jaw assembly is adjusted so that the two
measuring tips just touch the part to be measured. Then the fine adjustment clamp locking screw is tightened.
Final adjustment depending upon the sense of correct feel is made by the adjusting screw. After final
adjustment has been made sliding jaw locking screw is also tightened and the reading is noted.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

All the parts of the Vernier caliper are made of good quality steel and measuring faces are hardened.
Types of vernier:
Vernier caliper, electronic vernier caliper, vernier depth caliper

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:

Main scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

reading (MSR)
(mm)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

reading (VSR) (mm)
Total reading (MSR
+ VSR)
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OD


ID

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Depth


Vernier height gauge:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier height gauge is a sort of vernier caliper equipped with a special instrument suitable for height
measurement. It is always kept on the surface plate and the use of the surfaces plates as datum surfaces is
very essential.
Least count:
Least Count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm
1 VSD = 0.98 mm
Least Count (LC) = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm
Parts:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Base
2. Beam ? It has main scale.
3. Slider ? It has a vernier scale and slider locking screw.
4. Scriber
5. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Material:
All the parts of vernier are made of good quality steel and the measuring faces hardened.
Types of vernier gauge:
1. Analog vernier height gauge
2. Digital vernier height gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Electronic vernier height gauge
Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Main scale reading
(MSR)(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale reading
(VSR)(mm)
Total reading (MSR +

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSR)(mm)
1.
2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Outside micrometer:
The micrometer essentially consists of an accurate screw having about 10 or 20 threads per cm. The
end of the screw forms one measuring tip and other measuring tip is constituted by a stationary anvil in the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

base of the frame. The screw is threaded for certain length and is plain afterwards. The plain portion is called
spindle and its end is the measuring surface. The spindle is advanced or retracted by turning a thimble
connected to a spindle. The spindle is a slide fit over the barrel and barrel is the fixed part attached with the
frame. The barrel & thimble are graduated. The pitch of the screw threads is 0.5 mm.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count:
Least Count (LC) = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale
= 0.5 / 50 = 0.01 mm
Parts:
1. Frame

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Anvil
3. Spindle
4. Spindle lock
5. Barrel or outside sleeve
6. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.
The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.
14 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Measurement:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

It can be used for any external measurement.
Types of micrometer:
1. Outside micrometer, 2. Inside micrometer, 3.Depth micrometer, 4. Stick micrometer, 5. Screw thread
micrometer, 6. V ? anvil micrometer, 7. Blade type micrometer, 8. Dial micrometer, 9. Bench micrometer, 10.
Tape screw operated internal micrometer, 11. Groove micrometer, 12. Digital micrometer, 13.Differential screw

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

micrometer, 14.Adjustable range outside micrometer.
Ratchet stop mechanism:
The object of the ratchet stop is to ensure that same level of torque is applied on the spindle while
measuring and the sense of the feel of operator is eliminated and consistent readings are obtained. By
providing this arrangement, the ratchet stop is made slip off when the torque applied to rotate the spindle

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

exceeds the set torque. Thus this provision ensures the application of same amount of torque during the
measurement.
Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Pitch Scale Reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(PSR) (mm)
Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)
Head scale reading
(HSR x LC) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total Reading (PSR
+ HSR) (mm)
1.
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Depth micrometer:
Depth micrometer is a sort of micrometer which is mainly used for measuring depth of holes, so it is
named as depth micrometer.
Parts:
1. Shoulder

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Spindle
3. Spindle lock
4. Barrel or outside sleeve ? It has pitch scale.
5. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions.
6. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.
15 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


Least count:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least Count = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale = 0.50/50
= 0.01 mm
Measurements:
It can be used for measuring the depth of holes, slots and recessed areas. The pitch of the screw thread
is 0.5 mm. The least count is 0.01 mm. Shoulder acts as a reference surface and is held firmly and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

perpendicular to the centre line of the hole. For large range of measurement extension rods are used. In the
barrel the scale is calibrated. The accuracy again depends upon the sense of touch.
Procedure:
First, calculate the least count of the instrument. Check the zero error. Measure the specimen note
down the main scale reading or the head scale reading. Note down the vernier or head scale coincidence with

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

main or pitch scale divisions.
Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)
Head scale reading
(HSR x LC) (mm)
Total Reading (PSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

+ HSR) (mm)

1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.


16 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Universal bevel protractor:

Description:
Bevel protractor is an instrument for measuring the angle between the two faces of a specimen. It
consists of a base plate on which a circular scale is engraved. It is graduated in degrees. An adjustment plate

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

is attached to a circular plate containing the vernier scale. The adjustable blade can be locked in any position.
The circular plate has 360 division divided into four parts of 90 degrees each. The adjustable parts have 24
divisions of to the right and left sides of zero reading. These scales are used according to the position of the
specimen with respect to movable scale.
Procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Place the specimen whose taper is to be measured between the adjustable plate and movable
blade with one of its face parallel to the base.
2. Lock the adjustable plate in position and note down the main scale reading depending upon the
direction of rotation of adjustable plate in clockwise or anticlockwise.
3. Note the VSC to the right of zero.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Multiply the VSC with the least count and add to MSR to obtain the actual reading.
Least count:
Least Count = 2 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

24 VSD = 46
o
=> 1 VSD = 23/12
LC = 2 ? 23/12 = 1/12
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= 5? (five minutes)



17 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Main scale reading
(MSR) (deg)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale reading
(VSR) (deg)
Total reading (MSR +

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSR)
(deg)
1.
2.
The angle of scriber of the vernier height gauge =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Thus the various precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab are studied and the specimen
dimensions are recorded.
Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for linear, angular,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

roundness and roughness measurements they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring
instrument according to a specific requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).
Application:
1. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Metrology
2. Define ? Inspection
3. What are the needs of inspection in industries?
4. What are the various methods involving the measurement?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Define ? Precision
6. Define ? Accuracy
7. Define ? Calibration
8. Define ? Repeatability
9. Define ? Magnification

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. Define ? Error
11. Define ? Systematic Error
12. Define ? Random Error
13. Define ? Parallax Error
14. Define ? Environmental Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15. Define ? Cosine Error
Viva-voce

18 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.02 BUILD UP THE SLIP GAUGE FOR GIVEN DIMENSION
? A STUDY
Aim:
To build up the slip gauge for given dimension
Apparatus required:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Slip gauges set
2. Surface plate
3. Soft cloth
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
Slip gauge are universally accepted standard of length in industry. They are the working standard for
linear dimension. These were invented by a Swedish Engineer, C.E. Johansson. They are used
1. For direct precise measurement where the accuracy of the workpiece demand it.
2. For use with high- magnification comparators to establish the size of the gauge blocks in general

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

use.
3. Gauge blocks are also used for many other purposes such as checking the accuracy of measuring
instrument or setting up a comparator to a specific dimension, enabling a batch of component to be
quickly and accurately checked or indeed in any situation where there is need to refer to standard of
known length these blocks are rectangular.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

19 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Most gauge blocks are produced from high grade steel, hardened and established by a heat treatment
process to give a high degree of dimensional stability. Gauge blocks are also manufactured from tungsten
carbide which is an extremely hard and wear resistant material. The measuring faces have a lapped finish.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The faces are perfectly flat and parallel to one another with a high degree of accuracy. Each block has an
extremely high dimensional accuracy at 20
o
C.
These slip gauge are available in variety of selected sets both in inch units and metric units. Letter ?E? is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

used for inch units and ?M? is used for metric standard number of pieces in a set following the letter E or M. For
example EBI refers to a set whose blocks are in metric units and are 83 in number. Each block dimensions is
printed on anyone of its face itself the size of any required standard being made up by combining the
appropriate number of these different size blocks.
If two gauges are slid and twisted together under pressure they will firmly join together. This process,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

known as wringing, is very useful because it enables several gauge blocks to be assembled together to
produce a required size. In fact the success of precision measurement by slip gauges depends on the
phenomenon of wringing.
First the gauge is oscillated slightly with very light pressure over other gauge so as to detect pressure at
any foreign particles between the surfaces. One gauge is placed perpendicular to other using standard

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

gauging pressure and rotary motion is applied until the blocks are lined up.
Procedure:
1. Build the given dimension by wringing minimum number of slip gauges.
2. Note the given dimension and choose the minimum possible slip gauge available in the set so as to
accommodate the last decimal value. The minimum slip gauge value dimension available i.e., 1.12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

mm must be chosen followed by 1.5 mm thick gauge block.
3. Follow the above steps to build up the slip gauge of any dimension.
Precautions:
1. Slip gauges should be handled very carefully placed gently and should never be dropped.
2. Whenever a slip gauge is being removed from the set, its dimensions are noted and must be

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

replaced into the set at its appropriate place only.
3. Correct procedure must be followed in wringing and also in removing the gauge blocks.
4. They should be cleaned well before use and petroleum jelly is applied after use.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

20 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:
Range (mm) Increment (mm) No. of pieces

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total = ____________ Pieces

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total length of slip gauge = ________ mm
Given diameter Slip gauges used Obtained dimensions

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Slip gauge set is studied and the given dimensions are building up by wringing minimum number of slip
gauges.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Students will be able to select proper measuring instrument and know requirement of calibration, errors
in measurement etc. They can perform accurate measurements.
Application:
1. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Why C.I. is preferred material for surface plates and tables?
2. Why V ? blocks are generally manufactured in pairs?
3. Why micrometer is required to be tested for accuracy?
4. Define ? Linear Measurement

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. List the linear measuring instrument according to their accuracy.
6. Define ? Least Count
7. What are the uses of vernier depth gauge?
8. What are the uses of feeler gauges?
9. What are the uses of straight edge?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. What are the uses of angle plate?
11. What are the uses of V ? block?
12. What are the uses of combination square?
13. What precautions should be taken while using slip gauges?
14. What is wringing?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15. Why the slip gauges are termed as ?End standard?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

22 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


Expt.No.03 THREAD PARAMETERS MEASUREMENT USING
TOOL MAKERS MICROSCOPE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Aim:
To study the tool makers microscope and in the process measure the various dimensions of the given
specimen
Apparatus required:
1. Tool makers microscope

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Specimen
Diagram:

Description:
The tool maker?s microscope is designed for measurement of parts of complex forms; for example,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

profile of a tool having external threads. It can also be used for measuring centre to centre distance of the
holes in any plane as well as the coordinates of the outline of a complex template gauge, using the
coordinates measuring system.
23 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Basically it consists of an optical head which can be adjusted vertically along the ways of supporting
column. The optical head can be clamped at any position by a screw. On the work table (which as a circular
base in which there are graduations) the part to be inspected is placed. The table has a compound slide by
means of which the part can be measured. For giving these two movements, there are two micrometer screws
having thimble scales and verniers. At the back of the base light source is arranged that provides horizontal

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

beam of light, reflected from a mirror by 90 degrees upwards towards the table. The beam of light passes
through the transparent glass plate on which flat plates can be checked are placed. Observations are made
through the eyepiece of the optical head.
Procedure:
1. Place the given specimen on the work table and switch on all the three light sources and adjust the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

intensity of the light source until a clean image of the cross wires and specimen are seen through
the eyepiece.
2. Coincide one of the two extreme edges between which the measurement has to be taken with
vertical or horizontal cross wires and depending upon the other image coincide with the same cross
wires by moving the above device. Note the reading.The difference between the two readings gives

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the value of the required measurement.
3. Note the experiment specimen and the readings.
4. Tabulate the different measurements measured from the specimen.
Determination of thread parameters
Magnification =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

S.No. Parameters
Magnified value
(mm)
Actual value
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Outer diameter (O.D)

2. Internal diameter (I.D)

3. Pitch

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Flank angle


Result:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Included angle of the tool was measured using tool maker?s microscope and various dimensions of the
given specimen are measured.


24 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the various parameters of thread and select proper measuring
instrument and know requirement of calibration, errors in measurement etc. They can perform accurate
measurements.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Machine Shop
2. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by tool maker?s microscope?
2. What is the light used in tool maker?s microscope?
3. What are the various characteristics that you would measure in a screw thread?
4. What are the instruments that are required for measuring screw thread?
5. Define ? Pitch

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. What are the causes of pitch error?
7. Define ? Flank
8. What are the effects of flank angle error?
9. What is progressive error?
10. What is periodic error?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. What is drunken error?
12. What is erratic error?
13. What are the applications of tool maker?s microscope?
14. What are the limitations of tool maker?s microscope?
15. What are the advantages of tool maker?s microscope?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

25 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.04 CALIBRATION OF DIAL GAUGE USING SLIP GAUGE
Aim:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge
Apparatus required:
Dial gauge, magnetic stand, slip gauge, and surface plate
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
The dial test indicator is a precision measuring instrument which can convert linear motion into angular
motion by means of transmission mechanics of rack and pinion and can be used to measure linear vibration
and errors of shape.
This instrument has the features such as good appearance, compact size, light weight, high precision,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

reasonable construction, constant measuring face etc. Rigidity of all parts is excellent. Probe is tipped with
carbide balls. A shock proof mechanism is provided for those with larger measuring range.

26 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Types of dial indicator:
1. Plunger type
2. Lever type
Plunger type dial indicator has a resolution counter and each division in main scale is 0.01 mm. In lever
type dial test indicator is replaced by ball type stylus.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. Fix the dial gauge to the stand rigidly and place the stand on the surface plate.
2. Set the plunger of dial gauge to first touch the upper surface of standard slip gauge and set indicator
to zero.
3. Raise then the plunger by pulling the screw above the dial scale.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Place the standard slip gauge underneath the plunger.
5. Release the plunger and let it to touch the standard slip gauge.
6. Note the reading on the dial scale.
Formulae:
The standard error of dial gauge is calculated by the formula

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
S.No.
Slip gauge reading ?x?
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Dial gauge reading
(mm)
(x? - x)
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x? (x? - x)
1.
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Thus the accuracy and standard error of dial gauge is found. The standard error of given dial gauge is
__________.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

27 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Outcome:
Students will be able to check the variation in tolerance during the inspection process of a
machined part, measure the deflection of a beam or ring under laboratory conditions, as well as many

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

other situations where a small measurement needs to be registered or indicated
Application:
1. Milling Machine
2. Analog versus digital/electronic readout

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is comparator?
2. What are the types of comparators?
3. What is the LC for comparators?
4. What are the applications of comparator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. What is meant by plunger?
6. What are the types of dial indicators?
7. Why a revolution counter is not provided in lever type dial test indicator?
8. Draw a line diagram of the operating mechanism of plunger type dial test indicator.
9. Explain the term magnification of a dial indicator.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. What are the uses of dial test indicator?
11. What are the practical applications of dial test indicator?
12. What precautions should be taken while using dial test indicator?
13. What are the desirable qualities of a dial test indicator?
14. What are the advantages of dial test indicator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15. What are the limitations of dial test indicator?
16. Distinguish between comparator and measuring instrument.
17. What are the advantages of electrical comparator?
18. What are the advantages of optical comparator?
19. What are the uses of comparator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

20. What are the advantages and disadvantages of mechanical comparator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

28 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.05 DETERMINATION OF TAPER ANGLE BY SINE BAR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

METHOD
Aim:
To measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare
Apparatus required:
Sine bar, slip gauges, dial gauge with stand, micrometer, surface plate, bevel protractor, vernier caliper

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diagram:

Description:
The sine bar principle uses the ratio of the length of two sides of a right triangle. It may be noted that
devices operating on sine principle are capable of ?self-generation?. The measurement is restricted to 45

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
from
accuracy point of view. Sine bar itself is not a measuring instrument.
Accuracy requirements of sine bar:
1. The axes of the rollers must be parallel to each other and the centre distance L must be precisely

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

known.
2. The sine bar must be flat and parallel to the plane connecting the axes of the rollers.
3. The rollers must be of identical diameters and must have within a close tolerance.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

29 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Procedure:
1. Fix the dial gaugeon the magnetic stand and place the magnetic stand on the surface plate.Check
the parallelism of the sine bar.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Place the given specimen above the sine bar and place the dial gauge on top of the specimen.
Adjustthe dial gauge for zero deflection.
3. Raise the front end of the sine bar with slip gauges until the work surface is parallel to the datum
surface.
4. Check the parallelism using dial gauge.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Measure the distance between the centres of the sine bar rollers as ?L? and note the height of the
slip gauge as ?H?.
6. Note the included angle of the specimen.
Formulae:
Sin ? = H/L where ? = Included angle of the specimen

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

H = Height of slip gauges
L = Distance between the centre of rollers
Tabulation:
S.No. L (mm) H (mm) Taper angle ( ?)
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.
3.

Result:
The taper angle of the given specimen using sine bar was found to be =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for angular measurements
and they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a specific
requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Flat Surface
2. Granite

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

30 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. List out the various angle measuring instruments.
2. What is the working principles sine bar?
3. How is a sine bar used to measure the angle?
4. What is the application of sine bar?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. What is the material of sine bar?
6. Why sine bar is not preferred to use for measuring angles more than 45
0
?
7. What are the features of sine bar?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. A 100 mm sine bar is to be set up to an angle of 33
0
, determine the slip gauges needed from 87
pieces set.
9. What are the various instruments used for measuring angles?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. What is sine bar?
11. How sine bar is used for angle measurement?
12. Explain how sine bar is used to measure angle of small size component.
13. Explain how sine bar is used to measure angle of large size component.
14. What are the various types of sine bar?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15. What are the limitations of sine bar?
16. What is sine center?
17. What is sine table?
18. What are the possible sources of errors in angular measurement by sine bar?
19. What are angle gauges?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

20. How angle gauges are used for measuring angles?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

31 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.06 DETERMINATION OF GEAR TOOTH THICKNESS
USING GEAR TOOTH VERNIER
Aim:
To determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen and to draw the graph between the tooth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

number and the error in thickness
Apparatus required:
Gear tooth vernier, specimen, surface plate and vernier caliper
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
The tooth thickness, in general, is measured at pitch circle since gear tooth thickness varies from the tip
to the base circle of the tooth. This is possible only when there is an arrangement to fix that position for this
measurement by the gear tooth vernier. It has two vernier scales; one is vertical and other is horizontal.
Procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

32 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

1. Measure initially the outside diameter of the given gear specimen by means of a vertical calculation
of vernier caliper. Note the number of teeth. Calculate the module (m) using the formula.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M = OD/ (Z+2) where z ? number of teeth
M - Module
2. Calculate the theoretical tooth thickness (t) by t = z * m* sin (90/z).
3. Set the vernier scale for the height and tighten.
4. Measure the thickness of each tooth using the horizontal scale. This is measured thickness. It can

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

be positive or negative.
H = m x [1+ Z/2 (1- Cos 90/Z)]
5. Calculate the error in the tooth thickness i.e,1. measured thickness ? Theoretical thickness
6. Draw the graph between the tooth number and the error in thickness.
Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tooth
Number
Measured Thickness
(mm)
Theoretical Thickness (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Error in tooth thickness
(mm)
1
2
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tooth
Number
MSR
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSC

VSR
(mm)
TR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
1
2
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Graph:


Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tooth No.
33 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
The theoretical experiment value of gear tooth thickness is obtained and graph is drawn between error
and tooth number in tooth thickness
Theoretical tooth thickness =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Experimental tooth thickness =
Error in tooth thickness =
Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the basic measurement units and able to calibrate various
measuring parameters of the gear.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Gear Component
2. Mining

1. Calculate the setting of a gear tooth vernier caliper for a straight spur gear having 40 teeth and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

module 4.
2. What is the importance of chordal depth?
3. Define ? Chordal width
4. How is the actual profile of the gear tooth determined?
5. What are the manufacturing errors in gear element?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Define ? Addendum
7. Define ? Dedendum
8. Define ? Flank of tooth
9. Define ? Pitch
10. Define ? Pitch Circle

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. Define ? Crest of tooth
12. Define ? Root of tooth
13. Define ? Base Circle
14. Define ? Module
15. Define ? Angle of Obliquity

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

34 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.07 MEASUREMENT OF THREAD PARAMETER USING
FLOATING CARRIAGE MICROMETER
Aim:
To measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two wire

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

method
Apparatus required:
1. Floating carriage micrometer
2. Standard wire
3. Given specimen (screw thread)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diagram:

Description of floating carriage micrometer:
It consists of three main units. A base casting carries a pair of centres on which threaded work piece is
to be mounted. Another carriage capable of moving towards centre is mounted exactly above. In this carriage

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

one head with thimble to measure up to 0.002 mm is provided and at the other side of head a fiducial indicator
is provided to indicate zero position.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

35 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Procedure:
1. For two wire method, place the standard wire over a thread of the screw at opposite sides.
2. For three wire method, place two standard wires on two successive threads and the third wire

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

placed opposite sides of the thread.
3. Measure the diameter over wires (M) using floating carriage micrometer.
4. Repeat this procedure at various positions of the screw and take different readings.
Formulae:
1. For best wire size, d = P / 2 Cos (x/2)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Where, P = Pitch
d= wire size
x = angle between two threads
= 60
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

for metric thread
2. Actual effective diameter, E.A = M ? 3d + 0.866 p
3. Nominal effective diameter, EN = D ? 0.648 p
4. Max. wire size = 1.01 p
5. Min. wire size = 0.505 p

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Best wire size = 0.577 p
M = Diameter over wires
P = Pitch of thread
For metric thread:
Actual effective diameter (EA) = M ? 3d + 0.866 p

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Where d = actual diameter of wire
Determination of actual and nominal effective diameter of the screw thread:
Sl.No.
Nominal
Diameter (D)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
Diameter over
wire ?M?
(mm)
Actual eff.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diameter E.A
(mm)
Nominal eff.
Diameter E.N
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Error in effective
diameter
(E.A ? E.N)
(mm)
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

36 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Result:
Thus the actual and nominal effective diameter is measured using three wire method and the error in
effective diameter of screw is determined.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for roundness
measurements and they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a
specific requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).
Application:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Wholse
2. Maxxis Rubber India

1. Define ? Pitch
2. Define ? Flank Angle

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. What is plug gauge?
4. What is meant by micrometer?
5. What is meant by indicator?
6. What is best ? size wire?
7. Calculate the diameter of the best wire for an M 20 x 25 screws.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. What are the different corrections to be applied in the measurement of effective diameter by the
method of wire?
9. What is floating carriage micrometer?
10. What are the uses of floating carriage micrometer?
11. What are the methods are used for measuring effective diameter?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. Define ? Effective Diameter
13. Define ? Major Diameter
14. Define ? Minor Diameter
15. What are the effects of flank error?
16. Define ? Rake Angle

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17. Define ? Pitch Cylinder
18. What are the effects of pitch error?
19. Define ? Pitch Diameter
20. What is meant by angle of thread?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

37 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.08 MEASUREMENT OF VARIOUS DIMENSIONS USING
COORDINATE MEASURING MACHINE
Aim:
1. To study the construction and operation of coordinate measuring machine
2. To measure the specified dimensions of the given component

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Instruments used:
Coordinate measuring machine, vernier calipers
Diagram:

Theory:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

A coordinate measuring machine (CMM) is a 3D device for measuring the physical and geometrical
characteristics of an object. This machine may be manually controlled by an operator or it may be computer
controlled. Measurements are defined by a probe attached to the three moving axis of this machine X, Y and Z
axes. A coordinate measuring machine (CMM) is also a device used in manufacturing and assembly
processes to test a part or assembly against the design intent. By precisely recording the X, Y and Z

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

coordinates of the target, points are generated which can be analyzed via regression algorithms for the
construction of features. These points are collected by using a probe that is positioned manually by an
38 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

operator or automatically via direct computer control (DCC). DCC CMMs can be programmed to repeatedly

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measure identical parts, thus a CMM is a specialized form of industrial robot.
Parts:
Coordinate measuring machine include three main components:
1. The main structures which include three axes of motion.
2. Probing system

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Data collection and reduction system ? typically includes a machine controller, desktop computer
and application software
Machine description:
1. In modern machines, the gantry type superstructure has two legs and is often called a bridge. This
moves freely along the granite table with one leg following a guide rail attached to one side of the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

granite table. The opposite leg simply rests on the granite table following the vertical surface
contour.
2. Air bearings are fixed for ensuring friction free travel. Compressed air is forced through a series of
very small holes in a flat bearing surface to provide a smooth but controlled air cushion on which the
CMM can move in a frictionless manner.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. The movement of the bridge along the granite table forms one axis of the XY plane. The bridge of
the gantry contains a carriage which traverses between the inside and outside legs and forms the
other X or Y horizontal axis.
4. The third axis of movement (Z axis) is provided by the addition of a vertical quill or spindle which
moves up and down through the center of the carriage. The touch probe forms the sensing device

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

on the end of the quill.
5. The movement of the X, Y and Z axes fully describes the measuring envelope. Some touch probes
are themselves powered rotary devices with the probe tip able to swivel vertically through 90
degrees and through a full 360 degrees rotation.
Uses:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

They are generally used for:
1. Dimensional measurement
2. Profile measurement
3. Angularity or orientation measurement
4. Depth mapping

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Digitizing mapping
6. Shaft measurement
39 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

The machines are available in a wide range of sizes and designs with a variety of different probe

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

technologies. They can be operated manually or automatically through direct computer control (DCC). They
are offered in various configurations such as bench top, free ? standing, handheld and portable.
Procedure:
1. Take at least 8 points on sphere ball attached to the granite table.
2. Fix the object whose dimension needs to be measured using the jigs and fixtures.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Using joystick, move the probe whose tip is made of ruby slowly and carefully to the surface whose
measurements have to be taken.
4. Touch the probe at two places for measurement of a line (starting and ending point).
5. Touch the probe at two places for measurement of a circular profile and for a cylinder touch the
probe at 8 points.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Measure the same profiles again with vernier calipers (length of line, circle diameter, cylinder
diameter) to compare the two readings.
Comments:
1. The machine should be calibrated every time when it is being used.
2. While measuring the profiles, the probe should be moved very slowly as it may damage the ruby if

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

hit with a high force.
3. Care should be taken while performing experiment so that the granite table of the machines should
get any scratches.
4. ?Retract distance? should be fixed according to the space available in the near vicinity of the profile
measurement area.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Observation:
Sl.No. Feature
CMM reading
(mm)
Vernier reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
Form error
(mm)
Difference in two
readings (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 Circle -1
2 Circle -2
3 Circle -3
4 Line
5 Arc

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6
Cone - Diameter
Cone ? Vertex angle
Cone ? Height
7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Cylinder ? Diameter
Cylinder ? Height


40 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Thus the different profile of given object are measured using coordinate measuring machine
Outcome:
Students will be able to measures the geometry of physical objects by sensing discrete points on the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

surface of the object with a probe and they will be able to know the Various types of probes are used in CMMs,
including mechanical, optical, laser, and white light.
Application:
1. Surface Measuring Equipment
2. Photo transistor

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What are the types of measuring machine?
2. What is CMM?
3. What are the types of CMM?
4. What are the advantages of CMM?
5. What are the limitations of CMM?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. What are the possible sources of error in CMM?
7. What is the use of universal measuring machine?
8. What are the applications of CMM?
9. What is the working principle of three axis measuring machine?
10. What is image shearing microscope?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. What is the use of electronic inspection and measuring machine?
12. What are the types of electronic inspection and measuring machine?
13. What is CMM probe?
14. What are the three main probes are available?
15. What are the types of stylus?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

41 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.09 MEASUREMENT OF SURFACE ROUGHNESS UING
TALYSURF INSTRUMENT

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Aim:
To measure the surface roughness using Talysurf instrument
Apparatus required:
Talysurf instrument, work piece, surface plate
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Theory:
On any finished surface, imperfections are bound to be there and these take the form of a succession of
hills and valleys which vary both in height and in spacing and result in a kind of texture which in appearance or
feel is often characteristic of the machining process and accompanying defects. The several kinds of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

departures are there on the surface and these are due to various causes.

42 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Methods of measuring surface roughness:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Surface inspection of comparison methods
2. Direct instrument measurements
In comparative methods the surface texture is assessed by observation of the surface. But these
methods are not reliable as they can be misleading, if comparison is not made with surfaces produced by
same techniques. The various methods available under comparison method are: (i) Touch Inspection

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(ii)Scratch Inspection (iii) Microscopic Inspection (iv) Visual Inspection (v) Surface Photographs (vi) Reflected
Light Intensity Direct Instrument Measurements enable to determine a numerical value of the surface finish of
any surface. Nearly all instruments used are stylus probe type of instruments. This operates on electrical
principle.
Procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Place the finished component on the surface plate.
2. Fix the Talysurf tester to the vernier height gauge using adopter at a convenient height.
3. Make sure that the stylus probe touches the work piece.
4. Fix the sampling length in the tester.
5. Press the power button so that the probe moves on the surface to and fro.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Take the readings of the surface roughness directly from the instrument.
7. Repeat the above process for the remaining specimen and tabulate the readings.
Precautions:
1. The surface to be tested should be cleaned properly.
2. The tester should be fixed to the height gauge properly so that the movement of the probe is exactly

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

parallel to the surface of work.
3. Make sure that the probe gently touches the work.
Tabulation:
S.No
Measurement roughness value,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?m
Sample direction Ra, Rz
Average Ra Average Rz Grade
1.
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

43 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Result:
Thus the surface roughness is checked for different specimens by Talysurf.
Outcome:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for roughness
measurements they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a specific
requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).
Application:
1. Machine Shop

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Quality Department


1. Define ? Actual Size?
2. What is meant by normal surface?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. What is meant by profilo-graph?
4. What is Tomlinson surface meter?
5. What is meant by profile?
6. What are the factors affecting surface roughness?
7. Why the surface texture is control?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Define ? Lay
9. Define ? Surface Texture
10. Define ? Flaws
11. What is sampling length?
12. What are the methods used for evaluating surface finish?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. What is form factor?
14. What are the methods used for measuring surface finish?
15. How will you differentiate smooth surface from flat surface?
16. How surface finish is designated on drawings?
17. Define ? Primary Texture

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

18. Define ? Secondary Texture
19. What are the types of instrument used for measuring surface texture?
20. Define ? waviness

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

44 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.10 MEASUREMENT OF BORE USING DIAL BORE
INDICATOR AND TELESCOPIC GAUGE
Aim:
To determine the diameter of bore by using telescopic gauge and checking the same by using dial bore
indicator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Apparatus required:
Work piece, vernier caliper, telescopic gauge and dial gauge indicator set with anvil.
Diagram:

45 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
Bore gauge measurement:
1. Select the extension rod and washer according to the bore diameter to be measured

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Fix the suitable extension rod and washer with the bore gauge
3. Fix the dial gauge to the bore gauge in its position
4. Insert the bore gauge inside the bore to be measured and hold the gauge in parallel o the axis of the
bore. Ensure that the tips on either side of the bore gauge are in touch with inner wall of the bore
5. Note down the reading in the dial gauge and withdraw the bore gauge from the bore

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Hold the measuring tips of bore gauge between the spindle and anvil of a micrometer and compress
the tips by rotating the thimble till the reading reaches the same one as noted earlier
7. Observe and record the micrometer reading as the bore diameter to be measured
Telescopic gauge measurement:
1. Select the telescopic gauge according to the bore diameter to be measured

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Press the telescopic spindles in the telescopic gauge lock them by locking screw
3. Insert the telescopic gauge inside thee bore to be measured. Release the locking screw to expand
the telescopic spindles outwards inside the bore
4. Hold the telescopic gauge in parallel to the axis of bore axis and ensure that the tips of telescopic
spindles are in touch with the inner wall of the bore

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Lock the telescopic spindles and withdraw it from the bore
46 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

6. Measure the expanded length of the telescopic spindles using micrometer record them as the inner
diameter of the bore

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Practical observations:
Rough measurement of bore using Telescopic gauge:
Least count of micrometer = 0.01 mm
Sl.No.
Micrometer reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total reading
(MSR + TSC * LC) ( mm) Main scale reading (MSR)
(mm)
Thimble scale
coincidence

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
2.

Average reading = ________ mm
Accurate measuring using Bore gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
Micrometer
reading
(d) (mm)
Bore gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

reading
(R1) (mm)
Work piece reading
(R2) (mm)
Final reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d+ (R1 ? R2) * 0.01
(mm)
1.
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Accurate internal diameter of hole using bore gauge = ______ mm

Result
1. Internal diameter of the work piece by using telescopic gauge is ________mm
2. Diameter obtained by using dial gauge indicator is __________________mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Students will be able to measure a bore's size, by transferring the internal dimension to a remote
measuring tool (Telescopic gauge).
Application:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Automobile
2. Quality Department


47 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by bore diameter?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. What is gauge?
3. What is meant by measurement?
4. What is telescope gauge?
5. What is bore gauge?
6. What is contact point?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. What is the principle of bore gauge?
8. What are the applications of telescopic gauge?
9. What types of materials are used in telescopic gauge?
10. What are the types of instrument used to measure bore diameter?
11. What are the applications of bore gauge?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. What are the advantages of bore gauge over telescopic gauge?
13. What are the limitations of bore gauge?
14. What is the working principle of telescopic gauge?
15. What are the disadvantages of telescopic gauge?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

48 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.11 MEASUREMENT OF FORCE USING LOAD CELL
Aim:
To study the characteristic between applied load and the output voltage
Apparatus required:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Trainer kit
2. Multimeter
3. Load cell sensor with setup
4. Weights (5 kg)
5. Power chord

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diagram:

Formulae:
Error (%) = {Applied Voltage ? (Displayed Load)/ Applied Load)} x 100
Block diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Applied DC
Load O/P

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DC Excitation source Transducer
Transducer
Instrumentation
Amplifier

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Gain Amplifier DVM
49 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Interfacing and calibration procedure:
1. Interface the load cell 9 pin ?D? type male connector to 9 pin D type female connector, fixed on the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

module.
2. First unload the beam and nullify the display by using zero adjustment POT
3. Apply the maximum load of 5 kg to the beam and adjust the display to 5 kg by using gain
adjustment POT.
4. After the initial adjustment, the unit should not be disturbed until the completion of the experiment.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Safety precaution:
1. During offset adjustment, the beam should not be loaded.
2. The beam should not be disturbed during the experiment.
3. Remove the load from the beam, after completion of the experiment; otherwise wire wound on the
strain gauge will get damaged.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. If you are getting an unsatisfactory reading, then vary the zero and span POT minimum to
maximum.
5. Maximum load should not exceed 5 kg.
6. Once calibrated, the setting should not be distributed till the end of the experiment.
Procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Install the load cell module and interface the 9 pin D connector with kit.
2. Connect the multimeter in volt mode across T5 and GND for the output voltage measurement.
3. Switch on the module.
4. Initially, unload the beam and nullify the display by using zero adjustment POT (zero calibration).
5. Apply the maximum load of 5 kg to the beam and adjust the display to 5 kg by using gain

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

adjustment POT (gain calibration).
6. Now apply the load to the beam, a force will develop on the beam and measure the output voltage
(V) across T5 and GND.
7. Gradually increase the load and note down the output voltage (V) and applied load.
8. Tabulate the values of displayed load and applied voltage.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. Plot a graph between applied load and output voltage (V).
Note: When 1 kg load is applied to the beam, the displayed voltage is 1 kg.


50 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Applied load
(kg)
Output voltage

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(V)
Displayed load
(kg)
% Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Graph:
1. Applied load (kg) Vs Output Voltage (V)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Actual load (kg) Vs % Error
Result:
Thus the characteristic between applied load and the output voltage was studied.
Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the Sensor device (electro-mechanical) which help us to measure

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

a physical parameter (such as temperature, pressure, force, acceleration etc.) by providing analog input to get
digital output.
Application:
1. Machine Shop
2. Automobile

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by force?
2. Define ? Wheat stone bridge circuit
3. Define ? Load

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. What is meant by deflector?
5. What is meant by force indicator?
6. Define ? Instrumentation
7. How instrumentations are classified?
8. Define ? Transducer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. What is electrical transducer?
10. How transducers are classified?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

51 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.12 MEASUREMENT OF TORQUE USING STRAIN

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

GAUGE
Aim:
To study the characteristics of the developing torque and the signal conditioned sensor output voltage
Apparatus required:
1. Trainer kit

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Digital Multimeter (V)
3. Torque sensor setup
4. Weights (100 gram x 10 Nos.)
5. Power chord
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Interfacing and calibration procedure:
1. Interface the torque sensor 9 pin. ?D? type male connector to ?9? pin ?D? type female connector, fixed
on the module.
2. First, unload the beam and nullify the display by using zero adjustment POT.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Apply the maximum load of 1 kg to the beam and adjust the display to 9.81 Nm by using adjustment
POT.
4. After this initial calibration, the unit should not be disturbed until the completion of the experiment.
52 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Safety precaution:
1. During offset adjustment, the beam should not be loaded.
2. The beam should not be disturbed during the experiment.
3. Remove the beam from the shaft, after completion of the experiment otherwise wire wound on the
strain gauge will get damaged.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. If the displayed torque reading are in negative, change the beam connections in opposite to
previously connected direction.
5. If you are getting an unsatisfactory reading, then vary the zero and span POT minimum to
maximum.
6. Maximum load should not exceed 1 kg.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Once calibrated, the setting should not be disturbed till the end of this experiment.
Procedure:
1. Install the torque sensor setup and interface with kit.
2. Switch ?ON? the module.
3. Connect the Multimeter in millivolts mode T2 and T3 for bridge output voltage measurement POT.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. First, unload the beam and nullify the bridge output voltage by using zero adjustment POT.
5. By applying load to the beam, torque will develop on the shaft and measure the bridge output
voltage (mV) across T2 and T3
6. Gradually increase the force by applying load and note down the bridge output voltage (mV).
7. Tabulate the readings and plot a graph between developed torque versus bridge output voltage

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mV).
Formulae:
Error (%) = {(Actual Torque ? Theoretical Torque)/ Theoretical Torque} x 100
Theoretical Torque = mass (m) x acceleration due to gravity (g) x radial distance
= 1 kg x 9.81 m/s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
x 1 m
= 9.81 Nm
Tabulation:
Sl.No. Theoretical Torque

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(Nm)
Bridge output voltage
(mV)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Model graph:
The graph between developed torque and bridge output voltage is drawn
53 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Developed torque (Nm) Vs Output Voltage (V)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sample reading:
Developed Torque (Nm) = 9.81 Nm
Output Voltage (V) = 5 mV

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Thus the characteristics of the torque developed which is due to force applied to beam and the bridge
output voltage were studied and graph is plotted.
Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the Sensor device (electro-mechanical) which helps us to

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measure the strain by providing analog input to digital output.
Application:
1. Machine Shop
2. Turbine

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

54 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Torque
2. Define ? Twist

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. What are the methods used for measuring torque?
4. Define ? Strain Gauge
5. What is prony brake?
6. What are the modern devices used for measuring torque?
7. What are the elements of strain gauge?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. What is the use of slip ring for measuring torque?
9. What is slip ring?
10. What are the types of torque?
11. What are the types of dynamometer?
12. What are the applications of dynamometer?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. What are the features of dynamometer?
14. What is gauge factor?
15. What are the types of torque measurement?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

55 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.13 MEASUREMENT OF TEMPERATURE USING
THERMOCOUPLE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Aim:
To study the characteristics of thermocouple without compensation
Apparatus required:
1. Trainer kit
2. Thermocouple

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Water bath
4. Thermometer
5. Digital multi meter
6. Power chord
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. Connect the two terminals of the thermocouple across T1 & T2.
2. Position the switch ?SW1? towards ?NO?.
3. Switch ?ON? the unit and note the displayed temperature.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. If there is any difference in displayed temperature at room temperature, adjust the offset knob ?zero?
to set 0
o
C in display.
5. Place the Multimeter across T7 and T8.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Insert the thermocouple and thermometer into water bath.
7. Switch ?ON? the water bath.
8. Note the actual temperature in thermometer and displayed temperature simultaneously.
9. Tabulate the reading and calculate % error using the above formula
56 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. Plot the graph actual temperature Vs % error
Formulae:
Error (%) = {(Displayed Temperature ? Actual Temp)/ Actual Temp} x 100

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Actual Temperature
(
o
C)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Displayed Temperature
(
o
C)
% Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Graph
Temperature Vs % Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Thus the characteristics of the thermocouple without compensation were studied and graph is plotted.
Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the Sensor device (electro-mechanical) which help us to measure
a physical parameter (such as temperature) by providing analog input.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Thermocouple
2. Heat generation

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

57 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by total radiation pyrometer?
2. How the mercury in glass thermometer worked?
3. What are the sources of error in thermocouple?
4. Define ? Resistance

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Define ? Temperature detector
6. Define ? Temperature
7. What are the types of instrument used for measuring temperature?
8. What are the types of electrical temperature sensors?
9. What is optical sensor?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. What are the applications of liquid in gas thermometer?
11. What are the applications of bimetallic thermometer?
12. What is vapour pressure thermometer?
13. What is thermocouple?
14. What are the types of metal are used in combination to form thermocouples?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15. What are the advantages of thermocouple?
16. What are the disadvantages of thermocouple?
17. Define ? Resistance Thermometer
18. Define ? Thermistor
19. What is the use radiation pyrometer?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

20. What are the advantages of optical pyrometer?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

58 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.14 MEASUREMENT OF ALIGNMENT USING
AUTOCOLLIMATOR
Aim:
To check the straightness & flatness of the given component by using Autocollimator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Apparatus required:
Autocollimator, work piece/ object to be tested
Diagram:

Theory:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Definition of straightness ? A plane is to be said straight over a given length if the variation or
distance of its point from two planes perpendicular to each other and parallel to the generation
direction at of the line remain within specified tolerance limits. The reference planes being so
chosen that their intersection is parallel to the straight line joining two points suitably located on the
line to be tested and two points being close ends of the length to be measured.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Principle of the Autocollimator-A cross line ?target? graticule is positioned at the focal plane of a
telescope objective system with the intersection of the cross line on the optical axis, i.e. at the
principal focus. When the target graticule is illuminated, rays of light diverging from the intersection
point reach the objective via a beam splitter and are projected from the objective as parallel pencils
of light. In this mode the optical system is operating as a collimator.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

59 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

3. A flat reflector placed in front of the objective and exactly normal to the optical axis reflects the
parallel pencils of light back along their original paths. They are then brought to focus in the plane of
the target graticule and exactor coincident with its intersection. A proportion of the returned light

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

passes straight through the beam splitter and the return image of the target cross line is therefore
visible through the eyepiece. In this mode, the optical system is operating as a telescope focused at
infinity.
4. If the reflector is tilted through a small angle the reflected pencils of light will be deflected by twice
the angle of tilt (principle of reflection) and will be brought to focus in the plane of target graticule but

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

linearly displaced from the actual target cross lines by an amount 2?* f.
5. An optical system of an autocollimator consists of a light source, condensers, semi-reflectors, target
wire, collimating lens and reflector apart from microscope eyepiece. A target wire takes place of the
light source into the focal plane of the collimator lenses. Both the target wire and the reflected image
are seen through a microscope eyepiece. The eyepiece incorporates a scale graduated in 0.05mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

interval and a pair of parallel setting wires which can be adjusted. Movements of wires are effected
through a micrometer, one rotation of the drum equals to one scale division movement of the wires.
The instrument is designed to be rotated through 90 degrees about its longitudinal axis so that the
angles in both horizontal and vertical planes are measured.
Autocollimator:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

It is an instrument designed to measure small angular deflections & maybe used in conjunction with a
plane mirror or other reflecting surface. An autocollimator is essentially an infinity telescope and a collimator
combined into one instrument. This is an optical instrument used for the measurement of small angular
differences. For small angular measurements, autocollimator provides a very sensitive and accurate approach.
The principle on which this instrument works is given below. O is a point source of light placed at the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

principal focus of a collimating lens. The rays of light from O, incident on the lens, travels as a parallel beam of
light. If this beam strikes a plane reflector which is normal to the optical axis, it will be reflected back along its
own path and refocused at the same point O. If the plane reflector be tilted through a small angle ?, then
parallel beam will be deflected through twice this angle, and will be brought to focus at O? in the same plane at
a distance x from O. Obviously.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OO?=x=2?.f, where f is the focal length of the lens.
Applications:
1. For aligning circular & flat surfaces in machining
2. Alignment of beams & columns in construction buildings / industries, steel structures
3. To measure the straightness, flatness and parallelism

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

60 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Procedure:
1. Make the distance of 100mm internal on the work piece.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Set the cross wire so that two cross will coincide.
3. Set the mirror so that the cross wire is visible.
4. Move the reflector on next 100mm mark and adjust it to see reflection of cross wire.
5. Take the reading of reflected crosswire deviated or moved up or down.
6. Measure the distance between two crosswire.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Formulae:
Tan ? = X / 100
X = (100 x Tan ?) x 1000 in microns
Where X = Level at position B with respect to position A
? = Angle/Deviation in degrees/ Seconds (1 Degree = 60 Minutes, 1 Minute = 60 Seconds).

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:

Sl.No.
Bridge Length

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(Base length of
the reflector)
Cumulative
Bridge length
(Position of the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

reflector)
Micrometer final
reading
(Autocollimator)
Deviation for

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

each 100mm
( ? in degrees)
1.
2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
The values are analyzed and necessary modification of the surface may be recommended based on the
accuracy required on flatness. If the values observed from the micrometer are varying linearly then

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

straightness/flatness can be judged.
Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the optical instruments for non-contact measurement
of angles.
Application:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Surface Roughness
2. Quality Department

61 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Straightness

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Define ? Tolerance straightness
3. What is flatness?
4. What is autocollimator?
5. What light rays used in autocollimator?
6. What is the use of autocollimator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. What is collimating lens?
8. What are the applications of autocollimator?
9. What is meant by target graticule?
10. What is objective lens?
11. What is beam splitter?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. What is the principle of autocollimator?
13. What are the advantages of autocollimator?
14. What are the limitations of autocollimator?
15. What are the types of measurement uncertainties of autocollimator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

62 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.15 THREAD PARAMETERS MEASUREMENT USING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROFILE PROJECTOR
Aim:
To find the parameters of the given thread
Apparatus required:
1. Profile projector

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Magnification of 10 x
3. Trace paper
Diagram:

Procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Place the specimen between the work table centres and switch on the projector.
2. Place the magnification lens in the lens slot.
3. Focus the thread clearly by adjusting focusing knob to view the shadow on the screen clearly.
4. Place the tracing paper and trace the shadow profile.
5. Calculate the error in the pitch from the actual pitch.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Measure the major diameter (OD), minor diameter (ID), pitch of the thread and flank from the tracing
sheet.
FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice
1 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING


ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

V SEMESTER - R 2013

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No. : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LABORATORY MANUAL
2 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


3 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DHANALAKSHMI


College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.


1. To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
2. To contribute to the promotion of Academic Excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

levels
3. To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

DEPARTMENT OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rendering the services to the global needs of engineering industries by educating students to become
professionally sound mechanical engineers of excellent caliber

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To produce mechanical engineering technocrats with a perfect knowledge intellectual and hands on
experience and to inculcate the spirit of moral values and ethics to serve the society

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MISSION
MISSION
VISION

VISION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To impart students with fundamental knowledge in mathematics and basic sciences that will mould
them to be successful professionals
2. Core competence
To provide students with sound knowledge in engineering and experimental skills to identify
complex software problems in industry and to develop a practical solution for them

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theory and practice which
enable them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and organization and to design
products requiring interdisciplinary skills
4. Professional skills

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To bestow students with adequate training and provide opportunities to work as team that will build
up their communication skills, individual, leadership and supportive qualities and to enable them to
adapt and to work in ever changing technologies
5. Life-long learning
To develop the ability of students to establish themselves as professionals in mechanical

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

engineering and to create awareness about the need for lifelong learning and pursuing advanced
degrees

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)
On completion of the B.E. (Mechanical) degree, the graduate will be able
a) To apply the basic knowledge of mathematics, science and engineering
b) To design and conduct experiments as well as to analyze and interpret data and apply the same in
the career or entrepreneurship

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

c) To design and develop innovative and creative software applications
d) To understand a complex real world problem and develop an efficient practical solution
e) To create, select and apply appropriate techniques, resources, modern engineering and IT tools
f) To understand the role as a professional and give the best to the society
g) To develop a system that will meet expected needs within realistic constraints such as economical

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

environmental, social, political, ethical, safety and sustainability
h) To communicate effectively and make others understand exactly what they are trying to tell in both
verbal and written forms
i) To work in a team as a team member or a leader and make unique contributions and work with
coordination

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

j) To engage in lifelong learning and exhibit their technical skills
k) To develop and manage projects in multidisciplinary environments

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To familiar with different measurement equipment?s and use of this industry for quality inspection
List of Experiments
1. Tool Maker?s Microscope

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Comparator
3. Sine Bar
4. Gear Tooth Vernier Caliper
5. Floating gauge Micrometer
6. Coordinate Measuring Machine

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Surface Finish Measuring Equipment
8. Vernier Height Gauge
9. Bore diameter measurement using telescope gauge
10. Bore diameter measurement using micrometer
11. Force Measurement

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. Torque Measurement
13. Temperature measurement
14. Autocollimator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Ability to handle different measurement tools and perform measurements in quality impulsion
2. Learnt the usage of precision measuring instruments and practiced to take measurements
3. Learnt and practiced to build the required dimensions using slip gauge
4. Able to measure the various dimensions of the given specimen using the tool maker?s microscope
5. Able to find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Able to measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare
7. Learnt to determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen using Gear tooth vernier
8. Able to measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two
wire method
9. Learnt to study the construction and operation of coordinate measuring machine

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. Learnt to determine the diameter of bore by using telescopic gauge and dial bore indicator
11. Able to measure the surface roughness using Talysurf instrument
12. Studied the characteristic between applied load and the output volt
13. Learnt the characteristics of developing torque and respective sensor output voltage
14. Studied the characteristics of thermocouple without compensation

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15. Able to check the straightness & flatness of the given component by using Autocollimator
16. Learnt to measure the displacement using LVDT and to calibrate it with the millimeter scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OBJECTIVES

COURSE OUTCOMES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

CONTENTS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl. No. Name of the Experiments Page No.
CYCLE ? 1 EXPERIMENTS
1
Precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab ? A Study
7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
To build up the slip gauge for given dimension ? A Study
16
3
Thread parameters measurement using Tool Makers Microscope

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

20
4
Calibration of dial gauge
23
5

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of taper angle by sine bar method
26
6
Determination of gear tooth thickness using gear tooth vernier
29

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7
Measurement of thread parameters using floating carriage micrometer
32
CYCLE ? 2 EXPERIMENTS
8

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement of various dimensions using Coordinate Measuring Machine
35
9
Measurement of surface roughness
39

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10
Measurement of bores using dial bore indicator and telescopic gauge
42
11
Force measurement using load cell

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

46
12
Torque measurement using strain gauge
49
13

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Temperature measurement using thermocouple
53
14
Measurement of alignment using autocollimator
56

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ADDITIONAL EXPERIMENT BEYOND THE SYLLABUS
15
Thread parameters measurement using profile projector
60
16

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Displacement measurement ? linear variable differential transducer (LVDT)
62
PROJECT WORK
65

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.01 PRECISION MEASURING INSTRUMENT YSED IN
METROLOGY LAB ? A STUDY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Aim:
To study the following instruments and their usage for measuring dimensions of given specimen
1. Vernier caliper
2. Micrometer
3. Vernier height gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Depth micrometer
5. Universal bevel protractor
Apparatus required:
Surface plate, specimen and above instruments
Vernier caliper:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The principle of vernier caliper is to use the minor difference between the sizes two scales or divisions
for measurement. The difference between them can be utilized to enhance the accuracy of measurement. The
vernier caliper essentially consists of two steel rules, sliding along each other.
Parts:
Different parts of the vernier caliper are

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Beam ? It has main scale.
2. Fixed jaw
3. Sliding or Moving jaw ? It has vernier scale and sliding jaw locking screw.
4. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw knife
edges for internal measurement.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Stem or depth bar for depth measurement
Least count:
Least count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 VSD = 0.98 mm
Least count = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm

10 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ID

DEPTH

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OD
Measurement:
Given Vernier caliper can be used for external, internal depth, slot and step measurement.
Measurement principle:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

When both jaws contact each other scale shows the zero reading. The finer adjustment of movable jaw
can be done by the fine adjustment screw. First the whole movable jaw assembly is adjusted so that the two
measuring tips just touch the part to be measured. Then the fine adjustment clamp locking screw is tightened.
Final adjustment depending upon the sense of correct feel is made by the adjusting screw. After final
adjustment has been made sliding jaw locking screw is also tightened and the reading is noted.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

All the parts of the Vernier caliper are made of good quality steel and measuring faces are hardened.
Types of vernier:
Vernier caliper, electronic vernier caliper, vernier depth caliper

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:

Main scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

reading (MSR)
(mm)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

reading (VSR) (mm)
Total reading (MSR
+ VSR)
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OD


ID

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Depth


Vernier height gauge:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier height gauge is a sort of vernier caliper equipped with a special instrument suitable for height
measurement. It is always kept on the surface plate and the use of the surfaces plates as datum surfaces is
very essential.
Least count:
Least Count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm
1 VSD = 0.98 mm
Least Count (LC) = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm
Parts:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Base
2. Beam ? It has main scale.
3. Slider ? It has a vernier scale and slider locking screw.
4. Scriber
5. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Material:
All the parts of vernier are made of good quality steel and the measuring faces hardened.
Types of vernier gauge:
1. Analog vernier height gauge
2. Digital vernier height gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Electronic vernier height gauge
Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Main scale reading
(MSR)(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale reading
(VSR)(mm)
Total reading (MSR +

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSR)(mm)
1.
2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Outside micrometer:
The micrometer essentially consists of an accurate screw having about 10 or 20 threads per cm. The
end of the screw forms one measuring tip and other measuring tip is constituted by a stationary anvil in the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

base of the frame. The screw is threaded for certain length and is plain afterwards. The plain portion is called
spindle and its end is the measuring surface. The spindle is advanced or retracted by turning a thimble
connected to a spindle. The spindle is a slide fit over the barrel and barrel is the fixed part attached with the
frame. The barrel & thimble are graduated. The pitch of the screw threads is 0.5 mm.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count:
Least Count (LC) = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale
= 0.5 / 50 = 0.01 mm
Parts:
1. Frame

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Anvil
3. Spindle
4. Spindle lock
5. Barrel or outside sleeve
6. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.
The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.
14 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Measurement:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

It can be used for any external measurement.
Types of micrometer:
1. Outside micrometer, 2. Inside micrometer, 3.Depth micrometer, 4. Stick micrometer, 5. Screw thread
micrometer, 6. V ? anvil micrometer, 7. Blade type micrometer, 8. Dial micrometer, 9. Bench micrometer, 10.
Tape screw operated internal micrometer, 11. Groove micrometer, 12. Digital micrometer, 13.Differential screw

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

micrometer, 14.Adjustable range outside micrometer.
Ratchet stop mechanism:
The object of the ratchet stop is to ensure that same level of torque is applied on the spindle while
measuring and the sense of the feel of operator is eliminated and consistent readings are obtained. By
providing this arrangement, the ratchet stop is made slip off when the torque applied to rotate the spindle

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

exceeds the set torque. Thus this provision ensures the application of same amount of torque during the
measurement.
Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Pitch Scale Reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(PSR) (mm)
Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)
Head scale reading
(HSR x LC) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total Reading (PSR
+ HSR) (mm)
1.
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Depth micrometer:
Depth micrometer is a sort of micrometer which is mainly used for measuring depth of holes, so it is
named as depth micrometer.
Parts:
1. Shoulder

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Spindle
3. Spindle lock
4. Barrel or outside sleeve ? It has pitch scale.
5. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions.
6. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.
15 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


Least count:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least Count = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale = 0.50/50
= 0.01 mm
Measurements:
It can be used for measuring the depth of holes, slots and recessed areas. The pitch of the screw thread
is 0.5 mm. The least count is 0.01 mm. Shoulder acts as a reference surface and is held firmly and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

perpendicular to the centre line of the hole. For large range of measurement extension rods are used. In the
barrel the scale is calibrated. The accuracy again depends upon the sense of touch.
Procedure:
First, calculate the least count of the instrument. Check the zero error. Measure the specimen note
down the main scale reading or the head scale reading. Note down the vernier or head scale coincidence with

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

main or pitch scale divisions.
Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)
Head scale reading
(HSR x LC) (mm)
Total Reading (PSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

+ HSR) (mm)

1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.


16 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Universal bevel protractor:

Description:
Bevel protractor is an instrument for measuring the angle between the two faces of a specimen. It
consists of a base plate on which a circular scale is engraved. It is graduated in degrees. An adjustment plate

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

is attached to a circular plate containing the vernier scale. The adjustable blade can be locked in any position.
The circular plate has 360 division divided into four parts of 90 degrees each. The adjustable parts have 24
divisions of to the right and left sides of zero reading. These scales are used according to the position of the
specimen with respect to movable scale.
Procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Place the specimen whose taper is to be measured between the adjustable plate and movable
blade with one of its face parallel to the base.
2. Lock the adjustable plate in position and note down the main scale reading depending upon the
direction of rotation of adjustable plate in clockwise or anticlockwise.
3. Note the VSC to the right of zero.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Multiply the VSC with the least count and add to MSR to obtain the actual reading.
Least count:
Least Count = 2 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

24 VSD = 46
o
=> 1 VSD = 23/12
LC = 2 ? 23/12 = 1/12
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= 5? (five minutes)



17 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Main scale reading
(MSR) (deg)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale reading
(VSR) (deg)
Total reading (MSR +

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSR)
(deg)
1.
2.
The angle of scriber of the vernier height gauge =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Thus the various precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab are studied and the specimen
dimensions are recorded.
Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for linear, angular,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

roundness and roughness measurements they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring
instrument according to a specific requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).
Application:
1. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Metrology
2. Define ? Inspection
3. What are the needs of inspection in industries?
4. What are the various methods involving the measurement?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Define ? Precision
6. Define ? Accuracy
7. Define ? Calibration
8. Define ? Repeatability
9. Define ? Magnification

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. Define ? Error
11. Define ? Systematic Error
12. Define ? Random Error
13. Define ? Parallax Error
14. Define ? Environmental Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15. Define ? Cosine Error
Viva-voce

18 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.02 BUILD UP THE SLIP GAUGE FOR GIVEN DIMENSION
? A STUDY
Aim:
To build up the slip gauge for given dimension
Apparatus required:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Slip gauges set
2. Surface plate
3. Soft cloth
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
Slip gauge are universally accepted standard of length in industry. They are the working standard for
linear dimension. These were invented by a Swedish Engineer, C.E. Johansson. They are used
1. For direct precise measurement where the accuracy of the workpiece demand it.
2. For use with high- magnification comparators to establish the size of the gauge blocks in general

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

use.
3. Gauge blocks are also used for many other purposes such as checking the accuracy of measuring
instrument or setting up a comparator to a specific dimension, enabling a batch of component to be
quickly and accurately checked or indeed in any situation where there is need to refer to standard of
known length these blocks are rectangular.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

19 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Most gauge blocks are produced from high grade steel, hardened and established by a heat treatment
process to give a high degree of dimensional stability. Gauge blocks are also manufactured from tungsten
carbide which is an extremely hard and wear resistant material. The measuring faces have a lapped finish.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The faces are perfectly flat and parallel to one another with a high degree of accuracy. Each block has an
extremely high dimensional accuracy at 20
o
C.
These slip gauge are available in variety of selected sets both in inch units and metric units. Letter ?E? is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

used for inch units and ?M? is used for metric standard number of pieces in a set following the letter E or M. For
example EBI refers to a set whose blocks are in metric units and are 83 in number. Each block dimensions is
printed on anyone of its face itself the size of any required standard being made up by combining the
appropriate number of these different size blocks.
If two gauges are slid and twisted together under pressure they will firmly join together. This process,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

known as wringing, is very useful because it enables several gauge blocks to be assembled together to
produce a required size. In fact the success of precision measurement by slip gauges depends on the
phenomenon of wringing.
First the gauge is oscillated slightly with very light pressure over other gauge so as to detect pressure at
any foreign particles between the surfaces. One gauge is placed perpendicular to other using standard

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

gauging pressure and rotary motion is applied until the blocks are lined up.
Procedure:
1. Build the given dimension by wringing minimum number of slip gauges.
2. Note the given dimension and choose the minimum possible slip gauge available in the set so as to
accommodate the last decimal value. The minimum slip gauge value dimension available i.e., 1.12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

mm must be chosen followed by 1.5 mm thick gauge block.
3. Follow the above steps to build up the slip gauge of any dimension.
Precautions:
1. Slip gauges should be handled very carefully placed gently and should never be dropped.
2. Whenever a slip gauge is being removed from the set, its dimensions are noted and must be

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

replaced into the set at its appropriate place only.
3. Correct procedure must be followed in wringing and also in removing the gauge blocks.
4. They should be cleaned well before use and petroleum jelly is applied after use.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

20 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:
Range (mm) Increment (mm) No. of pieces

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total = ____________ Pieces

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total length of slip gauge = ________ mm
Given diameter Slip gauges used Obtained dimensions

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Slip gauge set is studied and the given dimensions are building up by wringing minimum number of slip
gauges.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Students will be able to select proper measuring instrument and know requirement of calibration, errors
in measurement etc. They can perform accurate measurements.
Application:
1. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Why C.I. is preferred material for surface plates and tables?
2. Why V ? blocks are generally manufactured in pairs?
3. Why micrometer is required to be tested for accuracy?
4. Define ? Linear Measurement

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. List the linear measuring instrument according to their accuracy.
6. Define ? Least Count
7. What are the uses of vernier depth gauge?
8. What are the uses of feeler gauges?
9. What are the uses of straight edge?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. What are the uses of angle plate?
11. What are the uses of V ? block?
12. What are the uses of combination square?
13. What precautions should be taken while using slip gauges?
14. What is wringing?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15. Why the slip gauges are termed as ?End standard?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

22 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


Expt.No.03 THREAD PARAMETERS MEASUREMENT USING
TOOL MAKERS MICROSCOPE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Aim:
To study the tool makers microscope and in the process measure the various dimensions of the given
specimen
Apparatus required:
1. Tool makers microscope

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Specimen
Diagram:

Description:
The tool maker?s microscope is designed for measurement of parts of complex forms; for example,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

profile of a tool having external threads. It can also be used for measuring centre to centre distance of the
holes in any plane as well as the coordinates of the outline of a complex template gauge, using the
coordinates measuring system.
23 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Basically it consists of an optical head which can be adjusted vertically along the ways of supporting
column. The optical head can be clamped at any position by a screw. On the work table (which as a circular
base in which there are graduations) the part to be inspected is placed. The table has a compound slide by
means of which the part can be measured. For giving these two movements, there are two micrometer screws
having thimble scales and verniers. At the back of the base light source is arranged that provides horizontal

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

beam of light, reflected from a mirror by 90 degrees upwards towards the table. The beam of light passes
through the transparent glass plate on which flat plates can be checked are placed. Observations are made
through the eyepiece of the optical head.
Procedure:
1. Place the given specimen on the work table and switch on all the three light sources and adjust the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

intensity of the light source until a clean image of the cross wires and specimen are seen through
the eyepiece.
2. Coincide one of the two extreme edges between which the measurement has to be taken with
vertical or horizontal cross wires and depending upon the other image coincide with the same cross
wires by moving the above device. Note the reading.The difference between the two readings gives

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the value of the required measurement.
3. Note the experiment specimen and the readings.
4. Tabulate the different measurements measured from the specimen.
Determination of thread parameters
Magnification =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

S.No. Parameters
Magnified value
(mm)
Actual value
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Outer diameter (O.D)

2. Internal diameter (I.D)

3. Pitch

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Flank angle


Result:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Included angle of the tool was measured using tool maker?s microscope and various dimensions of the
given specimen are measured.


24 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the various parameters of thread and select proper measuring
instrument and know requirement of calibration, errors in measurement etc. They can perform accurate
measurements.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Machine Shop
2. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by tool maker?s microscope?
2. What is the light used in tool maker?s microscope?
3. What are the various characteristics that you would measure in a screw thread?
4. What are the instruments that are required for measuring screw thread?
5. Define ? Pitch

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. What are the causes of pitch error?
7. Define ? Flank
8. What are the effects of flank angle error?
9. What is progressive error?
10. What is periodic error?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. What is drunken error?
12. What is erratic error?
13. What are the applications of tool maker?s microscope?
14. What are the limitations of tool maker?s microscope?
15. What are the advantages of tool maker?s microscope?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

25 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.04 CALIBRATION OF DIAL GAUGE USING SLIP GAUGE
Aim:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge
Apparatus required:
Dial gauge, magnetic stand, slip gauge, and surface plate
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
The dial test indicator is a precision measuring instrument which can convert linear motion into angular
motion by means of transmission mechanics of rack and pinion and can be used to measure linear vibration
and errors of shape.
This instrument has the features such as good appearance, compact size, light weight, high precision,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

reasonable construction, constant measuring face etc. Rigidity of all parts is excellent. Probe is tipped with
carbide balls. A shock proof mechanism is provided for those with larger measuring range.

26 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Types of dial indicator:
1. Plunger type
2. Lever type
Plunger type dial indicator has a resolution counter and each division in main scale is 0.01 mm. In lever
type dial test indicator is replaced by ball type stylus.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. Fix the dial gauge to the stand rigidly and place the stand on the surface plate.
2. Set the plunger of dial gauge to first touch the upper surface of standard slip gauge and set indicator
to zero.
3. Raise then the plunger by pulling the screw above the dial scale.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Place the standard slip gauge underneath the plunger.
5. Release the plunger and let it to touch the standard slip gauge.
6. Note the reading on the dial scale.
Formulae:
The standard error of dial gauge is calculated by the formula

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
S.No.
Slip gauge reading ?x?
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Dial gauge reading
(mm)
(x? - x)
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x? (x? - x)
1.
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Thus the accuracy and standard error of dial gauge is found. The standard error of given dial gauge is
__________.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

27 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Outcome:
Students will be able to check the variation in tolerance during the inspection process of a
machined part, measure the deflection of a beam or ring under laboratory conditions, as well as many

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

other situations where a small measurement needs to be registered or indicated
Application:
1. Milling Machine
2. Analog versus digital/electronic readout

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is comparator?
2. What are the types of comparators?
3. What is the LC for comparators?
4. What are the applications of comparator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. What is meant by plunger?
6. What are the types of dial indicators?
7. Why a revolution counter is not provided in lever type dial test indicator?
8. Draw a line diagram of the operating mechanism of plunger type dial test indicator.
9. Explain the term magnification of a dial indicator.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. What are the uses of dial test indicator?
11. What are the practical applications of dial test indicator?
12. What precautions should be taken while using dial test indicator?
13. What are the desirable qualities of a dial test indicator?
14. What are the advantages of dial test indicator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15. What are the limitations of dial test indicator?
16. Distinguish between comparator and measuring instrument.
17. What are the advantages of electrical comparator?
18. What are the advantages of optical comparator?
19. What are the uses of comparator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

20. What are the advantages and disadvantages of mechanical comparator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

28 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.05 DETERMINATION OF TAPER ANGLE BY SINE BAR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

METHOD
Aim:
To measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare
Apparatus required:
Sine bar, slip gauges, dial gauge with stand, micrometer, surface plate, bevel protractor, vernier caliper

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diagram:

Description:
The sine bar principle uses the ratio of the length of two sides of a right triangle. It may be noted that
devices operating on sine principle are capable of ?self-generation?. The measurement is restricted to 45

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
from
accuracy point of view. Sine bar itself is not a measuring instrument.
Accuracy requirements of sine bar:
1. The axes of the rollers must be parallel to each other and the centre distance L must be precisely

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

known.
2. The sine bar must be flat and parallel to the plane connecting the axes of the rollers.
3. The rollers must be of identical diameters and must have within a close tolerance.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

29 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Procedure:
1. Fix the dial gaugeon the magnetic stand and place the magnetic stand on the surface plate.Check
the parallelism of the sine bar.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Place the given specimen above the sine bar and place the dial gauge on top of the specimen.
Adjustthe dial gauge for zero deflection.
3. Raise the front end of the sine bar with slip gauges until the work surface is parallel to the datum
surface.
4. Check the parallelism using dial gauge.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Measure the distance between the centres of the sine bar rollers as ?L? and note the height of the
slip gauge as ?H?.
6. Note the included angle of the specimen.
Formulae:
Sin ? = H/L where ? = Included angle of the specimen

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

H = Height of slip gauges
L = Distance between the centre of rollers
Tabulation:
S.No. L (mm) H (mm) Taper angle ( ?)
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.
3.

Result:
The taper angle of the given specimen using sine bar was found to be =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for angular measurements
and they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a specific
requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Flat Surface
2. Granite

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

30 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. List out the various angle measuring instruments.
2. What is the working principles sine bar?
3. How is a sine bar used to measure the angle?
4. What is the application of sine bar?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. What is the material of sine bar?
6. Why sine bar is not preferred to use for measuring angles more than 45
0
?
7. What are the features of sine bar?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. A 100 mm sine bar is to be set up to an angle of 33
0
, determine the slip gauges needed from 87
pieces set.
9. What are the various instruments used for measuring angles?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. What is sine bar?
11. How sine bar is used for angle measurement?
12. Explain how sine bar is used to measure angle of small size component.
13. Explain how sine bar is used to measure angle of large size component.
14. What are the various types of sine bar?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15. What are the limitations of sine bar?
16. What is sine center?
17. What is sine table?
18. What are the possible sources of errors in angular measurement by sine bar?
19. What are angle gauges?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

20. How angle gauges are used for measuring angles?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

31 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.06 DETERMINATION OF GEAR TOOTH THICKNESS
USING GEAR TOOTH VERNIER
Aim:
To determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen and to draw the graph between the tooth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

number and the error in thickness
Apparatus required:
Gear tooth vernier, specimen, surface plate and vernier caliper
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
The tooth thickness, in general, is measured at pitch circle since gear tooth thickness varies from the tip
to the base circle of the tooth. This is possible only when there is an arrangement to fix that position for this
measurement by the gear tooth vernier. It has two vernier scales; one is vertical and other is horizontal.
Procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

32 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

1. Measure initially the outside diameter of the given gear specimen by means of a vertical calculation
of vernier caliper. Note the number of teeth. Calculate the module (m) using the formula.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M = OD/ (Z+2) where z ? number of teeth
M - Module
2. Calculate the theoretical tooth thickness (t) by t = z * m* sin (90/z).
3. Set the vernier scale for the height and tighten.
4. Measure the thickness of each tooth using the horizontal scale. This is measured thickness. It can

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

be positive or negative.
H = m x [1+ Z/2 (1- Cos 90/Z)]
5. Calculate the error in the tooth thickness i.e,1. measured thickness ? Theoretical thickness
6. Draw the graph between the tooth number and the error in thickness.
Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tooth
Number
Measured Thickness
(mm)
Theoretical Thickness (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Error in tooth thickness
(mm)
1
2
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tooth
Number
MSR
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSC

VSR
(mm)
TR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
1
2
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Graph:


Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tooth No.
33 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
The theoretical experiment value of gear tooth thickness is obtained and graph is drawn between error
and tooth number in tooth thickness
Theoretical tooth thickness =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Experimental tooth thickness =
Error in tooth thickness =
Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the basic measurement units and able to calibrate various
measuring parameters of the gear.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Gear Component
2. Mining

1. Calculate the setting of a gear tooth vernier caliper for a straight spur gear having 40 teeth and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

module 4.
2. What is the importance of chordal depth?
3. Define ? Chordal width
4. How is the actual profile of the gear tooth determined?
5. What are the manufacturing errors in gear element?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Define ? Addendum
7. Define ? Dedendum
8. Define ? Flank of tooth
9. Define ? Pitch
10. Define ? Pitch Circle

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. Define ? Crest of tooth
12. Define ? Root of tooth
13. Define ? Base Circle
14. Define ? Module
15. Define ? Angle of Obliquity

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

34 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.07 MEASUREMENT OF THREAD PARAMETER USING
FLOATING CARRIAGE MICROMETER
Aim:
To measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two wire

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

method
Apparatus required:
1. Floating carriage micrometer
2. Standard wire
3. Given specimen (screw thread)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diagram:

Description of floating carriage micrometer:
It consists of three main units. A base casting carries a pair of centres on which threaded work piece is
to be mounted. Another carriage capable of moving towards centre is mounted exactly above. In this carriage

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

one head with thimble to measure up to 0.002 mm is provided and at the other side of head a fiducial indicator
is provided to indicate zero position.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

35 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Procedure:
1. For two wire method, place the standard wire over a thread of the screw at opposite sides.
2. For three wire method, place two standard wires on two successive threads and the third wire

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

placed opposite sides of the thread.
3. Measure the diameter over wires (M) using floating carriage micrometer.
4. Repeat this procedure at various positions of the screw and take different readings.
Formulae:
1. For best wire size, d = P / 2 Cos (x/2)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Where, P = Pitch
d= wire size
x = angle between two threads
= 60
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

for metric thread
2. Actual effective diameter, E.A = M ? 3d + 0.866 p
3. Nominal effective diameter, EN = D ? 0.648 p
4. Max. wire size = 1.01 p
5. Min. wire size = 0.505 p

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Best wire size = 0.577 p
M = Diameter over wires
P = Pitch of thread
For metric thread:
Actual effective diameter (EA) = M ? 3d + 0.866 p

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Where d = actual diameter of wire
Determination of actual and nominal effective diameter of the screw thread:
Sl.No.
Nominal
Diameter (D)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
Diameter over
wire ?M?
(mm)
Actual eff.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diameter E.A
(mm)
Nominal eff.
Diameter E.N
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Error in effective
diameter
(E.A ? E.N)
(mm)
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

36 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Result:
Thus the actual and nominal effective diameter is measured using three wire method and the error in
effective diameter of screw is determined.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for roundness
measurements and they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a
specific requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).
Application:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Wholse
2. Maxxis Rubber India

1. Define ? Pitch
2. Define ? Flank Angle

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. What is plug gauge?
4. What is meant by micrometer?
5. What is meant by indicator?
6. What is best ? size wire?
7. Calculate the diameter of the best wire for an M 20 x 25 screws.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. What are the different corrections to be applied in the measurement of effective diameter by the
method of wire?
9. What is floating carriage micrometer?
10. What are the uses of floating carriage micrometer?
11. What are the methods are used for measuring effective diameter?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. Define ? Effective Diameter
13. Define ? Major Diameter
14. Define ? Minor Diameter
15. What are the effects of flank error?
16. Define ? Rake Angle

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17. Define ? Pitch Cylinder
18. What are the effects of pitch error?
19. Define ? Pitch Diameter
20. What is meant by angle of thread?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

37 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.08 MEASUREMENT OF VARIOUS DIMENSIONS USING
COORDINATE MEASURING MACHINE
Aim:
1. To study the construction and operation of coordinate measuring machine
2. To measure the specified dimensions of the given component

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Instruments used:
Coordinate measuring machine, vernier calipers
Diagram:

Theory:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

A coordinate measuring machine (CMM) is a 3D device for measuring the physical and geometrical
characteristics of an object. This machine may be manually controlled by an operator or it may be computer
controlled. Measurements are defined by a probe attached to the three moving axis of this machine X, Y and Z
axes. A coordinate measuring machine (CMM) is also a device used in manufacturing and assembly
processes to test a part or assembly against the design intent. By precisely recording the X, Y and Z

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

coordinates of the target, points are generated which can be analyzed via regression algorithms for the
construction of features. These points are collected by using a probe that is positioned manually by an
38 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

operator or automatically via direct computer control (DCC). DCC CMMs can be programmed to repeatedly

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measure identical parts, thus a CMM is a specialized form of industrial robot.
Parts:
Coordinate measuring machine include three main components:
1. The main structures which include three axes of motion.
2. Probing system

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Data collection and reduction system ? typically includes a machine controller, desktop computer
and application software
Machine description:
1. In modern machines, the gantry type superstructure has two legs and is often called a bridge. This
moves freely along the granite table with one leg following a guide rail attached to one side of the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

granite table. The opposite leg simply rests on the granite table following the vertical surface
contour.
2. Air bearings are fixed for ensuring friction free travel. Compressed air is forced through a series of
very small holes in a flat bearing surface to provide a smooth but controlled air cushion on which the
CMM can move in a frictionless manner.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. The movement of the bridge along the granite table forms one axis of the XY plane. The bridge of
the gantry contains a carriage which traverses between the inside and outside legs and forms the
other X or Y horizontal axis.
4. The third axis of movement (Z axis) is provided by the addition of a vertical quill or spindle which
moves up and down through the center of the carriage. The touch probe forms the sensing device

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

on the end of the quill.
5. The movement of the X, Y and Z axes fully describes the measuring envelope. Some touch probes
are themselves powered rotary devices with the probe tip able to swivel vertically through 90
degrees and through a full 360 degrees rotation.
Uses:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

They are generally used for:
1. Dimensional measurement
2. Profile measurement
3. Angularity or orientation measurement
4. Depth mapping

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Digitizing mapping
6. Shaft measurement
39 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

The machines are available in a wide range of sizes and designs with a variety of different probe

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

technologies. They can be operated manually or automatically through direct computer control (DCC). They
are offered in various configurations such as bench top, free ? standing, handheld and portable.
Procedure:
1. Take at least 8 points on sphere ball attached to the granite table.
2. Fix the object whose dimension needs to be measured using the jigs and fixtures.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Using joystick, move the probe whose tip is made of ruby slowly and carefully to the surface whose
measurements have to be taken.
4. Touch the probe at two places for measurement of a line (starting and ending point).
5. Touch the probe at two places for measurement of a circular profile and for a cylinder touch the
probe at 8 points.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Measure the same profiles again with vernier calipers (length of line, circle diameter, cylinder
diameter) to compare the two readings.
Comments:
1. The machine should be calibrated every time when it is being used.
2. While measuring the profiles, the probe should be moved very slowly as it may damage the ruby if

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

hit with a high force.
3. Care should be taken while performing experiment so that the granite table of the machines should
get any scratches.
4. ?Retract distance? should be fixed according to the space available in the near vicinity of the profile
measurement area.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Observation:
Sl.No. Feature
CMM reading
(mm)
Vernier reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
Form error
(mm)
Difference in two
readings (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1 Circle -1
2 Circle -2
3 Circle -3
4 Line
5 Arc

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6
Cone - Diameter
Cone ? Vertex angle
Cone ? Height
7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Cylinder ? Diameter
Cylinder ? Height


40 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Thus the different profile of given object are measured using coordinate measuring machine
Outcome:
Students will be able to measures the geometry of physical objects by sensing discrete points on the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

surface of the object with a probe and they will be able to know the Various types of probes are used in CMMs,
including mechanical, optical, laser, and white light.
Application:
1. Surface Measuring Equipment
2. Photo transistor

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What are the types of measuring machine?
2. What is CMM?
3. What are the types of CMM?
4. What are the advantages of CMM?
5. What are the limitations of CMM?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. What are the possible sources of error in CMM?
7. What is the use of universal measuring machine?
8. What are the applications of CMM?
9. What is the working principle of three axis measuring machine?
10. What is image shearing microscope?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. What is the use of electronic inspection and measuring machine?
12. What are the types of electronic inspection and measuring machine?
13. What is CMM probe?
14. What are the three main probes are available?
15. What are the types of stylus?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

41 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.09 MEASUREMENT OF SURFACE ROUGHNESS UING
TALYSURF INSTRUMENT

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Aim:
To measure the surface roughness using Talysurf instrument
Apparatus required:
Talysurf instrument, work piece, surface plate
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Theory:
On any finished surface, imperfections are bound to be there and these take the form of a succession of
hills and valleys which vary both in height and in spacing and result in a kind of texture which in appearance or
feel is often characteristic of the machining process and accompanying defects. The several kinds of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

departures are there on the surface and these are due to various causes.

42 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Methods of measuring surface roughness:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Surface inspection of comparison methods
2. Direct instrument measurements
In comparative methods the surface texture is assessed by observation of the surface. But these
methods are not reliable as they can be misleading, if comparison is not made with surfaces produced by
same techniques. The various methods available under comparison method are: (i) Touch Inspection

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(ii)Scratch Inspection (iii) Microscopic Inspection (iv) Visual Inspection (v) Surface Photographs (vi) Reflected
Light Intensity Direct Instrument Measurements enable to determine a numerical value of the surface finish of
any surface. Nearly all instruments used are stylus probe type of instruments. This operates on electrical
principle.
Procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Place the finished component on the surface plate.
2. Fix the Talysurf tester to the vernier height gauge using adopter at a convenient height.
3. Make sure that the stylus probe touches the work piece.
4. Fix the sampling length in the tester.
5. Press the power button so that the probe moves on the surface to and fro.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Take the readings of the surface roughness directly from the instrument.
7. Repeat the above process for the remaining specimen and tabulate the readings.
Precautions:
1. The surface to be tested should be cleaned properly.
2. The tester should be fixed to the height gauge properly so that the movement of the probe is exactly

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

parallel to the surface of work.
3. Make sure that the probe gently touches the work.
Tabulation:
S.No
Measurement roughness value,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?m
Sample direction Ra, Rz
Average Ra Average Rz Grade
1.
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

43 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Result:
Thus the surface roughness is checked for different specimens by Talysurf.
Outcome:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for roughness
measurements they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a specific
requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).
Application:
1. Machine Shop

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Quality Department


1. Define ? Actual Size?
2. What is meant by normal surface?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. What is meant by profilo-graph?
4. What is Tomlinson surface meter?
5. What is meant by profile?
6. What are the factors affecting surface roughness?
7. Why the surface texture is control?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Define ? Lay
9. Define ? Surface Texture
10. Define ? Flaws
11. What is sampling length?
12. What are the methods used for evaluating surface finish?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. What is form factor?
14. What are the methods used for measuring surface finish?
15. How will you differentiate smooth surface from flat surface?
16. How surface finish is designated on drawings?
17. Define ? Primary Texture

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

18. Define ? Secondary Texture
19. What are the types of instrument used for measuring surface texture?
20. Define ? waviness

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

44 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.10 MEASUREMENT OF BORE USING DIAL BORE
INDICATOR AND TELESCOPIC GAUGE
Aim:
To determine the diameter of bore by using telescopic gauge and checking the same by using dial bore
indicator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Apparatus required:
Work piece, vernier caliper, telescopic gauge and dial gauge indicator set with anvil.
Diagram:

45 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
Bore gauge measurement:
1. Select the extension rod and washer according to the bore diameter to be measured

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Fix the suitable extension rod and washer with the bore gauge
3. Fix the dial gauge to the bore gauge in its position
4. Insert the bore gauge inside the bore to be measured and hold the gauge in parallel o the axis of the
bore. Ensure that the tips on either side of the bore gauge are in touch with inner wall of the bore
5. Note down the reading in the dial gauge and withdraw the bore gauge from the bore

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Hold the measuring tips of bore gauge between the spindle and anvil of a micrometer and compress
the tips by rotating the thimble till the reading reaches the same one as noted earlier
7. Observe and record the micrometer reading as the bore diameter to be measured
Telescopic gauge measurement:
1. Select the telescopic gauge according to the bore diameter to be measured

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Press the telescopic spindles in the telescopic gauge lock them by locking screw
3. Insert the telescopic gauge inside thee bore to be measured. Release the locking screw to expand
the telescopic spindles outwards inside the bore
4. Hold the telescopic gauge in parallel to the axis of bore axis and ensure that the tips of telescopic
spindles are in touch with the inner wall of the bore

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Lock the telescopic spindles and withdraw it from the bore
46 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

6. Measure the expanded length of the telescopic spindles using micrometer record them as the inner
diameter of the bore

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Practical observations:
Rough measurement of bore using Telescopic gauge:
Least count of micrometer = 0.01 mm
Sl.No.
Micrometer reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total reading
(MSR + TSC * LC) ( mm) Main scale reading (MSR)
(mm)
Thimble scale
coincidence

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
2.

Average reading = ________ mm
Accurate measuring using Bore gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No.
Micrometer
reading
(d) (mm)
Bore gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

reading
(R1) (mm)
Work piece reading
(R2) (mm)
Final reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d+ (R1 ? R2) * 0.01
(mm)
1.
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Accurate internal diameter of hole using bore gauge = ______ mm

Result
1. Internal diameter of the work piece by using telescopic gauge is ________mm
2. Diameter obtained by using dial gauge indicator is __________________mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Students will be able to measure a bore's size, by transferring the internal dimension to a remote
measuring tool (Telescopic gauge).
Application:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Automobile
2. Quality Department


47 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by bore diameter?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. What is gauge?
3. What is meant by measurement?
4. What is telescope gauge?
5. What is bore gauge?
6. What is contact point?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. What is the principle of bore gauge?
8. What are the applications of telescopic gauge?
9. What types of materials are used in telescopic gauge?
10. What are the types of instrument used to measure bore diameter?
11. What are the applications of bore gauge?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. What are the advantages of bore gauge over telescopic gauge?
13. What are the limitations of bore gauge?
14. What is the working principle of telescopic gauge?
15. What are the disadvantages of telescopic gauge?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

48 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.11 MEASUREMENT OF FORCE USING LOAD CELL
Aim:
To study the characteristic between applied load and the output voltage
Apparatus required:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Trainer kit
2. Multimeter
3. Load cell sensor with setup
4. Weights (5 kg)
5. Power chord

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diagram:

Formulae:
Error (%) = {Applied Voltage ? (Displayed Load)/ Applied Load)} x 100
Block diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Applied DC
Load O/P

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DC Excitation source Transducer
Transducer
Instrumentation
Amplifier

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Gain Amplifier DVM
49 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Interfacing and calibration procedure:
1. Interface the load cell 9 pin ?D? type male connector to 9 pin D type female connector, fixed on the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

module.
2. First unload the beam and nullify the display by using zero adjustment POT
3. Apply the maximum load of 5 kg to the beam and adjust the display to 5 kg by using gain
adjustment POT.
4. After the initial adjustment, the unit should not be disturbed until the completion of the experiment.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Safety precaution:
1. During offset adjustment, the beam should not be loaded.
2. The beam should not be disturbed during the experiment.
3. Remove the load from the beam, after completion of the experiment; otherwise wire wound on the
strain gauge will get damaged.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. If you are getting an unsatisfactory reading, then vary the zero and span POT minimum to
maximum.
5. Maximum load should not exceed 5 kg.
6. Once calibrated, the setting should not be distributed till the end of the experiment.
Procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Install the load cell module and interface the 9 pin D connector with kit.
2. Connect the multimeter in volt mode across T5 and GND for the output voltage measurement.
3. Switch on the module.
4. Initially, unload the beam and nullify the display by using zero adjustment POT (zero calibration).
5. Apply the maximum load of 5 kg to the beam and adjust the display to 5 kg by using gain

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

adjustment POT (gain calibration).
6. Now apply the load to the beam, a force will develop on the beam and measure the output voltage
(V) across T5 and GND.
7. Gradually increase the load and note down the output voltage (V) and applied load.
8. Tabulate the values of displayed load and applied voltage.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. Plot a graph between applied load and output voltage (V).
Note: When 1 kg load is applied to the beam, the displayed voltage is 1 kg.


50 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Applied load
(kg)
Output voltage

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(V)
Displayed load
(kg)
% Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Graph:
1. Applied load (kg) Vs Output Voltage (V)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Actual load (kg) Vs % Error
Result:
Thus the characteristic between applied load and the output voltage was studied.
Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the Sensor device (electro-mechanical) which help us to measure

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

a physical parameter (such as temperature, pressure, force, acceleration etc.) by providing analog input to get
digital output.
Application:
1. Machine Shop
2. Automobile

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by force?
2. Define ? Wheat stone bridge circuit
3. Define ? Load

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. What is meant by deflector?
5. What is meant by force indicator?
6. Define ? Instrumentation
7. How instrumentations are classified?
8. Define ? Transducer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. What is electrical transducer?
10. How transducers are classified?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

51 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.12 MEASUREMENT OF TORQUE USING STRAIN

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

GAUGE
Aim:
To study the characteristics of the developing torque and the signal conditioned sensor output voltage
Apparatus required:
1. Trainer kit

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Digital Multimeter (V)
3. Torque sensor setup
4. Weights (100 gram x 10 Nos.)
5. Power chord
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Interfacing and calibration procedure:
1. Interface the torque sensor 9 pin. ?D? type male connector to ?9? pin ?D? type female connector, fixed
on the module.
2. First, unload the beam and nullify the display by using zero adjustment POT.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Apply the maximum load of 1 kg to the beam and adjust the display to 9.81 Nm by using adjustment
POT.
4. After this initial calibration, the unit should not be disturbed until the completion of the experiment.
52 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Safety precaution:
1. During offset adjustment, the beam should not be loaded.
2. The beam should not be disturbed during the experiment.
3. Remove the beam from the shaft, after completion of the experiment otherwise wire wound on the
strain gauge will get damaged.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. If the displayed torque reading are in negative, change the beam connections in opposite to
previously connected direction.
5. If you are getting an unsatisfactory reading, then vary the zero and span POT minimum to
maximum.
6. Maximum load should not exceed 1 kg.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Once calibrated, the setting should not be disturbed till the end of this experiment.
Procedure:
1. Install the torque sensor setup and interface with kit.
2. Switch ?ON? the module.
3. Connect the Multimeter in millivolts mode T2 and T3 for bridge output voltage measurement POT.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. First, unload the beam and nullify the bridge output voltage by using zero adjustment POT.
5. By applying load to the beam, torque will develop on the shaft and measure the bridge output
voltage (mV) across T2 and T3
6. Gradually increase the force by applying load and note down the bridge output voltage (mV).
7. Tabulate the readings and plot a graph between developed torque versus bridge output voltage

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mV).
Formulae:
Error (%) = {(Actual Torque ? Theoretical Torque)/ Theoretical Torque} x 100
Theoretical Torque = mass (m) x acceleration due to gravity (g) x radial distance
= 1 kg x 9.81 m/s

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2
x 1 m
= 9.81 Nm
Tabulation:
Sl.No. Theoretical Torque

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(Nm)
Bridge output voltage
(mV)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Model graph:
The graph between developed torque and bridge output voltage is drawn
53 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Developed torque (Nm) Vs Output Voltage (V)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sample reading:
Developed Torque (Nm) = 9.81 Nm
Output Voltage (V) = 5 mV

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Thus the characteristics of the torque developed which is due to force applied to beam and the bridge
output voltage were studied and graph is plotted.
Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the Sensor device (electro-mechanical) which helps us to

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measure the strain by providing analog input to digital output.
Application:
1. Machine Shop
2. Turbine

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

54 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Torque
2. Define ? Twist

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. What are the methods used for measuring torque?
4. Define ? Strain Gauge
5. What is prony brake?
6. What are the modern devices used for measuring torque?
7. What are the elements of strain gauge?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. What is the use of slip ring for measuring torque?
9. What is slip ring?
10. What are the types of torque?
11. What are the types of dynamometer?
12. What are the applications of dynamometer?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. What are the features of dynamometer?
14. What is gauge factor?
15. What are the types of torque measurement?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

55 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.13 MEASUREMENT OF TEMPERATURE USING
THERMOCOUPLE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Aim:
To study the characteristics of thermocouple without compensation
Apparatus required:
1. Trainer kit
2. Thermocouple

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Water bath
4. Thermometer
5. Digital multi meter
6. Power chord
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. Connect the two terminals of the thermocouple across T1 & T2.
2. Position the switch ?SW1? towards ?NO?.
3. Switch ?ON? the unit and note the displayed temperature.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. If there is any difference in displayed temperature at room temperature, adjust the offset knob ?zero?
to set 0
o
C in display.
5. Place the Multimeter across T7 and T8.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Insert the thermocouple and thermometer into water bath.
7. Switch ?ON? the water bath.
8. Note the actual temperature in thermometer and displayed temperature simultaneously.
9. Tabulate the reading and calculate % error using the above formula
56 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. Plot the graph actual temperature Vs % error
Formulae:
Error (%) = {(Displayed Temperature ? Actual Temp)/ Actual Temp} x 100

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Actual Temperature
(
o
C)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Displayed Temperature
(
o
C)
% Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Graph
Temperature Vs % Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Thus the characteristics of the thermocouple without compensation were studied and graph is plotted.
Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the Sensor device (electro-mechanical) which help us to measure
a physical parameter (such as temperature) by providing analog input.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Thermocouple
2. Heat generation

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

57 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by total radiation pyrometer?
2. How the mercury in glass thermometer worked?
3. What are the sources of error in thermocouple?
4. Define ? Resistance

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Define ? Temperature detector
6. Define ? Temperature
7. What are the types of instrument used for measuring temperature?
8. What are the types of electrical temperature sensors?
9. What is optical sensor?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. What are the applications of liquid in gas thermometer?
11. What are the applications of bimetallic thermometer?
12. What is vapour pressure thermometer?
13. What is thermocouple?
14. What are the types of metal are used in combination to form thermocouples?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15. What are the advantages of thermocouple?
16. What are the disadvantages of thermocouple?
17. Define ? Resistance Thermometer
18. Define ? Thermistor
19. What is the use radiation pyrometer?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

20. What are the advantages of optical pyrometer?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

58 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.14 MEASUREMENT OF ALIGNMENT USING
AUTOCOLLIMATOR
Aim:
To check the straightness & flatness of the given component by using Autocollimator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Apparatus required:
Autocollimator, work piece/ object to be tested
Diagram:

Theory:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Definition of straightness ? A plane is to be said straight over a given length if the variation or
distance of its point from two planes perpendicular to each other and parallel to the generation
direction at of the line remain within specified tolerance limits. The reference planes being so
chosen that their intersection is parallel to the straight line joining two points suitably located on the
line to be tested and two points being close ends of the length to be measured.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Principle of the Autocollimator-A cross line ?target? graticule is positioned at the focal plane of a
telescope objective system with the intersection of the cross line on the optical axis, i.e. at the
principal focus. When the target graticule is illuminated, rays of light diverging from the intersection
point reach the objective via a beam splitter and are projected from the objective as parallel pencils
of light. In this mode the optical system is operating as a collimator.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

59 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

3. A flat reflector placed in front of the objective and exactly normal to the optical axis reflects the
parallel pencils of light back along their original paths. They are then brought to focus in the plane of
the target graticule and exactor coincident with its intersection. A proportion of the returned light

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

passes straight through the beam splitter and the return image of the target cross line is therefore
visible through the eyepiece. In this mode, the optical system is operating as a telescope focused at
infinity.
4. If the reflector is tilted through a small angle the reflected pencils of light will be deflected by twice
the angle of tilt (principle of reflection) and will be brought to focus in the plane of target graticule but

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

linearly displaced from the actual target cross lines by an amount 2?* f.
5. An optical system of an autocollimator consists of a light source, condensers, semi-reflectors, target
wire, collimating lens and reflector apart from microscope eyepiece. A target wire takes place of the
light source into the focal plane of the collimator lenses. Both the target wire and the reflected image
are seen through a microscope eyepiece. The eyepiece incorporates a scale graduated in 0.05mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

interval and a pair of parallel setting wires which can be adjusted. Movements of wires are effected
through a micrometer, one rotation of the drum equals to one scale division movement of the wires.
The instrument is designed to be rotated through 90 degrees about its longitudinal axis so that the
angles in both horizontal and vertical planes are measured.
Autocollimator:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

It is an instrument designed to measure small angular deflections & maybe used in conjunction with a
plane mirror or other reflecting surface. An autocollimator is essentially an infinity telescope and a collimator
combined into one instrument. This is an optical instrument used for the measurement of small angular
differences. For small angular measurements, autocollimator provides a very sensitive and accurate approach.
The principle on which this instrument works is given below. O is a point source of light placed at the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

principal focus of a collimating lens. The rays of light from O, incident on the lens, travels as a parallel beam of
light. If this beam strikes a plane reflector which is normal to the optical axis, it will be reflected back along its
own path and refocused at the same point O. If the plane reflector be tilted through a small angle ?, then
parallel beam will be deflected through twice this angle, and will be brought to focus at O? in the same plane at
a distance x from O. Obviously.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OO?=x=2?.f, where f is the focal length of the lens.
Applications:
1. For aligning circular & flat surfaces in machining
2. Alignment of beams & columns in construction buildings / industries, steel structures
3. To measure the straightness, flatness and parallelism

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

60 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Procedure:
1. Make the distance of 100mm internal on the work piece.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Set the cross wire so that two cross will coincide.
3. Set the mirror so that the cross wire is visible.
4. Move the reflector on next 100mm mark and adjust it to see reflection of cross wire.
5. Take the reading of reflected crosswire deviated or moved up or down.
6. Measure the distance between two crosswire.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Formulae:
Tan ? = X / 100
X = (100 x Tan ?) x 1000 in microns
Where X = Level at position B with respect to position A
? = Angle/Deviation in degrees/ Seconds (1 Degree = 60 Minutes, 1 Minute = 60 Seconds).

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:

Sl.No.
Bridge Length

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(Base length of
the reflector)
Cumulative
Bridge length
(Position of the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

reflector)
Micrometer final
reading
(Autocollimator)
Deviation for

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

each 100mm
( ? in degrees)
1.
2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
The values are analyzed and necessary modification of the surface may be recommended based on the
accuracy required on flatness. If the values observed from the micrometer are varying linearly then

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

straightness/flatness can be judged.
Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the optical instruments for non-contact measurement
of angles.
Application:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Surface Roughness
2. Quality Department

61 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Straightness

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Define ? Tolerance straightness
3. What is flatness?
4. What is autocollimator?
5. What light rays used in autocollimator?
6. What is the use of autocollimator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. What is collimating lens?
8. What are the applications of autocollimator?
9. What is meant by target graticule?
10. What is objective lens?
11. What is beam splitter?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. What is the principle of autocollimator?
13. What are the advantages of autocollimator?
14. What are the limitations of autocollimator?
15. What are the types of measurement uncertainties of autocollimator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

62 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.15 THREAD PARAMETERS MEASUREMENT USING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROFILE PROJECTOR
Aim:
To find the parameters of the given thread
Apparatus required:
1. Profile projector

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Magnification of 10 x
3. Trace paper
Diagram:

Procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Place the specimen between the work table centres and switch on the projector.
2. Place the magnification lens in the lens slot.
3. Focus the thread clearly by adjusting focusing knob to view the shadow on the screen clearly.
4. Place the tracing paper and trace the shadow profile.
5. Calculate the error in the pitch from the actual pitch.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Measure the major diameter (OD), minor diameter (ID), pitch of the thread and flank from the tracing
sheet.
63 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Determination of thread parameters:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Magnification =
Sl.No. Parameters
Magnified value
(mm)
Actual value

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
1. Outer diameter (O.D)

2. Internal diameter (I.D)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Pitch
4. Flank angle

Result:
Parameters of the given thread are determined.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the projector magnification of the profile of the specimen, and how
the image ratio differs with the distance of the projection screen.
Application:
1. Measurement of Screw

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Quality Department



1. What are the various methods used for measuring minor diameter of the thread?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. What are the various method used for measuring major diameter of the thread?
3. What are the various method used for measuring pitch diameter?
4. What is Taylor?s principle?
5. How Taylor?s principle is applied to screw thread gauge?
6. What is drunken error in screw threads?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. What is the effect of flank angle error?
8. What is major diameter?
9. What is the magnification of profile projector in our laboratory?
10. What is the working principle of profile projector?
11. What are the applications of profile projector?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. What are the advantages of profile projector?
13. What are the disadvantages of profile projector over tool maker?s microscope?
14. What is meant by crest?
15. What is meant by root?
Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice
1 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?



DEPARTMENT OF

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MECHANICAL ENGINEERING


ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

V SEMESTER - R 2013

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Register No. : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________


LABORATORY MANUAL

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


3 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DHANALAKSHMI


College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry
2. To contribute to the promotion of Academic Excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

DEPARTMENT OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rendering the services to the global needs of engineering industries by educating students to become
professionally sound mechanical engineers of excellent caliber

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To produce mechanical engineering technocrats with a perfect knowledge intellectual and hands on
experience and to inculcate the spirit of moral values and ethics to serve the society

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MISSION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MISSION
VISION

VISION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)
1. Fundamentals
To impart students with fundamental knowledge in mathematics and basic sciences that will mould

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

them to be successful professionals
2. Core competence
To provide students with sound knowledge in engineering and experimental skills to identify
complex software problems in industry and to develop a practical solution for them
3. Breadth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theory and practice which
enable them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and organization and to design
products requiring interdisciplinary skills
4. Professional skills
To bestow students with adequate training and provide opportunities to work as team that will build

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

up their communication skills, individual, leadership and supportive qualities and to enable them to
adapt and to work in ever changing technologies
5. Life-long learning
To develop the ability of students to establish themselves as professionals in mechanical
engineering and to create awareness about the need for lifelong learning and pursuing advanced

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

degrees

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

On completion of the B.E. (Mechanical) degree, the graduate will be able
a) To apply the basic knowledge of mathematics, science and engineering
b) To design and conduct experiments as well as to analyze and interpret data and apply the same in
the career or entrepreneurship
c) To design and develop innovative and creative software applications

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d) To understand a complex real world problem and develop an efficient practical solution
e) To create, select and apply appropriate techniques, resources, modern engineering and IT tools
f) To understand the role as a professional and give the best to the society
g) To develop a system that will meet expected needs within realistic constraints such as economical
environmental, social, political, ethical, safety and sustainability

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

h) To communicate effectively and make others understand exactly what they are trying to tell in both
verbal and written forms
i) To work in a team as a team member or a leader and make unique contributions and work with
coordination
j) To engage in lifelong learning and exhibit their technical skills

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

k) To develop and manage projects in multidisciplinary environments

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To familiar with different measurement equipment?s and use of this industry for quality inspection
List of Experiments
1. Tool Maker?s Microscope
2. Comparator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Sine Bar
4. Gear Tooth Vernier Caliper
5. Floating gauge Micrometer
6. Coordinate Measuring Machine
7. Surface Finish Measuring Equipment

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Vernier Height Gauge
9. Bore diameter measurement using telescope gauge
10. Bore diameter measurement using micrometer
11. Force Measurement
12. Torque Measurement

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. Temperature measurement
14. Autocollimator


1. Ability to handle different measurement tools and perform measurements in quality impulsion

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Learnt the usage of precision measuring instruments and practiced to take measurements
3. Learnt and practiced to build the required dimensions using slip gauge
4. Able to measure the various dimensions of the given specimen using the tool maker?s microscope
5. Able to find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge
6. Able to measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Learnt to determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen using Gear tooth vernier
8. Able to measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two
wire method
9. Learnt to study the construction and operation of coordinate measuring machine
10. Learnt to determine the diameter of bore by using telescopic gauge and dial bore indicator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. Able to measure the surface roughness using Talysurf instrument
12. Studied the characteristic between applied load and the output volt
13. Learnt the characteristics of developing torque and respective sensor output voltage
14. Studied the characteristics of thermocouple without compensation
15. Able to check the straightness & flatness of the given component by using Autocollimator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16. Learnt to measure the displacement using LVDT and to calibrate it with the millimeter scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OBJECTIVES

COURSE OUTCOMES

7 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

CONTENTS
Sl. No. Name of the Experiments Page No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CYCLE ? 1 EXPERIMENTS
1
Precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab ? A Study
7
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To build up the slip gauge for given dimension ? A Study
16
3
Thread parameters measurement using Tool Makers Microscope
20

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4
Calibration of dial gauge
23
5
Determination of taper angle by sine bar method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

26
6
Determination of gear tooth thickness using gear tooth vernier
29
7

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement of thread parameters using floating carriage micrometer
32
CYCLE ? 2 EXPERIMENTS
8
Measurement of various dimensions using Coordinate Measuring Machine

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

35
9
Measurement of surface roughness
39
10

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement of bores using dial bore indicator and telescopic gauge
42
11
Force measurement using load cell
46

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12
Torque measurement using strain gauge
49
13
Temperature measurement using thermocouple

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

53
14
Measurement of alignment using autocollimator
56
ADDITIONAL EXPERIMENT BEYOND THE SYLLABUS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15
Thread parameters measurement using profile projector
60
16
Displacement measurement ? linear variable differential transducer (LVDT)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

62
PROJECT WORK
65

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.01 PRECISION MEASURING INSTRUMENT YSED IN
METROLOGY LAB ? A STUDY
Aim:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To study the following instruments and their usage for measuring dimensions of given specimen
1. Vernier caliper
2. Micrometer
3. Vernier height gauge
4. Depth micrometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Universal bevel protractor
Apparatus required:
Surface plate, specimen and above instruments
Vernier caliper:
The principle of vernier caliper is to use the minor difference between the sizes two scales or divisions

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

for measurement. The difference between them can be utilized to enhance the accuracy of measurement. The
vernier caliper essentially consists of two steel rules, sliding along each other.
Parts:
Different parts of the vernier caliper are
1. Beam ? It has main scale.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Fixed jaw
3. Sliding or Moving jaw ? It has vernier scale and sliding jaw locking screw.
4. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw knife
edges for internal measurement.
5. Stem or depth bar for depth measurement

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count:
Least count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm
1 VSD = 0.98 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm

10 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ID

DEPTH

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OD
Measurement:
Given Vernier caliper can be used for external, internal depth, slot and step measurement.
Measurement principle:
When both jaws contact each other scale shows the zero reading. The finer adjustment of movable jaw

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

can be done by the fine adjustment screw. First the whole movable jaw assembly is adjusted so that the two
measuring tips just touch the part to be measured. Then the fine adjustment clamp locking screw is tightened.
Final adjustment depending upon the sense of correct feel is made by the adjusting screw. After final
adjustment has been made sliding jaw locking screw is also tightened and the reading is noted.
All the parts of the Vernier caliper are made of good quality steel and measuring faces are hardened.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Types of vernier:
Vernier caliper, electronic vernier caliper, vernier depth caliper


11 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:

Main scale
reading (MSR)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale
reading (VSR) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total reading (MSR
+ VSR)
(mm)

OD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ID

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Depth


Vernier height gauge:
Vernier height gauge is a sort of vernier caliper equipped with a special instrument suitable for height

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measurement. It is always kept on the surface plate and the use of the surfaces plates as datum surfaces is
very essential.
Least count:
Least Count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

50 VSD = 49 mm
1 VSD = 0.98 mm
Least Count (LC) = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm
Parts:
1. Base

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Beam ? It has main scale.
3. Slider ? It has a vernier scale and slider locking screw.
4. Scriber
5. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


Material:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

All the parts of vernier are made of good quality steel and the measuring faces hardened.
Types of vernier gauge:
1. Analog vernier height gauge
2. Digital vernier height gauge
3. Electronic vernier height gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Main scale reading
(MSR)(mm)
Vernier scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale reading
(VSR)(mm)
Total reading (MSR +
VSR)(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
2.
3.

13 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outside micrometer:
The micrometer essentially consists of an accurate screw having about 10 or 20 threads per cm. The
end of the screw forms one measuring tip and other measuring tip is constituted by a stationary anvil in the
base of the frame. The screw is threaded for certain length and is plain afterwards. The plain portion is called

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

spindle and its end is the measuring surface. The spindle is advanced or retracted by turning a thimble
connected to a spindle. The spindle is a slide fit over the barrel and barrel is the fixed part attached with the
frame. The barrel & thimble are graduated. The pitch of the screw threads is 0.5 mm.

Least count:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least Count (LC) = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale
= 0.5 / 50 = 0.01 mm
Parts:
1. Frame
2. Anvil

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Spindle
4. Spindle lock
5. Barrel or outside sleeve
6. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions
7. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.
14 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Measurement:
It can be used for any external measurement.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Types of micrometer:
1. Outside micrometer, 2. Inside micrometer, 3.Depth micrometer, 4. Stick micrometer, 5. Screw thread
micrometer, 6. V ? anvil micrometer, 7. Blade type micrometer, 8. Dial micrometer, 9. Bench micrometer, 10.
Tape screw operated internal micrometer, 11. Groove micrometer, 12. Digital micrometer, 13.Differential screw
micrometer, 14.Adjustable range outside micrometer.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Ratchet stop mechanism:
The object of the ratchet stop is to ensure that same level of torque is applied on the spindle while
measuring and the sense of the feel of operator is eliminated and consistent readings are obtained. By
providing this arrangement, the ratchet stop is made slip off when the torque applied to rotate the spindle
exceeds the set torque. Thus this provision ensures the application of same amount of torque during the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measurement.
Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)
Head scale reading
(HSR x LC) (mm)
Total Reading (PSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

+ HSR) (mm)
1.
2.

Depth micrometer:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Depth micrometer is a sort of micrometer which is mainly used for measuring depth of holes, so it is
named as depth micrometer.
Parts:
1. Shoulder
2. Spindle

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Spindle lock
4. Barrel or outside sleeve ? It has pitch scale.
5. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions.
6. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.
The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


Least count:
Least Count = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale = 0.50/50

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= 0.01 mm
Measurements:
It can be used for measuring the depth of holes, slots and recessed areas. The pitch of the screw thread
is 0.5 mm. The least count is 0.01 mm. Shoulder acts as a reference surface and is held firmly and
perpendicular to the centre line of the hole. For large range of measurement extension rods are used. In the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

barrel the scale is calibrated. The accuracy again depends upon the sense of touch.
Procedure:
First, calculate the least count of the instrument. Check the zero error. Measure the specimen note
down the main scale reading or the head scale reading. Note down the vernier or head scale coincidence with
main or pitch scale divisions.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) (mm)
Head Scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Coincidence (HSC)
Head scale reading
(HSR x LC) (mm)
Total Reading (PSR
+ HSR) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.


2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Universal bevel protractor:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
Bevel protractor is an instrument for measuring the angle between the two faces of a specimen. It
consists of a base plate on which a circular scale is engraved. It is graduated in degrees. An adjustment plate
is attached to a circular plate containing the vernier scale. The adjustable blade can be locked in any position.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The circular plate has 360 division divided into four parts of 90 degrees each. The adjustable parts have 24
divisions of to the right and left sides of zero reading. These scales are used according to the position of the
specimen with respect to movable scale.
Procedure:
1. Place the specimen whose taper is to be measured between the adjustable plate and movable

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

blade with one of its face parallel to the base.
2. Lock the adjustable plate in position and note down the main scale reading depending upon the
direction of rotation of adjustable plate in clockwise or anticlockwise.
3. Note the VSC to the right of zero.
4. Multiply the VSC with the least count and add to MSR to obtain the actual reading.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count:
Least Count = 2 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1
o
24 VSD = 46

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
=> 1 VSD = 23/12
LC = 2 ? 23/12 = 1/12
o
= 5? (five minutes)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Main scale reading
(MSR) (deg)
Vernier scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale reading
(VSR) (deg)
Total reading (MSR +
VSR)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(deg)
1.
2.
The angle of scriber of the vernier height gauge =
Result:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thus the various precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab are studied and the specimen
dimensions are recorded.
Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for linear, angular,
roundness and roughness measurements they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

instrument according to a specific requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).
Application:
1. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Metrology
2. Define ? Inspection
3. What are the needs of inspection in industries?
4. What are the various methods involving the measurement?
5. Define ? Precision

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Define ? Accuracy
7. Define ? Calibration
8. Define ? Repeatability
9. Define ? Magnification
10. Define ? Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. Define ? Systematic Error
12. Define ? Random Error
13. Define ? Parallax Error
14. Define ? Environmental Error
15. Define ? Cosine Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

18 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.02 BUILD UP THE SLIP GAUGE FOR GIVEN DIMENSION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? A STUDY
Aim:
To build up the slip gauge for given dimension
Apparatus required:
1. Slip gauges set

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Surface plate
3. Soft cloth
Diagram:

Description:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Slip gauge are universally accepted standard of length in industry. They are the working standard for
linear dimension. These were invented by a Swedish Engineer, C.E. Johansson. They are used
1. For direct precise measurement where the accuracy of the workpiece demand it.
2. For use with high- magnification comparators to establish the size of the gauge blocks in general
use.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Gauge blocks are also used for many other purposes such as checking the accuracy of measuring
instrument or setting up a comparator to a specific dimension, enabling a batch of component to be
quickly and accurately checked or indeed in any situation where there is need to refer to standard of
known length these blocks are rectangular.
19 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Most gauge blocks are produced from high grade steel, hardened and established by a heat treatment
process to give a high degree of dimensional stability. Gauge blocks are also manufactured from tungsten
carbide which is an extremely hard and wear resistant material. The measuring faces have a lapped finish.
The faces are perfectly flat and parallel to one another with a high degree of accuracy. Each block has an

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

extremely high dimensional accuracy at 20
o
C.
These slip gauge are available in variety of selected sets both in inch units and metric units. Letter ?E? is
used for inch units and ?M? is used for metric standard number of pieces in a set following the letter E or M. For

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

example EBI refers to a set whose blocks are in metric units and are 83 in number. Each block dimensions is
printed on anyone of its face itself the size of any required standard being made up by combining the
appropriate number of these different size blocks.
If two gauges are slid and twisted together under pressure they will firmly join together. This process,
known as wringing, is very useful because it enables several gauge blocks to be assembled together to

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

produce a required size. In fact the success of precision measurement by slip gauges depends on the
phenomenon of wringing.
First the gauge is oscillated slightly with very light pressure over other gauge so as to detect pressure at
any foreign particles between the surfaces. One gauge is placed perpendicular to other using standard
gauging pressure and rotary motion is applied until the blocks are lined up.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. Build the given dimension by wringing minimum number of slip gauges.
2. Note the given dimension and choose the minimum possible slip gauge available in the set so as to
accommodate the last decimal value. The minimum slip gauge value dimension available i.e., 1.12
mm must be chosen followed by 1.5 mm thick gauge block.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Follow the above steps to build up the slip gauge of any dimension.
Precautions:
1. Slip gauges should be handled very carefully placed gently and should never be dropped.
2. Whenever a slip gauge is being removed from the set, its dimensions are noted and must be
replaced into the set at its appropriate place only.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Correct procedure must be followed in wringing and also in removing the gauge blocks.
4. They should be cleaned well before use and petroleum jelly is applied after use.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

20 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:
Range (mm) Increment (mm) No. of pieces

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total = ____________ Pieces
Total length of slip gauge = ________ mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Given diameter Slip gauges used Obtained dimensions

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Slip gauge set is studied and the given dimensions are building up by wringing minimum number of slip
gauges.
Outcome:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Students will be able to select proper measuring instrument and know requirement of calibration, errors
in measurement etc. They can perform accurate measurements.
Application:
1. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Why C.I. is preferred material for surface plates and tables?
2. Why V ? blocks are generally manufactured in pairs?
3. Why micrometer is required to be tested for accuracy?
4. Define ? Linear Measurement
5. List the linear measuring instrument according to their accuracy.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Define ? Least Count
7. What are the uses of vernier depth gauge?
8. What are the uses of feeler gauges?
9. What are the uses of straight edge?
10. What are the uses of angle plate?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. What are the uses of V ? block?
12. What are the uses of combination square?
13. What precautions should be taken while using slip gauges?
14. What is wringing?
15. Why the slip gauges are termed as ?End standard?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

22 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.03 THREAD PARAMETERS MEASUREMENT USING
TOOL MAKERS MICROSCOPE
Aim:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To study the tool makers microscope and in the process measure the various dimensions of the given
specimen
Apparatus required:
1. Tool makers microscope
2. Specimen

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diagram:

Description:
The tool maker?s microscope is designed for measurement of parts of complex forms; for example,
profile of a tool having external threads. It can also be used for measuring centre to centre distance of the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

holes in any plane as well as the coordinates of the outline of a complex template gauge, using the
coordinates measuring system.
23 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Basically it consists of an optical head which can be adjusted vertically along the ways of supporting

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

column. The optical head can be clamped at any position by a screw. On the work table (which as a circular
base in which there are graduations) the part to be inspected is placed. The table has a compound slide by
means of which the part can be measured. For giving these two movements, there are two micrometer screws
having thimble scales and verniers. At the back of the base light source is arranged that provides horizontal
beam of light, reflected from a mirror by 90 degrees upwards towards the table. The beam of light passes

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

through the transparent glass plate on which flat plates can be checked are placed. Observations are made
through the eyepiece of the optical head.
Procedure:
1. Place the given specimen on the work table and switch on all the three light sources and adjust the
intensity of the light source until a clean image of the cross wires and specimen are seen through

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the eyepiece.
2. Coincide one of the two extreme edges between which the measurement has to be taken with
vertical or horizontal cross wires and depending upon the other image coincide with the same cross
wires by moving the above device. Note the reading.The difference between the two readings gives
the value of the required measurement.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Note the experiment specimen and the readings.
4. Tabulate the different measurements measured from the specimen.
Determination of thread parameters
Magnification =
S.No. Parameters

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Magnified value
(mm)
Actual value
(mm)
1. Outer diameter (O.D)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Internal diameter (I.D)

3. Pitch

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Flank angle


Result:
Included angle of the tool was measured using tool maker?s microscope and various dimensions of the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

given specimen are measured.


24 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the various parameters of thread and select proper measuring
instrument and know requirement of calibration, errors in measurement etc. They can perform accurate
measurements.
Application:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Machine Shop
2. Quality Department


1. What is meant by tool maker?s microscope?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. What is the light used in tool maker?s microscope?
3. What are the various characteristics that you would measure in a screw thread?
4. What are the instruments that are required for measuring screw thread?
5. Define ? Pitch
6. What are the causes of pitch error?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Define ? Flank
8. What are the effects of flank angle error?
9. What is progressive error?
10. What is periodic error?
11. What is drunken error?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. What is erratic error?
13. What are the applications of tool maker?s microscope?
14. What are the limitations of tool maker?s microscope?
15. What are the advantages of tool maker?s microscope?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

25 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.04 CALIBRATION OF DIAL GAUGE USING SLIP GAUGE
Aim:
To find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Apparatus required:
Dial gauge, magnetic stand, slip gauge, and surface plate
Diagram:

Description:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The dial test indicator is a precision measuring instrument which can convert linear motion into angular
motion by means of transmission mechanics of rack and pinion and can be used to measure linear vibration
and errors of shape.
This instrument has the features such as good appearance, compact size, light weight, high precision,
reasonable construction, constant measuring face etc. Rigidity of all parts is excellent. Probe is tipped with

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

carbide balls. A shock proof mechanism is provided for those with larger measuring range.

26 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Types of dial indicator:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Plunger type
2. Lever type
Plunger type dial indicator has a resolution counter and each division in main scale is 0.01 mm. In lever
type dial test indicator is replaced by ball type stylus.
Procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Fix the dial gauge to the stand rigidly and place the stand on the surface plate.
2. Set the plunger of dial gauge to first touch the upper surface of standard slip gauge and set indicator
to zero.
3. Raise then the plunger by pulling the screw above the dial scale.
4. Place the standard slip gauge underneath the plunger.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Release the plunger and let it to touch the standard slip gauge.
6. Note the reading on the dial scale.
Formulae:
The standard error of dial gauge is calculated by the formula

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
S.No.
Slip gauge reading ?x?
(mm)
Dial gauge reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
(x? - x)
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x? (x? - x)
1.
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Thus the accuracy and standard error of dial gauge is found. The standard error of given dial gauge is
__________.

27 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Students will be able to check the variation in tolerance during the inspection process of a
machined part, measure the deflection of a beam or ring under laboratory conditions, as well as many
other situations where a small measurement needs to be registered or indicated

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Milling Machine
2. Analog versus digital/electronic readout

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is comparator?
2. What are the types of comparators?
3. What is the LC for comparators?
4. What are the applications of comparator?
5. What is meant by plunger?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. What are the types of dial indicators?
7. Why a revolution counter is not provided in lever type dial test indicator?
8. Draw a line diagram of the operating mechanism of plunger type dial test indicator.
9. Explain the term magnification of a dial indicator.
10. What are the uses of dial test indicator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. What are the practical applications of dial test indicator?
12. What precautions should be taken while using dial test indicator?
13. What are the desirable qualities of a dial test indicator?
14. What are the advantages of dial test indicator?
15. What are the limitations of dial test indicator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16. Distinguish between comparator and measuring instrument.
17. What are the advantages of electrical comparator?
18. What are the advantages of optical comparator?
19. What are the uses of comparator?
20. What are the advantages and disadvantages of mechanical comparator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

28 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.05 DETERMINATION OF TAPER ANGLE BY SINE BAR
METHOD

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Aim:
To measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare
Apparatus required:
Sine bar, slip gauges, dial gauge with stand, micrometer, surface plate, bevel protractor, vernier caliper
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
The sine bar principle uses the ratio of the length of two sides of a right triangle. It may be noted that
devices operating on sine principle are capable of ?self-generation?. The measurement is restricted to 45
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

from
accuracy point of view. Sine bar itself is not a measuring instrument.
Accuracy requirements of sine bar:
1. The axes of the rollers must be parallel to each other and the centre distance L must be precisely
known.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. The sine bar must be flat and parallel to the plane connecting the axes of the rollers.
3. The rollers must be of identical diameters and must have within a close tolerance.


29 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. Fix the dial gaugeon the magnetic stand and place the magnetic stand on the surface plate.Check
the parallelism of the sine bar.
2. Place the given specimen above the sine bar and place the dial gauge on top of the specimen.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Adjustthe dial gauge for zero deflection.
3. Raise the front end of the sine bar with slip gauges until the work surface is parallel to the datum
surface.
4. Check the parallelism using dial gauge.
5. Measure the distance between the centres of the sine bar rollers as ?L? and note the height of the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

slip gauge as ?H?.
6. Note the included angle of the specimen.
Formulae:
Sin ? = H/L where ? = Included angle of the specimen
H = Height of slip gauges

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

L = Distance between the centre of rollers
Tabulation:
S.No. L (mm) H (mm) Taper angle ( ?)
1.
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.

Result:
The taper angle of the given specimen using sine bar was found to be =
Outcome:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for angular measurements
and they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a specific
requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).

Application:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Flat Surface
2. Granite


30 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. List out the various angle measuring instruments.
2. What is the working principles sine bar?
3. How is a sine bar used to measure the angle?
4. What is the application of sine bar?
5. What is the material of sine bar?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Why sine bar is not preferred to use for measuring angles more than 45
0
?
7. What are the features of sine bar?
8. A 100 mm sine bar is to be set up to an angle of 33

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

0
, determine the slip gauges needed from 87
pieces set.
9. What are the various instruments used for measuring angles?
10. What is sine bar?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. How sine bar is used for angle measurement?
12. Explain how sine bar is used to measure angle of small size component.
13. Explain how sine bar is used to measure angle of large size component.
14. What are the various types of sine bar?
15. What are the limitations of sine bar?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16. What is sine center?
17. What is sine table?
18. What are the possible sources of errors in angular measurement by sine bar?
19. What are angle gauges?
20. How angle gauges are used for measuring angles?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

31 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.06 DETERMINATION OF GEAR TOOTH THICKNESS
USING GEAR TOOTH VERNIER
Aim:
To determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen and to draw the graph between the tooth
number and the error in thickness

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Apparatus required:
Gear tooth vernier, specimen, surface plate and vernier caliper
Diagram:

Description:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The tooth thickness, in general, is measured at pitch circle since gear tooth thickness varies from the tip
to the base circle of the tooth. This is possible only when there is an arrangement to fix that position for this
measurement by the gear tooth vernier. It has two vernier scales; one is vertical and other is horizontal.
Procedure:
32 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Measure initially the outside diameter of the given gear specimen by means of a vertical calculation
of vernier caliper. Note the number of teeth. Calculate the module (m) using the formula.

M = OD/ (Z+2) where z ? number of teeth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M - Module
2. Calculate the theoretical tooth thickness (t) by t = z * m* sin (90/z).
3. Set the vernier scale for the height and tighten.
4. Measure the thickness of each tooth using the horizontal scale. This is measured thickness. It can
be positive or negative.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

H = m x [1+ Z/2 (1- Cos 90/Z)]
5. Calculate the error in the tooth thickness i.e,1. measured thickness ? Theoretical thickness
6. Draw the graph between the tooth number and the error in thickness.
Tabulation:
Tooth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Number
Measured Thickness
(mm)
Theoretical Thickness (mm)
Error in tooth thickness

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
1
2
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tooth
Number
MSR
(mm)
VSC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VSR
(mm)
TR
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1
2
3

Graph:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tooth No.
33 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
The theoretical experiment value of gear tooth thickness is obtained and graph is drawn between error
and tooth number in tooth thickness
Theoretical tooth thickness =
Experimental tooth thickness =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Error in tooth thickness =
Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the basic measurement units and able to calibrate various
measuring parameters of the gear.
Application:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Gear Component
2. Mining

1. Calculate the setting of a gear tooth vernier caliper for a straight spur gear having 40 teeth and
module 4.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. What is the importance of chordal depth?
3. Define ? Chordal width
4. How is the actual profile of the gear tooth determined?
5. What are the manufacturing errors in gear element?
6. Define ? Addendum

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Define ? Dedendum
8. Define ? Flank of tooth
9. Define ? Pitch
10. Define ? Pitch Circle
11. Define ? Crest of tooth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. Define ? Root of tooth
13. Define ? Base Circle
14. Define ? Module
15. Define ? Angle of Obliquity

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

34 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.07 MEASUREMENT OF THREAD PARAMETER USING
FLOATING CARRIAGE MICROMETER
Aim:
To measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two wire
method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Apparatus required:
1. Floating carriage micrometer
2. Standard wire
3. Given specimen (screw thread)
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description of floating carriage micrometer:
It consists of three main units. A base casting carries a pair of centres on which threaded work piece is
to be mounted. Another carriage capable of moving towards centre is mounted exactly above. In this carriage
one head with thimble to measure up to 0.002 mm is provided and at the other side of head a fiducial indicator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

is provided to indicate zero position.



35 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. For two wire method, place the standard wire over a thread of the screw at opposite sides.
2. For three wire method, place two standard wires on two successive threads and the third wire
placed opposite sides of the thread.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Measure the diameter over wires (M) using floating carriage micrometer.
4. Repeat this procedure at various positions of the screw and take different readings.
Formulae:
1. For best wire size, d = P / 2 Cos (x/2)
Where, P = Pitch

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

d= wire size
x = angle between two threads
= 60
o
for metric thread

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Actual effective diameter, E.A = M ? 3d + 0.866 p
3. Nominal effective diameter, EN = D ? 0.648 p
4. Max. wire size = 1.01 p
5. Min. wire size = 0.505 p
6. Best wire size = 0.577 p

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M = Diameter over wires
P = Pitch of thread
For metric thread:
Actual effective diameter (EA) = M ? 3d + 0.866 p
Where d = actual diameter of wire

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of actual and nominal effective diameter of the screw thread:
Sl.No.
Nominal
Diameter (D)
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diameter over
wire ?M?
(mm)
Actual eff.
Diameter E.A

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
Nominal eff.
Diameter E.N
(mm)
Error in effective

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

diameter
(E.A ? E.N)
(mm)
1.
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.



36 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Thus the actual and nominal effective diameter is measured using three wire method and the error in
effective diameter of screw is determined.
Outcome:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for roundness
measurements and they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a
specific requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).
Application:
1. Wholse

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Maxxis Rubber India

1. Define ? Pitch
2. Define ? Flank Angle
3. What is plug gauge?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. What is meant by micrometer?
5. What is meant by indicator?
6. What is best ? size wire?
7. Calculate the diameter of the best wire for an M 20 x 25 screws.
8. What are the different corrections to be applied in the measurement of effective diameter by the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

method of wire?
9. What is floating carriage micrometer?
10. What are the uses of floating carriage micrometer?
11. What are the methods are used for measuring effective diameter?
12. Define ? Effective Diameter

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. Define ? Major Diameter
14. Define ? Minor Diameter
15. What are the effects of flank error?
16. Define ? Rake Angle
17. Define ? Pitch Cylinder

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

18. What are the effects of pitch error?
19. Define ? Pitch Diameter
20. What is meant by angle of thread?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

37 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.08 MEASUREMENT OF VARIOUS DIMENSIONS USING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COORDINATE MEASURING MACHINE
Aim:
1. To study the construction and operation of coordinate measuring machine
2. To measure the specified dimensions of the given component
Instruments used:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Coordinate measuring machine, vernier calipers
Diagram:

Theory:
A coordinate measuring machine (CMM) is a 3D device for measuring the physical and geometrical

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

characteristics of an object. This machine may be manually controlled by an operator or it may be computer
controlled. Measurements are defined by a probe attached to the three moving axis of this machine X, Y and Z
axes. A coordinate measuring machine (CMM) is also a device used in manufacturing and assembly
processes to test a part or assembly against the design intent. By precisely recording the X, Y and Z
coordinates of the target, points are generated which can be analyzed via regression algorithms for the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

construction of features. These points are collected by using a probe that is positioned manually by an
38 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

operator or automatically via direct computer control (DCC). DCC CMMs can be programmed to repeatedly
measure identical parts, thus a CMM is a specialized form of industrial robot.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Parts:
Coordinate measuring machine include three main components:
1. The main structures which include three axes of motion.
2. Probing system
3. Data collection and reduction system ? typically includes a machine controller, desktop computer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

and application software
Machine description:
1. In modern machines, the gantry type superstructure has two legs and is often called a bridge. This
moves freely along the granite table with one leg following a guide rail attached to one side of the
granite table. The opposite leg simply rests on the granite table following the vertical surface

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

contour.
2. Air bearings are fixed for ensuring friction free travel. Compressed air is forced through a series of
very small holes in a flat bearing surface to provide a smooth but controlled air cushion on which the
CMM can move in a frictionless manner.
3. The movement of the bridge along the granite table forms one axis of the XY plane. The bridge of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the gantry contains a carriage which traverses between the inside and outside legs and forms the
other X or Y horizontal axis.
4. The third axis of movement (Z axis) is provided by the addition of a vertical quill or spindle which
moves up and down through the center of the carriage. The touch probe forms the sensing device
on the end of the quill.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. The movement of the X, Y and Z axes fully describes the measuring envelope. Some touch probes
are themselves powered rotary devices with the probe tip able to swivel vertically through 90
degrees and through a full 360 degrees rotation.
Uses:
They are generally used for:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Dimensional measurement
2. Profile measurement
3. Angularity or orientation measurement
4. Depth mapping
5. Digitizing mapping

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Shaft measurement
39 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

The machines are available in a wide range of sizes and designs with a variety of different probe
technologies. They can be operated manually or automatically through direct computer control (DCC). They

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

are offered in various configurations such as bench top, free ? standing, handheld and portable.
Procedure:
1. Take at least 8 points on sphere ball attached to the granite table.
2. Fix the object whose dimension needs to be measured using the jigs and fixtures.
3. Using joystick, move the probe whose tip is made of ruby slowly and carefully to the surface whose

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measurements have to be taken.
4. Touch the probe at two places for measurement of a line (starting and ending point).
5. Touch the probe at two places for measurement of a circular profile and for a cylinder touch the
probe at 8 points.
6. Measure the same profiles again with vernier calipers (length of line, circle diameter, cylinder

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

diameter) to compare the two readings.
Comments:
1. The machine should be calibrated every time when it is being used.
2. While measuring the profiles, the probe should be moved very slowly as it may damage the ruby if
hit with a high force.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Care should be taken while performing experiment so that the granite table of the machines should
get any scratches.
4. ?Retract distance? should be fixed according to the space available in the near vicinity of the profile
measurement area.
Observation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No. Feature
CMM reading
(mm)
Vernier reading
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Form error
(mm)
Difference in two
readings (mm)
1 Circle -1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2 Circle -2
3 Circle -3
4 Line
5 Arc
6

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Cone - Diameter
Cone ? Vertex angle
Cone ? Height
7
Cylinder ? Diameter

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Cylinder ? Height


40 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Thus the different profile of given object are measured using coordinate measuring machine
Outcome:
Students will be able to measures the geometry of physical objects by sensing discrete points on the
surface of the object with a probe and they will be able to know the Various types of probes are used in CMMs,

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

including mechanical, optical, laser, and white light.
Application:
1. Surface Measuring Equipment
2. Photo transistor

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What are the types of measuring machine?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. What is CMM?
3. What are the types of CMM?
4. What are the advantages of CMM?
5. What are the limitations of CMM?
6. What are the possible sources of error in CMM?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. What is the use of universal measuring machine?
8. What are the applications of CMM?
9. What is the working principle of three axis measuring machine?
10. What is image shearing microscope?
11. What is the use of electronic inspection and measuring machine?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. What are the types of electronic inspection and measuring machine?
13. What is CMM probe?
14. What are the three main probes are available?
15. What are the types of stylus?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

41 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.09 MEASUREMENT OF SURFACE ROUGHNESS UING
TALYSURF INSTRUMENT
Aim:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To measure the surface roughness using Talysurf instrument
Apparatus required:
Talysurf instrument, work piece, surface plate
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Theory:
On any finished surface, imperfections are bound to be there and these take the form of a succession of
hills and valleys which vary both in height and in spacing and result in a kind of texture which in appearance or
feel is often characteristic of the machining process and accompanying defects. The several kinds of
departures are there on the surface and these are due to various causes.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

42 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Methods of measuring surface roughness:
1. Surface inspection of comparison methods

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Direct instrument measurements
In comparative methods the surface texture is assessed by observation of the surface. But these
methods are not reliable as they can be misleading, if comparison is not made with surfaces produced by
same techniques. The various methods available under comparison method are: (i) Touch Inspection
(ii)Scratch Inspection (iii) Microscopic Inspection (iv) Visual Inspection (v) Surface Photographs (vi) Reflected

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Light Intensity Direct Instrument Measurements enable to determine a numerical value of the surface finish of
any surface. Nearly all instruments used are stylus probe type of instruments. This operates on electrical
principle.
Procedure:
1. Place the finished component on the surface plate.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Fix the Talysurf tester to the vernier height gauge using adopter at a convenient height.
3. Make sure that the stylus probe touches the work piece.
4. Fix the sampling length in the tester.
5. Press the power button so that the probe moves on the surface to and fro.
6. Take the readings of the surface roughness directly from the instrument.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Repeat the above process for the remaining specimen and tabulate the readings.
Precautions:
1. The surface to be tested should be cleaned properly.
2. The tester should be fixed to the height gauge properly so that the movement of the probe is exactly
parallel to the surface of work.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Make sure that the probe gently touches the work.
Tabulation:
S.No
Measurement roughness value,
?m

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sample direction Ra, Rz
Average Ra Average Rz Grade
1.
2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

43 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Thus the surface roughness is checked for different specimens by Talysurf.
Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for roughness

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measurements they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a specific
requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).
Application:
1. Machine Shop
2. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Actual Size?
2. What is meant by normal surface?
3. What is meant by profilo-graph?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. What is Tomlinson surface meter?
5. What is meant by profile?
6. What are the factors affecting surface roughness?
7. Why the surface texture is control?
8. Define ? Lay

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. Define ? Surface Texture
10. Define ? Flaws
11. What is sampling length?
12. What are the methods used for evaluating surface finish?
13. What is form factor?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. What are the methods used for measuring surface finish?
15. How will you differentiate smooth surface from flat surface?
16. How surface finish is designated on drawings?
17. Define ? Primary Texture
18. Define ? Secondary Texture

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

19. What are the types of instrument used for measuring surface texture?
20. Define ? waviness

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

44 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.10 MEASUREMENT OF BORE USING DIAL BORE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

INDICATOR AND TELESCOPIC GAUGE
Aim:
To determine the diameter of bore by using telescopic gauge and checking the same by using dial bore
indicator
Apparatus required:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Work piece, vernier caliper, telescopic gauge and dial gauge indicator set with anvil.
Diagram:

45 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
Bore gauge measurement:
1. Select the extension rod and washer according to the bore diameter to be measured
2. Fix the suitable extension rod and washer with the bore gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Fix the dial gauge to the bore gauge in its position
4. Insert the bore gauge inside the bore to be measured and hold the gauge in parallel o the axis of the
bore. Ensure that the tips on either side of the bore gauge are in touch with inner wall of the bore
5. Note down the reading in the dial gauge and withdraw the bore gauge from the bore
6. Hold the measuring tips of bore gauge between the spindle and anvil of a micrometer and compress

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the tips by rotating the thimble till the reading reaches the same one as noted earlier
7. Observe and record the micrometer reading as the bore diameter to be measured
Telescopic gauge measurement:
1. Select the telescopic gauge according to the bore diameter to be measured
2. Press the telescopic spindles in the telescopic gauge lock them by locking screw

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Insert the telescopic gauge inside thee bore to be measured. Release the locking screw to expand
the telescopic spindles outwards inside the bore
4. Hold the telescopic gauge in parallel to the axis of bore axis and ensure that the tips of telescopic
spindles are in touch with the inner wall of the bore
5. Lock the telescopic spindles and withdraw it from the bore

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

46 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

6. Measure the expanded length of the telescopic spindles using micrometer record them as the inner
diameter of the bore
Practical observations:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Rough measurement of bore using Telescopic gauge:
Least count of micrometer = 0.01 mm
Sl.No.
Micrometer reading
Total reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(MSR + TSC * LC) ( mm) Main scale reading (MSR)
(mm)
Thimble scale
coincidence
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.

Average reading = ________ mm
Accurate measuring using Bore gauge
Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Micrometer
reading
(d) (mm)
Bore gauge
reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(R1) (mm)
Work piece reading
(R2) (mm)
Final reading
d+ (R1 ? R2) * 0.01

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
1.
2.

Accurate internal diameter of hole using bore gauge = ______ mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result
1. Internal diameter of the work piece by using telescopic gauge is ________mm
2. Diameter obtained by using dial gauge indicator is __________________mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Students will be able to measure a bore's size, by transferring the internal dimension to a remote
measuring tool (Telescopic gauge).
Application:
1. Automobile

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Quality Department


47 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by bore diameter?
2. What is gauge?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. What is meant by measurement?
4. What is telescope gauge?
5. What is bore gauge?
6. What is contact point?
7. What is the principle of bore gauge?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. What are the applications of telescopic gauge?
9. What types of materials are used in telescopic gauge?
10. What are the types of instrument used to measure bore diameter?
11. What are the applications of bore gauge?
12. What are the advantages of bore gauge over telescopic gauge?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. What are the limitations of bore gauge?
14. What is the working principle of telescopic gauge?
15. What are the disadvantages of telescopic gauge?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

48 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.11 MEASUREMENT OF FORCE USING LOAD CELL
Aim:
To study the characteristic between applied load and the output voltage
Apparatus required:
1. Trainer kit

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Multimeter
3. Load cell sensor with setup
4. Weights (5 kg)
5. Power chord
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Formulae:
Error (%) = {Applied Voltage ? (Displayed Load)/ Applied Load)} x 100
Block diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Applied DC
Load O/P

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DC Excitation source Transducer
Transducer
Instrumentation
Amplifier
Gain Amplifier DVM

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

49 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Interfacing and calibration procedure:
1. Interface the load cell 9 pin ?D? type male connector to 9 pin D type female connector, fixed on the
module.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. First unload the beam and nullify the display by using zero adjustment POT
3. Apply the maximum load of 5 kg to the beam and adjust the display to 5 kg by using gain
adjustment POT.
4. After the initial adjustment, the unit should not be disturbed until the completion of the experiment.
Safety precaution:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. During offset adjustment, the beam should not be loaded.
2. The beam should not be disturbed during the experiment.
3. Remove the load from the beam, after completion of the experiment; otherwise wire wound on the
strain gauge will get damaged.
4. If you are getting an unsatisfactory reading, then vary the zero and span POT minimum to

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

maximum.
5. Maximum load should not exceed 5 kg.
6. Once calibrated, the setting should not be distributed till the end of the experiment.
Procedure:
1. Install the load cell module and interface the 9 pin D connector with kit.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Connect the multimeter in volt mode across T5 and GND for the output voltage measurement.
3. Switch on the module.
4. Initially, unload the beam and nullify the display by using zero adjustment POT (zero calibration).
5. Apply the maximum load of 5 kg to the beam and adjust the display to 5 kg by using gain
adjustment POT (gain calibration).

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Now apply the load to the beam, a force will develop on the beam and measure the output voltage
(V) across T5 and GND.
7. Gradually increase the load and note down the output voltage (V) and applied load.
8. Tabulate the values of displayed load and applied voltage.
9. Plot a graph between applied load and output voltage (V).

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Note: When 1 kg load is applied to the beam, the displayed voltage is 1 kg.


50 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Applied load
(kg)
Output voltage
(V)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Displayed load
(kg)
% Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Graph:
1. Applied load (kg) Vs Output Voltage (V)
2. Actual load (kg) Vs % Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Thus the characteristic between applied load and the output voltage was studied.
Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the Sensor device (electro-mechanical) which help us to measure
a physical parameter (such as temperature, pressure, force, acceleration etc.) by providing analog input to get

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

digital output.
Application:
1. Machine Shop
2. Automobile

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by force?
2. Define ? Wheat stone bridge circuit
3. Define ? Load
4. What is meant by deflector?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. What is meant by force indicator?
6. Define ? Instrumentation
7. How instrumentations are classified?
8. Define ? Transducer
9. What is electrical transducer?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. How transducers are classified?



Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

51 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.12 MEASUREMENT OF TORQUE USING STRAIN
GAUGE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Aim:
To study the characteristics of the developing torque and the signal conditioned sensor output voltage
Apparatus required:
1. Trainer kit
2. Digital Multimeter (V)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Torque sensor setup
4. Weights (100 gram x 10 Nos.)
5. Power chord
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Interfacing and calibration procedure:
1. Interface the torque sensor 9 pin. ?D? type male connector to ?9? pin ?D? type female connector, fixed
on the module.
2. First, unload the beam and nullify the display by using zero adjustment POT.
3. Apply the maximum load of 1 kg to the beam and adjust the display to 9.81 Nm by using adjustment

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

POT.
4. After this initial calibration, the unit should not be disturbed until the completion of the experiment.
52 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Safety precaution:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. During offset adjustment, the beam should not be loaded.
2. The beam should not be disturbed during the experiment.
3. Remove the beam from the shaft, after completion of the experiment otherwise wire wound on the
strain gauge will get damaged.
4. If the displayed torque reading are in negative, change the beam connections in opposite to

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

previously connected direction.
5. If you are getting an unsatisfactory reading, then vary the zero and span POT minimum to
maximum.
6. Maximum load should not exceed 1 kg.
7. Once calibrated, the setting should not be disturbed till the end of this experiment.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. Install the torque sensor setup and interface with kit.
2. Switch ?ON? the module.
3. Connect the Multimeter in millivolts mode T2 and T3 for bridge output voltage measurement POT.
4. First, unload the beam and nullify the bridge output voltage by using zero adjustment POT.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. By applying load to the beam, torque will develop on the shaft and measure the bridge output
voltage (mV) across T2 and T3
6. Gradually increase the force by applying load and note down the bridge output voltage (mV).
7. Tabulate the readings and plot a graph between developed torque versus bridge output voltage
(mV).

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Formulae:
Error (%) = {(Actual Torque ? Theoretical Torque)/ Theoretical Torque} x 100
Theoretical Torque = mass (m) x acceleration due to gravity (g) x radial distance
= 1 kg x 9.81 m/s
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x 1 m
= 9.81 Nm
Tabulation:
Sl.No. Theoretical Torque
(Nm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Bridge output voltage
(mV)


Model graph:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The graph between developed torque and bridge output voltage is drawn
53 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Developed torque (Nm) Vs Output Voltage (V)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sample reading:
Developed Torque (Nm) = 9.81 Nm
Output Voltage (V) = 5 mV
Result:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thus the characteristics of the torque developed which is due to force applied to beam and the bridge
output voltage were studied and graph is plotted.
Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the Sensor device (electro-mechanical) which helps us to
measure the strain by providing analog input to digital output.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Machine Shop
2. Turbine

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

54 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Torque
2. Define ? Twist
3. What are the methods used for measuring torque?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Define ? Strain Gauge
5. What is prony brake?
6. What are the modern devices used for measuring torque?
7. What are the elements of strain gauge?
8. What is the use of slip ring for measuring torque?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. What is slip ring?
10. What are the types of torque?
11. What are the types of dynamometer?
12. What are the applications of dynamometer?
13. What are the features of dynamometer?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. What is gauge factor?
15. What are the types of torque measurement?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

55 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.13 MEASUREMENT OF TEMPERATURE USING
THERMOCOUPLE
Aim:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To study the characteristics of thermocouple without compensation
Apparatus required:
1. Trainer kit
2. Thermocouple
3. Water bath

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Thermometer
5. Digital multi meter
6. Power chord
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. Connect the two terminals of the thermocouple across T1 & T2.
2. Position the switch ?SW1? towards ?NO?.
3. Switch ?ON? the unit and note the displayed temperature.
4. If there is any difference in displayed temperature at room temperature, adjust the offset knob ?zero?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

to set 0
o
C in display.
5. Place the Multimeter across T7 and T8.
6. Insert the thermocouple and thermometer into water bath.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Switch ?ON? the water bath.
8. Note the actual temperature in thermometer and displayed temperature simultaneously.
9. Tabulate the reading and calculate % error using the above formula
56 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. Plot the graph actual temperature Vs % error
Formulae:
Error (%) = {(Displayed Temperature ? Actual Temp)/ Actual Temp} x 100

Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Actual Temperature
(
o
C)
Displayed Temperature

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(
o
C)
% Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Graph
Temperature Vs % Error
Result:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thus the characteristics of the thermocouple without compensation were studied and graph is plotted.
Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the Sensor device (electro-mechanical) which help us to measure
a physical parameter (such as temperature) by providing analog input.
Application:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Thermocouple
2. Heat generation

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

57 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by total radiation pyrometer?
2. How the mercury in glass thermometer worked?
3. What are the sources of error in thermocouple?
4. Define ? Resistance
5. Define ? Temperature detector

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Define ? Temperature
7. What are the types of instrument used for measuring temperature?
8. What are the types of electrical temperature sensors?
9. What is optical sensor?
10. What are the applications of liquid in gas thermometer?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. What are the applications of bimetallic thermometer?
12. What is vapour pressure thermometer?
13. What is thermocouple?
14. What are the types of metal are used in combination to form thermocouples?
15. What are the advantages of thermocouple?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16. What are the disadvantages of thermocouple?
17. Define ? Resistance Thermometer
18. Define ? Thermistor
19. What is the use radiation pyrometer?
20. What are the advantages of optical pyrometer?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

58 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.14 MEASUREMENT OF ALIGNMENT USING
AUTOCOLLIMATOR
Aim:
To check the straightness & flatness of the given component by using Autocollimator
Apparatus required:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Autocollimator, work piece/ object to be tested
Diagram:

Theory:
1. Definition of straightness ? A plane is to be said straight over a given length if the variation or

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

distance of its point from two planes perpendicular to each other and parallel to the generation
direction at of the line remain within specified tolerance limits. The reference planes being so
chosen that their intersection is parallel to the straight line joining two points suitably located on the
line to be tested and two points being close ends of the length to be measured.
2. Principle of the Autocollimator-A cross line ?target? graticule is positioned at the focal plane of a

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

telescope objective system with the intersection of the cross line on the optical axis, i.e. at the
principal focus. When the target graticule is illuminated, rays of light diverging from the intersection
point reach the objective via a beam splitter and are projected from the objective as parallel pencils
of light. In this mode the optical system is operating as a collimator.
59 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. A flat reflector placed in front of the objective and exactly normal to the optical axis reflects the
parallel pencils of light back along their original paths. They are then brought to focus in the plane of
the target graticule and exactor coincident with its intersection. A proportion of the returned light
passes straight through the beam splitter and the return image of the target cross line is therefore

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

visible through the eyepiece. In this mode, the optical system is operating as a telescope focused at
infinity.
4. If the reflector is tilted through a small angle the reflected pencils of light will be deflected by twice
the angle of tilt (principle of reflection) and will be brought to focus in the plane of target graticule but
linearly displaced from the actual target cross lines by an amount 2?* f.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. An optical system of an autocollimator consists of a light source, condensers, semi-reflectors, target
wire, collimating lens and reflector apart from microscope eyepiece. A target wire takes place of the
light source into the focal plane of the collimator lenses. Both the target wire and the reflected image
are seen through a microscope eyepiece. The eyepiece incorporates a scale graduated in 0.05mm
interval and a pair of parallel setting wires which can be adjusted. Movements of wires are effected

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

through a micrometer, one rotation of the drum equals to one scale division movement of the wires.
The instrument is designed to be rotated through 90 degrees about its longitudinal axis so that the
angles in both horizontal and vertical planes are measured.
Autocollimator:
It is an instrument designed to measure small angular deflections & maybe used in conjunction with a

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

plane mirror or other reflecting surface. An autocollimator is essentially an infinity telescope and a collimator
combined into one instrument. This is an optical instrument used for the measurement of small angular
differences. For small angular measurements, autocollimator provides a very sensitive and accurate approach.
The principle on which this instrument works is given below. O is a point source of light placed at the
principal focus of a collimating lens. The rays of light from O, incident on the lens, travels as a parallel beam of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

light. If this beam strikes a plane reflector which is normal to the optical axis, it will be reflected back along its
own path and refocused at the same point O. If the plane reflector be tilted through a small angle ?, then
parallel beam will be deflected through twice this angle, and will be brought to focus at O? in the same plane at
a distance x from O. Obviously.
OO?=x=2?.f, where f is the focal length of the lens.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Applications:
1. For aligning circular & flat surfaces in machining
2. Alignment of beams & columns in construction buildings / industries, steel structures
3. To measure the straightness, flatness and parallelism

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

60 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Procedure:
1. Make the distance of 100mm internal on the work piece.
2. Set the cross wire so that two cross will coincide.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Set the mirror so that the cross wire is visible.
4. Move the reflector on next 100mm mark and adjust it to see reflection of cross wire.
5. Take the reading of reflected crosswire deviated or moved up or down.
6. Measure the distance between two crosswire.
Formulae:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tan ? = X / 100
X = (100 x Tan ?) x 1000 in microns
Where X = Level at position B with respect to position A
? = Angle/Deviation in degrees/ Seconds (1 Degree = 60 Minutes, 1 Minute = 60 Seconds).

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:

Sl.No.
Bridge Length
(Base length of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the reflector)
Cumulative
Bridge length
(Position of the
reflector)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Micrometer final
reading
(Autocollimator)
Deviation for
each 100mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

( ? in degrees)
1.
2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
The values are analyzed and necessary modification of the surface may be recommended based on the
accuracy required on flatness. If the values observed from the micrometer are varying linearly then
straightness/flatness can be judged.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the optical instruments for non-contact measurement
of angles.
Application:
1. Surface Roughness

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Quality Department

61 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Straightness
2. Define ? Tolerance straightness

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. What is flatness?
4. What is autocollimator?
5. What light rays used in autocollimator?
6. What is the use of autocollimator?
7. What is collimating lens?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. What are the applications of autocollimator?
9. What is meant by target graticule?
10. What is objective lens?
11. What is beam splitter?
12. What is the principle of autocollimator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. What are the advantages of autocollimator?
14. What are the limitations of autocollimator?
15. What are the types of measurement uncertainties of autocollimator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

62 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.15 THREAD PARAMETERS MEASUREMENT USING
PROFILE PROJECTOR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Aim:
To find the parameters of the given thread
Apparatus required:
1. Profile projector
2. Magnification of 10 x

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Trace paper
Diagram:

Procedure:
1. Place the specimen between the work table centres and switch on the projector.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Place the magnification lens in the lens slot.
3. Focus the thread clearly by adjusting focusing knob to view the shadow on the screen clearly.
4. Place the tracing paper and trace the shadow profile.
5. Calculate the error in the pitch from the actual pitch.
6. Measure the major diameter (OD), minor diameter (ID), pitch of the thread and flank from the tracing

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

sheet.
63 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Determination of thread parameters:
Magnification =

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No. Parameters
Magnified value
(mm)
Actual value
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Outer diameter (O.D)

2. Internal diameter (I.D)

3. Pitch

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Flank angle

Result:
Parameters of the given thread are determined.
Outcome:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Students will be able to understand the projector magnification of the profile of the specimen, and how
the image ratio differs with the distance of the projection screen.
Application:
1. Measurement of Screw
2. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What are the various methods used for measuring minor diameter of the thread?
2. What are the various method used for measuring major diameter of the thread?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. What are the various method used for measuring pitch diameter?
4. What is Taylor?s principle?
5. How Taylor?s principle is applied to screw thread gauge?
6. What is drunken error in screw threads?
7. What is the effect of flank angle error?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. What is major diameter?
9. What is the magnification of profile projector in our laboratory?
10. What is the working principle of profile projector?
11. What are the applications of profile projector?
12. What are the advantages of profile projector?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. What are the disadvantages of profile projector over tool maker?s microscope?
14. What is meant by crest?
15. What is meant by root?
Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

64 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


Expt.No.16 MEASUREMENT OF DISPLACEMENT USING LVDT
Aim:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To measure the displacement using LVDT and to calibrate it with the millimeter scale reading
Apparatus required:
1. LVDT 2. Patch cords 3. Transducer with digital indicator 4. Millimeter scale
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Principle:
Linear variable differential transducer provides an AC voltage output that is proportional to the
displacement of core passing through the winding. It consists of three coils. The primary coil is energized by
external AC power source. This mutual ? inductance device making use of three coils is generally arranged on
a cylindrical, concentric, non-magnetic form. Output amplitude and phase depend on the relative coupling

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

between the two pick-up coils and the power.
Within limits, on either side of the null position, core displacement results in a proportional output. This
phase relation existing between power source and output changes 180
o
through null is relatively simple, low

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

priced and mechanically steady. It is free from temperature effects unlike strain gauge. High output, high
sensitivity, less friction and better linearity are its advantages.

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice
1 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

V SEMESTER - R 2013

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No. : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LABORATORY MANUAL
2 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

DHANALAKSHMI

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.


1. To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. To contribute to the promotion of Academic Excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels
3. To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING


Rendering the services to the global needs of engineering industries by educating students to become
professionally sound mechanical engineers of excellent caliber

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To produce mechanical engineering technocrats with a perfect knowledge intellectual and hands on
experience and to inculcate the spirit of moral values and ethics to serve the society

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MISSION
MISSION
VISION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION

4 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Fundamentals
To impart students with fundamental knowledge in mathematics and basic sciences that will mould
them to be successful professionals
2. Core competence
To provide students with sound knowledge in engineering and experimental skills to identify

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

complex software problems in industry and to develop a practical solution for them
3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theory and practice which
enable them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and organization and to design
products requiring interdisciplinary skills

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Professional skills
To bestow students with adequate training and provide opportunities to work as team that will build
up their communication skills, individual, leadership and supportive qualities and to enable them to
adapt and to work in ever changing technologies
5. Life-long learning

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To develop the ability of students to establish themselves as professionals in mechanical
engineering and to create awareness about the need for lifelong learning and pursuing advanced
degrees

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)
On completion of the B.E. (Mechanical) degree, the graduate will be able
a) To apply the basic knowledge of mathematics, science and engineering
b) To design and conduct experiments as well as to analyze and interpret data and apply the same in

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the career or entrepreneurship
c) To design and develop innovative and creative software applications
d) To understand a complex real world problem and develop an efficient practical solution
e) To create, select and apply appropriate techniques, resources, modern engineering and IT tools
f) To understand the role as a professional and give the best to the society

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

g) To develop a system that will meet expected needs within realistic constraints such as economical
environmental, social, political, ethical, safety and sustainability
h) To communicate effectively and make others understand exactly what they are trying to tell in both
verbal and written forms
i) To work in a team as a team member or a leader and make unique contributions and work with

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

coordination
j) To engage in lifelong learning and exhibit their technical skills
k) To develop and manage projects in multidisciplinary environments

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To familiar with different measurement equipment?s and use of this industry for quality inspection
List of Experiments

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Tool Maker?s Microscope
2. Comparator
3. Sine Bar
4. Gear Tooth Vernier Caliper
5. Floating gauge Micrometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Coordinate Measuring Machine
7. Surface Finish Measuring Equipment
8. Vernier Height Gauge
9. Bore diameter measurement using telescope gauge
10. Bore diameter measurement using micrometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. Force Measurement
12. Torque Measurement
13. Temperature measurement
14. Autocollimator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Ability to handle different measurement tools and perform measurements in quality impulsion
2. Learnt the usage of precision measuring instruments and practiced to take measurements
3. Learnt and practiced to build the required dimensions using slip gauge
4. Able to measure the various dimensions of the given specimen using the tool maker?s microscope

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Able to find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge
6. Able to measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare
7. Learnt to determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen using Gear tooth vernier
8. Able to measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two
wire method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. Learnt to study the construction and operation of coordinate measuring machine
10. Learnt to determine the diameter of bore by using telescopic gauge and dial bore indicator
11. Able to measure the surface roughness using Talysurf instrument
12. Studied the characteristic between applied load and the output volt
13. Learnt the characteristics of developing torque and respective sensor output voltage

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. Studied the characteristics of thermocouple without compensation
15. Able to check the straightness & flatness of the given component by using Autocollimator
16. Learnt to measure the displacement using LVDT and to calibrate it with the millimeter scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OBJECTIVES

COURSE OUTCOMES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CONTENTS
Sl. No. Name of the Experiments Page No.
CYCLE ? 1 EXPERIMENTS
1
Precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab ? A Study

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7
2
To build up the slip gauge for given dimension ? A Study
16
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thread parameters measurement using Tool Makers Microscope
20
4
Calibration of dial gauge
23

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5
Determination of taper angle by sine bar method
26
6
Determination of gear tooth thickness using gear tooth vernier

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

29
7
Measurement of thread parameters using floating carriage micrometer
32
CYCLE ? 2 EXPERIMENTS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8
Measurement of various dimensions using Coordinate Measuring Machine
35
9
Measurement of surface roughness

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

39
10
Measurement of bores using dial bore indicator and telescopic gauge
42
11

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Force measurement using load cell
46
12
Torque measurement using strain gauge
49

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13
Temperature measurement using thermocouple
53
14
Measurement of alignment using autocollimator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

56
ADDITIONAL EXPERIMENT BEYOND THE SYLLABUS
15
Thread parameters measurement using profile projector
60

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16
Displacement measurement ? linear variable differential transducer (LVDT)
62
PROJECT WORK
65

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.01 PRECISION MEASURING INSTRUMENT YSED IN

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

METROLOGY LAB ? A STUDY
Aim:
To study the following instruments and their usage for measuring dimensions of given specimen
1. Vernier caliper
2. Micrometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Vernier height gauge
4. Depth micrometer
5. Universal bevel protractor
Apparatus required:
Surface plate, specimen and above instruments

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier caliper:
The principle of vernier caliper is to use the minor difference between the sizes two scales or divisions
for measurement. The difference between them can be utilized to enhance the accuracy of measurement. The
vernier caliper essentially consists of two steel rules, sliding along each other.
Parts:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Different parts of the vernier caliper are
1. Beam ? It has main scale.
2. Fixed jaw
3. Sliding or Moving jaw ? It has vernier scale and sliding jaw locking screw.
4. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw knife

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

edges for internal measurement.
5. Stem or depth bar for depth measurement
Least count:
Least count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

50 VSD = 49 mm
1 VSD = 0.98 mm
Least count = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm

10 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ID

DEPTH

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OD
Measurement:
Given Vernier caliper can be used for external, internal depth, slot and step measurement.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement principle:
When both jaws contact each other scale shows the zero reading. The finer adjustment of movable jaw
can be done by the fine adjustment screw. First the whole movable jaw assembly is adjusted so that the two
measuring tips just touch the part to be measured. Then the fine adjustment clamp locking screw is tightened.
Final adjustment depending upon the sense of correct feel is made by the adjusting screw. After final

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

adjustment has been made sliding jaw locking screw is also tightened and the reading is noted.
All the parts of the Vernier caliper are made of good quality steel and measuring faces are hardened.
Types of vernier:
Vernier caliper, electronic vernier caliper, vernier depth caliper

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Main scale
reading (MSR)
(mm)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier scale
reading (VSR) (mm)
Total reading (MSR
+ VSR)
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OD


ID

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Depth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier height gauge:
Vernier height gauge is a sort of vernier caliper equipped with a special instrument suitable for height
measurement. It is always kept on the surface plate and the use of the surfaces plates as datum surfaces is
very essential.
Least count:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least Count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm
1 VSD = 0.98 mm
Least Count (LC) = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Parts:
1. Base
2. Beam ? It has main scale.
3. Slider ? It has a vernier scale and slider locking screw.
4. Scriber

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw.


12 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Material:
All the parts of vernier are made of good quality steel and the measuring faces hardened.
Types of vernier gauge:
1. Analog vernier height gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Digital vernier height gauge
3. Electronic vernier height gauge
Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Main scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(MSR)(mm)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale reading
(VSR)(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total reading (MSR +
VSR)(mm)
1.
2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Outside micrometer:
The micrometer essentially consists of an accurate screw having about 10 or 20 threads per cm. The

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

end of the screw forms one measuring tip and other measuring tip is constituted by a stationary anvil in the
base of the frame. The screw is threaded for certain length and is plain afterwards. The plain portion is called
spindle and its end is the measuring surface. The spindle is advanced or retracted by turning a thimble
connected to a spindle. The spindle is a slide fit over the barrel and barrel is the fixed part attached with the
frame. The barrel & thimble are graduated. The pitch of the screw threads is 0.5 mm.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count:
Least Count (LC) = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale
= 0.5 / 50 = 0.01 mm
Parts:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Frame
2. Anvil
3. Spindle
4. Spindle lock
5. Barrel or outside sleeve

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions
7. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.
The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.
14 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement:
It can be used for any external measurement.
Types of micrometer:
1. Outside micrometer, 2. Inside micrometer, 3.Depth micrometer, 4. Stick micrometer, 5. Screw thread
micrometer, 6. V ? anvil micrometer, 7. Blade type micrometer, 8. Dial micrometer, 9. Bench micrometer, 10.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tape screw operated internal micrometer, 11. Groove micrometer, 12. Digital micrometer, 13.Differential screw
micrometer, 14.Adjustable range outside micrometer.
Ratchet stop mechanism:
The object of the ratchet stop is to ensure that same level of torque is applied on the spindle while
measuring and the sense of the feel of operator is eliminated and consistent readings are obtained. By

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

providing this arrangement, the ratchet stop is made slip off when the torque applied to rotate the spindle
exceeds the set torque. Thus this provision ensures the application of same amount of torque during the
measurement.
Tabulation:
Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) (mm)
Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)
Head scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(HSR x LC) (mm)
Total Reading (PSR
+ HSR) (mm)
1.
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Depth micrometer:
Depth micrometer is a sort of micrometer which is mainly used for measuring depth of holes, so it is
named as depth micrometer.
Parts:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Shoulder
2. Spindle
3. Spindle lock
4. Barrel or outside sleeve ? It has pitch scale.
5. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.
The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.
15 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count:
Least Count = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale = 0.50/50
= 0.01 mm
Measurements:
It can be used for measuring the depth of holes, slots and recessed areas. The pitch of the screw thread

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

is 0.5 mm. The least count is 0.01 mm. Shoulder acts as a reference surface and is held firmly and
perpendicular to the centre line of the hole. For large range of measurement extension rods are used. In the
barrel the scale is calibrated. The accuracy again depends upon the sense of touch.
Procedure:
First, calculate the least count of the instrument. Check the zero error. Measure the specimen note

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

down the main scale reading or the head scale reading. Note down the vernier or head scale coincidence with
main or pitch scale divisions.
Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Pitch Scale Reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(PSR) (mm)
Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)
Head scale reading
(HSR x LC) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total Reading (PSR
+ HSR) (mm)

1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.


16 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Universal bevel protractor:

Description:
Bevel protractor is an instrument for measuring the angle between the two faces of a specimen. It

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

consists of a base plate on which a circular scale is engraved. It is graduated in degrees. An adjustment plate
is attached to a circular plate containing the vernier scale. The adjustable blade can be locked in any position.
The circular plate has 360 division divided into four parts of 90 degrees each. The adjustable parts have 24
divisions of to the right and left sides of zero reading. These scales are used according to the position of the
specimen with respect to movable scale.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. Place the specimen whose taper is to be measured between the adjustable plate and movable
blade with one of its face parallel to the base.
2. Lock the adjustable plate in position and note down the main scale reading depending upon the
direction of rotation of adjustable plate in clockwise or anticlockwise.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Note the VSC to the right of zero.
4. Multiply the VSC with the least count and add to MSR to obtain the actual reading.
Least count:
Least Count = 2 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
24 VSD = 46
o
=> 1 VSD = 23/12
LC = 2 ? 23/12 = 1/12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
= 5? (five minutes)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Main scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(MSR) (deg)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale reading
(VSR) (deg)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total reading (MSR +
VSR)
(deg)
1.
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The angle of scriber of the vernier height gauge =
Result:
Thus the various precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab are studied and the specimen
dimensions are recorded.
Outcome:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for linear, angular,
roundness and roughness measurements they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring
instrument according to a specific requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).
Application:
1. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Metrology
2. Define ? Inspection
3. What are the needs of inspection in industries?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. What are the various methods involving the measurement?
5. Define ? Precision
6. Define ? Accuracy
7. Define ? Calibration
8. Define ? Repeatability

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. Define ? Magnification
10. Define ? Error
11. Define ? Systematic Error
12. Define ? Random Error
13. Define ? Parallax Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. Define ? Environmental Error
15. Define ? Cosine Error
Viva-voce

18 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.02 BUILD UP THE SLIP GAUGE FOR GIVEN DIMENSION
? A STUDY
Aim:
To build up the slip gauge for given dimension

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Apparatus required:
1. Slip gauges set
2. Surface plate
3. Soft cloth
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
Slip gauge are universally accepted standard of length in industry. They are the working standard for
linear dimension. These were invented by a Swedish Engineer, C.E. Johansson. They are used
1. For direct precise measurement where the accuracy of the workpiece demand it.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. For use with high- magnification comparators to establish the size of the gauge blocks in general
use.
3. Gauge blocks are also used for many other purposes such as checking the accuracy of measuring
instrument or setting up a comparator to a specific dimension, enabling a batch of component to be
quickly and accurately checked or indeed in any situation where there is need to refer to standard of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

known length these blocks are rectangular.
19 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Most gauge blocks are produced from high grade steel, hardened and established by a heat treatment
process to give a high degree of dimensional stability. Gauge blocks are also manufactured from tungsten

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

carbide which is an extremely hard and wear resistant material. The measuring faces have a lapped finish.
The faces are perfectly flat and parallel to one another with a high degree of accuracy. Each block has an
extremely high dimensional accuracy at 20
o
C.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

These slip gauge are available in variety of selected sets both in inch units and metric units. Letter ?E? is
used for inch units and ?M? is used for metric standard number of pieces in a set following the letter E or M. For
example EBI refers to a set whose blocks are in metric units and are 83 in number. Each block dimensions is
printed on anyone of its face itself the size of any required standard being made up by combining the
appropriate number of these different size blocks.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

If two gauges are slid and twisted together under pressure they will firmly join together. This process,
known as wringing, is very useful because it enables several gauge blocks to be assembled together to
produce a required size. In fact the success of precision measurement by slip gauges depends on the
phenomenon of wringing.
First the gauge is oscillated slightly with very light pressure over other gauge so as to detect pressure at

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

any foreign particles between the surfaces. One gauge is placed perpendicular to other using standard
gauging pressure and rotary motion is applied until the blocks are lined up.
Procedure:
1. Build the given dimension by wringing minimum number of slip gauges.
2. Note the given dimension and choose the minimum possible slip gauge available in the set so as to

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

accommodate the last decimal value. The minimum slip gauge value dimension available i.e., 1.12
mm must be chosen followed by 1.5 mm thick gauge block.
3. Follow the above steps to build up the slip gauge of any dimension.
Precautions:
1. Slip gauges should be handled very carefully placed gently and should never be dropped.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Whenever a slip gauge is being removed from the set, its dimensions are noted and must be
replaced into the set at its appropriate place only.
3. Correct procedure must be followed in wringing and also in removing the gauge blocks.
4. They should be cleaned well before use and petroleum jelly is applied after use.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

20 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Range (mm) Increment (mm) No. of pieces

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total = ____________ Pieces
Total length of slip gauge = ________ mm
Given diameter Slip gauges used Obtained dimensions

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Slip gauge set is studied and the given dimensions are building up by wringing minimum number of slip

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

gauges.
Outcome:
Students will be able to select proper measuring instrument and know requirement of calibration, errors
in measurement etc. They can perform accurate measurements.
Application:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Why C.I. is preferred material for surface plates and tables?
2. Why V ? blocks are generally manufactured in pairs?
3. Why micrometer is required to be tested for accuracy?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Define ? Linear Measurement
5. List the linear measuring instrument according to their accuracy.
6. Define ? Least Count
7. What are the uses of vernier depth gauge?
8. What are the uses of feeler gauges?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. What are the uses of straight edge?
10. What are the uses of angle plate?
11. What are the uses of V ? block?
12. What are the uses of combination square?
13. What precautions should be taken while using slip gauges?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. What is wringing?
15. Why the slip gauges are termed as ?End standard?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

22 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


Expt.No.03 THREAD PARAMETERS MEASUREMENT USING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TOOL MAKERS MICROSCOPE
Aim:
To study the tool makers microscope and in the process measure the various dimensions of the given
specimen
Apparatus required:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Tool makers microscope
2. Specimen
Diagram:

Description:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The tool maker?s microscope is designed for measurement of parts of complex forms; for example,
profile of a tool having external threads. It can also be used for measuring centre to centre distance of the
holes in any plane as well as the coordinates of the outline of a complex template gauge, using the
coordinates measuring system.
23 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Basically it consists of an optical head which can be adjusted vertically along the ways of supporting
column. The optical head can be clamped at any position by a screw. On the work table (which as a circular
base in which there are graduations) the part to be inspected is placed. The table has a compound slide by
means of which the part can be measured. For giving these two movements, there are two micrometer screws

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

having thimble scales and verniers. At the back of the base light source is arranged that provides horizontal
beam of light, reflected from a mirror by 90 degrees upwards towards the table. The beam of light passes
through the transparent glass plate on which flat plates can be checked are placed. Observations are made
through the eyepiece of the optical head.
Procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Place the given specimen on the work table and switch on all the three light sources and adjust the
intensity of the light source until a clean image of the cross wires and specimen are seen through
the eyepiece.
2. Coincide one of the two extreme edges between which the measurement has to be taken with
vertical or horizontal cross wires and depending upon the other image coincide with the same cross

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

wires by moving the above device. Note the reading.The difference between the two readings gives
the value of the required measurement.
3. Note the experiment specimen and the readings.
4. Tabulate the different measurements measured from the specimen.
Determination of thread parameters

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Magnification =
S.No. Parameters
Magnified value
(mm)
Actual value

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
1. Outer diameter (O.D)

2. Internal diameter (I.D)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Pitch

4. Flank angle

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Included angle of the tool was measured using tool maker?s microscope and various dimensions of the
given specimen are measured.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

24 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the various parameters of thread and select proper measuring
instrument and know requirement of calibration, errors in measurement etc. They can perform accurate

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measurements.
Application:
1. Machine Shop
2. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by tool maker?s microscope?
2. What is the light used in tool maker?s microscope?
3. What are the various characteristics that you would measure in a screw thread?
4. What are the instruments that are required for measuring screw thread?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Define ? Pitch
6. What are the causes of pitch error?
7. Define ? Flank
8. What are the effects of flank angle error?
9. What is progressive error?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. What is periodic error?
11. What is drunken error?
12. What is erratic error?
13. What are the applications of tool maker?s microscope?
14. What are the limitations of tool maker?s microscope?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15. What are the advantages of tool maker?s microscope?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

25 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.04 CALIBRATION OF DIAL GAUGE USING SLIP GAUGE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Aim:
To find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge
Apparatus required:
Dial gauge, magnetic stand, slip gauge, and surface plate
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
The dial test indicator is a precision measuring instrument which can convert linear motion into angular
motion by means of transmission mechanics of rack and pinion and can be used to measure linear vibration
and errors of shape.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

This instrument has the features such as good appearance, compact size, light weight, high precision,
reasonable construction, constant measuring face etc. Rigidity of all parts is excellent. Probe is tipped with
carbide balls. A shock proof mechanism is provided for those with larger measuring range.

26 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Types of dial indicator:
1. Plunger type
2. Lever type
Plunger type dial indicator has a resolution counter and each division in main scale is 0.01 mm. In lever

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

type dial test indicator is replaced by ball type stylus.
Procedure:
1. Fix the dial gauge to the stand rigidly and place the stand on the surface plate.
2. Set the plunger of dial gauge to first touch the upper surface of standard slip gauge and set indicator
to zero.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Raise then the plunger by pulling the screw above the dial scale.
4. Place the standard slip gauge underneath the plunger.
5. Release the plunger and let it to touch the standard slip gauge.
6. Note the reading on the dial scale.
Formulae:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The standard error of dial gauge is calculated by the formula

Tabulation:
S.No.
Slip gauge reading ?x?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
Dial gauge reading
(mm)
(x? - x)
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x? (x? - x)
1.
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Thus the accuracy and standard error of dial gauge is found. The standard error of given dial gauge is
__________.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

27 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Outcome:
Students will be able to check the variation in tolerance during the inspection process of a

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

machined part, measure the deflection of a beam or ring under laboratory conditions, as well as many
other situations where a small measurement needs to be registered or indicated
Application:
1. Milling Machine
2. Analog versus digital/electronic readout

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is comparator?
2. What are the types of comparators?
3. What is the LC for comparators?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. What are the applications of comparator?
5. What is meant by plunger?
6. What are the types of dial indicators?
7. Why a revolution counter is not provided in lever type dial test indicator?
8. Draw a line diagram of the operating mechanism of plunger type dial test indicator.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. Explain the term magnification of a dial indicator.
10. What are the uses of dial test indicator?
11. What are the practical applications of dial test indicator?
12. What precautions should be taken while using dial test indicator?
13. What are the desirable qualities of a dial test indicator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. What are the advantages of dial test indicator?
15. What are the limitations of dial test indicator?
16. Distinguish between comparator and measuring instrument.
17. What are the advantages of electrical comparator?
18. What are the advantages of optical comparator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

19. What are the uses of comparator?
20. What are the advantages and disadvantages of mechanical comparator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

28 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.05 DETERMINATION OF TAPER ANGLE BY SINE BAR
METHOD
Aim:
To measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare
Apparatus required:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sine bar, slip gauges, dial gauge with stand, micrometer, surface plate, bevel protractor, vernier caliper
Diagram:

Description:
The sine bar principle uses the ratio of the length of two sides of a right triangle. It may be noted that

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

devices operating on sine principle are capable of ?self-generation?. The measurement is restricted to 45
o
from
accuracy point of view. Sine bar itself is not a measuring instrument.
Accuracy requirements of sine bar:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. The axes of the rollers must be parallel to each other and the centre distance L must be precisely
known.
2. The sine bar must be flat and parallel to the plane connecting the axes of the rollers.
3. The rollers must be of identical diameters and must have within a close tolerance.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

29 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Procedure:
1. Fix the dial gaugeon the magnetic stand and place the magnetic stand on the surface plate.Check

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the parallelism of the sine bar.
2. Place the given specimen above the sine bar and place the dial gauge on top of the specimen.
Adjustthe dial gauge for zero deflection.
3. Raise the front end of the sine bar with slip gauges until the work surface is parallel to the datum
surface.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Check the parallelism using dial gauge.
5. Measure the distance between the centres of the sine bar rollers as ?L? and note the height of the
slip gauge as ?H?.
6. Note the included angle of the specimen.
Formulae:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sin ? = H/L where ? = Included angle of the specimen
H = Height of slip gauges
L = Distance between the centre of rollers
Tabulation:
S.No. L (mm) H (mm) Taper angle ( ?)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
2.
3.

Result:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The taper angle of the given specimen using sine bar was found to be =
Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for angular measurements
and they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a specific
requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Flat Surface
2. Granite

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

30 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. List out the various angle measuring instruments.
2. What is the working principles sine bar?
3. How is a sine bar used to measure the angle?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. What is the application of sine bar?
5. What is the material of sine bar?
6. Why sine bar is not preferred to use for measuring angles more than 45
0
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. What are the features of sine bar?
8. A 100 mm sine bar is to be set up to an angle of 33
0
, determine the slip gauges needed from 87
pieces set.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. What are the various instruments used for measuring angles?
10. What is sine bar?
11. How sine bar is used for angle measurement?
12. Explain how sine bar is used to measure angle of small size component.
13. Explain how sine bar is used to measure angle of large size component.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. What are the various types of sine bar?
15. What are the limitations of sine bar?
16. What is sine center?
17. What is sine table?
18. What are the possible sources of errors in angular measurement by sine bar?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

19. What are angle gauges?
20. How angle gauges are used for measuring angles?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

31 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.06 DETERMINATION OF GEAR TOOTH THICKNESS
USING GEAR TOOTH VERNIER
Aim:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen and to draw the graph between the tooth
number and the error in thickness
Apparatus required:
Gear tooth vernier, specimen, surface plate and vernier caliper
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
The tooth thickness, in general, is measured at pitch circle since gear tooth thickness varies from the tip
to the base circle of the tooth. This is possible only when there is an arrangement to fix that position for this
measurement by the gear tooth vernier. It has two vernier scales; one is vertical and other is horizontal.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
32 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

1. Measure initially the outside diameter of the given gear specimen by means of a vertical calculation
of vernier caliper. Note the number of teeth. Calculate the module (m) using the formula.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M = OD/ (Z+2) where z ? number of teeth
M - Module
2. Calculate the theoretical tooth thickness (t) by t = z * m* sin (90/z).
3. Set the vernier scale for the height and tighten.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Measure the thickness of each tooth using the horizontal scale. This is measured thickness. It can
be positive or negative.
H = m x [1+ Z/2 (1- Cos 90/Z)]
5. Calculate the error in the tooth thickness i.e,1. measured thickness ? Theoretical thickness
6. Draw the graph between the tooth number and the error in thickness.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Tooth
Number
Measured Thickness
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Theoretical Thickness (mm)
Error in tooth thickness
(mm)
1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3

Tooth
Number
MSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
VSC

VSR
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TR
(mm)
1
2
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Graph:


Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tooth No.
33 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
The theoretical experiment value of gear tooth thickness is obtained and graph is drawn between error
and tooth number in tooth thickness

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Theoretical tooth thickness =
Experimental tooth thickness =
Error in tooth thickness =
Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the basic measurement units and able to calibrate various

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measuring parameters of the gear.
Application:
1. Gear Component
2. Mining

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Calculate the setting of a gear tooth vernier caliper for a straight spur gear having 40 teeth and
module 4.
2. What is the importance of chordal depth?
3. Define ? Chordal width
4. How is the actual profile of the gear tooth determined?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. What are the manufacturing errors in gear element?
6. Define ? Addendum
7. Define ? Dedendum
8. Define ? Flank of tooth
9. Define ? Pitch

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. Define ? Pitch Circle
11. Define ? Crest of tooth
12. Define ? Root of tooth
13. Define ? Base Circle
14. Define ? Module

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15. Define ? Angle of Obliquity


Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

34 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.07 MEASUREMENT OF THREAD PARAMETER USING
FLOATING CARRIAGE MICROMETER
Aim:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two wire
method
Apparatus required:
1. Floating carriage micrometer
2. Standard wire

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Given specimen (screw thread)
Diagram:

Description of floating carriage micrometer:
It consists of three main units. A base casting carries a pair of centres on which threaded work piece is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

to be mounted. Another carriage capable of moving towards centre is mounted exactly above. In this carriage
one head with thimble to measure up to 0.002 mm is provided and at the other side of head a fiducial indicator
is provided to indicate zero position.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

35 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Procedure:
1. For two wire method, place the standard wire over a thread of the screw at opposite sides.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. For three wire method, place two standard wires on two successive threads and the third wire
placed opposite sides of the thread.
3. Measure the diameter over wires (M) using floating carriage micrometer.
4. Repeat this procedure at various positions of the screw and take different readings.
Formulae:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. For best wire size, d = P / 2 Cos (x/2)
Where, P = Pitch
d= wire size
x = angle between two threads
= 60

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
for metric thread
2. Actual effective diameter, E.A = M ? 3d + 0.866 p
3. Nominal effective diameter, EN = D ? 0.648 p
4. Max. wire size = 1.01 p

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Min. wire size = 0.505 p
6. Best wire size = 0.577 p
M = Diameter over wires
P = Pitch of thread
For metric thread:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Actual effective diameter (EA) = M ? 3d + 0.866 p
Where d = actual diameter of wire
Determination of actual and nominal effective diameter of the screw thread:
Sl.No.
Nominal

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diameter (D)
(mm)
Diameter over
wire ?M?
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Actual eff.
Diameter E.A
(mm)
Nominal eff.
Diameter E.N

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
Error in effective
diameter
(E.A ? E.N)
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

36 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Result:
Thus the actual and nominal effective diameter is measured using three wire method and the error in

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

effective diameter of screw is determined.
Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for roundness
measurements and they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a
specific requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Wholse
2. Maxxis Rubber India

1. Define ? Pitch

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Define ? Flank Angle
3. What is plug gauge?
4. What is meant by micrometer?
5. What is meant by indicator?
6. What is best ? size wire?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Calculate the diameter of the best wire for an M 20 x 25 screws.
8. What are the different corrections to be applied in the measurement of effective diameter by the
method of wire?
9. What is floating carriage micrometer?
10. What are the uses of floating carriage micrometer?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. What are the methods are used for measuring effective diameter?
12. Define ? Effective Diameter
13. Define ? Major Diameter
14. Define ? Minor Diameter
15. What are the effects of flank error?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16. Define ? Rake Angle
17. Define ? Pitch Cylinder
18. What are the effects of pitch error?
19. Define ? Pitch Diameter
20. What is meant by angle of thread?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

37 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.08 MEASUREMENT OF VARIOUS DIMENSIONS USING
COORDINATE MEASURING MACHINE
Aim:
1. To study the construction and operation of coordinate measuring machine

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. To measure the specified dimensions of the given component
Instruments used:
Coordinate measuring machine, vernier calipers
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Theory:
A coordinate measuring machine (CMM) is a 3D device for measuring the physical and geometrical
characteristics of an object. This machine may be manually controlled by an operator or it may be computer
controlled. Measurements are defined by a probe attached to the three moving axis of this machine X, Y and Z
axes. A coordinate measuring machine (CMM) is also a device used in manufacturing and assembly

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

processes to test a part or assembly against the design intent. By precisely recording the X, Y and Z
coordinates of the target, points are generated which can be analyzed via regression algorithms for the
construction of features. These points are collected by using a probe that is positioned manually by an
38 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

operator or automatically via direct computer control (DCC). DCC CMMs can be programmed to repeatedly
measure identical parts, thus a CMM is a specialized form of industrial robot.
Parts:
Coordinate measuring machine include three main components:
1. The main structures which include three axes of motion.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Probing system
3. Data collection and reduction system ? typically includes a machine controller, desktop computer
and application software
Machine description:
1. In modern machines, the gantry type superstructure has two legs and is often called a bridge. This

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

moves freely along the granite table with one leg following a guide rail attached to one side of the
granite table. The opposite leg simply rests on the granite table following the vertical surface
contour.
2. Air bearings are fixed for ensuring friction free travel. Compressed air is forced through a series of
very small holes in a flat bearing surface to provide a smooth but controlled air cushion on which the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CMM can move in a frictionless manner.
3. The movement of the bridge along the granite table forms one axis of the XY plane. The bridge of
the gantry contains a carriage which traverses between the inside and outside legs and forms the
other X or Y horizontal axis.
4. The third axis of movement (Z axis) is provided by the addition of a vertical quill or spindle which

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

moves up and down through the center of the carriage. The touch probe forms the sensing device
on the end of the quill.
5. The movement of the X, Y and Z axes fully describes the measuring envelope. Some touch probes
are themselves powered rotary devices with the probe tip able to swivel vertically through 90
degrees and through a full 360 degrees rotation.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Uses:
They are generally used for:
1. Dimensional measurement
2. Profile measurement
3. Angularity or orientation measurement

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Depth mapping
5. Digitizing mapping
6. Shaft measurement
39 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The machines are available in a wide range of sizes and designs with a variety of different probe
technologies. They can be operated manually or automatically through direct computer control (DCC). They
are offered in various configurations such as bench top, free ? standing, handheld and portable.
Procedure:
1. Take at least 8 points on sphere ball attached to the granite table.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Fix the object whose dimension needs to be measured using the jigs and fixtures.
3. Using joystick, move the probe whose tip is made of ruby slowly and carefully to the surface whose
measurements have to be taken.
4. Touch the probe at two places for measurement of a line (starting and ending point).
5. Touch the probe at two places for measurement of a circular profile and for a cylinder touch the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

probe at 8 points.
6. Measure the same profiles again with vernier calipers (length of line, circle diameter, cylinder
diameter) to compare the two readings.
Comments:
1. The machine should be calibrated every time when it is being used.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. While measuring the profiles, the probe should be moved very slowly as it may damage the ruby if
hit with a high force.
3. Care should be taken while performing experiment so that the granite table of the machines should
get any scratches.
4. ?Retract distance? should be fixed according to the space available in the near vicinity of the profile

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measurement area.
Observation:
Sl.No. Feature
CMM reading
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier reading
(mm)
Form error
(mm)
Difference in two

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

readings (mm)
1 Circle -1
2 Circle -2
3 Circle -3
4 Line

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 Arc
6
Cone - Diameter
Cone ? Vertex angle
Cone ? Height

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7
Cylinder ? Diameter
Cylinder ? Height

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

40 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Result:
Thus the different profile of given object are measured using coordinate measuring machine
Outcome:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Students will be able to measures the geometry of physical objects by sensing discrete points on the
surface of the object with a probe and they will be able to know the Various types of probes are used in CMMs,
including mechanical, optical, laser, and white light.
Application:
1. Surface Measuring Equipment

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Photo transistor

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What are the types of measuring machine?
2. What is CMM?
3. What are the types of CMM?
4. What are the advantages of CMM?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. What are the limitations of CMM?
6. What are the possible sources of error in CMM?
7. What is the use of universal measuring machine?
8. What are the applications of CMM?
9. What is the working principle of three axis measuring machine?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. What is image shearing microscope?
11. What is the use of electronic inspection and measuring machine?
12. What are the types of electronic inspection and measuring machine?
13. What is CMM probe?
14. What are the three main probes are available?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15. What are the types of stylus?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

41 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.09 MEASUREMENT OF SURFACE ROUGHNESS UING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TALYSURF INSTRUMENT
Aim:
To measure the surface roughness using Talysurf instrument
Apparatus required:
Talysurf instrument, work piece, surface plate

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diagram:

Theory:
On any finished surface, imperfections are bound to be there and these take the form of a succession of
hills and valleys which vary both in height and in spacing and result in a kind of texture which in appearance or

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

feel is often characteristic of the machining process and accompanying defects. The several kinds of
departures are there on the surface and these are due to various causes.

42 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Methods of measuring surface roughness:
1. Surface inspection of comparison methods
2. Direct instrument measurements
In comparative methods the surface texture is assessed by observation of the surface. But these
methods are not reliable as they can be misleading, if comparison is not made with surfaces produced by

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

same techniques. The various methods available under comparison method are: (i) Touch Inspection
(ii)Scratch Inspection (iii) Microscopic Inspection (iv) Visual Inspection (v) Surface Photographs (vi) Reflected
Light Intensity Direct Instrument Measurements enable to determine a numerical value of the surface finish of
any surface. Nearly all instruments used are stylus probe type of instruments. This operates on electrical
principle.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. Place the finished component on the surface plate.
2. Fix the Talysurf tester to the vernier height gauge using adopter at a convenient height.
3. Make sure that the stylus probe touches the work piece.
4. Fix the sampling length in the tester.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Press the power button so that the probe moves on the surface to and fro.
6. Take the readings of the surface roughness directly from the instrument.
7. Repeat the above process for the remaining specimen and tabulate the readings.
Precautions:
1. The surface to be tested should be cleaned properly.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. The tester should be fixed to the height gauge properly so that the movement of the probe is exactly
parallel to the surface of work.
3. Make sure that the probe gently touches the work.
Tabulation:
S.No

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement roughness value,
?m
Sample direction Ra, Rz
Average Ra Average Rz Grade
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

43 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Result:
Thus the surface roughness is checked for different specimens by Talysurf.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for roughness
measurements they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a specific
requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).
Application:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Machine Shop
2. Quality Department


1. Define ? Actual Size?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. What is meant by normal surface?
3. What is meant by profilo-graph?
4. What is Tomlinson surface meter?
5. What is meant by profile?
6. What are the factors affecting surface roughness?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Why the surface texture is control?
8. Define ? Lay
9. Define ? Surface Texture
10. Define ? Flaws
11. What is sampling length?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. What are the methods used for evaluating surface finish?
13. What is form factor?
14. What are the methods used for measuring surface finish?
15. How will you differentiate smooth surface from flat surface?
16. How surface finish is designated on drawings?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17. Define ? Primary Texture
18. Define ? Secondary Texture
19. What are the types of instrument used for measuring surface texture?
20. Define ? waviness

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

44 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.10 MEASUREMENT OF BORE USING DIAL BORE
INDICATOR AND TELESCOPIC GAUGE
Aim:
To determine the diameter of bore by using telescopic gauge and checking the same by using dial bore

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

indicator
Apparatus required:
Work piece, vernier caliper, telescopic gauge and dial gauge indicator set with anvil.
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

45 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


Procedure:
Bore gauge measurement:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Select the extension rod and washer according to the bore diameter to be measured
2. Fix the suitable extension rod and washer with the bore gauge
3. Fix the dial gauge to the bore gauge in its position
4. Insert the bore gauge inside the bore to be measured and hold the gauge in parallel o the axis of the
bore. Ensure that the tips on either side of the bore gauge are in touch with inner wall of the bore

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Note down the reading in the dial gauge and withdraw the bore gauge from the bore
6. Hold the measuring tips of bore gauge between the spindle and anvil of a micrometer and compress
the tips by rotating the thimble till the reading reaches the same one as noted earlier
7. Observe and record the micrometer reading as the bore diameter to be measured
Telescopic gauge measurement:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Select the telescopic gauge according to the bore diameter to be measured
2. Press the telescopic spindles in the telescopic gauge lock them by locking screw
3. Insert the telescopic gauge inside thee bore to be measured. Release the locking screw to expand
the telescopic spindles outwards inside the bore
4. Hold the telescopic gauge in parallel to the axis of bore axis and ensure that the tips of telescopic

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

spindles are in touch with the inner wall of the bore
5. Lock the telescopic spindles and withdraw it from the bore
46 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

6. Measure the expanded length of the telescopic spindles using micrometer record them as the inner

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

diameter of the bore
Practical observations:
Rough measurement of bore using Telescopic gauge:
Least count of micrometer = 0.01 mm
Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Micrometer reading
Total reading
(MSR + TSC * LC) ( mm) Main scale reading (MSR)
(mm)
Thimble scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

coincidence
1.
2.

Average reading = ________ mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Accurate measuring using Bore gauge
Sl.No.
Micrometer
reading
(d) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Bore gauge
reading
(R1) (mm)
Work piece reading
(R2) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Final reading
d+ (R1 ? R2) * 0.01
(mm)
1.
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Accurate internal diameter of hole using bore gauge = ______ mm

Result
1. Internal diameter of the work piece by using telescopic gauge is ________mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Diameter obtained by using dial gauge indicator is __________________mm

Outcome:
Students will be able to measure a bore's size, by transferring the internal dimension to a remote
measuring tool (Telescopic gauge).

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Automobile
2. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

47 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by bore diameter?
2. What is gauge?
3. What is meant by measurement?
4. What is telescope gauge?
5. What is bore gauge?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. What is contact point?
7. What is the principle of bore gauge?
8. What are the applications of telescopic gauge?
9. What types of materials are used in telescopic gauge?
10. What are the types of instrument used to measure bore diameter?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. What are the applications of bore gauge?
12. What are the advantages of bore gauge over telescopic gauge?
13. What are the limitations of bore gauge?
14. What is the working principle of telescopic gauge?
15. What are the disadvantages of telescopic gauge?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

48 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.11 MEASUREMENT OF FORCE USING LOAD CELL
Aim:
To study the characteristic between applied load and the output voltage

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Apparatus required:
1. Trainer kit
2. Multimeter
3. Load cell sensor with setup
4. Weights (5 kg)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Power chord
Diagram:

Formulae:
Error (%) = {Applied Voltage ? (Displayed Load)/ Applied Load)} x 100

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Block diagram:



Applied DC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Load O/P

DC Excitation source Transducer
Transducer
Instrumentation

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Amplifier
Gain Amplifier DVM
49 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Interfacing and calibration procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Interface the load cell 9 pin ?D? type male connector to 9 pin D type female connector, fixed on the
module.
2. First unload the beam and nullify the display by using zero adjustment POT
3. Apply the maximum load of 5 kg to the beam and adjust the display to 5 kg by using gain
adjustment POT.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. After the initial adjustment, the unit should not be disturbed until the completion of the experiment.
Safety precaution:
1. During offset adjustment, the beam should not be loaded.
2. The beam should not be disturbed during the experiment.
3. Remove the load from the beam, after completion of the experiment; otherwise wire wound on the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

strain gauge will get damaged.
4. If you are getting an unsatisfactory reading, then vary the zero and span POT minimum to
maximum.
5. Maximum load should not exceed 5 kg.
6. Once calibrated, the setting should not be distributed till the end of the experiment.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. Install the load cell module and interface the 9 pin D connector with kit.
2. Connect the multimeter in volt mode across T5 and GND for the output voltage measurement.
3. Switch on the module.
4. Initially, unload the beam and nullify the display by using zero adjustment POT (zero calibration).

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Apply the maximum load of 5 kg to the beam and adjust the display to 5 kg by using gain
adjustment POT (gain calibration).
6. Now apply the load to the beam, a force will develop on the beam and measure the output voltage
(V) across T5 and GND.
7. Gradually increase the load and note down the output voltage (V) and applied load.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Tabulate the values of displayed load and applied voltage.
9. Plot a graph between applied load and output voltage (V).
Note: When 1 kg load is applied to the beam, the displayed voltage is 1 kg.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

50 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:
Applied load
(kg)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Output voltage
(V)
Displayed load
(kg)
% Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Graph:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Applied load (kg) Vs Output Voltage (V)
2. Actual load (kg) Vs % Error
Result:
Thus the characteristic between applied load and the output voltage was studied.
Outcome:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Students will be able to understand the Sensor device (electro-mechanical) which help us to measure
a physical parameter (such as temperature, pressure, force, acceleration etc.) by providing analog input to get
digital output.
Application:
1. Machine Shop

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Automobile


1. What is meant by force?
2. Define ? Wheat stone bridge circuit

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Define ? Load
4. What is meant by deflector?
5. What is meant by force indicator?
6. Define ? Instrumentation
7. How instrumentations are classified?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Define ? Transducer
9. What is electrical transducer?
10. How transducers are classified?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

51 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.12 MEASUREMENT OF TORQUE USING STRAIN
GAUGE
Aim:
To study the characteristics of the developing torque and the signal conditioned sensor output voltage
Apparatus required:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Trainer kit
2. Digital Multimeter (V)
3. Torque sensor setup
4. Weights (100 gram x 10 Nos.)
5. Power chord

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diagram:

Interfacing and calibration procedure:
1. Interface the torque sensor 9 pin. ?D? type male connector to ?9? pin ?D? type female connector, fixed
on the module.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. First, unload the beam and nullify the display by using zero adjustment POT.
3. Apply the maximum load of 1 kg to the beam and adjust the display to 9.81 Nm by using adjustment
POT.
4. After this initial calibration, the unit should not be disturbed until the completion of the experiment.
52 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Safety precaution:
1. During offset adjustment, the beam should not be loaded.
2. The beam should not be disturbed during the experiment.
3. Remove the beam from the shaft, after completion of the experiment otherwise wire wound on the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

strain gauge will get damaged.
4. If the displayed torque reading are in negative, change the beam connections in opposite to
previously connected direction.
5. If you are getting an unsatisfactory reading, then vary the zero and span POT minimum to
maximum.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Maximum load should not exceed 1 kg.
7. Once calibrated, the setting should not be disturbed till the end of this experiment.
Procedure:
1. Install the torque sensor setup and interface with kit.
2. Switch ?ON? the module.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Connect the Multimeter in millivolts mode T2 and T3 for bridge output voltage measurement POT.
4. First, unload the beam and nullify the bridge output voltage by using zero adjustment POT.
5. By applying load to the beam, torque will develop on the shaft and measure the bridge output
voltage (mV) across T2 and T3
6. Gradually increase the force by applying load and note down the bridge output voltage (mV).

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Tabulate the readings and plot a graph between developed torque versus bridge output voltage
(mV).
Formulae:
Error (%) = {(Actual Torque ? Theoretical Torque)/ Theoretical Torque} x 100
Theoretical Torque = mass (m) x acceleration due to gravity (g) x radial distance

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= 1 kg x 9.81 m/s
2
x 1 m
= 9.81 Nm
Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No. Theoretical Torque
(Nm)
Bridge output voltage
(mV)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Model graph:
The graph between developed torque and bridge output voltage is drawn
53 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Developed torque (Nm) Vs Output Voltage (V)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sample reading:
Developed Torque (Nm) = 9.81 Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Output Voltage (V) = 5 mV
Result:
Thus the characteristics of the torque developed which is due to force applied to beam and the bridge
output voltage were studied and graph is plotted.
Outcome:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Students will be able to understand the Sensor device (electro-mechanical) which helps us to
measure the strain by providing analog input to digital output.
Application:
1. Machine Shop
2. Turbine

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

54 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00



1. Define ? Torque

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Define ? Twist
3. What are the methods used for measuring torque?
4. Define ? Strain Gauge
5. What is prony brake?
6. What are the modern devices used for measuring torque?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. What are the elements of strain gauge?
8. What is the use of slip ring for measuring torque?
9. What is slip ring?
10. What are the types of torque?
11. What are the types of dynamometer?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. What are the applications of dynamometer?
13. What are the features of dynamometer?
14. What is gauge factor?
15. What are the types of torque measurement?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

55 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.13 MEASUREMENT OF TEMPERATURE USING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

THERMOCOUPLE
Aim:
To study the characteristics of thermocouple without compensation
Apparatus required:
1. Trainer kit

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Thermocouple
3. Water bath
4. Thermometer
5. Digital multi meter
6. Power chord

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diagram:

Procedure:
1. Connect the two terminals of the thermocouple across T1 & T2.
2. Position the switch ?SW1? towards ?NO?.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Switch ?ON? the unit and note the displayed temperature.
4. If there is any difference in displayed temperature at room temperature, adjust the offset knob ?zero?
to set 0
o
C in display.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Place the Multimeter across T7 and T8.
6. Insert the thermocouple and thermometer into water bath.
7. Switch ?ON? the water bath.
8. Note the actual temperature in thermometer and displayed temperature simultaneously.
9. Tabulate the reading and calculate % error using the above formula

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

56 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

10. Plot the graph actual temperature Vs % error
Formulae:
Error (%) = {(Displayed Temperature ? Actual Temp)/ Actual Temp} x 100

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Actual Temperature
(
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C)
Displayed Temperature
(
o
C)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

% Error



Graph

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Temperature Vs % Error
Result:
Thus the characteristics of the thermocouple without compensation were studied and graph is plotted.
Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the Sensor device (electro-mechanical) which help us to measure

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

a physical parameter (such as temperature) by providing analog input.
Application:
1. Thermocouple
2. Heat generation

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

57 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by total radiation pyrometer?
2. How the mercury in glass thermometer worked?
3. What are the sources of error in thermocouple?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Define ? Resistance
5. Define ? Temperature detector
6. Define ? Temperature
7. What are the types of instrument used for measuring temperature?
8. What are the types of electrical temperature sensors?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. What is optical sensor?
10. What are the applications of liquid in gas thermometer?
11. What are the applications of bimetallic thermometer?
12. What is vapour pressure thermometer?
13. What is thermocouple?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. What are the types of metal are used in combination to form thermocouples?
15. What are the advantages of thermocouple?
16. What are the disadvantages of thermocouple?
17. Define ? Resistance Thermometer
18. Define ? Thermistor

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

19. What is the use radiation pyrometer?
20. What are the advantages of optical pyrometer?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

58 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.14 MEASUREMENT OF ALIGNMENT USING
AUTOCOLLIMATOR
Aim:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To check the straightness & flatness of the given component by using Autocollimator
Apparatus required:
Autocollimator, work piece/ object to be tested
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Theory:
1. Definition of straightness ? A plane is to be said straight over a given length if the variation or
distance of its point from two planes perpendicular to each other and parallel to the generation
direction at of the line remain within specified tolerance limits. The reference planes being so
chosen that their intersection is parallel to the straight line joining two points suitably located on the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

line to be tested and two points being close ends of the length to be measured.
2. Principle of the Autocollimator-A cross line ?target? graticule is positioned at the focal plane of a
telescope objective system with the intersection of the cross line on the optical axis, i.e. at the
principal focus. When the target graticule is illuminated, rays of light diverging from the intersection
point reach the objective via a beam splitter and are projected from the objective as parallel pencils

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

of light. In this mode the optical system is operating as a collimator.
59 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

3. A flat reflector placed in front of the objective and exactly normal to the optical axis reflects the
parallel pencils of light back along their original paths. They are then brought to focus in the plane of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the target graticule and exactor coincident with its intersection. A proportion of the returned light
passes straight through the beam splitter and the return image of the target cross line is therefore
visible through the eyepiece. In this mode, the optical system is operating as a telescope focused at
infinity.
4. If the reflector is tilted through a small angle the reflected pencils of light will be deflected by twice

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the angle of tilt (principle of reflection) and will be brought to focus in the plane of target graticule but
linearly displaced from the actual target cross lines by an amount 2?* f.
5. An optical system of an autocollimator consists of a light source, condensers, semi-reflectors, target
wire, collimating lens and reflector apart from microscope eyepiece. A target wire takes place of the
light source into the focal plane of the collimator lenses. Both the target wire and the reflected image

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

are seen through a microscope eyepiece. The eyepiece incorporates a scale graduated in 0.05mm
interval and a pair of parallel setting wires which can be adjusted. Movements of wires are effected
through a micrometer, one rotation of the drum equals to one scale division movement of the wires.
The instrument is designed to be rotated through 90 degrees about its longitudinal axis so that the
angles in both horizontal and vertical planes are measured.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Autocollimator:
It is an instrument designed to measure small angular deflections & maybe used in conjunction with a
plane mirror or other reflecting surface. An autocollimator is essentially an infinity telescope and a collimator
combined into one instrument. This is an optical instrument used for the measurement of small angular
differences. For small angular measurements, autocollimator provides a very sensitive and accurate approach.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The principle on which this instrument works is given below. O is a point source of light placed at the
principal focus of a collimating lens. The rays of light from O, incident on the lens, travels as a parallel beam of
light. If this beam strikes a plane reflector which is normal to the optical axis, it will be reflected back along its
own path and refocused at the same point O. If the plane reflector be tilted through a small angle ?, then
parallel beam will be deflected through twice this angle, and will be brought to focus at O? in the same plane at

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

a distance x from O. Obviously.
OO?=x=2?.f, where f is the focal length of the lens.
Applications:
1. For aligning circular & flat surfaces in machining
2. Alignment of beams & columns in construction buildings / industries, steel structures

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. To measure the straightness, flatness and parallelism

60 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Make the distance of 100mm internal on the work piece.
2. Set the cross wire so that two cross will coincide.
3. Set the mirror so that the cross wire is visible.
4. Move the reflector on next 100mm mark and adjust it to see reflection of cross wire.
5. Take the reading of reflected crosswire deviated or moved up or down.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Measure the distance between two crosswire.
Formulae:
Tan ? = X / 100
X = (100 x Tan ?) x 1000 in microns
Where X = Level at position B with respect to position A

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? = Angle/Deviation in degrees/ Seconds (1 Degree = 60 Minutes, 1 Minute = 60 Seconds).

Tabulation:

Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Bridge Length
(Base length of
the reflector)
Cumulative
Bridge length

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(Position of the
reflector)
Micrometer final
reading
(Autocollimator)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Deviation for
each 100mm
( ? in degrees)
1.
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.


Result:
The values are analyzed and necessary modification of the surface may be recommended based on the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

accuracy required on flatness. If the values observed from the micrometer are varying linearly then
straightness/flatness can be judged.
Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the optical instruments for non-contact measurement
of angles.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Surface Roughness
2. Quality Department

61 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Straightness
2. Define ? Tolerance straightness
3. What is flatness?
4. What is autocollimator?
5. What light rays used in autocollimator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. What is the use of autocollimator?
7. What is collimating lens?
8. What are the applications of autocollimator?
9. What is meant by target graticule?
10. What is objective lens?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. What is beam splitter?
12. What is the principle of autocollimator?
13. What are the advantages of autocollimator?
14. What are the limitations of autocollimator?
15. What are the types of measurement uncertainties of autocollimator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

62 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.15 THREAD PARAMETERS MEASUREMENT USING
PROFILE PROJECTOR
Aim:
To find the parameters of the given thread
Apparatus required:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Profile projector
2. Magnification of 10 x
3. Trace paper
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. Place the specimen between the work table centres and switch on the projector.
2. Place the magnification lens in the lens slot.
3. Focus the thread clearly by adjusting focusing knob to view the shadow on the screen clearly.
4. Place the tracing paper and trace the shadow profile.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Calculate the error in the pitch from the actual pitch.
6. Measure the major diameter (OD), minor diameter (ID), pitch of the thread and flank from the tracing
sheet.
63 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of thread parameters:
Magnification =
Sl.No. Parameters
Magnified value
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Actual value
(mm)
1. Outer diameter (O.D)

2. Internal diameter (I.D)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Pitch
4. Flank angle

Result:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Parameters of the given thread are determined.
Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the projector magnification of the profile of the specimen, and how
the image ratio differs with the distance of the projection screen.
Application:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Measurement of Screw
2. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What are the various methods used for measuring minor diameter of the thread?
2. What are the various method used for measuring major diameter of the thread?
3. What are the various method used for measuring pitch diameter?
4. What is Taylor?s principle?
5. How Taylor?s principle is applied to screw thread gauge?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. What is drunken error in screw threads?
7. What is the effect of flank angle error?
8. What is major diameter?
9. What is the magnification of profile projector in our laboratory?
10. What is the working principle of profile projector?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. What are the applications of profile projector?
12. What are the advantages of profile projector?
13. What are the disadvantages of profile projector over tool maker?s microscope?
14. What is meant by crest?
15. What is meant by root?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

64 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.16 MEASUREMENT OF DISPLACEMENT USING LVDT
Aim:
To measure the displacement using LVDT and to calibrate it with the millimeter scale reading
Apparatus required:
1. LVDT 2. Patch cords 3. Transducer with digital indicator 4. Millimeter scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diagram:

Principle:
Linear variable differential transducer provides an AC voltage output that is proportional to the
displacement of core passing through the winding. It consists of three coils. The primary coil is energized by

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

external AC power source. This mutual ? inductance device making use of three coils is generally arranged on
a cylindrical, concentric, non-magnetic form. Output amplitude and phase depend on the relative coupling
between the two pick-up coils and the power.
Within limits, on either side of the null position, core displacement results in a proportional output. This
phase relation existing between power source and output changes 180

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
through null is relatively simple, low
priced and mechanically steady. It is free from temperature effects unlike strain gauge. High output, high
sensitivity, less friction and better linearity are its advantages.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

65 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


Circuit operation:
Excitation power source: The primary winding of LVDT is excited by means of 0.3 kHz power source.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The Wien bridge oscillator circuit placed on a suitable p.c.b. generator a stable AC excitation at fixed
frequency. The output from this signal generator card is given to the input of complementary power transistors.
The power transistors in turn provide the excitation to the primary of the LVDT. The output from secondary is
amplified by means of IC. Separate op.amp converts the excitation signal into square waves which serve to
provide reference signal for phase sensitive detection. A field effect transistor acts as an analogue switch and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

phase detached output is generated. in phase,
D.C. output is also proportional to the displacement. Finally a D.C. amplifier is provided with a range
selector switch to centre zero meter on the front panel. It is possible to display the core displacements in the
range of 0 to 20 mm. The functioning of the phase sensitive the range of 0 to 5 mm, 0 to 10 mm and 0 to 20
mm. The functioning of the phase sensitive detector is better understood by observing the wave forms

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

provided along with the circuit diagram.
Procedure:
1. Connect the terminals marked primary of the instrument with the primary terminal of the transducer.
The flexible load wires are provided identically to connect one each for terminals marked secondary.
2. Adjust the magnetic ? core and bring the pointer mounted on brass rod to zero position. Set the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

digital meter to zero using the potentiometer.
3. Displace the core to the right in steps of 2 mm and note the corresponding digital meter reading.
4. Repeat the same procedure for core displacement towards left from the centre zero.
5. Find the percentage of error
6. Draw the graphs between:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

a) Input displacement (x-axis) and LVDT reading (y-axis)
b) Input displacement (x-axis) and percentage error
7. Displace the core in a gentle manner.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice
1 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

V SEMESTER - R 2013

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No. : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LABORATORY MANUAL
2 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

DHANALAKSHMI

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.


1. To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. To contribute to the promotion of Academic Excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels
3. To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING


Rendering the services to the global needs of engineering industries by educating students to become
professionally sound mechanical engineers of excellent caliber

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To produce mechanical engineering technocrats with a perfect knowledge intellectual and hands on
experience and to inculcate the spirit of moral values and ethics to serve the society

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MISSION
MISSION
VISION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION

4 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Fundamentals
To impart students with fundamental knowledge in mathematics and basic sciences that will mould
them to be successful professionals
2. Core competence
To provide students with sound knowledge in engineering and experimental skills to identify

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

complex software problems in industry and to develop a practical solution for them
3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theory and practice which
enable them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and organization and to design
products requiring interdisciplinary skills

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Professional skills
To bestow students with adequate training and provide opportunities to work as team that will build
up their communication skills, individual, leadership and supportive qualities and to enable them to
adapt and to work in ever changing technologies
5. Life-long learning

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To develop the ability of students to establish themselves as professionals in mechanical
engineering and to create awareness about the need for lifelong learning and pursuing advanced
degrees

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)
On completion of the B.E. (Mechanical) degree, the graduate will be able
a) To apply the basic knowledge of mathematics, science and engineering
b) To design and conduct experiments as well as to analyze and interpret data and apply the same in

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the career or entrepreneurship
c) To design and develop innovative and creative software applications
d) To understand a complex real world problem and develop an efficient practical solution
e) To create, select and apply appropriate techniques, resources, modern engineering and IT tools
f) To understand the role as a professional and give the best to the society

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

g) To develop a system that will meet expected needs within realistic constraints such as economical
environmental, social, political, ethical, safety and sustainability
h) To communicate effectively and make others understand exactly what they are trying to tell in both
verbal and written forms
i) To work in a team as a team member or a leader and make unique contributions and work with

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

coordination
j) To engage in lifelong learning and exhibit their technical skills
k) To develop and manage projects in multidisciplinary environments

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To familiar with different measurement equipment?s and use of this industry for quality inspection
List of Experiments

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Tool Maker?s Microscope
2. Comparator
3. Sine Bar
4. Gear Tooth Vernier Caliper
5. Floating gauge Micrometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Coordinate Measuring Machine
7. Surface Finish Measuring Equipment
8. Vernier Height Gauge
9. Bore diameter measurement using telescope gauge
10. Bore diameter measurement using micrometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. Force Measurement
12. Torque Measurement
13. Temperature measurement
14. Autocollimator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Ability to handle different measurement tools and perform measurements in quality impulsion
2. Learnt the usage of precision measuring instruments and practiced to take measurements
3. Learnt and practiced to build the required dimensions using slip gauge
4. Able to measure the various dimensions of the given specimen using the tool maker?s microscope

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Able to find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge
6. Able to measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare
7. Learnt to determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen using Gear tooth vernier
8. Able to measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two
wire method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. Learnt to study the construction and operation of coordinate measuring machine
10. Learnt to determine the diameter of bore by using telescopic gauge and dial bore indicator
11. Able to measure the surface roughness using Talysurf instrument
12. Studied the characteristic between applied load and the output volt
13. Learnt the characteristics of developing torque and respective sensor output voltage

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. Studied the characteristics of thermocouple without compensation
15. Able to check the straightness & flatness of the given component by using Autocollimator
16. Learnt to measure the displacement using LVDT and to calibrate it with the millimeter scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OBJECTIVES

COURSE OUTCOMES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CONTENTS
Sl. No. Name of the Experiments Page No.
CYCLE ? 1 EXPERIMENTS
1
Precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab ? A Study

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7
2
To build up the slip gauge for given dimension ? A Study
16
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thread parameters measurement using Tool Makers Microscope
20
4
Calibration of dial gauge
23

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5
Determination of taper angle by sine bar method
26
6
Determination of gear tooth thickness using gear tooth vernier

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

29
7
Measurement of thread parameters using floating carriage micrometer
32
CYCLE ? 2 EXPERIMENTS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8
Measurement of various dimensions using Coordinate Measuring Machine
35
9
Measurement of surface roughness

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

39
10
Measurement of bores using dial bore indicator and telescopic gauge
42
11

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Force measurement using load cell
46
12
Torque measurement using strain gauge
49

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13
Temperature measurement using thermocouple
53
14
Measurement of alignment using autocollimator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

56
ADDITIONAL EXPERIMENT BEYOND THE SYLLABUS
15
Thread parameters measurement using profile projector
60

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16
Displacement measurement ? linear variable differential transducer (LVDT)
62
PROJECT WORK
65

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.01 PRECISION MEASURING INSTRUMENT YSED IN

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

METROLOGY LAB ? A STUDY
Aim:
To study the following instruments and their usage for measuring dimensions of given specimen
1. Vernier caliper
2. Micrometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Vernier height gauge
4. Depth micrometer
5. Universal bevel protractor
Apparatus required:
Surface plate, specimen and above instruments

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier caliper:
The principle of vernier caliper is to use the minor difference between the sizes two scales or divisions
for measurement. The difference between them can be utilized to enhance the accuracy of measurement. The
vernier caliper essentially consists of two steel rules, sliding along each other.
Parts:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Different parts of the vernier caliper are
1. Beam ? It has main scale.
2. Fixed jaw
3. Sliding or Moving jaw ? It has vernier scale and sliding jaw locking screw.
4. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw knife

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

edges for internal measurement.
5. Stem or depth bar for depth measurement
Least count:
Least count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

50 VSD = 49 mm
1 VSD = 0.98 mm
Least count = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm

10 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ID

DEPTH

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OD
Measurement:
Given Vernier caliper can be used for external, internal depth, slot and step measurement.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement principle:
When both jaws contact each other scale shows the zero reading. The finer adjustment of movable jaw
can be done by the fine adjustment screw. First the whole movable jaw assembly is adjusted so that the two
measuring tips just touch the part to be measured. Then the fine adjustment clamp locking screw is tightened.
Final adjustment depending upon the sense of correct feel is made by the adjusting screw. After final

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

adjustment has been made sliding jaw locking screw is also tightened and the reading is noted.
All the parts of the Vernier caliper are made of good quality steel and measuring faces are hardened.
Types of vernier:
Vernier caliper, electronic vernier caliper, vernier depth caliper

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Main scale
reading (MSR)
(mm)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier scale
reading (VSR) (mm)
Total reading (MSR
+ VSR)
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OD


ID

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Depth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier height gauge:
Vernier height gauge is a sort of vernier caliper equipped with a special instrument suitable for height
measurement. It is always kept on the surface plate and the use of the surfaces plates as datum surfaces is
very essential.
Least count:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least Count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm
1 VSD = 0.98 mm
Least Count (LC) = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Parts:
1. Base
2. Beam ? It has main scale.
3. Slider ? It has a vernier scale and slider locking screw.
4. Scriber

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw.


12 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Material:
All the parts of vernier are made of good quality steel and the measuring faces hardened.
Types of vernier gauge:
1. Analog vernier height gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Digital vernier height gauge
3. Electronic vernier height gauge
Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Main scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(MSR)(mm)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale reading
(VSR)(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total reading (MSR +
VSR)(mm)
1.
2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Outside micrometer:
The micrometer essentially consists of an accurate screw having about 10 or 20 threads per cm. The

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

end of the screw forms one measuring tip and other measuring tip is constituted by a stationary anvil in the
base of the frame. The screw is threaded for certain length and is plain afterwards. The plain portion is called
spindle and its end is the measuring surface. The spindle is advanced or retracted by turning a thimble
connected to a spindle. The spindle is a slide fit over the barrel and barrel is the fixed part attached with the
frame. The barrel & thimble are graduated. The pitch of the screw threads is 0.5 mm.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count:
Least Count (LC) = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale
= 0.5 / 50 = 0.01 mm
Parts:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Frame
2. Anvil
3. Spindle
4. Spindle lock
5. Barrel or outside sleeve

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions
7. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.
The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.
14 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement:
It can be used for any external measurement.
Types of micrometer:
1. Outside micrometer, 2. Inside micrometer, 3.Depth micrometer, 4. Stick micrometer, 5. Screw thread
micrometer, 6. V ? anvil micrometer, 7. Blade type micrometer, 8. Dial micrometer, 9. Bench micrometer, 10.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tape screw operated internal micrometer, 11. Groove micrometer, 12. Digital micrometer, 13.Differential screw
micrometer, 14.Adjustable range outside micrometer.
Ratchet stop mechanism:
The object of the ratchet stop is to ensure that same level of torque is applied on the spindle while
measuring and the sense of the feel of operator is eliminated and consistent readings are obtained. By

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

providing this arrangement, the ratchet stop is made slip off when the torque applied to rotate the spindle
exceeds the set torque. Thus this provision ensures the application of same amount of torque during the
measurement.
Tabulation:
Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) (mm)
Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)
Head scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(HSR x LC) (mm)
Total Reading (PSR
+ HSR) (mm)
1.
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Depth micrometer:
Depth micrometer is a sort of micrometer which is mainly used for measuring depth of holes, so it is
named as depth micrometer.
Parts:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Shoulder
2. Spindle
3. Spindle lock
4. Barrel or outside sleeve ? It has pitch scale.
5. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.
The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.
15 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count:
Least Count = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale = 0.50/50
= 0.01 mm
Measurements:
It can be used for measuring the depth of holes, slots and recessed areas. The pitch of the screw thread

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

is 0.5 mm. The least count is 0.01 mm. Shoulder acts as a reference surface and is held firmly and
perpendicular to the centre line of the hole. For large range of measurement extension rods are used. In the
barrel the scale is calibrated. The accuracy again depends upon the sense of touch.
Procedure:
First, calculate the least count of the instrument. Check the zero error. Measure the specimen note

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

down the main scale reading or the head scale reading. Note down the vernier or head scale coincidence with
main or pitch scale divisions.
Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Pitch Scale Reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(PSR) (mm)
Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)
Head scale reading
(HSR x LC) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total Reading (PSR
+ HSR) (mm)

1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.


16 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Universal bevel protractor:

Description:
Bevel protractor is an instrument for measuring the angle between the two faces of a specimen. It

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

consists of a base plate on which a circular scale is engraved. It is graduated in degrees. An adjustment plate
is attached to a circular plate containing the vernier scale. The adjustable blade can be locked in any position.
The circular plate has 360 division divided into four parts of 90 degrees each. The adjustable parts have 24
divisions of to the right and left sides of zero reading. These scales are used according to the position of the
specimen with respect to movable scale.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. Place the specimen whose taper is to be measured between the adjustable plate and movable
blade with one of its face parallel to the base.
2. Lock the adjustable plate in position and note down the main scale reading depending upon the
direction of rotation of adjustable plate in clockwise or anticlockwise.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Note the VSC to the right of zero.
4. Multiply the VSC with the least count and add to MSR to obtain the actual reading.
Least count:
Least Count = 2 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
24 VSD = 46
o
=> 1 VSD = 23/12
LC = 2 ? 23/12 = 1/12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
= 5? (five minutes)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Main scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(MSR) (deg)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale reading
(VSR) (deg)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total reading (MSR +
VSR)
(deg)
1.
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The angle of scriber of the vernier height gauge =
Result:
Thus the various precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab are studied and the specimen
dimensions are recorded.
Outcome:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for linear, angular,
roundness and roughness measurements they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring
instrument according to a specific requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).
Application:
1. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Metrology
2. Define ? Inspection
3. What are the needs of inspection in industries?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. What are the various methods involving the measurement?
5. Define ? Precision
6. Define ? Accuracy
7. Define ? Calibration
8. Define ? Repeatability

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. Define ? Magnification
10. Define ? Error
11. Define ? Systematic Error
12. Define ? Random Error
13. Define ? Parallax Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. Define ? Environmental Error
15. Define ? Cosine Error
Viva-voce

18 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.02 BUILD UP THE SLIP GAUGE FOR GIVEN DIMENSION
? A STUDY
Aim:
To build up the slip gauge for given dimension

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Apparatus required:
1. Slip gauges set
2. Surface plate
3. Soft cloth
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
Slip gauge are universally accepted standard of length in industry. They are the working standard for
linear dimension. These were invented by a Swedish Engineer, C.E. Johansson. They are used
1. For direct precise measurement where the accuracy of the workpiece demand it.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. For use with high- magnification comparators to establish the size of the gauge blocks in general
use.
3. Gauge blocks are also used for many other purposes such as checking the accuracy of measuring
instrument or setting up a comparator to a specific dimension, enabling a batch of component to be
quickly and accurately checked or indeed in any situation where there is need to refer to standard of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

known length these blocks are rectangular.
19 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Most gauge blocks are produced from high grade steel, hardened and established by a heat treatment
process to give a high degree of dimensional stability. Gauge blocks are also manufactured from tungsten

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

carbide which is an extremely hard and wear resistant material. The measuring faces have a lapped finish.
The faces are perfectly flat and parallel to one another with a high degree of accuracy. Each block has an
extremely high dimensional accuracy at 20
o
C.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

These slip gauge are available in variety of selected sets both in inch units and metric units. Letter ?E? is
used for inch units and ?M? is used for metric standard number of pieces in a set following the letter E or M. For
example EBI refers to a set whose blocks are in metric units and are 83 in number. Each block dimensions is
printed on anyone of its face itself the size of any required standard being made up by combining the
appropriate number of these different size blocks.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

If two gauges are slid and twisted together under pressure they will firmly join together. This process,
known as wringing, is very useful because it enables several gauge blocks to be assembled together to
produce a required size. In fact the success of precision measurement by slip gauges depends on the
phenomenon of wringing.
First the gauge is oscillated slightly with very light pressure over other gauge so as to detect pressure at

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

any foreign particles between the surfaces. One gauge is placed perpendicular to other using standard
gauging pressure and rotary motion is applied until the blocks are lined up.
Procedure:
1. Build the given dimension by wringing minimum number of slip gauges.
2. Note the given dimension and choose the minimum possible slip gauge available in the set so as to

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

accommodate the last decimal value. The minimum slip gauge value dimension available i.e., 1.12
mm must be chosen followed by 1.5 mm thick gauge block.
3. Follow the above steps to build up the slip gauge of any dimension.
Precautions:
1. Slip gauges should be handled very carefully placed gently and should never be dropped.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Whenever a slip gauge is being removed from the set, its dimensions are noted and must be
replaced into the set at its appropriate place only.
3. Correct procedure must be followed in wringing and also in removing the gauge blocks.
4. They should be cleaned well before use and petroleum jelly is applied after use.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

20 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Range (mm) Increment (mm) No. of pieces

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total = ____________ Pieces
Total length of slip gauge = ________ mm
Given diameter Slip gauges used Obtained dimensions

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Slip gauge set is studied and the given dimensions are building up by wringing minimum number of slip

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

gauges.
Outcome:
Students will be able to select proper measuring instrument and know requirement of calibration, errors
in measurement etc. They can perform accurate measurements.
Application:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Why C.I. is preferred material for surface plates and tables?
2. Why V ? blocks are generally manufactured in pairs?
3. Why micrometer is required to be tested for accuracy?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Define ? Linear Measurement
5. List the linear measuring instrument according to their accuracy.
6. Define ? Least Count
7. What are the uses of vernier depth gauge?
8. What are the uses of feeler gauges?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. What are the uses of straight edge?
10. What are the uses of angle plate?
11. What are the uses of V ? block?
12. What are the uses of combination square?
13. What precautions should be taken while using slip gauges?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. What is wringing?
15. Why the slip gauges are termed as ?End standard?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

22 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


Expt.No.03 THREAD PARAMETERS MEASUREMENT USING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TOOL MAKERS MICROSCOPE
Aim:
To study the tool makers microscope and in the process measure the various dimensions of the given
specimen
Apparatus required:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Tool makers microscope
2. Specimen
Diagram:

Description:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The tool maker?s microscope is designed for measurement of parts of complex forms; for example,
profile of a tool having external threads. It can also be used for measuring centre to centre distance of the
holes in any plane as well as the coordinates of the outline of a complex template gauge, using the
coordinates measuring system.
23 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Basically it consists of an optical head which can be adjusted vertically along the ways of supporting
column. The optical head can be clamped at any position by a screw. On the work table (which as a circular
base in which there are graduations) the part to be inspected is placed. The table has a compound slide by
means of which the part can be measured. For giving these two movements, there are two micrometer screws

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

having thimble scales and verniers. At the back of the base light source is arranged that provides horizontal
beam of light, reflected from a mirror by 90 degrees upwards towards the table. The beam of light passes
through the transparent glass plate on which flat plates can be checked are placed. Observations are made
through the eyepiece of the optical head.
Procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Place the given specimen on the work table and switch on all the three light sources and adjust the
intensity of the light source until a clean image of the cross wires and specimen are seen through
the eyepiece.
2. Coincide one of the two extreme edges between which the measurement has to be taken with
vertical or horizontal cross wires and depending upon the other image coincide with the same cross

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

wires by moving the above device. Note the reading.The difference between the two readings gives
the value of the required measurement.
3. Note the experiment specimen and the readings.
4. Tabulate the different measurements measured from the specimen.
Determination of thread parameters

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Magnification =
S.No. Parameters
Magnified value
(mm)
Actual value

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
1. Outer diameter (O.D)

2. Internal diameter (I.D)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Pitch

4. Flank angle

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Included angle of the tool was measured using tool maker?s microscope and various dimensions of the
given specimen are measured.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

24 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the various parameters of thread and select proper measuring
instrument and know requirement of calibration, errors in measurement etc. They can perform accurate

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measurements.
Application:
1. Machine Shop
2. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by tool maker?s microscope?
2. What is the light used in tool maker?s microscope?
3. What are the various characteristics that you would measure in a screw thread?
4. What are the instruments that are required for measuring screw thread?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Define ? Pitch
6. What are the causes of pitch error?
7. Define ? Flank
8. What are the effects of flank angle error?
9. What is progressive error?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. What is periodic error?
11. What is drunken error?
12. What is erratic error?
13. What are the applications of tool maker?s microscope?
14. What are the limitations of tool maker?s microscope?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15. What are the advantages of tool maker?s microscope?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

25 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.04 CALIBRATION OF DIAL GAUGE USING SLIP GAUGE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Aim:
To find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge
Apparatus required:
Dial gauge, magnetic stand, slip gauge, and surface plate
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
The dial test indicator is a precision measuring instrument which can convert linear motion into angular
motion by means of transmission mechanics of rack and pinion and can be used to measure linear vibration
and errors of shape.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

This instrument has the features such as good appearance, compact size, light weight, high precision,
reasonable construction, constant measuring face etc. Rigidity of all parts is excellent. Probe is tipped with
carbide balls. A shock proof mechanism is provided for those with larger measuring range.

26 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Types of dial indicator:
1. Plunger type
2. Lever type
Plunger type dial indicator has a resolution counter and each division in main scale is 0.01 mm. In lever

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

type dial test indicator is replaced by ball type stylus.
Procedure:
1. Fix the dial gauge to the stand rigidly and place the stand on the surface plate.
2. Set the plunger of dial gauge to first touch the upper surface of standard slip gauge and set indicator
to zero.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Raise then the plunger by pulling the screw above the dial scale.
4. Place the standard slip gauge underneath the plunger.
5. Release the plunger and let it to touch the standard slip gauge.
6. Note the reading on the dial scale.
Formulae:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The standard error of dial gauge is calculated by the formula

Tabulation:
S.No.
Slip gauge reading ?x?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
Dial gauge reading
(mm)
(x? - x)
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x? (x? - x)
1.
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Thus the accuracy and standard error of dial gauge is found. The standard error of given dial gauge is
__________.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

27 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Outcome:
Students will be able to check the variation in tolerance during the inspection process of a

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

machined part, measure the deflection of a beam or ring under laboratory conditions, as well as many
other situations where a small measurement needs to be registered or indicated
Application:
1. Milling Machine
2. Analog versus digital/electronic readout

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is comparator?
2. What are the types of comparators?
3. What is the LC for comparators?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. What are the applications of comparator?
5. What is meant by plunger?
6. What are the types of dial indicators?
7. Why a revolution counter is not provided in lever type dial test indicator?
8. Draw a line diagram of the operating mechanism of plunger type dial test indicator.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. Explain the term magnification of a dial indicator.
10. What are the uses of dial test indicator?
11. What are the practical applications of dial test indicator?
12. What precautions should be taken while using dial test indicator?
13. What are the desirable qualities of a dial test indicator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. What are the advantages of dial test indicator?
15. What are the limitations of dial test indicator?
16. Distinguish between comparator and measuring instrument.
17. What are the advantages of electrical comparator?
18. What are the advantages of optical comparator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

19. What are the uses of comparator?
20. What are the advantages and disadvantages of mechanical comparator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

28 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.05 DETERMINATION OF TAPER ANGLE BY SINE BAR
METHOD
Aim:
To measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare
Apparatus required:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sine bar, slip gauges, dial gauge with stand, micrometer, surface plate, bevel protractor, vernier caliper
Diagram:

Description:
The sine bar principle uses the ratio of the length of two sides of a right triangle. It may be noted that

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

devices operating on sine principle are capable of ?self-generation?. The measurement is restricted to 45
o
from
accuracy point of view. Sine bar itself is not a measuring instrument.
Accuracy requirements of sine bar:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. The axes of the rollers must be parallel to each other and the centre distance L must be precisely
known.
2. The sine bar must be flat and parallel to the plane connecting the axes of the rollers.
3. The rollers must be of identical diameters and must have within a close tolerance.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

29 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Procedure:
1. Fix the dial gaugeon the magnetic stand and place the magnetic stand on the surface plate.Check

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the parallelism of the sine bar.
2. Place the given specimen above the sine bar and place the dial gauge on top of the specimen.
Adjustthe dial gauge for zero deflection.
3. Raise the front end of the sine bar with slip gauges until the work surface is parallel to the datum
surface.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Check the parallelism using dial gauge.
5. Measure the distance between the centres of the sine bar rollers as ?L? and note the height of the
slip gauge as ?H?.
6. Note the included angle of the specimen.
Formulae:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sin ? = H/L where ? = Included angle of the specimen
H = Height of slip gauges
L = Distance between the centre of rollers
Tabulation:
S.No. L (mm) H (mm) Taper angle ( ?)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
2.
3.

Result:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The taper angle of the given specimen using sine bar was found to be =
Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for angular measurements
and they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a specific
requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Flat Surface
2. Granite

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

30 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. List out the various angle measuring instruments.
2. What is the working principles sine bar?
3. How is a sine bar used to measure the angle?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. What is the application of sine bar?
5. What is the material of sine bar?
6. Why sine bar is not preferred to use for measuring angles more than 45
0
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. What are the features of sine bar?
8. A 100 mm sine bar is to be set up to an angle of 33
0
, determine the slip gauges needed from 87
pieces set.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. What are the various instruments used for measuring angles?
10. What is sine bar?
11. How sine bar is used for angle measurement?
12. Explain how sine bar is used to measure angle of small size component.
13. Explain how sine bar is used to measure angle of large size component.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. What are the various types of sine bar?
15. What are the limitations of sine bar?
16. What is sine center?
17. What is sine table?
18. What are the possible sources of errors in angular measurement by sine bar?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

19. What are angle gauges?
20. How angle gauges are used for measuring angles?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

31 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.06 DETERMINATION OF GEAR TOOTH THICKNESS
USING GEAR TOOTH VERNIER
Aim:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen and to draw the graph between the tooth
number and the error in thickness
Apparatus required:
Gear tooth vernier, specimen, surface plate and vernier caliper
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
The tooth thickness, in general, is measured at pitch circle since gear tooth thickness varies from the tip
to the base circle of the tooth. This is possible only when there is an arrangement to fix that position for this
measurement by the gear tooth vernier. It has two vernier scales; one is vertical and other is horizontal.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
32 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

1. Measure initially the outside diameter of the given gear specimen by means of a vertical calculation
of vernier caliper. Note the number of teeth. Calculate the module (m) using the formula.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M = OD/ (Z+2) where z ? number of teeth
M - Module
2. Calculate the theoretical tooth thickness (t) by t = z * m* sin (90/z).
3. Set the vernier scale for the height and tighten.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Measure the thickness of each tooth using the horizontal scale. This is measured thickness. It can
be positive or negative.
H = m x [1+ Z/2 (1- Cos 90/Z)]
5. Calculate the error in the tooth thickness i.e,1. measured thickness ? Theoretical thickness
6. Draw the graph between the tooth number and the error in thickness.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Tooth
Number
Measured Thickness
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Theoretical Thickness (mm)
Error in tooth thickness
(mm)
1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3

Tooth
Number
MSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
VSC

VSR
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TR
(mm)
1
2
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Graph:


Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tooth No.
33 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
The theoretical experiment value of gear tooth thickness is obtained and graph is drawn between error
and tooth number in tooth thickness

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Theoretical tooth thickness =
Experimental tooth thickness =
Error in tooth thickness =
Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the basic measurement units and able to calibrate various

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measuring parameters of the gear.
Application:
1. Gear Component
2. Mining

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Calculate the setting of a gear tooth vernier caliper for a straight spur gear having 40 teeth and
module 4.
2. What is the importance of chordal depth?
3. Define ? Chordal width
4. How is the actual profile of the gear tooth determined?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. What are the manufacturing errors in gear element?
6. Define ? Addendum
7. Define ? Dedendum
8. Define ? Flank of tooth
9. Define ? Pitch

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. Define ? Pitch Circle
11. Define ? Crest of tooth
12. Define ? Root of tooth
13. Define ? Base Circle
14. Define ? Module

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15. Define ? Angle of Obliquity


Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

34 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.07 MEASUREMENT OF THREAD PARAMETER USING
FLOATING CARRIAGE MICROMETER
Aim:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two wire
method
Apparatus required:
1. Floating carriage micrometer
2. Standard wire

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Given specimen (screw thread)
Diagram:

Description of floating carriage micrometer:
It consists of three main units. A base casting carries a pair of centres on which threaded work piece is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

to be mounted. Another carriage capable of moving towards centre is mounted exactly above. In this carriage
one head with thimble to measure up to 0.002 mm is provided and at the other side of head a fiducial indicator
is provided to indicate zero position.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

35 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Procedure:
1. For two wire method, place the standard wire over a thread of the screw at opposite sides.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. For three wire method, place two standard wires on two successive threads and the third wire
placed opposite sides of the thread.
3. Measure the diameter over wires (M) using floating carriage micrometer.
4. Repeat this procedure at various positions of the screw and take different readings.
Formulae:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. For best wire size, d = P / 2 Cos (x/2)
Where, P = Pitch
d= wire size
x = angle between two threads
= 60

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
for metric thread
2. Actual effective diameter, E.A = M ? 3d + 0.866 p
3. Nominal effective diameter, EN = D ? 0.648 p
4. Max. wire size = 1.01 p

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Min. wire size = 0.505 p
6. Best wire size = 0.577 p
M = Diameter over wires
P = Pitch of thread
For metric thread:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Actual effective diameter (EA) = M ? 3d + 0.866 p
Where d = actual diameter of wire
Determination of actual and nominal effective diameter of the screw thread:
Sl.No.
Nominal

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diameter (D)
(mm)
Diameter over
wire ?M?
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Actual eff.
Diameter E.A
(mm)
Nominal eff.
Diameter E.N

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
Error in effective
diameter
(E.A ? E.N)
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

36 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Result:
Thus the actual and nominal effective diameter is measured using three wire method and the error in

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

effective diameter of screw is determined.
Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for roundness
measurements and they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a
specific requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Wholse
2. Maxxis Rubber India

1. Define ? Pitch

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Define ? Flank Angle
3. What is plug gauge?
4. What is meant by micrometer?
5. What is meant by indicator?
6. What is best ? size wire?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Calculate the diameter of the best wire for an M 20 x 25 screws.
8. What are the different corrections to be applied in the measurement of effective diameter by the
method of wire?
9. What is floating carriage micrometer?
10. What are the uses of floating carriage micrometer?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. What are the methods are used for measuring effective diameter?
12. Define ? Effective Diameter
13. Define ? Major Diameter
14. Define ? Minor Diameter
15. What are the effects of flank error?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16. Define ? Rake Angle
17. Define ? Pitch Cylinder
18. What are the effects of pitch error?
19. Define ? Pitch Diameter
20. What is meant by angle of thread?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

37 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.08 MEASUREMENT OF VARIOUS DIMENSIONS USING
COORDINATE MEASURING MACHINE
Aim:
1. To study the construction and operation of coordinate measuring machine

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. To measure the specified dimensions of the given component
Instruments used:
Coordinate measuring machine, vernier calipers
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Theory:
A coordinate measuring machine (CMM) is a 3D device for measuring the physical and geometrical
characteristics of an object. This machine may be manually controlled by an operator or it may be computer
controlled. Measurements are defined by a probe attached to the three moving axis of this machine X, Y and Z
axes. A coordinate measuring machine (CMM) is also a device used in manufacturing and assembly

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

processes to test a part or assembly against the design intent. By precisely recording the X, Y and Z
coordinates of the target, points are generated which can be analyzed via regression algorithms for the
construction of features. These points are collected by using a probe that is positioned manually by an
38 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

operator or automatically via direct computer control (DCC). DCC CMMs can be programmed to repeatedly
measure identical parts, thus a CMM is a specialized form of industrial robot.
Parts:
Coordinate measuring machine include three main components:
1. The main structures which include three axes of motion.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Probing system
3. Data collection and reduction system ? typically includes a machine controller, desktop computer
and application software
Machine description:
1. In modern machines, the gantry type superstructure has two legs and is often called a bridge. This

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

moves freely along the granite table with one leg following a guide rail attached to one side of the
granite table. The opposite leg simply rests on the granite table following the vertical surface
contour.
2. Air bearings are fixed for ensuring friction free travel. Compressed air is forced through a series of
very small holes in a flat bearing surface to provide a smooth but controlled air cushion on which the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CMM can move in a frictionless manner.
3. The movement of the bridge along the granite table forms one axis of the XY plane. The bridge of
the gantry contains a carriage which traverses between the inside and outside legs and forms the
other X or Y horizontal axis.
4. The third axis of movement (Z axis) is provided by the addition of a vertical quill or spindle which

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

moves up and down through the center of the carriage. The touch probe forms the sensing device
on the end of the quill.
5. The movement of the X, Y and Z axes fully describes the measuring envelope. Some touch probes
are themselves powered rotary devices with the probe tip able to swivel vertically through 90
degrees and through a full 360 degrees rotation.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Uses:
They are generally used for:
1. Dimensional measurement
2. Profile measurement
3. Angularity or orientation measurement

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Depth mapping
5. Digitizing mapping
6. Shaft measurement
39 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The machines are available in a wide range of sizes and designs with a variety of different probe
technologies. They can be operated manually or automatically through direct computer control (DCC). They
are offered in various configurations such as bench top, free ? standing, handheld and portable.
Procedure:
1. Take at least 8 points on sphere ball attached to the granite table.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Fix the object whose dimension needs to be measured using the jigs and fixtures.
3. Using joystick, move the probe whose tip is made of ruby slowly and carefully to the surface whose
measurements have to be taken.
4. Touch the probe at two places for measurement of a line (starting and ending point).
5. Touch the probe at two places for measurement of a circular profile and for a cylinder touch the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

probe at 8 points.
6. Measure the same profiles again with vernier calipers (length of line, circle diameter, cylinder
diameter) to compare the two readings.
Comments:
1. The machine should be calibrated every time when it is being used.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. While measuring the profiles, the probe should be moved very slowly as it may damage the ruby if
hit with a high force.
3. Care should be taken while performing experiment so that the granite table of the machines should
get any scratches.
4. ?Retract distance? should be fixed according to the space available in the near vicinity of the profile

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measurement area.
Observation:
Sl.No. Feature
CMM reading
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier reading
(mm)
Form error
(mm)
Difference in two

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

readings (mm)
1 Circle -1
2 Circle -2
3 Circle -3
4 Line

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 Arc
6
Cone - Diameter
Cone ? Vertex angle
Cone ? Height

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7
Cylinder ? Diameter
Cylinder ? Height

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

40 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Result:
Thus the different profile of given object are measured using coordinate measuring machine
Outcome:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Students will be able to measures the geometry of physical objects by sensing discrete points on the
surface of the object with a probe and they will be able to know the Various types of probes are used in CMMs,
including mechanical, optical, laser, and white light.
Application:
1. Surface Measuring Equipment

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Photo transistor

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What are the types of measuring machine?
2. What is CMM?
3. What are the types of CMM?
4. What are the advantages of CMM?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. What are the limitations of CMM?
6. What are the possible sources of error in CMM?
7. What is the use of universal measuring machine?
8. What are the applications of CMM?
9. What is the working principle of three axis measuring machine?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. What is image shearing microscope?
11. What is the use of electronic inspection and measuring machine?
12. What are the types of electronic inspection and measuring machine?
13. What is CMM probe?
14. What are the three main probes are available?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15. What are the types of stylus?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

41 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.09 MEASUREMENT OF SURFACE ROUGHNESS UING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TALYSURF INSTRUMENT
Aim:
To measure the surface roughness using Talysurf instrument
Apparatus required:
Talysurf instrument, work piece, surface plate

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diagram:

Theory:
On any finished surface, imperfections are bound to be there and these take the form of a succession of
hills and valleys which vary both in height and in spacing and result in a kind of texture which in appearance or

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

feel is often characteristic of the machining process and accompanying defects. The several kinds of
departures are there on the surface and these are due to various causes.

42 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Methods of measuring surface roughness:
1. Surface inspection of comparison methods
2. Direct instrument measurements
In comparative methods the surface texture is assessed by observation of the surface. But these
methods are not reliable as they can be misleading, if comparison is not made with surfaces produced by

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

same techniques. The various methods available under comparison method are: (i) Touch Inspection
(ii)Scratch Inspection (iii) Microscopic Inspection (iv) Visual Inspection (v) Surface Photographs (vi) Reflected
Light Intensity Direct Instrument Measurements enable to determine a numerical value of the surface finish of
any surface. Nearly all instruments used are stylus probe type of instruments. This operates on electrical
principle.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. Place the finished component on the surface plate.
2. Fix the Talysurf tester to the vernier height gauge using adopter at a convenient height.
3. Make sure that the stylus probe touches the work piece.
4. Fix the sampling length in the tester.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Press the power button so that the probe moves on the surface to and fro.
6. Take the readings of the surface roughness directly from the instrument.
7. Repeat the above process for the remaining specimen and tabulate the readings.
Precautions:
1. The surface to be tested should be cleaned properly.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. The tester should be fixed to the height gauge properly so that the movement of the probe is exactly
parallel to the surface of work.
3. Make sure that the probe gently touches the work.
Tabulation:
S.No

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement roughness value,
?m
Sample direction Ra, Rz
Average Ra Average Rz Grade
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

43 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Result:
Thus the surface roughness is checked for different specimens by Talysurf.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for roughness
measurements they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a specific
requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).
Application:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Machine Shop
2. Quality Department


1. Define ? Actual Size?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. What is meant by normal surface?
3. What is meant by profilo-graph?
4. What is Tomlinson surface meter?
5. What is meant by profile?
6. What are the factors affecting surface roughness?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Why the surface texture is control?
8. Define ? Lay
9. Define ? Surface Texture
10. Define ? Flaws
11. What is sampling length?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. What are the methods used for evaluating surface finish?
13. What is form factor?
14. What are the methods used for measuring surface finish?
15. How will you differentiate smooth surface from flat surface?
16. How surface finish is designated on drawings?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17. Define ? Primary Texture
18. Define ? Secondary Texture
19. What are the types of instrument used for measuring surface texture?
20. Define ? waviness

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

44 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.10 MEASUREMENT OF BORE USING DIAL BORE
INDICATOR AND TELESCOPIC GAUGE
Aim:
To determine the diameter of bore by using telescopic gauge and checking the same by using dial bore

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

indicator
Apparatus required:
Work piece, vernier caliper, telescopic gauge and dial gauge indicator set with anvil.
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

45 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


Procedure:
Bore gauge measurement:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Select the extension rod and washer according to the bore diameter to be measured
2. Fix the suitable extension rod and washer with the bore gauge
3. Fix the dial gauge to the bore gauge in its position
4. Insert the bore gauge inside the bore to be measured and hold the gauge in parallel o the axis of the
bore. Ensure that the tips on either side of the bore gauge are in touch with inner wall of the bore

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Note down the reading in the dial gauge and withdraw the bore gauge from the bore
6. Hold the measuring tips of bore gauge between the spindle and anvil of a micrometer and compress
the tips by rotating the thimble till the reading reaches the same one as noted earlier
7. Observe and record the micrometer reading as the bore diameter to be measured
Telescopic gauge measurement:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Select the telescopic gauge according to the bore diameter to be measured
2. Press the telescopic spindles in the telescopic gauge lock them by locking screw
3. Insert the telescopic gauge inside thee bore to be measured. Release the locking screw to expand
the telescopic spindles outwards inside the bore
4. Hold the telescopic gauge in parallel to the axis of bore axis and ensure that the tips of telescopic

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

spindles are in touch with the inner wall of the bore
5. Lock the telescopic spindles and withdraw it from the bore
46 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

6. Measure the expanded length of the telescopic spindles using micrometer record them as the inner

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

diameter of the bore
Practical observations:
Rough measurement of bore using Telescopic gauge:
Least count of micrometer = 0.01 mm
Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Micrometer reading
Total reading
(MSR + TSC * LC) ( mm) Main scale reading (MSR)
(mm)
Thimble scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

coincidence
1.
2.

Average reading = ________ mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Accurate measuring using Bore gauge
Sl.No.
Micrometer
reading
(d) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Bore gauge
reading
(R1) (mm)
Work piece reading
(R2) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Final reading
d+ (R1 ? R2) * 0.01
(mm)
1.
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Accurate internal diameter of hole using bore gauge = ______ mm

Result
1. Internal diameter of the work piece by using telescopic gauge is ________mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Diameter obtained by using dial gauge indicator is __________________mm

Outcome:
Students will be able to measure a bore's size, by transferring the internal dimension to a remote
measuring tool (Telescopic gauge).

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Automobile
2. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

47 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by bore diameter?
2. What is gauge?
3. What is meant by measurement?
4. What is telescope gauge?
5. What is bore gauge?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. What is contact point?
7. What is the principle of bore gauge?
8. What are the applications of telescopic gauge?
9. What types of materials are used in telescopic gauge?
10. What are the types of instrument used to measure bore diameter?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. What are the applications of bore gauge?
12. What are the advantages of bore gauge over telescopic gauge?
13. What are the limitations of bore gauge?
14. What is the working principle of telescopic gauge?
15. What are the disadvantages of telescopic gauge?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

48 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.11 MEASUREMENT OF FORCE USING LOAD CELL
Aim:
To study the characteristic between applied load and the output voltage

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Apparatus required:
1. Trainer kit
2. Multimeter
3. Load cell sensor with setup
4. Weights (5 kg)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Power chord
Diagram:

Formulae:
Error (%) = {Applied Voltage ? (Displayed Load)/ Applied Load)} x 100

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Block diagram:



Applied DC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Load O/P

DC Excitation source Transducer
Transducer
Instrumentation

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Amplifier
Gain Amplifier DVM
49 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Interfacing and calibration procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Interface the load cell 9 pin ?D? type male connector to 9 pin D type female connector, fixed on the
module.
2. First unload the beam and nullify the display by using zero adjustment POT
3. Apply the maximum load of 5 kg to the beam and adjust the display to 5 kg by using gain
adjustment POT.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. After the initial adjustment, the unit should not be disturbed until the completion of the experiment.
Safety precaution:
1. During offset adjustment, the beam should not be loaded.
2. The beam should not be disturbed during the experiment.
3. Remove the load from the beam, after completion of the experiment; otherwise wire wound on the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

strain gauge will get damaged.
4. If you are getting an unsatisfactory reading, then vary the zero and span POT minimum to
maximum.
5. Maximum load should not exceed 5 kg.
6. Once calibrated, the setting should not be distributed till the end of the experiment.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. Install the load cell module and interface the 9 pin D connector with kit.
2. Connect the multimeter in volt mode across T5 and GND for the output voltage measurement.
3. Switch on the module.
4. Initially, unload the beam and nullify the display by using zero adjustment POT (zero calibration).

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Apply the maximum load of 5 kg to the beam and adjust the display to 5 kg by using gain
adjustment POT (gain calibration).
6. Now apply the load to the beam, a force will develop on the beam and measure the output voltage
(V) across T5 and GND.
7. Gradually increase the load and note down the output voltage (V) and applied load.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Tabulate the values of displayed load and applied voltage.
9. Plot a graph between applied load and output voltage (V).
Note: When 1 kg load is applied to the beam, the displayed voltage is 1 kg.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

50 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:
Applied load
(kg)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Output voltage
(V)
Displayed load
(kg)
% Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Graph:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Applied load (kg) Vs Output Voltage (V)
2. Actual load (kg) Vs % Error
Result:
Thus the characteristic between applied load and the output voltage was studied.
Outcome:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Students will be able to understand the Sensor device (electro-mechanical) which help us to measure
a physical parameter (such as temperature, pressure, force, acceleration etc.) by providing analog input to get
digital output.
Application:
1. Machine Shop

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Automobile


1. What is meant by force?
2. Define ? Wheat stone bridge circuit

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Define ? Load
4. What is meant by deflector?
5. What is meant by force indicator?
6. Define ? Instrumentation
7. How instrumentations are classified?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Define ? Transducer
9. What is electrical transducer?
10. How transducers are classified?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

51 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.12 MEASUREMENT OF TORQUE USING STRAIN
GAUGE
Aim:
To study the characteristics of the developing torque and the signal conditioned sensor output voltage
Apparatus required:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Trainer kit
2. Digital Multimeter (V)
3. Torque sensor setup
4. Weights (100 gram x 10 Nos.)
5. Power chord

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diagram:

Interfacing and calibration procedure:
1. Interface the torque sensor 9 pin. ?D? type male connector to ?9? pin ?D? type female connector, fixed
on the module.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. First, unload the beam and nullify the display by using zero adjustment POT.
3. Apply the maximum load of 1 kg to the beam and adjust the display to 9.81 Nm by using adjustment
POT.
4. After this initial calibration, the unit should not be disturbed until the completion of the experiment.
52 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Safety precaution:
1. During offset adjustment, the beam should not be loaded.
2. The beam should not be disturbed during the experiment.
3. Remove the beam from the shaft, after completion of the experiment otherwise wire wound on the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

strain gauge will get damaged.
4. If the displayed torque reading are in negative, change the beam connections in opposite to
previously connected direction.
5. If you are getting an unsatisfactory reading, then vary the zero and span POT minimum to
maximum.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Maximum load should not exceed 1 kg.
7. Once calibrated, the setting should not be disturbed till the end of this experiment.
Procedure:
1. Install the torque sensor setup and interface with kit.
2. Switch ?ON? the module.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Connect the Multimeter in millivolts mode T2 and T3 for bridge output voltage measurement POT.
4. First, unload the beam and nullify the bridge output voltage by using zero adjustment POT.
5. By applying load to the beam, torque will develop on the shaft and measure the bridge output
voltage (mV) across T2 and T3
6. Gradually increase the force by applying load and note down the bridge output voltage (mV).

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Tabulate the readings and plot a graph between developed torque versus bridge output voltage
(mV).
Formulae:
Error (%) = {(Actual Torque ? Theoretical Torque)/ Theoretical Torque} x 100
Theoretical Torque = mass (m) x acceleration due to gravity (g) x radial distance

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= 1 kg x 9.81 m/s
2
x 1 m
= 9.81 Nm
Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No. Theoretical Torque
(Nm)
Bridge output voltage
(mV)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Model graph:
The graph between developed torque and bridge output voltage is drawn
53 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Developed torque (Nm) Vs Output Voltage (V)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sample reading:
Developed Torque (Nm) = 9.81 Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Output Voltage (V) = 5 mV
Result:
Thus the characteristics of the torque developed which is due to force applied to beam and the bridge
output voltage were studied and graph is plotted.
Outcome:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Students will be able to understand the Sensor device (electro-mechanical) which helps us to
measure the strain by providing analog input to digital output.
Application:
1. Machine Shop
2. Turbine

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

54 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00



1. Define ? Torque

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Define ? Twist
3. What are the methods used for measuring torque?
4. Define ? Strain Gauge
5. What is prony brake?
6. What are the modern devices used for measuring torque?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. What are the elements of strain gauge?
8. What is the use of slip ring for measuring torque?
9. What is slip ring?
10. What are the types of torque?
11. What are the types of dynamometer?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. What are the applications of dynamometer?
13. What are the features of dynamometer?
14. What is gauge factor?
15. What are the types of torque measurement?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

55 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.13 MEASUREMENT OF TEMPERATURE USING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

THERMOCOUPLE
Aim:
To study the characteristics of thermocouple without compensation
Apparatus required:
1. Trainer kit

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Thermocouple
3. Water bath
4. Thermometer
5. Digital multi meter
6. Power chord

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diagram:

Procedure:
1. Connect the two terminals of the thermocouple across T1 & T2.
2. Position the switch ?SW1? towards ?NO?.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Switch ?ON? the unit and note the displayed temperature.
4. If there is any difference in displayed temperature at room temperature, adjust the offset knob ?zero?
to set 0
o
C in display.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Place the Multimeter across T7 and T8.
6. Insert the thermocouple and thermometer into water bath.
7. Switch ?ON? the water bath.
8. Note the actual temperature in thermometer and displayed temperature simultaneously.
9. Tabulate the reading and calculate % error using the above formula

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

56 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

10. Plot the graph actual temperature Vs % error
Formulae:
Error (%) = {(Displayed Temperature ? Actual Temp)/ Actual Temp} x 100

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Actual Temperature
(
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C)
Displayed Temperature
(
o
C)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

% Error



Graph

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Temperature Vs % Error
Result:
Thus the characteristics of the thermocouple without compensation were studied and graph is plotted.
Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the Sensor device (electro-mechanical) which help us to measure

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

a physical parameter (such as temperature) by providing analog input.
Application:
1. Thermocouple
2. Heat generation

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

57 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by total radiation pyrometer?
2. How the mercury in glass thermometer worked?
3. What are the sources of error in thermocouple?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Define ? Resistance
5. Define ? Temperature detector
6. Define ? Temperature
7. What are the types of instrument used for measuring temperature?
8. What are the types of electrical temperature sensors?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. What is optical sensor?
10. What are the applications of liquid in gas thermometer?
11. What are the applications of bimetallic thermometer?
12. What is vapour pressure thermometer?
13. What is thermocouple?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. What are the types of metal are used in combination to form thermocouples?
15. What are the advantages of thermocouple?
16. What are the disadvantages of thermocouple?
17. Define ? Resistance Thermometer
18. Define ? Thermistor

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

19. What is the use radiation pyrometer?
20. What are the advantages of optical pyrometer?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

58 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.14 MEASUREMENT OF ALIGNMENT USING
AUTOCOLLIMATOR
Aim:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To check the straightness & flatness of the given component by using Autocollimator
Apparatus required:
Autocollimator, work piece/ object to be tested
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Theory:
1. Definition of straightness ? A plane is to be said straight over a given length if the variation or
distance of its point from two planes perpendicular to each other and parallel to the generation
direction at of the line remain within specified tolerance limits. The reference planes being so
chosen that their intersection is parallel to the straight line joining two points suitably located on the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

line to be tested and two points being close ends of the length to be measured.
2. Principle of the Autocollimator-A cross line ?target? graticule is positioned at the focal plane of a
telescope objective system with the intersection of the cross line on the optical axis, i.e. at the
principal focus. When the target graticule is illuminated, rays of light diverging from the intersection
point reach the objective via a beam splitter and are projected from the objective as parallel pencils

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

of light. In this mode the optical system is operating as a collimator.
59 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

3. A flat reflector placed in front of the objective and exactly normal to the optical axis reflects the
parallel pencils of light back along their original paths. They are then brought to focus in the plane of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the target graticule and exactor coincident with its intersection. A proportion of the returned light
passes straight through the beam splitter and the return image of the target cross line is therefore
visible through the eyepiece. In this mode, the optical system is operating as a telescope focused at
infinity.
4. If the reflector is tilted through a small angle the reflected pencils of light will be deflected by twice

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the angle of tilt (principle of reflection) and will be brought to focus in the plane of target graticule but
linearly displaced from the actual target cross lines by an amount 2?* f.
5. An optical system of an autocollimator consists of a light source, condensers, semi-reflectors, target
wire, collimating lens and reflector apart from microscope eyepiece. A target wire takes place of the
light source into the focal plane of the collimator lenses. Both the target wire and the reflected image

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

are seen through a microscope eyepiece. The eyepiece incorporates a scale graduated in 0.05mm
interval and a pair of parallel setting wires which can be adjusted. Movements of wires are effected
through a micrometer, one rotation of the drum equals to one scale division movement of the wires.
The instrument is designed to be rotated through 90 degrees about its longitudinal axis so that the
angles in both horizontal and vertical planes are measured.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Autocollimator:
It is an instrument designed to measure small angular deflections & maybe used in conjunction with a
plane mirror or other reflecting surface. An autocollimator is essentially an infinity telescope and a collimator
combined into one instrument. This is an optical instrument used for the measurement of small angular
differences. For small angular measurements, autocollimator provides a very sensitive and accurate approach.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The principle on which this instrument works is given below. O is a point source of light placed at the
principal focus of a collimating lens. The rays of light from O, incident on the lens, travels as a parallel beam of
light. If this beam strikes a plane reflector which is normal to the optical axis, it will be reflected back along its
own path and refocused at the same point O. If the plane reflector be tilted through a small angle ?, then
parallel beam will be deflected through twice this angle, and will be brought to focus at O? in the same plane at

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

a distance x from O. Obviously.
OO?=x=2?.f, where f is the focal length of the lens.
Applications:
1. For aligning circular & flat surfaces in machining
2. Alignment of beams & columns in construction buildings / industries, steel structures

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. To measure the straightness, flatness and parallelism

60 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Make the distance of 100mm internal on the work piece.
2. Set the cross wire so that two cross will coincide.
3. Set the mirror so that the cross wire is visible.
4. Move the reflector on next 100mm mark and adjust it to see reflection of cross wire.
5. Take the reading of reflected crosswire deviated or moved up or down.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Measure the distance between two crosswire.
Formulae:
Tan ? = X / 100
X = (100 x Tan ?) x 1000 in microns
Where X = Level at position B with respect to position A

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? = Angle/Deviation in degrees/ Seconds (1 Degree = 60 Minutes, 1 Minute = 60 Seconds).

Tabulation:

Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Bridge Length
(Base length of
the reflector)
Cumulative
Bridge length

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(Position of the
reflector)
Micrometer final
reading
(Autocollimator)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Deviation for
each 100mm
( ? in degrees)
1.
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.


Result:
The values are analyzed and necessary modification of the surface may be recommended based on the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

accuracy required on flatness. If the values observed from the micrometer are varying linearly then
straightness/flatness can be judged.
Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the optical instruments for non-contact measurement
of angles.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Surface Roughness
2. Quality Department

61 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Straightness
2. Define ? Tolerance straightness
3. What is flatness?
4. What is autocollimator?
5. What light rays used in autocollimator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. What is the use of autocollimator?
7. What is collimating lens?
8. What are the applications of autocollimator?
9. What is meant by target graticule?
10. What is objective lens?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. What is beam splitter?
12. What is the principle of autocollimator?
13. What are the advantages of autocollimator?
14. What are the limitations of autocollimator?
15. What are the types of measurement uncertainties of autocollimator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

62 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.15 THREAD PARAMETERS MEASUREMENT USING
PROFILE PROJECTOR
Aim:
To find the parameters of the given thread
Apparatus required:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Profile projector
2. Magnification of 10 x
3. Trace paper
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. Place the specimen between the work table centres and switch on the projector.
2. Place the magnification lens in the lens slot.
3. Focus the thread clearly by adjusting focusing knob to view the shadow on the screen clearly.
4. Place the tracing paper and trace the shadow profile.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Calculate the error in the pitch from the actual pitch.
6. Measure the major diameter (OD), minor diameter (ID), pitch of the thread and flank from the tracing
sheet.
63 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of thread parameters:
Magnification =
Sl.No. Parameters
Magnified value
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Actual value
(mm)
1. Outer diameter (O.D)

2. Internal diameter (I.D)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Pitch
4. Flank angle

Result:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Parameters of the given thread are determined.
Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the projector magnification of the profile of the specimen, and how
the image ratio differs with the distance of the projection screen.
Application:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Measurement of Screw
2. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What are the various methods used for measuring minor diameter of the thread?
2. What are the various method used for measuring major diameter of the thread?
3. What are the various method used for measuring pitch diameter?
4. What is Taylor?s principle?
5. How Taylor?s principle is applied to screw thread gauge?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. What is drunken error in screw threads?
7. What is the effect of flank angle error?
8. What is major diameter?
9. What is the magnification of profile projector in our laboratory?
10. What is the working principle of profile projector?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. What are the applications of profile projector?
12. What are the advantages of profile projector?
13. What are the disadvantages of profile projector over tool maker?s microscope?
14. What is meant by crest?
15. What is meant by root?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

64 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.16 MEASUREMENT OF DISPLACEMENT USING LVDT
Aim:
To measure the displacement using LVDT and to calibrate it with the millimeter scale reading
Apparatus required:
1. LVDT 2. Patch cords 3. Transducer with digital indicator 4. Millimeter scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diagram:

Principle:
Linear variable differential transducer provides an AC voltage output that is proportional to the
displacement of core passing through the winding. It consists of three coils. The primary coil is energized by

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

external AC power source. This mutual ? inductance device making use of three coils is generally arranged on
a cylindrical, concentric, non-magnetic form. Output amplitude and phase depend on the relative coupling
between the two pick-up coils and the power.
Within limits, on either side of the null position, core displacement results in a proportional output. This
phase relation existing between power source and output changes 180

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
through null is relatively simple, low
priced and mechanically steady. It is free from temperature effects unlike strain gauge. High output, high
sensitivity, less friction and better linearity are its advantages.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

65 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


Circuit operation:
Excitation power source: The primary winding of LVDT is excited by means of 0.3 kHz power source.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The Wien bridge oscillator circuit placed on a suitable p.c.b. generator a stable AC excitation at fixed
frequency. The output from this signal generator card is given to the input of complementary power transistors.
The power transistors in turn provide the excitation to the primary of the LVDT. The output from secondary is
amplified by means of IC. Separate op.amp converts the excitation signal into square waves which serve to
provide reference signal for phase sensitive detection. A field effect transistor acts as an analogue switch and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

phase detached output is generated. in phase,
D.C. output is also proportional to the displacement. Finally a D.C. amplifier is provided with a range
selector switch to centre zero meter on the front panel. It is possible to display the core displacements in the
range of 0 to 20 mm. The functioning of the phase sensitive the range of 0 to 5 mm, 0 to 10 mm and 0 to 20
mm. The functioning of the phase sensitive detector is better understood by observing the wave forms

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

provided along with the circuit diagram.
Procedure:
1. Connect the terminals marked primary of the instrument with the primary terminal of the transducer.
The flexible load wires are provided identically to connect one each for terminals marked secondary.
2. Adjust the magnetic ? core and bring the pointer mounted on brass rod to zero position. Set the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

digital meter to zero using the potentiometer.
3. Displace the core to the right in steps of 2 mm and note the corresponding digital meter reading.
4. Repeat the same procedure for core displacement towards left from the centre zero.
5. Find the percentage of error
6. Draw the graphs between:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

a) Input displacement (x-axis) and LVDT reading (y-axis)
b) Input displacement (x-axis) and percentage error
7. Displace the core in a gentle manner.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

66 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
S.No
Displacement in
millimeter scale ?x?
Reading in digital

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

meter ?y?
Error (x
- y)
Percentage Error = {(x ~
y)/x}* 100

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Unit Mm mm mm %



Result:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thus the displacement is measured using LVDT and it is calibrated with the meter scale measurement.
Outcome:
Students will be able to understand about the LVDT (linear variable differential transformer) and how the
electromechanical sensor used to convert mechanical motion or vibrations, specifically rectilinear motion, into
a variable electrical current, voltage or electric signals, and the reverse.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by transducer?
2. What is LVDT?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. What is displacement?
4. What is patch chord?
5. What is principle of LVDT?
6. What are the applications of LVDT?
7. What are the advantages of LVDT?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. What are the disadvantages of LVDT?
9. What is the purpose of strain gauge?
10. How will you calculate displacement using LVDT?
11. What are the elements of LVDT?
12. What is potentiometer?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. What are the various methods used for displacement measurement?
14. What is load cell?
15. What is quantity meter?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice
1 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

V SEMESTER - R 2013

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Name : _______________________________________
Register No. : _______________________________________
Section : _______________________________________

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

LABORATORY MANUAL
2 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

DHANALAKSHMI

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

College of Engineering is committed to provide highly disciplined, conscientious and
enterprising professionals conforming to global standards through value based quality education and training.


1. To provide competent technical manpower capable of meeting requirements of the industry

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. To contribute to the promotion of Academic Excellence in pursuit of Technical Education at different
levels
3. To train the students to sell his brawn and brain to the highest bidder but to never put a price tag on heart
and soul

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

DEPARTMENT OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING


Rendering the services to the global needs of engineering industries by educating students to become
professionally sound mechanical engineers of excellent caliber

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To produce mechanical engineering technocrats with a perfect knowledge intellectual and hands on
experience and to inculcate the spirit of moral values and ethics to serve the society

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

MISSION
MISSION
VISION

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

VISION

4 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Fundamentals
To impart students with fundamental knowledge in mathematics and basic sciences that will mould
them to be successful professionals
2. Core competence
To provide students with sound knowledge in engineering and experimental skills to identify

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

complex software problems in industry and to develop a practical solution for them
3. Breadth
To provide relevant training and experience to bridge the gap between theory and practice which
enable them to find solutions for the real time problems in industry and organization and to design
products requiring interdisciplinary skills

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Professional skills
To bestow students with adequate training and provide opportunities to work as team that will build
up their communication skills, individual, leadership and supportive qualities and to enable them to
adapt and to work in ever changing technologies
5. Life-long learning

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To develop the ability of students to establish themselves as professionals in mechanical
engineering and to create awareness about the need for lifelong learning and pursuing advanced
degrees

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

PROGRAMME OUTCOMES (POs)
On completion of the B.E. (Mechanical) degree, the graduate will be able
a) To apply the basic knowledge of mathematics, science and engineering
b) To design and conduct experiments as well as to analyze and interpret data and apply the same in

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the career or entrepreneurship
c) To design and develop innovative and creative software applications
d) To understand a complex real world problem and develop an efficient practical solution
e) To create, select and apply appropriate techniques, resources, modern engineering and IT tools
f) To understand the role as a professional and give the best to the society

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

g) To develop a system that will meet expected needs within realistic constraints such as economical
environmental, social, political, ethical, safety and sustainability
h) To communicate effectively and make others understand exactly what they are trying to tell in both
verbal and written forms
i) To work in a team as a team member or a leader and make unique contributions and work with

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

coordination
j) To engage in lifelong learning and exhibit their technical skills
k) To develop and manage projects in multidisciplinary environments

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To familiar with different measurement equipment?s and use of this industry for quality inspection
List of Experiments

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Tool Maker?s Microscope
2. Comparator
3. Sine Bar
4. Gear Tooth Vernier Caliper
5. Floating gauge Micrometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Coordinate Measuring Machine
7. Surface Finish Measuring Equipment
8. Vernier Height Gauge
9. Bore diameter measurement using telescope gauge
10. Bore diameter measurement using micrometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. Force Measurement
12. Torque Measurement
13. Temperature measurement
14. Autocollimator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Ability to handle different measurement tools and perform measurements in quality impulsion
2. Learnt the usage of precision measuring instruments and practiced to take measurements
3. Learnt and practiced to build the required dimensions using slip gauge
4. Able to measure the various dimensions of the given specimen using the tool maker?s microscope

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Able to find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge
6. Able to measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare
7. Learnt to determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen using Gear tooth vernier
8. Able to measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two
wire method

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. Learnt to study the construction and operation of coordinate measuring machine
10. Learnt to determine the diameter of bore by using telescopic gauge and dial bore indicator
11. Able to measure the surface roughness using Talysurf instrument
12. Studied the characteristic between applied load and the output volt
13. Learnt the characteristics of developing torque and respective sensor output voltage

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. Studied the characteristics of thermocouple without compensation
15. Able to check the straightness & flatness of the given component by using Autocollimator
16. Learnt to measure the displacement using LVDT and to calibrate it with the millimeter scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

COURSE OBJECTIVES

COURSE OUTCOMES

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

ME6513 ? METROLOGY AND MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CONTENTS
Sl. No. Name of the Experiments Page No.
CYCLE ? 1 EXPERIMENTS
1
Precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab ? A Study

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7
2
To build up the slip gauge for given dimension ? A Study
16
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thread parameters measurement using Tool Makers Microscope
20
4
Calibration of dial gauge
23

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5
Determination of taper angle by sine bar method
26
6
Determination of gear tooth thickness using gear tooth vernier

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

29
7
Measurement of thread parameters using floating carriage micrometer
32
CYCLE ? 2 EXPERIMENTS

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8
Measurement of various dimensions using Coordinate Measuring Machine
35
9
Measurement of surface roughness

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

39
10
Measurement of bores using dial bore indicator and telescopic gauge
42
11

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Force measurement using load cell
46
12
Torque measurement using strain gauge
49

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13
Temperature measurement using thermocouple
53
14
Measurement of alignment using autocollimator

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

56
ADDITIONAL EXPERIMENT BEYOND THE SYLLABUS
15
Thread parameters measurement using profile projector
60

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16
Displacement measurement ? linear variable differential transducer (LVDT)
62
PROJECT WORK
65

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.01 PRECISION MEASURING INSTRUMENT YSED IN

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

METROLOGY LAB ? A STUDY
Aim:
To study the following instruments and their usage for measuring dimensions of given specimen
1. Vernier caliper
2. Micrometer

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Vernier height gauge
4. Depth micrometer
5. Universal bevel protractor
Apparatus required:
Surface plate, specimen and above instruments

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier caliper:
The principle of vernier caliper is to use the minor difference between the sizes two scales or divisions
for measurement. The difference between them can be utilized to enhance the accuracy of measurement. The
vernier caliper essentially consists of two steel rules, sliding along each other.
Parts:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Different parts of the vernier caliper are
1. Beam ? It has main scale.
2. Fixed jaw
3. Sliding or Moving jaw ? It has vernier scale and sliding jaw locking screw.
4. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw knife

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

edges for internal measurement.
5. Stem or depth bar for depth measurement
Least count:
Least count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

50 VSD = 49 mm
1 VSD = 0.98 mm
Least count = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm

10 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

ID

DEPTH

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OD
Measurement:
Given Vernier caliper can be used for external, internal depth, slot and step measurement.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement principle:
When both jaws contact each other scale shows the zero reading. The finer adjustment of movable jaw
can be done by the fine adjustment screw. First the whole movable jaw assembly is adjusted so that the two
measuring tips just touch the part to be measured. Then the fine adjustment clamp locking screw is tightened.
Final adjustment depending upon the sense of correct feel is made by the adjusting screw. After final

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

adjustment has been made sliding jaw locking screw is also tightened and the reading is noted.
All the parts of the Vernier caliper are made of good quality steel and measuring faces are hardened.
Types of vernier:
Vernier caliper, electronic vernier caliper, vernier depth caliper

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Main scale
reading (MSR)
(mm)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier scale
reading (VSR) (mm)
Total reading (MSR
+ VSR)
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

OD


ID

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Depth

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier height gauge:
Vernier height gauge is a sort of vernier caliper equipped with a special instrument suitable for height
measurement. It is always kept on the surface plate and the use of the surfaces plates as datum surfaces is
very essential.
Least count:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least Count = 1 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1 mm
50 VSD = 49 mm
1 VSD = 0.98 mm
Least Count (LC) = 1 ? 0.98 = 0.02 mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Parts:
1. Base
2. Beam ? It has main scale.
3. Slider ? It has a vernier scale and slider locking screw.
4. Scriber

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Fine adjustment clamp ? It has fine adjustment clamp locking screw and fine adjustment screw.


12 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Material:
All the parts of vernier are made of good quality steel and the measuring faces hardened.
Types of vernier gauge:
1. Analog vernier height gauge

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Digital vernier height gauge
3. Electronic vernier height gauge
Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Main scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(MSR)(mm)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale reading
(VSR)(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total reading (MSR +
VSR)(mm)
1.
2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Outside micrometer:
The micrometer essentially consists of an accurate screw having about 10 or 20 threads per cm. The

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

end of the screw forms one measuring tip and other measuring tip is constituted by a stationary anvil in the
base of the frame. The screw is threaded for certain length and is plain afterwards. The plain portion is called
spindle and its end is the measuring surface. The spindle is advanced or retracted by turning a thimble
connected to a spindle. The spindle is a slide fit over the barrel and barrel is the fixed part attached with the
frame. The barrel & thimble are graduated. The pitch of the screw threads is 0.5 mm.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count:
Least Count (LC) = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale
= 0.5 / 50 = 0.01 mm
Parts:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Frame
2. Anvil
3. Spindle
4. Spindle lock
5. Barrel or outside sleeve

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions
7. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.
The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.
14 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement:
It can be used for any external measurement.
Types of micrometer:
1. Outside micrometer, 2. Inside micrometer, 3.Depth micrometer, 4. Stick micrometer, 5. Screw thread
micrometer, 6. V ? anvil micrometer, 7. Blade type micrometer, 8. Dial micrometer, 9. Bench micrometer, 10.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tape screw operated internal micrometer, 11. Groove micrometer, 12. Digital micrometer, 13.Differential screw
micrometer, 14.Adjustable range outside micrometer.
Ratchet stop mechanism:
The object of the ratchet stop is to ensure that same level of torque is applied on the spindle while
measuring and the sense of the feel of operator is eliminated and consistent readings are obtained. By

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

providing this arrangement, the ratchet stop is made slip off when the torque applied to rotate the spindle
exceeds the set torque. Thus this provision ensures the application of same amount of torque during the
measurement.
Tabulation:
Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Pitch Scale Reading
(PSR) (mm)
Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)
Head scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(HSR x LC) (mm)
Total Reading (PSR
+ HSR) (mm)
1.
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Depth micrometer:
Depth micrometer is a sort of micrometer which is mainly used for measuring depth of holes, so it is
named as depth micrometer.
Parts:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Shoulder
2. Spindle
3. Spindle lock
4. Barrel or outside sleeve ? It has pitch scale.
5. Thimble ? It has head scale. Thimble is divided into 50 divisions.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Ratchet stop ? Barrel is graduated into steps of 0.5 mm.
The least count of the given micrometer is 0.01 mm.
15 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Least count:
Least Count = Pitch / No. of divisions on the head scale = 0.50/50
= 0.01 mm
Measurements:
It can be used for measuring the depth of holes, slots and recessed areas. The pitch of the screw thread

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

is 0.5 mm. The least count is 0.01 mm. Shoulder acts as a reference surface and is held firmly and
perpendicular to the centre line of the hole. For large range of measurement extension rods are used. In the
barrel the scale is calibrated. The accuracy again depends upon the sense of touch.
Procedure:
First, calculate the least count of the instrument. Check the zero error. Measure the specimen note

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

down the main scale reading or the head scale reading. Note down the vernier or head scale coincidence with
main or pitch scale divisions.
Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Pitch Scale Reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(PSR) (mm)
Head Scale
Coincidence (HSC)
Head scale reading
(HSR x LC) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total Reading (PSR
+ HSR) (mm)

1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.


16 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Universal bevel protractor:

Description:
Bevel protractor is an instrument for measuring the angle between the two faces of a specimen. It

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

consists of a base plate on which a circular scale is engraved. It is graduated in degrees. An adjustment plate
is attached to a circular plate containing the vernier scale. The adjustable blade can be locked in any position.
The circular plate has 360 division divided into four parts of 90 degrees each. The adjustable parts have 24
divisions of to the right and left sides of zero reading. These scales are used according to the position of the
specimen with respect to movable scale.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. Place the specimen whose taper is to be measured between the adjustable plate and movable
blade with one of its face parallel to the base.
2. Lock the adjustable plate in position and note down the main scale reading depending upon the
direction of rotation of adjustable plate in clockwise or anticlockwise.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Note the VSC to the right of zero.
4. Multiply the VSC with the least count and add to MSR to obtain the actual reading.
Least count:
Least Count = 2 MSD ? 1 VSD
1 MSD = 1

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
24 VSD = 46
o
=> 1 VSD = 23/12
LC = 2 ? 23/12 = 1/12

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
= 5? (five minutes)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:
Sl.No.
Main scale reading

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(MSR) (deg)
Vernier scale
coincidence (VSC)
Vernier scale reading
(VSR) (deg)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total reading (MSR +
VSR)
(deg)
1.
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The angle of scriber of the vernier height gauge =
Result:
Thus the various precision measuring instruments used in metrology lab are studied and the specimen
dimensions are recorded.
Outcome:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for linear, angular,
roundness and roughness measurements they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring
instrument according to a specific requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).
Application:
1. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Metrology
2. Define ? Inspection
3. What are the needs of inspection in industries?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. What are the various methods involving the measurement?
5. Define ? Precision
6. Define ? Accuracy
7. Define ? Calibration
8. Define ? Repeatability

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. Define ? Magnification
10. Define ? Error
11. Define ? Systematic Error
12. Define ? Random Error
13. Define ? Parallax Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. Define ? Environmental Error
15. Define ? Cosine Error
Viva-voce

18 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.02 BUILD UP THE SLIP GAUGE FOR GIVEN DIMENSION
? A STUDY
Aim:
To build up the slip gauge for given dimension

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Apparatus required:
1. Slip gauges set
2. Surface plate
3. Soft cloth
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
Slip gauge are universally accepted standard of length in industry. They are the working standard for
linear dimension. These were invented by a Swedish Engineer, C.E. Johansson. They are used
1. For direct precise measurement where the accuracy of the workpiece demand it.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. For use with high- magnification comparators to establish the size of the gauge blocks in general
use.
3. Gauge blocks are also used for many other purposes such as checking the accuracy of measuring
instrument or setting up a comparator to a specific dimension, enabling a batch of component to be
quickly and accurately checked or indeed in any situation where there is need to refer to standard of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

known length these blocks are rectangular.
19 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Most gauge blocks are produced from high grade steel, hardened and established by a heat treatment
process to give a high degree of dimensional stability. Gauge blocks are also manufactured from tungsten

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

carbide which is an extremely hard and wear resistant material. The measuring faces have a lapped finish.
The faces are perfectly flat and parallel to one another with a high degree of accuracy. Each block has an
extremely high dimensional accuracy at 20
o
C.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

These slip gauge are available in variety of selected sets both in inch units and metric units. Letter ?E? is
used for inch units and ?M? is used for metric standard number of pieces in a set following the letter E or M. For
example EBI refers to a set whose blocks are in metric units and are 83 in number. Each block dimensions is
printed on anyone of its face itself the size of any required standard being made up by combining the
appropriate number of these different size blocks.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

If two gauges are slid and twisted together under pressure they will firmly join together. This process,
known as wringing, is very useful because it enables several gauge blocks to be assembled together to
produce a required size. In fact the success of precision measurement by slip gauges depends on the
phenomenon of wringing.
First the gauge is oscillated slightly with very light pressure over other gauge so as to detect pressure at

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

any foreign particles between the surfaces. One gauge is placed perpendicular to other using standard
gauging pressure and rotary motion is applied until the blocks are lined up.
Procedure:
1. Build the given dimension by wringing minimum number of slip gauges.
2. Note the given dimension and choose the minimum possible slip gauge available in the set so as to

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

accommodate the last decimal value. The minimum slip gauge value dimension available i.e., 1.12
mm must be chosen followed by 1.5 mm thick gauge block.
3. Follow the above steps to build up the slip gauge of any dimension.
Precautions:
1. Slip gauges should be handled very carefully placed gently and should never be dropped.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Whenever a slip gauge is being removed from the set, its dimensions are noted and must be
replaced into the set at its appropriate place only.
3. Correct procedure must be followed in wringing and also in removing the gauge blocks.
4. They should be cleaned well before use and petroleum jelly is applied after use.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

20 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Range (mm) Increment (mm) No. of pieces

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Total = ____________ Pieces
Total length of slip gauge = ________ mm
Given diameter Slip gauges used Obtained dimensions

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Slip gauge set is studied and the given dimensions are building up by wringing minimum number of slip

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

gauges.
Outcome:
Students will be able to select proper measuring instrument and know requirement of calibration, errors
in measurement etc. They can perform accurate measurements.
Application:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

21 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Why C.I. is preferred material for surface plates and tables?
2. Why V ? blocks are generally manufactured in pairs?
3. Why micrometer is required to be tested for accuracy?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Define ? Linear Measurement
5. List the linear measuring instrument according to their accuracy.
6. Define ? Least Count
7. What are the uses of vernier depth gauge?
8. What are the uses of feeler gauges?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. What are the uses of straight edge?
10. What are the uses of angle plate?
11. What are the uses of V ? block?
12. What are the uses of combination square?
13. What precautions should be taken while using slip gauges?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. What is wringing?
15. Why the slip gauges are termed as ?End standard?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

22 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


Expt.No.03 THREAD PARAMETERS MEASUREMENT USING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TOOL MAKERS MICROSCOPE
Aim:
To study the tool makers microscope and in the process measure the various dimensions of the given
specimen
Apparatus required:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Tool makers microscope
2. Specimen
Diagram:

Description:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The tool maker?s microscope is designed for measurement of parts of complex forms; for example,
profile of a tool having external threads. It can also be used for measuring centre to centre distance of the
holes in any plane as well as the coordinates of the outline of a complex template gauge, using the
coordinates measuring system.
23 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Basically it consists of an optical head which can be adjusted vertically along the ways of supporting
column. The optical head can be clamped at any position by a screw. On the work table (which as a circular
base in which there are graduations) the part to be inspected is placed. The table has a compound slide by
means of which the part can be measured. For giving these two movements, there are two micrometer screws

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

having thimble scales and verniers. At the back of the base light source is arranged that provides horizontal
beam of light, reflected from a mirror by 90 degrees upwards towards the table. The beam of light passes
through the transparent glass plate on which flat plates can be checked are placed. Observations are made
through the eyepiece of the optical head.
Procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Place the given specimen on the work table and switch on all the three light sources and adjust the
intensity of the light source until a clean image of the cross wires and specimen are seen through
the eyepiece.
2. Coincide one of the two extreme edges between which the measurement has to be taken with
vertical or horizontal cross wires and depending upon the other image coincide with the same cross

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

wires by moving the above device. Note the reading.The difference between the two readings gives
the value of the required measurement.
3. Note the experiment specimen and the readings.
4. Tabulate the different measurements measured from the specimen.
Determination of thread parameters

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Magnification =
S.No. Parameters
Magnified value
(mm)
Actual value

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
1. Outer diameter (O.D)

2. Internal diameter (I.D)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Pitch

4. Flank angle

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Included angle of the tool was measured using tool maker?s microscope and various dimensions of the
given specimen are measured.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

24 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the various parameters of thread and select proper measuring
instrument and know requirement of calibration, errors in measurement etc. They can perform accurate

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measurements.
Application:
1. Machine Shop
2. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by tool maker?s microscope?
2. What is the light used in tool maker?s microscope?
3. What are the various characteristics that you would measure in a screw thread?
4. What are the instruments that are required for measuring screw thread?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Define ? Pitch
6. What are the causes of pitch error?
7. Define ? Flank
8. What are the effects of flank angle error?
9. What is progressive error?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. What is periodic error?
11. What is drunken error?
12. What is erratic error?
13. What are the applications of tool maker?s microscope?
14. What are the limitations of tool maker?s microscope?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15. What are the advantages of tool maker?s microscope?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

25 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.04 CALIBRATION OF DIAL GAUGE USING SLIP GAUGE

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Aim:
To find the accuracy and standard error of the given dial gauge
Apparatus required:
Dial gauge, magnetic stand, slip gauge, and surface plate
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
The dial test indicator is a precision measuring instrument which can convert linear motion into angular
motion by means of transmission mechanics of rack and pinion and can be used to measure linear vibration
and errors of shape.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

This instrument has the features such as good appearance, compact size, light weight, high precision,
reasonable construction, constant measuring face etc. Rigidity of all parts is excellent. Probe is tipped with
carbide balls. A shock proof mechanism is provided for those with larger measuring range.

26 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Types of dial indicator:
1. Plunger type
2. Lever type
Plunger type dial indicator has a resolution counter and each division in main scale is 0.01 mm. In lever

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

type dial test indicator is replaced by ball type stylus.
Procedure:
1. Fix the dial gauge to the stand rigidly and place the stand on the surface plate.
2. Set the plunger of dial gauge to first touch the upper surface of standard slip gauge and set indicator
to zero.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Raise then the plunger by pulling the screw above the dial scale.
4. Place the standard slip gauge underneath the plunger.
5. Release the plunger and let it to touch the standard slip gauge.
6. Note the reading on the dial scale.
Formulae:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The standard error of dial gauge is calculated by the formula

Tabulation:
S.No.
Slip gauge reading ?x?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
Dial gauge reading
(mm)
(x? - x)
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

x? (x? - x)
1.
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
Thus the accuracy and standard error of dial gauge is found. The standard error of given dial gauge is
__________.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

27 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Outcome:
Students will be able to check the variation in tolerance during the inspection process of a

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

machined part, measure the deflection of a beam or ring under laboratory conditions, as well as many
other situations where a small measurement needs to be registered or indicated
Application:
1. Milling Machine
2. Analog versus digital/electronic readout

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is comparator?
2. What are the types of comparators?
3. What is the LC for comparators?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. What are the applications of comparator?
5. What is meant by plunger?
6. What are the types of dial indicators?
7. Why a revolution counter is not provided in lever type dial test indicator?
8. Draw a line diagram of the operating mechanism of plunger type dial test indicator.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. Explain the term magnification of a dial indicator.
10. What are the uses of dial test indicator?
11. What are the practical applications of dial test indicator?
12. What precautions should be taken while using dial test indicator?
13. What are the desirable qualities of a dial test indicator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. What are the advantages of dial test indicator?
15. What are the limitations of dial test indicator?
16. Distinguish between comparator and measuring instrument.
17. What are the advantages of electrical comparator?
18. What are the advantages of optical comparator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

19. What are the uses of comparator?
20. What are the advantages and disadvantages of mechanical comparator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

28 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.05 DETERMINATION OF TAPER ANGLE BY SINE BAR
METHOD
Aim:
To measure taper angle of the given specimen using Sine bar method and compare
Apparatus required:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sine bar, slip gauges, dial gauge with stand, micrometer, surface plate, bevel protractor, vernier caliper
Diagram:

Description:
The sine bar principle uses the ratio of the length of two sides of a right triangle. It may be noted that

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

devices operating on sine principle are capable of ?self-generation?. The measurement is restricted to 45
o
from
accuracy point of view. Sine bar itself is not a measuring instrument.
Accuracy requirements of sine bar:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. The axes of the rollers must be parallel to each other and the centre distance L must be precisely
known.
2. The sine bar must be flat and parallel to the plane connecting the axes of the rollers.
3. The rollers must be of identical diameters and must have within a close tolerance.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

29 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Procedure:
1. Fix the dial gaugeon the magnetic stand and place the magnetic stand on the surface plate.Check

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the parallelism of the sine bar.
2. Place the given specimen above the sine bar and place the dial gauge on top of the specimen.
Adjustthe dial gauge for zero deflection.
3. Raise the front end of the sine bar with slip gauges until the work surface is parallel to the datum
surface.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Check the parallelism using dial gauge.
5. Measure the distance between the centres of the sine bar rollers as ?L? and note the height of the
slip gauge as ?H?.
6. Note the included angle of the specimen.
Formulae:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sin ? = H/L where ? = Included angle of the specimen
H = Height of slip gauges
L = Distance between the centre of rollers
Tabulation:
S.No. L (mm) H (mm) Taper angle ( ?)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
2.
3.

Result:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The taper angle of the given specimen using sine bar was found to be =
Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for angular measurements
and they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a specific
requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Flat Surface
2. Granite

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

30 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. List out the various angle measuring instruments.
2. What is the working principles sine bar?
3. How is a sine bar used to measure the angle?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. What is the application of sine bar?
5. What is the material of sine bar?
6. Why sine bar is not preferred to use for measuring angles more than 45
0
?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. What are the features of sine bar?
8. A 100 mm sine bar is to be set up to an angle of 33
0
, determine the slip gauges needed from 87
pieces set.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. What are the various instruments used for measuring angles?
10. What is sine bar?
11. How sine bar is used for angle measurement?
12. Explain how sine bar is used to measure angle of small size component.
13. Explain how sine bar is used to measure angle of large size component.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. What are the various types of sine bar?
15. What are the limitations of sine bar?
16. What is sine center?
17. What is sine table?
18. What are the possible sources of errors in angular measurement by sine bar?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

19. What are angle gauges?
20. How angle gauges are used for measuring angles?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

31 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.06 DETERMINATION OF GEAR TOOTH THICKNESS
USING GEAR TOOTH VERNIER
Aim:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To determine the thickness of tooth of the given gear specimen and to draw the graph between the tooth
number and the error in thickness
Apparatus required:
Gear tooth vernier, specimen, surface plate and vernier caliper
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Description:
The tooth thickness, in general, is measured at pitch circle since gear tooth thickness varies from the tip
to the base circle of the tooth. This is possible only when there is an arrangement to fix that position for this
measurement by the gear tooth vernier. It has two vernier scales; one is vertical and other is horizontal.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
32 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

1. Measure initially the outside diameter of the given gear specimen by means of a vertical calculation
of vernier caliper. Note the number of teeth. Calculate the module (m) using the formula.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

M = OD/ (Z+2) where z ? number of teeth
M - Module
2. Calculate the theoretical tooth thickness (t) by t = z * m* sin (90/z).
3. Set the vernier scale for the height and tighten.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Measure the thickness of each tooth using the horizontal scale. This is measured thickness. It can
be positive or negative.
H = m x [1+ Z/2 (1- Cos 90/Z)]
5. Calculate the error in the tooth thickness i.e,1. measured thickness ? Theoretical thickness
6. Draw the graph between the tooth number and the error in thickness.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Tooth
Number
Measured Thickness
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Theoretical Thickness (mm)
Error in tooth thickness
(mm)
1
2

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3

Tooth
Number
MSR

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
VSC

VSR
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TR
(mm)
1
2
3

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Graph:


Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tooth No.
33 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Result:
The theoretical experiment value of gear tooth thickness is obtained and graph is drawn between error
and tooth number in tooth thickness

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Theoretical tooth thickness =
Experimental tooth thickness =
Error in tooth thickness =
Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the basic measurement units and able to calibrate various

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measuring parameters of the gear.
Application:
1. Gear Component
2. Mining

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Calculate the setting of a gear tooth vernier caliper for a straight spur gear having 40 teeth and
module 4.
2. What is the importance of chordal depth?
3. Define ? Chordal width
4. How is the actual profile of the gear tooth determined?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. What are the manufacturing errors in gear element?
6. Define ? Addendum
7. Define ? Dedendum
8. Define ? Flank of tooth
9. Define ? Pitch

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. Define ? Pitch Circle
11. Define ? Crest of tooth
12. Define ? Root of tooth
13. Define ? Base Circle
14. Define ? Module

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15. Define ? Angle of Obliquity


Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

34 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.07 MEASUREMENT OF THREAD PARAMETER USING
FLOATING CARRIAGE MICROMETER
Aim:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To measure the effective diameter of a screw thread using floating carriage micrometer by two wire
method
Apparatus required:
1. Floating carriage micrometer
2. Standard wire

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Given specimen (screw thread)
Diagram:

Description of floating carriage micrometer:
It consists of three main units. A base casting carries a pair of centres on which threaded work piece is

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

to be mounted. Another carriage capable of moving towards centre is mounted exactly above. In this carriage
one head with thimble to measure up to 0.002 mm is provided and at the other side of head a fiducial indicator
is provided to indicate zero position.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

35 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Procedure:
1. For two wire method, place the standard wire over a thread of the screw at opposite sides.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. For three wire method, place two standard wires on two successive threads and the third wire
placed opposite sides of the thread.
3. Measure the diameter over wires (M) using floating carriage micrometer.
4. Repeat this procedure at various positions of the screw and take different readings.
Formulae:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. For best wire size, d = P / 2 Cos (x/2)
Where, P = Pitch
d= wire size
x = angle between two threads
= 60

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
for metric thread
2. Actual effective diameter, E.A = M ? 3d + 0.866 p
3. Nominal effective diameter, EN = D ? 0.648 p
4. Max. wire size = 1.01 p

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Min. wire size = 0.505 p
6. Best wire size = 0.577 p
M = Diameter over wires
P = Pitch of thread
For metric thread:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Actual effective diameter (EA) = M ? 3d + 0.866 p
Where d = actual diameter of wire
Determination of actual and nominal effective diameter of the screw thread:
Sl.No.
Nominal

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diameter (D)
(mm)
Diameter over
wire ?M?
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Actual eff.
Diameter E.A
(mm)
Nominal eff.
Diameter E.N

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(mm)
Error in effective
diameter
(E.A ? E.N)
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1.
2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

36 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Result:
Thus the actual and nominal effective diameter is measured using three wire method and the error in

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

effective diameter of screw is determined.
Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for roundness
measurements and they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a
specific requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Wholse
2. Maxxis Rubber India

1. Define ? Pitch

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Define ? Flank Angle
3. What is plug gauge?
4. What is meant by micrometer?
5. What is meant by indicator?
6. What is best ? size wire?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Calculate the diameter of the best wire for an M 20 x 25 screws.
8. What are the different corrections to be applied in the measurement of effective diameter by the
method of wire?
9. What is floating carriage micrometer?
10. What are the uses of floating carriage micrometer?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. What are the methods are used for measuring effective diameter?
12. Define ? Effective Diameter
13. Define ? Major Diameter
14. Define ? Minor Diameter
15. What are the effects of flank error?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

16. Define ? Rake Angle
17. Define ? Pitch Cylinder
18. What are the effects of pitch error?
19. Define ? Pitch Diameter
20. What is meant by angle of thread?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

37 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.08 MEASUREMENT OF VARIOUS DIMENSIONS USING
COORDINATE MEASURING MACHINE
Aim:
1. To study the construction and operation of coordinate measuring machine

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. To measure the specified dimensions of the given component
Instruments used:
Coordinate measuring machine, vernier calipers
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Theory:
A coordinate measuring machine (CMM) is a 3D device for measuring the physical and geometrical
characteristics of an object. This machine may be manually controlled by an operator or it may be computer
controlled. Measurements are defined by a probe attached to the three moving axis of this machine X, Y and Z
axes. A coordinate measuring machine (CMM) is also a device used in manufacturing and assembly

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

processes to test a part or assembly against the design intent. By precisely recording the X, Y and Z
coordinates of the target, points are generated which can be analyzed via regression algorithms for the
construction of features. These points are collected by using a probe that is positioned manually by an
38 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

operator or automatically via direct computer control (DCC). DCC CMMs can be programmed to repeatedly
measure identical parts, thus a CMM is a specialized form of industrial robot.
Parts:
Coordinate measuring machine include three main components:
1. The main structures which include three axes of motion.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Probing system
3. Data collection and reduction system ? typically includes a machine controller, desktop computer
and application software
Machine description:
1. In modern machines, the gantry type superstructure has two legs and is often called a bridge. This

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

moves freely along the granite table with one leg following a guide rail attached to one side of the
granite table. The opposite leg simply rests on the granite table following the vertical surface
contour.
2. Air bearings are fixed for ensuring friction free travel. Compressed air is forced through a series of
very small holes in a flat bearing surface to provide a smooth but controlled air cushion on which the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

CMM can move in a frictionless manner.
3. The movement of the bridge along the granite table forms one axis of the XY plane. The bridge of
the gantry contains a carriage which traverses between the inside and outside legs and forms the
other X or Y horizontal axis.
4. The third axis of movement (Z axis) is provided by the addition of a vertical quill or spindle which

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

moves up and down through the center of the carriage. The touch probe forms the sensing device
on the end of the quill.
5. The movement of the X, Y and Z axes fully describes the measuring envelope. Some touch probes
are themselves powered rotary devices with the probe tip able to swivel vertically through 90
degrees and through a full 360 degrees rotation.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Uses:
They are generally used for:
1. Dimensional measurement
2. Profile measurement
3. Angularity or orientation measurement

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Depth mapping
5. Digitizing mapping
6. Shaft measurement
39 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The machines are available in a wide range of sizes and designs with a variety of different probe
technologies. They can be operated manually or automatically through direct computer control (DCC). They
are offered in various configurations such as bench top, free ? standing, handheld and portable.
Procedure:
1. Take at least 8 points on sphere ball attached to the granite table.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Fix the object whose dimension needs to be measured using the jigs and fixtures.
3. Using joystick, move the probe whose tip is made of ruby slowly and carefully to the surface whose
measurements have to be taken.
4. Touch the probe at two places for measurement of a line (starting and ending point).
5. Touch the probe at two places for measurement of a circular profile and for a cylinder touch the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

probe at 8 points.
6. Measure the same profiles again with vernier calipers (length of line, circle diameter, cylinder
diameter) to compare the two readings.
Comments:
1. The machine should be calibrated every time when it is being used.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. While measuring the profiles, the probe should be moved very slowly as it may damage the ruby if
hit with a high force.
3. Care should be taken while performing experiment so that the granite table of the machines should
get any scratches.
4. ?Retract distance? should be fixed according to the space available in the near vicinity of the profile

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

measurement area.
Observation:
Sl.No. Feature
CMM reading
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Vernier reading
(mm)
Form error
(mm)
Difference in two

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

readings (mm)
1 Circle -1
2 Circle -2
3 Circle -3
4 Line

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5 Arc
6
Cone - Diameter
Cone ? Vertex angle
Cone ? Height

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7
Cylinder ? Diameter
Cylinder ? Height

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

40 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Result:
Thus the different profile of given object are measured using coordinate measuring machine
Outcome:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Students will be able to measures the geometry of physical objects by sensing discrete points on the
surface of the object with a probe and they will be able to know the Various types of probes are used in CMMs,
including mechanical, optical, laser, and white light.
Application:
1. Surface Measuring Equipment

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Photo transistor

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What are the types of measuring machine?
2. What is CMM?
3. What are the types of CMM?
4. What are the advantages of CMM?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. What are the limitations of CMM?
6. What are the possible sources of error in CMM?
7. What is the use of universal measuring machine?
8. What are the applications of CMM?
9. What is the working principle of three axis measuring machine?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

10. What is image shearing microscope?
11. What is the use of electronic inspection and measuring machine?
12. What are the types of electronic inspection and measuring machine?
13. What is CMM probe?
14. What are the three main probes are available?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

15. What are the types of stylus?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

41 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.09 MEASUREMENT OF SURFACE ROUGHNESS UING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

TALYSURF INSTRUMENT
Aim:
To measure the surface roughness using Talysurf instrument
Apparatus required:
Talysurf instrument, work piece, surface plate

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diagram:

Theory:
On any finished surface, imperfections are bound to be there and these take the form of a succession of
hills and valleys which vary both in height and in spacing and result in a kind of texture which in appearance or

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

feel is often characteristic of the machining process and accompanying defects. The several kinds of
departures are there on the surface and these are due to various causes.

42 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Methods of measuring surface roughness:
1. Surface inspection of comparison methods
2. Direct instrument measurements
In comparative methods the surface texture is assessed by observation of the surface. But these
methods are not reliable as they can be misleading, if comparison is not made with surfaces produced by

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

same techniques. The various methods available under comparison method are: (i) Touch Inspection
(ii)Scratch Inspection (iii) Microscopic Inspection (iv) Visual Inspection (v) Surface Photographs (vi) Reflected
Light Intensity Direct Instrument Measurements enable to determine a numerical value of the surface finish of
any surface. Nearly all instruments used are stylus probe type of instruments. This operates on electrical
principle.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. Place the finished component on the surface plate.
2. Fix the Talysurf tester to the vernier height gauge using adopter at a convenient height.
3. Make sure that the stylus probe touches the work piece.
4. Fix the sampling length in the tester.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Press the power button so that the probe moves on the surface to and fro.
6. Take the readings of the surface roughness directly from the instrument.
7. Repeat the above process for the remaining specimen and tabulate the readings.
Precautions:
1. The surface to be tested should be cleaned properly.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. The tester should be fixed to the height gauge properly so that the movement of the probe is exactly
parallel to the surface of work.
3. Make sure that the probe gently touches the work.
Tabulation:
S.No

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Measurement roughness value,
?m
Sample direction Ra, Rz
Average Ra Average Rz Grade
1.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2.
3.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

43 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Result:
Thus the surface roughness is checked for different specimens by Talysurf.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Outcome:
Student will become familiar with the different instruments that are available for roughness
measurements they will be able to select and use the appropriate measuring instrument according to a specific
requirement (in terms of accuracy, etc).
Application:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Machine Shop
2. Quality Department


1. Define ? Actual Size?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. What is meant by normal surface?
3. What is meant by profilo-graph?
4. What is Tomlinson surface meter?
5. What is meant by profile?
6. What are the factors affecting surface roughness?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Why the surface texture is control?
8. Define ? Lay
9. Define ? Surface Texture
10. Define ? Flaws
11. What is sampling length?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. What are the methods used for evaluating surface finish?
13. What is form factor?
14. What are the methods used for measuring surface finish?
15. How will you differentiate smooth surface from flat surface?
16. How surface finish is designated on drawings?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

17. Define ? Primary Texture
18. Define ? Secondary Texture
19. What are the types of instrument used for measuring surface texture?
20. Define ? waviness

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

44 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.10 MEASUREMENT OF BORE USING DIAL BORE
INDICATOR AND TELESCOPIC GAUGE
Aim:
To determine the diameter of bore by using telescopic gauge and checking the same by using dial bore

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

indicator
Apparatus required:
Work piece, vernier caliper, telescopic gauge and dial gauge indicator set with anvil.
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

45 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


Procedure:
Bore gauge measurement:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Select the extension rod and washer according to the bore diameter to be measured
2. Fix the suitable extension rod and washer with the bore gauge
3. Fix the dial gauge to the bore gauge in its position
4. Insert the bore gauge inside the bore to be measured and hold the gauge in parallel o the axis of the
bore. Ensure that the tips on either side of the bore gauge are in touch with inner wall of the bore

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Note down the reading in the dial gauge and withdraw the bore gauge from the bore
6. Hold the measuring tips of bore gauge between the spindle and anvil of a micrometer and compress
the tips by rotating the thimble till the reading reaches the same one as noted earlier
7. Observe and record the micrometer reading as the bore diameter to be measured
Telescopic gauge measurement:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Select the telescopic gauge according to the bore diameter to be measured
2. Press the telescopic spindles in the telescopic gauge lock them by locking screw
3. Insert the telescopic gauge inside thee bore to be measured. Release the locking screw to expand
the telescopic spindles outwards inside the bore
4. Hold the telescopic gauge in parallel to the axis of bore axis and ensure that the tips of telescopic

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

spindles are in touch with the inner wall of the bore
5. Lock the telescopic spindles and withdraw it from the bore
46 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

6. Measure the expanded length of the telescopic spindles using micrometer record them as the inner

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

diameter of the bore
Practical observations:
Rough measurement of bore using Telescopic gauge:
Least count of micrometer = 0.01 mm
Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Micrometer reading
Total reading
(MSR + TSC * LC) ( mm) Main scale reading (MSR)
(mm)
Thimble scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

coincidence
1.
2.

Average reading = ________ mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Accurate measuring using Bore gauge
Sl.No.
Micrometer
reading
(d) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Bore gauge
reading
(R1) (mm)
Work piece reading
(R2) (mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Final reading
d+ (R1 ? R2) * 0.01
(mm)
1.
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Accurate internal diameter of hole using bore gauge = ______ mm

Result
1. Internal diameter of the work piece by using telescopic gauge is ________mm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Diameter obtained by using dial gauge indicator is __________________mm

Outcome:
Students will be able to measure a bore's size, by transferring the internal dimension to a remote
measuring tool (Telescopic gauge).

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Automobile
2. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

47 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by bore diameter?
2. What is gauge?
3. What is meant by measurement?
4. What is telescope gauge?
5. What is bore gauge?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. What is contact point?
7. What is the principle of bore gauge?
8. What are the applications of telescopic gauge?
9. What types of materials are used in telescopic gauge?
10. What are the types of instrument used to measure bore diameter?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. What are the applications of bore gauge?
12. What are the advantages of bore gauge over telescopic gauge?
13. What are the limitations of bore gauge?
14. What is the working principle of telescopic gauge?
15. What are the disadvantages of telescopic gauge?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

48 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.11 MEASUREMENT OF FORCE USING LOAD CELL
Aim:
To study the characteristic between applied load and the output voltage

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Apparatus required:
1. Trainer kit
2. Multimeter
3. Load cell sensor with setup
4. Weights (5 kg)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Power chord
Diagram:

Formulae:
Error (%) = {Applied Voltage ? (Displayed Load)/ Applied Load)} x 100

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Block diagram:



Applied DC

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Load O/P

DC Excitation source Transducer
Transducer
Instrumentation

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Amplifier
Gain Amplifier DVM
49 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Interfacing and calibration procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Interface the load cell 9 pin ?D? type male connector to 9 pin D type female connector, fixed on the
module.
2. First unload the beam and nullify the display by using zero adjustment POT
3. Apply the maximum load of 5 kg to the beam and adjust the display to 5 kg by using gain
adjustment POT.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. After the initial adjustment, the unit should not be disturbed until the completion of the experiment.
Safety precaution:
1. During offset adjustment, the beam should not be loaded.
2. The beam should not be disturbed during the experiment.
3. Remove the load from the beam, after completion of the experiment; otherwise wire wound on the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

strain gauge will get damaged.
4. If you are getting an unsatisfactory reading, then vary the zero and span POT minimum to
maximum.
5. Maximum load should not exceed 5 kg.
6. Once calibrated, the setting should not be distributed till the end of the experiment.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. Install the load cell module and interface the 9 pin D connector with kit.
2. Connect the multimeter in volt mode across T5 and GND for the output voltage measurement.
3. Switch on the module.
4. Initially, unload the beam and nullify the display by using zero adjustment POT (zero calibration).

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Apply the maximum load of 5 kg to the beam and adjust the display to 5 kg by using gain
adjustment POT (gain calibration).
6. Now apply the load to the beam, a force will develop on the beam and measure the output voltage
(V) across T5 and GND.
7. Gradually increase the load and note down the output voltage (V) and applied load.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Tabulate the values of displayed load and applied voltage.
9. Plot a graph between applied load and output voltage (V).
Note: When 1 kg load is applied to the beam, the displayed voltage is 1 kg.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

50 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Tabulation:
Applied load
(kg)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Output voltage
(V)
Displayed load
(kg)
% Error

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Graph:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Applied load (kg) Vs Output Voltage (V)
2. Actual load (kg) Vs % Error
Result:
Thus the characteristic between applied load and the output voltage was studied.
Outcome:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Students will be able to understand the Sensor device (electro-mechanical) which help us to measure
a physical parameter (such as temperature, pressure, force, acceleration etc.) by providing analog input to get
digital output.
Application:
1. Machine Shop

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Automobile


1. What is meant by force?
2. Define ? Wheat stone bridge circuit

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Define ? Load
4. What is meant by deflector?
5. What is meant by force indicator?
6. Define ? Instrumentation
7. How instrumentations are classified?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. Define ? Transducer
9. What is electrical transducer?
10. How transducers are classified?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

51 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.12 MEASUREMENT OF TORQUE USING STRAIN
GAUGE
Aim:
To study the characteristics of the developing torque and the signal conditioned sensor output voltage
Apparatus required:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Trainer kit
2. Digital Multimeter (V)
3. Torque sensor setup
4. Weights (100 gram x 10 Nos.)
5. Power chord

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diagram:

Interfacing and calibration procedure:
1. Interface the torque sensor 9 pin. ?D? type male connector to ?9? pin ?D? type female connector, fixed
on the module.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. First, unload the beam and nullify the display by using zero adjustment POT.
3. Apply the maximum load of 1 kg to the beam and adjust the display to 9.81 Nm by using adjustment
POT.
4. After this initial calibration, the unit should not be disturbed until the completion of the experiment.
52 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Safety precaution:
1. During offset adjustment, the beam should not be loaded.
2. The beam should not be disturbed during the experiment.
3. Remove the beam from the shaft, after completion of the experiment otherwise wire wound on the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

strain gauge will get damaged.
4. If the displayed torque reading are in negative, change the beam connections in opposite to
previously connected direction.
5. If you are getting an unsatisfactory reading, then vary the zero and span POT minimum to
maximum.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Maximum load should not exceed 1 kg.
7. Once calibrated, the setting should not be disturbed till the end of this experiment.
Procedure:
1. Install the torque sensor setup and interface with kit.
2. Switch ?ON? the module.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Connect the Multimeter in millivolts mode T2 and T3 for bridge output voltage measurement POT.
4. First, unload the beam and nullify the bridge output voltage by using zero adjustment POT.
5. By applying load to the beam, torque will develop on the shaft and measure the bridge output
voltage (mV) across T2 and T3
6. Gradually increase the force by applying load and note down the bridge output voltage (mV).

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. Tabulate the readings and plot a graph between developed torque versus bridge output voltage
(mV).
Formulae:
Error (%) = {(Actual Torque ? Theoretical Torque)/ Theoretical Torque} x 100
Theoretical Torque = mass (m) x acceleration due to gravity (g) x radial distance

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

= 1 kg x 9.81 m/s
2
x 1 m
= 9.81 Nm
Tabulation:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sl.No. Theoretical Torque
(Nm)
Bridge output voltage
(mV)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Model graph:
The graph between developed torque and bridge output voltage is drawn
53 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Developed torque (Nm) Vs Output Voltage (V)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Sample reading:
Developed Torque (Nm) = 9.81 Nm

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Output Voltage (V) = 5 mV
Result:
Thus the characteristics of the torque developed which is due to force applied to beam and the bridge
output voltage were studied and graph is plotted.
Outcome:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Students will be able to understand the Sensor device (electro-mechanical) which helps us to
measure the strain by providing analog input to digital output.
Application:
1. Machine Shop
2. Turbine

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

54 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00



1. Define ? Torque

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Define ? Twist
3. What are the methods used for measuring torque?
4. Define ? Strain Gauge
5. What is prony brake?
6. What are the modern devices used for measuring torque?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

7. What are the elements of strain gauge?
8. What is the use of slip ring for measuring torque?
9. What is slip ring?
10. What are the types of torque?
11. What are the types of dynamometer?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

12. What are the applications of dynamometer?
13. What are the features of dynamometer?
14. What is gauge factor?
15. What are the types of torque measurement?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

55 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Expt.No.13 MEASUREMENT OF TEMPERATURE USING

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

THERMOCOUPLE
Aim:
To study the characteristics of thermocouple without compensation
Apparatus required:
1. Trainer kit

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

2. Thermocouple
3. Water bath
4. Thermometer
5. Digital multi meter
6. Power chord

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diagram:

Procedure:
1. Connect the two terminals of the thermocouple across T1 & T2.
2. Position the switch ?SW1? towards ?NO?.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Switch ?ON? the unit and note the displayed temperature.
4. If there is any difference in displayed temperature at room temperature, adjust the offset knob ?zero?
to set 0
o
C in display.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Place the Multimeter across T7 and T8.
6. Insert the thermocouple and thermometer into water bath.
7. Switch ?ON? the water bath.
8. Note the actual temperature in thermometer and displayed temperature simultaneously.
9. Tabulate the reading and calculate % error using the above formula

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

56 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

10. Plot the graph actual temperature Vs % error
Formulae:
Error (%) = {(Displayed Temperature ? Actual Temp)/ Actual Temp} x 100

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
Actual Temperature
(
o

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

C)
Displayed Temperature
(
o
C)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

% Error



Graph

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Temperature Vs % Error
Result:
Thus the characteristics of the thermocouple without compensation were studied and graph is plotted.
Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the Sensor device (electro-mechanical) which help us to measure

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

a physical parameter (such as temperature) by providing analog input.
Application:
1. Thermocouple
2. Heat generation

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

57 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by total radiation pyrometer?
2. How the mercury in glass thermometer worked?
3. What are the sources of error in thermocouple?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Define ? Resistance
5. Define ? Temperature detector
6. Define ? Temperature
7. What are the types of instrument used for measuring temperature?
8. What are the types of electrical temperature sensors?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

9. What is optical sensor?
10. What are the applications of liquid in gas thermometer?
11. What are the applications of bimetallic thermometer?
12. What is vapour pressure thermometer?
13. What is thermocouple?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

14. What are the types of metal are used in combination to form thermocouples?
15. What are the advantages of thermocouple?
16. What are the disadvantages of thermocouple?
17. Define ? Resistance Thermometer
18. Define ? Thermistor

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

19. What is the use radiation pyrometer?
20. What are the advantages of optical pyrometer?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

58 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.14 MEASUREMENT OF ALIGNMENT USING
AUTOCOLLIMATOR
Aim:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

To check the straightness & flatness of the given component by using Autocollimator
Apparatus required:
Autocollimator, work piece/ object to be tested
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Theory:
1. Definition of straightness ? A plane is to be said straight over a given length if the variation or
distance of its point from two planes perpendicular to each other and parallel to the generation
direction at of the line remain within specified tolerance limits. The reference planes being so
chosen that their intersection is parallel to the straight line joining two points suitably located on the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

line to be tested and two points being close ends of the length to be measured.
2. Principle of the Autocollimator-A cross line ?target? graticule is positioned at the focal plane of a
telescope objective system with the intersection of the cross line on the optical axis, i.e. at the
principal focus. When the target graticule is illuminated, rays of light diverging from the intersection
point reach the objective via a beam splitter and are projected from the objective as parallel pencils

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

of light. In this mode the optical system is operating as a collimator.
59 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

3. A flat reflector placed in front of the objective and exactly normal to the optical axis reflects the
parallel pencils of light back along their original paths. They are then brought to focus in the plane of

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the target graticule and exactor coincident with its intersection. A proportion of the returned light
passes straight through the beam splitter and the return image of the target cross line is therefore
visible through the eyepiece. In this mode, the optical system is operating as a telescope focused at
infinity.
4. If the reflector is tilted through a small angle the reflected pencils of light will be deflected by twice

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

the angle of tilt (principle of reflection) and will be brought to focus in the plane of target graticule but
linearly displaced from the actual target cross lines by an amount 2?* f.
5. An optical system of an autocollimator consists of a light source, condensers, semi-reflectors, target
wire, collimating lens and reflector apart from microscope eyepiece. A target wire takes place of the
light source into the focal plane of the collimator lenses. Both the target wire and the reflected image

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

are seen through a microscope eyepiece. The eyepiece incorporates a scale graduated in 0.05mm
interval and a pair of parallel setting wires which can be adjusted. Movements of wires are effected
through a micrometer, one rotation of the drum equals to one scale division movement of the wires.
The instrument is designed to be rotated through 90 degrees about its longitudinal axis so that the
angles in both horizontal and vertical planes are measured.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Autocollimator:
It is an instrument designed to measure small angular deflections & maybe used in conjunction with a
plane mirror or other reflecting surface. An autocollimator is essentially an infinity telescope and a collimator
combined into one instrument. This is an optical instrument used for the measurement of small angular
differences. For small angular measurements, autocollimator provides a very sensitive and accurate approach.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The principle on which this instrument works is given below. O is a point source of light placed at the
principal focus of a collimating lens. The rays of light from O, incident on the lens, travels as a parallel beam of
light. If this beam strikes a plane reflector which is normal to the optical axis, it will be reflected back along its
own path and refocused at the same point O. If the plane reflector be tilted through a small angle ?, then
parallel beam will be deflected through twice this angle, and will be brought to focus at O? in the same plane at

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

a distance x from O. Obviously.
OO?=x=2?.f, where f is the focal length of the lens.
Applications:
1. For aligning circular & flat surfaces in machining
2. Alignment of beams & columns in construction buildings / industries, steel structures

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. To measure the straightness, flatness and parallelism

60 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

Procedure:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Make the distance of 100mm internal on the work piece.
2. Set the cross wire so that two cross will coincide.
3. Set the mirror so that the cross wire is visible.
4. Move the reflector on next 100mm mark and adjust it to see reflection of cross wire.
5. Take the reading of reflected crosswire deviated or moved up or down.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. Measure the distance between two crosswire.
Formulae:
Tan ? = X / 100
X = (100 x Tan ?) x 1000 in microns
Where X = Level at position B with respect to position A

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

? = Angle/Deviation in degrees/ Seconds (1 Degree = 60 Minutes, 1 Minute = 60 Seconds).

Tabulation:

Sl.No.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Bridge Length
(Base length of
the reflector)
Cumulative
Bridge length

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

(Position of the
reflector)
Micrometer final
reading
(Autocollimator)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Deviation for
each 100mm
( ? in degrees)
1.
2.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3.


Result:
The values are analyzed and necessary modification of the surface may be recommended based on the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

accuracy required on flatness. If the values observed from the micrometer are varying linearly then
straightness/flatness can be judged.
Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the optical instruments for non-contact measurement
of angles.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Application:
1. Surface Roughness
2. Quality Department

61 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Define ? Straightness
2. Define ? Tolerance straightness
3. What is flatness?
4. What is autocollimator?
5. What light rays used in autocollimator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. What is the use of autocollimator?
7. What is collimating lens?
8. What are the applications of autocollimator?
9. What is meant by target graticule?
10. What is objective lens?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. What is beam splitter?
12. What is the principle of autocollimator?
13. What are the advantages of autocollimator?
14. What are the limitations of autocollimator?
15. What are the types of measurement uncertainties of autocollimator?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

62 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.15 THREAD PARAMETERS MEASUREMENT USING
PROFILE PROJECTOR
Aim:
To find the parameters of the given thread
Apparatus required:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Profile projector
2. Magnification of 10 x
3. Trace paper
Diagram:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Procedure:
1. Place the specimen between the work table centres and switch on the projector.
2. Place the magnification lens in the lens slot.
3. Focus the thread clearly by adjusting focusing knob to view the shadow on the screen clearly.
4. Place the tracing paper and trace the shadow profile.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

5. Calculate the error in the pitch from the actual pitch.
6. Measure the major diameter (OD), minor diameter (ID), pitch of the thread and flank from the tracing
sheet.
63 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Determination of thread parameters:
Magnification =
Sl.No. Parameters
Magnified value
(mm)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Actual value
(mm)
1. Outer diameter (O.D)

2. Internal diameter (I.D)

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. Pitch
4. Flank angle

Result:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Parameters of the given thread are determined.
Outcome:
Students will be able to understand the projector magnification of the profile of the specimen, and how
the image ratio differs with the distance of the projection screen.
Application:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Measurement of Screw
2. Quality Department

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What are the various methods used for measuring minor diameter of the thread?
2. What are the various method used for measuring major diameter of the thread?
3. What are the various method used for measuring pitch diameter?
4. What is Taylor?s principle?
5. How Taylor?s principle is applied to screw thread gauge?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

6. What is drunken error in screw threads?
7. What is the effect of flank angle error?
8. What is major diameter?
9. What is the magnification of profile projector in our laboratory?
10. What is the working principle of profile projector?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

11. What are the applications of profile projector?
12. What are the advantages of profile projector?
13. What are the disadvantages of profile projector over tool maker?s microscope?
14. What is meant by crest?
15. What is meant by root?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

64 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Expt.No.16 MEASUREMENT OF DISPLACEMENT USING LVDT
Aim:
To measure the displacement using LVDT and to calibrate it with the millimeter scale reading
Apparatus required:
1. LVDT 2. Patch cords 3. Transducer with digital indicator 4. Millimeter scale

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Diagram:

Principle:
Linear variable differential transducer provides an AC voltage output that is proportional to the
displacement of core passing through the winding. It consists of three coils. The primary coil is energized by

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

external AC power source. This mutual ? inductance device making use of three coils is generally arranged on
a cylindrical, concentric, non-magnetic form. Output amplitude and phase depend on the relative coupling
between the two pick-up coils and the power.
Within limits, on either side of the null position, core displacement results in a proportional output. This
phase relation existing between power source and output changes 180

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

o
through null is relatively simple, low
priced and mechanically steady. It is free from temperature effects unlike strain gauge. High output, high
sensitivity, less friction and better linearity are its advantages.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

65 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00


Circuit operation:
Excitation power source: The primary winding of LVDT is excited by means of 0.3 kHz power source.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

The Wien bridge oscillator circuit placed on a suitable p.c.b. generator a stable AC excitation at fixed
frequency. The output from this signal generator card is given to the input of complementary power transistors.
The power transistors in turn provide the excitation to the primary of the LVDT. The output from secondary is
amplified by means of IC. Separate op.amp converts the excitation signal into square waves which serve to
provide reference signal for phase sensitive detection. A field effect transistor acts as an analogue switch and

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

phase detached output is generated. in phase,
D.C. output is also proportional to the displacement. Finally a D.C. amplifier is provided with a range
selector switch to centre zero meter on the front panel. It is possible to display the core displacements in the
range of 0 to 20 mm. The functioning of the phase sensitive the range of 0 to 5 mm, 0 to 10 mm and 0 to 20
mm. The functioning of the phase sensitive detector is better understood by observing the wave forms

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

provided along with the circuit diagram.
Procedure:
1. Connect the terminals marked primary of the instrument with the primary terminal of the transducer.
The flexible load wires are provided identically to connect one each for terminals marked secondary.
2. Adjust the magnetic ? core and bring the pointer mounted on brass rod to zero position. Set the

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

digital meter to zero using the potentiometer.
3. Displace the core to the right in steps of 2 mm and note the corresponding digital meter reading.
4. Repeat the same procedure for core displacement towards left from the centre zero.
5. Find the percentage of error
6. Draw the graphs between:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

a) Input displacement (x-axis) and LVDT reading (y-axis)
b) Input displacement (x-axis) and percentage error
7. Displace the core in a gentle manner.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

66 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Tabulation:
S.No
Displacement in
millimeter scale ?x?
Reading in digital

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

meter ?y?
Error (x
- y)
Percentage Error = {(x ~
y)/x}* 100

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Unit Mm mm mm %



Result:

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Thus the displacement is measured using LVDT and it is calibrated with the meter scale measurement.
Outcome:
Students will be able to understand about the LVDT (linear variable differential transformer) and how the
electromechanical sensor used to convert mechanical motion or vibrations, specifically rectilinear motion, into
a variable electrical current, voltage or electric signals, and the reverse.

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. What is meant by transducer?
2. What is LVDT?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

3. What is displacement?
4. What is patch chord?
5. What is principle of LVDT?
6. What are the applications of LVDT?
7. What are the advantages of LVDT?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

8. What are the disadvantages of LVDT?
9. What is the purpose of strain gauge?
10. How will you calculate displacement using LVDT?
11. What are the elements of LVDT?
12. What is potentiometer?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

13. What are the various methods used for displacement measurement?
14. What is load cell?
15. What is quantity meter?

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Viva-voce

67 Format No.: FirstRanker/Stud/LM/34/Issue:00/Revision:00

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

1. Check the alignment of track rod by using dial gauge / Auto collimator
2. Determination of helix angle in helical gear by using bevel protractor
3. Determination of surface roughness of the car roof and bonnet

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

4. Calibrate the given specimen by using the necessary metrology lab equipment
5. Check the dimensions of the given specimen by using limit gauges
6. Determination of torque produced in the propeller shaft
7. Determination of exhaust temperature in the single cylinder diesel engine

--- Content provided by FirstRanker.com ---

Project Work

FirstRanker.com - FirstRanker's Choice